Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.604

Home , The Loft (New York City)

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, placards and labels. REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1926.62 Lead. 1926.64 Process safety management of high- Subpart A—General ly hazardous chemicals. 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and Sec. emergency response. 1926.1 Purpose and scope. 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction 1926.2 Variances from safety and health of spray booths. standards. 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry. Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life 1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative adjudications for enforcement of safety Saving Equipment and health standards. 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective 1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Pa- equipment. perwork Reduction Act. 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. 1926.6 Incorporation by reference. 1926.97 Electrical protective equipment. 1926.98 [Reserved] Subpart B—General Interpretations 1926.100 Head protection. 1926.10 Scope of subpart. 1926.101 Hearing protection. 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act 1926.102 Eye and face protection. distinguished. 1926.103 Respiratory protection. 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards. 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. 1926.105 Safety nets. 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ types 1926.106 Working over or near water. of performance. 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract part. Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. 1926.16 Rules of construction. Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention 1926.150 Fire protection. Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.151 Fire prevention. Provisions 1926.152 Flammable liquids. 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas). 1926.20 General safety and health provi- 1926.154 Temporary heating devices. sions. 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.21 Safety training and education. part. 1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. [Reserved] 1926.23 First aid and medical attention. Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades 1926.24 Fire protection and prevention. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags. 1926.25 Housekeeping. 1926.201 Signaling. 1926.26 Illumination. 1926.27 Sanitation. Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage, 1926.28 Personal protective equipment. Use, and Disposal 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing. 1926.250 General requirements for storage. 1926.32 Definitions. 1926.251 Rigging equipment for material 1926.33 Access to employee exposure and handling. medical records. 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. 1926.34 Means of egress. 1926.35 Employee emergency action plans. Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power Subpart D—Occupational Health and 1926.300 General requirements. Environmental Controls 1926.301 Hand tools. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. 1926.50 Medical services and first aid. 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. 1926.51 Sanitation. 1926.304 Woodworking tools. 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw, 1926.53 Ionizing radiation. and hydraulic. 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. 1926.306 Air receivers. 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission ap- mists. paratus. 1926.56 Illumination. 1926.57 Ventilation. Subpart J—Welding and Cutting 1926.58 [Reserved] 1926.59 Hazard communication. 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. 1926.60 Methylenedianiline. 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

1926.352 Fire prevention. APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926— 1926.353 Ventilation and protection in weld- DRAWINGS AND ILLUSTRATIONS ing, cutting, and heating. 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in Subpart M—Fall Protection way of preservative coatings. 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions Subpart K—Electrical applicable to this subpart. 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. GENERAL 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria 1926.400 Introduction. and practices. 1926.401 [Reserved] 1926.503 Training requirements. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—DE- INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS TERMINING ROOF WIDTHS 1926.402 Applicability. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926— 1926.403 General requirements. GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS 1926.404 Wiring design and protection. APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926— 1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS equipment for general use. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926—PO- 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and in- SITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS stallations. APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART 1926— 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations. SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS 1926.408 Special systems. 1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved] Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, Elevators, SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES and Conveyors 1926.416 General requirements. 1926.550 [Reserved] 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. 1926.551 Helicopters. 1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists, and elevators. SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists. 1926.554 Overhead hoists. 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. 1926.555 Conveyors. 1926.432 Environmental deterioration of equipment. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized 1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] Equipment, and Marine Operations SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 1926.600 Equipment. 1926.601 Motor vehicles. 1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. 1926.602 Material handling equipment. 1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. DEFINITIONS 1926.604 Site clearing. 1926.605 Marine operations and equipment. 1926.449 Definitions applicable to this sub- 1926.606 Definitions applicable to this subpart. part.

Subpart L—Scaffolds Subpart P—Excavations 1926.450 Scope, application and definitions 1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. applicable to this subpart. 1926.451 General requirements. 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements. 1926.452 Additional requirements applicable to specific types of scaffolds. 1926.652 Requirements for protective sys- 1926.453 Aerial lifts. tems. 1926.454 Training requirements. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926— APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926— SOIL CLASSIFICATION SCAFFOLD SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926— APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—CRI- SLOPING AND BENCHING TERIA FOR DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926— OF PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926— DISMANTLERS [RESERVED] ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING FOR APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926— TRENCHES LIST OF NATIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—AL- APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926— TERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING LIST OF TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—SE- ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS [RESERVED] LECTION OF PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00018 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926

Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry GERED CONNECTION: NON-MANDATORY Construction GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(c)(1) 1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. Subpart S—Underground Construction, 1926.701 General requirements. Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air 1926.702 Requirements for equipment and tools. 1926.800 Underground construction. 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place con- 1926.801 Caissons. crete. 1926.802 Cofferdams. 1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. 1926.803 Compressed air. 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construc- 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this sub- tion operations. part. 1926.706 Requirements for masonry con- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART 1926—DE- struction. COMPRESSION TABLES APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART 1926— REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF PART 1926 Subpart T—Demolition Subpart R—Steel Erection 1926.850 Preparatory operations. 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders. 1926.750 Scope. 1926.852 Chutes. 1926.751 Definitions. 1926.853 Removal of materials through floor 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection openings. plan and construction sequence. 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sec- 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. tions, and chimneys. 1926.754 Structural steel assembly. 1926.855 Manual removal of floors. 1926.755 Column anchorage. 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and mate- 1926.756 Beams and columns. rial with equipment. 1926.757 Open web steel joists. 1926.857 Storage. 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal build- 1926.858 Removal of steel construction. ings. 1926.859 Mechanical demolition. 1926.759 Falling object protection. 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives. 1926.760 Fall protection. 1926.761 Training. Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926— Explosives GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING THE COM- PONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC ERECTION 1926.900 General provisions. PLAN: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. COMPLYING WITH § 1926.752(e) 1926.902 Surface transportation of explo- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926 [RE- sives. SERVED] 1926.903 Underground transportation of ex- APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—IL- plosives. LUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting POINTS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR agents. COMPLYING WITH §§ 1926.757(a)(10) AND 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting § 1926.757(c)(5) agents. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—IL- 1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges— LUSTRATION OF THE USE OF CONTROL electric blasting. LINES TO DEMARCATE CONTROLLED DECK- 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. ING ZONES (CDZS): NON-MANDATORY 1926.908 Use of detonating cord. GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH 1926.909 Firing the blast. § 1926.760(c)(3) 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926— 1926.911 Misfires. TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES 1926.912 Underwater blasting. FOR COMPLYING WITH § 1926.761 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—PE- compressed air. RIMETER COLUMNS: NON-MANDATORY 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this sub- GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH part. § 1926.756(e) TO PROTECT THE UNPRO- TECTED SIDE OR EDGE OF A WALKING/ Subpart V—Electric Power Transmission WORKING SURFACE and Distribution APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926— § 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTECTION SYS- 1926.950 General. TEMS CRITERIA AND PRACTICES 1926.951 Medical services and first aid. APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926— 1926.952 Job briefing. DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUSTRATION OF A 1926.953 Enclosed spaces. CLIPPED END CONNECTION AND A STAG- 1926.954 Personal protective equipment.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00019 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

1926.955 Portable ladders and platforms. Subpart Y—Diving 1926.956 Hand and portable power equipment. GENERAL 1926.957 Live-line tools. 1926.1071 Scope and application. 1926.958 Materials handling and storage. 1926.1072 Definitions. 1926.959 Mechanical equipment. 1926.960 Working on or near exposed ener- PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS gized parts. 1926.961 Deenergizing lines and equipment 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. for employee protection. GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES 1926.962 Grounding for the protection of employees. 1926.1080 Safe practices manual. 1926.963 Testing and test facilities. 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. 1926.964 Overhead lines and live-line bare- 1926.1082 Procedures during dive. hand work. 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. 1926.965 Underground electrical installations. SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES 1926.966 Substations. 1926.1084 SCUBA diving. 1926.967 Special conditions. 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving. 1926.968 Definitions. 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926 [RE- 1926.1087 Liveboating. SERVED] APPENDIX B TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS WORKING ON EXPOSED ENERGIZED PARTS 1926.1090 Equipment. APPENDIX C TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— PROTECTION FROM HAZARDOUS DIF- RECORDKEEPING FERENCES IN ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— METHODS OF INSPECTING AND TESTING APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y OF PART 1926—EX- WOOD POLES AMPLES OF CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RE- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— STRICT OR LIMIT EXPOSURE TO PROTECTION FROM FLAMES AND ELECTRIC HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS ARCS APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y OF PART 1926— APPENDIX F TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING WORK-POSITIONING EQUIPMENT INSPECTION GUIDELINES Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous APPENDIX G TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926— Substances REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 1926.1100 [Reserved] Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures; 1926.1101 Asbestos. Overhead Protection 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpretation of term. 1926.1000 Scope. 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl, 1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for etc.). rollover protective structures for des- 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine. ignated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders, 1926.1105 [Reserved] crawler tractors, compactors, and rub- 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether. ber-tired skid steer equipment. 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over pro- salts). tective structures, known as ROPS) for 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether. wheel-type agricultural and industrial 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine. tractors used in construction. 1926.1110 Benzidine. 1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl. of agricultural and industrial tractors 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. used in construction. 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone. 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders 1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene. 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. 1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. applicable to this subpart. 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic. 1926.1051 General requirements. 1926.1124 Beryllium. 1926.1052 Stairways. 1926.1126 Chromium (VI). 1926.1053 Ladders. 1926.1127 Cadmium. 1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved] 1926.1128 Benzene. 1926.1060 Training requirements. 1926.1129 [Reserved] APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X OF PART 1926— 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane. LADDERS 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00020 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926

1926.1147 Ethylene oxide. 1926.1423 Fall protection. 1926.1148 Formaldehyde. 1926.1424 Work area control. 1926.1152 Methylene chloride. 1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load. 1926.1153 Respirable crystalline silica. 1926.1426 Free fall and controlled load lowering. Subpart AA—Confined Spaces in 1926.1427 Operator training, certification, Construction and evaluation. 1926.1428 Signal person qualifications. 1926.1200 [Reserved] 1926.1429 Qualifications of maintenance & 1926.1201 Scope. repair employees. 1926.1202 Definitions. 1926.1430 Training. 1926.1203 General requirements. 1926.1431 Hoisting personnel. 1926.1204 Permit-required confined space 1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick lifts—sup- program. plemental requirements. 1926.1205 Permitting process. 1926.1433 Design, construction and testing. 1926.1206 Entry permit. 1926.1434 Equipment modifications. 1926.1207 Training. 1926.1435 Tower cranes. 1926.1208 Duties of authorized entrants. 1926.1436 Derricks. 1926.1209 Duties of attendants. 1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks and land 1926.1210 Duties of entry supervisors. cranes/derricks on barges. 1926.1211 Rescue and emergency services. 1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes. 1926.1212 Employee participation. 1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers. 1926.1213 Provision of documents to Sec- 1926.1440 Sideboom cranes. retary. 1926.1441 Equipment with a rated hoisting/ lifting capacity of 2,000 pounds or less. Subpart BB [Reserved] 1926.1442 Severability. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926— Subpart CC—Cranes and Derricks in STANDARD HAND SIGNALS Construction APPENDIX B TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926— ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY—SAMPLE PROCE- 1926.1400 Scope. DURES FOR MINIMIZING THE RISK OF UNIN- 1926.1401 Definitions. TENDED DANGEROUS BOOM MOVEMENT 1926.1402 Ground conditions. APPENDIX C TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926— 1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly—selection OPERATOR CERTIFICATION—WRITTEN EX- of manufacturer or employer procedures. AMINATION—TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE CRI- 1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly—general re- TERIA quirements (applies to all assembly and APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNATIONS FOR disassembly operations). GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS INCOR- 1926.1405 Disassembly—additional require- PORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION ments for dismantling of booms and jibs STANDARDS (applies to both the use of manufacturer procedures and employer procedures). SOURCE: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly—employer 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted. procedures—general requirements. EDITORIAL NOTE 1: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1926.1407 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)— 1979, and corrected at 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, assembly and disassembly. 1979, OSHA reprinted without change the en- 1926.1408 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)— tire text of 29 CFR part 1926 together with equipment operations. certain General Industry Occupational Safe- 1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 kV). ty and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR 1926.1410 Power line safety (all voltages)— part 1910, which have been identified as also equipment operations closer than the applicable to construction work. This repub- Table A zone. lication developed a single set of OSHA regu- 1926.1411 Power line safety—while traveling. lations for both labor and management 1926.1412 Inspections. forces within the construction industry. 1926.1413 Wire rope—inspection. 1926.1414 Wire rope—selection and installa- EDITORIAL NOTE 2: Nomenclature changes tion criteria. to part 1926 appear at 84 FR 21597, May 14, 1926.1415 Safety devices. 2019. 1926.1416 Operational aids. 1926.1417 Operation. 1926.1418 Authority to stop operation. Subpart A—General 1926.1419 Signals—general requirements. 1926.1420 Signals—radio, telephone or other AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. electronic transmission of signals. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 1926.1421 Signals—voice signals—additional 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 requirements. FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 1926.1422 Signals—hand signal chart. 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00021 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

2007 (72 FR 31160), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1– of contract performance for the fol- 2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR lowing purposes: part 1911. (1) To inspect or investigate the matter of compliance with the safety and § 1926.1 Purpose and scope. health standards contained in subpart (a) This part sets forth the safety and C of this part and following subparts; health standards promulgated by the and Secretary of Labor under section 107 of (2) To carry out the duties of the Sec- the Contract Work Hours and Safety retary under section 107(b) of the Act. Standards Act. The standards are pub- (b) For the purpose of carrying out lished in subpart C of this part and fol- his investigative duties under the Act, lowing subparts. the Secretary of Labor may, by agree- (b) Subpart B of this part contains ment, use with or without reimburse- statements of general policy and inter- ment the services, personnel, and fa- pretations of section 107 of the Con- cilities of any State or Federal agency. tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- Any agreements with States under this ards Act having general applicability. section shall be similar to those provided for under the Walsh-Healey Pub- § 1926.2 Variances from safety and health standards. lic Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50– 205. (a) Variances from standards which are, or may be, published in this part § 1926.4 Rules of practice for adminis- may be granted under the same cir- trative adjudications for enforce- cumstances whereunder variances may ment of safety and health stand- be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) ards. of the Williams-Steiger Occupational (a) The rules of practice for adminis- Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. trative adjudications for the enforce- 65). The procedures for the granting of ment of the safety and health stand- variances and for related relief under ards contained in subpart C of this part this part are those published in part and the following subparts shall be the 1905 of this title. same as those published in part 6 of (b) Any requests for variances under this title with respect to safety and this section shall also be considered re- health violations of the Service Con- quests for variances under the Wil- tract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except liams-Steiger Occupational Safety and as provided in paragraph (b) of this sec- Health Act of 1970, and any requests for tion. variances under Williams-Steiger Occu- (b) In the case of debarment, the find- pational Safety and Health Act with ings required by section 107(d) of the respect to construction safety or Act shall be made by the hearing exam- health standards shall be considered to iner or the Assistant Secretary of be also variances under the Construc- Labor for Occupational Safety and tion Safety Act. Any variance from a Health, as the case may be. Whenever, construction safety or health standard as provided in section 107(d)(2), a con- which is contained in this part and tractor requests termination of debar- which is incorporated by reference in ment before the end of the 3-year pe- part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a riod prescribed in that section, the re- variance from the standard under both quest shall be filed in writing with the the Construction Safety Act and the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu- Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety pational Safety and Health who shall and Health Act of 1970. publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG- ISTER that the request has been re- § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry. ceived and afford interested persons an (a) It shall be a condition of each opportunity to be heard upon the re- contract which is subject to section 107 quest, and thereafter the provisions of of the Contract Work Hours and Safety part 6 of this title shall apply with re- Standards Act that the Secretary of spect to prehearing conferences, hear- Labor or any authorized representative ings and related matters, and decisions shall have a right of entry to any site and orders.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00022 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.6

§ 1926.5 OMB control numbers under 29 CFR citation OMB con- the Paperwork Reduction Act. trol No. The following sections or paragraphs 1926.1144 ...... 1218–0101 each contain a collection of informa- 1926.1145 ...... 1218–0126 1926.1147 ...... 1218–0108 tion requirement which has been ap- 1926.1148 ...... 1218–0145 proved by the Office of Management 1926.1153 ...... 1218–0266 and Budget under the control number 1926.1203 ...... 1218–0258 listed. 1926.1204 ...... 1218–0258 1926.1205 ...... 1218–0258 1926.1206 ...... 1218–0258 29 CFR citation OMB control No. 1926.1207 ...... 1218–0258 1926.1208 ...... 1218–0258 1926.33 ...... 1218–0065 1926.1209 ...... 1218–0258 1926.50 ...... 1218–0093 1926.1210 ...... 1218–0258 1926.52 ...... 1218–0048 1926.1211 ...... 1218–0258 1926.53 ...... 1218–0103 1926.1212 ...... 1218–0258 1926.59 ...... 1218–0072 1926.1213 ...... 1218–0258 1926.60 ...... 1218–0183 1926.62 ...... 1218–0189 1926.1402 ...... 1218–0261 1926.64 ...... 1218–0200 1926.1403 ...... 1218–0261 1926.65 ...... 1218–0202 1926.1404 ...... 1218–0261 1926.103 ...... 1218–0099 1926.1406 ...... 1218–0261 1926.200 ...... 1218–0132 1926.1407 ...... 1218–0261 1926.250 ...... 1218–0093 1926.1408 ...... 1218–0261 1926.251 ...... 1218–0233 1926.1409 ...... 1218–0261 1926.403 ...... 1218–0130 1926.1410 ...... 1218–0261 1926.404 ...... 1218–0130 1926.1411 ...... 1218–0261 1926.405 ...... 1218–0130 1926.1412 ...... 1218–0261 1926.407 ...... 1218–0130 1926.1413 ...... 1218–0261 1926.408 ...... 1218–0130 1926.1414 ...... 1218–0261 1926.453(a)(2) ...... 1218–0216 1926.1417 ...... 1218–0261 1926.502 ...... 1218–0197 1926.1423 ...... 1218–0261 1926.503 ...... 1218–0197 1926.550(a)(1) ...... 1218–0115 1926.1424 ...... 1218–0261 1926.550(a)(2) ...... 1218–0115 1926.1427 ...... 1218–0270 1926.550(a)(4) ...... 1218–0115 1926.1428 ...... 1218–0261 1926.550(a)(6) ...... 1218–0113 1926.1431 ...... 1218–0261 1926.550(a)(11) ...... 1218–0054 1926.1433 ...... 1218–0261 1926.550(a)(16) ...... 1218–0115 1926.1434 ...... 1218–0261 1926.550(b)(2) ...... 1218–0232 1926.1435 ...... 1218–0261 1926.550(g) ...... 1218–0151 1926.1436 ...... 1218–0261 1926.552 ...... 1218–0231 1926.1437 ...... 1218–0261 1926.652 ...... 1218–0137 1926.1441 ...... 1218–0261 1926.703 ...... 1218–0095 1926.800 ...... 1218–0067 1926.803 ...... 1218–0067 [61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63 1926.900 ...... 1218–0217 FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1926.903 ...... 1218–0227 1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810, 1926.1080 ...... 1218–0069 1926.1081 ...... 1218–0069 Apr. 16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 75 FR 1926.1083 ...... 1218–0069 68430, Nov. 8, 2010; 81 FR 48710, July 26, 2016; 1926.1090 ...... 1218–0069 81 FR 53268, Aug. 12, 2016; 83 FR 9703, Mar. 7, 1926.1091 ...... 1218–0069 2018; 84 FR 34785, July 19, 2019] 1926.1101 ...... 1218–0134 1926.1103 ...... 1218–0085 § 1926.6 Incorporation by reference. 1926.1104 ...... 1218–0084 1926.1106 ...... 1218–0086 (a) The standards of agencies of the 1926.1107 ...... 1218–0083 U.S. Government, and organizations 1926.1108 ...... 1218–0087 1926.1109 ...... 1218–0089 which are not agencies of the U.S. Gov- 1926.1110 ...... 1218–0082 ernment which are incorporated by ref- 1926.1111 ...... 1218–0090 erence in this part, have the same force 1926.1112 ...... 1218–0080 1926.1113 ...... 1218–0079 and effect as other standards in this 1926.1114 ...... 1218–0088 part. Only the mandatory provisions 1926.1115 ...... 1218–0044 (i.e., provisions containing the word 1926.1116 ...... 1218–0081 ‘‘shall’’ or other mandatory language) 1926.1117 ...... 1218–0010 1926.1118 ...... 1218–0104 of standards incorporated by reference 1926.1124 ...... 1218–0267 are adopted as standards under the Oc- 1926.1126 ...... 1218–0252 cupational Safety and Health Act. 1926.1127 ...... 1218–0186 1926.1128 ...... 1218–0129 (b) The standards listed in this sec- 1926.1129 ...... 1218–0128 tion are incorporated by reference into

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00023 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.6 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

this part with the approval of the Di- (3) ANSI A10.5–1969, Safety Require- rector of the Federal Register in ac- ments for Material Hoists, IBR ap- cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR proved for § 1926.552(b). part 51. To enforce any edition other (4) ANSI A11.1–1965 (R1970), Practice than that specified in this section, for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved OSHA must publish a document in the for § 1926.56(b). FEDERAL REGISTER and the material (5) ANSI A17.1–1965, Elevators, must be available to the public. Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving (c) Copies of standards listed in this Walks, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). section and issued by private standards (6) ANSI A17.1a–1967, Elevators, organizations are available for pur- Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving chase from the issuing organizations at Walks Supplement, IBR approved for the addresses or through the other con- § 1926.552(d). tact information listed below for these (7) ANSI A17.1b–1968, Elevators, private standards organizations. In ad- Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving dition, the standards are available for Walks Supplement, IBR approved for inspection at any Regional Office of § 1926.552(d). the Occupational Safety and Health (8) ANSI A17.1c–1969, Elevators, Administration (OSHA), or at the Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department Walks Supplement, IBR approved for of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW, § 1926.552(d). Room N–3508, Washington, DC 20210; (9) ANSI A17.1d–1970, Elevators, telephone: 202–693–2350 (TTY number: Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving 877–889–5627). These standards are also Walks Supplement, IBR approved for available for inspection at the National § 1926.552(d). Archives and Records Administration (10) ANSI A17.2–1960, Practice for the (NARA). For information on the avail- Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s ability of these standards at NARA, Manual), IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). telephone: 202–741–6030, or go to (11) ANSI A17.2a–1965, Practice for www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr- the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s locations.html. Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (d) The following material is avail- (12) ANSI A17.2b–1967, Practice for able for purchase from the American the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s Conference of Governmental Industrial Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for Hygienists (ACGIH), 1330 Kemper § 1926.552(d). Meadow Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45240; (13) ANSI A92.2–1969, Vehicle Mount- telephone: 513–742–6163; fax: 513–742– ed Elevating and Rotating Work Plat- 3355; e-mail: ; Web site: [email protected] forms, IBR approved for §§ 1926.453(a) : http://www.acgih.org and 1926.453(b). (1) Threshold Limit Values of Air- (14) ANSI B7.1–1970, Safety Code for borne Contaminants for 1970, 1970, IBR the Use, Care, and Protection of Abra- approved for § 1926.55(a) and appendix A sive Wheels, IBR approved for of § 1926.55. §§ 1926.57(g), 1926.303(b), 1926.303(c), and (2) [Reserved] 1926.303(d). (e) The following material is avail- (15) ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety Code for able for purchase from the American Conveyors, Cableways, and Related National Standards Institute (ANSI), Equipment, IBR approved for 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New § 1926.555(a). York, NY 10036; telephone: 212–642–4900; (16) ANSI B56.1–1969, Safety Stand- fax: 212–302–1286; e-mail: [email protected]; ards for Powered Industrial Trucks, Web site: http://www.ansi.org/. IBR approved for § 1926.602(c). (1) ANSI A10.3–1970, Safety Require- (17)–(22) [Reserved] ments for Explosive-Actuated Fas- (23) ANSI O1.1–1961, Safety Code for tening Tools, IBR approved for Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved § 1926.302(e). for § 1926.304(f). (2) ANSI A10.4–1963, Safety Require- (24) ANSI Z35.1–1968, Specifications ments for Workmen’s Hoists, IBR ap- for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for § 1926.552(c). proved for § 1926.200(b), (c), and 1 (i).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00024 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.6

Copies available for purchase from the IBR approved for § 1926.200(h) and (i). IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way Copies available for purchase from the: East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (i) American National Standards In- 1–877–413–5184; Web site: stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd www.global.ihs.com. Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; (25) ANSI Z35.2–1968, Specifications telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http:// for Accident Prevention Tags, IBR ap- webstore.ansi.org/; proved for § 1926.200(i). (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness (26) ANSI Z49.1–1967, Safety in Weld- Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- ing and Cutting, IBR approved for phone: 877–413–5184; Web site: § 1926.350(j). www.global.ihs.com; or (27) USA Z53.1–1967 (also referred to (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero as ANSI Z53.1–1967), Safety Color Code Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI 877–699–9277; Web site: approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved www.techstreet.com. for § 1926.200(c). Copies available for (31) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1–2010, Occupa- purchase from the IHS Standards tional and Educational Personal Eye Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Engle- and Face Protection Devices, Approved wood, CO 80112; telephone: 1–877–413– April 3, 2010; IBR approved for 5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. § 1926.102(b). Copies are available for (28) ANSI Z535.1–2006 (R2011), Safety purchase from: Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR ap- (i) American National Standards In- proved for § 1926.200(c). Copies available stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd for purchase from the: Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; (i) American National Standards In- telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site: stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd http://webstore.ansi.org/; Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http:// Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- webstore.ansi.org/; phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http:// (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness global.ihs.com; or Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero phone: 877–413–5184; Web site: Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: www.global.ihs.com; or (877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero techstreet.com. Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (32) ANSI Z87.1–2003, Occupational 877–699–9277; Web site: and Educational Personal Eye and www.techstreet.com. Face Protection Devices, Approved (29) ANSI Z535.2–2011, Environmental June 19, 2003; IBR approved for and Facility Safety Signs, published § 1926.102(b). Copies available for pur- September 15, 2011; IBR approved for chase from the: § 1926.200(b), (c), and (i). Copies avail- (i) American National Standards In- able for purchase from the: stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd (i) American National Standards In- Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site: Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; http://webstore.ansi.org/; telephone: 212–642–4980; Web site: http:// (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness webstore.ansi.org/; Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http:// Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- global.ihs.com; or phone: 877–413–5184; Web site: (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero www.global.ihs.com; or Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero (877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: techstreet.com. 877–699–9277; Web site: (33) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Practice www.techstreet.com. for Occupational and Educational Eye (30) ANSI Z535.5–2011, Safety Tags and Face Protection, Reaffirmation ap- and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary proved January 4, 1999; IBR approved Hazards), published September 15, 2011, for § 1926.102(b). Copies are available for including Errata, November 14, 2011; purchase from:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00025 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.6 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(i) American National Standards In- mission Apparatus, revised 1958, IBR stitute’s e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd approved for § 1926.300(b)(2). Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; (2) ANSI B30.5–1968, Crawler, Loco- telephone: (212) 642–4980; Web site: motive, and Truck Cranes, approved http://webstore.ansi.org/; Dec. 16, 1968, IBR approved for (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness § 1926.1433(a). Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; tele- (g) The following material is avail- phone: (877) 413–5184; Web site: http:// able for purchase from the American global.ihs.com; or Society for Testing and Materials (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero (ASTM), ASTM International, 100 Barr Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West (877) 699–9277; Web site: http:// Conshohocken, PA, 19428–2959; tele- techstreet.com. phone: 610–832–9585; fax: 610–832–9555; e- (34) American National Standards In- mail: [email protected]; Web site: http:// stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, American Na- www.astm.org/: tional Standard for Industrial Head (1) ASTM A370–1968, Methods and Protection, approved January 26, 2009; Definitions for Mechanical Testing and IBR approved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(i). Cop- Steel Products, IBR approved for ies of ANSI Z89.1–2009 are available for § 1926.1001(f). purchase only from the International (2) [Reserved] Safety Equipment Association, 1901 (3) ASTM D56–1969, Standard Method North Moore Street, Arlington, VA of Test for Flash Point by the Tag 22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: Closed Tester, IBR approved for 703–528–2148; Web site: § 1926.155(i). www.safetyequipment.org. (4) ASTM D93–1969, Standard Method (35) American National Standards In- of Test for Flash Point by the Pensky stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, American Na- Martens Closed Tester, IBR approved tional Standard for Industrial Head for § 1926.155(i). Protection; IBR approved for (5) ASTM D323–1958 (R1968), Standard § 1926.100(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1– Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of 2003 are available for purchase only Petroleum Products (Reid Method), from the International Safety Equip- IBR approved for § 1926.155(m). ment Association, 1901 North Moore (h) The following material is avail- Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; tele- able for purchase from the American phone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148; Society of Mechanical Engineers Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New (36) American National Standards In- York, NY 10016; telephone: 1–800–843– stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, American Na- 2763; fax: 973–882–1717; e-mail: tional Standard for Personnel Protec- [email protected]; Web site: http:// tion—Protective Headwear for Indus- www.asme.org/: trial Workers—Requirements; IBR ap- (1) ASME B30.2–2005, Overhead and proved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(iii). Copies of Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, ANSI Z89.1–1997 are available for pur- Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running chase only from the International Safe- Trolley Hoist), issued Dec. 30, 2005 ty Equipment Association, 1901 North (‘‘ASME B30.2–2005’’), IBR approved for Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; § 1926.1438(b). telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528– (2) ASME B30.5–2004, Mobile and Lo- 2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. comotive Cranes, issued Sept. 27, 2004 (f) The following material is avail- (‘‘ASME B30.5–2004’’), IBR approved for able for purchase from standards re- §§ 1926.1414(b); 1926.1414(e); 1926.1433(b). sellers such as the Document Center (3) ASME B30.7–2001, Base-Mounted Inc., 111 Industrial Road, Suite 9, Bel- Drum Hoists, issued Jan. 21, 2002 mont, CA 94002; telephone: 650–591–7600; (‘‘ASME B30.7–2001’’), IBR approved for fax: 650–591–7617; e-mail: info@document- § 1926.1436(e). center.com; Web site: http:// (4) ASME B30.14–2004, Side Boom www.document-center.com/: Tractors, issued Sept. 20, 2004 (‘‘ASME (1) ANSI B15.1–1953 (R1958), Safety B30.14–2004’’), IBR approved for Code for Mechanical Power-Trans- § 1926.1440(c).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00026 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.6

(5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel (1) Safety and Health Regulations for Code, Section VIII, 1968, IBR approved Construction, Part II, Sept. 1971, IBR for §§ 1926.152(i), 1926.306(a), and approved for § 1926.1000(f). 1926.603(a). (2) [Reserved] (6) ASME Power Boilers, Section I, (m) The following material is avail- 1968, IBR approved for § 1926.603(a). able for purchase from the California (i) The following material is avail- Department of Industrial Relations, 455 able for purchase from the American Golden Gate Avenue, San Francisco CA Society of Agricultural and Biological 94102; telephone: (415) 703–5070; e-mail: Engineers (ASABE), 2950 Niles Road, [email protected]; Web site: http:// St. Joseph, MI 49085; telephone: 269–429– www.dir.ca.gov/: 0300; fax: 269–429–3852; e-mail: (1) Construction Safety Orders, IBR [email protected]; Web site: http:// approved for § 1926.1000(f). (2) [Reserved] www.asabe.org/: (n) The following material is avail- (1) ASAE R313.1–1971, Soil Cone Pene- able from the Federal Highway Admin- trometer, reaffirmed 1975, IBR ap- istration, United States Department of proved for § 1926.1002(e). Transportation, 1200 New Jersey Ave- (2) [Reserved] nue SE, Washington, DC 20590; tele- (j) The following material is avail- phone: 202–366–4000; website: able for purchase from the American www.fhwa.dot.gov/: Welding Society (AWS), 550 N.W. (1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Con- LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126; trol Devices for Streets and Highways, telephone: 1–800–443–9353; Web site: 2009 Edition, December 2009 (including http://www.aws.org/: Revision 1 dated May 2012 and Revision (1) AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002, Structural 2 dated May 2012), (‘‘MUTCD’’) IBR ap- Welding Code—Steel, 18th ed., ANSI approved for §§ 1926.200(g) and 1926.201(a). proved Aug. 31, 2001 (‘‘AWS D1.1/ (2) [Reserved] D1.1M:2002’’), IBR approved for (o) The following material is avail- § 1926.1436(c). able for purchase from the General (2) ANSI/AWS D14.3–94, Specification Services Administration (GSA), 1800 F for Welding Earthmoving and Con- Street, NW., Washington, DC 20405; struction Equipment, ANSI approved telephone: (202) 501–0800; Web site: Jun. 11, 1993 (‘‘ANSI/AWS D14.3–94’’), http://www.gsa.gov/: IBR approved for § 1926.1436(c). (1) QQ–P–416, Federal Specification (k) The following material is avail- Plating Cadmium (Electrodeposited), able for purchase from the British IBR approved for § 1926.104(e). Standards Institution (BSI), 389 (2) [Reserved] Chiswick High Road, London, W4 4AL, (p) The following material is avail- United Kingdom; telephone: + 44 20 8996 able for purchase from the Institute of 9001; fax: + 44 20 8996 7001; e-mail: Makers of Explosives (IME), 1120 19th Street, NW., Suite 310, Washington, DC [email protected]; Web site: http:// 20036; telephone: 202–429–9280; fax: 202– www.bsigroup.com/: 429–9280; e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: (1) BS EN 13000:2004, Cranes—Mobile http://www.ime.org/: Cranes, published Jan. 4, 2006 (‘‘BS EN (1) IME Pub. No. 2, American Table of 13000:2004’’), IBR approved for Distances for Storage of Explosives, § 1926.1433(c). Jun. 5, 1964, IBR approved for (2) BS EN 14439:2006, Cranes—Safety— § 1926.914(a). Tower Cranes, published Jan. 31, 2007 (2) IME Pub. No. 20, Radio Frequency (‘‘BS EN 14439:2006’’), IBR approved for Energy—A Potential Hazard in the Use § 1926.1433(c). of Electric Blasting Caps, Mar. 1968, (l) The following material is avail- IBR approved for § 1926.900(k). able for purchase from the Bureau of (q) The following material is avail- Reclamation, United States Depart- able from the International Labour Or- ment of the Interior, 1849 C Street, ganization (ILO), 4 route des Morillons, NW., Washington DC 20240; telephone: CH–1211 Gene`ve 22, Switzerland; tele- 202–208–4501; Web site: http:// phone: +41 (0) 22 799 6111; fax: +41 (0) 22 www.usbr.gov/: 798 8685; website://www.ilo.org/:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00027 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.6 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(1) Guidelines for the Use of the ILO (2) NFPA 13–1969, Standard for the In- International Classification of stallation of Sprinkler Systems, IBR Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Re- approved for § 1926.152(d). vised Edition 2011, Occupational safety (3) NFPA 30–1969, The Flammable and and health series; 22 (Rev.2011), IBR ap- Combustible Liquids Code, IBR approved for § 1926.1101. proved for § 1926.152(c). (2) [Reserved] (4) NFPA 80–1970, Standard for Fire (r) The following material is avail- Doors and Windows, Class E or F Open- able for purchase from the Inter- ings, IBR approved for § 1926.152(b). national Organization for Standardiza- (5) NFPA 251–1969, Standard Methods of Fire Test of Building Construction tion (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, and Material, IBR approved for Case postale 56, CH–1211 Geneva 20, §§ 1926.152(b) and 1926.155(f). Switzerland; telephone: + 41 22 749 01 11; (6) NFPA 385–1966, Standard for Tank fax: + 41 22 733 34 30; Web site: http:// Vehicles for Flammable and Combus- www.iso.org/: tible Liquids, IBR approved for (1) ISO 3471:2008(E), Earth-moving § 1926.152(g). machinery—Roll-over protective struc- (t) The following material is avail- tures—Laboratory tests and perform- able for purchase from the Power Crane ance requirements, Fourth Edition, and Shovel Association (PCSA), 6737 W. Aug. 8, 2008 (‘‘ISO 3471:2008’’), IBR ap- Washington Street, Suite 2400, Mil- proved for §§ 1926.1001(c) and waukee, WI 53214; telephone: 1–800–369– 1926.1002(c). 2310; fax: 414–272–1170; Web site: http:// (2) ISO 5700:2013(E), Tractors for agri- www.aem.org/CBC/ProdSpec/PCSA/: culture and forestry—Roll-over protec- (1) PCSA Std. No. 1, Mobile Crane tive structures—Static test method and Excavator Standards, 1968, IBR ap- and acceptance conditions, Fifth Edi- proved for § 1926.602(b). tion, May 1, 2013 (‘‘ISO 5700:2013’’), IBR (2) PCSA Std. No. 2, Mobile Hydraulic approved for § 1926.1002(c). Crane Standards, 1968 (‘‘PCSA Std. No. (3) ISO 27850:2013(E), Tractors for ag- 2 (1968)’’), IBR approved for §§ 1926.602(b) riculture and forestry—Falling object and 1926.1433(a). protective structures—Test procedures (3) PCSA Std. No. 3, Mobile Hydraulic and performance requirements, First Excavator Standards, 1969, IBR ap- Edition, May.01, 2013 (‘‘ISO 27850:2013’’), proved for § 1926.602(b). IBR approved for § 1926.1003(c). (u) The following material is avail- (4) ISO 11660–1:2008(E), Cranes—Ac- able from the Society of Automotive cess, guards and restraints—Part 1: Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth General, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (‘‘ISO Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096; telephone: 11660–1:2008(E)’’), IBR approved for 1–877–606–7323; fax: 724–776–0790; website: § 1926.1423(c). www.sae.org/: (5) ISO 11660–2:1994(E), Cranes—Ac- (1) SAE 1970 Handbook, IBR approved for § 1926.602(b). cess, guards and restraints—Part 2: Mo- (2) SAE J166–1971, Trucks and Wag- bile cranes, 1994 (‘‘ISO 11660–2:1994(E)’’), ons, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). (3) SAE J167, Protective Frame with (6) ISO 11660–3:2008(E), Cranes—Ac- Overhead Protection-Test Procedures cess, guards and restraints—Part 3: and Performance Requirements, ap- Tower cranes, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (‘‘ISO proved July 1970, IBR approved for 11660–3:2008(E)’’), IBR approved for § 1926.1003(b). § 1926.1423(c). (4) SAE J168, Protective Enclosures- (s) The following material is avail- Test Procedures and Performance Re- able for purchase from the National quirements, approved July 1970, IBR Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 approved for § 1926.1002(b). Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169; (5) SAE J185 (reaf. May 2003), Access telephone: 617–770–3000; fax: 617–770– Systems for Off-Road Machines, re- 0700; Web site: http://www.nfpa.org/: affirmed May 2003 (‘‘SAE J185 (May (1) NFPA 10A–1970, Maintenance and 1993)’’), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, (6) SAE J236–1971, Self-Propelled IBR approved for § 1926.150(c). Graders, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00028 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.11

(7) SAE J237–1971, Front End Loaders States Army Corps of Engineers, 441 G and Dozers, IBR approved for Street, NW., Washington, DC 20314; § 1926.602(a). telephone: 202–761–0011; e-mail: hq- (8) SAE J319b–1971, Self-Propelled [email protected]; Web site: Scrapers, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). http://www.usace.army.mil/: (9) SAE J320a, Minimum Performance (1) EM–385–1–1, General Safety Re- Criteria for Roll-Over Protective quirements, Mar. 1967, IBR approved Structure for Rubber-Tired, Self-Pro- for § 1926.1000(f). pelled Scrapers, revised July 1969 (edi- (2) [Reserved] torial change July 1970), IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). [75 FR 48130, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 77 (10) SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for FR 37600, June 22, 2012; 78 FR 35566, June 13, Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage 2013; 78 FR 66641, Nov. 6, 2013; 79 FR 20692, Equipment, IBR approved for Apr. 11, 2014; 81 FR 16092, Mar. 25, 2016; 84 FR 21574, May 14, 2019] § 1926.602(a). (11) SAE J333a–1970, Operator Protec- tion for Agricultural and Light Indus- Subpart B—General trial Tractors, IBR approved for Interpretations § 1926.602(a). (12) SAE J334a, Protective Frame AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours Test Procedures and Performance Re- and Safety Standards Act (Construction quirements, revised July 1970, IBR ap- Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333). proved for § 1926.1002(b). (13) SAE J386–1969, Seat Belts for § 1926.10 Scope of subpart. Construction Equipment, IBR approved (a) This subpart contains the general for § 1926.602(a). rules of the Secretary of Labor inter- (14) SAE J394, Minimum Performance preting and applying the construction Criteria for Roll-Over Protective safety and health provisions of section Structure for Rubber-Tired Front End 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Loaders and Rubber-Tired Dozers, ap- Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Sec- proved July 1969 (editorial change July tion 107 requires as a condition of each 1970), IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). contract which is entered into under (15) SAE J395, Minimum Performance legislation subject to Reorganization Criteria for Roll-Over Protective Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), Structure for Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type Loaders, approved July and which is for construction, alter- 1969 (editorial change July 1970), IBR ation, and/or repair, including painting approved for § 1926.1001(b). and decorating, that no contractor or (16) SAE J396, Minimum Performance subcontractor contracting for any part Criteria for Roll-Over Protective of the contract work shall require any Structure for Motor Graders, approved laborer or mechanic employed in the July 1969 (editorial change July 1970), performance of the contract to work in IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). surroundings or under working condi- (17) SAE J397, Critical Zone Charac- tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, teristics and Dimensions for Operators or dangerous to his health or safety, as of Construction and Industrial Machin- determined under construction safety ery, approved July 1969, IBR approved and health standards promulgated by for § 1926.1001(b). the Secretary by regulation. (18) SAE J987 (rev. Jun. 2003), Lattice Boom Cranes—Method of Test, revised § 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act distinguished. Jun. 2003 (‘‘SAE J987 (Jun. 2003)’’), IBR approved for § 1926.1433(c). (a) Coverage under section 103. It is im- (19) SAE J1063 (rev. Nov. 1993), Canti- portant to note that the coverage of levered Boom Crane Structures—Meth- section 107 differs from that for the od of Test, revised Nov. 1993 (‘‘SAE overtime requirements of the Contract J1063 (Nov. 1993)’’), IBR approved for Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. § 1926.1433(c). The application of the overtime re- (v) The following material is avail- quirements is governed by section 103, able for purchase from the United which subject to specific exemptions,

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00029 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

includes: (1) Federal contracts requir- under each statute. The individual ing or involving the employment of la- statutes should be resorted to for a borers or mechanics (thus including, more detailed scope of the work. but not limited to, contracts for con- (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The pro- struction), and (2) contracts assisted in visions codified in 23 U.S.C. 113 apply whole or in part by Federal loans, to the initial construction, reconstruc- grants, or guarantees under any stat- tion, or improvement work performed ute ‘‘providing wage standards for such by contractors or subcontractors on work.’’ The statutes ‘‘providing wage highway projects on the Federal-aid standards for such work’’ include stat- systems, the primary and secondary, as utes for construction which require the well as their extensions in urban areas, payment of minimum wages in accord- and the Interstate System, authorized ance with prevailing wage findings by under the highway laws providing for the Secretary of Labor in accordance the expenditure of Federal funds upon with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision the Federal-aid system. As cited in 41 to section 103 excludes from the over- Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney General time requirements work where the ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway Federal assistance is only in the form Acts are subject to Reorganization of a loan guarantee or insurance. Plan No. 14 of 1950. (b) Coverage under section 107. To be (3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C. covered by section 107 of the Contract 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748, a contract must be one which (1) is en- 1748h–2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1), tered into under a statute that is sub- 1715z–1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and ject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1x-B, 1715z–7). This act covers construc- 1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for ‘‘con- tion which is financed with assistance struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- by the Federal Government through cluding painting and decorating.’’ programs of loan and mortgage insurance for the following purposes: § 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 provides mortgage and insurance on rental (a) General provisions. Reorganization housing of eight or more units and on Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates to the pre- mobile-home courts. scribing by the Secretary of Labor of (ii) Section 1715a—Repealed. ‘‘appropriate standards, regulations, and procedures’’ with respect to the en- (iii) Cooperative Housing—Section forcement of labor standards under 1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on Federal and federally assisted con- cooperative housing of five or more tracts which are subject to various units as well as supplementary loans statutes subject to the Plan. The rules for improvement of repair or resale of of the Secretary of Labor imple- memberships. menting the Plan are published in part (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section 5 of this title. Briefly, the statutes sub- 1715k provides mortgage insurance on ject to the Plan include the Davis- single family or multifamily housing Bacon Act, including its extension to in approved urban renewal areas. Federal-aid highway legislation subject (v) Low or Moderate Income Hous- to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes sub- ing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures ject to the Plan by its original terms, mortgages on low-cost single family or statutes by which the Plan is expressly multifamily housing. applied, such as the Contract Work (vi) Housing for Elderly—Section Hours Standards Act by virtue of sec- 1715v provides mortgage insurance on tion 104(d) thereof. rental housing for elderly or handi- (b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject capped persons. to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 (vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w are cited and briefly described in the authorizes mortgage insurance on remaining paragraphs of this section. nursing home facilities and major These descriptions are general in na- equipment. ture and not intended to convey the (viii) Experimental Housing—Section full scope of the work to be performed 1715x provides mortgage insurance on

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00030 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.12

single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side- with experimental design of materials. walks, storm drainage facilities, and (ix) War Housing Insurance—Section other installations or work. 1743 not active. (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facili- (x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 in- ties—Subchapter LX-B authorizes sures investment returns on multi- mortgage insurance for the financing family housing. of construction and equipment, of fa- (xi) Armed Services Housing—Sec- cilities for group practice of medicine, tion 1748b to assist in relieving acute optometry, or dentistry. shortage and urgent need for family (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z–7 au- housing at or in areas adjacent to mili- thorizes mortgage insurance to cover tary installations. new and rehabilitated hospitals, in- (xii) Defense Housing for Impacted cluding initial equipment. Areas—Section 1748h–2 provides mortgage insurance on single family or (4) Hospital Survey and Construction multifamily housing for sale or rent Act, as amended by the Hospital and primarily to military or civilian per- Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42 sonnel of the Armed Services, National U.S.C. 291e).The provisions of this Act Aeronautics and Space Administration, cover construction contracts made by or Atomic Energy Commission. State or local authorities or private in- (xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Sec- stitutions under Federal grant-in-aid tion 1750g provides for mortgage insur- programs for the construction of hos- ance in critical defense housing areas. pitals and other medical facilities. (xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C. (h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for 1114(b)). The act provides grant-in-aid nonprofit organizations to finance the funds for airport construction limited purchase and rehabilitation of deterio- to general site preparation runways, rating or substandard housing for sub- taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant sequent resale to low-income home thereto, and fire, rescue, and mainte- purchasers. There must be located on nance buildings. The act excludes con- the property five or more single family struction intended for use as a public dwellings of detached, semidetached, or parking facility for passenger auto- row construction. mobiles and the cost of construction of (xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section any part of an airport building except 1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insur- such of those buildings or parts of ance to nonprofit organizations or pub- buildings to house facilities or activi- lic bodies or agencies executed to fi- ties directly related to the safety of nance sale of individual dwellings to persons at the airport. lower income individuals or families. (6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459). Also includes the rehabilitation of such Construction contracts awarded by housing if it is deteriorating or substandard for subsequent resale to lower local authorities financed with the as- income home purchasers. sistance of loans and grants from the (xvi) Rental Housing Assistance— Federal Government. The construction Section 1715Z–1 authorizes mortgage programs are for slum clearance and insurance and interest reduction pay- urban renewal which includes rehabili- ments on behalf of owners of rental tation grants, neighborhood develop- housing projects designed for occu- ment programs, neighborhood renewal pancy by lower income families. Pay- plans, community renewal, demolition ments are also authorized for certain projects, and assistance for blighted State or locally aided projects. areas. See the Housing Act of 1964, (xvii) Condominium Housing—Sec- paragraph (b)(21) of this section, con- tion 1715y(d) provides mortgage insur- cerning financial assistance for low- ance on property purchased for the de- rent housing for domestic farm labor. velopment of building sites. This in- (7) School Survey and Construction Act cludes waterlines and water supply in- of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This act provides stallations, sewer lines and sewage dis- for a Federal grant-in-aid program to posal installations, steam, gas, and assist in the construction of schools in electrical lines and installations, federally affected areas.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00031 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(8) Defense Housing & Community Fa- 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act cilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. provide for grants to assist public and 1592i). Inactive Program. nonprofit medical, dental, and similar (9) United States Housing Act of 1937 schools for the construction, expan- (42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute covers the sion, or renovation of teaching facili- construction of low-rent public housing ties. and slum clearance projects awarded (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Con- by local authorities. These projects are struction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D), financed with the assistance of loans 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes and grants from the Federal Govern- Federal financial assistance in the con- ment. The slum clearance is the demo- struction of centers for research on lition and removal of buildings from mental retardation and related aspects any slum area to be used for a low-rent of human development, of university- housing project. affiliated facilities for the mentally re- (10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 tarded and of facilities for the men- U.S.C. App. 2281). This act provides for tally retarded. Federal assistance to the several (15) Community Mental Health Centers States and their political subdivisions Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). This act au- in the field of civil defense which in- thorizes Federal grants for the con- cludes procurement, construction, leas- struction of public and other nonprofit ing, or renovating of materials and fa- community mental health centers. cilities. (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of (11) Delaware River Basin Compact 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This act authorizes (sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This joint resolu- the grant or loan of Federal funds to tion creates, by intergovernmental assist public and other nonprofit insti- compact between the United States, tutions of higher education in financ- Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and ing the construction, rehabilitation, or Pennsylvania, a regional agency for improvement of academic and related planning, conservation, utilization, de- facilities in undergraduate and grad- velopment, management and control of uate schools. the water and related sources of the (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963 Delaware River. (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act provides for (12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. Federal grants to the various States 332a(c)). This act provides Federal for construction of area vocational grants to a university, college, or other education school facilities. appropriate public or nonprofit private (18) Library Services and Construction agency or institution for part or all of Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). This act pro- the cost of constructing a facility for vides for Federal assistance to the var- research or for research and related ious States for the construction of pub- purposes. Research and related pur- lic libraries. poses means research, research train- (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of ing, surveys, or demonstrations in the 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This act provides field of education, or the dissemination for grants and loans to assist States of information derived therefrom, or and local public bodies and agencies all of such activities, including (but thereof in financing the acquisition, without limitation) experimental construction, reconstruction, and im- schools, except that such term does not provement of facilities and equipment include research, research training, for use, by operation or lease or other- surveys, or demonstrations in the field wise, in mass transportation service in of sectarian instruction or the dissemi- urban areas and in coordinating such nation of information derived there- service with highway and other trans- from. Construction includes new build- portation in such areas. ings, and the acquisition, expansion, (20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 remodeling, replacement, and alter- (42 U.S.C. 2947). This act covers con- ation of existing buildings and the struction which is financed with assist- equipping of new buildings and existing ance of the Federal Government for the buildings. following purposes: (13) Health Professions Educational As- (i) Authorizes Federal assistance for sistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), construction of projects, buildings and

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00032 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.12

works which will provide young men search and development of the com- and women in rural and urban residen- mercial fisheries resources of the Na- tial centers with education, vocational tion. training, and useful work experience (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42 (Title I). U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act provides for (ii) Authorizes financial assistance grants to assist in the construction of for construction work planned and car- new facilities for collegiate, associate ried out at the community level for degree, and diploma schools of nursing, antipoverty programs (Title II): or replacement or rehabilitation of ex- (a) Authorizes loans to low income isting facilities of such schools. rural families by assisting them to ac- (24) Elementary and Secondary Edu- quire or improve real estate or reduce cation Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848). encumbrances or erect improvements The purpose of the act is to provide fi- thereon, and to participate in coopera- nancial assistance to local educational tive associations and/or to finance non- agencies serving areas with concentra- agricultural enterprises which will en- tions of children from low-income fam- able such families to supplement their ilies for construction in connection income (Title III); with the expansion or improvement of (b) Authorizes loans to local coopera- their educational programs. tive associations furnishing essential (25) Federal Water Pollution Control processing, purchasing, or marketing Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act services, supplies, or facilities predomi- of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for fi- nantly to low-income rural families nancial assistance to States or munici- (Title III); palities for construction of facilities in (c) Authorizes financial assistance to connection with the prevention and States, political subdivisions of States, control of water pollution. This in- public and nonprofit agencies, institu- cludes projects that will control the tions, organizations, farm associations, discharge into any waters of untreated or individuals in establishing housing, or inadequately treated sewage. sanitation, education, and child day- (26) Appalachian Regional Development care programs for migrants and other Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). Author- seasonally employed agricultural em- izes Federal assistance in the construc- ployees and their families (Title III). tion of an Appalachian development (iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees highway system; construction of multi- loans to small businesses for construc- county demonstration health facilities, tion work (Title IV). hospitals, regional health, diagnostic (iv) Authorizes the payment of the and treatment centers, and other fa- cost of experimental, pilot, or dem- cilities for health; seal and fill voids in onstration projects to foster State pro- abandoned mines and to rehabilitate grams providing construction work ex- strip mine areas; construction of perience or training for unemployed fa- school facilities for vocational edu- thers and needy people (Title V). cation; and to assist in construction of (21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. sewage treatment works. 1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). Provides fi- (27) National Technical Institute for the nancial assistance for low-rent housing Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). Provides for domestic farm labor. The Act fur- for financial assistance for institutions ther provides for loans, through public of higher education for the establish- or private agencies, where feasible, to ment, construction, including equip- owners or tenants of property in urban ment and operation, of a National In- renewal areas to finance rehabilitation stitution for the Deaf. required to conform the property to ap- (28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C. plicable code requirements or carry out 1701(q)(c)(3)). This act authorizes loans the objectives of the urban renewal to nonprofit corporations to be used for plan for the area. the construction of housing and related (22) The Commercial Fisheries Research facilities for elderly families. Also, the and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C. provisions of the act provide for reha- 779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial bilitation, alteration, conversion or assistance to State agencies for con- improvement of existing structures struction projects designed for the re- which are otherwise inadequate for

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00033 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

proposed dwellings used by such fami- thorizes loans to assist in financing the lies. purchase or development of land for (29) College Housing Act of 1950, as public works which will assist in the amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). This act creation of long-term employment op- provides for Federal loans to assist portunities in the area. educational institutions in providing (ii) Loans for the purchase or devel- housing and other educational facili- opment of land and facilities (including ties for students and faculties. machinery and equipment) for indus- (30) Housing and Urban Development trial or commercial usage within rede- Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c–3, 3107). This velopment areas; guarantee of loans for act provides for Federal assistance for working capital made to private bor- the following purposes: rowers by private lending institutions (i) Grants to States and local public in connection with direct loan projects; bodies to assist in any construction and to contract to pay to, or on behalf work to be carried out under the open- of, business entities locating in rede- space land and urban beautification velopment areas, a portion of the inter- provisions contained therein. It pro- est costs which they incur in financing vides for parks and recreation areas, their expansions from private sources. conservation of land and other natural (iii) Loans and grants to create eco- resources, and historical and scenic nomic development centers within des- purposes. ignated county economic development (ii) Grants to local public bodies and districts. agencies to finance specific projects for (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation basic public water facilities (including Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). This act pro- works for the storage, treatment, puri- vides for financial assistance for con- fication, and distribution of water), struction activities in connection with and for basic public sewer facilities research and development of different (other than ‘‘treatment works’’ as de- forms of high-speed ground transpor- fined in the Federal Water Pollution tation and demonstration projects re- Control Act). lating to intercity rail passenger serv- (iii) Grants to any local public body ice. or agency to assist in financing neigh- (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke borhood facilities. These facilities Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)). must be necessary for carrying out a This act provides for grants to public program of health, recreational, social, or nonprofit private universities, med- or similar community service and lo- ical schools, research, institutions, cated so as to be available for the use hospitals, and other public and non- of the area’s low or moderate income profit agencies and institutions, or as- residents. sociations thereof to assist in construc- (31) National Foundation on the Arts tion and equipment of facilities in con- and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. nection with research, training, dem- 954(k)). The act establishes the ‘‘Na- onstration of patient care, diagnostic tional Foundation on the Arts and the and treatment related to heart disease, Humanities’’ which may provide cancer, stroke, and other major dis- matching grants to groups (nonprofit eases. organizations and State and other pub- (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and lic organizations) and to individuals Community Mental Health Centers Con- engaged in creative and performing struction Act Amendments of 1965 (20 arts for the entire range of artistic ac- U.S.C. 618(g)). These provisions provide tivity, including construction of nec- for grants to institutions of higher edu- essary facilities. cation for construction of facilities for (32) Public Works and Economic Devel- research or for research and related opment Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). This purposes relating to education for men- act provides for Federal assistance for tally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf, the following purposes: speech impaired, visually handicapped, (i) Grants for the acquisition or de- seriously emotionally disturbed, crip- velopment of land or improvements for pled, or other health impaired children public works or development facility who by reason thereof require special usage in redevelopment areas. It au- education.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00034 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.12

(36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act 1416). This act provides for Federal as- Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). sistance for the following purposes: This act authorizes grants to assist in (i) Grants to assist in the construc- meeting the costs of construction of tion, rehabilitation, alteration, or re- public or other nonprofit workshops pair of residential property only if such and rehabilitation facilities. residential property is designed for res- (37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal idential use for eight or more families Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This act provides to enable city demonstration agencies for financial assistance to public (Fed- to carry out comprehensive city dem- eral, State, interstate, or local) au- onstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310). thorities, agencies, and institutions, (ii) Amends the National Housing Act private agencies and institutions, and (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of individuals in the construction of fa- 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for cilities for solid-waste disposal. The coverage. term construction includes the instal- (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C. lation of initial equipment. 1857j–3). This act provides for Federal (38) Medical Library Assistance Act of assistance to public or nonprofit agen- 1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b–3(b)(3)). This act cies, institutions, and organizations provides for grants to public or private and to individuals, and contracts with non-profit agencies or institutions for public or private agencies, institutions, the cost of construction of medical li- or persons for construction of research brary facilities. and development facilities and dem- (39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act onstration plants relating to the appli- (38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The construction cation of preventing or controlling dis- industry health and safety standards charges into the air of various types of do not apply to this act since it is not pollutants. subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 (46) Elementary and Secondary Edu- of 1950. cation Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bi- (40) National Capital Transportation lingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b–6). Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). This act This act provides for Federal assist- provides for Federal assistance to the ance to local educational agencies or National Capital Transportation Agen- to an institution of higher education cy for construction of a rail rapid tran- applying jointly with a local edu- sit system and related facilities for the cational agency for minor remodeling Nation’s Capital. projects in connection with bilingual (41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. education programs to meet the special 82). The program under this legislation needs of children with limited English- has expired. speaking ability in the United States. (42) Model Secondary School for the (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amend- Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This act pro- ments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). This vides for funds to establish and oper- act authorizes Federal assistance to ate, including construction and initial any public or nonprofit private agency equipment of new buildings, expansion, or organization for the construction of remodeling, and alteration of existing a center for vocational rehabilitation buildings and equipment thereof, a of handicapped individuals who are model secondary school for the deaf to both deaf and blind which shall be serve the residents of the District of known as the National Center for Deaf- Columbia and nearby States. Blind Youths and Adults. Construction (43) Allied Health Professions Personnel includes new buildings and expansion, Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. remodeling, alteration and renovation 295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for of existing buildings, and initial equip- grants to assist in the construction of ment of such new, newly acquired, ex- new facilities for training centers for panded, remodeled, altered, or ren- allied health professions, or replace- ovated buildings. ment or rehabilitation of existing fa- (48) National Visitor Center Facilities cilities for such centers. Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). This act au- (44) Demonstration Cities and Metro- thorizes agreements and leases with politan Development Act of 1966 (42 the owner of property in the District of U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. Columbia known as Union Station for

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00035 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.12 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the use of all or a part of such property bility and desirability of such schools. for a national visitor center to be The act still further provides grants to known as the National Visitor Center. State boards, to colleges and univer- The agreements and leases shall pro- sities, to public educational agencies, vide for such alterations of the Union organizations or institutions to reduce Station Building as necessary to pro- the cost of borrowing funds for the con- vide adequate facilities for visitors. struction of residential schools and They also provide for the construction dormitories. of a parking facility, including nec- (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39 essary approaches and ramps. U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act provides for (49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention construction, modification, alteration, and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). repair, and other improvements of This act provides for Federal grants to postal facilities located in leased build- State, county, municipal, or other pub- ings. lic agency or combination thereof for (54) Airport and Airway Development the construction of facilities to be used Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–258, section in connection with rehabilitation serv- 52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal ices for the diagnosis, treatment, and financial assistance to States and lo- rehabilitation of delinquent youths and calities for the construction, improve- youths in danger of becoming delin- ment, or repair of public airports. quent. (55) (i) Public Law 91–230. This Act (50) Housing and Urban Development provides for federal financial assist- Act of 1968 (including New Communities ance to institutions of higher learning Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act for the construction of a National Cen- provides for Federal assistance for the ter on Educational Media and Mate- following purposes: rials for the Handicapped. The program (i) Guarantees, and commitments to under this statute expires on July 1, guarantee, the bonds, debentures, 1971. Public Law 91–230, section 662(1). notes, and other obligations issued by new community developers to help fi- (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act nance new community development (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). This Act pro- projects. vides for financial assistance to States (ii) Amends section 212(a) of the Na- for construction, expansion, remod- tional Housing Act, adding section 236 eling, or alteration of facilities for the for ‘‘Rental Housing for Lower Income education of handicapped children at Families’’ and section 242 ‘‘Mortgage the preschool, elementary school, and Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals’’ secondary school levels. thereto. (56) Housing and Urban Development (51) Public Health Service Act Amend- Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–609, section ment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Re- 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to habilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 States and local public agencies to help U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). This act provides finance the development of open-space for grants to a public and nonprofit pri- or other land in urban areas for open- vate agency or organization for con- space uses. This Act becomes effective struction projects consisting of any fa- on July 1, 1971. cilities (including post-hospitalization (57) Developmental Disabilities Services treatment facilities for the prevention and Facilities Construction Amendments and treatment of alcoholism or treat- of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–517, section 135(a)(5)). ment of narcotic addicts.) This Act authorizes grants to States (52) Vocational Education Amendments for construction of facilities for the of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This act pro- provision of services to persons with vides for grants to States for the con- developmental disabilities who are un- struction of area vocational education able to pay for such services. school facilities. The act further pro- (58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970 vides grants to public educational (Pub. L. 91–518, section 405(d)). This stat- agencies, organizations, or institutions ute provides that the National Rail- for construction of residential schools road Passenger Corporation may con- to provide vocational education for the struct physical facilities necessary to purpose of demonstrating the feasi- intercity rail passenger operations

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00036 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.14

within the basic national rail pas- or dangerous to his health or safety’’ as senger system designated by the Sec- these health and safety standards are retary of Transportation. applied in the rules of the Secretary of (c) VA and FHA housing. In the course Labor. of the legislative development of sec- (c) The term subcontractor under section 107, it was recognized that section tion 107 is considered to mean a person 107 would not apply to housing con- who agrees to perform any part of the struction for which insurance was labor or material requirements of a issued by the Federal Housing Author- contract for construction, alteration or ity and Veterans’ Administration for repair. Cf. MacEvoy Co. v. United individual home ownership. Concerning States, 322 U.S. 102, 108–9 (1944). A per- construction under the National Hous- son who undertakes to perform a por- ing Act, Reorganization Plan No. 14 of tion of a contract involving the fur- 1950 applies to construction which is nishing of supplies or materials will be subject to the minimum wage require- considered a ‘‘subcontractor’’ under ments of section 212(a) thereof (12 this part and section 107 if the work in U.S.C. 1715c). question involves the performance of construction work and is to be per- § 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory formed: (1) Directly on or near the con- terms. struction site, or (2) by the employer (a) The terms construction, alteration, for the specific project on a customized and repair used in section 107 of the Act basis. Thus, a supplier of materials are also used in section 1 of the Davis- which will become an integral part of Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a), providing the construction is a ‘‘subcontractor’’ minimum wage protection on Federal if the supplier fabricates or assembles construction contracts, and section 1 of the goods or materials in question spe- the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), pro- cifically for the construction project viding performance and payment bond and the work involved may be said to protection on Federal construction be construction activity. If the goods contracts. Similarly, the terms con- or materials in question are ordinarily tractor and subcontractor are used in sold to other customers from regular those statutes, as well as in Copeland inventory, the supplier is not a ‘‘sub- (Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) contractor.’’ Generally, the furnishing and the Contract Work Hours and Safe- of prestressed concrete beams and ty Standards Act itself, which apply prestressed structural steel would be concurrently with the Miller Act and considered manufacturing; therefore a the Davis-Bacon Act on Federal con- supplier of such materials would not be struction contracts and also apply to considered a ‘‘subcontractor.’’ An ex- most federally assisted construction ample of material supplied ‘‘for the contracts. The use of the same or iden- specific project on a customized basis’’ tical terms in these statutes which as that phrase is used in this section apply concurrently with section 107 of would be ventilating ducts, fabricated the Act have considerable precedential in a shop away from the construction value in ascertaining the coverage of job site and specifically cut for the section 107. project according to design specifica- (b) It should be noted that section 1 tions. On the other hand, if a con- of the Davis-Bacon Act limits min- tractor buys standard size nails from a imum wage protection to laborers and foundry, the foundry would not be a mechanics ‘‘employed directly’’ upon covered ‘‘subcontractor.’’ Ordinarily a the ‘‘site of the work.’’ There is no contract for the supplying of construc- comparable limitation in section 107 of tion equipment to a contractor would the Act. Section 107 expressly requires not, in and of itself, be considered a as a self-executing condition of each ‘‘subcontractor’’ for purposes of this covered contract that no contractor or part. subcontractor shall require ‘‘any laborer or mechanic employed in the per- § 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ formance of the contract to work in types of performance. surroundings or under working condi- (a) It is the intent of the Congress to tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, provide safety and health protection of

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00037 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.15 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Federal, federally financed, or feder- tract will be performed nor will any of ally assisted construction. See, for ex- the materials, supplies, articles or ample, H. Report No. 91–241, 91st Cong., equipment to be manufactured or fur- first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear nished under said contract be manufac- that when a Federal contract calls for tured or fabricated in any plants, fac- mixed types of performance, such as tories, buildings, or surroundings or both manufacturing and construction, under working conditions which are section 107 would apply to the con- unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous struction. By its express terms, section to the health and safety of employees 107 applies to a contract which is ‘‘for engaged in the performance of said construction, alteration, and/or re- contract.’’ The rules of the Secretary pair.’’ Such a contract is not required concerning these standards are pub- to be exclusively for such services. The lished in 41 CFR part 50–204, and ex- application of the section is not lim- press the Secretary of Labor’s interpre- ited to contracts which permit an over- tation and application of section 1(e) of all characterization as ‘‘construction the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act contracts.’’ The text of section 107 is to certain particular working condi- not so limited. tions. None of the described working (b) When the mixed types of perform- conditions are intended to deal with ances include both construction and construction activities, although such manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) con- activities may conceivably be a part of cerning the relationship between the a contract which is subject to the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. section 107. Nevertheless, such activities remain subject to the general statutory duty § 1926.15 Relationship to the Service prescribed by section 1(e). Section Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act provides, among (a) A contract for ‘‘construction’’ is other things, that the Act shall not one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., apply to any work required to be done 41 CFR 1–1.208. Section 2(e) of the Serv- in accordance with the provisions of ice Contract Act of 1965 requires as a the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts condition of every Federal contract Act. (and bid specification therefor) exceeding $2,500, the ‘‘principal purpose’’ of § 1926.16 Rules of construction. which is to furnish services to the United States through the use of (a) The prime contractor and any ‘‘service employees,’’ that certain safe- subcontractors may make their own ty and health standards be met. See 29 arrangements with respect to obliga- CFR part 1925, which contains the De- tions which might be more appro- partment rules concerning these stand- priately treated on a jobsite basis rath- ards. Section 7 of the Service Contract er than individually. Thus, for exam- Act provides that the Act shall not ple, the prime contractor and his sub- apply to ‘‘any contract of the United contractors may wish to make an ex- States or District of Columbia for con- press agreement that the prime construction, alteration, and/or repair, in- tractor or one of the subcontractors cluding painting and decorating of pub- will provide all required first-aid or lic buildings or public works.’’ It is toilet facilities, thus relieving the sub- clear from the legislative history of contractors from the actual, but not section 107 that no gaps in coverage be- any legal, responsibility (or, as the tween the two statutes are intended. case may be, relieving the other sub- (b) The Walsh-Healey Public Con- contractors from this responsibility). tracts Act requires that contracts en- In no case shall the prime contractor tered into by any Federal agency for be relieved of overall responsibility for the manufacture or furnishing of mate- compliance with the requirements of rials, supplies, articles, and equipment this part for all work to be performed in any amount exceeding $10,000 must under the contract. contain, among other provisions, a re- (b) By contracting for full perform- quirement that ‘‘no part of such con- ance of a contract subject to section

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00038 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.20

107 of the Act, the prime contractor as- (2) Such programs shall provide for sumes all obligations prescribed as em- frequent and regular inspections of the ployer obligations under the standards job sites, materials, and equipment to contained in this part, whether or not be made by competent persons des- he subcontracts any part of the work. ignated by the employers. (c) To the extent that a subcon- (3) The use of any machinery, tool, tractor of any tier agrees to perform material, or equipment which is not in any part of the contract, he also as- compliance with any applicable re- sumes responsibility for complying quirement of this part is prohibited. with the standards in this part with re- Such machine, tool, material, or equip- spect to that part. Thus, the prime ment shall either be identified as un- contractor assumes the entire responsi- safe by tagging or locking the controls bility under the contract and the sub- to render them inoperable or shall be contractor assumes responsibility with physically removed from its place of respect to his portion of the work. operation. With respect to subcontracted work, (4) The employer shall permit only the prime contractor and any subcon- those employees qualified by training tractor or subcontractors shall be or experience to operate equipment and deemed to have joint responsibility. machinery. (d) Where joint responsibility exists, (c) The standards contained in this both the prime contractor and his subpart shall apply with respect to em- contractor or subcontractors, regard- ployments performed in a workplace in less of tier, shall be considered subject a State, the District of Columbia, the to the enforcement provisions of the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Act. Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Commonwealth of the Subpart C—General Safety and Northern Mariana Islands, Wake Is- Health Provisions land, Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, and Johnston Island. AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. (d) (1) If a particular standard is spe- 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 cifically applicable to a condition, FR 35736), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 FR practice, means, method, operation, or 31160), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable; process, it shall prevail over any dif- and 29 CFR part 1911. ferent general standard which might otherwise be applicable to the same § 1926.20 General safety and health condition, practice, means, method, op- provisions. eration, or process. (a) Contractor requirements. (1) Sec- (2) On the other hand, any standard tion 107 of the Act requires that it shall apply according to its terms to shall be a condition of each contract any employment and place of employ- which is entered into under legislation ment in any industry, even though par- subject to Reorganization Plan Number ticular standards are also prescribed 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in for the industry to the extent that § 1926.12, and is for construction, alter- none of such particular standards ap- ation, and/or repair, including painting plies. and decorating, that no contractor or (e) In the event a standard protects subcontractor for any part of the con- on its face a class of persons larger tract work shall require any laborer or than employees, the standard shall be mechanic employed in the performance applicable under this part only to em- of the contract to work in sur- ployees and their employment and roundings or under working conditions places of employment. which are unsanitary, hazardous, or (f) Compliance duties owed to each em- dangerous to his health or safety. ployee—(1) Personal protective equipment. (b) Accident prevention responsibilities. Standards in this part requiring the (1) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to provide personal protec- employer to initiate and maintain such tive equipment (PPE), including res- programs as may be necessary to com- pirators and other types of PPE, be- ply with this part. cause of hazards to employees impose a

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00039 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.21 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

separate compliance duty with respect ards, and how to avoid injury, and the to each employee covered by the re- first aid procedures to be used in the quirement. The employer must provide event of injury. PPE to each employee required to use (5) Employees required to handle or the PPE, and each failure to provide use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic PPE to an employee may be considered materials shall be instructed in the a separate violation. safe handling and use of these mate- (2) Training. Standards in this part rials and made aware of the specific re- requiring training on hazards and requirements contained in subparts D, F, lated matters, such as standards re- and other applicable subparts of this quiring that employees receive train- part. ing or that the employer train employ- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, ees, provide training to employees, or 1979, as amended at 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015] institute or implement a training program, impose a separate compliance § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of duty with respect to each employee injuries. [Reserved] covered by the requirement. The employer must train each affected em- § 1926.23 First aid and medical atten- ployee in the manner required by the tion. standard, and each failure to train an First aid services and provisions for employee may be considered a separate medical care shall be made available violation. by the employer for every employee covered by these regulations. Regula- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993; tions prescribing specific requirements 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 85 FR 8735, Feb. 18, for first aid, medical attention, and 2020; 85 FR 8735, Feb. 18, 2020] emergency facilities are contained in subpart D of this part. § 1926.21 Safety training and education. § 1926.24 Fire protection and preven- (a) General requirements. The Sec- tion. retary shall, pursuant to section 107(f) The employer shall be responsible for of the Act, establish and supervise pro- the development and maintenance of grams for the education and training of an effective fire protection and preven- employers and employees in the rection program at the job site through- ognition, avoidance and prevention of out all phases of the construction, re- unsafe conditions in employments cov- pair, alteration, or demolition work. ered by the act. The employer shall ensure the avail- (b) Employer responsibility. (1) The em- ability of the fire protection and sup- ployer should avail himself of the safe- pression equipment required by subpart ty and health training programs the F of this part. Secretary provides. (2) The employer shall instruct each § 1926.25 Housekeeping. employee in the recognition and avoid- (a) During the course of construction, ance of unsafe conditions and the regu- alteration, or repairs, form and scrap lations applicable to his work environ- lumber with protruding nails, and all ment to control or eliminate any haz- other debris, shall be kept cleared from ards or other exposure to illness or in- work areas, passageways, and stairs, in jury. and around buildings or other struc- (3) Employees required to handle or tures. use poisons, caustics, and other harm- (b) Combustible scrap and debris ful substances shall be instructed re- shall be removed at regular intervals garding the safe handling and use, and during the course of construction. Safe be made aware of the potential haz- means shall be provided to facilitate ards, personal hygiene, and personal such removal. protective measures required. (c) Containers shall be provided for (4) In job site areas where harmful the collection and separation of waste, plants or animals are present, employ- trash, oily and used rags, and other ees who may be exposed shall be in- refuse. Containers used for garbage and structed regarding the potential haz- other oily, flammable, or hazardous

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00040 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.32

wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful § 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repair- dusts, etc. shall be equipped with cov- ing. ers. Garbage and other waste shall be (a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repair- disposed of at frequent and regular ining, alterations, and maintenance per- tervals. formed on ships under Government § 1926.26 Illumination. contract, except naval ship construction, is work subject to the Act. Construction areas, aisles, stairs, (b) Applicable safety and health stand- ramps, runways, corridors, offices, ards. For the purpose of work carried shops, and storage areas where work is out under this section, the safety and in progress shall be lighted with either health regulations in part 1915 of this natural or artificial illumination. The title, Shipyard Employment, shall minimum illumination requirements apply. for work areas are contained in subpart D of this part. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1926.27 Sanitation. § 1926.32 Definitions. Health and sanitation requirements for drinking water are contained in The following definitions shall apply subpart D of this part. in the application of the regulations in this part: § 1926.28 Personal protective equip- (a) Act means section 107 of the Con- ment. tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- (a) The employer is responsible for ards Act, commonly known as the Con- requiring the wearing of appropriate struction Safety Act (86 Stat. 96; 40 personal protective equipment in all U.S.C. 333). operations where there is an exposure (b) ANSI means American National to hazardous conditions or where this Standards Institute. part indicates the need for using such (c) Approved means sanctioned, en- equipment to reduce the hazards to the dorsed, accredited, certified, or accept- employees. ed as satisfactory by a duly constituted (b) Regulations governing the use, se- and nationally recognized authority or lection, and maintenance of personal agency. protective and lifesaving equipment (d) Authorized person means a person are described under subpart E of this approved or assigned by the employer part. to perform a specific type of duty or duties or to be at a specific location or § 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. locations at the jobsite. (a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid (e) Administration means the Occupa- certification by an insurance company tional Safety and Health Administra- or regulatory authority shall be tion. deemed as acceptable evidence of safe (f) Competent person means one who is installation, inspection, and testing of capable of identifying existing and pre- pressure vessels provided by the em- dictable hazards in the surroundings or ployer. working conditions which are unsani- (b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- employer shall be deemed to be in com- ployees, and who has authorization to pliance with the requirements of this take prompt corrective measures to part when evidence of current and valid eliminate them. certification by an insurance company (g) Construction work. For purposes of or regulatory authority attesting to this section, Construction work means the safe installation, inspection, and work for construction, alteration, and/ testing is presented. or repair, including painting and deco- (c) Other requirements. Regulations rating. prescribing specific requirements for (h) Defect means any characteristic other types of pressure vessels and or condition which tends to weaken or similar equipment are contained in reduce the strength of the tool, object, subparts F and O of this part. or structure of which it is a part.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00041 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.33 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(i) Designated person means ‘‘author- to meet a given purpose, occasion, con- ized person’’ as defined in paragraph (d) dition, function, or circumstance. of this section. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (j) Employee means every laborer or 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993] mechanic under the Act regardless of the contractual relationship which § 1926.33 Access to employee exposure may be alleged to exist between the la- and medical records.

borer and mechanic and the contractor NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- or subcontractor who engaged him. struction work under this section are iden- ‘‘Laborer and mechanic’’ are not de- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this fined in the Act, but the identical chapter. terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] (40 U.S.C. 276a), which provides for minimum wage protection on Federal § 1926.34 Means of egress. and federally assisted construction (a) General. In every building or contracts. The use of the same term in structure exits shall be so arranged and a statute which often applies concur- maintained as to provide free and un- rently with section 107 of the Act has obstructed egress from all parts of the considerable precedential value in building or structure at all times when ascertaining the meaning of ‘‘laborer it is occupied. No lock or fastening to and mechanic’’ as used in the Act. La- prevent free escape from the inside of borer generally means one who per- any building shall be installed except forms manual labor or who labors at an in mental, penal, or corrective institu- occupation requiring physical strength; tions where supervisory personnel is mechanic generally means a worker continually on duty and effective pro- skilled with tools. See 18 Comp. Gen. visions are made to remove occupants 341. in case of fire or other emergency. (k) Employer means contractor or (b) Exit marking. Exits shall be subcontractor within the meaning of marked by a readily visible sign. Ac- the Act and of this part. cess to exits shall be marked by readily (l) Hazardous substance means a sub- visible signs in all cases where the exit stance which, by reason of being explo- or way to reach it is not immediately sive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, visible to the occupants. oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise (c) Maintenance and workmanship. harmful, is likely to cause death or in- Means of egress shall be continually jury. maintained free of all obstructions or (m) Qualified means one who, by pos- impediments to full instant use in the session of a recognized degree, certifi- case of fire or other emergency. cate, or professional standing, or who [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully dem- § 1926.35 Employee emergency action onstrated his ability to solve or resolve plans. problems relating to the subject mat- (a) Scope and application. This section ter, the work, or the project. applies to all emergency action plans (n) means the ratio of Safety factor required by a particular OSHA stand- the ultimate breaking strength of a ard. The emergency action plan shall member or piece of material or equip- be in writing (except as provided in the ment to the actual working stress or last sentence of paragraph (e)(3) of this safe load when in use. section) and shall cover those des- (o) Secretary means the Secretary of ignated actions employers and employ- Labor. ees must take to ensure employee safe- (p) SAE means Society of Automotive ty from fire and other emergencies. Engineers. (b) Elements. The following elements, (q) Shall means mandatory. at a minimum, shall be included in the (r) Should means recommended. plan: (s) Suitable means that which fits, (1) Emergency escape procedures and and has the qualities or qualifications emergency escape route assignments;

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00042 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.50

(2) Procedures to be followed by em- Subpart D—Occupational Health ployees who remain to operate critical and Environmental Controls plant operations before they evacuate;

(3) Procedures to account for all em- AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3704; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, ployees after emergency evacuation and 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. has been completed; 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 (4) Rescue and medical duties for FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), those employees who are to perform 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5– 2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1– them; 2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable; and 29 CFR (5) The preferred means of reporting part 1911. fires and other emergencies; and Sections 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65 also (6) Names or regular job titles of per- issued under 5 U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR part sons or departments who can be con- 1911. Section 1926.61 also issued under 49 U.S.C. tacted for further information or expla- 1801–1819 and 5 U.S.C. 553. nation of duties under the plan. Section 1926.62 also issued under sec. 1031, (c) Alarm system. (1) The employer Public Law 102–550, 106 Stat. 3672 (42 U.S.C. shall establish an employee alarm sys- 4853). tem which complies with § 1926.159. Section 1926.65 also issued under sec. 126, Public Law 99–499, 100 Stat. 1614 (reprinted at (2) If the employee alarm system is 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note) and 5 U.S.C. 553. used for alerting fire brigade members, or for other purposes, a distinctive sig- § 1926.50 Medical services and first nal for each purpose shall be used. aid. (d) Evacuation. The employer shall (a) The employer shall insure the establish in the emergency action plan availability of medical personnel for the types of evacuation to be used in advice and consultation on matters of emergency circumstances. occupational health. (e) Training. (1) Before implementing (b) Provisions shall be made prior to the emergency action plan, the em- commencement of the project for prompt medical attention in case of se- ployer shall designate and train a suffi- rious injury. cient number of persons to assist in the (c) In the absence of an infirmary, safe and orderly emergency evacuation clinic, hospital, or physician, that is of employees. reasonably accessible in terms of time (2) The employer shall review the and distance to the worksite, which is plan with each employee covered by available for the treatment of injured the plan at the following times: employees, a person who has a valid (i) Initially when the plan is devel- certificate in first-aid training from oped, the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the Amer- (ii) Whenever the employee’s respon- ican Red Cross, or equivalent training sibilities or designated actions under that can be verified by documentary the plan change, and evidence, shall be available at the (iii) Whenever the plan is changed. worksite to render first aid. (3) The employer shall review with (d)(1) First aid supplies shall be eas- each employee upon initial assignment ily accessible when required. (2) The contents of the first aid kit those parts of the plan which the em- shall be placed in a weatherproof con- ployee must know to protect the em- tainer with individual sealed packages ployee in the event of an emergency. for each type of item, and shall be The written plan shall be kept at the checked by the employer before being workplace and made available for em- sent out on each job and at least week- ployee review. For those employers ly on each job to ensure that the ex- with 10 or fewer employees the plan pended items are replaced. may be communicated orally to em- (e) Proper equipment for prompt ployees and the employer need not transportation of the injured person to maintain a written plan. a physician or hospital, or a communication system for contacting nec- [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] essary ambulance service, shall be provided.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00043 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.51 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(f)(1) In areas where 911 emergency aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 dispatch services are not available, the log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to iden- telephone numbers of the physicians, tify these unique problems. Consultation hospitals, or ambulances shall be con- from the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or local emer- spicuously posted. gency room may be helpful to employers in (2) In areas where 911 emergency dis- these circumstances. By assessing the spe- patch services are available and an em- cific needs of their workplace, employers can ployer uses a communication system ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies for contacting necessary emergency- are available. Employers should assess the medical service, the employer must: specific needs of their worksite periodically (i) Ensure that the communication and augment the first aid kit appropriately. system is effective in contacting the If it is reasonably anticipated employees emergency-medical service; and will be exposed to blood or other potentially (ii)(A) When using a communication infectious materials while using first-aid supplies, employers should provide personal system in an area that does not auto- protective equipment (PPE). Appropriate matically supply the caller’s latitude PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields, and longitude information to the 911 masks and eye protection (see ‘‘Occupational emergency dispatcher, the employer Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens’’, 29 CFR must post in a conspicuous location at 1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175). the worksite either: [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (1) The latitude and longitude of the 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; worksite; or 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, (2) Other location-identification in- 1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 80740, formation that communicates effec- Dec. 27, 2011; 84 FR 21575, May 14, 2019] tively to employees the location of the worksite. § 1926.51 Sanitation. (B) The requirement specified in (a) Potable water. (1) An adequate sup- paragraph (f)(2)(ii)(A) of this section ply of potable water shall be provided does not apply to worksites with read- in all places of employment. ily available telephone land lines that (2) Portable containers used to dis- have 911 emergency service that auto- pense drinking water shall be capable matically identifies the location of the of being tightly closed, and equipped caller. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped (g) Where the eyes or body of any from containers. person may be exposed to injurious cor- (3) Any container used to distribute rosive materials, suitable facilities for drinking water shall be clearly marked quick drenching or flushing of the eyes as to the nature of its contents and not and body shall be provided within the used for any other purpose. work area for immediate emergency (4) The common drinking cup is pro- use. hibited. APPENDIX A TO § 1926.50—FIRST AID KITS (5) Where single service cups (to be (NON-MANDATORY) used but once) are supplied, both a san- First aid supplies are required to be easily itary container for the unused cups and accessible under paragraph § 1926.50(d)(1). An a receptacle for disposing of the used example of the minimal contents of a generic cups shall be provided. first aid kit is described in American Na- (6) Potable water means water that tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1978 ‘‘Min- meets the standards for drinking pur- imum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type poses of the State or local authority First-aid Kits’’. The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be adequate having jurisdiction, or water that for small work sites. When larger operations meets the quality standards prescribed or multiple operations are being conducted by the U.S. Environmental Protection at the same location, employers should de- Agency’s National Primary Drinking termine the need for additional first aid kits Water Regulations (40 CFR part 141). at the worksite, additional types of first aid (b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for equipment and supplies and additional quan- nonpotable water, such as water for in- tities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits. dustrial or firefighting purposes only, In a similar fashion, employers who have shall be identified by signs meeting the unique or changing first-aid needs in their requirements of subpart G of this part, workplace may need to enhance their first- to indicate clearly that the water is

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00044 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.51

unsafe and is not to be used for drink- where contaminants may be harmful to ing, washing, or cooking purposes. the employees. Such facilities shall be (2) There shall be no cross-connec- in near proximity to the worksite and tion, open or potential, between a sys- shall be so equipped as to enable em- tem furnishing potable water and a ployees to remove such substances. system furnishing nonpotable water. (2) General. Washing facilities shall (c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1) be maintained in a sanitary condition. Toilets shall be provided for employees (3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be according to the following table: made available in all places of employment. The requirements of this sub- TABLE D–1 division do not apply to mobile crews Number of em- or to normally unattended work loca- ployees Minimum number of facilities tions if employees working at these lo- 20 or less ...... 1. cations have transportation readily 20 or more ...... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers. available to nearby washing facilities 200 or more ...... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers. which meet the other requirements of this paragraph. (2) Under temporary field conditions, (ii) Each lavatory shall be provided provisions shall be made to assure not with hot and cold running water, or less than one toilet facility is avail- tepid running water. able. (iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing (3) Job sites, not provided with a san- agents shall be provided. itary sewer, shall be provided with one (iv) Individual hand towels or sec- of the following toilet facilities unless tions thereof, of cloth or paper, air prohibited by local codes: blowers or clean individual sections of (i) Privies (where their use will not continuous cloth toweling, convenient contaminate ground or surface water); to the lavatories, shall be provided. (ii) Chemical toilets; (iii) Recirculating toilets; (4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are (iv) Combustion toilets. required by a particular standard, the (4) The requirements of this para- showers shall be provided in accord- graph (c) for sanitation facilities shall ance with paragraphs (f)(4) (ii) through not apply to mobile crews having (v) of this section. transportation readily available to (ii) One shower shall be provided for nearby toilet facilities. each 10 employees of each sex, or nu- (d) Food handling. (1) All employees’ merical fraction thereof, who are re- food service facilities and operations quired to shower during the same shift. shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- (iii) Body soap or other appropriate nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- cleansing agents convenient to the tions in which they are located. showers shall be provided as specified (2) All employee food service facili- in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section. ties and operations shall be carried out (iv) Showers shall be provided with in accordance with sound hygienic hot and cold water feeding a common principles. In all places of employment discharge line. where all or part of the food service is (v) Employees who use showers shall provided, the food dispensed shall be be provided with individual clean tow- wholesome, free from spoilage, and els. shall be processed, prepared, handled, (g) Eating and drinking areas. No em- and stored in such a manner as to be ployee shall be allowed to consume protected against contamination. food or beverages in a toilet room nor (e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When in any area exposed to a toxic mate- temporary sleeping quarters are pro- rial. vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, (h) Vermin control. Every enclosed and lighted. workplace shall be so constructed, (f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer equipped, and maintained, so far as shall provide adequate washing facili- reasonably practicable, as to prevent ties for employees engaged in the ap- the entrance or harborage of rodents, plication of paints, coating, herbicides, insects, and other vermin. A con- or insecticides, or in other operations tinuing and effective extermination

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00045 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.52 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

program shall be instituted where their each. Exposure to different levels for presence is detected. various periods of time shall be com- (i) Change rooms. Whenever employ- puted according to the formula set ees are required by a particular stand- forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec- ard to wear protective clothing because tion.

of the possibility of contamination (ii) Fe = (T1/L1) + (T2/L2) + · · · + (Tn/ with toxic materials, change rooms Ln) equipped with storage facilities for street clothes and separate storage fa- Where: cilities for the protective clothing Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor. shall be provided. T = The period of noise exposure at any essentially constant level. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, L = The duration of the permissible noise ex- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; posure at the constant level (from Table 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011] D–2). § 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the (a) Protection against the effects of exposure exceeds permissible levels. noise exposure shall be provided when (iii) A sample computation showing the sound levels exceed those shown in an application of the formula in para- Table D–2 of this section when meas- graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as fol- ured on the A-scale of a standard sound lows. An employee is exposed at these level meter at slow response. levels for these periods: (b) When employees are subjected to 1 sound levels exceeding those listed in 110 db A ⁄4 hour. 1 Table D–2 of this section, feasible ad- 100 db A ⁄2 hour. 1 ministrative or engineering controls 90 db A 1 ⁄2 hours. 1 1 1 1 shall be utilized. If such controls fail to Fe = ( ⁄4/ ⁄2) + ( ⁄2/2) + (1 ⁄2/8) reduce sound levels within the levels of Fe = 0.500 + 0.25 + 0.188 the table, personal protective equip- Fe = 0.938 ment as required in subpart E, shall be provided and used to reduce sound lev- Since the value of Fe does not exceed els within the levels of the table. unity, the exposure is within permis- (c) If the variations in noise level in- sible limits. volve maxima at intervals of 1 second (e) Exposure to impulsive or impact or less, it is to be considered contin- noise should not exceed 140 dB peak uous. sound pressure level. (d)(1) In all cases where the sound levels exceed the values shown herein, § 1926.53 Ionizing radiation. a continuing, effective hearing con- (a) In construction and related ac- servation program shall be adminis- tivities involving the use of sources of tered. ionizing radiation, the pertinent provisions of the Nuclear Regulatory Com- TABLE D–2—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES mission’s Standards for Protection Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), re- Sound level Duration per day, hours dBA slow lating to protection against occupa- response tional radiation exposure, shall apply. 8 ...... 90 (b) Any activity which involves the 6 ...... 92 use of radioactive materials or X-rays, 4 ...... 95 whether or not under license from the 3 ...... 97 2 ...... 100 Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall 11⁄2 ...... 102 be performed by competent persons 1 ...... 105 specially trained in the proper and safe 1⁄2 ...... 110 1⁄4 or less ...... 115 operation of such equipment. In the case of materials used under Commis- (2)(i) When the daily noise exposure sion license, only persons actually li- is composed of two or more periods of censed, or competent persons under di- noise exposure of different levels, their rection and supervision of the licensee, combined effect should be considered, shall perform such work. rather than the individual effect of (c)–(r) [Reserved]

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00046 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (k) Laser unit in operation should be struction work under paragraphs (c) through set up above the heads of the employ- (r) of this section are identical to those set ees, when possible. forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of § 1910.1096 of this chapter. (l) Employees shall not be exposed to microwave power densities in excess of [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 10 milliwatts per square centimeter. 1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] § 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and mists. § 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. (a) Employers must limit an employ- (a) Only qualified and trained em- ee’s exposure to any substance listed in ployees shall be assigned to install, ad- Table 1 or 2 of this section in accord- just, and operate laser equipment. ance with the following: (b) Proof of qualification of the laser (1) Substances with limits preceded by equipment operator shall be available (C)—Ceiling Values. An employee’s ex- and in possession of the operator at all posure, as determined from breathing- times. zone air samples, to any substance in (c) Employees, when working in areas Table 1 of this section with a permis- in which a potential exposure to direct sible exposure limit preceded by (C) or reflected laser light greater than must at no time exceed the exposure 0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall limit specified for that substance. If in- be provided with antilaser eye protec- stantaneous monitoring is not feasible, tion devices as specified in subpart E of then the employer must assess the ceil- this part. ing as a 15-minute time-weighted aver- (d) Areas in which lasers are used age exposure that the employer cannot shall be posted with standard laser exceed at any time during the working warning placards. day. (e) Beam shutters or caps shall be (2) Other substances—8-hour Time utilized, or the laser turned off, when Weighted Averages. An employee’s expo- laser transmission is not actually re- sure, as determined from breathing- quired. When the laser is left unat- zone air samples, to any substance in tended for a substantial period of time, Table 1 or 2 of this section with a per- such as during lunch hour, overnight, missible exposure limit not preceded or at change of shifts, the laser shall be by (C) must not exceed the limit speci- turned off. fied for that substance measured as an (f) Only mechanical or electronic 8-hour time-weighted average in any means shall be used as a detector for work shift. guiding the internal alignment of the (b) To achieve compliance with para- laser. graph (a) of this section, administra- (g) The laser beam shall not be di- tive or engineering controls must first rected at employees. be implemented whenever feasible. (h) When it is raining or snowing, or When such controls are not feasible to when there is dust or fog in the air, the achieve full compliance, protective operation of laser systems shall be pro- equipment or other protective meas- hibited where practicable; in any ures shall be used to keep the exposure event, employees shall be kept out of of employees to air contaminants with- range of the area of source and target in the limits prescribed in this section. during such weather conditions. Any equipment and technical measures (i) Laser equipment shall bear a label used for this purpose must first be ap- to indicate maximum output. proved for each particular use by a (j) Employees shall not be exposed to competent industrial hygienist or light intensities above: other technically qualified person. (1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per Whenever respirators are used, their square centimeter; use shall comply with § 1926.103. (2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec- per square centimeter; tion do not apply to the exposure of (3) Diffused reflected light: 21⁄2 watts employees to airborne asbestos, per square centimeter. tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00047 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

dust. Whenever any employee is ex- employees to formaldehyde. Whenever posed to airborne asbestos, tremolite, any employee is exposed to formalde- anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the hyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of requirements of § 1926.1101 shall apply. this title shall apply. (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to the exposure of

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Abate; see Temephos. Acetaldehyde ...... 75–07–0 200 360 — Acetic acid ...... 64–19–7 10 25 — Acetic anhydride ...... 108–24–7 5 20 — Acetone ...... 67–64–1 1000 2400 — Acetonitrile ...... 75–05–8 40 70 — 2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 53–96–3 Acetylene ...... 74–86–2 E Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2- Dichloroethylene. Acetylene tetrabromide ...... 79–27–6 1 14 — Acrolein ...... 107–02–8 0.1 0 .25 — Acrylamide ...... 79–06–1 — 0 .3 X Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 ...... 107–13–1 Aldrin ...... 309–00–2 — 0 .25 X Allyl alcohol ...... 107–18–6 2 5 X Allyl chloride ...... 107–05–1 1 3 — Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) ...... 106–92–3 (C)10 (C)45 — Allyl propyl disulfide ...... 2179–59–1 2 12 — alpha-Alumina ...... 1344–28–1 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Alundum; see alpha-Alumina. 4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 ...... 92–67–1 2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine. 2-Aminopyridine ...... 504–29–0 0.5 2 — Ammonia ...... 7664–41–7 50 35 — Ammonium sulfamate ...... 7773–06–0 Total dust ...... — 15 — Respirable fraction ...... — 5 — n-Amyl acetate ...... 628–63–7 100 525 — sec-Amyl acetate ...... 626–38–0 125 650 — Aniline and homologs ...... 62–53–3 5 19 X Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) ...... 29191–52–4 — 0.5 X Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ...... 7440–36–0 — 0.5 — ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ...... 86–88–4 — 0.3 — Argon ...... 7440–37–1 E Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As); see § 1926.1118 ...... 7440–38–2 — — — Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) .... 7440–38–2 — 0 .5 — Arsine ...... 7784–42–1 0.05 0 .2 — Asbestos; see § 1926.1101. Azinphos-methyl ...... 86–50–0 — 0.2 X Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ..... 7440–39–3 — 0.5 — Benzene g; see § 1926.1128 ...... 71–43–2 Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 ...... 92–87–5 p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone. Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles. Benzoyl peroxide ...... 94–36–0 — 5 — Benzyl chloride ...... 100–44–7 1 5 — Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as Be); see 1926.1124 (q) ...... 7440–41–7 — 0 .002 — Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00048 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether. Boron oxide ...... 1303–86–2 Total dust ...... — 15 — Boron tribromide ...... 10294–33–4 1 10 — Boron trifluoride ...... 7637–07–2 (C)1 (C)3 — Bromine ...... 7726–95–6 0 .1 0 .7 — Bromine pentafluoride ...... 7789–30–2 0.1 0 .7 — Bromoform ...... 75–25–2 0 .5 5 X Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR 1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) ...... 106–99–0 STEL 1 ppm/5 ppm —

Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan. 2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ...... 78–93–3 200 590 — 2-Butoxyethanol ...... 111–76–2 50 240 X n-Butyl-acetate ...... 123–86–4 150 710 — sec-Butyl acetate ...... 105–46–4 200 950 — tert-Butyl acetate ...... 540–88–5 200 950 — n-Butyl alcohol ...... 71–36–3 100 300 — sec-Butyl alcohol ...... 78–92–2 150 450 — tert-Butyl alcohol ...... 75–65–0 100 300 — Butylamine ...... 109–73–9 (C)5 (C)15 X tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see 1926.1126 n ...... 1189–85–1 n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) ...... 2426–08–6 50 270 — Butyl mercaptan ...... 109–79–5 0 .5 1.5 — p-tert-Butyltoluene ...... 98–51–1 10 60 — Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 ...... 7440–43–9 Calcium carbonate ...... 1317–65–3 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Calcium oxide ...... 1305–78–8 — 5 — Calcium sulfate ...... 7778–18–9 Total dust ...... — 15 — Respirable fraction ...... — 5 — Camphor, synthetic ...... 76–22–2 — 2 — Carbaryl (Sevin) ...... 63–25–2 — 5 — Carbon black ...... 1333–86–4 — 3.5 — Carbon dioxide ...... 124–38–9 5000 9000 — Carbon disulfide ...... 75–15–0 20 60 X Carbon monoxide ...... 630–08–0 50 55 — Carbon tetrachloride ...... 56–23–5 10 65 X Cellulose ...... 9004–34–6 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Chlordane ...... 57–74–9 — 0 .5 X Chlorinated camphene ...... 8001–35–2 — 0 .5 X Chlorinated diphenyl oxide ...... 55720–99–5 — 0.5 — Chlorine ...... 7782–50–5 1 3 — Chlorine dioxide ...... 10049–04–4 0.1 0 .3 Chlorine trifluoride ...... 7790–91–2 (C)0 .1 (C)0.4 — Chloroacetaldehyde ...... 107–20–0 (C)1 (C)3 — a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chloride) ...... 532–27–4 0 .05 0 .3 — Chlorobenzene ...... 108–90–7 75 350 — o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ...... 2698–41–1 0.05 0.4 — Chlorobromomethane ...... 74–97–5 200 1050 — 2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chlo- roprene. Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 53469–21–9 — 1 X Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 11097–69–1 — 0.5 X 1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see Epichlorohydrin. 39

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00049 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin. Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride. Chloroform (Trichloromethane) ...... 67–66–3 (C)50 (C)240 — bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see § 1926.1108 ...... 542–88–1 Chloromethyl methyl ether; see § 1926.1106 ...... 107–30–2 1-Chloro-1-nitropropane ...... 600–25–9 20 100 — Chloropicrin ...... 76–06–2 0.1 0 .7 — beta-Chloroprene ...... 126–99–8 25 90 X Chromium (II) compounds. (as Cr) ...... 7440–47–3 — 0 .5 — Chromium (III) compounds. (as Cr) ...... 7440–47–3 — 0 .5 — Chromium (VI) compounds; See 1926.1126 o. Chromium metal and insol. salts (as Cr) ...... 7440–47–3 — 1 — Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles. Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene soluble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phen- anthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65996–93–2 — 0 .2 — Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) .. 7440–48–4 — 0 .1 — Copper ...... 7440–50–8 Fume (as Cu) ...... — 0.1 — Dusts and mists (as Cu) ...... — 1 — Corundum; see Emery. Cotton dust (raw) ...... — 1 Crag herbicide (Sesone) ...... 136–78–7 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Cresol, all isomers ...... 1319–77–3 5 22 X Crotonaldehyde ...... 123–73–9; 2 6 4170–30–3 Cumene ...... 98–82–8 50 245 X Cyanides (as CN) ...... Varies with — 5 X Compound Cyanogen ...... 460–19–5 10 — — Cyclohexane ...... 110–82–7 300 1050 — Cyclohexanol ...... 108–93–0 50 200 — Cyclohexanone ...... 108–94–1 50 200 — Cyclohexene ...... 110–83–8 300 1015 — Cyclonite ...... 121–82–4 — 1.5 X Cyclopentadiene ...... 542–92–7 75 200 — DDT, see Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane. DDVP, see Dichlorvos. 2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 94–75–7 — 10 — Decaborane ...... 17702–41–9 0 .05 0 .3 X Demeton (Systox) ...... 8065–48–3 — 0.1 X Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl- 2-pentanone) ...... 123–42–2 50 240 — 1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylene- diamine. Diazomethane ...... 334–88–3 0.2 0 .4 — Diborane ...... 19287–45–7 0 .1 0 .1 — 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP); see § 1926.1144 ...... 96–12–8 — 1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene dibromide. Dibutyl phosphate ...... 107–66–4 1 5 —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00050 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Dibutyl phthalate ...... 84–74–2 — 5 — Dichloroacetylene ...... 7572–29–4 (C)0 .1 (C)0.4 — o-Dichlorobenzene ...... 95–50–1 (C)50 (C)300 — p-Dichlorobenzene ...... 106–46–7 75 450 — 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine; see § 1926.1107 ...... 91–94–1 Dichlorodifluoromethane ...... 75–71–8 1000 4950 — 1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ..... 118–52–5 — 0 .2 — Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50–29–3 — 1 X 1,1-Dichloroethane ...... 75–34–3 100 400 — 1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene dichloride. 1,2-Dichloroethylene ...... 540–59–0 200 790 — Dichloroethyl ether ...... 111–44–4 (C)15 (C)90 X Dichloromethane; see Methylene chloride. Dichloromonofluoromethane ...... 75–43–4 1000 4200 — 1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane ...... 594–72–9 (C)10 (C)60 — 1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene dichloride. Dichlorotetrafluoroethane ...... 76–14–2 1000 7000 — Dichlorvos (DDVP) ...... 62–73–7 — 1 X Dieldrin ...... 60–57–1 — 0.25 X Diethylamine ...... 109–89–7 25 75 — 2-Diethylaminoethanol ...... 100–37–8 10 50 X Diethylene triamine ...... 111–40–0 (C)10 (C)42 X Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether. Difluorodibromomethane ...... 75–61–6 100 860 — Diglycidyl ether (DGE) ...... 2238–07–5 (C)0 .5 (C)2.8 — Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone. Diisobutyl ketone ...... 108–83–8 50 290 — Diisopropylamine ...... 108–18–9 5 20 X 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see § 1926.1115 ...... 60–11–7 Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal. Dimethyl acetamide ...... 127–19–5 10 35 X Dimethylamine ...... 124–40–3 10 18 — Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine. Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) ... 121–69–7 5 25 X Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene. Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl phosphate ...... 300–76–5 — 3 — Dimethylformamide ...... 68–12–2 10 30 X 2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see Diisobutyl ketone. 1,1-Dimethylhydrazine ...... 57–14–7 0 .5 1 X Dimethylphthalate ...... 131–11–3 — 5 — Dimethyl sulfate ...... 77–78–3 1 5 X Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ...... 1 X (ortho) ...... 528–29–0 (meta) ...... 99–65–0 (para) ...... 100–25–4 Dinitro-o-cresol ...... 534–52–1 — 0.2 X Dinitrotoluene ...... 25321–14–6 — 1.5 X Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ...... 123–91–1 100 360 X Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ...... 92–52–4 0.2 1 — Diphenylamine ...... 122–39–4 — 10 — Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate. Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ...... 34590–94–8 100 600 X Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate) ...... 117–81–7 — 5 —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00051 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Emery ...... 12415–34–8 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Endosulfan ...... 115–29–7 — 0 .1 X Endrin ...... 72–20–8 — 0 .1 X Epichlorohydrin ...... 106–89–8 5 19 X EPN ...... 2104–64–5 — 0.5 X 1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene oxide. 2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol. Ethane ...... 74–84–0 E Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan. Ethanolamine ...... 141–43–5 3 6 — 2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ...... 110–80–5 200 740 X 2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve acetate) ...... 111–15–9 100 540 X Ethyl acetate ...... 141–78–6 400 1400 — Ethyl acrylate ...... 140–88–5 25 100 X Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) ...... 64–17–5 1000 1900 — Ethylamine ...... 75–04–7 10 18 — Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3- heptanone) ...... 541–85–5 25 130 — Ethyl benzene ...... 100–41–4 100 435 — Ethyl bromide ...... 74–96–4 200 890 — Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) ...... 106–35–4 50 230 — Ethyl chloride ...... 75–00–3 1000 2600 — Ethyl ether ...... 60–29–7 400 1200 — Ethyl formate ...... 109–94–4 100 300 — Ethyl mercaptan ...... 75–08–1 0 .5 1 — Ethyl silicate ...... 78–10–4 100 850 — Ethylene ...... 74–85–1 E Ethylene chlorohydrin ...... 107–07–3 5 16 X Ethylenediamine ...... 107–15–3 10 25 — Ethylene dibromide ...... 106–93–4 (C)25 (C)190 X Ethylene dichloride (1,2- Dichloroethane) ...... 107–06–2 50 200 — Ethylene glycol dinitrate ...... 628–96–6 (C)0 .2 (C)1 X Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see Methyl cellosolve acetate. Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 ...... 151–56–4 Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 ...... 75–21–8 Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1- Dichloroethane. N-Ethylmorpholine ...... 100–74–3 20 94 X Ferbam ...... 14484–64–1 Total dust ...... — 15 — Ferrovanadium dust ...... 12604–58–9 — 1 — Fibrous Glass. Total dust ...... — Respirable fraction ...... — — Fluorides (as F) ...... Varies with — 2.5 — compound Fluorine ...... 7782–41–4 0 .1 0.2 — Fluorotrichloromethane (Trichlorofluoromethane) ...... 75–69–4 1000 5600 — Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 ...... 50–00–0 Formic acid ...... 64–18–6 5 9 — Furfural ...... 98–01–1 5 20 X Furfuryl alcohol ...... 98–00–0 50 200 — Gasoline ...... 8006–61–9 A 3 — Glycerin (mist) ...... 56–81–5 Total dust ...... — —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00052 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Respirable fraction ...... — — Glycidol ...... 556–52–5 50 150 — Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2- Ethoxyethanol. Graphite, natural, respirable dust ...... 7782–42–5 (2) (2) (2) Graphite, synthetic. Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Guthion; see Azinphos methyl. Gypsum ...... 13397–24–5 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Hafnium ...... 7440–58–6 — 0 .5 — Helium ...... 7440–59–7 E Heptachlor ...... 76–44–8 — 0 .5 X Heptane (n-Heptane) ...... 142–82–5 500 2000 — Hexachloroethane ...... 67–72–1 1 10 X Hexachloronaphthalene ...... 1335–87–1 — 0 .2 X n-Hexane ...... 110–54–3 500 1800 — 2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) ..... 591–78–6 100 410 — Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) ...... 108–10–1 100 410 — sec-Hexyl acetate ...... 108–84–9 50 300 — Hydrazine ...... 302–01–2 1 1 .3 X Hydrogen ...... 1333–74–0 E Hydrogen bromide ...... 10035–10–6 3 10 — Hydrogen chloride ...... 7647–01–0 (C)5 (C)7 — Hydrogen cyanide ...... 74–90–8 10 11 X Hydrogen fluoride (as F) ...... 7664–39–3 3 2 — Hydrogen peroxide ...... 7722–84–1 1 1 .4 — Hydrogen selenide (as Se) ...... 7783–07–5 0 .05 .02 — Hydrogen sulfide ...... 7783–06–4 10 15 — Hydroquinone ...... 123–31–9 — 2 — Indene ...... 95–13–6 10 45 — Indium and compounds (as In) ...... 7440–74–6 — 0 .1 — Iodine ...... 7553–56–2 (C)0 .1 (C)1 — Iron oxide fume ...... 1309–37–1 — 10 — Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) ...... Varies with — 1 — compound Isoamyl acetate ...... 123–92–2 100 525 — Isoamyl alcohol (primary and secondary) ...... 123–51–3 100 360 — Isobutyl acetate ...... 110–19–0 150 700 — Isobutyl alcohol ...... 78–83–1 100 300 — Isophorone ...... 78–59–1 25 140 — Isopropyl acetate ...... 108–21–4 250 950 — Isopropyl alcohol ...... 67–63–0 400 980 — Isopropylamine ...... 75–31–0 5 12 — Isopropyl ether ...... 108–20–3 500 2100 — Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ...... 4016–14–2 50 240 — Kaolin ...... 1332–58–7 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Ketene ...... 463–51–4 0 .5 0 .9 — Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 .. 7439–92–1 Limestone ...... 1317–65–3 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Lindane ...... 58–89–9 — 0 .5 X Lithium hydride ...... 7580–67–8 — 0 .025 — L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) ...... 68476–85–7 1000 1800 Magnesite ...... 546–93–0 Total dust ...... — —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00053 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Respirable fraction ...... — — Magnesium oxide fume ...... 1309–48–4 Total particulate ...... 15 — — Malathion ...... 121–75–5 Total dust ...... — 15 X Maleic anhydride ...... 108–31–6 0.25 Manganese compounds (as Mn) ...... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 — Manganese fume (as Mn) ...... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 — Marble ...... 1317–65–3 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ..... 7439–97–6 0.1 X Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as Hg) ...... 7439–97–6 — 0.01 X Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) ...... 7439–97–6 — 0 .1 X Mesityl oxide ...... 141–79–7 25 100 — Methane ...... 74–82–8 E Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan. Methoxychlor ...... 72–43–5 Total dust ...... — 15 — 2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) ... 109–86–4 25 80 X 2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl cellosolve acetate) ...... 110–49–6 25 120 X Methyl acetate ...... 79–20–9 200 610 — Methyl acetylene (Propyne) ...... 74–99–7 1000 1650 — Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture (MAPP) ...... 1000 1800 — Methyl acrylate ...... 96–33–3 10 35 X Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) ...... 109–87–5 1000 3100 — Methyl alcohol ...... 67–56–1 200 260 — Methylamine ...... 74–89–5 10 12 — Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl isobutyl carbinol. Methyl n-amyl ketone ...... 110–43–0 100 465 — Methyl bromide ...... 74–83–9 (C)20 (C)80 X Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone. Methyl cellosolve; see 2- Methoxyethanol. Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2- Methoxyethyl acetate. Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052. Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloro- ethane) ...... 71–55–6 350 1900 — Methylcyclohexane ...... 108–87–2 500 2000 — Methylcyclohexanol ...... 25639–42–3 100 470 — o-Methylcyclohexanone ...... 583–60–8 100 460 X Methylene chloride ...... 75–09–2 500 1740 — Methylenedianiline (MDA) ...... 101–77–9 Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Buta- none. Methyl formate ...... 107–31–3 100 250 — Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydrazine) ...... 60–34–4 (C)0.2 (C)0 .35 X Methyl iodide ...... 74–88–4 5 28 X Methyl isoamyl ketone ...... 110–12–3 100 475 — Methyl isobutyl carbinol ...... 108–11–2 25 100 X Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone. Methyl isocyanate ...... 624–83–9 0 .02 0 .05 X Methyl mercaptan ...... 74–93–1 0 .5 1 — Methyl methacrylate ...... 80–62–6 100 410 — Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone. Methyl silicate ...... 681–84–5 (C)5 (C)30 —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00054 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

alpha-Methyl styrene ...... 98–83–9 (C)100 (C)480 — Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101–68–8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 — Mica; see Silicates. Molybdenum (as Mo) ...... 7439–98–7 Soluble compounds ...... — 5 — Insoluble compounds. Total dust ...... — 15 — Monomethyl aniline ...... 100–61–8 2 9 X Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hydrazine. Morpholine ...... 110–91–8 20 70 X Naphtha (Coal tar) ...... 8030–30–6 100 400 — Naphthalene ...... 91–20–3 10 50 — alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 134–32–7 beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 91–59–8 — Neon ...... 7440–01–9 E Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) ...... 13463–39–3 0.001 0.007 — Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds (as Ni) ...... 7440–02–0 — 1 — Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) ...... 7440–02–0 — 1 — Nicotine ...... 54–11–5 — 0 .5 X Nitric acid ...... 7697–37–2 2 5 — Nitric oxide ...... 10102–43–9 25 30 — p-Nitroaniline ...... 100–01–6 1 6 X Nitrobenzene ...... 98–95–3 1 5 X p-Nitrochlorobenzene ...... 100–00–5 — 1 X 4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 ...... 92–93–3 Nitroethane ...... 79–24–3 100 310 — Nitrogen ...... 7727–37–9 E Nitrogen dioxide ...... 10102–44–0 (C)5 (C)9 — Nitrogen trifluoride ...... 7783–54–2 10 29 — Nitroglycerin ...... 55–63–0 (C)0 .2 (C)2 X Nitromethane ...... 75–52–5 100 250 — 1-Nitropropane ...... 108–03–2 25 90 — 2-Nitropropane ...... 79–46–9 25 90 — N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see § 1926.1116 ...... 62–79–9 — Nitrotoluene (all isomers) ...... 5 30 X o-isomer ...... 88–72–2; m-isomer ...... 99–08–1; p-isomer ...... 99–99–0 Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin. Nitrous oxide ...... 10024–97–2 E Octachloronaphthalene ...... 2234–13–1 — 0.1 X Octane ...... 111–65–9 400 1900 — Oil mist, mineral ...... 8012–95–1 — 5 — Osmium tetroxide (as Os) ...... 20816–12–0 — 0 .002 — Oxalic acid ...... 144–62–7 — 1 — Oxygen difluoride ...... 7783–41–7 0 .05 0 .1 — Ozone ...... 10028–15–6 0.1 0 .2 — Paraquat, respirable dust ...... 4685–14–7; — 0 .5 X 1910–42–5; 2074–50–2 Parathion ...... 56–38–2 — 0.1 X Particulates not otherwise regulated. Total dust organic and inorganic ... — 15 — PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and 54% chlorine). Pentaborane ...... 19624–22–7 0.005 0 .01 — Pentachloronaphthalene ...... 1321–64–8 — 0 .5 X Pentachlorophenol ...... 87–86–5 — 0 .5 X Pentaerythritol ...... 115–77–5

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00055 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Pentane ...... 109–66–0 500 1500 — 2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ..... 107–87–9 200 700 — Perchloroethylene (Tetrachloroethylene) ...... 127–18–4 100 670 — Perchloromethyl mercaptan ...... 594–42–3 0 .1 0 .8 — Perchloryl fluoride ...... 7616–94–6 3 13.5 — Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber Solvent) ...... A 3 — Phenol ...... 108–95–2 5 19 X p-Phenylene diamine ...... 106–50–3 — 0.1 X Phenyl ether, vapor ...... 101–84–8 1 7 — Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor ... 1 7 — Phenylethylene; see Styrene. Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) ...... 122–60–1 10 60 — Phenylhydrazine ...... 100–63–0 5 22 X Phosdrin (Mevinphos) ...... 7786–34–7 — 0.1 X Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) ...... 75–44–5 0 .1 0.4 — Phosphine ...... 7803–51–2 0.3 0 .4 — Phosphoric acid ...... 7664–38–2 — 1 — Phosphorus (yellow) ...... 7723–14–0 — 0 .1 — Phosphorus pentachloride ...... 10026–13–8 — 1 — Phosphorus pentasulfide ...... 1314–80–3 — 1 — Phosphorus trichloride ...... 7719–12–2 0.5 3 — Phthalic anhydride ...... 85–44–9 2 12 — Picric acid ...... 88–89–1 — 0 .1 X Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) ...... 83–26–1 — 0 .1 — Plaster of Paris ...... 26499–65–0 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Platinum (as Pt) ...... 7440–06–4 Metal ...... — — — Soluble salts ...... — 0.002 — Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products ...... A 2 Portland cement ...... 65997–15–1 Total dust ...... — 15 — Respirable fraction ...... 5 — Propane ...... 74–98–6 E Propargyl alcohol ...... 107–19–7 1 — X beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 .. 57–57–8 n-Propyl acetate ...... 109–60–4 200 840 — n-Propyl alcohol ...... 71–23–8 200 500 — n-Propyl nitrate ...... 627–13–4 25 110 — Propylene dichloride ...... 78–87–5 75 350 — Propylene imine ...... 75–55–8 2 5 X Propylene oxide ...... 75–56–9 100 240 — Propyne; see Methyl acetylene. Pyrethrum ...... 8003–34–7 — 5 — Pyridine ...... 110–86–1 5 15 — Quinone ...... 106–51–4 0 .1 0.4 — RDX; see Cyclonite. Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and insoluble compounds ...... 7440–16–6 — 0 .1 — Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440–16–6 — 0.001 — Ronnel ...... 299–84–3 — 10 — Rotenone ...... 83–79–4 — 5 — Rouge. Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Selenium compounds (as Se) ...... 7782–49–2 — 0.2 —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00056 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) ...... 7783–79–1 0.05 0 .4 — Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926–00–8 (2) (2) (2) Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth, containing less than 1% crystalline silica ...... 61790–53–2 (2) (2) (2) Silica, crystalline, respirable dust Cristobalite; see 1926.1153 ...... 14464–46–1 Quartz; see 1926.1153 5 ...... 14808–60–7 Tripoli (as quartz); see 1926.1153 5 1317–95–9 Tridymite; see 1926.1153 ...... 15468–32–3 Silica, fused, respirable dust ...... 60676–86–0 (2) (2) (2) Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica). Mica (respirable dust) ...... 12001–26–2 (2) (2) (2) Soapstone, total dust ...... (2) (2) (2) Soapstone, respirable dust ...... (2) (2) (2) Talc (containing asbestos); use asbestos limit; see § 1926.1101. Talc (containing no asbestos), respirable dust ...... 14807–96–6 (2) (2) (2) Tremolite, asbestiform; see § 1926.1101. Silicon carbide ...... 409–21–2 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Silver, metal and soluble compounds (as Ag) ...... 7440–22–4 — 0 .01 — Soapstone; see Silicates. Sodium fluoroacetate ...... 62–74–8 — 0.05 X Sodium hydroxide ...... 1310–73–2 — 2 — Starch ...... 9005–25–8 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Stibine ...... 7803–52–3 0.1 0 .5 — Stoddard solvent ...... 8052–41–3 200 1150 — Strychnine ...... 57–24–9 — 0 .15 — Styrene ...... 100–42–5 (C)100 (C)420 — Sucrose ...... 57–50–1 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Sulfur dioxide ...... 7446–09–5 5 13 — Sulfur hexafluoride ...... 2551–62–4 1000 6000 — Sulfuric acid ...... 7664–93–9 — 1 — Sulfur monochloride ...... 10025–67–9 1 6 — Sulfur pentafluoride ...... 5714–22–7 0.025 0 .25 — Sulfuryl fluoride ...... 2699–79–8 5 20 — Systox, see Demeton. 2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 93–76–5 — 10 — Talc; see Silicates—. Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ...... 7440–25–7 — 5 — TEDP (Sulfotep) ...... 3689–24–5 — 0 .2 X Teflon decomposition products ...... A2 Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ...... 13494–80–9 — 0.1 — Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) ...... 7783–80–4 0 .02 0 .2 — Temephos ...... 3383–96–8 Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ...... 107–49–3 — 0.05 X Terphenyls ...... 26140–60–3 (C)1 (C)9 — 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane .. 76–11–9 500 4170 — 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane .. 76–12–0 500 4170 —

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00057 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.55 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ...... 79–34–5 5 35 X Tetrachloroethylene; see Perchloroethylene. Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetrachloride. Tetrachloronaphthalene ...... 1335–88–2 — 2 X Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) ...... 78–00–2 — 0 .1 X Tetrahydrofuran ...... 109–99–9 200 590 — Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) ...... 75–74–1 — 0.15 X Tetramethyl succinonitrile ...... 3333–52–6 0.5 3 X Tetranitromethane ...... 509–14–8 1 8 — Tetryl (2,4,6- Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) ...... 479–45–8 — 1.5 X Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) .... 7440–28–0 — 0 .1 X Thiram ...... 137–26–8 — 5 — Tin, inorganic compounds (except ox- ides) (as Sn) ...... 7440–31–5 — 2 — Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) ...... 7440–31–5 — 0 .1 — Tin oxide (as Sn) ...... 21651–19–4 — — — Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Titanium dioxide ...... 13463–67–7 Total dust ...... — — Toluene ...... 108–88–3 200 750 — Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) ...... 584–84–9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 — o-Toluidine ...... 95–53–4 5 22 X Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene. Tremolite; see Silicates. Tributyl phosphate ...... 126–73–8 — 5 — 1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chloroform. 1,1,2-Trichloroethane ...... 79–00–5 10 45 X Trichloroethylene ...... 79–01–6 100 535 — Trichloromethane; see Chloroform. Trichloronaphthalene ...... 1321–65–9 — 5 X 1,2,3-Trichloropropane ...... 96–18–4 50 300 — 1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ...... 76–13–1 1000 7600 — Triethylamine ...... 121–44–8 25 100 — Trifluorobromomethane ...... 75–63–8 1000 6100 — Trimethyl benzene ...... 25551–13–7 25 120 — 2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid. 2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine; see Tetryl. 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) ...... 118–96–7 — 1 .5 X Triorthocresyl phosphate ...... 78–30–8 — 0 .1 — Triphenyl phosphate ...... 115–86–6 — 3 — Tungsten (as W) ...... 7440–33–7 Insoluble compounds ...... — 5 — Soluble compounds ...... — 1 — Turpentine ...... 8006–64–2 100 560 — Uranium (as U) ...... 7440–61–1 Soluble compounds ...... — 0 .2 — Insoluble compounds ...... — 0.2 — Vanadium ...... 1314–62–1 Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ...... — (C)0.5 — Fume (as V2 O5) ...... — (C)0.1 — Vegetable oil mist. Total dust ...... — — Respirable fraction ...... — — Vinyl benzene; see Styrene. Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 ...... 75–01–4 Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00058 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.55

TABLE 1 TO § 1926.55—PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS—Continued

d a 3b Skin Substance CAS No. ppm mg/m designation *

Vinyl toluene ...... 25013–15–4 100 480 — Warfarin ...... 81–81–2 — 0 .1 — Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) ...... 1330–20–7 100 435 — Xylidine ...... 1300–73–8 5 25 X Yttrium ...... 7440–65–5 — 1 — Zinc chloride fume ...... 7646–85–7 — 1 — Zinc oxide fume ...... 1314–13–2 — 5 — Zinc oxide ...... 1314–13–2 Total dust ...... — 15 — Respirable fraction ...... — 5 — Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ...... 7440–67–7 — 5

TABLE 2 TO § 1926.55—MINERAL DUSTS

SILICA: Crystalline ...... 250(k)

(p) Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula % SiO2 + 5 Cristobalite. Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth ...... 20 SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica) Mica ...... 20 Portland cement ...... 50 Soapstone ...... 20 Talc (non-asbestiform) ...... 20 Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit ...... — Graphite (natural) ...... 15

Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m3 whichever is the smaller) of total dust <1% SiO2 [Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic, and organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV’s appendix D] Conversion factors. mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles per c.c. Footnotes to Tables 1 and 2 of this section: 1 [Reserved] 2 See Table 2 of this section. 3 Use Asbestos Limit § 1926.1101. 4 [Reserved] 5 See Table 2 of this section for the exposure limit for any operations or sectors where the exposure limit in § 1926.1153 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect. * An ‘‘X’’ designation in the ‘‘Skin Designation’’ column indicates that the substance is a dermal hazard. a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 °C and 760 torr. b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when listed with a ppm entry, it is approximate. c [Reserved] d The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given—not CAS numbers for the individual compounds. e–f [Reserved] g For sectors excluded from § 1926.1128 the limit is 10 ppm TWA. h-i [Reserved] j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques. k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except in those instances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable. l [Reserved] m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated. n If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a ceiling of 0.1 mg/m3. o 3 If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1 mg/m (as CrO3) as an 8-hour TWA. p This standard applies to any operations or sectors for which the respirable crystalline silica standard, 1926.1153, is stayed or otherwise is not in effect. q This standard applies to any operations or sectors for which the beryllium standard, 1926.1124, is stayed or otherwise is not in effect. The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows: A 1 [Reserved]

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00059 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.56 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrolysis in alkaline solution, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure. No TLV is recommended pending determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be minimal. A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a single TLV for all types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and additives should be determined to arrive at the appropriate TLV. E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within the requirements addressing explosion in part 1926.

[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987; 58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997; 71 FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006; 81 FR 16875, Mar. 25, 2016; 81 FR 31168, May 18, 2016; 81 FR 60273, Sept. 1, 2016; 82 FR 2750, Jan. 9, 2017; 84 FR 21576, May 14, 2019]

§ 1926.56 Illumination. ventilation is used as an engineering control method, the system shall be in- (a) General. Construction areas, stalled and operated according to the ramps, runways, corridors, offices, requirements of this section. shops, and storage areas shall be lighted to not less than the minimum illu- (b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex- mination intensities listed in Table D– haust ventilation when used as de- 3 while any work is in progress: scribed in (a) shall be designed to prevent dispersion into the air of dusts, TABLE D–3—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in con- IN FOOT-CANDLES centrations causing harmful exposure. Such exhaust systems shall be so de- Foot-candles Area or operation signed that dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, 5 ...... General construction area lighting. or gases are not drawn through the 3 ...... General construction areas, concrete work area of employees. placement, excavation and waste areas, (c) Design and operation. Exhaust accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and field main- fans, jets, ducts, hoods, separators, and tenance areas. all necessary appurtenances, including 5 ...... Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways, refuse receptacles, shall be so designed, and exitways. constructed, maintained and operated 5 ...... Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 as to ensure the required protection by foot-candles is required at tunnel and maintaining a volume and velocity of shaft heading during drilling, mucking, exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts, and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved cap lights shall be acceptable for use in fumes, vapors, or gases from said the tunnel heading.) equipment or process, and to convey 10 ...... General construction plant and shops them to suitable points of safe dis- (e.g., batch plants, screening plants, posal, thereby preventing their disper- mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts sion in harmful quantities into the at- and active storerooms, barracks or liv- mosphere where employees work. ing quarters, locker or dressing rooms, (d) Duration of operations. (1) The ex- mess halls, and indoor toilets and workrooms). haust system shall be in operation con- 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. tinually during all operations which it is designed to serve. If the employee re- (b) Other areas. For areas or oper- mains in the contaminated zone, the ations not covered above, refer to the system shall continue to operate after American National Standard A11.1– the cessation of said operations, the 1965, R1970, Practice for Industrial length of time to depend upon the indi- Lighting, for recommended values of il- vidual circumstances and effectiveness lumination. of the general ventilation system. (2) Since dust capable of causing dis- § 1926.57 Ventilation. ability is, according to the best med- (a) General. Whenever hazardous sub- ical opinion, of microscopic size, tend- stances such as dusts, fumes, mists, va- ing to remain for hours in suspension pors, or gases exist or are produced in in still air, it is essential that the ex- the course of construction work, their haust system be continued in operation concentrations shall not exceed the for a time after the work process or limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When equipment served by the same shall

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00060 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

have ceased, in order to ensure the re- lecting equipment, (D) exhauster, and moval of the harmful elements to the (E) discharge stack. required extent. For the same reason, (ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air employees wearing respiratory equip- purifying respirator, commonly re- ment should not remove same imme- ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator, diately until the atmosphere seems which removes most of the dust or clear. fume from the air passing through the (e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The device. air outlet from every dust separator, (x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or sizes capable of passing through the gases collected by an exhaust or ven- upper respiratory system to reach the tilating system shall discharge to the lower lung passages. outside atmosphere. Collecting sys- (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en- tems which return air to work area closure where the pieces to be cleaned may be used if concentrations which are positioned on a rotating table and accumulate in the work area air do not are passed automatically through a se- result in harmful exposure to employ- ries of blast sprays. ees. Dust and refuse discharged from an (xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible exhaust system shall be disposed of in application of an abrasive to a surface such a manner that it will not result in by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres- harmful exposure to employees. sure, or centrifugal force. (f) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra- (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. sive. A solid substance used in an abra- (i) Abrasives and the surface coatings sive blasting operation. on the materials blasted are shattered (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- and pulverized during blasting oper- pirator constructed so that it covers ations and the dust formed will contain the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders particles of respirable size. The com- to protect the wearer from rebounding position and toxicity of the dust from abrasive. these sources shall be considered in (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete making an evaluation of the potential enclosure which rotates on an axis, or health hazards. which has an internal moving tread to (ii) The concentration of respirable tumble the parts, in order to expose dust or fume in the breathing zone of various surfaces of the parts to the ac- the abrasive-blasting operator or any tion of an automatic blast spray. other worker shall be kept below the (iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete levels specified in § 1926.55 or other per- enclosure in which blasting operations tinent sections of this part. are performed and where the operator (iii) Organic abrasives which are works inside of the room to operate the combustible shall be used only in auto- blasting nozzle and direct the flow of matic systems. Where flammable or ex- the abrasive material. plosive dust mixtures may be present, (v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure the construction of the equipment, in- where the operator stands outside and cluding the exhaust system and all operates the blasting nozzle through an electric wiring, shall conform to the opening or openings in the enclosure. requirements of American National (vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Standard Installation of Blower and it will not cause harm or discomfort to Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and an individual if it is inhaled for ex- Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1– tended periods of time. 1961 (NFPA 91–1961), and subpart S of (vii) Dust collector. A device or com- this part. The blast nozzle shall be bination of devices for separating dust bonded and grounded to prevent the from the air handled by an exhaust build up of static charges. Where flam- ventilation system. mable or explosive dust mixtures may (viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A be present, the abrasive blasting enclo- system for removing contaminated air sure, the ducts, and the dust collector from a space, comprising two or more shall be constructed with loose panels of the following elements (A) enclosure or explosion venting areas, located on or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust col- sides away from any occupied area, to

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00061 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

provide for pressure relief in case of ex- thereafter to assure continued satisfac- plosion, following the principles set tory operation. Whenever an appre- forth in the National Fire Protection ciable change in the pressure drop indi- Association Explosion Venting Guide. cates a partial blockage, the system NFPA 68–1954. shall be cleaned and returned to nor- (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast- mal operating condition. cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust (ii) In installations where the abra- ventilated in such a way that a contin- sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven- uous inward flow of air will be main- tilation system for the blasting enclo- tained at all openings in the enclosure sure shall not be relied upon for the re- during the blasting operation. moval of fines from the spent abrasive (A) All air inlets and access openings instead of an abrasive separator. An shall be baffled or so arranged that by abrasive separator shall be provided for the combination of inward air flow and the purpose. baffling the escape of abrasive or dust (iii) The air exhausted from blast- particles into an adjacent work area cleaning equipment shall be discharged will be minimized and visible spurts of through dust collecting equipment. dust will not be observed. Dust collectors shall be set up so that (B) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi- the accumulated dust can be emptied cient to provide prompt clearance of and removed without contaminating the dust-laden air within the enclosure other working areas. after the cessation of blasting. (5) Personal protective equipment. (i) (C) Before the enclosure is opened, Employers must use only respirators the blast shall be turned off and the ex- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part haust system shall be run for a suffi- 84 for protecting employees from dusts cient period of time to remove the produced during abrasive-blasting op- dusty air within the enclosure. erations. (D) Safety glass protected by screen- (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators ing shall be used in observation win- shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting dows, where hard deep-cutting abra- operators: sives are used. (A) When working inside of blast- (E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles cleaning rooms, or shall be installed in multiple sets at all (B) When using silica sand in manual small access openings where dust blasting operations where the nozzle might escape, and shall be inspected and blast are not physically separated regularly and replaced when needed. from the operator in an exhaust venti- (1) Doors shall be flanged and tight lated enclosure, or when closed. (C) Where concentrations of toxic (2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting shall be operable from both inside and may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or outside, except that where there is a other pertinent sections of this part small operator access door, the large and the nozzle and blast are not phys- work access door may be closed or ically separated from the operator in opened from the outside only. an exhaust-ventilated enclosure. (4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter construction, installation, inspection, respirators, commonly referred to as and maintenance of exhaust systems dust-filter respirators, may be used for shall conform to the principles and re- short, intermittent, or occasional dust quirements set forth in American Na- exposures such as cleanup, dumping of tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- dust collectors, or unloading shipments erning the Design and Operation of of sand at a receiving point when it is Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and not feasible to control the dust by en- ANSI Z33.1–1961. closure, exhaust ventilation, or other (a) When dust leaks are noted, re- means. The respirators used must be pairs shall be made as soon as possible. approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part (b) The static pressure drop at the ex- 84 for protection against the specific haust ducts leading from the equip- type of dust encountered. ment shall be checked when the instal- (iv) A respiratory protection program lation is completed and periodically as defined and described in § 1926.103,

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00062 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

shall be established wherever it is nec- iously known as cutting, cutting off, essary to use respiratory protective grooving, slotting, coping, and joint- equipment. ing, and the like. The wheels may be (v) Operators shall be equipped with ‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded heavy canvas or leather gloves and abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel aprons or equivalent protection to pro- centered’’ consisting of a steel disc tect them from the impact of abra- with a rim of organic-bonded material sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to moulded around the periphery, or of protect against foot injury where the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of heavy pieces of work are handled. a steel disc with organic-bonded abra- (A) Safety shoes shall conform to the sive teeth or inserts mechanically se- requirements of American National cured around the periphery. Standard for Men’s Safety-Toe Foot- (ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, wear, Z41.1–1967. coated bands used for grinding, (B) Equipment for protection of the polishing, or buffing purposes. eyes and face shall be supplied to the (iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex- operator when the respirator design haust system piping that is connected does not provide such protection and to directly to the hood or enclosure. any other personnel working in the vi- (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon cinity of abrasive blasting operations. which the part to be ground or polished This equipment shall conform to the is placed. requirements of § 1926.102. (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro- (6) Air supply and air compressors. Air tatable discs faced with abrasive mate- for abrasive-blasting respirators must rials, artificial or natural, and used for be free of harmful quantities of dusts, grinding or polishing on the side of the mists, or noxious gases, and must meet assembled disc. the requirements for supplied-air quality and use specified in 29 CFR (vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres- 1910.134(i). sure caused by air flowing into a duct or hood. It is usually expressed in (7) Operational procedures and general inches of water gauge. safety. Dust shall not be permitted to accumulate on the floor or on ledges (vii) Exhaust system. A system con- outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo- sisting of branch pipes connected to sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up hoods or enclosures, one or more head- promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep- kept clear of steel shot or similar abra- arating solid contaminants from the sive which may create a slipping haz- air flowing in the system, and a dis- ard. charge stack to outside. (8) Scope. This paragraph applies to (viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv- all operations where an abrasive is en rotatable grinding or abrasive forcibly applied to a surface by pneu- wheels, except disc wheels as defined in matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen- this standard, consisting of abrasive trifugal force. It does not apply to particles held together by artificial or steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or natural bonds and used for peripheral hydraulic cleaning methods where grinding. work is done without the aid of abra- (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe sives. into which one or more branch pipes (g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op- enter and which connects such branch erations—(1) Definitions applicable to pipes to the remainder of the exhaust this paragraph— system. (i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Or- (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial ganic-bonded wheels, the thickness of or complete enclosure around the which is not more than one forty- wheel or disc through which air enters eighth of their diameter for those up an exhaust system during operation. to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc diameter, and not more than one-six- grinder. A grinding machine carrying tieth of their diameter for those larger two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter, horizontal spindles upon the inside used for a multitude of operations var- ends of which are mounted abrasive

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00063 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

disc wheels used for grinding two sur- (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, faces simultaneously. pedestals, benches, and special-purpose (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinding machines and abrasive cut- grinder. A grinding machine carrying ting-off wheels shall have not less than an abrasive disc wheel upon one or the minimum exhaust volumes shown both ends of a power-driven, rotatable in Table D–57.1 with a recommended single horizontal spindle. minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per power-driven rotatable wheels com- minute in the main. The entry losses posed all or in part of textile fabrics, from all hoods except the vertical-spin- wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65 coated with abrasives on the periphery velocity pressure for a straight takeoff of the wheel for purposes of polishing, and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered buffing, and light grinding. takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical- (xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv- spindle disc grinder hood is shown in en rotatable grinding, polishing, or figure D–57.1 (following paragraph (g) buffing wheel mounted in such manner of this section). that it may be manually manipulated. (xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power- TABLE D–57.1—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE driven rotatable wheels made from CUTTING-OFF WHEELS wire or bristles, and used for scratch Wheel Minimum cleaning and brushing purposes. width, exhaust Wheel diameter, inches (cm) inches volume (xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- (cm) (feet3/min.) driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such a man- To 9 (22.86) ...... 11⁄2 (3.81) 220 Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ...... 2 (5.08) 390 ner that the wheel with its supporting Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 3 (7.62) 500 framework can be manipulated over Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 4 (10.16) 610 stationary objects. Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ...... 5 (12.7) 880 (xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki- Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ...... 6 (15.24) 1,200 netic pressure in the direction of flow necessary to cause a fluid at rest to For any wheel wider than wheel diame- flow at a given velocity. It is usually ters shown in Table D–57.1, increase the expressed in inches of water gauge. exhaust volume by the ratio of the new (xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A width to the width shown. grinding machine having a vertical, ro- Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches (11.43 tatable power-driven spindle carrying a cm), horizontal abrasive disc wheel. then 4.5 ÷ 4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690). (2) Application. Wherever dry grind- (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- buffing and polishing wheels mounted formed, and employee exposure, with- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or out regard to the use of respirators, ex- special-purpose machines shall have ceeds the permissible exposure limits not less than the minimum exhaust prescribed in § 1926.55 or other perti- volume shown in Table D–57.2. nent sections of this part, a local exhaust ventilation system shall be pro- TABLE D–57.2—BUFFING AND POLISHING vided and used to maintain employee WHEELS exposures within the prescribed limits. (3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. Minimum Wheel exhaust (i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, inches cm) volume shall be used, and such hoods shall be (feet3/min.) designed, located, and placed so that To 9 (22.86) ...... 2 (5.08) 300 the dust or dirt particles shall fall or Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ...... 3 (7.62) 500 be projected into the hoods in the di- Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 4 (10.16) 610 Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 5 (12.7) 740 rection of the air flow. No wheels, Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ...... 6 (15.24) 1,040 discs, straps, or belts shall be operated Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ...... 6 (15.24) 1,200 in such manner and in such direction as to cause the dust and dirt particles (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- to be thrown into the operator’s zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall breathing zone. be hooded to collect the dust or dirt

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00064 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

generated by the grinding operation ations and the hoods shall be connected and the hoods shall be connected to to branch pipes having exhaust vol- branch pipes having exhaust volumes umes as shown in Table D–57.6. as shown in Table D–57.3. TABLE D–57.6—GRINDING AND POLISHING TABLE D–57.3—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE BELTS DISC GRINDER Exhaust Exhaust Belts width, inches (cm) volume Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume (ft.3/min.) (ft.3/min.) Up to 3 (7.62) ...... 220 Up to 12 (30.48) ...... 220 Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ...... 300 Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) ...... 390 Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ...... 390 Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) ...... 610 Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ...... 500 Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ...... 880 Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...... 610 Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ...... 740 (v) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal double-spindle disc grinders (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind- shall have a hood enclosing the grinders. Where cradles are used for han- ing chamber and the hood shall be con- dling the parts to be ground, polished, nected to one or more branch pipes or buffed, requiring large partial enclo- having exhaust volumes as shown in sures to house the complete operation, Table D–57.4. a minimum average air velocity of 150 feet per minute shall be maintained TABLE D–57.4—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE over the entire opening of the enclo- DISC GRINDER sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also Exhaust be exhausted in the same manner as Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume (ft.3/min.) provided for cradles. (See fig. D–57.3) (ix) Where the work is outside the Up to 19 (48.26) ...... 610 hood, air volumes must be increased as Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) ...... 880 Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) ...... 1,200 shown in American Standard Fun- Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) ...... 1,770 damentals Governing the Design and Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) ...... 6,280 Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods). (vi) Grinding wheels or discs for (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys- vertical single-spindle disc grinders tems for grinding, polishing, and buff- shall be encircled with hoods to remove ing operations should be designed in the dust generated in the operation. accordance with American Standard The hoods shall be connected to one or Fundamentals Governing the Design more branch pipes having exhaust vol- and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- umes as shown in Table D–57.5. tems, Z9.2–1960. TABLE D–57.5—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC (ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, GRINDER polishing, and buffing operations shall be tested in the manner described in One-half or more Disc not cov- American Standard Fundamentals of disc covered ered Governing the Design and Operation of Disc diameter, inches Ex- Ex- Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960. (cm) Num- haust Num- haust ber 1 foot 3/ ber 1 foot3/ (iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro- min. min. vided with suitable dust collectors. Up to 20 (50.8) ...... 1 500 2 780 (5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to is the dual function of grinding and ab- 76.2) ...... 2 780 2 1,480 Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro- 134.62) ...... 2 1,770 4 3,530 tect the operator from the hazards of Over 53 to 72 (134.62 bursting wheels as well as to provide a to 182.88) ...... 2 3,140 5 6,010 means for the removal of dust and dirt 1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or generated. All hoods shall be not less equal distribution provided by other means. in structural strength than specified in (vii) Grinding and polishing belts the American National Standard Safe- shall be provided with hoods to remove ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec- dust and dirt generated in the oper- tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1–1970.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00065 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(B) Due to the variety of work and ing face of the enclosure shall not be types of grinding machines employed, less than 150 feet per minute. it is necessary to develop hoods adapt- (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin- able to the particular machine in ques- dle disc grinders shall be constructed tion, and such hoods shall be located as to conform as closely as possible to the close as possible to the operation. hood shown in figure D–57.6. It is essen- (ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, tial that there be a space between the pedestals, and bench grinders shall be back of the wheel and the hood, and a designed in accordance with figure D– space around the periphery of the 57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in the figure shall be kept in working order to permit the suction to act order and shall be adjusted within one- around the wheel periphery. The open- fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel pe- ing on the side of the disc shall be no riphery at all times. larger than is required for the grinding (iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be operation, but must never be less than provided with exhaust booths as indi- twice the area of the branch outlet. cated in figure D–57.3. (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc (iv) Portable grinding operations, grinders shall have a hood encircling whenever the nature of the work per- the wheels and grinding chamber simi- mits, shall be conducted within a partial enclosure. The opening in the en- lar to that illustrated in figure D–57.7. closure shall be no larger than is actu- The openings for passing the work into ally required in the operation and an the grinding chamber should be kept as average face air velocity of not less small as possible, but must never be than 200 feet per minute shall be main- less than twice the area of the branch tained. outlets. (v) Hoods for polishing and buffing (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- shall be encircled with a hood so constructed to conform as closely to figure structed that the heavy dust is drawn D–57.4 as the nature of the work will off a surface of the disc and the lighter permit. dust exhausted through a continuous (vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op- slot at the top of the hood as shown in erations shall be performed within a figure D–57.1. partial enclosure similar to figure D– (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods 57.5. The operator shall be positioned shall be constructed as close to the op- outside the working face of the opening eration as possible. The hood should of the enclosure. The face opening of extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch the enclosure should not be any greater (2.54 cm) wide openings should be pro- in area than that actually required for vided on either side. Figure D–57.8 the performance of the operation and shows a typical hood for a belt oper- the average air velocity into the work- ation.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00066 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex- hausted at 4,500 ft/min Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. ft3/min

...... 20 (50.8) 1 41⁄4 (10.795) 500 When one-half or more of the disc can be hooded, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left. Over 20 (50.8) ...... 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770 Over 53 (134.62) ...... 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140

...... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over disc, use exhaust ducts as shown at left. Over 20 (50.8) ...... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 30 (76.2) 2 51⁄2 (13.97) 1,480 Over 53 (134.62) ...... 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530 72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010 Entry loss = 1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure. Minimum slot velocity = 2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch (1.27 cm) slot width.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00067 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.000 § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Exhaust outlet, Volume of Diameter inches (centi- air at Width, Max meters) E 4,500 ft/ Min= d Max= D min

9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220 Over 9 (22.86) ...... 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390 Over 16 (40.64) ...... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 41⁄2 500 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610 Over 24 (60.96) ...... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00068 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.001 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS

NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as much as possible

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00069 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.002 § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of Diameter Exhaust outlet, air at Width, Max inches E 4,500 ft/ Min= d Max= D min

9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300 Over 9 (22.86) ...... 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500 Over 16 (40.64) ...... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 51⁄2 740 Over 24 (60.96) ...... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 61⁄2 1.040 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200 Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00070 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.003 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE

Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00071 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.004 § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Dia D, inches (centimeters) Exhaust E, Volume ex- dia. inches hausted at Min. Max. (cm) 4,500 ft/min ft3/min

12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220 Over 12 (30.48) ...... 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390 Over 19 (48.26) ...... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880

NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as described in 9.1. Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00072 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.005 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume exhaust at 4,500 ft/ Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/ min

19 (48.26) 1 5 610 Over 19 (48.26)...... 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust ducts should be as near heaviest grinding as possible. Over 25 (63.5) ...... 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200 Over 30 (76.2) ...... 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770 Over 53 (134.62) ...... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00073 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.006 § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION

Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for mable and Combustible Materials, tapered takeoff NFPA No. 33–1969). (iii) Spray room. A spray room is a Exhaust room in which spray-finishing oper- Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume. ft.1/min ations not conducted in a spray booth are performed separately from other Up to 3 (7.62) ...... 220 areas. 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ...... 300 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ...... 390 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min- 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ...... 500 imum maintained velocity is the veloc- 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...... 610 ity of air movement which must be 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ...... 740 maintained in order to meet minimum Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min specified requirements for health and main. safety. Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (2) Location and application. Spray booths or spray rooms are to be used to (6) Scope. This paragraph (g), pre- enclose or confine all operations. scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- Spray-finishing operations shall be lo- sures and systems in removing dust, cated as provided in sections 201 dirt, fumes, and gases generated through 206 of the Standard for Spray through the grinding, polishing, or Finishing Using Flammable and Com- buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969. als. (3) Design and construction of spray (h) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de- nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) signed and constructed in accordance Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- with § 1926.66(b) (1) through (4) and (6) ishing operations are employment of through (10) (see sections 301–304 and methods wherein organic or inorganic 306–310 of the Standard for Spray Fin- materials are utilized in dispersed form ishing Using Flammable and Combus- for deposit on surfaces to be coated, tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969), for treated, or cleaned. Such methods of general construction specifications. deposit may involve either automatic, For a more detailed discussion of fun- manual, or electrostatic deposition but damentals relating to this subject, see do not include metal spraying or met- ANSI Z9.2–1960 allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller (A) Lights, motors, electrical equip- coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ment, and other sources of ignition spray washing and degreasing as con- shall conform to the requirements of ducted in self-contained washing and § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310 degreasing machines or systems. and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray (ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- Finishing Using Flammable and Com- fined and described in § 1926.66(a). (See bustible Materials NFPA No. 33–1969.) sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- (B) In no case shall combustible ma- ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- terial be used in the construction of a

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00074 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.007 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

spray booth and supply or exhaust duct concrete, masonry, or other material connected to it. having similar properties. (ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (A) Tanks shall be provided with be less than 61⁄2 feet (1.976 m) high and weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to shall be maintained clear of obstruc- prevent sludge and floating paint from tion from any work location in the entering the pump suction box. Means booth to a booth exit or open booth for automatically maintaining the front. In booths where the open front is proper water level shall also be pro- the only exit, such exits shall be not vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In submerged. They shall terminate at booths having multiple exits, such least one pipe diameter above the safe- exits shall not be less than 2 feet (0.608 ty overflow level of the tank. m) wide, provided that the maximum (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as distance from the work location to the to discourage accumulation of haz- exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less. Where ardous deposits. booth exits are provided with doors, (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and such doors shall open outward from the headers shall be adequately sized to in- booth. sure sufficient water flow to provide ef- (iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and ficient operation of the water chamber. dry-type overspray collectors shall (4) Design and construction of spray conform to the requirements of rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including § 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 floors, shall be constructed of masonry, and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- concrete, or other noncombustible ma- ishing Using Flammable and Combus- terial. tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.) (ii) Spray rooms shall have non- (A) Overspray filters shall be in- combustible fire doors and shutters. stalled and maintained in accordance (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), ventilated so that the atmosphere in (see section 305 of the Standard for the breathing zone of the operator Spray Finishing Using Flammable and shall be maintained in accordance with Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33– the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii) 1969), and shall only be in a location of this section. easily accessible for inspection, clean- (iv) Spray rooms used for production ing, or replacement. spray-finishing operations shall con- (B) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths. stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions tion, it is permissible to operate the of § 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using (iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials, booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 33–1969), and in accordance within which intimate contact of con- with the following: taminated air and cleaning water or (A) Where a fan plenum is used to other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential (B) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im- spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean- vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para- removal of particulate matter from the graph (h)(5)(iii) of this section. exhaust air stream. (B) [Reserved] (v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con- used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00075 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet shall be sealed if there is a possibility (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for of infiltration of harmful quantities of ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in di- noxious gases, fumes, or mists from ameter, but the distance between areas through which ductwork passes. cleanout doors may be greater for larg- (B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na- accordance with volume flow require- tional Standard Z9.1–1951.) A clean-out ments and provide design air require- door or doors shall be provided for serv- ments at the spray booth. icing the fan, and where necessary, a (C) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- drain shall be provided. quately supported throughout its (F) Where ductwork passes through a length to sustain at least its own combustible roof or wall, the roof or weight plus any negative pressure wall shall be protected at the point of which is exerted upon it under normal penetration by open space or fire-resis- operating conditions. tive material between the duct and the (iii) [Reserved] roof or wall. When ducts pass through (A) Exhaust ductwork shall be ade- firewalls, they shall be provided with quately supported throughout its automatic fire dampers on both sides of length to sustain its weight plus any the wall, except that three-eighth-inch normal accumulation in interior dur- steel plates may be used in lieu of ing normal operating conditions and automatic fire dampers for ducts not any negative pressure exerted upon it. exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diame- (B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized ter. in accordance with good design prac- (G) Ductwork used for ventilating tice which shall include consideration any process covered in this standard of fan capacity, length of duct, number shall not be connected to ducts ven- of turns and elbows, variation in size, tilating any other process or any chim- volume, and character of materials ney or flue used for conveying any being exhausted. See American Na- products of combustion. tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further (6) Velocity and air flow requirements. details and explanation concerning ele- (i) Except where a spray booth has an ments of design. adequate air replacement system, the (C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel velocity of air into all openings of a ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, spray booth shall be not less than that riveted, or welded. For other than steel specified in Table D–57.7 for the oper- construction, equivalent securing of ating conditions specified. An adequate joints shall be provided. air replacement system is one which (D) Circumferential joints in duct- introduces replacement air upstream work shall be substantially fastened or above the object being sprayed and together and lapped in the direction of is so designed that the velocity of air airflow. At least every fourth joint in the booth cross section is not less shall be provided with connecting than that specified in Table D–57.7 flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- when measured upstream or above the lent fastening security. object being sprayed.

TABLE D–57.7—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS

Airflow velocities, f.p.m. Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth Crossdraft, f.p.m. Design Range

Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...... 50–75 without operator...... 100 small booth ...... 75–125 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ...... Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth ...... 75–125 ...... 150 small booth ...... 125–175 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ...... Up to 100 .... 150 large booth ...... 125–175 ...... 200 small booth ...... 150–250

NOTES: (1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00076 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted. (3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas. (4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.

(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued total air volume exhausted through a Lower ex- spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet plosive solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of per gallon limit in per- Solvent of vapor of cent by the lower explosive limit of the solvent liquid at 70 volume of °F (21.11 ° being sprayed. An example of the meth- °C). air at 70 F od of calculating this volume is given (21.11 °C) below. Butyl Cellosolve ...... 24.8 1.1 Cellosolve ...... 33.6 1.8 Example: To determine the lower explosive Cellosolve Acetate ...... 23.2 1.7 limits of the most common solvents used in Cyclohexanone ...... 31.2 1 1.1 spray finishing, see Table D–57.8. Column 1 1,1 Dichloroethylene ...... 42.4 5.9 gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...... 42.4 9.7 gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the Ethyl Acetate ...... 32.8 2.5 lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by Ethyl Alcohol ...... 55.2 4.3 1 volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- Ethyl Lactate ...... 28.0 1.5 vent will be diminished by the quantity of Methyl Acetate ...... 40.0 3.1 Methyl Alcohol ...... 80.8 7.3 solids and nonflammables contained in the Methyl Cellosolve ...... 40.8 2.5 finish. Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...... 36.0 1.8 To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ...... 30.4 1.5 feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) ..... 22.4 0.9 lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Sol- plosive limit, apply the following formula: vent—Stoddard Solvent ...... 23.2 1.0 Propyl Acetate (n) ...... 27.2 2.8 Dilution volume required per gallon of sol- Propyl Acetate (iso) ...... 28.0 1.1 vent = 4 (100–LEL) (cubic feet of vapor Propyl Alcohol (n) ...... 44.8 2.1 per gallon) ÷ LEL Propyl Alcohol (iso) ...... 44.0 2.0 Toluene ...... 30.4 1.4 Using toluene as the solvent. Turpentine ...... 20.8 0.8 (1) LEL of toluene from Table D–57.8, col- Xylene (o) ...... 26.4 1.0 umn 2, is 1.4 percent. 1 ° ° (2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from At 212 F (100 C). Table D–57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per (iii)(A) When an operator is in a gallon. booth downstream of the object being (3) Dilution volume required = sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or 4 (100–1.4) 30.4 ÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet. other type of respirator approved by (4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the required ventilation, multiply the dilution material being sprayed should be used volume required per gallon of solvent by the by the operator. number of gallons of solvent evaporated per (B) Where downdraft booths are pro- minute. vided with doors, such doors shall be TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF closed when spray painting. SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air, free of contamination from adjacent Cubic feet Lower ex- industrial exhaust systems, chimneys, per gallon plosive stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a of vapor of limit in per- Solvent liquid at 70 cent by spray booth or room in quantities °F (21.11 volume of equal to the volume of air exhausted ° air at 70 °F C). (21.11 °C) through the spray booth. (ii) Where a spray booth or room re- Column 1 Column 2 ceives make-up air through self-closing Acetone ...... 44.0 2.6 Amyl Acetate (iso) ...... 21.6 1 1.0 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall Amyl Alcohol (n) ...... 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the Amyl Alcohol (iso) ...... 29.6 1.2 booth or room is in use for spraying. Benzene ...... 36.8 1 1.4 Butyl Acetate (n) ...... 24.8 1.7 The velocity of air through such doors, Butyl Alcohol (n) ...... 35.2 1.4 dampers, or louvers shall not exceed

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00077 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- (C) No means of heating make-up air teristics are such that the required air shall be located in a spray booth. flow through the booth will be pro- (D) Where make-up air is heated by vided, higher velocities through the coal or oil, the products of combustion doors, dampers, or louvers may be shall not be allowed to mix with the used. make-up air, and the products of com- (iii) (A) Where the air supply to a bustion shall be conducted outside the spray booth or room is filtered, the fan building through a flue terminating at static pressure shall be calculated on a point remote from all points where the assumption that the filters are make-up air enters the building. dirty to the extent that they require (E) Where make-up air is heated by cleaning or replacement. gas, and the products of combustion (B) The rating of filters shall be gov- are not mixed with the make-up air but erned by test data supplied by the man- are conducted through an independent ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage flue to a point outside the building re- shall be installed to show the pressure mote from all points where make-up drop across the filters. This gage shall air enters the building, it is not nec- be marked to show the pressure drop at essary to comply with paragraph which the filters require cleaning or re- (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section. placement. Filters shall be replaced or (F) Where make-up air to any manu- cleaned whenever the pressure drop ally operated spray booth or room is across them becomes excessive or heated by gas and the products of combustion are allowed to mix with the whenever the air flow through the face supply air, the following precautions of the booth falls below that specified must be taken: in Table D–57.7. (1) The gas must have a distinctive (iv) (A) Means for heating make-up and strong enough odor to warn work- air to any spray booth or room, before men in a spray booth or room of its or at the time spraying is normally presence if in an unburned state in the performed, shall be provided in all make-up air. places where the outdoor temperature (2) The maximum rate of gas supply ° may be expected to remain below 55 F. to the make-up air heater burners ° (12.77 C.) for appreciable periods of must not exceed that which would time during the operation of the booth yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per except where adequate and safe means million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000 of radiant heating for all operating per- p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the sonnel affected is provided. The re- mixture if the unburned gas upon the placement air during the heating sea- occurrence of flame failure were mixed sons shall be maintained at not less with all of the make-up air supplied. than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) at the point of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver entry into the spray booth or spray the mixture of heated air and products room. When otherwise unheated make- of combustion from the plenum cham- up air would be at a temperature of ber housing the gas burners to the more than 10 °F. below room tempera- spray booth or room. ture, its temperature shall be regulated (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI rooms are to be used to enclose or con- Z9.2–1960. fine all spray finishing operations cov- (B) As an alternative to an air re- ered by this paragraph (h). This para- placement system complying with the graph does not apply to the spraying of preceding section, general heating of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks, the building in which the spray room or similar structures, nor to small or booth is located may be employed portable spraying apparatus not used provided that all occupied parts of the repeatedly in the same location. building are maintained at not less (i) Open surface tanks—(1) General. (i) than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) when the exhaust This paragraph applies to all oper- system is in operation or the general ations involving the immersion of ma- heating system supplemented by other terials in liquids, or in the vapors of sources of heat may be employed to such liquids, for the purpose of clean- meet this requirement. ing or altering the surface or adding to

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00078 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

or imparting a finish thereto or chang- tion. Where the tank contains a mixing the character of the materials, and ture of liquids, other than organic sol- their subsequent removal from the liq- vents, whose effects are additive, the uid or vapor, draining, and drying. hygienic standard of the most toxic These operations include washing, elec- component (for example, the one hav- troplating, anodizing, pickling, ing the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m.3) shall quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, be used, except where such substance dressing, bleaching, degreasing, alka- constitutes an insignificantly small line cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digest- fraction of the mixture. For mixtures ing, and other similar operations. of organic solvents, their combined ef- (ii) Except where specific construc- fect, rather than that of either individ- tion specifications are prescribed in ually, shall determine the hazard po- this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, tential. In the absence of information blowers, and all other exhaust system to the contrary, the effects shall be parts, components, and supports there- considered as additive. If the sum of of shall be so constructed as to meet the ratios of the airborne concentra- conditions of service and to facilitate tion of each contaminant to the toxic maintenance and shall conform in con- concentration of that contaminant ex- struction to the specifications con- ceeds unity, the toxic concentration tained in American National Standard shall be considered to have been ex- Fundamentals Governing the Design ceeded. (See Note A to paragraph and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- (i)(2)(v) of this section.) tems, Z9.2–1960. (v) Hazard potential shall be deter- (2) Classification of open-surface tank mined from Table D–57.9, with the operations. (i) Open-surface tank oper- value indicating greater hazard being ations shall be classified into 16 class- used. When the hazardous material es, numbered A–1 to D–4, inclusive. may be either a vapor with a threshold (ii) Determination of class. Class is de- limit value (TLV) in p.p.m. or a mist termined by two factors, hazard poten- with a TLV in mg./m.3, the TLV indi- tial designated by a letter from A to D, cating the greater hazard shall be used inclusive, and rate of gas, vapor, or (for example, A takes precedence over mist evolution designated by a number B or C; B over C; C over D). from 1 to 4, inclusive (for example, B.3). (iii) Hazard potential is an index, on NOTE A: ÷ ÷ ÷ a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the (c1 TLV1) + (c2 TLV2) + (c3 TLV3) + ÷ severity of the hazard associated with ; . . .(cN TLVN)1 the substance contained in the tank be- Where: cause of the toxic, flammable, or explo- c = Concentration measured at the op- sive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist eration in p.p.m. produced therefrom. The toxic hazard is determined from the concentration, TABLE D–57.9—DETERMINATION OF HAZARD measured in parts by volume of a gas POTENTIAL or vapor, per million parts by volume of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in mil- Toxicity group ligrams of mist per cubic meter of air Hazard potential Gas or 3 vapor Mist (mg./ Flash point in (mg./m. ), below which ill effects are m3) degrees F. (C.) unlikely to occur to the exposed work- (p.p.m.) er. The concentrations shall be those in A ...... 0–10 0–0.1 ...... § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of B ...... 11–100 0.11–1.0 Under 100 this part. (37.77) (iv) The relative fire or explosion C ...... 101–500 1.1–10 100 200 (37.77–93.33) hazard is measured in degrees Fahr- D ...... Over 500 Over 10 Over 200 enheit in terms of the closed-cup flash (93.33) point of the substance in the tank. De- tailed information on the prevention of (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evo- fire hazards in dip tanks may be found lution is a numerical index, on a scale in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34– relative capacity of the tank to 1966, National Fire Protection Associa- produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00079 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

relative energy with which it is pro- (D) The extent that the tank gases or jected or carried upwards from the produces mist in an arbitrary scale— tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table (A) The temperature of the liquid in D–57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; electrochemical or mechanical proc- (B) The number of degrees Fahr- esses, the effects of which have to be enheit that this temperature is below individually evaluated for each instal- the boiling point of the liquid in de- lation (see Table D–57.10, Note 3). grees Fahrenheit; (vii) Rate of evolution shall be deter- (C) The relative evaporation of the mined from Table D–57.10. When evapo- liquid in still air at room temperature ration and gassing yield different rates, in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, the lowest numerical value shall be slow, or nil; and used.

TABLE D–57.10—DETERMINATION OF RATE OF GAS, VAPOR, OR MIST EVOLUTION 1

Liquid temperature, Degrees below boil- 2 3 Rate °F. (C.) ing point Relative evaporation Gassing

1 ...... Over 200 (93.33) 0–20 Fast ...... High. 2 ...... 150–200 (65.55– 21–50 Medium ...... Medium. 93.33) 3 ...... 94–149 (34.44–65) 51–100 Slow ...... Low. 4 ...... Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil ...... Nil. 1 In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level thermostat is used to prevent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of vapor evolution from the tank into the workroom is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carry- out of vapors from excessively fast action, dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other materials, or improper heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a rate of 2 or 1 is indicated, depending upon observed conditions. 2 Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0–3 hours; Medium: 3–12 hours; Slow: 12–50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours. 3 Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface of the liquid in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.

(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of used to control potential exposures to hoods which workers as defined in paragraph (A) Project over the entire tank; (i)(2)(iii) of this section, it shall be ade- (B) Are fixed in position in such a lo- quate to reduce the concentration of cation that the head of the workman, the air contaminant to the degree that in all his normal operating positions a hazard to the worker does not exist. while working at the tank, is in front Methods of ventilation are discussed in of all hood openings; and American National Standard Fun- (C) Are completely enclosed on at damentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, least two sides, shall be considered to Z9.2–1960. be exhausted through an enclosing (4) Control requirements. (i) Control hood. velocities shall conform to Table D– (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet 57.11 in all cases where the flow of air per minute necessary to be exhausted past the breathing or working zone of through an enclosing hood shall be not the operator and into the hoods is unless than the product of the control ve- disturbed by local environmental con- locity times the net area of all open- ditions, such as open windows, wall ings in the enclosure through which air fans, unit heaters, or moving machin- can flow into the hood. ery.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00080 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

TABLE D–57.11—CONTROL VELOCITIES IN FEET PER MINUTE (F.P.M.) FOR UNDISTURBED LOCATIONS

Enclosing hood Canopy hood 2 Class Lateral ex- One open Two open haust 1 Three Four open side sides open sides sides

B–1 and A–2 ...... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use A–3 2, B–1, B–2, and C–1 ...... 75 100 100 125 175 A–3, C–2, and D–1 3 ...... 65 90 75 100 150 B–4 2, C–3, and D–2 3 ...... 50 75 50 75 125 A–4, C–4, D–3 3, and D–4 4 ...... 1 See Table D–57.12 for computation of ventilation rate. 2 Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes. 3 Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class. 4 General room ventilation required.

(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42 hoods which do not project over the en- inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is de- tire tank, and in which the direction of sirable to reduce the amount of air re- air movement into the hood or hoods is moved from the workroom, air supply substantially horizontal, shall be con- slots or orifices shall be provided along sidered to be laterally exhausted. The the side or the center of the tank oppo- quantity of air in cubic feet per minute site from the exhaust slots. The design necessary to be laterally exhausted per of such systems shall meet the fol- square foot of tank area in order to lowing criteria: maintain the required control velocity ( ) The supply air volume plus the en- shall be determined from Table D–57.12 1 for all variations in ratio of tank width trained air shall not exceed 50 percent (W) to tank length $(L). The total of the exhaust volume. quantity of air in cubic feet per minute (2) The velocity of the supply air- required to be exhausted per tank shall stream as it reaches the effective con- be not less than the product of the area trol area of the exhaust slot shall be of tank surface times the cubic feet per less than the effective velocity over minute per square foot of tank area, the exhaust slot area. determined from Table D–57.12.

TABLE D–57.12—MINIMUM VENTILATION RATE IN CUBIC FEET OF AIR PER MINUTE PER SQUARE FOOT OF TANK AREA FOR LATERAL EXHAUST

C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at fol- Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D– lowing ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)). 12 57.11) 0.0–0.09 0.1–0.24 0.25–0.49 0.5–0.99 1.0–2.0

Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle. 2 Also for a manifold along tank centerline. 3

50 ...... 50 60 75 90 100 75 ...... 75 90 110 130 150 100 ...... 100 125 150 175 200 150 ...... 150 190 225 260 300

Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.

50 ...... 75 90 100 110 125 75 ...... 110 130 150 170 190 100 ...... 150 175 200 225 250 150 ...... 225 260 300 340 375 1 It is not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0. It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to 1⁄2 the circumference, use W/L = 1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L = 0.5. 2 Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is wide. If the exhaust hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly baffled. 3 Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel sides of a tank. Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the hood face is set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The surface area of tanks can frequently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized systems) by using covers extending from the upper edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00081 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(3) The vertical height of the receiv- the liquid in the tank to minimize mist ing exhaust hood, including any baffle, formation, or any combination thereof, shall not be less than one-quarter the may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor width of the tank. control means for open-surface tank (4) The supply airstream shall not be operations, provided that they effec- allowed to impinge on obstructions be- tively reduce the concentrations of tween it and the exhaust slot in such a hazardous materials in the vicinity of manner as to significantly interfere the worker below the limits set in ac- with the performance of the exhaust cordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this hood. section. (5) Since most failure of push-pull (7) System design. (i) The equipment systems result from excessive supply for exhausting air shall have sufficient air volumes and pressures, methods of capacity to produce the flow of air re- measuring and adjusting the supply air quired in each of the hoods and open- shall be provided. When satisfactory ings of the system. control has been achieved, the adjust- (ii) The capacity required in para- able features of the hood shall be fixed graph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be so that they will not be altered. obtained when the airflow producing (iv) All tanks exhausted by means of equipment is operating against the fol- hoods which project over the entire lowing pressure losses, the sum of tank, and which do not conform to the which is the static pressure: definition of enclosing hoods, shall be (A) Entrance losses into the hood. considered to be overhead canopy (B) Resistance to airflow in branch hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet pipe including bends and trans- per minute necessary to be exhausted formations. through a canopy hood shall be not less (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe. than the product of the control veloc- (D) Resistance to airflow in main ity times the net area of all openings pipe including bends and trans- between the bottom edges of the hood formations. and the top edges of the tank. (E) Resistance of mechanical equip- (v) The rate of vapor evolution (in- ment; that is, filters, washers, concluding steam or products of combus- densers, absorbers, etc., plus their en- tion) from the process shall be esti- trance and exit losses. mated. If the rate of vapor evolution is (F) Resistance in outlet duct and dis- equal to or greater than 10 percent of charge stack. the calculated exhaust volume re- (iii) Two or more operations shall not quired, the exhaust volume shall be in- be connected to the same exhaust sys- creased in equal amount. tem where either one or the combina- (5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. tion of the substances removed may Wherever spraying or other mechanical constitute a fire, explosion, or chem- means are used to disperse a liquid ical reaction hazard in the duct sys- above an open-surface tank, control tem. Traps or other devices shall be must be provided for the airborne provided to insure that condensate in spray. Such operations shall be en- ducts does not drain back into any closed as completely as possible. The tank. inward air velocity into the enclosure (iv) The exhaust system, consisting shall be sufficient to prevent the dis- of hoods, ducts, air mover, and discharge of spray into the workroom. charge outlet, shall be designed in ac- Mechanical baffles may be used to help cordance with American National prevent the discharge of spray. Spray Standard Fundamentals Governing the painting operations are covered by Design and Operation of Local Exhaust paragraph (h) of this section. Systems, Z9.2–1960, or the manual, In- (6) Control means other than ventila- dustrial Ventilation, published by the tion. Tank covers, foams, beads, chips, American Conference of Governmental or other materials floating on the tank Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and surface so as to confine gases, mists, or pressure loss data provided by the man- vapors to the area under the cover or ufacturer of any air cleaning device to the foam, bead, or chip layer; or sur- shall be included in the design calcula- face tension depressive agents added to tions.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00082 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.57

(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow (ii) All persons required to work in shall be maintained at all times during such a manner that their feet may be- which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted come wet shall be provided with rubber from the tank, and at all times the or other impervious boots or shoes, tank, the draining, or the drying area rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes suffi- is in operation or use. When the system cient to keep feet dry. is first installed, the airflow from each (iii) All persons required to handle hood shall be measured by means of a work wet with a liquid other than pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and water shall be provided with gloves im- corrective action taken if the flow is pervious to such a liquid and of a less than that required. When the prop- length sufficient to prevent entrance of er flow is obtained, the hood static liquid into the tops of the gloves. The pressure shall be measured and re- interior of gloves shall be kept free corded. At intervals of not more than 3 from corrosive or irritating contami- months operation, or after a prolonged nants. shutdown period, the hoods and duct (iv) All persons required to work in system shall be inspected for evidence such a manner that their clothing may of corrosion or damage. In any case become wet shall be provided with such where the airflow is found to be less aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other than required, it shall be increased to garments made of rubber, or of other the required value. (Information on air- materials impervious to liquids other flow and static pressure measurement than water, as are required to keep and calculations may be found in their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend American National Standard Funda- well below the top of boots to prevent mental Governing the Design and Oper- liquid splashing into the boots. Provi- ation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2– sion of dry, clean, cotton clothing 1960, or in the manual, Industrial Ven- along with rubber shoes or short boots tilation, published by the American and an apron impervious to liquids Conference of Governmental Industrial other than water shall be considered a satisfactory substitute where small Hygienists.) parts are cleaned, plated, or acid (ii) The exhaust system shall dis- dipped in open tanks and rapid work is charge to the outer air in such a man- required. ner that the possibility of its effluent (v) Whenever there is a danger of entering any building is at a minimum. splashing, for example, when additions Recirculation shall only be through a are made manually to the tanks, or device for contaminant removal which when acids and chemicals are removed will prevent the creation of a health from the tanks, the employees so en- hazard in the room or area to which gaged shall be required to wear either the air is recirculated. tight-fitting chemical goggles or an ef- (iii) A volume of outside air in the fective face shield. See § 1926.102. range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the (vi) When, during the emergencies exhaust volume shall be provided to specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this each room having exhaust hoods. The section, employees must be in areas outside air supply shall enter the work- where concentrations of air contami- room in such a manner as not to be nants are greater than the limits set detrimental to any exhaust hood. The by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section airflow of the makeup air system shall or oxygen concentrations are less than be measured on installation. Corrective 19.5 percent, they must use respirators action shall be taken when the airflow that reduce their exposure to a level is below that required. The makeup air below these limits or that provide ade- shall be uncontaminated. quate oxygen. Such respirators must (9) Personal protection. (i) All employ- also be provided in marked, quickly-ac- ees working in and around open-surface cessible storage compartments built tank operations must be instructed as for this purpose when the possibility to the hazards of their respective jobs, exists of accidental release of haz- and in the personal protection and first ardous concentrations of air contami- aid procedures applicable to these haz- nants. Respirators must be approved by ards. NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00083 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.57 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

by a competent industrial hygienist or type of construction and by frequent other technically-qualified source, and flushing. They shall be firm, sound, and used in accordance with 29 CFR of the design and construction to mini- 1926.103. mize the possibility of tripping. (vii) Near each tank containing a liq- (ii) Before cleaning the interior of uid which may burn, irritate, or other- any tank, the contents shall be drained wise be harmful to the skin if splashed off, and the cleanout doors shall be upon the worker’s body, there shall be opened where provided. All pockets in a supply of clean cold water. The water tanks or pits, where it is possible for pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding hazardous vapors to collect, shall be 25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided ventilated and cleared of such vapors. with a quick opening valve and at least (iii) Tanks which have been drained 48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller to permit employees to enter for the than three-fourths inch, so that no purposes of cleaning, inspection, or time may be lost in washing off liquids maintenance may contain atmospheres from the skin or clothing. Alter- which are hazardous to life or health, natively, deluge showers and eye through the presence of flammable or flushes shall be provided in cases where toxic air contaminants, or through the harmful chemicals may be splashed on absence of sufficient oxygen. Before parts of the body. employees shall be permitted to enter (viii) Operators with sores, burns, or any such tank, appropriate tests of the other skin lesions requiring medical atmosphere shall be made to determine treatment shall not be allowed to work if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) at their regular operations until so au- of this section are exceeded, or if the thorized by a physician. Any small oxygen concentration is less than 19.5 skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open percent. sores which are found or reported shall be treated by a properly designated (iv) If the tests made in accordance person so that chances of exposures to with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this sec- the chemicals are removed. Workers tion indicate that the atmosphere in exposed to chromic acids shall have a the tank is unsafe, before any em- periodic examination made of the nos- ployee is permitted to enter the tank, trils and other parts of the body, to de- the tank shall be ventilated until the tect incipient ulceration. hazardous atmosphere is removed, and (ix) Sufficient washing facilities, in- ventilation shall be continued so as to cluding soap, individual towels, and prevent the occurrence of a hazardous hot water, shall be provided for all per- atmosphere as long as an employee is sons required to use or handle any liq- in the tank. uids which may burn, irritate, or oth- (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue erwise be harmful to the skin, on the work, it is necessary to enter a tank basis of at least one basin (or its equiv- which may contain a hazardous atmos- alent) with a hot water faucet for every phere, suitable respirators, such as 10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). self-contained breathing apparatus; (x) Locker space or equivalent cloth- hose mask with blower, if there is a ing storage facilities shall be provided possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a to prevent contamination of street gas mask, selected and operated in ac- clothing. cordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of (xi) First aid facilities specific to the this section, shall be used. If a con- hazards of the operations conducted taminant in the tank can cause derma- shall be readily available. titis, or be absorbed through the skin, (10) Special precautions for cyanide. the employee entering the tank shall Dikes or other arrangements shall be also wear protective clothing. At least provided to prevent the possibility of one trained standby employee, with intermixing of cyanide and acid in the suitable respirator, shall be present in event of tank rupture. the nearest uncontaminated area. The (11) Inspection, maintenance, and in- standby employee must be able to com- stallation. (i) Floors and platforms municate with the employee in the around tanks shall be prevented from tank and be able to haul him out of the becoming slippery both by original tank with a lifeline if necessary.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00084 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

(vi) Maintenance work requiring the vapors of such liquids, for the pur- welding or open flame, where toxic pose of cleaning or altering their sur- metal fumes such as cadmium, chro- faces, or adding or imparting a finish mium, or lead may be evolved, shall be thereto, or changing the character of done only with sufficient local exhaust the materials, and their subsequent re- ventilation to prevent the creation of a moval from the liquids or vapors, health hazard, or be done with res- draining, and drying. Such operations pirators selected and used in accord- include washing, electroplating, anod- ance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this izing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dip- section. Welding, or the use of open ping, tanning, dressing, bleaching, flames near any solvent cleaning degreasing, alkaline cleaning, strip- equipment shall be permitted only ping, rinsing, digesting, and other simi- after such equipment has first been lar operations, but do not include mol- thoroughly cleared of solvents and va- ten materials handling operations, or pors. surface coating operations. (12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any (ii) Molten materials handling oper- vapor degreasing tank equipped with a ations means all operations, other than condenser or vapor level thermostat, welding, burning, and soldering oper- the condenser or thermostat shall keep ations, involving the use, melting, the level of vapors below the top edge smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys, of the tank by a distance at least equal salts, or other similar substances in to one-half the tank width, or at least the molten state. Such operations also 36 inches (0.912 m), whichever is short- include heat treating baths, descaling er. baths, die casting stereotyping, gal- (ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for vanizing, tinning, and similar oper- heating vapor degreasing tanks, the ations. combustion chamber shall be of tight (iii) Surface coating operations means construction, except for such openings all operations involving the applica- as the exhaust flue, and those that are tion of protective, decorative, adhe- necessary for supplying air for combus- sive, or strengthening coating or im- tion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resist- pregnation to one or more surfaces, or ant construction and shall extend to into the interstices of any object or the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is material, by means of spraying, spread- used on this flue, a draft diverter shall ing, flowing, brushing, roll coating, be used. Special precautions must be pouring, cementing, or similar means; taken to prevent solvent fumes from and any subsequent draining or drying entering the combustion air of this or operations, excluding open-tank oper- any other heater when chlorinated or ations. fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, used. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993; (iii) Heating elements shall be so de- 61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8, 1998] signed and maintained that their surface temperature will not cause the § 1926.58 [Reserved] solvent or mixture to decompose, break down, or be converted into an excessive § 1926.59 Hazard communication. quantity of vapor. (iv) Tanks or machines of more than NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 2 struction work under this section are iden- 4 square feet (0.368 m ) of vapor area, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this used for solvent cleaning or vapor chapter. degreasing, shall be equipped with suitable cleanout or sludge doors located [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] near the bottom of each tank or still. These doors shall be so designed and § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline. gasketed that there will be no leakage (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- of solvent when they are closed. tion applies to all construction work as (13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) ap- defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which plies to all operations involving the there is exposure to MDA, including immersion of materials in liquids, or in but not limited to the following:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00085 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(i) Construction, alteration, repair, ployer shall maintain records of the maintenance, or renovation of struc- initial monitoring results or objective tures, substrates, or portions thereof, data supporting that exemption and that contain MDA; the basis for the employer’s reliance on (ii) Installation or the finishing of the data, as provided in the record- surfaces with products containing keeping provision of paragraph (o) of MDA; this section. (iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at (b) Definitions. For the purpose of this construction sites; and section, the following definitions shall (iv) Transportation, disposal, stor- apply: age, or containment of MDA or prod- Action level means a concentration of ucts containing MDA on the site or lo- airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an eight (8)- cation at which construction activities hour time-weighted average. are performed. Assistant Secretary means the Assist- (2) Except as provided in paragraphs ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this sectional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- tion does not apply to the processing, ment of Labor, or designee. use, and handling of products con- Authorized person means any person taining MDA where initial monitoring specifically authorized by the employer indicates that the product is not capa- whose duties require the person to ble of releasing MDA in excess of the enter a regulated area, or any person action level under the expected condi- entering such an area as a designated tions of processing, use, and handling representative of employees for the which will cause the greatest possible purpose of exercising the right to ob- release; and where no ‘‘dermal exposure serve monitoring and measuring proce- to MDA’’ can occur. dures under paragraph (p) of this sec- (3) Except as provided in paragraph tion, or any other person authorized by (a)(7) of this section, this section does the Act or regulations issued under the not apply to the processing, use, and Act. handling of products containing MDA where objective data are reasonably re- Container means any barrel, bottle, lied upon which demonstrate the prod- can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, uct is not capable of releasing MDA storage tank, commercial packaging or under the expected conditions of proc- the like, but does not include piping essing, use, and handling which will systems. cause the greatest possible release; and Decontamination area means an area where no ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ outside of but as near as practical to can occur. the regulated area, consisting of an (4) Except as provided in paragraph equipment storage area, wash area, and (a)(7) of this section, this section does clean change area, which is used for not apply to the storage, transpor- the decontamination of workers, mate- tation, distribution or sale of MDA in rials, and equipment contaminated intact containers sealed in such a man- with MDA. ner as to contain the MDA dusts, va- Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where pors, or liquids, except for the provi- employees are engaged in the handling, sions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph application or use of mixtures or mate- (e) of this section. rials containing MDA, with any of the (5) Except as provided in paragraph following non-airborne forms of MDA: (a)(7) of this section, this section does (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or not apply to materials in any form flaked mixtures containing MDA in which contain less than 0.1% MDA by concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume. weight or volume; and (6) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Materials other than ‘‘finished ar- (a)(7) of this section, this section does ticles’’ containing MDA in concentra- not apply to ‘‘finished articles con- tions greater than 0.1% by weight or taining MDA.’’ volume. (7) Where products containing MDA Director means the Director of the are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) National Institute for Occupational through (a)(6) of this section, the em- Safety and Health, U.S. Department of

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00086 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

Health and Human Services, or des- diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical ignee. Abstract Service Registry number 101– Emergency means any occurrence 77–9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or such as, but not limited to, equipment solid. The definition also includes the failure, rupture of containers, or fail- salts of MDA. ure of control equipment which results Regulated Areas means areas where in an unexpected and potentially haz- airborne concentrations of MDA exceed ardous release of MDA. or can reasonably be expected to ex- Employee exposure means exposure to ceed, the permissible exposure limits, MDA which would occur if the em- or where ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ ployee were not using respirators or can occur. protective work clothing and equip- STEL means short term exposure ment. limit as determined by any 15-minute Finished article containing MDA is de- sample period. fined as a manufactured item: (c) Permissible exposure limits. The em- (i) Which is formed to a specific ployer shall assure that no employee is shape or design during manufacture; exposed to an airborne concentration (ii) Which has end use function(s) de- of MDA in excess of ten parts per bil- pendent in whole or part upon its shape lion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weight- or design during end use; and ed average and a STEL of one hundred (iii) Where applicable, is an item parts per billion (100 ppb). which is fully cured by virtue of having (d) Communication among employers. been subjected to the conditions (temperature, time) necessary to complete On multi-employer worksites, an em- the desired chemical reaction. ployer performing work involving the Historical monitoring data means mon- application of MDA or materials con- itoring data for construction jobs that taining MDA for which establishment meet the following conditions: of one or more regulated areas is re- (i) The data upon which judgments quired shall inform other employers on are based are scientifically sound and the site of the nature of the employer’s were collected using methods that are work with MDA and of the existence of, sufficiently accurate and precise; and requirements pertaining to, regu- (ii) The processes and work practices lated areas. that were in use when the historical (e) Emergency situations—(1) Written monitoring data were obtained are es- plan. (i) A written plan for emergency sentially the same as those to be used situations shall be developed for each during the job for which initial moni- construction operation where there is a toring will not be performed; possibility of an emergency. The plan (iii) The characteristics of the MDA- shall include procedures where the em- containing material being handled ployer identifies emergency escape when the historical monitoring data routes for his employees at each con- were obtained are the same as those on struction site before the construction the job for which initial monitoring operation begins. Appropriate portions will not be performed; of the plan shall be implemented in the (iv) Environmental conditions pre- event of an emergency. vailing when the historical monitoring (ii) The plan shall specifically pro- data were obtained are the same as vide that employees engaged in cor- those on the job for which initial moni- recting emergency conditions shall be toring will not be performed; and equipped with the appropriate personal (v) Other data relevant to the oper- protective equipment and clothing as ations, materials, processing, or em- required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this ployee exposures covered by the excep- section until the emergency is abated. tion are substantially similar. The (iii) The plan shall specifically in- data must be scientifically sound, the clude provisions for alerting and evacu- characteristics of the MDA containing ating affected employees as well as the material must be similar and the envi- applicable elements prescribed in 29 ronmental conditions comparable. CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, ‘‘Emer- 4,4′Methylenedianiline or MDA means gency action plans’’ and ‘‘Fire preven- the chemical; 4,4′- tion plans,’’ respectively.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00087 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Alerting employees. Where there is monitoring for each such employee at the possibility of employee exposure to least every six (6) months. MDA due to an emergency, means shall (ii) If the monitoring required by be developed to promptly alert employ- paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals ees who have the potential to be di- employee exposure above the PELs, the rectly exposed. Affected employees not employer shall repeat such monitoring engaged in correcting emergency con- for each such employee at least every ditions shall be evacuated immediately three (3) months. in the event that an emergency occurs. (iii) Employers who are conducting Means shall also be developed for alert- MDA operations within a regulated ing other employees who may be ex- area can forego periodic monitoring if posed as a result of the emergency. the employees are all wearing supplied- (f) Exposure monitoring—(1) General. air respirators while working in the (i) Determinations of employee expo- regulated area. sure shall be made from breathing zone (iv) The employer may alter the mon- air samples that are representative of itoring schedule from every three each employee’s exposure to airborne months to every six months for any MDA over an eight (8) hour period. De- employee for whom two consecutive termination of employee exposure to measurements taken at least 7 days the STEL shall be made from breathing apart indicate that the employee expo- zone air samples collected over a 15 sure has decreased to below the PELs minute sampling period. but above the action level. (ii) Representative employee expo- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the sure shall be determined on the basis of initial monitoring required by para- one or more samples representing full graph (f)(2) of this section reveals em- shift exposure for each shift for each ployee exposure to be below the action job classification in each work area level, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for that employee, ex- where exposure to MDA may occur. cept as otherwise required by para- (iii) Where the employer can docu- graph (f)(5) of this section. ment that exposure levels are equiva- (ii) If the periodic monitoring re- lent for similar operations in different quired by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec- work shifts, the employer shall only be tion reveals that employee exposures, required to determine representative as indicated by at least two consecu- employee exposure for that operation tive measurements taken at least 7 during one shift. days apart, are below the action level (2) Initial monitoring. Each employer the employer may discontinue the who has a workplace or work operation monitoring for that employee, except covered by this standard shall perform as otherwise required by paragraph initial monitoring to determine accu- (f)(5) of this section. rately the airborne concentrations of (5) Additional monitoring. The em- MDA to which employees may be ex- ployer shall institute the exposure posed unless: monitoring required under paragraphs (i) The employer can demonstrate, on (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section when the basis of objective data, that the there has been a change in production MDA-containing product or material process, chemicals present, control being handled cannot cause exposures equipment, personnel, or work prac- above the standard’s action level, even tices which may result in new or addi- under worst-case release conditions; or tional exposures to MDA, or when the (ii) The employer has historical mon- employer has any reason to suspect a itoring or other data demonstrating change which may result in new or ad- that exposures on a particular job will ditional exposures. be below the action level. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring (3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level frequency. (i) If the monitoring required of 95 percent, to within plus or minus by paragraph (f)(2) of this section re- 25 percent for airborne concentrations veals employee exposure at or above of MDA. the action level, but at or below the (7) Employee notification of monitoring PELs, the employer shall repeat such results. (i) The employer must, as soon

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00088 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

as possible but no later than 5 working drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or days after the receipt of the results of apply cosmetics in regulated areas. any monitoring performed under this (h) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi- section, notify each affected employee neering controls and work practices and of these results either individually in respirators. (i) The employer shall use writing or by posting the results in an one or any combination of the fol- appropriate location that is accessible lowing control methods to achieve to employees. compliance with the permissible expo- (ii) The written notification required sure limits prescribed by paragraph (c) by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section of this section: shall contain the corrective action (A) Local exhaust ventilation being taken by the employer or any other protective measures which have equipped with HEPA filter dust collec- been implemented to reduce the em- tion systems; ployee exposure to or below the PELs, (B) General ventilation systems; wherever the PELs are exceeded. (C) Use of workpractices; or (8) Visual monitoring. The employer (D) Other engineering controls such shall make routine inspections of em- as isolation and enclosure that the As- ployee hands, face and forearms poten- sistant Secretary can show to be fea- tially exposed to MDA. Other potential sible. dermal exposures reported by the em- (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering ployee must be referred to the appro- controls and work practices ‘‘which priate medical personnel for observa- can be instituted are not sufficient to tion. If the employer determines that reduce employee exposure to or below the employee has been exposed to MDA the PELs, the employer shall use them the employer shall: to reduce employee exposure to the (i) Determine the source of exposure; lowest levels achievable by these con- (ii) Implement protective measures trols and shall supplement them by the to correct the hazard; and use of respiratory protective devices (iii) Maintain records of the correc- which comply with the requirements of tive actions in accordance with para- paragraph (i) of this section. graph (o) of this section. (g) Regulated areas—(1) Establish- (2) Special Provisions. For workers en- ment—(i) Airborne exposures. The em- gaged in spray application methods, ployer shall establish regulated areas respiratory protection must be used in where airborne concentrations of MDA addition to feasible engineering con- exceed or can reasonably be expected trols and work practices to reduce em- to exceed, the permissible exposure ployee exposure to or below the PELs. limits. (3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall (ii) Dermal exposures. Where employ- not be used to remove MDA, unless the ees are subject to ‘‘dermal exposure to compressed air is used in conjunction MDA’’ the employer shall establish with an enclosed ventilation system those work areas as regulated areas. designed to capture the dust cloud cre- (2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall ated by the compressed air. be demarcated from the rest of the (4) Employee rotation. The employer workplace in a manner that minimizes shall not use employee rotation as a the number of persons potentially ex- means of compliance with the exposure posed. limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of (3) Access. Access to regulated areas this section. shall be limited to authorized persons. (5) Compliance program. (i) The em- (4) Personal protective equipment and clothing. Each person entering a regu- ployer shall establish and implement a lated area shall be supplied with, and written program to reduce employee required to use, the appropriate per- exposure to or below the PELs by sonal protective clothing and equip- means of engineering and work prac- ment in accordance with paragraphs (i) tice controls, as required by paragraph and (j) of this section. (h)(1) of this section, and by use of res- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer piratory protection where permitted shall ensure that employees do not eat, under this section.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00089 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Upon request this written pro- (ii) An employee who cannot use a gram shall be furnished for examina- negative-pressure respirator must be tion and copying to the Assistant Sec- given the option of using a positive- retary, the Director, affected employ- pressure respirator, or a supplied-air ees and designated employee represent- respirator operated in the continuous- atives. The employer shall review and, flow or pressure-demand mode. as necessary, update such plans at (j) Protective work clothing and equip- least once every 12 months to make ment—(1) Provision and use. Where em- certain they reflect the current status ployees are subject to dermal exposure of the program. to MDA, where liquids containing MDA (i) Respiratory protection—(1) General. can be splashed into the eyes, or where For employees who use respirators re- airborne concentrations of MDA are in quired by this section, the employer excess of the PEL, the employer shall must provide each employee an appro- provide, at no cost to the employee, priate respirator that complies with and ensure that the employee uses, ap- the requirements of this paragraph. propriate protective work clothing and Respirators must be used during: equipment which prevent contact with (i) Periods necessary to install or im- MDA such as, but not limited to: plement feasible engineering and work- (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full- practice controls. body work clothing; (ii) Work operations, such as mainte- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot nance and repair activities and spray- coverings; and application processes, for which engi- (iii) Face shields, chemical goggles; neering and work-practice controls are or not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which fea- (iv) Other appropriate protective sible engineering and work-practice equipment which comply with 29 CFR controls are not yet sufficient to re- 1910.133. duce employee exposure to or below the (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em- PELs. ployer shall ensure that, at the end of (iv) Emergencies. their work shift, employees remove (2) Respirator program. The employer MDA-contaminated protective work must implement a respiratory protec- clothing and equipment that is not tion program in accordance with routinely removed throughout the day § 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except in change areas provided in accordance (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which with the provisions in paragraph (k) of covers each employee required by this this section. section to use a respirator. (ii) The employer shall ensure that, (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers during their work shift, employees re- must: move all other MDA-contaminated pro- (A) Select, and provide to employees, tective work clothing or equipment be- the appropriate respirators specified in fore leaving a regulated area. paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iii) The employer shall ensure that 1910.134. no employee takes MDA-contaminated (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered work clothing or equipment out of the and non-powered air-purifying res- decontamination areas, except those pirators. employees authorized to do so for the (C) For escape, provide employees purpose of laundering, maintenance, or with one of the following respirator op- disposal. tions: Any self-contained breathing ap- (iv) MDA-contaminated work cloth- paratus with a full facepiece or hood ing or equipment shall be placed and operated in the positive-pressure or stored and transported in sealed, im- continuous-flow mode; or a full face- permeable bags, or other closed imper- piece air-purifying respirator. meable containers. (D) Provide a combination HEPA fil- (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated ter and organic vapor canister or car- protective work clothing or equipment tridge with air-purifying respirators which are to be taken out of decon- when MDA is in liquid form or used as tamination areas or the workplace for part of a process requiring heat. cleaning, maintenance, or disposal,

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00090 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

shall bear labels warning of the hazards (iii) Equipment area. The equipment of MDA. area shall be supplied with imper- (3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The meable, labeled bags and containers for employer shall provide the employee the containment and disposal of con- with clean protective clothing and taminated protective clothing and equipment. The employer shall ensure equipment. that protective work clothing or equip- (2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible, ment required by this paragraph is shower facilities shall be provided cleaned, laundered, repaired, or re- which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3) placed at intervals appropriate to wherever the possibility of employee maintain its effectiveness. exposure to airborne levels of MDA in (ii) The employer shall prohibit the excess of the permissible exposure removal of MDA from protective work limit exists. clothing or equipment by blowing, (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA shaking, or any methods which allow occurs, the employer shall ensure that MDA to re-enter the workplace. materials spilled or deposited on the (iii) The employer shall ensure that skin are removed as soon as possible by laundering of MDA-contaminated methods which do not facilitate the clothing shall be done so as to prevent dermal absorption of MDA. the release of MDA in the workplace. (3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or (iv) Any employer who gives MDA- beverages are consumed at the work- contaminated clothing to another per- site and employees are exposed to MDA son for laundering shall inform such the employer shall provide clean lunch person of the requirement to prevent areas were MDA levels are below the the release of MDA. action level and where no dermal expo- (v) The employer shall inform any sure to MDA can occur. person who launders or cleans protec- (ii) The employer shall ensure that tive clothing or equipment contami- employees wash their hands and faces nated with MDA of the potentially with soap and water prior to eating, harmful effects of exposure. drinking, smoking, or applying cos- (4) Visual Examination. (i) The em- metics. ployer shall ensure that employees’ (iii) The employer shall ensure that work clothing is examined periodically employees do not enter lunch facilities for rips or tears that may occur during with contaminated protective work performance of work. clothing or equipment. (ii) When rips or tears are detected, (l) Communication of hazards to em- the protective equipment or clothing ployees—(1) Hazard communication. The shall be repaired and replaced imme- employer shall include diately. Methylenedianiline (MDA) in the pro- (k) Hygiene facilities and practices—(1) gram established to comply with the General. (i) The employer shall provide Hazard Communication Standard decontamination areas for employees (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall required to work in regulated areas or ensure that each employee has access required by paragraph (j)(1) of this sec- to labels on containers of MDA and tion to wear protective clothing. Excep- safety data sheets, and is trained in action: In lieu of the decontamination cordance with the provisions of HCS area requirement specified in para- and paragraph (l)(3) of this section. The graph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the em- employer shall ensure that at least the ployer may permit employees engaged following hazards are addressed: Can- in small scale, short duration oper- cer; liver effects; and skin sensitiza- ations, to clean their protective cloth- tion. ing or dispose of the protective cloth- (2) Signs and labels—(i) Signs. (A) The ing before such employees leave the employer shall post and maintain leg- area where the work was performed. ible signs demarcating regulated areas (ii) Change areas. The employer shall and entrances or access-ways to regu- ensure that change areas are equipped lated areas that bear the following leg- with separate storage facilities for pro- end: tective clothing and street clothing, in DANGER accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e). MDA

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00091 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

MAY CAUSE CANCER pendices A and B of this section, and CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER indicate to employees where a copy of RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PRO- the standard is available; TECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA (B) Describe the medical surveillance AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY program required under paragraph (n) of this section, and explain the infor- (B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers mation contained in appendix C of this may use the following legend in lieu of section; and that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i)(A) (C) Describe the medical removal of this section: provision required under paragraph (n) DANGER of this section. MDA (4) Access to training materials. (i) The MAY CAUSE CANCER employer shall make readily available LIVER TOXIN to all affected employees, without cost, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY all written materials relating to the RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTH- ING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN employee training program, including THIS AREA a copy of this regulation. (ii) The employer shall provide to the (ii) Labels. (A) The employer shall en- Assistant Secretary and the Director, sure that labels or other appropriate upon request, all information and forms of warning are provided for con- training materials relating to the em- tainers of MDA within the workplace. ployee information and training pro- The labels shall comply with the re- gram. quirements of § 1910.1200(f) and shall in- (m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces clude at least the following informa- shall be maintained as free as prac- tion for pure MDA and mixtures con- ticable of visible accumulations of taining MDA: MDA. DANGER (2) The employer shall institute a CONTAINS MDA program for detecting MDA leaks, MAY CAUSE CANCER spills, and discharges, including reg- CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER ular visual inspections of operations (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers involving liquid or solid MDA. may include the following information (3) All leaks shall be repaired and liq- workplace labels in lieu of the labeling uid or dust spills cleaned up promptly. requirements in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(A) (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA of this section: may not be cleaned by the use of com- (1) For Pure MDA: pressed air. (5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and DANGER other methods of dry clean-up of MDA CONTAINS MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER may be used where HEPA filtered LIVER TOXIN vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not feasible or practical. (2) For mixtures containing MDA: (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con- DANGER tainers, equipment, and clothing con- CONTAINS MDA taminated with MDA shall be collected CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY and disposed of in a manner to prevent CAUSE CANCER the re-entry of MDA into the work- LIVER TOXIN place. (3) Information and training. (i) The (n) Medical surveillance—(1) General. employer shall provide employees with (i) The employer shall make available information and training on MDA, in a medical surveillance program for em- accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(h), at ployees exposed to MDA under the fol- the time of initial assignment and at lowing circumstances: least annually thereafter. (A) Employees exposed at or above (ii) In addition to the information re- the action level for 30 or more days per quired under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the em- year; ployer shall: (B) Employees who are subject to (A) Provide an explanation of the dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more contents of this section, including ap- days per year;

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00092 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

(C) Employees who have been exposed intake, and the appearance of physical in an emergency situation; signs relating to the liver, and the (D) Employees whom the employer, skin; based on results from compliance with (B) The appropriate tests and exami- paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has rea- nations including liver function tests son to believe are being dermally ex- and skin examinations; and posed; and (C) Appropriate additional tests or (E) Employees who show signs or examinations as deemed necessary by symptoms of MDA exposure. the physician. (ii) The employer shall ensure that (ii) If in the physician’s opinion the all medical examinations and proce- results of liver function tests indicate dures are performed by or under the su- an abnormality, the employee shall be pervision of a licensed physician at a removed from further MDA exposure in reasonable time and place, and pro- accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of vided without cost to the employee. this section. Repeat liver function (2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150 tests shall be conducted on advice of days of the effective date of this stand- the physician. ard, or before the time of initial assign- (4) Emergency examinations. If the em- ment, the employer shall provide each ployer determines that the employee employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i) has been exposed to a potentially haz- of this section with a medical examina- ardous amount of MDA in an emer- tion including the following elements: gency situation under paragraph (e) of (A) A detailed history which in- this section, the employer shall provide cludes: medical examinations in accordance (1) Past work exposure to MDA or with paragraphs (n)(3) (i) and (ii) of any other toxic substances; this section. If the results of liver func- (2) A history of drugs, alcohol, to- tion testing indicate an abnormality, bacco, and medication routinely taken the employee shall be removed in ac- (duration and quantity); and cordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this (3) A history of dermatitis, chemical section. Repeat liver function tests skin sensitization, or previous hepatic shall be conducted on the advice of the disease. physician. If the results of the tests are (B) A physical examination which in- normal, tests must be repeated two to cludes all routine physical examina- three weeks from the initial testing. If tion parameters, skin examination, and the results of the second set of tests examination for signs of liver disease. are normal and on the advice of the (C) Laboratory tests including: physician, no additional testing is re- (1) Liver function tests and quired. (2) Urinalysis. (5) Additional examinations. Where the (D) Additional tests as necessary in employee develops signs and symptoms the opinion of the physician. associated with exposure to MDA, the (ii) No initial medical examination is employer shall provide the employee required if adequate records show that with an additional medical examina- the employee has been examined in action including liver function tests. Re- cordance with the requirements of this peat liver function tests shall be con- section within the previous six months ducted on the advice of the physician. prior to the effective date of this stand- If the results of the tests are normal, ard or prior to the date of initial as- tests must be repeated two to three signment. weeks from the initial testing. If the (3) Periodic examinations. (i) The em- results of the second set of tests are ployer shall provide each employee normal and on the advice of the physi- covered by this section with a medical cian, no additional testing is required. examination at least annually fol- (6) Multiple physician review mecha- lowing the initial examination. These nism. (i) If the employer selects the ini- periodic examinations shall include at tial physician who conducts any med- least the following elements: ical examination or consultation pro- (A) A brief history regarding any new vided to an employee under this sec- exposure to potential liver toxins, tion, and the employee has signs or changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol symptoms of occupational exposure to

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00093 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

MDA (which could include an abnormal recommendations of the second physi- liver function test), and the employee cian, unless the employer and the em- disagrees with the opinion of the exam- ployee reach a mutually acceptable ining physician, and this opinion could agreement. affect the employee’s job status, the (7) Information provided to the exam- employee may designate an appro- ining physician. (i) The employer shall priate and mutually acceptable second provide the following information to physician: the examining physician: (A) To review any findings, deter- (A) A copy of this regulation and its minations or recommendations of the appendices; initial physician; and (B) A description of the affected em- (B) To conduct such examinations, ployee’s duties as they relate to the consultations, and laboratory tests as employee’s potential exposure to MDA; the second physician deems necessary (C) The employee’s current actual or to facilitate this review. representative MDA exposure level; (ii) The employer shall promptly no- (D) A description of any personal pro- tify an employee of the right to seek a tective equipment used or to be used; second medical opinion after each oc- and casion that an initial physician con- (E) Information from previous em- ducts a medical examination or con- ployment related medical examina- sultation pursuant to this section. The tions of the affected employee. employer may condition its participa- (ii) The employer shall provide the tion in, and payment for, the multiple foregoing information to a second phy- physician review mechanism upon the sician under this section upon request employee doing the following within either by the second physician, or by fifteen (15) days after receipt of the the employee. foregoing notification, or receipt of the (8) Physician’s written opinion. (i) For initial physician’s written opinion, each examination under this section, whichever is later: the employer shall obtain, and provide (A) The employee informing the em- the employee with a copy of, the exam- ployer that he or she intends to seek a ining physician’s written opinion with- second medical opinion, and in 15 days of its receipt. The written (B) The employee initiating steps to opinion shall include the following: make an appointment with a second (A) The occupationally pertinent re- physician. sults of the medical examination and (iii) If the findings, determinations, tests; or recommendations of the second phy- (B) The physician’s opinion con- sician differ from those of the initial cerning whether the employee has any physician, then the employer and the detected medical conditions which employee shall assure that efforts are would place the employee at increased made for the two physicians to resolve risk of material impairment of health any disagreement. from exposure to MDA; (iv) If the two physicians have been (C) The physician’s recommended unable to quickly resolve their dis- limitations upon the employee’s expo- agreement, then the employer and the sure to MDA or upon the employee’s employee through their respective phy- use of protective clothing or equipment sicians shall designate a third physi- and respirators; and cian: (D) A statement that the employee (A) To review any findings, deter- has been informed by the physician of minations, or recommendations of the the results of the medical examination prior physicians; and and any medical conditions resulting (B) To conduct such examinations, from MDA exposure which require fur- consultations, laboratory tests, and ther explanation or treatment. discussions with the prior physicians (ii) The written opinion obtained by as the third physician deems necessary the employer shall not reveal specific to resolve the disagreement of the findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- prior physicians. cupational exposures. (v) The employer shall act consistent (9) Medical removal—(i) Temporary with the findings, determinations, and medical removal of an employee—(A)

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00094 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

Temporary removal resulting from occupa- the employee no longer has a detected tional exposure. The employee shall be medical condition which places the em- removed from work environments in ployee at increased risk of material which exposure to MDA is at or above impairment to health from exposure to the action level or where dermal expo- MDA. sure to MDA may occur, following an (B) For the purposes of this section, initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of the requirement that an employer re- this section), periodic examinations turn an employee to his or her former (paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an job status is not intended to expand emergency situation (paragraph (n)(4) upon or restrict any rights an em- of this section), or an additional exam- ployee has or would have had, absent ination (paragraph (n)(5) of this sec- temporary medical removal, to a spe- tion) in the following circumstances: cific job classification or position (1) When the employee exhibits signs under the terms of a collective bar- and/or symptoms indicative of acute gaining agreement. exposure to MDA; or (iii) Removal of other employee special (2) When the examining physician de- protective measure or limitations. The termines that an employee’s abnormal employer shall remove any limitations liver function tests are not associated placed on an employee or end any spe- with MDA exposure but that the abnor- cial protective measures provided to an malities may be exacerbated as a re- employee pursuant to a final medical sult of occupational exposure to MDA. determination when a subsequent final (B) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination indicates that medical determination. (1) The employer the limitations or special protective shall remove an employee from work measures are no longer necessary. having an exposure to MDA at or above (iv) Employer options pending a final the action level or where the potential medical determination. Where the physi- for dermal exposure exists on each oc- cian review mechanism used pursuant casion that a final medical determina- to the medical surveillance provisions tion results in a medical finding, deter- of this section, has not yet resulted in mination, or opinion that the employee a final medical determination with re- has a detected medical condition which spect to an employee, the employer places the employee at increased risk shall act as follows: of material impairment to health from (A) Removal. The employer may re- exposure to MDA. move the employee from exposure to (2) For the purposes of this section, MDA, provide special protective meas- the phrase ‘‘final medical determina- ures to the employee, or place limitation’’ shall mean the outcome of the tions upon the employee, consistent physician review mechanism used pur- with the medical findings, determina- suant to the medical surveillance pro- tions, or recommendations of the phy- visions of this section. sician who has reviewed the employee’s (3) Where a final medical determina- health status. tion results in any recommended spe- (B) Return. The employer may return cial protective measures for an em- the employee to his or her former job ployee, or limitations on an employee’s status, and end any special protective exposure to MDA, the employer shall measures provided to the employee, implement and act consistent with the consistent with the medical findings, recommendation. determinations, or recommendations of (ii) Return of the employee to former job any of the physicians who have re- status. (A) The employer shall return viewed the employee’s health status, an employee to his or her former job with two exceptions: status: (1) If the initial removal, special pro- (1) When the employee no longer tection, or limitation of the employee shows signs or symptoms of exposure resulted from a final medical deter- to MDA, or upon the advice of the phy- mination which differed from the find- sician. ings, determinations, or recommenda- (2) When a subsequent final medical tions of the initial physician; or determination results in a medical (2) The employee has been on re- finding, determination, or opinion that moval status for the preceding six

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00095 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.60 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

months as a result of exposure to MDA, with any employer made possible by then the employer shall await a final virtue of the employee’s removal. medical determination. (F) Employees who do not recover with- (v) Medical removal protection bene- in the 6 months of removal. The em- fits—(A) Provisions of medical removal ployer shall take the following meas- protection benefits. The employer shall ures with respect to any employee re- provide to an employee up to six (6) moved from exposure to MDA: months of medical removal protection (1) The employer shall make avail- benefits on each occasion that an em- able to the employee a medical exam- ployee is removed from exposure to ination pursuant to this section to ob- MDA or otherwise limited pursuant to tain a final medical determination this section. with respect to the employee; (B) Definition of medical removal pro- (2) The employer shall assure that tection benefits. For the purposes of this the final medical determination ob- section, the requirement that an em- tained indicates whether or not the ployer provide medical removal protec- employee may be returned to his or her tion benefits means that the employer former job status, and, if not, what shall maintain the earnings, seniority, steps should be taken to protect the and other employment rights and bene- employee’s health; fits of an employee as though the em- (3) Where the final medical deter- ployee had not been removed from nor- mination has not yet been obtained, or mal exposure to MDA or otherwise lim- once obtained indicates that the em- ited. ployee may not yet be returned to his (C) Follow-up medical surveillance dur- or her former job status, the employer ing the period of employee removal or lim- shall continue to provide medical re- itations. During the period of time that moval protection benefits to the em- an employee is removed from normal ployee until either the employee is re- exposure to MDA or otherwise limited, turned to former job status, or a final the employer may condition the provi- medical determination is made that sion of medical removal protection the employee is incapable of ever safe- benefits upon the employee’s participa- ly returning to his or her former job tion in follow-up medical surveillance status; and made available pursuant to this sec- (4) Where the employer acts pursuant tion. to a final medical determination which (D) Workers’ compensation claims. If a permits the return of the employee to removed employee files a claim for his or her former job status despite workers’ compensation payments for a what would otherwise be an unaccept- MDA-related disability, then the em- able liver function test, later questions ployer shall continue to provide med- concerning removing the employee ical removal protection benefits pend- again shall be decided by a final med- ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- ical determination. The employer need tent that an award is made to the em- not automatically remove such an employee for earnings lost during the pe- ployee pursuant to the MDA removal riod of removal, the employer’s med- criteria provided by this section. ical removal protection obligation (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of shall be reduced by such amount. The an employee. Where an employer, al- employer shall receive no credit for though not required by this section to workers’ compensation payments re- do so, removes an employee from expo- ceived by the employee for treatment- sure to MDA or otherwise places limi- related expenses. tations on an employee due to the ef- (E) Other credits. The employer’s obli- fects of MDA exposure on the employ- gation to provide medical removal pro- ee’s medical condition, the employer tection benefits to a removed employee shall provide medical removal protec- shall be reduced to the extent that the tion benefits to the employee equal to employee receives compensation for that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v) of earnings lost during the period of re- this section. moval either from a publicly or em- (o) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data ployer-funded compensation program, for exempted operations. (i) Where the or receives income from employment employer has relied on objective data

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00096 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.60

that demonstrate that products made were obtained are the same as those on from or containing MDA are not capa- the job for which initial monitoring ble of releasing MDA or do not present will not be performed; a dermal exposure problem under the (D) Environmental conditions pre- expected conditions of processing, use, vailing when the historical monitoring or handling to exempt such operations data were obtained are the same as from the initial monitoring require- those on the job for which initial moni- ments under paragraph (f)(2) of this toring will not be performed; and section, the employer shall establish (E) Other data relevant to the oper- and maintain an accurate record of ob- ations, materials, processing, or em- jective data reasonably relied upon in ployee exposures covered by the excep- support of the exemption. tion. (ii) The record shall include at least (iii) The employer shall maintain the following information: this record for the duration of the em- (A) The product qualifying for ex- ployer’s reliance upon such historical emption; monitoring data. (B) The source of the objective data; (3) The employer may utilize the (C) The testing protocol, results of services of competent organizations testing, and/or analysis of the material such as industry trade associations and for the release of MDA; employee associations to maintain the (D) A description of the operation ex- records required by this section. empted and how the data support the (4) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- exemption; and ployer shall keep an accurate record of (E) Other data relevant to the oper- all measurements taken to monitor ations, materials, processing, or em- employee exposure to MDA. ployee exposures covered by the ex- (ii) This record shall include at least emption. the following information: (iii) The employer shall maintain (A) The date of measurement; this record for the duration of the em- (B) The operation involving exposure ployer’s reliance upon such objective to MDA; data. (C) Sampling and analytical methods (2) Historical monitoring data. (i) used and evidence of their accuracy; Where the employer has relied on historical monitoring data that dem- (D) Number, duration, and results of onstrate that exposures on a particular samples taken; job will be below the action level to ex- (E) Type of protective devices worn, empt such operations from the initial if any; and monitoring requirements under para- (F) Name and exposure of the em- graph (f)(2) of this section, the employees whose exposures are rep- ployer shall establish and maintain an resented. accurate record of historical moni- (iii) The employer shall maintain toring data reasonably relied upon in this record for at least thirty (30) support of the exception. years, in accordance with 29 CFR (ii) The record shall include informa- 1910.33. tion that reflect the following condi- (5) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- tions: ployer shall establish and maintain an (A) The data upon which judgments accurate record for each employee sub- are based are scientifically sound and ject to medical surveillance by para- were collected using methods that are graph (n) of this section, in accordance sufficiently accurate and precise; with 29 CFR 1910.33. (B) The processes and work practices (ii) The record shall include at least that were in use when the historical the following information: monitoring data were obtained are es- (A) The name of the employee; sentially the same as those to be used (B) A copy of the employee’s medical during the job for which initial moni- examination results, including the toring will not be performed; medical history, questionnaire re- (C) The characteristics of the MDA- sponses, results of any tests, and physi- containing material being handled cian’s recommendations. when the historical monitoring data (C) Physician’s written opinions;

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00097 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.61 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(D) Any employee medical com- sonal protective clothing and equip- plaints related to exposure to MDA; ment or respirators required to be worn and by employees working in the area, as- (E) A copy of the information pro- sure the use of such clothing and equip- vided to the physician as required by ment or respirators, and require the paragraph (n) of this section. observer to comply with all other ap- (iii) The employer shall ensure that plicable safety and health procedures. this record is maintained for the dura- (q) Appendices. The information con- tion of employment plus thirty (30) tained in appendices A, B, C, and D of years, in accordance with 29 CFR this section is not intended, by itself, 1910.33. to create any additional obligations (iv) A copy of the employee’s medical not otherwise imposed by this standard removal and return to work status. (6) Training records. The employer nor detract from any existing obliga- shall maintain all employee training tion. records for one (1) year beyond the last APPENDIX A TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE DATA date of employment. SHEET, FOR 4–4′ METHYLENEDIANILINE (7) Availability. (i) The employer, upon written request, shall make all NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- records required to be maintained by struction work under this appendix A are identical to those set forth in appendix A to this section available to the Assistant § 1910.1050 of this chapter. Secretary and the Director for examination and copying. APPENDIX B TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE (ii) The employer, upon request, shall TECHNICAL GUIDELINES, MDA make any exposure records required by NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section struction work under this appendix B are available for examination and copying identical to those set forth in appendix B to to affected employees, former employ- § 1910.1050 of this chapter. ees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance APPENDIX C TO § 1926.60—MEDICAL with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)–(e) and (g)–(i). SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES FOR MDA (iii) The employer, upon request, NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- shall make employee medical records struction work under this appendix C are required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of identical to those set forth in appendix C to this section available for examination § 1910.1050 of this chapter. and copying to the subject employee, anyone having the specific written con- APPENDIX D TO § 1926.60—SAMPLING AND ANA- sent of the subject employee, and the LYTICAL METHODS FOR MDA MONITORING Assistant Secretary, in accordance AND MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES with 29 CFR 1910.33. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (8) Transfer of records. The employer struction work under this appendix D are shall comply with the requirements identical to those set forth in appendix D to concerning transfer of records set forth § 1910.1050 of this chapter. in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57 (p) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, ployee observation. The employer shall 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296, provide affected employees, or their Jan. 8, 1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR designated representatives, an oppor- 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 tunity to observe the measuring or FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, monitoring of employee exposure to 2008; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17889, MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph Mar. 26, 2012] (f) of this section. § 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, (2) Observation procedures. When ob- placards and labels. servation of the measuring or monitoring of employee exposure to MDA NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- requires entry into areas where the use struction work under this section are iden- of protective clothing and equipment tical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this or respirators is required, the employer chapter. shall provide the observer with per- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00098 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

§ 1926.62 Lead. This section means this standard. (a) Scope. This section applies to all (c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The construction work where an employee employer shall assure that no em- may be occupationally exposed to lead. ployee is exposed to lead at concentra- All construction work excluded from tions greater than fifty micrograms per coverage in the general industry stand- cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3) averaged ard for lead by 29 CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is over an 8-hour period. covered by this standard. Construction (2) If an employee is exposed to lead work is defined as work for construc- for more than 8 hours in any work day tion, alteration and/or repair, including the employees’ allowable exposure, as a painting and decorating. It includes time weighted average (TWA) for that but is not limited to the following: day, shall be reduced according to the (1) Demolition or salvage of struc- following formula: tures where lead or materials containing lead are present; Allowable employee exposure (in μg/m3) (2) Removal or encapsulation of ma- = 400 divided by hours worked in terials containing lead; the day. (3) New construction, alteration, re- (3) When respirators are used to limit pair, or renovation of structures, sub- employee exposure as required under strates, or portions thereof, that con- paragraph (c) of this section and all the tain lead, or materials containing lead; requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (4) Installation of products containing lead; (f) of this section have been met, em- (5) Lead contamination/emergency ployee exposure may be considered to cleanup; be at the level provided by the protec- (6) Transportation, disposal, storage, tion factor of the respirator for those or containment of lead or materials periods the respirator is worn. Those containing lead on the site or location periods may be averaged with exposure at which construction activities are levels during periods when respirators performed, and are not worn to determine the employ- (7) Maintenance operations associ- ee’s daily TWA exposure. ated with the construction activities (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General. described in this paragraph. (i) Each employer who has a workplace (b) Definitions. or operation covered by this standard Action level means employee expo- shall initially determine if any em- sure, without regard to the use of res- ployee may be exposed to lead at or pirators, to an airborne concentration above the action level. of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d) meter of air (30 μg/m3) calculated as an of this section, employee exposure is 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). that exposure which would occur if the Assistant Secretary means the Assist- employee were not using a respirator. ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (iii) With the exception of moni- tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- toring under paragraph (d)(3), where ment of Labor, or designee. monitoring is required under this sec- Competent person means one who is tion, the employer shall collect per- capable of identifying existing and predictable lead hazards in the sur- sonal samples representative of a full roundings or working conditions and shift including at least one sample for who has authorization to take prompt each job classification in each work corrective measures to eliminate them. area either for each shift or for the Director means the Director, National shift with the highest exposure level. Institute for Occupational Safety and (iv) Full shift personal samples shall Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of be representative of the monitored em- Health and Human Services, or des- ployee’s regular, daily exposure to ignee. lead. Lead means metallic lead, all inor- (2) Protection of employees during as- ganic lead compounds, and organic lead sessment of exposure. (i) With respect to soaps. Excluded from this definition the lead related tasks listed in para- are all other organic lead compounds. graph (d)(2)(i) of this section, where

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00099 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

lead is present, until the employer per- (A) Using lead containing mortar; forms an employee exposure assess- lead burning ment as required in paragraph (d) of (B) Where lead containing coatings or this section and documents that the paint are present: rivet busting; power employee performing any of the listed tool cleaning without dust collection tasks is not exposed above the PEL, systems; cleanup activities where dry the employer shall treat the employee expendable abrasives are used; and ab- as if the employee were exposed above rasive blasting enclosure movement the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10) and removal. times the PEL, and shall implement (iv) With respect to the tasks listed employee protective measures pre- in this paragraph (d)(2)(iv), where lead scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this is present, until the employer performs section. The tasks covered by this re- an employee exposure assessment as quirement are: required in this paragraph (d) and doc- (A) Where lead containing coatings uments that the employee performing or paint are present: Manual demoli- any of the listed tasks is not exposed μ 3 tion of structures (e.g, dry wall), man- to lead in excess of 2,500 g/m × ual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun (50 PEL), the employer shall treat the applications, and power tool cleaning employee as if the employee were ex- μ 3 with dust collection systems; posed to lead in excess of 2,500 g/m (B) Spray painting with lead paint. and shall implement employee protective measures as prescribed in para- (ii) In addition, with regard to tasks graph (d)(2)(v) of this section. Where not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where the employer does establish that the the employee has any reason to believe employee is exposed to levels of lead that an employee performing the task below 2,500 μg/m3, the employer may may be exposed to lead in excess of the provide the exposed employee with the PEL, until the employer performs an appropriate respirator prescribed for employee exposure assessment as reuse at such lower exposures, in accord- quired by paragraph (d) of this section ance with paragraph (f) of this section. and documents that the employee’s Interim protection as described in this lead exposure is not above the PEL the paragraph is required where lead con- employer shall treat the employee as if taining coatings or paint are present the employee were exposed above the on structures when performing: PEL and shall implememt employee (v) Until the employer performs an protective measures as prescribed in employee exposure assessment as re- paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. quired under paragraph (d) of this sec- (iii) With respect to the tasks listed tion and determines actual employee in this paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this sec- exposure, the employer shall provide to tion, where lead is present, until the employees performing the tasks de- employer performs an employee expo- scribed in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii), sure assessment as required in this (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section paragraph (d), and documents that the with interim protection as follows: employee performing any of the listed (A) Appropriate respiratory protec- tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 μg/ tion in accordance with paragraph (f) m3, the employer shall treat the em- of this section. ployee as if the employee were exposed (B) Appropriate personal protective to lead in excess of 500 μg/m3 and shall clothing and equipment in accordance implement employee protective meas- with paragraph (g) of this section. ures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) (C) Change areas in accordance with of this section. Where the employer paragraph (i)(2) of this section. does establish that the employee is ex- (D) Hand washing facilities in accord- posed to levels of lead below 500 μg/m3, ance with paragraph (i)(5) of this sec- the employer may provide the exposed tion. employee with the appropriate res- (E) Biological monitoring in accord- pirator prescribed for such use at such ance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this sec- lower exposures, in accordance with tion, to consist of blood sampling and paragraph (f) of this section. The tasks analysis for lead and zinc covered by this requirement are: protoporphyrin levels, and

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00100 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(F) Training as required under para- (A) The employer shall establish and graph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding maintain an accurate record docu- 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; menting the nature and relevancy of training as required under paragraph objective data as specified in paragraph (1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use (n)(4) of this section, where used in as- of respirators; and training in accord- sessing employee exposure in lieu of ance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety train- exposure monitoring. ing and education. (B) Objective data, as described in (3) Basis of initial determination. (i) paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is Except as provided under paragraphs not permitted to be used for exposure (d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section assessment in connection with para- the employer shall monitor employee graph (d)(2) of this section. exposures and shall base initial deter- (4) Positive initial determination and minations on the employee exposure initial monitoring. (i) Where a deter- monitoring results and any of the fol- mination conducted under paragraphs lowing, relevant considerations: (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this section shows (A) Any information, observations, or the possibility of any employee expo- calculations which would indicate em- sure at or above the action level the ployee exposure to lead; employer shall conduct monitoring (B) Any previous measurements of which is representative of the exposure for each employee in the workplace airborne lead; and who is exposed to lead. (C) Any employee complaints of (ii) Where the employer has pre- symptoms which may be attributable viously monitored for lead exposures, to exposure to lead. and the data were obtained within the (ii) Monitoring for the initial deter- past 12 months during work operations mination where performed may be lim- conducted under workplace conditions ited to a representative sample of the closely resembling the processes, type exposed employees who the employer of material, control methods, work reasonably believes are exposed to the practices, and environmental condi- greatest airborne concentrations of tions used and prevailing in the em- lead in the workplace. ployer’s current operations, the em- (iii) Where the employer has pre- ployer may rely on such earlier moni- viously monitored for lead exposures, toring results to satisfy the require- and the data were obtained within the ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) past 12 months during work operations of this section if the sampling and ana- conducted under workplace conditions lytical methods meet the accuracy and closely resembling the processes, type confidence levels of paragraph (d)(9) of of material, control methods, work this section. practices, and environmental condi- (5) Negative initial determination. tions used and prevailing in the em- Where a determination, conducted ployer’s current operations, the em- under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of ployer may rely on such earlier moni- this section is made that no employee toring results to satisfy the require- is exposed to airborne concentrations ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) of lead at or above the action level the of this section if the sampling and ana- employer shall make a written record lytical methods meet the accuracy and of such determination. The record shall confidence levels of paragraph (d)(9) of include at least the information speci- this section. fied in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this sec- (iv) Where the employer has objection and shall also include the date of tive data, demonstrating that a par- determination, location within the ticular product or material containing worksite, and the name of each em- lead or a specific process, operation or ployee monitored. activity involving lead cannot result in (6) Frequency. (i) If the initial deter- employee exposure to lead at or above mination reveals employee exposure to the action level during processing, use, be below the action level further expo- or handling, the employer may rely sure determination need not be re- upon such data instead of imple- peated except as otherwise provided in menting initial monitoring. paragraph (d)(7) of this section.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00101 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) If the initial determination or location that is accessible to employ- subsequent determination reveals em- ees. ployee exposure to be at or above the (ii) Whenever the results indicate action level but at or below the PEL that the representative employee expo- the employer shall perform monitoring sure, without regard to respirators, is in accordance with this paragraph at at or above the PEL the employer shall least every 6 months. The employer include in the written notice a state- shall continue monitoring at the re- ment that the employees exposure was quired frequency until at least two at or above that level and a description consecutive measurements, taken at of the corrective action taken or to be least 7 days apart, are below the action taken to reduce exposure to below that level at which time the employer may level. discontinue monitoring for that em- (9) Accuracy of measurement. The employee except as otherwise provided in ployer shall use a method of moni- paragraph (d)(7) of this section. toring and analysis which has an accu- (iii) If the initial determination re- racy (to a confidence level of 95%) of veals that employee exposure is above not less than plus or minus 25 percent the PEL the employer shall perform for airborne concentrations of lead μ 3 monitoring quarterly. The employer equal to or greater than 30 g/m . shall continue monitoring at the re- (e) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi- quired frequency until at least two neering and work practice controls. The employer shall implement engineering consecutive measurements, taken at and work practice controls, including least 7 days apart, are at or below the administrative controls, to reduce and PEL but at or above the action level at maintain employee exposure to lead to which time the employer shall repeat or below the permissible exposure limit monitoring for that employee at the to the extent that such controls are frequency specified in paragraph feasible. Wherever all feasible engi- (d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as oth- neering and work practices controls erwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of that can be instituted are not suffi- this section. The employer shall con- cient to reduce employee exposure to tinue monitoring at the required fre- or below the permissible exposure limit quency until at least two consecutive prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- measurements, taken at least 7 days tion, the employer shall nonetheless apart, are below the action level at use them to reduce employee exposure which time the employer may dis- to the lowest feasible level and shall continue monitoring for that employee supplement them by the use of res- except as otherwise provided in para- piratory protection that complies with graph (d)(7) of this section. the requirements of paragraph (f) of (7) Additional exposure assessments. this section. Whenever there has been a change of (2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to equipment, process, control, personnel commencement of the job each em- or a new task has been initiated that ployer shall establish and implement a may result in additional employees written compliance program to achieve being exposed to lead at or above the compliance with paragraph (c) of this action level or may result in employees section. already exposed at or above the action (ii) Written plans for these compli- level being exposed above the PEL, the ance programs shall include at least employer shall conduct additional the following: monitoring in accordance with this (A) A description of each activity in paragraph. which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment (8) Employee notification. (i) The em- used, material involved, controls in ployer must, as soon as possible but no place, crew size, employee job respon- later than 5 working days after the re- sibilities, operating procedures and ceipt of the results of any monitoring maintenance practices; performed under this section, notify (B) A description of the specific each affected employee of these results means that will be employed to achieve either individually in writing or by compliance and, where engineering posting the results in an appropriate controls are required engineering plans

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00102 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

and studies used to determine methods (ii) Duration and exposure levels at selected for controlling exposure to each job or work station where each af- lead; fected employee is located; and (C) A report of the technology consid- (iii) Any other information which ered in meeting the PEL; may be useful in assessing the reli- (D) Air monitoring data which docu- ability of administrative controls to ments the source of lead emissions; reduce exposure to lead. (E) A detailed schedule for implemen- (5) The employer shall ensure that, to tation of the program, including docu- the extent relevant, employees follow mentation such as copies of purchase good work practices such as described orders for equipment, construction in appendix B of this section. contracts, etc.; (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General. (F) A work practice program which For employees who use respirators re- includes items required under para- quired by this section, the employer graphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section must provide each employee an appro- and incorporates other relevant work priate respirator that complies with practices such as those specified in the requirements of this paragraph. paragraph (e)(5) of this section; Respirators must be used during: (G) An administrative control sched- (i) Periods when an employee’s expo- ule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this sure to lead exceeds the PEL. section, if applicable; (ii) Work operations for which engi- (H) A description of arrangements neering and work-practice controls are made among contractors on multi-con- not sufficient to reduce employee expo- tractor sites with respect to informing sures to or below the PEL. affected employees of potential expo- (iii) Periods when an employee re- sure to lead and with respect to respon- quests a respirator. sibility for compliance with this section as set-forth in § 1926.16. (iv) Periods when respirators are re- (I) Other relevant information. quired to provide interim protection of (iii) The compliance program shall employees while they perform the op- provide for frequent and regular inspec- erations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of tions of job sites, materials, and equip- this section. ment to be made by a competent per- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em- son. ployer must implement a respiratory (iv) Written programs shall be sub- protection program in accordance with mitted upon request to any affected § 1910.134(b) through (d) (except employee or authorized employee rep- (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which resentatives, to the Assistant Sec- covers each employee required by this retary and the Director, and shall be section to use a respirator. available at the worksite for examina- (ii) If an employee has breathing dif- tion and copying by the Assistant Sec- ficulty during fit testing or respirator retary and the Director. use, the employer must provide the em- (v) Written programs must be revised ployee with a medical examination in and updated at least annually to re- accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B) flect the current status of the program. of this section to determine whether or (3) Mechanical ventilation. When ven- not the employee can use a respirator tilation is used to control lead expo- while performing the required duty. sure, the employer shall evaluate the (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers mechanical performance of the system must: in controlling exposure as necessary to (A) Select, and provide to employees, maintain its effectiveness. the appropriate respirators specified in (4) Administrative controls. If adminis- paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR trative controls are used as a means of 1910.134. reducing employees TWA exposure to (B) Provide employees with a full lead, the employer shall establish and facepiece respirator instead of a half implement a job rotation schedule mask respirator for protection against which includes: lead aerosols that may cause eye or (i) Name or identification number of skin irritation at the use concentra- each affected employee; tions.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00103 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(C) Provide HEPA filters for powered disposed of, is placed in a closed con- and non-powered air-purifying res- tainer in the change area which pre- pirators. vents dispersion of lead outside the (ii) The employer must provide a container. powered air-purifying respirator when (vi) The employer shall inform in an employee chooses to use such a res- writing any person who cleans or laun- pirator and it will provide adequate ders protective clothing or equipment protection to the employee. of the potentially harmful effects of ex- (g) Protective work clothing and equip- posure to lead. ment—(1) Provision and use. Where an (vii)(A) The employer shall ensure employee is exposed to lead above the that the containers of contaminated PEL without regard to the use of res- protective clothing and equipment re- pirators, where employees are exposed quired by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this to lead compounds which may cause section are labeled as follows: skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arse- DANGER: CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT nate, lead azide), and as interim pro- CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. MAY tection for employees performing tasks DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this CHILD. CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CEN- section, the employer shall provide at TRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM. DO NOT EAT, no cost to the employee and assure DRINK OR SMOKE WHEN HANDLING. DO that the employee uses appropriate NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR protective work clothing and equip- SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMI- NATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE ment that prevents contamination of WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR the employee and the employee’s gar- FEDERAL REGULATIONS. ments such as, but not limited to: (i) Coveralls or similar full-body (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers work clothing; may include the following information (ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or dispos- on bags or containers of contaminated able shoe coverlets; and protective clothing and equipment re- (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or quired by paragraph (g)(2)(v) in lieu of other appropriate protective equip- the labeling requirements in paragraph ment which complies with § 1910.133 of (g)(2)(vii)(A) of this section: this chapter. Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead. (2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking. employer shall provide the protective Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of accordance with applicable local, state, or this section in a clean and dry condi- federal regulations. tion at least weekly, and daily to em- (viii) The employer shall prohibit the ployees whose exposure levels without removal of lead from protective cloth- regard to a respirator are over 200 μg/ ing or equipment by blowing, shaking, m3 of lead as an 8-hour TWA. or any other means which disperses (ii) The employer shall provide for lead into the air. the cleaning, laundering, and disposal (h) Housekeeping—(1) All surfaces of protective clothing and equipment shall be maintained as free as prac- required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec- ticable of accumulations of lead. tion. (2) Clean-up of floors and other sur- (iii) The employer shall repair or re- faces where lead accumulates shall place required protective clothing and wherever possible, be cleaned by equipment as needed to maintain their vacuuming or other methods that min- effectiveness. imize the likelihood of lead becoming (iv) The employer shall assure that airborne. all protective clothing is removed at (3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, the completion of a work shift only in and brushing may be used only where change areas provided for that purpose vacuuming or other equally effective as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this methods have been tried and found not section. to be effective. (v) The employer shall assure that (4) Where vacuuming methods are se- contaminated protective clothing lected, the vacuums shall be equipped which is to be cleaned, laundered, or with HEPA filters and used and

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00104 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

emptied in a manner which minimizes lead is above the PEL, without regard the reentry of lead into the workplace. to the use of a respirator, wash their (5) Compressed air shall not be used hands and face prior to eating, drink- to remove lead from any surface unless ing, smoking or applying cosmetics. the compressed air is used in conjunc- (iv) The employer shall assure that tion with a ventilation system de- employees do not enter lunchroom fa- signed to capture the airborne dust cre- cilities or eating areas with protective ated by the compressed air. work clothing or equipment unless sur- (i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1) face lead dust has been removed by The employer shall assure that in areas vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other where employees are exposed to lead cleaning method that limits dispersion above the PEL without regard to the of lead dust. use of respirators, food or beverage is (5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The em- not present or consumed, tobacco prod- ployer shall provide adequate ucts are not present or used, and cos- handwashing facilities for use by em- metics are not applied. ployees exposed to lead in accordance (2) Change areas. (i) The employer with 29 CFR 1926.51(f). shall provide clean change areas for (ii) Where showers are not provided employees whose airborne exposure to the employer shall assure that employ- lead is above the PEL, and as interim ees wash their hands and face at the protection for employees performing end of the work-shift. tasks as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of (j) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i) this section, without regard to the use The employer shall make available ini- of respirators. tial medical surveillance to employees (ii) The employer shall assure that occupationally exposed on any day to change areas are equipped with sepa- lead at or above the action level. Ini- rate storage facilities for protective tial medical surveillance consists of bi- work clothing and equipment and for ological monitoring in the form of street clothes which prevent cross-con- blood sampling and analysis for lead tamination. and zinc protoporphyrin levels. (iii) The employer shall assure that (ii) The employer shall institute a employees do not leave the workplace medical surveillance program in ac- wearing any protective clothing or cordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and equipment that is required to be worn (j)(3) of this section for all employees during the work shift. who are or may be exposed by the em- (3) Showers. (i) The employer shall ployer at or above the action level for provide shower facilities, where fea- more than 30 days in any consecutive sible, for use by employees whose air- 12 months; borne exposure to lead is above the (iii) The employer shall assure that PEL. all medical examinations and proce- (ii) The employer shall assure, where dures are performed by or under the su- shower facilities are available, that pervision of a licensed physician. employees shower at the end of the (iv) The employer shall make avail- work shift and shall provide an ade- able the required medical surveillance quate supply of cleansing agents and including multiple physician review towels for use by affected employees. under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost (4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer to employees and at a reasonable time shall provide lunchroom facilities or and place. eating areas for employees whose air- (2) Biological monitoring—(i) Blood lead borne exposure to lead is above the and ZPP level sampling and analysis. PEL, without regard to the use of res- The employer shall make available bio- pirators. logical monitoring in the form of blood (ii) The employer shall assure that sampling and analysis for lead and zinc lunchroom facilities or eating areas protoporphyrin levels to each employee are as free as practicable from lead covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and contamination and are readily acces- (ii) of this section on the following sible to employees. schedule: (iii) The employer shall assure that (A) For each employee covered under employees whose airborne exposure to paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00105 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

least every 2 months for the first 6 ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead months and every 6 months thereafter; level at or above 40 μg/dl; (B) For each employee covered under (B) As soon as possible, upon notifi- paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this sec- cation by an employee either that the tion whose last blood sampling and employee has developed signs or symp- analysis indicated a blood lead level at toms commonly associated with lead or above 40 μg/dl, at least every two intoxication, that the employee desires months. This frequency shall continue medical advice concerning the effects until two consecutive blood samples of current or past exposure to lead on and analyses indicate a blood lead level the employee’s ability to procreate a below 40 μg/dl; and healthy child, that the employee is (C) For each employee who is re- pregnant, or that the employee has moved from exposure to lead due to an demonstrated difficulty in breathing elevated blood lead level at least during a respirator fitting test or dur- monthly during the removal period. ing use; and (ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. (C) As medically appropriate for each Whenever the results of a blood lead employee either removed from expo- level test indicate that an employee’s sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining blood lead level is at or above the nu- material impairment to health, or oth- merical criterion for medical removal erwise limited pursuant to a final med- under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this sec- ical determination. tion, the employer shall provide a sec- (ii) Content. The content of medical ond (follow-up) blood sampling test examinations made available pursuant within two weeks after the employer to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)–(C) of this sec- receives the results of the first blood tion shall be determined by an exam- sampling test. ining physician and, if requested by an (iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sam- employee, shall include pregnancy pling and analysis. Blood lead level testing or laboratory evaluation of sampling and analysis provided pursu- male fertility. Medical examinations ant to this section shall have an accu- made available pursuant to paragraph racy (to a confidence level of 95 per- (j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include cent) within plus or minus 15 percent the following elements: μ or 6 g/dl, whichever is greater, and (A) A detailed work history and a shall be conducted by a laboratory ap- medical history, with particular atten- proved by OSHA. tion to past lead exposure (occupa- (iv) Employee notification. (A) Within tional and non-occupational), personal five working days after the receipt of habits (smoking, hygiene), and past biological monitoring results, the em- gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal, ployer shall notify each employee in cardiovascular, reproductive and neu- writing of his or her blood lead level; rological problems; and (B) A thorough physical examination, (B) The employer shall notify each with particular attention to teeth, employee whose blood lead level is at gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, or above 40 μg/dl that the standard re- renal, cardiovascular, and neurological quires temporary medical removal systems. Pulmonary status should be with Medical Removal Protection ben- evaluated if respiratory protection will efits when an employee’s blood lead be used; level is at or above the numerical cri- (C) A blood pressure measurement; terion for medical removal under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section. (D) A blood sample and analysis (3) Medical examinations and consulta- which determines: tions—(i) Frequency. The employer shall (1) Blood lead level; make available medical examinations (2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter- and consultations to each employee minations, red cell indices, and exam- covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of ination of peripheral smear mor- this section on the following schedule: phology; (A) At least annually for each em- (3) Zinc protoporphyrin; ployee for whom a blood sampling test (4) Blood urea nitrogen; and, conducted at any time during the pre- (5) Serum creatinine;

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00106 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(E) A routine urinalysis with micro- the third physician deems necessary to scopic examination; and resolve the disagreement of the prior (F) Any laboratory or other test rel- physicians. evant to lead exposure which the exam- (E) The employer shall act consistent ining physician deems necessary by with the findings, determinations and sound medical practice. recommendations of the third physi- (iii) Multiple physician review mecha- cian, unless the employer and the em- nism. (A) If the employer selects the ployee reach an agreement which is initial physician who conducts any otherwise consistent with the rec- medical examination or consultation ommendations of at least one of the provided to an employee under this sec- three physicians. tion, the employee may designate a (iv) Information provided to examining second physician: and consulting physicians. (A) The em- (1) To review any findings, deter- ployer shall provide an initial physi- minations or recommendations of the cian conducting a medical examination initial physician; and or consultation under this section with (2) To conduct such examinations, the following information: consultations, and laboratory tests as (1) A copy of this regulation for lead the second physician deems necessary including all Appendices; to facilitate this review. (2) A description of the affected em- (B) The employer shall promptly no- ployee’s duties as they relate to the tify an employee of the right to seek a employee’s exposure; second medical opinion after each oc- (3) The employee’s exposure level or casion that an initial physician con- anticipated exposure level to lead and ducts a medical examination or con- to any other toxic substance (if appli- sultation pursuant to this section. The cable); employer may condition its participa- (4) A description of any personal pro- tion in, and payment for, the multiple tective equipment used or to be used; physician review mechanism upon the (5) Prior blood lead determinations; employee doing the following within and fifteen (15) days after receipt of the (6) All prior written medical opinions foregoing notification, or receipt of the concerning the employee in the em- initial physician’s written opinion, ployer’s possession or control. whichever is later: (B) The employer shall provide the (1) The employee informing the em- foregoing information to a second or ployer that he or she intends to seek a third physician conducting a medical second medical opinion, and examination or consultation under this (2) The employee initiating steps to section upon request either by the sec- make an appointment with a second ond or third physician, or by the em- physician. ployee. (C) If the findings, determinations or (v) Written medical opinions. (A) The recommendations of the second physi- employer shall obtain and furnish the cian differ from those of the initial employee with a copy of a written med- physician, then the employer and the ical opinion from each examining or employee shall assure that efforts are consulting physician which contains made for the two physicians to resolve only the following information: any disagreement. (1) The physician’s opinion as to (D) If the two physicians have been whether the employee has any detected unable to quickly resolve their dis- medical condition which would place agreement, then the employer and the the employee at increased risk of ma- employee through their respective phy- terial impairment of the employee’s sicians shall designate a third physi- health from exposure to lead; cian: (2) Any recommended special protec- (1) To review any findings, deter- tive measures to be provided to the em- minations or recommendations of the ployee, or limitations to be placed prior physicians; and upon the employee’s exposure to lead; (2) To conduct such examinations, (3) Any recommended limitation consultations, laboratory tests and dis- upon the employee’s use of respirators, cussions with the prior physicians as including a determination of whether

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00107 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the employee can wear a powered air (ii) Temporary removal due to a final purifying respirator if a physician de- medical determination. (A) The employer termines that the employee cannot shall remove an employee from work wear a negative pressure respirator; having an exposure to lead at or above and the action level on each occasion that (4) The results of the blood lead de- a final medical determination results terminations. in a medical finding, determination, or (B) The employer shall instruct each opinion that the employee has a de- examining and consulting physician to: tected medical condition which places (1) Not reveal either in the written the employee at increased risk of ma- opinion or orally, or in any other terial impairment to health from expo- means of communication with the em- sure to lead. ployer, findings, including laboratory (B) For the purposes of this section, results, or diagnoses unrelated to an the phrase final medical determination employee’s occupational exposure to means the written medical opinion on lead; and the employees’ health status by the ex- (2) Advise the employee of any med- amining physician or, where relevant, ical condition, occupational or non- the outcome of the multiple physician occupational, which dictates further review mechanism or alternate medical medical examination or treatment. determination mechanism used pursu- (vi) Alternate physician determination ant to the medical surveillance provi- mechanisms. The employer and an em- sions of this section. ployee or authorized employee rep- (C) Where a final medical determina- resentative may agree upon the use of tion results in any recommended spe- any alternate physician determination cial protective measures for an em- mechanism in lieu of the multiple phy- ployee, or limitations on an employee’s sician review mechanism provided by exposure to lead, the employer shall paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of this section so implement and act consistent with the long as the alternate mechanism is as recommendation. expeditious and protective as the re- (iii) Return of the employee to former quirements contained in this para- job status. (A) The employer shall re- graph. turn an employee to his or her former (4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall job status: assure that any person whom he re- (1) For an employee removed due to a tains, employs, supervises or controls blood lead level at or above 50 μg/dl does not engage in prophylactic chela- when two consecutive blood sampling tion of any employee at any time. tests indicate that the employee’s (ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic che- blood lead level is below 40 μg/dl; lation is to be performed by any person (2) For an employee removed due to a in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, final medical determination, when a the employer shall assure that it be subsequent final medical determina- done under the supervision of a lition results in a medical finding, deter- censed physician in a clinical setting mination, or opinion that the employee with thorough and appropriate medical no longer has a detected medical condi- monitoring and that the employee is tion which places the employee at in- notified in writing prior to its occur- creased risk of material impairment to rence. health from exposure to lead. (k) Medical removal protection—(1) (B) For the purposes of this section, Temporary medical removal and return of the requirement that an employer re- an employee—(i) Temporary removal due turn an employee to his or her former to elevated blood lead level. The em- job status is not intended to expand ployer shall remove an employee from upon or restrict any rights an em- work having an exposure to lead at or ployee has or would have had, absent above the action level on each occasion temporary medical removal, to a spe- that a periodic and a follow-up blood cific job classification or position sampling test conducted pursuant to under the terms of a collective bar- this section indicate that the employ- gaining agreement. ee’s blood lead level is at or above 50 (iv) Removal of other employee special μg/dl; and, protective measure or limitations. The

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00108 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

employer shall remove any limitations section, the requirement that an em- placed on an employee or end any spe- ployer provide medical removal protec- cial protective measures provided to an tion benefits means that, as long as the employee pursuant to a final medical job the employee was removed from determination when a subsequent final continues, the employer shall maintain medical determination indicates that the total normal earnings, seniority the limitations or special protective and other employment rights and bene- measures are no longer necessary. fits of an employee, including the em- (v) Employer options pending a final ployee’s right to his or her former job medical determination. Where the mul- status as though the employee had not tiple physician review mechanism, or been medically removed from the em- alternate medical determination mech- ployee’s job or otherwise medically anism used pursuant to the medical limited. surveillance provisions of this section, (iii) Follow-up medical surveillance has not yet resulted in a final medical during the period of employee removal or determination with respect to an em- limitation. During the period of time ployee, the employer shall act as fol- that an employee is medically removed lows: from his or her job or otherwise medi- (A) Removal. The employer may re- cally limited, the employer may condi- move the employee from exposure to tion the provision of medical removal lead, provide special protective meas- protection benefits upon the employ- ures to the employee, or place limita- ee’s participation in follow-up medical tions upon the employee, consistent surveillance made available pursuant with the medical findings, determina- to this section. tions, or recommendations of any of (iv) Workers’ compensation claims. If a the physicians who have reviewed the removed employee files a claim for employee’s health status. workers’ compensation payments for a (B) Return. The employer may return lead-related disability, then the em- the employee to his or her former job ployer shall continue to provide med- status, end any special protective ical removal protection benefits pend- measures provided to the employee, ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- and remove any limitations placed tent that an award is made to the em- upon the employee, consistent with the ployee for earnings lost during the pe- medical findings, determinations, or riod of removal, the employer’s med- recommendations of any of the physi- ical removal protection obligation cians who have reviewed the employ- shall be reduced by such amount. The ee’s health status, with two exceptions. employer shall receive no credit for (1) If the initial removal, special pro- workers’ compensation payments re- tection, or limitation of the employee ceived by the employee for treatment- resulted from a final medical deter- related expenses. mination which differed from the find- (v) Other credits. The employer’s obli- ings, determinations, or recommenda- gation to provide medical removal pro- tions of the initial physician or; tection benefits to a removed employee (2) If the employee has been on re- shall be reduced to the extent that the moval status for the preceding eight- employee receives compensation for een months due to an elevated blood earnings lost during the period of re- lead level, then the employer shall moval either from a publicly or em- await a final medical determination. ployer-funded compensation program, (2) Medical removal protection bene- or receives income from employment fits—(i) Provision of medical removal pro- with another employer made possible tection benefits. The employer shall pro- by virtue of the employee’s removal. vide an employee up to eighteen (18) (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of months of medical removal protection an employee. Where an employer, al- benefits on each occasion that an em- though not required by this section to ployee is removed from exposure to do so, removes an employee from expo- lead or otherwise limited pursuant to sure to lead or otherwise places limita- this section. tions on an employee due to the effects (ii) Definition of medical removal proof lead exposure on the employee’s tection benefits. For the purposes of this medical condition, the employer shall

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00109 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

provide medical removal protection the adverse health effects associated benefits to the employee equal to that with excessive exposure to lead (with required by paragraph (k)(2) (i) and (ii) particular attention to the adverse re- of this section. productive effects on both males and (l) Communication of hazards—(1) Gen- females and hazards to the fetus and eral—(i) Hazard communication. The em- additional precautions for employees ployer shall include lead in the pro- who are pregnant); gram established to comply with the (v) The engineering controls and Hazard Communication Standard work practices associated with the em- (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall ployee’s job assignment including ensure that each employee has access training of employees to follow rel- to labels on containers of lead and safe- evant good work practices described in ty data sheets, and is trained in ac- appendix B of this section; cordance with the provisions of HCS (vi) The contents of any compliance and paragraph (l) of this section. The plan in effect; employer shall ensure that at least the (vii) Instructions to employees that following hazards are addressed: chelating agents should not routinely (A) Reproductive/developmental tox- be used to remove lead from their bod- icity; ies and should not be used at all except (B) Central nervous system effects; under the direction of a licensed physi- (C) Kidney effects; cian; and (D) Blood effects; and (viii) The employee’s right of access (E) Acute toxicity effects. to records under 29 CFR 1910.20. (ii) The employer shall train each (3) Access to information and training employee who is subject to exposure to materials. (i) The employer shall make lead at or above the action level on any readily available to all affected em- day, or who is subject to exposure to ployees a copy of this standard and its lead compounds which may cause skin appendices. or eye irritation (e.g., lead arsenate, (ii) The employer shall provide, upon lead azide), in accordance with the re- request, all materials relating to the quirements of this section. The em- employee information and training ployer shall institute a training pro- program to affected employees and gram and ensure employee participa- their designated representatives, and tion in the program. to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- (iii) The employer shall provide the rector. training program as initial training (m) Signs—(1) General. (i) The em- prior to the time of job assignment or ployer shall post the following warning prior to the start up date for this re- signs in each work area where an em- quirement, whichever comes last. ployee’s exposure to lead is above the (iv) The employer shall also provide PEL. the training program at least annually for each employee who is subject to DANGER lead exposure at or above the action LEAD WORK AREA level on any day. MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UN- (2) Training program. The employer BORN CHILD shall assure that each employee is CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL trained in the following: NERVOUS SYSTEM (i) The content of this standard and DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA its appendices; (ii) The specific nature of the oper- (ii) The employer shall ensure that ations which could result in exposure no statement appears on or near any to lead above the action level; sign required by this paragraph (m) (iii) The purpose, proper selection, that contradicts or detracts from the fitting, use, and limitations of res- meaning of the required sign. pirators; (iii) The employer shall ensure that (iv) The purpose and a description of signs required by this paragraph (m) the medical surveillance program, and are illuminated and cleaned as nec- the medical removal protection pro- essary so that the legend is readily gram including information concerning visible.

100

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00110 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(iv) The employer may use signs re- (D) Any employee medical com- quired by other statutes, regulations or plaints related to exposure to lead. ordinances in addition to, or in com- (iii) The employer shall keep, or as- bination with, signs required by this sure that the examining physician paragraph (m). keeps, the following medical records: (v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers (A) A copy of the medical examina- may use the following legend in lieu of tion results including medical and that specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of work history required under paragraph this section: (j) of this section; WARNING (B) A description of the laboratory LEAD WORK AREA procedures and a copy of any standards POISON or guidelines used to interpret the test NO SMOKING OR EATING results or references to that informa- (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure assess- tion; ment. (i) The employer shall establish (C) A copy of the results of biological and maintain an accurate record of all monitoring. monitoring and other data used in con- (iv) The employer shall maintain or ducting employee exposure assess- assure that the physician maintains ments as required in paragraph (d) of medical records in accordance with the this section. provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33. (ii) Exposure monitoring records (3) Medical removals. (i) The employer shall include: shall establish and maintain an accu- (A) The date(s), number, duration, lo- rate record for each employee removed cation and results of each of the sam- from current exposure to lead pursuant ples taken if any, including a descrip- to paragraph (k) of this section. tion of the sampling procedure used to (ii) Each record shall include: determine representative employee ex- (A) The name of the employee; posure where applicable; (B) The date of each occasion that (B) A description of the sampling and the employee was removed from cur- analytical methods used and evidence rent exposure to lead as well as the of their accuracy; corresponding date on which the em- (C) The type of respiratory protective ployee was returned to his or her devices worn, if any; former job status; (D) Name and job classification of the employee monitored and of all (C) A brief explanation of how each other employees whose exposure the removal was or is being accomplished; measurement is intended to represent; and and (D) A statement with respect to each (E) The environmental variables that removal indicating whether or not the could affect the measurement of em- reason for the removal was an elevated ployee exposure. blood lead level. (iii) The employer shall maintain (iii) The employer shall maintain monitoring and other exposure assess- each medical removal record for at ment records in accordance with the least the duration of an employee’s em- provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33. ployment. (2) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- (4) Objective data for exemption from re- ployer shall establish and maintain an quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For accurate record for each employee sub- purposes of this section, objective data ject to medical surveillance as required are information demonstrating that a by paragraph (j) of this section. particular product or material con- (ii) This record shall include: taining lead or a specific process, oper- (A) The name and description of the ation, or activity involving lead cannot duties of the employee; release dust or fumes in concentrations (B) A copy of the physician’s written at or above the action level under any opinions; expected conditions of use. Objective (C) Results of any airborne exposure data can be obtained from an industry- monitoring done on or for that em- wide study or from laboratory product ployee and provided to the physician; test results from manufacturers of lead and containing products or materials. The

101

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00111 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

data the employer uses from an indus- is not intended by itself, to create any try-wide survey must be obtained additional obligations not otherwise under workplace conditions closely re- imposed by this standard nor detract sembling the processes, types of mate- from any existing obligation. rial, control methods, work practices and environmental conditions in the APPENDIX A TO § 1926.62—SUBSTANCE DATA SHEET FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO LEAD employer’s current operations. (ii) The employer shall maintain the I. Substance Identification record of the objective data relied upon for at least 30 years. A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a heavy metal at room temperature and pressure and (5) Availability. The employer shall is a basic chemical element. It can combine make available upon request all with various other substances to form nu- records required to be maintained by merous lead compounds. paragraph (n) of this section to affected B. Compounds covered by the standard: The employees, former employees, and word lead when used in this interim final their designated representatives, and standard means elemental lead, all inorganic to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- lead compounds and a class of organic lead rector for examination and copying. compounds called lead soaps. This standard does not apply to other organic lead com- (6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever pounds. the employer ceases to do business, the C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in several successor employer shall receive and different occupations in the construction in- retain all records required to be main- dustry, including demolition or salvage of tained by paragraph (n) of this section. structures where lead or lead-containing ma- (ii) The employer shall also comply terials are present; removal or encapsulation with any additional requirements in- of lead-containing materials, new construc- volving the transfer of records set forth tion, alteration, repair, or renovation of in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). structures that contain lead or materials containing lead; installation of products con- (o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- taining lead. In addition, there are construc- ployee observation. The employer shall tion related activities where exposure to provide affected employees or their lead may occur, including transportation, designated representatives an oppor- disposal, storage, or containment of lead or tunity to observe any monitoring of materials containing lead on construction employee exposure to lead conducted sites, and maintenance operations associated pursuant to paragraph (d) of this sec- with construction activities. tion. D. Permissible exposure: The permissible exposure limit (PEL) set by the standard is 50 (2) Observation procedures. (i) When- micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50 ever observation of the monitoring of μg/m3), averaged over an 8-hour workday. employee exposure to lead requires E. Action level: The interim final standard entry into an area where the use of res- establishes an action level of 30 micrograms pirators, protective clothing or equip- of lead per cubic meter of air (30 μg/m3), aver- ment is required, the employer shall aged over an 8-hour workday. The action provide the observer with and assure level triggers several ancillary provisions of the use of such respirators, clothing the standard such as exposure monitoring, and equipment, and shall require the medical surveillance, and training. observer to comply with all other ap- II. Health Hazard Data plicable safety and health procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the A. Ways in which lead enters your body. When absorbed into your body in certain monitoring, observers shall be entitled doses, lead is a toxic substance. The object of to: the lead standard is to prevent absorption of (A) Receive an explanation of the harmful quantities of lead. The standard is measurement procedures; intended to protect you not only from the (B) Observe all steps related to the immediate toxic effects of lead, but also monitoring of lead performed at the from the serious toxic effects that may not place of exposure; and become apparent until years of exposure (C) Record the results obtained or re- have passed. Lead can be absorbed into your body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion ceive copies of the results when re- (eating). Lead (except for certain organic turned by the laboratory. lead compounds not covered by the standard, (p) Appendices. The information con- such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed tained in the appendices to this section through your skin. When lead is scattered in

102

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00112 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

the air as a dust, fume respiratory tract. In- drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, rest- halation of airborne lead is generally the lessness, irritability, tremor, and convul- most important source of occupational lead sions. It may arise suddenly with the onset absorption. You can also absorb lead through of seizures, followed by coma, and death. your digestive system if lead gets into your There is a tendency for muscular weakness mouth and is swallowed. If you handle food, to develop at the same time. This weakness cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up may progress to paralysis often observed as which have lead on them or handle them a characteristic ‘‘wrist drop’’ or ‘‘foot drop’’ with hands contaminated with lead, this will and is a manifestation of a disease to the contribute to ingestion. A significant por- nervous system called peripheral neurop- tion of the lead that you inhale or ingest athy. Chronic overexposure to lead also re- gets into your blood stream. Once in your sults in kidney disease with few, if any, blood stream, lead is circulated throughout symptoms appearing until extensive and your body and stored in various organs and most likely permanent kidney damage has body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly fil- occurred. Routine laboratory tests reveal the tered out of your body and excreted, but presence of this kidney disease only after some remains in the blood and other tissues. about two-thirds of kidney function is lost. As exposure to lead continues, the amount When overt symptoms of urinary dysfunc- stored in your body will increase if you are tion arise, it is often too late to correct or absorbing more lead than your body is ex- prevent worsening conditions, and progres- creting. Even though you may not be aware sion to kidney dialysis or death is possible. of any immediate symptoms of disease, this Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the re- lead stored in your tissues can be slowly productive systems of both men and women. causing irreversible damage, first to indi- Overexposure to lead may result in decreased vidual cells, then to your organs and whole sex drive, impotence and sterility in men. body systems. Lead can alter the structure of sperm cells B. Effects of overexposure to lead—(1) Short raising the risk of birth defects. There is evi- term (acute) overexposure. Lead is a potent, dence of miscarriage and stillbirth in women systemic poison that serves no known useful whose husbands were exposed to lead or who function once absorbed by your body. Taken were exposed to lead themselves. Lead expo- in large enough doses, lead can kill you in a sure also may result in decreased fertility, matter of days. A condition affecting the and abnormal menstrual cycles in women. brain called acute encephalopathy may arise The course of pregnancy may be adversely which develops quickly to seizures, coma, affected by exposure to lead since lead and death from cardiorespiratory arrest. A crosses the placental barrier and poses risks short term dose of lead can lead to acute to developing fetuses. Children born of par- encephalopathy. Short term occupational ex- ents either one of whom were exposed to exposures of this magnitude are highly un- cess lead levels are more likely to have birth usual, but not impossible. Similar forms of defects, mental retardation, behavioral dis- encephalopathy may, however, arise from ex- orders or die during the first year of child- tended, chronic exposure to lower doses of hood. Overexposure to lead also disrupts the lead. There is no sharp dividing line between blood-forming system resulting in decreased rapidly developing acute effects of lead, and hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that chronic effects which take longer to acquire. carries oxygen to the cells) and ultimately Lead adversely affects numerous body sys- anemia. Anemia is characterized by weak- tems, and causes forms of health impairment ness, pallor and fatigability as a result of de- and disease which arise after periods of expo- creased oxygen carrying capacity in the sure as short as days or as long as several blood. years. (3) Health protection goals of the standard. (2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Chron- Prevention of adverse health effects for most ic overexposure to lead may result in severe workers from exposure to lead throughout a damage to your blood-forming, nervous, uri- working lifetime requires that a worker’s nary and reproductive systems. Some com- blood lead level (BLL, also expressed as PbB) mon symptoms of chronic overexposure in- be maintained at or below forty micrograms clude loss of appetite, metallic taste in the per deciliter of whole blood (40 μg/dl). The mouth, anxiety, constipation, nausea, pallor, blood lead levels of workers (both male and excessive tiredness, weakness, insomnia, female workers) who intend to have children headache, nervous irritability, muscle and should be maintained below 30 μg/dl to mini- joint pain or soreness, fine tremors, numb- mize adverse reproductive health effects to ness, dizziness, hyperactivity and colic. In the parents and to the developing fetus. The lead colic there may be severe abdominal measurement of your blood lead level (BLL) pain. Damage to the central nervous system is the most useful indicator of the amount of in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead particular is one of the most severe forms of levels are most often reported in units of lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal, milligrams (mg) or micrograms (μg) of lead form of encephalopathy may be preceded by (1 mg = 1000 μg) per 100 grams (100g), 100 mil- vomiting, a feeling of dullness progressing to liliters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood.

103

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00113 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

These three units are essentially the same. or while wearing a respirator. In each of Sometime BLLs are expressed in the form of these cases, your employer must make avail- mg% or μg%. This is a shorthand notation able to you appropriate medical examina- for 100g, 100 ml, or dl. (References to BLL tions or consultations. These must be pro- measurements in this standard are expressed vided at no cost to you and at a reasonable in the form of μg/dl.) time and place. The standard contains a pro- BLL measurements show the amount of cedure whereby you can obtain a second lead circulating in your blood stream, but do opinion by a physician of your choice if your not give any information about the amount employer selected the initial physician. of lead stored in your various tissues. BLL measurements merely show current absorp- APPENDIX B TO § 1926.62—EMPLOYEE tion of lead, not the effect that lead is hav- STANDARD SUMMARY ing on your body or the effects that past lead exposure may have already caused. Past re- This appendix summarizes key provisions search into lead-related diseases, however, of the interim final standard for lead in con- has focused heavily on associations between struction that you as a worker should be- BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your come familiar with. BLL is an important indicator of the likelihood that you will gradually acquire a lead- I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)— related health impairment or disease. Paragraph (C) Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 The standard sets a permissible exposure μg/dl, your risk of disease increases. There is limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of lead per a wide variability of individual response to cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3), averaged over lead, thus it is difficult to say that a par- an 8-hour workday which is referred to as a ticular BLL in a given person will cause a time-weighted average (TWA). This is the particular effect. Studies have associated highest level of lead in air to which you may fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150 be permissibly exposed over an 8-hour work- μg/dl. Other studies have shown other forms day. However, since this is an 8-hour aver- of diseases in some workers with BLLs well age, short exposures above the PEL are per- μ below 80 g/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indi- mitted so long as for each 8-hour work day cator of the risks to your health, but one your average exposure does not exceed this other factor is also extremely important. level. This interim final standard, however, This factor is the length of time you have takes into account the fact that your daily had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large 8-hour workday as the result of overtime or quantities of lead are being gradually stored other alterations in your work schedule. To in your organs and tissues (body burden). deal with this situation, the standard con- The greater your overall body burden, the tains a formula which reduces your permis- greater the chances of substantial perma- sible exposure when you are exposed more nent damage. The best way to prevent all than 8 hours. For example, if you are exposed forms of lead-related impairments and dis- to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum per- eases—both short term and long term—is to mitted average exposure would be 40 μg/m3. maintain your BLL below 40 μg/dl. The provisions of the standard are designed with this II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D) end in mind. Your employer has prime responsibility to If lead is present in your workplace in any assure that the provisions of the standard quantity, your employer is required to make are complied with both by the company and an initial determination of whether any em- by individual workers. You, as a worker, ployee’s exposure to lead exceeds the action however, also have a responsibility to assist level (30 μg/m3 averaged over an 8-hour day). your employer in complying with the stand- Employee exposure is that exposure which ard. You can play a key role in protecting would occur if the employee were not using your own health by learning about the lead a respirator. This initial determination re- hazards and their control, learning what the quires your employer to monitor workers’ standard requires, following the standard exposures unless he or she has objective data where it governs your own actions, and see- which can demonstrate conclusively that no ing that your employer complies with provi- employee will be exposed to lead in excess of sions governing his or her actions. the action level. Where objective data is used (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health in lieu of actual monitoring the employer problems. You should immediately notify must establish and maintain an accurate your employer if you develop signs or symp- record, documenting its relevancy in assess- toms associated with lead poisoning or if you ing exposure levels for current job condi- desire medical advice concerning the effects tions. If such objective data is available, the of current or past exposure to lead or your employer need proceed no further on em- ability to have a healthy child. You should ployee exposure assessment until such time also notify your employer if you have dif- that conditions have changed and the deter- ficulty breathing during a respirator fit test mination is no longer valid.

104

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00114 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

Objective data may be compiled from var- is conducted which demonstrates that your ious sources, e.g., insurance companies and exposure level is below the PEL. trade associations and information from sup- If you are exposed to lead and air sampling pliers or exposure data collected from simi- is performed, your employer is required to lar operations. Objective data may also com- notify you in writing within 5 working days prise previously-collected sampling data in- of the air monitoring results which represent cluding area monitoring. If it cannot be de- your exposure. If the results indicate that termined through using objective data that your exposure exceeds the PEL (without re- worker exposure is less than the action level, gard to your use of a respirator), then your your employer must conduct monitoring or employer must also notify you of this in must rely on relevant previous personal sam- writing, and provide you with a description pling, if available. Where monitoring is re- of the corrective action that has been taken quired for the initial determination, it may or will be taken to reduce your exposure. be limited to a representative number of em- Your exposure must be rechecked by moni- ployees who are reasonably expected to have toring, at least every six months if your ex- the highest exposure levels. If your employer posure is at or over the action level but has conducted appropriate air sampling for below the PEL. Your employer may dis- lead in the past 12 months, he or she may use continue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive these results, provided they are applicable to measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, the same employee tasks and exposure condi- are at or below the action level. Air moni- tions and meet the requirements for accu- toring must be repeated every 3 months if racy as specified in the standard. As with ob- you are exposed over the PEL. Your em- jective data, if such results are relied upon ployer must continue monitoring for you at for the initial determination, your employer this frequency until 2 consecutive measure- must establish and maintain a record as to ments, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the relevancy of such data to current job the PEL but above the action level, at which conditions. time your employer must repeat monitoring If there have been any employee com- of your exposure every six months and may plaints of symptoms which may be attrib- discontinue monitoring only after your expo- utable to exposure to lead or if there is any sure drops to or below the action level. How- other information or observations which ever, whenever there is a change of equip- would indicate employee exposure to lead, ment, process, control, or personnel or a new this must also be considered as part of the type of job is added at your workplace which initial determination. may result in new or additional exposure to If this initial determination shows that a lead, your employer must perform additional reasonable possibility exists that any em- monitoring. ployee may be exposed, without regard to respirators, over the action level, your em- III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph (E) ployer must set up an air monitoring pro- Your employer is required to assure that gram to determine the exposure level rep- no employee is exposed to lead in excess of resentative of each employee exposed to lead the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final at your workplace. In carrying out this air standard for lead in construction requires monitoring program, your employer is not employers to institute engineering and work required to monitor the exposure of every practice controls including administrative employee, but he or she must monitor a rep- controls to the extent feasible to reduce em- resentative number of employees and job ployee exposure to lead. Where such controls types. Enough sampling must be done to en- are feasible but not adequate to reduce expo- able each employee’s exposure level to be sures below the PEL they must be used none- reasonably represent full shift exposure. In theless to reduce exposures to the lowest addition, these air samples must be taken level that can be accomplished by these under conditions which represent each em- means and then supplemented with appro- ployee’s regular, daily exposure to lead. priate respiratory protection. Sampling performed in the past 12 months Your employer is required to develop and may be used to determine exposures above implement a written compliance program the action level if such sampling was con- prior to the commencement of any job where ducted during work activities essentially employee exposures may reach the PEL as similar to present work conditions. an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard The standard lists certain tasks which may identifies the various elements that must be likely result in exposures to lead in excess of included in the plan. For example, employers the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in ex- are required to include a description of oper- cess of 50 times the PEL. If you are per- ations in which lead is emitted, detailing forming any of these tasks, your employer other relevant information about the oper- must provide you with appropriate res- ation such as the type of equipment used, piratory protection, protective clothing and the type of material involved, employee job equipment, change areas, hand washing fa- responsibilities, operating procedures and cilities, biological monitoring, and training maintenance practices. In addition, your em- until such time that an exposure assessment ployer’s compliance plan must specify the

105

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00115 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

means that will be used to achieve compli- available to you to ease the burden of having ance and, where engineering controls are re- to wear a respirator for long periods of time. quired, include any engineering plans or The standard provides that you can obtain a studies that have been used to select the PAPR upon request. control methods. If administrative controls Your employer must also start a Res- involving job rotation are used to reduce em- piratory Protection Program. This program ployee exposure to lead, the job rotation must include written procedures for the schedule must be included in the compliance proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and plan. The plan must also detail the type of maintenance of respirators. protective clothing and equipment, including Your employer must ensure that your res- respirators, housekeeping and hygiene prac- pirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of tices that will be used to protect you from a respirator facepiece is critical to your pro- the adverse effects of exposure to lead. tection from airborne lead. Obtaining a prop- The written compliance program must be er fit on each employee may require your made available, upon request, to affected employer to make available several different employees and their designated representa- types of respirator masks. To ensure that tives, the Assistant Secretary and the Direc- your respirator fits properly and that face- tor. piece leakage is minimal, your employer Finally, the plan must be reviewed and up- must give you either a qualitative or quan- dated at least every 6 months to assure it re- titative fit test as specified in appendix A of flects the current status in exposure control. the Respiratory Protection standard located at 29 CFR 1910.134. IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph (F) You must also receive from your employer Your employer is required to provide and proper training in the use of respirators. assure your use of respirators when your ex- Your employer is required to teach you how posure to lead is not controlled below the to wear a respirator, to know why it is need- PEL by other means. The employer must pay ed, and to understand its limitations. the cost of the respirator. Whenever you re- The standard provides that if your res- quest one, your employer is also required to pirator uses filter elements, you must be provide you a respirator even if your air ex- given an opportunity to change the filter ele- posure level is not above the PEL. You ments whenever an increase in breathing re- might desire a respirator when, for example, sistance is detected. You also must be per- you have received medical advice that your mitted to periodically leave your work area lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you to wash your face and respirator facepiece may intend to have children in the near fu- whenever necessary to prevent skin irrita- ture, and want to reduce the level of lead in tion. If you ever have difficulty in breathing your body to minimize adverse reproductive during a fit test or while using a respirator, effects. While respirators are the least satis- your employer must make a medical exam- factory means of controlling your exposure, ination available to you to determine wheth- they are capable of providing significant pro- er you can safely wear a respirator. The re- tection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, sult of this examination may be to give you cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they a positive pressure respirator (which reduces stop providing adequate protection. breathing resistance) or to provide alter- Your employer is required to select your native means of protection. respirator according to the requirements of V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment— 29 CFR 1926.62(f)(3), including the require- Paragraph (G) ments referenced in 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(3)(i)(A) of this chapter. Any res- If you are exposed to lead above the PEL pirator chosen must be approved by NIOSH as an 8-hour TWA, without regard to your under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. These use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to respirator selection references will enable lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead your employer to choose a type of respirator azide which can cause skin and eye irrita- that will give you a proper amount of protection, your employer must provide you with tion based on your airborne lead exposure. protective work clothing and equipment ap- Your employer may select a type of res- propriate for the hazard. If work clothing is pirator that provides greater protection than provided, it must be provided in a clean and that required by the standard; that is, one dry condition at least weekly, and daily if recommended for a higher concentration of your airborne exposure to lead is greater lead than is present in your workplace. For than 200 μg/m3. Appropriate protective work example, a powered air-purifying respirator clothing and equipment can include cover- (PAPR) is much more protective than a typ- alls or similar full-body work clothing, ical negative pressure respirator, and may gloves, hats, shoes or disposable shoe cover- also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR lets, and face shields or vented goggles. Your has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean employer is required to provide all such the air, and a power source that continu- equipment at no cost to you. In addition, ously blows filtered air into your breathing your employer is responsible for providing zone. Your employer might make a PAPR repairs and replacement as necessary, and

106

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00116 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

also is responsible for the cleaning, laun- may not be used except where vacuuming or dering or disposal of protective clothing and other equally effective methods have been equipment. tried and do not work. Vacuums must be The interim final standard requires that used equipped with a special filter called a your employer assure that you follow good high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter work practices when you are working in and emptied in a manner which minimizes areas where your exposure to lead may ex- the reentry of lead into the workplace. ceed the PEL. With respect to protective clothing and equipment, where appropriate, VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices— the following procedures should be observed Paragraph (I) prior to beginning work: The standard requires that hand washing 1. Change into work clothing and shoe cov- facilities be provided where occupational ex- ers in the clean section of the designated posure to lead occurs. In addition, change changing areas; areas, showers (where feasible), and 2. Use work garments of appropriate pro- lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made tective gear, including respirators before en- available to workers exposed to lead above tering the work area; and the PEL. Your employer must assure that 3. Store any clothing not worn under pro- except in these facilities, food and beverage tective clothing in the designated changing is not present or consumed, tobacco products area. are not present or used, and cosmetics are Workers should follow these procedures not applied, where airborne exposures are upon leaving the work area: above the PEL. Change rooms provided by 1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated protective work clothing while it is still your employer must be equipped with sepa- being worn. At no time may lead be removed rate storage facilities for your protective from protective clothing by any means clothing and equipment and street clothes to which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead avoid cross-contamination. After showering, into the air; no required protective clothing or equipment 2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in worn during the shift may be worn home. It the work area; is important that contaminated clothing or 3. Remove protective clothing and gear in equipment be removed in change areas and the dirty area of the designated changing not be worn home or you will extend your area. Remove protective coveralls by care- exposure and expose your family since lead fully rolling down the garment to reduce ex- from your clothing can accumulate in your posure to dust. house, car, etc. 4. Remove respirators last; and Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be 5. Wash hands and face. entered with protective clothing or equip- Workers should follow these procedures ment unless surface dust has been removed upon finishing work for the day (in addition by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other to procedures described above): cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed 1. Where applicable, place disposal cover- above the PEL must wash both their hands alls and shoe covers with the abatement and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking waste; or applying cosmetics. 2. Contaminated clothing which is to be All of the facilities and hygiene practices cleaned, laundered or disposed of must be just discussed are essential to minimize ad- placed in closed containers in the change ditional sources of lead absorption from in- room. halation or ingestion of lead that may accu- 3. Clean protective gear, including res- mulate on you, your clothes, or your posses- pirators, according to standard procedures; sions. Strict compliance with these provi- 4. Wash hands and face again. If showers sions can virtually eliminate several sources are available, take a shower and wash hair. of lead exposure which significantly con- If shower facilities are not available at the tribute to excessive lead absorption. work site, shower immediately at home and wash hair. VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph (J) The medical surveillance program is part VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H) of the standard’s comprehensive approach to Your employer must establish a house- the prevention of lead-related disease. Its keeping program sufficient to maintain all purpose is to supplement the main thrust of surfaces as free as practicable of accumula- the standard which is aimed at minimizing tions of lead dust. Vacuuming is the pre- airborne concentrations of lead and sources ferred method of meeting this requirement, of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can and the use of compressed air to clean floors determine if the other provisions of the and other surfaces is generally prohibited standard have affectively protected you as unless removal with compressed air is done an individual. Compliance with the stand- in conjunction with ventilation systems de- ard’s provision will protect most workers signed to contain dispersal of the lead dust. from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing may not be satisfactory to protect individual

107

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00117 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

workers (1) who have high body burdens of Medical examinations beyond the initial lead acquired over past years, (2) who have one must be made available on an annual additional uncontrolled sources of non-occu- basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 μg/dl pational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit unat any time during the preceding year and usual variations in lead absorption rates, or you are being exposed above the airborne ac- (4) who have specific non-work related med- tion level of 30 μg/m3 for 30 or more days per ical conditions which could be aggravated by year. The initial examination will provide lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In information to establish a baseline to which addition, control systems may fail, or hy- subsequent data can be compared. giene and respirator programs may be inad- An initial medical examination to consist equate. Periodic medical surveillance of indi- of blood sampling and analysis for lead and vidual workers will help detect those fail- zinc protoporphyrin must also be made avail- ures. Medical surveillance will also be impor- able (prior to assignment) for each employee tant to protect your reproductive ability-re- being assigned for the first time to an area gardless of whether you are a man or woman. where the airborne concentration of lead All medical surveillance required by the equals or exceeds the action level at any interim final standard must be performed by time. In addition, a medical examination or or under the supervision of a licensed physi- consultation must be made available as soon cian. The employer must provide required as possible if you notify your employer that medical surveillance without cost to employ- you are experiencing signs or symptoms ees and at a reasonable time and place. The commonly associated with lead poisoning or standard’s medical surveillance program has that you have difficulty breathing while two parts—periodic biological monitoring wearing a respirator or during a respirator and medical examinations. Your employer’s fit test. You must also be provided a medical obligation to offer you medical surveillance examination or consultation if you notify is triggered by the results of the air moni- your employer that you desire medical ad- toring program. Full medical surveillance vice concerning the effects of current or past must be made available to all employees who exposure to lead on your ability to procreate are or may be exposed to lead in excess of a healthy child. the action level for more than 30 days a year Finally, appropriate follow-up medical ex- and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 μg/dl. aminations or consultations may also be pro- Initial medical surveillance consisting of vided for employees who have been tempo- blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc rarily removed from exposure under the protoporphyrin must be provided to all em- medical removal protection provisions of the ployees exposed at any time (1 day) above standard. (See Part IX, below.) the action level. The standard specifies the minimum con- Biological monitoring under the standard tent of pre-assignment and annual medical must be provided at least every 2 months for examinations. The content of other types of the first 6 months and every 6 months there- medical examinations and consultations is after until your blood lead level is below 40 left up to the sound discretion of the exam- μg/dl. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a ining physician. Pre-assignment and annual very useful blood test which measures an ad- medical examinations must include (1) a de- verse metabolic effect of lead on your body tailed work history and medical history; (2) and is therefore an indicator of lead toxicity. a thorough physical examination, including If your BLL exceeds 40 μg/dl the moni- an evaluation of your pulmonary status if toring frequency must be increased from you will be required to use a respirator; (3) a every 6 months to at least every 2 months blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series and not reduced until two consecutive BLLs of laboratory tests designed to check your indicate a blood lead level below 40 μg/dl. blood chemistry and your kidney function. Each time your BLL is determined to be over In addition, at any time upon your request, 40 μg/dl, your employer must notify you of a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will this in writing within five working days of be made (microscopic examination of a his or her receipt of the test results. The em- sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be ployer must also inform you that the stand- given. ard requires temporary medical removal The standard does not require that you with economic protection when your BLL ex- participate in any of the medical procedures, ceeds 50 μg/dl. (See Discussion of Medical Re- tests, etc. which your employer is required moval Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime to make available to you. Medical surveil- your BLL exceeds 50 μg/dl your employer lance can, however, play a very important must make available to you within two role in protecting your health. You are weeks of receipt of these test results a sec- strongly encouraged, therefore, to partici- ond follow-up BLL test to confirm your BLL. pate in a meaningful fashion. The standard If the two tests both exceed 50 μg/dl, and you contains a multiple physician review mecha- are temporarily removed, then your em- nism which will give you a chance to have a ployer must make successive BLL tests physician of your choice directly participate available to you on a monthly basis during in the medical surveillance program. If you the period of your removal. are dissatisfied with an examination by a

108

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00118 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

physician chosen by your employer, you can it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of select a second physician to conduct an inde- this. pendent analysis. The two doctors would at- The medical surveillance section of the tempt to resolve any differences of opinion, standard also contains provisions dealing and select a third physician to resolve any with chelation. Chelation is the use of cer- firm dispute. Generally your employer will tain drugs (administered in pill form or in- choose the physician who conducts medical jected into the body) to reduce the amount surveillance under the lead standard-unless of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience you and your employer can agree on the accumulated by the medical and scientific choice of a physician or physicians. Some communities has largely confirmed the effec- companies and unions have agreed in ad- tiveness of this type of therapy for the treat- vance, for example, to use certain inde- ment of very severe lead poisoning. On the pendent medical laboratories or panels of other hand, it has also been established that physicians. Any of these arrangements are there can be a long list of extremely harmful acceptable so long as required medical sur- side effects associated with the use of veillance is made available to workers. chelating agents. The medical community has balanced the advantages and disadvan- The standard requires your employer to tages resulting from the use of chelating provide certain information to a physician to agents in various circumstances and has es- aid in his or her examination of you. This in- tablished when the use of these agents is ac- formation includes (1) the standard and its ceptable. The standard includes these ac- appendices, (2) a description of your duties as cepted limitations due to a history of abuse they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3) of chelation therapy by some lead compa- your exposure level or anticipated exposure nies. The most widely used chelating agents level, (4) a description of any personal pro- are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2 EDTA), tective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate), lead level results, and (6) prior written med- and d-penicillamine (pencillamine or ical opinions concerning you that the em- Cupramine). ployer has. After a medical examination or The standard prohibits ‘‘prophylactic che- consultation the physician must prepare a lation’’ of any employee by any person the written report which must contain (1) the employer retains, supervises or controls. Pro- physician’s opinion as to whether you have phylactic chelation is the routine use of any medical condition which places you at chelating or similarly acting drugs to pre- increased risk of material impairment to vent elevated blood levels in workers who health from exposure to lead, (2) any rec- are occupationally exposed to lead, or the ommended special protective measures to be use of these drugs to routinely lower blood provided to you, (3) any blood lead level de- lead levels to predesignated concentrations terminations, and (4) any recommended limi- believed to be ‘‘safe’’. It should be empha- tation on your use of respirators. This last sized that where an employer takes a worker element must include a determination of who has no symptoms of lead poisoning and whether you can wear a powered air puri- has chelation carried out by a physician (ei- fying respirator (PAPR) if you are found un- ther inside or outside of a hospital) solely to able to wear a negative pressure respirator. reduce the worker’s blood lead level, that The medical surveillance program of the will generally be considered prophylactic interim lead standard may at some point in chelation. The use of a hospital and a physi- time serve to notify certain workers that cian does not mean that prophylactic chela- they have acquired a disease or other adverse tion is not being performed. Routine chela- medical condition as a result of occupational tion to prevent increased or reduce current lead exposure. If this is true, these workers blood lead levels is unacceptable whatever might have legal rights to compensation the setting. from public agencies, their employers, firms The standard allows the use of ‘‘thera- that supply hazardous products to their em- peutic’’ or ‘‘diagnostic’’ chelation if adminis- ployers, or other persons. Some states have tered under the supervision of a licensed laws, including worker compensation laws, physician in a clinical setting with thorough that disallow a worker who learns of a job- and appropriate medical monitoring. Thera- related health impairment to sue, unless the peutic chelation responds to severe lead poi- worker sues within a short period of time soning where there are marked symptoms. after learning of the impairment. (This pe- Diagnostic chelation involved giving a pa- riod of time may be a matter of months or tient a dose of the drug then collecting all years.) An attorney can be consulted about urine excreted for some period of time as an these possibilities. It should be stressed that aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning. OSHA is in no way trying to either encour- In cases where the examining physician de- age or discourage claims or lawsuits. How- termines that chelation is appropriate, you ever, since results of the standard’s medical must be notified in writing of this fact before surveillance program can significantly affect such treatment. This will inform you of a po- the legal remedies of a worker who has ac- tentially harmful treatment, and allow you quired a job-related disease or impairment, to obtain a second opinion.

109

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00119 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

IX. Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph not been removed. Earnings includes more (K) than just your base wage; it includes overtime, shift differentials, incentives, and Excessive lead absorption subjects you to other compensation you would have earned if increased risk of disease. Medical removal you had not been removed. During the period protection (MRP) is a means of protecting of removal you must also be provided with you when, for whatever reasons, other meth- appropriate follow-up medical surveillance. ods, such as engineering controls, work prac- If you were removed because your blood lead tices, and respirators, have failed to provide level was too high, you must be provided the protection you need. MRP involves the with a monthly blood test. If a medical opin- temporary removal of a worker from his or ion caused your removal, you must be pro- her regular job to a place of significantly vided medical tests or examinations that the lower exposure without any loss of earnings, doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do seniority, or other employment rights or not participate in this follow up medical sur- benefits. The purpose of this program is to veillance, you may lose your eligibility for cease further lead absorption and allow your MRP benefits. body to naturally excrete lead which has pre- When you are medically eligible to return viously been absorbed. Temporary medical to your former job, your employer must re- removal can result from an elevated blood turn you to your ‘‘former job status.’’ This lead level, or a medical opinion. For up to 18 means that you are entitled to the position, months, or for as long as the job the em- wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if ployee was removed from lasts, protection is you had not been removed. If you would still provided as a result of either form of re- be in your old job if no removal had occurred moval. The vast majority of removed work- that is where you go back. If not, you are re- ers, however, will return to their former jobs turned consistent with whatever job assign- long before this eighteen month period ex- ment discretion your employer would have pires. You may also be removed from exposure had if no removal had occurred. MRP only even if your blood lead level is below 50 μg/ seeks to maintain your rights, not expand dl if a final medical determination indicates them or diminish them. that you temporarily need reduced lead ex- If you are removed under MRP and you are posure for medical reasons. If the physician also eligible for worker compensation or who is implementing your employers med- other compensation for lost wages, your em- ical program makes a final written opinion ployer’s MRP benefits obligation is reduced recommending your removal or other special by the amount that you actually receive protective measures, your employer must from these other sources. This is also true if implement the physician’s recommendation. you obtain other employment during the If you are removed in this manner, you may time you are laid off with MRP benefits. only be returned when the doctor indicates The standard also covers situations where that it is safe for you to do so. an employer voluntarily removes a worker The standard does not give specific in- from exposure to lead due to the effects of structions dealing with what an employer lead on the employee’s medical condition, must do with a removed worker. Your job as- even though the standard does not require signment upon removal is a matter for you, removal. In these situations MRP benefits your employer and your union (if any) to must still be provided as though the stand- work out consistent with existing procedures ard required removal. Finally, it is impor- for job assignments. Each removal must be tant to note that in all cases where removal accomplished in a manner consistent with is required, respirators cannot be used as a existing collective bargaining relationships. substitute. Respirators may be used before Your employer is given broad discretion to removal becomes necessary, but not as an al- implement temporary removals so long as no ternative to a transfer to a low exposure job, attempt is made to override existing agree- or to a lay-off with MRP benefits. ments. Similarly, a removed worker is pro- X. Employee Information and Training— vided no right to veto an employer’s choice Paragraph (L) which satisfies the standard. In most cases, employers will likely trans- Your employer is required to provide an infer removed employees to other jobs with formation and training program for all em- sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively, ployees exposed to lead above the action a worker’s hours may be reduced so that the level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation time weighted average exposure is reduced, from lead compounds such as lead arsenate or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no or lead azide. The program must train these other alternative is feasible. employees regarding the specific hazards as- In all of these situation, MRP benefits sociated with their work environment, pro- must be provided during the period of re- tective measures which can be taken, includ- moval—i.e., you continue to receive the ing the contents of any compliance plan in same earnings, seniority, and other rights effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (in- and benefits you would have had if you had cluding their reproductive systems), and

110

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00120 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

their rights under the standard. All employ- The standard requires that if you request ees must be trained prior to initial assign- to see or copy environmental monitoring, ment to areas where there is a possibility of blood lead level monitoring, or medical re- exposure over the action level. moval records, they must be made available This training program must also be pro- to you or to a representative that you au- vided at least annually thereafter unless fur- thorize. Your union also has access to these ther exposure above the action level will not records. Medical records other than BLL’s occur. must also be provided upon request to you, to your physician or to any other person XI. Signs—Paragraph (M) whom you may specifically designate. Your The standard requires that the following union does not have access to your personal warning sign be posted in work areas when medical records unless you authorize their the exposure to lead is above the PEL: access. DANGER XIII. Observation of Monitoring—Paragraph LEAD WORK AREA (O) MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UN- When air monitoring for lead is performed BORN CHILD at your workplace as required by this stand- CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL ard, your employer must allow you or some- NERVOUS SYSTEM one you designate to act as an observer of DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an AREA explanation of the measurement procedure, Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use and to record the results obtained. Since re- the following legend in lieu of that specified sults will not normally be available at the above: time of the monitoring, observers are entitled to record or receive the results of the WARNING monitoring when returned by the laboratory. LEAD WORK AREA Your employer is required to provide the ob- POISON server with any personal protective devices NO SMOKING OR EATING required to be worn by employees working in the area that is being monitored. The em- XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N) ployer must require the observer to wear all Your employer is required to keep all such equipment and to comply with all other records of exposure monitoring for airborne applicable safety and health procedures. lead. These records must include the name and job classification of employees meas- XIV. For Additional Information ured, details of the sampling and analytical A. A copy of the interim standard for lead techniques, the results of this sampling, and in construction can be obtained free of the type of respiratory protection being charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office worn by the person sampled. Such records of Publications, room N–3101, United States are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210: employer is also required to keep all records Telephone (202) 219–4667. of biological monitoring and medical exam- B. Additional information about the stand- ination results. These records must include ard, its enforcement, and your employer’s the names of the employees, the physician’s compliance can be obtained from the nearest written opinion, and a copy of the results of OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone the examination. Medical records must be directory under United States Government/ preserved and maintained for the duration of Department of Labor. employment plus 30 years. However, if the employee’s duration of employment is less APPENDIX C TO § 1926.62—MEDICAL than one year, the employer need not retain SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES that employee’s medical records beyond the period of employment if they are provided to Introduction the employee upon termination of employ- The primary purpose of the Occupational ment. Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so Recordkeeping is also required if you are far as possible, safe and healthful working temporarily removed from your job under conditions for every working man and the medical removal protection program. woman. The interim final occupational This record must include your name, the health standard for lead in construction is date of your removal and return, how the re- designed to protect workers exposed to inor- moval was or is being accomplished, and ganic lead including metallic lead, all inor- whether or not the reason for the removal ganic lead compounds and organic lead was an elevated blood lead level. Your em- soaps. ployer is required to keep each medical re- Under this interim final standard occupa- moval record only for as long as the duration tional exposure to inorganic lead is to be of an employee’s employment. limited to 50 μg/m3 (micrograms per cubic

111

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00121 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

meter) based on an 8 hour time-weighted av- action level on any one day. In addition, a erage (TWA). This permissible exposure limit program of biological monitoring is to be (PEL) must be achieved through a combina- made available to all employees exposed tion of engineering, work practice and ad- above the action level at any time and addi- ministrative controls to the extent feasible. tional medical surveillance is to be made Where these controls are in place but are available to all employees exposed to lead found not to reduce employee exposures to or above 30 μg/m3 TWA for more than 30 days below the PEL, they must be used nonethe- each year and whose BLL exceeds 40 μg/dl. less, and supplemented with respirators to This program consists of periodic blood sam- meet the 50 μg/m3 exposure limit. pling and medical evaluation to be per- The standard also provides for a program formed on a schedule which is defined by pre- of biological monitoring for employees ex- vious laboratory results, worker complaints posed to lead above the action level at any or concerns, and the clinical assessment of time, and additional medical surveillance for the examining physician. all employees exposed to levels of inorganic Under this program, the blood lead level lead above 30 μg/m3 (TWA) for more than 30 (BLL) of all employees who are exposed to days per year and whose BLL exceeds 40 μg/ lead above 30 μg/m3 for more than 30 days per dl. year or whose blood lead is above 40 μg/dl but The purpose of this document is to outline exposed for no more than 30 days per year is the medical surveillance provisions of the in- to be determined at least every two months terim standard for inorganic lead in con- for the first six months of exposure and struction, and to provide further information every six months thereafter. The frequency to the physician regarding the examination is increased to every two months for employ- and evaluation of workers exposed to inor- ees whose last blood lead level was 40 μg/dl or ganic lead. above. For employees who are removed from Section 1 provides a detailed description of exposure to lead due to an elevated blood the monitoring procedure including the re- lead, a new blood lead level must be meas- quired frequency of blood testing for exposed ured monthly. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) workers, provisions for medical removal pro- measurement is strongly recommended on tection (MRP), the recommended right of the each occasion that a blood lead level meas- employee to a second medical opinion, and urement is made. notification and recordkeeping requirements An annual medical examination and con- of the employer. A discussion of the require- sultation performed under the guidelines dis- ments for respirator use and respirator mon- cussed in Section 3 is to be made available to itoring and OSHA’s position on prophylactic each employee exposed above 30 μg/m3 for chelation therapy are also included in this more than 30 days per year for whom a blood section. test conducted at any time during the pre- Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and at or above 40 μg/dl. Also, an examination is effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic to be given to all employees prior to their as- pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse ef- signment to an area in which airborne lead fects on both male and female reproductive concentrations reach or exceed the 30 μg/m3 capacity and on the fetus are also discussed. for more than 30 days per year. In addition, Section 3 outlines the recommended med- a medical examination must be provided as ical evaluation of the worker exposed to in- soon as possible after notification by an em- organic lead, including details of the medical ployee that the employee has developed history, physical examination, and rec- signs or symptoms commonly associated ommended laboratory tests, which are based with lead intoxication, that the employee on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in desires medical advice regarding lead expo- Section 2. sure and the ability to procreate a healthy Section 4 provides detailed information child, or that the employee has dem- concerning the laboratory tests available for onstrated difficulty in breathing during a the monitoring of exposed workers. Included respirator fitting test or during respirator also is a discussion of the relative value of use. An examination is also to be made avail- each test and the limitations and pre- able to each employee removed from expo- cautions which are necessary in the interpre- sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining mate- tation of the laboratory results. rial impairment to health, or otherwise limited or specially protected pursuant to med- I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Re- ical recommendations. quirements for Workers Exposed to Inorganic Results of biological monitoring or the rec- Lead ommendations of an examining physician Under the interim final standard for inor- may necessitate removal of an employee ganic lead in the construction industry, ini- from further lead exposure pursuant to the tial medical surveillance consisting of bio- standard’s medical removal protection logical monitoring to include blood lead and (MRP) program. The object of the MRP pro- ZPP level determination shall be provided to gram is to provide temporary medical re- employees exposed to lead at or above the moval to workers either with substantially

112

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00122 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at During the period of any form of special risk of sustaining material health impair- protection or removal, the employer must ment from continued substantial exposure to maintain the worker’s earnings, seniority, lead. and other employment rights and benefits Under the standard’s ultimate worker re- (as though the worker had not been removed) moval criteria, a worker is to be removed for a period of up to 18 months or for as long from any work having an eight hour TWA as the job the employee was removed from exposure to lead of 30 μg/m3 when his or her lasts if less than 18 months. This economic blood lead level reaches 50 μg/dl and is con- protection will maximize meaningful worker firmed by a second follow-up blood lead level participation in the medical surveillance performed within two weeks after the em- program, and is appropriate as part of the ployer receives the results of the first blood employer’s overall obligation to provide a sampling test. Return of the employee to his safe and healthful workplace. The provisions or her job status depends on a worker’s blood of MRP benefits during the employee’s re- lead level declining to 40 μg/dl. moval period may, however, be conditioned As part of the interim standard, the em- upon participation in medical surveillance. ployer is required to notify in writing each The lead standard provides for a multiple employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 physician review in cases where the em- μg/dl. In addition each such employee is to be ployee wishes a second opinion concerning potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an informed that the standard requires medical employee wishes a second opinion, he or she removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, can make an appointment with a physician when an employee’s blood lead level exceeds of his or her choice. This second physician the above defined limit. will review the findings, recommendations or In addition to the above blood lead level determinations of the first physician and criterion, temporary worker removal may conduct any examinations, consultations or also take place as a result of medical deter- tests deemed necessary in an attempt to minations and recommendations. Written make a final medical determination. If the medical opinions must be prepared after first and second physicians do not agree in each examination pursuant to the standard. their assessment they must try to resolve If the examining physician includes a med- their differences. If they cannot reach an ical finding, determination or opinion that agreement then they must designate a third the employee has a medical condition which physician to resolve the dispute. places the employee at increased risk of ma- The employer must provide examining and terial health impairment from exposure to consulting physicians with the following spe- lead, then the employee must be removed cific information: A copy of the lead regula- from exposure to lead at or above 30 μg/m3. tions and all appendices, a description of the Alternatively, if the examining physician employee’s duties as related to exposure, the recommends special protective measures for exposure level or anticipated level to lead an employee (e.g., use of a powered air puri- and any other toxic substances (if applica- fying respirator) or recommends limitations ble), a description of personal protective on an employee’s exposure to lead, then the equipment used, blood lead levels, and all employer must implement these rec- prior written medical opinions regarding the ommendations. employee in the employer’s possession or Recommendations may be more stringent control. The employer must also obtain from than the specific provisions of the standard. the physician and provide the employee with The examining physician, therefore, is given a written medical opinion containing blood broad flexibility to tailor special protective lead levels, the physicians’s opinion as to procedures to the needs of individual em- whether the employee is at risk of material ployees. This flexibility extends to the eval- impairment to health, any recommended uation and management of pregnant workers protective measures for the employee if fur- and male and female workers who are plan- ther exposure is permitted, as well as any ning to raise children. Based on the history, recommended limitations upon an employ- physical examination, and laboratory stud- ee’s use of respirators. ies, the physician might recommend special Employers must instruct each physician protective measures or medical removal for not to reveal to the employer in writing or an employee who is pregnant or who is plan- in any other way his or her findings, labora- ning to conceive a child when, in the physi- tory results, or diagnoses which are felt to cian’s judgment, continued exposure to lead be unrelated to occupational lead exposure. at the current job would pose a significant They must also instruct each physician to risk. The return of the employee to his or advise the employee of any occupationally or her former job status, or the removal of spe- non-occupationally related medical condi- cial protections or limitations, depends upon tion requiring further treatment or evalua- the examining physician determining that tion. the employee is no longer at increased risk The standard provides for the use of res- of material impairment or that special meas- pirators where engineering and other pri- ures are no longer needed. mary controls are not effective. However,

113

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00123 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the use of respirator protection shall not be need not retain this record beyond the term used in lieu of temporary medical removal of employment if the record is provided to due to elevated blood lead levels or findings the employee upon termination of employ- that an employee is at risk of material ment. Medical removal records also must be health impairment. This is based on the nu- maintained for the duration of employment. merous inadequacies of respirators including All records required under the standard must skin rash where the facepiece makes contact be made available upon request to the As- with the skin, unacceptable stress to breath- sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational ing in some workers with underlying Safety and Health and the Director of the cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in providing adequate fit, the tendency for res- National Institute for Occupational Safety pirators to create additional hazards by and Health. Employers must also make envi- interfering with vision, hearing, and mobil- ronmental and biological monitoring and ity, and the difficulties of assuring the max- medical removal records available to af- imum effectiveness of a complicated work fected employees and to former employees or practice program involving respirators. Res- their authorized employee representatives. pirators do, however, serve a useful function Employees or their specifically designated where engineering and work practice con- representatives have access to their entire trols are inadequate by providing supple- medical surveillance records. mentary, interim, or short-term protection, In addition, the standard requires that the provided they are properly selected for the employer inform all workers exposed to lead environment in which the employee will be at or above 30 μg/m3 of the provisions of the working, properly fitted to the employee, standard and all its appendices, the purpose maintained and cleaned periodically, and and description of medical surveillance and worn by the employee when required. provisions for medical removal protection if In its interim final standard on occupational exposure to inorganic lead in the contemporary removal is required. An under- struction industry, OSHA has prohibited pro- standing of the potential health effects of phylactic chelation. Diagnostic and thera- lead exposure by all exposed employees along peutic chelation are permitted only under with full understanding of their rights under the supervision of a licensed physician with the lead standard is essential for an effective appropriate medical monitoring in an ac- monitoring program. ceptable clinical setting. The decision to initiate chelation therapy must be made on an II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead individual basis and take into account the Although the toxicity of lead has been severity of symptoms felt to be a result of known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the lead toxicity along with blood lead levels, complex relationship between lead exposure ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as appropriate. EDTA and penicillamine which and human response is still being refined. are the primary chelating agents used in the Significant research into the toxic prop- therapy of occupational lead poisoning have erties of lead continues throughout the significant potential side effects and their world, and it should be anticipated that our use must be justified on the basis of expected understanding of thresholds of effects and benefits to the worker. Unless frank and se- margins of safety will be improved in future vere symptoms are present, therapeutic che- years. The provisions of the lead standard lation is not recommended, given the oppor- are founded on two prime medical judg- tunity to remove a worker from exposure ments: First, the prevention of adverse and allow the body to naturally excrete ac- health effects from exposure to lead through- cumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the che- out a working lifetime requires that worker lation mobilization test using CA-EDTA has blood lead levels be maintained at or below limited applicability. According to some in- 40 μg/dl and second, the blood lead levels of vestigators, the test can differentiate be- workers, male or female, who intend to par- tween lead-induced and other nephropathies. ent in the near future should be maintained The test may also provide an estimation of below 30 μg/dl to minimize adverse reproduc- the mobile fraction of the total body lead tive health effects to the parents and devel- burden. oping fetus. The adverse effects of lead on re- Employers are required to assure that accurate records are maintained on exposure production are being actively researched and assessment, including environmental moni- OSHA encourages the physician to remain toring, medical surveillance, and medical re- abreast of recent developments in the area to moval for each employee. Exposure assess- best advise pregnant workers or workers ment records must be kept for at least 30 planning to conceive children. years. Medical surveillance records must be The spectrum of health effects caused by kept for the duration of employment plus 30 lead exposure can be subdivided into five de- years except in cases where the employment velopmental stages: Normal, physiological was less than one year. If duration of em- changes of uncertain significance, ployment is less than one year, the employer pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms

114

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00124 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

(morbidity), and mortality. Within this proc- 2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has ess there are no sharp distinctions, but rath- been found to have toxic effects on both the er a continuum of effects. Boundaries be- central and peripheral nervous systems. The tween categories overlap due to the wide var- earliest stages of lead-induced central nerv- iation of individual responses and exposures ous system effects first manifest themselves in the working population. OSHA’s develop- in the form of behavioral disturbances and ment of the lead standard focused on central nervous system symptoms including pathophysiological changes as well as later irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other stages of disease. sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, head- 1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest ache, poor memory, tremor, depression, and demonstrated effect of lead involves its abil- apathy. With more severe exposure, symp- ity to inhibit at least two enzymes of the toms can progress to drowsiness, stupor, hal- heme synthesis pathway at very low blood lucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma. levels. Inhibition of delta aminolevulinic The most severe and acute form of lead acid dehydrase (ALA-D) which catalyzes the poisoning which usually follows ingestion or conversion of delta-aminolevulinic acid inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute (ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a encephalopathy which may arise precipi- μ blood lead level below 20 g/dl. At a blood tously with the onset of intractable seizures, μ lead level of 40 g/dl, more than 20% of the coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death population would have 70% inhibition of within 48 hours. ALA-D. There is an exponential increase in While there is disagreement about what ex- ALA excretion at blood lead levels greater posure levels are needed to produce the ear- than 40 μg/dl. liest symptoms, most experts agree that Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also in- symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead hibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of levels of 60 μg/dl whole blood and therefore ferrochelatase leads to increased free eryth- recommend a 40 μg/dl maximum. The central rocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood nervous system effects frequently are not re- which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc versible following discontinued exposure or protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 chelation therapy and when improvement μg/dl or greater, nearly 100% of the popu- does occur, it is almost always only partial. lation will have an increase in FEP. There is also an exponential relationship between The peripheral neuropathy resulting from blood lead levels greater than 40 μg/dl and lead exposure characteristically involves the associated ZPP level, which has led to only motor function with minimal sensory the development of the ZPP screening test damage and has a marked predilection for for lead exposure. the extensor muscles of the most active ex- While the significance of these effects is tremity. The peripheral neuropathy can subject to debate, it is OSHA’s position that occur with varying degrees of severity. The these enzyme disturbances are early stages earliest and mildest form which can be de- of a disease process which may eventually tected in workers with blood lead levels as μ result in the clinical symptoms of lead poi- low as 50 g/dl is manifested by slowing of soning. Whether or not the effects do motor nerve conduction velocity often with- progress to the later stages of clinical dis- out clinical symptoms. With progression of ease, disruption of these enzyme processes the neuropathy there is development of pain- over a working lifetime is considered to be a less extensor muscle weakness usually in- material impairment of health. volving the extensor muscles of the fingers One of the eventual results of lead-induced and hand in the most active upper extrem- inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis ity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or, pathway is anemia which can be asymp- much less commonly, foot drop. tomatic if mild but associated with a wide In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, array of symptoms including dizziness, fa- electromyographical studies in patients with tigue, and tachycardia when more severe. blood lead levels greater than 50 μg/dl have Studies have indicated that lead levels as demonstrated a decrease in the number of low as 50 μg/dl can be associated with a defi- acting motor unit potentials, an increase in nite decreased hemoglobin, although most the duration of motor unit potentials, and cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as spontaneous pathological activity including shortened red-cell survival times, occur at fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether lead levels exceeding 80 μg/dl. Inhibited he- these effects occur at levels of 40 μg/dl is un- moglobin synthesis is more common in determined. chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte While the peripheral neuropathies can oc- life span is more common in acute cases. casionally be reversed with therapy, again In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a such recovery is not assured particularly in reticulocytosis along with the presence of the more severe neuropathies and often im- basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts, provement is only partial. The lack of re- although none of the above are versibility is felt to be due in part to seg- pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia. mental demyelination.

115

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00125 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect Infants of mothers with lead poisoning the gastrointestinal system producing ab- have a higher mortality during the first year dominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain, con- and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower stipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, growth, and nervous system disorders. nausea and vomiting. Lead colic rarely de- Lead can pass through the placental bar- velops at blood lead levels below 80 μg/dl. rier and lead levels in the mother’s blood are 4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of comparable to concentrations of lead in the the most serious health effects of lead poi- umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental pas- soning. In the early stages of disease nuclear sage becomes detectable at 12–14 weeks of inclusion bodies can frequently be identified gestation and increases until birth. in proximal renal tubular cells. Renal func- There is little direct data on damage to the tion remains normal and the changes in this fetus from exposure to lead but it is gen- stage are probably reversible. With more ad- erally assumed that the fetus and newborn vanced disease there is progressive intersti- would be at least as susceptible to neuro- tial fibrosis and impaired renal function. logical damage as young children. Blood lead Eventually extensive interstitial fibrosis en- levels of 50–60 μg/dl in children can cause sig- sues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and nificant neurobehavioral impairments and atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood stage kidney disease. Azotemia can be pro- levels as low as 25 μg/dl. Given the overall gressive, eventually resulting in frank ure- body of literature concerning the adverse mia necessitating dialysis. There is occa- health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels sionally associated hypertension and that the blood lead level in children should hyperuricemia with or without gout. be maintained below 30 μg/dl with a popu- Early kidney disease is difficult to detect. lation mean of 15 μg/dl. Blood lead levels in The urinalysis is normal in early lead the fetus and newborn likewise should not nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and exceed 30 μg/dl. serum creatinine increase only when two- Because of lead’s ability to pass through thirds of kidney function is lost. Measure- the placental barrier and also because of the ment of creatinine clearance can often de- demonstrated adverse effects of lead on re- tect earlier disease as can other methods of productive function in both the male and fe- measurement of glomerular filtration rate. male as well as the risk of genetic damage of An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA rec- been used to differentiate between lead-in- ommends a 30 μg/dl maximum permissible duced and other nephropathies, but this pro- blood lead level in both males and females cedure is not widely accepted. A form of who wish to bear children. Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria, glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indi- 6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research cating severe injury to the proximal renal continue on the effects of lead on the human tubules is occasionally seen in children. body. Hypertension has frequently been 5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead noted in occupationally exposed individuals can have serious effects on reproductive although it is difficult to assess whether this function in both males and females. In male is due to lead’s adverse effects on the kidney workers exposed to lead there can be a de- or if some other mechanism is involved. Vas- crease in sexual drive, impotence, decreased cular and electrocardiographic changes have ability to produce healthy sperm, and ste- been detected but have not been well charac- rility. Malformed sperm (teratospermia), de- terized. Lead is thought to impair thyroid creased number of sperm (hypospermia), and function and interfere with the pituitary-ad- sperm with decreased motility renal axis, but again these effects have not (asthenospermia) can all occur. been well defined. Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood III. Medical Evaluation lead levels of 53 μg/dl and hypospermia and asthenospermia at 41 μg/dl. Furthermore, The most important principle in evalu- there appears to be a dose-response relation- ating a worker for any occupational disease ship for teratospermia in lead exposed work- including lead poisoning is a high index of ers. suspicion on the part of the examining physi- Women exposed to lead may experience cian. As discussed in Section 2, lead can af- menstrual disturbances including fect numerous organ systems and produce a dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenor- wide array of signs and symptoms, most of rhea. Following exposure to lead, women which are non-specific and subtle in nature have a higher frequency of sterility, pre- at least in the early stages of disease. Unless mature births, spontaneous miscarriages, serious concern for lead toxicity is present, and stillbirths. many of the early clues to diagnosis may Germ cells can be affected by lead and easily be overlooked. cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm The crucial initial step in the medical cells before conception and result in failure evaluation is recognizing that a worker’s to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth employment can result in exposure to lead. defects. The worker will frequently be able to define

116

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00126 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

exposures to lead and lead containing mate- decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or rials but often will not volunteer this infor- tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa, mation unless specifically asked. In other or metallic taste in mouth. situations the worker may not know of any 3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath, exposures to lead but the suspicion might be cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthop- raised on the part of the physician because of nea. the industry or occupation of the worker. 4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting, Potential occupational exposure to lead and heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or its compounds occur in many occupations in diarrhea. the construction industry, including demoli- 5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia, tion and salvaging operations, removal or weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of mem- encapsulation of materials containing lead, ory, confusion, hallucinations, construction, alteration, repair or renovation of structures containing lead, transpor- incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in tation, disposal, storage or containment of hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty lead or lead-containing materials on con- in climbing stairs, or seizures. struction sites, and maintenance operations 6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability, associated with construction activities. abnormal blood loss, melena. Once the possibility for lead exposure is 7. Reproductive (male and female and raised, the focus can then be directed toward spouse where relevant)—history of infer- eliciting information from the medical his- tility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal tory, physical exam, and finally from labora- menstrual periods, history of miscarriages, tory data to evaluate the worker for poten- stillbirths, or children with birth defects. tial lead toxicity. 8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint A complete and detailed work history is pains. important in the initial evaluation. A listing The physical examination should empha- of all previous employment with information size the neurological, gastrointestinal, and on job description, exposure to fumes or cardiovascular systems. The worker’s weight dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic and blood pressure should be recorded and substances, a description of any personal the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation protective equipment used, and previous characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead medical surveillance should all be included line on the gingiva. It should be noted, how- in the worker’s record. Where exposure to ever, that the lead line may not be present lead is suspected, information concerning even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hy- on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eat- giene is practiced. ing habits in work areas, laundry procedures, The presence of pallor on skin examination and use of any protective clothing or res- may indicate an anemia which, if severe, piratory protection equipment should be might also be associated with a tachycardia. noted. A complete work history is essential If an anemia is suspected, an active search in the medical evaluation of a worker with for blood loss should be undertaken includ- suspected lead toxicity, especially when long ing potential blood loss through the gastro- term effects such as neurotoxicity and intestinal tract. nephrotoxicity are considered. The medical history is also of fundamental A complete neurological examination importance and should include a listing of should include an adequate mental status all past and current medical conditions, cur- evaluation including a search for behavioral rent medications including proprietary drug and psychological disturbances, memory intake, previous surgeries and hospitaliza- testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia, tions, allergies, smoking history, alcohol hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait consumption, and also non-occupational lead and coordination should be examined along exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery). with close observation for tremor. A detailed Also known childhood exposures should be evaluation of peripheral nerve function in- elicited. Any previous history of cluding careful sensory and motor function hematological, neurological, gastro- testing is warranted. Strength testing par- intestinal, renal, psychological, gyneco- ticularly of extensor muscle groups of all ex- logical, genetic, or reproductive problems tremities is of fundamental importance. should be specifically noted. Cranial nerve evaluation should also be in- A careful and complete review of systems cluded in the routine examination. must be performed to assess both recognized The abdominal examination should include complaints and subtle or slowly acquired auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal symptoms which the worker might not ap- bruits and palpation for organomegaly, preciate as being significant. The review of masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness. symptoms should include the following: Cardiovascular examination should evalu- 1. General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased ate possible early signs of congestive heart appetite. failure. Pulmonary status should be ad- 2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat dressed particularly if respirator protection (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or is contemplated.

117

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00127 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.62 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

As part of the medical evaluation, the in- relative advantages and disadvantages. terim lead standard requires the following Other blood tests currently available to laboratory studies: evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed. 1. Blood lead level The blood lead level is a good index of cur- 2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determina- rent or recent lead absorption when there is tions, red cell indices, and examination of no anemia present and when the worker has the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red not taken any chelating agents. However, blood cell morphology blood lead levels along with urinary lead lev- 3. Blood urea nitrogen els do not necessarily indicate the total body 4. Serum creatinine burden of lead and are not adequate meas- 5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic ex- ures of past exposure. One reason for this is amination. that lead has a high affinity for bone and up 6. A zinc protoporphyrin level. to 90% of the body’s total lead is deposited there. A very important component of the In addition to the above, the physician is total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue authorized to order any further laboratory (liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of or other tests which he or she deems nec- the lead body burden, the biologically active essary in accordance with sound medical lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead practice. The evaluation must also include levels since it is a function of the dynamics pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of lead absorption, distribution, deposition of male fertility if requested by the em- in bone and excretion. Following discontinu- ployee. Additional tests which are probably ation of exposure to lead, the excess body not warranted on a routine basis but may be burden is only slowly mobilized from bone appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels and other relatively stable body stores and are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in level may only represent recent heavy expo- the urine, and dark-field illumination for de- sure to lead without a significant total body tection of basophilic stippling in red blood excess and likewise a low blood lead level cells. does not exclude an elevated total body bur- If an anemia is detected further studies in- den of lead. cluding a careful examination of the periph- Also due to its correlation with recent ex- eral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for oc- posures, the blood lead level may vary con- cult blood, serum iron, total iron binding ca- siderably over short time intervals. pacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vita- To minimize laboratory error and erro- min B12 and folate may be of value in at- neous results due to contamination, blood tempting to identify the cause of the ane- specimens must be carefully collected after mia. thorough cleaning of the skin with appro- If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected, priate methods using lead-free blood con- nerve conduction studies are warranted both tainers and analyzed by a reliable labora- for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any tory. Under the standard, samples must be therapy. analyzed in laboratories which are approved If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour by OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atom- urine collection for creatinine clearance, ic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic protein, and electrolytes may be indicated. stripping voltammetry or any method which Elevated uric acid levels may result from meets the accuracy requirements set forth lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric by the standard. acid level might be performed. The determination of lead in urine is gen- An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may erally considered a less reliable monitoring be obtained as deemed appropriate. technique than analysis of whole blood pri- Sophisticated and highly specialized test- marily due to individual variability in uri- ing should not be done routinely and where nary excretion capacity as well as the tech- indicated should be under the direction of a nical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour specialist. urine collections. In addition, workers with renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or IV. Laboratory Evaluation some other cause, may have decreased lead The blood lead level at present remains the clearance and consequently urine lead levels single most important test to monitor lead may underestimate the true lead burden. exposure and is the test used in the medical Therefore, urine lead levels should not be surveillance program under the lead stand- used as a routine test. ard to guide employee medical removal. The The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the ZPP has several advantages over the blood blood lead determination, measures an ad- lead level. Because of its relatively recent verse metabolic effect of lead and as such is development and the lack of extensive data a better indicator of lead toxicity than the concerning its interpretation, the ZPP cur- level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP re- rently remains an ancillary test. flects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to This section will discuss the blood lead 4 months, and therefore is a better indicator level and ZPP in detail and will outline their of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more

118

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00128 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.62

time than the blood lead to read signifi- of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate cantly elevated levels; the return to normal ZPP levels with environmental exposure and after discontinuing lead exposure is also there is some variation of response with age slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is sim- and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to pler, faster, and less expensive to perform be an important diagnostic test for the early and no contamination is possible. Many in- detection of lead toxicity and its value will vestigators believe it is the most reliable increase as more data is collected regarding means of monitoring chronic lead absorp- its relationship to other manifestations of tion. lead poisoning. Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhi- Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) bition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which in the urine are also used as a measure of catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of into the protoporphyrin molecule, which ALA are believed to result from the inhibi- then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted tion of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid into the molecule then zinc, having a greater dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is rel- affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place atively easy to perform, inexpensive, and of the iron, forming ZPP. rapid, the disadvantages include variability An elevation in the level of circulating in results, the necessity to collect a com- ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as plete 24 hour urine sample which has a spe- 20–30 μg/dl in some workers. Once the blood cific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the lead level has reached 40 μg/dl there is more fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of marked rise in the ZPP value from its nor- light. mal range of less than 100 μg/dl100 ml. In- The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the creases in blood lead levels beyond 40 μg/100 urine can also be helpful in identifying lead g are associated with exponential increases intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine in ZPP. concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II, Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The short time spans, ZPP levels remain rel- most important increase, however, is that of atively stable. ZPP is measured directly in coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000 red blood cells and is present for the cell’s μg/l in the urine in lead poisoned individuals, entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP but its correlation with blood lead levels and level in blood reflects the average ZPP pro- ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. In- duction over the previous 3–4 months and creases in urinary porphyrins are not diag- consequently the average lead exposure dur- nostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in ing that time interval. porphyria, some liver diseases, and in pa- It is recommended that a hematocrit be de- tients with high reticulocyte counts. termined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 μg/ Summary. The Occupational Safety and 100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a Health Administration’s interim standard significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is for inorganic lead in the construction indus- in excess of 100 μg/100 ml and not associated try places significant emphasis on the med- with abnormal elevations in blood lead lev- ical surveillance of all workers exposed to els, the laboratory should be checked to be levels of inorganic lead above 30 μg/m3 TWA. sure that blood leads were determined using The physician has a fundamental role in this atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic surveillance program, and in the operation of stripping voltammetry, or any method which the medical removal protection program. meets the accuracy requirements set forth Even with adequate worker education on by the standard by an OSHA approved lab- the adverse health effects of lead and appro- oratory which is experienced in lead level de- priate training in work practices, personal terminations. Repeat periodic blood lead hygiene and other control measures, the studies should be obtained in all individuals physician has a primary responsibility for with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that evaluating potential lead toxicity in the an associated elevated blood lead level has worker. It is only through a careful and de- not been missed due to transient fluctua- tailed medical and work history, a complete tions in blood leads. physical examination and appropriate lab- ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spec- oratory testing that an accurate assessment trum with a peak at 594 nm which is detect- can be made. Many of the adverse health ef- able with a hematofluorimeter. The fects of lead toxicity are either irreversible hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable or only partially reversible and therefore and can provide on-site, instantaneous re- early detection of disease is very important. sults for workers who can be frequently test- This document outlines the medical moni- ed via a finger prick. toring program as defined by the occupa- However, careful attention must be given tional safety and health standard for inor- to calibration and quality control proce- ganic lead. It reviews the adverse health ef- dures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP cor- fects of lead poisoning and describes the im- relations and the ZPP levels which are asso- portant elements of the history and physical ciated with the adverse health effects dis- examinations as they relate to these adverse cussed in Section 2 are the major limitations effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory

119

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00129 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.64 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

testing for evaluating lead exposure and tox- ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa- icity is presented. cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 It is hoped that this review and discussion and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen- will give the physician a better under- cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A. standing of the OSHA standard with the ultimate goal of protecting the health and well- to implement RCRA regulations; and being of the worker exposed to lead under his (v) Emergency response operations or her care. for releases of, or substantial threats of [58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58 releases of, hazardous substances with- FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, out regard to the location of the haz- 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan. ard. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, (2) Application. (i) All requirements of Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 29 CFR parts 1910 and 1926 apply pursu- 33611, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80741, Dec. 27, 2011; ant to their terms to hazardous waste 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 85 FR 8735, Feb. 18, and emergency response operations 2020] whether covered by this section or not. § 1926.64 Process safety management If there is a conflict or overlap, the of highly hazardous chemicals. provision more protective of employee safety and health shall apply without For requirements regarding the proc- regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e). ess safety management of highly haz- (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op- ardous chemicals as it pertains to con- erations within the scope of paragraphs struction work, follow the require- (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec- ments in 29 CFR 1910.119. tion must comply with all paragraphs [84 FR 21576, May 14, 2019] of this section except paragraphs (p) and (q). § 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations (iii) Operations within the scope of and emergency response. paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section (a) Scope, application, and definitions— must comply only with the require- (1) Scope. This section covers the fol- ments of paragraph (p) of this section. lowing operations, unless the employer NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions can demonstrate that the operation of paragraph (p) of this section cover any does not involve employee exposure or treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper- the reasonable possibility for employee ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 exposure to safety or health hazards: or by state law authorized under RCRA, and (i) Clean-up operations required by a required to have a permit or interim status governmental body, whether Federal, from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from state, local or other involving haz- a state agency pursuant to RCRA. ardous substances that are conducted (B) Employers who are not required to at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites have a permit or interim status because they are conditionally exempt small quantity (including, but not limited to, the generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera- EPA’s National Priority Site List tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex- (NPL), state priority site lists, sites emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts recommended for the EPA NPL, and 264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are initial investigations of government not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through identified sites which are conducted be- (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers fore the presence or absence of haz- who are required by the EPA or state agency ardous substances has been to have their employees engage in emergency response or who direct their employ- ascertained); ees to engage in emergency response are cov- (ii) Corrective actions involving ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and clean-up operations at sites covered by cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec- the Resource Conservation and Recov- tion. Excepted employers who are not re- ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42 quired to have employees engage in emer- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.); gency response, who direct their employees (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at to evacuate in the case of such emergencies sites recognized by Federal, state, local and who meet the requirements of paragraph (p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the or other governmental bodies as uncon- balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. trolled hazardous waste sites; (C) If an area is used primarily for treat- (iv) Operations involving hazardous ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- wastes that are conducted at treat- sponse operations in that area shall comply

120

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00130 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other Facility means (A) any building, areas not used primarily for treatment, stor- structure, installation, equipment, pipe age, or disposal, any emergency response op- or pipeline (including any pipe into a erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of this section. Compliance with the require- sewer or publicly owned treatment ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im- be deemed to be in compliance with the re- poundment, ditch, storage container, quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec- motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air- tion. craft, or (B) any site or area where a (iv) Emergency response operations hazardous substance has been depos- for releases of, or substantial threats of ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or releases of, hazardous substances which otherwise come to be located; but does are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) not include any consumer product in through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must consumer use or any water-borne ves- only comply with the requirements of sel. paragraph (q) of this section. Hazardous materials response (3) Definitions—Buddy system means a (HAZMAT) team means an organized system of organizing employees into group of employees, designated by the work groups in such a manner that employer, who are expected to perform each employee of the work group is work to handle and control actual or designated to be observed by at least potential leaks or spills of hazardous one other employee in the work group. substances requiring possible close ap- The purpose of the buddy system is to proach to the substance. The team provide rapid assistance to employees members perform responses to releases in the event of an emergency. or potential releases of hazardous sub- Clean-up operation means an oper- stances for the purpose of control or ation where hazardous substances are stabilization of the incident. A removed, contained, incinerated, neu- HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT any other manner processed or handled team. A HAZMAT team, however, may with the ultimate goal of making the be a separate component of a fire bri- site safer for people or the environ- gade or fire department. ment. Hazardous substance means any sub- Decontamination means the removal stance designated or listed under para- of hazardous substances from employ- graphs (A) through (D) of this defini- ees and their equipment to the extent tion, exposure to which results or may necessary to preclude the occurrence of result in adverse affects on the health foreseeable adverse health affects. or safety of employees: Emergency response or responding to (A) Any substance defined under sec- emergencies means a response effort by tion 101(14) of CERCLA; employees from outside the immediate (B) Any biological agent and other release area or by other designated re- disease-causing agent which after responders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local lease into the environment and upon fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- which results, or is likely to result, in similation into any person, either di- an uncontrolled release of a hazardous rectly from the environment or indi- substance. Responses to incidental re- rectly by ingestion through food leases of hazardous substances where chains, will or may reasonably be an- the substance can be absorbed, neutral- ticipated to cause death, disease, be- ized, or otherwise controlled at the havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic time of release by employees in the im- mutation, physiological malfunctions mediate release area, or by mainte- (including malfunctions in reproduc- nance personnel are not considered to tion) or physical deformations in such be emergency responses within the persons or their offspring; scope of this standard. Responses to re- (C) Any substance listed by the U.S. leases of hazardous substances where Department of Transportation as haz- there is no potential safety or health ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical and appendices; and exposure) are not considered to be (D) Hazardous waste as herein de- emergency responses. fined.

121

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00131 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Hazardous waste means—(A) A waste porated by reference, or if none is spec- or combination of wastes as defined in ified, the exposure limits published in 40 CFR 261.3, or the standards specified by the Amer- (B) Those substances defined as haz- ican Conference of Governmental In- ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. dustrial Hygienists in their publication Hazardous waste operation means any ‘‘Threshold Limit Values and Biologi- operation conducted within the scope cal Exposure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated of this standard. 1987 incorporated by reference. Hazardous waste site or Site means Post emergency response means that any facility or location within the portion of an emergency response per- scope of this standard at which haz- formed after the immediate threat of a ardous waste operations take place. release has been stabilized or elimi- Health hazard means a chemical or a nated and clean-up of the site has pathogen where acute or chronic begun. If post emergency response is health effects may occur in exposed performed by an employer’s own em- employees. It also includes stress due ployees who were part of the initial to temperature extremes. The term emergency response, it is considered to health hazard includes chemicals that be part of the initial response and not are classified in accordance with the post emergency response. However, if a Hazard Communication Standard, group of an employer’s own employees, § 1910.1200, as posing one of the fol- separate from the group providing ini- lowing hazardous effects: acute tox- tial response, performs the clean-up op- icity (any route of exposure); skin cor- eration, then the separate group of em- rosion or irritation; serious eye dam- ployees would be considered to be per- age or eye irritation; respiratory or forming post-emergency response and skin sensitization; germ cell mutage- subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec- nicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive tion. toxicity; specific target organ toxicity Qualified person means a person with (single or repeated exposure); aspira- specific training, knowledge and expe- tion toxicity or simple asphyxiant. (See rience in the area for which the person Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Haz- has the responsibility and the author- ard Criteria (Mandatory) for the cri- ity to control. teria for determining whether a chem- Site safety and health supervisor (or of- ical is classified as a health hazard.) ficial) means the individual located on IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life a hazardous waste site who is respon- or health means an atmospheric con- sible to the employer and has the au- centration of any toxic, corrosive or thority and knowledge necessary to asphyxiant substance that poses an im- implement the site safety and health mediate threat to life or would cause plan and verify compliance with appli- irreversible or delayed adverse health cable safety and health requirements. effects or would interfere with an indi- Small quantity generator means a gen- vidual’s ability to escape from a dan- erator of hazardous wastes who in any gerous atmosphere. calendar month generates no more Oxygen deficiency means that con- than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of centration of oxygen by volume below hazardous waste in that month. which atmosphere supplying res- Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, piratory protection must be provided. means an area identified as an uncon- It exists in atmospheres where the per- trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- centage of oxygen by volume is less ernmental body, whether Federal, than 19.5 percent oxygen. state, local or other where an accumu- Permissible exposure limit means the lation of hazardous substances creates exposure, inhalation or dermal permis- a threat to the health and safety of in- sible exposure limit specified either in dividuals or the environment or both. § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in Some sites are found on public lands other pertinent sections of this part. such as those created by former munic- Published exposure level means the ex- ipal, county or state landfills where il- posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH legal or poorly managed waste disposal Recommendations for Occupational has taken place. Other sites are found Health Standards’’ dated 1986 incor- on private property, often belonging to

122

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00132 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

generators or former generators of haz- and any potential fire, explosion, ardous substance wastes. Examples of health, safety or other hazards of the such sites include, but are not limited hazardous waste operation that have to, surface impoundments, landfills, been identified by the employer, in- dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- cluding those identified in the employ- mal operations at TSD sites are not er’s information program. covered by this definition. (v) Program availability. The written (b) Safety and health program. safety and health program shall be made available to any contractor or NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs developed and implemented to meet other subcontractor or their representative Federal, state, or local regulations are con- who will be involved with the haz- sidered acceptable in meeting this require- ardous waste operation; to employees; ment if they cover or are modified to cover to employee designated representa- the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per- ditional or separate safety and health pro- sonnel of other Federal, state, or local gram is not required by this paragraph. agencies with regulatory authority (1) General. (i) Employers shall de- over the site. velop and implement a written safety (2) Organizational structure part of the and health program for their employ- site program—(i) The organizationa1 ees involved in hazardous waste oper- structure part of the program shall es- ations. The program shall be designed tablish the specific chain of command to identify, evaluate, and control safe- and specify the overall responsibilities ty and health hazards, and provide for of supervisors and employees. It shall emergency response for hazardous include, at a minimum, the following waste operations. elements: (ii) The written safety and health (A) A general supervisor who has the program shall incorporate the fol- responsibility and authority to direct lowing: all hazardous waste operations. (A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super- (B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and (C) A site-specific safety and health authority to develop and implement plan which need not repeat the employ- the site safety and health plan and er’s standard operating procedures re- verify compliance. quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this (C) All other personnel needed for section; hazardous waste site operations and (D) The safety and health training emergency response and their general program; functions and responsibilities. (E) The medical surveillance pro- (D) The lines of authority, responsi- gram; bility, and communication. (F) The employer’s standard oper- (ii) The organizational structure ating procedures for safety and health; shall be reviewed and updated as nec- and essary to reflect the current status of (G) Any necessary interface between waste site operations. general program and site specific ac- (3) Comprehensive workplan part of the tivities. site program. The comprehensive (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations workplan part of the program shall ad- created during initial site preparation dress the tasks and objectives of the or during hazardous waste operations site operations and the logistics and re- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate sources required to reach those tasks to prevent accidental collapse in ac- and objectives. cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part (i) The comprehensive workplan shall 1926. address anticipated clean-up activities (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors. as well as normal operating procedures An employer who retains contractor or which need not repeat the employer’s sub-contractor services for work in procedures available elsewhere. hazardous waste operations shall in- (ii) The comprehensive workplan form those contractors, sub-contrac- shall define work tasks and objectives tors, or their representatives of the and identify the methods for accom- site emergency response procedures plishing those tasks and objectives.

123

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00133 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iii) The comprehensive workplan the necessary PPE and other equip- shall establish personnel requirements ment. for implementing the plan. (I) Confined space entry procedures. (iv) The comprehensive workplan (J) A spill containment program shall provide for the implementation of meeting the requirements of paragraph the training required in paragraph (e) (j) of this section. of this section. (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe- (v) The comprehensive workplan cific safety and health plan shall pro- shall provide for the implementation of vide for pre-entry briefings to be held the required informational programs prior to initiating any site activity, required in paragraph (i) of this sec- and at such other times as necessary to tion. ensure that employees are apprised of (vi) The comprehensive workplan the site safety and health plan and shall provide for the implementation of that this plan is being followed. The in- the medical surveillance program deformation and data obtained from site scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. characterization and analysis work re- (4) Site-specific safety and health plan quired in paragraph (c) of this section part of the program—(i) General. The site shall be used to prepare and update the safety and health plan, which must be site safety and health plan. kept on site, shall address the safety (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and and health hazards of each phase of site health plan. Inspections shall be con- operation and include the requirements ducted by the site safety and health su- and procedures for employee protec- pervisor or, in the absence of that indi- tion. vidual, another individual who is (ii) Elements. The site safety and knowledgeable in occupational safety health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- and health, acting on behalf of the em- dress the following: ployer as necessary to determine the (A) A safety and health risk or haz- effectiveness of the site safety and ard analysis for each site task and op- health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef- eration found in the workplan. fectiveness of the site safety and (B) Employee training assignments health plan shall be corrected by the to assure compliance with paragraph employer. (e) of this section. (c) Site characterization and analysis— (C) Personal protective equipment to (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall be used by employees for each of the be evaluated in accordance with this site tasks and operations being con- paragraph to identify specific site haz- ducted as required by the personal pro- ards and to determine the appropriate tective equipment program in para- safety and health control procedures graph (g)(5) of this section. needed to protect employees from the (D) Medical surveillance require- identified hazards. ments in accordance with the program (2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- in paragraph (f) of this section. nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- (E) Frequency and types of air moni- tics shall be performed prior to site toring, personnel monitoring, and envi- entry by a qualified person in order to ronmental sampling techniques and in- aid in the selection of appropriate em- strumentation to be used, including ployee protection methods prior to site methods of maintenance and calibra- entry. Immediately after initial site tion of monitoring and sampling equip- entry, a more detailed evaluation of ment to be used. the site’s specific characteristics shall (F) Site control measures in accord- be performed by a qualified person in ance with the site control program re- order to further identify existing site quired in paragraph (d) of this section. hazards and to further aid in the selec- (G) Decontamination procedures in tion of the appropriate engineering accordance with paragraph (k) of this controls and personal protective equip- section. ment for the tasks to be performed. (H) An emergency response plan (3) Hazard identification. All suspected meeting the requirements of paragraph conditions that may pose inhalation or (l) of this section for safe and effective skin absorption hazards that are imme- responses to emergencies, including diately dangerous to life or health

124

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00134 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(IDLH), or other conditions that may (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained cause death or serious harm, shall be breathing apparatus is not used as part identified during the preliminary sur- of the entry ensemble, and if res- vey and evaluated during the detailed piratory protection is warranted by the survey. Examples of such hazards in- potential hazards identified during the clude, but are not limited to, confined preliminary site evaluation, an escape space entry, potentially explosive or self-contained breathing apparatus of flammable situations, visible vapor at least five minute’s duration shall be clouds, or areas where biological indi- carried by employees during initial site cators such as dead animals or vegeta- entry. tion are located. (iii) If the preliminary site evalua- (4) Required information. The fol- tion does not produce sufficient infor- lowing information to the extent avail- mation to identify the hazards or sus- able shall be obtained by the employer pected hazards of the site, an ensemble prior to allowing employees to enter a providing protection equivalent to site: Level B PPE shall be provided as min- (i) Location and approximate size of imum protection, and direct reading the site. instruments shall be used as appro- (ii) Description of the response activ- priate for identifying IDLH conditions. ity and/or the job task to be performed. (See appendix B for a description of (iii) Duration of the planned em- Level B hazards and the recommenda- ployee activity. tions for Level B protective equip- (iv) Site topography and accessibility ment.) by air and roads. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have (v) Safety and health hazards ex- been identified, the appropriate PPE pected at the site. shall be selected and used in accord- (vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- ance with paragraph (g) of this section. stance dispersion. (6) Monitoring. The following moni- (vii) Present status and capabilities toring shall be conducted during initial of emergency response teams that site entry when the site evaluation would provide assistance to hazardous produces information that shows the waste clean-up site employees at the potential for ionizing radiation or time of an emergency. IDLH conditions, or when the site in- (viii) Hazardous substances and formation is not sufficient reasonably health hazards involved or expected at to eliminate these possible conditions: the site, and their chemical and phys- (i) Monitoring with direct reading in- ical properties. struments for hazardous levels of ion- (5) Personal protective equipment. Per- izing radiation. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall (ii) Monitoring the air with appro- be provided and used during initial site priate direct reading test equipment entry in accordance with the following (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector requirements: tubes) for IDLH and other conditions (i) Based upon the results of the pre- that may cause death or serious harm liminary site evaluation, an ensemble (combustible or explosive atmospheres, of PPE shall be selected and used dur- oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). ing initial site entry which will provide (iii) Visually observing for signs of protection to a level of exposure below actual or potential IDLH or other dan- permissible exposure limits and pub- gerous conditions. lished exposure levels for known or sus- (iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- pected hazardous substances and gram in accordance with paragraph (h) health hazards, and which will provide of this section shall be implemented protection against other known and after site characterization has deter- suspected hazards identified during the mined the site is safe for the start-up preliminary site evaluation. If there is of operations. no permissible exposure limit or pub- (7) Risk identification. Once the pres- lished exposure level, the employer ence and concentrations of specific may use other published studies and in- hazardous substances and health haz- formation as a guide to appropriate ards have been established, the risks personal protective equipment. associated with these substances shall

125

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00135 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

be identified. Employees who will be hazardous substances, health hazards, working on the site shall be informed or safety hazards and their supervisors of any risks that have been identified. and management responsible for the In situations covered by the Hazard site shall receive training meeting the Communication Standard, 29 CFR requirements of this paragraph before 1926.59, training required by that stand- they are permitted to engage in hazard need not be duplicated. ardous waste operations that could ex- NOTE TO (c)(7). Risks to consider include, pose them to hazardous substances, but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they (a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex- shall receive review training as speci- posure limits and published exposure levels. fied in this paragraph. (b) IDLH concentrations. (c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted sources. to participate in or supervise field ac- (d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to (e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function ranges. and responsibility. (f) Oxygen deficiency. (2) Elements to be covered. The train- (8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol- mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing: ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health; present on site that is available to the (ii) Safety, health and other hazards employer and relevant to the duties an present on the site; employee is expected to perform shall (iii) Use of personal protective equip- be made available to the affected em- ment; ployees prior to the commencement of their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em- may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz- the hazard communication standard for ards; this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls (d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site; priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require- implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp- sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and (2) Site control program. A site control (vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) program for protecting employees through (J) of the site safety and which is part of the employer’s site health plan set forth in paragraph safety and health program required in (b)(4)(ii) of this section. paragraph (b) of this section shall be (3) Initial training. (i) General site developed during the planning stages of workers (such as equipment operators, a hazardous waste clean-up operation general laborers and supervisory per- and modified as necessary as new infor- sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance mation becomes available. removal or other activities which ex- (3) Elements of the site control program. pose or potentially expose workers to The site control program shall, as a hazardous substances and health haz- minimum, include: A site map; site work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys- ards shall receive a minimum of 40 tem’’; site communications including hours of instruction off the site, and a alerting means for emergencies; the minimum of three days actual field ex- standard operating procedures or safe perience under the direct supervision of work practices; and, identification of a trained, experienced supervisor. the nearest medical assistance. Where (ii) Workers on site only occasionally these requirements are covered else- for a specific limited task (such as, but where they need not be repeated. not limited to, ground water moni- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em- toring, land surveying, or geo-physical ployees working on site (such as but surveying) and who are unlikely to be not limited to equipment operators, exposed over permissible exposure lim- general laborers and others) exposed to its and published exposure limits shall

126

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00136 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- instructional skills and knowledge of struction off the site, and the min- the applicable subject matter. imum of one day actual field experi- (6) Training certification. Employees ence under the direct supervision of a and supervisors that have received and trained, experienced supervisor. successfully completed the training (iii) Workers regularly on site who and field experience specified in para- work in areas which have been mon- graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec- itored and fully characterized indi- tion shall be certified by their instruc- cating that exposures are under per- tor or the head instructor and trained missible exposure limits and published supervisor as having successfully com- exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ- not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph 24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper- experience under the direct supervision ations. of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees (iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz- who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz- and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may expose them to hazardous substances become general site workers or who are shall be trained in how to respond to required to wear respirators, shall have such expected emergencies. the additional 16 hours and two days of (8) Refresher training. Employees spec- training necessary to total the training ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). and managers and supervisors specified (4) Management and supervisor train- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall ing. On-site management and super- receive eight hours of refresher train- visors directly responsible for, or who ing annually on the items specified in supervise employees engaged in, haz- paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this ardous waste operations shall receive section, any critique of incidents that 40 hours initial training, and three have occurred in the past year that can days of supervised field experience (the serve as training examples of related training may be reduced to 24 hours work, and other relevant topics. and one day if the only area of their re- (9) Equivalent training. Employers sponsibility is employees covered by who can show by documentation or cer- paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and tification that an employee’s work ex- at least eight additional hours of spe- perience and/or training has resulted in cialized training at the time of job as- training equivalent to that training re- signment on such topics as, but not quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through limited to, the employer’s safety and (e)(4) of this section shall not be re- health program and the associated em- quired to provide the initial training ployee training program, personal pro- requirements of those paragraphs to tective equipment program, spill con- such employees and shall provide a tainment program, and health hazard copy of the certification or documenta- monitoring procedure and techniques. tion to the employee upon request. (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers However, certified employees or em- shall be qualified to instruct employees ployees with equivalent training new about the subject matter that is being to a site shall receive appropriate, site presented in training. Such trainers specific training before site entry and shall have satisfactorily completed a have appropriate supervised field expe- training program for teaching the sub- rience at the new site. Equivalent jects they are expected to teach, or training includes any academic train- they shall have the academic creden- ing or the training that existing em- tials and instructional experience nec- ployees might have already received essary for teaching the subjects. In- from actual hazardous waste site work structors shall demonstrate competent experience.

127

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00137 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation; fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex- (a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary. graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ- with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov- (2) Employees covered. The medical ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may surveillance program shall be insti- have been injured, received a health tuted by the employer for the following impairment, developed signs or symp- employees: toms which may have resulted from ex- (i) All employees who are or may be posure to hazardous substances result- exposed to hazardous substances or ing from an emergency incident, or ex- health hazards at or above the permis- posed during an emergency incident to sible exposure limits or, if there is no hazardous substances at concentra- permissible exposure limit, above the tions above the permissible exposure published exposure levels for these sub- limits or the published exposure levels stances, without regard to the use of without the necessary personal protec- respirators, for 30 days or more a year; tive equipment being used: (ii) All employees who wear a res- (A) As soon as possible following the pirator for 30 days or more a year or as emergency incident or development of required by § 1926.103; signs or symptoms; (iii) All employees who are injured, (B) At additional times, if the exam- become ill or develop signs or symp- ining physician determines that follow- toms due to possible overexposure in- up examinations or consultations are volving hazardous substances or health medically necessary. hazards from an emergency response or (4) Content of medical examinations and hazardous waste operation; and consultations. (i) Medical examinations required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec- (iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work (3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in Medical examina- and consultations. the employee’s file) with special em- tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han- available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of health hazards, and to fitness for duty this section on the following schedules: including the ability to wear any re- (i) For employees covered under quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and perature extremes) that may be ex- (f)(2)(iv): pected at the work site. (A) Prior to assignment; (ii) The content of medical examina- (B) At least once every twelve tions or consultations made available months for each employee covered un- to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) less the attending physician believes a shall be determined by the attending longer interval (not greater than bien- physician. The guidelines in the Occu- nially) is appropriate; pational Safety and Health Guidance (C) At termination of employment or Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- reassignment to an area where the em- ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) ployee would not be covered if the em- should be consulted. ployee has not had an examination (5) Examination bv a physician and within the last six months; costs. All medical examinations and (D) As soon as possible upon notifica- procedures shall be performed by or tion by an employee that the employee under the supervision of a licensed phy- has developed signs or symptoms indi- sician, preferably one knowledgeable in cating possible overexposure to haz- occupational medicine, and shall be ardous substances or health hazards, or provided without cost to the employee, that the employee has been injured or without loss of pay, and at a reason- exposed above the permissible exposure able time and place.

128

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00138 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(6) Information provided to the physi- (B) Physician’s written opinions, rec- cian. The employer shall provide one ommended limitations, and results of copy of this standard and its appen- examinations and tests; dices to the attending physician, and in (C) Any employee medical com- addition the following for each em- plaints related to exposure to haz- ployee: ardous substances; (i) A description of the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro- duties as they relate to the employee’s vided to the examining physician by exposures. the employer, with the exception of the (ii) The employee’s exposure levels or standard and its appendices. anticipated exposure levels. (g) Engineering controls, work prac- (iii) A description of any personal tices, and personal protective equipment protective equipment used or to be for employee protection. Engineering used. controls, work practices, personal pro- (iv) Information from previous med- tective equipment, or a combination of ical examinations of the employee these shall be implemented in accord- which is not readily available to the ance with this paragraph to protect examining physician. employees from exposure to hazardous (v) Information required by § 1926.103. substances and safety and health haz- (7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The ards. employer shall obtain and furnish the (1) Engineering controls, work practices employee with a copy of a written and PPE for substances regulated either opinion from the attending physician in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in containing the following: other pertinent sections of this part. (i) (A) The physician’s opinion as to Engineering controls and work prac- whether the employee has any detected tices shall be instituted to reduce and medical conditions which would place maintain employee exposure to or the employee at increased risk of ma- below the permissible exposure limits terial impairment of the employee’s for substances regulated either in health from work in hazardous waste § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of operations or emergency response, or this part, except to the extent that from respirator use. such controls and practices are not fea- (B) The physician’s recommended sible. limitations upon the employee’s assigned work. NOTE TO (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls (C) The results of the medical exam- which may be feasible include the use of pressurized cabs or control booths on equip- ination and tests if requested by the ment, and/or the use of remotely operated employee. material handling equipment. Work prac- (D) A statement that the employee tices which may be feasible are removing all has been informed by the physician of non-essential employees from potential ex- the results of the medical examination posure during opening of drums, wetting and any medical conditions which re- down dusty operations and locating employ- quire further examination or treat- ees upwind of possible hazards. ment. (ii) Whenever engineering controls and (ii) The written opinion obtained by work practices are not feasible or not required, any reasonable combination of engi- the employer shall not reveal specific neering controls, work practices and PPE findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- shall be used to reduce and maintain em- cupational exposures. ployee exposures to or below the permissible (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate exposure limits or dose limits for substances record of the medical surveillance re- regulated either in § 1926.55 or other perti- quired by paragraph (f) of this section nent sections of this part. shall be retained. This record shall be (iii) The employer shall not implement a retained for the period specified and schedule of employee rotation as a means of meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33. compliance with permissible exposure limits or dose limits except when there is no other (ii) The record required in paragraph feasible way of complying with the airborne (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation. least the following information: (iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be (A) The name of the employee; followed.

129

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00139 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Engineering controls, work practices, protection is necessary to reduce em- and PPE for substances not regulated ei- ployee exposures below permissible ex- ther in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, posure limits and published exposure or in other pertinent sections of this part. levels for hazardous substances and An appropriate combination of engi- health hazards. (See appendix B for neering controls, work practices, and guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.) personal protective equipment shall be NOTE TO (g)(3): The level of employee pro- used to reduce and maintain employee tection provided may be decreased when ad- exposure to or below published expo- ditional information or site conditions show sure levels for hazardous substances that decreased protection will not result in and health hazards not regulated either hazardous exposures to employees. in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or (vi) Personal protective equipment in other pertinent sections of this part. shall be selected and used to meet the The employer may use the published requirements of subpart E of this part literature and Safety Data Sheets and additional requirements specified (SDS) as a guide in making the em- in this section. ployer’s determination as to what level (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical proof protection the employer believes is tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating appropriate for hazardous substances suits shall protect employees from the and health hazards for which there is particular hazards which are identified no permissible exposure limit or pub- during site characterization and anal- lished exposure limit. ysis. (3) Personal protective equipment selec- (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall tion. (i) Personal protective equipment be capable of maintaining positive air (PPE) shall be selected and used which pressure. (See appendix A for a test will protect employees from the haz- method which may be used to evaluate ards and potential hazards they are this requirement.) likely to encounter as identified during (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall the site characterization and analysis. be capable of preventing inward test (ii) Personal protective equipment gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent. selection shall be based on an evalua- (See appendix A for a test method tion of the performance characteristics which may be used to evaluate this re- of the PPE relative to the require- quirement.) ments and limitations of the site, the (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) task-specific conditions and duration, program. A written personal protective and the hazards and potential hazards equipment program, which is part of identified at the site. the employer’s safety and health pro- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained gram required in paragraph (b) of this breathing apparatus, or positive pres- section or required in paragraph (p)(1) sure air-line respirators equipped with of this section and which is also a part an escape air supply, shall be used of the site-specific safety and health when chemical exposure levels present plan shall be established. The PPE pro- will create a substantial possibility of gram shall address the elements listed immediate death, immediate serious below. When elements, such as donning illness or injury, or impair the ability and doffing procedures, are provided by to escape. the manufacturer of a piece of equip- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical ment and are attached to the plan, protective suits (protection equivalent they need not be rewritten into the to Level A protection as recommended plan as long as they adequately address in appendix B) shall be used in condi- the procedure or element. tions where skin absorption of a haz- (i) PPE selection based upon site hazardous substance may result in a sub- ards, stantial possibility of immediate (ii) PPE use and limitations of the death, immediate serious illness or in- equipment, jury, or impair the ability to escape. (iii) Work mission duration, (v) The level of protection provided (iv) PPE maintenance and storage, by PPE selection shall be increased (v) PPE decontamination and dis- when additional information on site posal, conditions indicates that increased (vi) PPE training and proper fitting,

130

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00140 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- (iv) When employees are handling dures, leaking drums or containers or work- (viii) PPE inspection procedures ing in areas with obvious liquid con- prior to, during, and after use, tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon). (ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees. the PPE program, and After the actual clean-up phase of any (x) Limitations during temperature hazardous waste operation commences; extremes, heat stress, and other appro- for example, when soil, surface water priate medical considerations. or containers are moved or disturbed; (h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- the employer shall monitor those em- toring shall be performed in accord- ployees likely to have the highest ex- ance with this paragraph where there posures to hazardous substances and may be a question of employee expo- health hazards likely to be present sure to hazardous concentrations of above permissible exposure limits or hazardous substances in order to assure published exposure levels by using per- proper selection of engineering con- sonal sampling frequently enough to trols, work practices and personal pro- characterize employee exposures. If the tective equipment so that employees employees likely to have the highest are not exposed to levels which exceed exposure are over permissible exposure permissible exposure limits, or pub- limits or published exposure limits, lished exposure levels if there are no then monitoring shall continue to de- permissible exposure limits, for haz- termine all employees likely to be ardous substances. above those limits. The employer may (ii) Air monitoring shall be used to utilize a representative sampling ap- identify and quantify airborne levels of proach by documenting that the em- hazardous substances and safety and ployees and chemicals chosen for moni- health hazards in order to determine toring are based on the criteria stated the appropriate level of employee pro- above. tection needed on site. (2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, NOTE TO (h): It is not required to monitor employees engaged in site characterization representative air monitoring shall be operations covered by paragraph (c) of this conducted to identify any IDLH condi- section. tion, exposure over permissible exposure limits or published exposure lev- (i) Informational programs. Employers els, exposure over a radioactive mate- shall develop and implement a pro- rial’s dose limits or other dangerous gram, which is part of the employer’s condition such as the presence of flam- safety and health program required in mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient paragraph (b) of this section, to inform environments. employees, contractors, and sub- (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni- contractors (or their representative) toring shall be conducted when the pos- actually engaged in hazardous waste sibility of an IDLH condition or flam- operations of the nature, level and de- mable atmosphere has developed or gree of exposure likely as a result of when there is indication that exposures participation in such hazardous waste may have risen over permissible expo- operations. Employees, contractors and sure limits or published exposure levels subcontractors working outside of the since prior monitoring. Situations operations part of a site are not cov- where it shall be considered whether ered by this standard. the possibility that exposures have (j) Handling drums and containers—(1) risen are as follows: General. (i) Hazardous substances and (i) When work begins on a different contaminated soils, liquids, and other portion of the site. residues shall be handled, transported, (ii) When contaminants other than labeled, and disposed of in accordance those previously identified are being with this paragraph. handled. (ii) Drums and containers used dur- (iii) When a different type of oper- ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- opposed to exploratory well drilling). tions for the wastes that they contain.

131

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00141 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iii) When practical, drums and con- in areas where drums or containers are tainers shall be inspected and their in- being opened: tegrity shall be assured prior to being (i) Where an airline respirator system moved. Drums or containers that can- is used, connections to the source of air not be inspected before being moved supply shall be protected from con- because of storage conditions (i.e., bur- tamination and the entire system shall ied beneath the earth, stacked behind be protected from physical damage. other drums, stacked several tiers high (ii) Employees not actually involved in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac- in opening drums or containers shall be cessible location and inspected prior to kept a safe distance from the drums or further handling. containers being opened. (iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and (v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci- container movement. dental explosion. (vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip- the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion- with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier. tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi- (vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition. and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess (viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re- spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the (b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury. tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon being transferred. or work from drums or containers. (ix) Drums and containers that can- (3) Material handling equipment. Mate- not be moved without rupture, leakage, rial handiing equipment used to trans- or spillage shall be emptied into a fer drums and containers shall be se- sound container using a device classi- lected, positioned and operated to min- fied for the material being transferred. imize sources of ignition related to the (x) A ground-penetrating system or equipment from igniting vapors re- other type of detection system or de- leased from ruptured drums or con- vice shall be used to estimate the loca- tainers. tion and depth of buried drums or con- (4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and containers. tainers containing radioactive wastes (xi) Soil or covering material shall be shall not be handled until such time as removed with caution to prevent drum their hazard to employees is properly or container rupture. assessed. (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment (5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- meeting the requirements of subpart F imum, the following special pre- of this part shall be on hand and ready cautions shall be taken when drums for use to control incipient fires. and containers containing or suspected (2) Opening drums and containers. The of containing shock-sensitive wastes following procedures shall be followed are handled:

132

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00142 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(i) All non-essential employees shall (7) Sampling of drum and container be evacuated from the area of transfer. contents. Sampling of containers and (ii) Material handling equipment drums shall be done in accordance with shall be provided with explosive con- a sampling procedure which is part of tainment devices or protective shields the site safety and health plan devel- to protect equipment operators from oped for and available to employees exploding containers. and others at the specific worksite. (iii) An employee alarm system capa- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums ble of being perceived above sur- and containers shall be identified and rounding light and noise conditions classified prior to packaging for ship- shall be used to signal the commencement. ment and completion of explosive (ii) Drum or container staging areas waste handling activities. shall be kept to the minimum number (iv) Continuous communications (i.e., necessary to identify and classify ma- portable radios, hand signals, tele- terials safely and prepare them for phones, as appropriate) shall be main- transport. tained between the employee-in-charge (iii) Staging areas shall be provided of the immediate handling area and with adequate access and egress routes. both the site safety and health super- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes visor and the command post until such shall be permitted only after a thor- time as the handling operation is com- ough characterization of the materials pleted. Communication equipment or has been completed. methods that could cause shock sen- (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i) sitive materials to explode shall not be Tanks and vaults containing hazardous used. substances shall be handled in a man- (v) Drums and containers under pres- ner similar to that for drums and con- sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- tainers, taking into consideration the ing, shall not be moved until such time size of the tank or vault. as the cause for excess pressure is de- (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry termined and appropriate containment procedures as described in the employ- procedures have been implemented to er’s safety and health plan shall be fol- protect employees from explosive relief lowed whenever employees must enter of the drum. a tank or vault. (vi) Drums and containers containing (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro- packaged laboratory wastes shall be cedures for all phases of decontamina- considered to contain shock-sensitive tion shall be developed and imple- or explosive materials until they have mented in accordance with this para- been characterized. graph. CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes (2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A may be prohibited under U.S. Department of decontamination procedure shall be de- Transportation regulations. Employers and veloped, communicated to employees their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21 and implemented before any employees and 173.50. or equipment may enter areas on site (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition where potential for exposure to haz- to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5) ardous substances exists. of this section, the following pre- (ii) Standard operating procedures cautions shall be taken, as a minimum, shall be developed to minimize em- in handling laboratory waste packs ployee contact with hazardous sub- (lab packs): stances or with equipment that has (i) Lab packs shall be opened only contacted hazardous substances. when necessary and then only by an in- (iii) All employees leaving a contami- dividual knowledgeable in the inspec- nated area shall be appropriately de- tion, classification, and segregation of contaminated; all contaminated cloth- the containers within the pack according and equipment leaving a contami- ing to the hazards of the wastes. nated area shall be appropriately dis- (ii) If crystalline material is noted on posed of or decontaminated. any container, the contents shall be (iv) Decontamination procedures handled as a shock-sensitive waste shall be monitored by the site safety until the contents are identified. and health supervisor to determine

133

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00143 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives, dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern- propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon- rect any deficiencies. sibilities. (3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are equipment. exempt from the requirements of this (4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer- ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with tamination shall be decontaminated or § 1926.35 of this part. disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response (5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer- equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min- cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following: placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning. fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author- (ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication. meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre- hazardous substances shall imme- vention. diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref- ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge. disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control. is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce- (6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures. ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe- change rooms. ty and health plan. (7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid. cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures. ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow- tially harmful effects of exposures to up. hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. (8) Showers and change rooms. Where (3) Procedures for handling emergency the decontamination procedure indi- incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- cates a need for regular showers and ments for the emergency response plan change rooms outside of a contami- required in paragraph (1)(2) of this sec- nated area, they shall be provided and tion, the following elements shall be meet the requirements of 29 CFR included for emergency response plans: 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre- (A) Site topography, layout, and prevent the effective use of water, then vailing weather conditions. other effective means for cleansing (B) Procedures for reporting inci- shall be provided and used. dents to local, state, and federal gov- (l) Emergency response by employees at ernmental agencies. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1) (ii) The emergency response plan Emergency response plan. (i) An emer- shall be a separate section of the Site gency response plan shall be developed Safety and Health Plan. and implemented by all employers (iii) The emergency response plan within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1) shall be compatible and integrated (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici- with the disaster, fire and/or emer- pated emergencies prior to the com- gency response plans of local, state, mencement of hazardous waste oper- and federal agencies. ations. The plan shall be in writing and (iv) The emergency response plan available for inspection and copying by shall be rehearsed regularly as part of

134

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00144 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

the overall training program for site (iv) Where single service cups (to be operations. used but once) are supplied, both a san- (v) The site emergency response plan itary container for the unused cups and shall be reviewed periodically and, as a receptacle for disposing of the used necessary, be amended to keep it cur- cups shall be provided. rent with new or changing site condi- (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for tions or information. nonpotable water, such as water for (vi) An employee alarm system shall firefighting purposes, shall be identi- be installed to notify employees of an fied to indicate clearly that the water emergency situation; to stop work ac- is unsafe and is not to be used for tivities if necessary; to lower back- drinking, washing, or cooking pur- ground noise in order to speed commu- poses. nication; and to begin emergency procedures. (ii) There shall be no cross-connec- (vii) Based upon the information tion, open or potential, between a sys- available at time of the emergency, the tem furnishing potable water and a employer shall evaluate the incident system furnishing nonpotable water. and the site response capabilities and (3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be proceed with the appropriate steps to provided for employees according to implement the site emergency response the following Table D–65.2. plan. (m) Illumination. Areas accessible to TABLE D–65.2—TOILET FACILITIES employees shall be lighted to not less Number of employees Minimum number of facilities than the minimum illumination intensities listed in the following Table D– 20 or fewer ...... One. 65.1 while any work is in progress: More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one urinal per 40 employees. TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION More than 200 ...... One toilet seat and one urinal per 50 employees. INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES

Foot- (ii) Under temporary field conditions, can- Area or operations provisions shall be made to assure that dles at least one toilet facility is available. 5 ...... General site areas. (iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- 3 ...... Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and vided with a sanitary sewer shall be field maintenance areas. provided with the following toilet fa- 5 ...... Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and cilities unless prohibited by local exitways. 5 ...... Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work codes: areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is (A) Chemical toilets; required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling (B) Recirculating toilets; mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept- (C) Combustion toilets; or able for use in the tunnel heading.) (D) Flush toilets. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or (iv) The requirements of this para- living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining graph for sanitation facilities shall not areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.) apply to mobile crews having transpor- 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. tation readily available to nearby toi- (n) Sanitation at temporary work- let facilities. places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade- (v) Doors entering toilet facilities quate supply of potable water shall be shall be provided with entrance locks provided on the site. controlled from inside the facility. (ii) Portable containers used to dis- (4) Food handling. All food service fa- pense drinking water shall be capable cilities and operations for employees of being tightly closed, and equipped shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- with a tap. Water shall not be dipped nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- from containers. tions in which they are located. (iii) Any container used to distribute (5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When drinking water shall be clearly marked temporary sleeping quarters are pro- as to the nature of its contents and not vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, used for any other purpose. and lighted.

135

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00145 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz- shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained. the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in- and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams, which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated (7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives. hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de- operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be- months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec- change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu- posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef- waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made (i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request. shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain operations conducted under 1926.51(f)(4). the Resource Conservation and Recovery (ii) Change rooms shall be provided Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers con- and shall meet the requirements of 29 ducting operations at treatment, stor- CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall con- age and disposal (TSD) facilities speci- sist of two separate change areas sepa- fied in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this sec- rated by the shower area required in tion shall provide and implement the paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One programs specified in this paragraph. change area, with an exit leading off See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’ to the worksite, shall provide employees paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for with a clean area where they can re- employers not covered.)’’. move, store, and put on street clothing. (1) Safety and health program. The em- The second area, with an exit to the ployer shall develop and implement a worksite, shall provide employees with written safety and health program for an area where they can put on, remove employees involved in hazardous waste and store work clothing and personal operations that shall be available for protective equipment. inspection by employees, their rep- (iii) Showers and change rooms shall resentatives and OSHA personnel. The be located in areas where exposures are program shall be designed to identify, below the permissible exposure limits evaluate and control safety and health and published exposure levels. If this hazards in their facilities for the pur- cannot be accomplished, then a ven- pose of employee protection, to provide tilation system shall be provided that for emergency response meeting the re- will supply air that is below the per- quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this missible exposure limits and published section and to address as appropriate exposure levels. site analysis, engineering controls, (iv) Employers shall assure that em- maximum exposure limits, hazardous ployees shower at the end of their work waste handling procedures and uses of shift and when leaving the hazardous new technologies. waste site. (2) Hazard communication program. (o) New technology programs. (1) The The employer shall implement a haz- employer shall develop and implement ard communication program meeting procedures for the introduction of ef- the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59 as fective new technologies and equip- part of the employer’s safety and pro- ment developed for the improved program.

136

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00146 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

NOTE TO 1926.65: The exemption for haz- ployees shall receive eight hours of re- ardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applica- fresher training annually. ble to this section. (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini- (3) Medical surveillance program. The tial training shall have satisfactorily employer shall develop and implement completed a training course for teach- a medical surveillance program meeting the subjects they are expected to ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of teach or they shall have the academic this section. credentials and instruction experience (4) Decontamination program. The em- necessary to demonstrate a good com- ployer shall develop and implement a mand of the subject matter of the decontamination procedure meeting courses and competent instructional the requirements of paragraph (k) of skills. this section. (8) Emergency response program—(i) (5) New technology program. The em- Emergency response plan. An emergency ployer shall develop and implement response plan shall be developed and procedures meeting the requirements implemented by all employers. Such of paragraph (o) of this section for in- plans need not duplicate any of the troducing new and innovative equip- subjects fully addressed in the employment into the workplace. er’s contingency planning required by (6) Material handling program. Where permits, such as those issued by the employees will be handling drums or U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- cy, provided that the contingency plan containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em- through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployers safety and health program re- as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec- prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate (7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo- ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ- part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an stances at TSD operations to enable emergency action plan complying with the employees to perform their as- § 1926.35 of this part. signed duties and functions in a safe (ii) Elements of an emergency response and healthful manner so as not endan- plan. The employer shall develop an ger themselves or other employees. The emergency response plan for emer- initial training shall be for 24 hours gencies which shall address, as a min- and refresher training shall be for eight imum, the following areas to the ex- hours annually. Employees who have tent that they are not addressed in any received the initial training required specific program required in this para- by this paragraph shall be given a writ- graph: ten certificate attesting that they have (A) Pre-emergency planning and co- successfully completed the necessary ordination with outside parties. training. (B) Personnel roles, lines of author- (ii) Current employees. Employers who ity, and communication. can show by an employee’s previous work experience and/or training that (C) Emergency recognition and pre- the employee has had training equiva- vention. lent to the initial training required by (D) Safe distances and places of ref- this paragraph, shall be considered as uge. meeting the initial training require- (E) Site security and control. ments of this paragraph as to that em- (F) Evacuation routes and proce- ployee. Equivalent training includes dures. the training that existing employees (G) Decontamination procedures. might have already received from ac- (H) Emergency medical treatment tual site work experience. Current em- and first aid.

137

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00147 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(I) Emergency alerting and response toms which may result from over expo- procedures. sures. (J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that up. each covered employee has attended (K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train- (iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em- completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly. to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com- training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by operating procedures the employer has the employer. established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele- procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this Exception #1: An employer need not train all section, the following elements shall be employees to the degree specified if the included for emergency response plans employer divides the work force in a man- to the extent that they do not repeat ner such that a sufficient number of em- any information already contained in ployees who have responsibility to control the emergency response plan: emergencies have the training specified, (1) Site topography, layout, and pre- and all other employees, who may first re- vailing weather conditions. spond to an emergency incident, have suffi- (2) Procedures for reporting incidents cient awareness training to recognize that an emergency response situation exists and to local, state, and federal govern- that they are instructed in that case to mental agencies. summon the fully trained employees and (B) The emergency response plan not attempt control activities for which shall be compatible and integrated they are not trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer- Exception #2: An employer need not train all gency response plans of local, state, employees to the degree specified if ar- and federal agencies. rangements have been made in advance for (C) The emergency response plan an outside fully-trained emergency response team to respond in a reasonable pe- shall be rehearsed regularly as part of riod and all employees, who may come to the overall training program for site the incident first, have sufficient aware- operations. ness training to recognize that an emer- (D) The site emergency response plan gency response situation exists and they shall be reviewed periodically and, as have been instructed to call the designated necessary, be amended to keep it cur- outside fully-trained emergency response rent with new or changing site condi- team for assistance. tions or information. (B) Employee members of TSD facil- (E) An employee alarm system shall ity emergency response organizations be installed to notify employees of an shall be trained to a level of com- emergency situation; to stop work ac- petence in the recognition of health tivities if necessary; to lower back- and safety hazards to protect them- ground noise in order to speed commu- selves and other employees. This would nication; and to begin emergency pro- include training in the methods used to cedures. minimize the risk from safety and (F) Based upon the information avail- health hazards; in the safe use of con- able at time of the emergency, the em- trol equipment; in the selection and ployer shall evaluate the incident and use of appropriate personal protective the site response capabilities and pro- equipment; in the safe operating proce- ceed with the appropriate steps to im- dures to be used at the incident scene; plement the site emergency response in the techniques of coordination with plan. other employees to minimize risks; in (q) Emerqency response to hazardous the appropriate response to over expo- substance releases. This paragraph cov- sure from health hazards or injury to ers employers whose employees are en- themselves and other employees; and gaged in emergency response no matter in the recognition of subsequent symp- where it occurs except that it does not

138

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00148 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

cover employees engaged in operations sponse plan or both, as part of their specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through emergency response plan to avoid du- (a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- plication. Those items of the emergency response organizations who have gency response plan that are being developed and implemented programs properly addressed by the SARA Title equivalent to this paragraph for han- III plans may be substituted into their dling releases of hazardous substances emergency plan or otherwise kept to- pursuant to section 303 of the Super- gether for the employer and employee’s fund Amendments and Reauthorization use. Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and (3) Procedures for handling emergency Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, response. (i) The senior emergency re- 42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have sponse official responding to an emer- met the requirements of this paragraph. gency shall become the individual in (1) Emergency response plan. An emer- charge of a site-specific Incident Com- gency response plan shall be developed mand System (ICS). All emergency re- and implemented to handle anticipated sponders and their communications emergencies prior to the commence- shall be coordinated and controlled ment of emergency response oper- through the individual in charge of the ations. The plan shall be in writing and ICS assisted by the senior official available for inspection and copying by present for each employer. employees, their representatives and NOTE TO (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an OSHA personnel. Employers who will emergency response is the most senior offi- evacuate their employees from the cial on the site who has the responsibility danger area when an emergency occurs, for controlling the operations at the site. and who do not permit any of their em- Initially it is the senior officer on the first- ployees to assist in handling the emer- due piece of responding emergency apparatus gency, are exempt from the require- to arrive on the incident scene. As more sen- ments of this paragraph if they provide ior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire an emergency action plan in accord- chief, state law enforcement official, site co- ance with § 1926.35 of this part. ordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the (2) Elements of an emergency response line of authority which has been previously plan. The employer shall develop an established. emergency response plan for emer- (ii) The individual in charge of the gencies which shall address, as a min- ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- imum, the following to the extent that sible, all hazardous substances or con- they are not addressed elsewhere: ditions present and shall address as ap- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co- propriate site analysis, use of engineer- ordination with outside parties. ing controls, maximum exposure lim- (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author- its, hazardous substance handling pro- ity, training, and communication. cedures, and use of any new tech- (iii) Emergency recognition and pre- nologies. vention. (iii) Based on the hazardous sub- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref- stances and/or conditions present, the uge. individual in charge of the ICS shall (v) Site security and control. implement appropriate emergency op- (vi) Evacuation routes and procedures. erations, and assure that the personal (vii) Decontamination. protective equipment worn is appro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment priate for the hazards to be encoun- and first aid. tered. (ix) Emergency alerting and response (iv) Employees engaged in emergency procedures. response and exposed to hazardous sub- (x) Critique of response and follow- stances presenting an inhalation haz- up. ard or potential inhalation hazard shall (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. wear positive pressure self-contained (xii) Emergency response organiza- breathing apparatus while engaged in tions may use the local emergency re- emergency response, until such time sponse plan or the state emergency re- that the individual in charge of the ICS

139

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00149 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per- itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as (v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip- gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup- or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz- shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene, tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training (vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em- with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However, sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini- support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re- and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall include instruction in the wearing of ap- (vii) The individual in charge of the propriate personal protective equip- ICS shall designate a safety official, ment, what chemical hazards are in- who is knowledgable in the operations volved, and what duties are to be per- being implemented at the emergency formed. All other appropriate safety response site, with specific responsi- and health precautions provided to the bility to identify and evaluate hazards employer’s own employees shall be and to provide direction with respect used to assure the safety and health of to the safety of operations for the these personnel. emergency at hand. (5) Specialist employees. Employees (viii) When activities are judged by who, in the course of their regular job the safety official to be an IDLH condi- duties, work with and are trained in tion and/or to involve an imminent the hazards of specific hazardous sub- danger condition, the safety official stances, and who will be called upon to shall have the authority to alter, sus- provide technical advice or assistance pend, or terminate those activities. at a hazardous substance release inci- The safety official shall immediately dent to the individual in charge, shall inform the individual in charge of the receive training or demonstrate com- ICS of any actions needed to be taken petency in the area of their specializa- to correct these hazards at the emer- tion annually. gency scene. (6) Training. Training shall be based (ix) After emergency operations have on the duties and function to be per- terminated, the individual in charge of formed by each responder of an emer- the ICS shall implement appropriate gency response organization. The skill decontamination procedures. and knowledge levels required for all (x) When deemed necessary for meet- new responders, those hired after the ing the tasks at hand, approved self- effective date of this standard, shall be contained compressed air breathing ap- conveyed to them through training be- paratus may be used with approved cyl- fore they are permitted to take part in inders from other approved self-con- actual emergency operations on an in- tained compressed air breathing appa- cident. Employees who participate, or ratus provided that such cylinders are are expected to participate, in emer- of the same capacity and pressure rat- gency response, shall be given training ing. All compressed air cylinders used in accordance with the following para- with self-contained breathing appa- graphs: ratus shall meet U.S. Department of (i) First responder awareness level. Transportation and National Institute First responders at the awareness level for Occupational Safety and Health cri- are individuals who are likely to wit- teria. ness or discover a hazardous substance

140

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00150 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

release and who have been trained to vided to the first responder operational initiate an emergency response se- level. quence by notifying the proper authori- (C) An understanding of basic haz- ties of the release. They would take no ardous materials terms. further action beyond notifying the au- (D) Know how to perform basic con- thorities of the release. First respond- trol, containment and/or confinement ers at the awareness level shall have operations within the capabilities of sufficient training or have had suffi- the resources and personal protective cient experience to objectively dem- equipment available with their unit. onstrate competency in the following (E) Know how to implement basic de- areas: contamination procedures. (A) An understanding of what haz- (F) An understanding of the relevant ardous substances are, and the risks as- standard operating procedures and ter- sociated with them in an incident. mination procedures. (B) An understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an emer- (iii) Hazardous materials technician. gency created when hazardous sub- Hazardous materials technicians are stances are present. individuals who respond to releases or (C) The ability to recognize the pres- potential releases for the purpose of ence of hazardous substances in an stopping the release. They assume a emergency. more aggressive role than a first re- (D) The ability to identify the haz- sponder at the operations level in that ardous substances, if possible. they will approach the point of release (E) An understanding of the role of in order to plug, patch or otherwise the first responder awareness indi- stop the release of a hazardous sub- vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stance. Hazardous materials techni- sponse plan including site security and cians shall have received at least 24 control and the U.S. Department of hours of training equal to the first re- Transportation’s Emergency Response sponder operations level and in addi- Guidebook. tion have competency in the following (F) The ability to realize the need for areas and the employer shall so certify: additional resources, and to make ap- (A) Know how to implement the em- propriate notifications to the commu- ployer’s emergency response plan. nication center. (B) Know the classification, identi- (ii) First responder operations level. fication and verification of known and First responders at the operations level unknown materials by using field sur- are individuals who respond to releases vey instruments and equipment. or potential releases of hazardous sub- (C) Be able to function within an as- stances as part of the initial response signed role in the Incident Command to the site for the purpose of protecting System. nearby persons, property, or the envi- (D) Know how to select and use prop- ronment from the effects of the re- er specialized chemical personal pro- lease. They are trained to respond in a tective equipment provided to the haz- defensive fashion without actually try- ardous materials technician. ing to stop the release. Their function (E) Understand hazard and risk as- is to contain the release from a safe distance, keep it from spreading, and sessment techniques. prevent exposures. First responders at (F) Be able to perform advance con- the operational level shall have re- trol, containment, and/or confinement ceived at least eight hours of training operations within the capabilities of or have had sufficient experience to ob- the resources and personal protective jectively demonstrate competency in equipment available with the unit. the following areas in addition to those (G) Understand and implement de- listed for the awareness level and the contamination procedures. employer shall so certify: (H) Understand termination proce- (A) Knowledge of the basic hazard dures. and risk assessment techniques. (I) Understand basic chemical and (B) Know how to select and use prop- toxicological terminology and behav- er personal protective equipment pro- ior.

141

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00151 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. (B) Know how to implement the em- Hazardous materials specialists are in- ployer’s emergency response plan. dividuals who respond with and provide (C) Know and understand the hazards support to hazardous materials techni- and risks associated with employees cians. Their duties parallel those of the working in chemical protective cloth- hazardous materials technician, how- ing. ever, those duties require a more di- (D) Know how to implement the local rected or specific knowledge of the var- emergency response plan. ious substances they may be called (E) Know of the state emergency re- upon to contain. The hazardous mate- sponse plan and of the Federal Re- rials specialist would also act as the gional Response Team. site liaison with Federal, state, local (F) Know and understand the impor- and other government authorities in tance of decontamination procedures. regards to site activities. Hazardous (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any materials specialists shall have re- of the above training subjects shall ceived at least 24 hours of training have satisfactorily completed a train- equal to the technician level and in ad- ing course for teaching the subjects dition have competency in the fol- they are expected to teach, such as the lowing areas and the employer shall so courses offered by the U.S. National certify: Fire Academy, or they shall have the (A) Know how to implement the local training and/or academic credentials emergency response plan. and instructional experience necessary (B) Understand classification, identi- to demonstrate competent instruc- fication and verification of known and tional skills and a good command of unknown materials by using advanced the subject matter of the courses they survey instruments and equipment. are to teach. (C) Know of the state emergency re- (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em- sponse plan. ployees who are trained in accordance (D) Be able to select and use proper with paragraph (q)(6) of this section specialized chemical personal protec- shall receive annual refresher training tive equipment provided to the haz- of sufficient content and duration to ardous materials specialist. maintain their competencies, or shall demonstrate competency in those areas (E) Understand in-depth hazard and at least yearly. risk techniques. (ii) A statement shall be made of the (F) Be able to perform specialized training or competency, and if a state- control, containment, and/or confinement of competency is made, the em- ment operations within the capabili- ployer shall keep a record of the meth- ties of the resources and personal pro- odology used to demonstrate com- tective equipment available. petency. (G) Be able to determine and imple- (9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ment decontamination procedures. tion. (i) Members of an organized and (H) Have the ability to develop a site designated HAZMAT team and haz- safety and control plan. ardous materials specialists shall re- (I) Understand chemical, radiological ceive a baseline physical examination and toxicological terminology and be- and be provided with medical surveil- havior. lance as required in paragraph (f) of (v) On scene incident commander. Inci- this section. dent commanders, who will assume (ii) Any emergency response employ- control of the incident scene beyond ees who exhibits signs or symptoms the first responder awareness level, which may have resulted from exposure shall receive at least 24 hours of train- to hazardous substances during the ing equal to the first responder oper- course of an emergency incident, either ations level and in addition have com- immediately or subsequently, shall be petency in the following areas and the provided with medical consultation as employer shall so certify: required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this (A) Know and be able to implement section. the employer’s incident command sys- (10) Chemical protective clothing. tem. Chemical protective clothing and

142

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00152 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

equipment to be used by organized and tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical designated HAZMAT team members, or protective suit to be evaluated. to be used by hazardous materials spe- 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to cialists, shall meet the requirements of permeation, penetration, and degradation by specific hazardous substances is not deter- paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this mined by this test method. section. 2.0—Definition of terms (11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective ations. Upon completion of the emer- suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment gency response, if it is determined that which is constructed of protective clothing it is necessary to remove hazardous materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, substances, health hazards, and mate- arms, legs and respirator; may cover the wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- rials contaminated with them (such as tached gloves and boots; completely encloses contaminated soil or other elements of the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- the natural environment) from the site bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots. of the incident, the employer con- 2.2 Protective clothing material means any ducting the clean-up shall comply with material or combination of materials used in one of the following: an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- (i) Meet all of the requirements of lating parts of the body from direct contact paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- tion; or eous chemicals. 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (ii) Where the clean-up is done on test method, the limited flow of a gas under plant property using plant or work- pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to place employees, such employees shall atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and have completed the training require- time interval. ments of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, 3.0—Summary of test method 1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appro- 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and priate safety and health training made modified for the test. The test apparatus is necessary by the tasks that they are attached to the suit to permit inflation to the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- expected to be performed such as per- moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- sonal protective equipment and decon- sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- tamination procedures. All equipment itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop to be used in the performance of the is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and clean-up work shall be in serviceable is removed from service. The test is repeated condition and shall have been inspected after leak location and repair. prior to use. 4.0—Required Supplies 4.1 Source of compressed air. APPENDICES TO § 1926.65—HAZARDOUS WASTE 4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE ing a pressure measurement device with a sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. NOTE: The following appendices serve as 4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ- tape. ees and employers in complying with the ap- 4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. propriate requirements of this section. How- 4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de- ever § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain vice. circumstances the use of Level A and Level 5.0—Safety Precautions B PPE protection. 5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.65—PERSONAL rect pressure safety devices required for the PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS source of compressed air used. 6.0—Test Procedure This appendix sets forth the non-manda- 6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- tory examples of tests which may be used to form a visual inspection of the suit. Check evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii) the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- and (iii). Other tests and other challenge ining the seams and gently pulling on the agents may be used to evaluate compliance. seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fittings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective and show no signs of deterioration. suit pressure test 6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with 1.0—Scope any other normal inlet or exhaust points 1.1 This practice measures the ability of a (such as umbilical air line fittings or face gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical piece opening) with tape or other appropriate protective suit material, seams, and closures means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re- be exercised in the sealing process not to sults of this practice allow the gas tight in- damage any of the suit components.

143

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00153 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. leak location shall be identified in the test 6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- records. Retest pressure data shall be re- viding an improvised connection point on the corded as an additional test. suit for connecting an airline. Attach the 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit shall be identified and the sensitivity of the suit inflation from a compressed air source pressure gauge shall be recorded. equipped with a pressure indicating regu- 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres- lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test sure test even if repairs are being made at apparatus should be tested before and after the test location. each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the suit and assuring a pressure CAUTION of three inches water gauge for three minutes can be maintained. If a component is re- Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be moved for the test, that component shall be sure they are positioned correctly and se- replaced and a second test conducted with cured tightly before putting the suit back another component removed to permit a into service. Special care should be taken to complete test of the ensemble. examine each exhaust valve to make sure it 6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) is not blocked. and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup- Care should also be exercised to assure plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no that the inside and outside of the suit is case shall they be less than: (A) = three completely dry before it is put into storage. inches water gauge; and (B) = two inches water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective shall be no less than 80 percent of the test suit qualitative leak test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B). 1.0—Scope 6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one protective suit integrity by detecting inward minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi- Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- fications are made to the suit to carry out sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. this test, the results from this practice pro- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes, vide a realistic test for the integrity of the record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the entire suit. ending suit pressure. The difference between 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- the suit test pressure and the ending suit meation, penetration, and degradation is not test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the determined by this test method. ASTM test suit pressure drop. methods are available to test suit materials 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than for these characteristics and the tests are 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during usually conducted by the manufacturers of the three-minute test period, the suit fails the suits. the test and shall be removed from service. 2.0—Definition of terms 7.0—Retest Procedure 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and which is constructed of protective clothing brushing or wiping the entire suit (including materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve arms, legs and respirator; may cover the joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu- wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- tion. Observe the suit for the formation of tached gloves and boots; completely encloses soap bubbles, which is an indication of a the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- leak. Repair all identified leaks. bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in Test procedure 6.0. 2.2 Protective clothing material means any 8.0—Report material or combination of materials used in 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- shall have the following information relating parts of the body from direct contact corded: with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi- eous chemicals. fying brand name, date of purchase, material 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this of construction, and unique fit features, e.g., test method, the limited flow of a gas under special breathing apparatus. pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with time interval. the specific observation times. If the ending 2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test pressing the level of protection provided by a pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical failing the test. When possible, the specific protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is

144

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00154 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

calculated by dividing the test room chal- 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least lenge agent concentration by the concentra- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. (PVC) with tightly closing lid. The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu- dependent on the challenge agent monitoring metric measuring device of at least 50 milli- methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient liters in volume with an accuracy of at least the greater the protection provided by the ±1 milliliters. TECP suit. 3.0—Summary of recommended practice 5.0—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy- ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq- OH) required to generate the test atmos- uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro- phere is determined using the directions out- tection. The person conducting the test shall lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person review the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for aque- wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- ous ammonia. ment (either a positive pressure self-con- 5.2 Since the established permissible ex- tained breathing apparatus or a positive posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15 pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi- side the enclosed test room. The con- tive pressure self-contained breathing appa- centrated aqueous ammonia solution is ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res- taken by the suited individual into the test pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally room and poured into an open plastic pan. A only the person wearing the totally-encap- two-minute evaporation period is observed sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A before the test room concentration is meas- stand-by person shall have a positive pres- ured, using a high range ammonia length of sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a stain detector tube. When the ammonia positive pressure supplied air respirator vapor reaches a concentration of between available to enter the test area should the 1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual suited individual need assistance. starts a standardized exercise protocol to 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi- stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is vidual must be used during this test. Visual completed, the test room concentration is contact is the simplest but other methods measured again. The suited individual exits using communication devices are acceptable. the test room and his stand-by person meas- 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to ures the ammonia concentration inside the allow the exercise protocol to be carried out suit using a low range ammonia length of and then to be ventilated to allow for easy stain detector tube or other more sensitive exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re- after the test(s) are completed. quired to observe the test individual during 5.5 Individuals shall be medically the test procedure; aid the person in donning screened for the use of respiratory protection and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the and checked for allergies to ammonia before suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the participating in this test procedure. suit can be calculated by dividing the average test area concentration by the interior 6.0—TEST PROCEDURE suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia 6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv- foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. alent is placed on the inside of the suit face Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- piece lens so that the suited individual is liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- able to detect a color change and know if the lution per cubic foot of test area volume to suit has a significant leak. If a color change determine the approximate volume of con- is observed the individual shall leave the test centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- room immediately. erate 1000 ppm in the test area. 4.0—Required supplies 6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am- of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place monium hydroxide (58% by weight). it into a closed plastic container. 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi- 6.1.3 Place the container, several high cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10 range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute in the clean test pan and locate it near the period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 test area entry door so that the suited indi- (blue)] vidual has easy access to these supplies. 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume 6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip tubes for ammonia and the corresponding and fasten one end of the strip to the inside sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de- of the suit face shield lens where it can be tectors can be substituted for the low range seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of strip with distilled water. Care shall be this practice. taken not to contaminate the detector part

145

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00155 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo- small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en- to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia 6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading. this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed the test. and the respirator removed. 6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas. all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the (zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more 6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi- as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria. challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in- 6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in- the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- suit is suitable for emergency response and tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- field use. monia. A small mixing fan can be used near the evaporation pan to increase the evapo- 7.0—Retest procedures ration rate of the ammonia solution. 6.6 After two minutes a determination of 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for the ammonia concentration within the leaks by following the pressure test in test A chamber should be made using the high above. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0. centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater shall be generated before the exercises are 8.0—Report started. 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the 8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating following four minute exercise protocol chemical protective suit tested by this prac- should be followed: tice shall have the following information re- 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head corded. with at least 15 raising motions completed in 8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- one minute. tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with rial of construction, and unique suit fea- at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. one-minute period. 8.1.2 General description of test room 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 used for test. complete motions of the arms from above 8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of the head to touching of the toes in a one- ammonia detector strips and color change minute period. data. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete 8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- standing and squatting motions in a one- piration date of the length of stain ammonia minute period. detector tubes. The brand name and model of 6.8 If at any time during the test the col- the sampling pump should also be recorded. orimetric indicating paper should change If another type of ammonia detector is used, colors, the test should be stopped and section it should be identified along with its min- 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2). imum detection limit for ammonia. 6.9 After completion of the test exercise, 8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two the test area concentration should be meas- test area concentrations, their average, the ured again using the high range colorimetric interior suit concentration, and the cal- detector tube. culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data 6.10 Exit the test area. shall be recorded as an additional test. 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip- 8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be per or other appropriate suit penetration specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ should be used to determine the ammonia and the date of the test. Any detectable am- concentration in the suit with the low range monia (five ppm or greater for the length of

146

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00156 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- the hazards and conditions at the site be- cates the suit has failed this test. When comes available, the site supervisor can other ammonia detectors are used, a lower make decisions to up-grade or down-grade level of detection is possible and it should be the level of PPE protection to match the specified as the pass fail criteria. tasks at hand. The following are guidelines which an em- CAUTION ployer can use to begin the selection of the Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site insure they are positioned correctly and se- formation may suggest the use of combina- cured tightly before putting the suit back tions of PPE selected from the different pro- into service. Special care should be taken to tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being examine each exhaust valve to make sure it more suitable to the hazards of the work. It is not blocked. should be cautioned that the listing below Care should also be exercised to assure does not fully address the performance of the that the inside and outside of the suit is specific PPE material in relation to the spe- completely dry before it is put into storage. cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE selection, evaluation and re-selection is an APPENDIX B TO § 1926.65—GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF about the hazards and PPE performance is PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained. This appendix sets forth information about Part A. Personal protective equipment is personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- divided into four categories based on the de- tion levels which may be used to assist em- gree of protection afforded. (See part B of ployers in complying with the PPE require- this appendix for further explanation of Lev- ments of this section. els A, B, C, and D hazards.) As required by the standard, PPE must be I. Level A— To be selected when the great- selected which will protect employees from est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec- the specific hazards which they are likely to tion is required. encounter during their work on-site. The following constitute Level A equip- Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- ment; it may be used as appropriate; plex process which should take into consider- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self- ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or volved in this process are identification of positive pressure supplied air respirator with the hazards, or suspected hazards; their escape SCBA, approved by the National In- routes of potential hazard to employees (institute for Occupational Safety and Health halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye (NIOSH). or skin contact); and the performance of the 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec- PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar- tive suit. rier to these hazards. The amount of protec- 3. Coveralls. 1 tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe- 4. Long underwear. 1 cific. That is, protective equipment mate- 5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. rials will protect well against some haz- 6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. ardous substances and poorly, or not at all, 7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and against others. In many instances, protec- shank. tive equipment materials cannot be found 8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 which will provide continuous protection 9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and from the particular hazardous substance. In boots (depending on suit construction, may these cases the breakthrough time of the be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). protective material should exceed the work II. Level B—The highest level of res- durations. piratory protection is necessary but a lesser Other factors in this selection process to level of skin protection is needed. be considered are matching the PPE to the The following constitute Level B equip- employee’s work requirements and task-spe- ment; it may be used as appropriate. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate- 1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- rials, such as tear strength and seam tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- strength, should be considered in relation to tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). relation to heat stress and task duration are 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro- one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex- posable chemical-resistant overalls). pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip- 3. Coveralls. 1 ment. 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. The more that is known about the hazards 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec- 6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel tion becomes. As more information about toe and shank.

147

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00157 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant sence of conditions requiring Level A have (disposable). 1 not yet been determined. 8. Hard hat. 1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be 9. [Reserved] used when: 10. Face shield. 1 1. The type and atmospheric concentration III. Level C—The concentration(s) and of substances have been identified and re- type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and quire a high level of respiratory protection, the criteria for using air purifying res- but less skin protection; pirators are met. 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 The following constitute Level C equip- percent oxygen; or ment; it may be used as appropriate. 3. The presence of incompletely identified 1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read- pirators (NIOSH approved). ing organic vapor detection instrument, but 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing vapors and gases are not suspected of con- (overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; taining high levels of chemicals harmful to disposable chemical-resistant overalls). skin or capable of being absorbed through 3. Coveralls. 1 the skin. 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with 6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel IDLH concentrations of specific substances toe and shank. 1 that present severe inhalation hazards and 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant that do not represent a severe skin hazard; (disposable) 1. or that do not meet the criteria for use of 8. Hard hat. 1 air-purifying respirators. 1 9. Escape mask. III. Level C—Level C protection should be 1 10. Face shield. used when: IV. Level D—A work uniform affording 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid minimal protection, used for nuisance con- splashes, or other direct contact will not ad- tamination only. versely affect or be absorbed through any ex- The following constitute Level D equip- posed skin; ment; it may be used as appropriate: 2. The types of air contaminants have been 1. Coveralls. identified, concentrations measured, and an 1 2. Gloves. air-purifying respirator is available that can 3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe remove the contaminants; and and shank. 3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos- respirators are met. able). 1 IV. Level D—Level D protection should be 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash gog- used when: gles *. 1. The atmosphere contains no known haz- 6. Hard hat. 1 ard; and 7. Escape mask. 1 8. Face shield. 1 2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- Part B. The types of hazards for which lev- mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate halation of or contact with hazardous levels are described below: of any chemicals. I. Level A—Level A protection should be NOTE: As stated before, combinations of used when: personal protective equipment other than 1. The hazardous substance has been iden- those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro- tified and requires the highest level of protection may be more appropriate and may be tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory used to provide the proper level of protec- system based on either the measured (or po- tion. tential for) high concentration of atmos- As an aid in selecting suitable chemical pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the protective clothing, it should be noted that site operations and work functions involve a the National Fire Protection Association high potential for splash, immersion, or ex- (NFPA) has developed standards on chemical posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par- protective clothing. The standards that have ticulates of materials that are harmful to been adopted by include: skin or capable of being absorbed through NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective the skin; Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard (EPA Level A Protective Clothing). to the skin are known or suspected to be NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash- present, and skin contact is possible; or Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical 3. Operations are being conducted in con- Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth- fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab- ing). NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash- 1 Optional, as applicable. Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-

148

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00158 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace (EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em- performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules, ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su- are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super- priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to APPENDIX C TO § 1926.65—COMPLIANCE anticipate and prepare for emergency situa- GUIDELINES tions; and (6) means for obtaining information feedback to aid in evaluating the pro- 1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ- will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en- nator or the employer’s representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site. tion of employees at the site and will be an extension of the employer’s overall safety Accidents on the site or workplace should and health program. The program will need be investigated to provide information on to be developed before work begins on the how such occurrences can be avoided in the site and implemented as work proceeds as future. When injuries or illnesses occur on stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- the site or workplace, they will need to be cilitate coordination and communication of investigated to determine what needs to be safety and health issues among personnel re- done to prevent this incident from occurring sponsible for the various activities which again. Such information will need to be used will take place at the site. It will provide the as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro- overall means for planning and imple- gram and the information turned into posi- menting the needed safety and health train- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re- ing and job orientation of employees who ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints will be working at the site. The program will relating to safety and health issues involved provide the means for identifying and con- with site or workplace activities is also a trolling worksite hazards and the means for feedback mechanism that can be used effec- monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- tively to improve the program and may serve gram will need to cover the responsibilities in part as an evaluative tool(s). and authority of the site coordinator or the For the development and implementation employer’s manager on the site for the safe- of the program to be the most effective, pro- ty and health of employees at the site, and fessional safety and health personnel should the relationships with contractors or support be used. Certified Safety Professionals, services as to what each employer’s safety Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- and health responsibilities are for their em- istered Professional Safety Engineers are ployees on the site. Each contractor on the good examples of professional stature for site needs to have its own safety and health safety and health managers who will admin- program so structured that it will smoothly ister the employer’s program. interface with the program of the site coor- 2. Training. The training programs for em- dinator or principal contractor. ployees subject to the requirements of para- Also those employers involved with treat- graph (e) of this standard should address: the ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as covered in paragraph (p) must have imple- safety and health hazards employees should mented a safety and health program for their expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up employees. This program is to include the sites; what control measures or techniques hazard communication program required in are effective for those hazards; what moni- paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in toring procedures are effective in character- paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- employers comprehensive overall safety and tive employer’s safety and health program; health program. This program is to be in what a site safety and health plan should in- writing. clude; hands on training with personal pro- Each site or workplace safety and health tective equipment and clothing they may be program will need to include the following: expected to use; the contents of the OSHA (1) Policy statements of the line of authority standard relevant to the employee’s duties and accountability for implementing the and function; and, employee’s responsibil- program, the objectives of the program and ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su- the role of the site safety and health super- pervisors will need training in their respon- visor or manager and staff; (2) means or sibilities under the safety and health pro- methods for the development of procedures gram and its subject areas such as the spill

149

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00159 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

containment program, the personal protec- safety and health involving specific haz- tive equipment program, the medical sur- ardous substances. veillance program, the emergency response Those skilled support personnel, such as plan and other areas. employees who work for public works depart- The training programs for employees sub- ments or equipment operators who operate ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who this standard should address: the employers may be called to the incident scene to pro- safety and health program elements impact- vide emergency support assistance, should ing employees; the hazard communication have at least a safety and health briefing be- program; the medical surveillance program; fore entering the area of potential or actual the hazards and the controls for such hazards exposure. These skilled support personnel, that employees need to know for their job who have not been a part of the emergency duties and functions. All require annual re- response plan and do not meet the training fresher training. requirements, should be made aware of the The training programs for employees cov- hazards they face and should be provided all ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of necessary protective clothing and equipment this standard should address those com- required for their tasks. petencies required for the various levels of There are two National Fire Protection As- response such as: the hazards associated with sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard hazardous substances; hazard identification for Professional Competence of Responders and awareness; notification of appropriate to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA persons; the need for and use of personal pro- 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding tective equipment including respirators; the to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are decontamination procedures to be used; excellent resource documents to aid fire de- preplanning activities for hazardous sub- partments and other emergency response or- stance incidents including the emergency ganizations in developing their training pro- reponse plan; company standard operating procedures for hazardous substance emer- gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance gency responses; the use of the incident com- on the skills and knowledge needed for first mand system and other subjects. Hands-on responder awareness level, first responder training should be stressed whenever pos- operations level, hazmat technicians, and sible. Critiques done after an incident which hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for include an evaluation of what worked and the officer corp who will be in charge of haz- what did not and how could the incident be ardous substance incidents. better handled the next time may be counted 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro- as training time. cedures should be tailored to the specific For hazardous materials specialists (usu- hazards of the site, and may vary in com- ally members of hazardous materials teams), plexity and number of steps, depending on the training should address the care, use and/ the level of hazard and the employee’s expo- or testing of chemical protective clothing insure to the hazard. Decontamination proce- cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- dures and PPE decontamination methods ical surveillance program, the standard oper- will vary depending upon the specific sub- ating procedures for the hazardous materials stance, since one procedure or method may team including the use of plugging and not work for all substances. Evaluation of patching equipment and other subject areas. decontamination methods and procedures Officers and leaders who may be expected should be performed, as necessary, to assure to be in charge at an incident should be fully that employees are not exposed to hazards knowledgeable of their company’s incident by re-using PPE. References in appendix D command system. They should know where may be used for guidance in establishing an and how to obtain additional assistance and effective decontamination program. In addi- be familiar with the local district’s emer- tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy gency response plan and the state emergency Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- response plan. ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- Specialist employees such as technical ex- tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST perts, medical experts or environmental ex- M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing perts that work with hazardous materials in an effective decontamination program. their regular jobs, who may be sent to the 4. Emergency response plans. States, along incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer with designated districts within the states, or governmental agency to advise and assist will be developing or have developed local the person in charge of the incident should emergency response plans. These state and have training on an annual basis. Their district plans should be utilized in the emer- training should include the care and use of gency response plans called for in the stand- personal protective equipment including res- ard. Each employer should assure that its pirators; knowledge of the incident com- emergency response plan is compatible with mand system and how they are to relate to the local plan. The major reference being it; and those areas needed to keep them cur- used to aid in developing the state and local rent in their respective field as it relates to district plans is the Hazardous Materials

150

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00160 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur- eral companies and many pieces of apparent Emergency Response Guidebook from ratus, a command post would be established. the U.S. Department of Transportation, This enabled one individual to be in charge of CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service managing the incident, rather than having Emergency Management Handbook may also several officers from different companies be used as resources. making separate, and sometimes conflicting, Employers involved with treatment, stor- decisions. The individual in charge of the age, and disposal facilities for hazardous command post would delegate responsibility waste, which have the required contingency for performing various tasks to subordinate plan called for by their permit, would not officers. Additionally, all communications need to duplicate the same planning ele- were routed through the command post to ments. Those items of the emergency re- reduce the number of radio transmissions sponse plan that are properly addressed in and eliminate confusion. However, strategy, the contingency plan may be substituted tactics, and all decisions were made by one into the emergency response plan required in individual. 1926.65 or otherwise kept together for em- The ICS is a very similar system, except it ployer and employee use. is implemented for emergency response to 5. Personal protective equipment programs. all incidents, both large and small, that in- The purpose of personal protective clothing volve hazardous substances. and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate For a small incident, the individual in individuals from the chemical, physical, and charge of the ICS may perform many tasks biologic hazards that may be encountered at of the ICS. There may not be any, or little, a hazardous substance site. delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex- As discussed in appendix B, no single com- ample, in response to a small incident, the bination of protective equipment and cloth- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition ing is capable of protecting against all haz- to normal command activities, may become ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- the safety officer and may designate only tion with other protective methods and its one employee (with proper equipment) as a effectiveness evaluated periodically. back-up to provide assistance if needed. The use of PPE can itself create significant OSHA does recommend, however, that at worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back- sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue. should be selected that provide an adequate To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the level of protection. However, over-protec- following scenario might develop during a tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- small incident, such as an overturned tank ardous and should be avoided where possible. truck with a small leak of flammable liquid. Two basic objectives of any PPE program The first responding senior officer would should be to protect the wearer from safety implement and take command of the ICS. and health hazards, and to prevent injury to That person would size-up the incident and the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal- determine if additional personnel and appa- function of the PPE. To accomplish these ratus were necessary; would determine what goals, a comprehensive PPE program should actions to take to control the leak; and, de- include hazard identification, medical moni- termine the proper level of personal protec- toring, environmental surveillance, selective equipment. If additional assistance is tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination not needed, the individual in charge of the of PPE and its associated training. ICS would implement actions to stop and The written PPE program should include control the leak using the fewest number of policy statements, procedures, and guide- personnel that can effectively accomplish lines. Copies should be made available to all the tasks. The individual in charge of the employees, and a reference copy should be ICS then would designate himself as the safe- made available at the worksite. Technical ty officer and two other employees as a data on equipment, maintenance manuals, back-up in case rescue may become nec- relevant regulations, and other essential in- essary. In this scenario, decontamination formation should also be collected and main- procedures would not be necessary. tained. A large complex incident may require 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph many employees and difficult, time-con- 1926.65(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation suming efforts to control. In these situa- of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will to effectively control and manage operations want to delegate different tasks to subordi- at an emergency incident. The individual in nates in order to maintain a span of control charge of the ICS is the senior official re- that will keep the number of subordinates, sponding to the incident. The ICS is not that are reporting, to a manageable level. much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap- Delegation of task at large incidents may proach used for many years by the fire serv- be by location, where the incident scene is ice. During large complex fires involving sev- divided into sectors, and subordinate officers

151

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00161 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

coordinate activities within the sector that Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex- they have been assigned. cellent example of the types of medical test- Delegation of tasks can also be by func- ing that should be done as part of a medical tion. Some of the functions that the indi- surveillance program. vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment egate at a large incident are: medical serv- Programs. Where hazardous substances may ices; evacuation; water supply; resources be released by spilling from a container that (equipment, apparatus); media relations; will expose employees to the hazards of the safety; and, site control (integrate activities materials, the employer will need to imple- with police for crowd and traffic control). ment a program to contain and control the Also for a large incident, the individual in spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well charge of the ICS will designate several em- as use of absorbents like diatomaceous ployees as back-up personnel; and a number earth, are traditional techniques which have of safety officers to monitor conditions and proven to be effective over the years. How- recommend safety precautions. ever, in recent years new products have come Therefore, no matter what size or com- into the marketplace, the use of which complexity an incident may be, by implementing plement and increase the effectiveness of an ICS there will be one individual in charge these traditional methods. These new prod- who makes the decisions and gives direc- ucts also provide emergency responders and tions; and, all actions, and communications others with additional tools or agents to use are coordinated through one central point of to reduce the hazards of spilled materials. command. Such a system should reduce con- These agents can be rapidly applied over a fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- large area and can be uniformly applied or nate actions, and should facilitate effective otherwise can be used to build a small dam, management of the incident. thus improving the workers’ ability to con- 7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety trol spilled material. These application tech- and security of response personnel and oth- niques enhance the intimate contact be- ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- tween the agent and the spilled material al- dent site should be of primary concern to the lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or incident commander. The use of a site safety quickest control of the spilled material. and control plan could greatly assist those in Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled charge of assuring the safety and health of materials, to suppress vapor generation from employees on the site. spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe- A comprehensive site safety and control cial agents, which when applied as rec- plan should include the following: summary ommended by the manufacturer, will react analysis of hazards on the site and a risk in a controlled manner with the spilled ma- analysis of those hazards; site map or terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the tion or decontamination zone, work or hot spilled material. zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- There are several modern methods and de- nications; command post or command cen- vices for use by emergency response per- ter; standard operating procedures and safe sonnel or others involved with spill control work practices; medical assistance and efforts to safely apply spill control agents to triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con- control spilled material hazards. These in- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination clude portable pressurized applicators simi- procedures and area; and other relevant lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing areas. This plan should be a part of the em- devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex- to portable fire fighting foam systems which tension of it to the specific site. allow the operator to apply the agent with- 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers out having to come into contact with the handling hazardous substances may be ex- spilled material. The operator is able to posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio- apply the agent to the spilled material from logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a a remote position. medical surveillance program is essential to The solidification of liquids provides for assess and monitor workers’ health and fit- rapid containment and isolation of haz- ness for employment in hazardous waste op- ardous substance spills. By directing the erations and during the course of work; to agent at run-off points or at the edges of the provide emergency and other treatment as spill, the reactant solid will automatically needed; and to keep accurate records for fu- create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of ture reference. the material. Clean-up of hazardous sub- The Occupational Safety and Health Guid- stances is greatly improved when solidifying ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- ties developed by the National Institute for vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- the Occupational Safety and Health Admin- uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard sorb them, which results in materials which (USCG), and the Environmental Protection are less hazardous and easier to handle,

152

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00162 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu- spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form, stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175. protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa- operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration, The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986. volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe- present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ- face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980. bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo- vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically. portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per- good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection having to step into the untreated spilled ma- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial terial. Some of these systems can be re- Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi- charged in the field to provide coverage of sion, December 1984. larger spill areas than the design limits of a 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field single charged applicator unit. Some of the Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9; more effective agents can solidify the liquid U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of- flammable hazardous substances and at the same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 fice of Emergency and Remedial Response, °F so the resulting substance may be handled Hazardous Response Support Division, April as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 1985. the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S. 40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Environmental Protection Agency, Office of larly § 261.21). Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz- All workers performing hazardous sub- ardous Response Support Division, Environ- stance spill control work are expected to mental Response Team; November 1984. wear the proper protective clothing and 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance equipment for the materials present and to Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, follow the employer’s established standard National Institute for Occupational Safety operating procedures for spill control. All in- and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety volved workers need to be trained in the es- and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. tablished operating procedures; in the use Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental and care of spill control equipment; and in Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985. the associated hazards and control of such 11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- hazards of spill containment work. ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- These new tools and agents are the things ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ that employers will want to evaluate as part 006; September 1985. of their new technology program. The treat- 12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous ment of spills of hazardous substances or Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul- wastes at an emergency incident as part of letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human the immediate spill containment and control Services, Public Health Service, Centers for efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- permit exception is described in 40 CFR pational Safety and Health; December 1982. 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11). 13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; APPENDIX D TO § 1926.65—REFERENCES U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- The following references may be consulted ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis- for further information on the subject of this ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- standard: tional Safety and Health; October 1984. 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu- 14. Fire Service Emergency Management ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz- Handbook, International Association of Fire ardous Waste Sites. Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A— Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985. January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and 15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De- Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous partment of Transportation, Washington, Waste Site Activities. DC, 1987.

153

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00163 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- Initial training means training required terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, prior to beginning work. Federal Emergency Management Agency, Lecture means an interactive discourse Washington, DC, July 1986. with a class lead by an instructor. 17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. Proficient means meeting a stated level of Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National achievement. Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Site-specific means individual training di- Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. rected to the operations of a specific job site. 18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na- Training hours means the number of hours tional Fire Protection Association, devoted to lecture, learning activities, small Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. group work sessions, demonstration, evalua- 19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec- tions, or hands-on experience. tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- Suggested Core Criteria: sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. 1. Training facility. The training facility 20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- should have available sufficient resources, ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, equipment, and site locations to perform di- DC 20037, 1986. dactic and hands-on training when appro- 21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning priate. Training facilities should have suffi- Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection cient organization, support staff, and serv- Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. ices to conduct training in each of the 22. Community Teamwork: Working Together courses offered. to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation 2. Training Director. Each training program Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, should be under the direction of a training Washington, DC, May 1983. director who is responsible for the program. The Training Director should have a min- 23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and imum of two years of employee education ex- Industry, Federal Emergency Management perience. Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August 3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem 1987. competent on the basis of previous docu- APPENDIX E TO § 1926.65—TRAINING mented experience in their area of instruc- CURRICULUM GUIDELINES tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the- trainer’’ program specific to the topics they The following non-mandatory general cri- will teach, and an evaluation of instruc- teria may be used for assistance in devel- tional competence by the Training Director. oping site-specific training curriculum used Instructors should be required to maintain to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR professional competency by participating in 1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and continuing education or professional devel- 29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These opment programs or by completing success- are generic guidelines and they are not pre- fully an annual refresher course and having sented as a complete training curriculum for an annual review by the Training Director. any specific employer. Site-specific training The annual review by the Training Direc- programs must be developed on the basis of tor should include observation of an instruc- a needs assessment of the hazardous waste tor’s delivery, a review of those observations site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response op- with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- eration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65. structor or class evaluations completed by It is noted that the legal requirements are the students during the previous year. set forth in the regulatory text of § 1926.65. 4. Course materials. The Training Director The guidance set forth here presents a highly should approve all course materials to be effective program that in the areas covered used by the training provider. Course mate- would meet or exceed the regulatory require- rials should be reviewed and updated at least annually. Materials and equipment should be ments. In addition, other approaches could in good working order and maintained prop- meet the regulatory requirements. erly. Suggested General Criteria All written and audio-visual materials in Definitions: training curricula should be peer reviewed by Competent means possessing the skills, technically competent outside reviewers or knowledge, experience, and judgment to per- by a standing advisory committee. form assigned tasks or activities satisfac- Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- torily as determined by the employer. lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- Demonstration means the showing by actual tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, use of equipment or procedures. chemical/environmental engineering, em- Hands-on training means training in a sim- ployee education, or emergency response. ulated work environment that permits each One or more of the peer reviewers should be student to have experience performing tasks, a employee experienced in the work activi- making decisions, or using equipment appro- ties to which the training is directed. priate to the job assignment for which the 5. Students. The program for accepting stu- training is being conducted. dents should include:

154

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00164 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

a. Assurance that the student is or will be f. An individual identification number for involved in work where chemical exposures the certificate. are likely and that the student possesses the g. List of the levels of personal protective skills necessary to perform the work. equipment used by the student to complete b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- the course. ance. This documentation may include a certifi- 6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami- not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- nated card with a photograph of the student on activity requiring the use of personal pro- and the above information. When such tective equipment should have the following course certificate cards are used, the indi- student-instructor ratios. For Level C or vidual identification number for the training Level D personal protective equipment the certificate should be shown on the card. ratio should be 10 students per instructor. 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should For Level A or Level B personal protective maintain records listing the dates courses equipment the ratio should be 5 students per were presented, the names of the individual instructor. course attenders, the names of those stu- 7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should dents successfully completing each course, be evaluated and documented by the use of a and the number of training certificates written assessment and a skill demonstra- issued to each successful student. These tion selected and developed by the Training records should be maintained for a minimum Director and training staff. The assessment of five years after the date an individual par- and demonstration should evaluate the ticipated in a training program offered by knowledge and individual skills developed in the training provider. These records should the course of training. The level of minimum be available and provided upon the student’s achievement necessary for proficiency shall request or as mandated by law. be specified in writing by the Training Direc- 10. Program quality control. The Training tor. Director should conduct or direct an annual If a written test is used, there should be a written audit of the training program. Pro- minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is gram modifications to address deficiencies, if used in combination with a skills demonstra- any, should be documented, approved, and tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be implemented by the training provider. The used. If a skills demonstration is used, the audit and the program modification docu- tasks chosen and the means to rate success- ments should be maintained at the training ful completion should be fully documented facility. by the Training Director. The content of the written test or of the Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria skill demonstration shall be relevant to the Factors listed here are suggested criteria objectives of the course. The written test for determining the quality and appropriate- and skill demonstration should be updated as ness of employee health and safety training necessary to reflect changes in the cur- for hazardous waste operations and emer- riculum and any update should be approved gency response. by the Training Director. A. Training Plan. The proficiency assessment methods, re- Adequacy and appropriateness of the train- gardless of the approach or combination of ing program’s curriculum development, in- approaches used, should be justified, docu- structor training, distribution of course ma- ment and approved by the Training Director. terials, and direct student training should be The proficiency of those taking the addi- considered, including tional courses for supervisors should be eval- 1. The duration of training, course content, uated and document by using proficiency as- and course schedules/agendas; sessment methods acceptable to the Training 2. The different training requirements of Director. These proficiency assessment the various target populations, as specified methods must reflect the additional respon- in the appropriate generic training cur- sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in riculum; hazardous waste operations or emergency response. 3. The process for the development of cur- 8. Course certificate. Written documentation riculum, which includes appropriate tech- should be provided to each student who sat- nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- isfactorily completes the training course. gram pretesting. The documentation should include: 4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion a. Student’s name. of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction b. Course title. methods; c. Course date. 5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, d. Statement that the student has success- progress, and performance during the train- fully completed the course. ing. e. Name and address of the training pro- B. Program management, Training Director, vider. staff, and consultants.

155

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00165 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per- Adequacy and appropriateness of quality formance and delivering an effective training control and evaluation plans for training program should be considered, including programs should be considered, including: 1. Demonstration of the training director’s 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or leadership in assuring quality of health and competent outside reviewers to give overall safety training. policy guidance; 2. Demonstration of the competency of the 2. Clear and adequate definition of the staff to meet the demands of delivering high composition and active programmatic role of quality hazardous waste employee health the advisory committee or outside reviewers. and safety training. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of 3. Organization charts establishing clear the advisory committee or outside reviewers’ lines of authority. meetings or written communication. 4. Clearly defined staff duties including the 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the relationship of the training staff to the over- quality control and evaluations program to all program. account for instructor performance. 5. Evidence that the training organiza- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the tional structure suits the needs of the train- quality control and evaluation program to ing program. ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed- 6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the back, updating, and corrective action. training methods used by the instructors. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis- 7. Sufficiency of the time committed by ciplines and expertise being used within the the training director and staff to the training program. quality control and evaluation program. 8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the students. role of student evaluations to provide feed- 9. Availability and commitment of the back for training program improvement. training program of adequate human and E. Students equipment resources in the areas of Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro- a. Health effects, gram for accepting students should be con- b. Safety, sidered, including c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), 1. Assurance that the student already pos- d. Operational procedures, sess the necessary skills for their job, includ- e. Employee protection practices/proce- ing necessary documentation. dures. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program 10. Appropriateness of management con- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of trols. satisfactorily completing training. 11. Adequacy of the organization and ap- 3. Review and compliance with any medical propriate resources assigned to assure appro- clearance policy. priate training. 12. In the case of multiple-site training F. Institutional Environment and Administra- programs, adequacy of satellite centers man- tive Support. The adequacy and appropriate- agement. ness of the institutional environment and administrative support system for the train- C. Training facilities and resources. ing program should be considered, including Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili- 1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- ties and resources for supporting the train- ment to the employee training program. ing program should be considered, including, 2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- 1. Space and equipment to conduct the ministrative structure and administrative training. support. 2. Facilities for representative hands-on training. G. Summary of Evaluation Questions Key 3. In the case of multiple-site programs, questions for evaluating the quality and ap- equipment and facilities at the satellite cen- propriateness of an overall training program ters. should include the following: 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the 1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- quality control and evaluations program to ed? account for instructor performance. 2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the tives? quality control and evaluation program to 3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed- able? back, updating, and corrective action. 4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis- demonstration, and hands-on training? ciplines and expertise being used within the 5. Is the program providing quality em- quality control and evaluation program. ployee health and safety training that fully 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the meets the intent of regulatory requirements? role of student evaluations to provide feed- 6. What are the program’s main strengths? back for training program improvement. 7. What are the program’s main weak- D. Quality control and evaluation. nesses?

156

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00166 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

8. What is recommended to improve the boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys- program? ical and chemical properties. 9. Are instructors instructing according to (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi- their training outlines? cals. 10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- (4) General safety hazards such as but not propriate for the program content? limited to electrical hazards, powered equip- 11. Is the course material current and rel- ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk- evant to the target group? ing-working surface hazards, excavation hazards, and hazards associated with working in Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines hot and cold temperature extremes. The following training curriculum guide- (5) Review and knowledge of confined space lines are for those operations specifically entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146. identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring (6) Work practices to minimize employee training. Issues such as qualifications of in- risk from site hazards. structors, training certification, and similar (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip- criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- ment, and any new relevant safety tech- ations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered nology or safety procedures. in the preceding section and are not re-ad- (8) Review and demonstration of com- dressed in each of the generic guidelines. petency with air sampling and monitoring Basic core requirements for training pro- equipment that may be used in a site moni- grams that are addressed include toring program. 1. General Hazardous Waste Operations (9) Container sampling procedures and 2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, safeguarding; general drum and container and disposal facilities. handling procedures including special re- 3. Emergency Response. quirement for laboratory waste packs, A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive Site-specific Training 1. Off-site training. wastes. Minimum training course content for haz- (10) The elements of a spill control pro- ardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR gram. 1926.65(e), should include the following topics (11) Proper use and limitations of material or procedures: handling equipment. a. Regulatory knowledge. (12) Procedures for safe and healthful preparation of containers for shipping and trans- (1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core port. elements of an occupational safety and (13) Methods of communication including health program. those used while wearing respiratory protec- (2) The content of a medical surveillance tion. program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f). c. Technical skills. (1) Selection, use main- (3) The content of an effective site safety tenance, and limitations of personal protec- and health plan consistent with the require- tive equipment including the components ments of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii). and procedures for carrying out a respirator (4) Emergency response plan and proce- program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134. dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 (2) Instruction in decontamination pro- CFR 1926.65(l). grams including personnel, equipment, and (5) Adequate illumination. hardware; hands-on training including level (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip- A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- ment. contamination lines; field activities includ- (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz- ing the donning and doffing of protective ard-communication standard (29 CFR equipment to a level commensurate with the 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 employee’s anticipated job function and re- CFR 1910.147). sponsibility and to the degree required by (8) Review of other applicable standards in- potential hazards. cluding but not limited to those in the con- (3) Sources for additional hazard informa- struction standards (29 CFR part 1926). tion; exercises using relevant manuals and (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers hazard coding systems. and employees under applicable OSHA and d. Additional suggested items. (1) A lami- EPA laws. nated, dated card or certificate with photo, b. Technical knowledge. (1) Type of poten- denoting limitations and level of protection tial exposures to chemical, biological, and for which the employee is trained should be radiological hazards; types of human re- issued to those students successfully com- sponses to these hazards and recognition of pleting a course. those responses; principles of toxicology and (2) Attendance should be required at all information about acute and chronic haz- training modules, with successful comple- ards; health and safety considerations of new tion of exercises and a final written or oral technology. examination with at least 50 questions. (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in- (3) A minimum of one-third of the program cluding but not limited to vapor pressure, should be devoted to hands-on exercises.

157

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00167 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(4) A curriculum should be established for (7) The elements of the confined space pro- the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 gram including special PPE, permits, moni- CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such toring requirements, communication proce- courses directed toward those areas of pre- dures, emergency response, and applicable vious training that need improvement or re- lock-out procedures. emphasis. b. The employer should provide hazardous (5) A curriculum should be established for waste employees information and training the required 8-hour training for supervisors. and should provide a review and access to Demonstrated competency in the skills and the site safety and plan as follows: knowledge provided in a 40-hour course (1) Names of personnel and alternate re- should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- sponsible for site safety and health. ing. (2) Safety and health hazards present on 2. Refresher training. The 8-hour annual re- the site. fresher training required in 29 CFR (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi- 1926.65(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified tations of personal protective equipment training providers. Refresher training should specific to the site. include at a minimum the following topics (4) Work practices by which the employee and procedures: can minimize risks from hazards. (a) Review of and retraining on relevant (5) Safe use of engineering controls and topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- equipment available on site. propriate, using reports by the students on (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab- their work experiences. lished to minimize employee contact with (b) Update on developments with respect to hazardous substances, including: material covered in the 40-hour course. (A) Employee decontamination, (c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (B) Clothing decontamination, and sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (C) Equipment decontamination. (d) Introduction of additional subject areas (7) Elements of the site emergency re- as appropriate. (e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE sponse plan, including: or decontamination equipment or proce- (A) Pre-emergency planning. dures. Review of new developments in per- (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority sonal protective equipment. and communication. (f) Review of newly developed air and con- (C) Emergency recognition and prevention. taminant monitoring equipment. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge. 3. On-site training. a. The employer should (E) Site security and control. provide employees engaged in hazardous (F) Evacuation routes and procedures. waste site activities with information and (G) Decontamination procedures not cov- training prior to initial assignment into ered by the site safety and health plan. their work area, as follows: (H) Emergency medical treatment and first (1) The requirements of the hazard commu- aid. nication program including the location and (I) Emergency equipment and procedures availability of the written program, required for handling emergency incidents. lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data c. The employer should provide hazardous sheets. waste employees information and training (2) Activities and locations in their work on personal protective equipment used at the area where hazardous substance may be site, such as the following: present. (1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- (3) Methods and observations that may be ticipated site hazards. used to detect the present or release of a haz- (2) PPE limitations of materials and con- ardous chemical in the work area (such as struction; limitations during temperature monitoring conducted by the employer, con- extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear- medical considerations; use and limitations ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or of respirator equipment as well as docu- smell) of hazardous chemicals being released, mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR and applicable alarms from monitoring de- 1910.134. vices that record chemical releases. (3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, (4) The physical and health hazards of sub- during, and after use. stances known or potentially present in the (4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. work area. (5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- (5) The measures employees can take to cedures. help protect themselves from work-site haz- (6) PPE maintenance and storage. ards, including specific procedures the em- (7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- ployer has implemented. tions. (6) An explanation of the labeling system d. The employer should instruct the em- and safety data sheets and how employees ployee about the site medical surveillance can obtain and use appropriate hazard infor- program relative to the particular site, in- mation. cluding

158

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00168 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

(1) Specific medical surveillance programs (m) A review of the applicable appendices that have been adapted for the site. to 29 CFR 1926.65. (2) Specific signs and symptoms related to (n) Principles of toxicology and biological exposure to hazardous materials on the site. monitoring as they pertain to occupational (3) The frequency and extent of periodic health. medical examinations that will be used on (o) Rights and responsibilities of employ- the site. ees and employers under applicable OSHA (4) Maintenance and availability of and EPA laws. records. (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations (5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- of competency with equipment to illustrate dures to be followed when signs and symp- the basic equipment principles that may be toms of exposures are recognized. used during the performance of work duties, e. The employees will review and discuss including the donning and doffing of PPE. the site safety plan as part of the training (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of program. The location of the site safety plan relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard and all written programs should be discussed coding systems to include information con- with employees including a discussion of the tained in hazardous waste manifests. mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training. erences described. (s) Training in the job skills required for an employee’s job function and responsi- B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici- Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities. 1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide quired in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial (a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training 29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics: (b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (a) The Emergency response plan and pro- not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- cedures including first aid. diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- waste handling procedures including the ma- ards. terials handling program and elements of the (c) General safety hazards including those spill containment program, location of spill associated with electrical hazards, powered response kits or equipment, and the names of equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce- those trained to respond to releases. dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking- (c) The hazardous communication program working surface hazards. meeting the requirements of 29 CFR (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. 1910.1200. (e) Work practices to minimize employee (d) A review of the employer’s medical sur- risk from workplace hazards. veillance program including the recognition (f) Emergency response plan and proce- of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel- dures including first aid meeting the require- evant hazardous substance including known ments of paragraph (p)(8). synergistic interactions. (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex- (e) A review of the employer’s decon- posure to hazardous waste and various type tamination program and procedures. of waste streams, including the materials (f) An review of the employer’s training handling program and spill containment pro- program and the parties responsible for that gram. program. (h) A review of hazard communication pro- (g) A review of the employer’s personal grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR protective equipment program including the 1910.1200. proper selection and use of PPE based upon (i) A review of medical surveillance pro- specific site hazards. grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR (h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of dressing potential safety and health hazards. signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz- This may include, as appropriate, biological ardous substance including known syner- and radiological exposures, fire and explo- gistic interactions. sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical (j) A review of decontamination programs hazards such as electrical hazards, powered and procedures meeting the requirements of equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4). ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- (k) A review of an employer’s requirements working surface hazards. to implement a training program and its ele- (i) Safe use engineering controls and equipments. ment on site. (l) A review of the criteria and programs (j) Names of personnel and alternates re- for proper selection and use of personal pro- sponsible for safety and health. tective equipment, including respirators. C. Emergency response training.

159

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00169 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.65 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal 1926.65(q) are directed toward private sector protective equipment. emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- (11) Safe sampling techniques. lines provided in this portion of the appendix (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ- are directed toward that employee popu- ees under OSHA and other related laws con- lation. However, they also impact indirectly cerning right-to-know, safety and health, through State OSHA or USEPA regulations compensations and liability. some public sector emergency responders. (13) Medical monitoring requirements. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (14) Community relations. portion of the appendix may be applied to both employee populations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses. States with OSHA state plans must cover (1) First responder awareness level. their employees with regulations at least as (A) Review of and demonstration of com- effective as the Federal OSHA standards. petency in performing the applicable skills Public employees in states without approved of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). state OSHA programs covering hazardous (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- waste operations and emergency response partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization 311, a regulation virtually identical to with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60. § 1926.65. (C) Review of the principles and practices Since this is a non-mandatory appendix for analyzing an incident to determine both and therefore not an enforceable standard, the hazardous substances present and the OSHA recommends that those employers, basic hazard and response information for employees or volunteers in public sector each hazardous substance present. emergency response organizations outside (D) Review of procedures for implementing Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- actions consistent with the local emergency lowing criteria in developing their own response plan, the organization’s standard training programs. A unified approach to operating procedures, and the current edi- training at the community level between tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no- emergency response organizations covered tification procedures and follow-up commu- by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- nications. rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an (E) Review of the expected hazards includ- effective community response to the release ing fire and explosions hazards, confined or potential release of hazardous substances space hazards, electrical hazards, powered in the community. equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, a. General considerations. and walking-working surface hazards. Emergency response organizations are re- (F) Awareness and knowledge of the com- quired to consider the topics listed in petencies for the First Responder at the § 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organiza- Awareness Level covered in the National tions may use some or all of the following Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. topics to supplement those mandatory topics 472, Professional Competence of Responders to when developing their response training pro- Hazardous Materials Incidents. grams. Many of the topics would require an (2) First responder operations level. interaction between the response provider (A) Review of and demonstration of com- and the individuals responsible for the site petency in performing the applicable skills where the response would be expected. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (1) Hazard recognition, including: (A) Nature of hazardous substances (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- present, partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- (B) Practical applications of hazard rec- sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety ognition, including presentations on biology, data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper chemistry, and physics. or manufacturer contacts and other relevant (2) Principles of toxicology, biological sources of information addressing hazardous monitoring, and risk assessment. substance releases. Familiarization with (3) Safe work practices and general site OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60. safety. (C) Review of the principles and practices (4) Engineering controls and hazardous for analyzing an incident to determine the waste operations. hazardous substances present, the likely be- (5) Site safety plans and standard oper- havior of the hazardous substance and its ating procedures. container, the types of hazardous substance (6) Decontamination procedures and prac- transportation containers and vehicles, the tices. types and selection of the appropriate defen- (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and sive strategy for containing the release. self-rescue. (D) Review of procedures for implementing (8) Safe use of field equipment. continuing response actions consistent with (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor- the local emergency response plan, the orga- tation of hazardous substances. nization’s standard operating procedures,

160

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00170 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.65

and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous cluding extended emergency notification Materials Incidents. procedures and follow-up communications. (4) Hazardous materials specialist. (E) Review of the principles and practice (A) Review of and demonstration of com- for proper selection and use of personal pro- petency in performing the applicable skills tective equipment. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (F) Review of the principles and practice of (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and personnel and equipment decontamination. use of written and electronic information (G) Review of the expected hazards includ- relative to response decision making including fire and explosions hazards, confined ing but not limited to the U.S. Department space hazards, electrical hazards, powered of Transportation’s Emergency Response equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data and walking-working surface hazards. sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- manufacturer contacts, computer data bases petencies for the First Responder at the Op- and response models, and other relevant erations Level covered in the National Fire sources of information addressing hazardous Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, substance releases. Familiarization with 29 Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- CFR 1926.60. ardous Materials Incidents. (C) Review of the principles and practices (3) Hazardous materials technician. for analyzing an incident to determine the (A) Review of and demonstration of com- hazardous substances present, their physical petency in performing the applicable skills and chemical properties, and the likely be- of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). havior of the hazardous substance and its (B) Hands-on experience with written and container, vessel, or vehicle. electronic information relative to response (D) Review of the principles and practices decision making including but not limited to for identification of the types of hazardous the U.S. Department of Transportation’s substance transportation containers, vessels Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- and vehicles involved in the release; select- facturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ ing and using the various types of equipment CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer con- available for plugging or patching transpor- tacts, computer data bases and response tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga- models, and other relevant sources of infor- nizing and directing the use of multiple mation addressing hazardous substance re- teams of hazardous material technicians and leases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60. selecting the appropriate strategy for ap- (C) Review of the principles and practices proaching release sites and containing or for analyzing an incident to determine the stopping the release. hazardous substances present, their physical (E) Review of procedures for implementing and chemical properties, the likely behavior continuing response actions consistent with of the hazardous substance and its container, the local emergency response plan, the orga- the types of hazardous substance transpor- nization’s standard operating procedures, in- tation containers and vehicles involved in cluding knowledge of the available public the release, the appropriate strategy for ap- and private response resources, establish- proaching release sites and containing the ment of an incident command post, direction release. of hazardous material technician teams, and (D) Review of procedures for implementing extended emergency notification procedures continuing response actions consistent with and follow-up communications. the local emergency response plan, the orga- (F) Review of the principles and practice nization’s standard operating procedures, for proper selection and use of personal pro- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- tective equipment. cluding extended emergency notification (G) Review of the principles and practices procedures and follow-up communications. of establishing exposure zones and proper de- (E) Review of the principles and practice contamination, monitoring and medical sur- for proper selection and use of personal pro- veillance stations and procedures. tective equipment. (H) Review of the expected hazards includ- (F) Review of the principles and practices ing fire and explosions hazards, confined of establishing exposure zones, proper decon- space hazards, electrical hazards, powered tamination and medical surveillance sta- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, tions and procedures. and walking-working surface hazards. (G) Review of the expected hazards includ- (I) Awareness and knowledge of the coming fire and explosions hazards, confined petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em- space hazards, electrical hazards, powered ployee covered in the National Fire Protec- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- and walking-working surface hazards. sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- Materials Incidents. petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech- (5) Incident commander. The incident com- nician covered in the National Fire Protec- mander is the individual who, at any one tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- time, is responsible for and in control of the

161

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00171 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.66 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

response effort. This individual is the person (3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated responsible for the direction and coordina- structure provided to enclose or accom- tion of the response effort. An incident com- modate a spraying operation to confine mander’s position should be occupied by the most senior, appropriately trained individual and limit the escape of spray, vapor, present at the response site. Yet, as nec- and residue, and to safely conduct or essary and appropriate by the level of redirect them to an exhaust system. sponse provided, the position may be occu- (4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray pied by many individuals during a particular booth equipped with a water washing response as the need for greater authority, system designed to minimize dusts or responsibility, or training increases. It is residues entering exhaust ducts and to possible for the first responder at the aware- permit the recovery of overspray fin- ness level to assume the duties of incident commander until a more senior and appro- ishing material. priately trained individual arrives at the re- (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not sponse site. equipped with a water washing system Therefore, any emergency responder ex- as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this pected to perform as an incident commander section. A dry spray booth may be should be trained to fulfill the obligations of equipped with the position at the level of response they will (i) Distribution or baffle plates to be providing including the following: (A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- promote an even flow of air through stance incident to determine the magnitude the booth or cause the deposit of of the response problem. overspray before it enters the exhaust (B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- duct; or propriate response plan within the capabili- (ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize ties of available personnel and equipment. dusts; or (C) Ability to implement a response to fa- (iii) Overspray dry filters to mini- vorably change the outcome of the incident in a manner consistent with the local emer- mize dusts or residues entering exhaust gency response plan and the organization’s ducts; or standard operating procedures. (iv) Overspray dry filter rolls de- (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the signed to minimize dusts or residues emergency response to ensure that the re- entering exhaust ducts; or sponse objectives are being met safely, effec- (v) Where dry powders are being tively, and efficiently. sprayed, with powder collection sys- (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to the conditions of the response and to notify tems so arranged in the exhaust to cap- higher levels of response when required by ture oversprayed material. the changes to the response plan. (6) Fluidized bed. A container holding [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59 powder coating material which is aer- FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, ated from below so as to form an air- 1996; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315, supported expanded cloud of such ma- Feb. 8, 2013; 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020] terial through which the preheated object to be coated is immersed and § 1926.66 Criteria for design and con- transported. struction of spray booths. (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con- (a) Definitions applicable to this sec- tainer holding powder coating material tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated which is aerated from below so as to powders shall mean any powdered ma- form an air-supported expanded cloud terial used as a coating material which of such material which is electrically shall be fluidized within a container by charged with a charge opposite to the passing air uniformly from below. It is charge of the object to be coated; such common practice to fluidize such mate- object is transported, through the con- rials to form a fluidized powder bed and tainer immediately above the charged then dip the part to be coated into the and aerated materials in order to be bed in a manner similar to that used in coated. liquid dipping. Such beds are also used (8) Approved. Shall mean approved as sources for powder spray operations. and listed by a nationally recognized (2) Spraying area. Any area in which testing laboratory. dangerous quantities of flammable va- (9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in para- pors or mists, or combustible residues, graph (a)(8) of this section. dusts, or deposits are present due to (b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. the operation of spraying processes. Spray booths shall be substantially

162

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00172 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.66

constructed of steel, securely and rig- in a water-filled metal container and idly supported, or of concrete or ma- disposed of at the close of the day’s op- sonry except that aluminum or other eration unless maintained completely substantial noncombustible material in water. may be used for intermittent or low (iii) The location of filters in a spray volume spraying. Spray booths shall be booth shall be so as to not reduce the designed to sweep air currents toward effective booth enclosure of the arti- the exhaust outlet. cles being sprayed. (2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of (iv) Space within the spray booth on spray booths shall be smooth and con- the downstream and upstream sides of tinuous without edges and otherwise filters shall be protected with approved designed to prevent pocketing of resi- automatic sprinklers. dues and facilitate cleaning and wash- (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be ing without injury. used when applying a spray material (3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray known to be highly susceptible to spon- booth and operator’s working area, if taneous heating and ignition. combustible, shall be covered with non- (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall combustible material of such character be noncombustible or of a type having as to facilitate the safe cleaning and a combustibility not in excess of class removal of residues. 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab- (4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls tribution or baffle plates, if installed shall not be alternately used for dif- to promote an even flow of air through ferent types of coating materials, the booth or cause the deposit of where the combination of materials overspray before it enters the exhaust may be conducive to spontaneous igni- duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- tion. rial and readily removable or acces- (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth sible on both sides for cleaning. Such having a frontal area larger than 9 plates shall not be located in exhaust square feet shall have a metal deflector ducts. or curtain not less than 21⁄2 inches (5.35 (5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex- cm) deep installed at the upper outer haust air filters). In conventional dry edge of the booth over the opening. type spray booths, overspray dry filters (7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are or filter rolls, if installed, shall con- arranged to carry work into or out of form to the following: spray booths, the openings therefor (i) The spraying operations except shall be as small as practical. electrostatic spraying operations shall (8) Separation of operations. Each be so designed, installed and main- spray booth shall be separated from tained that the average air velocity other operations by not less than 3 feet over the open face of the booth (or (0.912 m), or by a greater distance, or booth cross section during spraying op- by such partition or wall as to reduce erations) shall be not less than 100 lin- the danger from juxtaposition of haz- ear feet per minute. Electrostatic ardous operations. See also paragraph spraying operations may be conducted (c)(1) of this section. with an air velocity over the open face (9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so of the booth of not less than 60 linear installed that all portions are readily feet per minute, or more, depending on accessible for cleaning. A clear space of the volume of the finishing material not less than 3 feet (0.912 m) on all being applied and its flammability and sides shall be kept free from storage or explosion characteristics. Visible combustible construction. gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac- (10) Illumination. When spraying areas tivated devices shall be installed to in- are illuminated through glass panels or dicate or insure that the required air other transparent materials, only fixed velocity is maintained. Filter rolls lighting units shall be used as a source shall be inspected to insure proper re- of illumination. Panels shall effec- placement of filter media. tively isolate the spraying area from (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter the area in which the lighting unit is rolls shall be immediately removed to located, and shall be of a noncombus- a safe, well-detached location or placed tible material of such a nature or so

163

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00173 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.66 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

protected that breakage will be un- 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area, likely. Panels shall be so arranged that and not separated therefrom by parti- normal accumulations of residue on tions, shall not produce sparks under the exposed surface of the panel will normal operating conditions and shall not be raised to a dangerous tempera- otherwise conform to the provisions of ture by radiation or conduction from subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi- the source of illumination. sion 2 Hazardous Locations. (c) Electrical and other sources of igni- (7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of, tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spray- equipment, open flames and other ing area, and not separated therefrom sources of ignition shall conform to the by a partition, shall be totally enclosed requirements of this paragraph, except to prevent the falling of hot particles as follows: and shall be protected from mechanical (i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- injury by suitable guards or by loca- form to the requirements of paragraphs tion. (e) and (f) of this section; (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric (ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- lamps shall not be used in any spraying ratus shall conform to the require- area during spraying operations. Port- ments of paragraph (g) of this section; able electric lamps, if used during (iii) [Reserved] cleaning or repairing operations, shall (iv) Powder coating equipment shall be of the type approved for hazardous conform to the requirements of para- Class I locations. graph (c)(1) of this section. (9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of (2) Minimum separation. There shall be spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping no open flame or spark producing systems conveying flammable or com- equipment in any spraying area nor bustible liquids or aerated solids shall within 20 feet (6.08 m) thereof, unless be properly electrically grounded in an separated by a partition. effective and permanent manner. (3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven- ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall tilating and exhaust systems shall be not be located in a spraying area where in accordance with the Standard for deposits of combustible residues may Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor readily accumulate. Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, where ap- (4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir- plicable and shall also conform to the ing and equipment shall conform to the provisions of this section. provisions of this paragraph and shall (2) General. All spraying areas shall otherwise be in accordance with sub- be provided with mechanical ventila- part S of this part. tion adequate to remove flammable va- (5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- specifically approved for locations con- tion and to confine and control com- taining both deposits of readily ignit- bustible residues so that life is not enable residue and explosive vapors, there dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall shall be no electrical equipment in any be kept in operation at all times while spraying area, whereon deposits of spraying operations are being con- combustible residues may readily accu- ducted and for a sufficient time there- mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit after to allow vapors from drying coat- or in boxes or fittings containing no ed articles and drying finishing mate- taps, splices, or terminal connections. rial residue to be exhausted. (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical (3) Independent exhaust. Each spray wiring and equipment not subject to booth shall have an independent ex- deposits of combustible residues but lo- haust duct system discharging to the cated in a spraying area as herein de- exterior of the building, except that fined shall be of explosion-proof type multiple cabinet spray booths in which approved for Class I, group D locations identical spray finishing material is and shall otherwise conform to the pro- used with a combined frontal area of visions of subpart S of this part, for not more than 18 square feet may have Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- a common exhaust. If more than one tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and fan serves one booth, all fans shall be other equipment outside of but within so interconnected that one fan cannot

164

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00174 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.66

operate without all fans being oper- (8) Discharge clearance. Unless the ated. spray booth exhaust duct terminal is (4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro- from a water-wash spray booth, the tating element shall be nonferrous or terminal discharge point shall be not nonsparking or the casing shall consist less than 6 feet from any combustible of or be lined with such material. exterior wall or roof nor discharge in There shall be ample clearance be- the direction of any combustible con- tween the fan-rotating element and the struction or unprotected opening in fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, any noncombustible exterior wall with- necessary allowance being made for or- in 25 feet (7.6 m). dinary expansion and loading to pre- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from vent contact between moving parts and spray operations shall not be directed the duct or fan housing. Fan blades so that it will contaminate makeup air shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- being introduced into the spraying area ciently heavy to maintain perfect or other ventilating intakes, nor di- alignment even when the blades of the fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- rected so as to create a nuisance. Air erably to have bearings outside the exhausted from spray operations shall duct and booth. All bearings shall be of not be recirculated. the self-lubricating type, or lubricated (10) Access doors. When necessary to from the outside duct. facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall (5) Electric motors. Electric motors be provided with an ample number of driving exhaust fans shall not be placed access doors. inside booths or ducts. See also para- (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings graph (c) of this section. to rooms containing spray finishing op- (6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the erations shall be adequate for the effi- duct or booth unless the belt and pul- cient operation of exhaust fans and ley within the duct or booth are thor- shall be so located as to minimize the oughly enclosed. creation of dead air pockets. (7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed be constructed of steel and shall be articles shall be dried only in spaces substantially supported. Exhaust ducts provided with adequate ventilation to without dampers are preferred; how- prevent the formation of explosive va- ever, if dampers are installed, they pors. In the event adequate and reliable shall be maintained so that they will ventilation is not provided such drying be in a full open position at all times spaces shall be considered a spraying the ventilating system is in operation. area. (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected (e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1) against mechanical damage and have a Conformance. Where installation and clearance from unprotected combus- use of electrostatic spraying equip- tible construction or other combustible ment is used, such installation and use material of not less than 18 inches (45.72 cm). shall conform to all other paragraphs (ii) If combustible construction is of this section, and shall also conform provided with the following protection to the requirements of this paragraph. applied to all surfaces within 18 inches (2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa- (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced ratus and devices used in connection to the distances indicated: with coating operations shall be of ap- (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch as- 12 inches (30.48 proved types. bestos mill board. cm). (3) Location. Transformers, power (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch as- 9 inches (22.86 packs, control apparatus, and all other bestos mill board spaced out 1 inch cm). (2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers. electrical portions of the equipment, (c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch 3 inches (7.62 with the exception of high-voltage rockwool batts reinforced with wire cm). grids, electrodes, and electrostatic mesh or the equivalent. (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap- atomizing heads and their connections, proved automatic sprinkler system, shall be located outside of the spraying properly maintained, the clearance re- area, or shall otherwise conform to the quired in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24 requirements of paragraph (c) of this cm). section.

165

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00175 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.66 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions: quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or tions and shall be effectively insulated failure of ventilating equipment from from the ground. Electrodes and elec- any cause. trostatic atomizing heads which are (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car- permanently attached to their bases, rying goods through the high voltage supports, or reciprocators, shall be field. deemed to comply with this section. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an Insulators shall be nonporous and non- imminent ground at any point on the combustible. high voltage system. (5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage (iv) Reduction of clearance below leads to electrodes shall be properly in- that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sulated and protected from mechanical section. injury or exposure to destructive (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc- chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing ing, railings, or guards shall be so heads shall be effectively and perma- placed about the equipment that they, nently supported on suitable insulators either by their location or character or and shall be effectively guarded both, assure that a safe isolation of the against accidental contact or ground- process is maintained from plant storing. An automatic means shall be pro- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc- vided for grounding the electrode sys- ing, and guards shall be of conducting tem when it is electrically deenergized material, adequately grounded. for any reason. All insulators shall be (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic kept clean and dry. atomization is used the spraying area (6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall shall be so ventilated as to insure safe be maintained between goods being conditions from a fire and health painted and electrodes or electrostatic standpoint. atomizing heads or conductors of at (12) Fire protection. All areas used for least twice the sparking distance. A spraying, including the interior of the suitable sign indicating this safe dis- booth, shall be protected by automatic tance shall be conspicuously posted sprinklers where this protection is near the assembly. available. Where this protection is not (7) Conveyors required. Goods being available, other approved automatic painted using this process are to be extinguishing equipment shall be pro- supported on conveyors. The conveyors vided. shall be so arranged as to maintain (f) Electrostatic hand spraying equip- safe distances between the goods and ment—(1) Application. This paragraph the electrodes or electrostatic atom- shall apply to any equipment using izing heads at all times. Any irregu- electrostatically charged elements for larly shaped or other goods subject to the atomization and/or, precipitation possible swinging or movement shall be of materials for coatings on articles, or rigidly supported to prevent such for other similar purposes in which the swinging or movement which would re- atomizing device is hand held and ma- duce the clearance to less than that nipulated during the spraying oper- specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sec- ation. tion. (2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand (8) Prohibition. This process is not ac- spraying equipment shall conform with ceptable where goods being coated are the other provisions of this section. manipulated by hand. When finishing (3) Equipment approval and specifica- materials are applied by electrostatic tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- equipment which is manipulated by ratus and devices used in connection hand, see paragraph (f) of this section with coating operations shall be of ap- for applicable requirements. proved types. The high voltage circuits (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap- shall be designed so as to not produce paratus shall be equipped with auto- a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite matic controls which will operate with- any vapor-air mixtures nor result in out time delay to disconnect the power appreciable shock hazard upon coming supply to the high voltage transformer in contact with a grounded object

166

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00176 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.66

under all normal operating conditions. or fusion apparatus in connection with The electrostatically charged exposed spray application of flammable and elements of the handgun shall be capa- combustible finishes shall conform to ble of being energized only by a switch the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, which also controls the coating mate- NFPA 86A–1969, where applicable and rial supply. shall also conform with the following (4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- requirements of this paragraph. formers, powerpacks, control appa- (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray ratus, and all other electrical portions booths, rooms, or other enclosures used of the equipment, with the exception of for spraying operations shall not alter- the handgun itself and its connections nately be used for the purpose of dry- to the power supply shall be located ing by any arrangement which will outside of the spraying area or shall cause a material increase in the sur- otherwise conform to the requirements face temperature of the spray booth, of paragraph (c) of this section. room, or enclosure. (5) Spray gun ground. The handle of (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except the spraying gun shall be electrically as specifically provided in paragraph connected to ground by a metallic con- (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or nection and to be so constructed that fusion units utilizing a heating system the operator in normal operating posi- having open flames or which may tion is in intimate electrical contact produce sparks shall not be installed in with the grounded handle. a spraying area, but may be installed (6) Grounding-general. All electrically adjacent thereto when equipped with conductive objects in the spraying area an interlocked ventilating system ar- shall be adequately grounded. This re- ranged to: quirement shall apply to paint con- (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying tainers, wash cans, and any other ob- space before the heating system can be jects or devices in the area. The equip- started; ment shall carry a prominent perma- (ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at nently installed warning regarding the any source of ignition; necessity for this grounding feature. (iii) Automatically shut down the (7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects being painted or coated shall be main- heating system in the event of failure tained in metallic contact with the of the ventilating system. conveyor or other grounded support. (4) Alternate use permitted. Auto- Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in- mobile refinishing spray booths or ensure this contact and areas of contact closures, otherwise installed and main- shall be sharp points or knife edges tained in full conformity with this sec- where possible. Points of support of the tion, may alternately be used for dry- object shall be concealed from random ing with portable electrical infrared spray where feasible and where the ob- drying apparatus when conforming jects being sprayed are supported from with the following: a conveyor, the point of attachment to (i) Interior (especially floors) of the conveyor shall be so located as to spray enclosures shall be kept free of not collect spray material during nor- overspray deposits. mal operation. (ii) During spray operations, the dry- (8) Interlocks. The electrical equip- ing apparatus and electrical connec- ment shall be so interlocked with the tions and wiring thereto shall not be ventilation of the spraying area that located within spray enclosure nor in the equipment cannot be operated un- any other location where spray resi- less the ventilation fans are in oper- dues may be deposited thereon. ation. (iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper- ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- ation shall take place within a spray tem of the spray enclosure shall be area which is adequately ventilated to equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- remove solvent vapors released from ranged that: the operation. (a) The spraying apparatus cannot be (g) Drying, curing, or fusion appa- operated while the drying apparatus is ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing, inside the spray enclosure.

167

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00177 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.95 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(b) The spray enclosure will be (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where purged of spray vapors for a period of employees provide their own protective not less than 3 minutes before the dry- equipment, the employer shall be re- ing apparatus can be energized. sponsible to assure its adequacy, in- (c) The ventilating system will main- cluding proper maintenance, and sani- tain a safe atmosphere within the entation of such equipment. closure during the drying process and (c) Design. All personal protective the drying apparatus will automati- equipment shall be of safe design and cally shut off in the event of failure of construction for the work to be per- the ventilating system. formed. (iv) All electrical wiring and equip- (d) Payment for protective equipment. ment of the drying apparatus shall con- (1) Except as provided by paragraphs form with the applicable sections of (d)(2) through (d)(6) of this section, the subpart S of this part. Only equipment protective equipment, including per- of a type approved for Class I, Division sonal protective equipment (PPE), used 2 hazardous locations shall be located to comply with this part, shall be pro- within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor vided by the employer at no cost to level. All metallic parts of the drying employees. apparatus shall be properly electrically bonded and grounded. (2) The employer is not required to (v) The drying apparatus shall con- pay for non-specialty safety-toe protec- tain a prominently located, perma- tive footwear (including steel-toe shoes nently attached warning sign indi- or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty cating that ventilation should be main- prescription safety eyewear, provided tained during the drying period and that the employer permits such items that spraying should not be conducted to be worn off the job-site. in the vicinity that spray will deposit (3) When the employer provides on apparatus. metatarsal guards and allows the employee, at his or her request, to use [58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993] shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal protection, the employer is not re- Subpart E—Personal Protective quired to reimburse the employee for and Life Saving Equipment the shoes or boots. (4) The employer is not required to AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. pay for: 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. (i) Everyday clothing, such as long- 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), and normal work boots; or 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4– 2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as (ii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. or other items, used solely for protection from weather, such as winter § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protec- coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber tive equipment. boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sun- (a) Application. Protective equipment, glasses, and sunscreen. including personal protective equip- (5) The employer must pay for re- ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem- placement PPE, except when the em- ities, protective clothing, respiratory ployee has lost or intentionally dam- devices, and protective shields and bar- aged the PPE. riers, shall be provided, used, and (6) Where an employee provides ade- maintained in a sanitary and reliable quate protective equipment he or she condition wherever it is necessary by owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this reason of hazards of processes or envi- section, the employer may allow the ronment, chemical hazards, radio- employee to use it and is not required logical hazards, or mechanical irri- to reimburse the employee for that tants encountered in a manner capable equipment. The employer shall not re- of causing injury or impairment in the quire an employee to provide or pay for function of any part of the body his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is through absorption, inhalation or excepted by paragraphs (d)(2) through physical contact. (d)(5) of this section.

168

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00178 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.97

(7) This section shall become effec- as not to impair the insulating quali- tive on February 13, 2008. Employers ties of the equipment. must implement the PPE payment re- (iv) Markings on gloves shall be con- quirements no later than May 15, 2008. fined to the cuff portion of the glove.

NOTE TO § 1926.95(d): When the provisions of (2) Electrical requirements. (i) Equip- another OSHA standard specify whether or ment shall be capable of withstanding not the employer must pay for specific the ac proof-test voltage specified in equipment, the payment provisions of that Table E–1 or the dc proof-test voltage standard shall prevail. specified in Table E–2. [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993, as amended at 72 (A) The proof test shall reliably indi- FR 64429, Nov. 15, 2007] cate that the equipment can withstand the voltage involved. § 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. (B) The test voltage shall be applied Safety-toe footwear for employees continuously for 3 minutes for equip- shall meet the requirements and speci- ment other than matting and shall be fications in American National Stand- applied continuously for 1 minute for ard for Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear, matting. Z41.1–1967. (C) Gloves shall also be capable of [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993] separately withstanding the ac proof- test voltage specified in Table E–1 after § 1926.97 Electrical protective equip- a 16-hour water soak. (See the note fol- ment. lowing paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this (a) Design requirements for specific section.) types of electrical protective equipment. (ii) When the ac proof test is used on Rubber insulating blankets, rubber in- gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current sulating matting, rubber insulating may not exceed the values specified in covers, rubber insulating line hose, Table E–1 at any time during the test rubber insulating gloves, and rubber in- period. sulating sleeves shall meet the fol- (A) If the ac proof test is made at a lowing requirements: frequency other than 60 hertz, the per- (1) Manufacture and marking of rubber missible proof-test current shall be insulating equipment. (i) Blankets, computed from the direct ratio of the gloves, and sleeves shall be produced by frequencies. a seamless process. (B) For the test, gloves (right side (ii) Each item shall be clearly out) shall be filled with tap water and marked as follows: immersed in water to a depth that is in (A) Class 00 equipment shall be accordance with Table E–3. Water shall marked Class 00. be added to or removed from the glove, (B) Class 0 equipment shall be as necessary, so that the water level is marked Class 0. the same inside and outside the glove. (C) Class 1 equipment shall be (C) After the 16-hour water soak spec- marked Class 1. ified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this (D) Class 2 equipment shall be section, the 60-hertz proof-test current marked Class 2. may not exceed the values given in (E) Class 3 equipment shall be Table E–1 by more than 2 milliamperes. marked Class 3. (iii) Equipment that has been sub- (F) Class 4 equipment shall be jected to a minimum breakdown volt- marked Class 4. age test may not be used for electrical (G) Nonozone-resistant equipment protection. (See the note following shall be marked Type I. paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (H) Ozone-resistant equipment shall (iv) Material used for Type II insu- be marked Type II. lating equipment shall be capable of (I) Other relevant markings, such as withstanding an ozone test, with no the manufacturer’s identification and visible effects. The ozone test shall re- the size of the equipment, may also be liably indicate that the material will provided. resist ozone exposure in actual use. (iii) Markings shall be nonconducting Any visible signs of ozone deterioration and shall be applied in such a manner of the material, such as checking,

169

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00179 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.97 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evi- ASTM F819–10, Standard Terminology Relat- dence of failure to meet the require- ing to Electrical Protective Equipment for Work- ments for ozone-resistant material. ers, includes definitions of terms relating to (See the note following paragraph the electrical protective equipment covered under this section. (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (3) Workmanship and finish. (i) Equip- (b) Design requirements for other types ment shall be free of physical irreg- of electrical protective equipment. The ularities that can adversely affect the following requirements apply to the de- insulating properties of the equipment sign and manufacture of electrical pro- and that can be detected by the tests tective equipment that is not covered or inspections required under this sec- by paragraph (a) of this section: tion. (1) Voltage withstand. Insulating (ii) Surface irregularities that may equipment used for the protection of be present on all rubber goods (because employees shall be capable of with- of imperfections on forms or molds or standing, without failure, the voltages because of inherent difficulties in the that may be imposed upon it. manufacturing process) and that may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(1): These voltages appear as indentations, protuberances, include transient overvoltages, such as or imbedded foreign material are ac- switching surges, as well as nominal line ceptable under the following condi- voltage. See appendix B to subpart V of this tions: part for a discussion of transient (A) The indentation or protuberance overvoltages on electric power transmission blends into a smooth slope when the and distribution systems. See IEEE Std 516– material is stretched. 2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines, for methods of deter- (B) Foreign material remains in mining the magnitude of transient place when the insulating material is overvoltages on an electrical system and for folded and stretches with the insu- a discussion comparing the ability of insula- lating material surrounding it. tion equipment to withstand a transient overvoltage based on its ability to withstand NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Rubber insulating ac voltage testing. equipment meeting the following national consensus standards is deemed to be in com- (2) Equipment current. (i) Protective pliance with the performance requirements equipment used for the primary insula- of paragraph (a) of this section: tion of employees from energized cir- American Society for Testing and Mate- cuit parts shall be capable of passing a rials (ASTM) D120–09, Standard Specification current test when subjected to the for Rubber Insulating Gloves. highest nominal voltage on which the ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. equipment is to be used. ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for (ii) When insulating equipment is Rubber Insulating Blankets. tested in accordance with paragraph ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specifica- (b)(2)(i) of this section, the equipment tion for Rubber Insulating Covers. current may not exceed 1 microampere ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specifica- per kilovolt of phase-to-phase applied tion for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. voltage. ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): This para- The preceding standards also contain spec- graph applies to equipment that provides pri- ifications for conducting the various tests mary insulation of employees from energized required in paragraph (a) of this section. For parts. It does not apply to equipment used example, the ac and dc proof tests, the for secondary insulation or equipment used breakdown test, the water-soak procedure, for brush contact only. and the ozone test mentioned in this para- NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): For ac exci- graph are described in detail in these ASTM tation, this current consists of three compo- standards. nents: Capacitive current because of the di- ASTM F1236–96 (2012), Standard Guide for electric properties of the insulating material Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rub- itself, conduction current through the vol- ber Products, presents methods and tech- ume of the insulating equipment, and leak- niques for the visual inspection of electrical age current along the surface of the tool or protective equipment made of rubber. This equipment. The conduction current is nor- guide also contains descriptions and photo- mally negligible. For clean, dry insulating graphs of irregularities that can be found in equipment, the leakage current is small, and this equipment. the capacitive current predominates.

170

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00180 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.97

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): Plastic guard (vi) Insulating equipment shall be equipment is deemed to conform to the per- stored in such a location and in such a formance requirements of paragraph (b) of manner as to protect it from light, this section if it meets, and is used in ac- temperature extremes, excessive hu- cordance with, ASTM F712–06 (2011), Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically midity, ozone, and other damaging sub- Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protec- stances and conditions. tion of Workers. (vii) Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except as fol- (c) In-service care and use of electrical lows: protective equipment—(1) General. Elec- (A) Protector gloves need not be used trical protective equipment shall be with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use maintained in a safe, reliable condi- conditions, when small equipment and tion. parts manipulation necessitate unusu- (2) Specific requirements. The following ally high finger dexterity. specific requirements apply to rubber insulating blankets, rubber insulating NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(vii)(A): Persons inspecting rubber insulating gloves used covers, rubber insulating line hose, under these conditions need to take extra rubber insulating gloves, and rubber in- care in visually examining them. Employees sulating sleeves: using rubber insulating gloves under these (i) Maximum use voltages shall con- conditions need to take extra care to avoid form to those listed in Table E–4. handling sharp objects. (ii) Insulating equipment shall be in- (B) If the voltage does not exceed 250 spected for damage before each day’s volts, ac, or 375 volts, dc, protector use and immediately following any in- gloves need not be used with Class 00 cident that can reasonably be sus- gloves, under limited-use conditions, pected of causing damage. Insulating when small equipment and parts ma- gloves shall be given an air test, along nipulation necessitate unusually high with the inspection. finger dexterity.

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(ii): ASTM F1236– NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(vii)(B): Persons 96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection inspecting rubber insulating gloves used of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, pre- under these conditions need to take extra sents methods and techniques for the visual care in visually examining them. Employees inspection of electrical protective equipment using rubber insulating gloves under these made of rubber. This guide also contains de- conditions need to take extra care to avoid scriptions and photographs of irregularities handling sharp objects. that can be found in this equipment. (C) Any other class of glove may be (iii) Insulating equipment with any used without protector gloves, under of the following defects may not be limited-use conditions, when small used: equipment and parts manipulation ne- (A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut; cessitate unusually high finger dex- (B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking terity but only if the employer can (that is, a series of interlacing cracks demonstrate that the possibility of produced by ozone on rubber under me- physical damage to the gloves is small chanical stress); and if the class of glove is one class (C) An embedded foreign object; higher than that required for the volt- (D) Any of the following texture age involved. changes: Swelling, softening, hard- (D) Insulating gloves that have been ening, or becoming sticky or inelastic. used without protector gloves may not (E) Any other defect that damages be reused until they have been tested the insulating properties. under the provisions of paragraphs (iv) Insulating equipment found to (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section. have other defects that might affect its (viii) Electrical protective equipment insulating properties shall be removed shall be subjected to periodic electrical from service and returned for testing tests. Test voltages and the maximum under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and intervals between tests shall be in ac- (c)(2)(ix) of this section. cordance with Table E–4 and Table E–5. (v) Insulating equipment shall be (ix) The test method used under para- cleaned as needed to remove foreign graphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(xi) of this substances. section shall reliably indicate whether

171

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00181 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.97 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the insulating equipment can with- that results in physical and electrical stand the voltages involved. properties equal to those of the blan-

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(ix): Standard ket. electrical test methods considered as meet- (D) Rubber insulating gloves and ing this paragraph are given in the following sleeves with minor physical defects, national consensus standards: such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, ASTM D120–09, Standard Specification for may be repaired by the application of a Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification compatible patch. Also, rubber insu- for Rubber Insulating Matting. lating gloves and sleeves with minor ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for surface blemishes may be repaired with Rubber Insulating Blankets. a compatible liquid compound. The re- ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specifica- paired area shall have electrical and tion for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specifica- physical properties equal to those of tion for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. the surrounding material. Repairs to ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for gloves are permitted only in the area Rubber Insulating Sleeves. between the wrist and the reinforced ASTM F478–09, Standard Specification for In- edge of the opening. Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Cov- ers. (xi) Repaired insulating equipment ASTM F479–06 (2011), Standard Specification shall be retested before it may be used for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. by employees. ASTM F496–08, Standard Specification for In- (xii) The employer shall certify that Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. equipment has been tested in accord- (x) Insulating equipment failing to ance with the requirements of para- pass inspections or electrical tests may graphs (c)(2)(iv), (c)(2)(vii)(D), not be used by employees, except as (c)(2)(viii), (c)(2)(ix), and (c)(2)(xi) of follows: this section. The certification shall (A) Rubber insulating line hose may identify the equipment that passed the be used in shorter lengths with the de- test and the date it was tested and fective portion cut off. shall be made available upon request to (B) Rubber insulating blankets may the Assistant Secretary for Occupa- be salvaged by severing the defective tional Safety and Health and to em- area from the undamaged portion of the blanket. The resulting undamaged ployees or their authorized representa- area may not be smaller than 560 milli- tives. meters by 560 millimeters (22 inches by NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(2)(xii): Marking 22 inches) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blan- equipment with, and entering onto logs, the kets. results of the tests and the dates of testing (C) Rubber insulating blankets may are two acceptable means of meeting the cer- be repaired using a compatible patch tification requirement.

TABLE E–1—AC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Maximum proof-test current, mA Proof-test (gloves only) Class of equipment voltage 280-mm 360-mm 410-mm 460-mm rms V (11-in) (14-in) (16-in) (18-in) glove glove glove glove

00 ...... 2,500 8 12 ...... 0 ...... 5,000 8 12 14 16 1 ...... 10,000 ...... 14 16 18 2 ...... 20,000 ...... 16 18 20 3 ...... 30,000 ...... 18 20 22 4 ...... 40,000 ...... 22 24

TABLE E–2—DC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Class of equipment Proof-test voltage

00 ...... 10,000 0 ...... 20,000 1 ...... 40,000

172

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00182 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.97

TABLE E–2—DC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS—Continued

Class of equipment Proof-test voltage

2 ...... 50,000 3 ...... 60,000 4 ...... 70,000

Note: The dc voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for proof testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this equipment, dc proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to indicate that the equipment can be safely used at the voltages listed in Table E–4. See ASTM D1050–05 (2011) and ASTM D1049–98 (2010) for further information on proof tests for rubber insulating line hose and covers, respectively.

TABLE E–3—GLOVE TESTS—WATER LEVEL 12

AC proof test DC proof test Class of glove mm in mm in

00 ...... 38 1.5 38 1.5 0 ...... 38 1.5 38 1.5 1 ...... 38 1.5 51 2.0 2 ...... 64 2.5 76 3.0 3 ...... 89 3.5 102 4.0 4 ...... 127 5.0 153 6.0

1 The water level is given as the clearance from the reinforced edge of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of ±13 mm. (±0.5 in.). 2 If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25 mm. (1 in.).

TABLE E–4—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS

Maximum use Retest Retest Class of equipment voltage 1 voltage 2 voltage 2 AC rms AC rms DC avg

00 ...... 500 2,500 10,000 0 ...... 1,000 5,000 20,000 1 ...... 7,500 10,000 40,000 2 ...... 17,000 20,000 50,000 3 ...... 26,500 30,000 60,000 4 ...... 36,000 40,000 70,000

1 The maximum use voltage is the ac voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the phase-to- phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage if: (1) There is no multiphase exposure in a system area and the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or (2) The electric equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit is removed. 2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.

TABLE E–5—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT, TEST INTERVALS

Type of equipment When to test

Rubber insulating line hose ...... Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. Rubber insulating covers ...... Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. Rubber insulating blankets ...... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter;1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect; and after repair. Rubber insulating gloves ...... Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter;1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect; after repair; and after use without protectors. Rubber insulating sleeves ...... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter;1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect; and after repair.

1 If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service, the insulating equipment may not be placed into service unless it has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.

[79 FR 20693, Apr. 11, 2014]

173

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00183 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.98 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

§ 1926.98 [Reserved] (c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable protective device. § 1926.100 Head protection. (a) Employees working in areas § 1926.102 Eye and face protection. where there is a possible danger of head (a) General. (1) The employer shall en- injury from impact, or from falling or sure that each affected employee uses flying objects, or from electrical shock appropriate eye or face protection and burns, shall be protected by protec- when exposed to eye or face hazards tive helmets. from flying particles, molten metal, (b) Criteria for head protection. (1) The liquid chemicals, acids or caustic liq- employer must provide each employee uids, chemical gases or vapors, or po- with head protection that meets the tentially injurious light radiation. specifications contained in any of the (2) The employer shall ensure that following consensus standards: each affected employee uses eye pro- (i) American National Standards In- tection that provides side protection stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, ‘‘American when there is a hazard from flying ob- National Standard for Industrial Head jects. Detachable side protectors (e.g. Protection,’’ incorporated by reference clip-on or slide-on side shields) meeting in § 1926.6; the pertinent requirements of this sec- (ii) American National Standards In- tion are acceptable. stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, ‘‘American (3) The employer shall ensure that National Standard for Industrial Head each affected employee who wears pre- Protection,’’ incorporated by reference scription lenses while engaged in oper- in § 1926.6; or ations that involve eye hazards wears (iii) American National Standards In- eye protection that incorporates the stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, ‘‘American prescription in its design, or wears eye National Standard for Personnel Pro- protection that can be worn over the tection—Protective Headwear for In- prescription lenses without disturbing dustrial Workers—Requirements,’’ in- the proper position of the prescription corporated by reference in § 1926.6. lenses or the protective lenses. (2) The employer must ensure that (4) Eye and face PPE shall be dis- the head protection provided for each tinctly marked to facilitate identifica- employee exposed to high-voltage elec- tion of the manufacturer. tric shock and burns also meets the (5) Protectors shall meet the fol- specifications contained in Section 9.7 lowing minimum requirements: (‘‘Electrical Insulation’’) of any of the (i) They shall provide adequate pro- consensus standards identified in para- tection against the particular hazards graph (b)(1) of this section. for which they are designed. (3) OSHA will deem any head protec- (ii) They shall be reasonably com- tion device that the employer dem- fortable when worn under the des- onstrates is at least as effective as a ignated conditions. head protection device constructed in (iii) They shall fit snugly and shall accordance with one of the consensus not unduly interfere with the move- standards identified in paragraph (b)(1) ments of the wearer. of this section to be in compliance with (iv) They shall be durable. the requirements of this section. (v) They shall be capable of being dis- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR infected. 37600, June 22, 2012; 77 FR 42988, July 23, 2012] (vi) They shall be easily cleanable. (b) Criteria for protective eye and face § 1926.101 Hearing protection. protection. (1) Protective eye and face (a) Wherever it is not feasible to re- protection devices must comply with duce the noise levels or duration of ex- any of the following consensus stand- posures to those specified in Table D–2, ards: Permissible Noise Exposures, in (i) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1–2010, Occupa- § 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be tional and Educational Personal Eye provided and used. and Face Protection Devices, incor- (b) Ear protective devices inserted in porated by reference in § 1926.6; the ear shall be fitted or determined in- (ii) ANSI Z87.1–2003, Occupational dividually by competent persons. and Educational Personal Eye and

174

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00184 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.104

Face Protection Devices, incorporated TABLE E–2—SELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS by reference in § 1926.6; or (iii) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Prac- Intensity, CW max- Attenuation imum power density Optical density tice for Occupational and Educational (watts/cm2) Attenuation factor Eye and Face Protection, incorporated (O.D.) by reference in § 1926.6; 10¥2 ...... 5 ...... 105 (2) Protective eye and face protection 10¥1 ...... 6 ...... 106 devices that the employer dem- 1.0 ...... 7 ...... 107 10.0 ...... 8 ...... 108 onstrates are at least as effective as protective eye and face protection de- (ii) All protective goggles shall bear vices that are constructed in accord- a label identifying the following data: ance with one of the above consensus (A) The laser wavelengths for which standards will be deemed to be in com- use is intended; pliance with the requirements of this (B) The optical density of those section. wavelengths; (c) Protection against radiant energy— (C) The visible light transmission. (1) Selection of shade numbers for welding filter. Table E–1 shall be used as a guide [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, for the selection of the proper shade 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993; numbers of filter lenses or plates used 81 FR 16092, Mar. 25, 2016] in welding. Shades more dense than § 1926.103 Respiratory protection. those listed may be used to suit the individual’s needs. NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- TABLE E–1—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR tical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of this chapter. PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY [63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998] Shade Welding operation number § 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and Shielded metal-arc welding 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/ lanyards. 32-inch diameter electrodes ...... 10 (a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lan- Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1/16-, 3/ 32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes ...... 11 yards shall be used only for employee Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes ...... 12 or lanyard actually subjected to in- Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16-, 7/32-, 1/4-inch diameter electrodes ...... 12 service loading, as distinguished from 5/16-, 3/8-inch diameter electrodes ...... 14 static load testing, shall be imme- Atomic hydrogen welding ...... 10–14 diately removed from service and shall Carbon-arc welding ...... 14 not be used again for employee safe- Soldering ...... 2 Torch brazing ...... 3 or 4 guarding. Light cutting, up to 1 inch ...... 3 or 4 (b) Lifelines shall be secured above Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ...... 4 or 5 the point of operation to an anchorage Heavy cutting, over 6 inches ...... 5 or 6 or structural member capable of sup- Gas welding (light), up to 1/8-inch ...... 4 or 5 Gas welding (medium), 1/8-inch to 1/2-inch ...... 5 or 6 porting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 Gas welding (heavy), over 1/2-inch ...... 6 or 8 pounds. (c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling op- (2) Laser protection. (i) Employees erations, or in areas where the lifeline whose occupation or assignment re- may be subjected to cutting or abra- quires exposure to laser beams shall be sion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch furnished suitable laser safety goggles wire core manila rope. For all other which will protect for the specific lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4- wavelength of the laser and be of opti- inch manila or equivalent, with a min- cal density (O.D.) adequate for the en- imum breaking strength of 5,000 ergy involved. Table E–2 lists the max- pounds, shall be used. imum power or energy density for (d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a which adequate protection is afforded minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equiva- by glasses of optical densities from 5 lent, with a maximum length to pro- through 8. Output levels falling be- vide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet. tween lines in this table shall require The rope shall have a nominal breaking the higher optical density. strength of 5,400 pounds.

175

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00185 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.105 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(e) All safety belt and lanyard hard- § 1926.106 Working over or near water. ware shall be drop forged or pressed (a) Employees working over or near steel, cadmium plated in accordance water, where the danger of drowning with type 1, Class B plating specified in exists, shall be provided with U.S. Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Sur- Coast Guard-approved life jacket or face shall be smooth and free of sharp buoyant work vests. edges. (b) Prior to and after each use, the (f) All safety belt and lanyard hard- buoyant work vests or life preservers ware, except rivets, shall be capable of shall be inspected for defects which withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 would alter their strength or buoy- pounds without cracking, breaking, or ancy. Defective units shall not be used. taking a permanent deformation. (c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line shall be provided and readily avail- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, able for emergency rescue operations. 1979, as amended at 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] Distance between ring buoys shall not § 1926.105 Safety nets. exceed 200 feet. (d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall (a) Safety nets shall be provided be immediately available at locations when workplaces are more than 25 feet where employees are working over or above the ground or water surface, or adjacent to water. other surfaces where the use of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary § 1926.107 Definitions applicable to floors, safety lines, or safety belts is this subpart. impractical. (a) Contaminant means any material (b) Where safety net protection is re- which by reason of its action upon, quired by this part, operations shall within, or to a person is likely to cause not be undertaken until the net is in physical harm. place and has been tested. (b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable (c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond for supporting one person. One end is the edge of the work surface where em- fastened to a safety belt or harness and ployees are exposed and shall be in- the other end is secured to a substan- stalled as close under the work surface tial object or a safety line. as practical but in no case more than (c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for supporting one person, to which a lan- 25 feet below such work surface. Nets yard or safety belt (or harness) is at- shall be hung with sufficient clearance tached. to prevent user’s contact with the sur- (d) O.D. means optical density and faces or structures below. Such clear- refers to the light refractive character- ances shall be determined by impact istics of a lens. load testing. (e) Radiant energy means energy that (2) It is intended that only one level travels outward in all directions from of nets be required for bridge construc- its sources. tion. (f) Safety belt means a device, usually (d) The mesh size of nets shall not ex- worn around the waist which, by rea- ceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets son of its attachment to a lanyard and shall meet accepted performance lifeline or a structure, will prevent a standards of 17,500 foot-pounds min- worker from falling. imum impact resistance as determined [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979] and certified by the manufacturers, and shall bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes shall provide a minimum Subpart F—Fire Protection and breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. Prevention (e) Forged steel safety hooks or shackles shall be used to fasten the net AUTHORITY: Section 107 of the Contract to its supports. Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- (f) Connections between net panels pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 shall develop the full strength of the U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s net. Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR

176

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00186 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.150

25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– (ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water 96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (62 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 with two fire pails may be substituted FR 650008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rat- 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. ing. (iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type § 1926.150 Fire protection. hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in (a) General requirements. (1) The em- length and equipped with a nozzle, may ployer shall be responsible for the de- be substituted for a 2A-rated fire extin- velopment of a fire protection program guisher, providing it is capable of dis- to be followed throughout all phases of charging a minimum of 5 gallons per the construction and demolition work, minute with a minimum hose stream and he shall provide for the firefighting range of 30 feet horizontally. The gar- equipment as specified in this subpart. den-type hose lines shall be mounted As fire hazards occur, there shall be no on conventional racks or reels. The delay in providing the necessary equip- number and location of hose racks or ment. reels shall be such that at least one (2) Access to all available firefighting hose stream can be applied to all points equipment shall be maintained at all in the area. times. (iv) One or more fire extinguishers, (3) All firefighting equipment, pro- rated not less than 2A, shall be provided by the employer, shall be con- vided on each floor. In multistory spicuously located. buildings, at least one fire extinguisher (4) All firefighting equipment shall shall be located adjacent to stairway. be periodically inspected and maintained in operating condition. Defec- (v) Extinguishers and water drums, tive equipment shall be immediately subject to freezing, shall be protected replaced. from freezing. (5) As warranted by the project, the (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less employer shall provide a trained and than 10B, shall be provided within 50 equipped firefighting organization feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate pro- flammable or combustible liquids or 5 tection to life. pounds of flammable gas are being used (b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or on the jobsite. This requirement does permanent water supply, of sufficient not apply to the integral fuel tanks of volume, duration, and pressure, re- motor vehicles. quired to properly operate the fire- (vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other fighting equipment shall be made toxic vaporizing liquid fire extin- available as soon as combustible mate- guishers are prohibited. rials accumulate. (viii) Portable fire extinguishers (2) Where underground water mains shall be inspected periodically and are to be provided, they shall be in- maintained in accordance with Mainte- stalled, completed, and made available nance and Use of Portable Fire Extin- for use as soon as practicable. (c) Portable firefighting equipment—(1) guishers, NFPA No. 10A–1970. Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (i) (ix) Fire extinguishers which have A fire extinguisher, rated not less than been listed or approved by a nationally 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000 recognized testing laboratory, shall be square feet of the protected building used to meet the requirements of this area, or major fraction thereof. Travel subpart. distance from any point of the pro- (x) Table F–1 may be used as a guide tected area to the nearest fire extin- for selecting the appropriate portable guisher shall not exceed 100 feet. fire extinguishers.

177

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00187 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.150 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One persons. Modification of sprinkler sys- hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, tems to permit alterations or addi- with a nozzle capable of discharging tional demolition should be expedited water at 25 gallons or more per minute, so that the automatic protection may may be substituted for a fire extin- be returned to service as quickly as guisher rated not more than 2A in the possible. Sprinkler control valves shall designated area provided that the hose be checked daily at close of work to as- line can reach all points in the area. certain that the protection is in serv- (ii) If fire hose connections are not ice. compatible with local firefighting (2) Standpipes. In all structures in equipment, the contractor shall pro- which standpipes are required, or vide adapters, or equivalent, to permit where standpipes exist in structures connections. being altered, they shall be brought up (iii) During demolition involving as soon as applicable laws permit, and combustible materials, charged hose shall be maintained as construction lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank progresses in such a manner that they trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall are always ready for fire protection be made available. use. The standpipes shall be provided (d) Fixed firefighting equipment—(1) with Siamese fire department connec- Sprinkler protection. (i) If the facility tions on the outside of the structure, at being constructed includes the instal- the street level, which shall be con- lation of automatic sprinkler protec- spicuously marked. There shall be at tion, the installation shall closely fol- least one standard hose outlet at each low the construction and be placed in service as soon as applicable laws per- floor. mit following completion of each story. (e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm (ii) During demolition or alterations, system, e.g., telephone system, siren, existing automatic sprinkler installa- etc., shall be established by the em- tions shall be retained in service as ployer whereby employees on the site long as reasonable. The operation of and the local fire department can be sprinkler control valves shall be per- alerted for an emergency. mitted only by properly authorized

178

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00188 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.012 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.151

(2) The alarm code and reporting in- construction or of combustible con- structions shall be conspicuously post- struction having a fire resistance of ed at phones and at employee en- not less than 1 hour. trances. (3) Temporary buildings, located (f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit other than inside another building and stairways, required for the completed not used for the storage, handling, or buildings, shall be given construction use of flammable or combustible liq- priority. Fire doors, with automatic uids, flammable gases, explosives, or closing devices, shall be hung on open- blasting agents, or similar hazardous ings as soon as practicable. occupancies, shall be located at a dis- (2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in tance of not less than 10 feet from an- buildings undergoing alterations or other building or structure. Groups of demolition until operations necessitate temporary buildings, not exceeding their removal. 2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, the purposes of this part, be considered 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; a single temporary building. 61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible materials shall be piled with due re- § 1926.151 Fire prevention. gard to the stability of piles and in no (a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wir- case higher than 20 feet. ing and equipment for light, heat, or (2) Driveways between and around power purposes shall be installed in combustible storage piles shall be at compliance with the requirements of least 15 feet wide and maintained free subpart K of this part. from accumulation of rubbish, equip- (2) Internal combustion engine pow- ment, or other articles or materials. ered equipment shall be so located that Driveways shall be so spaced that a the exhausts are well away from com- maximum grid system unit of 50 feet bustible materials. When the exhausts by 150 feet is produced. are piped to outside the building under (3) The entire storage site shall be construction, a clearance of at least 6 kept free from accumulation of unnec- inches shall be maintained between essary combustible materials. Weeds such piping and combustible material. and grass shall be kept down and a reg- (3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or ular procedure provided for the peri- in the vicinity of operations which con- odic cleanup of the entire area. stitute a fire hazard, and shall be conspicuously posted: ‘‘No Smoking or (4) When there is a danger of an un- Open Flame.’’ derground fire, that land shall not be (4) Portable battery powered lighting used for combustible or flammable equipment, used in connection with the storage. storage, handling, or use of flammable (5) Method of piling shall be solid gases or liquids, shall be of the type ap- wherever possible and in orderly and proved for the hazardous locations. regular piles. No combustible material (5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet steam lines or hoses, when used in the of a building or structure. cleaning or ventilation of tanks and (6) Portable fire extinguishing equip- vessels that contain hazardous con- ment, suitable for the fire hazard in- centrations of flammable gases or va- volved, shall be provided at convenient, pors, shall be bonded to the tank or conspicuously accessible locations in vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not the yard area. Portable fire extin- be attached or detached in hazardous guishers, rated not less than 2A, shall concentrations of flammable gases or be placed so that maximum travel dis- vapors. tance to the nearest unit shall not ex- (b) Temporary buildings. (1) No tem- ceed 100 feet. porary building shall be erected where (d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall it will adversely affect any means of not obstruct, or adversely affect, exit. means of exit. (2) Temporary buildings, when lo- (2) All materials shall be stored, han- cated within another building or struc- dled, and piled with due regard to their ture, shall be of either noncombustible fire characteristics.

179

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00189 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(3) Noncompatible materials, which an acceptable or approved cabinet may create a fire hazard, shall be seg- meeting the following requirements: regated by a barrier having a fire re- (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabi- sistance of at least 1 hour. nets shall be constructed in the fol- (4) Material shall be piled to mini- lowing manner, or equivalent: The bot- mize the spread of fire internally and tom, sides, and top shall be constructed to permit convenient access for fire- of an exterior grade of plywood at least fighting. Stable piling shall be main- 1 inch in thickness, which shall not tained at all times. Aisle space shall be break down or delaminate under stand- maintained to safely accommodate the ard fire test conditions. All joints shall widest vehicle that may be used within be rabbeted and shall be fastened in the building for firefighting purposes. two directions with flathead wood (5) Clearance of at least 36 inches screws. When more than one door is shall be maintained between the top used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap level of the stored material and the of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges sprinkler deflectors. shall be mounted in such a manner as (6) Clearance shall be maintained to not lose their holding capacity due around lights and heating units to pre- to loosening or burning out of the vent ignition of combustible materials. screws when subjected to fire. Such (7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be cabinets shall be painted inside and out maintained around the path of travel with fire retardant paint. of fire doors unless a barricade is pro- (ii) Approved metal storage cabinets vided, in which case no clearance is will be acceptable. needed. Material shall not be stored (iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in con- within 36 inches of a fire door opening. spicuous lettering, ‘‘Flammable-Keep Away from Open Flames.’’ [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Not more than 60 gallons of Cat- 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] egory 1, 2 and/or 3 flammable liquids or 120 gallons of Category 4 flammable § 1926.152 Flammable liquids. liquids shall be stored in any one stor- (a) General requirements. (1) Only ap- age cabinet. Not more than three such proved containers and portable tanks cabinets may be located in a single shall be used for storage and handling storage area. Quantities in excess of of flammable liquids. Approved safety this shall be stored in an inside storage cans or Department of Transportation room. approved containers shall be used for (4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be the handling and use of flammable liq- constructed to meet the required fire- uids in quantities of 5 gallons or less, resistive rating for their use. Such con- except that this shall not apply to struction shall comply with the test those flammable liquid materials specifications set forth in Standard which are highly viscid (extremely Methods of Fire Test of Building Con- hard to pour), which may be used and struction and Material, NFPA 251–1969. handled in original shipping con- (ii) Where an automatic extin- tainers. For quantities of one gallon or guishing system is provided, the sys- less, the original container may be tem shall be designed and installed in used, for storage, use and handling of an approved manner. Openings to other flammable liquids. rooms or buildings shall be provided (2) Flammable liquids shall not be with noncombustible liquid-tight stored in areas used for exits, stair- raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in ways, or normally used for the safe height, or the floor in the storage area passage of people. shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- (b) Indoor storage of flammable liquids. rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- (1) No more than 25 gallons of flam- vided with approved self-closing fire mable liquids shall be stored in a room doors. The room shall be liquid-tight outside of an approved storage cabinet. where the walls join the floor. A per- For storage of liquefied petroleum gas, missible alternate to the sill or ramp is see § 1926.153. an open-grated trench, inside of the (2) Quantities of flammable liquid in room, which drains to a safe location. excess of 25 gallons shall be stored in Where other portions of the building or

180

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00190 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

other buildings are exposed, windows (viii) Flammable liquids in excess of shall be protected as set forth in the that permitted in inside storage rooms Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, shall be stored outside of buildings in NFPA No. 80–1970, for Class E or F accordance with paragraph (c) of this openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nomi- section. nal thickness may be used for shelving, (5) Quantity. The quantity of flam- racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor over- mable liquids kept in the vicinity of lay, and similar installations. spraying operations shall be the min- (iii) Materials which will react with imum required for operations and water and create a fire hazard shall not be stored in the same room with flam- should ordinarily not exceed a supply mable liquids. for 1 day or one shift. Bulk storage of (iv) Storage in inside storage rooms portable containers of flammable liq- shall comply with Table F–2 following: uids shall be in a separate, constructed building detached from other impor- TABLE F–2 tant buildings or cut off in a standard manner. Total allowable (c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Stor- Fire protection Fire resist- quantities provided ance Maximum size gals./sq. age of containers (not more than 60 ft./floor gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gal- area lons in any one pile or area. Piles or Yes ...... 2 hrs ...... 500 sq. ft ...... 10 groups of containers shall be separated No ...... 2 hrs ...... 500 sq. ft ...... 4 by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of Yes ...... 1 hr ...... 150 sq. ft ...... 5 No ...... 1 hr ...... 150 sq. ft ...... 2 containers shall not be nearer than 20 feet to a building. NOTE: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally rec- (2) Within 200 feet of each pile of con- ognized testing laboratory for this purpose. tainers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide (v) Electrical wiring and equipment access way to permit approach of fire located in inside storage rooms shall be control apparatus. approved for Class I, Division 1, Haz- (3) The storage area shall be graded ardous Locations. For definition of in a manner to divert possible spills Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- away from buildings or other expo- tions, see § 1926.449. sures, or shall be surrounded by a curb (vi) Every inside storage room shall or earth dike at least 12 inches high. be provided with either a gravity or a mechanical exhausting system. Such When curbs or dikes are used, provi- system shall commence not more than sions shall be made for draining off ac- 12 inches above the floor and be de- cumulations of ground or rain water, signed to provide for a complete or spills of flammable liquids. Drains change of air within the room at least shall terminate at a safe location and 6 times per hour. If a mechanical ex- shall be accessible to operation under hausting system is used, it shall be fire conditions. controlled by a switch located outside (4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) of the door. The ventilating equipment Portable tanks shall not be nearer than and any lighting fixtures shall be oper- 20 feet from any building. Two or more ated by the same switch. An electric portable tanks, grouped together, hav- pilot light shall be installed adjacent ing a combined capacity in excess of to the switch if Category 1, 2, or 3 flam- 2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5- mable liquids are dispensed within the foot-clear area. Individual portable room. Where gravity ventilation is pro- tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be vided, the fresh air intake, as well as separated by a 5-foot-clear area. the exhausting outlet from the room, (ii) Within 200 feet of each portable shall be on the exterior of the building tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide ac- in which the room is located. (vii) In every inside storage room cess way to permit approach of fire there shall be maintained one clear control apparatus. aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers (5) Storage areas shall be kept free of over 30 gallons capacity shall not be weeds, debris, and other combustible stacked one upon the other. material not necessary to the storage.

181

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00191 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 outside only through a closed piping gallons, shall be provided with emer- system, from safety cans, by means of gency venting and other devices, as re- a device drawing through the top, or quired by chapters III and IV of NFPA from a container, or portable tanks, by 30–1969, The Flammable and Combus- gravity or pump, through an approved tible Liquids Code. self-closing valve. Transferring by (7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 means of air pressure on the container gallons, shall have emergency venting or portable tanks is prohibited. and other devices, as required by chap- (4) The dispensing units shall be pro- ters II and III of The Flammable and tected against collision damage. Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30– (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for 1969. Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids (d) Fire control for flammable liquid shall be of an approved type. storage. (1) At least one portable fire (f) Handling liquids at point of final extinguisher, having a rating of not use. (1) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable less than 20–B units, shall be located liquids shall be kept in closed con- outside of, but not more than 10 feet tainers when not actually in use. from, the door opening into any room used for storage of more than 60 gal- (2) Leakage or spillage of flammable lons of flammable liquids. liquids shall be disposed of promptly (2) At least one portable fire extin- and safely. guisher having a rating of not less than (3) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liq- 20–B units shall be located not less uids may be used only where there are than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, no open flames or other sources of igni- from any flammable liquid storage tion within 50 feet of the operation, un- area located outside. less conditions warrant greater clear- (3) When sprinklers are provided, ance. they shall be installed in accordance (g) Service and refueling areas. (1) with the Standard for the Installation Flammable liquids shall be stored in of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13–1969. approved closed containers, in tanks (4) At least one portable fire extin- located underground, or in above- guisher having a rating of not less than ground portable tanks. 20–B:C units shall be provided on all (2) The tank trucks shall comply tank trucks or other vehicles used for with the requirements covered in the transporting and/or dispensing flam- Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flam- mable liquids. mable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA (e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in No. 385–1966. which flammable liquids are trans- (3) The dispensing hose shall be an ferred at one time, in quantities great- approved type. er than 5 gallons from one tank or con- (4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an tainer to another tank or container, approved automatic-closing type with- shall be separated from other oper- out a latch-open device. ations by 25-feet distance or by construction having a fire resistance of at (5) Underground tanks shall not be least 1 hour. Drainage or other means abandoned. shall be provided to control spills. Ade- (6) Clearly identified and easily ac- quate natural or mechanical ventila- cessible switch(es) shall be provided at tion shall be provided to maintain the a location remote from dispensing de- concentration of flammable vapor at or vices to shut off the power to all dis- below 10 percent of the lower flam- pensing devices in the event of an mable limit. emergency. (2) Transfer of Category 1, 2, or 3 (7)(i) Heating equipment of an ap- flammable liquids from one container proved type may be installed in the lu- to another shall be done only when brication or service area where there is containers are electrically inter- no dispensing or transferring of Cat- connected (bonded). egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, pro- (3) Flammable liquids shall be drawn vided the bottom of the heating unit is from or transferred into vessels, con- at least 18 inches above the floor and is tainers, or tanks within a building or protected from physical damage.

182

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00192 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

(ii) Heating equipment installed in of the liquid to be stored exceeds that lubrication or service areas, where Cat- of water or if the tanks are designed to egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are contain flammable liquids at a liquid dispensed, shall be of an approved type temperature below 0 °F. for garages, and shall be installed at (ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved] least 8 feet above the floor. (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv- (8) There shall be no smoking or open eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or flames in the areas used for fueling, constructed by use of a combination of servicing fuel systems for internal these methods. Filler metal used in combustion engines, receiving or dis- brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an pensing of flammable liquids. alloy having a melting point above 1000 (9) Conspicuous and legible signs pro- °F. and below that of the metal joined. hibiting smoking shall be posted. (iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmos- (10) The motors of all equipment pheric tanks shall be built in accord- being fueled shall be shut off during ance with acceptable good standards of the fueling operation. design. Atmospheric tanks may be (11) Each service or fueling area shall built in accordance with: be provided with at least one fire extin- (1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., guisher having a rating of not less than Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel 20–B:C located so that an extinguisher Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and will be within 75 feet of each pump, dis- Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, penser, underground fill pipe opening, Standard for Steel Underground Tanks and lubrication or service area. for Flammable and Combustible Liq- (h) Scope. This section applies to the uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or handling, storage, and use of flam- No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks mable liquids with a flashpoint at or for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963. below 199.4 °F (93 °C). This section does not apply to: (2) American Petroleum Institute (1) Bulk transportation of flammable Standards No. 12A, Specification for liquids; and Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel Seventh Edition, September 1951, or oil tanks and containers connected No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil with oil burning equipment. Storage, Third Edition, 1966. (i) Tank storage—(1) Design and con- (3) American Petroleum Institute struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (A) Standards No. 12B, Specification for Tanks shall be built of steel except as Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B) Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1, through (E) of this section. March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for (B) Tanks may be built of materials Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev- other than steel for installation under- enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, ground or if required by the properties Specification for Small Welded Produc- of the liquid stored. Tanks located tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. above ground or inside buildings shall Tanks built in accordance with these be of noncombustible construction. standards shall be used only as produc- (C) Tanks built of materials other tion tanks for storage of crude petro- than steel shall be designed to speci- leum in oil-producing areas. fications embodying principles recog- (B) Tanks designed for underground nized as good engineering design for service not exceeding 2,500 gallons the material used. (9,462.5 L) capacity may be used above- (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be ground. used for storing flammable liquids hav- (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure ing a gravity of 40° API or heavier. vessels may be used as atmospheric Concrete tanks with special lining may tanks. be used for other services provided the (D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be design is in accordance with sound en- used for the storage of a flammable liq- gineering practice. uid at a temperature at or above its (E) [Reserved] boiling point. (F) Special engineering consideration (iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The nor- shall be required if the specific gravity mal operating pressure of the tank

183

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00193 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

shall not exceed the design pressure of one tank is less than one-half the di- the tank. ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis- (B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built tance between the two tanks shall not in accordance with acceptable stand- be less than one-half the diameter of ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may the smaller tank. be built in accordance with: (C) Where crude petroleum in con- (1) American Petroleum Institute junction with production facilities are Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules located in noncongested areas and have for the Design and Construction of capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage (3,000 barrels), the distance between Tanks, Third Edition, 1966. such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet (2) The principles of the Code for (0.912 m). Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII (D) Where unstable flammable liquids of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves- are stored, the distance between such sels Code, 1968. tanks shall not be less than one-half (C) Atmospheric tanks built accord- the sum of their diameters. ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., (E) When tanks are compacted in requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) three or more rows or in an irregular of this section and shall be limited to pattern, greater spacing or other 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting means shall be provided so that inside conditions. tanks are accessible for firefighting This paragraph may be used for oper- purposes. ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. (F) The minimum separation between (D) Pressure vessels may be used as a liquefied petroleum gas container low-pressure tanks. and a flammable liquid storage tank (v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal shall be 20 feet (6.08 m), except in the operating pressure of the vessel shall case of flammable liquid tanks oper- not exceed the design pressure of the ating at pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. vessel. (B) Pressure vessels shall be built in or equipped with emergency venting accordance with the Code for Unfired which will permit pressures to exceed Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of 1968. this section shall apply. Suitable (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. means shall be taken to prevent the ac- When tanks are not designed in accord- cumulation of flammable liquids under ance with the American Petroleum In- adjacent liquefied petroleum gas constitute, American Society of Mechan- tainers such as by diversion curbs or ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’ grading. When flammable liquid stor- Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if age tanks are within a diked area, the corrosion is anticipated beyond that liquefied petroleum gas containers provided for in the design formulas shall be outside the diked area and at used, additional metal thickness or least 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the suitable protective coatings or linings centerline of the wall of the diked area. shall be provided to compensate for the The foregoing provisions shall not corrosion loss expected during the de- apply when liquefied petroleum gas sign life of the tank. containers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or (2) Installation of outside aboveground less capacity are installed adjacent to tanks. (i) [Reserved] fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between (2,081.75 L) or less capacity. aboveground tanks. (A) The distance be- (iii) [Reserved] tween any two flammable liquid stor- (iv) Normal venting for aboveground age tanks shall not be less than 3 feet tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage tanks (0.912 m). shall be adequately vented to prevent (B) Except as provided in paragraph the development of vacuum or pressure (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance sufficient to distort the roof of a cone between any two adjacent tanks shall roof tank or exceeding the design pres- not be less than one-sixth the sum of sure in the case of other atmospheric their diameters. When the diameter of tanks, as a result of filling or

184

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00194 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

emptying, and atmospheric tempera- than Category 1 flammable liquids may ture changes. have open vents. (See paragraph (B) Normal vents shall be sized either (i)(2)(vi)(B) of this section.) in accordance with: (1) The American (G) Flame arresters or venting de- Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 vices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F) (1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low- of this section may be omitted for Cat- Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other egory 2 flammable liquids or Category accepted standard; or (3) shall be at 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint least as large as the filling or with- below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where conditions drawal connection, whichever is larger are such that their use may, in case of but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 obstruction, result in tank damage. cm) nominal inside diameter. (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex- vessels shall be adequately vented to posure for aboveground tanks. (A) Every prevent development of pressure or aboveground storage tank shall have vacuum, as a result of filling or some form of construction or device emptying and atmospheric tempera- that will relieve excessive internal ture changes, from exceeding the de- pressure caused by exposure fires. sign pressure of the tank or vessel. (B) In a vertical tank the construc- Protection shall also be provided to tion referred to in paragraph prevent overpressure from any pump (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the discharging into the tank or vessel form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a when the pump discharge pressure can weak roof-to-shell seam, or other ap- exceed the design pressure of the tank proved pressure relieving construction. or vessel. The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be (D) If any tank or pressure vessel has constructed to fail preferential to any more than one fill or withdrawal con- other seam. nection and simultaneous filling or (C) Where entire dependence for withdrawal can be made, the vent size emergency relief is placed upon pres- shall be based on the maximum antici- sure relieving devices, the total vent- pated simultaneous flow. ing capacity of both normal and emer- (E) Unless the vent is designed to gency vents shall be enough to prevent limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or rupture of the shell or bottom of the less, the outlet of vents and vent drains shall be arranged to discharge in such tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads a manner as to prevent localized over- if horizontal. If unstable liquids are heating of any part of the tank in the stored, the effects of heat or gas result- event vapors from such vents are ig- ing from polymerization, decomposi- nited. tion, condensation, or self-reactivity (F) Tanks and pressure vessels stor- shall be taken into account. The total ing Category 1 flammable liquids shall capacity of both normal and emergency be equipped with venting devices that venting devices shall be not less than shall be normally closed except when that derived from Table F–10 except as venting to pressure or vacuum condi- provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or tions. Tanks and pressure vessels stor- (F) of this section. Such device may be ing Category 2 flammable liquids, or a self-closing manhole cover, or one Category 3 flammable liquids with a using long bolts that permit the cover flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall to lift under internal pressure, or an be equipped with venting devices that additional or larger relief valve or shall be normally closed except when valves. The wetted area of the tank venting under pressure or vacuum con- shall be calculated on the basis of 55 ditions, or with approved flame arrest- percent of the total exposed area of a ers. sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls (bar- total exposed area of a horizontal tank rels) (84 m(3)) capacity or less con- and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above taining crude petroleum in crude-pro- grade of the exposed shell area of a ducing areas; and, outside aboveground atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons vertical tank. (3,785 L) capacity containing other

185

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00195 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE F–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET (METERS) FREE AIR PER HOUR [14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)]

Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H)

20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672) 30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596) 40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436) 50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192) 60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892) 70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536) 80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712) 90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776) 100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and 120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over 140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672) 160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704) 180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908)

(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- 0.15 for approved water spray with approved signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the insulation. total rate of venting shall be deter- (G) The outlet of all vents and vent mined in accordance with Table F–10, drains on tanks equipped with emer- except that when the exposed wetted gency venting to permit pressures ex- area of the surface is greater than 2,800 ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of discharge in such a way as to prevent venting shall be calculated by the fol- localized overheating of any part of the lowing formula: tank, in the event vapors from such CFH = 1,107A0.82 vents are ignited. Where: (H) Each commercial tank venting CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet device shall have stamped on it the (meters) of free air per hour. opening pressure, the pressure at which A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet the valve reaches the full open posi- (m2). tion, and the flow capacity at the lat-

NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on Q ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet = 21,000A0.82. (meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55 °C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a. (E) The total emergency relief vent- (I) The flow capacity of tank venting ing capacity for any specific stable liq- devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller uid may be determined by the fol- in nominal pipe size shall be deter- lowing formula: mined by actual test of each type and V = 1337 ÷ L√ M size of vent. These flow tests may be V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour conducted by the manufacturer if cer- from Table F–10. tified by a qualified impartial observer, L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific or may be conducted by an outside liquid in B.t.u. per pound. agency. The flow capacity of tank M = Molecular weight of specific liquids. venting devices larger than 12 inches (F) The required airflow rate of para- (30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including graph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section manhole covers with long bolts or may be multiplied by the appropriate equivalent, may be calculated provided factor listed in the following schedule that the opening pressure is actually when protection is provided as indi- measured, the rating pressure and cor- cated. Only one factor may be used for responding free orifice area are stated, any one tank. the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears on the nameplate, and the computation is 0.5 for drainage in accordance with para- based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap- graph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area. plied to the rated orifice area. 0.3 for approved water spray. (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. 0.3 for approved insulation. (A) Vent piping shall be constructed in

186

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00196 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

accordance with paragraph (c) of this comply with the following require- section. ments: (B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks (1) Except as provided in paragraph storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volu- uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids metric capacity of the diked area shall with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), not be less than the greatest amount of are adjacent to buildings or public liquid that can be released from the ways, they shall be located so that the largest tank within the diked area, as- vapors are released at a safe point out- suming a full tank. The capacity of the side of buildings and not less than 12 diked area enclosing more than one feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent tank shall be calculated by deducting ground level. In order to aid their dis- the volume of the tanks other than the persion, vapors shall be discharged up- largest tank below the height of the ward or horizontally away from closely dike. adjacent walls. Vent outlets shall be (2) For a tank or group of tanks with located so that flammable vapors will fixed roofs containing crude petroleum not be trapped by eaves or other ob- with boilover characteristics, the volu- structions and shall be at least 5 feet metric capacity of the diked area shall (1.52 m) from building openings. be not less than the capacity of the (C) When tank vent piping is largest tank served by the enclosure, manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as assuming a full tank. The capacity of to discharge, within the pressure limi- the diked enclosure shall be calculated tations of the system, the vapors they by deducting the volume below the may be required to handle when height of the dike of all tanks within manifolded tanks are subject to the the enclosure. same fire exposure. (3) Walls of the diked area shall be of (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry aboveground tanks—(A) Drainage and designed to be liquidtight and to with- diked areas. The area surrounding a stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen tank or a group of tanks shall be pro- walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height vided with drainage as in paragraph shall have a flat section at the top not (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this slope of an earthen wall shall be con- section, to prevent accidental dis- sistent with the angle of repose of the charge of liquid from endangering ad- material of which the wall is con- joining property or reaching water- structed. ways. (4) The walls of the diked area shall (B) Drainage. Where protection of ad- be restricted to an average height of 6 joining property or waterways is by feet (1.824 m) above interior grade. means of a natural or manmade drain- (5) [Reserved] age system, such systems shall comply (6) No loose combustible material, with the following: empty or full drum or barrel, shall be (1) [Reserved] permitted within the diked area. (2) The drainage system shall termi- (viii) Tank openings other than vents nate in vacant land or other area or in for aboveground tanks. an impounding basin having a capacity (A)–(C) [Reserved] not smaller than that of the largest (D) Openings for gaging shall be pro- tank served. This termination area and vided with a vaportight cap or cover. the route of the drainage system shall (E) For Category 2 flammable liquids be so located that, if the flammable or Category 3 flammable liquids with a liquids in the drainage system are ig- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other nited, the fire will not seriously expose than crude oils, gasolines, and as- tanks or adjoining property. phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed (C) Diked areas. Where protection of and installed as to minimize the possi- adjoining property or waterways is ac- bility of generating static electricity. complished by retaining the liquid A fill pipe entering the top of a tank around the tank by means of a dike, shall terminate within 6 inches (15.24 the volume of the diked area shall cm) of the bottom of the tank and shall

187

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00197 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

be installed to avoid excessive vibra- plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced tion. concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of as- (F) Filling and emptying connections phaltic concrete. When asphaltic or re- which are made and broken shall be lo- inforced concrete paving is used as part cated outside of buildings at a location of the protection, it shall extend at free from any source of ignition and least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally be- not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from yond the outline of the tank in all di- any building opening. Such connection rections. shall be closed and liquidtight when (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion not in use. The connection shall be protection for the tank and its piping properly identified. shall be provided by one or more of the (3) Installation of underground tanks— following methods: (i) Location. Evacuation for underground storage tanks shall be made (A) Use of protective coatings or with due care to avoid undermining of wrappings; foundations of existing structures. Un- (B) Cathodic protection; or, derground tanks or tanks under build- (C) Corrosion resistant materials of ings shall be so located with respect to construction. existing building foundations and sup- (iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrange- ports that the loads carried by the lat- ment of vents for Category 1 or 2 flam- ter cannot be transmitted to the tank. mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable The distance from any part of a tank liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- (37.8 °C). Vent pipes from tanks storing uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), Category 3 flammable liquids with a to the nearest wall of any basement or flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall pit shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304 be so located that the discharge point m), and to any property line that may is outside of buildings, higher than the be built upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912 fill pipe opening, and not less than 12 m). The distance from any part of a feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent tank storing Category 3 flammable liq- ground level. Vent pipes shall dis- uids with a flashpoint at or above 100 charge only upward in order to disperse °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids to the nearest wall of any base- vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or ment, pit or property line shall be not less in nominal inside diameter shall less than 1 foot (0.304 m). not be obstructed by devices that will (ii) Depth and cover. Underground cause excessive back pressure. Vent tanks shall be set on firm foundations pipe outlets shall be so located that and surrounded with at least 6 inches flammable vapors will not enter build- (15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert mate- ing openings, or be trapped under eaves rials such as clean sand, earth, or grav- or other obstructions. If the vent pipe el well tamped in place. The tank shall is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or be placed in the hole with care since greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nomi- dropping or rolling the tank into the nal inside diameter, the outlet shall be hole can break a weld, puncture or provided with a vacuum and pressure damage the tank, or scrape off the pro- relief device or there shall be an ap- tective coating of coated tanks. Tanks proved flame arrester located in the shall be covered with a minimum of 2 vent line at the outlet or within the feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be cov- approved distance from the outlet. ered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m) (B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be of earth, on top of which shall be vented through piping adequate in size placed a slab of reinforced concrete not to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick. at the fill opening while the tank is When underground tanks are, or are being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less likely to be, subject to traffic, they 1 shall be protected against damage from than 1 ⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside vehicles passing over them by at least diameter. 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18 inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth,

188

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00198 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

TABLE F–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS

Pipe length 1 Maximum flow GPM (L) 50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)

Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)

100 (378.5) ...... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 200 (757) ...... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 300 (1,135.5) ...... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81) 400 (1,514) ...... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 500 (1,892.5) ...... 11⁄2 (3.81) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 600 (2,271) ...... 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 700 (2,649.5) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 800 (3,028) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 900 (3,406.5) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 1,000 (3,785) ...... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 1 Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.

(C) Location and arrangement of (C) Fill and discharge lines shall vents for Category 3 flammable liquids enter tanks only through the top. Fill with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F lines shall be sloped toward the tank. (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liq- (D) For Category 2 flammable liquids. Vent pipes from tanks storing uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids Category 3 flammable liquids with a with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or other than crude oils, gasolines, and Category 4 flammable liquids shall ter- asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- minate outside of the building and signed and installed as to minimize the higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent possibility of generating static elec- outlets shall be above normal snow tricity by terminating within 6 inches level. They may be fitted with return (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. bends, coarse screens or other devices (E) Filling and emptying connections to minimize ingress of foreign mate- which are made and broken shall be lo- rial. cated outside of buildings at a location (D) Vent piping shall be constructed free from any source of ignition and in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from of this section. Vent pipes shall be so any building opening. Such connection laid as to drain toward the tank with- shall be closed and liquidtight when out sags or traps in which liquid can not in use. The connection shall be collect. They shall be located so that properly identified. they will not be subjected to physical (4) Installation of tanks inside of build- damage. The tank end of the vent pipe ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be shall enter the tank through the top. permitted inside of buildings except as (E) When tank vent piping is provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as (i) of this section. to discharge, within the pressure limi- (ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of tations of the system, the vapors they buildings shall be as provided in para- may be required to handle when graphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv) manifolded tanks are filled simulta- of this section, except that emergency neously. venting by the use of weak roof seams (v) Tank openings other than vents. (A) on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents Connections for all tank openings shall shall discharge vapors outside the be vapor or liquid tight. buildings. (B) Openings for manual gaging, if (iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be independent of the fill pipe, shall be constructed in accordance with para- provided with a liquid-tight cap or graph (c) of this section. cover. If inside a building, each such (iv) Tank openings other than vents. opening shall be protected against liq- (A) Connections for all tank openings uid overflow and possible vapor release shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are by means of a spring loaded check covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this valve or other approved device. section.

189

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00199 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(B) Each connection to a tank inside (H) Tanks inside buildings shall be of buildings through which liquid can equipped with a device, or other means normally flow shall be provided with shall be provided, to prevent overflow an internal or an external valve lo- into the building. cated as close as practical to the shell (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor- of the tank. Such valves, when exter- age for all tank locations—(i) General. nal, and their connections to the tank Tank supports shall be installed on shall be of steel except when the chem- firm foundations. Tank supports shall ical characteristics of the liquid stored be of concrete, masonry, or protected are incompatible with steel. When ma- steel. Single wood timber supports (not terials other than steel are necessary, cribbing) laid horizontally may be used they shall be suitable for the pressures, for outside aboveground tanks if not structural stresses, and temperatures more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at involved, including fire exposures. their lowest point. (C) Flammable liquid tanks located (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or inside of buildings, except in one-story exposed piling shall be protected by buildings designed and protected for materials having a fire resistance rat- flammable liquid storage, shall be pro- ing of not less than 2 hours, except that vided with an automatic-closing heat- steel saddles need not be protected if actuated valve on each withdrawal con- less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at nection below the liquid level, except their lowest point. Water spray protec- for connections used for emergency dis- tion or its equivalent may be used in posal, to prevent continued flow in the lieu of fire-resistive materials to pro- event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. tect supports. This function may be incorporated in (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup- the valve required in paragraph porting structure for tanks such as (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a sep- spheres shall receive special engineer- arate valve, shall be located adjacent ing consideration. to the valve required in paragraph (iv) Load distribution. Every tank (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. shall be so supported as to prevent the (D) Openings for manual gaging, if excessive concentration of loads on the independent of the fill pipe (see para- supporting portion of the shell. graph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on be provided with a vaportight cap or the ground or on foundations made of cover. Each such opening shall be pro- concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. tected against liquid overflow and pos- Tank foundations shall be designed to sible vapor release by means of a spring minimize the possibility of uneven set- loaded check valve or other approved tling of the tank and to minimize cor- device. rosion in any part of the tank resting (E) For Category 2 flammable liquids, on the foundation. or Category 3 flammable liquids with a (vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other cated in an area that may be subjected than crude oils, gasolines, and as- to flooding, the applicable precautions phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- and installed as to minimize the possi- served. bility of generating static electricity (A) No aboveground vertical storage by terminating within 6 inches (15.24 tank containing a flammable liquid cm) of the bottom of the tank. shall be located so that the allowable (F) The fill pipe inside of the tank liquid level within the tank is below shall be installed to avoid excessive vi- the established maximum flood stage, bration of the pipe. unless the tank is provided with a guid- (G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be ing structure such as described in para- located outside of buildings at a loca- graphs (i)(5)(vi) (M), (N), and (O) of this tion free from any source of ignition section. and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away (B) Independent water supply facili- from any building opening. The inlet of ties shall be provided at locations the fill pipe shall be closed and where there is no ample and dependable liquidtight when not in use. The fill public water supply available for load- connection shall be properly identified. ing partially empty tanks with water.

190

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00200 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

(C) In addition to the preceding re- uids, and submerged by flood waters to quirements, each tank so located that the established flood stage. more than 70 percent, but less than 100 (H) Pipe connections below the allow- percent, of its allowable liquid storage able liquid level in a tank shall be pro- capacity will be submerged at the es- vided with valves or cocks located as tablished maximum flood stage, shall closely as practicable to the tank shell. be safeguarded by one of the following Such valves and their connections to methods: Tank shall be raised, or its tanks shall be of steel or other mate- height shall be increased, until its top rial suitable for use with the liquid extends above the maximum flood being stored. Cast iron shall not be per- stage a distance equivalent to 30 permitted. cent or more of its allowable liquid (I) At locations where an independent storage capacity: Provided, however, water supply is required, it shall be en- That the submerged part of the tank tirely independent of public power and shall not exceed two and one-half times water supply. Independent source of the diameter. Or, as an alternative to water shall be available when flood wa- the foregoing, adequate noncombus- ters reach a level not less than 10 feet tible structural guides, designed to per- (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest mit the tank to float vertically with- tank on a property. out loss of product, shall be provided. (J) The self-contained power and (D) Each horizontal tank so located pumping unit shall be so located or so that more than 70 percent of its stor- designed that pumping into tanks may age capacity will be submerged at the be carried on continuously throughout established flood stage, shall be an- the rise in flood waters from a level 10 chored, attached to a foundation of feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to concrete or of steel and concrete, of sufficient weight to provide adequate the level of the potential flood stage. load for the tank when filled with flam- (K) Capacity of the pumping unit mable liquid and submerged by flood shall be such that the rate of rise of waters to the established flood stage, water in all tanks shall be equivalent or adequately secured by other means. to the established potential average (E) [Reserved] rate of rise of flood waters at any stage. (F) At locations where there is no ample and dependable water supply, or (L) Each independent pumping unit where filling of underground tanks shall be tested periodically to insure with liquids is impracticable because of that it is in satisfactory operating con- the character of their contents, their dition. use, or for other reasons, each tank (M) Structural guides for holding shall be safeguarded against movement floating tanks above their foundations when empty and submerged by high shall be so designed that there will be ground water or flood waters by an- no resistance to the free rise of a tank, choring, weighting with concrete or and shall be constructed of noncombus- other approved solid loading material, tible material. or securing by other means. Each such (N) The strength of the structure tank shall be so constructed and in- shall be adequate to resist lateral stalled that it will safely resist exter- movement of a tank subject to a hori- nal pressures due to high ground water zontal force in any direction equivalent or flood waters. to not less than 25 pounds per square (G) At locations where there is an foot (1.05 kg m2) acting on the pro- ample and dependable water supply jected vertical cross-sectional area of available, underground tanks con- the tank. taining flammable liquids, so installed (O) Where tanks are situated on ex- that more than 70 percent of their stor- posed points or bends in a shoreline age capacity will be submerged at the where swift currents in flood waters maximum flood stage, shall be so an- will be present, the structures shall be chored, weighted, or secured by other designed to withstand a unit force of means, as to prevent movement of such not less than 50 pounds per square foot tanks when filled with flammable liq- (2.1 kg m2).

191

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00201 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(P) The filling of a tank to be pro- prevent ignition by eliminating or con- tected by water loading shall be start- trolling sources of ignition. Sources of ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- ignition may include open flames, gerous flood stage. The rate of filling lightning, smoking, cutting and weld- shall be at least equal to the rate of ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat, rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- sparks (static, electrical, and mechan- lished average potential rate of rise). ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical (Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the and physical-chemical reactions, and water pumps shall be available at all radiant heat. times to insure adequate power to fill (7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks, all tankage with water. whether shop built or field erected, (R) All valves on connecting pipe- shall be strength tested before they are lines shall be closed and locked in placed in service in accordance with closed position when water loading has the applicable paragraphs of the code been completed. under which they were built. The (S) Where structural guides are pro- American Society of Mechanical Engi- vided for the protection of floating neers (ASME) code stamp, American tanks, all rigid connections between Petroleum Institute (API) monogram, tanks and pipelines shall be discon- or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab- nected and blanked off or blinded be- oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi- fore the floodwaters reach the bottom dence of compliance with this strength of the tank, unless control valves and test. Tanks not marked in accordance their connections to the tank are of a with the above codes shall be strength type designed to prevent breakage be- tested before they are placed in service tween the valve and the tank shell. in accordance with good engineering (T) All valves attached to tanks principles and reference shall be made other than those used in connection to the sections on testing in the codes with water loading operations shall be listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A), closed and locked. (iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this section. (U) If a tank is equipped with a swing (ii) Strength. When the vertical line, the swing pipe shall be raised to length of the fill and vent pipes is such and secured at its highest position. that when filled with liquid the static (V) Inspections. The Assistant Sec- head imposed upon the bottom of the retary or his designated representative tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch shall make periodic inspections of all (68.94 kPa), the tank and related piping plants where the storage of flammable shall be tested hydrostatically to a liquids is such as to require compliance pressure equal to the static head thus with the foregoing requirements, in imposed. order to assure the following: (iii) Tightness. In addition to the (1) That all flammable liquid storage strength test called for in paragraphs tanks are in compliance with these re- (i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all quirements and so maintained. tanks and connections shall be tested (2) That detailed printed instructions for tightness. Except for underground of what to do in flood emergencies are tanks, this tightness test shall be made properly posted. at operating pressure with air, inert (3) That station operators and other gas, or water prior to placing the tank employees depended upon to carry out in service. In the case of field-erected such instructions are thoroughly in- tanks the strength test may be consid- formed as to the location and operation ered to be the test for tank tightness. of such valves and other equipment Underground tanks and piping, before necessary to effect these requirements. being covered, enclosed, or placed in (vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub- use, shall be tested for tightness ject to earthquakes, the tank supports hydrostatically, or with air pressure at and connections shall be designed to not less than 3 pounds per square inch resist damage as a result of such (20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds shocks. per square inch (34.47 kPa). (6) Sources of ignition. In locations (iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- where flammable vapors may be tions shall be corrected in an accept- present, precautions shall be taken to able manner before the tank is placed

192

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00202 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

in service. Mechanical caulking is not (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit- permitted for correcting leaks in weld- tings may have combustible or non- ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the combustible linings. roof. (iv) Low-melting materials. When low- (v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- melting point materials such as alu- erated at pressures below their design minum and brass or materials that pressure may be tested by the applica- soften on fire exposure such as plastics, ble provisions of paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or or non-ductile materials such as cast (ii) of this section, based upon the pres- iron, are necessary, special consider- sure developed under full emergency ation shall be given to their behavior venting of the tank. on fire exposure. If such materials are (j) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- used in above ground piping systems or eral—(i) Design. The design (including inside buildings, they shall be suitably selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from systems containing flammable liquids the failure of these materials could not shall be suitable for the expected work- unduly expose persons, important ing pressures and structural stresses. buildings or structures or can be read- Conformity with the applicable provi- ily controlled by remote valves. sions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 se- (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made ries and the provisions of this para- liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints graph, shall be considered prima facie or approved connectors shall be used. evidence of compliance with the fore- Threaded joints and connections shall going provisions. be made up tight with a suitable lubri- (ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does cant or piping compound. Pipe joints not apply to any of the following: dependent upon the friction character- (A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas istics of combustible materials for me- wells and any piping connected directly chanical continuity of piping shall not thereto. be used inside buildings. They may be (B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or used outside of buildings above or portable or stationary engines. below ground. If used above ground, the (C) Piping within the scope of any ap- piping shall either be secured to pre- plicable boiler and pressures vessel vent disengagement at the fitting or code. the piping system shall be so designed (iii) Definitions. As used in this para- that any spill resulting from such dis- graph, piping systems consist of pipe, engagement could not unduly expose tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, persons, important buildings or struc- valves, fittings, the pressure con- tures, and could be readily controlled taining parts of other components such by remote valves. as expansion joints and strainers, and (4) Supports. Piping systems shall be devices which serve such purposes as substantially supported and protected mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib- against physical damage and excessive uting, metering, or controlling flow. stresses arising from settlement, vibra- (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit- tion, expansion, or contraction. tings—(i) Required materials. Materials (5) Protection against corrosion. All for piping, valves, or fittings shall be piping for flammable liquids, both steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron, aboveground and underground, where except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2) subject to external corrosion, shall be (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section. painted or otherwise protected. (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than (6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron tain a sufficient number of valves to may be used underground, or if re- operate the system properly and to quired by the properties of the flam- protect the plant. Piping systems in mable liquid handled. Material other connection with pumps shall contain a than steel, nodular iron, or malleable sufficient number of valves to control iron shall be designed to specifications properly the flow of liquid in normal embodying principles recognized as operation and in the event of physical good engineering practices for the ma- damage. Each connection to pipelines, terial used. by which equipments such as tankcars

193

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00203 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.152 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

or tank vehicles discharge liquids by the solid fill type, except as provided in means of pumps into storage tanks, paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this shall be provided with a check valve for section. automatic protection against backflow (ii) Where shore location would re- if the piping arrangement is such that quire excessively long supply lines to backflow from the system is possible. dispensers, tanks may be installed on a (7) Testing. All piping before being pier provided that applicable portions covered, enclosed, or placed in use of paragraph (b) of this section relative shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 to spacing, diking, and piping are com- percent of the maximum anticipated plied with and the quantity so stored pressure of the system, or pneumati- does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L) cally tested to 110 percent of the max- aggregate capacity. imum anticipated pressure of the sys- (iii) Shore tanks supplying marine tem, but not less than 5 pounds per service stations may be located above square inch gage at the highest point ground, where rock ledges or high of the system. This test shall be main- water table make underground tanks tained for a sufficient time to complete impractical. visual inspection of all joints and connections, but for at least 10 minutes. (iv) Where tanks are at an elevation (k) Marine service stations—(1) Dis- which would produce gravity head on pensing. (i) The dispensing area shall be the dispensing unit, the tank outlet located away from other structures so shall be equipped with a pressure con- as to provide room for safe ingress and trol valve positioned adjacent to and egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing outside the tank block valve specified units shall in all cases be at least 20 in § 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so ad- feet (6.08 m) from any activity involv- justed that liquid cannot flow by grav- ing fixed sources of ignition. ity from the tank in case of piping or (ii) Dispensing shall be by approved hose failure. dispensing units with or without inte- (3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore gral pumps and may be located on open tanks and dispensing units shall be as piers, wharves, or floating docks or on described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this shore or on piers of the solid fill type. section, except that, where dispensing (iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto- is from a floating structure, suitable matic-closing without a hold-open lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose latch. may be employed between the shore (2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and piping and the piping on the floating pumps not integral with the dispensing structure as made necessary by change unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of in water level or shoreline.

194

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00204 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.152

195

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00205 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER26MR12.128 § 1926.153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut and shall include all facilities used in off the supply from shore shall be pro- connection therewith. vided in each pipeline at or near the approach to the pier and at the shore [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; end of each pipeline adjacent to the 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June point where flexible hose is attached. 18, 1998; 77 FR 17891, Mar. 26, 2012] (iii) Piping shall be located so as to be protected from physical damage. § 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (iv) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 (LP-Gas). flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below (a) Approval of equipment and systems. 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be grounded to (1) Each system shall have containers, control stray currents. valves, connectors, manifold valve as- (4) Definition; as used in this section: semblies, and regulators of an approved Marine service station shall mean that type. portion of a property where flammable (2) All cylinders shall meet the De- liquids used as fuels are stored and dis- partment of Transportation specifica- pensed from fixed equipment on shore, tion identification requirements pub- piers, wharves, or floating docks into lished in 49 CFR part 178, Shipping the fuel tanks of self-propelled craft, Container Specifications.

196

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00206 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER26MR12.129 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.153

(3) Definition. As used in this section, (f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP- Containers—All vessels, such as tanks, Gas consuming appliances shall be ap- cylinders, or drums, used for transpor- proved types. tation or storing liquefied petroleum (2) Any appliance that was originally gases. manufactured for operation with a gas- (b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. eous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in Welding is prohibited on containers. good condition, may be used with LP- (c) Container valves and container ac- Gas only after it is properly converted, cessories. (1) Valves, fittings, and acces- adapted, and tested for performance sories connected directly to the con- with LP-Gas before the appliance is tainer, including primary shut off placed in use. valves, shall have a rated working pres- (g) Containers and regulating equip- sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be ment installed outside of buildings or of material and design suitable for LP- structures. Containers shall be upright Gas service. upon firm foundations or otherwise (2) Connections to containers, except firmly secured. The possible effect on safety relief connections, liquid level the outlet piping of settling shall be gauging devices, and plugged openings, guarded against by a flexible connec- shall have shutoff valves located as tion or special fitting. close to the container as practicable. (h) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures. (1) When (d) Safety devices. (1) Every container operational requirements make port- and every vaporizer shall be provided able use of containers necessary, and with one or more approved safety relief their location outside of buildings or valves or devices. These valves shall be structures is impracticable, containers arranged to afford free vent to the and equipment shall be permitted to be outer air with discharge not less than 5 used inside of buildings or structures in feet horizontally away from any open- accordance with paragraphs (h)(2) ing into a building which is below such through (11) of this section. discharge. (2) Containers in use means connected (2) Shutoff valves shall not be infor use. stalled between the safety relief device (3) Systems utilizing containers hav- and the container, or the equipment or ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2 piping to which the safety relief device pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca- is connected, except that a shutoff pacity) shall be equipped with excess valve may be used where the arrange- flow valves. Such excess flow valves ment of this valve is such that full re- shall be either integral with the con- quired capacity flow through the safety tainer valves or in the connections to relief device is always afforded. the container valve outlets. (3) Container safety relief devices and (4) Regulators shall be either directly regulator relief vents shall be located connected to the container valves or to not less than 5 feet in any direction manifolds connected to the container from air openings into sealed combus- valves. The regulator shall be suitable tion system appliances or mechanical for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fit- ventilation air intakes. tings connecting containers to pressure (e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel con- regulator inlets shall be designed for at tainers for trucks or motor vehicles least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure. from bulk storage containers shall be (5) Valves on containers having water performed not less than 10 feet from capacity greater than 50 pounds (nomi- the nearest masonry-walled building, nal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be or not less than 25 feet from the near- protected from damage while in use or est building or other construction and, storage. in any event, not less than 25 feet from (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall any building opening. not be used. (2) Filling of portable containers or (7) Hose shall be designed for a work- containers mounted on skids from storing pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. De- age containers shall be performed not sign, construction, and performance of less than 50 feet from the nearest build- hose, and hose connections shall have ing. their suitability determined by listing

197

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00207 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

by a nationally recognized testing (14) If two or more heater-container agency. The hose length shall be as units, of either the integral or non- short as practicable. Hoses shall be integral type, are located in an long enough to permit compliance with unpartitioned area on the same floor, spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) the container or containers of each through (13) of this section, without unit shall be separated from the con- kinking or straining, or causing hose tainer or containers of any other unit to be so close to a burner as to be dam- by at least 20 feet. aged by heat. (15) When heaters are connected to (8) Portable heaters, including sala- containers for use in an unpartitioned manders, shall be equipped with an ap- area on the same floor, the total water proved automatic device to shut off the capacity of containers, manifolded to- flow of gas to the main burner, and gether for connection to a heater or pilot if used, in the event of flame fail- heaters, shall not be greater than 735 ure. Such heaters, having inputs above pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca- 50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa- with either a pilot, which must be rated by at least 20 feet. lighted and proved before the main burner can be turned on, or an elec- (16) Storage of containers awaiting trical ignition system. use shall be in accordance with paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section. NOTE: The provisions of this subparagraph (i) Multiple container systems. (1) do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500 Valves in the assembly of multiple con- B.t.u. per hour input when used with containers having a maximum water capacity of tainer systems shall be arranged so 21⁄2 pounds. that replacement of containers can be made without shutting off the flow of (9) Container valves, connectors, reg- gas in the system. This provision is not ulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing to be construed as requiring an auto- shall not be used as structural supports matic changeover device. for heaters. (10) Containers, regulating equip- (2) Heaters shall be equipped with an ment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose approved regulator in the supply line shall be located to minimize exposure between the fuel cylinder and the heat- to high temperatures or physical dam- er unit. Cylinder connectors shall be age. provided with an excess flow valve to (11) Containers having a water capac- minimize the flow of gas in the event 1 the fuel line becomes ruptured. ity greater than 2 ⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for (3) Regulators and low-pressure relief use shall stand on a firm and substan- devices shall be rigidly attached to the tially level surface and, when nec- cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting essary, shall be secured in an upright standards, the building walls, or other- position. wise rigidly secured, and shall be so in- (12) The maximum water capacity of stalled or protected from the elements. individual containers shall be 245 (j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- of LPG within buildings is prohibited. pacity). (k) Storage outside of buildings. (1) (13) For temporary heating, heaters Storage outside of buildings, for con- (other than integral heater-container tainers awaiting use, shall be located units) shall be located at least 6 feet from the nearest building or group of from any LP-Gas container. This shall buildings, in accordance with the fol- not prohibit the use of heaters specifi- lowing: cally designed for attachment to the container or to a supporting standard, TABLE F–3 provided they are designed and in- Quantity of LP-Gas stored Distance stalled so as to prevent direct or radi- (feet) ant heat application from the heater onto the containers. Blower and radi- 500 lbs. or less ...... 0 ant type heaters shall not be directed 501 to 6,000 lbs ...... 10 toward any LP-Gas container within 20 6,001 to 10,000 lbs ...... 20 feet. Over 10,000 lbs ...... 25

198

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00208 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.154

(2) Containers shall be in a suitable dles but shall have adequate ferrous ventilated enclosure or otherwise pro- metal supports. tected against tampering. (ii) They shall not be located with (l) Fire protection. Storage locations the outside bottom of the container shall be provided with at least one ap- shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above proved portable fire extinguisher hav- the surface of the ground unless fire-re- ing a rating of not less than 20–B:C. sisting supports are provided. (m) Systems utilizing containers other (iii) The bottom of the skids shall not than DOT containers—(1) Application. be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more This paragraph applies specifically to than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the out- systems utilizing storage containers side bottom of the container shell. other than those constructed in accord- (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, ance with DOT specifications. Para- and the like, having communication graph (b) of this section applies to this with the interior of the container, shall paragraph unless otherwise noted in be protected against physical damage. paragraph (b) of this section. (v) When not permanently located on (2) Design pressure and classification of fire-resisting foundations, piping con- storage containers. Storage containers nections shall be sufficiently flexible shall be designed and classified in ac- to minimize the possibility of breakage cordance with Table F–31. or leakage of connections if the container settles, moves, or is otherwise TABLE F–31 displaced. (vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of Minimum design pressure of con- skids, shall be secured to the container tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage For gases in accordance with the code or rules with vapor 1949 edition of ASME under which the container is designed press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200, Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952, and built (with a minimum factor of tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, safety of four) to withstand loading in type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi- 100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of any direction equal to four times the (37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- weight of the container and attach- 69) tions of API-ASME Code 3 ments when filled to the maximum permissible loaded weight. 1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100 (4) Field welding where necessary 100 100 100 125 shall be made only on saddle plates or 125 125 125 156 150 150 150 187 brackets which were applied by the 175 175 175 219 manufacturer of the tank. 2 200 215 200 250 (n) When LP-Gas and one or more 1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au- other gases are stored or used in the thorized since Dec. 31, 1947. same area, the containers shall be 2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of marked to identify their content. the container type designation when constructed under 1949 Marking shall be in compliance with or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of American National Standard Z48.1– the container type designation when constructed under: (1) 1954, ‘‘Method of Marking Portable the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions Compressed Gas Containers To Identify of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME the Material Contained.’’ Code. 3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is (o) Damage from vehicles. When dam- not authorized after July 1, 1961. age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular (3) Containers with foundations at- traffic is a possibility, precautions tached (portable or semiportable b con- against such damage shall be taken. tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’ [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993] industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be designed, installed, and used in accord- § 1926.154 Temporary heating devices. ance with these rules subject to the fol- (a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be lowing provisions: supplied in sufficient quantities to (i) If they are to be used at a given maintain the health and safety of general location for a temporary period workmen. Where natural means of not to exceed 6 months they need not fresh air supply is inadequate, mechan- have fire-resisting foundations or sad- ical ventilation shall be provided.

199

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00209 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.155 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) When heaters are used in confined (2) Heaters designed for barometric spaces, special care shall be taken to or gravity oil feed shall be used only provide sufficient ventilation in order with the integral tanks. to ensure proper combustion, maintain (3) [Reserved] the health and safety of workmen, and (4) Heaters specifically designed and limit temperature rise in the area. approved for use with separate supply (b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Tem- tanks may be directly connected for porary heating devices shall be in- gravity feed, or an automatic pump, stalled to provide clearance to combus- from a supply tank. tible material not less than the § 1926.155 Definitions applicable to amount shown in Table F–4. this subpart. (2) Temporary heating devices, which (a) Approved, for the purpose of this are listed for installation with lesser subpart, means equipment that has clearances than specified in Table F–4, been listed or approved by a nationally may be installed in accordance with recognized testing laboratory such as their approval. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or TABLE F–4 Federal agencies such as Bureau of Minimum clearance, (inches) Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which issue approvals for such equipment. Heating appliances Chimney Sides Rear con- (b) Closed container means a container nector so sealed by means of a lid or other device that neither liquid nor vapor will Room heater, circulating type ...... 12 12 18 escape from it at ordinary tempera- Room heater, radiant type .. 36 36 18 tures. (c) [Reserved] (3) Heaters not suitable for use on (d) Combustion means any chemical wood floors shall not be set directly process that involves oxidation suffi- upon them or other combustible mate- cient to produce light or heat. rials. When such heaters are used, they (e) Fire brigade means an organized shall rest on suitable heat insulating group of employees that are knowl- material or at least 1-inch concrete, or edgeable, trained, and skilled in the equivalent. The insulating material safe evacuation of employees during shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or emergency situations and in assisting more in all directions. in fire fighting operations. (4) Heaters used in the vicinity of (f) Fire resistance means so resistant combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or to fire that, for specified time and similar coverings shall be located at under conditions of a standard heat in- least 10 feet from the coverings. The tensity, it will not fail structurally and coverings shall be securely fastened to will not permit the side away from the prevent ignition or upsetting of the fire to become hotter than a specified heater due to wind action on the cov- temperature. For purposes of this part, fire resistance shall be determined by ering or other material. the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of (c) Stability. Heaters, when in use, Building Construction and Materials, shall be set horizontally level, unless NFPA 251–1969. otherwise permitted by the manufac- (g) Flammable means capable of being turer’s markings. easily ignited, burning intensely, or (d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel having a rapid rate of flame spread. salamanders are prohibited in buildings (h) Flammable liquid means any liquid and on scaffolds. having a vapor pressure not exceeding (e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped 100 °F (37.8 °C) and having a flashpoint with a primary safety control to stop at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). Flammable the flow of fuel in the event of flame liquids are divided into four categories failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed as follows: shall not be considered a primary safe- (1) Category 1 shall include liquids ty control. having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C)

200

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00210 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.200

and having a boiling point at or below inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile 95 °F (35 °C). liquid as determined by the ‘‘Standard (2) Category 2 shall include liquids Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) Petroleum Products (Reid Method).’’ and having a boiling point above 95 °F (ASTM D–323–58). (35 °C). (3) Category 3 shall include liquids [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F 1979, as amended at 77 FR 17894, Mar. 26, 2012] (23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C). (4) Category 4 shall include liquids Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) Barricades and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). (i) Flash point of the liquid means the AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, temperature at which it gives off vapor 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 sufficient to form an ignitable mixture FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), with the air near the surface of the liq- 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5– uid or within the vessel used as deter- 2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1– mined by appropriate test procedure 2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR and apparatus as specified below. part 1911. (1) The flashpoint of liquids having a viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Uni- § 1926.200 Accident prevention signs versal Second(s) at 100 °F (37.8 °C) and and tags. a flashpoint below 175 °F (79.4 °C) shall (a) General. Signs and symbols re- be determined in accordance with the quired by this subpart shall be visible Standard Method of Test for Flash at all times when work is being per- Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM formed, and shall be removed or cov- D–56–69 (incorporated by reference; See ered promptly when the hazards no § 1926.6), or an equivalent method as de- longer exist. fined by § 1910.1200 appendix B. (b) (1) Danger signs (2) The flashpoints of liquids having a Danger signs. viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Sec- shall be used only where an immediate ond(s) or more at 175 °F (79.4 °C) or hazard exists, and shall follow the spec- higher shall be determined in accord- ifications illustrated in Figure 1 of ance with the Standard Method of Test ANSI Z35.1–1968 or in Figures 1 to 13 of for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens ANSI Z535.2–2011, incorporated by ref- Closed Tester, ASTM D–93–69 (incor- erence in § 1926.6. porated by reference; See § 1926.6), or an (2) Danger signs shall have red as the equivalent method as defined by predominating color for the upper § 1910.1200 appendix B. panel; black outline on the borders; (j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and and a white lower panel for additional LP Gas mean and include any material sign wording. which is composed predominantly of (c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs any of the following hydrocarbons, or shall be used only to warn against po- mixtures of them, such as propane, pro- tential hazards or to caution against pylene, butane (normal butane or iso- unsafe practices, and shall follow the butane), and butylenes. specifications illustrated in Figure 4 of (k) Portable tank means a closed con- ANSI Z35.1–1968 or in Figures 1 to 13 of tainer having a liquid capacity more ANSI Z535.2–2011, incorporated by ref- than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended erence in § 1926.6. for fixed installation. (l) Safety can means an approved (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as closed container, of not more than 5 the predominating color; black upper gallons capacity, having a flash-arrest- panel and borders: yellow lettering of ing screen, spring-closing lid and spout ‘‘caution’’ on the black panel; and the cover and so designed that it will safe- lower yellow panel for additional sign ly relieve internal pressure when sub- wording. Black lettering shall be used jected to fire exposure. for additional wording. (m) Vapor pressure means the pressure, measured in pounds per square

201

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00211 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.201 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Acci- dent prevention tags shall be used as a temporary means of warning employees of an existing hazard, such as defective tools, equipment, etc. They shall not be used in place of, or as a substitute for, accident prevention signs. (2) For accident prevention tags, employers shall follow specifications that are similar to those in Figures 1 to 4 of ANSI Z35.2–1968 or Figures 1 to 8 of ANSI Z535.5–2011, incorporated by reference in § 1926.6. (i) Additional rules. ANSI Z35.1–1968, ANSI Z535.2–2011, ANSI Z35.2–1968, and ANSI Z535.5–2011, incorporated by reference in § 1926.6, contain rules in addi- (3) The standard color of the back- tion to those specifically prescribed in ground shall be yellow; and the panel, this subpart. The employer shall com- black with yellow letters. Any letters ply with ANSI Z35.1–1968 or ANSI used against the yellow background Z535.2–2011, and ANSI Z35.2–1968 or shall be black. The colors shall be Z535.5–2011, with respect to such addi- those of opaque glossy samples as spec- tional rules. ified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1–1967 or in [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1–2006(R2011), in- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993; corporated by reference in § 1926.6. 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr. (d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when re- 9, 2004; 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013; 78 FR 66642, quired, shall be lettered in legible red Nov. 6, 2013; 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] letters, not less than 6 inches high, on a white field and the principal stroke § 1926.201 Signaling. of the letters shall be at least three- (a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers fourths inch in width. and the use of flaggers, including warn- (e) Safety instruction signs. Safety ining garments worn by flaggers, shall struction signs, when used, shall be conform to Part 6 of the MUTCD (in- white with green upper panel with corporated by reference, see § 1926.6). white letters to convey the principal (b) Crane and hoist signals. Regula- message. Any additional wording on tions for crane and hoist signaling will the sign shall be black letters on the be found in applicable American Na- white background. tional Standards Institute standards. (f) Directional signs. Directional signs, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, other than automotive traffic signs 1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, specified in paragraph (g) of this sec- 2002; 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013; 84 FR 21577, tion, shall be white with a black panel May 14, 2019] and a white directional symbol. Any additional wording on the sign shall be Subpart H—Materials Handling, black letters on the white background. Storage, Use, and Disposal (g) Traffic control signs and devices. (1) At points of hazard, construction areas shall be posted with legible traffic con- AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 trol signs and protected by traffic con- (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR trol devices. 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), (2) The design and use of all traffic or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Section control devices, including signs, sig- 1926.250 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. nals, markings, barricades, and other devices, for protection of construction § 1926.250 General requirements for workers shall conform to Part 6 of the storage. MUTCD (incorporated by reference, see (a) General. (1) All materials stored in § 1926.6). tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked,

202

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00212 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.013 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

interlocked, or otherwise secured to (i) Used lumber shall have all nails prevent sliding, falling or collapse. withdrawn before stacking. (2)(i) The weight of stored materials (ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level on floors within buildings and struc- and solidly supported sills. tures shall not exceed maximum safe (iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to load limits. be stable and self-supporting. (ii) Employers shall conspicuously (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20 post maximum safe load limits of feet in height provided that lumber to floors within buildings and structures, be handled manually shall not be in pounds per square foot, in all stor- stacked more than 16 feet high. age areas, except when the storage area (9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar is on a floor or slab on grade. Posting stock, and other cylindrical materials, is not required for storage areas in all unless racked, shall be stacked and single-family residential structures blocked so as to prevent spreading or and wood-framed multi-family residential structures. tilting. (3) Aisles and passageways shall be (c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall kept clear to provide for the free and be kept free from accumulation of ma- safe movement of material handling terials that constitute hazards from equipment or employees. Such areas tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor- shall be kept in good repair. age. Vegetation control will be exer- (4) When a difference in road or work- cised when necessary. ing levels exist, means such as ramps, (d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port- blocking, or grading shall be used to able and powered dockboards shall be ensure the safe movement of vehicles strong enough to carry the load im- between the two levels. posed on them. (b) Material storage. (1) Material (2) Portable dockboards shall be se- stored inside buildings under construc- cured in position, either by being an- tion shall not be placed within 6 feet of chored or equipped with devices which any hoistway or inside floor openings, will prevent their slipping. nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall (3) Handholds, or other effective which does not extend above the top of means, shall be provided on portable the material stored. dockboards to permit safe handling. (2) Each employee required to work (4) Positive protection shall be pro- on stored material in silos, hoppers, vided to prevent railroad cars from tanks, and similar storage areas shall being moved while dockboards or be equipped with personal fall arrest bridge plates are in position. equipment meeting the requirements of subpart M of this part. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Noncompatible materials shall be 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; segregated in storage. 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30, (4) Bagged materials shall be stacked 1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. by stepping back the layers and cross- 13, 1996; 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] keying the bags at least every 10 bags § 1926.251 Rigging equipment for ma- high. terial handling. (5) Materials shall not be stored on scaffolds or runways in excess of sup- (a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for plies needed for immediate operations. material handling shall be inspected (6) Brick stacks shall not be more prior to use on each shift and as nec- than 7 feet in height. When a loose essary during its use to ensure that it brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet, is safe. Defective rigging equipment it shall be tapered back 2 inches in shall be removed from service. every foot of height above the 4-foot (2) Employers must ensure that rig- level. ging equipment: (7) When masonry blocks are stacked (i) Has permanently affixed and leg- higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be ible identification markings as pre- tapered back one-half block per tier scribed by the manufacturer that indi- above the 6-foot level. cate the recommended safe working (8) Lumber: load;

203

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00213 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Not be loaded in excess of its rec- permanently affixed and legible identi- ommended safe working load as pre- fication markings prescribed by the scribed on the identification markings manufacturer. by the manufacturer; and (5) Whenever wear at any point of (iii) Not be used without affixed, leg- any chain link exceeds that shown in ible identification markings, required Table H–1, the assembly shall be re- by paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section. moved from service. (3) Rigging equipment, when not in (6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the use, shall be removed from the imme- inspection required by other para- diate work area so as not to present a graphs of this section, a thorough peri- hazard to employees. odic inspection of alloy steel chain (4) Special custom design grabs, slings in use shall be made on a regular hooks, clamps, or other lifting acces- basis, to be determined on the basis of sories, for such units as modular pan- (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity els, prefabricated structures and simi- of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts lar materials, shall be marked to indi- being made; and (D) experience gained cate the safe working loads and shall on the service life of slings used in be proof-tested prior to use to 125 per- similar circumstances. Such inspec- cent of their rated load. tions shall in no event be at intervals (5) Scope. This section applies to greater than once every 12 months. slings used in conjunction with other (ii) The employer shall make and material handling equipment for the maintain a record of the most recent movement of material by hoisting, in month in which each alloy steel chain employments covered by this part. The sling was thoroughly inspected, and types of slings covered are those made shall make such record available for from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal examination. mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope (c) Wire rope. (1) Employers must not (conventional three strand construc- use improved plow-steel wire rope and tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- wire-rope slings with loads in excess of ester, and polypropylene). the rated capacities (i.e., working load (6) Inspections. Each day before being limits) indicated on the sling by per- used, the sling and all fastenings and manently affixed and legible identifica- attachments shall be inspected for tion markings prescribed by the manu- damage or defects by a competent per- facturer. son designated by the employer. Addi- tional inspections shall be performed (2) Protruding ends of strands in during sling use, where service condi- splices on slings and bridles shall be tions warrant. Damaged or defective covered or blunted. slings shall be immediately removed (3) Wire rope shall not be secured by from service. knots, except on haul back lines on (b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy scrapers. steel chain slings shall have perma- (4) The following limitations shall nently affixed durable identification apply to the use of wire rope: stating size, grade, rated capacity, and (i) An eye splice made in any wire sling manufacturer. rope shall have not less than three full (2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear- tucks. However, this requirement shall shaped links, welded or mechanical not operate to preclude the use of an- coupling links, or other attachments, other form of splice or connection when used with alloy steel chains, shall which can be shown to be as efficient have a rated capacity at least equal to and which is not otherwise prohibited. that of the chain. (ii) Except for eye splices in the ends (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or of wires and for endless rope slings, makeshift fasteners, formed from each wire rope used in hoisting or low- bolts, rods, etc., or other such attach- ering, or in pulling loads, shall consist ments, shall not be used. of one continuous piece without knot (4) Employers must not use alloy or splice. steel-chain slings with loads in excess (iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, of the rated capacities (i.e., working or bull wires shall not be formed by load limits) indicated on the sling by wire rope clips or knots.

204

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00214 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.251

(iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in (15) End attachments. (i) Welding of any length of eight diameters, the end attachments, except covers to total number of visible broken wires thimbles, shall be performed prior to exceeds 10 percent of the total number the assembly of the sling. of wires, or if the rope shows other (ii) All welded end attachments shall signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or not be used unless proof tested by the defect. manufacturer or equivalent entity at (5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are twice their rated capacity prior to ini- used to form eyes, Table H–2 shall be tial use. The employer shall retain a used to determine the number and certificate of the proof test, and make spacing of clips. it available for examination. (i) When used for eye splices, the U- (16) Wire rope slings shall have per- bolt shall be applied so that the ‘‘U’’ manently affixed, legible identification section is in contact with the dead end markings stating size, rated capacity of the rope. for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the (i1) [Reserved] angle upon which it is based, and the (6) Slings shall not be shortened with number of legs if more than one. knots or bolts or other makeshift de- (d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber. (1) vices. Employers must not use natural- and (7) Sling legs shall not be kinked. synthetic-fiber rope slings with loads (8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall in excess of the rated capacities (i.e., have the loads balanced to prevent slip- working load limits) indicated on the page. sling by permanently affixed and leg- (9) Slings shall be padded or pro- ible identification markings prescribed tected from the sharp edges of their by the manufacturer. loads. (10) Hands or fingers shall not be (2) All splices in rope slings provided placed between the sling and its load by the employer shall be made in ac- while the sling is being tightened cordance with fiber rope manufacturers around the load. recommendations. (11) Shock loading is prohibited. (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall (12) A sling shall not be pulled from contain at least three full tucks, and under a load when the load is resting short splices shall contain at least six on the sling. full tucks (three on each side of the (13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable centerline of the splice). laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall (ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye have a minimum clear length of wire splices shall contain at least four full rope 10 times the component rope di- tucks, and short splices shall contain ameter between splices, sleeves or end at least eight full tucks (four on each fittings. side of the centerline of the splice). (ii) Braided slings shall have a min- (iii) Strand end tails shall not be imum clear length of wire rope 40 times trimmed short (flush with the surface the component rope diameter between of the rope) immediately adjacent to the loops or end fittings. the full tucks. This precaution applies (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid to both eye and short splices and all grommets and endless slings shall have types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes a minimum circumferential length of under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall 96 times their body diameter. project at least six rope diameters be- (14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber yond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes core wire rope slings of all grades shall 1-inch diameter and larger, the tails be permanently removed from service shall project at least 6 inches beyond if they are exposed to temperatures in the last full tuck. In applications excess of 200 °F (93.33 °C). When where the projecting tails may be ob- nonfiber core wire rope slings of any jectionable, the tails shall be tapered grade are used at temperatures above and spliced into the body of the rope 400 °F (204.44 °C) or below minus 60 °F using at least two additional tucks (15.55 °C), recommendations of the sling (which will require a tail length of ap- manufacturer regarding use at that proximately six rope diameters beyond temperature shall be followed. the last full tuck).

205

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00215 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.251 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall (vi) Clamps not designed specifically be sufficiently large to provide an infor fiber ropes shall not be used for cluded angle of not greater than 60° at splicing. the splice when the eye is placed over (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall the load or support. be of such size to provide an included (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of angle of not greater than 60 degrees at splices. the splice when the eye is placed over (3) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- the load or support. ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- (5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings cept for wet frozen slings, may be used shall not be used if end attachments in in a temperature range from minus 20 contact with the rope have sharp edges °F (¥28.88 °C) to plus 180 °F (82.2 °C) or projections. without decreasing the working load (6) Removal from service. Natural and limit. For operations outside this tem- synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im- perature range and for wet frozen mediately removed from service if any slings, the sling manufacturer’s rec- of the following conditions are present: ommendations shall be followed. (i) Abnormal wear. (4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings (ii) Powdered fiber between strands. shall not be used unless they have been (iii) Broken or cut fibers. spliced in accordance with the fol- (iv) Variations in the size or round- lowing minimum requirements and in ness of strands. accordance with any additional rec- (v) Discoloration or rotting. ommendations of the manufacturer: (vi) Distortion of hardware in the (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall sling. consist of at least three full tucks, and (7) Employers must use natural- and short splices shall consist of at least synthetic-fiber rope slings that have six full tucks, three on each side of the permanently affixed and legible identi- splice center line. fication markings that state the rated (ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es) splices shall consist of at least four full used and the angle upon which it is tucks, and short splices shall consist of based, type of fiber material, and the at least eight full tucks, four on each number of legs if more than one. side of the center line. (e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester, (iii) Strand end tails shall not be and polypropylene). (1) The employer trimmed flush with the surface of the shall have each synthetic web sling rope immediately adjacent to the full marked or coded to show: tucks. This applies to all types of fiber (i) Name or trademark of manufac- rope and both eye and short splices. turer. For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in (ii) Rated capacities for the type of diameter, the tail shall project at least hitch. six rope diameters beyond the last full (iii) Type of material. tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in (2) Rated capacity shall not be ex- diameter and larger, the tail shall ceeded. project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) be- (3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall yond the last full tuck. Where a probe of uniform thickness and width and jecting tail interferes with the use of selvage edges shall not be split from the sling, the tail shall be tapered and the webbing’s width. spliced into the body of the rope using (4) Fittings. Fittings shall be: at least two additional tucks (which (i) Of a minimum breaking strength will require a tail length of approxi- equal to that of the sling; and mately six rope diameters beyond the (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could last full tuck). in any way damage the webbing. (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a (5) Attachment of end fittings to web- minimum clear length of rope between bing and formation of eyes. Stitching eye splices equal to 10 times the rope shall be the only method used to at- diameter. tach end fittings to webbing and to (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of form eyes. The thread shall be in an splices. even pattern and contain a sufficient

206

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00216 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.252

number of stitches to develop the full TABLE H–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT breaking strength of the sling. ANY POINT OF LINK—Continued (6) Environmental conditions. When Maximum synthetic web slings are used, the fol- Chain size (inches) allowable lowing precautions shall be taken: wear (inch) (i) Nylon web slings shall not be used 3⁄8 ...... 5⁄64 where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or 1⁄2 ...... 7⁄64 liquids of acids or phenolics are 5⁄8 ...... 9⁄64 present. 3⁄4 ...... 5⁄32 (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web 7⁄8 ...... 11⁄64 1 ...... 3⁄16 slings shall not be used where fumes, 11⁄8 ...... 7⁄32 vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of 11⁄4 ...... 1⁄4 caustics are present. 13⁄8 ...... 9⁄32 1 5 (iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- 1 ⁄2 ...... ⁄16 13⁄4 ...... 11⁄32 tings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present. TABLE H–2—NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT (7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- WIRE ROPE CLIPS thetic web slings of polyester and Number of clips nylon shall not be used at tempera- Improved plow steel, rope Minimum diameter (inches) Drop Other spacing tures in excess of 180 °F (82.2 °C). Poly- forged material (inches) propylene web slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 200 °F 1⁄2 ...... 3 4 3 5 3 (93.33 °C). ⁄8 ...... 3 4 3 ⁄4 3⁄4 ...... 4 5 41⁄2 (8) Removal from service. Synthetic 7⁄8 ...... 4 5 51⁄4 web slings shall be immediately re- 1 ...... 5 6 6 moved from service if any of the fol- 11⁄8 ...... 6 6 63⁄4 11⁄4 ...... 6 7 71⁄2 lowing conditions are present: 13⁄8 ...... 7 7 81⁄4 (i) Acid or caustic burns; 11⁄2 ...... 7 8 9 (ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface; [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993; (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 23118, Apr. 18, (v) Distortion of fittings. 2012] (f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Employers must not use shackles with loads in ex- § 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. cess of the rated capacities (i.e., work- (a) Whenever materials are dropped ing load limits) indicated on the shack- more than 20 feet to any point lying le by permanently affixed and legible outside the exterior walls of the build- identification markings prescribed by ing, an enclosed chute of wood, or the manufacturer. equivalent material, shall be used. For (2) The manufacturer’s recommenda- the purpose of this paragraph, an en- tions shall be followed in determining closed chute is a slide, closed in on all the safe working loads of the various sides, through which material is moved sizes and types of specific and identifi- from a high place to a lower one. able hooks. All hooks for which no ap- (b) When debris is dropped through plicable manufacturer’s recommenda- holes in the floor without the use of tions are available shall be tested to chutes, the area onto which the mate- twice the intended safe working load rial is dropped shall be completely en- before they are initially put into use. closed with barricades not less than 42 The employer shall maintain a record inches high and not less than 6 feet of the dates and results of such tests. back from the projected edge of the opening above. Signs warning of the TABLE H–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT hazard of falling materials shall be ANY POINT OF LINK posted at each level. Removal shall not Maximum be permitted in this lower area until Chain size (inches) allowable debris handling ceases above. wear (inch) (c) All scrap lumber, waste material,

1⁄4 ...... 3⁄64 and rubbish shall be removed from the

207

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00217 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.300 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

immediate work area as the work pro- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The gresses. guarding device shall be in conformity (d) Disposal of waste material or de- with any appropriate standards there- bris by burning shall comply with local for, or, in the absence of applicable spe- fire regulations. cific standards, shall be so designed (e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and and constructed as to prevent the oper- flammable liquids shall be kept in fire ator from having any part of his body resistant covered containers until rein the danger zone during the operating moved from worksite. cycle. (iii) Special handtools for placing and Subpart I—Tools—Hand and removing material shall be such as to Power permit easy handling of material without the operator placing a hand in the AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- danger zone. Such tools shall not be in pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 lieu of other guarding required by this U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s section, but can only be used to supple- Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ment protection provided. 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or (iv) The following are some of the 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1926.307 also issued under 5 machines which usually require point U.S.C. 553. of operation guarding: (a) Guillotine cutters. § 1926.300 General requirements. (b) Shears. (a) Condition of tools. All hand and (c) Alligator shears. power tools and similar equipment, (d) Power presses. whether furnished by the employer or (e) Milling machines. the employee, shall be maintained in a (f) Power saws. safe condition. (g) Jointers. (b) Guarding. (1) When power operated (h) Portable power tools. tools are designed to accommodate (i) Forming rolls and calenders. guards, they shall be equipped with (5) Exposure of blades. When the pe- such guards when in use. riphery of the blades of a fan is less (2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, working level, the blades shall be chains, or other reciprocating, rotating guarded. The guard shall have openings or moving parts of equipment shall be 1 guarded if such parts are exposed to no larger than ⁄2 inch (1.27 cm). contact by employees or otherwise cre- (6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- ate a hazard. Guarding shall meet the chines designed for a fixed location requirements as set forth in American shall be securely anchored to prevent National Standards Institute, B15.1– walking or moving. 1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechan- (7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin- ical Power-Transmission Apparatus. ery—exposure adjustment. Safety guards (3) Types of guarding. One or more of the types described in paragraphs (b) methods of machine guarding shall be (8) and (9) of this section, where the op- provided to protect the operator and erator stands in front of the opening, other employees in the machine area shall be constructed so that the periph- from hazards such as those created by eral protecting member can be ad- point of operation, ingoing nip points, justed to the constantly decreasing di- rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. ameter of the wheel. The maximum an- Examples of guarding methods are— gular exposure above the horizontal barrier guards, two-hand tripping de- plane of the wheel spindle as specified vices, electronic safety devices, etc. in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this sec- (4) Point of operation guarding. (i) tion shall never be exceeded, and the Point of operation is the area on a ma- distance between the wheel periphery chine where work is actually performed and the adjustable tongue or the end of upon the material being processed. the peripheral member at the top shall (ii) The point of operation of ma- never exceed 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm). (See chines whose operation exposes an em- Figures I–1 through I–6.)

208

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00218 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.300

zontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I–9 and I–10.)

Figure I–1 Figure I–2 Correct Showing adjustable tongue giving required angle protection for all sizes of wheel Figure I–9 Figure I–10 used. (9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical grinding machines shall not exceed 180°. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65° above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures I–11 and I–12 and Figure I–3 Figure I–4 paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) Correct Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for the smallest size wheel used.

Figure I–11 Figure I–12 (c) Personal protective equipment. Em- ployees using hand and power tools and Figure I–5 Figure I–6 exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, Incorrect abrasive, and splashing objects, or ex- Showing movable guard with size of opening posed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, correct for full size wheel but too large vapors, or gases shall be provided with for smaller wheel. the particular personal protective equipment necessary to protect them (8) Bench and floor stands. The angu- from the hazard. All personal protec- lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- tive equipment shall meet the require- riphery and sides for safety guards used ments and be maintained according to on machines known as bench and floor subparts D and E of this part. stands should not exceed 90° or one- (d) Switches. (1) All hand-held pow- fourth of the periphery. This exposure ered platen sanders, grinders with shall begin at a point not more than 65° wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers, above the horizontal plane of the wheel planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, spindle. (See Figures I–7 and I–8 and shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) blade shanks one-fourth of an inch wide or less may be equipped with only a positive ‘‘on-off’’ control. (2) All hand-held powered drills, tap- pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, disc sanders, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber saws, and other Figure I–7 Figure I–8 similar operating powered tools shall Wherever the nature of the work requires be equipped with a momentary contact contact with the wheel below the hori- ‘‘on-off’’ control and may have a lock-

209

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00219 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER07MR96.000 ER07MR96.001 ER07MR96.002 ER07MR96.003 ER07MR96.004 ER07MR96.005 § 1926.301 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

on control provided that turnoff can be pressure at the tool shall have a safety accomplished by a single motion of the device on the muzzle to prevent the same finger or fingers that turn it on. tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the (3) All other hand-held powered tools, muzzle is in contact with the work sur- such as circular saws, chain saws, and face. percussion tools without positive ac- (4) Compressed air shall not be used cessory holding means, shall be for cleaning purposes except where re- equipped with a constant pressure duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then switch that will shut off the power only with effective chip guarding and when the pressure is released. personal protective equipment which (4) The requirements of this para- meets the requirements of subpart E of graph shall become effective on July this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does 15, 1972. not apply for concrete form, mill scale (5) Exception: This paragraph does and similar cleaning purposes. not apply to concrete vibrators, con- (5) The manufacturer’s safe operating crete breakers, powered tampers, jack pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters, hammers, rock drills, and similar hand and other fittings shall not be exceed- operated power tools. ed, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (6) The use of hoses for hoisting or 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; lowering tools shall not be permitted. 61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996] (7) All hoses exceeding 1⁄2-inch inside diameter shall have a safety device at § 1926.301 Hand tools. the source of supply or branch line to (a) Employers shall not issue or per- reduce pressure in case of hose failure. mit the use of unsafe hand tools. (8) Airless spray guns of the type (b) Wrenches, including adjustable, which atomize paints and fluids at high pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall pressures (1,000 pounds or more per not be used when jaws are sprung to square inch) shall be equipped with the point that slippage occurs. automatic or visible manual safety de- (c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, vices which will prevent pulling of the wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free trigger to prevent release of the paint of mushroomed heads. or fluid until the safety device is (d) The wooden handles of tools shall manually released. be kept free of splinters or cracks and (9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut shall be kept tight in the tool. which will prevent high pressure, high velocity release, while the nozzle tip is § 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which (a) Electric power-operated tools. (1) will prevent the tip from coming into Electric power operated tools shall ei- contact with the operator, or other ther be of the approved double-insu- equivalent protection, shall be pro- lated type or grounded in accordance vided. with subpart K of this part. (10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. (2) The use of electric cords for hoist- The blast cleaning nozzles shall be ing or lowering tools shall not be per- equipped with an operating valve which mitted. must be held open manually. A support (b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneu- shall be provided on which the nozzle matic power tools shall be secured to may be mounted when it is not in use. the hose or whip by some positive (c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel pow- means to prevent the tool from becom- ered tools shall be stopped while being ing accidentally disconnected. refueled, serviced, or maintained, and (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be fuel shall be transported, handled, and securely installed and maintained on stored in accordance with subpart F of pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to this part. prevent attachments from being acci- (2) When fuel powered tools are used dentally expelled. in enclosed spaces, the applicable re- (3) All pneumatically driven nailers, quirements for concentrations of toxic staplers, and other similar equipment gases and use of personal protective provided with automatic fastener feed, equipment, as outlined in subparts D which operate at more than 100 p.s.i. and E of this part, shall apply.

210

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00220 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.303

(d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid (11) All tools shall be used with the used in hydraulic powered tools shall correct shield, guard, or attachment be fire-resistant fluids approved under recommended by the manufacturer. Schedule 30 of the U.S. Bureau of (12) Powder-actuated tools used by Mines, Department of the Interior, and employees shall meet all other applica- shall retain its operating characteris- ble requirements of American National tics at the most extreme temperatures Standards Institute, A10.3–1970, Safety to which it will be exposed. Requirements for Explosive-Actuated (2) The manufacturer’s safe operating Fastening Tools. pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, fil- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, ters, and other fittings shall not be ex- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] ceeded. (e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only em- § 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. ployees who have been trained in the (a) Power. All grinding machines operation of the particular tool in use shall be supplied with sufficient power shall be allowed to operate a powder- to maintain the spindle speed at safe actuated tool. levels under all conditions of normal (2) The tool shall be tested each day operation. before loading to see that safety de- (b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines shall be equipped with safety guards in vices are in proper working condition. conformance with the requirements of The method of testing shall be in ac- American National Standards Insti- cordance with the manufacturer’s rec- tute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the Use, ommended procedure. Care and Protection of Abrasive (3) Any tool found not in proper Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this sec- working order, or that develops a de- tion. fect during use, shall be immediately (2) Guard design. The safety guard removed from service and not used shall cover the spindle end, nut, and until properly repaired. flange projections. The safety guard (4) Personal protective equipment shall be mounted so as to maintain shall be in accordance with subpart E proper alignment with the wheel, and of this part. the strength of the fastenings shall ex- (5) Tools shall not be loaded until ceed the strength of the guard, except: just prior to the intended firing time. (i) Safety guards on all operations Neither loaded nor empty tools are to where the work provides a suitable be pointed at any employees. Hands measure of protection to the operator, shall be kept clear of the open barrel may be so constructed that the spindle end. end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; (6) Loaded tools shall not be left un- and where the nature of the work is attended. such as to entirely cover the side of the (7) Fasteners shall not be driven into wheel, the side covers of the guard may very hard or brittle materials includ- be omitted; and (ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer ing, but not limited to, cast iron, flange may be exposed on machines de- glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, signed as portable saws. glass block, live rock, face brick, or (c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor hollow tile. stand and bench mounted abrasive (8) Driving into materials easily pen- wheels, used for external grinding, etrated shall be avoided unless such shall be provided with safety guards materials are backed by a substance (protection hoods). The maximum an- that will prevent the pin or fastener gular exposure of the grinding wheel from passing completely through and periphery and sides shall be not more creating a flying missile hazard on the than 90°, except that when work re- other side. quires contact with the wheel below (9) No fastener shall be driven into a the horizontal plane of the spindle, the spalled area caused by an unsatisfac- angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. tory fastening. In either case, the exposure shall begin (10) Tools shall not be used in an ex- not more than 65° above the horizontal plosive or flammable atmosphere. plane of the spindle. Safety guards

211

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00221 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.304 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

shall be strong enough to withstand mounting to ensure that they are free the effect of a bursting wheel. from cracks or defects. (2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders (8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on shall be provided with work rests the spindle and shall not be forced on. which are rigidly supported and readily The spindle nut shall be tightened only adjustable. Such work rests shall be enough to hold the wheel in place. kept at a distance not to exceed one- (9) All employees using abrasive eighth inch from the surface of the wheels shall be protected by eye pro- wheel. tection equipment in accordance with (3) Cup type wheels used for external the requirements of subpart E of this grinding shall be protected by either a part, except when adequate eye protec- revolving cup guard or a band type tion is afforded by eye shields which are permanently attached to the bench guard in accordance with the provi- or floor stand. sions of the American National Stand- (d) Other requirements. All abrasive ards Institute, B7.1–1970 Safety Code wheels and tools used by employees for the Use, Care, and Protection of Ab- shall meet other applicable require- rasive Wheels. All other portable abra- ments of American National Standards sive wheels used for external grinding, Institute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the shall be provided with safety guards Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive (protection hoods) meeting the require- Wheels. ments of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- (e) Work rests. On offhand grinding tion, except as follows: machines, work rests shall be used to (i) When the work location makes it support the work. They shall be of impossible, a wheel equipped with safe- rigid construction and designed to be ty flanges, as described in paragraph adjustable to compensate for wheel (c)(6) of this section, shall be used; wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted (ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in closely to the wheel with a maximum diameter which are securely mounted opening of 1⁄8 inch (0.3175 cm) to pre- on the end of a steel mandrel are used. vent the work from being jammed be- (4) Portable abrasive wheels used for tween the wheel and the rest, which internal grinding shall be provided may cause wheel breakage. The work with safety flanges (protection flanges) rest shall be securely clamped after meeting the requirements of paragraph each adjustment. The adjustment shall (c)(6) of this section, except as follows: not be made with the wheel in motion. (i) When wheels 2 inches or less in di- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, ameter which are securely mounted on 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] the end of a steel mandrel are used; (ii) If the wheel is entirely within the § 1926.304 Woodworking tools. work being ground while in use. (a) Disconnect switches. All fixed (5) When safety guards are required, power driven woodworking tools shall they shall be so mounted as to main- be provided with a disconnect switch tain proper alignment with the wheel, that can either be locked or tagged in and the guard and its fastenings shall the off position. be of sufficient strength to retain frag- (b) Speeds. The operating speed shall ments of the wheel in case of acci- be etched or otherwise permanently dental breakage. The maximum angu- marked on all circular saws over 20 lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- inches in diameter or operating at over riphery and sides shall not exceed 180°. 10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any (6) When safety flanges are required, saw so marked shall not be operated at they shall be used only with wheels de- a speed other than that marked on the signed to fit the flanges. Only safety blade. When a marked saw is reten- flanges, of a type and design and prop- sioned for a different speed, the mark- erly assembled so as to ensure that the ing shall be corrected to show the new pieces of the wheel will be retained in speed. case of accidental breakage, shall be (c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding de- used. vices shall be installed on machines (7) All abrasive wheels shall be close- whenever the nature of the work will ly inspected and ring-tested before permit. Feeder attachments shall have

212

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00222 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.305

the feed rolls or other moving parts hood will automatically adjust itself to covered or guarded so as to protect the the thickness of and remain in contact operator from hazardous points. with the material being cut but it shall (d) Guarding. All portable, power- not offer any considerable resistance to driven circular saws shall be equipped insertion of material to saw or to pas- with guards above and below the base sage of the material being sawed. The plate or shoe. The upper guard shall hood shall be made of adequate cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, strength to resist blows and strains in- except for the minimum arc required cidental to reasonable operation, ad- to permit the base to be tilted for bevel justing, and handling, and shall be so cuts. The lower guard shall cover the designed as to protect the operator saw to the depth of the teeth, except from flying splinters and broken saw for the minimum arc required to allow teeth. It shall be made of material that proper retraction and contact with the is soft enough so that it will be un- work. When the tool is withdrawn from likely to cause tooth breakage. The the work, the lower guard shall auto- hood shall be so mounted as to insure matically and instantly return to the that its operation will be positive, reli- covering position. able, and in true alignment with the (e) Personal protective equipment. All saw; and the mounting shall be ade- personal protective equipment pro- quate in strength to resist any reason- vided for use shall conform to subpart able side thrust or other force tending E of this part. to throw it out of line. (f) Other requirements. All woodworking tools and machinery shall [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; meet other applicable requirements of 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996] American National Standards Insti- tute, 01.1–1961, Safety Code for Wood- § 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, working Machinery. screw, and hydraulic. (g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood (a) General requirements. (1) The man- shall completely enclose the upper por- ufacturer’s rated capacity shall be leg- tion of the blade down to a point that ibly marked on all jacks and shall not will include the end of the saw arbor. be exceeded. The upper hood shall be constructed in (2) All jacks shall have a positive such a manner and of such material stop to prevent overtravel. that it will protect the operator from flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., (b) [Reserved] and will deflect sawdust away from the (c) Blocking. When it is necessary to operator. The sides of the lower ex- provide a firm foundation, the base of posed portion of the blade shall be the jack shall be blocked or cribbed. guarded to the full diameter of the Where there is a possibility of slippage blade by a device that will automati- of the metal cap of the jack, a wood cally adjust itself to the thickness of block shall be placed between the cap the stock and remain in contact with and the load. stock being cut to give maximum pro- (d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i) tection possible for the operation being After the load has been raised, it shall performed. be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise se- (h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1) cured at once. Each circular crosscut table saw shall (ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez- be guarded by a hood which shall meet ing temperatures shall be supplied with all the requirements of paragraph (i)(1) an adequate antifreeze liquid. of this section for hoods for circular (iii) All jacks shall be properly lubri- ripsaws. cated at regular intervals. (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular (iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly in- hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a spected at times which depend upon hood which shall completely enclose the service conditions. Inspections that portion of the saw above the table shall be not less frequent than the fol- and that portion of the saw above the lowing: material being cut. The hood and (a) For constant or intermittent use mounting shall be arranged so that the at one locality, once every 6 months,

213

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00223 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.306 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe- The drain valve on the air receiver cial work, when sent out and when re- shall be opened and the receiver com- turned, pletely drained frequently and at such (c) For a jack subjected to abnormal intervals as to prevent the accumula- load or shock, immediately before and tion of excessive amounts of liquid in immediately thereafter. the receiver. (v) Repair or replacement parts shall (3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- be examined for possible defects. ceiver shall be equipped with an indi- (vi) Jacks which are out of order cating pressure gage (so located as to shall be tagged accordingly, and shall be readily visible) and with one or not be used until repairs are made. more spring-loaded safety valves. The total relieving capacity of such safety [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; valves shall be such as to prevent pres- 58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] sure in the receiver from exceeding the maximum allowable working pressure § 1926.306 Air receivers. of the receiver by more than 10 per- (a) General requirements—(1) Applica- cent. tion. This section applies to compressed (ii) No valve of any type shall be air receivers, and other equipment used placed between the air receiver and its in providing and utilizing compressed safety valve or valves. air for performing operations such as (iii) Safety appliances, such as safety cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- valves, indicating devices and control- ping. On the other hand, however, this ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- section does not deal with the special cated, and installed so that they can- problems created by using compressed not be readily rendered inoperative by air to convey materials nor the prob- any means, including the elements. lems created when men work in com- (iv) All safety valves shall be tested pressed air as in tunnels and caissons. frequently and at regular intervals to This section is not intended to apply to determine whether they are in good op- compressed air machinery and equip- erating condition. ment used on transportation vehicles [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] such as steam railroad cars, electric railway cars, and automotive equip- § 1926.307 Mechanical power-trans- ment. mission apparatus. (2) New and existing equipment. (i) All (a) General requirements. (1) This sec- new air receivers installed after the ef- tion covers all types and shapes of fective date of these regulations shall power-transmission belts, except the be constructed in accordance with the following when operating at two hun- 1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII. less: (i) Flat belts 1 inch (2.54 cm) or (ii) All safety valves used shall be less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches constructed, installed, and maintained (5.08 cm) or less in width which are free in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii) and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII round belts 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) or less in Edition 1968. diameter; and (iv) single strand V- (b) Installation and equipment require- belts, the width of which is thirteen ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers thirty-seconds (13⁄32) inch or less. shall be so installed that all drains, (2) Vertical and inclined belts (para- handholes, and manholes therein are graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if easily accessible. Under no cir- not more than 21⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) wide cumstances shall an air receiver be and running at a speed of less than one buried underground or located in an in- thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if accessible place. free from metal lacings or fastenings (2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and may be guarded with a nip-point belt valve shall be installed at the lowest and pulley guard. point of every air receiver to provide (3) For the Textile Industry, because for the removal of accumulated oil and of the presence of excessive deposits of water. Adequate automatic traps may lint, which constitute a serious fire be installed in addition to drain valves. hazard, the sides and face sections only

214

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00224 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.307

of nip-point belt and pulley guards are event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail- required, provided the guard shall ex- ure. tend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond (2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks the rim of the pulley on the in-running and connecting rods, when exposed to and off-running sides of the belt and at contact, shall be guarded in accordance least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec- rim and face of the pulley in all other tion, or by a guardrail as described in directions. paragraph (o)(5) of this section. (4) This section covers the principal (3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. features with which power trans- Tail rods or extension piston rods shall mission safeguards shall comply. be guarded in accordance with para- (b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels. graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by Flywheels located so that any part is 7 a guardrail on sides and end, with a feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or clearance of not less than 15 (38.1 cm) platform shall be guarded in accord- nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when ance with the requirements of this sub- rod is fully extended. paragraph: (c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each (i) With an enclosure of sheet, per- continuous line of shafting shall be se- forated, or expanded metal, or woven cured in position against excessive end- wire; wise movement. (ii) With guard rails placed not less (ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par- than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be 20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When securely held in position against end- flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 wise thrust. inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard (2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All toeboard shall also be provided; exposed parts of horizontal shafting 7 (iii) When the upper rim of flywheel feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or protrudes through a working floor, it working platform, excepting runways shall be entirely enclosed or sur- used exclusively for oiling, or running rounded by a guardrail and toeboard. adjustments, shall be protected by a (iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5 stationary casing enclosing shafting feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where completely or by a trough enclosing the preceding methods cannot be ap- sides and top or sides and bottom of plied, the following may be used: A shafting as location requires. disk attached to the flywheel in such (ii) Shafting under bench machines manner as to cover the spokes of the shall be enclosed by a stationary cas- wheel on the exposed side and present a ing, or by a trough at sides and top or smooth surface and edge, at the same sides and bottom, as location requires. time providing means for periodic in- The sides of the trough shall come spection. An open space, not exceeding within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of 4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left the underside of table, or if shafting is between the outside edge of the disk located near floor within 6 inches (15.24 and the rim of the wheel if desired, to cm) of floor. In every case the sides of facilitate turning the wheel over. trough shall extend at least 2 inches Where a disk is used, the keys or other (5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protu- dangerous projections not covered by berance. disk shall be cut off or covered. This (3) Guarding vertical and inclined subdivision does not apply to flywheels shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting with solid web centers. 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (v) Adjustable guard to be used for working platform, excepting mainte- starting engine or for running adjust- nance runways, shall be enclosed with ment may be provided at the flywheel a stationary casing in accordance with of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) jack bar will be permitted. of this section. (vi) Wherever flywheels are above (4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting working areas, guards shall be in- shaft ends shall present a smooth edge stalled having sufficient strength to and end and shall not project more hold the weight of the flywheel in the than one-half the diameter of the shaft

215

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00225 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.307 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

unless guarded by nonrotating caps or (e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1) safety sleeves. Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet or covered. (2.128 m) or less from the floor level, (5) Power-transmission apparatus lo- the guard shall extend to at least 15 cated in basements. All mechanical inches (38.1 cm) above the belt or to a power transmission apparatus located standard height except that where both in basements, towers, and rooms used runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches exclusively for power transmission (106.68 cm) or less from the floor, the equipment shall be guarded in accord- belt shall be fully enclosed. ance with this section, except that the (ii) In powerplants or power-develop- requirements for safeguarding belts, ment rooms, a guardrail may be used pulleys, and shafting need not be complied with when the following require- in lieu of the guard required by para- ments are met: graph (e)(1)(i) of this section. (i) The basement, tower, or room oc- (2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over- cupied by transmission equipment is head horizontal belts, with lower parts locked against unauthorized entrance. 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or (ii) The vertical clearance in passage- platform, shall be guarded on sides and ways between the floor and power bottom in accordance with paragraph transmission beams, ceiling, or any (o)(3) of this section. other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in. (ii) Horizontal overhead belts more (1.672 m). than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or plat- (iii) The intensity of illumination form shall be guarded for their entire conforms to the requirements of ANSI length under the following conditions: A11.1–1965 (R–1970). (a) If located over passageways or (iv) [Reserved] work places and traveling 1,800 feet or (v) The route followed by the oiler is more per minute. protected in such manner as to prevent (b) If center to center distance be- accident. tween pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m) or (d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any more. parts of which are 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or working plat- (c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or form, shall be guarded in accordance more in width. with the standards specified in para- (iii) Where the upper and lower runs graphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pul- of horizontal belts are so located that leys serving as balance wheels (e.g., passage of persons between them would punch presses) on which the point of be possible, the passage shall be either: contact between belt and pulley is (a) Completely barred by a guardrail more than 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) from the or other barrier in accordance with floor or platform may be guarded with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; a disk covering the spokes. or (2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the (b) Where passage is regarded as nec- distance to the nearest fixed pulley, essary, there shall be a platform over clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of the lower run guarded on either side by the belt used, a guide shall be provided a railing completely filled in with wire to prevent the belt from leaving the mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar- pulley on the side where insufficient rier. The upper run shall be so guarded clearance exists. as to prevent contact therewith either (ii) [Reserved] by the worker or by objects carried by (3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with him. In powerplants only the lower run cracks, or pieces broken out of rims, shall not be used. of the belt need be guarded. (4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to (iv) Overhead chain and link belt operate at rim speed in excess of manu- drives are governed by the same rules facturers normal recommendations as overhead horizontal belts and shall shall be specially designed and care- be guarded in the same manner as fully balanced for the speed at which belts. they are to operate.

216

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00226 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.307

(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1) Vertical and inclined belts shall be en- Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord- closed by a guard conforming to stand- ance with one of the following meth- ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this ods: section. (i) By a complete enclosure; or (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall (ii) By a standard guard as described be arranged in such a manner that a in paragraph (o) of this section, at minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m) least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6 is maintained between belt and floor at inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point any point outside of guard. of the gears; or (4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run- (iii) By a band guard covering the ning over a lower pulley more than 7 face of gear and having flanges ex- feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform tended inward beyond the root of the shall be guarded at the bottom in the teeth on the exposed side or sides. same manner as horizontal overhead Where any portion of the train of gears belts, if conditions are as stated in guarded by a band guard is less than 6 paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk section. guard or a complete enclosure to the (5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be re- and pulley shall be equipped with a belt quired. shifter so constructed as to adequately (2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph guard the nip point of the belt and pul- (f)(1) of this section does not apply to ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does hand-operated gears used only to ad- not adequately guard the nip point of just machine parts and which do not the belt and pulley, the nip point shall continue to move after hand power is be further protected by means of a removed. However, the guarding of vertical guard placed in front of the these gears is highly recommended. pulley and extending at least to the top (3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket of the largest step of the cone. wheels and chains shall be enclosed un- (ii) If the belt is of the endless type less they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m) or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt above the floor or platform. Where the shifter is not desired, the belt will be drive extends over other machine or considered guarded if the nip point of working areas, protection against fall- the belt and pulley is protected by a ing shall be provided. This subpara- nip point guard located in front of the graph does not apply to manually oper- cone extending at least to the top of ated sprockets. the largest step of the cone, and formed (4) Openings for oiling. When frequent to show the contour of the cone in oiling must be done, openings with order to give the nip point of the belt hinged or sliding self-closing covers and pulley the maximum protection. shall be provided. All points not read- (iii) If the cone is located less than 3 ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working if lubricant is to be added while ma- platform, the cone pulley and belt shall chinery is in motion. be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912 (g) Guarding friction drives. The driv- m) regardless of whether the belt is ing point of all friction drives when ex- endless or laced with rawhide. posed to contact shall be guarded, all (6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended arm or spoke friction drives and all counterbalanced tighteners and all web friction drives with holes in the parts thereof shall be of substantial web shall be entirely enclosed, and all construction and securely fastened; the projecting belts on friction drives bearings shall be securely capped. where exposed to contact shall be Means must be provided to prevent guarded. tightener from falling, in case the belt (h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec- breaks. tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, (ii) Where suspended counterweights and other projections in revolving are used and not guarded by location, parts shall be removed or made flush or they shall be so encased as to prevent guarded by metal cover. This subpara- accident. graph does not apply to keys or

217

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00227 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.307 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

setscrews within gear or sprocket cas- operator. Where belt shifters are not ings or other enclosures, nor to keys, directly located over a machine or setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft. less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diame- 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level. ter where they are within the plane of (2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The the rim of the pulley. use of belt poles as substitutes for me- (2) It is recommended, however, that chanical shifters is not recommended. no projecting setscrews or oilcups be (3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys used in any revolving pulley or part of or idlers are not practicable, belt machinery. perches in form of brackets, rollers, (i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars. etc., shall be used to keep idle belts All revolving collars, including split away from the shafts. collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws (4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne- or bolts used in collars shall not cessity must be shifted by hand and project beyond the largest periphery of belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor the collar. or working platform which are not (2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be guarded in accordance with this sec- so constructed as to present no hazard tion shall not be fastened with metal in from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv- any case, nor with any other fastening ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews which by construction or wear will will, however, be permitted where they constitute an accident hazard. are covered with safety sleeves or (m) Standard guards—general require- where they are used parallel with the ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard condi- shafting and are countersunk or else do tions shall be secured by the use of the not extend beyond the flange of the following materials. Expanded metal, coupling. perforated or solid sheet metal, wire (j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron drip cups and pans shall be securely pipe securely fastened to floor or to fastened. frame of machine. (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou- (ii) All metal should be free from plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards. burrs and sharp edges. Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch (2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex- pulleys having projecting parts, where panded metal, sheet or perforated such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128 metal, and wire mesh shall be securely m) or less above the floor or working fastened to frame. platform, shall be enclosed by a sta- (n) [Reserved] tionary guard constructed in accord- (o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum ance with this section. A ‘‘U’’ type requirements. The materials and dimen- guard is permissible. sions specified in this paragraph shall (2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a apply to all guards, except horizontal guardrail, preferably with toeboard, overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain may be used instead of the guard re- guards more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec- floor, or platform. tion, provided such a room is occupied (i) [Reserved] only by engine room attendants. (a) All guards shall be rigidly braced (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, every 3 feet (0.912 m) or fractional part poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt of their height to some fixed part of shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on machinery or building structure. all new installations made on or after Where guard is exposed to contact with August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with moving equipment additional strength a permanent belt shifter provided with may be necessary. mechanical means to prevent belt from (2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may creeping from loose to tight pulley. It be used in the woodworking and chem- is recommended that old installations ical industries, in industries where the be changed to conform to this rule. presence of fumes or where manufac- (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles turing conditions would cause the shall be rounded and be located as far rapid deterioration of metal guards; as possible from danger of accidental also in construction work and in loca- contact, but within easy reach of the tions outdoors where extreme cold or

218

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00228 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.307

extreme heat make metal guards and free from protruding nails, bolts, and railings undesirable. In all other indus- splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall tries, wood guards shall not be used. be 11⁄4 inches (3.175 cm) inside diameter, (3) Guards for horizontal overhead or larger. If made of metal shapes or belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead bars, their section shall be equal in belts shall run the entire length of the strength to that of 11⁄2 (3.81 cm) by 11⁄2 belt and follow the line of the pulley to (3.81 cm) by 3⁄16 inch angle iron. If made the ceiling or be carried to the nearest of wood, the posts shall be two by four wall, thus enclosing the belt effec- (2 × 4) inches or larger. The upper rail tively. Where belts are so located as to shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches, or make it impracticable to carry the two one by four (1 × 4) strips, one at the guard to wall or ceiling, construction top and one at the side of posts. The of guard shall be such as to enclose midrail may be one by four (1 × 4) completely the top and bottom runs of belt and the face of pulleys. inches or more. Where panels are fitted (ii) [Reserved] with expanded metal or wire mesh the (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be middle rails may be omitted. Where provided for the ceiling rafters or over- guard is exposed to contact with mov- head floor beams, where such is nec- ing equipment, additional strength essary, to sustain safely the weight and may be necessary. stress likely to be imposed by the (iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16 guard. The interior surface of all cm) or more in height, of wood, metal, guards, by which is meant the surface or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch of the guard with which a belt will (2.54 cm) mesh. come in contact, shall be smooth and (p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All free from all projections of any char- power-transmission equipment shall be acter, except where construction de- inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 mands it; protruding shallow round- days and be kept in good working con- head rivets may be used. Overhead belt dition at all times. guards shall be at least one-quarter (2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept wider than belt which they protect, ex- in alignment, free from rust and excess cept that this clearance need not in oil or grease. any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on (ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, each side. Overhead rope drive and flammable vapors or flammable liquids block and roller-chain-drive guards exist, the hazard of static sparks from shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24 shafting shall be carefully considered. cm) wider than the drive on each side. In overhead silent chain-drive guards (3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in where the chain is held from lateral alignment and properly adjusted. displacement on the sprockets, the side (4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in- clearances required on drives of 20 inch spected to make certain that all sup- (50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not porting bolts and screws are tight and less than 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm) from the that supports of hanger boxes are ad- nearest moving chain part, and on justed properly. drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers (5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) from proper alignment to prevent belts from the nearest moving chain part. running off. (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope (6) Care of belts. and chain drives. Overhead-rope and (i) [Reserved] chain-drive guard construction shall (ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, conform to the rules for overhead-belt lacings, and fasteners and such equip- guard. ment kept in good repair. (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard- (7) Lubrication. The regular oilers rail shall be 42 inches (106.68 cm) in shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma- height, with midrail between top rail chinery shall be oiled when not in mo- and floor. tion, wherever possible. (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8 feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be per- [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993, as amended at 69 manent and substantial, smooth, and FR 31882, June 8, 2004]

219

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00229 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.350 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Subpart J—Welding and Cutting a fire-resistance rating of at least one- half hour. (11) Inside of buildings, cylinders AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction shall be stored in a well-protected, Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- well-ventilated, dry location, at least pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl- Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR inders should be stored in definitely as- 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. signed places away from elevators, stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage § 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. places shall be located where cylinders (a) Transporting, moving, and storing will not be knocked over or damaged compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro- by passing or falling objects, or subject tection caps shall be in place and se- to tampering by unauthorized persons. cured. Cylinders shall not be kept in (2) When cylinders are hoisted, they unventilated enclosures such as lockers shall be secured on a cradle, and cupboards. slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be (12) The in-plant handling, storage, hoisted or transported by means of and utilization of all compressed gases magnets or choker slings. in cylinders, portable tanks, rail (3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt- tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks ing and rolling them on their bottom shall be in accordance with Compressed edges. They shall not be intentionally Gas Association Pamphlet P–1–1965. dropped, struck, or permitted to strike (b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders each other violently. shall be kept far enough away from the (4) When cylinders are transported by powered vehicles, they shall be secured actual welding or cutting operation so in a vertical position. that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not (5) Valve protection caps shall not be reach them. When this is impractical, used for lifting cylinders from one fire resistant shields shall be provided. vertical position to another. Bars shall (2) Cylinders shall be placed where not be used under valves or valve pro- they cannot become part of an elec- tection caps to pry cylinders loose trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water struck against a cylinder to strike an shall be used to thaw cylinders loose. arc. (6) Unless cylinders are firmly se- (3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed cured on a special carrier intended for with valve end up whenever they are in this purpose, regulators shall be reuse. They shall not be placed in a loca- moved and valve protection caps put in tion where they would be subject to place before cylinders are moved. open flame, hot metal, or other sources (7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, of artificial heat. or other steadying device shall be used (4) Cylinders containing oxygen or to keep cylinders from being knocked acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be over while in use. taken into confined spaces. (8) When work is finished, when cyl- (c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl- inders are empty, or when cylinders are inders, whether full or empty, shall not moved at any time, the cylinder valve be used as rollers or supports. shall be closed. (2) No person other than the gas sup- (9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be plier shall attempt to mix gases in a secured in an upright position at all cylinder. No one except the owner of times except, if necessary, for short pe- the cylinder or person authorized by riods of time while cylinders are actu- him, shall refill a cylinder. No one ally being hoisted or carried. shall use a cylinder’s contents for pur- (10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall poses other than those intended by the be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or supplier. All cylinders used shall meet combustible materials (especially oil the Department of Transportation re- or grease), a minimum distance of 20 quirements published in 49 CFR part feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar- 178, subpart C, Specification for Cyl- rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having inders.

220

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00230 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.350

(3) No damaged or defective cylinder the work area. If a regulator attached shall be used. to a cylinder valve will effectively stop (d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall a leak through the valve seat, the cyl- thoroughly instruct employees in the inder need not be removed from the safe use of fuel gas, as follows: work area. (1) Before a regulator to a cylinder (6) If a leak should develop at a fuse valve is connected, the valve shall be plug or other safety device, the cyl- opened slightly and closed imme- inder shall be removed from the work diately. (This action is generally area. termed ‘‘cracking’’ and is intended to (e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1) clear the valve of dust or dirt that Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall might otherwise enter the regulator.) bear the name of the substance they The person cracking the valve shall contain in letters at least 1-inch high stand to one side of the outlet, not in which shall be either painted on the front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl- manifold or on a sign permanently at- inder shall not be cracked where the tached to it. gas would reach welding work, sparks, (2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds flame, or other possible sources of igni- shall be placed in safe, well ventilated, tion. and accessible locations. They shall (2) The cylinder valve shall always be not be located within enclosed spaces. opened slowly to prevent damage to (3) Manifold hose connections, in- the regulator. For quick closing, valves cluding both ends of the supply hose on fuel gas cylinders shall not be that lead to the manifold, shall be such opened more than 11⁄2 turns. When a that the hose cannot be interchanged special wrench is required, it shall be between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds left in position on the stem of the valve and supply header connections. Adapt- while the cylinder is in use so that the ers shall not be used to permit the fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in interchange of hose. Hose connections case of an emergency. In the case of shall be kept free of grease and oil. manifolded or coupled cylinders, at (4) When not in use, manifold and least one such wrench shall always be header hose connections shall be available for immediate use. Nothing capped. shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl- (5) Nothing shall be placed on top of inder, when in use, which may damage a manifold, when in use, which will the safety device or interfere with the damage the manifold or interfere with quick closing of the valve. the quick closing of the valves. (3) Fuel gas shall not be used from (f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen cylinders through torches or other de- hose shall be easily distinguishable vices which are equipped with shutoff from each other. The contrast may be valves without reducing the pressure made by different colors or by surface through a suitable regulator attached characteristics readily distinguishable to the cylinder valve or manifold. by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel (4) Before a regulator is removed gas hoses shall not be interchangeable. from a cylinder valve, the cylinder A single hose having more than one gas valve shall always be closed and the passage shall not be used. gas released from the regulator. (2) When parallel sections of oxygen (5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas and fuel gas hose are taped together, cylinder is opened, there is found to be not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches a leak around the valve stem, the valve shall be covered by tape. shall be closed and the gland nut tight- (3) All hose in use, carrying acety- ened. If this action does not stop the lene, oxygen, natural or manufactured leak, the use of the cylinder shall be fuel gas, or any gas or substance which discontinued, and it shall be properly may ignite or enter into combustion, tagged and removed from the work or be in any way harmful to employees, area. In the event that fuel gas should shall be inspected at the beginning of leak from the cylinder valve, rather each working shift. Defective hose than from the valve stem, and the gas shall be removed from service. cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall (4) Hose which has been subject to be properly tagged and removed from flashback, or which shows evidence of

221

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00231 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.351 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

severe wear or damage, shall be tested (2) Any current-carrying parts pass- to twice the normal pressure to which ing through the portion of the holder it is subject, but in no case less than which the arc welder or cutter grips in 300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in his hand, and the outer surfaces of the doubtful condition, shall not be used. jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu- (5) Hose couplings shall be of the type lated against the maximum voltage en- that cannot be unlocked or discon- countered to ground. nected by means of a straight pull (b) Welding cables and connectors. (1) without rotary motion. All arc welding and cutting cables shall (6) Boxes used for the storage of gas be of the completely insulated, flexible hose shall be ventilated. type, capable of handling the max- (7) Hoses, cables, and other equip- imum current requirements of the ment shall be kept clear of passage- work in progress, taking into account ways, ladders and stairs. the duty cycle under which the arc (g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip welder or cutter is working. openings shall be cleaned with suitable (2) Only cable free from repair or cleaning wires, drills, or other devices splices for a minimum distance of 10 designed for such purpose. feet from the cable end to which the (2) Torches in use shall be inspected electrode holder is connected shall be at the beginning of each working shift used, except that cables with standard for leaking shutoff valves, hose cou- insulated connectors or with splices plings, and tip connections. Defective whose insulating quality is equal to torches shall not be used. that of the cable are permitted. (3) Torches shall be lighted by fric- (3) When it becomes necessary to con- tion lighters or other approved devices, nect or splice lengths of cable one to and not by matches or from hot work. another, substantial insulated connec- (h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and tors of a capacity at least equivalent to fuel gas pressure regulators, including that of the cable shall be used. If con- their related gauges, shall be in proper nections are effected by means of cable working order while in use. lugs, they shall be securely fastened to- (i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cyl- gether to give good electrical contact, inders and fittings shall be kept away and the exposed metal parts of the lugs from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder shall be completely insulated. caps and valves, couplings, regulators, (4) Cables in need of repair shall not hose, and apparatus shall be kept free be used. When a cable, other than the from oil or greasy substances and shall cable lead referred to in paragraph not be handled with oily hands or (b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to gloves. Oxygen shall not be directed at the extent of exposing bare conductors, oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within the portion thus exposed shall be pro- a fuel oil or other storage tank or ves- tected by means of rubber and friction sel. tape or other equivalent insulation. (j) Additional rules. For additional de- (c) Ground returns and machine tails not covered in this subpart, appli- grounding. (1) A ground return cable cable technical portions of American shall have a safe current carrying ca- National Standards Institute, Z49.1– pacity equal to or exceeding the speci- 1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting, fied maximum output capacity of the shall apply. arc welding or cutting unit which it [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, services. When a single ground return 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; cable services more than one unit, its 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] safe current-carrying capacity shall equal or exceed the total specified § 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. maximum output capacities of all the (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only units which it services. manual electrode holders which are (2) Pipelines containing gases or specifically designed for arc welding flammable liquids, or conduits con- and cutting, and are of a capacity capa- taining electrical circuits, shall not be ble of safely handling the maximum used as a ground return. For welding rated current required by the elec- on natural gas pipelines, the technical trodes, shall be used. portions of regulations issued by the

222

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00232 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.352

Department of Transportation, Office (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional re- of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, quirements. Minimum Federal Safety Standards for (e) Shielding. Whenever practicable, Gas Pipelines, shall apply. all arc welding and cutting operations (3) When a structure or pipeline is shall be shielded by noncombustible or employed as a ground return circuit, it flameproof screens which will protect shall be determined that the required employees and other persons working electrical contact exists at all joints. in the vicinity from the direct rays of The generation of an arc, sparks, or the arc. heat at any point shall cause rejection [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, of the structures as a ground circuit. 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] (4) When a structure or pipeline is continuously employed as a ground re- § 1926.352 Fire prevention. turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded, (a) When practical, objects to be and periodic inspections shall be con- welded, cut, or heated shall be moved ducted to ensure that no condition of to a designated safe location or, if the electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir- objects to be welded, cut, or heated tue of such use. cannot be readily moved, all movable (5) The frames of all arc welding and fire hazards in the vicinity shall be cutting machines shall be grounded ei- taken to a safe place, or otherwise pro- ther through a third wire in the cable tected. containing the circuit conductor or (b) If the object to be welded, cut, or through a separate wire which is heated cannot be moved and if all the grounded at the source of the current. fire hazards cannot be removed, posi- Grounding circuits, other than by tive means shall be taken to confine means of the structure, shall be the heat, sparks, and slag, and to pro- checked to ensure that the circuit be- tect the immovable fire hazards from tween the ground and the grounded them. power conductor has resistance low (c) No welding, cutting, or heating enough to permit sufficient current to shall be done where the application of flow to cause the fuse or circuit break- flammable paints, or the presence of er to interrupt the current. other flammable compounds, or heavy (6) All ground connections shall be dust concentrations creates a hazard. inspected to ensure that they are me- (d) Suitable fire extinguishing equip- chanically strong and electrically ade- ment shall be immediately available in quate for the required current. the work area and shall be maintained (d) Operating instructions. Employers in a state of readiness for instant use. shall instruct employees in the safe (e) When the welding, cutting, or means of arc welding and cutting as heating operation is such that normal follows: fire prevention precautions are not suf- (1) When electrode holders are to be ficient, additional personnel shall be left unattended, the electrodes shall be assigned to guard against fire while the removed and the holders shall be so actual welding, cutting, or heating op- placed or protected that they cannot eration is being performed, and for a make electrical contact with employ- sufficient period of time after comple- ees or conducting objects. tion of the work to ensure that no pos- (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be sibility of fire exists. Such personnel dipped in water; to do so may expose shall be instructed as to the specific the arc welder or cutter to electric anticipated fire hazards and how the shock. firefighting equipment provided is to (3) When the arc welder or cutter has be used. occasion to leave his work or to stop (f) When welding, cutting, or heating work for any appreciable length of is performed on walls, floors, and ceil- time, or when the arc welding or cut- ings, since direct penetration of sparks ting machine is to be moved, the power or heat transfer may introduce a fire supply switch to the equipment shall hazard to an adjacent area, the same be opened. precautions shall be taken on the oppo- (4) Any faulty or defective equipment site side as are taken on the side on shall be reported to the supervisor. which the welding is being performed.

223

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00233 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.353 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(g) For the elimination of possible air changes necessary to maintain fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas welding fumes and smoke within safe escaping through leaking or improp- limits, as defined in subpart D of this erly closed torch valves, the gas supply part. to the torch shall be positively shut off (3) Local exhaust ventilation shall at some point outside the enclosed consist of freely movable hoods in- space whenever the torch is not to be tended to be placed by the welder or used or whenever the torch is left unat- burner as close as practicable to the tended for a substantial period of time, work. This system shall be of sufficient such as during the lunch period. Over- capacity and so arranged as to remove night and at the change of shifts, the fumes and smoke at the source and torch and hose shall be removed from keep the concentration of them in the the confined space. Open end fuel gas breathing zone within safe limits as de- and oxygen hoses shall be immediately fined in subpart D of this part. removed from enclosed spaces when (4) Contaminated air exhausted from they are disconnected from the torch a working space shall be discharged or other gas-consuming device. into the open air or otherwise clear of (h) Except when the contents are the source of intake air. being removed or transferred, drums, (5) All air replacing that withdrawn pails, and other containers which con- shall be clean and respirable. tain or have contained flammable liq- (6) Oxygen shall not be used for ven- uids shall be kept closed. Empty con- tilation purposes, comfort cooling, tainers shall be removed to a safe area blowing dust from clothing, or for apart from hot work operations or open cleaning the work area. flames. (b) Welding, cutting, and heating in (i) Drums containers, or hollow confined spaces. (1) Except as provided structures which have contained toxic in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and or flammable substances shall, before paragraph (c)(2) of this section, either welding, cutting, or heating is under- general mechanical or local exhaust taken on them, either be filled with ventilation meeting the requirements water or thoroughly cleaned of such of paragraph (a) of this section shall be substances and ventilated and tested. provided whenever welding, cutting, or For welding, cutting and heating on heating is performed in a confined steel pipelines containing natural gas, space. the pertinent portions of regulations (2) When sufficient ventilation can- issued by the Department of Transpor- not be obtained without blocking the tation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49 means of access, employees in the con- CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety fined space shall be protected by air Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall line respirators in accordance with the apply. requirements of subpart E of this part, (j) Before heat is applied to a drum, and an employee on the outside of such container, or hollow structure, a vent a confined space shall be assigned to or opening shall be provided for the re- maintain communication with those lease of any built-up pressure during working within it and to aid them in the application of heat. an emergency. (3) Lifelines. Where a welder must § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection enter a confined space through a man- in welding, cutting, and heating. hole or other small opening, means (a) Mechanical ventilation. For pur- shall be provided for quickly removing poses of this section, mechanical ven- him in case of emergency. When safety tilation shall meet the following re- belts and lifelines are used for this pur- quirements: pose they shall be so attached to the (1) Mechanical ventilation shall con- welder’s body that his body cannot be sist of either general mechanical ven- jammed in a small exit opening. An at- tilation systems or local exhaust sys- tendant with a pre-planned rescue pro- tems. cedure shall be stationed outside to ob- (2) General mechanical ventilation serve the welder at all times and be ca- shall be of sufficient capacity and so pable of putting rescue operations into arranged as to produce the number of effect.

224

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00234 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.353

(c) Welding, cutting, or heating of met- traviolet rays, and the liberation of als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut- toxic fumes and gases, employees shall ting, or heating in any enclosed spaces not be permitted to engage in, or be ex- involving the metals specified in this posed to the process until the following subparagraph shall be performed with special precautions have been taken: either general mechanical or local ex- (i) The use of chlorinated solvents haust ventilation meeting the require- shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless ments of paragraph (a) of this section: shielded, from the exposed arc, and sur- (i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals faces prepared with chlorinated sol- or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma- vents shall be thoroughly dry before terials; welding is permitted on such surfaces. (ii) Lead base metals; (ii) Employees in the area not pro- (iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate- tected from the arc by screening shall rials; be protected by filter lenses meeting (iv) Chromium-bearing metals or the requirements of subpart E of this metals coated with chromium-bearing part. When two or more welders are ex- materials. posed to each other’s arc, filter lens (2) Welding, cutting, or heating in goggles of a suitable type, meeting the any enclosed spaces involving the met- requirements of subpart E of this part, als specified in this subparagraph shall shall be worn under welding helmets. be performed with local exhaust ven- Hand shields to protect the welder tilation in accordance with the require- against flashes and radiant energy ments of paragraph (a) of this section, shall be used when either the helmet is or employees shall be protected by air lifted or the shield is removed. line respirators in accordance with the (iii) Welders and other employees requirements of subpart E of this part: who are exposed to radiation shall be (i) Metals containing lead, other than suitably protected so that the skin is as an impurity, or metals coated with covered completely to prevent burns lead-bearing materials; and other damage by ultraviolet rays. (ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium- Welding helmets and hand shields shall coated base metals; be free of leaks and openings, and free (iii) Metals coated with mercury- of highly reflective surfaces. bearing metals; (iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld- (iv) Beryllium-containing base or ing is being performed on stainless filler metals. Because of its high tox- steel, the requirements of paragraph icity, work involving beryllium shall (c)(2) of this section shall be met to be done with both local exhaust ven- protect against dangerous concentra- tilation and air line respirators. tions of nitrogen dioxide. (3) Employees performing such oper- (e) General welding, cutting, and heat- ations in the open air shall be pro- ing. (1) Welding, cutting, and heating, tected by filter-type respirators in ac- not involving conditions or materials cordance with the requirements of sub- described in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of part E of this part, except that employ- this section, may normally be done ees performing such operations on be- without mechanical ventilation or res- ryllium-containing base or filler met- piratory protective equipment, but als shall be protected by air line res- where, because of unusual physical or pirators in accordance with the re- atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac- quirements of subpart E of this part. cumulation of contaminants exists, (4) Other employees exposed to the suitable mechanical ventilation or res- same atmosphere as the welders or piratory protective equipment shall be burners shall be protected in the same provided. manner as the welder or burner. (2) Employees performing any type of (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1) welding, cutting, or heating shall be Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding protected by suitable eye protective process involves the production of equipment in accordance with the re- ultra-violet radiation of intensities of 5 quirements of subpart E of this part. to 30 times that produced during [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, shielded metal-arc welding, the decom- 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; position of chlorinated solvents by ul- 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]

225

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00235 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.354 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

§ 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heat- (a) Installation safety requirements. In- ing in way of preservative coatings. stallation safety requirements are con- (a) Before welding, cutting, or heat- tained in §§ 1926.402 through 1926.408. In- ing is commenced on any surface cov- cluded in this category are electric ered by a preservative coating whose equipment and installations used to flammability is not known, a test shall provide electric power and light on be made by a competent person to de- jobsites. termine its flammability. Preservative (b) Safety-related work practices. Safe- coatings shall be considered to be high- ty-related work practices are contained ly flammable when scrapings burn with in §§ 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to extreme rapidity. covering the hazards arising from the (b) Precautions shall be taken to pre- use of electricity at jobsites, these reg- vent ignition of highly flammable ulations also cover the hazards arising hardened preservative coatings. When from the accidental contact, direct or coatings are determined to be highly indirect, by employees with all ener- flammable, they shall be stripped from gized lines, above or below ground, the area to be heated to prevent igni- passing through or near the jobsite. tion. (c) Safety-related maintenance and en- (c) Protection against toxic preserva- vironmental considerations. Safety-re- tive coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all lated maintenance and environmental surfaces covered with toxic preserva- considerations are contained in tives shall be stripped of all toxic coat- §§ 1926.431 and 1926.432. ings for a distance of at least 4 inches (d) Safety requirements for special from the area of heat application, or equipment. Safety requirements for spe- the employees shall be protected by air cial equipment are contained in line respirators, meeting the require- § 1926.441. ments of subpart E of this part. (2) In the open air, employees shall be (e) Definitions. Definitions applicable protected by a respirator, in accord- to this subpart are contained in ance with requirements of subpart E of § 1926.449. this part. (d) The preservative coatings shall be § 1926.401 [Reserved] removed a sufficient distance from the INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS area to be heated to ensure that the temperature of the unstripped metal § 1926.402 Applicability. will not be appreciably raised. Artifi- cial cooling of the metal surrounding (a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through the heating area may be used to limit 1926.408 contain installation safety re- the size of the area required to be quirements for electrical equipment cleaned. and installations used to provide electric power and light at the jobsite. Subpart K—Electrical These sections apply to installations, both temporary and permanent, used on the jobsite; but these sections do AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; 40 U.S.C. not apply to existing permanent instal- 333; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033) or 1–2012 (77 FR lations that were in place before the 3912), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911. construction activity commenced. SOURCE: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless NOTE: If the electrical installation is made otherwise noted. in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70–1984, exclusive of For- GENERAL mal Interpretations and Tentative Interim Amendments, it will be deemed to be in com- § 1926.400 Introduction. pliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, ex- This subpart addresses electrical cept for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) (E), (F), (G), and (J). safety requirements that are necessary for the practical safeguarding of em- (b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402 ployees involved in construction work through 1926.408 do not cover installa- and is divided into four major divisions tions used for the generation, trans- and applicable definitions as follows: mission, and distribution of electric

226

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00236 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.403

energy, including related communica- plaster, or similar materials shall not tion, metering, control, and trans- be used. formation installations. (However, (2) Cooling. Electrical equipment these regulations do cover portable and which depends upon the natural cir- vehicle-mounted generators used to culation of air and convection prin- provide power for equipment used at ciples for cooling of exposed surfaces the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part shall be installed so that room air flow for the construction of power distribu- over such surfaces is not prevented by tion and transmission lines. walls or by adjacent installed equipment. For equipment designed for floor § 1926.403 General requirements. mounting, clearance between top sur- (a) Approval. All electrical conduc- faces and adjacent surfaces shall be tors and equipment shall be approved. provided to dissipate rising warm air. (b) Examination, installation, and use Electrical equipment provided with of equipment—(1) Examination. The em- ventilating openings shall be installed ployer shall ensure that electrical so that walls or other obstructions do equipment is free from recognized haz- not prevent the free circulation of air ards that are likely to cause death or through the equipment. serious physical harm to employees. (e) Splices. Conductors shall be Safety of equipment shall be deter- spliced or joined with splicing devices mined on the basis of the following designed for the use or by brazing, considerations: welding, or soldering with a fusible (i) Suitability for installation and metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall use in conformity with the provisions first be so spliced or joined as to be me- of this subpart. Suitability of equip- chanically and electrically secure ment for an identified purpose may be without solder and then soldered. All evidenced by listing, labeling, or cer- splices and joints and the free ends of tification for that identified purpose. conductors shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of the con- (ii) Mechanical strength and dura- ductors or with an insulating device bility, including, for parts designed to designed for the purpose. enclose and protect other equipment, (f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric the adequacy of the protection thus equipment which in ordinary operation provided. produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten (iii) Electrical insulation. metal shall be enclosed or separated (iv) Heating effects under conditions and isolated from all combustible ma- of use. terial. (v) Arcing effects. (g) Marking. Electrical equipment (vi) Classification by type, size, volt- shall not be used unless the manufac- age, current capacity, specific use. turer’s name, trademark, or other de- (vii) Other factors which contribute scriptive marking by which the organi- to the practical safeguarding of em- zation responsible for the product may ployees using or likely to come in con- be identified is placed on the equip- tact with the equipment. ment and unless other markings are (2) Installation and use. Listed, la- provided giving voltage, current, watt- beled, or certified equipment shall be age, or other ratings as necessary. The installed and used in accordance with marking shall be of sufficient dura- instructions included in the listing, la- bility to withstand the environment in- beling, or certification. volved. (c) Interrupting rating. Equipment in- (h) Identification of disconnecting tended to break current shall have an means and circuits. Each disconnecting interrupting rating at system voltage means required by this subpart for mo- sufficient for the current that must be tors and appliances shall be legibly interrupted. marked to indicate its purpose, unless (d) Mounting and cooling of equip- located and arranged so the purpose is ment—(1) Mounting. Electric equipment evident. Each service, feeder, and shall be firmly secured to the surface branch circuit, at its disconnecting on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs means or overcurrent device, shall be driven into holes in masonry, concrete, legibly marked to indicate its purpose,

227

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00237 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.403 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

unless located and arranged so the pur- live parts are exposed for inspection or pose is evident. These markings shall servicing, the working space, if in a be of sufficient durability to withstand passageway or general open space, the environment involved. shall be guarded. (i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This (iii) Access and entrance to working paragraph applies to equipment oper- space. At least one entrance shall be ating at 600 volts, nominal, or less. provided to give access to the working (1) Working space about electric equip- space about electric equipment. ment. Sufficient access and working (iv) Front working space. Where there space shall be provided and maintained are live parts normally exposed on the about all electric equipment to permit front of switchboards or motor control ready and safe operation and mainte- centers, the working space in front of nance of such equipment. such equipment shall not be less than 3 (i) Working clearances. Except as re- feet (914 mm). quired or permitted elsewhere in this (v) Headroom. The minimum head- subpart, the dimension of the working room of working spaces about service space in the direction of access to live equipment, switchboards, panelboards, parts operating at 600 volts or less and or motor control centers shall be 6 feet likely to require examination, adjust- 3 inches (1.91 m). ment, servicing, or maintenance while (2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as alive shall not be less than indicated in required or permitted elsewhere in this Table K–1. In addition to the dimen- subpart, live parts of electric equip- sions shown in Table K–1, workspace ment operating at 50 volts or more shall not be less than 30 inches (762 shall be guarded against accidental mm) wide in front of the electric equip- contact by cabinets or other forms of ment. Distances shall be measured enclosures, or by any of the following from the live parts if they are exposed, means: or from the enclosure front or opening (A) By location in a room, vault, or if the live parts are enclosed. Walls similar enclosure that is accessible constructed of concrete, brick, or tile only to qualified persons. are considered to be grounded. Working (B) By partitions or screens so ar- space is not required in back of assem- ranged that only qualified persons will blies such as dead-front switchboards have access to the space within reach or motor control centers where there of the live parts. Any openings in such are no renewable or adjustable parts partitions or screens shall be so sized such as fuses or switches on the back and located that persons are not likely and where all connections are acces- to come into accidental contact with sible from locations other than the the live parts or to bring conducting back. objects into contact with them. (C) By location on a balcony, gallery, TABLE K–1—WORKING CLEARANCES or platform so elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons. Minimum clear distance for conditions 1 (D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or Nominal voltage to ground more above the floor or other working (a) (b) (c) surface and so installed as to exclude Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2 unqualified persons. 0–150 ...... 3 3 3 (ii) In locations where electric equip- 151–600 ...... 3 31⁄2 4 ment would be exposed to physical 1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live damage, enclosures or guards shall be parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides so arranged and of such strength as to effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or in- prevent such damage. sulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and (iii) Entrances to rooms and other grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on guarded locations containing exposed both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in Con- dition (a)] with the operator between. live parts shall be marked with con- 2 Note: For International System of Units (SI): one foot = spicuous warning signs forbidding un- 0.3048m. qualified persons to enter. (ii) Clear spaces. Working space re- (j) Over 600 volts, nominal—(1) General. quired by this subpart shall not be used Conductors and equipment used on cir- for storage. When normally enclosed cuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal,

228

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00238 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.403

shall comply with all applicable provi- imum clear workspace shall not be less sions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (meas- this section and with the following pro- ured vertically from the floor or plat- visions which supplement or modify form), or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide those requirements. The provisions of (measured parallel to the equipment). paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this The depth shall be as required in Table section do not apply to equipment on K–2. The workspace shall be adequate the supply side of the service conduc- to permit at least a 90-degree opening tors. of doors or hinged panels. (2) Enclosure for electrical installations. (i) Working space. The minimum clear Electrical installations in a vault, working space in front of electric room, closet or in an area surrounded equipment such as switchboards, con- by a wall, screen, or fence, access to trol panels, switches, circuit breakers, which is controlled by lock and key or motor controllers, relays, and similar other equivalent means, are considered equipment shall not be less than speci- to be accessible to qualified persons fied in Table K–2 unless otherwise spec- only. A wall, screen, or fence less than ified in this subpart. Distances shall be 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not consid- measured from the live parts if they ered adequate to prevent access unless are exposed, or from the enclosure it has other features that provide a de- front or opening if the live parts are gree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot enclosed. However, working space is (2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all not required in back of equipment such buildings, rooms or enclosures con- as deadfront switchboards or control taining exposed live parts or exposed assemblies where there are no renew- conductors operating at over 600 volts, able or adjustable parts (such as fuses nominal, shall be kept locked or shall or switches) on the back and where all be under the observation of a qualified connections are accessible from loca- person at all times. tions other than the back. Where rear (i) Installations accessible to qualified access is required to work on de-ener- persons only. Electrical installations gized parts on the back of enclosed having exposed live parts shall be ac- equipment, a minimum working space cessible to qualified persons only and of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall shall comply with the applicable provi- be provided. sions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section. (ii) Installations accessible to unquali- TABLE K–2—MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORK- fied persons. Electrical installations ING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIP- that are open to unqualified persons MENT shall be made with metal-enclosed Conditions 1 equipment or shall be enclosed in a Nominal voltage to ground vault or in an area, access to which is (a) (b) (c) controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2 switchgear, unit substations, trans- 601 to 2,500 ...... 3 4 5 formers, pull boxes, connection boxes, 2,501 to 9,000 ...... 4 5 6 9,001 to 25,000 ...... 5 6 9 and other similar associated equipment 25,001 to 75 kV ...... 6 8 10 shall be marked with appropriate cau- Above 75kV ...... 8 10 12 tion signs. If equipment is exposed to 1Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live physical damage from vehicular traffic, parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides guards shall be provided to prevent effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or such damage. Ventilating or similar insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and openings in metal-enclosed equipment grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of con- shall be designed so that foreign ob- crete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not jects inserted through these openings guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator be- will be deflected from energized parts. tween. 2 (3) Workspace about equipment. Suffi- NOTE: For SI units: one foot = 0.3048 m. cient space shall be provided and main- (ii) Lighting outlets and points of contained about electric equipment to per- trol. The lighting outlets shall be so ar- mit ready and safe operation and main- ranged that persons changing lamps or tenance of such equipment. Where en- making repairs on the lighting system ergized parts are exposed, the min- will not be endangered by live parts or

229

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00239 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

other equipment. The points of control (b) Branch circuits—(1) Ground-fault shall be so located that persons are not protection—(i) General. The employer likely to come in contact with any live shall use either ground fault circuit in- part or moving part of the equipment terrupters as specified in paragraph while turning on the lights. (b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured (iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. equipment grounding conductor pro- Unguarded live parts above working gram as specified in paragraph space shall be maintained at elevations (b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect em- not less than specified in Table K–3. ployees on construction sites. These requirements are in addition to any TABLE K–3—ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED other requirements for equipment ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE grounding conductors. (ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. Nominal voltage between phases Minimum elevation All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20- ampere receptacle outlets on construc- 601–7,500 ...... 8 feet 6 inches. 1 tion sites, which are not a part of the 7,501–35,000 ...... 9 feet. Over 35kV ...... 9 feet + 0.37 inches per kV permanent wiring of the building or above 35kV. structure and which are in use by employees, shall have approved ground- 1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch = 25.4 mm; one foot = 0.3048 m. fault circuit interrupters for personnel protection. Receptacles on a two-wire, (4) Entrance and access to workspace. single-phase portable or vehicle- At least one entrance not less than 24 mounted generator rated not more inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches than 5kW, where the circuit conductors (1.98 m) high shall be provided to give of the generator are insulated from the access to the working space about elec- generator frame and all other grounded tric equipment. On switchboard and surfaces, need not be protected with control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22 ground-fault circuit interrupters. m) in width, there shall be one en- (iii) Assured equipment grounding con- trance at each end of such board where ductor program. The employer shall es- practicable. Where bare energized parts tablish and implement an assured at any voltage or insulated energized equipment grounding conductor pro- parts above 600 volts are located adja- gram on construction sites covering all cent to such entrance, they shall be cord sets, receptacles which are not a guarded. part of the building or structure, and [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 equipment connected by cord and plug FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] which are available for use or used by employees. This program shall comply § 1926.404 Wiring design and protec- with the following minimum require- tion. ments: (a) Use and identification of grounded (A) A written description of the pro- and grounding conductors—(1) Identifica- gram, including the specific procedures tion of conductors. A conductor used as adopted by the employer, shall be a grounded conductor shall be identifi- available at the jobsite for inspection able and distinguishable from all other and copying by the Assistant Secretary conductors. A conductor used as an and any affected employee. equipment grounding conductor shall (B) The employer shall designate one be identifiable and distinguishable or more competent persons (as defined from all other conductors. in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the pro- (2) Polarity of connections. No ground- gram. ed conductor shall be attached to any (C) Each cord set, attachment cap, terminal or lead so as to reverse des- plug and receptacle of cord sets, and ignated polarity. any equipment connected by cord and (3) Use of grounding terminals and de- plug, except cord sets and receptacles vices. A grounding terminal or ground- which are fixed and not exposed to ing-type device on a receptacle, cord damage, shall be visually inspected be- connector, or attachment plug shall fore each day’s use for external defects, not be used for purposes other than such as deformed or missing pins or in- grounding. sulation damage, and for indications of

230

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00240 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.404

possible internal damage. Equipment circuit shall have an ampere rating of found damaged or defective shall not not less than that of the branch cir- be used until repaired. cuit. (D) The following tests shall be per- (ii) Two or more receptacles. Where formed on all cord sets, receptacles connected to a branch circuit sup- which are not a part of the permanent plying two or more receptacles or out- wiring of the building or structure, and lets, receptacle ratings shall conform cord- and plug-connected equipment re- to the values listed in Table K–4. quired to be grounded: (iii) Receptacles used for the connection (1) All equipment grounding conduc- of motors. The rating of an attachment tors shall be tested for continuity and plug or receptacle used for cord- and shall be electrically continuous. plug-connection of a motor to a branch (2) Each receptacle and attachment circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at cap or plug shall be tested for correct 125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if attachment of the equipment ground- individual overload protection is omit- ing conductor. The equipment ground- ted. ing conductor shall be connected to its proper terminal. TABLE K–4—RECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR (E) All required tests shall be per- VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS formed: Receptacle (1) Before first use; Circuit rating amperes rating amperes (2) Before equipment is returned to 15 ...... Not over 15. service following any repairs; 20 ...... 15 or 20. (3) Before equipment is used after 30 ...... 30. 40 ...... 40 or 50. any incident which can be reasonably 50 ...... 50. suspected to have caused damage (for example, when a cord set is run over); (c) Outside conductors and lamps—(1) and 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs (4) At intervals not to exceed 3 (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this sec- months, except that cord sets and re- tion apply to branch circuit, feeder, ceptacles which are fixed and not ex- and service conductors rated 600 volts, posed to damage shall be tested at in- nominal, or less and run outdoors as tervals not exceeding 6 months. open conductors. (F) The employer shall not make (i) Conductors on poles. Conductors available or permit the use by employ- supported on poles shall provide a hori- ees of any equipment which has not zontal climbing space not less than the met the requirements of this paragraph following: (b)(1)(iii) of this section. (A) Power conductors below commu- (G) Tests performed as required in nication conductors—30 inches (762 this paragraph shall be recorded. This mm) . test record shall identify each recep- (B) Power conductors alone or above tacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-con- communication conductors: 300 volts or nected equipment that passed the test less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 and shall indicate the last date it was volts—30 inches (762 mm). tested or the interval for which it was (C) Communication conductors below tested. This record shall be kept by power conductors: with power conduc- means of logs, color coding, or other ef- tors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 fective means and shall be maintained mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches until replaced by a more current (762 mm). record. The record shall be made avail- (ii) Clearance from ground. Open con- able on the jobsite for inspection by ductors shall conform to the following the Assistant Secretary and any af- minimum clearances: fected employee. (A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished (2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall grade, sidewalks, or from any platform have an ampere rating not less than or projection from which they might be the load to be served and shall comply reached. with the following: (B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas sub- (i) Single receptacles. A single recep- ject to vehicular traffic other than tacle installed on an individual branch truck traffic.

231

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00241 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other (d) Services—(1) Disconnecting means— than those specified in paragraph (i) General. Means shall be provided to (c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are sub- disconnect all conductors in a building ject to truck traffic. or other structure from the service-en- (D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public trance conductors. The disconnecting streets, alleys, roads, and driveways. means shall plainly indicate whether it (iii) Clearance from building openings. is in the open or closed position and Conductors shall have a clearance of at shall be installed at a readily acces- least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows, sible location nearest the point of en- doors, fire escapes, or similar loca- trance of the service-entrance conduc- tions. Conductors run above the top tors. level of a window are considered to be (ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. out of reach from that window and, Each service disconnecting means shall therefore, do not have to be 3 feet (914 simultaneously disconnect all mm) away. ungrounded conductors. (iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors (2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The above roof space accessible to employ- following additional requirements ees on foot shall have a clearance from apply to services over 600 volts, nomi- the highest point of the roof surface of nal. not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical (i) Guarding. Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires shall be clearance for insulated conductors, not guarded to make them accessible only less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or di- to qualified persons. agonal clearance for covered conduc- (ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of tors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57 m) high voltage shall be posted where un- for bare conductors, except that: authorized employees might come in (A) Where the roof space is also ac- contact with live parts. cessible to vehicular traffic, the (e) Overcurrent protection—(1) 600 vertical clearance shall not be less volts, nominal, or less. The following re- than 18 feet (5.49 m), or quirements apply to overcurrent pro- (B) Where the roof space is not nor- tection of circuits rated 600 volts, mally accessible to employees on foot, nominal, or less. fully insulated conductors shall have a (i) Protection of conductors and equip- vertical or diagonal clearance of not ment. Conductors and equipment shall less than 3 feet (914 mm), or be protected from overcurrent in ac- (C) Where the voltage between con- cordance with their ability to safely ductors is 300 volts or less and the roof conduct current. Conductors shall have has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102 sufficient ampacity to carry the load. mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clear- (ii) Grounded conductors. Except for ance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet motor-running overload protection, (914 mm), or overcurrent devices shall not interrupt (D) Where the voltage between con- the continuity of the grounded conductors is 300 volts or less and the conductor unless all conductors of the cir- ductors do not pass over more than 4 cuit are opened simultaneously. feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of (iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal the roof and they are terminated at a cutouts. Except for devices provided for through-the-roof raceway or support, current-limiting on the supply side of the clearance from roofs shall be at the service disconnecting means, all least 18 inches (457 mm). cartridge fuses which are accessible to (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps other than qualified persons and all for outdoor lighting shall be located fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits below all live conductors, trans- over 150 volts to ground shall be pro- formers, or other electric equipment, vided with disconnecting means. This unless such equipment is controlled by disconnecting means shall be installed a disconnecting means that can be so that the fuse or thermal cutout can locked in the open position or unless be disconnected from its supply with- adequate clearances or other safe- out disrupting service to equipment guards are provided for relamping oper- and circuits unrelated to those pro- ations. tected by the overcurrent device.

232

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00242 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.404

(iv) Location in or on premises. Over- (A) If the system can be so grounded current devices shall be readily acces- that the maximum voltage to ground sible. Overcurrent devices shall not be on the ungrounded conductors does not located where they could create an em- exceed 150 volts; ployee safety hazard by being exposed (B) If the system is nominally rated to physical damage or located in the 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which vicinity of easily ignitible material. the neutral is used as a circuit con- (v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. ductor; Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so (C) If the system is nominally rated located or shielded that employees will 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which not be burned or otherwise injured by the midpoint of one phase is used as a their operation. circuit conductor; or (vi) Circuit breakers—(A) Circuit (D) If a service conductor is breakers shall clearly indicate whether uninsulated. they are in the open (off) or closed (on) (v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts position. to 1000 volts are not required to be (B) Where circuit breaker handles on grounded if the system is separately switchboards are operated vertically derived and is supplied by a trans- rather than horizontally or former that has a primary voltage rat- rotationally, the up position of the ing less than 1000 volts, provided all of handle shall be the closed (on) position. the following conditions are met: (C) If used as switches in 120-volt, flu- (A) The system is used exclusively orescent lighting circuits, circuit for control circuits, breakers shall be marked ‘‘SWD.’’ (B) The conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only quali- (2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders fied persons will service the installa- and branch circuits over 600 volts, tion, nominal, shall have short-circuit pro- (C) Continuity of control power is re- tection. quired, and (f) Paragraphs (f)(1) Grounding. (D) Ground detectors are installed on through (f)(11) of this section contain the control system. grounding requirements for systems, (2) Separately derived systems. Where circuits, and equipment. paragraph (f)(1) of this section requires (1) Systems to be grounded. The fol- grounding of wiring systems whose lowing systems which supply premises power is derived from generator, trans- wiring shall be grounded: former, or converter windings and has (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire no direct electrical connection, includ- DC systems shall have their neutral ing a solidly connected grounded cir- conductor grounded. cuit conductor, to supply conductors (ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC originating in another system, para- systems operating at over 50 volts graph (f)(5) of this section shall also through 300 volts between conductors apply. shall be grounded unless they are rec- (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- tifier-derived from an AC system com- erators—(i) Portable generators. Under plying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii), the following conditions, the frame of a (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section. portable generator need not be ground- (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC ed and may serve as the grounding circuits of less than 50 volts shall be electrode for a system supplied by the grounded if they are installed as over- generator: head conductors outside of buildings or (A) The generator supplies only if they are supplied by transformers equipment mounted on the generator and the transformer primary supply and/or cord- and plug-connected equip- system is ungrounded or exceeds 150 ment through receptacles mounted on volts to ground. the generator, and (iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts parts of equipment and the equipment shall be grounded under any of the fol- grounding conductor terminals of the lowing conditions, unless exempted by receptacles are bonded to the generator paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section: frame.

233

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00243 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under (7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment the following conditions the frame of a to be grounded—(i) Supports and enclo- vehicle may serve as the grounding sures for conductors. Metal cable trays, electrode for a system supplied by a metal raceways, and metal enclosures generator located on the vehicle: for conductors shall be grounded, ex- (A) The frame of the generator is cept that: bonded to the vehicle frame, and (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves (B) The generator supplies only that are used to protect cable assem- equipment located on the vehicle and/ blies from physical damage need not be or cord- and plug-connected equipment grounded; and through receptacles mounted on the (B) Metal enclosures for conductors vehicle or on the generator, and added to existing installations of open (C) The noncurrent-carrying metal wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non- parts of equipment and the equipment metallic-sheathed cable need not be grounding conductor terminals of the grounded if all of the following condi- receptacles are bonded to the generator tions are met: frame, and (1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m); (D) The system complies with all (2) Enclosures are free from probable other provisions of this section. contact with ground, grounded metal, (iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neu- metal laths, or other conductive mate- tral conductor shall be bonded to the rials; and generator frame if the generator is a (3) Enclosures are guarded against component of a separately derived sys- employee contact. tem. No other conductor need be bond- (ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal ed to the generator frame. enclosures for service equipment shall (4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC be grounded. premises wiring systems the identified (iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncur- conductor shall be grounded. rent-carrying metal parts of fixed (5) Grounding connections—(i) Ground- equipment which may become ener- ed system. For a grounded system, a gized shall be grounded under any of grounding electrode conductor shall be the following conditions: used to connect both the equipment (A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically grounding conductor and the grounded or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground circuit conductor to the grounding or grounded metal objects and subject electrode. Both the equipment ground- to employee contact. ing conductor and the grounding elec- (B) If located in a wet or damp loca- trode conductor shall be connected to tion and subject to employee contact. the grounded circuit conductor on the (C) If in electrical contact with supply side of the service disconnecting metal. means, or on the supply side of the sys- (D) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- tem disconnecting means or overcur- tion. rent devices if the system is separately (E) If supplied by a metal-clad, derived. metal-sheathed, or grounded metal (ii) Ungrounded systems. For an raceway wiring method. ungrounded service-supplied system, (F) If equipment operates with any the equipment grounding conductor terminal at over 150 volts to ground; shall be connected to the grounding however, the following need not be electrode conductor at the service grounded: equipment. For an ungrounded sepa- (1) Enclosures for switches or circuit rately derived system, the equipment breakers used for other than service grounding conductor shall be con- equipment and accessible to qualified nected to the grounding electrode con- persons only; ductor at, or ahead of, the system dis- (2) Metal frames of electrically heat- connecting means or overcurrent de- ed appliances which are permanently vices. and effectively insulated from ground; (6) Grounding path. The path to and ground from circuits, equipment, and (3) The cases of distribution appa- enclosures shall be permanent and con- ratus such as transformers and capaci- tinuous. tors mounted on wooden poles at a

234

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00244 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.404

height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above sures around equipment of over IkV be- ground or grade level. tween conductors. (iv) Equipment connected by cord and (8) Methods of grounding equipment— plug. Under any of the conditions de- (i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent- scribed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A) carrying metal parts of fixed equip- through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, ex- ment, if required to be grounded by posed noncurrent-carrying metal parts this subpart, shall be grounded by an of cord- and plug-connected equipment equipment grounding conductor which which may become energized shall be is contained within the same raceway, grounded: cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses (A) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- the circuit conductors. For DC circuits tion (see § 1926.407). only, the equipment grounding con- (B) If operated at over 150 volts to ductor may be run separately from the ground, except for guarded motors and circuit conductors. metal frames of electrically heated ap- (ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor pliances if the appliance frames are used for grounding fixed or movable permanently and effectively insulated equipment shall have capacity to con- from ground. duct safely any fault current which (C) If the equipment is one of the may be imposed on it. types listed in paragraphs (iii) Equipment considered effectively (f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of grounded. Electric equipment is consid- this section. However, even though the ered to be effectively grounded if it is equipment may be one of these types, secured to, and in electrical contact it need not be grounded if it is exempt- with, a metal rack or structure that is ed by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6). provided for its support and the metal (1) Hand held motor-operated tools; rack or structure is grounded by the (2) Cord- and plug-connected equip- method specified for the noncurrent- ment used in damp or wet locations or carrying metal parts of fixed equip- by employees standing on the ground ment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this sec- or on metal floors or working inside of tion. Metal car frames supported by metal tanks or boilers; metal hoisting cables attached to or (3) Portable and mobile X-ray and as- running over metal sheaves or drums of sociated equipment; grounded elevator machines are also (4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/ considered to be effectively grounded. or conductive locations; and (9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are (5) Portable hand lamps. used to assure electrical continuity, (6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/ they shall have the capacity to conduct or conductive locations need not be any fault current which may be im- grounded if supplied through an iso- posed. lating transformer with an ungrounded (10) Made electrodes. If made elec- secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed trodes are used, they shall be free from or labeled portable tools and appli- nonconductive coatings, such as paint ances protected by a system of double or enamel; and, if practicable, they insulation, or its equivalent, need not shall be embedded below permanent be grounded. If such a system is em- moisture level. A single electrode con- ployed, the equipment shall be distinc- sisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has tively marked to indicate that the tool a resistance to ground greater than 25 or appliance utilizes a system of double ohms shall be augmented by one addi- insulation. tional electrode installed no closer (v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first elec- parts of the following nonelectrical trode. equipment shall be grounded: Frames (11) Grounding of systems and circuits and tracks of electrically operated of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)—(i) cranes; frames of nonelectrically driv- General. If high voltage systems are en elevator cars to which electric con- grounded, they shall comply with all ductors are attached; hand-operated applicable provisions of paragraphs metal shifting ropes or cables of elec- (f)(1) through (f)(10) of this section as tric elevators, and metal partitions, supplemented and modified by this grill work, and similar metal enclo- paragraph (f)(11).

235

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00245 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.405 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Grounding of systems supplying § 1926.405 Wiring methods, compo- portable or mobile equipment. Systems nents, and equipment for general supplying portable or mobile high volt- use. age equipment, other than substations (a) Wiring methods. The provisions of installed on a temporary basis, shall this paragraph do not apply to conduc- comply with the following: tors which form an integral part of (A) Portable and mobile high voltage equipment such as motors, controllers, equipment shall be supplied from a sys- motor control centers and like equip- tem having its neutral grounded ment. through an impedance. If a delta-con- (1) General requirements—(i) Electrical nected high voltage system is used to continuity of metal raceways and enclo- supply the equipment, a system neu- sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors tral shall be derived. shall be metallically joined together (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying into a continuous electric conductor metal parts of portable and mobile and shall be so connected to all boxes, equipment shall be connected by an fittings, and cabinets as to provide ef- equipment grounding conductor to the fective electrical continuity. point at which the system neutral im- (ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems pedance is grounded. of any type shall be installed in ducts (C) Ground-fault detection and relay- used to transport dust, loose stock or ing shall be provided to automatically flammable vapors. No wiring system of de-energize any high voltage system any type shall be installed in any duct component which has developed a used for vapor removal or in any shaft ground fault. The continuity of the containing only such ducts. equipment grounding conductor shall (2) Temporary wiring—(i) Scope. The be continuously monitored so as to de- provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this energize automatically the high volt- section apply to temporary electrical age feeder to the portable equipment power and lighting wiring methods upon loss of continuity of the equip- which may be of a class less than would ment grounding conductor. be required for a permanent installation. Except as specifically modified in (D) The grounding electrode to which paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all the portable or mobile equipment sys- other requirements of this subpart for tem neutral impedance is connected permanent wiring shall apply to tem- shall be isolated from and separated in porary wiring installations. Temporary the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m) wiring shall be removed immediately from any other system or equipment upon completion of construction or the grounding electrode, and there shall be purpose for which the wiring was in- no direct connection between the stalled. grounding electrodes, such as buried (ii) General requirements for temporary pipe, fence or like objects. wiring—(A) Feeders shall originate in a (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non- distribution center. The conductors current-carrying metal parts of port- shall be run as multiconductor cord or able equipment and fixed equipment in- cable assemblies or within raceways; cluding their associated fences, or, where not subject to physical dam- housings, enclosures, and supporting age, they may be run as open conduc- structures shall be grounded. However, tors on insulators not more than 10 feet equipment which is guarded by loca- (3.05 m) apart. tion and isolated from ground need not (B) Branch circuits shall originate in be grounded. Additionally, pole-mount- a power outlet or panelboard. Conduc- ed distribution apparatus at a height tors shall be run as multiconductor exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above ground cord or cable assemblies or open conductors, or shall be run in raceways. or grade level need not be grounded. All conductors shall be protected by [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54 overcurrent devices at their ampacity. FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, Runs of open conductors shall be lo- 1996] cated where the conductors will not be subject to physical damage, and the

236

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00246 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.405

conductors shall be fastened at inter- NOTE: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/ vals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400–4, lists branch-circuit conductors shall be laid various types of flexible cords, some of which are noted as being designed for hard or extra- on the floor. Each branch circuit that hard usage. Examples of these types of flexi- supplies receptacles or fixed equipment ble cords include hard service cord (types S, shall contain a separate equipment ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord grounding conductor if the branch cir- (types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO). cuit is run as open conductors. (iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring (C) Receptacles shall be of the over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, bar- grounding type. Unless installed in a riers, or other effective means shall be complete metallic raceway, each provided to prevent access of other branch circuit shall contain a separate than authorized and qualified per- equipment grounding conductor, and sonnel. all receptacles shall be electrically (b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings—(1) connected to the grounding conductor. Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or Receptacles for uses other than tem- fittings. Conductors entering boxes, porary lighting shall not be installed cabinets, or fittings shall be protected on branch circuits which supply tem- from abrasion, and openings through porary lighting. Receptacles shall not which conductors enter shall be effec- be connected to the same ungrounded tively closed. Unused openings in cabi- conductor of multiwire circuits which nets, boxes, and fittings shall also be supply temporary lighting. effectively closed. (D) Disconnecting switches or plug (2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, connectors shall be installed to permit junction boxes, and fittings shall be the disconnection of all ungrounded provided with covers. If metal covers conductors of each temporary circuit. are used, they shall be grounded. In en- (E) All lamps for general illumina- ergized installations each outlet box tion shall be protected from accidental shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture contact or breakage. Metal-case sock- canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having ets shall be grounded. holes through which flexible cord pendants pass shall be provided with bush- (F) Temporary lights shall not be ings designed for the purpose or shall suspended by their electric cords unless have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on cords and lights are designed for this which the cords may bear. means of suspension. (3) Pull and junction boxes for systems (G) Portable electric lighting used in over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to wet and/or other conductive locations, other requirements in this section for as for example, drums, tanks, and ves- pull and junction boxes, the following sels, shall be operated at 12 volts or shall apply to these boxes for systems less. However, 120-volt lights may be over 600 volts, nominal: used if protected by a ground-fault cir- (i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall cuit interrupter. provide a complete enclosure for the (H) A box shall be used wherever a contained conductors or cables. change is made to a raceway system or (ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by a cable system which is metal clad or covers securely fastened in place. Un- metal sheathed. derground box covers that weigh over (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be 100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this require- protected from damage. Sharp corners ment. Covers for boxes shall be perma- and projections shall be avoided. Flexi- nently marked ‘‘HIGH VOLTAGE.’’ ble cords and cables may pass through The marking shall be on the outside of doorways or other pinch points, if pro- the box cover and shall be readily visi- tection is provided to avoid damage. ble and legible. (J) Extension cord sets used with (c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife portable electric tools and appliances switches shall be so connected that the shall be of three-wire type and shall be blades are dead when the switch is in designed for hard or extra-hard usage. the open position. Single-throw knife Flexible cords used with temporary and switches shall be so placed that gravity portable lights shall be designed for will not tend to close them. Single- hard or extra-hard usage. throw knife switches approved for use

237

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00247 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.405 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

in the inverted position shall be pro- (D) Elevator cables; vided with a locking device that will (E) Wiring of cranes and hoists; ensure that the blades remain in the (F) Connection of stationary equip- open position when so set. Double- ment to facilitate their frequent inter- throw knife switches may be mounted change; so that the throw will be either (G) Prevention of the transmission of vertical or horizontal. However, if the noise or vibration; or throw is vertical, a locking device shall (H) Appliances where the fastening be provided to ensure that the blades means and mechanical connections are remain in the open position when so designed to permit removal for mainte- set. nance and repair. (d) Switchboards and panelboards. (ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used Switchboards that have any exposed as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(C), live parts shall be located in perma- (g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this sec- nently dry locations and accessible tion, the flexible cord shall be equipped only to qualified persons. Panelboards with an attachment plug and shall be shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout energized from a receptacle outlet. boxes, or enclosures designed for the (iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary purpose and shall be dead front. How- for a use permitted in paragraph ever, panelboards other than the dead (g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords front externally-operable type are per- and cables shall not be used: mitted where accessible only to quali- (A) As a substitute for the fixed wir- fied persons. Exposed blades of knife ing of a structure; switches shall be dead when open. (B) Where run through holes in walls, (e) Enclosures for damp or wet loca- ceilings, or floors; tions—(1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes. (C) Where run through doorways, Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, windows, or similar openings, except as and panelboard enclosures in damp or permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(I) of wet locations shall be installed so as to this section; prevent moisture or water from enter- (D) Where attached to building suring and accumulating within the enclo- faces; or sures. In wet locations the enclosures (E) Where concealed behind building shall be weatherproof. walls, ceilings, or floors. (2) Switches and circuit breakers. (2) Identification, splices, and termi- Switches, circuit breakers, and switch- nations—(i) Identification. A conductor boards installed in wet locations shall of a flexible cord or cable that is used be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures. as a grounded conductor or an equip- (f) Conductors for general wiring. All ment grounding conductor shall be dis- conductors used for general wiring tinguishable from other conductors. shall be insulated unless otherwise per- (ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, mitted in this subpart. The conductor SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall insulation shall be of a type that is not be used unless durably marked on suitable for the voltage, operating tem- the surface with the type designation, perature, and location of use. Insulated size, and number of conductors. conductors shall be distinguishable by (iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be appropriate color or other means as used only in continuous lengths with- being grounded conductors, out splice or tap. Hard service flexible ungrounded conductors, or equipment cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired grounding conductors. if spliced so that the splice retains the (g) Flexible cords and cables—(1) Use of insulation, outer sheath properties, flexible cords and cables—(i) Permitted and usage characteristics of the cord uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be being spliced. suitable for conditions of use and loca- (iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall tion. Flexible cords and cables shall be be connected to devices and fittings so used only for: that strain relief is provided which will (A) Pendants; prevent pull from being directly trans- (B) Wiring of fixtures; mitted to joints or terminal screws. (C) Connection of portable lamps or (v) Cords passing through holes. Flexi- appliances; ble cords and cables shall be protected

238

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00248 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.405

by bushings or fittings where passing shall not be supported by the screw through holes in covers, outlet boxes, shell of a lampholder. or similar enclosures. (iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nomi- shall be wired with flexible cord and an nal. Multiconductor portable cable for attachment plug of the polarized or use in supplying power to portable or grounding type. If the portable lamp mobile equipment at over 600 volts, uses an Edison-based lampholder, the nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger grounded conductor shall be identified conductors employing flexible strand- and attached to the screw shell and the ing. Cables operated at over 2000 volts identified blade of the attachment shall be shielded for the purpose of con- plug. In addition, portable handlamps fining the voltage stresses to the insu- shall comply with the following: lation. Grounding conductors shall be (A) Metal shell, paperlined provided. Connectors for these cables lampholders shall not be used; shall be of a locking type with provi- (B) Handlamps shall be equipped with sions to prevent their opening or clos- a handle of molded composition or ing while energized. Strain relief shall other insulating material; be provided at connections and termi- (C) Handlamps shall be equipped with nations. Portable cables shall not be a substantial guard attached to the operated with splices unless the splices lampholder or handle; are of the permanent molded, vulcan- ized, or other equivalent type. Termi- (D) Metallic guards shall be grounded nation enclosures shall be marked with by the means of an equipment ground- a high voltage hazard warning, and tering conductor run within the power minations shall be accessible only to supply cord. authorized and qualified personnel. (iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the (i) Fixture wires—(1) General. Fixture screw-shell type shall be installed for wires shall be suitable for the voltage, use as lampholders only. Lampholders temperature, and location of use. A fix- installed in wet or damp locations shall ture wire which is used as a grounded be of the weatherproof type. conductor shall be identified. (v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet (2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may or damp locations shall be identified be used: for the purpose and shall be installed (i) For installation in lighting, fix- so that water cannot enter or accumu- tures and in similar equipment where late in wireways, lampholders, or other enclosed or protected and not subject electrical parts. to bending or twisting in use; or (2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures tachment plugs (caps)—(i) Configuration. to the branch-circuit conductors sup- Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- plying the fixtures. tachment plugs shall be constructed so (3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires that no receptacle or cord connector shall not be used as branch-circuit con- will accept an attachment plug with a ductors except as permitted for Class 1 different voltage or current rating than power-limited circuits. that for which the device is intended. (j) Equipment for general use—(1) However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, or cord connector may accept a 15-am- and receptacles—(i) Live parts. Fixtures, pere attachment plug of the same volt- lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and re- age rating. Receptacles connected to ceptacles shall have no live parts nor- circuits having different voltages, fre- mally exposed to employee contact. quencies, or types of current (ac or dc) However, rosettes and cleat-type on the same premises shall be of such lampholders and receptacles located at design that the attachment plugs used least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may on these circuits are not interchange- have exposed parts. able. (ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders, (ii) Damp and wet locations. A recep- rosettes, and receptacles shall be se- tacle installed in a wet or damp loca- curely supported. A fixture that weighs tion shall be designed for the location. more than 6 pounds (2.72 kg) or exceeds (3) Appliances—(i) Live parts. Appli- 16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension ances, other than those in which the

239

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00249 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.405 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

current-carrying parts at high tem- (1) If a number of motors drive spe- peratures are necessarily exposed, shall cial parts of a single machine or piece have no live parts normally exposed to of apparatus, such as a metal or wood- employee contact. working machine, crane, or hoist; (ii) Disconnecting means. A means (2) If a group of motors is under the shall be provided to disconnect each protection of one set of branch-circuit appliance. protective devices; or (iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be (3) If a group of motors is in a single marked with its rating in volts and room in sight from the location of the amperes or volts and watts. disconnecting means. (4) Motors. This paragraph applies to (iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and motors, motor circuits, and control- ground-fault protection. Motors, motor- lers. control apparatus, and motor branch- (i) In sight from. If specified that one circuit conductors shall be protected piece of equipment shall be ‘‘in sight against overheating due to motor over- from’’ another piece of equipment, one loads or failure to start, and against shall be visible and not more than 50 short-circuits or ground faults. These feet (15.2 m) from the other. provisions do not require overload pro- (ii) Disconnecting means—(A) A dis- tection that will stop a motor where a connecting means shall be located in shutdown is likely to introduce addi- sight from the controller location. The tional or increased hazards, as in the controller disconnecting means for case of fire pumps, or where continued motor branch circuits over 600 volts, operation of a motor is necessary for a nominal, may be out of sight of the safe shutdown of equipment or process controller, if the controller is marked and motor overload sensing devices are with a warning label giving the loca- connected to a supervised alarm. tion and identification of the disconnecting means which is to be locked (iv) Protection of live parts—all in the open position. voltages—(A) Stationary motors having (B) The disconnecting means shall commutators, collectors, and brush disconnect the motor and the con- rigging located inside of motor end troller from all ungrounded supply con- brackets and not conductively conductors and shall be so designed that nected to supply circuits operating at no pole can be operated independently. more than 150 volts to ground need not (C) If a motor and the driven machin- have such parts guarded. Exposed live ery are not in sight from the controller parts of motors and controllers oper- location, the installation shall comply ating at 50 volts or more between ter- with one of the following conditions: minals shall be guarded against acci- (1) The controller disconnecting dental contact by any of the following: means shall be capable of being locked (1) By installation in a room or en- in the open position. closure that is accessible only to quali- (2) A manually operable switch that fied persons; will disconnect the motor from its (2) By installation on a balcony, gal- source of supply shall be placed in lery, or platform, so elevated and ar- sight from the motor location. ranged as to exclude unqualified per- (D) The disconnecting means shall sons; or plainly indicate whether it is in the (3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or open (off) or closed (on) position. more above the floor. (E) The disconnecting means shall be (B) Where live parts of motors or con- readily accessible. If more than one trollers operating at over 150 volts to disconnect is provided for the same ground are guarded against accidental equipment, only one need be readily contact only by location, and where ad- accessible. justment or other attendance may be (F) An individual disconnecting necessary during the operation of the means shall be provided for each apparatus, insulating mats or plat- motor, but a single disconnecting forms shall be provided so that the at- means may be used for a group of mo- tendant cannot readily touch live parts tors under any one of the following unless standing on the mats or plat- conditions: forms.

240

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00250 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.406

(5) Transformers—(i) Application. The (ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated following paragraphs cover the instal- over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply lation of all transformers, except: with the following additional require- (A) Current transformers; ments: (B) Dry-type transformers installed (A) Isolating or disconnecting switch- as a component part of other appa- es (with no interrupting rating) shall ratus; be interlocked with the load inter- (C) Transformers which are an inte- rupting device or shall be provided gral part of an X-ray, high frequency, with prominently displayed caution or electrostatic-coating apparatus; signs to prevent switching load cur- (D) Transformers used with Class 2 rent. and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline (B) For series capacitors the proper lighting, electric discharge lighting, switching shall be assured by use of at and power-limited fire-protective sig- least one of the following: naling circuits. (1) Mechanically sequenced isolating (ii) Operating voltage. The operating and bypass switches, voltage of exposed live parts of trans- (2) Interlocks, or former installations shall be indicated (3) Switching procedure prominently by warning signs or visible markings displayed at the switching location. on the equipment or structure. (iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry- [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 type, high fire point liquid-insulated, FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, and askarel-insulated transformers in- 2020] stalled indoors and rated over 35 kV § 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment shall be in a vault. and installations. (iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they present a fire hazard to employees, oil- (a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph insulated transformers installed in- applies to the installation of electric doors shall be in a vault. equipment and wiring used in connec- (v) Fire protection. Combustible mate- tion with cranes, monorail hoists, rial, combustible buildings and parts of hoists, and all runways. buildings, fire escapes, and door and (1) Disconnecting means—(i) Runway window openings shall be safeguarded conductor disconnecting means. A readily from fires which may originate in oil- accessible disconnecting means shall insulated transformers attached to or be provided between the runway con- adjacent to a building or combustible tact conductors and the power supply. material. (ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and (vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer monorail hoists. A disconnecting means, vaults shall be constructed so as to capable of being locked in the open po- contain fire and combustible liquids sition, shall be provided in the leads within the vault and to prevent unau- from the runway contact conductors or thorized access. Locks and latches other power supply on any crane or shall be so arranged that a vault door monorail hoist. can be readily opened from the inside. (A) If this additional disconnecting (vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct means is not readily accessible from system foreign to the vault installa- the crane or monorail hoist operating tion shall not enter or pass through a station, means shall be provided at the transformer vault. operating station to open the power (viii) Material storage. Materials shall circuit to all motors of the crane or not be stored in transformer vaults. monorail hoist. (6) Capacitors—(i) Drainage of stored (B) The additional disconnect may be charge. All capacitors, except surge ca- omitted if a monorail hoist or hand- pacitors or capacitors included as a propelled crane bridge installation component part of other apparatus, meets all of the following: shall be provided with an automatic (1) The unit is floor controlled; means of draining the stored charge (2) The unit is within view of the and maintaining the discharged state power supply disconnecting means; and after the capacitor is disconnected (3) No fixed work platform has been from its source of supply. provided for servicing the unit.

241

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00251 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.407 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Control. A limit switch or other (2) Resistance welders. A switch or cir- device shall be provided to prevent the cuit breaker shall be provided by which load block from passing the safe upper each resistance welder and its control limit of travel of any hoisting mecha- equipment can be isolated from the nism. supply circuit. The ampere rating of (3) Clearance. The dimension of the this disconnecting means shall not be working space in the direction of ac- less than the supply conductor cess to live parts which may require ampacity. examination, adjustment, servicing, or (d) X-Ray equipment—(1) Disconnecting maintenance while alive shall be a means—(i) General. A disconnecting minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm). means shall be provided in the supply Where controls are enclosed in cabi- circuit. The disconnecting means shall nets, the door(s) shall open at least 90 be operable from a location readily ac- degrees or be removable, or the instal- cessible from the X-ray control. For lation shall provide equivalent access. equipment connected to a 120-volt (4) Grounding. All exposed metal branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists grounding-type attachment plug cap and accessories including pendant con- and receptacle of proper rating may trols shall be metallically joined to- serve as a disconnecting means. gether into a continuous electrical con- (ii) More than one piece of equipment. ductor so that the entire crane or hoist If more than one piece of equipment is will be grounded in accordance with operated from the same high-voltage § 1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than circuit, each piece or each group of removable accessories or attachments, equipment as a unit shall be provided having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces with a high-voltage switch or equiva- shall be considered to be electrically lent disconnecting means. This disconnected to each other through the connecting means shall be constructed, bearing surfaces for grounding pur- enclosed, or located so as to avoid con- poses. The trolley frame and bridge tact by employees with its live parts. frame shall be considered as elec- (2) Control—Radiographic and fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and trically grounded through the bridge fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be and trolley wheels and its respective effectively enclosed or shall have inter- tracks unless conditions such as paint locks that deenergize the equipment or other insulating materials prevent automatically to prevent ready access reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this to live current-carrying parts. case a separate bonding conductor shall be provided. § 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) loca- (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving tions. walks—(1) Disconnecting means. Ele- (a) Scope. This section sets forth re- vators, escalators, and moving walks quirements for electric equipment and shall have a single means for dis- wiring in locations which are classified connecting all ungrounded main power depending on the properties of the supply conductors for each unit. flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or (2) Control panels. If control panels combustible dusts or fibers which may are not located in the same space as be present therein and the likelihood the drive machine, they shall be lo- that a flammable or combustible con- cated in cabinets with doors or panels centration or quantity is present. Each capable of being locked closed. room, section or area shall be consid- (c) Electric welders—disconnecting ered individually in determining its means—(1) Motor-generator, AC trans- classification. These hazardous (classi- former, and DC rectifier arc welders. A fied) locations are assigned six designa- disconnecting means shall be provided tions as follows: in the supply circuit for each motor- generator arc welder, and for each AC Class I, Division 1 Class I, Division 2 transformer and DC rectifier arc welder Class II, Division 1 which is not equipped with a dis- Class II, Division 2 connect mounted as an integral part of Class III, Division l the welder. Class III, Division 2

242

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00252 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.408

For definitions of these locations see marked with the class, group, division, § 1926.449. All applicable requirements or operating temperature. in this subpart apply to all hazardous (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, (classified) locations, unless modified other than lighting fixtures, which is by provisions of this section. acceptable for use in Class II, Division (b) Electrical installations. Equipment, 2 and Class III locations need not be wiring methods, and installations of marked with the class, group, division, equipment in hazardous (classified) lo- or operating temperature. cations shall be approved as intrinsi- (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) cally safe or approved for the haz- location. Equipment which is safe for ardous (classified) location or safe for the location shall be of a type and de- the hazardous (classified) location. Re- sign which the employer demonstrates quirements for each of these options will provide protection from the haz- are as follows: ards arising from the combustibility (1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and and flammability of vapors, liquids, associated wiring approved as intrinsi- gases, dusts, or fibers. cally safe is permitted in any haz- NOTE: The National Electrical Code, NFPA ardous (classified) location included in 70, contains guidelines for determining the its listing or labeling. type and design of equipment and installa- (2) Approved for the hazardous (classi- tions which will meet this requirement. The fied) location—(i) General. Equipment guidelines of this document address electric shall be approved not only for the class wiring, equipment, and systems installed in of location but also for the ignitible or hazardous (classified) locations and contain combustible properties of the specific specific provisions for the following: wiring methods, wiring connections, conductor in- gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be sulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, present. transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, recep- NOTE: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, va- tacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, in- pors, and dusts by ‘‘Groups’’ characterized by struments, resistors, generators, motors, their ignitible or combustible properties. lighting fixtures, storage battery charging equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists (ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be and similar equipment, utilization equip- used unless it is marked to show the ment, signaling systems, alarm systems, re- class, group, and operating tempera- mote control systems, local loud speaker and ture or temperature range, based on communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning surge protection, and operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for grounding. Compliance with these guidelines which it is approved. The temperature will constitute one means, but not the only marking shall not exceed the ignition means, of compliance with this paragraph. temperature of the specific gas, vapor, or dust to be encountered. However, (c) Conduits. All conduits shall be the following provisions modify this threaded and shall be made wrench- marking requirement for specific tight. Where it is impractical to make equipment: a threaded joint tight, a bonding jump- (A) Equipment of the non-heat-pro- er shall be utilized. ducing type (such as junction boxes, [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 conduit, and fitting) and equipment of FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] the heat-producing type having a maximum temperature of not more than § 1926.408 Special systems. 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not (a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. have a marked operating temperature Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this or temperature range. section contain general requirements (B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for all circuits and equipment operated for use only in Class I, Division 2 loca- at over 600 volts. tions need not be marked to indicate (1) Wiring methods for fixed installa- the group. tions—(i) Above ground. Above-ground (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment conductors shall be installed in rigid in Class I locations, other than lighting metal conduit, in intermediate metal fixtures, which is acceptable for use in conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in Class I, Division 2 locations need not be other suitable raceways, or as open

243

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00253 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.408 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

runs of metal-clad cable designed for method of cable termination used shall the use and purpose. However, open prevent any strain or pull on the cable runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or from stressing the electrical connec- of bare conductors or busbars may be tions. The enclosure shall have provi- installed in locations which are acces- sion for locking so only authorized sible only to qualified persons. Metallic qualified persons may open it and shall shielding components, such as tapes, be marked with a sign warning of the wires, or braids for conductors, shall be presence of energized parts. grounded. Open runs of insulated wires (ii) Guarding live parts. All energized and cables having a bare lead sheath or switching and control parts shall be en- a braided outer covering shall be sup- closed in effectively grounded metal ported in a manner designed to prevent cabinets or enclosures. Circuit break- physical damage to the braid or sheath. ers and protective equipment shall (ii) Installations emerging from the have the operating means projecting ground. Conductors emerging from the through the metal cabinet or enclosure ground shall be enclosed in raceways. so these units can be reset without Raceways installed on poles shall be of locked doors being opened. Enclosures rigid metal conduit, intermediate and metal cabinets shall be locked so metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or that only authorized qualified persons equivalent extending from the ground have access and shall be marked with a line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above sign warning of the presence of ener- finished grade. Conductors entering a gized parts. Collector ring assemblies building shall be protected by an enclo- on revolving-type machines (shovels, sure from the ground line to the point draglines, etc.) shall be guarded. of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall (4) Tunnel installations—(i) Applica- be grounded. tion. The provisions of this paragraph (2) Interrupting and isolating devices— apply to installation and use of high- (i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers lo- voltage power distribution and utiliza- cated indoors shall consist of metal-en- tion equipment which is associated closed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted with tunnels and which is portable and/ units. In locations accessible only to or mobile, such as substations, trailers, qualified personnel, open mounting of cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, circuit breakers is permitted. A means drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, of indicating the open and closed posi- conveyors, and underground exca- tion of circuit breakers shall be pro- vators. vided. (ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels (ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts in- shall be installed in one or more of the stalled in buildings or transformer following: vaults shall be of a type identified for (A) Metal conduit or other metal the purpose. They shall be readily ac- raceway, cessible for fuse replacement. (B) Type MC cable, or (iii) Equipment isolating means. A (C) Other suitable multiconductor means shall be provided to completely cable. isolate equipment for inspection and Conductors shall also be so located or repairs. Isolating means which are not guarded as to protect them from phys- designed to interrupt the load current ical damage. Multiconductor portable of the circuit shall be either cable may supply mobile equipment. interlocked with a circuit interrupter An equipment grounding conductor or provided with a sign warning shall be run with circuit conductors in- against opening them under load. side the metal raceway or inside the (3) Mobile and portable equipment—(i) multiconductor cable jacket. The Power cable connections to mobile ma- equipment grounding conductor may chines. A metallic enclosure shall be be insulated or bare. provided on the mobile machine for en- (iii) Guarding live parts. Bare termi- closing the terminals of the power nals of transformers, switches, motor cable. The enclosure shall include pro- controllers, and other equipment shall visions for a solid connection for the be enclosed to prevent accidental con- ground wire(s) terminal to ground ef- tact with energized parts. Enclosures fectively the machine frame. The for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof,

244

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00254 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.408

weatherproof, or submersible as resources, and where wet contact occur- quired by the environmental condi- rence is not likely. tions. (2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 (iv) Disconnecting means. A dis- power supply unit shall not be used un- connecting means that simultaneously less it is durably marked where plainly opens all ungrounded conductors shall visible to indicate the class of supply be installed at each transformer or and its electrical rating. motor location. (c) Communications systems—(1) Scope. (v) Grounding and bonding. All non- These provisions for communication energized metal parts of electric equip- systems apply to such systems as cen- ment and metal raceways and cable tral-station-connected and non-cen- sheaths shall be grounded and bonded tral-station-connected telephone cir- to all metal pipes and rails at the por- cuits, radio receiving and transmitting tal and at intervals not exceeding 1000 equipment, and outside wiring for fire feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel. and burglar alarm, and similar central (b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote station systems. These installations control, signaling, and power-limited cir- need not comply with the provisions of cuits—(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408(b), except or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or § 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and § 1926.407. power-limited circuits are character- (2) Protective devices—(i) Circuits ex- ized by their usage and electrical power posed to power conductors. Communica- limitation which differentiates them tion circuits so located as to be ex- from light and power circuits. These posed to accidental contact with light circuits are classified in accordance or power conductors operating at over with their respective voltage and power 300 volts shall have each circuit so ex- limitations as summarized in para- posed provided with an approved pro- graphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of tector. this section. (ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor (i) Class 1 circuits—(A) A Class 1 of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna power-limited circuit is supplied from shall be provided with an antenna dis- a source having a rated output of not charge unit or other means that will more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-am- drain static charges from the antenna peres. system. (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit (3) Conductor location—(i) Outside of or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a volt- buildings—(A) Receiving distribution age which does not exceed 600 volts; lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached however, the power output of the to buildings and lead-in conductors to source need not be limited. radio transmitters shall be so installed (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits—(A) as to avoid the possibility of accidental Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is contact with electric light or power limited either inherently (in which no conductors. overcurrent protection is required) or (B) The clearance between lead-in by a combination of a power source and conductors and any lightning protec- overcurrent protection. tion conductors shall not be less than 6 (B) The maximum circuit voltage is feet (1.83 m). 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inher- (ii) On poles. Where practicable, com- ently limited power source, and 100 munication conductors on poles shall volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently be located below the light or power limited power source. conductors. Communications conduc- (C) The maximum circuit voltage is tors shall not be attached to a cross- 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class arm that carries light or power conduc- 2 power source limited by overcurrent tors. protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for (iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor anten- a Class 3 power source limited by over- nas, lead-ins, and other communication current protection. conductors attached as open conduc- (iii) Application. The maximum cir- tors to the inside of buildings shall be cuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from (b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinus- conductors of any light or power or oidal AC or continuous DC power Class 1 circuits unless a special and

245

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00255 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB §§ 1926.409–1926.415 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

equally protective method of conductor (2) In work areas where the exact lo- separation is employed. cation of underground electric (4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal powerlines is unknown, employees structures supporting antennas, as well using jack-hammers, bars, or other as self-supporting antennas such as hand tools which may contact a line vertical rods or dipole structures, shall shall be provided with insulated protec- be located as far away from overhead tive gloves. conductors of electric light and power (3) Before work is begun the em- circuits of over 150 volts to ground as ployer shall ascertain by inquiry or di- necessary to avoid the possibility of rect observation, or by instruments, the antenna or structure falling into or whether any part of an energized elec- making accidental contact with such tric power circuit, exposed or con- circuits. cealed, is so located that the perform- (5) Grounding—(i) Lead-in conductors. ance of the work may bring any person, If exposed to contact with electric tool, or machine into physical or elec- light or power conductors, the metal trical contact with the electric power sheath of aerial cables entering build- circuit. The employer shall post and ings shall be grounded or shall be inter- maintain proper warning signs where rupted close to the entrance to the such a circuit exists. The employer building by an insulating joint or shall advise employees of the location equivalent device. Where protective de- of such lines, the hazards involved, and vices are used, they shall be grounded. the protective measures to be taken. (b) Passageways and open spaces—-(1) (ii) Antenna structures. Masts and Barriers or other means of guarding metal structures supporting antennas shall be provided to ensure that work- shall be permanently and effectively space for electrical equipment will not grounded without splice or connection be used as a passageway during periods in the grounding conductor. when energized parts of electrical (iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmit- equipment are exposed. ters shall be enclosed in a metal frame (2) Working spaces, walkways, and or grill or separated from the operating similar locations shall be kept clear of space by a barrier, all metallic parts of cords so as not to create a hazard to which are effectively connected to employees. ground. All external metal handles and (c) Load ratings. In existing installa- controls accessible to the operating tions, no changes in circuit protection personnel shall be effectively grounded. shall be made to increase the load in Unpowered equipment and enclosures excess of the load rating of the circuit shall be considered grounded where wiring. connected to an attached coaxial cable (d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or with an effectively grounded metallic removed with one or both terminals en- shield. ergized, special tools insulated for the [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 voltage shall be used. FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] (e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or frayed electric cords or cables shall not §§ 1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved] be used. (2) Extension cords shall not be fas- SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES tened with staples, hung from nails, or suspended by wire. § 1926.416 General requirements. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (a) Protection of employees—(1) No em- 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; ployer shall permit an employee to 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, work in such proximity to any part of 1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996] an electric power circuit that the employee could contact the electric power § 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of cir- circuit in the course of work, unless cuits. the employee is protected against elec- (a) Controls. Controls that are to be tric shock by deenergizing the circuit deactivated during the course of work and grounding it or by guarding it ef- on energized or deenergized equipment fectively by insulation or other means. or circuits shall be tagged.

246

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00256 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

(b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment §§ 1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] or circuits that are deenergized shall be rendered inoperative and shall have SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL tags attached at all points where such EQUIPMENT equipment or circuits can be energized. § 1926.441 Batteries and battery charg- (c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to iden- ing. tify plainly the equipment or circuits (a) General requirements—(1) Batteries being worked on. of the unsealed type shall be located in [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, enclosures with outside vents or in well 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; ventilated rooms and shall be arranged 58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, so as to prevent the escape of fumes, 1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]] gases, or electrolyte spray into other areas. §§ 1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] (2) Ventilation shall be provided to ensure diffusion of the gases from the SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND battery and to prevent the accumula- ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS tion of an explosive mixture. (3) Racks and trays shall be substan- § 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. tial and shall be treated to make them The employer shall ensure that all resistant to the electrolyte. wiring components and utilization (4) Floors shall be of acid resistant equipment in hazardous locations are construction unless protected from maintained in a dust-tight, dust-igni- acid accumulations. tion-proof, or explosion-proof condi- (5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber tion, as appropriate. There shall be no gloves shall be provided for workers loose or missing screws, gaskets, handling acids or batteries. threaded connections, seals, or other (6) Facilities for quick drenching of the eyes and body shall be provided impairments to a tight condition. within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery han- § 1926.432 Environmental deteriora- dling areas. tion of equipment. (7) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- (a) Deteriorating agents—(1) Unless trolyte and for fire protection. identified for use in the operating envi- (b) Charging—(1) Battery charging in- ronment, no conductors or equipment stallations shall be located in areas shall be located: designated for that purpose. (i) In damp or wet locations; (2) Charging apparatus shall be pro- (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes, tected from damage by trucks. vapors, liquids, or other agents having (3) When batteries are being charged, a deteriorating effect on the conduc- the vent caps shall be kept in place to tors or equipment; or avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall (iii) Where exposed to excessive tem- be maintained in functioning condi- peratures. tion. (2) Control equipment, utilization §§ 1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] equipment, and busways approved for use in dry locations only shall be pro- DEFINITIONS tected against damage from the weather during building construction. § 1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (b) Protection against corrosion. Metal raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable The definitions given in this section sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, apply to the terms used in subpart K. fittings, supports, and support hard- The definitions given here for ‘‘ap- ware shall be of materials appropriate proved’’ and ‘‘qualified person’’ apply, instead of the definitions given in for the environment in which they are § 1926.32, to the use of these terms in to be installed. subpart K. Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the Assistant

247

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00257 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Secretary of Labor, and approved with- ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- in the meaning of this subpart K: tional Safety and Health. The defini- (a) If it is accepted, or certified, or tion of ‘‘acceptable’’ indicates what is listed, or labeled, or otherwise deter- acceptable to the Assistant Secretary mined to be safe by a qualified testing of Labor, and therefore approved with- laboratory capable of determining the in the meaning of this subpart. suitability of materials and equipment Askarel. A generic term for a group of for installation and use in accordance nonflammable synthetic chlorinated with this standard; or hydrocarbons used as electrical insu- (b) With respect to an installation or lating media. Askarels of various equipment of a kind which no qualified compositional types are used. Under testing laboratory accepts, certifies, arcing conditions the gases produced, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if while consisting predominantly of non- it is inspected or tested by another combustible hydrogen chloride, can in- Federal agency, or by a State, munic- clude varying amounts of combustible ipal, or other local authority respon- gases depending upon the askarel type. sible for enforcing occupational safety Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A de- provisions of the National Electrical vice which, by insertion in a recep- Code, and found in compliance with tacle, establishes connection between those provisions; or the conductors of the attached flexible (c) With respect to custom-made cord and the conductors connected per- equipment or related installations manently to the receptacle. which are designed, fabricated for, and Automatic. Self-acting, operating by intended for use by a particular cus- its own mechanism when actuated by tomer, if it is determined to be safe for some impersonal influence, as for exits intended use by its manufacturer on ample, a change in current strength, the basis of test data which the em- pressure, temperature, or mechanical ployer keeps and makes available for configuration. inspection to the Assistant Secretary Bare conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ and his authorized representatives. Bonding. The permanent joining of Accepted. An installation is ‘‘accept- metallic parts to form an electrically ed’’ if it has been inspected and found conductive path which will assure elec- to be safe by a qualified testing labora- trical continuity and the capacity to tory. conduct safely any current likely to be Accessible. (As applied to wiring imposed. methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without damaging the building Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor structure or finish, or not permanently to assure the required electrical con- closed in by the structure or finish of ductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected. the building. (See ‘‘concealed’’ and ‘‘exposed.’’) Branch circuit. The circuit conductors Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) between the final overcurrent device Admitting close approach; not guarded protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). by locked doors, elevation, or other ef- Building. A structure which stands fective means. (See‘‘Readily acces- alone or which is cut off from adjoining sible.’’) structures by fire walls with all open- Ampacity. The current in amperes a ings therein protected by approved fire conductor can carry continuously doors. under the conditions of use without ex- Cabinet. An enclosure designed either ceeding its temperature rating. for surface or flush mounting, and pro- Appliances. Utilization equipment, vided with a frame, mat, or trim in generally other than industrial, nor- which a swinging door or doors are or mally built in standardized sizes or may be hung. types, which is installed or connecetcd Certified. Equipment is ‘‘certified’’ if as a unit to perform one or more func- it: tions. (a) Has been tested and found by a Approved. Acceptable to the author- qualified testing laboratory to meet ity enforcing this subpart. The author- applicable test standards or to be safe ity enforcing this subpart is the Assist- for use in a specified manner, and

248

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00258 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

(b) Is of a kind whose production is (1) In which volatile flammable liq- periodically inspected by a qualified uids or flammable gases are handled, testing laboratory. Certified equipment processed, or used, but in which the must bear a label, tag, or other record hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will of certification. normally be confined within closed Circuit breaker—(a) (600 volts nomi- containers or closed systems from nal, or less.) A device designed to open which they can escape only in case of and close a circuit by nonautomatic accidental rupture or breakdown of means and to open the circuit auto- such containers or systems, or in case matically on a predetermined overcur- of abnormal operation of equipment; or rent without injury to itself when (2) In which ignitible concentrations properly applied within its rating. of gases or vapors are normally pre- (b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A vented by positive mechanical ventila- switching device capable of making, tion, and which might become haz- carrying, and breaking currents under ardous through failure or abnormal op- normal circuit conditions, and also erations of the ventilating equipment; making, carrying for a specified time, or and breaking currents under specified (3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Divi- abnormal circuit conditions, such as sion 1 location, and to which ignitible those of short circuit. concentrations of gases or vapors Class I locations. Class I locations are might occasionally be communicated those in which flammable gases or va- unless such communication is pre- pors are or may be present in the air in vented by adequate positive-pressure quantities sufficient to produce explo- ventilation from a source of clean air, sive or ignitible mixtures. Class I loca- and effective safeguards against ven- tions include the following: tilation failure are provided. (a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Divi- sion 1 location is a location: NOTE: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids (1) In which ignitible concentrations or flammable gases or vapors are used, but of flammable gases or vapors may exist which would become hazardous only in case under normal operating conditions; or of an accident or of some unusual operating (2) In which ignitible concentrations condition. The quantity of flammable mate- of such gases or vapors may exist fre- rial that might escape in case of accident, quently because of repair or mainte- the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the nance operations or because of leakage; total area involved, and the record of the in- or dustry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consider- (3) In which breakdown or faulty op- ation in determining the classification and eration of equipment or processes extent of each location. might release ignitible concentrations Piping without valves, checks, meters, and of flammable gases or vapors, and similar devices would not ordinarily intro- might also cause simultaneous failure duce a hazardous condition even though used of electric equipment. for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or NOTE: This classification usually includes of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed locations where volatile flammable liquids containers would not normally be considered or liquefied flammable gases are transferred hazardous unless also subject to other haz- from one container to another; interiors of ardous conditions. spray booths and areas in the vicinity of Electrical conduits and their associated spraying and painting operations where vola- enclosures separated from process fluids by a tile flammable solvents are used; locations single seal or barrier are classed as a Divi- containing open tanks or vats of volatile sion 2 location if the outside of the conduit flammable liquids; drying rooms or compart- and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. ments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms Class II locations. Class II locations for flammable gas or for volatile flammable are those that are hazardous because of liquids; and all other locations where ignit- the presence of combustible dust. Class ible concentrations of flammable vapors or II locations include the following: gases are likely to occur in the course of nor- (a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Di- mal operations. vision 1 location is a location: (b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Divi- (1) In which combustible dust is or sion 2 location is a location: may be in suspension in the air under

249

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00259 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

normal operating conditions, in quan- the presence of easily ignitible fibers tities sufficient to produce explosive or or flyings but in which such fibers or ignitible mixtures; or flyings are not likely to be in suspen- (2) Where mechanical failure or ab- sion in the air in quantities sufficient normal operation of machinery or to produce ignitible mixtures. Class 111 equipment might cause such explosive locations include the following: or ignitible mixtures to be produced, (a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, and might also provide a source of igni- Division 1 location is a location in tion through simultaneous failure of which easily ignitible fibers or mate- electric equipment, operation of pro- rials producing combustible flyings are tection devices, or from other causes, handled, manufactured, or used. or NOTE: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings in- (3) In which combustible dusts of an clude rayon, cotton (including cotton linters electrically conductive nature may be and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, present. jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, saw- NOTE: Combustible dusts which are elec- dust, woodchips, and other material of simi- trically nonconductive include dusts pro- lar nature. duced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and (b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulver- Division 2 location is a location in ized spices, starch and pastes, potato and which easily ignitible fibers are stored woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed, or handled, except in process of manu- dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when proc- facture. essed or handled. Dusts containing magne- Collector ring. A collector ring is an sium or aluminum are particularly haz- assembly of slip rings for transferring ardous and the use of extreme caution is nec- electrical energy from a stationary to essary to avoid ignition and explosion. a rotating member. (b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Di- Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by vision 2 location is a location in which: the structure or finish of the building. (1) Combustible dust will not nor- Wires in concealed raceways are con- mally be in suspension in the air in sidered concealed, even though they quantities sufficient to produce explo- may become accessible by withdrawing sive or ignitible mixtures, and dust ac- them. [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to cumulations are normally insufficient wiring methods.)’’] to interfere with the normal operation Conductor—(a) Bare. A conductor hav- of electrical equipment or other appa- ing no covering or electrical insulation ratus; or whatsoever. (2) Dust may be in suspension in the (b) Covered. A conductor encased air as a result of infrequent malfunc- within material of composition or tioning of handling or processing thickness that is not recognized as equipment, and dust accumulations re- electrical insulation. sulting therefrom may be ignitible by (c) Insulated. A conductor encased abnormal operation or failure of elec- within material of composition and trical equipment or other apparatus. thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation. NOTE: This classification includes loca- Controller. A device or group of de- tions where dangerous concentrations of sus- vices that serves to govern, in some pended dust would not be likely but where predetermined manner, the electric dust accumulations might form on or in the power delivered to the apparatus to vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appre- which it is connected. ciable quantities of dust would escape under Covered conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ abnormal operating conditions or be adja- Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An cent to a Class II Division 1 location, as de- assembly of a fuse support with either scribed above, into which an explosive or ig- a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or dis- nitible concentration of dust may be put into connecting blade. The fuseholder or suspension under abnormal operating condi- fuse carrier may include a conducting tions. element (fuse link), or may act as the Class III locations. Class III locations disconnecting blade by the inclusion of are those that are hazardous because of a nonfusible member.

250

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00260 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

Cutout box. An enclosure designed for Exposed. (As applied to wiring meth- surface mounting and having swinging ods.) On or attached to the surface or doors or covers secured directly to and behind panels designed to allow access. telescoping with the walls of the box [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to wiring proper. (See ‘‘Cabinet.’’) methods.)’’] Damp location. See ‘‘Location.’’ Exposed. (For the purposes of Dead front. Without live parts ex- § 1926.408(d), Communications systems.) posed to a person on the operating side Where the circuit is in such a position of the equipment. that in case of failure of supports or in- Device. A unit of an electrical system sulation, contact with another circuit which is intended to carry but not uti- may result. lize electric energy. Externally operable. Capable of being Disconnecting means. A device, or operated without exposing the operator group of devices, or other means by to contact with live parts. which the conductors of a circuit can Feeder. All circuit conductors be- be disconnected from their source of tween the service equipment, or the supply. generator switchboard of an isolated Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. plant, and the final branch-circuit (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical overcurrent device. switching device used for isolating a Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor circuit or equipment from a source of lights suspended between two points power. more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart. Dry location. See ‘‘Location.’’ Fitting. An accessory such as a lock- Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, hous- nut, bushing, or other part of a wiring ing, fence or walls which will prevent system that is intended primarily to persons from accidentally contacting perform a mechanical rather than an energized parts. electrical function. Enclosure. The case or housing of ap- Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An paratus, or the fence or walls sur- overcurrent protective device with a rounding an installation to prevent circuit opening fusible part that is personnel from accidentally contacting heated and severed by the passage of energized parts, or to protect the overcurrent through it. A fuse com- equipment from physical damage. prises all the parts that form a unit ca- Equipment. A general term including pable of performing the prescribed material, fittings, devices, appliances, functions. It may or may not be the fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used complete device necessary to connect as a part of, or in connection with, an it into an electrical circuit. electrical installation. Ground. A conducting connection, Equipment grounding conductor. See whether intentional or accidental, be- ‘‘Grounding conductor, equipment.’’ tween an electrical circuit or equip- Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus ment and the earth, or to some con- enclosed in a case that is capable of ducting body that serves in place of the withstanding an explosion of a speci- earth. fied gas or vapor which may occur Grounded. Connected to earth or to within it and of preventing the ignition some conducting body that serves in of a specified gas or vapor surrounding place of the earth. the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or ex- Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts, plosion of the gas or vapor within, and nominal.) Permanently connected to which operates at such an external earth through a ground connection of temperature that it will not ignite a sufficiently low impedance and having surrounding flammable atmosphere. sufficient ampacity that ground fault Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) current which may occur cannot build Capable of being inadvertently touched up to voltages dangerous to personnel. or approached nearer than a safe dis- Grounded conductor. A system or cir- tance by a person. It is applied to parts cuit conductor that is intentionally not suitably guarded, isolated, or insu- grounded. lated. (See ‘‘Accessible and ‘‘Con- Grounding conductor. A conductor cealed.’’) used to connect equipment or the

251

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00261 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

grounded circuit of a wiring system to wiring in which any spark or thermal a grounding electrode or electrodes. effect, produced either normally or in Grounding conductor, equipment. The specified fault conditions, is incapable, conductor used to connect the noncur- under certain prescribed test condi- rent-carrying metal parts of equip- tions, of causing ignition of a mixture ment, raceways, and other enclosures of flammable or combustible material to the system grounded conductor and/ in air in its most easily ignitible con- or the grounding electrode conductor centration. at the service equipment or at the Isolated. Not readily accessible to source of a separately derived system. persons unless special means for access Grounding electrode conductor. The are used. conductor used to connect the ground- Isolated power system. A system coming electrode to the equipment ground- prising an isolating transformer or its ing conductor and/or to the grounded equivalent, a line isolation monitor, conductor of the circuit at the service and its ungrounded circuit conductors. equipment or at the source of a sepa- Labeled. Equipment or materials to rately derived system. which has been attached a label, sym- Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A de- bol or other identifying mark of a vice for the protection of personnel qualified testing laboratory which indi- that functions to deenergize a circuit cates compliance with appropriate or portion thereof within an estab- standards or performance in a specified lished period of time when a current to manner. ground exceeds some predetermined Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for value that is less than that required to the direct connection of a lampholder, operate the overcurrent protective de- a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord vice of the supply circuit. terminating in a lampholder. Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by Listed. Equipment or materials in- means of suitable covers, casings, bar- cluded in a list published by a qualified riers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms testing laboratory whose listing states to remove the likelihood of approach either that the equipment or material to a point of danger or contact by per- meets appropriate standards or has sons or objects. been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical opening or Location—(a) Damp location. Partially space in which an elevator or dumb- protected locations under canopies, waiter is designed to operate. marquees, roofed open porches, and Identified (conductors or terminals). like locations, and interior locations Identified, as used in reference to a subject to moderate degrees of mois- conductor or its terminal, means that ture, such as some basements. such conductor or terminal can be rec- (b) Dry location. A location not nor- ognized as grounded. mally subject to dampness or wetness. Identified (for the use). Recognized as A location classified as dry may be suitable for the specific purpose, func- temporarily subject to dampness or tion, use, environment, application, wetness, as in the case of a building etc. where described as a requirement under construction. in this standard. Suitability of equip- (c) Wet location. Installations under- ment for a specific purpose, environ- ground or in concrete slabs or masonry ment, or application is determined by a in direct contact with the earth, and qualified testing laboratory where such locations subject to saturation with identification includes labeling or list- water or other liquids, such as loca- ing. tions exposed to weather and unpro- Insulated conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ tected. Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment nominal.) A switch capable of making, mounted on a permanent base with carrying, and interrupting specified wheels and/or casters for moving while currents. completely assembled. Intrinsically safe equipment and associ- Motor control center. An assembly of ated wiring. Equipment and associated one or more enclosed sections having a

252

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00262 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.449

common power bus and principally con- Qualified person. One familiar with taining motor control units. the construction and operation of the Outlet. A point on the wiring system equipment and the hazards involved. at which current is taken to supply Qualified testing laboratory. A prop- utilization equipment. erly equipped and staffed testing lab- Overcurrent. Any current in excess of oratory which has capabilities for and the rated current of equipment or the which provides the following services: ampacity of a conductor. It may result (a) Experimental testing for safety of from overload (see definition), short specified items of equipment and mate- circuit, or ground fault. A current in rials referred to in this standard to de- excess of rating may be accommodated termine compliance with appropriate by certain equipment and conductors test standards or performance in a for a given set of conditions. Hence the specified manner; rules for overcurrent protection are (b) Inspecting the run of such items specific for particular situations. of equipment and materials at fac- Overload. Operation of equipment in tories for product evaluation to assure excess of normal, full load rating, or of compliance with the test standards; a conductor in excess of rated (c) Service-value determinations ampacity which, when it persists for a through field inspections to monitor sufficient length of time, would cause the proper use of labels on products damage or dangerous overheating. A and with authority for recall of the fault, such as a short circuit or ground label in the event a hazardous product fault, is not an overload. is installed; (See‘‘Overcurrent.’’) (d) Employing a controlled procedure Panelboard. A single panel or group of for identifying the listed and/or labeled panel units designed for assembly in equipment or materials tested; and the form of a single panel; including (e) Rendering creditable reports or buses, automatic overcurrent devices, findings that are objective and without and with or without switches for the bias of the tests and test methods em- control of light, heat, or power cir- ployed. cuits; designed to be placed in a cabi- Raceway. A channel designed ex- net or cutout box placed in or against pressly for holding wires, cables, or a wall or partition and accessible only busbars, with additional functions as from the front. (See ‘‘Switchboard.’’) permitted in this subpart. Raceways Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment de- may be of metal or insulating material, signed to be hand-carried. and the term includes rigid metal con- Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, inter- See ‘‘Fuse.’’ mediate metal conduit, liquidtight Power outlet. An enclosed assembly flexible metal conduit, flexible metal- which may include receptacles, circuit lic tubing, flexible metal conduit, elec- breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, trical metallic tubing, underfloor race- buses and watt-hour meter mounting ways, cellular concrete floor raceways, means; intended to serve as a means cellular metal floor raceways, surface for distributing power required to oper- raceways, wireways, and busways. ate mobile or temporarily installed Readily accessible. Capable of being equipment. reached quickly for operation, renewal, Premises wiring system. That interior or inspections, without requiring those and exterior wiring, including power, to whom ready access is requisite to lighting, control, and signal circuit climb over or remove obstacles or to wiring together with all of its associ- resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. ated hardware, fittings, and wiring de- (See ‘‘Accessible.’’) vices, both permanently and tempo- Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact rarily installed, which extends from device installed at the outlet for the the load end of the service drop, or load connection of a single attachment end of the service lateral conductors to plug. A single receptacle is a single the outlet(s). Such wiring does not in- contact device with no other contact clude wiring internal to appliances, fix- device on the same yoke. A multiple tures, motors, controllers, motor con- receptacle is a single device containing trol centers, and similar equipment. two or more receptacles.

253

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00263 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.449 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one constitute the main control and means or more receptacles are installed. of cutoff of the supply. Remote-control circuit. Any electric Service raceway. The raceway that en- circuit that controls any other circuit closes the service-entrance conductors. through a relay or an equivalent de- Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit vice. that energizes signaling equipment. Sealable equipment. Equipment en- Switchboard. A large single panel, closed in a case or cabinet that is pro- frame, or assembly of panels which vided with a means of sealing or lock- have switches, buses, instruments, ing so that live parts cannot be made overcurrent and other protective de- accessible without opening the enclo- vices mounted on the face or back or sure. The equipment may or may not both. Switchboards are generally ac- be operable without opening the enclo- cessible from the rear as well as from sure. the front and are not intended to be in- Separately derived system. A premises stalled in cabinets. (See ‘‘Panelboard.’’) wiring system whose power is derived from generator, transformer, or con- Switches—(a) General-use switch. A verter windings and has no direct elec- switch intended for use in general dis- trical connection, including a solidly tribution and branch circuits. It is connected grounded circuit conductor, rated in amperes, and it is capable of to supply conductors originating in an- interrupting its rated current at its other system. rated voltage. Service. The conductors and equip- (b) General-use snap switch. A form of ment for delivering energy from the general-use switch so constructed that electricity supply system to the wiring it can be installed in flush device boxes system of the premises served. or on outlet box covers, or otherwise Service conductors. The supply con- used in conjunction with wiring sys- ductors that extend from the street tems recognized by this subpart. main or from transformers to the serv- (c) Isolating switch. A switch intended ice equipment of the premises supplied. for isolating an electric circuit from Service drop. The overhead service the source of power. It has no inter- conductors from the last pole or other rupting rating, and it is intended to be aerial support to and including the operated only after the circuit has been splices, if any, connecting to the serv- opened by some other means. ice-entrance conductors at the building (d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, or other structure. rated in horsepower, capable of inter- Service-entrance conductors, overhead rupting the maximum operating over- system. The service conductors between load current of a motor of the same the terminals of the service equipment horsepower rating as the switch at the and a point usually outside the build- rated voltage. ing, clear of building walls, where Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, joined by tap or splice to the service nominal.) Devices designed to close drop. and/or open one or more electric cir- Service-entrance conductors, under- cuits. Included in this category are cir- ground system. The service conductors cuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting between the terminals of the service (or isolating) switches, disconnecting equipment and the point of connection means, and interrupter switches. to the service lateral. Where service equipment is located outside the build- Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment ing walls, there may be no service-en- installed in a vehicle or that may read- trance conductors, or they may be en- ily be disassembled for transport in a tirely outside the building. vehicle. Service equipment. The necessary Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment, usually consisting of a cir- equipment means equipment which uti- cuit breaker or switch and fuses, and lizes electric energy for mechanical, their accessories, located near the chemical, heating, lighting, or similar point of entrance of supply conductors useful purpose. to a building or other structure, or an Utilization system. A utilization sys- otherwise defined area, and intended to tem is a system which provides electric

254

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00264 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.450

power and light for employee work- § 1926.450 Scope, application and defi- places, and includes the premises wir- nitions applicable to this subpart. ing system and utilization equipment. (a) Scope and application. This sub- Ventilated. Provided with a means to part applies to all scaffolds used in permit circulation of air sufficient to workplaces covered by this part. It remove an excess of heat, fumes, or va- does not apply to crane or derrick sus- pors. pended personnel platforms. The cri- Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable teria for aerial lifts are set out exclu- liquid having a flash point below 38 de- sively in § 1926.453. grees C (100 degrees F) or whose tem- (b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension perature is above its flash point, or a scaffold means a suspension scaffold Class II combustible liquid having a equipped with a hoist(s) that can be op- vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia erated by an employee(s) on the scaf- (276 kPa) at 38 °C (100 °F) whose tem- fold. perature is above its flash point. Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest transverse scaffold member (which root-mean-square (effective) difference may be supported by ledgers or run- of potential between any two conduc- ners) upon which the scaffold platform tors of the circuit concerned. rests and which joins scaffold uprights, Voltage, nominal. A nominal value as- posts, poles, and similar members. signed to a circuit or system for the Boatswains’ chair means a single- purpose of conveniently designating its point adjustable suspension scaffold voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, consisting of a seat or sling designed to etc.). The actual voltage at which a cir- support one employee in a sitting posi- cuit operates can vary from the nomi- tion. nal within a range that permits satis- Body belt (safety belt) means a strap factory operation of equipment. with means both for securing it about Voltage to ground. For grounded cir- the waist and for attaching it to a lan- cuits, the voltage between the given yard, lifeline, or deceleration device. conductor and that point or conductor Body harness means a design of straps of the circuit that is grounded; for which may be secured about the em- ungrounded circuits, the greatest volt- ployee in a manner to distribute the age between the given conductor and fall arrest forces over at least the any other conductor of the circuit. thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoul- Watertight. So constructed that mois- ders, with means for attaching it to ture will not enter the enclosure. other components of a personal fall arrest system. Weatherproof. So constructed or pro- Brace means a rigid connection that tected that exposure to the weather holds one scaffold member in a fixed will not interfere with successful oper- position with respect to another mem- ation. Rainproof, raintight, or water- ber, or to a building or structure. tight equipment can fulfill the require- Bricklayers’ square scaffold means a ments for weatherproof where varying supported scaffold composed of framed weather conditions other than wetness, squares which support a platform. such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature Carpenters’ bracket scaffold means a extremes, are not a factor. supported scaffold consisting of a plat- Wet location. See ‘‘Location.’’ form supported by brackets attached to building or structural walls. Subpart L—Scaffolds Catenary scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a platform sup- AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, ported by two essentially horizontal 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 1–90 (55 and parallel ropes attached to struc- FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR tural members of a building or other 3912); and 29 CFR part 1911. structure. Additional support may be SOURCE: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless provided by vertical pickups. otherwise noted. Chimney hoist means a multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold used to

255

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00265 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.450 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

provide access to work inside chim- from contact. Such lines do not include neys. (See ‘‘Multi-point adjustable sus- extension cords or power tool cords. pension scaffold’’.) Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or Cleat means a structural block used without a thimble at the end of a wire at the end of a platform to prevent the rope. platform from slipping off its supports. Fabricated decking and planking Cleats are also used to provide footing means manufactured platforms made on sloped surfaces such as crawling of wood (including laminated wood, and boards. solid sawn wood planks), metal or Competent person means one who is other materials. capable of identifying existing and pre- Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular dictable hazards in the surroundings or welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold working conditions which are unsani- consisting of a platform(s) supported tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- on fabricated end frames with integral ployees, and who has authorization to posts, horizontal bearers, and inter- take prompt corrective measures to mediate members. eliminate them. Failure means load refusal, breakage, Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) or separation of component parts. Load means a two- point or multi-point ad- refusal is the point where the ultimate justable suspension scaffold con- strength is exceeded. Float (ship) scaffold means a suspen- structed using a series of inter- sion scaffold consisting of a braced connected braced scaffold members or platform resting on two parallel bear- supporting structures erected to form a ers and hung from overhead supports continuous scaffold. by ropes of fixed length. Coupler means a device for locking Form scaffold means a supported scaf- together the tubes of a tube and cou- fold consisting of a platform supported pler scaffold. by brackets attached to formwork. Crawling board (chicken ladder) means Guardrail system means a vertical bar- a supported scaffold consisting of a rier, consisting of, but not limited to, plank with cleats spaced and secured to toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to provide footing, for use on sloped sur- prevent employees from falling off a faces such as roofs. scaffold platform or walkway to lower Deceleration device means any mecha- levels. nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch Hoist means a manual or power-oper- lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- ated mechanical device to raise or ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic lower a suspended scaffold. self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which Horse scaffold means a supported scaf- dissipates a substantial amount of en- fold consisting of a platform supported ergy during a fall arrest or limits the by construction horses (saw horses). energy imposed on an employee during Horse scaffolds constructed of metal fall arrest. are sometimes known as trestle scaf- Double pole (independent pole) scaffold folds. means a supported scaffold consisting Independent pole scaffold (see ‘‘Double of a platform(s) resting on cross beams pole scaffold’’). (bearers) supported by ledgers and a Interior hung scaffold means a suspen- double row of uprights independent of sion scaffold consisting of a platform support (except ties, guys, braces) from suspended from the ceiling or roof any structure. structure by fixed length supports. Equivalent means alternative designs, Ladder jack scaffold means a sup- materials or methods to protect ported scaffold consisting of a platform against a hazard which the employer resting on brackets attached to lad- can demonstrate will provide an equal ders. or greater degree of safety for employ- Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed- ees than the methods, materials or de- size, self-supporting ladder consisting signs specified in the standard. of a wide flat tread ladder in the form Exposed power lines means electrical of stairs. power lines which are accessible to em- Landing means a platform at the end ployees and which are not shielded of a flight of stairs.

256

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00266 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.450

Large area scaffold means a pole scaf- Open sides and ends means the edges fold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems of a platform that are more than 14 scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold inches (36 cm) away horizontally from erected over substantially the entire a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface work area. For example: a scaffold (such as a building wall) or a sturdy, erected over the entire floor area of a continuous horizontal surface (such as room. a floor), or a point of access. Exception: Lean-to scaffold means a supported For plastering and lathing operations scaffold which is kept erect by tilting the horizontal threshold distance is 18 it toward and resting it against a inches (46 cm). building or structure. Outrigger means the structural mem- Lifeline means a component con- ber of a supported scaffold used to in- sisting of a flexible line that connects crease the base width of a scaffold in to an anchorage at one end to hang order to provide support for and in- vertically (vertical lifeline), or that creased stability of the scaffold. connects to anchorages at both ends to Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the stretch horizontally (horizontal life- structural member of a suspension line), and which serves as a means for scaffold or outrigger scaffold which connecting other components of a per- provides support for the scaffold by ex- sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- tending the scaffold point of attach- age. ment to a point out and away from the Lower levels means areas below the structure or building. level where the employee is located Outrigger scaffold means a supported and to which an employee can fall. scaffold consisting of a platform rest- Such areas include, but are not limited ing on outrigger beams (thrustouts) to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, projecting beyond the wall or face of runways, excavations, pits, tanks, ma- the building or structure, the inboard terials, water, and equipment. ends of which are secured inside the Masons’ adjustable supported scaffold building or structure. (see ‘‘Self-contained adjustable scaffold’’). Overhand bricklaying means the proc- Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- ess of laying bricks and masonry units sion scaffold means a continuous run such that the surface of the wall to be suspension scaffold designed and used jointed is on the opposite side of the for masonry operations. wall from the mason, requiring the Maximum intended load means the mason to lean over the wall to com- total load of all persons, equipment, plete the work. It includes mason tend- tools, materials, transmitted loads, ing and electrical installation incor- and other loads reasonably anticipated porated into the brick wall during the to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold overhand bricklaying process. component at any one time. Personal fall arrest system means a Mobile scaffold means a powered or system used to arrest an employee’s unpowered, portable, caster or wheel- fall. It consists of an anchorage, con- mounted supported scaffold. nectors, a body belt or body harness Multi-level suspended scaffold means a and may include a lanyard, decelera- two-point or multi-point adjustable tion device, lifeline, or combinations of suspension scaffold with a series of these. platforms at various levels resting on Platform means a work surface ele- common stirrups. vated above lower levels. Platforms Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- can be constructed using individual fold means a suspension scaffold con- wood planks, fabricated planks, fab- sisting of a platform(s) which is sus- ricated decks, and fabricated plat- pended by more than two ropes from forms. overhead supports and equipped with Pole scaffold (see definitions for means to raise and lower the platform ‘‘Single-pole scaffold’’ and ‘‘Double to desired work levels. Such scaffolds (independent) pole scaffold’’). include chimney hoists. Power operated hoist means a hoist Needle beam scaffold means a platform which is powered by other than human suspended from needle beams. energy.

257

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00267 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.450 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Pump jack scaffold means a supported movement of the platform to desired scaffold consisting of a platform sup- work levels. ported by vertical poles and movable Single-pole scaffold means a supported support brackets. scaffold consisting of a platform(s) Qualified means one who, by posses- resting on bearers, the outside ends of sion of a recognized degree, certificate, which are supported on runners secured or professional standing, or who by ex- to a single row of posts or uprights, and tensive knowledge, training, and expe- the inner ends of which are supported rience, has successfully demonstrated on or in a structure or building wall. his/her ability to solve or resolve prob- Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) lems related to the subject matter, the means a tower comprised of scaffold work, or the project. components and which contains inter- Rated load means the manufacturer’s nal stairway units and rest platforms. specified maximum load to be lifted by These towers are used to provide access a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or to scaffold platforms and other ele- scaffold component. vated points such as floors and roofs. Repair bracket scaffold means a sup- Stall load means the load at which ported scaffold consisting of a platform the prime-mover of a power-operated supported by brackets which are se- hoist stalls or the power to the prime- cured in place around the circum- mover is automatically disconnected. ference or perimeter of a chimney, Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf- stack, tank or other supporting struc- fold means a platform resting directly ture by one or more wire ropes placed on the rungs of step ladders or trestle around the supporting structure. ladders. Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop Stilts means a pair of poles or similar supported scaffold consisting of a plat- supports with raised footrests, used to form resting on angular-shaped sup- permit walking above the ground or ports. working surface. Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the lengthwise horizontal spacing or brac- Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable sus- ing member which may support the pension scaffold means a continuous run bearers. suspension scaffold designed and used for stonesetters’ operations. Scaffold means any temporary elevated platform (supported or sus- Supported scaffold means one or more pended) and its supporting structure platforms supported by outrigger (including points of anchorage), used beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights, for supporting employees or materials posts, frames, or similar rigid support. or both. Suspension scaffold means one or Self-contained adjustable scaffold more platforms suspended by ropes or means a combination supported and other non-rigid means from an over- suspension scaffold consisting of an ad- head structure(s). justable platform(s) mounted on an System scaffold means a scaffold con- independent supporting frame(s) not a sisting of posts with fixed connection part of the object being worked on, and points that accept runners, bearers, which is equipped with a means to per- and diagonals that can be intermit the raising and lowering of the connected at predetermined levels. platform(s). Such systems include roll- Tank builders’ scaffold means a sup- ing roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems, ported scaffold consisting of a platform and some masons’ adjustable supported resting on brackets that are either di- scaffolds. rectly attached to a cylindrical tank or Shore scaffold means a supported scaf- attached to devices that are attached fold which is placed against a building to such a tank. or structure and held in place with Top plate bracket scaffold means a props. scaffold supported by brackets that Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- hook over or are attached to the top of fold means a suspension scaffold con- a wall. This type of scaffold is similar sisting of a platform suspended by one to carpenters’ bracket scaffolds and rope from an overhead support and form scaffolds and is used in residen- equipped with means to permit the tial construction for setting trusses.

258

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00268 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

Tube and coupler scaffold means a sup- the tipping moment imposed by the ported or suspended scaffold consisting scaffold operating at the stall load of of a platform(s) supported by tubing, the hoist, whichever is greater. erected with coupling devices con- (3) Each suspension rope, including necting uprights, braces, bearers, and connecting hardware, used on non-ad- runners. justable suspension scaffolds shall be Tubular welded frame scaffold (see capable of supporting, without failure, ‘‘Fabricated frame scaffold’’). at least 6 times the maximum intended Two-point suspension scaffold (swing load applied or transmitted to that stage) means a suspension scaffold con- rope. sisting of a platform supported by (4) Each suspension rope, including hangers (stirrups) suspended by two connecting hardware, used on adjust- ropes from overhead supports and able suspension scaffolds shall be capa- equipped with means to permit the ble of supporting, without failure, at raising and lowering of the platform to least 6 times the maximum intended desired work levels. load applied or transmitted to that Unstable objects means items whose rope with the scaffold operating at ei- strength, configuration, or lack of stability may allow them to become dis- ther the rated load of the hoist, or 2 located and shift and therefore may (minimum) times the stall load of the not properly support the loads imposed hoist, whichever is greater. on them. Unstable objects do not con- (5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist stitute a safe base support for scaf- shall not exceed 3 times its rated load. folds, platforms, or employees. Exam- (6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a ples include, but are not limited to, qualified person and shall be con- barrels, boxes, loose brick, and constructed and loaded in accordance with crete blocks. that design. Non-mandatory appendix Vertical pickup means a rope used to A to this subpart contains examples of support the horizontal rope in catenary criteria that will enable an employer scaffolds. to comply with paragraph (a) of this Walkway means a portion of a scaf- section. fold platform used only for access and (b) Scaffold platform construction. (1) not as a work level. Each platform on all working levels of Window jack scaffold means a plat- scaffolds shall be fully planked or form resting on a bracket or jack decked between the front uprights and which projects through a window open- the guardrail supports as follows: ing. (i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold [61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 75 plank, fabricated plank, fabricated FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010] deck, or fabricated platform) shall be installed so that the space between ad- § 1926.451 General requirements. jacent units and the space between the This section does not apply to aerial platform and the uprights is no more lifts, the criteria for which are set out than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where exclusively in § 1926.453. the employer can demonstrate that a (a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in wider space is necessary (for example, paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5) to fit around uprights when side brack- and (g) of this section, each scaffold ets are used to extend the width of the and scaffold component shall be capa- platform). ble of supporting, without failure, its (ii) Where the employer makes the own weight and at least 4 times the demonstration provided for in para- maximum intended load applied or graph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the plat- transmitted to it. form shall be planked or decked as (2) Direct connections to roofs and fully as possible and the remaining floors, and counterweights used to bal- open space between the platform and ance adjustable suspension scaffolds, the uprights shall not exceed 91⁄2 inches shall be capable of resisting at least 4 (24.1 cm). times the tipping moment imposed by Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The re- the scaffold operating at the rated load quirement in paragraph (b)(1) to proof the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times vide full planking or decking does not

259

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00269 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

apply to platforms used solely as walk- (5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or ways or solely by employees per- less in length shall not extend over its forming scaffold erection or disman- support more than 12 inches (30 cm) un- tling. In these situations, only the less the platform is designed and in- planking that the employer establishes stalled so that the cantilevered portion is necessary to provide safe working of the platform is able to support em- conditions is required. ployees and/or materials without tip- (2) Except as provided in paragraphs ping, or has guardrails which block em- (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section, ployee access to the cantilevered end. each scaffold platform and walkway (ii) Each platform greater than 10 shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide. feet in length shall not extend over its (i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top support more than 18 inches (46 cm), plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket unless it is designed and installed so scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall that the cantilevered portion of the be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. platform is able to support employees There is no minimum width require- without tipping, or has guardrails ment for boatswains’ chairs. which block employee access to the cantilevered end. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to (6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks an administrative stay effective November are abutted to create a long platform, 29, 1996 and published in the FEDERAL REG- each abutted end shall rest on a sepa- ISTER on November 25, 1996, the requirement rate support surface. This provision in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaffolds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed does not preclude the use of common until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking support members, such as ‘‘T’’ sec- regarding the minimum width of roof brack- tions, to support abutting planks, or et scaffolds has been completed, whichever is hook on platforms designed to rest on later. common supports. (7) On scaffolds where platforms are (ii) Where scaffolds must be used in overlapped to create a long platform, areas that the employer can dem- the overlap shall occur only over sup- onstrate are so narrow that platforms ports, and shall not be less than 12 and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and nailed together or otherwise restrained walkways shall be as wide as feasible, to prevent movement. and employees on those platforms and (8) At all points of a scaffold where walkways shall be protected from fall the platform changes direction, such as hazards by the use of guardrails and/or turning a corner, any platform that personal fall arrest systems. rests on a bearer at an angle other than (3) Except as provided in paragraphs a right angle shall be laid first, and (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the platforms which rest at right angles front edge of all platforms shall not be over the same bearer shall be laid sec- more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the ond, on top of the first platform. face of the work, unless guardrail sys- (9) Wood platforms shall not be cov- tems are erected along the front edge ered with opaque finishes, except that and/or personal fall arrest systems are platform edges may be covered or used in accordance with paragraph (g) marked for identification. Platforms of this section to protect employees may be coated periodically with wood from falling. preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, (i) The maximum distance from the and slip-resistant finishes; however, face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 the coating may not obscure the top or inches (8 cm); bottom wood surfaces. (ii) The maximum distance from the (10) Scaffold components manufac- face for plastering and lathing oper- tured by different manufacturers shall ations shall be 18 inches (46 cm). not be intermixed unless the compo- (4) Each end of a platform, unless nents fit together without force and cleated or otherwise restrained by the scaffold’s structural integrity is hooks or equivalent means, shall ex- maintained by the user. Scaffold com- tend over the centerline of its support ponents manufactured by different at least 6 inches (15 cm). manufacturers shall not be modified in

260

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00270 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

order to intermix them unless a com- (iv) Front-end loaders and similar petent person determines the resulting pieces of equipment shall not be used scaffold is structurally sound. to support scaffold platforms unless (11) Scaffold components made of dis- they have been specifically designed by similar metals shall not be used to- the manufacturer for such use. gether unless a competent person has (v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to determined that galvanic action will support scaffold platforms unless the not reduce the strength of any compo- entire platform is attached to the fork nent to a level below that required by and the fork-lift is not moved hori- paragraph (a)(1) of this section. zontally while the platform is occu- (c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1) pied. Supported scaffolds with a height to (3) Supported scaffold poles, legs, base width (including outrigger sup- posts, frames, and uprights shall be ports, if used) ratio of more than four plumb and braced to prevent swaying to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tip- and displacement. ping by guying, tying, bracing, or (d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1) equivalent means, as follows: All suspension scaffold support devices, (i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- such as outrigger beams, cornice stalled at locations where horizontal hooks, parapet clamps, and similar de- members support both inner and outer vices, shall rest on surfaces capable of supporting at least 4 times the load im- legs. posed on them by the scaffold oper- (ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- ating at the rated load of the hoist (or stalled according to the scaffold manu- at least 1.5 times the load imposed on facturer’s recommendations or at the them by the scaffold at the stall capac- closest horizontal member to the 4:1 ity of the hoist, whichever is greater). height and be repeated vertically at lo- (2) Suspension scaffold outrigger cations of horizontal members every 20 beams, when used, shall be made of feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaf- structural metal or equivalent folds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and strength material, and shall be re- every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter strained to prevent movement. for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) (3) The inboard ends of suspension wide. The top guy, tie or brace of com- scaffold outrigger beams shall be sta- pleted scaffolds shall be placed no fur- bilized by bolts or other direct connec- ther than the 4:1 height from the top. tions to the floor or roof deck, or they Such guys, ties and braces shall be in- shall have their inboard ends stabilized stalled at each end of the scaffold and by counterweights, except masons’ at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end fold outrigger beams shall not be sta- [not both] towards the other). bilized by counterweights. (iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers (i) Before the scaffold is used, direct shall be used to prevent the tipping of connections shall be evaluated by a supported scaffolds in all cir- competent person who shall confirm, cumstances where an eccentric load, based on the evaluation, that the sup- such as a cantilevered work platform, porting surfaces are capable of sup- is applied or is transmitted to the scaf- porting the loads to be imposed. In ad- fold. dition, masons’ multi-point adjustable (2) Supported scaffold poles, legs, suspension scaffold connections shall posts, frames, and uprights shall bear be designed by an engineer experienced on base plates and mud sills or other in such scaffold design. adequate firm foundation. (ii) Counterweights shall be made of (i) Footings shall be level, sound, non-flowable material. Sand, gravel rigid, and capable of supporting the and similar materials that can be eas- loaded scaffold without settling or dis- ily dislocated shall not be used as placement. counterweights. (ii) Unstable objects shall not be used (iii) Only those items specifically de- to support scaffolds or platform units. signed as counterweights shall be used (iii) Unstable objects shall not be to counterweight scaffold systems. used as working platforms. Construction materials such as, but

261

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00271 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

not limited to, masonry units and rolls (5) Suspension scaffold support de- of roofing felt, shall not be used as vices such as cornice hooks, roof counterweights. hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or (iv) Counterweights shall be secured similar devices shall be: by mechanical means to the outrigger (i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or beams to prevent accidental displace- materials of equivalent strength; ment. (ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and (v) Counterweights shall not be re- (iii) Secured against movement by moved from an outrigger beam until tiebacks installed at right angles to the scaffold is disassembled. the face of the building or structure, or (vi) Outrigger beams which are not opposing angle tiebacks shall be in- stabilized by bolts or other direct con- stalled and secured to a structurally nections to the floor or roof deck shall sound point of anchorage on the build- be secured by tiebacks. ing or structure. Sound points of an- (vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in chorage include structural members, strength to the suspension ropes. but do not include standpipes, vents, (viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed other piping systems, or electrical con- perpendicular to its bearing support duit. (usually the face of the building or (iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in structure). However, where the em- strength to the hoisting rope. ployer can demonstrate that it is not (6) When winding drum hoists are possible to place an outrigger beam used on a suspension scaffold, they perpendicular to the face of the build- shall contain not less than four wraps ing or structure because of obstruc- of the suspension rope at the lowest tions that cannot be moved, the out- point of scaffold travel. When other rigger beam may be placed at some types of hoists are used, the suspension other angle, provided opposing angle ropes shall be long enough to allow the tiebacks are used. scaffold to be lowered to the level (ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a below without the rope end passing structurally sound anchorage on the through the hoist, or the rope end shall building or structure. Sound anchor- be configured or provided with means ages include structural members, but to prevent the end from passing do not include standpipes, vents, other through the hoist. piping systems, or electrical conduit. (7) The use of repaired wire rope as (x) Tiebacks shall be installed per- suspension rope is prohibited. pendicular to the face of the building (8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be or structure, or opposing angle joined together except through the use tiebacks shall be installed. Single of eye splice thimbles connected with tiebacks installed at an angle are pro- shackles or coverplates and bolts. hibited. (9) The load end of wire suspension (4) Suspension scaffold outrigger ropes shall be equipped with proper size beams shall be: thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or (i) Provided with stop bolts or shack- equivalent means. les at both ends; (10) Ropes shall be inspected for de- (ii) Securely fastened together with fects by a competent person prior to the flanges turned out when channel each workshift and after every occur- iron beams are used in place of I- rence which could affect a rope’s integ- beams; rity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of (iii) Installed with all bearing sup- the following conditions exist: ports perpendicular to the beam center (i) Any physical damage which im- line; pairs the function and strength of the (iv) Set and maintained with the web rope. in a vertical position; and (ii) Kinks that might impair the (v) When an outrigger beam is used, tracking or wrapping of rope around the shackle or clevis with which the the drum(s) or sheave(s). rope is attached to the outrigger beam (iii) Six randomly distributed broken shall be placed directly over the center wires in one rope lay or three broken line of the stirrup. wires in one strand in one rope lay.

262

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00272 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

(iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, (17) Manually operated hoists shall flattening or peening causing loss of require a positive crank force to de- more than one-third of the original di- scend. ameter of the outside wires. (18) Two-point and multi-point sus- (v) Heat damage caused by a torch or pension scaffolds shall be tied or other- any damage caused by contact with wise secured to prevent them from electrical wires. swaying, as determined to be necessary (vi) Evidence that the secondary based on an evaluation by a competent brake has been activated during an person. Window cleaners’ anchors shall overspeed condition and has engaged not be used for this purpose. the suspension rope. (19) Devices whose sole function is to (11) Swaged attachments or spliced provide emergency escape and rescue eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not shall not be used as working platforms. be used unless they are made by the This provision does not preclude the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified use of systems which are designed to person. function both as suspension scaffolds (12) When wire rope clips are used on and emergency systems. suspension scaffolds: (e) Access. This paragraph applies to (i) There shall be a minimum of 3 scaffold access for all employees. Ac- wire rope clips installed, with the clips cess requirements for employees erect- a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart; ing or dismantling supported scaffolds (ii) Clips shall be installed according are specifically addressed in paragraph to the manufacturer’s recommenda- (e)(9) of this section. tions; (1) When scaffold platforms are more (iii) Clips shall be retightened to the than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a manufacturer’s recommendations after point of access, portable ladders, hook- the initial loading; on ladders, attachable ladders, stair (iv) Clips shall be inspected and re- towers (scaffold stairways/towers), tightened to the manufacturer’s rec- stairway-type ladders (such as ladder ommendations at the start of each stands), ramps, walkways, integral pre- workshift thereafter; fabricated scaffold access, or direct ac- (v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at cess from another scaffold, structure, the point of suspension for any scaffold personnel hoist, or similar surface hoist; shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be (vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the used as a means of access. U-bolt shall be placed over the dead (2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable end of the rope, and the saddle shall be ladders (Additional requirements for placed over the live end of the rope. the proper construction and use of (13) Suspension scaffold power-oper- portable ladders are contained in sub- ated hoists and manual hoists shall be part X of this part—Stairways and tested by a qualified testing labora- Ladders): tory. (i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and ladders shall be positioned so as not to hoists shall not be used on suspension tip the scaffold; scaffolds. (ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders (15) Gears and brakes of power-oper- shall be positioned so that their bot- ated hoists used on suspension scaf- tom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 folds shall be enclosed. cm) above the scaffold supporting (16) In addition to the normal oper- level; ating brake, suspension scaffold power- (iii) When hook-on and attachable operated hoists and manually operated ladders are used on a supported scaffold hoists shall have a braking device or more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they locking pawl which engages automati- shall have rest platforms at 35-foot cally when a hoist makes either of the (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals. following uncontrolled movements: an (iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders instantaneous change in momentum or shall be specifically designed for use an accelerated overspeed. with the type of scaffold used;

263

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00273 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(v) Hook-on and attachable ladders inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided shall have a minimum rung length of at each level. 111⁄2 inches (29 cm); and (ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at (vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between shall have uniformly spaced rungs with stairrails. a maximum spacing between rungs of (x) Treads and landings shall have 163⁄4 inches. slip-resistant surfaces. (3) Stairway-type ladders shall: (xi) Stairways shall be installed be- (i) Be positioned such that their bot- tween 40 degrees and 60 degrees from tom step is not more than 24 inches (61 the horizontal. cm) above the scaffold supporting (xii) Guardrails meeting the require- level; ments of paragraph (g)(4) of this sec- (ii) Be provided with rest platforms tion shall be provided on the open sides at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical in- and ends of each landing. tervals; (xiii) Riser height shall be uniform, (iii) Have a minimum step width of 16 within 1⁄4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaf- of stairs. Greater variations in riser fold stairway-type ladders shall have a height are allowed for the top and bot- minimum step width of 111⁄2 inches (30 tom steps of the entire system, not for cm); and each flight of stairs. (iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all (xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform, steps and landings. within 1⁄4 inch, for each flight of stairs. (4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/ (5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps towers) shall be positioned such that and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more their bottom step is not more than 24 above lower levels shall have guardrail inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold sup- systems which comply with subpart M porting level. of this part—Fall Protection; (i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail (ii) No ramp or walkway shall be in- and a midrail shall be provided on each clined more than a slope of one (1) side of each scaffold stairway. vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 de- (ii) The toprail of each stairrail sys- grees above the horizontal). tem shall also be capable of serving as (iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walk- a handrail, unless a separate handrail way is steeper than one (1) vertical in is provided. eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walk- (iii) Handrails, and toprails that way shall have cleats not more than serve as handrails, shall provide an fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which adequate handhold for employees are securely fastened to the planks to grasping them to avoid falling. provide footing. (iv) Stairrail systems and handrails (6) Integral prefabricated scaffold ac- shall be surfaced to prevent injury to cess frames shall: employees from punctures or lacera- (i) Be specifically designed and con- tions, and to prevent snagging of cloth- structed for use as ladder rungs; ing. (ii) Have a rung length of at least 8 (v) The ends of stairrail systems and inches (20 cm); handrails shall be constructed so that (iii) Not be used as work platforms they do not constitute a projection when rungs are less than 111⁄2 inches in hazard. length, unless each affected employee (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are uses fall protection, or a positioning used as handrails, shall be at least 3 device, which complies with § 1926.502; inches (7.6 cm) from other objects. (iv) Be uniformly spaced within each (vii) Stairrails shall be not less than frame section; 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 (v) Be provided with rest platforms at inches (94 cm) from the upper surface 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical in- of the stairrail to the surface of the tervals on all supported scaffolds more tread, in line with the face of the riser than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and at the forward edge of the tread. (vi) Have a maximum spacing be- (viii) A landing platform at least 18 tween rungs of 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). Non- inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 uniform rung spacing caused by joining

264

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00274 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

end frames together is allowed, pro- provided they are erected in a manner vided the resulting spacing does not ex- that creates a usable ladder and proceed 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). vides good hand hold and foot space. (7) Steps and rungs of ladder and (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded stairway type access shall line up frame scaffolds shall not be used as a vertically with each other between rest means of access or egress. platforms. (f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold com- (8) Direct access to or from another ponents shall not be loaded in excess of surface shall be used only when the their maximum intended loads or rated scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 capacities, whichever is less. cm) horizontally and not more than 24 (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaf- inches (61 cm) vertically from the other folds is prohibited. surface. (3) Scaffolds and scaffold components (9) Effective September 2, 1997, access shall be inspected for visible defects by for employees erecting or dismantling a competent person before each work supported scaffolds shall be in accord- shift, and after any occurrence which ance with the following: could affect a scaffold’s structural in- (i) The employer shall provide safe tegrity. means of access for each employee (4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or erecting or dismantling a scaffold weakened such that its strength is less where the provision of safe access is than that required by paragraph (a) of feasible and does not create a greater this section shall be immediately re- hazard. The employer shall have a com- paired or replaced, braced to meet petent person determine whether it is those provisions, or removed from serv- feasible or would pose a greater hazard ice until repaired. to provide, and have employees use a (5) Scaffolds shall not be moved hori- safe means of access. This determina- zontally while employees are on them, tion shall be based on site conditions unless they have been designed by a and the type of scaffold being erected registered professional engineer spe- or dismantled. cifically for such movement or, for mo- (ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders bile scaffolds, where the provisions of shall be installed as soon as scaffold § 1926.452(w) are followed. erection has progressed to a point that (6) The clearance between scaffolds permits safe installation and use. and power lines shall be as follows: (iii) When erecting or dismantling tu- Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, bular welded frame scaffolds, (end) dismantled, altered, or moved such frames, with horizontal members that that they or any conductive material are parallel, level and are not more handled on them might come closer to than 22 inches apart vertically may be exposed and energized power lines than used as climbing devices for access, as follows:

Insulated lines voltage Minimum distance Alternatives

Less than 300 volts ...... 3 feet (0.9 m). 300 volts to 50 kv ...... 10 feet (3.1m). More than 50 kv ...... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).

Uninsulated lines voltage Minimum distance Alternatives

Less than 50 kv ...... 10 feet (3.1 m). More than 50 kv ...... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).

EXCEPTION TO PARAGRAPH (f)(6): Scaffolds tem operator, has been notified of the need and materials may be closer to power lines to work closer and the utility company, or than specified above where such clearance is electrical system operator, has deenergized necessary for performance of work, and only the lines, relocated the lines, or installed after the utility company, or electrical sys-

265

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00275 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

protective coverings to prevent accidental scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured contact with the lines. against the sideways thrust exerted by (7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, the ladder; dismantled, or altered only under the (ii) The platform units shall be se- supervision and direction of a com- cured to the scaffold to prevent their petent person qualified in scaffold erec- movement; tion, moving, dismantling or alter- (iii) The ladder legs shall be on the ation. Such activities shall be per- same platform or other means shall be formed only by experienced and trained provided to stabilize the ladder against employees selected for such work by unequal platform deflection, and the competent person. (iv) The ladder legs shall be secured (8) Employees shall be prohibited to prevent them from slipping or being from working on scaffolds covered with pushed off the platform. snow, ice, or other slippery material (16) Platforms shall not deflect more except as necessary for removal of such than 1⁄60 of the span when loaded. materials. (17) To reduce the possibility of weld- (9) Where swinging loads are being ing current arcing through the suspen- hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that sion wire rope when performing weld- the loads might contact the scaffold, ing from suspended scaffolds, the fol- tag lines or equivalent measures to lowing precautions shall be taken, as control the loads shall be used. applicable: (10) Suspension ropes supporting ad- (i) An insulated thimble shall be used justable suspension scaffolds shall be of to attach each suspension wire rope to a diameter large enough to provide suf- its hanging support (such as cornice ficient surface area for the functioning hook or outrigger). Excess suspension of brake and hoist mechanisms. wire rope and any additional inde- (11) Suspension ropes shall be shield- pendent lines from grounding shall be ed from heat-producing processes. insulated; When acids or other corrosive sub- (ii) The suspension wire rope shall be stances are used on a scaffold, the covered with insulating material ex- ropes shall be shielded, treated to pro- tending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the tect against the corrosive substances, hoist. If there is a tail line below the or shall be of a material that will not hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent be damaged by the substance being contact with the platform. The portion used. of the tail line that hangs free below (12) Work on or from scaffolds is pro- the scaffold shall be guided or retained, hibited during storms or high winds or both, so that it does not become unless a competent person has deter- grounded; mined that it is safe for employees to (iii) Each hoist shall be covered with be on the scaffold and those employees insulated protective covers; are protected by a personal fall arrest (iv) In addition to a work lead at- system or wind screens. Wind screens tachment required by the welding proc- shall not be used unless the scaffold is ess, a grounding conductor shall be secured against the anticipated wind connected from the scaffold to the forces imposed. structure. The size of this conductor (13) Debris shall not be allowed to ac- shall be at least the size of the welding cumulate on platforms. process work lead, and this conductor (14) Makeshift devices, such as but shall not be in series with the welding not limited to boxes and barrels, shall process or the work piece; not be used on top of scaffold platforms (v) If the scaffold grounding lead is to increase the working level height of disconnected at any time, the welding employees. machine shall be shut off; and (15) Ladders shall not be used on scaf- (vi) An active welding rod or folds to increase the working level uninsulated welding lead shall not be height of employees, except on large allowed to contact the scaffold or its area scaffolds where employers have suspension system. satisfied the following criteria: (g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee (i) When the ladder is placed against on a scaffold more than 10 feet (3.1 m) a structure which is not a part of the above a lower level shall be protected

266

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00276 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.451

from falling to that lower level. Para- (g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee graphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this shall be protected by the use of per- section establish the types of fall pro- sonal fall arrest systems or guardrail tection to be provided to the employees systems meeting the requirements of on each type of scaffold. Paragraph paragraph (g)(4) of this section. (g)(2) of this section addresses fall pro- (2) Effective September 2, 1997, the tection for scaffold erectors and dis- employer shall have a competent per- mantlers. son determine the feasibility and safe-

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1): The fall protec- ty of providing fall protection for em- tion requirements for employees installing ployees erecting or dismantling sup- suspension scaffold support systems on ported scaffolds. Employers are re- floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are quired to provide fall protection for set forth in subpart M of this part. employees erecting or dismantling sup- (i) Each employee on a boatswains’ ported scaffolds where the installation chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold, and use of such protection is feasible needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack and does not create a greater hazard. scaffold shall be protected by a per- (3) In addition to meeting the re- sonal fall arrest system; quirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall (ii) Each employee on a single-point arrest systems used on scaffolds shall or two-point adjustable suspension be attached by lanyard to a vertical scaffold shall be protected by both a lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold personal fall arrest system and guard- structural member. Vertical lifelines rail system; shall not be used when overhead com- (iii) Each employee on a crawling ponents, such as overhead protection board (chicken ladder) shall be pro- or additional platform levels, are part tected by a personal fall arrest system, of a single-point or two-point adjust- a guardrail system (with minimum 200 able suspension scaffold. pound toprail capacity), or by a three- (i) When vertical lifelines are used, fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline they shall be fastened to a fixed safe or equivalent handhold securely fas- point of anchorage, shall be inde- tened beside each crawling board; pendent of the scaffold, and shall be (iv) Each employee on a self-con- protected from sharp edges and abra- tained adjustable scaffold shall be pro- sion. Safe points of anchorage include tected by a guardrail system (with structural members of buildings, but minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) do not include standpipes, vents, other when the platform is supported by the piping systems, electrical conduit, out- frame structure, and by both a per- rigger beams, or counterweights. sonal fall arrest system and a guardrail (ii) When horizontal lifelines are system (with minimum 200 pound top- used, they shall be secured to two or rail capacity) when the platform is sup- more structural members of the scaf- ported by ropes; fold, or they may be looped around (v) Each employee on a walkway lo- both suspension and independent sus- cated within a scaffold shall be pro- pension lines (on scaffolds so equipped) tected by a guardrail system (with above the hoist and brake attached to minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) the end of the scaffold. Horizontal life- installed within 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm) of lines shall not be attached only to the and along at least one side of the walk- suspension ropes. way. (iii) When lanyards are connected to (vi) Each employee performing horizontal lifelines or structural mem- overhand bricklaying operations from bers on a single-point or two-point ad- a supported scaffold shall be protected justable suspension scaffold, the scaf- from falling from all open sides and fold shall be equipped with additional ends of the scaffold (except at the side independent support lines and auto- next to the wall being laid) by the use matic locking devices capable of stop- of a personal fall arrest system or ping the fall of the scaffold in the event guardrail system (with minimum 200 one or both of the suspension ropes pound toprail capacity). fail. The independent support lines (vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise shall be equal in number and strength specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through to the suspension ropes.

267

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00277 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.451 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iv) Vertical lifelines, independent (vii) Each toprail or equivalent mem- support lines, and suspension ropes ber of a guardrail system shall be capa- shall not be attached to each other, nor ble of withstanding, without failure, a shall they be attached to or use the force applied in any downward or hori- same point of anchorage, nor shall they zontal direction at any point along its be attached to the same point on the top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n) scaffold or personal fall arrest system. for guardrail systems installed on sin- (4) Guardrail systems installed to gle-point adjustable suspension scaf- meet the requirements of this section folds or two-point adjustable suspen- shall comply with the following provision scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds sions (guardrail systems built in ac- (890 n) for guardrail systems installed cordance with appendix A to this sub- on all other scaffolds. part will be deemed to meet the re- (viii) When the loads specified in quirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii), paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are (viii), and (ix) of this section): applied in a downward direction, the (i) Guardrail systems shall be in- top edge shall not drop below the stalled along all open sides and ends of height above the platform surface that platforms. Guardrail systems shall be is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of installed before the scaffold is released this section. for use by employees other than erec- (ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- tion/dismantling crews. mediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent structural members (ii) The top edge height of toprails or of a guardrail system shall be capable equivalent member on supported scaf- of withstanding, without failure, a folds manufactured or placed in service force applied in any downward or hori- after January 1, 2000 shall be installed zontal direction at any point along the between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches midrail or other member of at least 75 (1.2 m) above the platform surface. The pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems top edge height on supported scaffolds with a minimum 100 pound toprail ca- manufactured and placed in service be- pacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) fore January 1, 2000, and on all sus- for guardrail systems with a minimum pended scaffolds where both a guardrail 200 pound toprail capacity. and a personal fall arrest system are (x) Suspension scaffold hoists and required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 non-walk-through stirrups may be used m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When condi- as end guardrails, if the space between tions warrant, the height of the top the hoist or stirrup and the side guard- edge may exceed the 45-inch height, rail or structure does not allow passage provided the guardrail system meets of an employee to the end of the scaf- all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4). fold. (iii) When midrails, screens, mesh, (xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to intermediate vertical members, solid prevent injury to an employee from panels, or equivalent structural mem- punctures or lacerations, and to pre- bers are used, they shall be installed vent snagging of clothing. between the top edge of the guardrail (xii) The ends of all rails shall not system and the scaffold platform. overhang the terminal posts except (iv) When midrails are used, they when such overhang does not con- shall be installed at a height approxi- stitute a projection hazard to employ- mately midway between the top edge of ees. the guardrail system and the platform (xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall surface. not be used as a toprail or midrail. (v) When screens and mesh are used, (xiv) Manila or plastic (or other syn- they shall extend from the top edge of thetic) rope being used for toprails or the guardrail system to the scaffold midrails shall be inspected by a com- platform, and along the entire opening petent person as frequently as nec- between the supports. essary to ensure that it continues to (vi) When intermediate members meet the strength requirements of (such as balusters or additional rails) paragraph (g) of this section. are used, they shall not be more than (xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in 19 inches (48 cm) apart. place of a midrail when the crossing

268

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00278 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

point of two braces is between 20 inches tial falling objects shall be erected (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the over the employees below. work platform or as a toprail when the (3) Canopies, when used for falling ob- crossing point of two braces is between ject protection, shall comply with the 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) following criteria: above the work platform. The end (i) Canopies shall be installed be- points at each upright shall be no more tween the falling object hazard and the than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart. employees. (h) Falling object protection. (1) In ad- (ii) When canopies are used on sus- dition to wearing hardhats each em- pension scaffolds for falling object pro- ployee on a scaffold shall be provided tection, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional protection from falling with additional independent support hand tools, debris, and other small ob- lines equal in number to the number of jects through the installation of points supported, and equivalent in toeboards, screens, or guardrail sys- strength to the strength of the suspen- tems, or through the erection of debris sion ropes. nets, catch platforms, or canopy struc- (iii) Independent support lines and tures that contain or deflect the falling suspension ropes shall not be attached objects. When the falling objects are to the same points of anchorage. too large, heavy or massive to be con- (4) Where used, toeboards shall be: tained or deflected by any of the above- (i) Capable of withstanding, without listed measures, the employer shall failure, a force of at least 50 pounds place such potential falling objects (222 n) applied in any downward or hor- away from the edge of the surface from izontal direction at any point along the which they could fall and shall secure toeboard (toeboards built in accord- those materials as necessary to prevent ance with appendix A to this subpart their falling. will be deemed to meet this require- (2) Where there is a danger of tools, ment); and materials, or equipment falling from a (ii) At least three and one-half inches scaffold and striking employees below, (9 cm) high from the top edge of the the following provisions apply: toeboard to the level of the walking/ (i) The area below the scaffold to working surface. Toeboards shall be se- which objects can fall shall be barri- curely fastened in place at the outer- caded, and employees shall not be permost edge of the platform and have not mitted to enter the hazard area; or more than 1⁄4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance (ii) A toeboard shall be erected along above the walking/working surface. the edge of platforms more than 10 feet Toeboards shall be solid or with open- (3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance ings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the sufficient to protect employees below, greatest dimension. except on float (ship) scaffolds where [61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and 3 1 an edging of ⁄4 × 1 ⁄2 inch (2 × 4 cm) amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996] wood or equivalent may be used in lieu of toeboards; EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and (iii) Where tools, materials, or equip- certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25, ment are piled to a height higher than 1997, or until further rulemaking has been the top edge of the toeboard, paneling completed, whichever is later. or screening extending from the toeboard or platform to the top of the § 1926.452 Additional requirements ap- guardrail shall be erected for a dis- plicable to specific types of scaf- tance sufficient to protect employees folds. below; or In addition to the applicable require- (iv) A guardrail system shall be in- ments of § 1926.451, the following re- stalled with openings small enough to quirements apply to the specific types prevent passage of potential falling ob- of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not jects; or specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such (v) A canopy structure, debris net, or as but not limited to systems scaffolds, catch platform strong enough to with- must meet the requirements of stand the impact forces of the poten- § 1926.451.

269

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00279 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.452 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms (2) Transverse bracing forming an are being moved to the next level, the ‘‘X’’ across the width of the scaffold existing platform shall be left undis- shall be installed at the scaffold ends turbed until the new bearers have been and at least at every third set of posts set in place and braced, prior to receiv- horizontally (measured from only one ing the new platforms. end) and every fourth runner (2) Crossbracing shall be installed be- vertically. Bracing shall extend diago- tween the inner and outer sets of poles nally from the inner or outer posts or on double pole scaffolds. runners upward to the next outer or (3) Diagonal bracing in both direc- inner posts or runners. Building ties tions shall be installed across the en- shall be installed at the bearer levels tire inside face of double-pole scaffolds between the transverse bracing and used to support loads equivalent to a shall conform to the requirements of uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds § 1926.451(c)(1). (22.7 kg) or more per square foot (929 (3) On straight run scaffolds, longitu- square cm). dinal bracing across the inner and (4) Diagonal bracing in both direc- outer rows of posts shall be installed tions shall be installed across the en- diagonally in both directions, and shall tire outside face of all double- and sin- extend from the base of the end posts gle-pole scaffolds. upward to the top of the scaffold at ap- (5) Runners and bearers shall be in- proximately a 45 degree angle. On scaf- stalled on edge. folds whose length is greater than their (6) Bearers shall extend a minimum height, such bracing shall be repeated of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside beginning at least at every fifth post. edges of runners. On scaffolds whose length is less than (7) Runners shall extend over a min- their height, such bracing shall be in- imum of two poles, and shall be sup- stalled from the base of the end posts ported by bearing blocks securely at- upward to the opposite end posts, and tached to the poles. then in alternating directions until (8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall reaching the top of the scaffold. Brac- not be spliced between poles. ing shall be installed as close as pos- (9) Where wooden poles are spliced, sible to the intersection of the bearer the ends shall be squared and the upper and post or runner and post. section shall rest squarely on the lower (4) Where conditions preclude the at- section. Wood splice plates shall be tachment of bracing to posts, bracing provided on at least two adjacent sides, shall be attached to the runners as and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m) close to the post as possible. on either side of the splice, overlap the (5) Bearers shall be installed trans- abutted ends equally, and have at least versely between posts, and when cou- the same cross-sectional areas as the pled to the posts, shall have the in- pole. Splice plates of other materials of board coupler bear directly on the run- equivalent strength may be used. ner coupler. When the bearers are cou- (10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in pled to the runners, the couplers shall height shall be designed by a registered be as close to the posts as possible. professional engineer, and shall be con- (6) Bearers shall extend beyond the structed and loaded in accordance with posts and runners, and shall provide that design. Non-mandatory appendix full contact with the coupler. A to this subpart contains examples of (7) Runners shall be installed along criteria that will enable an employer the length of the scaffold, located on to comply with design and loading re- both the inside and outside posts at quirements for pole scaffolds under 60 level heights (when tube and coupler feet in height. guardrails and midrails are used on (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) outside posts, they may be used in lieu When platforms are being moved to the of outside runners). next level, the existing platform shall (8) Runners shall be interlocked on be left undisturbed until the new bear- straight runs to form continuous ers have been set in place and braced lengths, and shall be coupled to each prior to receiving the new platforms. post. The bottom runners and bearers

270

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00280 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

shall be located as close to the base as designed by a registered professional possible. engineer, and shall be constructed and (9) Couplers shall be of a structural loaded in accordance with such design. metal, such as drop-forged steel, malle- (d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large able iron, or structural grade alu- area scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be con- minum. The use of gray cast iron is structed in accordance with paragraphs prohibited. (a), (b), or (c) of this section, as appro- (10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over priate. 125 feet in height shall be designed by (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds a registered professional engineer, and (squares). (1) Scaffolds made of wood shall be constructed and loaded in ac- shall be reinforced with gussets on cordance with such design. Non-manda- both sides of each corner. tory appendix A to this subpart contains examples of criteria that will en- (2) Diagonal braces shall be installed able an employer to comply with de- on all sides of each square. sign and loading requirements for tube (3) Diagonal braces shall be installed and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in between squares on the rear and front height. sides of the scaffold, and shall extend (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular from the bottom of each square to the welded frame scaffolds). (1) When mov- top of the next square. ing platforms to the next level, the ex- (4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three isting platform shall be left undis- tiers in height, and shall be so con- turbed until the new end frames have structed and arranged that one square been set in place and braced prior to re- rests directly above the other. The ceiving the new platforms. upper tiers shall stand on a continuous (2) Frames and panels shall be braced row of planks laid across the next by cross, horizontal, or diagonal lower tier, and shall be nailed down or braces, or combination thereof, which otherwise secured to prevent displace- secure vertical members together lat- ment. erally. The cross braces shall be of such (f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall length as will automatically square not be constructed or arranged more and align vertical members so that the than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in erected scaffold is always plumb, level, height, whichever is less. and square. All brace connections shall (2) When horses are arranged in tiers, be secured. each horse shall be placed directly over (3) Frames and panels shall be joined the horse in the tier below. together vertically by coupling or (3) When horses are arranged in tiers, stacking pins or equivalent means. the legs of each horse shall be nailed (4) Where uplift can occur which down or otherwise secured to prevent would displace scaffold end frames or displacement. panels, the frames or panels shall be (4) When horses are arranged in tiers, locked together vertically by pins or equivalent means. each tier shall be crossbraced. (5) Brackets used to support canti- (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ levered loads shall: bracket scaffolds. (1) Each bracket, ex- (i) Be seated with side-brackets par- cept those for wooden bracket-form allel to the frames and end-brackets at scaffolds, shall be attached to the sup- 90 degrees to the frames; porting formwork or structure by (ii) Not be bent or twisted from these means of one or more of the following: positions; and nails; a metal stud attachment device; (iii) Be used only to support per- welding; hooking over a secured struc- sonnel, unless the scaffold has been de- tural supporting member, with the signed for other loads by a qualified en- form wales either bolted to the form or gineer and built to withstand the tip- secured by snap ties or tie bolts ex- ping forces caused by those other loads tending through the form and securely being placed on the bracket-supported anchored; or, for carpenters’ bracket section of the scaffold. scaffolds only, by a bolt extending (6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in through to the opposite side of the height above their base plates shall be structure’s wall.

271

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00281 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.452 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds have two positive gripping mechanisms shall be an integral part of the form to prevent any failure or slippage. panel. (2) Poles shall be secured to the (3) Folding type metal brackets, structure by rigid triangular bracing or when extended for use, shall be either equivalent at the bottom, top, and bolted or secured with a locking-type other points as necessary. When the pin. pump jack has to pass bracing already (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold installed, an additional brace shall be brackets shall be constructed to fit the installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) pitch of the roof and shall provide a above the brace to be passed, and shall level support for the platform. be left in place until the pump jack has (2) Brackets (including those pro- been moved and the original brace re- vided with pointed metal projections) installed. shall be anchored in place by nails un- (3) When guardrails are used for fall less it is impractical to use nails. When protection, a workbench may be used nails are not used, brackets shall be se- as the toprail only if it meets all the cured in place with first-grade manila requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii), rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9 (vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451. cm) diameter, or equivalent. (4) Work benches shall not be used as (i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard scaffold platforms. end of outrigger beams, measured from (5) When poles are made of wood, the the fulcrum point to the extreme point pole lumber shall be straight-grained, of anchorage, shall be not less than one free of shakes, large loose or dead and one-half times the outboard end in knots, and other defects which might length. impair strength. (2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the (6) When wood poles are constructed shape of an I-beam or channel shall be of two continuous lengths, they shall placed so that the web section is be joined together with the seam par- vertical. allel to the bracket. (3) The fulcrum point of outrigger (7) When two by fours are spliced to beams shall rest on secure bearings at make a pole, mending plates shall be least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each hori- installed at all splices to develop the zontal dimension. full strength of the member. (4) Outrigger beams shall be secured in place against movement, and shall (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms be securely braced at the fulcrum point shall not exceed a height of 20 feet (6.1 against tipping. m). (5) The inboard ends of outrigger (2) All ladders used to support ladder beams shall be securely anchored ei- jack scaffolds shall meet the require- ther by means of braced struts bearing ments of subpart X of this part—Stair- against sills in contact with the over- ways and Ladders, except that job- head beams or ceiling, or by means of made ladders shall not be used to sup- tension members secured to the floor port ladder jack scaffolds. joists underfoot, or by both. (3) The ladder jack shall be so de- (6) The entire supporting structure signed and constructed that it will bear shall be securely braced to prevent any on the side rails and ladder rungs or on horizontal movement. the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on (7) To prevent their displacement, rungs only, the bearing area shall in- platform units shall be nailed, bolted, clude a length of at least 10 inches (25.4 or otherwise secured to outriggers. cm) on each rung. (8) Scaffolds and scaffold components (4) Ladders used to support ladder shall be designed by a registered pro- jacks shall be placed, fastened, or fessional engineer and shall be con- equipped with devices to prevent slip- structed and loaded in accordance with ping. such design. (5) Scaffold platforms shall not be (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack bridged one to another. brackets, braces, and accessories shall (l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds be fabricated from metal plates and an- shall be securely attached to the win- gles. Each pump jack bracket shall dow opening.

272

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00282 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

(2) Scaffolds shall be used only for (3) Boatswains’ chair tackle shall the purpose of working at the window consist of correct size ball bearings or opening through which the jack is bushed blocks containing safety hooks placed. and properly ‘‘eye-spliced’’ minimum (3) Window jacks shall not be used to five-eighth (5⁄8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter support planks placed between one win- first-grade manila rope, or other rope dow jack and another, or for other ele- which will satisfy the criteria (e.g., ments of scaffolding. strength and durability) of manila (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). rope. (1) Crawling boards shall extend from (4) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall the roof peak to the eaves when used in be reeved through four corner holes in connection with roof construction, re- the seat; shall cross each other on the pair, or maintenance. underside of the seat; and shall be (2) Crawling boards shall be secured rigged so as to prevent slippage which to the roof by ridge hooks or by means could cause an out-of-level condition. that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., (5) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall strength and durability). be a minimum of five-eight (5⁄8) inch (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder (1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or scaffolds. (1) Scaffold platforms shall other rope which will satisfy the cri- not be placed any higher than the sec- teria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, du- ond highest rung or step of the ladder rability, etc.) of first grade manila supporting the platform. rope. (2) All ladders used in conjunction (6) When a heat-producing process with step, platform and trestle ladder such as gas or arc welding is being con- scaffolds shall meet the pertinent re- ducted, boatswains’ chair seat slings quirements of subpart X of this part— shall be a minimum of three-eight (3⁄8) Stairways and Ladders, except that inch (1.0 cm) wire rope. job-made ladders shall not be used to support such scaffolds. (7) Non-cross-laminated wood boat- (3) Ladders used to support step, plat- swains’ chairs shall be reinforced on form, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall their underside by cleats securely fas- be placed, fastened, or equipped with tened to prevent the board from split- devices to prevent slipping. ting. (4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one (p) Two-point adjustable suspension to another. scaffolds (swing stages). The following (o) Single-point adjustable suspension requirements do not apply to two-point scaffolds. (1) When two single-point ad- adjustable suspension scaffolds used as justable suspension scaffolds are com- masons’ or stonesetters’ scaffolds. bined to form a two-point adjustable Such scaffolds are covered by para- suspension scaffold, the resulting two- graph (q) of this section. point scaffold shall comply with the re- (1) Platforms shall not be more than quirements for two-point adjustable 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed suspension scaffolds in paragraph (p) of by a qualified person to prevent unsta- this section. ble conditions. (2) The supporting rope between the (2) The platform shall be securely fas- scaffold and the suspension device shall tened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts be kept vertical unless all of the fol- or by other means which satisfy the re- lowing conditions are met: quirements of § 1926.451(a). (i) The rigging has been designed by a (3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic qualified person, and ropes shall consist of at least one dou- (ii) The scaffold is accessible to res- ble and one single block. The sheaves cuers, and of all blocks shall fit the size of the (iii) The supporting rope is protected rope used. to ensure that it will not chafe at any (4) Platforms shall be of the ladder- point where a change in direction oc- type, plank-type, beam-type, or light- curs, and metal type. Light metal-type plat- (iv) The scaffold is positioned so that forms having a rated capacity of 750 swinging cannot bring the scaffold into pounds or less and platforms 40 feet contact with another surface. (12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested

273

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00283 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.452 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

and listed by a nationally recognized (3) When only two ropes are used testing laboratory. with each float: (5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be (i) They shall be arranged so as to bridged or otherwise connected one to provide four ends which are securely another during raising and lowering fastened to overhead supports. operations unless the bridge connec- (ii) Each supporting rope shall be tions are articulated (attached), and hitched around one end of the bearer the hoists properly sized. and pass under the platform to the (6) Passage may be made from one other end of the bearer where it is platform to another only when the hitched again, leaving sufficient rope platforms are at the same height, are at each end for the supporting ties. abutting, and walk-through stirrups (t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaf- specifically designed for this purpose folds shall be suspended only from the are used. roof structure or other structural (q) Multi-point adjustable suspension member such as ceiling beams. scaffolds, stonesetters’ multi-point adjust- (2) Overhead supporting members able suspension scaffolds, and masons’ (roof structure, ceiling beams, or other multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- structural members) shall be inspected folds. (1) When two or more scaffolds and checked for strength before the are used they shall not be bridged one scaffold is erected. to another unless they are designed to (3) Suspension ropes and cables shall be bridged, the bridge connections are be connected to the overhead sup- articulated, and the hoists are properly porting members by shackles, clips, sized. thimbles, or other means that meet (2) If bridges are not used, passage equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- may be made from one platform to an- rability). other only when the platforms are at (u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold the same height and are abutting. support beams shall be installed on (3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from edge. metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope (2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for slings, hooks, or means that meet supports, except that one end of a nee- equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- dle beam scaffold may be supported by rability). a permanent structural member. (r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more than one platform shall be placed be- (3) The ropes shall be securely at- tween consecutive vertical pickups, tached to the needle beams. and no more than two platforms shall (4) The support connection shall be be used on a catenary scaffold. arranged so as to prevent the needle (2) Platforms supported by wire ropes beam from rolling or becoming dis- shall have hook-shaped stops on each placed. end of the platforms to prevent them (5) Platform units shall be securely from slipping off the wire ropes. These attached to the needle beams by bolts hooks shall be so placed that they will or equivalent means. Cleats and over- prevent the platform from falling if hang are not considered to be adequate one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks. means of attachment. (3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened (v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1) to the extent that the application of a Scaffolds shall be equipped with addi- scaffold load will overstress them. tional independent support lines, equal (4) Wire ropes shall be continuous in number to the number of points sup- and without splices between anchors. ported, and of equivalent strength to (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The plat- the suspension ropes, and rigged to form shall be supported by a minimum support the scaffold in the event the of two bearers, each of which shall suspension rope(s) fail. project a minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) (2) Independent support lines and sus- beyond the platform on both sides. pension ropes shall not be attached to Each bearer shall be securely fastened the same points of anchorage. to the platform. (3) Supports for platforms shall be at- (2) Rope connections shall be such tached directly to the support stirrup that the platform cannot shift or slip. and not to any other platform.

274

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00284 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.452

(w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3 be braced by cross, horizontal, or di- mps); and agonal braces, or combination thereof, (v) No employee is on any part of the to prevent racking or collapse of the scaffold which extends outward beyond scaffold and to secure vertical mem- the wheels, casters, or other supports. bers together laterally so as to auto- (7) Platforms shall not extend out- matically square and align the vertical ward beyond the base supports of the members. Scaffolds shall be plumb, scaffold unless outrigger frames or level, and squared. All brace connec- equivalent devices are used to ensure tions shall be secured. stability. (i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and (8) Where leveling of the scaffold is coupler components shall also comply necessary, screw jacks or equivalent with the requirements of paragraph (b) means shall be used. of this section; (9) Caster stems and wheel stems (ii) Scaffolds constructed of fab- shall be pinned or otherwise secured in ricated frame components shall also scaffold legs or adjustment screws. comply with the requirements of para- (10) Before a scaffold is moved, each graph (c) of this section. employee on the scaffold shall be made (2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall aware of the move. be locked with positive wheel and/or (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brack- wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent ets shall be secured in place by at least means, to prevent movement of the one wire rope at least 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) scaffold while the scaffold is used in a in diameter. stationary manner. (2) Each bracket shall be attached to (3) Manual force used to move the the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a scaffold shall be applied as close to the positive locking device capable of pre- base as practicable, but not more than venting the unintentional detachment 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting sur- of the bracket from the rope, or by face. equivalent means. (4) Power systems used to propel mo- (3) Each bracket, at the contact point bile scaffolds shall be designed for such between the supporting structure and use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor the bottom of the bracket, shall be pro- vehicles or add-on motors shall not be vided with a shoe (heel block or foot) used to propel scaffolds unless the scaf- capable of preventing the lateral move- fold is designed for such propulsion sys- ment of the bracket. tems. (4) Platforms shall be secured to the (5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to brackets in a manner that will prevent prevent tipping during movement. the separation of the platforms from (6) Employees shall not be allowed to the brackets and the movement of the ride on scaffolds unless the following platforms or the brackets on a com- conditions exist: pleted scaffold. (i) The surface on which the scaffold (5) When a wire rope is placed around is being moved is within 3 degrees of the structure in order to provide a safe level, and free of pits, holes, and ob- anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- structions; tems used by employees erecting or (ii) The height to base width ratio of dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope the scaffold during movement is two to shall meet the requirements of subpart one or less, unless the scaffold is de- M of this part, but shall be at least 5⁄16 signed and constructed to meet or ex- inch (0.8 cm) in diameter. ceed nationally recognized stability (6) Each wire rope used for securing test requirements such as those listed brackets in place or as an anchorage in paragraph 2.(w) of appendix A to this for personal fall arrest systems shall be subpart; protected from damage due to contact (iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are with edges, corners, protrusions, or installed on both sides of the scaffold; other discontinuities of the supporting (iv) When power systems are used, structure or scaffold components. the propelling force is applied directly (7) Tensioning of each wire rope used to the wheels, and does not produce a for securing brackets in place or as an

275

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00285 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.453 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- and construction requirements of ANSI tems shall be by means of a turnbuckle A92.2–1969. Aerial lifts include the fol- at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or lowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial by equivalent means. devices used to elevate personnel to (8) Each turnbuckle shall be con- job-sites above ground: nected to the other end of its rope by (i) Extensible boom platforms; use of an eyesplice thimble of a size ap- (ii) Aerial ladders; propriate to the turnbuckle to which it (iii) Articulating boom platforms; is attached. (iv) Vertical towers; and (9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be (v) A combination of any such de- used on any wire rope used to secure vices. Aerial equipment may be made brackets or to serve as an anchor for of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced personal fall arrest systems. plastic (FRP), or other material; may (10) The employer shall ensure that be powered or manually operated; and materials shall not be dropped to the are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or outside of the supporting structure. not they are capable of rotating about (11) Scaffold erection shall progress a substantially vertical axis. in only one direction around any struc- (2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi- ture. fied’’ for uses other than those in- (y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be tended by the manufacturer provided used in accordance with the following the modification has been certified in requirements: writing by the manufacturer or by any (1) An employee may wear stilts on a other equivalent entity, such as a na- scaffold only if it is a large area scaf- tionally recognized testing laboratory, fold. to be in conformity with all applicable (2) When an employee is using stilts provisions of ANSI A92.2–1969 and this on a large area scaffold where a guard- section and to be at least as safe as the rail system is used to provide fall pro- equipment was before modification. tection, the guardrail system shall be (b) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder increased in height by an amount equal trucks and tower trucks. Aerial ladders to the height of the stilts being used by shall be secured in the lower traveling the employee. position by the locking device on top of (3) Surfaces on which stilts are used the truck cab, and the manually oper- shall be flat and free of pits, holes and ated device at the base of the ladder be- obstructions, such as debris, as well as fore the truck is moved for highway other tripping and falling hazards. travel. (4) Stilts shall be properly main- (2) Extensible and articulating boom tained. Any alteration of the original platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test- equipment shall be approved by the ed each day prior to use to determine manufacturer. that such controls are in safe working [61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 85 condition. FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020] (ii) Only authorized persons shall operate an aerial lift. § 1926.453 Aerial lifts. (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, (a) General requirements. (1) Unless structure, or equipment while working otherwise provided in this section, aer- from an aerial lift shall not be per- ial lifts acquired for use on or after mitted. January 22, 1973 shall be designed and (iv) Employees shall always stand constructed in conformance with the firmly on the floor of the basket, and applicable requirements of the Amer- shall not sit or climb on the edge of the ican National Standards for ‘‘Vehicle basket or use planks, ladders, or other Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work devices for a work position. Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2–1969, including (v) A body belt shall be worn and a appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before lanyard attached to the boom or bas- January 22, 1973 which do not meet the ket when working from an aerial lift. requirements of ANSI A92.2–1969, may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(v): As of Janu- not be used after January 1, 1976, un- ary 1, 1998, subpart M of this part less they shall have been modified so as (§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not to conform with the applicable design acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest

276

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00286 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.454

system. The use of a body belt in a tethering pneumatic components. Critical com- system or in a restraint system is acceptable ponents are those in which a failure and is regulated under § 1926.502(e). would result in a free fall or free rota- (vi) Boom and basket load limits tion of the boom. All noncritical com- specified by the manufacturer shall not ponents shall have a bursting safety be exceeded. factor of at least 2 to 1. (vii) The brakes shall be set and when (5) Welding standards. All welding outriggers are used, they shall be posi- shall conform to the following stand- tioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel ards as applicable: chocks shall be installed before using (i) Standard Qualification Procedure, an aerial lift on an incline, provided AWS B3.0–41. they can be safely installed. (ii) Recommended Practices for (viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be Automotive Welding Design, AWS moved when the boom is elevated in a D8.4–61. working position with men in the bas- (iii) Standard Qualification of Weld- ket, except for equipment which is spe- ing Procedures and Welders for Piping cifically designed for this type of oper- and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69. ation in accordance with the provisions (iv) Specifications for Welding High- of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this sec- way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69. tion. (ix) Articulating boom and extensible NOTE TO § 1926.453: Non-mandatory appen- boom platforms, primarily designed as dix C to this subpart lists examples of na- personnel carriers, shall have both tional consensus standards that are considered to provide employee protection equiva- platform (upper) and lower controls. lent to that provided through the application Upper controls shall be in or beside the of ANSI A92.2–1969, where appropriate. This platform within easy reach of the oper- incorporation by reference was approved by ator. Lower controls shall provide for the Director of the Federal Register in ac- overriding the upper controls. Controls cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part shall be plainly marked as to their 51. Copies may be obtained from the Amer- function. Lower level controls shall not ican National Standards Institute. Copies be operated unless permission has been may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occu- pational Safety and Health Administration, obtained from the employee in the lift, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution except in case of emergency. Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or (x) Climbers shall not be worn while at the National Archives and Records Ad- performing work from an aerial lift. ministration (NARA). For information on (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial the availability of this material at NARA, lift shall not be altered in any manner call 202–741–6030, or go to: http:// that might reduce its insulating value. www.archives.gov/federallregister/ (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for codeloflfederallregulations/ ibrllocations.html. travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to see that it is properly cradled and [61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. outriggers are in stowed position ex- 25, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, cept as provided in paragraph 2004] (b)(2)(viii) of this section. (3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests § 1926.454 Training requirements. shall conform to the requirements of This section supplements and clari- ANSI A92.2–1969 section 5. However fies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2) equivalent d.c.; voltage tests may be as these relate to the hazards of work used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified on scaffolds. in A92.2–1969; d.c. voltage tests which (a) The employer shall have each em- are approved by the equipment manu- ployee who performs work while on a facturer or equivalent entity shall be scaffold trained by a person qualified considered an equivalent test for the in the subject matter to recognize the purpose of this paragraph (b)(3). hazards associated with the type of (4) Bursting safety factor. The provi- scaffold being used and to understand sions of the American National Stand- the procedures to control or minimize ards Institute standard ANSI A92.2– those hazards. The training shall in- 1969, section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor clude the following areas, as applica- shall apply to all critical hydraulic and ble:

277

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00287 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(1) The nature of any electrical haz- NON-MANDATORY APPENDICES ards, fall hazards and falling object hazards in the work area; (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX A TO SUB- (2) The correct procedures for dealing PART L OF PART 1926—SCAFFOLD with electrical hazards and for erect- SPECIFICATIONS ing, maintaining, and disassembling This appendix provides non-mandatory the fall protection systems and falling guidelines to assist employers in complying object protection systems being used; with the requirements of subpart L of this (3) The proper use of the scaffold, and part. An employer may use these guidelines the proper handling of materials on the and tables as a starting point for designing scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do scaffold; not provide all the information necessary to (4) The maximum intended load and build a complete system, and the employer is the load-carrying capacities of the still responsible for designing and assem- scaffolds used; and bling these components in such a way that (5) Any other pertinent requirements the completed system will meet the requirements of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components of this subpart. which are not selected and loaded in accord- (b) The employer shall have each em- ance with this Appendix, and components for ployee who is involved in erecting, dis- which no specific guidelines or tables are assembling, moving, operating, repair- given in this appendix (e.g., joints, ties, coming, maintaining, or inspecting a scaf- ponents for wood pole scaffolds more than 60 fold trained by a competent person to feet in height, components for heavy-duty recognize any hazards associated with horse scaffolds, components made with other materials, and components with other di- the work in question. The training mensions, etc.) must be designed and con- shall include the following topics, as structed in accordance with the capacity re- applicable: quirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in ac- (1) The nature of scaffold hazards; cordance with § 1926.451(d)(1). (2) The correct procedures for erect- Index to appendix A for Subpart L ing, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, inspecting, and maintaining 1. General guidelines and tables. 2. Specific guidelines and tables. the type of scaffold in question; (a) Pole scaffolds: (3) The design criteria, maximum in- Single-pole wood pole scaffolds. tended load-carrying capacity and in- Independent wood pole scaffolds. tended use of the scaffold; (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (4) Any other pertinent requirements (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. of this subpart. (d) Plasterers’, decorators’ and large area scaffolds. (c) When the employer has reason to (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. believe that an employee lacks the (f) Horse scaffolds. skill or understanding needed for safe (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket work involving the erection, use or dis- scaffolds. mantling of scaffolds, the employer (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. shall retrain each such employee so (i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level). (j) Pump jack scaffolds. that the requisite proficiency is re- (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. gained. Retraining is required in at (l) Window jack scaffolds. least the following situations: (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). (1) Where changes at the worksite (n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaf- present a hazard about which an em- folds. ployee has not been previously trained; (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. or (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaf- (2) Where changes in the types of folds. scaffolds, fall protection, falling object (q)(1) Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable protection, or other equipment present suspension scaffolds. a hazard about which an employee has (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- not been previously trained; or sion scaffolds. (r) Catenary scaffolds. (3) Where inadequacies in an affected (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. employee’s work involving scaffolds in- (t) Interior hung scaffolds. dicate that the employee has not re- (u) Needle beam scaffolds. tained the requisite proficiency. (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds.

278

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00288 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A

(w) Mobile scaffolds. (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. compliance with the National Design Speci- (y) Stilts. fication for Wood Construction published by (z) Tank builders’ scaffolds. the National Forest Products Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8–1988 Scaffolding- 1. GENERAL GUIDELINES AND TABLES Safety Requirements published by the Amer- (a) The following tables, and the tables in ican National Standards Institute; or for 2 × part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, as- 10 inch (nominal) or 2 × 9 inch (rough) solid sume that all load-carrying timber members sawn wood planks, as shown in the following (except planks) of the scaffold are a min- table: imum of 1,500 lb-f/in2 (stress grade) construction grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi- Maximum per- Maximum permissible span missible span nal sizes as provided in the American Maximum intended nominal using full thick- Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January using nominal load ness un- thickness 1970, except that, where rough sizes are (lb/ft2) dressed lumber lumber noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the (ft) (ft) size specified will satisfy minimum requirements. 25 ...... 10 8 (b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks 50 ...... 8 6 shall be selected for such use following the 75 ...... 6 grading rules established by a recognized lumber grading association or by an inde- (ii) The maximum permissible span for 11⁄4 pendent lumber grading inspection agency. × 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thick- Such planks shall be identified by the grade ness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/ stamp of such association or agency. The as- ft.2 shall be 4 feet. sociation or agency and the grading rules (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may under which the wood is graded shall be cer- be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks. tified by the Board of Review, American Maximum spans for such units shall be as Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in recommended by the manufacturer based on the American Softwood Lumber Standard of the maximum intended load being calculated the U.S. Department of Commerce. as follows:

Rated load capacity Intended load

Light-duty ...... • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Medium-duty ...... • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Heavy-duty ...... • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. One-person ...... • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds). Two-person ...... • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds). Three-person ...... • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 750 pounds).

NOTE: Platform units used to make scaf- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch structural angle iron; or fold platforms intended for light-duty use 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or shall be capable of supporting at least 25 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- pounds per square foot applied uniformly ing. over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength point load placed on the unit at the center of to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or the span, whichever load produces the great- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 structural angle er shear force. iron; or (d) Guardrails shall be as follows: 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or (i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or ing. 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or (v) Distance between posts shall not exceed 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 8 feet. inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength (e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2 3 to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or inch nominal planking laid tight, or ⁄4-inch plywood. 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or (f) Screen installed between toeboards and 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh. ing. 2. SPECIFIC GUIDELINES AND TABLES. (iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or (a) Pole Scaffolds.

279

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00289 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

SINGLE POLE WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to 20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high

Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2) ...... 25 ...... 25 ...... 50 ...... 75 Poles or uprights ...... 2 × 4 in ...... 4 × 4 in ...... 4 × 4 in ...... 4 × 6 in. Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ...... 6 feet ...... 10 feet ...... 8 feet ...... 6 feet Maximum pole spacing (transverse) ...... 5 feet ...... 5 feet ...... 5 feet ...... 5 feet Runners ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 11⁄4 × 9 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in. Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet ...... 2 × 4 in ...... 2 × 4 in ...... 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in. in. 5 feet ...... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in. in. (rough). in. in. 6 feet ...... 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in. in. 8 feet ...... 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in. Planking ...... 11⁄4 × 9 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in. Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ...... 9 feet ...... 7 feet ...... 6 ft. 6 in. members. Bracing horizontal ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 6 in. or 11⁄4 × 2 × 4 in. 4 in. Bracing diagonal ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 2 × 4 in. Tie-ins ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in.

NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16 × 2 inch steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.

INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to 20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high

Maximum intended load ...... 25 lbs/ft2 ...... 25 lbs/ft2 ...... 50 lbs/ft2 ...... 75 lbs/ft2. Poles or uprights ...... 2 × 4 in ...... 4 × 4 in ...... 4 × 4 in ...... 4 × 4 in. Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ...... 6 feet ...... 10 feet ...... 8 feet ...... 6 feet. Maximum (transverse) ...... 6 feet ...... 10 feet ...... 8 feet ...... 8 feet. Runners ...... 11⁄4 × 4 in ...... 11⁄4 × 9 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in. Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet ...... 2 × 4 in ...... 2 × 4 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in. (rough). 6 feet ...... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. (rough) 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in. (rough). in. or 3 × 8 in. 8 feet ...... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. (rough) 2 × 10 in ...... in. or 3 × 8 in. 10 feet ...... 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 2 × 10 in. (rough) ...... in. or 3 × 3 in. Planking ...... 11⁄4 × 9 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in ...... 2 × 10 in. Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ...... 7 feet ...... 6 feet ...... 6 feet. members. Bracing horizontal ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 6 in. or 11⁄4 × 2 × 4 in. 4 in. Bracing diagonal ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 2 × 4 in. Tie-ins ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in ...... 1 × 4 in.

(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.

MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty

Maximum intended load ...... 25 lbs/ft2 ...... 50 lbs/ft2 ...... 75 lbs/ft2. Posts, runners and braces ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. Bearers ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.). OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 6 ft. × 10 ft.. ft. × 7 ft. or. ft. × 6 ft. Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).

280

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00290 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A

MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS—Continued

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty

OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 6 ft. × 8 ft. *. Maximum runner spacing 6 ft. 6 in ...... 6 ft. 6 in ...... 6 ft. 6 in. vertically. * Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension. NOTE: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (±5°).

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PLANKED LEVELS

Maximum number of additional planked levels Maximum height of Me- scaffold Light dium Heavy (in feet) duty duty duty

Number of Working Levels: 1 ...... 16 11 6 125 2 ...... 11 1 0 125 3 ...... 6 0 0 125 4 ...... 1 0 0 125

(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of inches, or of 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch their prefabricated nature, no additional structural angle iron. guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are (2) Bolts used to attach brackets to struc- being adopted in this Appendix. tures shall not be less than 5⁄8 inches in di- (d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large area ameter. scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or (3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a) feet on centers. and (b)) may be applied. (4) No more than two employees shall oc- (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. cupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2 thnsp;* scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials Maximum width: 5 ft. shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the Maximum height: 5 ft. occupancy. Gussets: 1 × 6 in. (5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds: Braces: 1 × 8 in. Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 Legs: 2 × 6 in. Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in. Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in. (f) Horse scaffolds. Braces: 1 × 6 in. Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 ft.2 ** ft. 6 in. Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 (i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two lb/ft.2 ** pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite Horizontal members or bearers: sides of the vertical support. Light duty: 2 × 4 in. (ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets Medium duty: 3 × 4 in. shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches Legs: 2 × 4 in. from the outside of the form support, and Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in. shall be braced and secured to prevent tip- Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in. ping or turning. The knee or angle brace Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket the form at an angle of approximately 45 de- scaffolds. (1) Brackets shall consist of a tri- grees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a angular-shaped frame made of wood with a vertical support. cross-section not less than 2 inches by 3 (6) Metal bracket scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 × * The squares shall be set not more than 8 Uprights: 2 4 inch feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not Bearers: As designed. more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf- Braces: As designed. folds. (7) Wood bracket scaffolds: ** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 feet apart for light duty loads, and not more Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. Bearers: 2 × 6 in

281

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00291 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. Braces: 1 × 6 in (1) In addition to direct connections to build- (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guide- ings (except window cleaners’ anchors) ac- lines or tables are given. ceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway in- (i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No spe- clude angulated roping and static lines. An- cific guidelines or tables are given. gulated roping is a system of platform sus- (j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not pension in which the upper wire rope sheaves exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended or suspension points are closer to the plane load—500 lbs between poles; applied at the of the building face than the corresponding center of the span. Not more than two em- attachment points on the platform, thus ployees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at causing the platform to press against the one time between any two supports. When 2 face of the building. Static lines are separate × 4’s are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch ropes secured at their top and bottom ends wood pole, they shall be spliced with ‘‘10 penny’’ common nails no more than 12 inches closer to the plane of the building face than center to center, staggered uniformly from the outermost edge of the platform. By draw- the opposite outside edges. ing the static line taut, the platform is (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum in- drawn against the face of the building. tended load—25 lb/ft2. However, not more (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a than two employees shall occupy any plat- working load of 500 pounds, no more than form at any one time. Maximum span be- two employees shall be permitted on the tween supports shall be 8 feet. scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds (l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than with a working load of 750 pounds, no more one employee shall occupy a window jack than three employees shall be permitted on scaffold at any one time. the scaffold at one time. (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side string- Crawling boards shall be not less than 10 er shall be of clear straight-grained spruce. inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak, having a minimum 1 × 11⁄2 inch cross-sec- ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diame- tional area. The cleats shall be equal in 7 length to the width of the board and spaced ter, with ⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the 7 at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches. side stringers at least ⁄8 inch. The stringers (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf- shall be tied together with tie rods not less folds. No additional guidelines or tables are than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through given. the stringers and riveted up tight against (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- washers on both ends. The flooring strips folds. Maximum intended load—250 lbs. Wood shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart, seats for boatswains’ chairs shall be not less except at the side rails where the space may than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine constructed in accordance with the following quality plywood. table:

SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS

Length of Platform ...... 12 feet ...... 14 & 16 feet ...... 18 & 20 feet. Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes): At ends ...... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 3 in. At middle ...... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 4 in. Reinforcing strip (minimum) ...... A1⁄8 × 7⁄8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or underside, full length. Rungs ...... Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at least 7⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center. Tie rods: Number (minimum) ...... 3 ...... 4 ...... 4 Diameter (minimum) ...... 1⁄4 inch ...... 1⁄4 inch ...... 1⁄4 inch Flooring, minimum finished size ...... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ...... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ...... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.

SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS

Length of Platform ...... 22 & 24 ft ...... 28 & 30 ft. Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):

282

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00292 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A

SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS—Continued

At ends ...... 13⁄4 × 3 in ...... 13⁄4 × 31⁄2 in. At middle ...... 13⁄4 × 41⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 5 in. Reinforcing strip (minimum) ...... A1⁄8 × 7⁄8-inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or underside, full length. Rungs ...... Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at least 7⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center. Tie rods. Number (minimum) ...... 5 ...... 6. Diameter (minimum) ...... 1⁄4 in ...... 1⁄4 in. Flooring, minimum finished size ...... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ...... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.

(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type plat- (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum informs shall be composed of not less than tended load—750 lbs. nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, con- (2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch ply- nected together on the underside with cleats wood, equivalent in rating to American Ply- at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 wood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exte- inches from each end. A bar or other effec- rior. tive means shall be securely fastened to the (3) Bearers shall be made from 2 × 4 inch, platform at each end to prevent the platform or 1 × 10 inch rough lumber. They shall be from slipping off the hanger. The span be- free of knots and other flaws. tween hangers for plank-type platforms shall (4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to not exceed 10 feet. at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade (5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms manila rope. shall have side stringers of lumber not less (t) Interior hung scaffolds. than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span be- × tween hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when Bearers (use on edge): 2 10 in. beam platforms are used. The flooring shall Maximum intended load: Maximum span be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid 25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. flat and set into the upper edge of the string- 50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. ers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more 75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft. than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross (u) Needle beam scaffolds. beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced 2 more than 1⁄2 inch apart. Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft. (q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- Beams: 4 × 6 in. folds and stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable Maximum platform span: 8 ft. suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or Maximum beam span: 10 ft. tables are given for these scaffolds. (1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice. scaffolds. Maximum intended load—50 lb/ft2. The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a Each outrigger beam shall be at least a bowline knot or by a round turn and a half standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at hitch. least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not (2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6 manila rope. feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com- (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No addi- posed of stronger beams or multiple beams. tional guidelines or tables are being given (r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum infor these scaffolds. tended load—500 lbs. (w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as de- (2) Not more than two employees shall be scribed in the ANSI A92 series documents, as permitted on the scaffold at one time. appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be (3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall used to establish stability for the purpose of be 2,000 lbs. § 1926.452(w)(6). (4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional more than 50 feet apart. guidelines or tables are being given for these (5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to scaffolds. at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved (y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables plow steel wire rope. are given.

283

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00293 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(z) Tank builder’s scaffold. (1) The maximum ANSI/SIA A92.8–1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge distance between brackets to which scaf- Inspection and Maintenance Devices folding and guardrail supports are attached ANSI/SIA A92.9–1993 Mast-Climbing Work shall be no more than 10 feet 6 inches. Platforms (2) Not more than three employees shall occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold plank- (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX D TO SUB- ing at any time. PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF (3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS the scaffold plank level between the inner- most edge of the scaffold platform and the This appendix D is provided to serve as a curved plate structure of the tank shell to guide to assist employers when evaluating serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner the training needs of employees erecting or guardrail assembly where the space between dismantling supported scaffolds. the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12 The Agency believes that employees erect- inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space ing or dismantling scaffolds should be on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches trained in the following topics: (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope • General Overview of Scaffolding appropriately placed, or guardrails in ac- • regulations and standards cordance with § 1926.451(g)(4), shall be in- • erection/dismantling planning stalled in order to reduce that open space to • PPE and proper procedures less than 12 inches (30.48 cm). • fall protection (4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimen- • materials handling × sioned 2-inch (5.1 cm) 12-inch (30.5 cm) • access Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Se- • working platforms lect Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas • foundations Fir planks shall have a fiber stress of at • guys, ties and braces 2 2 least 1900 lb/in (130,929 n/cm ) and a modulus • Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds 2 of elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in • specific regulations and standards 2 (130,929,000 n/cm ), while Yellow Pine planks • components shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2 • parts inspection (172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of • erection/dismantling planning at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/cm2). • guys, ties and braces (5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a • fall protection taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be sup- • general safety ported by angle irons attached to brackets • access and platforms welded to the steel plates. These guardrails • erection/dismantling procedures shall comply with § 1926.451(g)(4). Guardrail • rolling scaffold assembly supports shall be located at no greater than • putlogs 10 feet 6 inch intervals. • Tube and Clamp Scaffolds [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR • specific regulations and standards 46950, Aug. 7, 2012] • components • parts inspection (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX B TO SUB- • erection/dismantling planning PART L OF PART 1926—CRITERIA FOR • guys, ties and braces DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF • fall protection PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL • general safety • PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD EREC- access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures TORS AND DISMANTLERS [RE- • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges SERVED] • System Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX C TO SUB- • components PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF NA- • parts inspection TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990 Vehicle-Mounted Ele- • fall protection vating and Rotating Aerial Devices • general safety ANSI/SIA A92.3–1990 Manually Propelled Ele- • access and platforms vating Aerial Platforms • erection/dismantling procedures ANSI/SIA A92.5–1990 Boom Supported Ele- • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges vating Work Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.6–1990 Self-Propelled Elevating Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should Work Platforms all receive the general overview, and, in ad- ANSI/SIA A92.7–1990 Airline Ground Support dition, specific training for the type of sup- Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices ported scaffold being erected or dismantled.

284

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00294 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—DRAWINGS AND ILLUSTRATIONS

This appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and scaffold components, and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and tie spacing patterns. This appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the user in complying with the requirements of subpart L, part 1926.

285

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00295 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.000 Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD

286

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00296 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.001 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

287

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00297 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.059 Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

288

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00298 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.060 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

289

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00299 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.004 Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

290

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00300 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.005 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E

291

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00301 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.006 Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

292

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00302 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.007 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.500

[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996; 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020]

Subpart M—Fall Protection § 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart.

AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. (a) Scope and application. (1) This sub- 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. part sets forth requirements and cri- 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 teria for fall protection in construction FR 50017), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 workplaces covered under 29 CFR part FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR Part 1911. 1926. Exception: The provisions of this SOURCE: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless subpart do not apply when employees otherwise noted. are making an inspection, investigation, or assessment of workplace conditions prior to the actual start of construction work or after all construction work has been completed.

293

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00303 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER30au96.008 § 1926.500 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those belts, lanyards and lifelines used for workplaces, conditions, operations, and fall protection during tank and com- circumstances for which fall protection munication and broadcast tower erec- shall be provided except as follows: tion. Paragraphs (b),(c) and (f) of (i) Requirements relating to fall pro- § 1926.107 provide definitions for the tection for employees working on scaf- pertinent terms.) folds are provided in subpart L of this (v) Criteria for steps, handholds, lad- part. ders, and grabrails/guardrails/railings (ii) Requirements relating to fall pro- required by subpart CC are provided in tection for employees working on subpart CC. Sections 1926.502(a), (c) cranes and derricks are provided in through (e), and (i) apply to activities subpart CC of this part. covered under subpart CC unless other- (iii) Fall protection requirements for wise stated in subpart CC. No other employees performing steel erection paragraphs of § 1926.502 apply to subpart work (except for towers and tanks) are CC. provided in subpart R of this part. (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth require- (iv) Requirements relating to fall ments for training in the installation protection for employees working on and use of fall protection systems, ex- certain types of equipment used in tun- cept in relation to steel erection ac- neling operations are provided in sub- tivities and the use of equipment cov- part S of this part. ered by subpart CC. (v) Requirements relating to fall pro- (b) Definitions. tection for employees engaged in the Anchorage means a secure point of at- erection of tanks and communication tachment for lifelines, lanyards or de- and broadcast towers are provided in celeration devices. § 1926.105. Body belt (safety belt) means a strap (vi) Subpart V of this part provides with means both for securing it about requirements relating to fall protec- the waist and for attaching it to a lan- tion for employees working from aerial yard, lifeline, or deceleration device. lifts or on poles, towers, or similar Body harness means straps which structures while engaged in the con- may be secured about the employee in struction of electric transmission or a manner that will distribute the fall distribution lines or equipment. arrest forces over at least the thighs, (vii) Requirements relating to fall pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with protection for employees working on means for attaching it to other compo- stairways and ladders are provided in nents of a personal fall arrest system. subpart X of this part. Buckle means any device for holding (3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the re- the body belt or body harness closed quirements for the installation, con- around the employee’s body. struction, and proper use of fall protec- Connector means a device which is tion required by part 1926, except as used to couple (connect) parts of the follows: personal fall arrest system and posi- (i) Performance requirements for tioning device systems together. It guardrail systems used on scaffolds and may be an independent component of performance requirements for falling the system, such as a carabiner, or it object protection used on scaffolds are may be an integral component of part provided in subpart L of this part. of the system (such as a buckle or dee- (ii) Performance requirements for ring sewn into a body belt or body har- stairways, stairrail systems, and hand- ness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to rails are provided in subpart X of this a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). part. Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an (iii) Additional performance require- area in which certain work (e.g., ments for fall arrest and work-posi- overhand bricklaying) may take place tioning equipment are provided in sub- without the use of guardrail systems, part V of this part. personal fall arrest systems, or safety (iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to net systems and access to the zone is the erection of tanks and communica- controlled. tion and broadcast towers. (Note: Sec- Dangerous equipment means equip- tion 1926.104 sets the criteria for body ment (such as pickling or galvanizing

294

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00304 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.500

tanks, degreasing units, machinery, a floor, roof, or other walking/working electrical equipment, and other units) surface. which, as a result of form or function, Infeasible means that it is impossible may be hazardous to employees who to perform the construction work using fall onto or into such equipment. a conventional fall protection system Deceleration device means any mecha- (i.e., guardrail system, safety net sys- nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch tem, or personal fall arrest system) or lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- that it is technologically impossible to ing or deforming lanyards, automatic use any one of these systems to provide self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., fall protection. which serves to dissipate a substantial Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, amount of energy during a fall arrest, wire rope, or strap which generally has or otherwise limit the energy imposed a connector at each end for connecting on an employee during fall arrest. the body belt or body harness to a de- Deceleration distance means the addi- celeration device, lifeline, or anchor- tional vertical distance a falling em- age. ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon- Leading edge means the edge of a gation and free fall distance, before floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or stopping, from the point at which the other walking/working surface (such as deceleration device begins to operate. the deck) which changes location as ad- It is measured as the distance between ditional floor, roof, decking, or the location of an employee’s body belt formwork sections are placed, formed, or body harness attachment point at or constructed. A leading edge is con- the moment of activation (at the onset sidered to be an ‘‘unprotected side and of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration edge’’ during periods when it is not ac- device during a fall, and the location of tively and continuously under con- that attachment point after the em- struction. ployee comes to a full stop. Lifeline means a component con- Equivalent means alternative designs, sisting of a flexible line for connection materials, or methods to protect to an anchorage at one end to hang against a hazard which the employer vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con- can demonstrate will provide an equal nection to anchorages at both ends to or greater degree of safety for employ- stretch horizontally (horizontal life- ees than the methods, materials or de- line), and which serves as a means for signs specified in the standard. connecting other components of a per- Failure means load refusal, breakage, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- or separation of component parts. Load age. refusal is the point where the ultimate Low-slope roof means a roof having a strength is exceeded. slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 Free fall means the act of falling be- (vertical to horizontal). fore a personal fall arrest system be- Lower levels means those areas or sur- gins to apply force to arrest the fall. faces to which an employee can fall. Free fall distance means the vertical Such areas or surfaces include, but are displacement of the fall arrest attach- not limited to, ground levels, floors, ment point on the employee’s body belt platforms, ramps, runways, exca- or body harness between onset of the vations, pits, tanks, material, water, fall and just before the system begins equipment, structures, or portions to apply force to arrest the fall. This thereof. distance excludes deceleration dis- Mechanical equipment means all tance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, motor or human propelled wheeled but includes any deceleration device equipment used for roofing work, ex- slide distance or self-retracting life- cept wheelbarrows and mopcarts. line/lanyard extension before they op- Opening means a gap or void 30 erate and fall arrest forces occur. inches (76 cm) or more high and 18 Guardrail system means a barrier inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall erected to prevent employees from fall- or partition, through which employees ing to lower levels. can fall to a lower level. Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 Overhand bricklaying and related work cm) or more in its least dimension, in means the process of laying bricks and

295

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00305 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.500 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

masonry units such that the surface of permit the hook to receive an object the wall to be jointed is on the opposite and, when released, automatically side of the wall from the mason, requir- closes to retain the object. Snaphooks ing the mason to lean over the wall to are generally one of two types: complete the work. Related work in- (1) The locking type with a self-clos- cludes mason tending and electrical ining, self-locking keeper which remains stallation incorporated into the brick closed and locked until unlocked and wall during the overhand bricklaying pressed open for connection or dis- process. connection; or Personal fall arrest system means a (2) The non-locking type with a self- system used to arrest an employee in a closing keeper which remains closed fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt until pressed open for connection or or body harness and may include a lan- disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, yard, deceleration device, lifeline, or the use of a non-locking snaphook as suitable combinations of these. As of part of personal fall arrest systems and January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt positioning device systems is prohib- for fall arrest is prohibited. ited. Positioning device system means a body Steep roof means a roof having a slope belt or body harness system rigged to greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to hori- allow an employee to be supported on zontal). an elevated vertical surface, such as a Toeboard means a low protective bar- wall, and work with both hands free rier that will prevent the fall of mate- while leaning. rials and equipment to lower levels and Rope grab means a deceleration de- provide protection from falls for per- vice which travels on a lifeline and sonnel. automatically, by friction, engages the Unprotected sides and edges means any lifeline and locks so as to arrest the side or edge (except at entrances to fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- points of access) of a walking/working ally employs the principle of inertial surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or run- locking, cam/level locking, or both. way where there is no wall or guardrail Roof means the exterior surface on system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high. the top of a building. This does not include floors or formwork which, be- Walking/working surface means any cause a building has not been com- surface, whether horizontal or vertical pleted, temporarily become the top on which an employee walks or works, surface of a building. including, but not limited to, floors, Roofing work means the hoisting, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, storage, application, and removal of formwork and concrete reinforcing roofing materials and equipment, in- steel but not including ladders, vehi- cluding related insulation, sheet metal, cles, or trailers, on which employees and vapor barrier work, but not includ- must be located in order to perform ing the construction of the roof deck. their job duties. Safety-monitoring system means a safe- Warning line system means a barrier ty system in which a competent person erected on a roof to warn employees is responsible for recognizing and warn- that they are approaching an unpro- ing employees of fall hazards. tected roof side or edge, and which des- Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a ignates an area in which roofing work deceleration device containing a drum- may take place without the use of wound line which can be slowly ex- guardrail, body belt, or safety net sys- tracted from, or retracted onto, the tems to protect employees in the area. drum under slight tension during nor- Work area means that portion of a mal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically walking/working surface where job du- locks the drum and arrests the fall. ties are being performed. Snaphook means a connector com- [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60 prised of a hook-shaped member with a FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, normally closed keeper, or similar ar- 2001; 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010; 79 FR 20696, rangement, which may be opened to Apr. 11, 2014]

296

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00306 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.501

§ 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. the edge that parallels the leading (a) General. (1) This section sets forth edge. requirements for employers to provide (3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a fall protection systems. All fall protec- hoist area shall be protected from fall- tion required by this section shall con- ing 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower lev- form to the criteria set forth in els by guardrail systems or personal § 1926.502 of this subpart. fall arrest systems. If guardrail sys- (2) The employer shall determine if tems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or the walking/working surfaces on which portions thereof, are removed to facili- its employees are to work have the tate the hoisting operation (e.g., dur- strength and structural integrity to ing landing of materials), and an em- support employees safely. Employees ployee must lean through the access shall be allowed to work on those sur- opening or out over the edge of the ac- faces only when the surfaces have the cess opening (to receive or guide equip- requisite strength and structural integ- ment and materials, for example), that rity. employee shall be protected from fall (b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. hazards by a personal fall arrest sys- Each employee on a walking/working tem. surface (horizontal and vertical sur- (4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walk- face) with an unprotected side or edge ing/working surfaces shall be protected which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a from falling through holes (including lower level shall be protected from fall- skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m) ing by the use of guardrail systems, above lower levels, by personal fall ar- safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail sys- rest systems. tems erected around such holes. (2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee (ii) Each employee on a walking/ who is constructing a leading edge 6 working surface shall be protected feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels from tripping in or stepping into or shall be protected from falling by through holes (including skylights) by guardrail systems, safety net systems, covers. or personal fall arrest systems. Excep- (iii) Each employee on a walking/ tion: When the employer can dem- working surface shall be protected onstrate that it is infeasible or creates from objects falling through holes (in- a greater hazard to use these systems, cluding skylights) by covers. the employer shall develop and imple- (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel. ment a fall protection plan which Each employee on the face of formwork meets the requirements of paragraph or reinforcing steel shall be protected (k) of § 1926.502. from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- lower levels by personal fall arrest sys- sible and will not create a greater hazard to tems, safety net systems, or posi- implement at least one of the above-listed tioning device systems. fall protection systems. Accordingly, the (6) Ramps, runways, and other walk- employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- ways. Each employee on ramps, run- tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) ways, and other walkways shall be pro- for a particular workplace situation, in lieu tected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or of implementing any of those systems. more to lower levels by guardrail sys- (ii) Each employee on a walking/ tems. working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more (7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at above a lower level where leading edges the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) are under construction, but who is not or more in depth shall be protected engaged in the leading edge work, shall from falling by guardrail systems, be protected from falling by a guard- fences, or barricades when the exca- rail system, safety net system, or per- vations are not readily seen because of sonal fall arrest system. If a guardrail plant growth or other visual barrier; system is chosen to provide the fall (ii) Each employee at the edge of a protection, and a controlled access well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation zone has already been established for 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be leading edge work, the control line protected from falling by guardrail sys- may be used in lieu of a guardrail along tems, fences, barricades, or covers.

297

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00307 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.501 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each em- (12) Precast concrete erection. Each employee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above ployee engaged in the erection of pre- dangerous equipment shall be pro- cast concrete members (including, but tected from falling into or onto the not limited to the erection of wall pan- dangerous equipment by guardrail sys- els, columns, beams, and floor and roof tems or by equipment guards. ‘‘tees’’) and related operations such as (ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or grouting of precast concrete members, more above dangerous equipment shall who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above be protected from fall hazards by lower levels shall be protected from guardrail systems, personal fall arrest falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or safety net systems. systems, or personal fall arrest sys- (9) Overhand bricklaying and related tems, unless another provision in para- work. (i) Except as otherwise provided graph (b) of this section provides for an in paragraph (b) of this section, each alternative fall protection measure. employee performing overhand brick- Exception: When the employer can laying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) demonstrate that it is infeasible or cre- or more above lower levels, shall be ates a greater hazard to use these sys- protected from falling by guardrail systems, the employer shall develop and tems, safety net systems, personal fall implement a fall protection plan which arrest systems, or shall work in a con- meets the requirements of paragraph trolled access zone. (k) of § 1926.502. (ii) Each employee reaching more NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level sible and will not create a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed of the walking/working surface on fall protection systems. Accordingly, the which they are working, shall be pro- employer has the burden of establishing that tected from falling by a guardrail sys- it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- tem, safety net system, or personal fall tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) arrest system. for a particular workplace situation, in lieu NOTE: Bricklaying operations performed on of implementing any of those systems. scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaf- (13) Residential construction. Each em- folds of this part. ployee engaged in residential construc- (10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. tion activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more Except as otherwise provided in para- above lower levels shall be protected graph (b) of this section, each employee by guardrail systems, safety net sys- engaged in roofing activities on low- tem, or personal fall arrest system un- slope roofs, with unprotected sides and less another provision in paragraph (b) edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower of this section provides for an alter- levels shall be protected from falling native fall protection measure. Excep- by guardrail systems, safety net sys- tion: When the employer can dem- tems, personal fall arrest systems, or a onstrate that it is infeasible or creates combination of warning line system a greater hazard to use these systems, and guardrail system, warning line sys- the employer shall develop and imple- tem and safety net system, or warning ment a fall protection plan which line system and personal fall arrest meets the requirements of paragraph system, or warning line system and (k) of § 1926.502. safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- 50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see ap- sible and will not create a greater hazard to pendix A to subpart M of this part), the implement at least one of the above-listed use of a safety monitoring system fall protection systems. Accordingly, the alone [i.e. without the warning line employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- system] is permitted. tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) (11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a for a particular workplace situation, in lieu steep roof with unprotected sides and of implementing any of those systems. edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower (14) Wall openings. Each employee levels shall be protected from falling working on, at, above, or near wall by guardrail systems with toeboards, openings (including those with chutes safety net systems, or personal fall ar- attached) where the outside bottom rest systems. edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m)

298

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00308 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

or more above lower levels and the in- working level. When conditions war- side bottom edge of the wall opening is rant, the height of the top edge may less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the exceed the 45-inch height, provided the walking/working surface, shall be pro- guardrail system meets all other cri- tected from falling by the use of a teria of this paragraph. guardrail system, a safety net system, NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the or a personal fall arrest system. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent (15) Walking/working surfaces not oth- member, shall be increased an amount equal erwise addressed. Except as provided in to the height of the stilts. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- § 1926.500(a)(2) or in § 1926.501 (b)(1) mediate vertical members, or equiva- through (b)(14), each employee on a lent intermediate structural members walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) shall be installed between the top edge or more above lower levels shall be proof the guardrail system and the walk- tected from falling by a guardrail sys- ing/working surface when there is no tem, safety net system, or personal fall wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches arrest system. (53 cm) high. (c) Protection from falling objects. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be in- When an employee is exposed to falling stalled at a height midway between the objects, the employer shall have each top edge of the guardrail system and employee wear a hard hat and shall im- the walking/working level. plement one of the following measures: (ii) Screens and mesh, when used, (1) Erect toeboards, screens, or shall extend from the top rail to the guardrail systems to prevent objects walking/working level and along the from falling from higher levels; or, entire opening between top rail sup- (2) Erect a canopy structure and keep ports. potential fall objects far enough from (iii) Intermediate members (such as the edge of the higher level so that balusters), when used between posts, those objects would not go over the shall be not more than 19 inches (48 edge if they were accidentally dis- cm) apart. placed; or, (iv) Other structural members (such (3) Barricade the area to which ob- as additional midrails and architec- jects could fall, prohibit employees tural panels) shall be installed such from entering the barricaded area, and that there are no openings in the keep objects that may fall far enough guardrail system that are more than 19 away from the edge of a higher level so inches (.5 m) wide. that those objects would not go over (3) Guardrail systems shall be capa- the edge if they were accidentally dis- ble of withstanding, without failure, a placed. force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top § 1926.502 Fall protection systems cri- edge, in any outward or downward di- teria and practices. rection, at any point along the top (a) General. (1) Fall protection sys- edge. tems required by this part shall comply (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test with the applicable provisions of this load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of section. this section is applied in a downward (2) Employers shall provide and in- direction, the top edge of the guardrail stall all fall protection systems re- shall not deflect to a height less than quired by this subpart for an employee, 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/ and shall comply with all other perti- working level. Guardrail system com- nent requirements of this subpart be- ponents selected and constructed in ac- fore that employee begins the work cordance with the appendix B to sub- that necessitates the fall protection. part M of this part will be deemed to (b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- meet this requirement. tems and their use shall comply with (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- the following provisions: mediate vertical members, solid pan- (1) Top edge height of top rails, or els, and equivalent structural members equivalent guardrail system members, shall be capable of withstanding, with- shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus out failure, a force of at least 150 3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/ pounds (666 N) applied in any downward

299

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00309 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.502 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

or outward direction at any point (1) Safety nets shall be installed as along the midrail or other member. close as practicable under the walking/ (6) Guardrail systems shall be so sur- working surface on which employees faced as to prevent injury to an em- are working, but in no case more than ployee from punctures or lacerations, 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When and to prevent snagging of clothing. nets are used on bridges, the potential (7) The ends of all top rails and fall area from the walking/working sur- midrails shall not overhang the ter- face to the net shall be unobstructed. minal posts, except where such over- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward hang does not constitute a projection from the outermost projection of the hazard. work surface as follows: (8) Steel banding and plastic banding Minimum required horizontal shall not be used as top rails or Vertical distance from working distance of outer edge of net level to horizontal plane of net from the edge of the working midrails. surface (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at Up to 5 feet ...... 8 feet. least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet. diameter or thickness to prevent cuts More than 10 feet ...... 13 feet. and lacerations. If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be flagged at not (3) Safety nets shall be installed with more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with sufficient clearance under them to pre- high-visibility material. vent contact with the surface or struc- (10) When guardrail systems are used tures below when subjected to an im- at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or re- pact force equal to the drop test speci- movable guardrail section shall be fied in paragraph (c)(4) of this section. placed across the access opening be- (4) Safety nets and their installations tween guardrail sections when hoisting shall be capable of absorbing an impact operations are not taking place. force equal to that produced by the (11) When guardrail systems are used drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) at holes, they shall be erected on all of this section. unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and (12) When guardrail systems are used safety net installations shall be drop- around holes used for the passage of tested at the jobsite after initial in- materials, the hole shall have not more stallation and before being used as a than two sides provided with remov- fall protection system, whenever relo- able guardrail sections to allow the cated, after major repair, and at 6- passage of materials. When the hole is month intervals if left in one place. not in use, it shall be closed over with The drop-test shall consist of a 400 a cover, or a guardrail system shall be pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches provided along all unprotected sides or (76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the edges. net from the highest walking/working (13) When guardrail systems are used surface at which employees are exposed around holes which are used as points to fall hazards, but not from less than of access (such as ladderways), they 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level. shall be provided with a gate, or be so (ii) When the employer can dem- offset that a person cannot walk di- onstrate that it is unreasonable to per- rectly into the hole. form the drop-test required by para- (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps graph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the em- and runways shall be erected along ployer (or a designated competent per- each unprotected side or edge. son) shall certify that the net and net (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope installation is in compliance with the being used for top rails or midrails provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and shall be inspected as frequently as nec- (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a essary to ensure that it continues to certification record prior to the net meet the strength requirements of being used as a fall protection system. paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The certification record must include (c) Safety net systems. Safety net sys- an identification of the net and net in- tems and their use shall comply with stallation for which the certification the following provisions: record is being prepared; the date that

300

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00310 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

it was determined that the identified (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be net and net installation were in com- proof-tested to a minimum tensile load pliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- section and the signature of the person ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- making the determination and certifi- formation. cation. The most recent certification (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be record for each net and net installation compatible with the member to which shall be available at the jobsite for in- they are connected to prevent uninten- spection. tional disengagement of the snaphook (5) Defective nets shall not be used. by depression of the snaphook keeper Safety nets shall be inspected at least by the connected member, or shall be a once a week for wear, damage, and locking type snaphook designed and other deterioration. Defective compo- used to prevent disengagement of the nents shall be removed from service. snaphook by the contact of the Safety nets shall also be inspected snaphook keeper by the connected after any occurrence which could affect member. Effective January 1, 1998, only the integrity of the safety net system. locking type snaphooks shall be used. (6) Materials, scrap pieces, equip- (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking ment, and tools which have fallen into type and designed for the following the safety net shall be removed as soon connections, snaphooks shall not be en- as possible from the net and at least gaged: before the next work shift. (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire (7) The maximum size of each safety rope; net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 (ii) to each other; square inches (230 cm 2) nor be longer (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and snaphook or other connector is at- the opening, measured center-to-center tached; of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh (v) to any object which is incom- crossings shall be secured to prevent patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- enlargement of the mesh opening. tion to the snaphook such that unin- (8) Each safety net (or section of it) tentional disengagement could occur shall have a border rope for webbing by the connected object being able to with a minimum breaking strength of depress the snaphook keeper and re- 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). lease itself. (9) Connections between safety net (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar panels shall be as strong as integral work platforms with horizontal life- net components and shall be spaced not lines which may become vertical life- more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. lines, the devices used to connect to a (d) Personal fall arrest systems. Per- horizontal lifeline shall be capable of sonal fall arrest systems and their use locking in both directions on the life- shall comply with the provisions set line. forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be de- body belts are not acceptable as part of signed, installed, and used, under the a personal fall arrest system. Note: The supervision of a qualified person, as use of a body belt in a positioning depart of a complete personal fall arrest vice system is acceptable and is regu- system, which maintains a safety fac- lated under paragraph (e) of this sector of at least two. tion. (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines (1) Connectors shall be drop forged, shall have a minimum breaking pressed or formed steel, or made of strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). equivalent materials. (10) (i) Except as provided in para- (2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- graph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when resistant finish, and all surfaces and vertical lifelines are used, each em- edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- ployee shall be attached to a separate age to interfacing parts of the system. lifeline. (3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall (ii) During the construction of eleva- have a minimum tensile strength of tor shafts, two employees may be at- 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). tached to the same lifeline in the

301

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00311 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.502 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

hoistway, provided both employees are distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet working atop a false car that is (1.07 m); and, equipped with guardrails; the strength (v) have sufficient strength to with- of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 stand twice the potential impact en- pounds per employee attached] (44.4 ergy of an employee free falling a dis- kN); and all other criteria specified in tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall this paragraph for lifelines have been distance permitted by the system, met. whichever is less. (11) Lifelines shall be protected NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system against being cut or abraded. meets the criteria and protocols contained in (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- appendix C to subpart M, and if the system yards which automatically limit free is being used by an employee having a com- fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less bined person and tool weight of less than 310 shall be capable of sustaining a min- pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- imum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 ered to be in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the kN) applied to the device with the life- system is used by an employee having a com- line or lanyard in the fully extended bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140 position. kg) or more, then the employer must appro- (13) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- priately modify the criteria and protocols of yards which do not limit free fall dis- the appendix to provide proper protection for tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch such heavier weights, or the system will not lanyards, and tearing and deforming be deemed to be in compliance with the re- lanyards shall be capable of sustaining quirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this sec- a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds tion. (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the (17) The attachment point of the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended body belt shall be located in the center position. of the wearer’s back. The attachment (14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used point of the body harness shall be lo- in lanyards, lifelines, and strength cated in the center of the wearer’s back components of body belts and body har- near shoulder level, or above the wear- nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- er’s head. bers. (18) Body belts, harnesses, and com- (15) Anchorages used for attachment ponents shall be used only for em- of personal fall arrest equipment shall ployee protection (as part of a personal be independent of any anchorage being fall arrest system or positioning device used to support or suspend platforms system) and not to hoist materials. and capable of supporting at least 5,000 (19) Personal fall arrest systems and pounds (22.2 kN) per employee at- components subjected to impact load- tached, or shall be designed, installed, ing shall be immediately removed from and used as follows: service and shall not be used again for (i) as part of a complete personal fall employee protection until inspected arrest system which maintains a safety and determined by a competent person factor of at least two; and to be undamaged and suitable for (ii) under the supervision of a quali- reuse. fied person. (20) The employer shall provide for (16) Personal fall arrest systems, prompt rescue of employees in the when stopping a fall, shall: event of a fall or shall assure that em- (i) limit maximum arresting force on ployees are able to rescue themselves. an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall used with a body belt; be inspected prior to each use for wear, (ii) limit maximum arresting force damage and other deterioration, and on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) defective components shall be removed when used with a body harness; from service. (iii) be rigged such that an employee (22) Body belts shall be at least one can neither free fall more than 6 feet and five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) (1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; wide. (iv) bring an employee to a complete (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall stop and limit maximum deceleration not be attached to guardrail systems,

302

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00312 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

nor shall they be attached to hoists ex- (v) to any object which is incom- cept as specified in other subparts of patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- this part. tion to the snaphook such that unin- (24) When a personal fall arrest sys- tentional disengagement could occur tem is used at hoist areas, it shall be by the connected object being able to rigged to allow the movement of the depress the snaphook keeper and re- employee only as far as the edge of the lease itself. walking/working surface. (9) Positioning device systems shall (e) Positioning device systems. Posi- be inspected prior to each use for wear, tioning device systems and their use damage, and other deterioration, and shall conform to the following provi- defective components shall be removed sions: from service. (1) Positioning devices shall be rigged (10) Body belts, harnesses, and com- such that an employee cannot free fall ponents shall be used only for em- more than 2 feet (.6 m). ployee protection (as part of a personal (2) Positioning devices shall be se- fall arrest system or positioning device cured to an anchorage capable of sup- system) and not to hoist materials. porting at least twice the potential im- (f) Warning line systems. Warning line pact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 systems [See § 1926.501(b)(10)] and their pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. use shall comply with the following (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, provisions: pressed or formed steel, or made of (1) The warning line shall be erected equivalent materials. around all sides of the roof work area. (i) When mechanical equipment is (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion- not being used, the warning line shall resistant finish, and all surfaces and be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- from the roof edge. age to interfacing parts of this system. (ii) When mechanical equipment is (5) Connecting assemblies shall have being used, the warning line shall be a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from pounds (22.2 kN) the roof edge which is parallel to the (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be direction of mechanical equipment op- proof-tested to a minimum tensile load eration, and not less than 10 feet (3.1 of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- m) from the roof edge which is perpen- ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- dicular to the direction of mechanical formation. equipment operation. (7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be (iii) Points of access, materials han- compatible with the member to which dling areas, storage areas, and hoisting they are connected to prevent uninten- areas shall be connected to the work tional disengagement of the snaphook area by an access path formed by two by depression of the snaphook keeper warning lines. by the connected member, or shall be a (iv) When the path to a point of ac- locking type snaphook designed and cess is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, used to prevent disengagement of the or other barricade, equivalent in snaphook by the contact of the strength and height to the warning snaphook keeper by the connected line, shall be placed across the path at member. As of January 1, 1998, only the point where the path intersects the locking type snaphooks shall be used. warning line erected around the work (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking area, or the path shall be offset such type and designed for the following that a person cannot walk directly into connections, snaphooks shall not be en- the work area. gaged: (2) Warning lines shall consist of (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting rope; stanchions erected as follows: (ii) to each other; (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) snaphook or other connector is at- intervals with high-visibility material; tached; (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or rigged and supported in such a way

303

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00313 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.502 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

that its lowest point (including sag) is whichever is less, from the leading no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the edge. walking/working surface and its high- (iii) The control line shall extend est point is no more than 39 inches (1.0 along the entire length of the unpro- m) from the walking/working surface; tected or leading edge and shall be ap- (iii) After being erected, with the proximately parallel to the unpro- rope, wire, or chain attached, stan- tected or leading edge. chions shall be capable of resisting, (iv) The control line shall be con- without tipping over, a force of at least nected on each side to a guardrail sys- 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally tem or wall. against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) (2) When used to control access to above the walking/working surface, areas where overhand bricklaying and perpendicular to the warning line, and related work are taking place: in the direction of the floor, roof, or (i) The controlled access zone shall platform edge; be defined by a control line erected not (iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than have a minimum tensile strength of 500 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge. pounds (2.22 kN), and after being at- (ii) The control line shall extend for tached to the stanchions, shall be capa- a distance sufficient for the controlled ble of supporting, without breaking, access zone to enclose all employees the loads applied to the stanchions as performing overhand bricklaying and prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of related work at the working edge and this section; and shall be approximately parallel to the (v) The line shall be attached at each working edge. stanchion in such a way that pulling on (iii) Additional control lines shall be one section of the line between stan- erected at each end to enclose the con- chions will not result in slack being trolled access zone. taken up in adjacent sections before the stanchion tips over. (iv) Only employees engaged in (3) No employee shall be allowed in overhand bricklaying or related work the area between a roof edge and a shall be permitted in the controlled ac- warning line unless the employee is cess zone. performing roofing work in that area. (3) Control lines shall consist of (4) Mechanical equipment on roofs ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent mate- shall be used or stored only in areas rials, and supporting stanchions as fol- where employees are protected by a lows: warning line system, guardrail system, (i) Each line shall be flagged or oth- or personal fall arrest system. erwise clearly marked at not more (g) Controlled access zones. Controlled than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high- access zones [See § 1926.501(b)(9) and visibility material. § 1926.502(k)] and their use shall con- (ii) Each line shall be rigged and sup- form to the following provisions. ported in such a way that its lowest (1) When used to control access to point (including sag) is not less than 39 areas where leading edge and other op- inches (1 m) from the walking/working erations are taking place the con- surface and its highest point is not trolled access zone shall be defined by more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches a control line or by any other means (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying op- that restricts access. erations are being performed] from the (i) When control lines are used, they walking/working surface. shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 (iii) Each line shall have a minimum m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88 the unprotected or leading edge, except kN). when erecting precast concrete mem- (4) On floors and roofs where guard- bers. rail systems are not in place prior to (ii) When erecting precast concrete the beginning of overhand bricklaying members, the control line shall be operations, controlled access zones erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor shall be enlarged, as necessary, to en- more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the close all points of access, material han- length of the member being erected, dling areas, and storage areas.

304

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00314 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.502

(5) On floors and roofs where guard- vehicle expected to cross over the rail systems are in place, but need to cover. be removed to allow overhand brick- (2) All other covers shall be capable laying work or leading edge work to of supporting, without failure, at least take place, only that portion of the twice the weight of employees, equip- guardrail necessary to accomplish that ment, and materials that may be im- day’s work shall be removed. posed on the cover at any one time. (h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety (3) All covers shall be secured when monitoring systems [See installed so as to prevent accidental §§ 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and displacement by the wind, equipment, their use shall comply with the fol- or employees. lowing provisions: (4) All covers shall be color coded or (1) The employer shall designate a they shall be marked with the word competent person to monitor the safe- ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to provide warn- ty of other employees and the em- ing of the hazard. ployer shall ensure that the safety NOTE: This provision does not apply to cast monitor complies with the following iron manhole covers or steel grates used on requirements: streets or roadways. (i) The safety monitor shall be com- (j) Protection from falling objects. Fall- petent to recognize fall hazards; ing object protection shall comply with (ii) The safety monitor shall warn the following provisions: the employee when it appears that the (1) Toeboards, when used as falling employee is unaware of a fall hazard or object protection, shall be erected is acting in an unsafe manner; along the edge of the overhead walking/ (iii) The safety monitor shall be on working surface for a distance suffi- the same walking/working surface and cient to protect employees below. within visual sighting distance of the employee being monitored; (2) Toeboards shall be capable of (iv) The safety monitor shall be close withstanding, without failure, a force enough to communicate orally with of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in the employee; and any downward or outward direction at (v) The safety monitor shall not have any point along the toeboard. other responsibilities which could take (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of 1 the monitor’s attention from the moni- 3 ⁄2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height toring function. from their top edge to the level of the (2) Mechanical equipment shall not walking/working surface. They shall 1 be used or stored in areas where safety have not more than ⁄4 inch (0.6 cm) monitoring systems are being used to clearance above the walking/working monitor employees engaged in roofing surface. They shall be solid or have operations on low-slope roofs. openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in (3) No employee, other than an em- greatest dimension. ployee engaged in roofing work [on (4) Where tools, equipment, or mate- low-sloped roofs] or an employee cov- rials are piled higher than the top edge ered by a fall protection plan, shall be of a toeboard, paneling or screening allowed in an area where an employee shall be erected from the walking/ is being protected by a safety moni- working surface or toeboard to the top toring system. of a guardrail system’s top rail or (4) Each employee working in a con- midrail, for a distance sufficient to trolled access zone shall be directed to protect employees below. comply promptly with fall hazard (5) Guardrail systems, when used as warnings from safety monitors. falling object protection, shall have all (i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, openings small enough to prevent pas- roofs, and other walking/working sur- sage of potential falling objects. faces shall meet the following require- (6) During the performance of ments: overhand bricklaying and related work: (1) Covers located in roadways and (i) No materials or equipment except vehicular aisles shall be capable of sup- masonry and mortar shall be stored porting, without failure, at least twice within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working the maximum axle load of the largest edge.

305

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00315 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.503 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Excess mortar, broken or scat- tion systems. For example, the em- tered masonry units, and all other ma- ployer shall discuss the extent to terials and debris shall be kept clear which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle from the work area by removal at reg- mounted work platforms can be used to ular intervals. provide a safer working surface and (7) During the performance of roofing thereby reduce the hazard of falling. work: (7) The fall protection plan shall (i) Materials and equipment shall not identify each location where conven- be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof tional fall protection methods cannot edge unless guardrails are erected at be used. These locations shall then be the edge. classified as controlled access zones (ii) Materials which are piled, and the employer must comply with grouped, or stacked near a roof edge the criteria in paragraph (g) of this sec- shall be stable and self-supporting. tion. (8) Canopies, when used as falling ob- (8) Where no other alternative meas- ject protection, shall be strong enough ure has been implemented, the em- to prevent collapse and to prevent pen- ployer shall implement a safety moni- etration by any objects which may fall toring system in conformance with onto the canopy. § 1926.502(h). (k) Fall protection plan. This option is (9) The fall protection plan must in- available only to employees engaged in clude a statement which provides the leading edge work, precast concrete name or other method of identification erection work, or residential construc- for each employee who is designated to tion work (See § 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), work in controlled access zones. No and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that other employees may enter controlled it is infeasible or it creates a greater access zones. hazard to use conventional fall protec- (10) In the event an employee falls, or tion equipment. The fall protection some other related, serious incident oc- plan must conform to the following curs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer provisions. shall investigate the circumstances of (1) The fall protection plan shall be the fall or other incident to determine prepared by a qualified person and de- if the fall protection plan needs to be veloped specifically for the site where changed (e.g. new practices, proce- the leading edge work, precast concrete dures, or training) and shall implement work, or residential construction work those changes to prevent similar types is being performed and the plan must of falls or incidents. be maintained up to date. (2) Any changes to the fall protection § 1926.503 Training requirements. plan shall be approved by a qualified The following training provisions person. supplement and clarify the require- (3) A copy of the fall protection plan ments of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards with all approved changes shall be addressed in subpart M of this part. maintained at the job site. (a) Training program. (1) The em- (4) The implementation of the fall ployer shall provide a training program protection plan shall be under the su- for each employee who might be ex- pervision of a competent person. posed to fall hazards. The program (5) The fall protection plan shall doc- shall enable each employee to recog- ument the reasons why the use of con- nize the hazards of falling and shall ventional fall protection systems train each employee in the procedures (guardrail systems, personal fall arrest to be followed in order to minimize systems, or safety nets systems) are in- these hazards. feasible or why their use would create (2) The employer shall assure that a greater hazard. each employee has been trained, as (6) The fall protection plan shall in- necessary, by a competent person clude a written discussion of other qualified in the following areas: measures that will be taken to reduce (i) The nature of fall hazards in the or eliminate the fall hazard for workers work area; who cannot be provided with protec- (ii) The correct procedures for erect- tion from the conventional fall protec- ing, maintaining, disassembling, and

306

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00316 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A

inspecting the fall protection systems (3) Inadequacies in an affected em- to be used; ployee’s knowledge or use of fall pro- (iii) The use and operation of guard- tection systems or equipment indicate rail systems, personal fall arrest sys- that the employee has not retained the tems, safety net systems, warning line requisite understanding or skill. systems, safety monitoring systems, NOTE: The following appendices to subpart controlled access zones, and other pro- M of this part serve as non-mandatory guide- tection to be used; lines to assist employers in complying with (iv) The role of each employee in the the appropriate requirements of subpart M of safety monitoring system when this this part. system is used; APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART (v) The limitations on the use of me- 1926—DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS chanical equipment during the performance of roofing work on low-sloped Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With roofs; § 1926.501(b)(10) (vi) The correct procedures for the (1) This appendix serves as a guideline to handling and storage of equipment and assist employers complying with the require- materials and the erection of overhead ments of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section protection; and 1926.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety mon- (vii) The role of employees in fall itoring system alone as a means of providing protection plans; fall protection during the performance of (viii) The standards contained in this roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet subpart. (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in (b) Certification of training. (1) The the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and indicates where each roof or roof area is to employer shall verify compliance with be measured to determine its width. Section paragraph (a) of this section by pre- views or elevation views are shown where ap- paring a written certification record. propriate. Some examples show ‘‘correct’’ The written certification record shall and ‘‘incorrect’’ subdivisions of irregularly contain the name or other identity of shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly the employee trained, the date(s) of the shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension training, and the signature of the per- selected to be the width of an area is the son who conducted the training or the lesser of the two primary dimensions of the signature of the employer. If the em- area, as viewed from above. Example A ployer relies on training conducted by shows that on a simple rectangular roof, another employer or completed prior to width is the lesser of the two primary overall dimensions. This is also the case with roofs the effective date of this section, the which are sloped toward or away from the certification record shall indicate the roof center, as shown in Example B. date the employer determined the prior (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles. training was adequate rather than the Such roofs may be broken down into sub- date of actual training. areas as shown in Example C. The process of (2) The latest training certification dividing a roof area can produce many dif- shall be maintained. ferent configurations. Example C gives the (c) Retraining. When the employer has general rule of using dividing lines of min- reason to believe that any affected em- imum length to minimize the size and number of the areas which are potentially less ployee who has already been trained than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to does not have the understanding and minimize the number of roof areas where skill required by paragraph (a) of this safety monitoring systems alone are suffi- section, the employer shall retrain cient protection. each such employee. Circumstances (3) Roofs which are comprised of several where retraining is required include, separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in but are not limited to, situations Example D, may be considered as a series of where: individual roofs. Some roofs have pent- (1) Changes in the workplace render houses, additional floors, courtyard open- previous training obsolete; or ings, or similar architectural features; Ex- ample E shows how the rule for dividing (2) Changes in the types of fall pro- roofs into subareas is applied to such con- tection systems or equipment to be figurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs used render previous training obsolete; must be considered on an individual basis, as or shown in Example F.

307

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00317 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

308

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00318 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.061 ER18FE20.062 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A

309

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00319 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.063 Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

310

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00320 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.064 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A

311

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00321 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.065 Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

[85 FR 8738, Feb. 18, 2020] plying with these requirements. An employer may use these guidelines as a starting point APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART for designing guardrail systems. However, 1926—GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS the guidelines do not provide all the information necessary to build a complete sys- Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with tem, and the employer is still responsible for § 1926.502(b) designing and assembling these components The standard requires guardrail systems in such a way that the completed system and components to be designed and built to will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3), meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), (4), and (5). Components for which no specific and (5). This appendix serves as a non-man- guidelines are given in this appendix (e.g., datory guideline to assist employers in com- joints, base connections, components made

312

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00322 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18FE20.066 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C

with other materials, and components with (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create other dimensions) must also be designed and the free fall distance should be supplied with constructed in such a way that the com- the system, or in its absence, the least elas- pleted system meets the requirements of tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used § 1926.502. with the system. (1) For wood railings: Wood components (6) The test weight for each test should be shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in2 fiber (stress hoisted to the required level and should be grade) construction grade lumber; the posts quickly released without having any appre- shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm × 10 ciable motion imparted to it. cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 (7) The system’s performance should be m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at evaluated taking into account the range of least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) lumber, environmental conditions for which it is de- the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch signed to be used. by 6-inch (2.5 cm × 15 cm) lumber. All lumber (8) Following the test, the system need not dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by be capable of further operation. the American Softwood Lumber Standards, (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of dated January 1970. all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5 (2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of intermediate railings shall be at least one this section.) and one-half inches nominal diameter (2) The test consists of dropping the test (schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more weight once. A new unused system should be than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. used for each test. (3) For structural steel railings: posts, top (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches × 3 2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm 10 cm) by ⁄8-inch (1.1 (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than the fixed anchorage to the attachment on 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. the body belt or body harness. (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys- APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART tems, the length of the lifeline above the 1926—PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With 2 feet (0.61 m). § 1926.502(d) (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automati- I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) and positioning device systems—(a) General. or less, and for systems with deceleration de- This appendix serves as a non-mandatory vices which have a connection distance in ex- guideline to assist employers comply with cess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the the requirements in § 1926.502(d). Paragraphs centerline of the lifeline and the attachment (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this appendix describe point to the body belt or harness), the test test procedures which may be used to deter- weight should be rigged to free fall a dis- mine compliance with the requirements in tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is § 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in appendix D of 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to this subpart, the test methods listed here in its hanging location (6 feet below the anchor- appendix C can also be used to assist employ- age). The test weight should fall without in- ers comply with the requirements in terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor § 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device or ground during the test. In some cases a systems. non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length (b) General conditions for all tests in the ap- may need to be added to the system (for test pendix to § 1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards purposes) to create the necessary free fall and deceleration devices should be attached distance. to an anchorage and connected to the body- (6) For deceleration device systems with belt or body harness in the same manner as integral lifelines or lanyards which auto- they would be when used to protect employ- matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet ees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be (2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 should not have a deflection greater than m). 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 (7) Any weight which detaches from the pounds (10 kN) is applied. belt or harness has failed the strength test. (3) The frequency response of the load (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. of dropping the respective test weight once (4) The test weight used in the strength as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- of this section. A new, unused system should lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth be used for each test. of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm (2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of plus or minus 10 cm). 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg

313

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00323 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See signed for more than one arrest should lock paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). each of 1,000 times as they would in normal (ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or service. minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for as measured from the fixed anchorage to the personal fall arrest systems. The following in- attachment on the body belt or body har- formation constitutes additional guidelines ness. for use in complying with requirements for a (iii) The test weight should fall free from personal fall arrest system. the anchorage level to its hanging location (a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) kind of personal fall arrest system selected without interference, obstruction, or hitting should match the particular work situation, the floor or ground during the test. and any possible free fall distance should be (3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of kept to a minimum. Consideration should be 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg given to the particular work environment. plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See For example, the presence of acids, dirt, paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on (ii) The free fall distance to be used in the the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold test should be the maximum fall distance environments may also have an adverse ef- physically permitted by the system during fect on the system. Wire rope should not be normal use conditions, up to a maximum used where an electrical hazard is antici- free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet pated. As required by the standard, the em- (1.83 m), except as follows: ployer must plan to have means available to (A) For deceleration systems which have a promptly rescue an employee should a fall connection link or lanyard, the test weight occur, since the suspended employee may not should free fall a distance equal to the con- be able to reach a work level independently. nection distance (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and life- point to the body belt or harness). lines are subject to damage by work oper- (B) For deceleration device systems with ations such as welding, chemical cleaning, integral lifelines or lanyards which auto- and sandblasting, the component should be matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet protected, or other securing systems should (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free be used. The employer should fully evaluate fall a distance equal to that permitted by the the work conditions and environment (in- system in normal use. (For example, to test cluding seasonal weather changes) before se- a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lecting the appropriate personal fall protec- lanyard, the test weight should be supported tion system. Once in use, the system’s effec- and the system allowed to retract the life- tiveness should be monitored. In some cases, line or lanyard as it would in normal use. a program for cleaning and maintenance of The test weight would then be released and the system may be necessary. the force and deceleration distance meas- (b) Testing considerations. Before pur- ured). chasing or putting into use a personal fall (4) A system fails the force test if the re- arrest system, an employer should obtain corded maximum arresting force exceeds from the supplier information about the sys- 1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, tem based on its performance during testing and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when so that the employer can know if the system using a body harness. meets this standard. Testing should be done (5) The maximum elongation and decelera- using recognized test methods. This appendix tion distance should be recorded during the contains test methods recognized for evalu- force test. ating the performance of fall arrest systems. (e) Deceleration device tests—(1) General. The Not all systems may need to be individually device should be evaluated or tested under tested; the performance of some systems the environmental conditions, (such as rain, may be based on data and calculations de- ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for rived from testing of similar systems, pro- which the device is designed. vided that enough information is available (2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) to demonstrate similarity of function and Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 design. times over the same length of line a distance (c) Component compatibility considerations. of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de- mechanism should lock each time. signed, tested, and supplied as a complete (ii) Unless the device is permanently system. However, it is common practice for marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration which must be used, several types (different devices, body belts and body harnesses to be diameters and different materials), of life- interchanged since some components wear lines should be used to test the device. out before others. The employer and em- (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration de- ployee should realize that not all compo- vices. The locking mechanisms of other self- nents are interchangeable. For instance, a activating-type deceleration devices de- lanyard should not be connected between a

314

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00324 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C

body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de- allows employees to rescue themselves after vice of the self-retracting type since this can the fall has been arrested may be desirable, result in additional free fall for which the such as devices which have descent capa- system was not designed. Any substitution bility. or change to a personal fall arrest system (g) Inspection considerations. As required by should be fully evaluated or tested by a com- § 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems petent person to determine that it meets the must be regularly inspected. Any component standard, before the modified system is put with any significant defect, such as cuts, in use. tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; (d) Employee training considerations. Thor- alterations or additions which might affect ough employee training in the selection and its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; tive. Employees must be trained in the safe distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; use of the system. This should include the tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; following: application limits; proper anchor- loose or damaged mountings; non-func- ing and tie-off techniques; estimation of free tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- fall distance, including determination of de- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from celeration distance, and total fall distance to service immediately, and should be tagged or prevent striking a lower level; methods of marked as unusable, or destroyed. use; and inspection and storage of the sys- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the tem. Careless or improper use of the equip- most important aspects of personal fall pro- ment can result in serious injury or death. tection systems is fully planning the system Employers and employees should become fa- before it is put into use. Probably the most miliar with the material in this Appendix, as overlooked component is planning for suit- well as manufacturer’s recommendations, able anchorage points. Such planning should before a system is used. Of uppermost impor- ideally be done before the structure or build- tance is the reduction in strength caused by ing is constructed so that anchorage points certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying can be incorporated during construction for around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum per- use later for window cleaning or other build- mitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed ing maintenance. If properly planned, these are the importance of inspections prior to anchorage points may be used during con- use, the limitations of the equipment, and struction, as well as afterwards. unique conditions at the worksite which may (i) Properly planned anchorages should be be important in determining the type of sys- used if they are available. In some cases, an- tem to use. chorages must be installed immediately (e) Instruction considerations. Employers prior to use. In such cases, a registered pro- should obtain comprehensive instructions fessional engineer with experience in design- from the supplier as to the system’s proper ing fall protection systems, or another quali- use and application, including, where appli- fied person with appropriate education and cable: experience should design an anchor point to (1) The force measured during the sample be installed. force test; (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes (2) The maximum elongation measured for that there will be a need to devise an anchor lanyards during the force test; point from existing structures. Examples of (3) The deceleration distance measured for what might be appropriate anchor points are deceleration devices during the force test; steel members or I-beams if an acceptable (4) Caution statements on critical use limi- strap is available for the connection (do not tations; use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto (5) Application limits; itself); large eye-bolts made of an appro- (6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off priate grade steel; guardrails or railings if techniques, including the proper dee-ring or they have been designed for use as an anchor other attachment point to use on the body point; or masonry or wood members only if belt and harness for fall arrest; the attachment point is substantial and pre- (7) Proper climbing techniques; cautions have been taken to assure that (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, bolts or other connectors will not pull and storage; and through. A qualified person should be used to (9) Specific lifelines which may be used. evaluate the suitable of these ‘‘make shift’’ This information should be provided to em- anchorages with a focus on proper strength. ployees during training. (2) Employers and employees should at all (f) Rescue considerations. As required by times be aware that the strength of a per- § 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest sys- sonal fall arrest system is based on its being tems are used, the employer must assure attached to an anchoring system which does that employees can be promptly rescued or not reduce the strength of the system (such can rescue themselves should a fall occur. as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap- The availability of rescue personnel, ladders hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of at- or other rescue equipment should be evalu- tachment is used that will reduce the ated. In some situations, equipment which strength of the system, that component

315

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00325 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

should be replaced by a stronger one, but one dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de- that will also maintain the appropriate max- signed to be compatible for the connection. imum arrest force characteristics. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the (3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life- cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life- used for lifeline/lanyard connections except line should be used to compensate for the in emergency situations where no other weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard available system is practical. The ‘‘one-and- length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca- one’’ sliding hitch knot should never be used tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by The ‘‘two-and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’ one which has an appropriately incorporated knot (preferable) may be used in emergency connector to eliminate the need for a knot. situations; however, care should be taken to (4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline limit free fall distance to a minimum be- around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup- cause of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. port can reduce its strength as much as 70 (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re- percent due to the cutting action of the quired by the standard, each employee must beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of have a separate lifeline [except employees a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline engaged in constructing elevator shafts who around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline are permitted to have two employees on one should be protected from the edge; or free lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The fall distance should be greatly minimized. reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to (5) Tie-off where the line passes over or a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the around rough or sharp surfaces reduces movement of the lifeline during the arrest of strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards, avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging causing them to fall as well. should be used. Such alternatives may in- (j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, not required by this standard for all connec- wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the tions until January 1, 1998, locking surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap snaphooks designed for connection to suit- around or over the problem surface. able objects (of sufficient strength) are high- (6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on ly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a posi- to greater loads than the impact load im- tive locking mechanism in addition to the posed by an attached component. When the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 the keeper to open under moderate pressure degrees, the impact force imparted to the without someone first releasing the mecha- lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly nism. Such a feature, properly designed, ef- amplified. For example, with a sag angle of fectively prevents roll-out from occurring. 15 degrees, the force amplification is about (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the fol- 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- lowing connections must be avoided (unless pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s properly designed locking snaphooks are elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- used) because they are conditions which can line and the anchorages to which it is at- result in roll-out when a nonlocking tached should be increased a number of snaphook is used: times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a should be taken in considering a horizontal horizontal lifeline. lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- one dee-ring. zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each movement of the falling employee and the other. horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall (iv) A snaphook connected back on its inte- may cause other employees to fall also. Hori- gral lanyard. zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing be increased for each additional employee to loop or webbing lanyard. be tied off. For these and other reasons, the (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, design of systems using horizontal lifelines rebar, or other connection point in relation must only be done by qualified persons. Test- to the snaphook dimensions which would ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed use is recommended. by a turning motion of the snaphook. (7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated (k) Free fall considerations. The employer along the axis of the bolt and its strength is and employee should at all times be aware greatly reduced if the force is applied at an that a system’s maximum arresting force is angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). evaluated under normal use conditions es- Also, care should be exercised in selecting tablished by the manufacturer, and in no the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci- case using a free fall distance in excess of 6

316

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00326 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. D

feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can structions which might interfere with this significantly increase the arresting force on motion should be avoided or a severe injury the employee, possibly to the point of caus- could occur. ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis- (n) Other considerations. Because of the de- tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad- required by the standard, in no case greater ditional considerations may be required for than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera- tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an- tion devices of the self-retracting type chor should be located at or above the con- should be secured overhead in order to avoid nection point of the fall arrest equipment to the weight of the device having to be sup- belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional ported by the employee. Also, if self- retract- free fall distance is added to the length of ing equipment is connected to a horizontal the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach- lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be ing to the working surface will often result minimized to prevent the device from sliding in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For down the lifeline to a position which creates instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used, a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all the total free fall distance will be the dis- cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be tance from the working level to the body followed. belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another important consideration is that the arresting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART force which the fall system must withstand 1926—POSITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS also goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With system. § 1926.502(e) (l) Elongation and deceleration distance con- I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device siderations. Other factors involved in a proper Systems. This appendix serves as a non-man- tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis- datory guideline to assist employers comply tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan- with the requirements for positioning device yard will experience a length of stretching or systems in § 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c), elongation, whereas activation of a decelera- (d) and (e) of appendix C of subpart M relat- tion device will result in a certain stopping ing to § 1926.502(d)—Personal Fall Arrest Sys- distance. These distances should be available tems—set forth test procedures which may with the lanyard or device’s instructions and be used, along with the procedures listed must be added to the free fall distance to ar- below, to determine compliance with the re- rive at the total fall distance before an em- quirements for positioning device systems in ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop- § 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M. ping distance may be very significant if the (a) General. (1) Single strap positioning de- lanyard or deceleration device is attached vices shall have one end attached to a fixed near or at the end of a long lifeline, which anchorage and the other end connected to a may itself add considerable distance due to body belt or harness in the same manner as its own elongation. As required by the stand- they would be used to protect employees. ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of Double strap positioning devices, similar to these factors must also be maintained be- window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of tween the employee and obstructions below, the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and to prevent an injury due to impact before the the other end shall hang free. The body belt system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should or harness shall be attached to the strap in be allowed below the securing point of a rope the same manner as it would be used to pro- grab type deceleration device, and the end tect employees. The two strap ends shall be terminated to prevent the device from slid- adjusted to their maximum span. ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and should extend to the ground or the next shall not have a deflection greater than .04 working level below. These measures are inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds suggested to prevent the worker from inad- (10 kN) is applied. vertently moving past the end of the lifeline (3) During the testing of all systems, a test and having the rope grab become disengaged weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds from the lifeline. (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. (m) Obstruction considerations. The location The weight shall be a rigid object with a of the tie-off should also consider the hazard girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 of obstructions in the potential fall path of cm plus or minus 10 cm). the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should specified weight one time without failure of be considered. In addition, when a body belt the system being tested. A new system shall is used, the employee’s body will go through be used for each test. a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi- (5) The test weight for each test shall be tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob- hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its ‘‘at

317

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00327 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

rest’’ position), and shall be dropped so as to Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). Plan Approved By llllllllllllll (6) The test is failed whenever any break- Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll age or slippage occurs which permits the The following Fall Protection Plan is a weight to fall free of the system. sample program prepared for the prevention (7) Following the test, the system need not of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- be capable of further operation; however, all tection Plan must be developed and evalu- such incapacities shall be readily apparent. ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- II. Inspection Considerations. As required in ommended that erectors discuss the written § 1926.502 (e)(5), positioning device systems Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area must be regularly inspected. Any component Office prior to going on a jobsite. with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY alterations or additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; (Company Name) is dedicated to the pro- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; tection of its employees from on-the-job in- distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; juries. All employees of (Company Name) tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; have the responsibility to work safely on the loose or damaged mountings; non-func- job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To sup- tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- plement our standard safety policy by pro- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from viding safety standards specifically designed service immediately, and should be tagged or to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to marked as unusable, or destroyed. ensure that each employee is trained and made aware of the safety provisions which APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART are to be implemented by this plan prior to 1926—SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLAN the start of erection. This Fall Protection Plan addresses the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.502(k) use of other than conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as Employers engaged in leading edge work, well as identifying specific activities that re- precast concrete construction work and resi- quire non-conventional means of fall protec- dential construction work who can dem- tion. These areas include: onstrate that it is infeasible or creates a a. Connecting activity (point of erection). greater hazard to use conventional fall pro- b. Leading edge work. tection systems must develop and follow a c. Unprotected sides or edge. fall protection plan. Below are sample fall protection plans developed for precast con- d. Grouting. crete construction and residential work that This plan is designed to enable employers could be tailored to be site specific for other and employees to recognize the fall hazards precast concrete or residential jobsite. This on this job and to establish the procedures sample plan can be modified to be used for that are to be followed in order to prevent other work involving leading edge work. The falls to lower levels or through holes and sample plan outlines the elements that must openings in walking/working surfaces. Each be addressed in any fall protection plan. The employee will be trained in these procedures reasons outlined in this sample fall protec- and strictly adhere to them except when tion plan are for illustrative purposes only doing so would expose the employee to a and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion, rationale (unless the conditions at the job this is the case, the employee is to notify the site are the same as those covered by these foreman of the concern and the concern ad- sample plans) for not using conventional fall dressed before proceeding. protection systems for a particular precast Safety policy and procedure on any one concrete or residential construction work- project cannot be administered, imple- site. However, the sample plans provide guid- mented, monitored and enforced by any one ance to employers on the type of information individual. The total objective of a safe, ac- that is required to be discussed in fall pro- cident free work environment can only be ac- tection plans. complished by a dedicated, concerted effort by every individual involved with the project SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS from management down to the last em- Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress ployee. Each employee must understand Concrete Structures their value to the company; the costs of accidents, both monetary, physical, and emo- This Fall Protection Plan is specific for tional; the objective of the safety policy and the following project: procedures; the safety rules that apply to the Location of Job lllllllllllllll safety policy and procedures; and what their Erecting Company lllllllllllll individual role is in administering, imple- Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll menting, monitoring, and compliance of

318

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00328 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

their safety policy and procedures. This al- 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the lows for a more personal approach to compli- work area (at the leading edge and when ance through planning, training, under- making initial connections—point of erec- standing and cooperative effort, rather than tion). by strict enforcement. If for any reason an 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using estab- unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will lished work practices which have been made be implemented. known to the employees. It is the responsibility of (name of com- 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or work- petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- ing conditions that could lead to a fall, such tection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is as windy conditions. responsible for continual observational safe- 4. The function, use, and operation of safety checks of their work operations and to en- ty monitoring systems, guardrail systems, force the safety policy and procedures. The body belt/harness systems, control zones and foreman also is responsible to correct any other protection to be used. unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is 5. The correct procedure for erecting, the responsibility of the employee to under- maintaining, disassembling and inspecting stand and adhere to the procedures of this the system(s) to be used. plan and to follow the instructions of the 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or foreman. It is also the responsibility of the the erection plan. employee to bring to management’s atten- A conference will take place prior to start- tion any unsafe or hazardous conditions or ing work involving all members of the erec- acts that may cause injury to either them- tion crew, crane crew and supervisors of any selves or any other employees. Any changes other concerned contractors. This conference to this Fall Protection Plan must be ap- will be conducted by the precast concrete proved by (name of Qualified Person). erection supervisor in charge of the project. During the pre-work conference, erection II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON procedures and sequences pertinent to this THIS PROJECT job will be thoroughly discussed and safety practices to be used throughout the project Where conventional fall protection is in- will be specified. Further, all personnel will feasible or creates a greater hazard at the be informed that the controlled access zones leading edge and during initial connecting are off limits to all personnel other than activity, we plan to do this work using a those designated erectors specifically safety monitoring system and expose only a trained to work in that area. minimum number of employees for the time necessary to actually accomplish the job. Safety Monitoring System The maximum number of workers to be mon- A safety monitoring system means a fall itored by one safety monitor is six (6). We protection system in which a competent per- are designating the following trained em- son is responsible for recognizing and warn- ployees as designated erectors and they are ing employees of fall hazards. The duties of permitted to enter the controlled access the safety monitor are to: zones and work without the use of conven- 1. Warn by voice when approaching the tional fall protection. open edge in an unsafe manner. Safety monitor: 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous sit- Designated erector: uation developing which cannot be seen by Designated erector: another person involved with product place- Designated erector: ment, such as a member getting out of con- Designated erector: trol. Designated erector: 3. Make the designated erectors aware they Designated erector: are in a dangerous area. 4. Be competent in recognizing fall haz- The safety monitor shall be identified by ards. wearing an orange hard hat. The designated 5. Warn employees when they appear to be erectors will be identified by one of the fol- unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an lowing methods: unsafe manner. 1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, 6. Be on the same walking/working surface or as the monitored employees and within vis- 2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, ual sighting distance of the monitored em- or ployees. 3. They will wear a blue colored vest. 7. Be close enough to communicate orally Only individuals with the appropriate experi- with the employees. ence, skills, and training will be authorized 8. Not allow other responsibilities to en- as designated erectors. All employees that cumber monitoring. If the safety monitor be- will be working as designated erectors under comes too encumbered with other respon- the safety monitoring system shall have sibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erec- been trained and instructed in the following tion process; and (2) turn over other respon- areas: sibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn

319

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00329 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

over the safety monitoring function to an- disturbed. The opening being uncovered to other designated, competent person. The erect a column will become part of the point safety monitoring system shall not be used of erection and will be addressed as part of when the wind is strong enough to cause this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is loads with large surface areas to swing out of to be done at the erection foreman’s direc- radius, or result in loss of control of the tion and will only occur immediately prior load, or when weather conditions cause the to ‘‘feeding’’ the column through the open- walking-working surfaces to become icy or ing. Once the end of the column is through slippery. the slab opening, there will no longer exist a fall hazard at this location. Control Zone System III. IMPLEMENTATION OF FALL PROTECTION A controlled access zone means an area PLAN designated and clearly marked, in which leading edge work may take place without The structure being erected is a multistory the use of guardrail, safety net or personal total precast concrete building consisting of fall arrest systems to protect the employees columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core in the area. Control zone systems shall com- slabs and double tee floor and roof members. ply with the following provisions: The following is a list of the products and 1. When used to control access to areas erection situations on this job: where leading edge and other operations are Columns taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or by any other For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees means that restricts access. disconnecting crane hooks from columns will When control lines are used, they shall be work from a ladder and wear a body belt/har- erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more ness with lanyard and be tied off when both than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the hands are needed to disconnect. For tying member being erected, whichever is less, off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to from the leading edge. the lifting eye at the top of the column, 2. The control line shall extend along the prior to lifting, to be used with a manually entire length of the unprotected or leading operated or mobile rope grab. For columns edge and shall be approximately parallel to too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and the unprotected or leading edge. higher, an added cable will be used to reduce 3. The control line shall be connected on the height of the disconnecting point so that each side to a guardrail system or wall. a ladder can be used. This cable will be left 4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, in place until a point in erection that it can wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and be removed safely. In some cases, columns supporting stanchions as follows: will be unhooked from the crane by using an 5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise erection tube or shackle with a pull pin clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 which is released from the ground after the m) intervals with high- visibility material. column is stabilized. 6. Each line shall be rigged and supported The column will be adequately connected in such a way that its lowest point (includ- and/or braced to safely support the weight of ing sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from a ladder with an employee on it. the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from Inverted Tee Beams the walking/working surface. Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at 7. Each line shall have a minimum break- a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam, ing strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). make initial connections, and final alignment from a ladder. If the employee needs to Holes reach over the side of the beam to bar or All openings greater than 12 in. × 12 in. will make an adjustment to the alignment of the have perimeter guarding or covering. All beam, they will mount the beam and be tied predetermined holes will have the plywood off to the lifting device in the beam after en- covers made in the precasters’ yard and suring the load has been stabilized on its shipped with the member to the jobsite. bearing. To disconnect the crane from the Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper pro- beam an employee will stand a ladder tection for the hole must be provided to pro- against the beam. Because the use of ladders tect the workers. Perimeter guarding or cov- is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams ers will not be removed without the approval will be initially placed with the use of tag of the erection foreman. lines and their final alignment made by a Precast concrete column erection through person on a manlift or similar employee po- the existing deck requires that many holes sitioning systems. be provided through this deck. These are to Spandrel Beams be covered and protected. Except for the opening being currently used to erect a col- Spandrel beams at the exterior of the umn, all opening protection is to be left un- building will be aligned as closely as possible

320

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00330 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

with the use of tag lines with the final place- other end while maintaining the minimum ment of the spandrel beam made from a lad- distance of six (6) ft at all times. der at the open end of the structure. A ladder Erection of double tees, where conditions will be used to make the initial connections require bearing of one end into a closed and a ladder will be used to disconnect the pocket and the other end on a beam ledge, crane. The other end of the beam will be restricting the tee legs from going directly placed by the designated erector from the into the pockets, require special consider- double tee deck under the observation of the ations. The tee legs that are to bear in the safety monitor. closed pocket must hang lower than those at The beams will be adequately connected the beam bearing. The double tee will be and/or braced to safely support the weight of ‘‘two-lined’’ in order to elevate one end high- a ladder with an employee on it. er than the other to allow for the low end to be ducked into the closed pocket using the Floor and Roof Members following procedure. During installation of the precast concrete The double tee will be rigged with a stand- floor and/or roof members, the work deck ard four-way spreader off of the main load continuously increases in area as more and line. An additional choker will be attached more units are being erected and positioned. to the married point of the two-legged Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is spreader at the end of the tee that is to be constantly modified with the leading edge elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with changing location as each member is in- the main load line and swung into a position stalled. The fall protection for workers at as close as possible to the tee’s final bearing the leading edge shall be assured by properly elevation. When the tee is in this position constructed and maintained control zone and stabilized, the whip line load block will lines not more than 60 ft away from the lead- be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this ing edge supplemented by a safety moni- time, two erectors will walk out on the sus- toring system to ensure the safety of all des- pended tee deck at midspan of the tee mem- ignated erectors working within the area de- ber and pull the load block to the end of the fined by the control zone lines. tee to be elevated and attach the additional The hollow core slabs erected on the ma- choker to the load block. The possibility of sonry portion of the building will be erected entanglement with the crane lines and other and grouted using the safety monitoring sys- obstacles during this two lining process tem. Grout will be placed in the space be- while raising and lowering the crane block tween the end of the slab and face shell of on that second line could be hazardous to an the concrete masonry by dumping from a encumbered employee. Therefore, the des- wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways be- ignated erectors will not tie off during any tween the slabs will be dumped from a wheel- part of this process. While the designated barrow and then spread with long handled erectors are on the double tee, the safety tools, allowing the worker to stand erect fac- monitoring system will be used. After ating toward the unprotected edge and back taching the choker, the two erectors then from any work deck edge. step back on the previously erected tee deck Whenever possible, the designated erectors and signal the crane operator to hoist the will approach the incoming member at the load with the whip line to the elevation that leading edge only after it is below waist will allow for enough clearance to let the low height so that the member itself provides end tee legs slide into the pockets when the protection against falls. main load line is lowered. The erector, who Except for the situations described below, is handling the lowered end of the tee at the when the arriving floor or roof member is closed pocket bearing, will step out on the within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the suspended tee. An erection bar will then be designated erectors can then proceed to their placed between the end of the tee leg and the position of erection at each end of the mem- inside face of the pocketed spandrel member. ber under the control of the safety monitor. The tee is barred away from the pocketed Crane hooks will be unhooked from double member to reduce the friction and lateral tee members by designated erectors under force against the pocketed member. As the the direction and supervision of the safety tee is being lowered, the other erector re- monitor. mains on the tee which was previously erect- Designated erectors, while waiting for the ed to handle the other end. At this point the next floor or roof member, will be constantly tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point under the control of the safety monitor for where the tee legs can freely slide into the fall protection and are directed to stay a pockets. The erector working the lowered minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar event a designated erector must move from between the tee and the face of the pocketed one end of a member, which has just been spandrel member to very gradually let the placed at the leading edge, they must first tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper move away from the leading edge a min- bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly imum of six (6) ft and then progress to the lowered into its final erected position.

321

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00331 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

The designated erector should be allowed during their usage at the leading edge of pre- onto the suspended double tee, otherwise cast/prestressed concrete construction. there is no control over the horizontal move- Leading edge erection and initial connec- ment of the double tee and this movement tions are conducted by employees who are could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or specifically trained to do this type of work the column out of plumb. The control nec- and are trained to recognize the fall hazards. essary to prevent hitting the spandrel can The nature of such work normally exposes only be done safely from the top of the dou- the employee to the fall hazard for a short ble tee being erected. period of time and installation of fall protec- Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of tion systems for a short duration is not fea- the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated sible because it exposes the installers of the decks requires the use of a safety monitor system to the same fall hazard, but for a and a controlled access zone that is a min- longer period of time. imum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1⁄2 the 1. It is necessary that the employee be able length of the wall panels away from the un- to move freely without encumbrance in order protected edge, so that designated erectors to guide the sections of precast concrete into can move freely and unencumbered when re- their final position without having lifelines ceiving the panels. Bracing, if required for attached which will restrict the employee’s stability, will be installed by ladder. After ability to move about at the point of erec- the braces are secured, the crane will be dis- tion. connected from the wall by using a ladder. 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more The wall to wall connections will also be per- workers to maneuver around each other as a formed from a ladder. concrete member is positioned to fit into the Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The structure. If they are each attached to a life- locating of survey lines, panel layout and line, part of their attention must be diverted other installation prerequisites (prewelding, from their main task of positioning a mem- etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) ber weighing several tons to the task of will not commence until floor perimeter and floor openings have been protected. In some avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or areas, it is necessary because of panel con- avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if figuration to remove the perimeter protec- these workers are attached to lanyards, tion as the cladding is being installed. Re- more fall potential would result than from moval of perimeter protection will be per- not using such a device. formed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of In this specific erection sequence and pro- cladding erection to minimize temporarily cedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the unprotected floor edges. Those workers with- problem of two workers becoming tangled. In in 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline the cladding when the perimeter protection from retracting as the worker moved, thus is removed shall be tied off. potentially exposing the worker to a fall greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing Detailing over the lifeline of another worker can create a hazard because the movement of one Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or more to lower levels, who are not actively person can unbalance the other. In the event engaged in leading edge work or connecting of a fall by one person there is a likelihood activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting, that the other person will be caused to fall bracing, guying, patching, painting or other as well. In addition, if contamination such as operations, and who are working less than grout (during hollow core grouting) enters six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be the retractable housing it can cause exces- tied off at all times or guardrails will be in- sive wear and damage to the device and stalled. Employees engaged in these activi- could clog the retracting mechanism as the ties but who are more than six (6) ft from an lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstruct- unprotected edge as defined by the control ing the cable orifice can defeat the device’s zone lines, do not require fall protection but shock absorbing function, produce cable a warning line or control lines must be erect- slack and damage, and adversely affect cable ed to remind employees they are approach- extraction and retraction. ing an area where fall protection is required. 3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be trapped and crushed by moving structural IV. CONVENTIONAL FALL PROTECTION CONSID- members if the employee becomes restrained ERED FOR THE POINT OF ERECTION OR LEAD- by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and ING EDGE ERECTION OPERATIONS cannot get out of the path of the moving load. A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems The sudden movement of a precast con- In this particular erection sequence and crete member being raised by a crane can be procedure, personal fall arrest systems re- caused by a number of factors. When this quiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines happens, a connector may immediately have and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards to move a considerable distance to avoid in- to workers and will create offsetting hazards jury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being

322

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00332 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

used, the connector could be trapped. There- surface, will require removal and/or fore, there is a greater risk of injury if the patching. In order to remove and/or patch connector is tied to the structure for this these points, requires the employee to be ex- specific erection sequence and procedure. posed to an additional fall hazard at an un- When necessary to move away from a re- protected perimeter. The fact that attach- tractable device, the worker cannot move at ment points could be available anywhere on a rate greater than the device locking speed the structure does not eliminate the hazards typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving to- of using these points for tying off as dis- ward the device it is necessary to move at a cussed above. A logical point for tying off on rate which does not permit cable slack to double tees would be using the lifting loops, build up. This slack may cause cable retrac- except that they must be cut off to eliminate tion acceleration and cause a worker to lose a tripping hazard at an appropriate time. their balance by applying a higher than nor- 5. Providing attachment at a point above mal jerking force on the body when the cable the walking/working surface would also cre- suddenly becomes taut after building up mo- ate fall exposures for employees installing mentum. This slack can also cause damage their devices. Final positioning of a precast to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven concrete member requires it to be moved in coiling of cable on the drum, and possible such a way that it must pass through the cable damage. area that would be occupied by the lifeline The factors causing sudden movements for and the lanyards attached to the point this location include: above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines and lanyards on a moving member could pull (a) Cranes employees from the work surface. Also, the structure is being created and, in most cases, (1) Operator error. there is no structure above the members (2) Site conditions (soft or unstable being placed. ground). (a) Temporary structural supports, in- (3) Mechanical failure. stalled to provide attaching points for life- (4) Structural failure. lines limit the space which is essential for (5) Rigging failure. orderly positioning, alignment and place- (6) Crane signal/radio communication fail- ment of the precast concrete members. To ure. keep the lanyards a reasonable and manage- (b) Weather Conditions able length, lifeline supports would necessarily need to be in proximity to the posi- (1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—par- tioning process. A sudden shift of the precast ticularly a problem with the large surface concrete member being positioned because of areas of precast concrete members. wind pressure or crane movement could (2) Snow/rain (visibility). make it strike the temporary supporting (3) Fog (visibility). structure, moving it suddenly and causing (4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or me- tied off employees to fall. chanical problems. (b) The time in manhours which would be (c) Structure/Product Conditions. expended in placing and maintaining tem- (1) Lifting Eye failure. porary structural supports for lifeline at- (2) Bearing failure or slippage. taching points could exceed the expended (3) Structure shifting. manhours involved in placing the precast (4) Bracing failure. concrete members. No protection could be (5) Product failure. provided for the employees erecting the tem- (d) Human Error. porary structural supports and these sup- (1) Incorrect tag line procedure. ports would have to be moved for each suc- (2) Tag line hang-up. cessive step in the construction process, thus (3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane sig- greatly increasing the employee’s exposure nals. to the fall hazard. (4) Misjudged elevation of member. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally (5) Misjudged speed of member. between two columns to provide tie off lines (6) Misjudged angle of member. for erecting or walking a beam for con- 4. Anchorages or special attachment points necting work is not feasible and creates a could be cast into the precast concrete mem- greater hazard on this multi-story building bers if sufficient preplanning and consider- for the following reasons: ation of erectors’ position is done before the (1) If a connector is to use such a line, it members are cast. Any hole or other attach- must be installed between the two columns. ment must be approved by the engineer who To perform this installation requires an designed the member. It is possible that erector to have more fall exposure time at- some design restrictions will not allow a taching the cable to the columns than would member to be weakened by an additional be spent to make the beam to column con- hole; however, it is anticipated that such sit- nection itself. uations would be the exception, not the rule. (2) If such a line is to be installed so that Attachment points, other than on the deck an erector can walk along a beam, it must be

323

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00333 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

overhead or below him. For example, if a distance and will cause higher forces on the connector must walk along a 24 in. wide body in the event of an accidental fall. beam, the presence of a line next to the con- Manufacturers recommend an anchorage nector at waist level, attached directly to for the retractable lifeline which is immov- the columns, would prevent the connector ably fixed in space and is independent of the from centering their weight over the beam user’s support systems. A moveable anchor- and balancing themselves. Installing the line age is one which can be moved around (such above the connector might be possible on the as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which first level of a two-story column; however, can deflect substantially under shock load- the column may extend only a few feet above ing (such as a horizontal cable or very flexi- the floor level at the second level or be flush ble beam). In the case of a very flexible an- with the floor level. Attaching the line to chorage, a shock load applied to the anchor- the side of the beam could be a solution; age during fall arrest can cause oscillation of however, it would require the connector to the flexible anchorage such that the retract- attach the lanyard below foot level which able brake mechanism may undergo one or would most likely extend a fall farther than more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking 6 ft. (ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflec- (3) When lines are strung over every beam, tion is dampened. Therefore, use of a move- it becomes more and more difficult for the able anchorage involves critical engineering crane operator to lower a precast concrete and safety factors and should only be consid- member into position without the member ered after fixed anchorage has been deter- becoming fouled. Should the member become mined to be not feasible. entangled, it could easily dislodge the line Horizontal cables used as an anchorage from a column. If a worker is tied to it at present an additional hazard due to amplifi- the time, a fall could be caused. cation of the horizontal component of maximum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to 6. The ANSI A10.14–1991 American National the points where the horizontal cable is at- Standard for Construction and Demolition tached to the structure. This amplification Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Con- cable and is most severe for small angles of struction and Demolition Use, states that sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration horizontal force on the points of cable at- device should, if possible, be located above tachment can be amplified by a factor of 15. the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. It is also necessary to install the retract- ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable an- able device vertically overhead to minimize chorage point is one which is located as high swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s as possible to prevent contact with an ob- swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous struction below should the worker fall. Most situations exist: (1) due to the swing, hori- manufacturers also warn in the user’s hand- zontal speed of the user may be high enough book that the safety block/retractable life- to cause injury when an obstacle in the line must be positioned above the D-ring swing fall path is struck by either the user (above the work space of the intended user) or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall dis- and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and tance of the user may be much greater than restraint equipment be used in accordance if the user had fallen only vertically without with the manufacturer’s instructions. a swing fall path. Attachment of a retractable device to a With retractable lines, overconfidence may horizontal cable near floor level or using the cause the worker to engage in inappropriate inserts in the floor or roof members may re- behavior, such as approaching the perimeter sult in increased free fall due to the dorsal of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher greater than the shortest distance between than the attachment point of the snaphook the anchorage point and the leading edge. to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor worker’s fall before he or she has fallen a few or surface, reduces the working length to feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of only one foot, by placing the anchorage five the floor or beam and swing the worker like feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, a pendulum until the line has moved to a po- impact loads may exceed maximum fall ar- sition where the distance between the an- rest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D- chorage point and floor edge is the shortest ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safe- distance between those two points. Accom- ty block/retractable lifeline anchored to the panying this pendulum swing is a lowering of walking-working surface; and the potential the worker, with the attendant danger that for swing hazards is increased. he or she may violently impact the floor or Manufacturers also require that workers some obstruction below. not work at a level where the point of The risk of a cable breaking is increased if snaphook attachment to the body harness is a lifeline is dragged sideways across the above the device because this will increase rough surface or edge of a concrete member the free fall distance and the deceleration at the same moment that the lifeline is

324

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00334 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

being subjected to a maximum impact load- employees must be suspended by swing ing during a fall. The typical 3⁄16 in. cable in stages, boatswain chairs or other devices, a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength thereby increasing the amount of fall expo- of from 3000 to 3700 lbs. sure time to employees. 7. The competent person, who can take 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional into account the specialized operations being hazard at the perimeter of the erected struc- performed on this project, should determine ture where limited space is available in when and where a designated erector cannot which members can be turned after being use a personal fall arrest system. lifted from the ground by the crane. There would be a high probability that the member B. Safety Net Systems being lifted could become entangled in net The nature of this particular precast con- hardware, cables, etc. crete erection worksite precludes the safe 6. The use of safety nets where structural use of safety nets where point of erection or wall panels are being erected would prevent leading edge work must take place. movement of panels to point of installation. 1. To install safety nets in the interior To be effective, nets would necessarily have high bay of the single story portion of the to provide protection across the area where building poses rigging attachment problems. structural supporting wall panels would be Structural members do not exist to which set and plumbed before roof units could be supporting devices for nets can be attached placed. in the area where protection is required. As 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of the erection operation advances, the loca- the high rise portion of the structure poses a tion of point of erection or leading edge work particular hazard in that the crane operator changes constantly as each member is at- cannot see or judge the proximity of the load tached to the structure. Due to this constant in relation to the structure or nets. If the change it is not feasible to set net sections signaler is looking through nets and sup- and build separate structures to support the porting structural devices while giving in- nets. structions to the crane operator, it is not 2. The nature of the erection process for possible to judge precise relationships be- the precast concrete members is such that tween the load and the structure itself or to an installed net would protect workers as nets and supporting structural devices. This they position and secure only one structural could cause the load to become entangled in member. After each member is stabilized the the net or hit the structure causing poten- net would have to be moved to a new loca- tial damage. tion (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or C. Guardrail Systems the possibility of a move to a different level or area of the structure) to protect workers On this particular worksite, guardrails, placing the next piece in the construction se- barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter quence. The result would be the installation guarding devices or methods on the erection and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly floor will pose problems to safe erection pro- throughout the normal work day. As the cedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected time necessary to install a net, test, and re- by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members move it is significantly greater than the next to one another and welding or grouting time necessary to position and secure a pre- them together. The perimeter of a floor and cast concrete member, the exposure time for roof changes each time a new member is the worker installing the safety net would be placed into position. It is unreasonable and far longer than for the workers whom the net virtually impossible to erect guardrails and is intended to protect. The time exposure re- toe boards at the ever changing leading edge peats itself each time the nets and sup- of a floor or roof. porting hardware must be moved laterally or 1. To position a member safely it is nec- upward to provide protection at the point of essary to remove all obstructions extending erection or leading edge. above the floor level near the point of erec- 3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) re- tion. Such a procedure allows workers to quires that operations shall not be under- swing a new member across the erected sur- taken until the net is in place and has been face as necessary to position it properly tested. With the point of erection constantly without worrying about knocking material changing, the time necessary to install and off of this surface. test a safety net significantly exceeds the Hollow core slab erection on the masonry time necessary to position and secure the wall requires installation of the perimeter concrete member. protection where the masonry wall has to be 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter constructed. This means the guardrail is in- wall openings and opensided floors, causes stalled then subsequently removed to con- attachment points to be left in architectural tinue the masonry construction. The erector concrete which must be patched and filled will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer with matching material after the net sup- period of time while installing and removing porting hardware is removed. In order to perimeter protection than while erecting the patch these openings, additional numbers of slabs.

325

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00335 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

In hollow core work, as in other precast by merely erecting the precast concrete concrete erection, others are not typically member. on the work deck until the precast concrete 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the erection is complete. The deck is not com- safe swinging of a load by the crane. plete until the leveling, aligning, and grout- 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not ing of the joints is done. It is normal prac- allow for the safe use of scaffolding. tice to keep others off the deck until at least B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used the next day after the installation is com- because: plete to allow the grout to harden. 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not 2. There is no permanent boundary until reach areas on the deck that are erected over all structural members have been placed in other levels. the floor or roof. At the leading edge, work- 2. The leading edge of the building is usu- ers are operating at the temporary edge of ally over a lower level of the building and the structure as they work to position the this lower level will not support the weight next member in the sequence. Compliance of a vehicle mounted platform. with the standard would require a guardrail 3. A vehicle mounted platform could inter- and toe board be installed along this edge. fere with the safe swinging of a load by the However, the presence of such a device would crane, either by the crane swinging the load prevent a new member from being swung over or into the equipment. over the erected surface low enough to allow 4. Power lines and surrounding site work workers to control it safely during the posi- do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle tioning process. Further, these employees mounted platform. would have to work through the guardrail to C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are align the new member and connect it to the not used because: structure. The guardrail would not protect 1. A second crane close enough to suspend an employee who must lean through it to do any employee in the working and erecting the necessary work, rather it would hinder area could interfere with the safe swinging of the employee to such a degree that a greater a load by the crane hoisting the product to hazard is created than if the guardrail were be erected. absent. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work 3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at do not allow for the safe use of a second the leading edge of installed floor or roof crane on the job. sections by creating the possibility of employees being caught between guardrails and VI. ENFORCEMENT suspended loads. The lack of a clear work Constant awareness of and respect for fall area in which to guide the suspended load hazards, and compliance with all safety rules into position for placement and welding of are considered conditions of employment. members into the existing structure creates The jobsite Superintendent, as well as indi- still further hazards. viduals in the Safety and Personnel Depart- 4. Where erection processes require precast ment, reserve the right to issue disciplinary concrete stairways or openings to be in- warnings to employees, up to and including stalled as an integral part of the overall termination, for failure to follow the guide- erection process, it must also be recognized lines of this program. that guardrails or handrails must not project above the surface of the erection floor. Such VII. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS guardrails should be terminated at the level of the erection floor to avoid placing haz- All accidents that result in injury to work- ardous obstacles in the path of a member ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- being positioned. tigated and reported. It is an integral part of any safety program that documentation take V. OTHER FALL PROTECTION MEASURES place as soon as possible so that the cause CONSIDERED FOR THIS JOB and means of prevention can be identified to The following is a list and explanation of prevent a reoccurrence. other fall protection measures available and In the event that an employee falls or an explanation of limitations for use on this there is some other related, serious incident particular jobsite. If during the course of occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- erecting the building the employee sees an termine if additional practices, procedures, area that could be erected more safely by the or training need to be implemented to pre- use of these fall protection measures, the vent similar types of falls or incidents from foreman should be notified. occurring. A. Scaffolds are not used because: VIII. CHANGES TO PLAN 1. The leading edge of the building is constantly changing and the scaffolding would Any changes to the plan will be approved have to be moved at very frequent intervals. by (name of the qualified person). This plan Employees erecting and dismantling the shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards job progresses to determine if additional for a greater length of time than they would practices, procedures or training needs to be

326

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00336 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

implemented by the competent person to im- Each employee will be trained in these pro- prove or provide additional fall protection. cedures and will strictly adhere to them ex- Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- cept when doing so would expose the em- essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ployee to a greater hazard. If, in the employ- plan and all approved changes shall be main- ee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is tained at the jobsite. to notify the competent person of their concern and have the concern addressed before Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential proceeding. Construction It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement this Fall Pro- (INSERT COMPANY NAME) tection Plan. Continual observational safety This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For checks of work operations and the enforce- The Following Project: ment of the safety policy and procedures shall be regularly enforced. The crew super- Location of Job lllllllllllllll visor or foreman (insert name) is responsible Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll for correcting any unsafe practices or condi- Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll tions immediately. Plan Approved By llllllllllllll It is the responsibility of the employer to Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll ensure that all employees understand and The following Fall Protection Plan is a adhere to the procedures of this plan and to sample program prepared for the prevention follow the instructions of the crew super- of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- visor. It is also the responsibility of the em- tection Plan must be developed and evalu- ployee to bring to management’s attention ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- any unsafe or hazardous conditions or prac- ommended that builders discuss the written tices that may cause injury to either them- Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area selves or any other employees. Any changes Office prior to going on a jobsite. to the Fall Protection Plan must be approved by (name of qualified person). I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY (Your company name here) is dedicated to II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON the protection of its employees from on-the- THIS JOB job injuries. All employees of (Your company Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior name here) have the responsibility to work wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is and joist/truss activities will be conducted to supplement our existing safety and health by employees who are specifically trained to program and to ensure that every employee do this type of work and are trained to rec- who works for (Your company name here) ognize the fall hazards. The nature of such recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes work normally exposes the employee to the the appropriate measures to address those fall hazard for a short period of time. This hazards. Plan details how (Your company name here) This Fall Protection Plan addresses the will minimize these hazards. use of conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as identi- Controlled Access Zones fies specific activities that require non-con- When using the Plan to implement the fall ventional means of fall protection. During protection options available, workers must the construction of residential buildings be protected through limited access to high under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infea- hazard locations. Before any non-conven- sible or it creates a greater hazard to use tional fall protection systems are used as conventional fall protection systems at spe- part of the work plan, a controlled access cific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the tasks may include, but are not limited to: competent person as an area where a recog- a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and nized hazard exists. The demarcation of the rafters; CAZ shall be communicated by the com- b. Installation of floor sheathing and petent person in a recognized manner, either joists; through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains. c. Roof sheathing operations; and (Your company name here) shall take the d. Erecting exterior walls. following steps to ensure that the CAZ is In these cases, conventional fall protection clearly marked or controlled by the com- systems may not be the safest choice for petent person: builders. This plan is designed to enable em- • All access to the CAZ must be restricted ployers and employees to recognize the fall to authorized entrants; hazards associated with this job and to es- • All workers who are permitted in the tablish the safest procedures that are to be CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sec- followed in order to prevent falls to lower tions of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable levels or through holes and openings in walk- by the competent person) prior to implemen- ing/working surfaces. tation;

327

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00337 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

• The competent person shall ensure that • Workers shall have no other duties to all protective elements of the CAZ be imple- perform during truss/rafter erection proce- mented prior to the beginning of work. dures; • All trusses/rafters will be adequately Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and braced before any worker can use the truss/ Rafter Erection rafter as a support; • Workers will remain on the top plate During the erection and bracing of roof using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection a support while other trusses/rafters are may present a greater hazard to workers. On being erected; this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal • Workers will leave the area of the se- fall arrest systems will not provide adequate cured trusses only when it is necessary to se- fall protection because the nets will cause cure another truss/rafter; the walls to collapse, while there are no suit- • The first two trusses/rafters will be set able attachment or anchorage points for from ladders leaning on side walls at points guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. where the walls can support the weight of On this job, requiring workers to use a lad- the ladder; and der for the entire installation process will • A worker will climb onto the interior top cause a greater hazard because the worker plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the must stand on the ladder with his back or first two trusses/rafters being set. side to the front of the ladder. While erecting The workers responsible for detaching the truss or rafter the worker will need both trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses hands to maneuver the truss and therefore at the peaks traditionally are positioned at cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, lad- the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are ders cannot be adequately protected from also situations where workers securing movement while trusses are being maneu- rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on vered into place. Many workers may experi- top of the ridge beam. ence additional fatigue because of the in- (Your company name here) shall take the crease in overhead work with heavy mate- following steps to protect workers who are rials, which can also lead to a greater haz- exposed to fall hazards while securing truss- ard. es/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on beam: this job because the ground, after recent • Only the following trained workers will backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding. be allowed to work at the peak during roof In most cases, the erection and dismantling truss or rafter installation: of the scaffold would expose workers to a greater fall hazard than erection of the llllllllllllllllllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll trusses/rafters. llllllllllllllllllllllll On all walls eight feet or less, workers will • Once truss or rafter installation begins, install interior scaffolds along the interior workers not involved in that activity shall wall below the location where the trusses/ not stand or walk below or adjacent to the rafters will be erected. ‘‘Sawhorse’’ scaffolds roof opening or exterior walls in any area constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2 × 10 where they could be struck by falling ob- planks will often allow workers to be ele- jects; vated high enough to allow for the erection • Workers shall have no other duties than of trusses and rafters without working on securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam; the top plate of the wall. • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the In structures that have walls higher than webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and shall work from a stable position, either by ladders would create a greater hazard, safe sitting on a ‘‘ridge seat’’ or other equivalent working procedures will be utilized when surface that provides additional stability or working on the top plate and will be mon- by positioning themselves in previously sta- itored by the crew supervisor. During all bilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of reaching through the trusses/rafters; the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all • Workers shall not remain on or in the times. peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safe- (Your company name here) shall take the ly complete the task. following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while working from Roof Sheathing Operations the top plate installing trusses/rafters: Workers typically install roof sheathing • Only the following trained workers will after all trusses/rafters and any permanent be allowed to work on the top plate during truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are roof truss or rafter installation: unstable until some sheathing is installed, so llllllllllllllllllllllll workers installing roof sheathing cannot be llllllllllllllllllllllll protected from fall hazards by conventional llllllllllllllllllllllll fall protection systems until it is determined

328

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00338 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E

that the roofing system can be used as an an- are to be suspended unless wind breakers are chorage point. At that point, employees erected. shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system. Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a During the installation of floor sheathing/ worker falls while attached to a single truss joists (leading edge construction), the fol- with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause lowing steps shall be taken to protect work- collapse, and there is no place to attach ers: guardrails. • Only the following trained workers will All workers will ensure that they have se- be allowed to install floor joists or sheath- cure footing before they attempt to walk on ing: the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots of mud or other slip hazards. llllllllllllllllllllllll To minimize the time workers must be ex- llllllllllllllllllllllll posed to a fall hazard, materials will be llllllllllllllllllllllll staged to allow for the quickest installation • Materials for the operations shall be con- of sheathing. veniently staged to allow for easy access to (Your company name here) shall take the workers; following steps to protect workers who are • The first floor joists or trusses will be exposed to fall hazards while installing roof rolled into position and secured either from sheathing: the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds; • Once roof sheathing installation begins, • Each successive floor joist or truss will workers not involved in that activity shall be rolled into place and secured from a plat- not stand or walk below or adjacent to the form created from a sheet of plywood laid roof opening or exterior walls in any area over the previously secured floor joists or where they could be struck by falling ob- trusses; jects; • Except for the first row of sheathing • The competent person shall determine which will be installed from ladders or the the limits of this area, which shall be clearly ground, workers shall work from the estab- communicated to workers prior to place- lished deck; and ment of the first piece of roof sheathing; • Any workers not assisting in the leading • The competent person may order work edge construction while leading edges still on the roof to be suspended for brief periods exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the install- as necessary to allow other workers to pass ers) shall not be permitted within six feet of through such areas when this would not cre- the leading edge under construction. ate a greater hazard; • Only qualified workers shall install roof Erection of Exterior Walls sheathing; During the construction and erection of ex- • The bottom row of roof sheathing may be terior walls, employers shall take the fol- installed by workers standing in truss webs; lowing steps to protect workers: • After the bottom row of roof sheathing is • Only the following trained workers will installed, a slide guard extending the width be allowed to erect exterior walls: of the roof shall be securely attached to the roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no llllllllllllllllllllllll less than nominal 4’’ height capable of lim- llllllllllllllllllllllll iting the uncontrolled slide of workers. llllllllllllllllllllllll • Workers should install the slide guard while A painted line six feet from the perim- standing in truss webs and leaning over the eter will be clearly marked prior to any wall sheathing; erection activities to warn of the approach- • Additional rows of roof sheathing may be ing unprotected edge; • installed by workers positioned on pre- Materials for operations shall be conven- viously installed rows of sheathing. A slide iently staged to minimize fall hazards; and • guard can be used to assist workers in re- Workers constructing exterior walls taining their footing during successive shall complete as much cutting of materials sheathing operations; and and other preparation as possible away from • Additional slide guards shall be securely the edge of the deck. attached to the roof at intervals not to ex- III. ENFORCEMENT ceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing are installed. For roofs with pitches in ex- Constant awareness of and respect for fall cess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed hazards, and compliance with all safety rules at four-foot intervals. are considered conditions of employment. • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet) The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as are present, roof sheathing operations shall individuals in the Safety and Personnel De- be suspended unless safe footing can be as- partment, reserve the right to issue discipli- sured for those workers installing sheathing. nary warnings to employees, up to and in- • When strong winds (above 40 miles per cluding termination, for failure to follow the hour) are present, roof sheathing operations guidelines of this program.

329

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00339 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.550 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

IV. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper- All accidents that result in injury to work- ated cargo hooks shall have the elec- ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- trical activating device so designed and tigated and reported. It is an integral part of installed as to prevent inadvertent op- any safety program that documentation take eration. In addition, these cargo hooks place as soon as possible so that the cause shall be equipped with an emergency and means of prevention can be identified to mechanical control for releasing the prevent a reoccurrence. load. The hooks shall be tested prior to In the event that an employee falls or each day’s operation to determine that there is some other related, serious incident occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- the release functions properly, both termine if additional practices, procedures, electrically and mechanically. or training need to be implemented to pre- (e) Personal protective equipment. (1) vent similar types of falls or incidents from Personal protective equipment for em- occurring. ployees receiving the load shall consist of complete eye protection and hard V. CHANGES TO PLAN hats secured by chinstraps. Any changes to the plan will be approved (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to by (name of the qualified person). This plan flap in the downwash, and thus be shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job progresses to determine if additional snagged on hoist line, shall not be practices, procedures or training needs to be worn. implemented by the competent person to im- (f) Loose gear and objects. Every prac- prove or provide additional fall protection. tical precaution shall be taken to pro- Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- vide for the protection of the employ- essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ees from flying objects in the rotor plan and all approved changes shall be main- downwash. All loose gear within 100 tained at the jobsite. feet of the place of lifting the load, de- [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] positing the load, and all other areas susceptible to rotor downwash shall be Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, secured or removed. Elevators, and Conveyors (g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all helicopter loading and unloading areas. AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 12–71 (36 (h) Operator responsibility. The heli- FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (49 FR 35736), copter operator shall be responsible for 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as size, weight, and manner in which applicable; and 29 CFR 1911. loads are connected to the helicopter. If, for any reason, the helicopter oper- § 1926.550 [Reserved] ator believes the lift cannot be made safely, the lift shall not be made. § 1926.551 Helicopters. (i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When (a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter employees are required to perform cranes shall be expected to comply work under hovering craft, a safe with any applicable regulations of the means of access shall be provided for Federal Aviation Administration. employees to reach the hoist line hook (b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper- and engage or disengage cargo slings. ation a briefing shall be conducted. Employees shall not perform work This briefing shall set forth the plan of under hovering craft except when nec- operation for the pilot and ground per- essary to hook or unhook loads. sonnel. (j) Static charge. Static charge on the (c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be suspended load shall be dissipated with properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a a grounding device before ground per- length that will not permit their being sonnel touch the suspended load, or drawn up into rotors. Pressed sleeve, protective rubber gloves shall be worn swedged eyes, or equivalent means by all ground personnel touching the shall be used for all freely suspended suspended load. loads to prevent hand splices from (k) Weight limitation. The weight of an spinning open or cable clamps from external load shall not exceed the man- loosening. ufacturer’s rating.

330

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00340 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.551

(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other bilizing rotors. Precautions shall also gear, except for pulling lines or con- be taken by the employer to eliminate ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’ as far as practical reduced visibility. from a container or roll off a reel, shall (n) Signal systems. Signal systems be- not be attached to any fixed ground tween aircrew and ground personnel structure, or allowed to foul on any shall be understood and checked in ad- fixed structure. vance of hoisting the load. This applies (m) When visibility is re- Visibility. to either radio or hand signal systems. duced by dust or other conditions, Hand signals shall be as shown in Fig- ground personnel shall exercise special ure N–1. caution to keep clear of main and sta-

331

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00341 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.551 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(o) Approach distance. No unauthor- (p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever ized person shall be allowed to ap- approaching or leaving a helicopter proach within 50 feet of the helicopter with blades rotating, all employees when the rotor blades are turning. shall remain in full view of the pilot

332

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00342 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.015 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.552

and keep in a crouched position. Em- inches; and three thirty-seconds inch ployees shall avoid the area from the for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches. cockpit or cabin rearward unless au- (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed thorized by the helicopter operator to in accordance with the wire rope manu- work there. facturers’ recommendations. (q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per- (5) The installation of live booms on sonnel shall be provided when required hoists is prohibited. for safe helicopter loading and unload- (6) The use of endless belt-type ing operations. manlifts on construction shall be pro- (r) Communications. There shall be hibited. constant reliable communication be- (b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating tween the pilot, and a designated em- rules shall be established and posted at ployee of the ground crew who acts as the operator’s station of the hoist. a signalman during the period of load- Such rules shall include signal system ing and unloading. This signalman and allowable line speed for various shall be distinctly recognizable from loads. Rules and notices shall be posted other ground personnel. on the car frame or crosshead in a con- (s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per- spicuous location, including the state- mitted in an area that could result in ment ‘‘No Riders Allowed.’’ such fires being spread by the rotor (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride downwash. on material hoists except for the purposes of inspection and maintenance. § 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel (2) All entrances of the hoistways hoists, and elevators. shall be protected by substantial gates (a) General requirements. (1) The em- or bars which shall guard the full width ployer shall comply with the manufac- of the landing entrance. All hoistway turer’s specifications and limitations entrance bars and gates shall be paint- applicable to the operation of all hoists ed with diagonal contrasting colors, and elevators. Where manufacturer’s such as black and yellow stripes. specifications are not available, the (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4- limitations assigned to the equipment inch wooden bars or the equivalent, lo- shall be based on the determinations of cated 2 feet from the hoistway line. a professional engineer competent in Bars shall be located not less than 36 the field. inches nor more than 42 inches above (2) Rated load capacities, rec- the floor. ommended operating speeds, and spe- (ii) Gates or bars protecting the en- cial hazard warnings or instructions trances to hoistways shall be equipped shall be posted on cars and platforms. with a latching device. (3) Wire rope shall be removed from (3) Overhead protective covering of 2- service when any of the following con- inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood, or ditions exists: other solid material of equivalent (i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly strength, shall be provided on the top distributed broken wires in one rope of every material hoist cage or plat- lay or three broken wires in one strand form. in one rope lay; (4) The operator’s station of a hoist- (ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, ing machine shall be provided with or peening, causing loss of more than overhead protection equivalent to tight one-third of the original diameter of planking not less than 2 inches thick. the outside wires; The support for the overhead protec- (iii) Evidence of any heat damage re- tion shall be of equal strength. sulting from a torch or any damage (5) Hoist towers may be used with or caused by contact with electrical without an enclosure on all sides. How- wires; ever, whichever alternative is chosen, (iv) Reduction from nominal diame- the following applicable conditions ter of more than three sixty-fourths shall be met: inch for diameters up to and including (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch shall be enclosed on all sides for its en- for diameters seven-eights to 11⁄8 tire height with a screen enclosure of

333

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00343 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.552 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

1⁄2-inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or (6) A door or gate shall be provided at equivalent, except for landing access. each entrance to the car which shall (ii) When a hoist tower is not en- protect the full width and height of the closed, the hoist platform or car shall car entrance opening. be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides (7) Overhead protective covering of 2- for the full height between the floor inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood or other and the overhead protective covering solid material or equivalent strength with 1⁄2-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge shall be provided on the top of every wire or equivalent. The hoist platform personnel hoist. enclosure shall include the required (8) Doors or gates shall be provided gates for loading and unloading. A 6- with electric contacts which do not foot high enclosure shall be provided allow movement of the hoist when door on the unused sides of the hoist tower or gate is open. at ground level. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stopping and holding the car and rated load (6) Car arresting devices shall be in- when traveling at governor tripping stalled to function in case of rope fail- speed. ure. (10) Cars shall be provided with a ca- (7) All material hoist towers shall be pacity and data plate secured in a con- designed by a licensed professional en- spicuous place on the car or crosshead. gineer. (11) Internal combustion engines (8) All material hoists shall conform shall not be permitted for direct drive. to the requirements of ANSI A10.5–1969, (12) Normal and final terminal stop- Safety Requirements for Material ping devices shall be provided. Hoists. (13) An emergency stop switch shall (c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers be provided in the car and marked outside the structure shall be enclosed ‘‘Stop.’’ for the full height on the side or sides (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number used for entrance and exit to the struc- of hoisting ropes used shall be three for ture. At the lowest landing, the enclo- traction hoists and two for drum-type sure on the sides not used for exit or hoists. entrance to the structure shall be en- (ii) The minimum diameter of hoist- closed to a height of at least 10 feet. ing and counterweight wire ropes shall Other sides of the tower adjacent to be 1⁄2-inch. floors or scaffold platforms shall be en- (iii) Safety factors: closed to a height of 10 feet above the level of such floors or scaffolds. MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR SUSPENSION (2) Towers inside of structures shall WIRE ROPES be enclosed on all four sides through- Minimum out the full height. Rope speed in feet per minute factor of (3) Towers shall be anchored to the safety structure at intervals not exceeding 25 50 ...... 7.60 feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of 75 ...... 7.75 100 ...... 7.95 guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins 125 ...... 8.10 are not practical the tower shall be an- 150 ...... 8.25 chored by means of guys made of wire 175 ...... 8.40 200 ...... 8.60 rope at least one-half inch in diameter, 225 ...... 8.75 securely fastened to anchorage to en- 250 ...... 8.90 sure stability. 300 ...... 9.20 350 ...... 9.50 (4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be 400 ...... 9.75 not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and 450 ...... 10.00 shall be provided with mechanical 500 ...... 10.25 550 ...... 10.45 locks which cannot be operated from 600 ...... 10.70 the landing side, and shall be accessible only to persons on the car. (15) Following assembly and erection (5) Cars shall be permanently en- of hoists, and before being put in serv- closed on all sides and the top, except ice, an inspection and test of all func- sides used for entrance and exit which tions and safety devices shall be made have car gates or doors. under the supervision of a competent

334

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00344 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.553

person. A similar inspection and test is (C) Evidence of any heat damage required following major alteration of from any cause; an existing installation. All hoists (D) Reductions from nominal diame- shall be inspected and tested at not ter of more than three-sixty-fourths more than 3-month intervals. The em- inch for diameters to and including ployer shall prepare a certification three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch record which includes the date the infor diameters seven-eights inch to 11⁄8 spection and test of all functions and inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds safety devices was performed; the sig- inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in- nature of the person who performed the clusive; inspection and test; and a serial num- (E) In standing ropes, more than two ber, or other identifier, for the hoist broken wires in one lay in sections be- that was inspected and tested. The yond end connections or more than one most recent certification record shall broken wire at an end connection. be maintained on file. (d) Permanent elevators under the (16) All personnel hoists used by em- care and custody of the employer and ployees shall be constructed of mate- used by employees for work covered by rials and components which meet the this Act shall comply with the require- specifications for materials, construc- ments of American National Standards tion, safety devices, assembly, and Institute A17.1–1965 with addenda structural integrity as stated in the A17.1a–1967, A17.1b–1968, A17.1c–1969, American National Standard A10.4– A17.1d–1970, and inspected in accord- 1963, Safety Requirements for Work- ance with A17.2–1960 with addenda men’s Hoists. The requirements of this A17.2a–1965, A17.2b–1967. paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to cantilever type personnel hoists. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (17)(i) Personnel hoists used in bridge 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, 1987; 85 FR 8743, Feb. 18, 2020] tower construction shall be approved by a registered professional engineer § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists. and erected under the supervision of a qualified engineer competent in this (a) General requirements. (1) Exposed field. moving parts such as gears, projecting (ii) When a hoist tower is not en- screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain closed, the hoist platform or car shall sprockets, and reciprocating or rotat- be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides ing parts, which constitute a hazard, for the full height between the floor shall be guarded. and the overhead protective covering (2) All controls used during the nor- with 3⁄4-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge mal operation cycle shall be located wire or equivalent. The hoist platform within easy reach of the operator’s sta- enclosure shall include the required tion. gates for loading and unloading. (3) Electric motor operated hoists (iii) These hoists shall be inspected shall be provided with: and maintained on a weekly basis. (i) A device to disconnect all motors Whenever the hoisting equipment is ex- from the line upon power failure and posed to winds exceeding 35 miles per not permit any motor to be restarted hour it shall be inspected and put in until the controller handle is brought operable condition before reuse. to the ‘‘off’’ position; (iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed service when any of the following con- preventive device; ditions exist: (iii) A means whereby remotely oper- (A) In running ropes, six randomly ated hoists stop when any control is in- distributed broken wires in one lay or effective. three broken wires in one strand in one (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in lay; use shall meet the applicable require- (B) Wear of one-third the original di- ments for design, construction, instal- ameter of outside individual wires. lation, testing, inspection, mainte- Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any nance, and operations, as prescribed by other damage resulting in distortion of the manufacturer. the rope structure; (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]

335

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00345 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.554 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(c) This section does not apply to (5) Where a conveyor passes over base-mounted drum hoists used in con- work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares, junction with derricks. Base-mounted suitable guards shall be provided to drum hoists used in conjunction with protect employees required to work derricks must conform to § 1926.1436(e). below the conveyors. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 75 FR (6) All crossovers, aisles, and passage- 48134, Aug. 9, 2010] ways shall be conspicuously marked by suitable signs, as required by subpart G § 1926.554 Overhead hoists. of this part. (a) General requirements. (1) The safe (7) Conveyors shall be locked out or working load of the overhead hoist, as otherwise rendered inoperable, and determined by the manufacturer, shall tagged out with a ‘‘Do Not Operate’’ be indicated on the hoist, and this safe tag during repairs and when operation working load shall not be exceeded. is hazardous to employees performing (2) The supporting structure to which maintenance work. the hoist is attached shall have a safe (8) All conveyors in use shall meet working load equal to that of the hoist. the applicable requirements for design, (3) The support shall be arranged so construction, inspection, testing, as to provide for free movement of the maintenance, and operation, as pre- hoist and shall not restrict the hoist scribed in the ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety from lining itself up with the load. Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and (4) The hoist shall be installed only Related Equipment. in locations that will permit the operator to stand clear of the load at all Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, times. Mechanized Equipment, and (5) Air hoists shall be connected to an Marine Operations air supply of sufficient capacity and pressure to safely operate the hoist. All air hoses supplying air shall be posi- AUTHORITY: Section 107, Construction tively connected to prevent their be- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con- coming disconnected during use. struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of (6) All overhead hoists in use shall 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La- meet the applicable requirements for bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR construction, design, installation, test- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– ing, inspection, maintenance, and oper- 96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as ap- ation, as prescribed by the manufac- plicable. Section 1926.602 also issued under 29 turer. CFR part 1911. (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] § 1926.600 Equipment. § 1926.555 Conveyors. (a) General requirements. (1) All equip- (a) General requirements. (1) Means for ment left unattended at night, adja- stopping the motor or engine shall be cent to a highway in normal use, or ad- provided at the operator’s station. Con- jacent to construction areas where veyor systems shall be equipped with work is in progress, shall have appro- an audible warning signal to be sound- priate lights or reflectors, or barri- ed immediately before starting up the cades equipped with appropriate lights conveyor. or reflectors, to identify the location of (2) If the operator’s station is at a re- the equipment. mote point, similar provisions for stop- (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equiv- ping the motor or engine shall be pro- alent protection shall be provided and vided at the motor or engine location. used when inflating, mounting, or dis- (3) Emergency stop switches shall be mounting tires installed on split rims, arranged so that the conveyor cannot or rims equipped with locking rings or be started again until the actuating similar devices. stop switch has been reset to running (3)(i) Heavy machinery, equipment, or ‘‘on’’ position. or parts thereof, which are suspended (4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or to prevent employee contact with turn- jacks shall be substantially blocked or ing flights. cribbed to prevent falling or shifting

336

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00346 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.601

before employees are permitted to (v) Cage-type boom guards, insu- work under or between them. Bulldozer lating links, or proximity warning de- and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, vices may be used on cranes, but the dump bodies, and similar equipment, use of such devices shall not alter the shall be either fully lowered or blocked requirements of any other regulation when being repaired or when not in of this part even if such device is reuse. All controls shall be in a neutral quired by law or regulation; position, with the motors stopped and (vi) Any overhead wire shall be con- brakes set, unless work being per- sidered to be an energized line unless formed requires otherwise. and until the person owning such line (ii) Whenever the equipment is or the electrical utility authorities in- parked, the parking brake shall be set. dicate that it is not an energized line Equipment parked on inclines shall and it has been visibly grounded; have the wheels chocked and the park- (vii) Prior to work near transmitter ing brake set. towers where an electrical charge can be induced in the equipment or mate- (4) The use, care and charging of all rials being handled, the transmitter batteries shall conform to the require- shall be de-energized or tests shall be ments of subpart K of this part. made to determine if electrical charge (5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, is induced on the crane. The following or equivalent, that introduces no visi- precautions shall be taken when nec- ble distortion affecting the safe oper- essary to dissipate induced voltages: ation of any machine covered by this (A) The equipment shall be provided subpart. with an electrical ground directly to (6) All equipment covered by this the upper rotating structure sup- subpart shall comply with the fol- porting the boom; and lowing requirements when working or (B) Ground jumper cables shall be at- being moved in the vicinity of power tached to materials being handled by lines or energized transmitters, except boom equipment when electrical where electrical distribution and trans- charge is induced while working near mission lines have been deenergized energized transmitters. Crews shall be and visibly grounded at point of work provided with nonconductive poles hav- or where insulating barriers, not a part ing large alligator clips or other simi- of or an attachment to the equipment lar protection to attach the ground or machinery, have been erected to pre- cable to the load. vent physical contact with the lines: (C) Combustible and flammable ma- (i) For lines rated 50 kV or below, terials shall be removed from the im- minimum clearance between the lines mediate area prior to operations. and any part of the crane or load shall (7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or be 10 feet; bumper blocks shall be provided on (ii) For lines rated over 50 kV, min- spur railroad tracks where a rolling car imum clearance between the lines and could contact other cars being worked, any part of the crane or load shall be 10 enter a building, work or traffic area. feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV over 50 (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] kV, or twice the length of the line in- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, sulator, but never less than 10 feet; 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; (iii) In transit with no load and boom 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010] lowered, the equipment clearance shall be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages § 1926.601 Motor vehicles. less than 50 kV, and 10 feet for voltages (a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as cov- over 50 kV, up to and including 345 kV, ered by this part are those vehicles and 16 feet for voltages up to and in- that operate within an off-highway job- cluding 750 kV; site, not open to public traffic. The re- (iv) A person shall be designated to quirements of this section do not apply observe clearance of the equipment and to equipment for which rules are pre- give timely warning for all operations scribed in § 1926.602. where it is difficult for the operator to (b) General requirements. (1) All vehi- maintain the desired clearance by vis- cles shall have a service brake system, ual means; an emergency brake system, and a

337

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00347 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.602 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

parking brake system. These systems while maintenance or inspection work may use common components, and is being done. shall be maintained in operable condi- (11) Operating levers controlling tion. hoisting or dumping devices on haulage (2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions bodies shall be equipped with a latch or warrant additional light, all vehicles, other device which will prevent acci- or combinations of vehicles, in use dental starting or tripping of the mech- shall be equipped with at least two anism. headlights and two taillights in oper- (12) Trip handles for tailgates of able condition. dump trucks shall be so arranged that, (ii) All vehicles, or combination of in dumping, the operator will be in the vehicles, shall have brake lights in op- clear. erable condition regardless of light (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle conditions. equipment manufactured on or after (3) All vehicles shall be equipped with May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with an adequate audible warning device at fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle the operator’s station and in an oper- equipment manufactured before May 1, able condition. 1972, shall be equipped with fenders not (4) No employer shall use any motor later than May 1, 1973. vehicle equipment having an ob- (ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of structed view to the rear unless: fenders whenever motor vehicle equip- (i) The vehicle has a reverse signal ment is not designed for fenders. alarm audible above the surrounding noise level or: (14) All vehicles in use shall be (ii) The vehicle is backed up only checked at the beginning of each shift when an observer signals that it is safe to assure that the following parts, to do so. equipment, and accessories are in safe (5) All vehicles with cabs shall be operating condition and free of appar- equipped with windshields and powered ent damage that could cause failure wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall while in use: service brakes, including be replaced. Vehicles operating in trailer brake connections; parking sys- areas or under conditions that cause tem (hand brake); emergency stopping fogging or frosting of the windshields system (brakes); tires; horn; steering shall be equipped with operable mechanism; coupling devices; seat defogging or defrosting devices. belts; operating controls; and safety (6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay devices. All defects shall be corrected load is loaded by means of cranes, before the vehicle is placed in service. power shovels, loaders, or similar These requirements also apply to equipment, shall have a cab shield and/ equipment such as lights, reflectors, or canopy adequate to protect the oper- windshield wipers, defrosters, fire ex- ator from shifting or falling materials. tinguishers, etc., where such equip- (7) Tools and material shall be se- ment is necessary. cured to prevent movement when transported in the same compartment § 1926.602 Material handling equipment. with employees. (8) Vehicles used to transport em- (a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1) ployees shall have seats firmly secured These rules apply to the following and adequate for the number of em- types of earthmoving equipment: ployees to be carried. scrapers, loaders, crawler or wheel (9) Seat belts and anchorages meet- tractors, bulldozers, off-highway ing the requirements of 49 CFR part 571 trucks, graders, agricultural and indus- (Department of Transportation, Fed- trial tractors, and similar equipment. eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards) The promulgation of specific rules for shall be installed in all motor vehicles. compactors and rubber-tired ‘‘skid- (10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be steer’’ equipment is reserved pending equipped with positive means of sup- consideration of standards currently port, permanently attached, and capa- being developed. ble of being locked in position to pre- (2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be vent accidental lowering of the body provided on all equipment covered by

338

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00348 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.602

this section and shall meet the require- present no hazard to personnel from ments of the Society of Automotive flying materials. Engineers, J386–1969, Seat Belts for (6) Rollover protective structures Construction Equipment. Seat belts for (ROPS). See subpart W of this part for agricultural and light industrial trac- requirements for rollover protective tors shall meet the seat belt require- structures and overhead protection. ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (7) Rollover protective structures for off- neers J333a–1970, Operator Protection highway trucks. The promulgation of for Agricultural and Light Industrial standards for rollover protective struc- Tractors. tures for off-highway trucks is reserved (ii) Seat belts need not be provided pending further study and develop- for equipment which is designed only ment. for standup operation. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and (iii) Seat belts need not be provided fenders. (i) Equipment mentioned in for equipment which does not have paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section, roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and manufactured after January 1, or adequate canopy protection. 1972, which is used by any employer (3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No after that date, shall comply with the employer shall move or cause to be applicable rules prescribed therein con- moved construction equipment or vehi- cerning brakes and fenders. Equipment cles upon any access roadway or grade mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5) unless the access roadway or grade is of this section, and manufactured be- constructed and maintained to accom- fore January 1, 1972, which is used by modate safely the movement of the any employer after that date, shall equipment and vehicles involved. meet the applicable rules prescribed (ii) Every emergency access ramp herein not later than June 30, 1973. It and berm used by an employer shall be should be noted that, as permitted constructed to restrain and control under § 1926.2, employers may request runaway vehicles. variations from the applicable brakes (4) Brakes. All earthmoving equip- and fender standards required by this ment mentioned in this § 1926.602(a) subpart. Employers wishing to seek shall have a service braking system ca- variations from the applicable brakes pable of stopping and holding the and fenders rules may submit any re- equipment fully loaded, as specified in quests for variations after the publica- Society of Automotive Engineers SAE- tion of this document in the FEDERAL J237, Loader Dozer–1971, J236, Graders– REGISTER. Any statements intending to 1971, and J319b, Scrapers–1971. Brake meet the requirements of § 1926.2(b)(4), systems for self-propelled rubber-tired should specify how the variation would off-highway equipment manufactured protect the safety of the employees by after January 1, 1972 shall meet the ap- providing for any compensating re- plicable minimum performance criteria strictions on the operation of equip- set forth in the following Society of ment. Automotive Engineers Recommended (ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of Practices: paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this Self-Propelled Scrapers ...... SAE J319b–1971. Self-Propelled Graders ...... SAE J236–1971. section, the requirement that fenders Trucks and Wagons ...... SAE J166–1971. be installed on pneumatic-tired Front End Loaders and Dozers .... SAE J237–1971. earthmoving haulage equipment, is (5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth- suspended pending reconsideration of moving haulage equipment (trucks, the requirement. scrapers, tractors, and trailing units) (9) Audible alarms. (i) All whose maximum speed exceeds 15 miles bidirectional machines, such as rollers, per hour, shall be equipped with fend- compacters, front-end loaders, bull- ers on all wheels to meet the require- dozers, and similar equipment, shall be ments of Society of Automotive Engi- equipped with a horn, distinguishable neers SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for from the surrounding noise level, Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage which shall be operated as needed when Equipment. An employer may, of the machine is moving in either direc- course, at any time seek to show under tion. The horn shall be maintained in § 1926.2, that the uncovered wheels an operative condition.

339

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00349 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.602 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) No employer shall permit accordingly. In no case shall the origi- earthmoving or compacting equipment nal safety factor of the equipment be which has an obstructed view to the reduced. rear to be used in reverse gear unless (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more the equipment has in operation a re- trucks working in unison, the propor- verse signal alarm distinguishable tion of the total load carried by any from the surrounding noise level or an one truck shall not exceed its capacity. employee signals that it is safe to do (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall so. not be attached to the steering wheel (10) Scissor points. Scissor points on unless the steering mechanism is of a all front-end loaders, which constitute type that prevents road reactions from a hazard to the operator during normal operation, shall be guarded. causing the steering handwheel to spin. (b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) The steering knob shall be mounted Tractors covered in paragraph (a) of within the periphery of the wheel. this section shall have seat belts as re- (v) All high lift rider industrial quired for the operators when seated in trucks shall be equipped with overhead the normal seating arrangement for guards which meet the configuration tractor operation, even though back- and structural requirements as defined hoes, breakers, or other similar attach- in paragraph 421 of American National ments are used on these machines for Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety excavating or other work. Standards for Powered Industrial (2) For the purposes of this subpart Trucks. and of subpart N of this part, the no- (vi) All industrial trucks in use shall menclatures and descriptions for meas- meet the applicable requirements of urement of dimensions of machinery design, construction, stability, inspec- and attachments shall be as described tion, testing, maintenance, and oper- in Society of Automotive Engineers ation, as defined in American National 1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103. Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety (3) The safety requirements, ratios, Standards for Powered Industrial or limitations applicable to machines Trucks. or attachment usage covered in Power (vii) Unauthorized personnel shall Crane and Shovel Associations Stand- ards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3 not be permitted to ride on powered in- of 1969, shall be complied with, and dustrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall apply to cranes, machines, and shall be provided where riding of attachments under this part. trucks is authorized. (c) Lifting and hauling equipment (viii) Whenever a truck is equipped (other than equipment covered under sub- with vertical only, or vertical and hori- part N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks zontal controls elevatable with the lift- shall meet the requirements of ing carriage or forks for lifting per- § 1926.600 and the following: sonnel, the following additional pre- (i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall cautions shall be taken for the protec- have the rated capacity clearly posted tion of personnel being elevated. on the vehicle so as to be clearly visi- (A) Use of a safety platform firmly ble to the operator. When auxiliary re- secured to the lifting carriage and/or movable counterweights are provided forks. by the manufacturer, corresponding al- (B) Means shall be provided whereby ternate rated capacities also shall be personnel on the platform can shut off clearly shown on the vehicle. These power to the truck. ratings shall not be exceeded. (C) Such protection from falling ob- (ii) No modifications or additions which affect the capacity or safe oper- jects as indicated necessary by the op- ation of the equipment shall be made erating conditions shall be provided. without the manufacturer’s written ap- (d) Powered industrial truck operator proval. If such modifications or training. changes are made, the capacity, oper- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- ation, and maintenance instruction struction work under this paragraph are plates, tags, or decals shall be changed

340

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00350 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.604

identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of vided with the same protection as re- this chapter. quired for steam lines. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (10) Safety chains, or equivalent 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; means, shall be provided for each hose 63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] connection to prevent the line from thrashing around in case the coupling § 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. becomes disconnected. (a) General requirements. (1) Boilers (11) Steam line controls shall consist and piping systems which are a part of, of two shutoff valves, one of which or used with, pile driving equipment shall be a quick-acting lever type with- shall meet the applicable requirements in easy reach of the hammer operator. of the American Society of Mechanical (12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or Engineers, Power Boilers (section I). counterbalances shall be provided as (2) All pressure vessels which are a necessary to maintain stability of pile part of, or used with, pile driving driver rigs. equipment shall meet the applicable (b) Pile driving from barges and floats. requirements of the American Society Barges or floats supporting pile driving of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Ves- operations shall meet the applicable sels (section VIII). requirements of § 1926.605. (c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engi- (3) Overhead protection, which will neers and winchmen shall accept sig- not obscure the vision of the operator nals only from the designated signal- and which meets the requirements of men. subpart N of this part, shall be pro- (2) All employees shall be kept clear vided. Protection shall be the equiva- when piling is being hoisted into the lent of 2-inch planking or other solid leads. material of equivalent strength. (3) When piles are being driven in an (4) Stop blocks shall be provided for excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall the leads to prevent the hammer from be sloped to the angle of repose or being raised against the head block. sheet-piled and braced. (5) A blocking device, capable of safe- (4) When steel tube piles are being ly supporting the weight of the ham- ‘‘blown out’’, employees shall be kept mer, shall be provided for placement in well beyond the range of falling mate- the leads under the hammer at all rials. times while employees are working (5) When it is necessary to cut off the under the hammer. tops of driven piles, pile driving oper- (6) Guards shall be provided across ations shall be suspended except where the top of the head block to prevent the cutting operations are located at the cable from jumping out of the least twice the length of the longest sheaves. pile from the driver. (7) When the leads must be inclined (6) When driving jacked piles, all ac- in the driving of batter piles, provi- cess pits shall be provided with ladders sions shall be made to stabilize the and bulkheaded curbs to prevent mate- leads. rial from falling into the pit. (8) Fixed leads shall be provided with ladder, and adequate rings, or similar § 1926.604 Site clearing. attachment points, so that the loft (a) General requirements. (1) Employ- worker may engage his safety belt lan- ees engaged in site clearing shall be yard to the leads. If the leads are pro- protected from hazards of irritant and vided with loft platforms(s), such plat- toxic plants and suitably instructed in form(s) shall be protected by standard the first aid treatment available. guardrails. (2) All equipment used in site clear- (9) Steam hose leading to a steam ing operations shall be equipped with hammer or jet pipe shall be securely rollover guards meeting the require- attached to the hammer with an ade- ments of this subpart. In addition, quate length of at least 1⁄4-inch diame- rider-operated equipment shall be ter chain or cable to prevent whipping equipped with an overhead and rear in the event the joint at the hammer is canopy guard meeting the following re- broken. Air hammer hoses shall be pro- quirements:

341

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00351 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.605 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(i) The overhead covering on this so located that the load will not pass canopy structure shall be of not less over employees. than 1⁄8-inch steel plate or 1⁄4-inch (c) Working surfaces of barges. (1) Em- woven wire mesh with openings no ployees shall not be permitted to walk greater than 1 inch, or equivalent. along the sides of covered lighters or (ii) The opening in the rear of the barges with coamings more than 5 feet canopy structure shall be covered with high, unless there is a 3-foot clear not less than 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh walkway, or a grab rail, or a taut with openings no greater than 1 inch. handline is provided. (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] (2) Decks and other working surfaces shall be maintained in a safe condition. § 1926.605 Marine operations and equipment. (3) Employees shall not be permitted to pass fore and aft, over, or around (a) Material handling operations. (1) deckloads, unless there is a safe pas- Operations fitting the definition of sage. ‘‘material handling’’ shall be performed in conformance with applicable (4) Employees shall not be permitted requirements of part 1918, ‘‘Safety and to walk over deckloads from rail to Health Regulations for Longshoring’’ coaming unless there is a safe passage. of this chapter. The term ‘‘longshoring If it is necessary to stand at the out- operations’’ means the loading, unload- board or inboard edge of the deckload ing, moving, or handling of construc- where less than 24 inches of bulwark, tion materials, equipment and supplies, rail, coaming, or other protection ex- etc. into, in, on, or out of any vessel ists, all employees shall be provided from a fixed structure or shore-to-ves- with a suitable means of protection sel, vessel-to-shore or fixed structure against falling from the deckload. or vessel-to-vessel. (d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment. (b) Access to barges. (1) Ramps for ac- (1) Provisions for rendering first aid cess of vehicles to or between barges and medical assistance shall be in ac- shall be of adequate strength, provided cordance with subpart D of this part. with side boards, well maintained, and (2) The employer shall ensure that properly secured. there is in the vicinity of each barge in (2) Unless employees can step safely use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-ap- to or from the wharf, float, barge, or proved 30-inch lifering with not less river towboat, either a ramp, meeting than 90 feet of line attached, and at the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of least one portable or permanent ladder this section, or a safe walkway, shall which will reach the top of the apron be provided. to the surface of the water. If the above (3) Jacob’s ladders shall be of the equipment is not available at the pier, double rung or flat tread type. They the employer shall furnish it during shall be well maintained and properly the time that he is working the barge. secured. (3) Employees walking or working on (4) A Jacob’s ladder shall either hang the unguarded decks of barges shall be without slack from its lashings or be protected with U.S. Coast Guard-ap- pulled up entirely. proved work vests or buoyant vests. (5) When the upper end of the means (e) Commercial diving operations. Com- of access rests on or is flush with the mercial diving operations shall be sub- top of the bulwark, substantial steps ject to subpart T of part 1910, properly secured and equipped with at §§ 1910.401–1910.441, of this chapter. least one substantial hand rail approximately 33 inches in height, shall be [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42 provided between the top of the bul- FR 37674, July 22, 1977] wark and the deck. (6) Obstructions shall not be laid on § 1926.606 Definitions applicable to this subpart. or across the gangway. (7) The means of access shall be ade- (a) Apron—The area along the water- quately illuminated for its full length. front edge of the pier or wharf. (8) Unless the structure makes it im- (b) Bulwark—The side of a ship above possible, the means of access shall be the upper deck.

342

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00352 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.650

(c) Coaming—The raised frame, as could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure around a hatchway in the deck, to keep and immobilize a person. out water. Competent person means one who is (d) Jacob’s ladder—A marine ladder of capable of identifying existing and pre- rope or chain with wooden or metal dictable hazards in the surroundings, rungs. or working conditions which are unsan- (e) Rail, for the purpose of § 1926.605, itary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- means a light structure serving as a ployees, and who has authorization to guard at the outer edge of a ship’s take prompt corrective measures to deck. eliminate them. Cross braces mean the horizontal Subpart P—Excavations members of a shoring system installed perpendicular to the sides of the excavation, the ends of which bear against AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 either uprights or wales. (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR Excavation means any man-made cut, 35736), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; cavity, trench, or depression in an and 29 CFR part 1911. earth surface, formed by earth re- SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless moval. otherwise noted. Faces or sides means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a re- § 1926.650 Scope, application, and defi- sult of excavation work. nitions applicable to this subpart. Failure means the breakage, displace- (a) Scope and application. This sub- ment, or permanent deformation of a part applies to all open excavations structural member or connection so as made in the earth’s surface. Exca- to reduce its structural integrity and vations are defined to include trenches. its supportive capabilities. (b) Definitions applicable to this sub- Hazardous atmosphere means an at- part. mosphere which by reason of being ex- Accepted engineering practices means plosive, flammable, poisonous, corro- those requirements which are compat- sive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen defi- ible with standards of practice required cient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may by a registered professional engineer. cause death, illness, or injury. Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a Kickout means the accidental release pre-engineered shoring system com- or failure of a cross brace. prised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders Protective system means a method of (crossbraces) used in conjunction with protecting employees from cave-ins, vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal from material that could fall or roll rails (walers). Such system is designed, from an excavation face or into an ex- specifically to support the sidewalls of cavation, or from the collapse of adja- an excavation and prevent cave-ins. cent structures. Protective systems in- Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of clude support systems, sloping and shaft or footing excavation, the bottom benching systems, shield systems, and of which is made larger than the cross other systems that provide the nec- section above to form a belled shape. essary protection. Benching (Benching system) means a Ramp means an inclined walking or method of protecting employees from working surface that is used to gain ac- cave-ins by excavating the sides of an cess to one point from another, and is excavation to form one or a series of constructed from earth or from struc- horizontal levels or steps, usually with tural materials such as steel or wood. vertical or near-vertical surfaces be- Registered Professional Engineer means tween levels. a person who is registered as a profes- Cave-in means the separation of a sional engineer in the state where the mass of soil or rock material from the work is to be performed. However, a side of an excavation, or the loss of soil professional engineer, registered in any from under a trench shield or support state is deemed to be a ‘‘registered pro- system, and its sudden movement into fessional engineer’’ within the meaning the excavation, either by falling or of this standard when approving de- sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it signs for ‘‘manufactured protective

343

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00353 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.651 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

systems’’ or ‘‘tabulated data’’ to be sional engineer and used to design and used in interstate commerce. construct a protective system. Sheeting means the members of a Trench (Trench excavation) means a shoring system that retain the earth in narrow excavation (in relation to its position and in turn are supported by length) made below the surface of the other members of the shoring system. ground. In general, the depth is greater Shield (Shield system) means a struc- than the width, but the width of a ture that is able to withstand the trench (measured at the bottom) is not forces imposed on it by a cave-in and greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or thereby protect employees within the other structures are installed or con- structure. Shields can be permanent structed in an excavation so as to re- structures or can be designed to be duce the dimension measured from the portable and moved along as work pro- forms or structure to the side of the ex- gresses. Additionally, shields can be ei- cavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less ther premanufactured or job-built in (measured at the bottom of the exca- accordance with § 1926.652 (c)(3) or vation), the excavation is also consid- (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usu- ered to be a trench. ally referred to as ‘‘trench boxes’’ or Trench box. See ‘‘Shield.’’ ‘‘trench shields.’’ Trench shield. See ‘‘Shield.’’ Shoring (Shoring system) means a Uprights means the vertical members structure such as a metal hydraulic, of a trench shoring system placed in mechanical or timber shoring system contact with the earth and usually po- that supports the sides of an exca- sitioned so that individual members do vation and which is designed to prevent not contact each other. Uprights cave-ins. placed so that individual members are Sides. See ‘‘Faces.’’ closely spaced, in contact with or Sloping (Sloping system) means a interconnected to each other, are often method of protecting employees from called ‘‘sheeting.’’ cave-ins by excavating to form sides of Wales means horizontal members of a an excavation that are inclined away shoring system placed parallel to the from the excavation so as to prevent excavation face whose sides bear cave-ins. The angle of incline required against the vertical members of the to prevent a cave-in varies with dif- shoring system or earth. ferences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of ex- § 1926.651 Specific excavation require- posure, and application of surcharge ments. loads. (a) Surface encumbrances. All surface Stable rock means natural solid min- encumbrances that are located so as to eral material that can be excavated create a hazard to employees shall be with vertical sides and will remain in- removed or supported, as necessary, to tact while exposed. Unstable rock is safeguard employees. considered to be stable when the rock (b) Underground installations. (1) The material on the side or sides of the ex- estimated location of utility installa- cavation is secured against caving-in tions, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, or movement by rock bolts or by an- electric, water lines, or any other un- other protective system that has been derground installations that reason- designed by a registered professional ably may be expected to be encoun- engineer. tered during excavation work, shall be Structural ramp means a ramp built of determined prior to opening an exca- steel or wood, usually used for vehicle vation. access. Ramps made of soil or rock are (2) Utility companies or owners shall not considered structural ramps. be contacted within established or cus- Support system means a structure tomary local response times, advised of such as underpinning, bracing, or shor- the proposed work, and asked to estab- ing, which provides support to an adja- lish the location of the utility under- cent structure, underground installa- ground installations prior to the start tion, or the sides of an excavation. of actual excavation. When utility Tabulated data means tables and companies or owners cannot respond to charts approved by a registered profes- a request to locate underground utility

344

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00354 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.651

installations within 24 hours (unless a (e) Exposure to falling loads. No em- longer period is required by state or ployee shall be permitted underneath local law), or cannot establish the loads handled by lifting or digging exact location of these installations, equipment. Employees shall be re- the employer may proceed, provided quired to stand away from any vehicle the employer does so with caution, and being loaded or unloaded to avoid being provided detection equipment or other struck by any spillage or falling mate- acceptable means to locate utility in- rials. Operators may remain in the stallations are used. cabs of vehicles being loaded or un- (3) When excavation operations ap- loaded when the vehicles are equipped, proach the estimated location of under- in accordance with § 1926.601(b)(6), to ground installations, the exact loca- provide adequate protection for the option of the installations shall be deter- erator during loading and unloading mined by safe and acceptable means. operations. (4) While the excavation is open, un- (f) Warning system for mobile equip- derground installations shall be pro- ment. When mobile equipment is oper- tected, supported or removed as nec- ated adjacent to an excavation, or essary to safeguard employees. when such equipment is required to ap- (c) Access and egress—(1) Structural proach the edge of an excavation, and ramps. (i) Structural ramps that are the operator does not have a clear and used solely by employees as a means of direct view of the edge of the exca- access or egress from excavations shall vation, a warning system shall be uti- be designed by a competent person. lized such as barricades, hand or me- Structural ramps used for access or chanical signals, or stop logs. If pos- egress of equipment shall be designed sible, the grade should be away from by a competent person qualified in the excavation. structural design, and shall be con- (g) Hazardous atmospheres—(1) Testing structed in accordance with the design. and controls. In addition to the require- (ii) Ramps and runways constructed ments set forth in subparts D and E of of two or more structural members this part (29 CFR 1926.50–1926.107) to shall have the structural members con- prevent exposure to harmful levels of nected together to prevent displace- atmospheric contaminants and to as- ment. sure acceptable atmospheric condi- (iii) Structural members used for tions, the following requirements shall ramps and runways shall be of uniform apply: thickness. (i) Where oxygen deficiency (iv) Cleats or other appropriate (atmospheres containing less than 19.5 means used to connect runway struc- percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmos- tural members shall be attached to the phere exists or could reasonably be ex- bottom of the runway or shall be at- pected to exist, such as in excavations tached in a manner to prevent tripping. in landfill areas or excavations in areas (v) Structural ramps used in lieu of where hazardous substances are stored steps shall be provided with cleats or nearby, the atmospheres in the exca- other surface treatments on the top vation shall be tested before employees surface to prevent slipping. enter excavations greater than 4 feet (2) Means of egress from trench exca- (1.22 m) in depth. vations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or (ii) Adequate precautions shall be other safe means of egress shall be lo- taken to prevent employee exposure to cated in trench excavations that are 4 atmospheres containing less than 19.5 feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to percent oxygen and other hazardous require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of atmospheres. These precautions in- lateral travel for employees. clude providing proper respiratory pro- (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Em- tection or ventilation in accordance ployees exposed to public vehicular with subparts D and E of this part re- traffic shall be provided with, and shall spectively. wear, warning vests or other suitable (iii) Adequate precaution shall be garments marked with or made of taken such as providing ventilation, to reflectorized or high-visibility mate- prevent employee exposure to an at- rial. mosphere containing a concentration

345

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00355 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.651 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

of a flammable gas in excess of 20 per- spection by a competent person and cent of the lower flammable limit of compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and the gas. (h)(2) of this section. (iv) When controls are used that are (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (1) intended to reduce the level of atmos- Where the stability of adjoining build- pheric contaminants to acceptable lev- ings, walls, or other structures is en- els, testing shall be conducted as often dangered by excavation operations, as necessary to ensure that the atmos- support systems such as shoring, brac- phere remains safe. ing, or underpinning shall be provided (2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) to ensure the stability of such struc- Emergency rescue equipment, such as tures for the protection of employees. breathing apparatus, a safety harness (2) Excavation below the level of the and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be base or footing of any foundation or re- readily available where hazardous at- taining wall that could be reasonably mospheric conditions exist or may rea- expected to pose a hazard to employees sonably be expected to develop during shall not be permitted except when: work in an excavation. This equipment (i) A support system, such as under- shall be attended when in use. pinning, is provided to ensure the safe- (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom ty of employees and the stability of the pier holes, or other similar deep and structure; or confined footing excavations, shall (ii) The excavation is in stable rock; wear a harness with a life-line securely or attached to it. The lifeline shall be sep- (iii) A registered professional engi- arate from any line used to handle ma- neer has approved the determination terials, and shall be individually at- that the structure is sufficently re- tended at all times while the employee moved from the excavation so as to be wearing the lifeline is in the exca- unaffected by the excavation activity; vation. or (h) Protection from hazards associated (iv) A registered professional engi- with water accumulation. (1) Employees neer has approved the determination shall not work in excavations in which that such excavation work will not there is accumulated water, or in exca- pose a hazard to employees. vations in which water is accumu- (3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appur- lating, unless adequate precautions tenant structure shall not be under- have been taken to protect employees mined unless a support system or an- against the hazards posed by water ac- other method of protection is provided cumulation. The precautions necessary to protect employees from the possible to protect employees adequately vary collapse of such structures. with each situation, but could include (j) Protection of employees from loose special support or shield systems to rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection protect from cave-ins, water removal shall be provided to protect employees to control the level of accumulating from loose rock or soil that could pose water, or use of a safety harness and a hazard by falling or rolling from an lifeline. excavation face. Such protection shall (2) If water is controlled or prevented consist of scaling to remove loose ma- from accumulating by the use of water terial; installation of protective barri- removal equipment, the water removal cades at intervals as necessary on the equipment and operations shall be face to stop and contain falling mate- monitored by a competent person to rial; or other means that provide equiv- ensure proper operation. alent protection. (3) If excavation work interrupts the (2) Employees shall be protected from natural drainage of surface water (such excavated or other materials or equip- as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or ment that could pose a hazard by fall- other suitable means shall be used to ing or rolling into excavations. Protec- prevent surface water from entering tion shall be provided by placing and the excavation and to provide adequate keeping such materials or equipment drainage of the area adjacent to the ex- at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of cavation. Excavations subject to runoff excavations, or by the use of retaining from heavy rains will require an in- devices that are sufficient to prevent

346

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00356 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.652

materials or equipment from falling or (b) Design of sloping and benching sys- rolling into excavations, or by a com- tems. The slopes and configurations of bination of both if necessary. sloping and benching systems shall be (k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections selected and constructed by the em- of excavations, the adjacent areas, and ployer or his designee and shall be in protective systems shall be made by a accordance with the requirements of competent person for evidence of a sit- paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative, uation that could result in possible paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative, cave-ins, indications of failure of pro- paragraph (b)(3), or, in the alternative, tective systems, hazardous paragraph (b)(4), as follows: atmospheres, or other hazardous condi- (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations tions. An inspection shall be conducted and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be by the competent person prior to the sloped at an angle not steeper than one start of work and as needed throughout and one-half horizontal to one vertical the shift. Inspections shall also be (34 degrees measured from the hori- made after every rainstorm or other zontal), unless the employer uses one hazard increasing occurrence. These in- of the other options listed below. spections are only required when em- (ii) Slopes specified in paragraph ployee exposure can be reasonably an- (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be exca- ticipated. vated to form configurations that are (2) Where the competent person finds in accordance with the slopes shown evidence of a situation that could re- for Type C soil in appendix B to this sult in a possible cave-in, indications subpart. of failure of protective systems, haz- (2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes ardous atmospheres, or other haz- and configurations using Appendices A ardous conditions, exposed employees and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and shall be removed from the hazardous allowable configurations for sloping area until the necessary precautions and benching systems, shall be deter- have been taken to ensure their safety. mined in accordance with the condi- (l) Walkways shall be provided where tions and requirements set forth in ap- employees or equipment are required pendices A and B to this subpart. or permitted to cross over excavations. (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- Guardrails which comply with ulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or § 1926.502(b) shall be provided where benching systems shall be selected walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more from and be in accordance with tab- above lower levels. ulated data, such as tables and charts. (ii) The tabulated data shall be in [54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended at 59 written form and shall include all of FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] the following: (A) Identification of the parameters § 1926.652 Requirements for protective systems. that affect the selection of a sloping or benching system drawn from such data; (a) Protection of employees in exca- (B) Identification of the limits of use vations. (1) Each employee in an exca- of the data, to include the magnitude vation shall be protected from cave-ins and configuration of slopes determined by an adequate protective system de- to be safe; signed in accordance with paragraph (C) Explanatory information as may (b) or (c) of this section except when: be necessary to aid the user in making (i) Excavations are made entirely in a correct selection of a protective sys- stable rock; or tem from the data. (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet (iii) At least one copy of the tab- (1.52m) in depth and examination of the ulated data which identifies the reg- ground by a competent person provides istered professional engineer who ap- no indication of a potential cave-in. proved the data, shall be maintained at (2) Protective systems shall have the the jobsite during construction of the capacity to resist without failure all protective system. After that time the loads that are intended or could rea- data may be stored off the jobsite, but sonably be expected to be applied or a copy of the data shall be made avail- transmitted to the system. able to the Secretary upon request.

347

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00357 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.652 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered shall only be allowed after the manu- professional engineer. (i) Sloping and facturer issues specific written ap- benching systems not utilizing Option proval. (1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under (iii) Manufacturer’s specifications, paragraph (b) of this section shall be recommendations, and limitations, and approved by a registered professional manufacturer’s approval to deviate engineer. from the specifications, recommenda- (ii) Designs shall be in written form tions, and limitations shall be in writ- and shall include at least the following: ten form at the jobsite during con- (A) The magnitude of the slopes that struction of the protective system. were determined to be safe for the par- After that time this data may be ticular project; stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall (B) The configurations that were determined to be safe for the particular be made available to the Secretary project; and upon request. (C) The identity of the registered pro- (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- fessional engineer approving the de- ulated data. (i) Designs of support sys- sign. tems, shield systems, or other protec- (iii) At least one copy of the design tive systems shall be selected from and shall be maintained at the jobsite be in accordance with tabulated data, while the slope is being constructed. such as tables and charts. After that time the design need not be (ii) The tabulated data shall be in at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made written form and include all of the fol- available to the Secretary upon re- lowing: quest. (A) Identification of the parameters (c) Design of support systems, shield that affect the selection of a protective systems, and other protective systems. De- system drawn from such data; signs of support systems shield sys- (B) Identification of the limits of use tems, and other protective systems of the data; shall be selected and constructed by (C) Explanatory information as may the employer or his designee and shall be necessary to aid the user in making be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alter- a correct selection of a protective sys- native, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the al- tem from the data. ternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, in the (iii) At least one copy of the tab- alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows: ulated data, which identifies the reg- (1) Option (1)—Designs using appen- istered professional engineer who ap- dices A, C and D. Designs for timber proved the data, shall be maintained at shoring in trenches shall be determined the jobsite during construction of the in accordance with the conditions and protective system. After that time the requirements set forth in appendices A data may be stored off the jobsite, but and C to this subpart. Designs for alu- a copy of the data shall be made avail- minum hydraulic shoring shall be in able to the Secretary upon request. accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered section, but if manufacturer’s tab- professional engineer. (i) Support sys- ulated data cannot be utilized, designs tems, shield systems, and other protec- shall be in accordance with appendix D. tive systems not utilizing Option 1, Op- (2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufac- tion 2 or Option 3, above, shall be ap- turer’s Tabulated Data. (i) Design of sup- proved by a registered professional en- port systems, shield systems, or other gineer. protective systems that are drawn (ii) Designs shall be in written form from manufacturer’s tabulated data shall be in accordance with all speci- and shall include the following: fications, recommendations, and limi- (A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, tations issued or made by the manufac- and configurations of the materials to turer. be used in the protective system; and (ii) Deviation from the specifications, (B) The identity of the registered recommendations, and limitations professional engineer approving the de- issued or made by the manufacturer sign.

348

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00358 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.652

(iii) At least one copy of the design ly so as to note any indication of pos- shall be maintained at the jobsite dur- sible failure of the remaining members ing construction of the protective sys- of the structure or possible cave-in of tem. After that time, the design may the sides of the excavation. be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of (vi) Backfilling shall progress to- the design shall be made available to gether with the removal of support sys- the Secretary upon request. tems from excavations. (d) Materials and equipment. (1) Mate- (2) Additional requirements for support rials and equipment used for protective systems for trench excavations. (i) Exca- systems shall be free from damage or vation of material to a level no greater defects that might impair their proper than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of function. the members of a support system shall (2) Manufactured materials and be permitted, but only if the system is equipment used for protective systems designed to resist the forces calculated shall be used and maintained in a manner that is consistent with the rec- for the full depth of the trench, and ommendations of the manufacturer, there are no indications while the and in a manner that will prevent em- trench is open of a possible loss of soil ployee exposure to hazards. from behind or below the bottom of the (3) When material or equipment that support system. is used for protective systems is dam- (ii) Installation of a support system aged, a competent person shall exam- shall be closely coordinated with the ine the material or equipment and excavation of trenches. evaluate its suitability for continued (f) Sloping and benching systems. Em- use. If the competent person cannot as- ployees shall not be permitted to work sure the material or equipment is able on the faces of sloped or benched exca- to support the intended loads or is oth- vations at levels above other employ- erwise suitable for safe use, then such ees except when employees at the lower material or equipment shall be re- levels are adequately protected from moved from service, and shall be evalu- the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding ated and approved by a registered pro- material or equipment. fessional engineer before being re- (g) Shield systems—(1) General. (i) turned to service. Shield systems shall not be subjected (e) Installation and removal of sup- to loads exceeding those which the sys- port—(1) General. (i) Members of sup- tem was designed to withstand. port systems shall be securely con- (ii) Shields shall be installed in a nected together to prevent sliding, fall- manner to restrict lateral or other haz- ing, kickouts, or other predictable fail- ardous movement of the shield in the ure. event of the application of sudden lat- (ii) Support systems shall be in- eral loads. stalled and removed in a manner that (iii) Employees shall be protected protects employees from cave-ins, from the hazard of cave-ins when enter- structural collapses, or from being ing or exiting the areas protected by struck by members of the support system. shields. (iii) Individual members of support (iv) Employees shall not be allowed systems shall not be subjected to loads in shields when shields are being in- exceeding those which those members stalled, removed, or moved vertically. were designed to withstand. (2) Additional requirement for shield (iv) Before temporary removal of in- systems used in trench excavations. Exca- dividual members begins, additional vations of earth material to a level not precautions shall be taken to ensure greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the the safety of employees, such as in- bottom of a shield shall be permitted, stalling other structural members to but only if the shield is designed to re- carry the loads imposed on the support sist the forces calculated for the full system. depth of the trench, and there are no (v) Removal shall begin at, and indications while the trench is open of progress from, the bottom of the exca- a possible loss of soil from behind or vation. Members shall be released slow- below the bottom of the shield.

349

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00359 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened 1926—SOIL CLASSIFICATION planes in rock or shale are considered layered. (a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. This Moist soil means a condition in which a soil appendix describes a method of classifying looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can soil and rock deposits based on site and envi- easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into ronmental conditions, and on the structure small diameter threads before crumbling. and composition of the earth deposits. The Moist granular soil that contains some cohe- appendix contains definitions, sets forth re- sive material will exhibit signs of cohesion quirements, and describes acceptable visual between particles. and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Plastic means a property of a soil which al- (2) Application. This appendix applies when lows the soil to be deformed or molded with- a sloping or benching system is designed in out cracking, or appreciable volume change. accordance with the requirements set forth Saturated soil means a soil in which the in § 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection voids are filled with water. Saturation does for employees from cave-ins. This appendix not require flow. Saturation, or near satura- also applies when timber shoring for exca- tion, is necessary for the proper use of in- vations is designed as a method of protection struments such as a pocket penetrometer or from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C sheer vane. to subpart P of part 1926, and when alu- Soil classification system means, for the pur- minum hydraulic shoring is designed in ac- pose of this subpart, a method of catego- cordance with appendix D. This appendix rizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy also applies if other protective systems are of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, designed and selected for use from data pre- in decreasing order of stability. The cat- pared in accordance with the requirements egories are determined based on an analysis set forth in § 1926.652(c), and the use of the of the properties and performance character- data is predicated on the use of the soil clas- istics of the deposits and the environmental sification system set forth in this appendix. conditions of exposure. (b) Definitions. The definitions and exam- Stable rock means natural solid mineral ples given below are based on, in whole or in matter that can be excavated with vertical part, the following: American Society for sides and remain intact while exposed. Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653–85 and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification Submerged soil means soil which is under- System, the U.S. Department of Agriculture water or is free seeping. (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and Type A means cohesive soils with an The National Bureau of Standards Report unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton BSS–121. per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Ex- Cemented soil means a soil in which the par- amples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay, ticles are held together by a chemical agent, sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand- silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Ce- size sample cannot be crushed into powder or mented soils such as caliche and hardpan are individual soil particles by finger pressure. also considered Type A. However, no soil is Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil), Type A if: or soil with a high clay content, which has (i) The soil is fissured; or cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not (ii) The soil is subject to vibration from crumble, can be excavated with vertical heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects; sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohe- or sive soil is hard to break up when dry, and (iii) The soil has been previously disturbed; exhibits significant cohesion when sub- or merged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, (iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. system where the layers dip into the exca- Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit vation on a slope of four horizontal to one visible signs of moisture content. vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or Fissured means a soil material that has a (v) The material is subject to other factors tendency to break along definite planes of that would require it to be classified as a less fracture with little resistance, or a material stable material. that exhibits open cracks, such as tension Type B means: cracks, in an exposed surface. (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt, pressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or content. Granular soil has no cohesive (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some molded when moist and crumbles easily cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. when dry. (iii) Previously disturbed soils except those Layered system means two or more dis- which would otherwise be classified as Type tinctly different soil or rock types arranged C soil.

350

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00360 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A

(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined com- (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a depressive strength or cementation require- posit, the properties, factors, or conditions ments for Type A, but is fissured or subject affecting its classification change in any to vibration; or way, the changes shall be evaluated by a (v) Dry rock that is not stable; or competent person. The deposit shall be re- (vi) Material that is part of a sloped, lay- classified as necessary to reflect the changed ered system where the layers dip into the ex- circumstances. cavation on a slope less steep than four hori- (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests—(1) zontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to material would otherwise be classified as determine qualitative information regarding Type B. the excavation site in general, the soil adja- Type C means: cent to the excavation, the soil forming the (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- sides of the open excavation, and the soil pressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or taken as samples from excavated material. (ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, (i) Observe samples of soil that are exca- and loamy sand; or vated and soil in the sides of the excavation. (iii) Submerged soil or soil from which Estimate the range of particle sizes and the water is freely seeping; or relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil (iv) Submerged rock that is not stable; or that is primarily composed of fine-grained (v) Material in a sloped, layered system material is cohesive material. Soil composed where the layers dip into the excavation on primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is a slope of four horizontal to one vertical granular material. (4H:1V) or steeper. (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil Unconfined compressive strength means the that remains in clumps when excavated is load per unit area at which a soil will fail in cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does compression. It can be determined by labora- not stay in clumps is granular. tory testing, or estimated in the field using a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetra- (iii) Observe the side of the opened exca- tion tests, and other methods. vation and the surface area adjacent to the Wet soil means soil that contains signifi- excavation. Crack-like openings such as ten- cantly more moisture than moist soil, but in sion cracks could indicate fissured material. such a range of values that cohesive material If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evi- Granular material that would exhibit cohe- dence of moving ground and are indications sive properties when moist will lose those co- of potentially hazardous situations. hesive properties when wet. (iv) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- (c) Requirements—(1) Classification of soil vation and the excavation itself for evidence and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit of existing utility and other underground shall be classified by a competent person as structures, and to identify previously dis- Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in turbed soil. accordance with the definitions set forth in (v) Observe the opened side of the exca- paragraph (b) of this appendix. vation to identify layered systems. Examine (2) Basis of classification. The classification layered systems to identify if the layers of the deposits shall be made based on the re- slope toward the excavation. Estimate the sults of at least one visual and at least one degree of slope of the layers. manual analysis. Such analyses shall be con- (vi) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- ducted by a competent person using tests de- vation and the sides of the opened exca- scribed in paragraph (d) below, or in other vation for evidence of surface water, water recognized methods of soil classification and seeping from the sides of the excavation, or testing such as those adopted by the Amer- the location of the level of the water table. ica Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S. (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- Department of Agriculture textural classi- vation and the area within the excavation fication system. for sources of vibration that may affect the (3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual stability of the excavation face. and manual analyses, such as those noted as (2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this ap- samples is conducted to determine quan- pendix, shall be designed and conducted to titative as well as qualitative properties of provide sufficient quantitative and quali- soil and to provide more information in tative information as may be necessary to order to classify soil properly. identify properly the properties, factors, and (i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of conditions affecting the classification of the soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into deposits. threads as thin as 1⁄8-inch in diameter. Cohe- (4) Layered systems. In a layered system, sive material can be successfully rolled into the system shall be classified in accordance threads without crumbling. For example, if with its weakest layer. However, each layer at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1⁄8-inch may be classified individually where a more thread can be held on one end without tear- stable layer lies under a less stable layer. ing, the soil is cohesive.

351

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00361 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and verize easily into very small fragments, the crumbles on its own or with moderate pres- material is granular. sure into individual grains or fine powder, it [85 FR 8743, Feb. 18, 2020] is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into clumps which break up into smaller clumps, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART but the smaller clumps can only be broken 1926—SLOPING AND BENCHING up with difficulty, it may be clay in any (a) Scope and application. This appendix combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the contains specifications for sloping and dry soil breaks into clumps which do not benching when used as methods of protecting break up into small clumps and which can employees working in excavations from only be broken with difficulty, and there is cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix no visual indication the soil is fissured, the apply when the design of sloping and bench- soil may be considered unfissured. ing protective systems is to be performed in (iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetration test can be used to estimate the accordance with the requirements set forth unconfined compressive strength of cohesive in § 1926.652(b)(2). soils. (This test is based on the thumb pene- (b) Definitions. tration test described in American Society Actual slope means the slope to which an for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard excavation face is excavated. designation D2488—‘‘Standard Recommended Distress means that the soil is in a condi- Practice for Description of Soils (Visual— tion where a cave-in is imminent or is likely Manual Procedure).’’) Type A soils with an to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phe- unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf nomena as the development of fissures in the can be readily indented by the thumb; how- face of or adjacent to an open excavation; ever, they can be penetrated by the thumb the subsidence of the edge of an excavation; only with very great effort. Type C soils with the slumping of material from the face or an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf the bulging or heaving of material from the can be easily penetrated several inches by bottom of an excavation; the spalling of ma- the thumb, and can be molded by light finger terial from the face of an excavation; and pressure. This test should be conducted on ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large such as pebbles or little clumps of material clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after suddenly separating from the face of an exca- excavation to keep to a minimum the effects vation and trickling or rolling down into the of exposure to drying influences. If the exca- excavation. vation is later exposed to wetting influences Maximum allowable slope means the steep- (rain, flooding), the classification of the soil est incline of an excavation face that is ac- must be changed accordingly. ceptable for the most favorable site condi- (iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of tions as protection against cave-ins, and is unconfined compressive strength of soils can expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance also be obtained by use of a pocket pene- to vertical rise (H:V). trometer or by using a hand-operated Short term exposure means a period of time shearvane. less than or equal to 24 hours that an exca- (v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the vation is open. drying test is to differentiate between cohe- (c) Requirements—(1) Soil classification. Soil sive material with fissures, unfissured cohe- and rock deposits shall be classified in ac- sive material, and granular material. The cordance with appendix A to subpart P of procedure for the drying test involves drying part 1926. a sample of soil that is approximately one (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit in diameter until it is thoroughly dry: shall be determined from Table B–1 of this (A) If the sample develops cracks as it appendix. dries, significant fissures are indicated. (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall (B) Samples that dry without cracking are not be steeper than the maximum allowable to be broken by hand. If considerable force is slope. necessary to break a sample, the soil has sig- (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep nificant cohesive material content. The soil than the maximum allowable slope, when can be classified as an unfissured cohesive there are signs of distress. If that situation material and the unconfined compressive occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an ac- strength should be determined. tual slope which is at least 1⁄2 horizontal to (C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is one vertical (1⁄2H:1V) less steep than the either a fissured cohesive material or a maximum allowable slope. granular material. To distinguish between (iii) When surcharge loads from stored ma- the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the terial or equipment, operating equipment, or sample by hand or by stepping on them. If traffic are present, a competent person shall the clumps do not pulverize easily, the mate- determine the degree to which the actual rial is cohesive with fissures. If they pul- slope must be reduced below the maximum

352

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00362 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

allowable slope, and shall assure that such (4) Configurations. Configurations of slop- reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from ing and benching systems shall be in accord- adjacent structures shall be evaluated in ac- ance with Figure B–1. cordance with § 1926.651(i).

Figure B–1

Slope Configurations (All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)

B–1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil. 1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE—GENERAL Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1⁄2:1.

353

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00363 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.016 EC30OC91.017 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

SIMPLE SLOPE—SHORT TERM 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4 to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

SIMPLE BENCH

MULTIPLE BENCH 3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.

354

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00364 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.018 EC30OC91.019 EC30OC91.020 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.

UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1. The support or shield system must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.

SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION 4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b).

355

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00365 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.021 EC30OC91.022 EC30OC91.023 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

B–1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

SINGLE BENCH

MULTIPLE BENCH 3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.

356

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00366 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.024 EC30OC91.025 EC30OC91.026 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B

VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION 4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).

B–1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE 2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.

VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION 3. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).

357

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00367 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.027 EC30OC91.028 EC30OC91.029 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

B–1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils 1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum allowable slope for each layer as set forth below.

358

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00368 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.030 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

2. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).

APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the 1926—TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES data presented in this appendix, the soil type or types in which the excavation is made (a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- must first be determined using the soil clas- tion that can be used timber shoring is pro- sification method set forth in appendix A of vided as a method of protection from cave- subpart P of this part. ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 (c) Presentation of Information. Information m) in depth. This appendix must be used is presented in several forms as follows: when design of timber shoring protective (1) Information is presented in tabular systems is to be performed in accordance form in Tables C–1.1, C–1.2, and C–1.3, and Ta- with § 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring bles C–2.1, C–2.2 and C–2.3 following para- configurations; other systems of support graph (g) of the appendix. Each table pre- such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; sents the minimum sizes of timber members and other protective systems such as slop- to use in a shoring system, and each table ing, benching, shielding, and freezing sys- contains data only for the particular soil tems must be designed in accordance with type in which the excavation or portion of the requirements set forth in § 1926.652(b) and § 1926.652(c).

359

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00369 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.031 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the excavation is made. The data are ar- (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross ranged to allow the user the flexibility to se- braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load dis- lect from among several acceptable configu- tributed on a one-foot section of the center rations of members based on varying the of the crossbrace. horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable (C) When surcharge loads are present from rock is exempt from shoring requirements equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 and therefore, no data are presented for this pounds. condition. (D) When only the lower portion of a (2) Information concerning the basis of the trench is shored and the remaining portion tabular data and the limitations of the data of the trench is sloped or benched unless: is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less dix, and on the tables themselves. steep than three horizontal to one vertical; (3) Information explaining the use of the or the members are selected from the tables tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of for use at a depth which is determined from this appendix. the top of the overall trench, and not from (4) Information illustrating the use of the the toe of the sloped portion. tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shor- this appendix. ing system that are to be selected using this (5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Ta- information are the cross braces, the bles C–1.1 through C–1.3 and Tables C–2.1 uprights, and the wales, where wales are re- through C–2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) quired. Minimum sizes of members are speci- of this Appendix. fied for use in different types of soil. There (d) Basis and limitations of the data—(1) Di- are six tables of information, two for each mensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the soil type. The soil type must first be deter- timber members listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 are taken from the National mined in accordance with the soil classifica- Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, ‘‘Rec- tion system described in appendix A to sub- ommended Technical Provisions for Con- part P of part 1926. Using the appropriate struction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of table, the selection of the size and spacing of Trenches and Excavations.’’ In addition, the members is then made. The selection is where NBS did not recommend specific sizes based on the depth and width of the trench of members, member sizes are based on an where the members are to be installed and, analysis of the sizes required for use by ex- in most instances, the selection is also based isting codes and on empirical practice. on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. (ii) The required dimensions of the mem- Instances where a choice of horizontal spac- bers listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 refer ing of crossbracing is available, the hori- to actual dimensions and not nominal di- zontal spacing of the crossbraces must be mensions of the timber. Employers wanting chosen by the user before the size of any to use nominal size shoring are directed to member can be determined. When the soil Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3, or have this type, the width and depth of the trench, and choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of known, the size and vertical spacing of the Reclamation or data from other acceptable crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of sources. the wales, and the size and horizontal spac- (2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not ining of the uprights can be read from the ap- tended that the timber shoring specification propriate table. apply to every situation that may be experi- (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C– enced in the field. These data were developed 1.1 through C–1.3. to apply to the situations that are most (1) Example 1. commonly experienced in current trenching A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep practice. Shoring systems for use in situa- and five feet wide. tions that are not covered by the data in this From Table C–1.1, for acceptable arrange- appendix must be designed as specified in ments of timber can be used. § 1926.652(c). (ii) When any of the following conditions Arrangement #B1 are present, the members specified in the ta- Space 4 × 4 crossbraces at six feet hori- bles are not considered adequate. Either an zontally and four feet vertically. alternate timber shoring system must be de- Wales are not required. signed or another type of protective system Space 3 × 8 uprights at six feet hori- designed in accordance with § 1926.652. (A) When loads imposed by structures or zontally. This arrangement is commonly by stored material adjacent to the trench called ‘‘skip shoring.’’ weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two- Arrangement #B2 foot soil surcharge. The term ‘‘adjacent’’ as used here means the area within a horizontal Space 4 × 6 crossbraces at eight feet hori- distance from the edge of the trench equal to zontally and four feet vertically. the depth of the trench. Space 8 × 8 wales at four feet vertically.

360

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00370 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

Space 2 × 6 uprights at four feet hori- Space 12 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. zontally. Position 2 × 6 uprights in a close sheeting configuration unless water pressure must be Arrangement #B3 resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- water must be retained. zontally and four feet vertically. (4) Example 4. Space 8 × 10 wales at four feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep Space 2 × 6 uprights at five feet hori- and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of zontally. members for the section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is determined using Arrangement #B4 Table C–1.3. Only one arrangement of mem- Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at 12 feet hori- bers is provided. zontally and four feet vertically. Space 8 × 10 crossbraces at six feet hori- Space 10 × 10 wales at four feet vertically. zontally and five feet vertically. × Spaces 3 8 uprights at six feet hori- Space 12 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. zontally. Use 3 × 6 tight sheeting. (2) Example 2. A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep Use of Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3 would fol- and five feet wide. From Table C–1.2 three low the same procedures. acceptable arrangements of members are (g) Notes for all Tables. listed. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than indicated are to be determined as specified in Arrangement #B1 § 1926.652(c), ‘‘Design of Protective Systems.’’ Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at six feet hori- 2. When conditions are saturated or sub- zontally and five feet vertically. merged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting Space 8 × 8 wales at five feet vertically. refers to the use of specially-edged timber Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet hori- planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least zontally. three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or similar construction that when driven or Arrangement #B2 placed in position provide a tight wall to re- Space 6 × 8 crossbraces at eight feet hori- sist the lateral pressure of water and to pre- zontally and five feet vertically. vent the loss of backfill material. Close Space 10 × 10 wales at five feet vertically. Sheeting refers to the placement of planks Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet hori- side-by-side allowing as little space as pos- zontally. sible between them. 3. All spacing indicated is measured center Arrangement #B3 to center. Space 8 × 8 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- 4. Wales to be installed with greater di- zontally and five feet vertically. mension horizontal. Space 10 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. 5. If the vertical distance from the center Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet vertically. of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the (3) Example 3. trench exceeds two and one-half feet, A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep uprights shall be firmly embedded or a and five feet wide. mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are From Table C–1.3 two acceptable arrange- embedded, the vertical distance from the ments of members can be used. center of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches. Arrangement #B1 When mudsills are used, the vertical dis- Space 8 × 8 crossbraces at six feet hori- tance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are zontally and five feet vertically. wales that are installed at the toe of the Space 10 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. trench side. Position 2 × 6 uprights as closely together 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in as possible. combination with timber crossbraces. If water must be retained use special 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the tongue and groove uprights to form tight vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet, sheeting. place the top crossbrace no more than two feet below the top of the trench. When the Arrangement #B2 vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet, Space 8 × 10 crossbraces at eight feet hori- place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5 zontally and five feet vertically. feet below the top of the trench.

361

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00371 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

362

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00372 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.032 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

363

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00373 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.033 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

364

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00374 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.034 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C

365

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00375 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.035 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

366

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00376 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.036 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth. This ap- 1926—ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHOR- pendix must be used when design of the alu- ING FOR TRENCHES minum hydraulic protective system cannot be performed in accordance with (a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- § 1926.652(c)(2). tion that can be used when aluminum hy- (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data draulic shoring is provided as a method of presented in this appendix, the soi1 type or protection against cave-ins in trenches that types in which the excavation is made must

367

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00377 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.037 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

first be determined using the soil classifica- bles are not considered adequate. In this tion method set forth in appendix A of sub- case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic part P of part 1926. shoring system or other type of protective (c) Presentation of Information. Information system must be designed in accordance with is presented in several forms as follows: § 1926.652. (1) Information is presented in tabular (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross form in Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and E–1.4. braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load dis- Each table presents the maximum vertical tributed on a one foot section of the center and horizontal spacings that may be used of the hydraulic cylinder. with various aluminum member sizes and (B) When surcharge loads are present from various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 contains data only for the particular soil pounds. type in which the excavation or portion of (C) When only the lower portion or a the excavation is made. Tables D–1.1 and D– trench is shored and the remaining portion 1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B of the trench is sloped or benched unless: soil. Tables D–1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less waler systems in Types B and C soil. steep than three horizontal to one vertical; (2) Information concerning the basis of the or the members are selected from the tables tabular data and the limitations of the data for use at a depth which is determined from is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- the top of the overall trench, and not from dix. the toe of the sloped portion. (3) Information explaining the use of the (e) Use of Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and D– tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of 1.4. The members of the shoring system that this appendix. are to be selected using this information are (4) Information illustrating the use of the the hydraulic cylinders, and either the tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When this appendix. a waler system is used the vertical timber (5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) re- sheeting to be used is also selected from garding Table D–1.1 through D–1.4 are pre- these tables. The Tables D–1.1 and D–1.2 for sented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. vertical shores are used in Type A and B (6) Figures, illustrating typical installa- soils that do not require sheeting. Type B tions of hydraulic shoring, are included just soils that may require sheeting, and Type C prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is soils that always require sheeting are found entitled ‘‘Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; in the horizontal wale Tables D–1.3 and D–1.4. Typical Installations.’’ The soil type must first be determined in ac- (d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) cordance with the soil classification system Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are described in appendix A to subpart P of part those that meet the Section Modulus re- 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selec- quirements in the D–1 Tables. Aluminum tion of the size and spacing of the members material is 6061–T6 or material of equivalent is made. The selection is based on the depth strength and properties. and width of the trench where the members (2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2- are to be installed. In these tables the inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- vertical spacing is held constant at four feet side diameter with a minimum safe working on center. The tables show the maximum capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for compressive load at maximum extension. each size of wale in the waler system tables, Maximum extension is to include full range and in the vertical shore tables, the hydrau- of cylinder extensions as recommended by lic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as product manufaturer. the vertical shore spacing. (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables: inch inside diameter with a safe working ca- (1) Example 1: pacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep compressive load at extensions as rec- and 3 feet wide. From Table D–1.1: Find ommended by product manufacturer. vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders (3) Limitation of application. spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and (i) It is not intended that the aluminum 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures hydraulic specification apply to every situa- 1 & 3 for typical installations.) tion that may be experienced in the field. (2) Example 2: These data were developed to apply to the A trench is dug in Type B soil that does situations that are most commonly experi- not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet enced in current trenching practice. Shoring wide. From Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores systems for use in situations that are not and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet covered by the data in this appendix must be o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically. otherwise designed as specified in (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.) § 1926.652(c). (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does (ii) When any of the following conditions not require sheeting, but does experience are present, the members specified in the Ta- some minor raveling of the trench face. The

368

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00378 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width, Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch shall have structural steel tube (3.5 × 3.5 × diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves 0.1875) oversleeves, or structural oversleeves as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet of manufacturer’s specification, extending o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, the full, collapsed length. plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D–1 Table) (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2 should be used behind the shores. (See Fig- inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- ures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) side diameter with a safe working capacity (4) Example 4: A trench is dug in pre- of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compres- viously disturbed Type B soil, with charac- sive load at maximum extension. Maximum teristics of a Type C soil, and will require extension is to include full range of cylinder sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 extensions as recommended by product man- feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between ufacturer. cylinders is desired for working space. From (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- Table D–1.3: Find horizontal wale with a sec- inch inside diameter with a safe work capac- tion modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. ity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial com- vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder pressive load at maximum extension. Max- spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. imum extension is to include full range of × 3 12 timber sheeting is required at close cylinder extensions as recommended by spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical product manufacturer. installation.) (4) All spacing indicated is measured cen- (5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C ter to center. soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a min- cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired imum section modulus of 0.40 inch. for working space. From Table D–1.4: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 (6) When vertical shores are used, there and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 must be a minimum of three shores spaced feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal equally, horizontally, in a group. wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. hori- softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic zontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. white birch (Finland form). Please note that vertically. 3 × 12 timber sheeting is required plywood is not intended as a structural at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for member, but only for prevention of local rav- typical installation.) eling (sloughing of the trench face) between (g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables shores. D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3, and D–1.4. (8) See appendix C for timber specifica- (1) For applications other than those listed tions. in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of (9) Wales are calculated for simple span manufacturer’s tabulated data. For trench conditions. depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and § 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). limitations of the data.

369

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00379 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

370

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00380 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.038 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

371

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00381 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.039 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

372

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00382 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.040 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D

373

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00383 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.041 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

374

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00384 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.042 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. E

APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—ALTERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING

375

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00385 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.043 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS

The following figures are a graphic summary of the requirements contained in subpart P for excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems for use in excavations more than 20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with § 1926.652 (b) and (c).

376

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00386 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8026 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.044 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F

377

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00387 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.045 Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

378

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00388 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.046 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F

379

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00389 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.047 § 1926.700 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Subpart Q—Concrete and forms and shores are removed, in order Masonry Construction to support partially cured concrete and construction loads. (7) Shore means a supporting member AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours that resists a compressive force im- and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8 posed by a load. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (8) Vertical slip forms means forms (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- which are jacked vertically during the bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR placement of concrete. 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (9) Jacking operation means the task as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. of lifting a slab (or group of slabs) SOURCE: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless vertically from one location to another otherwise noted. (e.g., from the casting location to a temporary (parked) location, or from a § 1926.700 Scope, application, and defi- temporary location to another tem- nitions applicable to this subpart. porary location, or to its final location (a) Scope and application. This sub- in the structure), during the construc- part sets forth requirements to protect tion of a building/structure where the all construction employees from the lift-slab process is being used. hazards associated with concrete and [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55 masonry construction operations per- FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990] formed in workplaces covered under 29 CFR part 1926. In addition to the re- § 1926.701 General requirements. quirements in subpart Q, other rel- (a) Construction loads. No construc- evant provisions in parts 1910 and 1926 tion loads shall be placed on a concrete apply to concrete and masonry con- structure or portion of a concrete struction operations. structure unless the employer deter- (b) Definitions applicable to this sub- mines, based on information received part. In addition to the definitions set from a person who is qualified in struc- forth in § 1926.32, the following defini- tural design, that the structure or portions apply to this subpart. tion of the structure is capable of sup- (1) Bull float means a tool used to porting the loads. spread out and smooth concrete. (b) Reinforcing steel. All protruding (2) Formwork means the total system reinforcing steel, onto and into which of support for freshly placed or par- employees could fall, shall be guarded tially cured concrete, including the to eliminate the hazard of impalement. mold or sheeting (form) that is in con- (c) Post-tensioning operations. (1) No tact with the concrete as well as all employee (except those essential to the supporting members including shores, post-tensioning operations) shall be reshores, hardware, braces, and related permitted to be behind the jack during hardware. tensioning operations. (3) Lift slab means a method of con- (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected crete construction in which floor, and to limit employee access to the post- roof slabs are cast on or at ground level tensioning area during tensioning oper- and, using jacks, lifted into position. ations. (4) Limited access zone means an area (d) Riding concrete buckets. No em- alongside a masonry wall, which is ployee shall be permitted to ride con- under construction, and which is clear- crete buckets. ly demarcated to limit access by em- (e) Working under loads. (1) No employees. ployee shall be permitted to work (5) Precast concrete means concrete under concrete buckets while buckets members (such as walls, panels, slabs, are being elevated or lowered into posi- columns, and beams) which have been tion. formed, cast, and cured prior to final (2) To the extent practical, elevated placement in a structure. concrete buckets shall be routed so (6) Reshoring means the construction that no employee, or the fewest num- operation in which shoring equipment ber of employees, are exposed to the (also called reshores or reshoring hazards associated with falling con- equipment) is placed, as the original crete buckets.

380

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00390 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.703

(f) Personal protective equipment. No (g) Tremies. Sections of tremies and employee shall be permitted to apply a similar concrete conveyances shall be cement, sand, and water mixture secured with wire rope (or equivalent through a pneumatic hose unless the materials) in addition to the regular employee is wearing protective head couplings or connections. and face equipment. (h) Bull floats. Bull float handles, [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 used where they might contact ener- FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] gized electrical conductors, shall be constructed of nonconductive material § 1926.702 Requirements for equip- or insulated with a nonconductive ment and tools. sheath whose electrical and mechan- (a) Bulk cement storage. (1) Bulk stor- ical characteristics provide the equiva- age bins, containers, and silos shall be lent protection of a handle constructed equipped with the following: of nonconductive material. (i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (i) Masonry saws. (1) Masonry saws (ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means shall be guarded with a semicircular of starting the flow of material. enclosure over the blade. (2) No employee shall be permitted to (2) A method for retaining blade frag- enter storage facilities unless the ejec- ments shall be incorporated in the de- tion system has been shut down, locked sign of the semicircular enclosure. out, and tagged to indicate that the (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (1) No ejection system is not to be operated. employee shall be permitted to perform (b) Concrete mixers. Concrete mixers maintenance or repair activity on 3 with one cubic yard (.8 m ) or larger equipment (such as compressors, mix- loading skips shall be equipped with ers, screens or pumps used for concrete the following: and masonry construction activities) (1) A mechanical device to clear the where the inadvertent operation of the skip of materials; and equipment could occur and cause in- (2) Guardrails installed on each side jury, unless all potentially hazardous of the skip. energy sources have been locked out (c) Powered Power concrete trowels. and tagged. and rotating type concrete troweling (2) Tags shall read Do Not Start or machines that are manually guided similar language to indicate that the shall be equipped with a control switch equipment is not to be operated. that will automatically shut off the power whenever the hands of the oper- § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in- ator are removed from the equipment place concrete. handles. (d) Concrete buggies. Concrete buggy (a) General requirements for formwork. handles shall not extend beyond the (1) Formwork shall be designed, fab- wheels on either side of the buggy. ricated, erected, supported, braced and (e) Concrete pumping systems. (1) Con- maintained so that it will be capable of crete pumping systems using discharge supporting without failure all vertical pipes shall be provided with pipe sup- and lateral loads that may reasonably ports designed for 100 percent overload. be anticipated to be applied to the (2) Compressed air hoses used on con- formwork. Formwork which is de- crete pumping system shall be provided signed, fabricated, erected, supported, with positive fail-safe joint connectors braced and maintained in conformance to prevent separation of sections when with the appendix to this section will pressurized. be deemed to meet the requirements of (f) Concrete buckets. (1) Concrete this paragraph. buckets equipped with hydraulic or (2) Drawings or plans, including all pneumatic gates shall have positive revisions, for the jack layout, safety latches or similar safety devices formwork (including shoring equip- installed to prevent premature or acci- ment), working decks, and scaffolds, dental dumping. shall be available at the jobsite. (2) Concrete buckets shall be de- (b) Shoring and reshoring. (1) All shor- signed to prevent concrete from hanging equipment (including equipment ing up on top and the sides. used in reshoring operations) shall be

381

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00391 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.703 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

inspected prior to erection to deter- (c) Vertical slip forms. (1) The steel mine that the equipment meets the re- rods or pipes on which jacks climb or quirements specified in the formwork by which the forms are lifted shall be— drawings. (i) Specifically designed for that pur- (2) Shoring equipment found to be pose; and damaged such that its strength is re- (ii) Adequately braced where not en- duced to less than that required by cased in concrete. § 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for (2) Forms shall be designed to pre- shoring. vent excessive distortion of the struc- (3) Erected shoring equipment shall ture during the jacking operation. be inspected immediately prior to, dur- (3) All vertical slip forms shall be ing, and immediately after concrete provided with scaffolds or work plat- placement. forms where employees are required to (4) Shoring equipment that is found work or pass. to be damaged or weakened after erec- (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall tion, such that its strength is reduced be positioned in such a manner that to less than that required by the loads do not exceed the rated ca- § 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately re- pacity of the jacks. inforced. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices (5) The sills for shoring shall be shall be provided with mechanical dogs sound, rigid, and capable of carrying or other automatic holding devices to the maximum intended load. support the slip forms whenever failure (6) All base plates, shore heads, ex- of the power supply or lifting mecha- tension devices, and adjustment screws nism occurs. shall be in firm contact, and secured (6) The form structure shall be main- when necessary, with the foundation tained within all design tolerances and the form. specified for plumbness during the jacking operation. (7) Eccentric loads on shore heads (7) The predetermined safe rate of lift and similar members shall be prohib- shall not be exceeded. ited unless these members have been (d) Reinforcing steel. (1) Reinforcing designed for such loading. steel for walls, piers, columns, and (8) Whenever single post shores are similar vertical structures shall be used one on top of another (tiered), the adequately supported to prevent over- employer shall comply with the fol- turning and to prevent collapse. lowing specific requirements in addi- (2) Employers shall take measures to tion to the general requirements for prevent unrolled wire mesh from re- formwork: coiling. Such measures may include, (i) The design of the shoring shall be but are not limited to, securing each prepared by a qualified designer and end of the roll or turning over the roll. the erected shoring shall be inspected (e) Removal of formwork. (1) Forms by an engineer qualified in structural and shores (except those used for slabs design. on grade and slip forms) shall not be (ii) The single post shores shall be removed until the employer determines vertically aligned. that the concrete has gained sufficient (iii) The single post shores shall be strength to support its weight and su- spliced to prevent misalignment. perimposed loads. Such determination (iv) The single post shores shall be shall be based on compliance with one adequately braced in two mutually per- of the following: pendicular directions at the splice (i) The plans and specifications stipu- level. Each tier shall also be diagonally late conditions for removal of forms braced in the same two directions. and shores, and such conditions have (9) Adjustment of single post shores been followed, or to raise formwork shall not be made (ii) The concrete has been properly after the placement of concrete. tested with an appropriate ASTM (10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the standard test method designed to indi- original forms and shores are removed, cate the concrete compressive whenever the concrete is required to strength, and the test results indicate support loads in excess of its capacity. that the concrete has gained sufficient

382

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00392 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.705

strength to support its weight and su- § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab perimposed loads. construction operations. (2) Reshoring shall not be removed (a) Lift-slab operations shall be de- until the concrete being supported has signed and planned by a registered pro- attained adequate strength to support fessional engineer who has experience its weight and all loads in place upon in lift-slab construction. Such plans it. and designs shall be implemented by the employer and shall include detailed APPENDIX TO § 1926.703(a)(1) instructions and sketches indicating GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK the prescribed method of erection. These plans and designs shall also in- (This appendix is non-mandatory.) clude provisions for ensuring lateral This appendix serves as a non-mandatory stability of the building/structure dur- guideline to assist employers in complying ing construction. with the formwork requirements in (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be § 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork which has been de- marked to indicate their rated capac- signed, fabricated, erected, braced, supported ity as established by the manufacturer. and maintained in accordance with Sections (c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be 6 and 7 of the American National Standard loaded beyond their rated capacity as for Construction and Demolition Oper- established by the manufacturer. ations—Concrete and Masonry Work, ANSI (d) Jacking equipment shall be capa- A10.9–1983, shall be deemed to be in compli- ble of supporting at least two and one- ance with the provision of § 1926.703(a)(1). half times the load being lifted during [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 jacking operations and the equipment FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] shall not be overloaded. For the purpose of this provision, jacking equip- § 1926.704 Requirements for precast ment includes any load bearing compo- concrete. nent which is used to carry out the lift- (a) Precast concrete wall units, ing operation(s). Such equipment in- structural framing, and tilt-up wall cludes, but is not limited, to the fol- panels shall be adequately supported to lowing: threaded rods, lifting attach- prevent overturning and to prevent col- ments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T- lapse until permanent connections are caps, shearheads, columns, and foot- completed. ings. (b) Lifting inserts which are embed- (e) Jacks/lifting units shall be de- ded or otherwise attached to tilt-up signed and installed so that they will precast concrete members shall be ca- neither lift nor continue to lift when pable of supporting at least two times they are loaded in excess of their rated the maximum intended load applied or capacity. transmitted to them. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a (c) Lifting inserts which are embed- safety device installed which will cause ded or otherwise attached to precast the jacks/lifting units to support the concrete members, other than the tilt- load in any position in the event any up members, shall be capable of sup- jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses porting at least four times the max- its lifting ability. imum intended load applied or trans- (g) Jacking operations shall be syn- mitted to them. chronized in such a manner to ensure (d) Lifting hardware shall be capable even and uniform lifting of the slab. During lifting, all points at which the of supporting at least five times the slab is supported shall be kept within maximum intended load applied or 1⁄2 inch of that needed to maintain the transmitted to the lifting hardware. slab in a level position. (e) No employee shall be permitted (h) If leveling is automatically con- under precast concrete members being trolled, a device shall be installed that lifted or tilted into position except will stop the operation when the 1⁄2inch those employees required for the erec- tolerance set forth in paragraph (g) of tion of those members. this section is exceeded or where there [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54 is a malfunction in the jacking (lifting) FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989] system.

383

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00393 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.705 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(i) If leveling is maintained by man- (m) All welding on temporary and ual controls, such controls shall be lo- permanent connections shall be per- cated in a central location and at- formed by a certified welder, familiar tended by a competent person while with the welding requirements speci- lifting is in progress. In addition to fied in the plans and specifications for meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), the lift-slab operation. the competent person must be experi- (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting enced in the lifting operation and with units to building columns shall not be the lifting equipment being used. executed until the welds on the column (j) The maximum number of manu- shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to ally controlled jacks/lifting units on air temperature. one slab shall be limited to a number that will permit the operator to main- (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be posi- tain the slab level within specified tol- tively secured to building columns so erances of paragraph (g) of this section, that they do not become dislodged or but in no case shall that number ex- dislocated. ceed 14. (p) Equipment shall be designed and (k)(1) No employee, except those es- installed so that the lifting rods cannot sential to the jacking operation, shall slip out of position or the employer be permitted in the building/structure shall institute other measures, such as while any jacking operation is taking the use of locking or blocking devices, place unless the building/structure has which will provide positive connection been reinforced sufficiently to ensure between the lifting rods and attach- its integrity during erection. The ments and will prevent components phrase ‘‘reinforced sufficiently to en- from disengaging during lifting oper- sure its integrity’’ used in this para- ations. graph means that a registered professional engineer, independent of the en- APPENDIX TO § 1926.705—LIFT-SLAB gineer who designed and planned the OPERATIONS lifting operation, has determined from (This appendix is non-mandatory.) the plans that if there is a loss of support at any jack location, that loss will In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA requires be confined to that location and the employees to be removed from the building/ structure as a whole will remain sta- structure during jacking operations unless ble. an independent registered professional engi- (2) Under no circumstances, shall any neer, other than the engineer who designed and planned the lifting operation, has deter- employee who is not essential to the mined that the building/structure has been jacking operation be permitted imme- sufficiently reinforced to insure the integ- diately beneath a slab while it is being rity of the building/structure. One method to lifted. comply with this provision is for the em- (3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) ployer to ensure that continuous bottom of this section, a jacking operation be- steel is provided in every slab and in both di- gins when a slab or group of slabs is rections through every wall or column head lifted and ends when such slabs are se- area. (Column head area means the distance cured (with either temporary connec- between lines that are one and one half tions or permanent connections). times the thickness of the slab or drop panel. (4) Employers who comply with ap- These lines are located outside opposite pendix A to § 1926.705 shall be consid- faces of the outer edges of the shearhead sec- ered to be in compliance with the pro- tions—See Figure 1). The amount of bottom visions of paragraphs (k)(1) through steel shall be established by assuming loss of support at a given lifting jack and then de- (k)(3) of this section. termining the steel necessary to carry, by (l) When making temporary connec- catenary action over the span between sur- tions to support slabs, wedges shall be rounding supports, the slab service dead load secured by tack welding, or an equiva- plus any service dead and live loads likely to lent method of securing the wedges to be acting on the slab during jacking. In addi- prevent them from falling out of position, the surrounding supports must be capa- tion. Lifting rods may not be released ble of resisting any additional load trans- until the wedges at that column have ferred to them as a result of the loss of sup- been secured. port at the lifting jack considered.

384

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00394 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.706

[55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]

§ 1926.706 Requirements for masonry constructed plus four feet, and shall construction. run the entire length of the wall. (a) A limited access zone shall be es- (3) The limited access zone shall be tablished whenever a masonry wall is established on the side of the wall being constructed. The limited access which will be unscaffolded. zone shall conform to the following. (4) The limited access zone shall be (1) The limited access zone shall be restricted to entry by employees ac- established prior to the start of con- tively engaged in constructing the struction of the wall. wall. No other employees shall be per- (2) The limited access zone shall be mitted to enter the zone. equal to the height of the wall to be

385

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00395 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.048 Pt. 1926, Subpt. Q, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(5) The limited access zone shall re- Insulating Concrete for Compressive main in place until the wall is ade- Strength (ASTM C513–86). quately supported to prevent over- • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength turning and to prevent collapse unless of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM C495–86). the height of wall is over eight feet, in • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing, which case, the limited access zone and Testing of Concrete Compression Test shall remain in place until the require- Specimens (ASTM C684–81). ments of paragraph (b) of this section • Test Method for Compressive Strength of have been met. Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in (b) All masonry walls over eight feet Flexure (ASTM C116–68 (1980)). in height shall be adequately braced to prevent overturning and to prevent col- Subpart R—Steel Erection lapse unless the wall is adequately supported so that it will not overturn or AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, collapse. The bracing shall remain in 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 3–2000 (65 place until permanent supporting ele- FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR ments of the structure are in place. 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART SOURCE: 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, unless 1926—REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF otherwise noted. PART 1926 (This appendix is non-mandatory.) § 1926.750 Scope. The following non-mandatory references (a) This subpart sets forth require- provide information which can be helpful in ments to protect employees from the understanding and complying with the re- hazards associated with steel erection quirements contained in subpart Q. activities involved in the construction, • Accident Prevention Manual for Indus- alteration, and/or repair of single and trial Operations; Eighth Edition; National multi-story buildings, bridges, and Safety Council. other structures where steel erection • Building Code Requirements for Rein- occurs. The requirements of this sub- forced Concrete (ACI 318–83). • Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP–4). part apply to employers engaged in • Recommended Practice for Concrete steel erection unless otherwise speci- Formwork (ACI 347–78). fied. This subpart does not cover elec- • Safety Requirements for Concrete and trical transmission towers, commu- Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9–1983). nication and broadcast towers, or • Standard Test Method for Compressive tanks. Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens (ASTM C39–86). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Examples of struc- • Standard Test Method for Making and tures where steel erection may occur include Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field but are not limited to the following: Single (ASTM C31–85). and multi-story buildings; systems-engi- • Standard Test Method for Penetration neered metal buildings; lift slab/tilt-up Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM structures; energy exploration structures; C803–82). energy production, transfer and storage • Standard Test Method for Compressive structures and facilities; auditoriums; malls; Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place amphitheaters; stadiums; power plants; in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873–85). mills; chemical process structures; bridges; • Standard Method for Developing Early trestles; overpasses; underpasses; viaducts; Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting aqueducts; aerospace facilities and struc- Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918–80). tures; radar and communication structures; • Recommended Practice for Inspection light towers; signage; billboards; score- and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and boards; conveyor systems; conveyor supports Bituminous Materials as Used in Construc- and related framing; stairways; stair towers; tion (ASTM E329–77). fire escapes; draft curtains; fire containment • Method of Making and Curing Concrete structures; monorails; aerialways; catwalks; Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM curtain walls; window walls; store fronts; el- C192–88). evator fronts; entrances; skylights; metal • Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled roofs; industrial structures; hi-bay struc- Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM tures; rail, marine and other transportation C42–87). structures; sound barriers; water process and • Methods of Securing, Preparing and Test- water containment structures; air and cable ing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight supported structures; space frames; geodesic

386

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00396 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.751

domes; canopies; racks and rack support lights; joint fillers; gaskets; sealants structures and frames; platforms; walkways; and seals; doors; windows; hardware; balconies; atriums; penthouses; car dumpers; detention/security equipment and stackers/reclaimers; cranes and craneways; bins; hoppers; ovens; furnaces; stacks; doors, windows and hardware; con- amusement park structures and rides; and veying systems; building specialties; artistic and monumental structures. building equipment; machinery and plant equipment, furnishings and spe- (b)(1) Steel erection activities include hoisting, laying out, placing, cial construction. connecting, welding, burning, guying, (c) The duties of controlling contrac- bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging tors under this subpart include, but are structural steel, steel joists and metal not limited to, the duties specified in buildings; installing metal decking, §§ 1926.752 (a) and (c), 1926.755(b)(2), curtain walls, window walls, siding sys- 1926.759(b), and 1926.760(e). tems, miscellaneous metals, ornamental iron and similar materials; and § 1926.751 Definitions. moving point-to-point while per- Anchored bridging means that the forming these activities. steel joist bridging is connected to a (2) The following activities are cov- bridging terminus point. ered by this subpart when they occur Bolted diagonal bridging means diago- during and are a part of steel erection nal bridging that is bolted to a steel activities: rigging, hoisting, laying out, joist or joists. placing, connecting, guying, bracing, Bridging clip means a device that is dismantling, burning, welding, bolting, attached to the steel joist to allow the grinding, sealing, caulking, and all related activities for construction, alter- bolting of the bridging to the steel ation and/or repair of materials and as- joist. semblies such as structural steel; fer- Bridging terminus point means a wall, rous metals and alloys; non-ferrous a beam, tandem joists (with all bridg- metals and alloys; glass; plastics and ing installed and a horizontal truss in synthetic composite materials; struc- the plane of the top chord) or other ele- tural metal framing and related brac- ment at an end or intermediate ing and assemblies; anchoring devices; point(s) of a line of bridging that pro- structural cabling; cable stays; perma- vides an anchor point for the steel joist nent and temporary bents and towers; bridging. falsework for temporary supports of Choker means a wire rope or syn- permanent steel members; stone and thetic fiber rigging assembly that is other non-precast concrete architec- used to attach a load to a hoisting de- tural materials mounted on steel vice. frames; safety systems for steel erec- Cold forming means the process of tion; steel and metal joists; metal using press brakes, rolls, or other decking and raceway systems and ac- methods to shape steel into desired cessories; metal roofing and acces- cross sections at room temperature. sories; metal siding; bridge flooring; Column means a load-carrying cold formed steel framing; elevator vertical member that is part of the pri- beams; grillage; shelf racks; multi-pur- mary skeletal framing system. Col- pose supports; crane rails and acces- umns do not include posts. sories; miscellaneous, architectural and ornamental metals and metal Competent person (also defined in work; ladders; railings; handrails; § 1926.32) means one who is capable of fences and gates; gratings; trench cov- identifying existing and predictable ers; floor plates; castings; sheet metal hazards in the surroundings or working fabrications; metal panels and panel conditions which are unsanitary, haz- wall systems; louvers; column covers; ardous, or dangerous to employees, and enclosures and pockets; stairs; per- who has authorization to take prompt forated metals; ornamental iron work, corrective measures to eliminate them. expansion control including bridge ex- Connector means an employee who, pansion joint assemblies; slide bear- working with hoisting equipment, is ings; hydraulic structures; fascias; sof- placing and connecting structural fit panels; penthouse enclosures; sky- members and/or components.

387

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00397 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.751 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Constructibility means the ability to stallation of a double connection, sup- erect structural steel members in ac- ports the first member while the sec- cordance with subpart R without hav- ond member is connected. ing to alter the over-all structural de- Erection bridging means the bolted di- sign. agonal bridging that is required to be Construction load (for joist erection) installed prior to releasing the hoisting means any load other than the weight cables from the steel joists. of the employee(s), the joists and the Fall restraint system means a fall pro- bridging bundle. tection system that prevents the user Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ) means from falling any distance. The system an area in which certain work (for ex- is comprised of either a body belt or ample, initial installation and place- body harness, along with an anchorage, ment of metal decking) may take place connectors and other necessary equip- without the use of guardrail systems, ment. The other components typically personal fall arrest systems, fall re- include a lanyard, and may also in- straint systems, or safety net systems clude a lifeline and other devices. and where access to the zone is con- Final interior perimeter means the pe- trolled. rimeter of a large permanent open Controlled load lowering means low- space within a building such as an atri- ering a load by means of a mechanical um or courtyard. This does not include hoist drum device that allows a hoisted openings for stairways, elevator shafts, load to be lowered with maximum con- etc. trol using the gear train or hydraulic Girt (in systems-engineered metal build- components of the hoist mechanism. ings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped mem- Controlled load lowering requires the ber formed from sheet steel spanning use of the hoist drive motor, rather between primary framing and sup- than the load hoist brake, to lower the porting wall material. load. Headache ball means a weighted hook Controlling contractor means a prime that is used to attach loads to the hoist contractor, general contractor, con- load line of the crane. struction manager or any other legal Hoisting equipment means commer- entity which has the overall responsi- cially manufactured lifting equipment bility for the construction of the designed to lift and position a load of project—its planning, quality and com- known weight to a location at some pletion. known elevation and horizontal dis- Critical lift means a lift that (1) ex- tance from the equipment’s center of ceeds 75 percent of the rated capacity rotation. ‘‘Hoisting equipment’’ in- of the crane or derrick, or (2) requires cludes but is not limited to cranes, der- the use of more than one crane or derricks, tower cranes, barge-mounted rick. derricks or cranes, gin poles and gan- Decking hole means a gap or void try hoist systems. A ‘‘come-a-long’’ (a more than 2 inches (5.1 cm) in its least mechanical device, usually consisting dimension and less than 12 inches (30.5 of a chain or cable attached at each cm) in its greatest dimension in a end, that is used to facilitate move- floor, roof or other walking/working ment of materials through leverage) is surface. Pre-engineered holes in cel- not considered ‘‘hoisting equipment.’’ lular decking (for wires, cables, etc.) Leading edge means the unprotected are not included in this definition. side and edge of a floor, roof, or Derrick floor means an elevated floor formwork for a floor or other walking/ of a building or structure that has been working surface (such as deck) which designated to receive hoisted pieces of changes location as additional floor, steel prior to final placement. roof, decking or formwork sections are Double connection means an attach- placed, formed or constructed. ment method where the connection Metal decking means a commercially point is intended for two pieces of steel manufactured, structural grade, cold which share common bolts on either rolled metal panel formed into a series side of a central piece. of parallel ribs; for this subpart, this Double connection seat means a struc- includes metal floor and roof decks, tural attachment that, during the in- standing seam metal roofs, other metal

388

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00398 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.751

roof systems and other products such appears on the structural contract doc- as bar gratings, checker plate, ex- uments. panded metal panels, and similar prod- Purlin (in systems-engineered metal ucts. After installation and proper fas- buildings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped tening, these decking materials serve a member formed from sheet steel span- combination of functions including, ning between primary framing and sup- but not limited to: a structural ele- porting roof material. ment designed in combination with the Qualified person (also defined in structure to resist, distribute and § 1926.32) means one who, by possession transfer loads, stiffen the structure and of a recognized degree, certificate, or provide a diaphragm action; a walking/ professional standing, or who by exten- working surface; a form for concrete sive knowledge, training, and experi- slabs; a support for roofing systems; ence, has successfully demonstrated and a finished floor or roof. the ability to solve or resolve problems Multiple lift rigging means a rigging relating to the subject matter, the assembly manufactured by wire rope work, or the project. rigging suppliers that facilitates the Safety deck attachment means an ini- attachment of up to five independent tial attachment that is used to secure loads to the hoist rigging of a crane. an initially placed sheet of decking to means a gap or void 12 Opening keep proper alignment and bearing inches (30.5 cm) or more in its least di- with structural support members. mension in a floor, roof or other walk- Shear connector means headed steel ing/working surface. For the purposes of this subpart, skylights and smoke studs, steel bars, steel lugs, and similar domes that do not meet the strength devices which are attached to a struc- requirements of § 1926.754(e)(3) shall be tural member for the purpose of regarded as openings. achieving composite action with concrete. Permanent floor means a structurally completed floor at any level or ele- Steel erection means the construction, vation (including slab on grade). alteration or repair of steel buildings, Personal fall arrest system means a bridges and other structures, including system used to arrest an employee in a the installation of metal decking and fall from a working level. A personal all planking used during the process of fall arrest system consists of an an- erection. chorage, connectors, a body harness Steel joist means an open web, sec- and may include a lanyard, decelera- ondary load-carrying member of 144 tion device, lifeline, or suitable com- feet (43.9 m) or less, designed by the bination of these. The use of a body manufacturer, used for the support of belt for fall arrest is prohibited. floors and roofs. This does not include Positioning device system means a body structural steel trusses or cold-formed belt or body harness rigged to allow an joists. employee to be supported on an ele- Steel joist girder means an open web, vated, vertical surface, such as a wall primary load-carrying member, de- or column and work with both hands signed by the manufacturer, used for free while leaning. the support of floors and roofs. This Post means a structural member with does not include structural steel truss- a longitudinal axis that is essentially es. vertical, that: (1) weighs 300 pounds or Steel truss means an open web mem- less and is axially loaded (a load press- ber designed of structural steel compo- es down on the top end), or (2) is not nents by the project structural engi- axially loaded, but is laterally re- neer of record. For the purposes of this strained by the above member. Posts subpart, a steel truss is considered typically support stair landings, wall equivalent to a solid web structural framing, mezzanines and other sub- member. structures. Structural steel means a steel member, Project structural engineer of record or a member made of a substitute ma- means the registered, licensed profes- terial (such as, but not limited to, fi- sional responsible for the design of berglass, aluminum or composite mem- structural steel framing and whose seal bers). These members include, but are

389

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00399 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.752 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

not limited to, steel joists, joist gird- priate ASTM standard test method of ers, purlins, columns, beams, trusses, field-cured samples, either 75 percent splices, seats, metal decking, girts, and of the intended minimum compressive all bridging, and cold formed metal design strength or sufficient strength framing which is integrated with the to support the loads imposed during structural steel framing of a building. steel erection. Systems-engineered metal building (c) Site layout. The controlling con- means a metal, field-assembled build- tractor shall ensure that the following ing system consisting of framing, roof is provided and maintained: and wall coverings. Typically, many of (1) Adequate access roads into and these components are cold-formed through the site for the safe delivery shapes. These individual parts are fab- and movement of derricks, cranes, ricated in one or more manufacturing trucks, other necessary equipment, and facilities and shipped to the job site for the material to be erected and means assembly into the final structure. The and methods for pedestrian and vehic- engineering design of the system is ular control. Exception: this require- normally the responsibility of the sys- ment does not apply to roads outside of tems-engineered metal building manu- the construction site. facturer. (2) A firm, properly graded, drained Tank means a container for holding area, readily accessible to the work gases, liquids or solids. with adequate space for the safe stor- Unprotected sides and edges means any age of materials and the safe operation side or edge (except at entrances to of the erector’s equipment. points of access) of a walking/working (d) Pre-planning of overhead hoisting surface, for example a, floor, roof, ramp operations. All hoisting operations in or runway, where there is no wall or steel erection shall be pre-planned to guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 ensure that the requirements of m) high. § 1926.753(d) are met. (e) Site-specific erection plan. Where § 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection plan and construction se- employers elect, due to conditions spe- quence. cific to the site, to develop alternate means and methods that provide em- (a) Approval to begin steel erection. Be- ployee protection in accordance with fore authorizing the commencement of § 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) or steel erection, the controlling con- § 1926.757(e)(4), a site-specific erection tractor shall ensure that the steel erec- plan shall be developed by a qualified tor is provided with the following writ- person and be available at the work ten notifications: site. Guidelines for establishing a site- (1) The concrete in the footings, piers specific erection plan are contained in and walls and the mortar in the ma- appendix A to this subpart. sonry piers and walls has attained, on the basis of an appropriate ASTM § 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. standard test method of field-cured samples, either 75 percent of the in- (a) All the provisions of subpart CC tended minimum compressive design apply to hoisting and rigging with the strength or sufficient strength to sup- exception of § 1926.1431(a). port the loads imposed during steel (b) In addition, paragraphs (c) erection. through (e) of this section apply re- (2) Any repairs, replacements and garding the hazards associated with modifications to the anchor bolts were hoisting and rigging. conducted in accordance with (c) General. (1) Pre-shift visual in- § 1926.755(b). spection of cranes. (b) Commencement of steel erection. A (i) Cranes being used in steel erection steel erection contractor shall not activities shall be visually inspected erect steel unless it has received writ- prior to each shift by a competent per- ten notification that the concrete in son; the inspection shall include obser- the footings, piers and walls or the vation for deficiencies during oper- mortar in the masonry piers and walls ation. At a minimum this inspection has attained, on the basis of an appro- shall include the following:

390

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00400 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.753

(A) All control mechanisms for mal- sonnel except as provided in paragraph adjustments; (c)(4) of this section. (B) Control and drive mechanism for (4) Cranes or derricks may be used to excessive wear of components and con- hoist employees on a personnel plat- tamination by lubricants, water or form when work under this subpart is other foreign matter; being conducted, provided that all pro- (C) Safety devices, including but not visions of § 1926.1431 (except for limited to boom angle indicators, boom § 1926.1431(a)) are met. stops, boom kick out devices, anti-two (5) Safety latches on hooks shall not block devices, and load moment indica- be deactivated or made inoperable ex- tors where required; cept: (D) Air, hydraulic, and other pressur- (i) When a qualified rigger has deter- ized lines for deterioration or leakage, mined that the hoisting and placing of particularly those which flex in normal purlins and single joists can be per- operation; formed more safely by doing so; or (E) Hooks and latches for deforma- (ii) When equivalent protection is tion, chemical damage, cracks, or provided in a site-specific erection wear; plan. (F) Wire rope reeving for compliance (d) Working under loads. (1) Routes for with hoisting equipment manufactur- suspended loads shall be pre-planned to er’s specifications; ensure that no employee is required to (G) Electrical apparatus for malfunc- work directly below a suspended load tioning, signs of excessive deteriora- except for: tion, dirt, or moisture accumulation; (i) Employees engaged in the initial (H) Hydraulic system for proper fluid connection of the steel; or level; (ii) Employees necessary for the (I) Tires for proper inflation and con- hooking or unhooking of the load. dition; (2) When working under suspended (J) Ground conditions around the loads, the following criteria shall be hoisting equipment for proper support, met: including ground settling under and (i) Materials being hoisted shall be around outriggers, ground water accu- rigged to prevent unintentional dis- mulation, or similar conditions; placement; (K) The hoisting equipment for level position; and (ii) Hooks with self-closing safety (L) The hoisting equipment for level latches or their equivalent shall be position after each move and setup. used to prevent components from slip- (ii) If any deficiency is identified, an ping out of the hook; and immediate determination shall be (iii) All loads shall be rigged by a made by the competent person as to qualified rigger whether the deficiency constitutes a (e) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (1) A hazard. multiple lift shall only be performed if (iii) If the deficiency is determined to the following criteria are met: constitute a hazard, the hoisting equip- (i) A multiple lift rigging assembly is ment shall be removed from service used; until the deficiency has been corrected. (ii) A maximum of five members are (iv) The operator shall be responsible hoisted per lift; for those operations under the opera- (iii) Only beams and similar structor’s direct control. Whenever there is tural members are lifted; and any doubt as to safety, the operator (iv) All employees engaged in the shall have the authority to stop and multiple lift have been trained in these refuse to handle loads until safety has procedures in accordance with been assured. § 1926.761(c)(1). (2) A qualified rigger (a rigger who is (v) No crane is permitted to be used also a qualified person) shall inspect for a multiple lift where such use is the rigging prior to each shift in ac- contrary to the manufacturer’s speci- cordance with § 1926.251. fications and limitations. (3) The headache ball, hook or load (2) Components of the multiple lift shall not be used to transport per- rigging assembly shall be specifically

391

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00401 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.754 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

designed and assembled with a max- (1) The permanent floors shall be in- imum capacity for total assembly and stalled as the erection of structural for each individual attachment point. members progresses, and there shall be This capacity, certified by the manu- not more than eight stories between facturer or a qualified rigger, shall be the erection floor and the upper-most based on the manufacturer’s specifica- permanent floor, except where the tions with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all structural integrity is maintained as a components. result of the design. (3) The total load shall not exceed: (2) At no time shall there be more (i) The rated capacity of the hoisting than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m), equipment specified in the hoisting whichever is less, of unfinished bolting equipment load charts; or welding above the foundation or up- (ii) The rigging capacity specified in permost permanently secured floor, ex- the rigging rating chart. cept where the structural integrity is (4) The multiple lift rigging assembly maintained as a result of the design. shall be rigged with members: (3) A fully planked or decked floor or (i) Attached at their center of grav- nets shall be maintained within two ity and maintained reasonably level; stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is (ii) Rigged from top down; and less, directly under any erection work (iii) Rigged at least 7 feet (2.1 m) being performed. apart. (c) Walking/working surfaces—shear (5) The members on the multiple lift connectors and other similar devices—(1) rigging assembly shall be set from the Tripping hazards. Shear connectors bottom up. (such as headed steel studs, steel bars (6) Controlled load lowering shall be or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, de- used whenever the load is over the con- formed anchors or threaded studs shall nectors. not be attached to the top flanges of [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 75 beams, joists or beam attachments so FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010] that they project vertically from or horizontally across the top flange of § 1926.754 Structural steel assembly. the member until after the metal deck- (a) Structural stability shall be ing, or other walking/working surface, maintained at all times during the has been installed. erection process. (2) Installation of shear connectors on composite floors, roofs and bridge decks. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) regulations incor- When shear connectors are used in con- porate by reference a number of standards, struction of composite floors, roofs and policies, and standard specifications pub- bridge decks, employees shall lay out lished by the American Association of State and install the shear connectors after Highway and Transportation Officials the metal decking has been installed, (AASHTO) and other organizations. (See 23 using the metal decking as a working CFR 625.4). Many of these incorporated provisions may be relevant to maintaining platform. Shear connectors shall not be structural stability during the erection proc- installed from within a controlled ess. For instance, as of May 17, 2010, in many decking zone (CDZ), as specified in cases FHWA requires a Registered Engineer § 1926.760(c)(7). to prepare and seal working drawings for (d) Plumbing-up. (1) When deemed falsework used in highway bridge construc- necessary by a competent person, tion. (See AASHTO Specifications for High- plumbing-up equipment shall be in- way Bridges, Div. II, § 3.2.1, 15th edition, 1992, which FHWA incorporates by reference in 23 stalled in conjunction with the steel CFR 625.4). FHWA also encourages compli- erection process to ensure the stability ance with AASHTO Specifications that the of the structure. FHWA regulations do not currently incor- (2) When used, plumbing-up equip- porate by reference. (See http:// ment shall be in place and properly in- www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/index.htm.) stalled before the structure is loaded (b) The following additional require- with construction material such as ments shall apply for multi-story loads of joists, bundles of decking or structures: bundles of bridging.

392

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00402 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.755

(3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be placement by the wind, equipment or removed only with the approval of a employees. competent person. (iii) All covers shall be painted with (e) Metal decking—(1) Hoisting, landing high-visibility paint or shall be marked and placing of metal decking bundles. (i) with the word ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to Bundle packaging and strapping shall provide warning of the hazard. not be used for hoisting unless specifi- (iv) Smoke dome or skylight fixtures cally designed for that purpose. that have been installed, are not con- (ii) If loose items such as dunnage, sidered covers for the purpose of this flashing, or other materials are placed section unless they meet the strength on the top of metal decking bundles to requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of be hoisted, such items shall be secured this section. to the bundles. (4) Decking gaps around columns. Wire (iii) Bundles of metal decking on mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, joists shall be landed in accordance shall be installed around columns with § 1926.757(e)(4). where planks or metal decking do not (iv) Metal decking bundles shall be fit tightly. The materials used must be landed on framing members so that of sufficient strength to provide fall enough support is provided to allow the protection for personnel and prevent bundles to be unbanded without dis- objects from falling through. (5) Installation of metal decking. (i) Ex- lodging the bundles from the supports. cept as provided in § 1926.760(c), metal (v) At the end of the shift or when en- decking shall be laid tightly and imme- vironmental or jobsite conditions re- diately secured upon placement to pre- quire, metal decking shall be secured vent accidental movement or displace- against displacement. ment. (2) Roof and floor holes and openings. (ii) During initial placement, metal Metal decking at roof and floor holes decking panels shall be placed to en- and openings shall be installed as fol- sure full support by structural mem- lows: bers. (i) Framed metal deck openings shall (6) Derrick floors. (i) A derrick floor have structural members turned down shall be fully decked and/or planked to allow continuous deck installation and the steel member connections com- except where not allowed by structural pleted to support the intended floor design constraints or constructibility. loading. (ii) Roof and floor holes and openings (ii) Temporary loads placed on a der- shall be decked over. Where large size, rick floor shall be distributed over the configuration or other structural de- underlying support members so as to sign does not allow openings to be prevent local overloading of the deck decked over (such as elevator shafts, material. stair wells, etc.) employees shall be protected in accordance with [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 71 FR 2885, Jan. 18, 2006; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, § 1926.760(a)(1). 2006; 75 FR 27429, May 17, 2010; 85 FR 8745, (iii) Metal decking holes and open- Feb. 18, 2020] ings shall not be cut until immediately prior to being permanently filled with § 1926.755 Column anchorage. the equipment or structure needed or (a) General requirements for erection intended to fulfill its specific use and stability. (1) All columns shall be an- which meets the strength requirements chored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or (anchor bolts). shall be immediately covered. (2) Each column anchor rod (anchor (3) Covering roof and floor openings. (i) bolt) assembly, including the column- Covers for roof and floor openings shall to-base plate weld and the column be capable of supporting, without fail- foundation, shall be designed to resist ure, twice the weight of the employees, a minimum eccentric gravity load of equipment and materials that may be 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches imposed on the cover at any one time. (.46m) from the extreme outer face of (ii) All covers shall be secured when the column in each direction at the top installed to prevent accidental dis- of the column shaft.

393

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00403 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.756 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(3) Columns shall be set on level fin- secure the first member and prevent ished floors, pre-grouted leveling the column from being displaced (See plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs appendix H to this subpart for exam- which are adequate to transfer the con- ples of equivalent connection devices). struction loads. (2) If a seat or equivalent device is (4) All columns shall be evaluated by used, the seat (or device) shall be de- a competent person to determine signed to support the load during the whether guying or bracing is needed; if double connection process. It shall be guying or bracing is needed, it shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a installed. supporting member and the first mem- (b) Repair, replacement or field modi- ber before the nuts on the shared bolts fication of anchor rods (anchor bolts). (1) are removed to make the double con- Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be nection. repaired, replaced or field-modified (d) Column splices. Each column splice without the approval of the project shall be designed to resist a minimum structural engineer of record. eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds (2) Prior to the erection of a column, (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from the controlling contractor shall pro- the extreme outer face of the column vide written notification to the steel in each direction at the top of the col- erector if there has been any repair, re- umn shaft. placement or modification of the an- (e) Perimeter columns. Perimeter col- chor rods (anchor bolts) of that columns shall not be erected unless: umn. (1) The perimeter columns extend a minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the § 1926.756 Beams and columns. finished floor to permit installation of (a) General. (1) During the final plac- perimeter safety cables prior to erec- ing of solid web structural members, tion of the next tier, except where the load shall not be released from the constructibility does not allow (see ap- hoisting line until the members are se- pendix F to this subpart); cured with at least two bolts per con- (2) The perimeter columns have holes nection, of the same size and strength or other devices in or attached to pe- as shown in the erection drawings, rimeter columns at 42–45 inches (107–114 drawn up wrench-tight or the equiva- cm) above the finished floor and the lent as specified by the project struc- midpoint between the finished floor tural engineer of record, except as and the top cable to permit installa- specified in paragraph (b) of this section of perimeter safety cables required tion. by § 1926.760(a)(2), except where (2) A competent person shall deter- constructibility does not allow. (See mine if more than two bolts are nec- appendix F to this subpart). essary to ensure the stability of cantilevered members; if additional bolts § 1926.757 Open web steel joists. are needed, they shall be installed. (a) General. (1) Except as provided in (b) Diagonal bracing. Solid web struc- paragraph (a)(2) of this section, where tural members used as diagonal brac- steel joists are used and columns are ing shall be secured by at least one bolt not framed in at least two directions per connection drawn up wrench-tight with solid web structural steel mem- or the equivalent as specified by the bers, a steel joist shall be field-bolted project structural engineer of record. at the column to provide lateral sta- (c)(1) Double connections at columns bility to the column during erection. and/or at beam webs over a column. When For the installation of this joist: two structural members on opposite (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be sides of a column web, or a beam web provided on each column for steel over a column, are connected sharing joists. The plate shall be a minimum of common connection holes, at least one 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) bolt with its wrench-tight nut shall re- and shall extend at least 3 inches (76 main connected to the first member mm) below the bottom chord of the unless a shop-attached or field-at- joist with a 13⁄16 inch (21 mm) hole to tached seat or equivalent connection provide an attachment point for guying device is supplied with the member to or plumbing cables.

394

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00404 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.757

(ii) The bottom chords of steel joists (ii) These connections shall be field- at columns shall be stabilized to pre- bolted unless constructibility does not vent rotation during erection. allow. (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (9) Steel joists and steel joist girders leased until the seat at each end of the shall not be used as anchorage points steel joist is field-bolted, and each end for a fall arrest system unless written of the bottom chord is restrained by approval to do so is obtained from a the column stabilizer plate. qualified person. (2) Where constructibility does not (10) A bridging terminus point shall allow a steel joist to be installed at the be established before bridging is in- column: stalled. (See appendix C to this sub- (i) an alternate means of stabilizing joists shall be installed on both sides part.) near the column and shall: (b) Attachment of steel joists and steel (A) provide stability equivalent to joist girders. (1) Each end of ‘‘K’’ series paragraph (a)(1) of this section; steel joists shall be attached to the (B) be designed by a qualified person; support structure with a minimum of (C) be shop installed; and two 1⁄8-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch (D) be included in the erection draw- (25 mm) long or with two 1⁄2-inch (13 ings. mm) bolts, or the equivalent. (ii) hoisting cables shall not be re- (2) Each end of ‘‘LH’’ and ‘‘DLH’’ se- leased until the seat at each end of the ries steel joists and steel joist girders steel joist is field-bolted and the joist shall be attached to the support struc- is stabilized. ture with a minimum of two 1⁄4-inch (6 (3) Where steel joists at or near col- mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long, umns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the or with two 3⁄4-inch (19 mm) bolts, or joist shall be designed with sufficient the equivalent. strength to allow one employee to re- (3) Except as provided in paragraph lease the hoisting cable without the (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist need for erection bridging. shall be attached to the support struc- (4) Where steel joists at or near col- ture, at least at one end on both sides umns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), of the seat, immediately upon place- the joists shall be set in tandem with all bridging installed unless an alter- ment in the final erection position and native method of erection, which pro- before additional joists are placed. vides equivalent stability to the steel (4) Panels that have been pre-assem- joist, is designed by a qualified person bled from steel joists with bridging and is included in the site-specific erec- shall be attached to the structure at tion plan. each corner before the hoisting cables (5) A steel joist or steel joist girder are released. shall not be placed on any support (c) Erection of steel joists. (1) Both structure unless such structure is sta- sides of the seat of one end of each bilized. steel joist that requires bridging under (6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a Tables A and B shall be attached to the structure, they shall be secured to pre- support structure before hoisting ca- vent unintentional displacement prior bles are released. to installation. (2) For joists over 60 feet, both ends (7) No modification that affects the of the joist shall be attached as speci- strength of a steel joist or steel joist fied in paragraph (b) of this section and girder shall be made without the ap- the provisions of paragraph (d) of this proval of the project structural engi- section met before the hoisting cables neer of record. are released. (8) Field-bolted joists. (i) Except for steel joists that have been pre-assem- (3) On steel joists that do not require bled into panels, connections of indi- erection bridging under Tables A and vidual steel joists to steel structures in B, only one employee shall be allowed bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be on the joist until all bridging is in- fabricated to allow for field bolting stalled and anchored. during erection.

395

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00405 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.757 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT SPAN JOISTS SPAN JOISTS—Continued

Joist Span Joist Span

8L1 ...... NM 14KCS2 ...... NM 10K1 ...... NM 14KCS3 ...... NM 12K1 ...... 23–0 16KCS2 ...... NM 12K3 ...... NM 16KCS3 ...... NM 12K5 ...... NM 16KCS4 ...... NM 14K1 ...... 27–0 16KCS5 ...... NM 14K3 ...... NM 18KCS2 ...... 35–0 14K4 ...... NM 18KCS3 ...... NM 14K6 ...... NM 18KCS4 ...... NM 16K2 ...... 29–0 18KCS5 ...... NM 16K3 ...... 30–0 20KCS2 ...... 36–0 16K4 ...... 32–0 20KCS3 ...... 39–0 16K5 ...... 32–0 20KCS4 ...... NM 16K6 ...... NM 20KCS5 ...... NM 16K7 ...... NM 22KCS2 ...... 36–0 16K9 ...... NM 22KCS3 ...... 40–0 18K3 ...... 31–0 22KCS4 ...... NM 18K4 ...... 32–0 22KCS5 ...... NM 18K5 ...... 33–0 24KCS2 ...... 39–0 18K6 ...... 35–0 24KCS3 ...... 44–0 18K7 ...... NM 24KCS4 ...... NM 18K9 ...... NM 24KCS5 ...... NM 18K10 ...... NM 26KCS2 ...... 39–0 20K3 ...... 32–0 26KCS3 ...... 44–0 20K4 ...... 34–0 26KCS4 ...... NM 20K5 ...... 34–0 26KCS5 ...... NM 20K6 ...... 36–0 28KCS2 ...... 40–0 20K7 ...... 39–0 28KCS3 ...... 45–0 20K9 ...... 39–0 28KCS4 ...... 53–0 20K10 ...... NM 28KCS5 ...... 53–0 22K4 ...... 34–0 30KC53 ...... 45–0 22K5 ...... 35–0 30KCS4 ...... 54–0 22K6 ...... 36–0 30KCS5 ...... 54–0 22K7 ...... 40–0 22K9 ...... 40–0 NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory. 22K10 ...... 40–0 22K11 ...... 40–0 TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN 24K4 ...... 36–0 JOISTS 24K5 ...... 38–0 24K6 ...... 39–0 Joist Span 24K7 ...... 43–0 24K8 ...... 43–0 18LH02 ...... 33–0. 24K9 ...... 44–0 18LH03 ...... NM. 24K10 ...... NM 18LH04 ...... NM. 24K12 ...... NM 18LH05 ...... NM. 26K5 ...... 38–0 18LH06 ...... NM. 26K6 ...... 39–0 18LH07 ...... NM. 26K7 ...... 43–0 18LH08 ...... NM. 26K8 ...... 44–0 18LH09 ...... NM. 26K9 ...... 45–0 20LH02 ...... 33–0. 26K10 ...... 49–0 20LH03 ...... 38–0. 26K12 ...... NM 20LH04 ...... NM. 28K6 ...... 40–0 20LH05 ...... NM. 28K7 ...... 43–0 20LH06 ...... NM. 28K8 ...... 44–0 20LH07 ...... NM. 28K9 ...... 45–0 20LH08 ...... NM. 28K10 ...... 49–0 20LH09 ...... NM. 28K12 ...... 53–0 20LH10 ...... NM. 30K7 ...... 44–0 24LH03 ...... 35–0. 30K8 ...... 45–0 24LH04 ...... 39–0. 30K9 ...... 45–0 24LH05 ...... 40–0. 30K10 ...... 50–0 24LH06 ...... 45–0. 30K11 ...... 52–0 24LH07 ...... NM. 30K12 ...... 54–0 24LH08 ...... NM. 10KCS1 ...... NM 24LH09 ...... NM. 10KCS2 ...... NM 24LH10 ...... NM. 10KCS3 ...... NM 24LH11 ...... NM. 12KCS1 ...... NM 28LH05 ...... 42–0. 12KCS2 ...... NM 28LH06 ...... 42–0. 12KCS3 ...... NM 28LH07 ...... NM. 14KCS1 ...... NM 28LH08 ...... NM.

396

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00406 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.757

TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- JOISTS—Continued leased until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and anchored; Joist Span and 28LH09 ...... NM. (iv) No more than two employees 28LH10 ...... NM. shall be allowed on these spans until 28LH11 ...... NM. all other bridging is installed and an- 28LH12 ...... NM. 28LH13 ...... NM. chored. 32LH06 ...... 47–0 through 60–0. (3) Where the span of the steel joist is 32LH07 ...... 47–0 through 60–0. over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet 32LH08 ...... 55–0 through 60–0. 32LH09 ...... NM through 60–0. (43.9 m), the following shall apply: 32LH10 ...... NM through 60–0. (i) All rows of bridging shall be 32LH11 ...... NM through 60–0. bolted diagonal bridging; 32LH12 ...... NM through 60–0. 32LH13 ...... NM through 60–0. (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- 32LH14 ...... NM through 60–0. leased until all bridging is installed 32LH15 ...... NM through 60–0. and anchored; and 36LH07 ...... 47–0 through 60–0. 36LH08 ...... 47–0 through 60–0. (iii) No more than two employees 36LH09 ...... 57–0 through 60–0. shall be allowed on these spans until 36LH10 ...... NM through 60–0. all bridging is installed and anchored. 36LH11 ...... NM through 60–0. (4) For steel members spanning over 36LH12 ...... NM through 60–0. 36LH13 ...... NM through 60–0. 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods 36LH14 ...... NM through 60–0. used shall be in accordance with 36LH15 ...... NM through 60–0. § 1926.756. NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory. (5) Where any steel joist specified in (4) Employees shall not be allowed on paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and steel joists where the span of the steel (d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord joist is equal to or greater than the bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal span shown in Tables A and B except in bridging shall be provided near the sup- accordance with § 1926.757(d). port(s). This bridging shall be installed (5) When permanent bridging ter- and anchored before the hoisting minus points cannot be used during cable(s) is released. erection, additional temporary bridg- (6) When bolted diagonal erection ing terminus points are required to bridging is required by this section, the provide stability. (See appendix C of following shall apply: this subpart.) (i) The bridging shall be indicated on (d) Erection bridging. (1) Where the the erection drawing; span of the steel joist is equal to or (ii) The erection drawing shall be the greater than the span shown in Tables exclusive indicator of the proper place- A and B, the following shall apply: ment of this bridging; (i) A row of bolted diagonal erection (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or bridging shall be installed near the functional equivalents, shall be used midspan of the steel joist; where the bridging bolts to the steel (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- joists; leased until this bolted diagonal erec- (iv) When two pieces of bridging are tion bridging is installed and anchored; attached to the steel joist by a com- and mon bolt, the nut that secures the first (iii) No more than one employee shall piece of bridging shall not be removed be allowed on these spans until all from the bolt for the attachment of the other bridging is installed and an- second; and chored. (v) Bridging attachments shall not (2) Where the span of the steel joist is protrude above the top chord of the over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet steel joist. (30.5 m), the following shall apply: (e) Landing and placing loads. (1) Dur- (i) All rows of bridging shall be ing the construction period, the em- bolted diagonal bridging; ployer placing a load on steel joists (ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erec- shall ensure that the load is distrib- tion bridging shall be installed near uted so as not to exceed the carrying the third points of the steel joist; capacity of any steel joist.

397

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00407 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.758 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this (d) Construction loads shall not be section, no construction loads are al- placed on any structural steel frame- lowed on the steel joists until all bridg- work unless such framework is safely ing is installed and anchored and all bolted, welded or otherwise adequately joist-bearing ends are attached. secured. (3) The weight of a bundle of joist (e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame bridging shall not exceed a total of connections, when girts or eave struts 1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist share common connection holes, at bridging shall be placed on a minimum least one bolt with its wrench-tight of three steel joists that are secured at nut shall remain connected to the first one end. The edge of the bridging bun- member unless a manufacturer-sup- dle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30 plied, field-attached seat or similar m) of the secured end. connection device is present to secure (4) No bundle of decking may be the first member so that the girt or placed on steel joists until all bridging eave strut is always secured against has been installed and anchored and all displacement. joist bearing ends attached, unless all (f) Both ends of all steel joists or of the following conditions are met: cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted (i) The employer has first determined and/or welded to the support structure from a qualified person and docu- before: mented in a site-specific erection plan (1) Releasing the hoisting cables; that the structure or portion of the (2) Allowing an employee on the structure is capable of supporting the joists; or load; (3) Allowing any construction loads (ii) The bundle of decking is placed on the joists. on a minimum of three steel joists; (g) Purlins and girts shall not be used (iii) The joists supporting the bundle as an anchorage point for a fall arrest of decking are attached at both ends; system unless written approval is ob- (iv) At least one row of bridging is in- tained from a qualified person. stalled and anchored; (h) Purlins may only be used as a (v) The total weight of the bundle of walking/working surface when install- decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds ing safety systems, after all permanent (1816 kg); and bridging has been installed and fall (vi) Placement of the bundle of deck- protection is provided. ing shall be in accordance with para- (i) Construction loads may be placed graph (e)(5) of this section. only within a zone that is within 8 feet (5) The edge of the construction load (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of support member. the bearing surface of the joist end. § 1926.759 Falling object protection. [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, 2020] (a) Securing loose items aloft. All materials, equipment, and tools, which are § 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal not in use while aloft, shall be secured buildings. against accidental displacement. (a) All of the requirements of this (b) Protection from falling objects other subpart apply to the erection of sys- than materials being hoisted. The con- tems-engineered metal buildings ex- trolling contractor shall bar other concept §§ 1926.755 (column anchorage) and struction processes below steel erec- 1926.757 (open web steel joists). tion unless overhead protection for the (b) Each structural column shall be employees below is provided. anchored by a minimum of four anchor rods (anchor bolts). § 1926.760 Fall protection. (c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent (a) General requirements. (1) Except as of their bolts or the number of bolts provided by paragraph (a)(3) of this sec- specified by the manufacturer (which- tion, each employee engaged in a steel ever is greater) installed and tightened erection activity who is on a walking/ on both sides of the web adjacent to working surface with an unprotected each flange before the hoisting equip- side or edge more than 15 feet (4.6 m) ment is released. above a lower level shall be protected

398

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00408 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.761

from fall hazards by guardrail systems, (4) Each employee working in a CDZ safety net systems, personal fall arrest shall have completed CDZ training in systems, positioning device systems or accordance with § 1926.761. fall restraint systems. (5) Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall (2) Perimeter safety cables. On multi- not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m2). story structures, perimeter safety ca- (6) Safety deck attachments shall be bles shall be installed at the final inte- performed in the CDZ from the leading rior and exterior perimeters of the edge back to the control line and shall floors as soon as the metal decking has have at least two attachments for each been installed. metal decking panel. (3) Connectors and employees work- (7) Final deck attachments and ining in controlled decking zones shall be stallation of shear connectors shall not protected from fall hazards as provided be performed in the CDZ. in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this sec- (d) Criteria for fall protection equip- tion, respectively. ment. (1) Guardrail systems, safety net (b) Connectors. Each connector shall: systems, personal fall arrest systems, (1) Be protected in accordance with positioning device systems and their components shall conform to the cri- paragraph (a)(1) of this section from teria in § 1926.502 (see appendix G to fall hazards of more than two stories or this subpart). 30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, whichever is less; (2) Fall arrest system components shall be used in fall restraint systems (2) Have completed connector train- and shall conform to the criteria in ing in accordance with § 1926.761; and § 1926.502 (see appendix G). Either body (3) Be provided, at heights over 15 belts or body harnesses shall be used in and up to 30 feet above a lower level, fall restraint systems. with a personal fall arrest system, po- (3) Perimeter safety cables shall sitioning device system or fall re- meet the criteria for guardrail systems straint system and wear the equipment in § 1926.502 (see appendix G). necessary to be able to be tied off; or be (e) Custody of fall protection. Fall pro- provided with other means of protec- tection provided by the steel erector tion from fall hazards in accordance shall remain in the area where steel with paragraph (a)(1) of this section. erection activity has been completed, (c) Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). A to be used by other trades, only if the controlled decking zone may be estab- controlling contractor or its author- lished in that area of the structure ized representative: over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower (1) Has directed the steel erector to level where metal decking is initially leave the fall protection in place; and being installed and forms the leading (2) Has inspected and accepted con- edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the trol and responsibility of the fall pro- following shall apply: tection prior to authorizing persons (1) Each employee working at the other than steel erectors to work in leading edge in a CDZ shall be pro- the area. tected from fall hazards of more than two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever § 1926.761 Training. is less. The following provisions supplement (2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding to only those employees engaged in the hazards addressed in this subpart. leading edge work. (a) Training personnel. Training re- (3) The boundaries of a CDZ shall be quired by this section shall be provided designated and clearly marked. The by a qualified person(s). CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 (b) Fall hazard training. The employer m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from shall train each employee exposed to a any leading edge. The CDZ shall be fall hazard in accordance with the re- marked by the use of control lines or quirements of this section. The em- the equivalent. Examples of acceptable ployer shall institute a training pro- procedures for demarcating CDZ’s can gram and ensure employee participa- be found in appendix D to this subpart. tion in the program. The program shall

399

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00409 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

include training and instruction in the tices required by § 1926.760(c) and following areas: § 1926.754(e). (1) The recognition and identification [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 73 of fall hazards in the work area; FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008; 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, (2) The use and operation of guardrail 2020] systems (including perimeter safety cable systems), personal fall arrest sys- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART tems, positioning device systems, fall 1926—GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING restraint systems, safety net systems, THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC and other protection to be used; ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (3) The correct procedures for erect- § 1926.752(e) ing, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection systems (a) General. This appendix serves as a to be used; guideline to assist employers who elect to (4) The procedures to be followed to develop a site-specific erection plan in accordance with § 1926.752(e) with alternate prevent falls to lower levels and means and methods to provide employee pro- through or into holes and openings in tection in accordance with § 1926.752(e), walking/working surfaces and walls; § 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) and and § 1926.757(e)(4). (5) The fall protection requirements (b) Development of a site-specific erection plan. Pre-construction conference(s) and site of this subpart. inspection(s) are held between the erector (c) Special training programs. In addi- and the controlling contractor, and others tion to the training required in para- such as the project engineer and fabricator graphs (a) and (b) of this section, the before the start of steel erection. The pur- employer shall provide special training pose of such conference(s) is to develop and to employees engaged in the following review the site-specific erection plan that will meet the requirements of this section. activities. (c) Components of a site-specific erection (1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. The plan. In developing a site-specific erection employer shall ensure that each em- plan, a steel erector considers the following ployee who performs multiple lift rig- elements: ging has been provided training in the (1) The sequence of erection activity, de- following areas: veloped in coordination with the controlling contractor, that includes the following: (i) The nature of the hazards associ- (i) Material deliveries: ated with multiple lifts; and (ii) Material staging and storage; and (ii) The proper procedures and equip- (iii) Coordination with other trades and ment to perform multiple lifts required construction activities. by § 1926.753(e). (2) A description of the crane and derrick selection and placement procedures, includ- (2) Connector procedures. The em- ing the following: ployer shall ensure that each connector (i) Site preparation; has been provided training in the fol- (ii) Path for overhead loads; and lowing areas: (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging sup- (i) The nature of the hazards associ- plies and equipment. ated with connecting; and (3) A description of steel erection activities and procedures, including the following: (ii) The establishment, access, proper (i) Stability considerations requiring tem- connecting techniques and work prac- porary bracing and guying; tices required by § 1926.756(c) and (ii) Erection bridging terminus point; § 1926.760(b). (iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications (3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. regarding repair, replacement and modifications; Where CDZs are being used, the em- (iv) Columns and beams (including joists ployer shall assure that each employee and purlins); has been provided training in the fol- (v) Connections; lowing areas: (vi) Decking; and (i) The nature of the hazards associ- (vii) Ornamental and miscellaneous iron. ated with work within a controlled (4) A description of the fall protection procedures that will be used to comply with decking zone; and § 1926.760. (ii) The establishment, access, proper (5) A description of the procedures that installation techniques and work prac- will be used to comply with § 1926.759.

400

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00410 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. A

(6) A description of the special procedures (d) Other plan information. The plan: required for hazardous non-routine tasks. (1) Includes the identification of the site (7) A certification for each employee who and project; and has received training for performing steel (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified per- erection operations as required by § 1926.761. son(s) responsible for its preparation and (8) A list of the qualified and competent modification. persons. (9) A description of the procedures that APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926 will be utilized in the event of rescue or emergency response. [RESERVED]

401

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00411 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS POINTS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH §§ 1926.757(a)(10) AND § 1926.757(c)(5)

402

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00412 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18JA01.021 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C

403

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00413 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18JA01.022 Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART metal deck and other operations connected 1926—ILLUSTRATION OF THE USE OF with leading edge work are taking place, the controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE CON- control line or by any other means that re- TROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): stricts access. NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR (i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not COMPLYING WITH § 1926.760(c)(3) less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet (27.4 m) from the leading edge. (1) When used to control access to areas (ii) Control lines extend along the entire where leading edge and initial securement of length of the unprotected or leading edge

404

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00414 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18JA01.023 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G

and are approximately parallel to the unpro- NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the tected or leading edge. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent (iii) Control lines are connected on each member, shall be increased an amount equal side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or to the height of the stilts. other suitable anchorage. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate (2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, vertical members, or equivalent inter- tapes, or equivalent materials, and sup- mediate structural members shall be in- porting stanchions as follows: stalled between the top edge of the guardrail (i) Each line is rigged and supported in system and the walking/working surface such a way that its lowest point (including when there is no wall or parapet wall at least sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from 21 inches (53 cm) high. the walking/working surface and its highest (i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from at a height midway between the top edge of the walking/working surface. the guardrail system and the walking/work- (ii) Each line has a minimum breaking ing level. strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg). (ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the walking/work- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART ing level and along the entire opening be- 1926—TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY tween top rail supports. GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (iii) Intermediate members (such as balus- § 1926.761 ters), when used between posts, shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. The training requirements of § 1926.761 will (iv) Other structural members (such as ad- be deemed to have been met if employees ditional midrails and architectural panels) have completed a training course on steel shall be installed such that there are no erection, including instruction in the provi- openings in the guardrail system that are sions of this standard, that has been ap- more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide. proved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bu- (3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of reau of Apprenticeship. withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any out- 1926—PERIMETER COLUMNS: NON- ward or downward direction, at any point MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COM- along the top edge. PLYING WITH § 1926.756(e) TO PRO- (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load TECT THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section EDGE OF A WALKING/WORKING SUR- (§ 1926.502) is applied in a downward direc- FACE tion, the top edge of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m) In multi-story structures, when holes in above the walking/working level. Guardrail the column web are used for perimeter safety system components selected and constructed cables, the column splice must be placed suf- in accordance with the appendix B to subpart ficiently high so as not to interfere with any M of this part will be deemed to meet this re- attachments to the column necessary for the quirement. column splice. Column splices are rec- (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate ommended to be placed at every other or vertical members, solid panels, and equiva- fourth levels as design allows. Column lent structural members shall be capable of splices at third levels are detrimental to the withstanding, without failure, a force of at erection process and should be avoided if pos- least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any down- sible. ward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member. APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced 1926—§ 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTEC- as to prevent injury to an employee from TION SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRAC- punctures or lacerations, and to prevent TICES snagging of clothing. (7) The ends of all top rails and midrails (b) ‘‘Guardrail systems.’’ Guardrail sys- shall not overhang the terminal posts, ex- tems and their use shall comply with the fol- cept where such overhang does not con- lowing provisions: stitute a projection hazard. (1) Top edge height of top rails, or equiva- (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall lent guardrail system members, shall be 42 not be used as top rails or midrails. inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least above the walking/working level. When con- one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter ditions warrant, the height of the top edge or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be guardrail system meets all other criteria of flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals this paragraph (§ 1926.502(b)). with high-visibility material.

405

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00415 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(10) When guardrail systems are used at (i) Except as provided in paragraph hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable (c)(4)(ii) of this section (§ 1926.502), safety guardrail section shall be placed across the nets and safety net installations shall be access opening between guardrail sections drop-tested at the jobsite after initial instal- when hoisting operations are not taking lation and before being used as a fall protec- place. tion system, whenever relocated, after major (11) When guardrail systems are used at repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one holes, they shall be erected on all unpro- place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400 tected sides or edges of the hole. pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 + or ¥2 inches (12) When guardrail systems are used (76 + or ¥5 cm) in diameter dropped into the around holes used for the passage of mate- net from the highest walking/working sur- rials, the hole shall have not more than two face at which employees are exposed to fall sides provided with removable guardrail sec- hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 tions to allow the passage of materials. m) above that level. When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed (ii) When the employer can demonstrate over with a cover, or a guardrail system that it is unreasonable to perform the drop- shall be provided along all unprotected sides test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this or edges. section (§ 1926.502), the employer (or a des- (13) When guardrail systems are used ignated competent person) shall certify that around holes which are used as points of ac- the net and net installation is in compliance cess (such as ladderways), they shall be pro- with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and vided with a gate, or be so offset that a per- (c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502) by pre- son cannot walk directly into the hole. paring a certification record prior to the net (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and being used as a fall protection system. The runways shall be erected along each unpro- certification record must include an identi- tected side or edge. fication of the net and net installation for (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being which the certification record is being pre- used for top rails or midrails shall be in- pared; the date that it was determined that spected as frequently as necessary to ensure the identified net and net installation were that it continues to meet the strength rein compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this quirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section section (§ 1926.502) and the signature of the (§ 1926.502). person making the determination and cer- (c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems tification. The most recent certification and their use shall comply with the fol- record for each net and net installation shall lowing provisions: be available at the jobsite for inspection. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety practicable under the walking/working sur- nets shall be inspected at least once a week face on which employees are working, but in for wear, damage, and other deterioration. no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such Defective components shall be removed from level. When nets are used on bridges, the po- service. Safety nets shall also be inspected tential fall area from the walking/working after any occurrence which could affect the surface to the net shall be unobstructed. integrity of the safety net system. (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from (6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and the outermost projection of the work surface tools which have fallen into the safety net as follows: shall be removed as soon as possible from the net and at least before the next work shift. (7) The maximum size of each safety net Vertical distance from working Minimum required horizontal level to horizontal plane of distance of outer edge of net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square from the edge of the working inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches net surface (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, meas- Up to 5 feet ...... 8 feet ured center-to-center of mesh ropes or web- More than 5 feet up to 10 10 feet bing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15 feet. cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to More than 10 feet ...... 13 feet prevent enlargement of the mesh opening. (8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall (3) Safety nets shall be installed with suffi- have a border rope for webbing with a min- cient clearance under them to prevent con- imum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 tact with the surface or structures below kN). when subjected to an impact force equal to (9) Connections between safety net panels the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of shall be as strong as integral net components this section [§ 1926.502]. and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches (4) Safety nets and their installations shall (15 cm) apart. be capable of absorbing an impact force (d) ‘‘Personal fall arrest systems.’’ Per- equal to that produced by the drop test spec- sonal fall arrest systems and their use shall ified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section comply with the provisions set forth below. [§ 1926.502]. Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not

406

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00416 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G

acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest both employees are working atop a false car system. that is equipped with guardrails; the strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 NOTE: The use of a body belt in a posi- pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and tioning device system is acceptable and is regulated under paragraph (e) of this section all other criteria specified in this paragraph (§ 1926.502). for lifelines have been met. (11) Lifelines shall be protected against (1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed being cut or abraded. or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate- (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards rials. which automatically limit free fall distance (2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with facing parts of the system. the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended (3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a position. minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards (22.2 kN). which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof- (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tear- tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 ing and deforming lanyards shall be capable pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 or taking permanent deformation. pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat- the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended ible with the member to which they are con- position. nected to prevent unintentional disengage- (14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan- ment of the snaphook by depression of the yards, lifelines, and strength components of snaphook keeper by the connected member, body belts and body harnesses shall be made or shall be a locking type snaphook designed from synthetic fibers. and used to prevent disengagement of the (15) Anchorages used for attachment of snaphook by the contact of the snaphook personal fall arrest equipment shall be inde- keeper by the connected member. Effective pendent of any anchorage being used to sup- January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks port or suspend platforms and capable of sup- shall be used. porting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type employee attached, or shall be designed, in- and designed for the following connections, stalled, and used as follows: snaphooks shall not be engaged: (i) as part of a complete personal fall ar- (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; rest system which maintains a safety factor (ii) to each other; of at least two; and (iii) to a dee-ring to which another (ii) under the supervision of a qualified snaphook or other connector is attached; person. (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when (v) to any object which is incompatibly stopping a fall, shall: shaped or dimensioned in relation to the (i) limit maximum arresting force on an snaphook such that unintentional disengage- employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used ment could occur by the connected object with a body belt; being able to depress the snaphook keeper (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an and release itself. employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work with a body harness; platforms with horizontal lifelines which (iii) be rigged such that an employee can may become vertical lifelines, the devices neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall contact any lower level; be capable of locking in both directions on (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop the lifeline. and limit maximum deceleration distance an (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and, installed, and used, under the supervision of (v) have sufficient strength to withstand a qualified person, as part of a complete per- twice the potential impact energy of an em- sonal fall arrest system, which maintains a ployee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), safety factor of at least two. or the free fall distance permitted by the (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall system, whichever is less. have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system (10)(i) Except as provided in paragraph meets the criteria and protocols contained in (d)(10)(ii) of this section [§ 1926.502], when appendix C to subpart M, and if the system vertical lifelines are used, each employee is being used by an employee having a com- shall be attached to a separate lifeline. bined person and tool weight of less than 310 (ii) During the construction of elevator pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- shafts, two employees may be attached to ered to be in compliance with the provisions the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided of paragraph (d)(16) of this section [§ 1926.502].

407

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00417 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

If the system is used by an employee having (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed a combined tool and body weight of 310 or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate- pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer rials. must appropriately modify the criteria and (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- protocols of the appendix to provide proper sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges protection for such heavier weights, or the shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- system will not be deemed to be in compli- facing parts of this system. ance with the requirements of paragraph (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a (d)(16) of this section (§ 1926.502). minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (17) The attachment point of the body belt (22.2 kN) shall be located in the center of the wearer’s (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof- back. The attachment point of the body har- tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 ness shall be located in the center of the pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above or taking permanent deformation. the wearer’s head. (7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat- (18) Body belts, harnesses, and components ible with the member to which they are con- shall be used only for employee protection nected to prevent unintentional disengage- (as part of a personal fall arrest system or ment of the snaphook by depression of the positioning device system) and not to hoist snaphook keeper by the connected member, materials. or shall be a locking type snaphook designed (19) Personal fall arrest systems and com- and used to prevent disengagement of the ponents subjected to impact loading shall be snaphook by the contact of the snaphook immediately removed from service and shall keeper by the connected member. As of Jan- not be used again for employee protection uary 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks until inspected and determined by a com- shall be used. petent person to be undamaged and suitable (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type for reuse. and designed for the following connections, (20) The employer shall provide for prompt snaphooks shall not be engaged: rescue of employees in the event of a fall or (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; shall assure that employees are able to res- (ii) to each other; cue themselves. (iii) to a dee-ring to which another (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be snaphook or other connector is attached; inspected prior to each use for wear, damage (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or to depress and other deterioration, and defective com- the snaphook keeper and release itself. ponents shall be removed from service. (v) to any object which is incompatibly (22) Body belts shall be at least one and shaped or dimensioned in relation to the five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) wide. snaphook such that unintentional disengage- (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not ment could occur by the connected object be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall being able to depress the snaphook keeper they be attached to hoists except as specified and release itself. in other subparts of this Part. (9) Positioning device systems shall be in- (24) When a personal fall arrest system is spected prior to each use for wear, damage, used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to and other deterioration, and defective com- allow the movement of the employee only as ponents shall be removed from service. far as the edge of the walking/working sur- (10) Body belts, harnesses, and components face. shall be used only for employee protection (e) Positioning device systems. Positioning (as part of a personal fall arrest system or device systems and their use shall conform positioning device system) and not to hoist to the following provisions: materials. (1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot free fall more than APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART 2 feet (.9 m). 1926—DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUS- (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least TRATION OF A CLIPPED END CONNEC- twice the potential impact load of an em- TION AND A STAGGERED CONNECTION: ployee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), which- NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR ever is greater. COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(c)(1)

408

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00418 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H

Clipped end connections are connection member to remain in place. The notch(es) material on the end of a structural member fits around the nut or bolt head of the oppos- which has a notch at the bottom and/or top ing member to allow the second member to to allow the bolt(s) of the first member be bolted up without removing the bolt(s) placed on the opposite side of the central holding the first member.

Staggered connections are connection ma- Subpart S—Underground Con- terial on a structural member in which all of the bolt holes in the common member web struction, Caissons, are not shared by the two incoming members Cofferdams and Compressed in the final connection. The extra hole in the Air column web allows the erector to maintain at least a one bolt connection at all times AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, while making the double connection. 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72

409

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00419 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER18JA01.024 ER18JA01.025 § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- when the remaining construction ac- ble. tivity will not cause any environmental hazard or structural failure § 1926.800 Underground construction. within the facilities. (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- (d) Safety instruction. All employees tion applies to the construction of un- shall be instructed in the recognition derground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and avoidance of hazards associated and passageways. This section also ap- with underground construction activi- plies to cut-and-cover excavations ties including, where appropriate, the which are both physically connected to following subjects: ongoing underground construction op- (1) Air monitoring; erations within the scope of this sec- (2) Ventilation; tion, and covered in such a manner as (3) Illumination; to create conditions characteristic of (4) Communications; underground construction. (5) Flood control; (2) This section does not apply to the (6) Mechanical equipment; following: (7) Personal protective equipment; (i) Excavation and trenching oper- (8) Explosives; ations covered by subpart P of this (9) Fire prevention and protection; part, such as foundation operations for and above-ground structures that are not (10) Emergency procedures, including physically connected to underground evacuation plans and check-in/check- construction operations, and surface out systems. excavation; nor (e) Notification. (1) Oncoming shifts (ii) Underground electrical trans- shall be informed of any hazardous oc- mission and distribution lines, as ad- currences or conditions that have af- dressed in subpart V of this part. fected or might affect employee safety, (b) Access and egress. (1) The employer including liberation of gas, equipment shall provide and maintain safe means failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins, of access and egress to all work sta- floodings, fires or explosions. tions. (2) The employer shall establish and (2) The employer shall provide access maintain direct communications for and egress in such a manner that em- coordination of activities with other ployees are protected from being employers whose operations at the job- struck by excavators, haulage ma- site affect or may affect the safety of chines, trains and other mobile equip- employees underground. ment. (f) Communications. (1) When natural (3) The employer shall control access unassisted voice communication is in- to all openings to prevent unauthorized effective, a power-assisted means of entry underground. Unused chutes, voice communication shall be used to manways, or other openings shall be provide communication between the tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced work face, the bottom of the shaft, and off, and shall be posted with warning the surface. signs indicating ‘‘Keep Out’’ or similar (2) Two effective means of commu- language. Completed or unused sec- nication, at least one of which shall be tions of the underground facility shall voice communication, shall be provided be barricaded. in all shafts which are being developed (c) Check-in/check-out. The employer or used either for personnel access or shall maintain a check-in/check-out for hoisting. Additional requirements procedure that will ensure that above- for hoist operator communication are ground personnel can determine an ac- contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of curate count of the number of persons this section. underground in the event of an emer- (3) Powered communication systems gency. However, this procedure is not shall operate on an independent power required when the construction of un- supply, and shall be installed so that derground facilities designed for the use of or disruption of any one human occupancy has been sufficiently phone or signal location will not dis- completed so that the permanent envi- rupt the operation of the system from ronmental controls are effective, and any other location.

410

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00420 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

(4) Communication systems shall be provide (or make arrangements in ad- tested upon initial entry of each shift vance with locally available rescue to the underground, and as often as services to provide) at least two 5-per- necessary at later times, to ensure that son rescue teams, one on the jobsite or they are in working order. within one-half hour travel time from (5) Any employee working alone un- the entry point, and the other within 2 derground in a hazardous location, who hours travel time. is both out of the range of natural un- (ii) On jobsites where less than 25 em- assisted voice communication and not ployees work underground at one time, under observation by other persons, the employer shall provide (or make shall be provided with an effective arrangements in advance with locally means of obtaining assistance in an available rescue services to provide) at emergency. least one 5-person rescue team to be ei- (g) Emergency provisions—(1) Hoisting ther on the jobsite or within one-half capability. When a shaft is used as a hour travel time from the entry point. means of egress, the employer shall (iii) Rescue team members shall be make advance arrangements for power- qualified in rescue procedures, the use assisted hoisting capability to be read- and limitations of breathing apparatus, ily available in an emergency, unless and the use of firefighting equipment. the regular hoisting means can con- Qualifications shall be reviewed not tinue to function in the event of an less than annually. electrical power failure at the jobsite. (iv) On jobsites where flammable or Such hoisting means shall be designed noxious gases are encountered or an- so that the load hoist drum is powered ticipated in hazardous quantities, res- in both directions of rotation and so cue team members shall practice don- that the brake is automatically applied ning and using self-contained breathing upon power release or failure. apparatus monthly. (2) Self-rescuers. The employer must (v) The employer shall ensure that provide self-rescuers approved by the rescue teams are familiar with condi- National Institute for Occupational tions at the jobsite. Safety and Health under 42 CFR part (h) Hazardous classifications—(1) Po- 84. The respirators must be imme- tentially gassy operations. Underground diately available to all employees at construction operations shall be classi- work stations in underground areas fied as potentially gassy if either: where employees might be trapped by (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per- smoke or gas. The selection, issuance, cent or more of the lower explosive use, and care of respirators must be in limit for methane or other flammable accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm) (3) Designated person. At least one ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face, designated person shall be on duty floor or walls in any underground work above ground whenever any employee area for more than a 24-hour period; or is working underground. This des- (ii) The history of the geographical ignated person shall be responsible for area or geological formation indicates securing immediate aid and keeping an that 10 percent or more of the lower ex- accurate count of employees under- plosive limit for methane or other ground in case of emergency. The des- flammable gases is likely to be encoun- ignated person must not be so busy tered in such underground operations. with other responsibilities that the (2) Gassy operations. Underground counting function is encumbered. construction operations shall be classi- (4) Emergency lighting. Each employee fied as gassy if: underground shall have an acceptable (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per- portable hand lamp or cap lamp in his cent or more of the lower explosive or her work area for emergency use, limit for methane or other flammable unless natural light or an emergency gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm) lighting system provides adequate illu- ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face, mination for escape. floor or walls in any underground work (5) Rescue teams. (i) On jobsites where area for three consecutive days; or 25 or more employees work under- (ii) There has been an ignition of ground at one time, the employer shall methane or of other flammable gases

411

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00421 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

emanating from the strata that indi- (j) Air quality and monitoring—(1) Gen- cates the presence of such gases; or eral. Air quality limits and control re- (iii) The underground construction quirements for construction are found operation is both connected to an unin § 1926.55, except as modified by this derground work area which is cur- section. rently classified as gassy and is also (i)(A) The employer shall assign a subject to a continuous course of air competent person who shall perform all containing the flammable gas con- air monitoring required by this sec- centration. tion. (3) Declassification to potentially gassy (B) Where this paragraph requires operations. Underground construction monitoring of airborne contaminants gassy operations may be declassified to ‘‘as often as necessary,’’ the competent Potentially Gassy when air monitoring person shall make a reasonable deter- results remain under 10 percent of the mination as to which substances to lower explosive limit for methane or monitor and how frequently to mon- other flammable gases for three con- itor, considering at least the following secutive days. factors: (i) Gassy operations-additional require- (1) Location of jobsite: Proximity to ments. (1) Only acceptable equipment, fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, old land- maintained in suitable condition, shall fills, coal deposits, and swamps; be used in gassy operations. (2) Geology: Geological studies of the (2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment jobsite, particularly involving the soil used in gassy operations shall be either type and its permeability; approved in accordance with the requirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly (3) History: Presence of air contami- Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be dem- nants in nearby jobsites, changes in onstrated by the employer to be fully levels of substances monitored on the equivalent to such MSHA-approved prior shift; and equipment, and shall be operated in ac- (4) Work practices and jobsite condi- cordance with that part. tions: The use of diesel engines, use of (3) Each entrance to a gassy oper- explosives, use of fuel gas, volume and ation shall be prominently posted with flow of ventilation, visible atmospheric signs notifying all entrants of the conditions, decompression of the at- gassy classification. mosphere, welding, cutting and hot (4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all work, and employees’ physical reac- gassy operations and the employer tions to working underground. shall be responsible for collecting all (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all under- personal sources of ignition, such as ground work areas shall be tested as matches and lighters, from all persons often as necessary to assure that the entering a gassy operation. atmosphere at normal atmospheric (5) A fire watch as described in pressure contains at least 19.5 percent § 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when oxygen and no more than 22 percent ox- hot work is performed. ygen. (6) Once an operation has met the cri- (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be teria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting made before tests for air contaminants. classification as gassy, all operations (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all under- in the affected area, except the fol- ground work areas shall be tested lowing, shall be discontinued until the quantitatively for carbon monoxide, ni- operation either is in compliance with trogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and all of the gassy operation requirements other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists, or has been declassified in accordance and fumes as often as necessary to en- with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: sure that the permissible exposure lim- (i) Operations related to the control its prescribed in § 1926.55 are not ex- of the gas concentration; ceeded. (ii) Installation of new equipment, or (B) The atmosphere in all under- conversion of existing equipment, to ground work areas shall be tested comply with this paragraph (i); and quantitatively for methane and other (iii) Installation of above-ground con- flammable gases as often as necessary trols for reversing the air flow. to determine:

412

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00422 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

(1) Whether action is to be taken to inform all entrants of the hazardous under paragraphs (j)(1)(vii), (viii), and condition; and (ix), of this section; and (B) Ensure that the necessary pre- (2) Whether an operation is to be cautions are taken. classified potentially gassy or gassy (vii) Whenever five percent or more under paragraph (h) of this section. of the lower explosive limit for meth- (C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine ane or other flammable gases is de- driven ventilating fans or compressors tected in any underground work area(s) are used, an initial test shall be made or in the air return, steps shall be of the inlet air of the fan or com- taken to increase ventilation air vol- pressor, with the engines operating, to ume or otherwise control the gas con- ensure that the air supply is not concentration, unless the employer is op- taminated by engine exhaust. erating in accordance with the poten- (D) Testing shall be performed as tially gassy or gassy operation require- often as necessary to ensure that the ventilation requirements of paragraph ments. Such additional ventilation (k) of this section are met. controls may be discontinued when gas (iv) When rapid excavation machines concentrations are reduced below five are used, a continuous flammable gas percent of the lower explosive limit, monitor shall be operated at the face but shall be reinstituted whenever the with the sensor(s) placed as high and five percent level is exceeded. close to the front of the machine’s cut- (viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of ter head as practicable. the lower explosive limit for methane (v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indi- or other flammable gases is detected in cates the presence of 5 ppm or more of the vicinity of welding, cutting, or hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be con- other hot work, such work shall be sus- ducted in the affected underground pended until the concentration of such work area(s), at least at the beginning flammable gas is reduced to less than and midpoint of each shift, until the 10 percent of the lower explosive limit. concentration of hydrogen sulfide has (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive the lower explosive limit for methane days. or other flammable gases is detected in (B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is de- any underground work area(s) or in the tected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, air return: a continuous sampling and indicating (A) All employees, except those nec- hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used essary to eliminate the hazard, shall be to monitor the affected work area. immediately withdrawn to a safe loca- (C) Employees shall be informed tion above ground; and when a concentration of 10 ppm hydro- (B) Electrical power, except for ac- gen sulfide is exceeded. ceptable pumping and ventilation (D) The continuous sampling and in- equipment, shall be cut off to the area dicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall endangered by the flammable gas until be designed, installed, and maintained the concentration of such gas is re- to provide a visual and aural alarm when the hydrogen sulfide concentra- duced to less than 20 percent of the tion reaches 20 ppm to signal that addi- lower explosive limit. tional measures, such as respirator use, (2) Additional monitoring for potentially increased ventilation, or evacuation, gassy and gassy operations. Operations might be necessary to maintain hydro- which meet the criteria for potentially gen sulfide exposure below the permis- gassy and gassy operations set forth in sible exposure limit. paragraph (h) of this section shall be (vi) When the competent person de- subject to the additional monitoring termines, on the basis of air moni- requirements of this paragraph. toring results or other information, (i) A test for oxygen content shall be that air contaminants may be present conducted in the affected underground in sufficient quantity to be dangerous work areas and work areas imme- to life, the employer shall: diately adjacent to such areas at least (A) Prominently post a notice at all at the beginning and midpoint of each entrances to the underground jobsite shift.

413

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00423 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) When using rapid excavation ma- other underground work areas shall be chines, continuous automatic flam- at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute mable gas monitoring equipment shall where blasting or rock drilling is con- be used to monitor the air at the head- ducted, or where other conditions like- ing, on the rib, and in the return air ly to produce dust, fumes, mists, va- duct. The continuous monitor shall sig- pors, or gases in harmful or explosive nal the heading, and shut down electric quantities are present. power in the affected underground (4) The direction of mechanical air work area, except for acceptable pump- flow shall be reversible. ing and ventilation equipment, when 20 (5) Following blasting, ventilation percent or more of the lower explosive systems shall exhaust smoke and limit for methane or other flammable fumes to the outside atmosphere before gases is encountered. work is resumed in affected areas. (iii) A manual flammable gas mon- (6) Ventilation doors shall be de- itor shall be used as needed, but at signed and installed so that they re- least at the beginning and midpoint of main closed when in use, regardless of each shift, to ensure that the limits the direction of the air flow. prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are (7) When ventilation has been re- not exceeded. In addition, a manual duced to the extent that hazardous lev- electrical shut down control shall be els of methane or flammable gas may provided near the heading. have accumulated, a competent person (iv) Local gas tests shall be made shall test all affected areas after ven- prior to and continuously during any tilation has been restored and shall de- welding, cutting, or other hot work. termine whether the atmosphere is (v) In underground operations driven within flammable limits before any by drill-and-blast methods, the air in power, other than for acceptable equip- the affected area shall be tested for ment, is restored or work is resumed. flammable gas prior to re-entry after (8) Whenever the ventilation system blasting, and continuously when em- has been shut down with all employees ployees are working underground. out of the underground area, only com- (3) Recordkeeping. A record of all air petent persons authorized to test for quality tests shall be maintained above air contaminants shall be allowed un- ground at the worksite and be made derground until the ventilation has available to the Secretary of Labor been restored and all affected areas upon request. The record shall include have been tested for air contaminants the location, date, time, substance and and declared safe. amount monitored. Records of expo- (9) When drilling rock or concrete, sures to toxic substances shall be re- appropriate dust control measures tained in accordance with § 1910.33 of shall be taken to maintain dust levels this chapter. All other air quality test within limits set in § 1926.55. Such records shall be retained until comple- measures may include, but are not lim- tion of the project. ited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum (k) Ventilation. (1)(i) Fresh air shall collectors, and water mix spray sys- be supplied to all underground work tems. areas in sufficient quantities to pre- (10)(i) Internal combustion engines, vent dangerous or harmful accumula- except diesel-powered engines on motion of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or bile equipment, are prohibited under- gases. ground. (ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment provided in all underground work areas used underground in atmospheres other except when the employer can dem- than gassy operations: onstrate that natural ventilation pro- (A) Shall comply with MSHA provi- vides the necessary air quality through sions in 30 CFR 57.5067; or sufficient air volume and air flow. (B) If purchased on or before July 15, (2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7 2019, may alternatively comply with m3) of fresh air per minute shall be sup- MSHA provisions under 30 CFR part 32 plied for each employee underground. (revised as of July 1, 1996) (formerly (3) The linear velocity of air flow in Schedule 24), or be demonstrated by the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all the employer to be fully equivalent to

414

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00424 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

such MSHA-approved equipment, and (ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting be operated in accordance with that smoking and open flames shall be post- part. ed in areas having fire or explosion (iii) For purposes of this paragraph hazards. (k)(10), when an applicable MSHA pro- (3) The employer may store under- vision uses the term ‘‘mine,’’ use the ground no more than a 24-hour supply phrase ‘‘underground construction of diesel fuel for the underground site.’’ (Each brake horsepower of a die- equipment used at the worksite. sel engine requires at least 100 cubic (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the feet (2.832 m3) of air per minute for surface to an underground location is suitable operation in addition to the permitted only if: air requirements for personnel. Some (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the sur- engines may require a greater amount face in a tank whose maximum capac- of air to ensure that the allowable lev- ity is no more than the amount of fuel els of carbon monoxide, nitric oxide, required to supply for a 24-hour period and nitrogen dioxide are not exceeded.) the equipment serviced by the under- (11) Potentially gassy or gassy oper- ground fueling station; and ations shall have ventilation systems (ii) The surface tank is connected to installed which shall: the underground fueling station by an (i) Be constructed of fire-resistant acceptable pipe or hose system that is materials; and controlled at the surface by a valve, (ii) Have acceptable electrical sys- and at the shaft bottom by a hose noz- tems, including fan motors. zle; and (12) Gassy operations shall be pro- (iii) The pipe is empty at all times vided with controls located above except when transferring diesel fuel ground for reversing the air flow of from the surface tank to a piece of ventilation systems. equipment in use underground; and (13) In potentially gassy or gassy op- (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft erations, wherever mine-type ventila- are suspended during refueling oper- tion systems using an offset main fan ations if the supply piping in the shaft installed on the surface are used, they is not protected from damage. shall be equipped with explosion-doors (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried, or a weak-wall having an area at least stored, or used underground. equivalent to the cross-sectional area (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum of the airway. gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene (l) Illumination. (1) Illumination re- Stabilized gas may be used under- quirements applicable to underground ground only for welding, cutting and construction operations are found in other hot work, and only in accordance Table D–3 of § 1926.56 of this part. with subpart J of this part, and para- (2) Only acceptable portable lighting graphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this sec- equipment shall be used within 50 feet tion. (15.24 m) of any underground heading (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored during explosives handling. underground shall be kept in tightly (m) Fire prevention and control. Fire sealed containers in fire-resistant areas prevention and protection require- at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from under- ments applicable to underground con- ground explosive magazines, and at struction operations are found in sub- least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft sta- part F of this part, except as modified tions and steeply inclined passageways. by the following additional standards. Storage areas shall be positioned or (1) Open flames and fires are prohib- diked so that the contents of ruptured ited in all underground construction or overturned containers will not flow operations except as permitted for from the storage area. welding, cutting and other hot work (7) Flammable or combustible mate- operations in paragraph (n) of this sec- rials shall not be stored above ground tion. within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access (2)(i) Smoking may be allowed only opening to any underground operation. in areas free of fire and explosion haz- Where this is not feasible because of ards. space limitations at the jobsite, such

415

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00425 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

materials may be located within the be guarded by shoring, fencing, head 100-foot limit, provided that: walls, shotcreting or other equivalent (i) They are located as far as prac- protection to ensure safe access of em- ticable from the opening; and ployees and equipment. Adjacent areas (ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of shall be scaled or otherwise secured to not less than one-hour rating is placed prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured between the stored material and the materials from endangering the portal opening, or additional precautions are and access area. taken which will protect the materials (2) Subsidence areas. The employer from ignition sources. shall ensure ground stability in haz- (8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids ardous subsidence areas by shoring, by shall be used in hydraulically-actuated filling in, or by erecting barricades and underground machinery and equipment posting warning signs to prevent entry. unless such equipment is protected by (3) Underground areas. (i)(A) A com- a fire suppression system or by multi- petent person shall inspect the roof, purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of face, and walls of the work area at the sufficient capacity for the type and size start of each shift and as often as nec- of hydraulic equipment involved, but essary to determine ground stability. rated at least 4A:40B:C. (B) Competent persons conducting (9)(i) Electrical installations in un- such inspections shall be protected derground areas where oil, grease, or from loose ground by location, ground diesel fuel are stored shall be used only support or equivalent means. for lighting fixtures. (ii) Ground conditions along (ii) Lighting fixtures in storage haulageways and travelways shall be areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of un- inspected as frequently as necessary to derground areas where oil, grease, or ensure safe passage. diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved (iii) Loose ground that might be haz- for Class I, Division 2 locations, in ac- ardous to employees shall be taken cordance with subpart K of this part. down, scaled or supported. (10) Leaks and spills of flammable or (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be combustible fluids shall be cleaned up used wherever bolts that depend on immediately. torsionally applied force are used for (11) A fire extinguisher of at least ground support. 4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent ex- (B) A competent person shall deter- tinguishing means shall be provided at mine whether rock bolts meet the nec- the head pulley and at the tail pulley essary torque, and shall determine the of underground belt conveyors. testing frequency in light of the bolt (12) Any structure located under- system, ground conditions and the dis- ground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an tance from vibration sources. opening to the underground shall be (v) Suitable protection shall be pro- constructed of material having a fire- vided for employees exposed to the haz- resistance rating of at least one hour. ard of loose ground while installing (n) Welding, cutting, and other hot ground support systems. work. In addition to the requirements (vi) Support sets shall be installed so of subpart J of this part, the following that the bottoms have sufficient an- requirements shall apply to under- chorage to prevent ground pressures ground welding, cutting, and other hot from dislodging the support base of the work. sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing, (1) No more than the amount of fuel tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to between immediately adjacent sets to perform welding, cutting, or other hot ensure added stability. work during the next 24-hour period (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground shall be permitted underground. supports that create a hazardous condi- (2) Noncombustible barriers shall be tion shall be promptly repaired or reinstalled below welding, cutting, or placed. When replacing supports, the other hot work being done in or over a new supports shall be installed before shaft or raise. the damaged supports are removed. (o) Ground support—(1) Portal areas. (viii) A shield or other type of sup- Portal openings and access areas shall port shall be used to maintain a safe

416

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00426 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

travelway for employees working in (q) Drilling. (1) A competent person dead-end areas ahead of any support re- shall inspect all drilling and associated placement operation. equipment prior to each use. Equip- (4) Shafts. (i) Shafts and wells over 5 ment defects affecting safety shall be feet (1.53 m) in depth that employees corrected before the equipment is used. must enter shall be supported by a (2) The drilling area shall be in- steel casing, concrete pipe, timber, spected for hazards before the drilling solid rock or other suitable material. operation is started. (ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft (3) Employees shall not be allowed on shall be supported by casing or bracing a drill mast while the drill bit is in op- except where the shaft penetrates into eration or the drill machine is being solid rock having characteristics that moved. will not change as a result of exposure. (4) When a drill machine is being Where the shaft passes through earth moved from one drilling area to an- into solid rock, or through solid rock other, drill steel, tools, and other into earth, and where there is potential equipment shall be secured and the for shear, the casing or bracing shall mast shall be placed in a safe position. extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock. When the shaft terminates (5) Receptacles or racks shall be pro- in solid rock, the casing or bracing vided for storing drill steel located on shall extend to the end of the shaft or jumbos. 5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, (6) Employees working below jumbo whichever is less. decks shall be warned whenever drill- (B) The casing or bracing shall ex- ing is about to begin. tend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 (7) Drills on columns shall be an- inches (8 cm) above ground level, ex- chored firmly before starting drilling, cept that the minimum casing height and shall be retightened as necessary may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m), thereafter. provided that a standard railing is in- (8) (i) The employer shall provide me- stalled; that the ground adjacent to the chanical means on the top deck of a top of the shaft is sloped away from the jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy ma- shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids; terial. and that effective barriers are used to (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10 prevent mobile equipment operating feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer near the shaft from jumping over the 12 shall install stairs wide enough for two inch (0.3 m) barrier. persons. (iii) After blasting operations in (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet shafts, a competent person shall deter- (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped mine if the walls, ladders, timbers, with guardrails on all open sides, ex- blocking, or wedges have loosened. If cluding access openings of platforms, so, necessary repairs shall be made be- unless an adjacent surface provides fore employees other than those as- equivalent fall protection. signed to make the repairs are allowed in or below the affected areas. (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the (p) Blasting. This paragraph applies in operator shall be allowed to ride on addition to the requirements for blast- jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the re- ing and explosives operations, includ- quirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of ing handling of misfires, which are this section. found in subpart U of this part. (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to pre- (1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear vent movement while employees are of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and working on them. other conductive material, excluding (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces earth, to prevent explosives initiation of jumbos shall be maintained to pre- or employee exposure to electric cur- vent the hazards of slipping, tripping rent. and falling. (2) Following blasting, an employee (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads shall not enter a work area until the shall be designed to be slip-resistent air quality meets the requirements of and secured to prevent accidental dis- paragraph (j) of this section. placement.

417

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00427 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(9) Scaling bars shall be available at (ii) No employee shall ride haulage scaling operations and shall be main- equipment unless it is equipped with tained in good condition at all times. seating for each passenger and protects Blunted or severely worn bars shall not passengers from being struck, crushed, be used. or caught between other equipment or (10)(i) Blasting holes shall not be surfaces. Members of train crews may drilled through blasted rock (muck) or ride on a locomotive if it is equipped water. with handholds and nonslip steps or (ii) Employees in a shaft shall be pro- footboards. Requirements applicable to tected either by location or by suitable Underground Construction for motor barrier(s) if powered mechanical load- vehicle transportation of employees ing equipment is used to remove muck are found in § 1926.601 of this part. containing unfired explosives. (7) Powered mobile haulage equip- (11) A caution sign reading ‘‘Buried ment, including trains, shall not be left Line,’’ or similar wording shall be post- unattended unless the master switch or ed where air lines are buried or other- motor is turned off; operating controls wise hidden by water or debris. are in neutral or park position; and the (r) Haulage. (1)(i) A competent person brakes are set, or equivalent pre- shall inspect haulage equipment before each shift. cautions are taken to prevent rolling. (ii) Equipment defects affecting safe- (8) Whenever rails serve as a return ty and health shall be corrected before for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be the equipment is used. bonded at every joint and crossbonded (2) Powered mobile haulage equip- every 200 feet (60.96 m). ment shall have suitable means of stop- (9) When dumping cars by hand, the ping. car dumps shall have tiedown chains, (3)(i) Power mobile haulage equip- bumper blocks, or other locking or ment, including trains, shall have audi- holding devices to prevent the cars ble warning devices to warn employees from overturning. to stay clear. The operator shall sound (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump the warning device before moving the cars shall be equipped with positive equipment and whenever necessary locking devices to prevent unintended during travel. dumping. (ii) The operator shall assure that (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be lights which are visible to employees loaded and secured to prevent sliding at both ends of any mobile equipment, or dislodgement. including a train, are turned on when- (12)(i) Mobile equipment, including ever the equipment is operating. rail-mounted equipment, shall be (4) In those cabs where glazing is stopped for manual connecting or serv- used, the glass shall be safety glass, or ice work. its equivalent, and shall be maintained (ii) Employees shall not reach be- and cleaned so that vision is not ob- tween moving cars during coupling op- structed. erations. (5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes (iii) Couplings shall not be aligned, shall be installed on inclined conveyor drive units to prevent conveyors from shifted or cleaned on moving cars or lo- inadvertently running in reverse. comotives. (6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be per- (13)(i) Safety chains or other connec- mitted to ride a power-driven chain, tions shall be used in addition to cou- belt, or bucket conveyor unless the plers to connect man cars or powder conveyor is specifically designed for cars whenever the locomotive is uphill the transportation of persons. of the cars. (B) Endless belt-type manlifts are (ii) When the grade exceeds one per- prohibited in underground construc- cent and there is a potential for run- tion. away cars, safety chains or other con- (C) General requirements also appli- nections shall be used in addition to cable to underground construction for couplers to connect haulage cars or, as use of conveyors in construction are an alternative, the locomotive must be found in § 1926.555 of this part. downhill of the train.

418

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00428 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

(iii) Such safety chains or other con- with the requirements of subpart CC of nections shall be capable of maintain- this part, except that the limitation in ing connection between cars in the § 1926.1431(a) does not apply to the rou- event of either coupler disconnect, fail- tine access of employees to an under- ure or breakage. ground worksite via a shaft; ensure (14) Parked rail equipment shall be that material hoists comply with chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to § 1926.552(a) and (b) of this part; and en- prevent inadvertent movement. sure that personnel hoists comply with (15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety the personnel-hoists requirements of hooks, or equivalent means shall be § 1926.552(a) and (c) of this part and the provided to prevent overtravel and elevator requirements of § 1926.552(a) overturning of haulage equipment at and (d) of this part. dumping locations. (1) General requirements for cranes and (16) Bumper blocks or equivalent hoists. (i) Materials, tools, and supplies stopping devices shall be provided at being raised or lowered, whether within all track dead ends. a cage or otherwise, shall be secured or (17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch stacked in a manner to prevent the pails or similar small items may be load from shifting, snagging or falling transported with employees in man- into the shaft. cars, or on top of a locomotive. (ii) A warning light suitably located (ii) When small hand tools or other to warn employees at the shaft bottom small items are carried on top of a lo- and subsurface shaft entrances shall comotive, the top shall be designed or flash whenever a load is above the modified to retain them while trav- shaft bottom or subsurface entrances, eling. or the load is being moved in the shaft. (18)(i) Where switching facilities are This paragraph does not apply to fully available, occupied personnel-cars shall enclosed hoistways. be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully must be pushed and visibility of the enclosed and employees are at the track ahead is hampered, then a quali- shaft bottom, conveyances or equip- fied person shall be stationed in the ment shall be stopped at least 15 feet lead car to give signals to the loco- (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft motive operator. and held there until the signalman at (ii) Crew trips shall consist of per- the bottom of the shaft directs the op- sonnel-loads only. erator to continue lowering the load, (s) Electrical safety. This paragraph except that the load may be lowered applies in addition to the general re- without stopping if the load or convey- quirements for electrical safety which ance is within full view of a bottom are found in subpart K of this part. signalman who is in constant voice (1) Electric power lines shall be insu- communication with the operator. lated or located away from water lines, (iv)(A) Before maintenance, repairs, telephone lines, air lines, or other con- or other work is commenced in the ductive materials so that a damaged shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket, circuit will not energize the other sys- the operator and other employees in tems. the area shall be informed and given (2) Lighting circuits shall be located suitable instructions. so that movement of personnel or (B) A sign warning that work is being equipment will not damage the circuits done in the shaft shall be installed at or disrupt service. the shaft collar, at the operator’s sta- (3) Oil-filled transformers shall not tion, and at each underground landing. be used underground unless they are lo- (v) Any connection between the cated in a fire-resistant enclosure suit- hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall ably vented to the outside and sur- be compatible with the type of wire rounded by a dike to retain the con- rope used for hoisting. tents of the transformers in the event (vi) Spin-type connections, where of rupture. used, shall be maintained in a clean (t) Hoisting unique to underground con- condition and protected from foreign struction. Except as modified by this matter that could affect their oper- paragraph (t), employers must: Comply ation.

419

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00429 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.800 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(vii) Cage, skip, and load connections (vii) Line speed shall not exceed the to the hoist rope shall be made so that design limitations of the systems. the force of the hoist pull, vibration, (viii) Hoists shall be equipped with misalignment, release of lift force, or landing level indicators at the opera- impact will not disengage the connector’s station. Marking the hoist rope tion. Moused or latched openthroat does not satisfy this requirement. hooks do not meet this requirement. (ix) Whenever glazing is used in the (viii) When using wire rope wedge hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or sockets, means shall be provided to its equivalent, and be free of distor- prevent wedge escapement and to en- tions and obstructions. sure that the wedge is properly seated. (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated (2) Additional requirements for cranes. at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry Cranes shall be equipped with a limit chemical) shall be mounted in each switch to prevent overtravel at the hoist house. boom tip. Limit switches are to be used (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged only to limit travel of loads when oper- so that the operator can perform all ational controls malfunction and shall operating cycle functions and reach the not be used as a substitute for other emergency power cutoff without hav- operational controls. ing to reach beyond the operator’s normal operating position. (3) Additional requirements for hoists. (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with (i) Hoists shall be designed so that the limit switches to prevent overtravel at load hoist drum is powered in both di- the top and bottom of the hoistway. rections of rotation, and so that brakes (xiii) Limit switches are to be used are automatically applied upon power only to limit travel of loads when oper- release or failure. ational controls malfunction and shall (ii) Control levers shall be of the not be used as a substitute for other ‘‘deadman type’’ which return auto- operational controls. matically to their center (neutral) po- (xiv) Hoist operators shall be pro- sition upon release. vided with a closed-circuit voice com- (iii) When a hoist is used for both munication system to each landing sta- personnel hoisting and material hoist- tion, with speaker microphones so lo- ing, load and speed ratings for per- cated that the operator can commu- sonnel and for materials shall be as- nicate with individual landing stations signed to the equipment. during hoist use. (iv) Material hoisting may be per- (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86 formed at speeds higher than the rated m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist buckets that may swing, bump, or snag and components have been designed for against shaft sides or other structural such higher speeds and if shaft condi- protrusions shall be guided by fenders, tions permit. rails, ropes, or a combination of those (v) Employees shall not ride on top of means. any cage, skip or bucket except when (xvi) When sinking shafts more than necessary to perform inspection or 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages, maintenance of the hoisting system, in skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail which case they shall be protected by a guided to within a rail length from the body belt/harness system to prevent sinking operation. falling. (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all (vi) Personnel and materials (other completed shafts, or in all shafts being than small tools and supplies secured used as completed shafts, shall be rope in a manner that will not create a haz- or rail-guided for the full length of ard to employees) shall not be hoisted their travel. together in the same conveyance. How- (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of ever, if the operator is protected from material hoists shall be capable of sup- the shifting of materials, then the op- porting, without failure, at least five erator may ride with materials in times the maximum intended load or cages or skips which are designed to be the factor recommended by the rope controlled by an operator within the manufacturer, whichever is greater. cage or skip. Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part

420

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00430 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.800

for design factors for wire rope used in (iii) All sides of personnel cages shall personnel hoists. The design factor be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm) shall be calculated by dividing the wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge breaking strength of wire rope, as re- or equivalent) to a height of not less ported in the manufacturer’s rating ta- than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the bles, by the total static load, including cage or skip is being used as a work the weight of the wire rope in the shaft platform, its sides may be reduced in when fully extended. height to 42 inches (1.07 m) when the (xix) A competent person shall vis- conveyance is not in motion. ually check all hoisting machinery, (iv) All personnel cages shall be pro- equipment, anchorages, and hoisting vided with a positive locking door that rope at the beginning of each shift and does not open outward. during hoist use, as necessary. (v) All personnel cages shall be pro- (xx) Each safety device shall be vided with a protective canopy. The checked by a competent person at least canopy shall be made of steel plate, at weekly during hoist use to ensure suit- least 3/16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness, able operation and safe condition. or material of equivalent strength and (xxi) In order to ensure suitable oper- impact resistance. The canopy shall be ation and safe condition of all func- sloped to the outside, and so designed tions and safety devices, each hoist as- that a section may be readily pushed sembly shall be inspected and load- upward to afford emergency egress. tested to 100 percent of its rated capac- The canopy shall cover the top in such ity: at the time of installation; after a manner as to protect those inside any repairs or alterations affecting its from objects falling in the shaft. structural integrity; after the oper- (vi) Personnel platforms operating on ation of any safety device; and annu- guide rails or guide ropes shall be ally when in use. The employer shall equipped with broken-rope safety de- prepare a certification record which in- vices, safety catches or arrestment de- cludes the date each inspection and vices that will stop and hold 150 per- load-test was performed; the signature of the person who performed the in- cent of the weight of the personnel spection and test; and a serial number platform and its maximum rated load. or other identifier for the hoist that (vii) During sinking operations in was inspected and tested. The most re- shafts where guides and safeties are cent certification record shall be main- not yet used, the travel speed of the tained on file until completion of the personnel platform shall not exceed 200 project. feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor (xxii) Before hoisting personnel or controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per material, the operator shall perform a minute shall be installed in the control test run of any cage or skip whenever system and shall be used during per- it has been out of service for one com- sonnel hoisting. plete shift, and whenever the assembly (viii) The personnel platform may or components have been repaired or travel over the controlled length of the adjusted. hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet (xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be cor- (182.88 m) per minute during sinking rected before using the equipment. operations in shafts where guides and (4) Additional requirements for per- safeties are used. sonnel hoists. (i) Hoist drum systems (ix) The personnel platform may shall be equipped with at least two travel at rated speeds greater than 600 means of stopping the load, each of feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed which shall be capable of stopping and shafts. holding 150 percent of the hoist’s rated (u) Definitions. ‘‘Accept’’—Any de- line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety vice, equipment, or appliance that is catch, or arrestment device is not a either approved by MSHA and main- permissible means of stopping under tained in permissible condition, or is this paragraph (t). listed or labeled for the class and loca- (ii) The operator shall remain within tion under subpart K of this part. sight and sound of the signals at the ‘‘Rapid Excavation Machine’’—Tun- operator’s station. nel boring machines, shields,

421

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00431 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.801 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

roadheaders, or any other similar exca- (b) Warning signals for evacuation of vation machine. employees in case of emergency shall be developed and posted. [54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June (c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or 30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, ramps with at least two means of rapid 1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010; 77 FR 49728, exit shall be provided with guardrails Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23841, Apr. 24, 2013; 84 FR as specified in subpart M of this part. 21577, May 14, 2019] (d) Cofferdams located close to navi- gable shipping channels shall be pro- § 1926.801 Caissons. tected from vessels in transit, where possible. (a) Wherever, in caisson work in which compressed air is used, and the § 1926.803 Compressed air. working chamber is less than 11 feet in length, and when such caissons are at (a) General provisions. (1) There shall be present, at all times, at least one any time suspended or hung while work competent person designated by and is in progress so that the bottom of the representing the employer, who shall excavation is more than 9 feet below be familiar with this subpart in all re- the deck of the working chamber, a spects, and responsible for full compli- shield shall be erected therein for the ance with these and other applicable protection of the employees. subparts. (b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hy- (2) Every employee shall be in- drostatic or air-pressure test, at which structed in the rules and regulations pressure they shall be tight. The shaft which concern his safety or the safety shall be stamped on the outside shell of others. about 12 inches from each flange to (b) Medical attendance, examination, show the pressure to which they have and regulations. (1) There shall be re- been subjected. tained one or more licensed physicians (c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall familiar with and experienced in the be provided, where space permits, with physical requirements and the medical a safe, proper, and suitable staircase aspects of compressed air work and the for its entire length, including landing treatment of decompression illness. He platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. shall be available at all times while Where this is impracticable, suitable work is in progress in order to provide ladders shall be installed with landing medical supervision of employees em- platforms located about 20 feet apart to ployed in compressed air work. He break the climb. shall himself be physically qualified (d) All caissons having a diameter or and be willing to enter a pressurized side greater than 10 feet shall be pro- environment. vided with a man lock and shaft for the (2) No employee shall be permitted to exclusive use of employees. enter a compressed air environment (e) In addition to the gauge in the until he has been examined by the phy- locks, an accurate gauge shall be main- sician and reported by him to be phys- tained on the outer and inner side of ically qualified to engage in such work. each bulkhead. These gauges shall be (3) In the event an employee is absent accessible at all times and kept in ac- from work for 10 days, or is absent due to sickness or injury, he shall not re- curate working order. sume work until he is reexamined by (f) In caisson operations where em- the physician, and his physical condi- ployees are exposed to compressed air tion reported, as provided in this para- working environments, the require- graph, to be such as to permit him to ments contained in § 1926.803 shall be work in compressed air. complied with. (4) After an employee has been employed continuously in compressed air § 1926.802 Cofferdams. for a period designated by the physi- (a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by cian, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall high waters is possible, means shall be be reexamined by the physician to de- provided for controlled flooding of the termine if he is still physically quali- work area. fied to engage in compressed air work.

422

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00432 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.803

(5) Such physician shall at all times (viii) Be equipped with internal con- keep a complete and full record of ex- trols which may be overridden by examinations made by him. The physi- ternal controls; cian shall also keep an accurate record (ix) Be provided with air pressure of any decompression illness or other gauges to show the air pressure within illness or injury incapacitating any each compartment to observers inside employee for work, and of all loss of and outside the medical lock. life that occurs in the operation of a (x) Be equipped with a manual type tunnel, caisson, or other compartment sprinkler system that can be activated in which compressed air is used. inside the lock or by the outside lock (6) Records shall be available for the tender. inspection of the Secretary or his rep- (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines resentatives, and a copy thereof shall and fittings leading into external be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours tanks. The lines shall be fitted with following the occurrence of the acci- check valves to prevent reverse flow. dent, death, injury, or decompression The oxygen system inside the chamber illness. It shall state as fully as pos- shall be of a closed circuit design and sible the cause of said death or decom- be so designed as to automatically shut pression illness, and the place where off the oxygen supply whenever the fire the injured or sick employee was system is activated. taken, and such other relative informa- (xii) Be in constant charge of an at- tion as may be required by the Sec- tendant under the direct control of the retary. retained physician. The attendant shall (7) A fully equipped first aid station be trained in the use of the lock and shall be provided at each tunnel project suitably instructed regarding steps to regardless of the number of persons be taken in the treatment of employee employed. An ambulance or transpor- exhibiting symptoms compatible with tation suitable for a litter case shall be a diagnosis of decompression illness; at each project. (xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate (8) Where tunnels are being excavated emergency medical facility; from portals more than 5 road miles (xiv) The medical facility shall be apart, a first aid station and transpor- equipped with demand-type oxygen in- tation facilities shall be provided at halation equipment approved by the each portal. U.S. Bureau of Mines; (9) A medical lock shall be estab- (xv) Be capable of being maintained lished and maintained in immediate at a temperature, in use, not to exceed working order whenever air pressure in 90 °F. nor be less than 70 °F.; and the working chamber is increased above the normal atmosphere. (xvi) Be provided with sources of air, free of oil and carbon monoxide, for (10) The medical lock shall: normal and emergency use, which are (i) Have at least 6 feet of clear head- capable of raising the air pressure in room at the center, and be subdivided the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 min- into not less than two compartments; utes. (ii) Be readily accessible to employ- (11) Identification badges shall be ees working under compressed air; furnished to all employees, indicating (iii) Be kept ready for immediate use that the wearer is a compressed air for at least 5 hours subsequent to the worker. A permanent record shall be emergence of any employee from the kept of all identification badges issued. working chamber; The badge shall give the employee’s (iv) Be properly heated, lighted and name, address of the medical lock, the ventilated; telephone number of the licensed phy- (v) Be maintained in a sanitary con- sician for the compressed air project, dition; and contain instructions that in case of (vi) Have a nonshatterable port emergency of unknown or doubtful through which the occupant(s) may be cause or illness, the wearer shall be kept under constant observation; rushed to the medical lock. The badge (vii) Be designed for a working pres- shall be worn at all times—off the job, sure of 75 p.s.i.g. as well as on the job.

423

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00433 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.803 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(c) Telephone and signal communica- lieved. If, after 5 minutes the discom- tion. (1) Effective and reliable means of fort does not disappear, the lock at- communication, such as bells, whistles, tendant shall gradually reduce the or telephones, shall be maintained, at pressure until the employee signals all times between all the following lo- that the discomfort has ceased. If he cations: does not indicate that the discomfort (i) The working chamber face; has disappeared, the lock attendant (ii) The working chamber side of the shall reduce the pressure to atmos- man lock near the door; pheric and the employee shall be re- (iii) The interior of the man lock; leased from the lock. (iv) Lock attendant’s station; (5) No employee shall be subjected to (v) The compressor plant; pressure exceeding 50 pounds per (vi) The first-aid station; square inch except in emergency. (vii) The emergency lock (if one is re- (f) Decompression. (1) Decompression quired); and to normal condition shall be in accord- (viii) The special decompression ance with the Decompression Tables in chamber (if one is required). appendix A of this subpart. (d) Signs and records. (1) The time of (2) In the event it is necessary for an decompression shall be posted in each employee to be in compressed air more man lock as follows: than once in a 24-hour period, the ap- TIME OF DECOMPRESSION FOR THIS LOCK pointed physician shall be responsible ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. for the establishment of methods and ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. procedures of decompression applicable (Signed by) llllll (Superintendent) to repetitive exposures. This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at (3) If decanting is necessary, the ap- all times. pointed physician shall establish proce- (2) Any code of signals used shall be dures before any employee is permitted conspicuously posted near workplace to be decompressed by decanting meth- entrances and such other locations as ods. The period of time that the em- may be necessary to bring them to the ployees spend at atmospheric pressure attention of all employees concerned. between the decompression following (3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of the shift and recompression shall not employees employed under air pressure exceed 5 minutes. shall be kept by an employee who shall (g) Man locks and special decompres- remain outside the lock near the en- sion chambers—(1) Man locks. (i) Except trance. This record shall show the pe- in emergency, no employees employed riod each employee spends in the air in compressed air shall be permitted to chamber and the time taken from de- pass from the working chamber to at- compression. A copy shall be submitted mospheric pressure until after decom- to the appointed physician after each pression, in accordance with the proce- shift. dures in this subpart. (e) Compression. (1) Every employee (ii) The lock attendant in charge of a going under air pressure for the first man lock shall be under the direct su- time shall be instructed on how to pervision of the appointed physician. avoid excessive discomfort. He shall be stationed at the lock con- (2) During the compression of em- trols on the free air side during the pe- ployees, the pressure shall not be in- riod of compression and decompression creased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within and shall remain at the lock control the first minute. The pressure shall be station whenever there are men in the held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. working chamber or in the man lock. sufficiently long to determine if any (iii) Except where air pressure in the employees are experiencing discomfort. working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g., (3) After the first minute the pres- each man lock shall be equipped with sure shall be raised uniformly and at a automatic controls which, through rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. taped programs, cams, or similar appa- (4) If any employee complains of dis- ratus, shall automatically regulate de- comfort, the pressure shall be held to compressions. It shall also be equipped determine if the symptoms are re- with manual controls to permit the

424

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00434 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.803

lock attendant to override the auto- (xi) In addition to the pressure gauge matic mechanism in the event of an in the locks, an accurate pressure emergency, as provided in paragraph gauge shall be maintained on the outer (g)(1)(viii) of this section. and inner side of each bulkhead. These (iv) A manual control, which can be gauges shall be accessible at all times used in the event of an emergency, and shall be kept in accurate working shall be placed inside the man lock. order. (v) A clock, thermometer, and con- (xii) Man locks shall have an observa- tinuous recording pressure gauge with tion port at least 4 inches in diameter a 4-hour graph shall be installed out- located in such a position that all oc- side of each man lock and shall be cupants of the man lock may be ob- changed prior to each shift’s decom- served from the working chamber and pression. The chart shall be of suffi- from the free air side of the lock. cient size to register a legible record of (xiii) Adequate ventilation in the variations in pressure within the man lock shall be provided. lock and shall be visible to the lock at- (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained tendant. A copy of each graph shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 °F. submitted to the appointed physician (xv) When locks are not in use and after each shift. In addition, a pressure employees are in the working chamber, gauge, clock, and thermometer shall lock doors shall be kept open to the also be installed in each man lock. Ad- working chamber, where practicable. ditional fittings shall be provided so (xvi) Provision shall be made to that test gauges may be attached allow for rescue parties to enter the whenever necessary. tunnel if the working force is disabled. (vi) Except where air pressure is (xvii) A special decompression cham- below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger ber of sufficient size to accommodate of rapid flooding, all caissons having a the entire force of employees being de- working area greater than 150 square compressed at the end of a shift shall feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 be provided whenever the regularly es- feet or more in diameter, or equivalent tablished working period requires a area, shall have at least two locks in total time of decompression exceeding perfect working condition, one of 75 minutes. which shall be used exclusively as a (2) Special decompression chamber. (i) man lock, the other, as a materials The headroom in the special decom- lock. pression chamber shall be not less than (vii) Where only a combination man- a minimum 7 feet and the cubical con- and-materials lock is required, this tent shall provide at least 50 cubic feet single lock shall be of sufficient capac- of airspace for each employee. For each ity to hold the employees constituting occupant, there shall be provided 4 two successive shifts. square feet of free walking area and 3 (viii) Emergency locks shall be large square feet of seating space, exclusive enough to hold an entire heading shift of area required for lavatory and toilet and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. facilities. The rated capacity shall be There shall be a chamber available for based on the stated minimum space per oxygen decompression therapy to 28 employee and shall be posted at the p.s.i.g. chamber entrance. The posted capacity (ix) The man lock shall be large shall not be exceeded, except in case of enough so that those using it are not emergency. compelled to be in a cramped position, (ii) Each special decompression and shall not have less than 5 feet clear chamber shall be equipped with the fol- head room at the center and a min- lowing: imum of 30 cubic feet of air space per (a) A clock or clocks suitably placed occupant. so that the attendant and the chamber (x) Locks on caissons shall be so lo- occupants can readily ascertain the cated that the bottom door shall be not time; less than 3 feet above the water level (b) Pressure gauges which will indi- surrounding the caisson on the outside. cate to the attendants and to the (The water level, where it is affected by chamber occupants the pressure in the tides, is construed to mean high tide.) chamber;

425

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00435 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.803 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(c) Valves to enable the attendant to the special chamber to atmospheric control the supply and discharge of pressure upon the completion of the decompressed air into and from the compression procedure. chamber; (h) Compressor plant and air supply. (1) (d) Valves and pipes, in connection At all times there shall be a thor- with the air supply and exhaust, ar- oughly experienced, competent, and re- ranged so that the chamber pressure liable person on duty at the air control can be controlled from within and valves as a gauge tender who shall reg- without; ulate the pressure in the working (e) Effective means of oral inter- areas. During tunneling operations, communication between the attendant, one gauge tender may regulate the occupants of the chamber, and the air pressure in not more than two head- compressor plant; and ings: Provided, That the gauge and con- (f) An observation port at the en- trols are all in one location. In caisson trance to permit observation of the work, there shall be a gauge tender for chamber occupants. each caisson. (iii) Seating facilities in special de- (2) The low air compressor plant shall compression chambers shall be so ar- be of sufficient capacity to not only ranged as to permit a normal sitting permit the work to be done safely, but posture without cramping. Seating shall also provide a margin to meet space, not less than 18 inches by 24 emergencies and repairs. inches wide, shall be provided per occu- (3) Low air compressor units shall pant. have at least two independent and sep- (iv) Adequate toilet and washing fa- arate sources of power supply and each cilities, in a screened or enclosed re- shall be capable of operating the entire cess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls low air plant and its accessory sys- shall have a built-in protector on the tems. rim so that an air space is created when the seat lid is closed. (4) The capacity, arrangement, and (v) Fresh and pure drinking water number of compressors shall be suffi- shall be available. This may be accom- cient to maintain the necessary pres- plished by either piping water into the sure without overloading the equip- special decompression chamber and ment and to assure maintenance of providing drinking fountains, or by such pressure in the working chamber providing individual canteens, or by during periods of breakdown, repair, or some other sanitary means. Commu- emergency. nity drinking vessels are prohibited. (5) Switching from one independent (vi) No refuse or discarded material source of power supply to the other of any kind shall be permitted to accu- shall be done periodically to ensure the mulate, and the chamber shall be kept workability of the apparatus in an clean. emergency. (vii) Unless the special decompres- (6) Duplicate low-pressure air sion chamber is serving as the man feedlines and regulating valves shall be lock to atmospheric pressure, the spe- provided between the source of air sup- cial decompression chamber shall be ply and a point beyond the locks with situated, where practicable, adjacent one of the lines extending to within 100 to the man lock on the atmospheric feet of the working face. pressure side of the bulkhead. A pas- (7) All high- and low-pressure air sup- sageway shall be provided, connecting ply lines shall be equipped with check the special chamber with the man lock, valves. to permit employees in the process of (8) Low-pressure air shall be regu- decompression to move from the man lated automatically. In addition, lock to the special chamber without a manually operated valves shall be pro- reduction in the ambient pressure from vided for emergency conditions. that designated for the next stage of (9) The air intakes for all air com- decompression. The passageway shall pressors shall be located at a place be so arranged as to not interfere with where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other the normal operation of the man lock, air contaminants will be at a min- nor with the release of the occupants of imum.

426

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00436 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.803

(10) Gauges indicating the pressure in foot-candles, and in all workplaces the the working chamber shall be installed lighting shall at all times be such as to in the compressor building, the lock at- enable employees to see clearly. tendant’s station, and at the employ- (3) All electrical equipment and wir- er’s field office. ing for light and power circuits shall (i) Ventilation and air quality. (1) Ex- comply with the requirements of sub- haust valves and exhaust pipes shall be part K of this part for use in damp, provided and operated so that the hazardous, high temperature, and com- working chamber shall be well venti- pressed air environments. lated, and there shall be no pockets of (4) External parts of lighting fixtures dead air. Outlets may be required at in- and all other electrical equipment, termediate points along the main low- when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be pressure air supply line to the heading constructed of noncombustible, non- to eliminate such pockets of dead air. absorptive, insulating materials, ex- Ventilating air shall be not less than 30 cept that metal may be used if it is ef- cubic feet per minute. fectively grounded. (2) The air in the workplace shall be (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped analyzed by the employer not less than with noncombustible, nonabsorptive, once each shift, and records of such insulating sockets, approved handles, tests shall be kept on file at the place basket guards, and approved cords. where the work is in progress. The test (6) The use of worn or defective port- results shall be within the threshold able and pendant conductors is prohib- limit values specified in subpart D of ited. this part, for hazardous gases, and within 10 percent of the lower explosive (k) Sanitation. (1) Sanitary, heated, limit of flammable gases. If these lim- lighted, and ventilated dressing rooms its are not met, immediate action to and drying rooms shall be provided for correct the situation shall be taken by all employees engaged in compressed the employer. air work. Such rooms shall contain (3) The temperature of all working suitable benches and lockers. Bathing chambers which are subjected to air accommodations (showers at the ratio pressure shall, by means of after-cool- of one to 10 employees per shift), ers or other suitable devices, be main- equipped with running hot and cold tained at a temperature not to exceed water, and suitable and adequate toilet 85 °F. accommodations, shall be provided. (4) Forced ventilation shall be pro- One toilet for each 15 employees, or vided during decompression. During fractional part thereof, shall be pro- the entire decompression period, forced vided. ventilation through chemical or me- (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a chanical air purifying devices that will cover, there should be an air space so ensure a source of fresh air shall be that the bowl or bucket does not im- provided. plode when pressure is increased. (5) Whenever heat-producing ma- (3) All parts of caissons and other chines (moles, shields) are used in com- working compartments shall be kept in pressed air tunnel operations, a posi- a sanitary condition. tive means of removing the heat build- (l) Fire prevention and protection. (1) up at the heading shall be provided. Firefighting equipment shall be avail- (j) Electricity. (1) All lighting in com- able at all times and shall be main- pressed-air chambers shall be by elec- tained in working condition. tricity exclusively, and two inde- (2) While welding or flame-cutting is pendent electric-lighting systems with being done in compressed air, a independent sources of supply shall be firewatch with a fire hose or approved used. The emergency source shall be extinguisher shall stand by until such arranged to become automatically op- operation is completed. erative in the event of failure of the (3) Shafts and caissons containing regularly used source. flammable material of any kind, either (2) The minimum intensity of light above or below ground, shall be pro- on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or vided with a waterline and a fire hose working level shall be not less than 10 connected thereto, so arranged that all

427

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00437 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.803 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

points of the shaft or caisson are with- combustible material shall not be used in reach of the hose stream. in the working chamber in quantities (4) Fire hose shall be at least 11⁄2 which could cause a fire hazard. The inches in nominal diameter; the water compressor building shall be con- pressure shall at all times be adequate structed of non-combustible material. for efficient operation of the type of (9) Man locks shall be equipped with nozzle used; and the water supply shall a manual type fire extinguisher system be such as to ensure an uninterrupted that can be activated inside the man flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall lock and also by the outside lock at- be located or guarded to prevent injury tendant. In addition, a fire hose and thereto. portable fire extinguisher shall be pro- (5) The power house, compressor vided inside and outside the man lock. house, and all buildings housing ven- The portable fire extinguisher shall be tilating equipment, shall be provided the dry chemical type. with at least one hose connection in (10) Equipment, fixtures, and fur- the water line, with a fire hose con- niture in man locks and special decom- nected thereto. A fire hose shall be pression chambers shall be constructed maintained within reach of structures of noncombustible materials. Bedding, of wood over or near shafts. etc., shall be chemically treated so as (6) Tunnels shall be provided with a to be fire resistant. 2-inch minimum diameter water line (11) Head frames shall be constructed extending into the working chamber of structural steel or open frame-work and to within 100 feet of the working fireproofed timber. Head houses and face. Such line shall have hose outlets other temporary surface buildings or with 100 feet of fire hose attached and structures within 100 feet of the shaft, maintained as follows: One at the caisson, or tunnel opening shall be working face; one immediately inside built of fire-resistant materials. of the bulkhead of the working chamber; and one immediately outside such (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combus- bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets tible material shall be stored within shall be provided at 200-foot intervals 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel throughout the length of the tunnel, opening, except that oils may be stored and 100 feet of fire hose shall be at- in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof tached to the outlet nearest to any lo- buildings, provided such buildings are cation where flammable material is not less than 50 feet from any shaft, being kept or stored or where any caisson, or tunnel opening, or any flame is being used. building directly connected thereto. (7) In addition to fire hose protection (13) Positive means shall be taken to required by this subpart, on every floor prevent leaking flammable liquids of every building not under compressed from flowing into the areas specifically air, but used in connection with the mentioned in the preceding paragraph. compressed air work, there shall be (14) All explosives used in connection provided at least one approved fire ex- with compressed air work shall be se- tinguisher of the proper type for the lected, stored, transported, and used as hazard involved. At least two approved specified in subpart U of this part. fire extinguishers shall be provided in (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (1) the working chamber as follows: One at Intermediate bulkheads with locks, or the working face and one immediately intermediate safety screens or both, inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Ex- are required where there is the danger tinguishers in the working chamber of rapid flooding. shall use water as the primary extin- (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in di- guishing agent and shall not use any ameter, hanging walkways shall be extinguishing agent which could be provided from the face to the man lock harmful to the employees in the work- as high in the tunnel as practicable, ing chamber. The fire extinguisher with at least 6 feet of head room. Walk- shall be protected from damage. ways shall be constructed of non- (8) Highly combustible materials combustible material. Standard rail- shall not be used or stored in the work- ings shall be securely installed ing chamber. Wood, paper, and similar throughout the length of all walkways

428

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00438 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

on open sides in accordance with sub- (j) Normal condition—One during part M of this part. Where walkways which exposure to compressed air is are ramped under safety screens, the limited to a single continuous working walkway surface shall be skidproofed period followed by a single decompres- by cleats or by equivalent means. sion in any given 24-hour period; the (3) Bulkheads used to contain com- total time of exposure to compressed pressed air shall be tested, where prac- air during the single continuous work- ticable, to prove their ability to resist ing period is not interrupted by expo- the highest air pressure which may be sure to normal atmospheric pressure, expected to be used. and a second exposure to compressed air does not occur until at least 12 con- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, secutive hours of exposure to normal 1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, atmospheric pressure has elapsed since Feb. 13, 1996] the employee has been under pressure. (k) Pressure—A force acting on a unit § 1926.804 Definitions applicable to area. Usually shown as pounds per this subpart. square inch. (p.s.i.) (a) Bulkhead—An airtight structure (l) Absolute pressure (p.s.i.a.)—The separating the working chamber from sum of the atmospheric pressure and free air or from another chamber under gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.). a lesser pressure than the working (m) Atmospheric pressure—The pres- pressure. sure of air at sea level, usually 14.7 (b) Caisson—A wood, steel, concrete p.s.i.a. (1 atmosphere), or 0 p.s.i.g. or reinforced concrete, air- and water- (n) Gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.)—Pressure tight chamber in which it is possible measured by a gauge and indicating for men to work under air pressure the pressure exceeding atmospheric. greater than atmospheric pressure to (o) Safety screen—An air- and water- excavate material below water level. tight diaphragm placed across the upper part of a compressed air tunnel (c) Decanting—A method used for de- between the face and bulkhead, in compressing under emergency cir- order to prevent flooding the crown of cumstances. In this procedure, the em- the tunnel between the safety screen ployees are brought to atmospheric and the bulkhead, thus providing a safe pressure with a very high gas tension means of refuge and exit from a flood- in the tissues and then immediately re- ing or flooded tunnel. compressed in a second and separate chamber or lock. (p) Special decompression chamber—A chamber to provide greater comfort of (d) Emergency locks—A lock designed employees when the total decompres- to hold and permit the quick passage of sion time exceeds 75 minutes. an entire shift of employees. (q) Working chamber—The space or (e) High air—Air pressure used to sup- compartment under air pressure in ply power to pneumatic tools and de- which the work is being done. vices. (f) Low air—Air supplied to pressurize APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART working chambers and locks. 1926—DECOMPRESSION TABLES (g) Man lock—A chamber through which men pass from one air pressure 1. Explanation. The decompression tables environment into another. are computed for working chamber pressures from 0 to 14 pounds, and from 14 to 50 pounds (h) Materials lock—A chamber per square inch gauge inclusive by 2-pound through which materials and equip- increments and for exposure times for each ment pass from one air pressure envi- pressure extending from one-half to over 8 ronment into another. hours inclusive. Decompressions will be con- (i) Medical lock—A special chamber in ducted by two or more stages with a max- which employees are treated for de- imum of four stages, the latter for a working compression illness. It may also be chamber pressure of 40 pounds per square inch gauge or over. used in preemployment physical ex- Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient aminations to determine the adapt- pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16 ability of the prospective employee to pounds per square inch, but in no instance changes in pressure. will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds

429

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00439 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pres- Examples Minutes sure in stage 1 will always take place at a rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute. Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20 pounds gauge. Further reduction in pressure will take Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4 place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as hours, total decompression time ...... 43 required at a slower rate, but in no event at Decompression Table No. 2: a rate greater than 1 pound per minute. Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5 pounds per minute. body of the table the total decompression Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ...... 3 time in minutes for various combinations of Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a working chamber pressure and exposure uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound time. gage over a period of 40 minutes. Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for Rate—0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes per pound. the same various combinations of working Stage 2 (final) elapsed time ...... 40 chamber pressure and exposure time the following: Total time ...... 43 a. The number of stages required; Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24 pounds gage. b. The reduction in pressure and the ter- Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5 minal pressure for each required stage; hours, total decompression time ...... 117 c. The time in minutes through which the Decompression Table No. 2: reduction in pressure is accomplished for Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds each required stage; to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5 pounds per minute. d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ...... 3 per pound for each required stage; Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period IMPORTANT NOTE: The Pressure Reduction of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute in Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform elapsed time, stage 2 ...... 4 Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values Transfer men to special decompression Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher chamber maintaining the 4-pound pres- Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Expo- sure during the transfer operation. sure Time Should the Actual Working Cham- Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decompression chamber, reduce the pressure at ber Pressure or the Actual Exposure Time, a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound Respectively, Fall Between Those for Which gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate, Calculated Values Are Shown in the Body of 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes the Tables. per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time ... 110 Total time ...... 117

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 1—TOTAL DECOMPRESSION TIME

Working period hours Work pressure p.s.i.g. 1 1 Over ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8

9 to 12...... 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 14 ...... 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33 16 ...... 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62 18 ...... 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87 20 ...... 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113 22 ...... 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133 24 ...... 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151 26 ...... 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163 28 ...... 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183 30 ...... 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204 32 ...... 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226 34 ...... 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248 36 ...... 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273 38 ...... 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278 40 ...... 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288 42 ...... 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293 44 ...... 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293 46 ...... 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318 48 ...... 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 ...... 50 ...... 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 ......

430

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00440 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2 [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

Decompression data Working chamber pressure Working Total time p.s.i.g. period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure decom- hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate press min- From To utes Min/pound utes

14 ...... 1⁄2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 11⁄2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 6 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 7 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 14 3.50 16 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 14 3.50 16 Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 30 7.50 32 16 ...... 1⁄2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 11⁄2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 3 1 16 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 4 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7 2 4 0 4 3.50 17 6 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 30 7.50 33 7 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 18 ...... 1⁄2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 11⁄2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 5 1.25 8 3 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 8 2.00 11 4 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 14 3.50 17 5 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 6 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 7 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 70 17.50 73 Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 84 21.00 87

431

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00441 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

20 ...... 1⁄2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 11⁄2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 5 1.25 8 2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 12 3.00 15 3 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 12 3.00 15 4 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 40 10.00 43 5 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 6 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 70 17.50 73 7 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 80 20.00 83 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 100 25.00 103 Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 110 27.50 113 22 ...... 1⁄2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 6 1.00 9 1 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 6 1.00 9 11⁄2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 13 2.20 16 2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 21 3.50 24 3 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 35 5.85 38 4 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 65 10.83 68 5 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 90 15.00 93 6 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 4 0 100 16.67 103 7 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 110 18.35 113 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 125 20.80 128 Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ...... 2 6 0 130 21.70 133 24 ...... 1⁄2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 11 1 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 5 1.25 12 11⁄2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 16 4.00 23 2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 27 3 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 45 11.25 52 4 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 85 21.25 92 5 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 110 27.50 117 6 1 24 8 3 0.20 ......

432

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00442 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 115 28.80 122 7 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 127 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 137 Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ...... 2 8 4 8 2.00 ...... 3 4 0 140 35.00 151 26 ...... 1⁄2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 13 1 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 5 1.25 14 11⁄2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 29 2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 34 3 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 60 15.00 69 4 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 95 23.75 104 5 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 8 1.33 ...... 3 4 0 115 28.80 126 6 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 8 1.33 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 141 7 1 26 10 3 2.20 ...... 2 10 4 9 1.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 142 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 9 1.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 142 Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ...... 2 10 4 30 5.00 ...... 3 4 0 30 32.50 163 28 ...... 1⁄2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 15 1 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 12 3.00 23 11⁄2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 31 2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 30 7.50 41 3 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 10 1.25 ...... 3 4 0 85 21.20 98 4 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 14 1.75 ...... 3 4 0 110 27.50 127 5 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 143 6 1 28 12 3 0.20 ......

433

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00443 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

2 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 153 7 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 120 32.50 153 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 32 4.00 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 165 Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ...... 2 12 4 50 6.25 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 183 30 ...... 1⁄2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 17 1 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 15 3.75 28 11⁄2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 38 2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 14 1.40 ...... 3 4 0 45 11.25 62 3 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 17 1.70 ...... 3 4 0 85 21.20 105 4 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 30 3.00 ...... 3 4 0 110 27.50 143 5 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 35 3.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 165 6 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 35 3.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 168 7 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 45 4.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 178 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 55 5.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 188 Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ...... 2 14 4 71 7.10 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 204 32 ...... 1⁄2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 12 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 19 1 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 12 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 20 5.00 35 11⁄2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 15 1.25 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 43 2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 22 1.83 ...... 3 4 0 60 15.00 85 3 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 28 2.33 ...... 3 4 0 95 23.75 126 4 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 40 3.33 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 163 5 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 45 3.75 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 178 6 1 32 16 3 0.20 ......

434

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00444 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

2 16 4 60 5.00 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 193 7 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 70 5.83 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 203 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 80 6.67 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 213 Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ...... 2 16 4 93 7.75 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 226 34 ...... 1⁄2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 14 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 4 1.00 21 1 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 14 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 22 5.50 39 11⁄2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 25 1.80 ...... 3 4 0 30 7.50 58 2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 35 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 60 15.00 98 3 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 43 3.10 ...... 3 4 0 105 26.25 151 4 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 55 3.93 ...... 3 4 0 120 30.00 178 5 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 62 4.43 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 195 6 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 85 6.07 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 218 7 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 90 6.43 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 223 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 100 7.15 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 233 Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ...... 2 18 4 115 8.23 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 248 36 ...... 1⁄2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 16 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 5 1.25 24 1 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 16 1.00 ...... 3 4 0 25 6.25 44 11⁄2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 30 1.88 ...... 3 4 0 30 7.50 63 2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 40 2.50 ...... 3 4 0 70 17.50 113 3 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 52 3.25 ...... 3 4 0 115 28.75 170 4 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 65 4.06 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 198 5 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 90 5.63 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 223 6 1 36 20 3 0.20 ......

435

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00445 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

2 20 4 100 6.25 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 233 7 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 110 6.88 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 243 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 120 7.50 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 253 Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ...... 2 20 4 140 8.75 ...... 3 4 0 130 32.50 273 38 ...... 1⁄2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 16 1.00 ...... 3 6 0 9 1.50 28 1 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 16 1.00 ...... 3 6 0 30 5.00 49 11⁄2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 20 1.25 ...... 3 6 0 50 8.34 73 2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 30 1.88 ...... 3 6 0 95 15.83 128 3 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 35 2.19 ...... 3 6 0 140 23.35 178 4 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 50 3.12 ...... 3 6 0 150 25.00 203 5 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 55 3.44 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 223 6 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 70 4.38 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 238 7 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 85 5.32 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 253 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 95 5.93 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 263 Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ...... 2 22 6 110 6.88 ...... 3 6 0 165 27.50 278 40 ...... 1⁄2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 16 1.00 ...... 3 8 4 4 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 8 2.00 31 1 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 16 1.00 ...... 3 8 4 5 1.25 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 49 11⁄2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 16 1.00 ...... 3 8 4 20 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 45 11.25 84 2 2 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 1 24 8 25 1.56 ...... 3 8 4 20 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 95 23.75 143 3 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 30 1.88 ...... 3 8 4 30 7.50 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 183 4 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 45 2.81 ......

436

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00446 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

3 8 4 35 8.75 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 213 5 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 47 2.94 ...... 3 8 4 53 13.25 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 233 6 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 55 3.44 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 248 7 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 65 4.06 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 258 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 75 4.70 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 268 Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ...... 2 24 8 95 5.93 ...... 3 8 4 60 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 288 42 ...... 1⁄2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 6 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 12 3.00 37 1 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 12 2.00 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 56 11⁄2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 23 3.83 ...... 4 4 0 60 15.00 102 2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 30 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 95 23.75 144 3 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 50 8.34 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 189 4 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 17 1.06 ...... 3 10 4 65 10.83 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 215 5 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 27 1.69 ...... 3 10 4 85 14.18 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 245 6 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 27 1.69 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 260 7 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 30 1.88 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 263 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 35 2.19 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 268 Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ...... 2 26 10 60 3.75 ...... 3 10 4 100 16.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 293

437

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00447 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

44 ...... 1⁄2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 8 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 16 4.00 43 1 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 20 2.50 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 64 11⁄2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 27 3.38 ...... 4 4 0 72 18.00 118 2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 40 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 95 23.75 154 3 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 60 7.50 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 199 4 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 85 10.62 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 234 5 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 105 13.13 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 254 6 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 115 14.38 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 264 7 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 120 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 16 1.00 ...... 3 12 4 120 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ...... 2 28 12 40 2.50 ...... 3 12 4 120 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 293 46 ...... 1⁄2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 10 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 15 3.75 44 1 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 25 2.50 ...... 4 4 0 30 7.50 74 11⁄2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 35 3.50 ...... 4 4 0 85 21.20 139 2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 47 4.70 ...... 4 4 0 105 26.25 171 3 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 65 6.50 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 214 4 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ......

438

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00448 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

3 14 4 95 9.50 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 244 5 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 120 12.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 6 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 125 12.50 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 274 7 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 10 4 140 14.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 289 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 16 1.00 ...... 3 14 4 150 15.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 299 Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ...... 2 30 14 25 1.56 ...... 3 14 4 160 16.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 318 48 ...... 1⁄2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 12 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 20 5.00 51 1 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 35 2.92 ...... 4 4 0 35 8.75 89 11⁄2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 45 3.75 ...... 4 4 0 80 20.00 144 2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 60 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 110 27.50 189 3 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 90 7.50 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 229 4 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 120 10.00 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 5 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 140 11.67 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 209 6 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 160 13.33 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 309 7 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 170 14.17 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 ...... 8 1 48 32 3 0.20 ...... 2 32 16 16 1.00 ...... 3 16 4 170 14.17 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 ...... 50 ...... 1⁄2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 14 1.00 ...... 4 4 0 25 6.25 58

439

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00449 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.850 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

1 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 40 2.86 ...... 4 4 0 35 8.75 94 11⁄2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 55 3.93 ...... 4 4 0 90 22.50 164 2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 70 5.00 ...... 4 4 0 120 30.00 209 3 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 100 7.15 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 249 4 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 130 8.58 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 279 5 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 160 11.42 ......

DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—CONTINUED [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]

4 4 0 130 32.50 309 6 1 50 34 3 0.20 ...... 2 34 18 16 1.00 ...... 3 18 4 180 12.85 ...... 4 4 0 130 32.50 329

[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993]

Subpart T—Demolition the structure. Any adjacent structure where employees may be exposed shall also be similarly checked. The em- AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 ployer shall have in writing evidence FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), that such a survey has been performed. 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 (b) When employees are required to FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- work within a structure to be demol- ble. ished which has been damaged by fire, flood, explosion, or other cause, the § 1926.850 Preparatory operations. walls or floor shall be shored or braced. (a) Prior to permitting employees to (c) All electric, gas, water, steam, start demolition operations, an engi- sewer, and other service lines shall be neering survey shall be made, by a shut off, capped, or otherwise con- competent person, of the structure to trolled, outside the building line before determine the condition of the fram- demolition work is started. In each ing, floors, and walls, and possibility of case, any utility company which is in- unplanned collapse of any portion of volved shall be notified in advance.

440

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00450 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.852

(d) If it is necessary to maintain any protection from the face of the build- power, water or other utilities during ing for a minimum of 8 feet. All such demolition, such lines shall be tempo- canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider rarily relocated, as necessary, and pro- than the building entrances or open- tected. ings (1 foot wider on each side thereof), (e) It shall also be determined if any and shall be capable of sustaining a type of hazardous chemicals, gases, ex- load of 150 pounds per square foot. plosives, flammable materials, or similarly dangerous substances have been § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and used in any pipes, tanks, or other ladders. equipment on the property. When the (a) Only those stairways, passage- presence of any such substances is ap- ways, and ladders, designated as means parent or suspected, testing and purg- of access to the structure of a building, ing shall be performed and the hazard shall be used. Other access ways shall eliminated before demolition is start- be entirely closed at all times. ed. (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders (f) Where a hazard exists from frag- and incidental equipment thereto, mentation of glass, such hazards shall which are covered by this section, shall be removed. be periodically inspected and main- (g) Where a hazard exists to employ- tained in a clean safe condition. ees falling through wall openings, the (c) In a multistory building, when a opening shall be protected to a height stairwell is being used, it shall be prop- of approximately 42 inches. erly illuminated by either natural or (h) When debris is dropped through artificial means, and completely and holes in the floor without the use of substantially covered over at a point chutes, the area onto which the mate- not less than two floors below the floor rial is dropped shall be completely en- on which work is being performed, and closed with barricades not less than 42 access to the floor where the work is in inches high and not less than 6 feet progress shall be through a properly back from the projected edge of the lighted, protected, and separate pas- opening above. Signs, warning of the sageway. hazard of falling materials, shall be posted at each level. Removal shall not § 1926.852 Chutes. be permitted in this lower area until debris handling ceases above. (a) No material shall be dropped to (i) All floor openings, not used as ma- any point lying outside the exterior terial drops, shall be covered over with walls of the structure unless the area is material substantial enough to support effectively protected. the weight of any load which may be (b) All materials chutes, or sections imposed. Such material shall be prop- thereof, at an angle of more than 45° erly secured to prevent its accidental from the horizontal, shall be entirely movement. enclosed, except for openings equipped (j) Except for the cutting of holes in with closures at or about floor level for floors for chutes, holes through which the insertion of materials. The open- to drop materials, preparation of stor- ings shall not exceed 48 inches in age space, and similar necessary pre- height measured along the wall of the paratory work, the demolition of exte- chute. At all stories below the top rior walls and floor construction shall floor, such openings shall be kept begin at the top of the structure and closed when not in use. proceed downward. Each story of exte- (c) A substantial gate shall be in- rior wall and floor construction shall stalled in each chute at or near the dis- be removed and dropped into the stor- charge end. A competent employee age space before commencing the re- shall be assigned to control the oper- moval of exterior walls and floors in ation of the gate, and the backing and the story next below. loading of trucks. (k) Employee entrances to multi- (d) When operations are not in story structures being demolished shall progress, the area surrounding the dis- be completely protected by sidewalk charge end of a chute shall be securely sheds or canopies, or both, providing closed off.

441

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00451 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.853 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(e) Any chute opening, into which hibit the cutting of floor beams for the workmen dump debris, shall be pro- disposal of materials or for the instal- tected by a substantial guardrail ap- lation of equipment, provided that the proximately 42 inches above the floor requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855 or other surface on which the men are met. stand to dump the material. Any space (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of between the chute and the edge of any wall being demolished shall be openings in the floors through which it planked solid, except when employees passes shall be solidly covered over. are kept out of the area below. (f) Where the material is dumped (f) In buildings of ‘‘skeleton-steel’’ from mechanical equipment or wheel- construction, the steel framing may be barrows, a securely attached toeboard left in place during the demolition of or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick masonry. Where this is done, all steel and 6 inches high, shall be provided at beams, girders, and similar structural each chute opening. supports shall be cleared of all loose (g) Chutes shall be designed and con- material as the masonry demolition structed of such strength as to elimi- progresses downward. nate failure due to impact of materials (g) Walkways or ladders shall be pro- or debris loaded therein. vided to enable employees to safely reach or leave any scaffold or wall. § 1926.853 Removal of materials through floor openings. (h) Walls, which serve as retaining walls to support earth or adjoining Any openings cut in a floor for the structures, shall not be demolished disposal of materials shall be no larger until such earth has been properly in size than 25 percent of the aggregate braced or adjoining structures have of the total floor area, unless the lat- been properly underpinned. eral supports of the removed flooring (i) Walls, which are to serve as re- remain in place. Floors weakened or taining walls against which debris will otherwise made unsafe by demolition be piled, shall not be so used unless ca- operations shall be shored to carry pable of safely supporting the imposed safely the intended imposed load from load. demolition operations.

§ 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors. sections, and chimneys. (a) Openings cut in a floor shall ex- (a) Masonry walls, or other sections tend the full span of the arch between of masonry, shall not be permitted to supports. fall upon the floors of the building in (b) Before demolishing any floor such masses as to exceed the safe car- arch, debris and other material shall be rying capacities of the floors. removed from such arch and other ad- (b) No wall section, which is more jacent floor area. Planks not less than than one story in height, shall be per- 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section, mitted to stand alone without lateral full size undressed, shall be provided bracing, unless such wall was origi- for, and shall be used by employees to nally designed and constructed to stand on while breaking down floor stand without such lateral support, and arches between beams. Such planks is in a condition safe enough to be self- shall be so located as to provide a safe supporting. All walls shall be left in a support for the workmen should the stable condition at the end of each arch between the beams collapse. The shift. open space between planks shall not (c) Employees shall not be permitted exceed 16 inches. to work on the top of a wall when (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18 weather conditions constitute a haz- inches wide, formed of planks not less ard. than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equiv- (d) Structural or load-supporting alent strength if metal, shall be pro- members on any floor shall not be cut vided and used by workmen when nec- or removed until all stories above such essary to enable them to reach any a floor have been demolished and re- point without walking upon exposed moved. This provision shall not pro- beams.

442

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00452 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.859

(d) Stringers of ample strength shall (e) Storage space into which material be installed to support the flooring is dumped shall be blocked off, except planks, and the ends of such stringers for openings necessary for the removal shall be supported by floor beams or of material. Such openings shall be girders, and not by floor arches alone. kept closed at all times when material (e) Planks shall be laid together over is not being removed. solid bearings with the ends overlap- ping at least 1 foot. § 1926.858 Removal of steel construc- (f) When floor arches are being re- tion. moved, employees shall not be allowed (a) When floor arches have been rein the area directly underneath, and moved, planking in accordance with such an area shall be barricaded to pre- § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the vent access to it. workers engaged in razing the steel (g) Demolition of floor arches shall framing. not be started until they, and the sur- (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoisting rounding floor area for a distance of 20 equipment. Employers must meet the feet, have been cleared of debris and requirements specified in subparts N any other unnecessary materials. and CC of this part. (c) Steel construction shall be dis- § 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, mantled column length by column and material with equipment. length, and tier by tier (columns may (a) Mechanical equipment shall not be in two-story lengths). be used on floors or working surfaces (d) Any structural member being dis- unless such floors or surfaces are of membered shall not be overstressed. sufficient strength to support the im- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, posed load. 2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843, (b) Floor openings shall have curbs or Apr. 23, 2013] stop-logs to prevent equipment from running over the edge. § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition. (c) Cranes, derricks, and other mechan- (a) No workers shall be permitted in ical equipment. Employers must meet any area, which can be adversely af- the requirements specified in subparts fected by demolition operations, when N, O, and CC of this part. balling or clamming is being per- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, formed. Only those workers necessary 2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843, for the performance of the operations Apr. 23, 2013] shall be permitted in this area at any other time. § 1926.857 Storage. (b) The weight of the demolition ball (a) The storage of waste material and shall not exceed 50 percent of the debris on any floor shall not exceed the crane’s rated load, based on the length allowable floor loads. of the boom and the maximum angle of (b) In buildings having wooden floor operation at which the demolition ball construction, the flooring boards may will be used, or it shall not exceed 25 be removed from not more than one percent of the nominal breaking floor above grade to provide storage strength of the line by which it is sus- space for debris, provided falling mate- pended, whichever results in a lesser rial is not permitted to endanger the value. stability of the structure. (c) The crane boom and loadline shall (c) When wood floor beams serve to be as short as possible. brace interior walls or free-standing (d) The ball shall be attached to the exterior walls, such beams shall be left loadline with a swivel-type connection in place until other equivalent support to prevent twisting of the loadline, and can be installed to replace them. shall be attached by positive means in (d) Floor arches, to an elevation of such manner that the weight cannot not more than 25 feet above grade, may become accidentally disconnected. be removed to provide storage area for (e) When pulling over walls or por- debris: Provided, That such removal tions thereof, all steel members af- does not endanger the stability of the fected shall have been previously cut structure. free.

443

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00453 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.860 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(f) All roof cornices or other such or- with explosives. All employees shall be namental stonework shall be removed removed to a safe area and the fire area prior to pulling walls over. guarded against intruders. (g) During demolition, continuing in- (g) Original containers, or Class II spections by a competent person shall magazines, shall be used for taking det- be made as the work progresses to de- onators and other explosives from stor- tect hazards resulting from weakened age magazines to the blasting area. or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loos- (h) When blasting is done in con- ened material. No employee shall be gested areas or in proximity to a struc- permitted to work where such hazards ture, railway, or highway, or any other exist until they are corrected by shor- installation that may be damaged, the ing, bracing, or other effective means. blaster shall take special precautions § 1926.860 Selective demolition by ex- in the loading, delaying, initiation, and plosives. confinement of each blast with mats or Selective demolition by explosives other methods so as to control the shall be conducted in accordance with throw of fragments, and thus prevent the applicable sections of subpart U of bodily injury to employees. this part. (i) Employees authorized to prepare explosive charges or conduct blasting Subpart U—Blasting and the Use operations shall use every reasonable of Explosives precaution including, but not limited to, visual and audible warning signals, flags, or barricades, to ensure employee AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); safety. secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health (j) Insofar as possible, blasting oper- Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary ations above ground shall be conducted of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 between sunup and sundown. (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 6–96 (62 FR (k) Due precautions shall be taken to 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. prevent accidental discharge of electric § 1926.900 General provisions. blasting caps from current induced by radar, radio transmitters, lightning, (a) The employer shall permit only authorized and qualified persons to adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or handle and use explosives. other sources of extraneous electricity. (b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open These precautions shall include: flame lamps, and other fires, flame or (1) Detonators shall be short- heat producing devices and sparks shall circuited in holes which have been be prohibited in or near explosive mag- primed and shunted until wired into azines or while explosives are being the blasting circuit. handled, transported or used. (2) The suspension of all blasting op- (c) No person shall be allowed to han- erations and removal of persons from dle or use explosives while under the the blasting area during the approach influence of intoxicating liquors, nar- and progress of an electric storm; cotics, or other dangerous drugs. (3)(i) The prominent display of ade- (d) All explosives shall be accounted quate signs, warning against the use of for at all times. Explosives not being mobile radio transmitters, on all roads used shall be kept in a locked maga- within 1,000 feet of blasting operations. zine, unavailable to persons not au- Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot thorized to handle them. The employer distance would create an operational shall maintain an inventory and use handicap, a competent person shall be record of all explosives. Appropriate consulted to evaluate the particular authorities shall be notified of any loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into situation, and alternative provisions a magazine. may be made which are adequately de- (e) No explosives or blasting agents signed to prevent any premature firing shall be abandoned. of electric blasting caps. A description (f) No fire shall be fought where the of any such alternatives shall be re- fire is in imminent danger of contact duced to writing and shall be certified

444

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00454 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.900

as meeting the purposes of this subdivi- (q) All loading and firing shall be di- sion by the competent person con- rected and supervised by competent sulted. The description shall be main- persons thoroughly experienced in this tained at the construction site during field. the duration of the work, and shall be (r) All blasts shall be fired elec- available for inspection by representa- trically with an electric blasting ma- tives of the Secretary of Labor. chine or properly designed electric (ii) Specimens of signs which would power source, except as provided in meet the requirements of paragraph § 1926.906 (a) and (r). (k)(3) of this section are the following: (s) Buildings used for the mixing of blasting agents shall conform to the requirements of this section. (1) Buildings shall be of noncombustible construction or sheet metal on wood studs. (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be of concrete or of other nonabsorbent materials. (3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall be separated from the mixing plant and located in such a manner that in case (4) Ensuring that mobile radio trans- of tank rupture, the oil will drain away mitters which are less than 100 feet from the mixing plant building. away from electric blasting caps, in (4) The building shall be well venti- other than original containers, shall be lated. deenergized and effectively locked; (5) Heating units which do not depend (5) Compliance with the rec- on combustion processes, when prop- ommendations of The Institute of the erly designed and located, may be used Makers of Explosives with regard to in the building. All direct sources of blasting in the vicinity of radio trans- heat shall be provided exclusively from mitters as stipulated in Radio Fre- units located outside the mixing build- quency Energy—A Potential Hazard in ing. the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME (6) All internal-combustion engines Publication No. 20, March 1971. used for electric power generation shall (l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber be located outside the mixing plant packing materials, which have pre- building, or shall be properly venti- viously contained high explosives, lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex- shall not be used again for any purpose, haust systems on all such engines shall but shall be destroyed by burning at an be located so any spark emission can- approved location. not be a hazard to any materials in or (m) Explosives, blasting agents, and adjacent to the plant. blasting supplies that are obviously de- (t) Buildings used for the mixing of teriorated or damaged shall not be water gels shall conform to the reused. quirements of this subdivision. (n) Delivery and issue of explosives (1) Buildings shall be of noncombus- shall only be made by and to author- tible construction or sheet metal on ized persons and into authorized maga- wood studs. zines or approved temporary storage or (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be handling areas. of concrete or of other nonabsorbent (o) Blasting operations in the prox- materials. imity of overhead power lines, commu- (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil nication lines, utility services, or other storage facilities shall be separated services and structures shall not be from the mixing plant and located in carried on until the operators and/or such a manner that in case of tank rup- owners have been notified and meas- ture, the oil will drain away from the ures for safe control have been taken. mixing plant building. (p) The use of black powder shall be (4) The building shall be well venti- prohibited. lated.

445

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00455 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB EC30OC91.049 § 1926.901 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(5) Heating units that do not depend (c) No person shall smoke, or carry on combustion processes, when prop- matches or any other flame-producing erly designed and located, may be used device, nor shall firearms or loaded in the building. All direct sources of cartridges be carried while in or near a heat shall be provided exclusively from motor vehicle or conveyance trans- units located outside of the mixing porting explosives. building. (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and (6) All internal-combustion engines blasting supplies shall not be trans- used for electric power generation shall ported with other materials or cargoes. be located outside the mixing plant Blasting caps (including electric) shall building, or shall be properly venti- not be transported in the same vehicle lated and isolated by a firewall. The exhaust systems on all such engines shall with other explosives. be located so any spark emission can- (e) Vehicles used for transporting ex- not be a hazard to any materials in or plosives shall be strong enough to adjacent to the plant. carry the load without difficulty, and shall be in good mechanical condition. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (f) When explosives are transported 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993] by a vehicle with an open body, a Class § 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. II magazine or original manufacturer’s (a) A blaster shall be able to under- container shall be securely mounted on stand and give written and oral orders. the bed to contain the cargo. (b) A blaster shall be in good physical (g) All vehicles used for the transpor- condition and not be addicted to nar- tation of explosives shall have tight cotics, intoxicants, or similar types of floors and any exposed spark-producing drugs. metal on the inside of the body shall be (c) A blaster shall be qualified, by covered with wood, or other non- reason of training, knowledge, or expe- sparking material, to prevent contact rience, in the field of transporting, with containers of explosives. storing, handling, and use of explo- (h) Every motor vehicle or convey- sives, and have a working knowledge of ance used for transporting explosives State and local laws and regulations shall be marked or placarded on both which pertain to explosives. sides, the front, and the rear with the (d) Blasters shall be required to fur- word ‘‘Explosives’’ in red letters, not nish satisfactory evidence of com- less than 4 inches in height, on white petency in handling explosives and per- background. In addition to such mark- forming in a safe manner the type of ing or placarding, the motor vehicle or blasting that will be required. conveyance may display, in such a (e) The blaster shall be knowledge- manner that it will be readily visible able and competent in the use of each from all directions, a red flag 18 inches type of blasting method used. by 30 inches, with the word ‘‘Explo- § 1926.902 Surface transportation of sives’’ painted, stamped, or sewed explosives. thereon, in white letters, at least 6 inches in height. (a) Transportation of explosives shall meet the provisions of Department of (i) Each vehicle used for transpor- Transportation regulations contained tation of explosives shall be equipped in 46 CFR parts 146–149, Water Carriers; with a fully charged fire extinguisher, 49 CFR parts 171–179, Highways and in good condition. An Underwriters Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; Laboratory-approved extinguisher of and 49 CFR parts 390–397, Motor Car- not less than 10-ABC rating will meet riers. the minimum requirement. The driver (b) Motor vehicles or conveyances shall be trained in the use of the extin- transporting explosives shall only be guisher on his vehicle. driven by, and be in the charge of, a li- (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances censed driver who is physically fit. He carrying explosives, blasting agents, or shall be familiar with the local, State, blasting supplies, shall not be taken in- and Federal regulation governing the side a garage or shop for repairs or transportation of explosives. servicing.

446

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00456 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.904

(k) No motor vehicle transporting ex- (k) No explosives or blasting agents plosives shall be left unattended. shall be transported on a man haul trip. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (l) The car or conveyance containing 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] explosives or blasting agents shall be § 1926.903 Underground transpor- pulled, not pushed, whenever possible. tation of explosives. (m) The powder car or conveyance especially built for the purpose of trans- (a) All explosives or blasting agents porting explosives or blasting agents in transit underground shall be taken shall bear a reflectorized sign on each to the place of use or storage without side with the word ‘‘Explosives’’ in let- delay. ters, not less than 4 inches in height; (b) The quantity of explosives or upon a background of sharply con- blasting agents taken to an under- trasting color. ground loading area shall not exceed (n) Compartments for transporting the amount estimated to be necessary detonators and explosives in the same for the blast. car or conveyance shall be physically (c) Explosives in transit shall not be separated by a distance of 24 inches or left unattended. by a solid partition at least 6 inches (d) The hoist operator shall be noti- thick. fied before explosives or blasting (o) Detonators and other explosives agents are transported in a shaft con- shall not be transported at the same veyance. time in any shaft conveyance. (e) Trucks used for the transpor- (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or tation of explosives underground shall blasting supplies shall not be trans- have the electrical system checked ported with other materials. weekly to detect any failures which (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not may constitute an electrical hazard. A in original containers, shall be placed certification record which includes the in a suitable container when trans- date of the inspection; the signature of ported manually. the person who performed the inspec- (r) Detonators, primers, and other ex- tion; and a serial number, or other plosives shall be carried in separate identifier, of the truck inspected shall containers when transported manually. be prepared and the most recent certification record shall be maintained [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, on file. 1987] (f) The installation of auxiliary lights on truck beds, which are pow- § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and ered by the truck’s electrical system, blasting agents. shall be prohibited. (a) Explosives and related materials (g) Explosives and blasting agents shall be stored in approved facilities shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed required under the applicable provi- in a powder car. No other materials, sions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco supplies, or equipment shall be trans- and Firearms regulations contained in ported in the same conveyance at the 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explo- same time. sives. (h) No one, except the operator, his (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting helper, and the powderman, shall be caps, detonating primers, and primed permitted to ride on a conveyance cartridges shall not be stored in the transporting explosives and blasting same magazine with other explosives agents. or blasting agents. (i) No person shall ride in any shaft (c) Smoking and open flames shall conveyance transporting explosives not be permitted within 50 feet of ex- and blasting agents. plosives and detonator storage maga- (j) No explosives or blasting agents zine. shall be transported on any loco- (d) No explosives or blasting agents motive. At least two car lengths shall shall be permanently stored in any un- separate the locomotive from the pow- derground operation until the oper- der car. ation has been developed to the point

447

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00457 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.905 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

where at least two modes of exit have or blasting agents being loaded into been provided. drill holes. Cables in the proximity of (e) Permanent underground storage the blast area shall be deenergized and magazines shall be at least 300 feet locked out by the blaster. from any shaft, adit, or active under- (k) Holes shall be checked prior to ground working area. loading to determine depth and condi- (f) Permanent underground maga- tions. Where a hole has been loaded zines containing detonators shall not with explosives but the explosives have be located closer than 50 feet to any failed to detonate, there shall be no magazine containing other explosives drilling within 50 feet of the hole. or blasting agents. (l) When loading a long line of holes with more than one loading crew, the [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] crews shall be separated by practical distance consistent with efficient oper- § 1926.905 Loading of explosives or ation and supervision of crews. blasting agents. (m) No explosive shall be loaded or (a) Procedures that permit safe and used underground in the presence of efficient loading shall be established combustible gases or combustible before loading is started. dusts. (b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently (n) No explosives other than those in large to admit freely the insertion of Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Insti- the cartridges of explosives. tute of Makers of Explosives, shall be (c) Tamping shall be done only with used; however, explosives complying wood rods or plastic tamping poles with the requirements of Fume Class 2 without exposed metal parts, but non- and Fume Class 3 may be used if ade- sparking metal connectors may be used quate ventilation has been provided. for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall (o) All blast holes in open work shall be avoided. The primer shall never be be stemmed to the collar or to a point tamped. which will confine the charge. (d) No holes shall be loaded except (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast those to be fired in the next round of area, shall be maintained at all ap- blasting. After loading, all remaining proaches to the blast area. The warn- explosives and detonators shall be im- ing sign lettering shall not be less than mediately returned to an authorized 4 inches in height on a contrasting magazine. background. (e) Drilling shall not be started until (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung all remaining butts of old holes are ex- when it is adjacent to or near a hole amined for unexploded charges, and if that is loaded. Flashlight batteries any are found, they shall be refired be- shall not be used for springing holes. fore work proceeds. (r) Drill holes which have been (f) No person shall be allowed to sprung or chambered, and which are deepen drill holes which have con- not water-filled, shall be allowed to tained explosives or blasting agents. cool before explosives are loaded. (g) No explosives or blasting agents (s) No loaded holes shall be left unat- shall be left unattended at the blast tended or unprotected. site. (t) The blaster shall keep an accu- (h) Machines and all tools not used rate, up-to-date record of explosives, for loading explosives into bore holes blasting agents, and blasting supplies shall be removed from the immediate used in a blast and shall keep an accu- location of holes before explosives are rate running inventory of all explosives delivered. Equipment shall not be oper- and blasting agents stored on the operated within 50 feet of loaded holes. ation. (i) No activity of any nature other (u) When loading blasting agents than that which is required for loading pneumatically over electric blasting holes with explosives shall be per- caps, semiconductive delivery hose mitted in a blast area. shall be used and the equipment shall (j) Powerlines and portable electric be bonded and grounded. cables for equipment being used shall [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, be kept a safe distance from explosives 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993]

448

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00458 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.906

§ 1926.906 Initiation of explosive This gap shall be bridged by a flexible charges—electric blasting. jumper cord just before firing the blast. (a) Electric blasting caps shall not be (l) When firing from a power circuit, used where sources of extraneous elec- the firing switch shall be locked in the tricity make the use of electric blast- open or ‘‘Off’’ position at all times, ex- ing caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg cept when firing. It shall be so designed wires shall be kept short-circuited that the firing lines to the cap circuit (shunted) until they are connected into are automatically short-circuited when the circuit for firing. the switch is in the ‘‘Off’’ position. (b) Before adopting any system of Keys to this switch shall be entrusted electrical firing, the blaster shall con- only to the blaster. duct a thorough survey for extraneous (m) Blasting machines shall be in currents, and all dangerous currents good condition and the efficiency of shall be eliminated before any holes the machine shall be tested periodi- are loaded. cally to make certain that it can de- (c) In any single blast using electric liver power at its rated capacity. blasting caps, all caps shall be of the (n) When firing with blasting ma- same style or function, and of the same chines, the connections shall be made manufacture. as recommended by the manufacturer (d) Electric blasting shall be carried of the electric blasting caps used. out by using blasting circuits or power (o) The number of electric blasting circuits in accordance with the electric caps connected to a blasting machine blasting cap manufacturer’s rec- shall not be in excess of its rated ca- ommendations, or an approved con- pacity. Furthermore, in primary blast- tractor or his designated representa- ing, a series circuit shall contain no tive. more caps than the limits rec- (e) When firing a circuit of electric ommended by the manufacturer of the blasting caps, care must be exercised to electric blasting caps in use. ensure that an adequate quantity of de- (p) The blaster shall be in charge of livered current is available, in accord- the blasting machines, and no other ance with the manufacturer’s rec- person shall connect the leading wires ommendations. to the machine. (f) Connecting wires and lead wires (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to shall be insulated single solid wires of charged holes, shall use only blasting sufficient current-carrying capacity. galvanometers or other instruments (g) Bus wires shall be solid single that are specifically designed for this wires of sufficient current-carrying ca- purpose. pacity. (r) Whenever the possibility exists (h) When firing electrically, the insu- that a leading line or blasting wire lation on all firing lines shall be ade- might be thrown over a live powerline quate and in good condition. by the force of an explosion, care shall (i) A power circuit used for firing be taken to see that the total length of electric blasting caps shall not be wires are kept too short to hit the grounded. lines, or that the wires are securely an- (j) In underground operations when chored to the ground. If neither of firing from a power circuit, a safety these requirements can be satisfied, a switch shall be placed in the perma- nonelectric system shall be used. nent firing line at intervals. This (s) In electrical firing, only the man switch shall be made so it can be making leading wire connections shall locked only in the ‘‘Off’’ position and fire the shot. All connections shall be shall be provided with a short- made from the bore hole back to the circuiting arrangement of the firing source of firing current, and the lead- lines to the cap circuit. ing wires shall remain shorted and not (k) In underground operations there be connected to the blasting machine shall be a ‘‘lightning’’ gap of at least 5 or other source of current until the feet in the firing system ahead of the charge is to be fired. main firing switch; that is, between (t) After firing an electric blast from this switch and the source of power. a blasting machine, the leading wires

449

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00459 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.907 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

shall be immediately disconnected one charge from dislodging other shots from the machine and short-circuited. in the blast. (m) When blasting with safety fuses, [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998] consideration shall be given to the length and burning rate of the fuse. § 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safety, shall always be provided for the (a) Safety fuse shall only be used blaster to reach a place of safety. where sources of extraneous electricity make the use of electric blasting caps § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord. dangerous. The use of a fuse that has (a) Care shall be taken to select a been hammered or injured in any way detonating cord consistent with the shall be forbidden. type and physical condition of the bore (b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or hole and stemming and the type of ex- other projections which will cause a plosives used. sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is (b) Detonating cord shall be handled prohibited. and used with the same respect and (c) Before capping safety fuse, a short care given other explosives. length shall be cut from the end of the (c) The line of detonating cord ex- supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut tending out of a bore hole or from a end in each blasting cap. charge shall be cut from the supply (d) Only a cap crimper of approved spool before loading the remainder of design shall be used for attaching the bore hole or placing additional blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers charges. shall be kept in good repair and acces- (d) Detonating cord shall be handled sible for use. and used with care to avoid damaging (e) No unused cap or short capped or severing the cord during and after fuse shall be placed in any hole to be loading and hooking-up. blasted; such unused detonators shall (e) Detonating cord connections shall be removed from the working place and be competent and positive in accord- destroyed. ance with approved and recommended (f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers methods. Knot-type or other cord-to- made up, in any magazine or near any cord connections shall be made only possible source of ignition. with detonating cord in which the ex- (g) No one shall be permitted to carry plosive core is dry. detonators or primers of any kind on (f) All detonating cord trunklines and his person. branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp (h) The minimum length of safety kinks, or angles that direct the cord fuse to be used in blasting shall be as back toward the oncoming line of deto- required by State law, but shall not be nation. less than 30 inches. (g) All detonating cord connections (i) At least two men shall be present shall be inspected before firing the when multiple cap and fuse blasting is blast. done by hand lighting methods. (h) When detonating cord milli- (j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be second-delay connectors or short-inter- lighted by each blaster when hand val-delay electric blasting caps are lighting devices are used. However, used with detonating cord, the practice when two or more safety fuses in a shall conform strictly to the manufac- group are lighted as one by means of turer’s recommendations. igniter cord, or other similar fuse- (i) When connecting a blasting cap or lighting devices, they may be consid- an electric blasting cap to detonating ered as one fuse. cord, the cap shall be taped or other- (k) The so-called ‘‘drop fuse’’ method wise attached securely along the side of dropping or pushing a primer or any or the end of the detonating cord, with explosive with a lighted fuse attached the end of the cap containing the ex- is forbidden. plosive charge pointed in the direction (l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for in which the detonation is to proceed. firing mudcap charges unless charges (j) Detonators for firing the trunk- are separated sufficiently to prevent line shall not be brought to the loading

450

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00460 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.912

area nor attached to the detonating and in tunnels, after the muck pile has cord until everything else is in readi- been wetted down. ness for the blast. § 1926.911 Misfires. § 1926.909 Firing the blast. (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster (a) A code of blasting signals equiva- shall provide proper safeguards for ex- lent to Table U–1, shall be posted on cluding all employees from the danger one or more conspicuous places at the zone. operation, and all employees shall be (b) No other work shall be done ex- required to familiarize themselves with cept that necessary to remove the haz- the code and conform to it. Danger ard of the misfire and only those em- signs shall be placed at suitable loca- ployees necessary to do the work shall tions. remain in the danger zone. (b) Before a blast is fired, a loud (c) No attempt shall be made to ex- warning signal shall be given by the tract explosives from any charged or blaster in charge, who has made cer- misfired hole; a new primer shall be tain that all surplus explosives are in a put in and the hole reblasted. If re- safe place and all employees, vehicles, firing of the misfired hole presents a and equipment are at a safe distance, hazard, the explosives may be removed or under sufficient cover. by washing out with water or, where (c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed the misfire is under water, blown out on highways which pass through the with air. danger zone so as to stop traffic during (d) If there are any misfires while blasting operations. using cap and fuse, all employees shall (d) It shall be the duty of the blaster remain away from the charge for at to fix the time of blasting. least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled (e) Before firing an underground under the direction of the person in blast, warning shall be given, and all charge of the blasting. All wires shall possible entries into the blasting area, be carefully traced and a search made and any entrances to any working for unexploded charges. place where a drift, raise, or other (e) No drilling, digging, or picking opening is about to hole through, shall shall be permitted until all missed be carefully guarded. The blaster shall holes have been detonated or the au- make sure that all employees are out thorized representative has approved of the blast area before firing a blast. that work can proceed. TABLE U–1 § 1926.912 Underwater blasting. WARNING SIGNAL—A 1-minute series of long blasts 5 minutes prior to blast signal. (a) A blaster shall conduct all blast- BLAST SIGNAL—A series of short blasts 1 ing operations, and no shot shall be minute prior to the shot. fired without his approval. ALL CLEAR SIGNAL—A prolonged blast fol- (b) Loading tubes and casings of dis- lowing the inspection of blast area. similar metals shall not be used because of possible electric transient cur- § 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. rents from galvanic action of the met- (a) Immediately after the blast has als and water. been fired, the firing line shall be dis- (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps connected from the blasting machine, and detonating cords shall be used for or where power switches are used, they all marine blasting. Loading shall be shall be locked open or in the off posi- done through a nonsparking metal tion. loading tube when tube is necessary. (b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, (d) No blast shall be fired while any not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for vessel under way is closer than 1,500 the smoke and fumes to leave the feet to the blasting area. Those on blasted area before returning to the board vessels or craft moored or an- shot. An inspection of the area and the chored within 1,500 feet shall be noti- surrounding rubble shall be made by fied before a blast is fired. the blaster to determine if all charges (e) No blast shall be fired while any have been exploded before employees swimming or diving operations are in are allowed to return to the operation, progress in the vicinity of the blasting

451

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00461 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.913 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

area. If such operations are in progress, (g) When tunnel excavation in rock signals and arrangements shall be face is approaching mixed face, and agreed upon to assure that no blast when tunnel excavation is in mixed shall be fired while any person is in the face, blasting shall be performed with water. light charges and with light burden on (f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. each hole. Advance drilling shall be (g) The storage and handling of ex- performed as tunnel excavation in rock plosives aboard vessels used in under- face approaches mixed face, to deter- water blasting operations shall be ac- mine the general nature and extent of cording to provisions outlined herein rock cover and the remaining distance on handling and storing explosives. ahead to soft ground as excavation ad- (h) When more than one charge is vances. placed under water, a float device shall be attached to an element of each § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to charge in such manner that it will be this subpart. released by the firing. Misfires shall be handled in accordance with the re- (a) American Table of Distances (also quirements of § 1926.911. known as Quantity Distance Tables) means American Table of Distances for § 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work Storage of Explosives as revised and under compressed air. approved by the Institute of the Mak- (a) Detonators and explosives shall ers of Explosives, June 5, 1964. not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, (b) Approved storage facility—A facil- or caissons. Detonators and explosives ity for the storage of explosive mate- for each round shall be taken directly rials conforming to the requirements of from the magazines to the blasting this part and covered by a license or zone and immediately loaded. Deto- permit issued under authority of the nators and explosives left over after Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Fire- loading a round shall be removed from arms. (See 27 CFR part 55) the working chamber before the con- (c) Blast area—The area in which ex- necting wires are connected up. plosives loading and blasting oper- (b) When detonators or explosives are ations are being conducted. brought into an air lock, no employee (d) Blaster—The person or persons au- except the powderman, blaster, lock thorized to use explosives for blasting tender and the employees necessary for purposes and meeting the qualifica- carrying, shall be permitted to enter tions contained in § 1926.901. the air lock. No other material, sup- (e) Blasting agent—A blasting agent is plies, or equipment shall be locked any material or mixture consisting of a through with the explosives. fuel and oxidizer used for blasting, but (c) Detonators and explosives shall be not classified an explosive and in which taken separately into pressure working chambers. none of the ingredients is classified as (d) The blaster or powderman shall be an explosive provided the furnished responsible for the receipt, unloading, (mixed) product cannot be detonated storage, and on-site transportation of with a No. 8 test blasting cap when explosives and detonators. confined. A common blasting agent (e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, presently in use is a mixture of ammo- and steel tunnel lining shall be elec- nium nitrate (NH4 NO3) and carbo- trically bonded together and grounded naceous combustibles, such as fuel oil at or near the portal or shaft, and such or coal, and may either be procured, pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded to- premixed and packaged from explosives gether at not less than 1,000-foot inter- companies or mixed in the field. vals throughout the length of the tun- (f) Blasting cap—A metallic tube nel. In addition, each low air supply closed at one end, containing a charge pipe shall be grounded at its delivery of one or more detonating compounds, end. and designed for and capable of detona- (f) The explosives suitable for use in tion from the sparks or flame from a wet holes shall be water-resistant and safety fuse inserted and crimped into shall be Fume Class 1. the open end.

452

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00462 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.914

(g) Block holing—The breaking of Class A Explosives. Possessing detonating boulders by firing a charge of explo- hazard, such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, pic- sives that has been loaded in a drill ric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury, hole. black powder, blasting caps, and detonating primers. (h) Conveyance—Any unit for trans- Class B Explosives. Possessing flammable porting explosives or blasting agents, hazard, such as propellant explosives, includ- including but not limited to trucks, ing some smokeless propellants. trailers, rail cars, barges, and vessels. Class C Explosives. Include certain types of (i) Detonating cord—A flexible cord manufactured articles which contain Class A containing a center core of high explo- or Class B explosives, or both, as compo- sives which when detonated, will have nents, but in restricted quantities. sufficient strength to detonate other (o) Fuse lighters—Special devices for cap-sensitive explosives with which it the purpose of igniting safety fuse. is in contact. (p) Magazine—Any building or struc- (j) Detonator—Blasting caps, electric ture, other than an explosives manu- blasting caps, delay electric blasting facturing building, used for the storage caps, and nonelectric delay blasting of explosives. caps. (q) Misfire—An explosive charge (k) Electric blasting cap—A blasting which failed to detonate. cap designed for and capable of detona- (r) Mud-capping (sometimes known as tion by means of an electric current. bulldozing, adobe blasting, or dobying). (l) Electric blasting circuitry— The blasting of boulders by placing a (1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, quantity of explosives against a rock, used in parallel or series, in parallel boulder, or other object without con- circuits, to which are connected the leg fining the explosives in a drill hole. wires of electric blasting caps. (s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap—A (2) Connecting wire. An insulated ex- blasting cap with an integral delay ele- pendable wire used between electric ment in conjunction with and capable blasting caps and the leading wires or of being detonated by a detonation im- between the bus wire and the leading pulse or signal from miniaturized deto- wires. nating cord. (3) Leading wire. An insulated wire (t) Primary blasting—The blasting op- used between the electric power source eration by which the original rock for- and the electric blasting cap circuit. mation is dislodged from its natural lo- (4) Permanent blasting wire. A per- cation. manently mounted insulated wire used (u) Primer—A cartridge or container between the electric power source and of explosives into which a detonator or the electric blasting cap circuit. detonating cord is inserted or attached. (m) Electric delay blasting caps—Caps (v) Safety fuse—A flexible cord con- designed to detonate at a predeter- taining an internal burning medium by mined period of time after energy is which fire is conveyed at a continuous applied to the ignition system. and uniform rate for the purpose of fir- (n) Explosives—(1) Any chemical coming blasting caps. pound, mixture, or device, the primary (w) Secondary blasting—The reduction or common purpose of which is to func- of oversize material by the use of ex- tion by explosion; that is, with sub- plosives to the dimension required for stantially instantaneous release of gas handling, including mudcapping and and heat, unless such compound, mix- blockholing. ture or device is otherwise specifically (x) Stemming—A suitable inert incom- classified by the U.S. Department of bustible material or device used to con- Transportation. fine or separate explosives in a drill (2) All material which is classified as hole, or to cover explosives in mud-cap- Class A, Class B, and Class C Explo- ping. sives by the U.S. Department of Trans- (y) Springing—The creation of a pock- portation. et in the bottom of a drill hole by the (3) Classification of explosives by the use of a moderate quantity of explo- U.S. Department of Transportation is sives in order that larger quantities or as follows: explosives may be inserted therein.

453

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00463 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.950 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(z) Water gels, or slurry explosives—A ance with § 1910.269 of this chapter will not wide variety of materials used for excuse an employer from compliance obliga- blasting. They all contain substantial tions under other subparts of this part. proportions of water and high propor- (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph tions of ammonium nitrate, some of (a)(1)(i) of this section, this subpart which is in solution in the water. Two does not apply to electrical safety-re- broad classes of water gels are: (1) lated work practices for unqualified Those which are sensitized by a mate- employees. rial classed as an explosive, such as (2) Other part 1926 standards. This sub- TNT or smokeless powder, and (2) those part applies in addition to all other ap- which contain no ingredient classified plicable standards contained in this as an explosive; these are sensitized part 1926. Employers covered under this with metals such as aluminum or with subpart are not exempt from com- other fuels. Water gels may be plying with other applicable provisions premixed at an explosives plant or in part 1926 by the operation of mixed at the site immediately before § 1910.5(c) of this chapter. Specific ref- delivery into the bore hole. erences in this subpart to other sec- (aa) Semiconductive hose. tions of part 1926 are provided for em- Semiconductive hose—a hose with an phasis only. electrical resistance high enough to (3) Applicable part 1910 requirements. limit flow of stray electric currents to (i) Line-clearance tree trimming per- safe levels, yet not so high as to pre- formed for the purpose of clearing vent drainage of static electric charges space around electric power genera- to ground; hose of not more than 2 tion, transmission, or distribution megohms resistance over its entire lines or equipment and on behalf of an length and of not less than 5,000 ohms organization that operates, or that per foot meets the requirement. controls the operating procedures for, those lines or equipment shall comply [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, 35311, June with § 1910.269 of this chapter. 30, 1993] (ii) Work involving electric power generation installations shall comply Subpart V—Electric Power with § 1910.269 of this chapter. (b) Training—(1) All employees. (i) Transmission and Distribution Each employee shall be trained in, and familiar with, the safety-related work SOURCE: 79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, unless practices, safety procedures, and other otherwise noted. safety requirements in this subpart AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. that pertain to his or her job assign- 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. ments. 1–2012 (77 FR 3912); and 29 CFR Part 1911. (ii) Each employee shall also be trained in and familiar with any other § 1926.950 General. safety practices, including applicable (a) Application—(1) Scope. (i) This sub- emergency procedures (such as pole-top part, except for paragraph (a)(3) of this and manhole rescue), that are not spe- section, covers the construction of cifically addressed by this subpart but electric power transmission and dis- that are related to his or her work and tribution lines and equipment. As used are necessary for his or her safety. in this subpart, the term ‘‘construc- (iii) The degree of training shall be tion’’ includes the erection of new elec- determined by the risk to the employee tric transmission and distribution lines for the hazard involved. and equipment, and the alteration, (2) Qualified employees. Each qualified conversion, and improvement of exist- employee shall also be trained and ing electric transmission and distribu- competent in: tion lines and equipment. (i) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(1)(i): An employer that complies with § 1910.269 of this chapter from other parts of electric equipment, will be considered in compliance with re- (ii) The skills and techniques nec- quirements in this subpart that do not ref- essary to determine the nominal volt- erence other subparts of this part. Compli- age of exposed live parts,

454

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00464 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.950

(iii) The minimum approach dis- (6) Training goals. The training shall tances specified in this subpart cor- establish employee proficiency in the responding to the voltages to which the work practices required by this subpart qualified employee will be exposed and and shall introduce the procedures nec- the skills and techniques necessary to essary for compliance with this sub- maintain those distances, part. (iv) The proper use of the special pre- (7) Demonstration of proficiency. The cautionary techniques, personal pro- employer shall ensure that each em- tective equipment, insulating and ployee has demonstrated proficiency in shielding materials, and insulated tools the work practices involved before that for working on or near exposed ener- employee is considered as having com- gized parts of electric equipment, and pleted the training required by para- (v) The recognition of electrical haz- graph (b) of this section. ards to which the employee may be ex- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(7): Though they posed and the skills and techniques are not required by this paragraph, employ- necessary to control or avoid these ment records that indicate that an employee hazards. has successfully completed the required training are one way of keeping track of NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): For the pur- when an employee has demonstrated pro- poses of this subpart, a person must have the ficiency. training required by paragraph (b)(2) of this NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b)(7): For an em- section to be considered a qualified person. ployee with previous training, an employer (3) Supervision and annual inspection. may determine that that employee has dem- The employer shall determine, through onstrated the proficiency required by this regular supervision and through in- paragraph using the following process: (1) spections conducted on at least an an- Confirm that the employee has the training required by paragraph (b) of this section, (2) nual basis, that each employee is com- use an examination or interview to make an plying with the safety-related work initial determination that the employee un- practices required by this subpart. derstands the relevant safety-related work (4) Additional training. An employee practices before he or she performs any work shall receive additional training (or re- covered by this subpart, and (3) supervise the training) under any of the following employee closely until that employee has conditions: demonstrated proficiency as required by this (i) If the supervision or annual in- paragraph. spections required by paragraph (b)(3) (c) Information transfer—(1) Host em- of this section indicate that the employer responsibilities. Before work be- ployee is not complying with the safe- gins, the host employer shall inform ty-related work practices required by contract employers of: this subpart, or (i) The characteristics of the host (ii) If new technology, new types of employer’s installation that are re- equipment, or changes in procedures lated to the safety of the work to be necessitate the use of safety-related performed and are listed in paragraphs work practices that are different from (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section; those which the employee would nor- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(i): This para- mally use, or graph requires the host employer to obtain (iii) If he or she must employ safety- information listed in paragraphs (d)(1) related work practices that are not through (d)(5) of this section if it does not normally used during his or her regular have this information in existing records. job duties. (ii) Conditions that are related to the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4)(iii): The Occupa- safety of the work to be performed, tional Safety and Health Administration that are listed in paragraphs (d)(6) considers tasks that are performed less often through (d)(8) of this section, and that than once per year to necessitate retraining are known to the host employer; before the performance of the work practices involved. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(ii): For the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer (5) Type of training. The training re- need only provide information to contract quired by paragraph (b) of this section employers that the host employer can obtain shall be of the classroom or on-the-job from its existing records through the exer- type. cise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph

455

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00465 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.951 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

does not require the host employer to make each employee of the contract em- inspections of worksite conditions to obtain ployer and the host employer is pro- this information. tected as required by this subpart. (iii) Information about the design (d) Existing characteristics and condi- and operation of the host employer’s tions. Existing characteristics and con- installation that the contract em- ditions of electric lines and equipment ployer needs to make the assessments that are related to the safety of the required by this subpart; and work to be performed shall be deter- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(iii): This para- mined before work on or near the lines graph requires the host employer to obtain or equipment is started. Such charac- information about the design and operation teristics and conditions include, but of its installation that contract employers are not limited to: need to make required assessments if it does not have this information in existing (1) The nominal voltages of lines and records. equipment, (2) The maximum switching-tran- (iv) Any other information about the design and operation of the host em- sient voltages, ployer’s installation that is known by (3) The presence of hazardous induced the host employer, that the contract voltages, employer requests, and that is related (4) The presence of protective to the protection of the contract em- grounds and equipment grounding con- ployer’s employees. ductors, (5) The locations of circuits and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(iv): For the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer equipment, including electric supply need only provide information to contract lines, communication lines, and fire- employers that the host employer can obtain protective signaling circuits, from its existing records through the exer- (6) The condition of protective cise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph grounds and equipment grounding con- does not require the host employer to make ductors, inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information. (7) The condition of poles, and (8) Environmental conditions relat- (2) Contract employer responsibilities. ing to safety. (i) The contract employer shall ensure that each of its employees is instructed [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, in the hazardous conditions relevant to 1979, as amended at 80 FR 60040, Oct. 5, 2015] the employee’s work that the contract employer is aware of as a result of in- § 1926.951 Medical services and first formation communicated to the con- aid. tract employer by the host employer (a) General. The employer shall pro- under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. vide medical services and first aid as (ii) Before work begins, the contract required in § 1926.50. employer shall advise the host em- (b) First-aid training. In addition to ployer of any unique hazardous condi- the requirements of § 1926.50, when em- tions presented by the contract employees are performing work on, or as- ployer’s work. sociated with, exposed lines or equip- (iii) The contract employer shall ad- ment energized at 50 volts or more, per- vise the host employer of any unantici- sons with first-aid training shall be pated hazardous conditions found dur- available as follows: ing the contract employer’s work that the host employer did not mention (1) Field work. For field work involv- under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. ing two or more employees at a work The contract employer shall provide location, at least two trained persons this information to the host employer shall be available. within 2 working days after discovering (2) Fixed work locations. For fixed the hazardous condition. work locations such as substations, the (3) Joint host- and contract-employer re- number of trained persons available sponsibilities. The contract employer shall be sufficient to ensure that each and the host employer shall coordinate employee exposed to electric shock can their work rules and procedures so that be reached within 4 minutes by a

456

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00466 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.953

trained person. However, where the ex- (e) Working alone. An employee work- isting number of employees is insuffi- ing alone need not conduct a job brief- cient to meet this requirement (at a re- ing. However, the employer shall en- mote substation, for example), each sure that the tasks to be performed are employee at the work location shall be planned as if a briefing were required. a trained employee. § 1926.953 Enclosed spaces. § 1926.952 Job briefing. (a) General. This section covers en- (a) Before each job—(1) Information closed spaces that may be entered by provided by the employer. In assigning employees. It does not apply to vented an employee or a group of employees to vaults if the employer makes a deter- perform a job, the employer shall pro- mination that the ventilation system vide the employee in charge of the job is operating to protect employees be- with all available information that re- fore they enter the space. This section lates to the determination of existing applies to routine entry into enclosed characteristics and conditions required spaces. If, after the employer takes the by § 1926.950(d). precautions given in this section and in (2) Briefing by the employee in charge. § 1926.965, the hazards remaining in the The employer shall ensure that the em- enclosed space endanger the life of an ployee in charge conducts a job brief- entrant or could interfere with an ening that meets paragraphs (b), (c), and trant’s escape from the space, then (d) of this section with the employees entry into the enclosed space must involved before they start each job. (b) Subjects to be covered. The briefing meet the permit space entry require- shall cover at least the following sub- ments of subpart AA of this part. For jects: Hazards associated with the job, routine entries where the hazards re- work procedures involved, special pre- maining in the enclosed space do not cautions, energy-source controls, and endanger the life of an entrant or personal protective equipment require- interfere with an entrant’s escape from ments. the space, this section applies in lieu of (c) Number of briefings—(1) At least one the permit-space entry requirements before each day or shift. If the work or contained in §§ 1926.1204 through operations to be performed during the 926.1211. work day or shift are repetitive and (b) Safe work practices. The employer similar, at least one job briefing shall shall ensure the use of safe work prac- be conducted before the start of the tices for entry into, and work in, en- first job of each day or shift. closed spaces and for rescue of employ- (2) Additional briefings. Additional job ees from such spaces. briefings shall be held if significant (c) Training. Each employee who en- changes, which might affect the safety ters an enclosed space or who serves as of the employees, occur during the an attendant shall be trained in the course of the work. hazards of enclosed-space entry, in en- (d) Extent of briefing—(1) Short discus- closed-space entry procedures, and in sion. A brief discussion is satisfactory enclosed-space rescue procedures. if the work involved is routine and if (d) Rescue equipment. Employers shall the employees, by virtue of training provide equipment to ensure the and experience, can reasonably be ex- prompt and safe rescue of employees pected to recognize and avoid the haz- from the enclosed space. ards involved in the job. (e) Evaluating potential hazards. Be- (2) Detailed discussion. A more exten- fore any entrance cover to an enclosed sive discussion shall be conducted: space is removed, the employer shall (i) If the work is complicated or par- determine whether it is safe to do so by ticularly hazardous, or checking for the presence of any at- (ii) If the employee cannot be ex- mospheric pressure or temperature dif- pected to recognize and avoid the haz- ferences and by evaluating whether ards involved in the job. there might be a hazardous atmosphere NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): The briefing must in the space. Any conditions making it address all the subjects listed in paragraph unsafe to remove the cover shall be (b) of this section. eliminated before the cover is removed.

457

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00467 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.953 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e): The determination used ensure that employees are not ex- called for in this paragraph may consist of a posed to the hazards posed by oxygen check of the conditions that might deficiency. foreseeably be in the enclosed space. For ex- (k) Testing for flammable gases and va- ample, the cover could be checked to see if it is hot and, if it is fastened in place, could be pors. Before an employee enters an en- loosened gradually to release any residual closed space, the internal atmosphere pressure. An evaluation also needs to be shall be tested for flammable gases and made of whether conditions at the site could vapors with a direct-reading meter or cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as an similar instrument capable of collec- oxygen-deficient or flammable atmosphere, tion and immediate analysis of data to develop within the space. samples without the need for off-site (f) Removing covers. When covers are evaluation. This test shall be per- removed from enclosed spaces, the formed after the oxygen testing and opening shall be promptly guarded by a ventilation required by paragraph (j) of railing, temporary cover, or other bar- this section demonstrate that there is rier designed to prevent an accidental sufficient oxygen to ensure the accu- fall through the opening and to protect racy of the test for flammability. employees working in the space from (l) Ventilation, and monitoring for flam- objects entering the space. mable gases or vapors. If flammable (g) Hazardous atmosphere. Employees gases or vapors are detected or if an oxygen deficiency is found, forced-air may not enter any enclosed space while ventilation shall be used to maintain it contains a hazardous atmosphere, oxygen at a safe level and to prevent a unless the entry conforms to the con- hazardous concentration of flammable fined spaces in construction standard gases and vapors from accumulating. A in subpart AA of this part. continuous monitoring program to en- (h) Attendants. While work is being sure that no increase in flammable gas performed in the enclosed space, an at- or vapor concentration above safe lev- tendant with first-aid training shall be els occurs may be followed in lieu of immediately available outside the en- ventilation if flammable gases or va- closed space to provide assistance if a pors are initially detected at safe lev- hazard exists because of traffic pat- els. terns in the area of the opening used for entry. The attendant is not pre- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (l): See the definition cluded from performing other duties of ‘‘hazardous atmosphere’’ for guidance in outside the enclosed space if these du- determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous. ties do not distract the attendant from: Monitoring employees within the space (m) Specific ventilation requirements. If or ensuring that it is safe for employ- continuous forced-air ventilation is ees to enter and exit the space. used, it shall begin before entry is made and shall be maintained long NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h): See § 1926.965 for enough for the employer to be able to additional requirements on attendants for demonstrate that a safe atmosphere ex- work in manholes and vaults. ists before employees are allowed to (i) Calibration of test instruments. Test enter the work area. The forced-air instruments used to monitor ventilation shall be so directed as to atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be ventilate the immediate area where kept in calibration and shall have a employees are present within the en- minimum accuracy of ±10 percent. closed space and shall continue until (j) Testing for oxygen deficiency. Be- all employees leave the enclosed space. fore an employee enters an enclosed (n) Air supply. The air supply for the space, the atmosphere in the enclosed continuous forced-air ventilation shall space shall be tested for oxygen defi- be from a clean source and may not in- ciency with a direct-reading meter or crease the hazards in the enclosed similar instrument, capable of collec- space. tion and immediate analysis of data (o) Open flames. If open flames are samples without the need for off-site used in enclosed spaces, a test for flam- evaluation. If continuous forced-air mable gases and vapors shall be made ventilation is provided, testing is not immediately before the open flame de- required provided that the procedures vice is used and at least once per hour

458

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00468 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.954

while the device is used in the space. (C) Hardware surfaces shall be Testing shall be conducted more fre- smooth and free of sharp edges. quently if conditions present in the en- (ii) Buckles shall be capable of with- closed space indicate that once per standing an 8.9-kilonewton (2,000- hour is insufficient to detect hazardous pound-force) tension test with a max- accumulations of flammable gases or imum permanent deformation no vapors. greater than 0.4 millimeters (0.0156 NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (o): See the definition inches). of ‘‘hazardous atmosphere’’ for guidance in (iii) D rings shall be capable of with- determining whether a specific concentra- standing a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound- tion of a substance is hazardous. force) tensile test without cracking or NOTE TO § 1926.953: Entries into enclosed breaking. spaces conducted in accordance with the permit space entry requirements of subpart AA (iv) Snaphooks shall be capable of of this part are considered as complying with withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000- this section. pound-force) tension test without failure. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015] NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(iv): Distortion of the snaphook sufficient to release the keeper § 1926.954 Personal protective equip- is considered to be tensile failure of a ment. snaphook. (a) General. Personal protective (v) Top grain leather or leather sub- equipment shall meet the requirements stitute may be used in the manufacture of subpart E of this part. of body belts and positioning straps; NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Paragraph (d) of however, leather and leather sub- § 1926.95 sets employer payment obligations stitutes may not be used alone as a for the personal protective equipment reload-bearing component of the assem- quired by this subpart, including, but not bly. limited to, the fall protection equipment required by paragraph (b) of this section, the (vi) Plied fabric used in positioning electrical protective equipment required by straps and in load-bearing parts of § 1926.960(c), and the flame-resistant and arc- body belts shall be constructed in such rated clothing and other protective equip- a way that no raw edges are exposed ment required by § 1926.960(g). and the plies do not separate. (b) Fall protection—(1) Personal fall ar- (vii) Positioning straps shall be capa- rest systems. (i) Personal fall arrest sys- ble of withstanding the following tests: tems shall meet the requirements of (A) A dielectric test of 819.7 volts, subpart M of this part. AC, per centimeter (25,000 volts per (ii) Personal fall arrest equipment foot) for 3 minutes without visible de- used by employees who are exposed to terioration; hazards from flames or electric arcs, as (B) A leakage test of 98.4 volts, AC, determined by the employer under per centimeter (3,000 volts per foot) § 1926.960(g)(1), shall be capable of pass- with a leakage current of no more than ing a drop test equivalent to that re- 1 mA; quired by paragraph (b)(2)(xii) of this section after exposure to an electric NOTE TO PARAGRAPHS (b)(2)(vii)(A) AND (b)(2)(vii)(B): Positioning straps that pass di- ± 2 arc with a heat energy of 40 5 cal/cm . rect-current tests at equivalent voltages are (2) Work-positioning equipment. Body considered as meeting this requirement. belts and positioning straps for work- positioning equipment shall meet the (C) Tension tests of 20 kilonewtons following requirements: (4,500 pounds-force) for sections free of (i) Hardware for body belts and posi- buckle holes and of 15 kilonewtons tioning straps shall meet the following (3,500 pounds-force) for sections with requirements: buckle holes; (A) Hardware shall be made of drop- (D) A buckle-tear test with a load of forged steel, pressed steel, formed 4.4 kilonewtons (1,000 pounds-force); steel, or equivalent material. and (B) Hardware shall have a corrosion- (E) A flammability test in accord- resistant finish. ance with Table V–1.

459

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00469 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.954 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE V–1—FLAMMABILITY TEST the mass of the equipped worker divided by 1.4). Test method Criteria for passing the test (B) For body belts, the body belt Vertically suspend a 500- Any flames on the positioning shall be fitted snugly around the test mm (19.7-inch) length of strap shall self extinguish. mass and shall be attached to the test- strapping supporting a structure anchorage point by means of 100-kg (220.5-lb) weight. Use a butane or propane The positioning strap shall con- a wire rope. burner with a 76-mm (3- tinue to support the 100-kg (C) For positioning straps, the strap inch) flame. (220.5-lb) mass. shall be adjusted to its shortest length Direct the flame to an edge of the strapping at a dis- possible to accommodate the test and tance of 25 mm (1 inch). connected to the test-structure anchor- Remove the flame after 5 age point at one end and to the test seconds. mass on the other end. Wait for any flames on the positioning strap to stop (D) The test mass shall be dropped an burning. unobstructed distance of 1 meter (39.4 inches) from a supporting structure (viii) The cushion part of the body that will sustain minimal deflection belt shall contain no exposed rivets on during the test. the inside and shall be at least 76 milli- (E) Body belts shall successfully ar- meters (3 inches) in width. rest the fall of the test mass and shall (ix) Tool loops shall be situated on be capable of supporting the mass after the body of a body belt so that the 100 the test. millimeters (4 inches) of the body belt (F) Positioning straps shall success- that is in the center of the back, meas- fully arrest the fall of the test mass uring from D ring to D ring, is free of without breaking, and the arrest force tool loops and any other attachments. may not exceed 17.8 kilonewtons (4,000 (x) Copper, steel, or equivalent liners pounds-force). Additionally, snaphooks shall be used around the bars of D rings on positioning straps may not distort to prevent wear between these mem- to such an extent that the keeper bers and the leather or fabric enclosing would release. them. (xi) Snaphooks shall be of the lock- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): When used by ing type meeting the following require- employees weighing no more than 140 kg (310 ments: lbm) fully equipped, body belts and positioning straps that conform to American So- (A) The locking mechanism shall ciety of Testing and Materials Standard Spec- first be released, or a destructive force ifications for Personal Climbing Equipment, shall be placed on the keeper, before ASTM F887–12e1, are deemed to be in compli- the keeper will open. ance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (B) A force in the range of 6.7 N (1.5 (3) Care and use of personal fall protec- lbf) to 17.8 N (4 lbf) shall be required to tion equipment. (i) Work-positioning release the locking mechanism. equipment shall be inspected before use (C) With the locking mechanism re- each day to determine that the equip- leased and with a force applied on the ment is in safe working condition. keeper against the face of the nose, the Work-positioning equipment that is keeper may not begin to open with a not in safe working condition may not force of 11.2 N (2.5 lbf) or less and shall be used. begin to open with a maximum force of 17.8 N (4 lbf). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(i): Appendix F to (xii) Body belts and positioning this subpart contains guidelines for inspect- straps shall be capable of withstanding ing work-positioning equipment. a drop test as follows: (ii) Personal fall arrest systems shall (A) The test mass shall be rigidly be used in accordance with § 1926.502(d). constructed of steel or equivalent material with a mass of 100 kg (220.5 lbm). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(ii): Fall protec- For work-positioning equipment used tion equipment rigged to arrest falls is considered a fall arrest system and must meet by employees weighing more than 140 the applicable requirements for the design kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, the test and use of those systems. Fall protection mass shall be increased proportion- equipment rigged for work positioning is ately (that is, the test mass must equal considered work-positioning equipment and

460

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00470 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.955

must meet the applicable requirements for tection any time they are more than 1.2 me- the design and use of that equipment. ters (4 feet) above the ground. (iii) The employer shall ensure that (iv) On and after April 1, 2015, work- employees use fall protection systems positioning systems shall be rigged so as follows: that an employee can free fall no more (A) Each employee working from an than 0.6 meters (2 feet). aerial lift shall use a fall restraint sys- (v) Anchorages for work-positioning tem or a personal fall arrest system. equipment shall be capable of sup- Paragraph (b)(2)(v) of § 1926.453 does not porting at least twice the potential im- apply. pact load of an employee’s fall, or 13.3 (B) Except as provided in paragraph kilonewtons (3,000 pounds-force), (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section, each em- whichever is greater. ployee in elevated locations more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground on NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(v): Wood-pole poles, towers, or similar structures fall-restriction devices meeting American shall use a personal fall arrest system, Society of Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment, work-positioning equipment, or fall re- ASTM F887–12e1, are deemed to meet the an- straint system, as appropriate, if the chorage-strength requirement when they are employer has not provided other fall used in accordance with manufacturers’ in- protection meeting subpart M of this structions. part. (vi) Unless the snaphook is a locking (C) Until March 31, 2015, a qualified employee climbing or changing loca- type and designed specifically for the tion on poles, towers, or similar struc- following connections, snaphooks on tures need not use fall protection work-positioning equipment may not equipment, unless conditions, such as, be engaged: but not limited to, ice, high winds, the (A) Directly to webbing, rope, or wire design of the structure (for example, no rope; provision for holding on with hands), or (B) To each other; the presence of contaminants on the (C) To a D ring to which another structure, could cause the employee to snaphook or other connector is at- lose his or her grip or footing. On and tached; after April 1, 2015, each qualified em- (D) To a horizontal lifeline; or ployee climbing or changing location (E) To any object that is incom- on poles, towers, or similar structures patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- must use fall protection equipment un- tion to the snaphook such that acci- less the employer can demonstrate dental disengagement could occur that climbing or changing location should the connected object suffi- with fall protection is infeasible or cre- ciently depress the snaphook keeper to ates a greater hazard than climbing or allow release of the object. changing location without it. § 1926.955 Portable ladders and plat- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPHS (b)(3)(iii)(B) AND forms. (b)(3)(iii)(C): These paragraphs apply to structures that support overhead electric (a) General. Requirements for port- power transmission and distribution lines able ladders contained in subpart X of and equipment. They do not apply to por- this part apply in addition to the re- tions of buildings, such as loading docks, or quirements of this section, except as to electric equipment, such as transformers and capacitors. Subpart M of this part con- specifically noted in paragraph (b) of tains the duty to provide fall protection as- this section. sociated with walking and working surfaces. (b) Special ladders and platforms. Port- NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPHS (b)(3)(iii)(B) AND able ladders used on structures or con- (b)(3)(iii)(C): Until the employer ensures that ductors in conjunction with overhead employees are proficient in climbing and the line work need not meet use of fall protection under § 1926.950(b)(7), § 1926.1053(b)(5)(i) and (b)(12). Portable the employees are not considered ‘‘qualified employees’’ for the purposes of paragraphs ladders and platforms used on struc- (b)(3)(iii)(B) and (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section. tures or conductors in conjunction These paragraphs require unqualified em- with overhead line work shall meet the ployees (including trainees) to use fall pro- following requirements:

461

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00471 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.956 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(1) Design load. In the configurations generators used to supply cord- and in which they are used, portable plat- plug-connected equipment covered by forms shall be capable of supporting paragraph (b) of this section shall meet without failure at least 2.5 times the the following requirements: maximum intended load. (1) Equipment to be supplied. The gen- (2) Maximum load. Portable ladders erator may only supply equipment lo- and platforms may not be loaded in ex- cated on the generator or the vehicle cess of the working loads for which and cord- and plug-connected equip- they are designed. ment through receptacles mounted on (3) Securing in place. Portable ladders the generator or the vehicle. and platforms shall be secured to pre- (2) Equipment grounding. The non-cur- vent them from becoming dislodged. rent-carrying metal parts of equipment (4) Intended use. Portable ladders and and the equipment grounding con- platforms may be used only in applica- ductor terminals of the receptacles tions for which they are designed. shall be bonded to the generator frame. (c) Conductive ladders. Portable metal (3) Bonding the frame. For vehicle- ladders and other portable conductive mounted generators, the frame of the ladders may not be used near exposed generator shall be bonded to the vehi- energized lines or equipment. However, cle frame. in specialized high-voltage work, con- (4) Bonding the neutral conductor. Any ductive ladders shall be used when the neutral conductor shall be bonded to employer demonstrates that non- the generator frame. conductive ladders would present a (d) Hydraulic and pneumatic tools—(1) greater hazard to employees than con- Hydraulic fluid in insulating tools. Para- ductive ladders. graph (d)(1) of § 1926.302 does not apply to hydraulic fluid used in insulating § 1926.956 Hand and portable power sections of hydraulic tools. equipment. (2) Operating pressure. Safe operating (a) General. Paragraph (b) of this sec- pressures for hydraulic and pneumatic tion applies to electric equipment con- tools, hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and nected by cord and plug. Paragraph (c) fittings may not be exceeded. of this section applies to portable and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(2): If any hazardous vehicle-mounted generators used to defects are present, no operating pressure is supply cord- and plug-connected equip- safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equipment. Paragraph (d) of this section ap- ment involved may not be used. In the ab- plies to hydraulic and pneumatic tools. sence of defects, the maximum rated operating pressure is the maximum safe pressure. (b) Cord- and plug-connected equipment. Cord- and plug-connected equip- (3) Work near energized parts. A hy- ment not covered by subpart K of this draulic or pneumatic tool used where it part shall comply with one of the fol- may contact exposed energized parts lowing instead of § 1926.302(a)(1): shall be designed and maintained for (1) The equipment shall be equipped such use. with a cord containing an equipment (4) Protection against vacuum forma- grounding conductor connected to the tion. The hydraulic system supplying a equipment frame and to a means for hydraulic tool used where it may con- grounding the other end of the contact exposed live parts shall provide ductor (however, this option may not protection against loss of insulating be used where the introduction of the value, for the voltage involved, due to ground into the work environment in- the formation of a partial vacuum in creases the hazard to an employee); or the hydraulic line. (2) The equipment shall be of the dou- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(4): Use of hydraulic ble-insulated type conforming to sub- lines that do not have check valves and that part K of this part; or have a separation of more than 10.7 meters (3) The equipment shall be connected (35 feet) between the oil reservoir and the to the power supply through an iso- upper end of the hydraulic system promotes lating transformer with an ungrounded the formation of a partial vacuum. secondary of not more than 50 volts. (5) Protection against the accumulation (c) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- of moisture. A pneumatic tool used on erators. Portable and vehicle-mounted energized electric lines or equipment,

462

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00472 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.958

or used where it may contact exposed (ii) If a defect or contamination that live parts, shall provide protection could adversely affect the insulating against the accumulation of moisture qualities or mechanical integrity of in the air supply. the live-line tool is found, the tool (6) Breaking connections. Pressure shall be repaired and refinished or shall shall be released before connections are be permanently removed from service. broken, unless quick-acting, self-clos- If no such defect or contamination is ing connectors are used. found, the tool shall be cleaned and (7) Leaks. Employers must ensure waxed. that employees do not use any part of (iii) The tool shall be tested in ac- their bodies to locate, or attempt to cordance with paragraphs (b)(3)(iv) and stop, a hydraulic leak. (b)(3)(v) of this section under the fol- (8) Hoses. Hoses may not be kinked. lowing conditions: (A) After the tool has been repaired § 1926.957 Live-line tools. or refinished; and (a) Design of tools. Live-line tool rods, (B) After the examination if repair or tubes, and poles shall be designed and refinishing is not performed, unless the constructed to withstand the following tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled minimum tests: FRP tube and the employer can dem- (1) Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. If the onstrate that the tool has no defects tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced that could cause it to fail during use. plastic (FRP), it shall withstand 328,100 (iv) The test method used shall be de- volts per meter (100,000 volts per foot) signed to verify the tool’s integrity of length for 5 minutes, or along its entire working length and, if the tool is made of fiberglass-rein- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(1): Live-line tools forced plastic, its integrity under wet using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711–02 (2007), Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Re- conditions. inforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in (v) The voltage applied during the Live Line Tools, are deemed to comply with tests shall be as follows: paragraph (a)(1) of this section. (A) 246,100 volts per meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if (2) Wood. If the tool is made of wood, the tool is made of fiberglass, or it shall withstand 246,100 volts per (B) 164,000 volts per meter (50,000 meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if for 3 minutes, or the tool is made of wood, or (3) Equivalent tests. The tool shall (C) Other tests that the employer can withstand other tests that the em- demonstrate are equivalent. ployer can demonstrate are equivalent. (b) Condition of tools—(1) Daily inspec- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): Guidelines for the tion. Each live-line tool shall be wiped examination, cleaning, repairing, and in- clean and visually inspected for defects service testing of live-line tools are specified in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics before use each day. Engineers’ IEEE Guide for Maintenance Meth- (2) Defects. If any defect or contami- ods on Energized Power Lines, IEEE Std 516– nation that could adversely affect the 2009. insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is present § 1926.958 Materials handling and stor- after wiping, the tool shall be removed age. from service and examined and tested (a) General. Materials handling and according to paragraph (b)(3) of this storage shall comply with applicable section before being returned to serv- material-handling and material-stor- ice. age requirements in this part, includ- (3) Biennial inspection and testing. ing those in subparts N and CC of this Live-line tools used for primary em- part. ployee protection shall be removed (b) Materials storage near energized from service every 2 years, and when- lines or equipment—(1) Unrestricted ever required under paragraph (b)(2) of areas. In areas to which access is not this section, for examination, cleaning, restricted to qualified persons only, repair, and testing as follows: materials or equipment may not be (i) Each tool shall be thoroughly ex- stored closer to energized lines or examined for defects. posed energized parts of equipment

463

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00473 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.959 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

than the following distances, plus a (3) Operation without outriggers. If the distance that provides for the max- work area or the terrain precludes the imum sag and side swing of all conduc- use of outriggers, the equipment may tors and for the height and movement be operated only within its maximum of material-handling equipment: load ratings specified by the equipment (i) For lines and equipment energized manufacturer for the particular con- at 50 kilovolts or less, the distance is figuration of the equipment without 3.05 meters (10 feet). outriggers. (ii) For lines and equipment ener- (c) Applied loads. Mechanical equip- gized at more than 50 kilovolts, the dis- ment used to lift or move lines or other tance is 3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 material shall be used within its max- meter (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts imum load rating and other design lim- over 50 kilovolts. itations for the conditions under which (2) Restricted areas. In areas restricted the mechanical equipment is being to qualified employees, materials may used. not be stored within the working space (d) Operations near energized lines or about energized lines or equipment. equipment—(1) Minimum approach distance. Mechanical equipment shall be NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2): Paragraph (b) of operated so that the minimum ap- § 1926.966 specifies the size of the working proach distances, established by the space. employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), are maintained from exposed energized § 1926.959 Mechanical equipment. lines and equipment. However, the in- (a) General requirements—(1) Other ap- sulated portion of an aerial lift oper- plicable requirements. Mechanical equip- ated by a qualified employee in the lift ment shall be operated in accordance is exempt from this requirement if the with applicable requirements in this applicable minimum approach distance part, including subparts N, O, and CC is maintained between the uninsulated of this part, except that § 1926.600(a)(6) portions of the aerial lift and exposed does not apply to operations performed objects having a different electrical po- by qualified employees. tential. (2) Inspection before use. The critical (2) Observer. A designated employee safety components of mechanical ele- other than the equipment operator vating and rotating equipment shall re- shall observe the approach distance to ceive a thorough visual inspection be- exposed lines and equipment and pro- fore use on each shift. vide timely warnings before the minimum approach distance required by NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2): Critical safety paragraph (d)(1) of this section is components of mechanical elevating and ro- reached, unless the employer can dem- tating equipment are components for which failure would result in free fall or free rota- onstrate that the operator can accu- tion of the boom. rately determine that the minimum approach distance is being maintained. (3) Operator. The operator of an elec- (3) Extra precautions. If, during oper- tric line truck may not leave his or her ation of the mechanical equipment, position at the controls while a load is that equipment could become ener- suspended, unless the employer can gized, the operation also shall comply demonstrate that no employee (includ- with at least one of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) ing the operator) is endangered. through (d)(3)(iii) of this section. (b) Outriggers—(1) Extend outriggers. (i) The energized lines or equipment Mobile equipment, if provided with exposed to contact shall be covered outriggers, shall be operated with the with insulating protective material outriggers extended and firmly set, ex- that will withstand the type of contact cept as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of that could be made during the oper- this section. ation. (2) Clear view. Outriggers may not be (ii) The mechanical equipment shall extended or retracted outside of the be insulated for the voltage involved. clear view of the operator unless all The mechanical equipment shall be po- employees are outside the range of pos- sitioned so that its uninsulated por- sible equipment motion. tions cannot approach the energized

464

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00474 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.960

lines or equipment any closer than the shall be present while any employees minimum approach distances, estab- perform the following types of work: lished by the employer under (A) Installation, removal, or repair of § 1926.960(c)(1)(i). lines energized at more than 600 volts, (iii) Each employee shall be pro- (B) Installation, removal, or repair of tected from hazards that could arise deenergized lines if an employee is ex- from mechanical equipment contact posed to contact with other parts ener- with energized lines or equipment. The gized at more than 600 volts, measures used shall ensure that em- (C) Installation, removal, or repair of ployees will not be exposed to haz- equipment, such as transformers, ca- ardous differences in electric potential. pacitors, and regulators, if an em- Unless the employer can demonstrate ployee is exposed to contact with parts that the methods in use protect each energized at more than 600 volts, employee from the hazards that could (D) Work involving the use of me- arise if the mechanical equipment con- chanical equipment, other than insu- tacts the energized line or equipment, lated aerial lifts, near parts energized the measures used shall include all of at more than 600 volts, and the following techniques: (E) Other work that exposes an em- (A) Using the best available ground ployee to electrical hazards greater to minimize the time the lines or elec- than, or equal to, the electrical hazards tric equipment remain energized, posed by operations listed specifically (B) Bonding mechanical equipment in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) through together to minimize potential dif- (b)(3)(i)(D) of this section. ferences, (ii) Paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section (C) Providing ground mats to extend does not apply to the following oper- areas of equipotential, and ations: (D) Employing insulating protective (A) Routine circuit switching, when equipment or barricades to guard the employer can demonstrate that against any remaining hazardous elec- conditions at the site allow safe per- trical potential differences. formance of this work, (B) Work performed with live-line NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(3)(iii): Appendix C to this subpart contains information on haz- tools when the position of the em- ardous step and touch potentials and on ployee is such that he or she is neither methods of protecting employees from haz- within reach of, nor otherwise exposed ards resulting from such potentials. to contact with, energized parts, and (C) Emergency repairs to the extent § 1926.960 Working on or near exposed necessary to safeguard the general pub- energized parts. lic. (a) Application. This section applies (c) Live work—(1) Minimum approach to work on exposed live parts, or near distances. (i) The employer shall estab- enough to them to expose the employee lish minimum approach distances no to any hazard they present. less than the distances computed by (b) General—(1) Qualified employees Table V–2 for ac systems or Table V–7 only. (i) Only qualified employees may for dc systems. work on or with exposed energized (ii) No later than April 1, 2015, for lines or parts of equipment. voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the em- (ii) Only qualified employees may ployer shall determine the maximum work in areas containing unguarded, anticipated per-unit transient over- uninsulated energized lines or parts of voltage, phase-to-ground, through an equipment operating at 50 volts or engineering analysis or assume a max- more. imum anticipated per-unit transient (2) Treat as energized. Electric lines overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in ac- and equipment shall be considered and cordance with Table V–8. When the em- treated as energized unless they have ployer uses portable protective gaps to been deenergized in accordance with control the maximum transient over- § 1926.961. voltage, the value of the maximum an- (3) At least two employees. (i) Except ticipated per-unit transient over- as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of voltage, phase-to-ground, must provide this section, at least two employees for five standard deviations between

465

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00475 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.960 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the statistical sparkover voltage of the not expose his or her upper arm to con- gap and the statistical withstand volt- tact with other energized parts. age corresponding to the electrical (ii) When an employee uses rubber in- component of the minimum approach sulating gloves or rubber insulating distance. The employer shall make any gloves and sleeves as insulation from engineering analysis conducted to deenergized parts (under paragraph termine maximum anticipated per-unit (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section), the em- transient overvoltage available upon ployer shall ensure that the employee: request to employees and to the Assist- (A) Puts on the rubber insulating ant Secretary or designee for examina- gloves and sleeves in a position where tion and copying. he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(1)(ii): See appendix B to this subpart for information on how to by the employer under paragraph (c)(1) calculate the maximum anticipated per-unit of this section; and transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, (B) Does not remove the rubber insu- when the employer uses portable protective lating gloves and sleeves until he or gaps to reduce maximum transient she is in a position where he or she overvoltages. cannot reach into the minimum ap- (iii) The employer shall ensure that proach distance, established by the em- no employee approaches or takes any ployer under paragraph (c)(1) of this conductive object closer to exposed en- section. ergized parts than the employer’s es- (d) Working position—(1) Working from tablished minimum approach distance, below. The employer shall ensure that unless: each employee, to the extent that (A) The employee is insulated from other safety-related conditions at the the energized part (rubber insulating worksite permit, works in a position gloves or rubber insulating gloves and from which a slip or shock will not sleeves worn in accordance with para- bring the employee’s body into contact graph (c)(2) of this section constitutes with exposed, uninsulated parts ener- insulation of the employee from the gized at a potential different from the energized part upon which the em- employee’s. ployee is working provided that the (2) Requirements for working without employee has control of the part in a electrical protective equipment. When an manner sufficient to prevent exposure employee performs work near exposed to uninsulated portions of the employ- parts energized at more than 600 volts, ee’s body), or but not more than 72.5 kilovolts, and is (B) The energized part is insulated not wearing rubber insulating gloves, from the employee and from any other being protected by insulating equip- conductive object at a different poten- ment covering the energized parts, per- tial, or forming work using live-line tools, or (C) The employee is insulated from performing live-line barehand work any other exposed conductive object in under § 1926.964(c), the employee shall accordance with the requirements for work from a position where he or she live-line barehand work in § 1926.964(c). cannot reach into the minimum ap- (2) Type of insulation. (i) When an em- proach distance, established by the employee uses rubber insulating gloves as ployer under paragraph (c)(1) of this insulation from energized parts (under section. paragraph (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section), (e) Making connections. The employer the employer shall ensure that the em- shall ensure that employees make con- ployee also uses rubber insulating nections as follows: sleeves. However, an employee need not (1) Connecting. In connecting deener- use rubber insulating sleeves if: gized equipment or lines to an ener- (A) Exposed energized parts on which gized circuit by means of a conducting the employee is not working are insu- wire or device, an employee shall first lated from the employee; and attach the wire to the deenergized (B) When installing insulation for part; purposes of paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A) of (2) Disconnecting. When disconnecting this section, the employee installs the equipment or lines from an energized insulation from a position that does circuit by means of a conducting wire

466

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00476 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.960

or device, an employee shall remove could ignite and continue to burn when the source end first; and exposed to flames or the heat energy (3) Loose conductors. When lines or estimated under paragraph (g)(2) of equipment are connected to or discon- this section. nected from energized circuits, an employee shall keep loose conductors NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(3): This paragraph prohibits clothing made from acetate, nylon, away from exposed energized parts. polyester, rayon and polypropylene, either (f) Conductive articles. When an em- alone or in blends, unless the employer dem- ployee performs work within reaching onstrates that the fabric has been treated to distance of exposed energized parts of withstand the conditions that may be en- equipment, the employer shall ensure countered by the employee or that the em- that the employee removes or renders ployee wears the clothing in such a manner nonconductive all exposed conductive as to eliminate the hazard involved. articles, such as keychains or watch (4) Flame-resistant clothing. The em- chains, rings, or wrist watches or ployer shall ensure that the outer layer bands, unless such articles do not in- of clothing worn by an employee, ex- crease the hazards associated with concept for clothing not required to be arc tact with the energized parts. rated under paragraphs (g)(5)(i) (g) Protection from flames and electric through (g)(5)(v) of this section, is arcs—(1) Hazard assessment. The em- flame resistant under any of the fol- ployer shall assess the workplace to lowing conditions: identify employees exposed to hazards (i) The employee is exposed to con- from flames or from electric arcs. tact with energized circuit parts oper- (2) Estimate of available heat energy. ating at more than 600 volts, For each employee exposed to hazards (ii) An electric arc could ignite flam- from electric arcs, the employer shall mable material in the work area that, make a reasonable estimate of the inci- in turn, could ignite the employee’s dent heat energy to which the em- clothing, ployee would be exposed. (iii) Molten metal or electric arcs NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g)(2): Appendix E to from faulted conductors in the work this subpart provides guidance on estimating area could ignite the employee’s cloth- available heat energy. The Occupational ing, or Safety and Health Administration will deem employers following the guidance in appen- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(4)(iii): This para- dix E to this subpart to be in compliance graph does not apply to conductors that are with paragraph (g)(2) of this section. An em- capable of carrying, without failure, the ployer may choose a method of calculating maximum available fault current for the incident heat energy not included in appen- time the circuit protective devices take to dix E to this subpart if the chosen method interrupt the fault. reasonably predicts the incident energy to which the employee would be exposed. (iv) The incident heat energy esti- NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (g)(2): This para- mated under paragraph (g)(2) of this graph does not require the employer to esti- section exceeds 2.0 cal/cm2. mate the incident heat energy exposure for (5) Arc rating. The employer shall en- every job task performed by each employee. sure that each employee exposed to The employer may make broad estimates hazards from electric arcs wears pro- that cover multiple system areas provided tective clothing and other protective the employer uses reasonable assumptions about the energy-exposure distribution equipment with an arc rating greater throughout the system and provided the esti- than or equal to the heat energy estimates represent the maximum employee ex- mated under paragraph (g)(2) of this posure for those areas. For example, the em- section whenever that estimate exceeds ployer could estimate the heat energy just 2.0 cal/cm2. This protective equipment outside a substation feeding a radial dis- shall cover the employee’s entire body, tribution system and use that estimate for except as follows: all jobs performed on that radial system. (i) Arc-rated protection is not nec- (3) Prohibited clothing. The employer essary for the employee’s hands when shall ensure that each employee who is the employee is wearing rubber insu- exposed to hazards from flames or elec- lating gloves with protectors or, if the tric arcs does not wear clothing that estimated incident energy is no more could melt onto his or her skin or that than 14 cal/cm2, heavy-duty leather

467

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00477 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.960 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

work gloves with a weight of at least to hazards from electric arcs wears the 407 gm/m2 (12 oz/yd2), required arc-rated protective equip- (ii) Arc-rated protection is not nec- ment commences April 1, 2015. essary for the employee’s feet when the (h) Fuse handling. When an employee employee is wearing heavy-duty work must install or remove fuses with one shoes or boots, or both terminals energized at more (iii) Arc-rated protection is not nec- than 300 volts, or with exposed parts essary for the employee’s head when energized at more than 50 volts, the the employee is wearing head protec- employer shall ensure that the em- tion meeting § 1926.100(b)(2) if the esti- ployee uses tools or gloves rated for mated incident energy is less than 9 the voltage. When an employee installs cal/cm2 for exposures involving single- or removes expulsion-type fuses with phase arcs in open air or 5 cal/cm2 for one or both terminals energized at other exposures, more than 300 volts, the employer shall (iv) The protection for the employ- ensure that the employee wears eye ee’s head may consist of head protec- protection meeting the requirements of tion meeting § 1926.100(b)(2) and a subpart E of this part, uses a tool rated faceshield with a minimum arc rating for the voltage, and is clear of the ex- of 8 cal/cm2 if the estimated incident- haust path of the fuse barrel. energy exposure is less than 13 cal/cm2 (i) Covered (noninsulated) conductors. for exposures involving single-phase The requirements of this section that arcs in open air or 9 cal/cm2 for other pertain to the hazards of exposed live exposures, and parts also apply when an employee per- (v) For exposures involving single- forms work in proximity to covered phase arcs in open air, the arc rating (noninsulated) wires. for the employee’s head and face pro- (j) Non-current-carrying metal parts. tection may be 4 cal/cm2 less than the Non-current-carrying metal parts of estimated incident energy. equipment or devices, such as transformer cases and circuit-breaker NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g): See appendix E to housings, shall be treated as energized this subpart for further information on the at the highest voltage to which these selection of appropriate protection. parts are exposed, unless the employer (6) Dates. (i) The obligation in para- inspects the installation and deter- graph (g)(2) of this section for the em- mines that these parts are grounded ployer to make reasonable estimates of before employees begin performing the incident energy commences January 1, work. 2015. (k) Opening and closing circuits under (ii) The obligation in paragraph load. (1) The employer shall ensure that (g)(4)(iv) of this section for the em- devices used by employees to open cir- ployer to ensure that the outer layer of cuits under load conditions are de- clothing worn by an employee is flame- signed to interrupt the current in- resistant when the estimated incident volved. heat energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm2 com- (2) The employer shall ensure that mences April 1, 2015. devices used by employees to close cir- (iii) The obligation in paragraph cuits under load conditions are de- (g)(5) of this section for the employer signed to safely carry the current in- to ensure that each employee exposed volved.

468

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00478 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.960

469

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00479 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.034 § 1926.960 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

470

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00480 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.035 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.960

TABLE V–3—ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF THE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE (D; IN METERS) AT 5.1 TO 72.5 KV

Phase-to-ground Phase-to-phase Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase exposure exposure D (m) D (m)

5.1 to 15.0 ...... 0.04 0.07 15.1 to 36.0 ...... 0.16 0.28 36.1 to 46.0 ...... 0.23 0.37 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 0.39 0.59

TABLE V–4—ALTITUDE CORRECTION FACTOR TABLE V–4—ALTITUDE CORRECTION FACTOR— Continued Altitude above sea level (m) A Altitude above sea level (m) A 0 to 900 ...... 1.00 901 to 1,200 ...... 1.02 3,001 to 3,600 ...... 1.25 1,201 to 1,500 ...... 1.05 1,501 to 1,800 ...... 1.08 3,601 to 4,200 ...... 1.30 1,801 to 2,100 ...... 1.11 4,201 to 4,800 ...... 1.35 2,101 to 2,400 ...... 1.14 4,801 to 5,400 ...... 1.39 2,401 to 2,700 ...... 1.17 5,401 to 6,000 ...... 1.44 2,701 to 3,000 ...... 1.20

TABLE V–5—ALTERNATIVE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES FOR VOLTAGES OF 72.5 KV AND LESS 1

Distance Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft

0.050 0.300 2 ...... Avoid contact Avoid contact

0.301 to 0.750 2 ...... 0.33 1.09 0.33 1.09 0.751 to 5.0 ...... 0.63 2.07 0.63 2.07 5.1 to 15.0 ...... 0.65 2.14 0.68 2.24 15.1 to 36.0 ...... 0.77 2.53 0.89 2.92 36.1 to 46.0 ...... 0.84 2.76 0.98 3.22 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 1.00 3.29 1.20 3.94

TABLE V–6—ALTERNATIVE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES FOR VOLTAGES OF MORE THAN 72.5 KV 123

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure Voltage range phase to phase (kV) m ft m ft

72.6 to 121.0 ...... 1.13 3.71 1.42 4.66 121.1 to 145.0 ...... 1.30 4.27 1.64 5.38 145.1 to 169.0 ...... 1.46 4.79 1.94 6.36 169.1 to 242.0 ...... 2.01 6.59 3.08 10.10 242.1 to 362.0 ...... 3.41 11.19 5.52 18.11 362.1 to 420.0 ...... 4.25 13.94 6.81 22.34 420.1 to 550.0 ...... 5.07 16.63 8.24 27.03 550.1 to 800.0 ...... 6.88 22.57 11.38 37.34

1 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table V–4 corresponding to the altitude of the work. 2 Employers may use the phase-to-phase minimum approach distances in this table provided that no insulated tool spans the gap and no large conductive object is in the gap. 3 The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or exceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges.

471

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00481 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.961 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE V–7—DC LIVE-LINE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE (IN METERS) WITH OVERVOLTAGE FACTOR 1

distance (m) Maximum anticipated per-unit maximum line-to-ground voltage (kV) transient overvoltage 250 400 500 600 750

1.5 or less...... 1.12 1.60 2.06 2.62 3.61 1.6 ...... 1.17 1.69 2.24 2.86 3.98 1.7 ...... 1.23 1.82 2.42 3.12 4.37 1.8 ...... 1.28 1.95 2.62 3.39 4.79 1 The distances specified in this table are for air, bare-hand, and live-line tool conditions. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table V–4 corresponding to the altitude of the work.

TABLE V–8—ASSUMED MAXIMUM PER-UNIT TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE

Assumed maximum Voltage range Type of current per-unit transient (kV) (ac or dc) overvoltage

72.6 to 420.0 ...... ac 3.5 420.1 to 550.0 ...... ac 3.0 550.1 to 800.0 ...... ac 2.5 250 to 750 ...... dc 1.8

[79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 60040, Oct. 5, 2015]

§ 1926.961 Deenergizing lines and employee in charge of the clearance. If equipment for employee protection. only one crew will be working on the (a) Application. This section applies lines or equipment and if the means of to the deenergizing of transmission and disconnection is accessible and visible distribution lines and equipment for to, and under the sole control of, the the purpose of protecting employees. employee in charge of the clearance, Conductors and parts of electric equip- paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(3), and (c)(5) of ment that have been deenergized under this section do not apply. Additionally, procedures other than those required the employer does not need to use the by this section shall be treated as ener- tags required by the remaining provi- gized. sions of paragraph (c) of this section. (b) General—(1) System operator. If a (4) Multiple crews. If two or more system operator is in charge of the crews will be working on the same lines or equipment and their means of lines or equipment, then: disconnection, the employer shall des- (i) The crews shall coordinate their ignate one employee in the crew to be activities under this section with a sin- in charge of the clearance and shall gle employee in charge of the clearance comply with all of the requirements of for all of the crews and follow the re- paragraph (c) of this section in the quirements of this section as if all of order specified. the employees formed a single crew, or (2) No system operator. If no system (ii) Each crew shall independently operator is in charge of the lines or equipment and their means of dis- comply with this section and, if there connection, the employer shall des- is no system operator in charge of the ignate one employee in the crew to be lines or equipment, shall have separate in charge of the clearance and to per- tags and coordinate deenergizing and form the functions that the system op- reenergizing the lines and equipment erator would otherwise perform under with the other crews. this section. All of the requirements of (5) Disconnecting means accessible to paragraph (c) of this section apply, in general public. The employer shall the order specified, except as provided render any disconnecting means that in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. are accessible to individuals outside (3) Single crews working with the means the employer’s control (for example, of disconnection under the control of the the general public) inoperable while

472

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00482 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.961

the disconnecting means are open for network protector in a closed position, the purpose of protecting employees. that: The line connected to the net- (c) Deenergizing lines and equipment— work protector is not deenergized for (1) Request to deenergize. The employee the protection of any employee work- that the employer designates pursuant ing on the line; and (if the line con- to paragraph (b) of this section as nected to the network protector is not being in charge of the clearance shall deenergized for the protection of any make a request of the system operator employee working on the line) the pri- to deenergize the particular section of mary conductors for the network pro- line or equipment. The designated em- tector are energized. ployee becomes the employee in charge (5) Tags. Tags shall prohibit oper- (as this term is used in paragraph (c) of ation of the disconnecting means and this section) and is responsible for the shall indicate that employees are at clearance. work. (2) Open disconnecting means. The em- (6) Test for energized condition. After ployer shall ensure that all switches, the applicable requirements in para- disconnectors, jumpers, taps, and other graphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this sec- means through which known sources of tion have been followed and the system electric energy may be supplied to the operator gives a clearance to the em- particular lines and equipment to be ployee in charge, the employer shall deenergized are open. The employer ensure that the lines and equipment shall render such means inoperable, un- are deenergized by testing the lines and less its design does not so permit, and equipment to be worked with a device then ensure that such means are designed to detect voltage. tagged to indicate that employees are (7) Install grounds. The employer shall at work. ensure the installation of protective (3) Automatically and remotely con- grounds as required by § 1926.962. trolled switches. The employer shall en- (8) Consider lines and equipment deen- sure that automatically and remotely ergized. After the applicable require- controlled switches that could cause ments of paragraphs (c)(1) through the opened disconnecting means to (c)(7) of this section have been fol- close are also tagged at the points of lowed, the lines and equipment in- control. The employer shall render the volved may be considered deenergized. automatic or remote control feature (9) Transferring clearances. To transfer inoperable, unless its design does not the clearance, the employee in charge so permit. (or the employee’s supervisor if the (4) Network protectors. The employer employee in charge must leave the need not use the tags mentioned in worksite due to illness or other emer- paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this sec- gency) shall inform the system oper- tion on a network protector for work ator and employees in the crew; and on the primary feeder for the network the new employee in charge shall be re- protector’s associated network trans- sponsible for the clearance. former when the employer can dem- (10) Releasing clearances. To release a onstrate all of the following condi- clearance, the employee in charge tions: shall: (i) Every network protector is main- (i) Notify each employee under that tained so that it will immediately trip clearance of the pending release of the open if closed when a primary con- clearance; ductor is deenergized; (ii) Ensure that all employees under (ii) Employees cannot manually that clearance are clear of the lines place any network protector in a closed and equipment; position without the use of tools, and (iii) Ensure that all protective any manual override position is grounds protecting employees under blocked, locked, or otherwise disabled; that clearance have been removed; and and (iv) Report this information to the (iii) The employer has procedures for system operator and then release the manually overriding any network pro- clearance. tector that incorporate provisions for (11) Person releasing clearance. Only determining, before anyone places a the employee in charge who requested

473

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00483 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.962 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the clearance may release the clear- ergized under the provisions of ance, unless the employer transfers re- § 1926.961. sponsibility under paragraph (c)(9) of (2) No possibility of contact. There is this section. no possibility of contact with another (12) Removal of tags. No one may reenergized source. move tags without the release of the (3) No induced voltage. The hazard of associated clearance as specified under induced voltage is not present. paragraphs (c)(10) and (c)(11) of this (c) Equipotential zone. Temporary pro- section. tective grounds shall be placed at such (13) Reenergizing lines and equipment. locations and arranged in such a man- The employer shall ensure that no one ner that the employer can demonstrate initiates action to reenergize the lines will prevent each employee from being or equipment at a point of disconnec- exposed to hazardous differences in tion until all protective grounds have electric potential. been removed, all crews working on the lines or equipment release their clear- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c): Appendix C to this subpart contains guidelines for establishing ances, all employees are clear of the the equipotential zone required by this para- lines and equipment, and all protective graph. The Occupational Safety and Health tags are removed from that point of Administration will deem grounding prac- disconnection. tices meeting these guidelines as complying with paragraph (c) of this section. § 1926.962 Grounding for the protection of employees. (d) Protective grounding equipment—(1) Ampacity. (i) Protective grounding (a) Application. This section applies equipment shall be capable of con- to grounding of transmission and dis- ducting the maximum fault current tribution lines and equipment for the that could flow at the point of ground- purpose of protecting employees. Para- ing for the time necessary to clear the graph (d) of this section also applies to fault. protective grounding of other equip- (ii) Protective grounding equipment ment as required elsewhere in this Sub- shall have an ampacity greater than or part. equal to that of No. 2 AWG copper. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): This section cov- (2) Impedance. Protective grounds ers grounding of transmission and distribu- shall have an impedance low enough so tion lines and equipment when this subpart that they do not delay the operation of requires protective grounding and whenever protective devices in case of accidental the employer chooses to ground such lines energizing of the lines or equipment. and equipment for the protection of employees. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): American Society (b) General. For any employee to for Testing and Materials Standard Specifica- tions for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be work transmission and distribution Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and lines or equipment as deenergized, the Equipment, ASTM F855–09, contains guide- employer shall ensure that the lines or lines for protective grounding equipment. equipment are deenergized under the The Institute of Electrical Engineers Guide provisions of § 1926.961 and shall ensure for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, IEEE proper grounding of the lines or equip- Std 1048–2003, contains guidelines for select- ment as specified in paragraphs (c) ing and installing protective grounding through (h) of this section. However, if equipment. the employer can demonstrate that in- (e) Testing. The employer shall ensure stallation of a ground is impracticable that, unless a previously installed or that the conditions resulting from ground is present, employees test lines the installation of a ground would and equipment and verify the absence present greater hazards to employees of nominal voltage before employees than working without grounds, the install any ground on those lines or lines and equipment may be treated as that equipment. deenergized provided that the employer (f) Connecting and removing grounds— establishes that all of the following (1) Order of connection. The employer conditions apply: shall ensure that, when an employee (1) Deenergized. The employer ensures attaches a ground to a line or to equip- that the lines and equipment are deen- ment, the employee attaches the

474

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00484 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.963

ground-end connection first and then involving interim measurements using attaches the other end by means of a high voltage, high power, or combina- live-line tool. For lines or equipment tions of high voltage and high power, operating at 600 volts or less, the em- and not to testing involving contin- ployer may permit the employee to use uous measurements as in routine me- insulating equipment other than a live- tering, relaying, and normal line work. line tool if the employer ensures that NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): OSHA considers the line or equipment is not energized routine inspection and maintenance meas- at the time the ground is connected or urements made by qualified employees to be if the employer can demonstrate that routine line work not included in the scope each employee is protected from haz- of this section, provided that the hazards re- ards that may develop if the line or lated to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or equipment is energized. high-power sources require only the normal (2) Order of removal. The employer precautions associated with routine work specified in the other paragraphs of this sub- shall ensure that, when an employee part. Two typical examples of such excluded removes a ground, the employee retest work procedures are ‘‘phasing-out’’ test- moves the grounding device from the ing and testing for a ‘‘no-voltage’’ condition. line or equipment using a live-line tool (b) General requirements—(1) Safe work before he or she removes the ground- practices. The employer shall establish end connection. For lines or equipment and enforce work practices for the pro- operating at 600 volts or less, the em- tection of each worker from the haz- ployer may permit the employee to use ards of high-voltage or high-power test- insulating equipment other than a live- ing at all test areas, temporary and line tool if the employer ensures that permanent. Such work practices shall the line or equipment is not energized include, as a minimum, test area safe- at the time the ground is disconnected guarding, grounding, the safe use of or if the employer can demonstrate measuring and control circuits, and a that each employee is protected from means providing for periodic safety hazards that may develop if the line or checks of field test areas. equipment is energized. (2) Training. The employer shall en- (g) Additional precautions. The em- sure that each employee, upon initial ployer shall ensure that, when an em- assignment to the test area, receives ployee performs work on a cable at a training in safe work practices, with location remote from the cable ter- retraining provided as required by minal, the cable is not grounded at the § 1926.950(b). cable terminal if there is a possibility (c) Safeguarding of test areas—(1) Safe- of hazardous transfer of potential guarding. The employer shall provide should a fault occur. safeguarding within test areas to con- (h) Removal of grounds for test. The trol access to test equipment or to ap- employer may permit employees to re- paratus under test that could become move grounds temporarily during energized as part of the testing by ei- tests. During the test procedure, the ther direct or inductive coupling and to employer shall ensure that each em- prevent accidental employee contact ployee uses insulating equipment, shall with energized parts. isolate each employee from any haz- (2) Permanent test areas. The employer ards involved, and shall implement any shall guard permanent test areas with additional measures necessary to pro- walls, fences, or other barriers designed tect each exposed employee in case the to keep employees out of the test previously grounded lines and equip- areas. ment become energized. (3) Temporary test areas. In field testing, or at a temporary test site not § 1926.963 Testing and test facilities. guarded by permanent fences and (a) Application. This section provides gates, the employer shall ensure the for safe work practices for high-voltage use of one of the following means to and high-power testing performed in prevent employees without authoriza- laboratories, shops, and substations, tion from entering: and in the field and on electric trans- (i) Distinctively colored safety tape mission and distribution lines and supported approximately waist high equipment. It applies only to testing with safety signs attached to it,

475

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00485 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.963 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) A barrier or barricade that limits tentials that may develop during the access to the test area to a degree test. equivalent, physically and visually, to the barricade specified in paragraph NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(3)(ii): See appendix C to this subpart for information on meas- (c)(3)(i) of this section, or ures that employers can take to protect em- (iii) One or more test observers sta- ployees from hazardous step and touch po- tioned so that they can monitor the en- tentials. tire area. (4) Removal of safeguards. The em- (4) Equipment grounding conductors. ployer shall ensure the removal of the For tests in which using the equipment safeguards required by paragraph (c)(3) grounding conductor in the equipment of this section when employees no power cord to ground the test equip- longer need the protection afforded by ment would result in greater hazards the safeguards. to test personnel or prevent the taking (d) Grounding practices—(1) Establish of satisfactory measurements, the em- and implement practices. The employer ployer may use a ground clearly indi- shall establish and implement safe cated in the test set-up if the employer grounding practices for the test facil- can demonstrate that this ground af- ity. fords protection for employees equiva- (i) The employer shall maintain at lent to the protection afforded by an ground potential all conductive parts equipment grounding conductor in the accessible to the test operator while power supply cord. the equipment is operating at high (5) Grounding after tests. The em- voltage. ployer shall ensure that, when any em- (ii) Wherever ungrounded terminals ployee enters the test area after equip- of test equipment or apparatus under ment is deenergized, a ground is placed test may be present, they shall be on the high-voltage terminal and any treated as energized until tests dem- other exposed terminals. onstrate that they are deenergized. (i) Before any employee applies a di- (2) Installation of grounds. The em- rect ground, the employer shall dis- ployer shall ensure either that visible charge high capacitance equipment or grounds are applied automatically, or apparatus through a resistor rated for that employees using properly insu- the available energy. lated tools manually apply visible (ii) A direct ground shall be applied grounds, to the high-voltage circuits to the exposed terminals after the after they are deenergized and before stored energy drops to a level at which any employee performs work on the it is safe to do so. circuit or on the item or apparatus (6) Grounding test vehicles. If the em- under test. Common ground connec- ployer uses a test trailer or test vehicle tions shall be solidly connected to the in field testing, its chassis shall be test equipment and the apparatus grounded. The employer shall protect under test. each employee against hazardous touch (3) Isolated ground return. In high- potentials with respect to the vehicle, power testing, the employer shall pro- instrument panels, and other conduc- vide an isolated ground-return con- tive parts accessible to employees with ductor system designed to prevent the bonding, insulation, or isolation. intentional passage of current, with its (e) Control and measuring circuits—(1) attendant voltage rise, from occurring Control wiring. The employer may not in the ground grid or in the earth. How- run control wiring, meter connections, ever, the employer need not provide an test leads, or cables from a test area isolated ground-return conductor if the unless contained in a grounded metal- employer can demonstrate that both of lic sheath and terminated in a ground- the following conditions exist: ed metallic enclosure or unless the em- (i) The employer cannot provide an ployer takes other precautions that it isolated ground-return conductor due can demonstrate will provide employ- to the distance of the test site from the ees with equivalent safety. electric energy source, and (2) Instruments. The employer shall (ii) The employer protects employees isolate meters and other instruments from any hazardous step and touch po- with accessible terminals or parts from

476

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00486 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.964

test personnel to protect against haz- head lines and equipment and for live- ards that could arise should such terline barehand work. minals and parts become energized dur- (2) Checking structure before climbing. ing testing. If the employer provides Before allowing employees to subject this isolation by locating test equip- elevated structures, such as poles or ment in metal compartments with towers, to such stresses as climbing or viewing windows, the employer shall the installation or removal of equip- provide interlocks to interrupt the ment may impose, the employer shall power supply when someone opens the ascertain that the structures are capa- compartment cover. ble of sustaining the additional or un- (3) Routing temporary wiring. The em- balanced stresses. If the pole or other ployer shall protect temporary wiring structure cannot withstand the ex- and its connections against damage, pected loads, the employer shall brace accidental interruptions, and other or otherwise support the pole or struc- hazards. To the maximum extent posture so as to prevent failure. sible, the employer shall keep signal, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2): Appendix D to control, ground, and power cables sepa- this subpart contains test methods that em- rate from each other. ployers can use in ascertaining whether a (4) Test observer. If any employee will wood pole is capable of sustaining the forces be present in the test area during test- imposed by an employee climbing the pole. ing, a test observer shall be present. This paragraph also requires the employer to The test observer shall be capable of ascertain that the pole can sustain all other forces imposed by the work employees will implementing the immediate deener- perform. gizing of test circuits for safety purposes. (3) Setting and moving poles. (i) When (f) Safety check—(1) Before each test. a pole is set, moved, or removed near Safety practices governing employee an exposed energized overhead con- work at temporary or field test areas ductor, the pole may not contact the shall provide, at the beginning of each conductor. series of tests, for a routine safety (ii) When a pole is set, moved, or re- check of such test areas. moved near an exposed energized over- (2) Conditions to be checked. The test head conductor, the employer shall en- operator in charge shall conduct these sure that each employee wears elec- routine safety checks before each se- trical protective equipment or uses in- ries of tests and shall verify at least sulated devices when handling the pole the following conditions: and that no employee contacts the pole with uninsulated parts of his or her (i) Barriers and safeguards are in body. workable condition and placed properly (iii) To protect employees from fall- to isolate hazardous areas; ing into holes used for placing poles, (ii) System test status signals, if the employer shall physically guard used, are in operable condition; the holes, or ensure that employees at- (iii) Clearly marked test-power dis- tend the holes, whenever anyone is connects are readily available in an working nearby. emergency; (b) Installing and removing overhead (iv) Ground connections are clearly lines. The following provisions apply to identifiable; the installation and removal of over- (v) Personal protective equipment is head conductors or cable (overhead provided and used as required by sub- lines). part E of this part and by this subpart; (1) Tension stringing method. When and lines that employees are installing or (vi) Proper separation between sig- removing can contact energized parts, nal, ground, and power cables. the employer shall use the tension- stringing method, barriers, or other § 1926.964 Overhead lines and live-line equivalent measures to minimize the barehand work. possibility that conductors and cables (a) General—(1) Application. This sec- the employees are installing or remov- tion provides additional requirements ing will contact energized power lines for work performed on or near over- or equipment.

477

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00487 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.964 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(2) Conductors, cables, and pulling and sultant current would be more than 6 tensioning equipment. For conductors, milliamperes. cables, and pulling and tensioning (5) Safe operating condition. Reel-han- equipment, the employer shall provide dling equipment, including pulling and the protective measures required by tensioning devices, shall be in safe op- § 1926.959(d)(3) when employees are in- erating condition and shall be leveled stalling or removing a conductor or and aligned. cable close enough to energized con- (6) Load ratings. The employer shall ductors that any of the following fail- ensure that employees do not exceed ures could energize the pulling or ten- load ratings of stringing lines, pulling sioning equipment or the conductor or lines, conductor grips, load-bearing cable being installed or removed: hardware and accessories, rigging, and (i) Failure of the pulling or ten- hoists. sioning equipment, (7) Defective pulling lines. The em- (ii) Failure of the conductor or cable ployer shall repair or replace defective being pulled, or pulling lines and accessories. (iii) Failure of the previously in- (8) Conductor grips. The employer stalled lines or equipment. shall ensure that employees do not use (3) Disable automatic-reclosing feature. conductor grips on wire rope unless the If the conductors that employees are manufacturer specifically designed the installing or removing cross over ener- grip for this application. gized conductors in excess of 600 volts (9) Communications. The employer and if the design of the circuit-inter- shall ensure that employees maintain rupting devices protecting the lines so reliable communications, through two- permits, the employer shall render in- way radios or other equivalent means, operable the automatic-reclosing fea- between the reel tender and the pull- ture of these devices. ing-rig operator. (4) Induced voltage. (i) Before employ- (10) Operation of pulling rig. Employ- ees install lines parallel to existing en- ees may operate the pulling rig only ergized lines, the employer shall make when it is safe to do so. a determination of the approximate voltage to be induced in the new lines, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(10): Examples of or work shall proceed on the assump- unsafe conditions include: employees in location that the induced voltage is haz- tions prohibited by paragraph (b)(11) of this ardous. section, conductor and pulling line hang-ups, and slipping of the conductor grip. (ii) Unless the employer can demonstrate that the lines that employees (11) Working under overhead oper- are installing are not subject to the in- ations. While a power-driven device is duction of a hazardous voltage or un- pulling the conductor or pulling line less the lines are treated as energized, and the conductor or pulling line is in temporary protective grounds shall be motion, the employer shall ensure that placed at such locations and arranged employees are not directly under over- in such a manner that the employer head operations or on the crossarm, ex- can demonstrate will prevent exposure cept as necessary for the employees to of each employee to hazardous dif- guide the stringing sock or board over ferences in electric potential. or through the stringing sheave. (c) Live-line barehand work. In addi- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4)(ii): Appendix C to this subpart contains guidelines for pro- tion to other applicable provisions con- tecting employees from hazardous dif- tained in this subpart, the following references in electric potential as required by quirements apply to live-line barehand this paragraph. work: NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4): If the employer (1) Training. Before an employee uses takes no precautions to protect employees or supervises the use of the live-line from hazards associated with involuntary re- barehand technique on energized cir- actions from electric shock, a hazard exists cuits, the employer shall ensure that if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm the employee completes training con- resistor. If the employer protects employees forming to § 1926.950(b) in the technique from injury due to involuntary reactions and in the safety requirements of para- from electric shock, a hazard exists if the re- graph (c) of this section.

478

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00488 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.964

(2) Existing conditions. Before any em- aerial device to the energized line or ployee uses the live-line barehand tech- equipment. nique on energized high-voltage con- (i) The employee shall be connected ductors or parts, the employer shall as- to the bucket liner or other conductive certain the following information in device by the use of conductive shoes, addition to information about other ex- leg clips, or other means. isting conditions required by (ii) Where differences in potentials at § 1926.950(d): the worksite pose a hazard to employ- (i) The nominal voltage rating of the ees, the employer shall provide electro- circuit on which employees will per- static shielding designed for the volt- form the work, age being worked. (ii) The clearances to ground of lines (7) Bonding the employee to the ener- and other energized parts on which em- gized part. The employer shall ensure ployees will perform the work, and that, before the employee contacts the (iii) The voltage limitations of equip- energized part, the employee bonds the ment employees will use. conductive bucket liner or other con- (3) Insulated tools and equipment. (i) ductive device to the energized con- The employer shall ensure that the in- ductor by means of a positive connec- sulated equipment, insulated tools, and tion. This connection shall remain at- aerial devices and platforms used by tached to the energized conductor until employees are designed, tested, and the employee completes the work on made for live-line barehand work. the energized circuit. (ii) The employer shall ensure that (8) Aerial-lift controls. Aerial lifts used employees keep tools and equipment for live-line barehand work shall have clean and dry while they are in use. dual controls (lower and upper) as follows: (4) Disable automatic-reclosing feature. (i) The upper controls shall be within The employer shall render inoperable easy reach of the employee in the the automatic-reclosing feature of cir- bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, ac- cuit-interrupting devices protecting cess to the controls shall be within the lines if the design of the devices easy reach of both buckets. permits. (ii) The lower set of controls shall be (5) Adverse weather conditions. The near the base of the boom and shall be employer shall ensure that employees designed so that they can override op- do not perform work when adverse eration of the equipment at any time. weather conditions would make the (9) Operation of lower controls. Lower work hazardous even after the em- (ground-level) lift controls may not be ployer implements the work practices operated with an employee in the lift required by this subpart. Additionally, except in case of emergency. employees may not perform work when (10) Check controls. The employer winds reduce the phase-to-phase or shall ensure that, before employees ele- phase-to-ground clearances at the work vate an aerial lift into the work posi- location below the minimum approach tion, the employees check all controls distances specified in paragraph (c)(13) (ground level and bucket) to determine of this section, unless insulating that they are in proper working condi- guards cover the grounded objects and tion. other lines and equipment. (11) Body of aerial lift truck. The em- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(5): Thunderstorms ployer shall ensure that, before em- in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ployees elevate the boom of an aerial ice storms are examples of adverse weather lift, the employees ground the body of conditions that make live-line barehand the truck or barricade the body of the work too hazardous to perform safely even truck and treat it as energized. after the employer implements the work (12) Boom-current test. The employer practices required by this subpart. shall ensure that employees perform a (6) Bucket liners and electrostatic boom-current test before starting work shielding. The employer shall provide each day, each time during the day and ensure that employees use a con- when they encounter a higher voltage, ductive bucket liner or other conduc- and when changed conditions indicate tive device for bonding the insulated a need for an additional test.

479

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00489 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.965 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(i) This test shall consist of placing (17) Passing objects to employee. The the bucket in contact with an ener- employer shall ensure that employees gized source equal to the voltage to be do not pass uninsulated equipment or encountered for a minimum of 3 min- material between a pole or structure utes. and an aerial lift while an employee (ii) The leakage current may not ex- working from the bucket is bonded to ceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of an energized part. nominal phase-to-ground voltage. (18) Nonconductive measuring device. A (iii) The employer shall immediately nonconductive measuring device shall suspend work from the aerial lift when be readily accessible to employees per- there is any indication of a malfunc- forming live-line barehand work to as- tion in the equipment. sist them in maintaining the required (13) Minimum approach distance. The minimum approach distance. employer shall ensure that employees (d) Towers and structures. The fol- maintain the minimum approach dis- lowing requirements apply to work per- tances, established by the employer formed on towers or other structures under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), from all ground- that support overhead lines. ed objects and from lines and equip- (1) Working beneath towers and struc- ment at a potential different from that tures. The employer shall ensure that to which the live-line barehand equip- no employee is under a tower or struc- ment is bonded, unless insulating ture while work is in progress, except guards cover such grounded objects and when the employer can demonstrate other lines and equipment. that such a working position is nec- (14) Approaching, leaving, and bonding essary to assist employees working to energized part. The employer shall above. ensure that, while an employee is ap- (2) Tag lines. The employer shall en- proaching, leaving, or bonding to an sure that employees use tag lines or energized circuit, the employee main- other similar devices to maintain contains the minimum approach distances, trol of tower sections being raised or established by the employer under positioned, unless the employer can § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), between the employee demonstrate that the use of such de- and any grounded parts, including the vices would create a greater hazard to lower boom and portions of the truck employees. and between the employee and conduc- (3) Disconnecting load lines. The em- tive objects energized at different po- ployer shall ensure that employees do tentials. not detach the loadline from a member (15) Positioning bucket near energized or section until they safely secure the bushing or insulator string. While the load. bucket is alongside an energized bush- (4) Adverse weather conditions. The ing or insulator string, the employer employer shall ensure that, except dur- shall ensure that employees maintain ing emergency restoration procedures, the phase-to-ground minimum ap- employees discontinue work when ad- proach distances, established by the verse weather conditions would make employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), be- the work hazardous in spite of the tween all parts of the bucket and the work practices required by this sub- grounded end of the bushing or insu- part. lator string or any other grounded surface. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(4): Thunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and (16) Handlines. The employer shall en- ice storms are examples of adverse weather sure that employees do not use conditions that make this work too haz- handlines between the bucket and the ardous to perform even after the employer boom or between the bucket and the implements the work practices required by ground. However, employees may use this subpart. nonconductive-type handlines from conductor to ground if not supported § 1926.965 Underground electrical in- from the bucket. The employer shall stallations. ensure that no one uses ropes used for (a) Application. This section provides live-line barehand work for other pur- additional requirements for work on poses. underground electrical installations.

480

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00490 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.965

(b) Access. The employer shall ensure (e) Duct rods. The employer shall en- that employees use a ladder or other sure that, if employees use duct rods, climbing device to enter and exit a the employees install the duct rods in manhole or subsurface vault exceeding the direction presenting the least haz- 1.22 meters (4 feet) in depth. No em- ard to employees. The employer shall ployee may climb into or out of a man- station an employee at the far end of hole or vault by stepping on cables or the duct line being rodded to ensure hangers. that the employees maintain the re- (c) Lowering equipment into manholes— quired minimum approach distances. (1) Hoisting equipment. Equipment used (f) Multiple cables. When multiple ca- to lower materials and tools into man- bles are present in a work area, the em- holes or vaults shall be capable of sup- ployer shall identify the cable to be porting the weight to be lowered and worked by electrical means, unless its shall be checked for defects before use. identity is obvious by reason of distinc- (2) Clear the area of employees. Before tive appearance or location or by other anyone lowers tools or material into readily apparent means of identifica- the opening for a manhole or vault, tion. The employer shall protect cables each employee working in the manhole other than the one being worked from or vault shall be clear of the area di- damage. rectly under the opening. (g) Moving cables. Except when paragraph (h)(2) of this section permits em- (d) Attendants for manholes and ployees to perform work that could vaults—(1) When required. While work is cause a fault in an energized cable in a being performed in a manhole or vault manhole or vault, the employer shall containing energized electric equip- ensure that employees inspect ener- ment, an employee with first-aid train- gized cables to be moved for abnormali- ing shall be available on the surface in ties. the immediate vicinity of the manhole (h) Protection against faults—(1) Cables or vault entrance to render emergency with abnormalities. Where a cable in a assistance. manhole or vault has one or more ab- (2) Brief entries allowed. Occasionally, normalities that could lead to a fault the employee on the surface may brief- or be an indication of an impending ly enter a manhole or vault to provide fault, the employer shall deenergize nonemergency assistance. the cable with the abnormality before NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (d)(2): Paragraph (h) any employee may work in the man- of 1926.953 may also require an attendant and hole or vault, except when service-load does not permit this attendant to enter the conditions and a lack of feasible alter- manhole or vault. natives require that the cable remain NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (d)(2): Paragraph energized. In that case, employees may (b)(1)(ii) of § 1926.960 requires employees en- enter the manhole or vault provided tering manholes or vaults containing un- the employer protects them from the guarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts possible effects of a failure using of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more to be qualified. shields or other devices that are capable of containing the adverse effects of (3) Entry without attendant. For the a fault. The employer shall treat the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, following abnormalities as indications taking readings, or similar work, an of impending faults unless the em- employee working alone may enter, for ployer can demonstrate that the condi- brief periods of time, a manhole or tions could not lead to a fault: Oil or vault where energized cables or equip- compound leaking from cable or joints, ment are in service if the employer can broken cable sheaths or joint sleeves, demonstrate that the employee will be hot localized surface temperatures of protected from all electrical hazards. cables or joints, or joints swollen be- (4) Communications. The employer yond normal tolerance. shall ensure that employees maintain (2) Work-related faults. If the work reliable communications, through two- employees will perform in a manhole way radios or other equivalent means, or vault could cause a fault in a cable, among all employees involved in the the employer shall deenergize that job. cable before any employee works in the

481

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00491 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.966 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

manhole or vault, except when service- render the control circuit inoperable if load conditions and a lack of feasible the design of the equipment permits. alternatives require that the cable re- (d) Substation fences. Conductive main energized. In that case, employ- fences around substations shall be ees may enter the manhole or vault grounded. When a substation fence is provided the employer protects them expanded or a section is removed, fence from the possible effects of a failure sections shall be isolated, grounded, or using shields or other devices that are bonded as necessary to protect employ- capable of containing the adverse ef- ees from hazardous differences in elec- fects of a fault. tric potential. (i) Sheath continuity. When employees NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): IEEE Std 80–2000, perform work on buried cable or on IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation cable in a manhole or vault, the em- Grounding, contains guidelines for protec- ployer shall maintain metallic-sheath tion against hazardous differences in continuity, or the cable sheath shall be electric potential. treated as energized. (e) Guarding of rooms and other spaces containing electric supply equipment—(1) § 1926.966 Substations. When to guard rooms and other spaces. (a) Application. This section provides Rooms and other spaces in which elec- additional requirements for sub- tric supply lines or equipment are in- stations and for work performed in stalled shall meet the requirements of them. paragraphs (e)(2) through (e)(5) of this (b) Access and working space. The em- section under the following conditions: ployer shall provide and maintain suf- (i) If exposed live parts operating at ficient access and working space about 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4 electric equipment to permit ready and meters (8 feet) of the ground or other safe operation and maintenance of such working surface inside the room or equipment by employees. other space, (ii) If live parts operating at 151 to NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): American Na- tional Standard National Electrical Safety 600 volts to ground and located within Code, ANSI/IEEE C2–2012 contains guidelines 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or for the dimensions of access and working other working surface inside the room space about electric equipment in sub- or other space are guarded only by lo- stations. Installations meeting the ANSI cation, as permitted under paragraph provisions comply with paragraph (b) of this (f)(1) of this section, or section. The Occupational Safety and Health (iii) If live parts operating at more Administration will determine whether an installation that does not conform to this than 600 volts to ground are within the ANSI standard complies with paragraph (b) room or other space, unless: of this section based on the following cri- (A) The live parts are enclosed within teria: grounded, metal-enclosed equipment (1) Whether the installation conforms to whose only openings are designed so the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect that foreign objects inserted in these when the installation was made; openings will be deflected from ener- (2) Whether the configuration of the instal- gized parts, or lation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach distances, established by (B) The live parts are installed at a the employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), while height, above ground and any other the employees are working on exposed, ener- working surface, that provides protec- gized parts; and tion at the voltage on the live parts (3) Whether the precautions taken when corresponding to the protection pro- employees perform work on the installation vided by a 2.4-meter (8-foot) height at provide protection equivalent to the protec- 50 volts. tion provided by access and working space (2) Prevent access by unqualified per- meeting ANSI/IEEE C2–2012. sons. Fences, screens, partitions, or (c) Draw-out-type circuit breakers. The walls shall enclose the rooms and other employer shall ensure that, when em- spaces so as to minimize the possibility ployees remove or insert draw-out-type that unqualified persons will enter. circuit breakers, the breaker is in the (3) Restricted entry. Unqualified per- open position. The employer shall also sons may not enter the rooms or other

482

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00492 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.967

spaces while the electric supply lines barriers around the work area to pre- or equipment are energized. vent employees who are not working (4) Warning signs. The employer shall on the equipment, but who are in the display signs at entrances to the rooms area, from contacting the exposed live and other spaces warning unqualified parts. persons to keep out. (g) Substation entry—(1) Report upon (5) Entrances to rooms and other. The entering. Upon entering an attended employer shall keep each entrance to a substation, each employee, other than room or other space locked, unless the employees regularly working in the entrance is under the observation of a station, shall report his or her presence person who is attending the room or to the employee in charge of substation other space for the purpose of pre- activities to receive information on venting unqualified employees from en- special system conditions affecting em- tering. ployee safety. (f) Guarding of energized parts—(1) (2) Job briefing. The job briefing re- Type of guarding. The employer shall quired by § 1926.952 shall cover informa- provide guards around all live parts option on special system conditions af- erating at more than 150 volts to fecting employee safety, including the ground without an insulating covering location of energized equipment in or unless the location of the live parts adjacent to the work area and the lim- gives sufficient clearance (horizontal, its of any deenergized work area. vertical, or both) to minimize the possibility of accidental employee con- § 1926.967 Special conditions. tact. (a) Capacitors. The following addi- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (f)(1): American Na- tional requirements apply to work on tional Standard National Electrical Safety capacitors and on lines connected to Code, ANSI/IEEE C2–2002 contains guidelines capacitors. for the dimensions of clearance distances NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): See §§ 1926.961 and about electric equipment in substations. In- 1926.962 for requirements pertaining to the stallations meeting the ANSI provisions deenergizing and grounding of capacitor in- comply with paragraph (f)(1) of this section. stallations. The Occupational Safety and Health Admin- istration will determine whether an installa- (1) Disconnect from energized source. tion that does not conform to this ANSI Before employees work on capacitors, standard complies with paragraph (f)(1) of the employer shall disconnect the ca- this section based on the following criteria: pacitors from energized sources and (1) Whether the installation conforms to short circuit the capacitors. The em- the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made; ployer shall ensure that the employee (2) Whether each employee is isolated from short circuiting the capacitors waits at energized parts at the point of closest ap- least 5 minutes from the time of dis- proach; and connection before applying the short (3) Whether the precautions taken when circuit, employees perform work on the installation (2) Short circuiting units. Before em- provide protection equivalent to the protec- ployees handle the units, the employer tion provided by horizontal and vertical shall short circuit each unit in series- clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2–2002. parallel capacitor banks between all (2) Maintaining guards during oper- terminals and the capacitor case or its ation. Except for fuse replacement and rack. If the cases of capacitors are on other necessary access by qualified per- ungrounded substation racks, the em- sons, the employer shall maintain ployer shall bond the racks to ground. guarding of energized parts within a (3) Short circuiting connected lines. The compartment during operation and employer shall short circuit any line maintenance functions to prevent acci- connected to capacitors before the line dental contact with energized parts is treated as deenergized. and to prevent dropped tools or other (b) Current transformer secondaries. equipment from contacting energized The employer shall ensure that em- parts. ployees do not open the secondary of a (3) Temporary removal of guards. Be- current transformer while the trans- fore guards are removed from energized former is energized. If the employer equipment, the employer shall install cannot deenergize the primary of the

483

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00493 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.967 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

current transformer before employees (2) Controlling traffic. Before employ- perform work on an instrument, a ees begin work in the vicinity of vehic- relay, or other section of a current ular or pedestrian traffic that may en- transformer secondary circuit, the em- danger them, the employer shall place ployer shall bridge the circuit so that warning signs or flags and other traf- the current transformer secondary does fic-control devices in conspicuous loca- not experience an open-circuit conditions to alert and channel approaching tion. traffic. (c) Series streetlighting—(1) Applicable (3) Barricades. The employer shall use requirements. If the open-circuit voltage barricades where additional employee exceeds 600 volts, the employer shall protection is necessary. ensure that employees work on series (4) Excavated areas. The employer streetlighting circuits in accordance shall protect excavated areas with bar- with § 1926.964 or § 1926.965, as appro- ricades. priate. (2) Opening a series loop. Before any (5) Warning lights. The employer shall employee opens a series loop, the em- display warning lights prominently at ployer shall deenergize the night. streetlighting transformer and isolate (h) Backfeed. When there is a possi- it from the source of supply or shall bility of voltage backfeed from sources bridge the loop to avoid an open-circuit of cogeneration or from the secondary condition. system (for example, backfeed from (d) Illumination. The employer shall more than one energized phase feeding provide sufficient illumination to en- a common load), the requirements of able the employee to perform the work § 1926.960 apply if employees will work safely. the lines or equipment as energized, and the requirements of §§ 1926.961 and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d): See § 1926.56, which requires specific levels of illumination. 1926.962 apply if employees will work the lines or equipment as deenergized. (e) Protection against drowning—(1) (i) Lasers. The employer shall install, Personal flotation devices. Whenever an adjust, and operate laser equipment in employee may be pulled or pushed, or accordance with § 1926.54. might fall, into water where the danger (j) Hydraulic fluids. Hydraulic fluids of drowning exists, the employer shall used for the insulated sections of provide the employee with, and shall equipment shall provide insulation for ensure that the employee uses, a per- the voltage involved. sonal flotation device meeting § 1926.106. (k) Communication facilities—(1) Micro- (i) The employer (2) Maintaining flotation devices in safe wave transmission. condition. The employer shall maintain shall ensure that no employee looks each personal flotation device in safe into an open waveguide or antenna condition and shall inspect each per- connected to an energized microwave sonal flotation device frequently source. enough to ensure that it does not have (ii) If the electromagnetic-radiation rot, mildew, water saturation, or any level within an accessible area associ- other condition that could render the ated with microwave communications device unsuitable for use. systems exceeds the radiation-protec- (3) Crossing bodies of water. An em- tion guide specified by § 1910.97(a)(2) of ployee may cross streams or other bod- this chapter, the employer shall post ies of water only if a safe means of pas- the area with warning signs containing sage, such as a bridge, is available. the warning symbol described in (f) Excavations. Excavation oper- § 1910.97(a)(3) of this chapter. The lower ations shall comply with subpart P of half of the warning symbol shall in- this part. clude the following statements, or ones (g) Employee protection in public work that the employer can demonstrate are areas—(1) Traffic control devices. Traffic- equivalent: ‘‘Radiation in this area control signs and traffic-control de- may exceed hazard limitations and spe- vices used for the protection of em- cial precautions are required. Obtain ployees shall meet § 1926.200(g)(2). specific instruction before entering.’’

484

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00494 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.968

(iii) When an employee works in an of conductors insulated from one an- area where the electromagnetic radi- other (multiple-conductor cable). ation could exceed the radiation-pro- Cable sheath. A conductive protective tection guide, the employer shall insti- covering applied to cables. tute measures that ensure that the employee’s exposure is not greater than NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘CABLE SHEATH’’: A cable sheath may consist of mul- that permitted by that guide. Such tiple layers one or more of which is conduc- measures may include administrative tive. and engineering controls and personal protective equipment. Circuit. A conductor or system of con- (2) Power-line carrier. The employer ductors through which an electric cur- shall ensure that employees perform rent is intended to flow. power-line carrier work, including Clearance (between objects). The clear work on equipment used for coupling distance between two objects measured carrier current to power line conduc- surface to surface. tors, in accordance with the require- Clearance (for work). Authorization to ments of this subpart pertaining to perform specified work or permission work on energized lines. to enter a restricted area. Communication lines. (See Lines; (1) § 1926.968 Definitions. Communication lines.) Attendant. An employee assigned to Conductor. A material, usually in the remain immediately outside the en- form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, used trance to an enclosed or other space to for carrying an electric current. render assistance as needed to employ- Contract employer. An employer, other ees inside the space. than a host employer, that performs Automatic circuit recloser. A self-con- work covered by subpart V of this part trolled device for automatically inter- under contract. rupting and reclosing an alternating- Covered conductor. A conductor cov- current circuit, with a predetermined ered with a dielectric having no rated sequence of opening and reclosing fol- insulating strength or having a rated lowed by resetting, hold closed, or insulating strength less than the volt- lockout. age of the circuit in which the con- Barricade. A physical obstruction ductor is used. such as tapes, cones, or A-frame type Current-carrying part. A conducting wood or metal structures that provides part intended to be connected in an a warning about, and limits access to, electric circuit to a source of voltage. a hazardous area. Non-current-carrying parts are those Barrier. A physical obstruction that not intended to be so connected. prevents contact with energized lines Deenergized. Free from any electrical or equipment or prevents unauthorized connection to a source of potential dif- access to a work area. ference and from electric charge; not Bond. The electrical interconnection having a potential that is different of conductive parts designed to main- from the potential of the earth. tain a common electric potential. Bus. A conductor or a group of con- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘DEENERGIZED’’: ductors that serve as a common con- The term applies only to current-carrying parts, which are sometimes energized (alive). nection for two or more circuits. Bushing. An insulating structure that Designated employee (designated per- includes a through conductor or that son). An employee (or person) who is provides a passageway for such a con- assigned by the employer to perform ductor, and that, when mounted on a specific duties under the terms of this barrier, insulates the conductor from subpart and who has sufficient knowl- the barrier for the purpose of con- edge of the construction and operation ducting current from one side of the of the equipment, and the hazards in- barrier to the other. volved, to perform his or her duties Cable. A conductor with insulation, safely. or a stranded conductor with or with- Electric line truck. A truck used to out insulation and other coverings (sin- transport personnel, tools, and mate- gle-conductor cable), or a combination rial for electric supply line work.

485

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00495 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.968 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Electric supply equipment. Equipment Exposed, Exposed to contact (as applied that produces, modifies, regulates, con- to energized parts). Not isolated or trols, or safeguards a supply of electric guarded. energy. Fall restraint system. A fall protection Electric supply lines. (See ‘‘Lines; (2) system that prevents the user from Electric supply lines.’’) falling any distance. Electric utility. An organization re- First-aid training. Training in the ini- sponsible for the installation, oper- tial care, including cardiopulmonary ation, or maintenance of an electric resuscitation (which includes chest supply system. compressions, rescue breathing, and, as Enclosed space. A working space, such appropriate, other heart and lung re- as a manhole, vault, tunnel, or shaft, suscitation techniques), performed by a that has a limited means of egress or person who is not a medical practi- entry, that is designed for periodic em- tioner, of a sick or injured person until ployee entry under normal operating definitive medical treatment can be ad- conditions, and that, under normal ministered. conditions, does not contain a haz- Ground. A conducting connection, ardous atmosphere, but may contain a whether planned or unplanned, between hazardous atmosphere under abnormal an electric circuit or equipment and conditions. the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘ENCLOSED SPACE’’. The Occupational Safety and Health Grounded. Connected to earth or to Administration does not consider spaces that some conducting body that serves in are enclosed but not designed for employee place of the earth. entry under normal operating conditions to Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this or otherwise protected, by means of subpart. Similarly, the Occupational Safety suitable covers or casings, barrier rails and Health Administration does not consider or screens, mats, or platforms, de- spaces that are enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous atmosphere to signed to minimize the possibility, be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this under normal conditions, of dangerous subpart. Such spaces meet the definition of approach or inadvertent contact by permit spaces in subpart AA of this part, and persons or objects. entry into them must conform to that standard. NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘GUARDED’’: Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise Energized (alive, live). Electrically protected, are not guarded. connected to a source of potential dif- Hazardous atmosphere. An atmosphere ference, or electrically charged so as to that may expose employees to the risk have a potential significantly different of death, incapacitation, impairment of from that of earth in the vicinity. ability to self-rescue (that is, escape Energy source. Any electrical, me- unaided from an enclosed space), in- chanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chem- jury, or acute illness from one or more ical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy of the following causes: source that could cause injury to em- (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in ployees. excess of 10 percent of its lower flam- Entry (as used in § 1926.953). The ac- mable limit (LFL); tion by which a person passes through (2) Airborne combustible dust at a an opening into an enclosed space. concentration that meets or exceeds its Entry includes ensuing work activities LFL; in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the en- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS AT- trant’s body breaks the plane of an MOSPHERE’’ (2): This concentration may be opening into the space. approximated as a condition in which the Equipment (electric). A general term dust obscures vision at a distance of 1.52 meters (5 feet) or less. including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra- like used as part of or in connection tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 with an electrical installation. percent;

486

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00496 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.968

(4) Atmospheric concentration of any takes precautions to protect employees from substance for which a dose or a permis- the hazardous effects of the wind. sible exposure limit is published in Host employer. An employer that op- Subpart D, Occupational Health and En- erates, or that controls the operating vironmental Controls, or in Subpart Z, procedures for, an electric power gen- Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of this eration, transmission, or distribution part and which could result in em- installation on which a contract employee exposure in excess of its dose or ployer is performing work covered by permissible exposure limit; subpart V of this part.

NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS AT- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HOST EM- MOSPHERE’’ (4): An atmospheric concentra- PLOYER’’: The Occupational Safety and tion of any substance that is not capable of Health Administration will treat the electric causing death, incapacitation, impairment of utility or the owner of the installation as ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness the host employer if it operates or controls due to its health effects is not covered by operating procedures for the installation. If this provision. the electric utility or installation owner neither operates nor controls operating proce- (5) Any other atmospheric condition dures for the installation, the Occupational that is immediately dangerous to life Safety and Health Administration will treat or health. the employer that the utility or owner has contracted with to operate or control the op- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS erating procedures for the installation as the ATMOSPHERE’’ (5): For air contaminants for host employer. In no case will there be more which the Occupational Safety and Health than one host employer. Administration has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of Immediately dangerous to life or health information, such as Safety Data Sheets (IDLH). Any condition that poses an (SDS) that comply with the Hazard Commu- immediate or delayed threat to life or nication Standard, § 1910.1200, published in- that would cause irreversible adverse formation, and internal documents can pro- health effects or that would interfere vide guidance in establishing acceptable at- with an individual’s ability to escape mospheric conditions. unaided from a permit space. High-power tests. Tests in which the employer uses fault currents, load cur- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘IMMEDIATELY DANGEROUS TO LIFE OR HEALTH’’: Some mate- rents, magnetizing currents, and line- rials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium dropping currents to test equipment, vapor, for example—may produce immediate either at the equipment’s rated voltage transient effects that, even if severe, may or at lower voltages. pass without medical attention, but are fol- High-voltage tests. Tests in which the lowed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12–72 employer uses voltages of approxi- hours after exposure. The victim ‘‘feels nor- mately 1,000 volts as a practical min- mal’’ from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous imum and in which the voltage source quantities are considered to be ‘‘imme- has sufficient energy to cause injury. diately’’ dangerous to life or health. High wind. A wind of such velocity that one or more of the following haz- Insulated. Separated from other con- ards would be present: ducting surfaces by a dielectric (in- (1) The wind could blow an employee cluding air space) offering a high re- from an elevated location, sistance to the passage of current. (2) The wind could cause an employee NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘INSULATED’’: or equipment handling material to lose When any object is said to be insulated, it is control of the material, or understood to be insulated for the conditions (3) The wind would expose an em- to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this subpart, ployee to other hazards not controlled uninsulated. by the standard involved. Insulation (cable). Material relied NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HIGH WIND’’: upon to insulate the conductor from The Occupational Safety and Health Admin- other conductors or conducting parts istration normally considers winds exceeding 64.4 kilometers per hour (40 miles per hour), or from ground. or 48.3 kilometers per hour (30 miles per Isolated. Not readily accessible to hour) if the work involves material handling, persons unless special means for access as meeting this criteria, unless the employer are used.

487

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00497 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.968 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Line-clearance tree trimming. The Personal fall arrest system. A system pruning, trimming, repairing, main- used to arrest an employee in a fall taining, removing, or clearing of trees, from a working level. or the cutting of brush, that is within Qualified employee (qualified person). the following distance of electric sup- An employee (person) knowledgeable in ply lines and equipment: the construction and operation of the (1) For voltages to ground of 50 kilo- electric power generation, trans- volts or less—3.05 meters (10 feet); mission, and distribution equipment (2) For voltages to ground of more involved, along with the associated than 50 kilovolts—3.05 meters (10 feet) hazards. plus 0.10 meters (4 inches) for every 10 NOTE 1 TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘QUALIFIED kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. EMPLOYEE (QUALIFIED PERSON)’’: An employee Lines—(1) Communication lines. The must have the training required by conductors and their supporting or § 1926.950(b)(2) to be a qualified employee. containing structures which are used NOTE 2 TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘QUALIFIED for public or private signal or commu- EMPLOYEE (QUALIFIED PERSON)’’: Except under nication service, and which operate at § 1926.954(b)(3)(iii), an employee who is under- potentials not exceeding 400 volts to going on-the-job training and who has dem- ground or 750 volts between any two onstrated, in the course of such training, an points of the circuit, and the trans- ability to perform duties safely at his or her mitted power of which does not exceed level of training and who is under the direct 150 watts. If the lines are operating at supervision of a qualified person is a quali- less than 150 volts, no limit is placed fied person for the performance of those du- on the transmitted power of the sys- ties. tem. Under certain conditions, commu- Statistical sparkover voltage. A tran- nication cables may include commu- sient overvoltage level that produces a nication circuits exceeding these limi- 97.72-percent probability of sparkover tations where such circuits are also (that is, two standard deviations above used to supply power solely to commu- the voltage at which there is a 50-per- nication equipment. cent probability of sparkover).

NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘COMMUNICA- Statistical withstand voltage. A tran- TION LINES’’: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sient overvoltage level that produces a signal, data, clock, fire, police alarm, cable 0.14-percent probability of sparkover television, and other systems conforming to (that is, three standard deviations this definition are included. Lines used for below the voltage at which there is a signaling purposes, but not included under 50-percent probability of sparkover). this definition, are considered as electric Switch. A device for opening and clos- supply lines of the same voltage. ing or for changing the connection of a (2) Electric supply lines. Conductors circuit. In this subpart, a switch is used to transmit electric energy and manually operable, unless otherwise their necessary supporting or con- stated. taining structures. Signal lines of more System operator. A qualified person than 400 volts are always supply lines designated to operate the system or its within this subpart, and those of less parts. than 400 volts are considered as supply Vault. An enclosure, above or below lines, if so run and operated through- ground, that personnel may enter and out. that is used for installing, operating, Manhole. A subsurface enclosure that or maintaining equipment or cable. personnel may enter and that is used Vented vault. A vault that has provi- for installing, operating, and maintain- sion for air changes using exhaust-flue ing submersible equipment or cable. stacks and low-level air intakes oper- Minimum approach distance. The clos- ating on pressure and temperature dif- est distance an employee may approach ferentials that provide for airflow that an energized or a grounded object. precludes a hazardous atmosphere from developing. NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘MINIMUM AP- PROACH DISTANCE’’: Paragraph (c)(1)(i) of Voltage. The effective (root mean § 1926.960 requires employers to establish square, or rms) potential difference be- minimum approach distances. tween any two conductors or between a

488

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00498 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

conductor and ground. This subpart ex- accordance with § 1926.960(c)(1)(i) and Table presses voltages in nominal values, un- V–2 and Table V–7. This appendix provides less otherwise indicated. The nominal essential background information and tech- voltage of a system or circuit is the nical criteria for the calculation of the required minimum approach distances for live- value assigned to a system or circuit of line work on electric power generation, a given voltage class for the purpose of transmission, and distribution installations. convenient designation. The operating Unless an employer is using the maximum voltage of the system may vary above transient overvoltages specified in Table V– or below this value. 8 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the em- Work-positioning equipment. A body ployer must use persons knowledgeable in belt or body harness system rigged to the techniques discussed in this appendix, and competent in the field of electric trans- allow an employee to be supported on mission and distribution system design, to an elevated vertical surface, such as a determine the maximum transient over- utility pole or tower leg, and work voltage. with both hands free while leaning. II. GENERAL [79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 A. The following definitions FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 25518, May 4, Definitions. from § 1926.968 relate to work on or near elec- 2015; 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, 2020] tric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment and the elec- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART V OF PART 1926 trical hazards they present. [RESERVED] Exposed. . . . Not isolated or guarded. Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or oth- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART V OF PART erwise protected, by means of suitable covers 1926—WORKING ON EXPOSED ENER- or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or GIZED PARTS platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of dangerous I. INTRODUCTION approach or inadvertent contact by persons Electric utilities design electric power gen- or objects. eration, transmission, and distribution in- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘GUARDED’’: stallations to meet National Electrical Safe- Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise ty Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. protected, are not guarded. Electric utilities also design transmission and distribution lines to limit line outages Insulated. Separated from other conducting as required by system reliability criteria 1 surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) and to withstand the maximum overvoltages offering a high resistance to the passage of impressed on the system. Conditions such as current. switching surges, faults, and lightning can NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘INSULATED’’: cause overvoltages. Electric utilities gen- When any object is said to be insulated, it is erally select insulator design and lengths understood to be insulated for the conditions and the clearances to structural parts so as to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, to prevent outages from contaminated line it is, for the purpose of this subpart, insulation and during storms. Line insulator uninsulated. lengths and structural clearances have, over the years, come closer to the minimum ap- Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons proach distances used by workers. As min- unless special means for access are used. imum approach distances and structural Statistical sparkover voltage. A transient clearances converge, it is increasingly im- overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-per- portant that system designers and system cent probability of sparkover (that is, two standard deviations above the voltage at operating and maintenance personnel under- which there is a 50-percent probability of stand the concepts underlying minimum ap- sparkover). proach distances. Statistical withstand voltage. A transient The information in this appendix will as- overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-per- sist employers in complying with the min- cent probability of sparkover (that is, three imum approach-distance requirements con- standard deviations below the voltage at tained in §§ 1926.960(c)(1) and 1926.964(c). Em- which there is a 50-percent probability of ployers must use the technical criteria and sparkover). methodology presented in this appendix in B. Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts. establishing minimum approach distances in The hazards posed by installations energized at 50 to 300 volts are the same as those found 1 Federal, State, and local regulatory bod- in many other workplaces. That is not to say ies and electric utilities set reliability re- that there is no hazard, but the complexity quirements that limit the number and dura- of electrical protection required does not tion of system outages. compare to that required for high-voltage

489

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00499 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

systems. The employee must avoid contact III. DETERMINATION OF MINIMUM APPROACH with the exposed parts, and the protective DISTANCES FOR AC VOLTAGES GREATER equipment used (such as rubber insulating THAN 300 VOLTS gloves) must provide insulation for the A. Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Test data voltages involved. generally forms the basis of minimum air in- C. Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC. sulation distances. The lowest voltage for Paragraph (c)(1)(i) of § 1926.960 requires the which sufficient test data exists is 5,000 employer to establish minimum approach volts, and these data indicate that the min- distances no less than the distances com- imum air insulation distance at that voltage puted by Table V–2 for ac systems so that is 20 millimeters (1 inch). Because the min- employees can work safely without risk of imum air insulation distance increases with sparkover.2 increasing voltage, and, conversely, de- Unless the employee is using electrical creases with decreasing voltage, an assumed protective equipment, air is the insulating minimum air insulation distance of 20 milli- medium between the employee and energized meters will protect against sparkover at parts. The distance between the employee voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Thus, 20 milli- and an energized part must be sufficient for meters is the electrical component of the the air to withstand the maximum transient minimum approach distance for these overvoltage that can reach the worksite voltages. under the working conditions and practices the employee is using. This distance is the B. Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts. For minimum air insulation distance, and it is voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, the Occu- equal to the electrical component of the pational Safety and Health Administration minimum approach distance. bases the methodology for calculating the Normal system design may provide or in- electrical component of the minimum ap- clude a means (such as lightning arrestors) proach distance on Institute of Electrical to control maximum anticipated transient and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 4– overvoltages, or the employer may use tem- 1995, Standard Techniques for High-Voltage porary devices (portable protective gaps) or Testing. Table 1 lists the critical sparkover measures (such as preventing automatic cir- distances from that standard as listed in cuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same IEEE Std 516–2009, IEEE Guide for Mainte- result. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of § 1926.960 re- nance Methods on Energized Power Lines. quires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient over- TABLE 1—SPARKOVER DISTANCE FOR ROD-TO- voltage, phase-to-ground, through an engi- ROD GAP neering analysis or assume a maximum an- Gap spacing from IEEE Std ticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, 60 Hz rod-to-rod sparkover 4–1995 phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table (kV peak) (cm) V–8, which specifies the following maximums for ac systems: 25 2 36 3 72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts ...... 3.5 per unit. 46 4 420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts ...... 3.0 per unit. 53 5 550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts ...... 2.5 per unit. 60 6 See paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appen- 70 8 dix, for additional discussion of maximum 79 10 transient overvoltages. 86 12 95 14 D. Types of exposures. Employees working 104 16 on or near energized electric power genera- 112 18 tion, transmission, and distribution systems 120 20 face two kinds of exposures: Phase-to-ground 143 25 and phase-to-phase. The exposure is phase- 167 30 to-ground: (1) With respect to an energized 192 35 part, when the employee is at ground poten- 218 40 tial or (2) with respect to ground, when an 243 45 employee is at the potential of the energized 270 50 part during live-line barehand work. The ex- 322 60 posure is phase-to-phase, with respect to an Source: IEEE Std 516–2009. energized part, when an employee is at the potential of another energized part (at a dif- To use this table to determine the elec- ferent potential) during live-line barehand trical component of the minimum approach work. distance, the employer must determine the peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage and select a gap from the table that cor- 2 Sparkover is a disruptive electric dis- responds to that voltage as a withstand volt- charge in which an electric arc forms and age rather than a critical sparkover voltage. electric current passes through air. To calculate the electrical component of the

490

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00500 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

minimum approach distance for voltages be- overvoltage, which corresponds to the with- tween 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following stand voltage for the relevant exposure.3 procedure: 4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground 1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to- the corresponding critical sparkover voltage. ground voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard 2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the withstand voltage.) the square root of 2 to convert the rms value 5. Determine the electrical component of of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground the minimum approach distance from Table voltage. 1 through interpolation. 3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground volt- Table 2 illustrates how to derive the elec- age by the maximum per-unit transient over- trical component of the minimum approach voltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, distance for voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilo- as discussed later in this appendix. This is volts, before the application of any altitude the maximum phase-to-ground transient correction factor, as explained later.

TABLE 2—CALCULATING THE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF MAD—751 V TO 72.5 KV

Maximum system phase-to-phase voltage (kV) Step 15 36 46 72.5

1. Divide by √3 ...... 8.7 20.8 26.6 41.9 2. Multiply by √2 ...... 12.2 29.4 37.6 59.2 3. Multiply by 3.0 ...... 36.7 88.2 112.7 177.6 4. Divide by 0.85 ...... 43.2 103.7 132.6 208.9 5. Interpolate from Table 1 ...... 3 + (7.2/10) 1 14 + (8.7/9)*2 20 + (12.6/ 35 + (16.9/ 23)*5 26)*5 Electrical component of MAD (cm) ...... 3.72 15.93 22.74 38.25

C. Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts. For In Equation 1, C is 0.01: (1) For phase-to- voltages of 72.6 kilovolts to 800 kilovolts, ground exposures that the employer can this subpart bases the electrical component demonstrate consist only of air across the of minimum approach distances, before the approach distance (gap) and (2) for phase-to- application of any altitude correction factor, phase exposures if the employer can dem- on the following formula: onstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the EQUATION 1—FOR VOLTAGES OF 72.6 KV TO 800 gap. Otherwise, C is 0.011. KV In Equation 1, the term a varies depending D = 0.3048(C + a)VL-GT on whether the employee’s exposure is phase- Where: to-ground or phase-to-phase and on whether objects are in the gap. The employer must D = Electrical component of the minimum use the equations in Table 3 to calculate a. approach distance in air in meters; Sparkover test data with insulation span- C = a correction factor associated with the variation of gap sparkover with voltage; ning the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-ground exposures, and sparkover a = A factor relating to the saturation of air at system voltages of 345 kilovolts or test data with only air in the gap form the higher; 4 basis for the equations for phase-to-phase exposures. The phase-to-ground equations re- VL-G = Maximum system line-to-ground rms voltage in kilovolts—it should be the sult in slightly higher values of a, and, con- ‘‘actual’’ maximum, or the normal highest sequently, produce larger minimum ap- voltage for the range (for example, 10 percent proach distances, than the phase-to-phase above the nominal voltage); and equations for the same value of VPeak. T = Maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit.

3 The withstand voltage is the voltage at of about 630 kilovolts. Systems operating at which sparkover is not likely to occur across 345 kilovolts (or maximum system voltages a specified distance. It is the voltage taken of 362 kilovolts) can have peak maximum at the 3s point below the sparkover voltage, transient overvoltages exceeding 630 kilo- assuming that the sparkover curve follows a volts. Table V–2 sets equations for calcu- normal distribution. lating a based on peak voltage. 4 Test data demonstrates that the saturation factor is greater than 0 at peak voltages

491

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00501 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

In Equation 1, T is the maximum transient mine the total safe minimum approach dis- overvoltage factor in per unit. As noted ear- tances used in live-line work. lier, § 1926.960(c)(1)(ii) requires the employer The Occupational Safety and Health Ad- to determine the maximum anticipated per- ministration based the ergonomic compo- unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, nent of the minimum approach distance on through an engineering analysis or assume a response time-distance analysis. This tech- maximum anticipated per-unit transient nique uses an estimate of the total response overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance time to a hazardous incident and converts with Table V–8. For phase-to-ground exposures, the employer uses this value, called that time to the distance traveled. For example, the driver of a car takes a given TL-G, as T in Equation 1. IEEE Std 516–2009 provides the following formula to calculate amount of time to respond to a ‘‘stimulus’’ the phase-to-phase maximum transient over- and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time in- voltage, TL-L, from TL-G: volved results in the car’s traveling some distance before coming to a complete stop. TL-L = 1.35TL-G + 0.45. This distance depends on the speed of the car For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer at the time the stimulus appears and the re- uses this value as T in Equation 1. D. Provisions for inadvertent movement. The action time of the driver. minimum approach distance must include an In the case of live-line work, the employee ‘‘adder’’ to compensate for the inadvertent must first perceive that he or she is ap- movement of the worker relative to an ener- proaching the danger zone. Then, the worker gized part or the movement of the part rel- responds to the danger and must decelerate ative to the worker. This ‘‘adder’’ must ac- and stop all motion toward the energized count for this possible inadvertent move- part. During the time it takes to stop, the ment and provide the worker with a com- employee will travel some distance. This is fortable and safe zone in which to work. Em- the distance the employer must add to the ployers must add the distance for inad- electrical component of the minimum ap- vertent movement (called the ‘‘ergonomic proach distance to obtain the total safe min- component of the minimum approach dis- imum approach distance. tance’’) to the electrical component to deter-

492

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00502 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.036 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

At voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilo- constant distance from the employee and, volts,5 the electrical component of the min- thus, maintain the appropriate minimum ap- imum approach distance is smaller than the proach distance automatically. ergonomic component. At 72.5 kilovolts, the The location of the worker and the type of electrical component is only a little more work methods the worker is using also influ- than 0.3 meters (1 foot). An ergonomic com- ence the length of the ergonomic component ponent of the minimum approach distance of the minimum approach distance. In this must provide for all the worker’s unantici- higher voltage range, the employees use pated movements. At these voltages, work- work methods that more tightly control ers generally use rubber insulating gloves; their movements than when the workers per- however, these gloves protect only a worker’s hands and arms. Therefore, the energized form work using rubber insulating gloves. object must be at a safe approach distance to The worker, therefore, is farther from the protect the worker’s face. In this case, 0.61 energized line or equipment and must be meters (2 feet) is a sufficient and practical more precise in his or her movements just to ergonomic component of the minimum ap- perform the work. For these reasons, this proach distance. subpart adopts an ergonomic component of For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1 employees must use different work practices foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilo- during energized line work. Generally, em- volts. ployees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to per- Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic compo- form work on energized equipment. These nent of the minimum approach distance for tools, by design, keep the energized part at a various voltage ranges.

TABLE 4—ERGONOMIC COMPONENT OF MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE

Distance Voltage range (kV) m ft

0.301 to 0.750 ...... 0.31 1.0 0.751 to 72.5 ...... 0.61 2.0 72.6 to 800 ...... 0.31 1.0 Note: The employer must add this distance to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the full minimum approach distance.

The ergonomic component of the minimum the work. For example, the employee should approach distance accounts for errors in be able to perform all of the following ac- maintaining the minimum approach distance tions without straying into the minimum ap- (which might occur, for example, if an em- proach distance: ployee misjudges the length of a conductive • Adjust his or her hardhat, object he or she is holding), and for errors in • maneuver a tool onto an energized part judging the minimum approach distance. with a reasonable amount of overreaching or The ergonomic component also accounts for underreaching, inadvertent movements by the employee, • reach for and handle tools, material, and such as slipping. In contrast, the working po- equipment passed to him or her, and sition selected to properly maintain the min- • adjust tools, and replace components on imum approach distance must account for them, when necessary during the work pro- all of an employee’s reasonably likely move- cedure. ments and still permit the employee to ad- The training of qualified employees re- here to the applicable minimum approach quired under § 1926.950, and the job planning distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely and briefing required under § 1926.952, must movements include an employee’s adjust- address selection of a proper working posi- ments to tools, equipment, and working position. tions and all movements needed to perform

5 For voltages of 50 to 300 volts, Table V–2 distance for this voltage range contains nei- specifies a minimum approach distance of ther an electrical component nor an ergo- ‘‘avoid contact.’’ The minimum approach nomic component.

493

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00503 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

E. Miscellaneous correction factors. Changes 1. Dielectric strength of air. The dielectric in the air medium that forms the insulation strength of air in a uniform electric field at influences the strength of an air gap. A brief discussion of each factor follows.

494

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00504 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.037 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

standard atmospheric conditions is approxi- overvoltage has an associated transient volt- mately 3 kilovolts per millimeter.6 The pres- age wave shape. The wave shape arriving at sure, temperature, and humidity of the air, the site and its magnitude vary consider- the shape, dimensions, and separation of the ably. electrodes, and the characteristics of the ap- In developing requirements for minimum plied voltage (wave shape) affect the disrup- approach distances, the Occupational Safety tive gradient. and Health Administration considered the 2. Atmospheric effect. The empirically deter- most common wave shapes and the mag- mined electrical strength of a given gap is nitude of transient overvoltages found on normally applicable at standard atmospheric electric power generation, transmission, and conditions (20 °C, 101.3 kilopascals, 11 grams/ distribution systems. The equations in Table cubic centimeter humidity). An increase in V–2 for minimum approach distances use per- the density (humidity) of the air inhibits unit maximum transient overvoltages, which sparkover for a given air gap. The combina- are relative to the nominal maximum volt- tion of temperature and air pressure that re- age of the system. For example, a maximum sults in the lowest gap sparkover voltage is transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit in- high temperature and low pressure. This dicates that the highest transient over- combination of conditions is not likely to voltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum occur. Low air pressure, generally associated system voltage. with high humidity, causes increased elec- 3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. Table 5 trical strength. An average air pressure gen- lists the magnitude of typical transient erally correlates with low humidity. Hot and overvoltages. dry working conditions normally result in reduced electrical strength. The equations TABLE 5—MAGNITUDE OF TYPICAL TRANSIENT for minimum approach distances in Table V– OVERVOLTAGES 2 assume standard atmospheric conditions. 3. Altitude. The reduced air pressure at high Cause Magnitude altitudes causes a reduction in the electrical (per unit) strength of an air gap. An employer must in- Energized 200-mile line without closing resistors 3.5 crease the minimum approach distance by Energized 200-mile line with one-step closing about 3 percent per 300 meters (1,000 feet) of resistor ...... 2.1 increased altitude for altitudes above 900 me- Energized 200-mile line with multistep resistor ... 2.5 ters (3,000 feet). Table V–4 specifies the alti- Reclosing with trapped charge one-step resistor 2.2 tude correction factor that the employer Opening surge with single restrike ...... 3.0 must use in calculating minimum approach Fault initiation unfaulted phase ...... 2.1 Fault initiation adjacent circuit ...... 2.5 distances. Fault clearing ...... 1.7 to 1.9 IV. DETERMINING MINIMUM APPROACH 4. Standard deviation—air-gap withstand. DISTANCES For each air gap length under the same at- A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the mospheric conditions, there is a statistical Worksite variation in the breakdown voltage. The probability of breakdown against voltage has 1. System voltage (nominal). The nominal a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The stand- system voltage range determines the voltage ard deviation of this distribution varies with for purposes of calculating minimum ap- the wave shape, gap geometry, and atmos- proach distances. The employer selects the pheric conditions. The withstand voltage of range in which the nominal system voltage the air gap is three standard deviations (3s) falls, as given in the relevant table, and uses below the critical sparkover voltage. (The the highest value within that range in per- critical sparkover voltage is the crest value unit calculations. of the impulse wave that, under specified 2. Transient overvoltages. Operation of conditions, causes sparkover 50 percent of switches or circuit breakers, a fault on a line the time. An impulse wave of three standard or circuit or on an adjacent circuit, and deviations below this value, that is, the similar activities may generate transient withstand voltage, has a probability of overvoltages on an electrical system. Each sparkover of approximately 1 in 1,000.) 5. Broken Insulators. Tests show reductions 6 For the purposes of estimating arc length, in the insulation strength of insulator Subpart V generally assumes a more con- strings with broken skirts. Broken units servative dielectric strength of 10 kilovolts may lose up to 70 percent of their withstand per 25.4 millimeters, consistent with assump- capacity. Because an employer cannot deter- tions made in consensus standards such as mine the insulating capability of a broken the National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE unit without testing it, the employer must C2–2012). The more conservative value ac- consider damaged units in an insulator to counts for variables such as electrode shape, have no insulating value. Additionally, the wave shape, and a certain amount of over- presence of a live-line tool alongside an insu- voltage. lator string with broken units may further

495

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00505 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

reduce the overall insulating strength. The ing transient overvoltages. Alternatively, number of good units that must be present in the employer can hold the overvoltage to an a string for it to be ‘‘insulated’’ as defined by acceptable level by installing surge arresters § 1926.968 depends on the maximum over- or portable protective gaps on the system. In voltage possible at the worksite. addition, the employer can change the transmission system to minimize the effect of B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known, Maximum-Anticipated Per-Unit switching operations. Section 4.8 of IEEE Transient Overvoltages Std 516–2009 describes various ways of controlling, and thereby reducing, maximum 1. Determining the minimum approach dis- transient overvoltages. tance for AC systems. Under § 1926.960(c)(1)(ii), 2. Operation of circuit breakers.7 The max- the employer must determine the maximum imum transient overvoltage that can reach anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, the worksite is often the result of switching phase-to-ground, through an engineering on the line on which employees are working. analysis or must assume a maximum antici- Disabling automatic reclosing during ener- pated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase- to-ground, in accordance with Table V–8. gized line work, so that the line will not be When the employer conducts an engineering reenergized after being opened for any rea- analysis of the system and determines that son, limits the maximum switching surge the maximum transient overvoltage is lower overvoltage to the larger of the opening than specified by Table V–8, the employer surge or the greatest possible fault-gen- must ensure that any conditions assumed in erated surge, provided that the devices (for the analysis, for example, that employees example, insertion resistors) are operable block reclosing on a circuit or install port- and will function to limit the transient over- able protective gaps, are present during ener- voltage and that circuit breaker restrikes do gized work. To ensure that these conditions not occur. The employer must ensure the are present, the employer may need to insti- proper functioning of insertion resistors and tute new live-work procedures reflecting the other overvoltage-limiting devices when the conditions and limitations set by the engi- employer’s engineering analysis assumes neering analysis. their proper operation to limit the over- 2. Calculation of reduced approach distance voltage level. If the employer cannot disable values. An employer may take the following the reclosing feature (because of system op- steps to reduce minimum approach distances erating conditions), other methods of con- when the maximum transient overvoltage on trolling the switching surge level may be the system (that is, the maximum transient necessary. overvoltage without additional steps to control overvoltages) produces unacceptably Transient surges on an adjacent line, par- large minimum approach distances: ticularly for double circuit construction, Step 1. Determine the maximum voltage may cause a significant overvoltage on the (with respect to a given nominal voltage line on which employees are working. The range) for the energized part. employer’s engineering analysis must ac- Step 2. Determine the technique to use to count for coupling to adjacent lines. control the maximum transient overvoltage. 3. Surge arresters. The use of modern surge (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appen- arresters allows a reduction in the basic im- dix.) Determine the maximum transient pulse-insulation levels of much transmission overvoltage that can exist at the worksite system equipment. The primary function of with that form of control in place and with early arresters was to protect the system in- a confidence level of 3s . This voltage is the sulation from the effects of lightning. Mod- withstand voltage for the purpose of calcu- ern arresters not only dissipate lightning- lating the appropriate minimum approach caused transients, but may also control distance. many other system transients caused by Step 3. Direct employees to implement pro- switching or faults. cedures to ensure that the control technique The employer may use properly designed is in effect during the course of the work. arresters to control transient overvoltages Step 4. Using the new value of transient along a transmission line and thereby reduce overvoltage in per unit, calculate the required minimum approach distance from the requisite length of the insulator string Table V–2. 7 The detailed design of a circuit inter- C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient rupter, such as the design of the contacts, re- Overvoltage Stress Found on a System sistor insertion, and breaker timing control, 1. Introduction. There are several means of are beyond the scope of this appendix. The controlling overvoltages that occur on trans- design of the system generally accounts for mission systems. For example, the employer these features. This appendix only discusses can modify the operation of circuit breakers features that can limit the maximum switch- or other switching devices to reduce switching transient overvoltage on a system.

496

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00506 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

and possibly the maximum transient over- site by installing portable protective gaps, voltage on the line.8 the employer may calculate the minimum 4. Switching Restrictions. Another form of approach distance as follows: overvoltage control involves establishing Step 1. Select the appropriate withstand switching restrictions, whereby the em- voltage for the protective gap based on sys- ployer prohibits the operation of circuit tem requirements and an acceptable prob- breakers until certain system conditions are ability of gap sparkover.9 present. The employer restricts switching by using a tagging system, similar to that used Step 2. Determine a gap distance that pro- 10 for a permit, except that the common term vides a withstand voltage greater than or used for this activity is a ‘‘hold-off’’ or ‘‘re- equal to the one selected in the first step.11 striction.’’ These terms indicate that the re- Step 3. Use 110 percent of the gap’s critical striction does not prevent operation, but sparkover voltage to determine the phase-to- only modifies the operation during the live- ground peak voltage at gap sparkover (VPPG work activity. Peak). Step 4. Determine the maximum transient D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Con- overvoltage, phase-to-ground, at the work- trol of Maximum Transient Overvoltage at the site from the following formula: Worksite When the employer institutes control of maximum transient overvoltage at the work-

Step 5. Use this value of T 12 in the equation that is subject to transient overvoltages of in Table V–2 to obtain the minimum ap- 2.4 p.u. The maximum operating voltage of proach distance. If the worksite is no more the line is 550 kilovolts. Determine the than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above sea level, length of the protective gap that will provide the employer may use this value of T to de- the minimum practical safe approach dis- termine the minimum approach distance tance. Also, determine what that minimum from Table 7 through Table 14. approach distance is. NOTE: All rounding must be to the next Step 1. Calculate the smallest practical higher value (that is, always round up). maximum transient overvoltage (1.25 times the crest phase-to-ground voltage): 13 Sample protective gap calculations. Problem: Employees are to perform work on a 500-kilovolt transmission line at sea level

8 Surge arrester application is beyond the voltage for each gap spacing (for example, a scope of this appendix. However, if the em- critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts for ployer installs the arrester near the work a gap spacing of 1.2 meters). The withstand site, the application would be similar to the voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of protective gaps discussed in paragraph IV.D its critical sparkover voltage. of this appendix. 11 Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the 9 The employer should check the withstand protective gap is known. voltage to ensure that it results in a prob- 12 ability of gap flashover that is acceptable IEEE Std 516–2009 states that most em- from a system outage perspective. (In other ployers add 0.2 to the calculated value of T words, a gap sparkover will produce a system as an additional safety factor. outage. The employer should determine 13 To eliminate sparkovers due to minor whether such an outage will impact overall system disturbances, the employer should system performance to an acceptable de- use a withstand voltage no lower than 1.25 gree.) In general, the withstand voltage p.u. Note that this is a practical, or oper- should be at least 1.25 times the maximum ational, consideration only. It may be fea- crest operating voltage. sible for the employer to use lower values of 10 The manufacturer of the gap provides, withstand voltage. based on test data, the critical sparkover 497

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00507 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.038 Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

This value equals the withstand voltage of Step 3. The phase-to-ground peak voltage

the protective gap. at gap sparkover (VPPG Peak) is 110 percent of Step 2. Using test data for a particular pro- the value from the previous step: tective gap, select a gap that has a critical 665kV × 1.10 = 732kV sparkover voltage greater than or equal to: This value corresponds to the withstand 561kV ÷ 0.85 = 660kV voltage of the electrical component of the For example, if a protective gap with a 1.22- minimum approach distance. m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical Step 4. Use this voltage to determine the sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), select this gap spacing. worksite value of T:

Step 5. Use this value of T in the equation 3. Worksite. If the employer installs protec- in Table V–2 to obtain the minimum ap- tive gaps at the worksite, the gap setting es- proach distance, or look up the minimum ap- tablishes the worksite impulse insulation proach distance in Table 7 through Table 14: strength. Lightning strikes as far as 6 miles MAD = 2.29m(7.6ft) from the worksite can cause a voltage surge greater than the gap withstand voltage, and E. Location of Protective Gaps a gap sparkover can occur. In addition, the 1. Adjacent structures. The employer may gap can sparkover from overvoltages on the install the protective gap on a structure ad- line that exceed the withstand voltage of the jacent to the worksite, as this practice does gap. Consequently, the employer must pro- not significantly reduce the protection af- tect employees from hazards resulting from forded by the gap. any sparkover that could occur. 2. Terminal stations. Gaps installed at ter- F. Disabling automatic reclosing. There are minal stations of lines or circuits provide a two reasons to disable the automatic-re- level of protection; however, that level of closing feature of circuit-interrupting de- protection may not extend throughout the vices while employees are performing live- length of the line to the worksite. The use of line work: substation terminal gaps raises the possi- • To prevent reenergization of a circuit bility that separate surges could enter the faulted during the work, which could create line at opposite ends, each with low enough a hazard or result in more serious injuries or magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without damage than the injuries or damage pro- sparkover. When voltage surges occur simul- duced by the original fault; taneously at each end of a line and travel to- • To prevent any transient overvoltage ward each other, the total voltage on the caused by the switching surge that would re- line at the point where they meet is the sult if the circuit were reenergized. arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap in- However, due to system stability consider- stalled within 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of the work- ations, it may not always be feasible to dis- site will protect against such intersecting able the automatic-reclosing feature. waves. Engineering studies of a particular line or system may indicate that employers V. MINIMUM APPROACH-DISTANCE TABLES can adequately protect employees by installing gaps at even more distant locations. In A. Legacy tables. Employers may use the any event, unless using the default values for minimum approach distances in Table 6 until T from Table V–8, the employer must deter- March 31, 2015. mine T at the worksite.

498

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00508 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.039 ER11AP14.040 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

TABLE 6—MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES UNTIL MARCH 31, 2015

Voltage range Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure phase to phase (kV) m ft m ft

2.1 to 15.0 ...... 0.64 2.1 0.61 2.0 15.1 to 35.0 ...... 0.71 2.3 0.71 2.3 35.1 to 46.0 ...... 0.76 2.5 0.76 2.5 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 0.91 3.0 0.91 3.0 72.6 to 121 ...... 1.02 3.3 1.37 4.5 138 to 145 ...... 1.07 3.5 1.52 5.0 161 to 169 ...... 1.12 3.7 1.68 5.5 230 to 242 ...... 1.52 5.0 2.54 8.3 345 to 362 * ...... 2.13 7.0 4.06 13.3 500 to 552 * ...... 3.35 11.0 6.10 20.0 700 to 765 * ...... 4.57 15.0 9.45 31.0 * The minimum approach distance may be the shortest distance between the energized part and the grounded surface.

B. Alternative minimum approach distances. vided that the employer follows the notes to Employers may use the minimum approach those tables. distances in Table 7 through Table 14 pro-

TABLE 7—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—72.6 TO 121.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 0.67 2.2 0.84 2.8 1.6 ...... 0.69 2.3 0.87 2.9 1.7 ...... 0.71 2.3 0.90 3.0 1.8 ...... 0.74 2.4 0.93 3.1 1.9 ...... 0.76 2.5 0.96 3.1 2.0 ...... 0.78 2.6 0.99 3.2 2.1 ...... 0.81 2.7 1.01 3.3 2.2 ...... 0.83 2.7 1.04 3.4 2.3 ...... 0.85 2.8 1.07 3.5 2.4 ...... 0.88 2.9 1.10 3.6 2.5 ...... 0.90 3.0 1.13 3.7 2.6 ...... 0.92 3.0 1.16 3.8 2.7 ...... 0.95 3.1 1.19 3.9 2.8 ...... 0.97 3.2 1.22 4.0 2.9 ...... 0.99 3.2 1.24 4.1 3.0 ...... 1.02 3.3 1.27 4.2 3.1 ...... 1.04 3.4 1.30 4.3 3.2 ...... 1.06 3.5 1.33 4.4 3.3 ...... 1.09 3.6 1.36 4.5 3.4 ...... 1.11 3.6 1.39 4.6 3.5 ...... 1.13 3.7 1.42 4.7

TABLE 8—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—121.1 TO 145.0 KV

Phase-to-ground rxposure Phase-to-phase rxposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 0.74 2.4 0.95 3.1 1.6 ...... 0.76 2.5 0.98 3.2 1.7 ...... 0.79 2.6 1.02 3.3 1.8 ...... 0.82 2.7 1.05 3.4 1.9 ...... 0.85 2.8 1.08 3.5 2.0 ...... 0.88 2.9 1.12 3.7 2.1 ...... 0.90 3.0 1.15 3.8 2.2 ...... 0.93 3.1 1.19 3.9 2.3 ...... 0.96 3.1 1.22 4.0 2.4 ...... 0.99 3.2 1.26 4.1 2.5 ...... 1.02 3.3 1.29 4.2 2.6 ...... 1.04 3.4 1.33 4.4 2.7 ...... 1.07 3.5 1.36 4.5 2.8 ...... 1.10 3.6 1.39 4.6 2.9 ...... 1.13 3.7 1.43 4.7 3.0 ...... 1.16 3.8 1.46 4.8 3.1 ...... 1.19 3.9 1.50 4.9

499

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00509 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 8—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—121.1 TO 145.0 KV—Continued

Phase-to-ground rxposure Phase-to-phase rxposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

3.2 ...... 1.21 4.0 1.53 5.0 3.3 ...... 1.24 4.1 1.57 5.2 3.4 ...... 1.27 4.2 1.60 5.2 3.5 ...... 1.30 4.3 1.64 5.4

TABLE 9—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—145.1 TO 169.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 0.81 2.7 1.05 3.4 1.6 ...... 0.84 2.8 1.09 3.6 1.7 ...... 0.87 2.9 1.13 3.7 1.8 ...... 0.90 3.0 1.17 3.8 1.9 ...... 0.94 3.1 1.21 4.0 2.0 ...... 0.97 3.2 1.25 4.1 2.1 ...... 1.00 3.3 1.29 4.2 2.2 ...... 1.03 3.4 1.33 4.4 2.3 ...... 1.07 3.5 1.37 4.5 2.4 ...... 1.10 3.6 1.41 4.6 2.5 ...... 1.13 3.7 1.45 4.8 2.6 ...... 1.17 3.8 1.49 4.9 2.7 ...... 1.20 3.9 1.53 5.0 2.8 ...... 1.23 4.0 1.57 5.2 2.9 ...... 1.26 4.1 1.61 5.3 3.0 ...... 1.30 4.3 1.65 5.4 3.1 ...... 1.33 4.4 1.70 5.6 3.2 ...... 1.36 4.5 1.76 5.8 3.3 ...... 1.39 4.6 1.82 6.0 3.4 ...... 1.43 4.7 1.88 6.2 3.5 ...... 1.46 4.8 1.94 6.4

TABLE 10—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—169.1 TO 242.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 1.02 3.3 1.37 4.5 1.6 ...... 1.06 3.5 1.43 4.7 1.7 ...... 1.11 3.6 1.48 4.9 1.8 ...... 1.16 3.8 1.54 5.1 1.9 ...... 1.21 4.0 1.60 5.2 2.0 ...... 1.25 4.1 1.66 5.4 2.1 ...... 1.30 4.3 1.73 5.7 2.2 ...... 1.35 4.4 1.81 5.9 2.3 ...... 1.39 4.6 1.90 6.2 2.4 ...... 1.44 4.7 1.99 6.5 2.5 ...... 1.49 4.9 2.08 6.8 2.6 ...... 1.53 5.0 2.17 7.1 2.7 ...... 1.58 5.2 2.26 7.4 2.8 ...... 1.63 5.3 2.36 7.7 2.9 ...... 1.67 5.5 2.45 8.0 3.0 ...... 1.72 5.6 2.55 8.4 3.1 ...... 1.77 5.8 2.65 8.7 3.2 ...... 1.81 5.9 2.76 9.1 3.3 ...... 1.88 6.2 2.86 9.4 3.4 ...... 1.95 6.4 2.97 9.7 3.5 ...... 2.01 6.6 3.08 10.1

TABLE 11—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—242.1 TO 362.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 1.37 4.5 1.99 6.5 1.6 ...... 1.44 4.7 2.13 7.0

500

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00510 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. B

TABLE 11—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—242.1 TO 362.0 KV—Continued

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.7 ...... 1.51 5.0 2.27 7.4 1.8 ...... 1.58 5.2 2.41 7.9 1.9 ...... 1.65 5.4 2.56 8.4 2.0 ...... 1.72 5.6 2.71 8.9 2.1 ...... 1.79 5.9 2.87 9.4 2.2 ...... 1.87 6.1 3.03 9.9 2.3 ...... 1.97 6.5 3.20 10.5 2.4 ...... 2.08 6.8 3.37 11.1 2.5 ...... 2.19 7.2 3.55 11.6 2.6 ...... 2.29 7.5 3.73 12.2 2.7 ...... 2.41 7.9 3.91 12.8 2.8 ...... 2.52 8.3 4.10 13.5 2.9 ...... 2.64 8.7 4.29 14.1 3.0 ...... 2.76 9.1 4.49 14.7 3.1 ...... 2.88 9.4 4.69 15.4 3.2 ...... 3.01 9.9 4.90 16.1 3.3 ...... 3.14 10.3 5.11 16.8 3.4 ...... 3.27 10.7 5.32 17.5 3.5 ...... 3.41 11.2 5.52 18.1

TABLE 12—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—362.1 TO 420.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 1.53 5.0 2.40 7.9 1.6 ...... 1.62 5.3 2.58 8.5 1.7 ...... 1.70 5.6 2.75 9.0 1.8 ...... 1.78 5.8 2.94 9.6 1.9 ...... 1.88 6.2 3.13 10.3 2.0 ...... 1.99 6.5 3.33 10.9 2.1 ...... 2.12 7.0 3.53 11.6 2.2 ...... 2.24 7.3 3.74 12.3 2.3 ...... 2.37 7.8 3.95 13.0 2.4 ...... 2.50 8.2 4.17 13.7 2.5 ...... 2.64 8.7 4.40 14.4 2.6 ...... 2.78 9.1 4.63 15.2 2.7 ...... 2.93 9.6 4.87 16.0 2.8 ...... 3.07 10.1 5.11 16.8 2.9 ...... 3.23 10.6 5.36 17.6 3.0 ...... 3.38 11.1 5.59 18.3 3.1 ...... 3.55 11.6 5.82 19.1 3.2 ...... 3.72 12.2 6.07 19.9 3.3 ...... 3.89 12.8 6.31 20.7 3.4 ...... 4.07 13.4 6.56 21.5 3.5 ...... 4.25 13.9 6.81 22.3

TABLE 13—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—420.1 TO 550.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 1.95 6.4 3.46 11.4 1.6 ...... 2.11 6.9 3.73 12.2 1.7 ...... 2.28 7.5 4.02 13.2 1.8 ...... 2.45 8.0 4.31 14.1 1.9 ...... 2.62 8.6 4.61 15.1 2.0 ...... 2.81 9.2 4.92 16.1 2.1 ...... 3.00 9.8 5.25 17.2 2.2 ...... 3.20 10.5 5.55 18.2 2.3 ...... 3.40 11.2 5.86 19.2 2.4 ...... 3.62 11.9 6.18 20.3 2.5 ...... 3.84 12.6 6.50 21.3 2.6 ...... 4.07 13.4 6.83 22.4 2.7 ...... 4.31 14.1 7.18 23.6 2.8 ...... 4.56 15.0 7.52 24.7 2.9 ...... 4.81 15.8 7.88 25.9

501

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00511 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 13—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—420.1 TO 550.0 KV—Continued

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

3.0 ...... 5.07 16.6 8.24 27.0

TABLE 14—AC MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCES—550.1 TO 800.0 KV

Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure T (p.u.) m ft m ft

1.5 ...... 3.16 10.4 5.97 19.6 1.6 ...... 3.46 11.4 6.43 21.1 1.7 ...... 3.78 12.4 6.92 22.7 1.8 ...... 4.12 13.5 7.42 24.3 1.9 ...... 4.47 14.7 7.93 26.0 2.0 ...... 4.83 15.8 8.47 27.8 2.1 ...... 5.21 17.1 9.02 29.6 2.2 ...... 5.61 18.4 9.58 31.4 2.3 ...... 6.02 19.8 10.16 33.3 2.4 ...... 6.44 21.1 10.76 35.3 2.5 ...... 6.88 22.6 11.38 37.3 Notes to Table 7 through Table 14: 1. The employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis, as required by § 1926.960(c)(1)(ii), or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to- ground, in accordance with Table V–8. 2. For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer must demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. 3. The worksite must be at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less above sea level.

[79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014]

APPENDIX C TO SUBPART V OF PART station structures (which have relatively low 1926—PROTECTION FROM HAZARDOUS values of impedance to ground) can result in 2 DIFFERENCES IN ELECTRIC POTEN- hazardous voltages. In all cases, the degree of the hazard depends on the magnitude of TIAL the current through the employee and the I. INTRODUCTION time of exposure. This appendix discusses methods of protecting workers against the Current passing through an impedance im- possibility that grounded objects, such as presses voltage across that impedance. Even cranes and other mechanical equipment, will conductors have some, albeit low, value of contact energized power lines and that deen- 1 impedance. Therefore, if a ‘‘grounded’’ ob- ergized and grounded power lines will be- ject, such as a crane or deenergized and come accidentally energized. grounded power line, results in a ground fault on a power line, voltage is impressed on II. VOLTAGE-GRADIENT DISTRIBUTION that grounded object. The voltage impressed on the grounded object depends largely on A. Voltage-gradient distribution curve. Abso- the voltage on the line, on the impedance of lute, or true, ground serves as a reference the faulted conductor, and on the impedance and always has a voltage of 0 volts above to ‘‘true,’’ or ‘‘absolute,’’ ground represented ground potential. Because there is an imped- by the object. If the impedance of the object ance between a grounding electrode and ab- causing the fault is relatively large, the volt- solute ground, there will be a voltage dif- age impressed on the object is essentially the ference between the grounding electrode and phase-to-ground system voltage. However, absolute ground under ground-fault condi- even faults to grounded power lines or to tions. Voltage dissipates from the grounding well grounded transmission towers or sub- electrode (or from the grounding point) and creates a ground potential gradient. The voltage decreases rapidly with increasing 1 This appendix generally uses the term distance from the grounding electrode. A ‘‘grounded’’ only with respect to grounding voltage drop associated with this dissipation that the employer intentionally installs, for example, the grounding an employer installs on a deenergized conductor. However, in this 2 Thus, grounding systems for transmission case, the term ‘‘grounded’’ means connected towers and substation structures should be to earth, regardless of whether or not that designed to minimize the step and touch po- connection is intentional. tentials involved.

502

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00512 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C

of voltage is a ground potential. Figure 1 is a typical voltage-gradient distribution curve (assuming a uniform soil texture).

503

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00513 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.041 Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

B. Step and touch potentials. Figure 1 also tial is equal to the difference in voltage be- shows that workers are at risk from step and tween the electrode (which is at a distance of touch potentials. Step potential is the volt- 0 meters) and a point some distance away age between the feet of a person standing from the electrode (where the point rep- near an energized grounded object (the elec- resents the location of the feet of the person trode). In Figure 1, the step potential is in contact with the object). The touch poten- equal to the difference in voltage between tial could be nearly the full voltage across two points at different distances from the the grounded object if that object is ground- electrode (where the points represent the lo- ed at a point remote from the place where cation of each foot in relation to the elec- the person is in contact with it. For exam- trode). A person could be at risk of injury ple, a crane grounded to the system neutral during a fault simply by standing near the and that contacts an energized line would ex- object. pose any person in contact with the crane or Touch potential is the voltage between the its uninsulated load line to a touch potential energized grounded object (again, the elec- nearly equal to the full fault voltage. trode) and the feet of a person in contact Figure 2 illustrates step and touch poten- with the object. In Figure 1, the touch potentials.

504

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00514 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C

III. PROTECTING WORKERS FROM HAZARDOUS Ground. A conducting connection between DIFFERENCES IN ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that A. Definitions. The following definitions serves in place of the earth. apply to section III of this appendix: Grounding cable (grounding jumper). A cable Bond. The electrical interconnection of connected between a deenergized part and conductive parts designed to maintain a ground. Note that grounding cables carry common electric potential. fault current and bonding cables generally Bonding cable (bonding jumper). A cable con- do not. A cable that bonds two conductive nected to two conductive parts to bond the parts but carries substantial fault current parts together. (for example, a jumper connected between Cluster bar. A terminal temporarily at- one phase and a grounded phase) is a ground- tached to a structure that provides a means ing cable. for the attachment and bonding of grounding Ground mat (grounding grid). A temporarily and bonding cables to the structure. or permanently installed metallic mat or grating that establishes an equipotential

505

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00515 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.042 Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

surface and provides connection points for an equipotential zone for workers on the attaching grounds. ground, with respect to a grounded object, B. Analyzing the hazard. The employer can through the use of a metal mat connected to use an engineering analysis of the power sys- the grounded object. The employer can use a tem under fault conditions to determine grounding grid to equalize the voltage within whether hazardous step and touch voltages the grid or bond conductive objects in the will develop. The analysis should determine immediate work area to minimize the poten- the voltage on all conductive objects in the tial between the objects and between each work area and the amount of time the volt- object and ground. (Bonding an object outage will be present. Based on the this anal- side the work area can increase the touch po- ysis, the employer can select appropriate tential to that object, however.) Section measures and protective equipment, includ- III.D of this appendix discusses equipotential ing the measures and protective equipment zones for employees working on deenergized outlined in Section III of this appendix, to and grounded power lines. protect each employee from hazardous dif- 2. Insulating equipment, such as rubber ferences in electric potential. For example, gloves, can protect employees handling from the analysis, the employer will know grounded equipment and conductors from the voltage remaining on conductive objects hazardous touch potentials. The insulating after employees install bonding and ground- equipment must be rated for the highest ing equipment and will be able to select insu- voltage that can be impressed on the ground- lating equipment with an appropriate rating, ed objects under fault conditions (rather as described in paragraph III.C.2 of this ap- than for the full system voltage). pendix. 3. Restricting employees from areas where C. Protecting workers on the ground. The em- hazardous step or touch potentials could ployer may use several methods, including arise can protect employees not directly in- equipotential zones, insulating equipment, volved in performing the operation. The em- and restricted work areas, to protect employer must ensure that employees on the ployees on the ground from hazardous dif- ground in the vicinity of transmission struc- ferences in electrical potential. tures are at a distance where step voltages 1. An equipotential zone will protect work- would be insufficient to cause injury. Em- ers within it from hazardous step and touch ployees must not handle grounded conduc- potentials. (See Figure 3.) Equipotential tors or equipment likely to become energized zones will not, however, protect employees to hazardous voltages unless the employees located either wholly or partially outside the are within an equipotential zone or protected protected area. The employer can establish by insulating equipment.

506

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00516 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C

D. Protecting employees working on deener- protect employees working on deenergized gized and grounded power lines. This Section power lines. Section 1926.962 applies to III.D of Appendix C establishes guidelines to grounding of transmission and distribution help employers comply with requirements in lines and equipment for the purpose of pro- § 1926.962 for using protective grounding to tecting workers. Paragraph (c) of § 1926.962

507

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00517 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.043 Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

requires temporary protective grounds to be Finally, Section III.D.3 of this appendix placed at such locations and arranged in discusses other safety considerations that such a manner that the employer can dem- will help the employer comply with other re- onstrate will prevent exposure of each em- quirements in § 1926.962. Following these ployee to hazardous differences in electric guidelines will protect workers from hazards potential.3 Sections III.D.1 and III.D.2 of this that can occur when a deenergized and appendix provide guidelines that employers grounded line becomes energized. can use in making the demonstration re- 1. Determining safe body current limits. This quired by § 1926.962(c). Section III.D.1 of this Section III.D.1 of Appendix C provides guide- appendix provides guidelines on how the em- lines on how an employer can determine ployer can determine whether particular whether any differences in electric potential grounding practices expose employees to hazardous differences in electric potential. to which workers could be exposed are haz- Section III.D.2 of this appendix describes ardous as part of the demonstration required grounding methods that the employer can by § 1926.962(c). use in lieu of an engineering analysis to Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engi- make the demonstration required by neers (IEEE) Standard 1048–2003, IEEE Guide § 1926.962(c). The Occupational Safety and for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, pro- Health Administration will consider employ- vides the following equation for determining ers that comply with the criteria in this ap- the threshold of ventricular fibrillation when pendix as meeting § 1926.962(c). the duration of the electric shock is limited:

where I is the current through the worker’s Employers may use the IEEE Std 1048–2003 body, and t is the duration of the current in equation to determine safe body current lim- seconds. This equation represents the ven- its only if the employer protects workers tricular fibrillation threshold for 95.5 percent from hazards associated with involuntary of the adult population with a mass of 50 muscle reactions from electric shock (for ex- kilograms (110 pounds) or more. The equa- ample, the hazard to a worker from falling as tion is valid for current durations between a result of an electric shock). Moreover, the 0.0083 to 3.0 seconds. equation applies only when the duration of To use this equation to set safe voltage the electric shock is limited. If the pre- limits in an equipotential zone around the cautions the employer takes, including those worker, the employer will need to assume a required by applicable standards, do not ade- value for the resistance of the worker’s body. quately protect employees from hazards as- IEEE Std 1048–2003 states that ‘‘total body sociated with involuntary reactions from resistance is usually taken as 1000 W for de- electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced termining . . . body current limits.’’ How- voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 ever, employers should be aware that the im- milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. (The pedance of a worker’s body can be substan- 500-ohm resistor represents the resistance of tially less than that value. For instance, an employee. The 1-milliampere current is IEEE Std 1048–2003 reports a minimum hand- to-hand resistance of 610 ohms and an inter- the threshold of perception.) Finally, if the nal body resistance of 500 ohms. The internal employer protects employees from injury resistance of the body better represents the due to involuntary reactions from electric minimum resistance of a worker’s body when shock, but the duration of the electric shock the skin resistance drops near zero, which is unlimited (that is, when the fault current occurs, for example, when there are breaks at the work location will be insufficient to in the worker’s skin, for instance, from cuts trip the devices protecting the circuit), a or from blisters formed as a result of the cur- hazard exists if the resultant current would rent from an electric shock, or when the worker is wet at the points of contact.

3 The protective grounding required by point is at the same electric potential. In § 1926.962 limits to safe values the potential practice, current passing through the differences between accessible objects in grounding and bonding elements creates po- each employee’s work environment. Ideally, tential differences. If these potential dif- a protective grounding system would create ferences are hazardous, the employer may a true equipotential zone in which every not treat the zone as an equipotential zone.

508

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00518 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.044 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C

be more than 6 milliamperes (the recognized mote ground when lower impedance grounds let-go threshold for workers 4). are not available. In the absence of a ground- 2. Acceptable methods of grounding for em- ed system neutral, substation grid, and re- ployers that do not perform an engineering de- mote ground, the employer may use a tem- termination. The grounding methods pre- porary driven ground at the worksite. sented in this section of this appendix ensure In addition, if employees are working on a that differences in electric potential are as three-phase system, the grounding method low as possible and, therefore, meet must short circuit all three phases. Short § 1926.962(c) without an engineering deter- circuiting all phases will ensure faster clear- mination of the potential differences. These ing and lower the current through the methods follow two principles: (i) The grounding cable connecting the deenergized grounding method must ensure that the cir- line to ground, thereby lowering the voltage cuit opens in the fastest available clearing across that cable. The short circuit need not time, and (ii) the grounding method must en- be at the worksite; however, the employer sure that the potential differences between must treat any conductor that is not ground- conductive objects in the employee’s work ed at the worksite as energized because the area are as low as possible. ungrounded conductors will be energized at Paragraph (c) of § 1926.962 does not require fault voltage during a fault. grounding methods to meet the criteria em- ii. Ensuring that the potential differences be- bodied in these principles. Instead, the para- tween conductive objects in the employee’s work graph requires that protective grounds be area are as low as possible. To achieve as low ‘‘placed at such locations and arranged in a voltage as possible across any two conduc- such a manner that the employer can dem- tive objects in the work area, the employer onstrate will prevent exposure of each em- must bond all conductive objects in the work ployee to hazardous differences in electric area. This section of this appendix discusses potential.’’ However, when the employer’s how to create a zone that minimizes dif- grounding practices do not follow these two ferences in electric potential between con- principles, the employer will need to perform ductive objects in the work area. an engineering analysis to make the dem- The employer must use bonding cables to onstration required by § 1926.962(c). bond conductive objects, except for metallic i. Ensuring that the circuit opens in the fast- objects bonded through metal-to-metal con- est available clearing time. Generally, the tact. The employer must ensure that metal- higher the fault current, the shorter the to-metal contacts are tight and free of contamination, such as oxidation, that can in- clearing times for the same type of fault. crease the impedance across the connection. Therefore, to ensure the fastest available For example, a bolted connection between clearing time, the grounding method must metal lattice tower members is acceptable if maximize the fault current with a low im- the connection is tight and free of corrosion pedance connection to ground. The employer and other contamination. Figure 4 shows accomplishes this objective by grounding the how to create an equipotential zone for circuit conductors to the best ground avail- metal lattice towers. able at the worksite. Thus, the employer Wood poles are conductive objects. The must ground to a grounded system neutral poles can absorb moisture and conduct elec- conductor, if one is present. A grounded sys- tricity, particularly at distribution and tem neutral has a direct connection to the transmission voltages. Consequently, the system ground at the source, resulting in an employer must either: (1) Provide a conduc- extremely low impedance to ground. In a tive platform, bonded to a grounding cable, substation, the employer may instead on which the worker stands or (2) use cluster ground to the substation grid, which also has bars to bond wood poles to the grounding an extremely low impedance to the system cable. The employer must ensure that em- ground and, typically, is connected to a ployees install the cluster bar below, and grounded system neutral when one is close to, the worker’s feet. The inner portion present. Remote system grounds, such as of the wood pole is more conductive than the pole and tower grounds, have a higher imped- outer shell, so it is important that the clus- ance to the system ground than grounded ter bar be in conductive contact with a system neutrals and substation grounding metal spike or nail that penetrates the wood grids; however, the employer may use a re- to a depth greater than or equal to the depth the worker’s climbing gaffs will penetrate 4 Electric current passing through the body the wood. For example, the employer could has varying effects depending on the amount mount the cluster bar on a bare pole ground of the current. At the let-go threshold, the wire fastened to the pole with nails or sta- current overrides a person’s control over his ples that penetrate to the required depth. Al- or her muscles. At that level, an employee ternatively, the employer may temporarily grasping an object will not be able to let go nail a conductive strap to the pole and con- of the object. The let-go threshold varies nect the strap to the cluster bar. Figure 5 from person to person; however, the recog- shows how to create an equipotential zone nized value for workers is 6 milliamperes. for wood poles.

509

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00519 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

510

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00520 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.045 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. C

For underground systems, employers com- gized or if a fault occurs on a different, but monly install grounds at the points of dis- nearby, energized cable. The fault current connection of the underground cables. These causes potential gradients in the earth, and grounding points are typically remote from a potential difference will exist between the the manhole or underground vault where em- earth where the worker is standing and the ployees will be working on the cable. Work- earth where the cable is grounded. Con- ers in contact with a cable grounded at a re- sequently, to create an equipotential zone mote location can experience hazardous po- for the worker, the employer must provide a tential differences if the cable becomes ener- means of connecting the deenergized cable to

511

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00521 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER11AP14.046 Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

ground at the worksite by having the worker APPENDIX D TO SUBPART V OF PART stand on a conductive mat bonded to the de- 1926—METHODS OF INSPECTING AND energized cable. If the cable is cut, the em- TESTING WOOD POLES ployer must install a bond across the opening in the cable or install one bond on each I. INTRODUCTION side of the opening to ensure that the sepa- When employees are to perform work on a rate cable ends are at the same potential. wood pole, it is important to determine the The employer must protect the worker from condition of the pole before employees climb any hazardous differences in potential any it. The weight of the employee, the weight of time there is no bond between the mat and equipment to be installed, and other working the cable (for example, before the worker in- stresses (such as the removal or retensioning stalls the bonds). of conductors) can lead to the failure of a de- 3. Other safety-related considerations. To en- fective pole or a pole that is not designed to sure that the grounding system is safe and handle the additional stresses.1 For these effective, the employer should also consider reasons, it is essential that, before an em- the following factors: 5 ployee climbs a wood pole, the employer ascertain that the pole is capable of sustaining i. Maintenance of grounding equipment. It is the stresses of the work. The determination essential that the employer properly main- that the pole is capable of sustaining these tain grounding equipment. Corrosion in the stresses includes an inspection of the condi- connections between grounding cables and tion of the pole. clamps and on the clamp surface can in- If the employer finds the pole to be unsafe crease the resistance of the cable, thereby to climb or to work from, the employer must increasing potential differences. In addition, secure the pole so that it does not fail while the surface to which a clamp attaches, such an employee is on it. The employer can se- as a conductor or tower member, must be cure the pole by a line truck boom, by ropes clean and free of corrosion and oxidation to or guys, or by lashing a new pole alongside ensure a low-resistance connection. Cables it. If a new one is lashed alongside the defec- must be free of damage that could reduce tive pole, employees should work from the their current-carrying capacity so that they new one. can carry the full fault current without fail- II. INSPECTING WOOD POLES ure. Each clamp must have a tight connection to the cable to ensure a low resistance A qualified employee should inspect wood and to ensure that the clamp does not sepa- poles for the following conditions:2 rate from the cable during a fault. A. General condition. Buckling at the ground line or an unusual angle with respect ii. Grounding cable length and movement. to the ground may indicate that the pole has The electromagnetic forces on grounding ca- rotted or is broken. bles during a fault increase with increasing B. Cracks. Horizontal cracks perpendicular cable length. These forces can cause the to the grain of the wood may weaken the cable to move violently during a fault and pole. Vertical cracks, although not normally can be high enough to damage the cable or considered to be a sign of a defective pole, clamps and cause the cable to fail. In addi- can pose a hazard to the climber, and the tion, flying cables can injure workers. Con- employee should keep his or her gaffs away sequently, cable lengths should be as short from them while climbing. as possible, and grounding cables that might C. Holes. Hollow spots and woodpecker carry high fault current should be in posi- holes can reduce the strength of a wood pole. tions where the cables will not injure work- D. Shell rot and decay. Rotting and decay ers during a fault. are cutout hazards and possible indications of the age and internal condition of the pole. E. Knots. One large knot or several smaller ones at the same height on the pole may be evidence of a weak point on the pole. F. Depth of setting. Evidence of the exist- 5 This appendix only discusses factors that ence of a former ground line substantially relate to ensuring an equipotential zone for employees. The employer must consider 1 A properly guyed pole in good condition other factors in selecting a grounding sys- should, at a minimum, be able to handle the tem that is capable of conducting the max- weight of an employee climbing it. imum fault current that could flow at the 2 The presence of any of these conditions is point of grounding for the time necessary to an indication that the pole may not be safe clear the fault, as required by to climb or to work from. The employee per- § 1926.962(d)(1)(i). IEEE Std 1048–2003 contains forming the inspection must be qualified to guidelines for selecting and installing make a determination as to whether it is grounding equipment that will meet safe to perform the work without taking ad- § 1926.962(d)(1)(i). ditional precautions.

512

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00522 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E

above the existing ground level may be an tive clothing and other protective equipment indication that the pole is no longer buried that has an arc rating greater than or equal to a sufficient depth. to the available heat energy under certain G. Soil conditions. Soft, wet, or loose soil conditions (paragraphs (g)(4) and (g)(5)). This around the base of the pole may indicate appendix contains information to help em- that the pole will not support any change in ployers estimate available heat energy as re- stress. quired by § 1926.960(g)(2), select protective H. Burn marks. Burning from transformer clothing and other protective equipment failures or conductor faults could damage with an arc rating suitable for the available the pole so that it cannot withstand changes heat energy as required by § 1926.960(g)(5), in mechanical stress. and ensure that employees do not wear flammable clothing that could lead to burn in- III. TESTING WOOD POLES jury as addressed by §§ 1926.960(g)(3) and The following tests, which are from (g)(4). § 1910.268(n)(3) of this chapter, are acceptable II. ASSESSING THE WORKPLACE FOR FLAME methods of testing wood poles: AND ELECTRIC-ARC HAZARDS A. Hammer test. Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 1.4 kg (3 pounds), Paragraph (g)(1) of § 1926.960 requires the starting near the ground line and continuing employer to assess the workplace to identify upwards circumferentially around the pole employees exposed to hazards from flames or to a height of approximately 1.8 meters (6 from electric arcs. This provision ensures feet). The hammer will produce a clear sound that the employer evaluates employee expo- and rebound sharply when striking sound sure to flames and electric arcs so that em- wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a ployees who face such exposures receive the dull sound or a less pronounced hammer re- required protection. The employer must con- bound. Also, prod the pole as near the ground duct an assessment for each employee who line as possible using a pole prod or a screw- performs work on or near exposed, energized driver with a blade at least 127 millimeters (5 parts of electric circuits. inches) long. If substantial decay is present, the pole is unsafe. A. Assessment Guidelines B. Rocking test. Apply a horizontal force to Sources electric arcs. Consider possible the pole and attempt to rock it back and sources of electric arcs, including: forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. • Energized circuit parts not guarded or in- Exercise caution to avoid causing power sulated, lines to swing together. Apply the force to • Switching devices that produce electric the pole either by pushing it with a pike pole arcs in normal operation, or pulling the pole with a rope. If the pole • Sliding parts that could fault during op- cracks during the test, it is unsafe. eration (for example, rack-mounted circuit breakers), and APPENDIX E TO SUBPART V OF PART • Energized electric equipment that could 1926—PROTECTION FROM FLAMES fail (for example, electric equipment with AND ELECTRIC ARCS damaged insulation or with evidence of arcing or overheating). I. INTRODUCTION Exposure to flames. Identify employees ex- Paragraph (g) of § 1926.960 addresses proposed to hazards from flames. Factors to tecting employees from flames and electric consider include: arcs. This paragraph requires employers to: • The proximity of employees to open (1) Assess the workplace for flame and elec- flames, and tric-arc hazards (paragraph (g)(1)); (2) esti- • For flammable material in the work mate the available heat energy from electric area, whether there is a reasonable likeli- arcs to which employees would be exposed hood that an electric arc or an open flame (paragraph (g)(2)); (3) ensure that employees can ignite the material. wear clothing that will not melt, or ignite Probability that an electric arc will occur. and continue to burn, when exposed to Identify employees exposed to electric-arc flames or the estimated heat energy (para- hazards. The Occupational Safety and Health graph (g)(3)); and (4) ensure that employees Administration will consider an employee wear flame-resistant clothing 1 and protec- exposed to electric-arc hazards if there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc will occur in the employee’s work area, in 1 Flame-resistant clothing includes cloth- other words, if the probability of such an ing that is inherently flame resistant and clothing chemically treated with a flame re- event is higher than it is for the normal op- tardant. (See ASTM F1506–10a, Standard Per- eration of enclosed equipment. Factors to formance Specification for Flame Resistant Tex- consider include: tile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Elec- ASTM F1891–12 Standard Specification for Arc tric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards, and and Flame Resistant Rainwear.)

513

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00523 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

• For energized circuit parts not guarded ing operation is part of the normal operation or insulated, whether conductive objects can of the equipment or occurs during servicing come too close to or fall onto the energized or maintenance, and parts, • For energized electric equipment, wheth- • For exposed, energized circuit parts, er there is evidence of impending failure, whether the employee is closer to the part such as evidence of arcing or overheating. than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (as permitted by B. Examples § 1926.960(c)(1)(iii)). • Whether the operation of electric equip- Table 1 provides task-based examples of ex- ment with sliding parts that could fault dur- posure assessments.

TABLE 1—EXAMPLE ASSESSMENTS FOR VARIOUS TASKS

Task Is employee exposed to flame or electric-arc hazard?

Normal operation of enclosed equip- The employer properly installs and No. ment, such as closing or opening a maintains enclosed equipment, and switch. there is no evidence of impending failure. There is evidence of arcing or over- Yes. heating. Parts of the equipment are loose or Yes. sticking, or the equipment otherwise exhibits signs of lack of maintenance.

Servicing electric equipment, such as racking in a circuit breaker or replacing a Yes. switch.

Inspection of electric equipment with ex- The employee is not holding conduc- No. posed energized parts. tive objects and remains outside the minimum approach distance established by the employer. The employee is holding a conductive Yes. object, such as a flashlight, that could fall or otherwise contact energized parts (irrespective of whether the employee maintains the minimum approach distance). The employee is closer than the min- Yes. imum approach distance established by the employer (for example, when wearing rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves).

Using open flames, for example, in wiping cable splice sleeves ...... Yes.

III. PROTECTION AGAINST BURN INJURY the expected length of the electric arc, the distance from the arc to the employee, and A. Estimating Available Heat Energy the clearing time for the fault (that is, the Calculation methods. Paragraph (g)(2) of time the circuit protective devices take to § 1926.960 provides that, for each employee ex- open the circuit and clear the fault). The em- posed to an electric-arc hazard, the employer ployer can precisely determine some of these must make a reasonable estimate of the heat parameters, such as the fault current and energy to which the employee would be ex- the clearing time, for a given system. The posed if an arc occurs. Table 2 lists various employer will need to estimate other param- methods of calculating values of available eters, such as the length of the arc and the heat energy from an electric circuit. The Oc- distance between the arc and the employee, cupational Safety and Health Administra- because such parameters vary widely. tion does not endorse any of these specific methods. Each method requires the input of various parameters, such as fault current,

514

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00524 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E

TABLE 2—METHODS OF CALCULATING INCIDENT HEAT ENERGY FROM AN ELECTRIC ARC

1. Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, NFPA 70E–2012, Annex D, ‘‘Sam- ple Calculation of Flash Protection Boundary.’’ 2. Doughty, T.E., Neal, T.E., and Floyd II, H.L., ‘‘Predicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric Arc Hazard on 600 V Power Distribution Systems,’’ Record of Conference Papers IEEE IAS 45th Annual Petro- leum and Chemical Industry Conference, September 28—30, 1998. 3. Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, IEEE Std 1584–2002, 1584a––2004 (Amendment 1 to IEEE Std 1584–2002), and 1584b–2011 (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of IEEE Std 1584– 2002). * 4. ARCPRO, a commercially available software program developed by Kinectrics, Toronto, ON, CA. * This appendix refers to IEEE Std 1584–2002 with both amendments as IEEE Std 1584b–2011.

The amount of heat energy calculated by distance from the arc to the employee is key any of the methods is to protecting employees. approximatelyinversely proportional to the The employer must select a method of esti- square of the distance between the employee mating incident heat energy that provides a and the arc. In other words, if the employee reasonable estimate of incident heat energy is very close to the arc, the heat energy is for the exposure involved. Table 3 shows very high; but if the employee is just a few which methods provide reasonable estimates more centimeters away, the heat energy for various exposures. drops substantially. Thus, estimating the

TABLE 3—SELECTING A REASONABLE INCIDENT-ENERGY CALCULATION METHOD 1

600 V and Less 2 601 V to 15 kV 2 More than 15 kV Incident-energy calculation method 1F 3Fa 3Fb 1F 3Fa 3Fb 1F 3Fa 3Fb

NFPA 70E–2012 Annex D (Lee equation) ...... Y–C Y N Y–C Y–C N N 3 N3 N3 Doughty, Neal, and Floyd...... Y–C Y Y N N N N N N IEEE Std 1584b–2011...... Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N ARCPRO ...... Y N N Y N N Y Y 4 Y4 Key: 1F: Single-phase arc in open air 3Fa: Three-phase arc in open air 3Fb: Three-phase arc in an enclosure (box) Y: Acceptable; produces a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc N: Not acceptable; does not produce a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc Y–C: Acceptable; produces a reasonable, but conservative, estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc. Notes:1 Although the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider these methods reasonable for enforcement purposes when employers use the methods in accordance with this table, employers should be aware that the listed methods do not necessarily result in estimates that will provide full protection from internal faults in transformers and similar equipment or from arcs in underground manholes or vaults. 2 At these voltages, the presumption is that the arc is three-phase unless the employer can demonstrate that only one phase is present or that the spacing of the phases is sufficient to prevent a multiphase arc from occurring. 3 Although the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider this method acceptable for purposes of assessing whether incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm2, the results at voltages of more than 15 kilovolts are extremely conservative and unrealistic. 4The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem the results of this method reasonable when the employer ad- justs them using the conversion factors for three-phase arcs in open air or in an enclosure, as indicated in the program’s instructions.

Selecting a reasonable distance from the em- is free to use other reasonable distances, but ployee to the arc. In estimating available heat must consider equipment enclosure size and energy, the employer must make some rea- the working distance to the employee in se- sonable assumptions about how far the em- lecting a distance from the employee to the ployee will be from the electric arc. Table 4 arc. The Occupational Safety and Health Ad- lists reasonable distances from the employee ministration will consider a distance reason- to the electric arc. The distances in Table 4 able when the employer bases it on equip- are consistent with national consensus ment size and working distance. standards, such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers’ National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI/IEEE C2–2012, and IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Cal- culations, IEEE Std 1584b–2011. The employer

515

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00525 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 4—SELECTING A REASONABLE DISTANCE FROM THE EMPLOYEE TO THE ELECTRIC ARC

Three-phase arc Class of equipment Single-phase arc mm mm (inches) (inches)

Cable ...... NA * ...... 455 (18) Low voltage MCCs and panelboards ...... NA ...... 455 (18) Low-voltage switchgear ...... NA ...... 610 (24) 5-kV switchgear ...... NA ...... 910 (36) 15-kV switchgear ...... NA ...... 910 (36) Single conductors in air (up to 46 kilovolts), work with rubber insu- 380 (15) ...... NA lating gloves. Single conductors in air, work with live-line tools and live-line bare- MAD¥(2 × kV × 2.54) ...... NA hand work. (MAD¥(2 × kV/10)) † * NA = not applicable. † The terms in this equation are: MAD = The applicable minimum approach distance, and kV = The system voltage in kilovolts.

Selecting a reasonable arc gap. For a single- pendent on the spacing between parts ener- phase arc in air, the electric arc will almost gized at different electrical potentials. Docu- always occur when an energized conductor ments such as IEEE Std 1584b–2011 provide approaches too close to ground. Thus, an em- information on these distances. Employers ployer can determine the arc gap, or arc may select a reasonable arc gap from Table length, for these exposures by the dielectric 5, or they may select any other reasonable strength of air and the voltage on the line. arc gap based on sparkover distance or on The dielectric strength of air is approxi- the spacing between (1) live parts at different mately 10 kilovolts for every 25.4 millimeters potentials or (2) live parts and grounded (1 inch). For example, at 50 kilovolts, the arc parts (for example, bus or conductor spacings gap would be 50 ÷ 10 × 25.4 (or 50 × 2.54), which in equipment). In any event, the employer equals 127 millimeters (5 inches). must use an estimate that reasonably resem- For three-phase arcs in open air and in en- bles the actual exposures faced by the em- closures, the arc gap will generally be de- ployee.

TABLE 5—SELECTING A REASONABLE ARC GAP

Single-phase arc mm Three-phase arc mm 1 Class of equipment (inches) (inches)

Cable ...... NA 2 ...... 13 (0.5) Low voltage MCCs and panelboards ...... NA ...... 25 (1.0) Low-voltage switchgear ...... NA ...... 32 (1.25) 5-kV switchgear ...... NA ...... 104 (4.0) 15-kV switchgear ...... NA ...... 152 (6.0) Single conductors in air, 15 kV and less ...... 51 (2.0) ...... Phase conductor spacings. Single conductor in air, more than 15 kV ...... Voltage in kV × 2.54 ...... (Voltage in kV × 0.1), but no less Phase conductor spacings. than 51 mm (2 inches) 1 Source: IEEE Std 1584b–2011. 2 NA = not applicable.

Making estimates over multiple system areas. incident heat energy levels for open-air, The employer need not estimate the heat-en- phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures typ- ergy exposure for every job task performed ical for overhead systems.2 Table 6 presents by each employee. Paragraph (g)(2) of estimates of available energy for employees § 1926.960 permits the employer to make using rubber insulating gloves to perform broad estimates that cover multiple system work on overhead systems operating at 4 to areas provided that: (1) The employer uses 46 kilovolts. The table assumes that the em- reasonable assumptions about the energy-ex- ployee will be 380 millimeters (15 inches) posure distribution throughout the system, from the electric arc, which is a reasonable and (2) the estimates represent the maximum exposure for those areas. For example, 2 The Occupational Safety and Health Ad- the employer can use the maximum fault ministration used metric values to calculate current and clearing time to cover several the clearing times in Table 6 and Table 7. An system areas at once. employer may use English units to calculate Incident heat energy for single-phase-to- clearing times instead even though the re- ground exposures. Table 6 and Table 7 provide sults will differ slightly.

516

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00526 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E

estimate for rubber insulating glove work. ing time specified in the table. For example, Table 6 also assumes that the arc length an employer that provides employees with equals the sparkover distance for the max- arc-flash protective equipment rated at 8 cal/ imum transient overvoltage of each voltage cm2 can use the table to determine if any range.3 To use the table, an employer would system area exceeds 8 cal/cm2 by checking use the voltage, maximum fault current, and the clearing time for the highest fault cur- maximum clearing time for a system area rent for each voltage range and ensuring and, using the appropriate voltage range and that the clearing times do not exceed the fault-current and clearing-time values cor- values specified in the 8-cal/cm2 column in responding to the next higher values listed the table. in the table, select the appropriate heat en- Table 7 presents similar estimates for em- 2 ergy (4, 5, 8, or 12 cal/cm ) from the table. ployees using live-line tools to perform work For example, an employer might have a on overhead systems operating at voltages of 12,470-volt power line supplying a system 4 to 800 kilovolts. The table assumes that the area. The power line can supply a maximum arc length will be equal to the sparkover dis- fault current of 8 kiloamperes with a max- tance 4 and that the employee will be a dis- imum clearing time of 10 cycles. For rubber glove work, this system falls in the 4.0-to- tance from the arc equal to the minimum ap- 15.0-kilovolt range; the next-higher fault cur- proach distance minus twice the sparkover rent is 10 kA (the second row in that voltage distance. range); and the clearing time is under 18 cy- The employer will need to use other meth- cles (the first column to the right of the ods for estimating available heat energy in fault current column). Thus, the available situations not addressed by Table 6 or Table heat energy for this part of the system will 7. The calculation methods listed in Table 2 be 4 cal/cm2 or less (from the column head- and the guidance provided in Table 3 will ing), and the employer could select protec- help employers do this. For example, em- tion with a 5-cal/cm2 rating to meet ployers can use IEEE Std 1584b–2011 to esti- § 1926.960(g)(5). Alternatively, an employer mate the available heat energy (and to select could select a base incident-energy value and appropriate protective equipment) for many ensure that the clearing times for each volt- specific conditions, including lower-voltage, age range and fault current listed in the phase-to-phase arc, and enclosed arc expo- table do not exceed the corresponding clear- sures.

TABLE 6—INCIDENT HEAT ENERGY FOR VARIOUS FAULT CURRENTS, CLEARING TIMES, AND VOLTAGES OF 4.0 TO 46.0 KV: RUBBER INSULATING GLOVE EXPOSURES INVOLVING PHASE-TO- GROUND ARCS IN OPEN AIR ONLY * †‡

Fault current Maximum clearing time (cycles) Voltage range (kV) ** (kA) 4 cal/cm2 5 cal/cm2 8 cal/cm2 12 cal/cm2

4.0 to 15.0 ...... 5 46 58 92 138 10 18 22 36 54 15 10 12 20 30 20 6 8 13 19 15.1 to 25.0 ...... 5 28 34 55 83 10 11 14 23 34 15 7 8 13 20 20 4 5 9 13 25.1 to 36.0 ...... 5 21 26 42 62 10 9 11 18 26 15 5 6 10 16 20 4 4 7 11 36.1 to 46.0 ...... 5 16 20 32 48 10 7 9 14 21 15 4 5 8 13 20 3 4 6 9 Notes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box). † The table assumes that the employee will be 380 mm (15 in.) from the electric arc. The table also assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum transient overvoltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to this subpart), as follows:

3 The Occupational Safety and Health Ad- 4 The dielectric strength of air is about 10 ministration based this assumption, which is kilovolts for every 25.4 millimeters (1 inch). more conservative than the arc length speci- Thus, the employer can estimate the arc fied in Table 5, on Table 410–2 of the 2012 length in millimeters to be the phase-to- NESC. ground voltage in kilovolts multiplied by 2.54 (or voltage (in kilovolts) × 2.54).

517

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00527 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

4.0 to 15.0 kV 51 mm (2 in.) 15.1 to 25.0 kV 102 mm (4 in.) 25.1 to 36.0 kV 152 mm (6 in.) 36.1 to 46.0 kV 229 mm (9 in.) ‡ The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2. ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage.

TABLE 7—INCIDENT HEAT ENERGY FOR VARIOUS FAULT CURRENTS, CLEARING TIMES, AND VOLTAGES: LIVE-LINE TOOL EXPOSURES INVOLVING PHASE-TO-GROUND ARCS IN OPEN AIR ONLY * †‡#

Voltage range Fault current Maximum clearing time (cycles) (kV) ** (kA) 4 cal/cm2 5 cal/cm2 8 cal/cm2 12 cal/cm2

4.0 to 15.0 ...... 5 197 246 394 591 10 73 92 147 220 15 39 49 78 117 20 24 31 49 73 15.1 to 25.0 ...... 5 197 246 394 591 10 75 94 150 225 15 41 51 82 122 20 26 33 52 78 25.1 to 36.0 ...... 5 138 172 275 413 10 53 66 106 159 15 30 37 59 89 20 19 24 38 58 36.1 to 46.0 ...... 5 129 161 257 386 10 51 64 102 154 15 29 36 58 87 20 19 24 38 57 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 20 18 23 36 55 30 10 13 20 30 40 6 8 13 19 50 4 6 9 13 72.6 to 121.0 ...... 20 10 12 20 30 30 6 7 11 17 40 4 5 7 11 50 3 3 5 8 121.1 to 145.0 ...... 20 12 15 24 35 30 7 9 15 22 40 5 6 10 15 50 4 5 8 11 145.1 to 169.0 ...... 20 12 15 24 36 30 7 9 15 22 40 5 7 10 16 50 4 5 8 12 169.1 to 242.0 ...... 20 13 17 27 40 30 8 10 17 25 40 6 7 12 17 50 4 5 9 13 242.1 to 362.0 ...... 20 25 32 51 76 30 16 19 31 47 40 11 14 22 33 50 8 10 16 25 362.1 to 420.0 ...... 20 12 15 25 37 30 8 10 15 23 40 5 7 11 16 50 4 5 8 12 420.1 to 550.0 ...... 20 23 29 47 70 30 14 18 29 43 40 10 13 20 30 50 8 9 15 23 550.1 to 800.0 ...... 20 25 31 50 75 30 15 19 31 46 40 11 13 21 32 50 8 10 16 24 Notes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box). † The table assumes the arc length to be the sparkover distance for the maximum phase-to-ground voltage of each voltage range (see Appendix B to this subpart). The table also assumes that the employee will be the minimum approach distance minus twice the arc length from the electric arc. ‡ The Occupational Safety and Health Administration calculated the values in this table using the ARCPRO method listed in Table 2. # For voltages of more than 72.6 kV, employers may use this table only when the minimum approach distance established under § 1926.960(c)(1) is greater than or equal to the following values:

518

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00528 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E

72.6 to 121.0 kV 1.02 m 121.1 to 145.0 kV 1.16 m 145.1 to 169.0 kV 1.30 m 169.1 to 242.0 kV 1.72 m 242.1 to 362.0 kV 2.76 m 362.1 to 420.0 kV 2.50 m 420.1 to 550.0 kV 3.62 m 550.1 to 800.0 kV 4.83 m ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage.

B. Selecting Protective Clothing and Other appropriate degree of protection for an em- Protective Equipment ployee exposed to electric-arc hazards. Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 does not re- Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 requires em- quire arc-rated protection for exposures of 2 ployers, in certain situations, to select pro- cal/cm2 or less. Untreated cotton clothing tective clothing and other protective equip- will reduce a 2-cal/cm2 exposure below the ment with an arc rating that is greater than 2 or equal to the incident heat energy esti- 1.2- to 1.5-cal/cm level necessary to cause mated under § 1926.960(g)(2). Based on labora- burn injury, and this material should not ig- tory testing required by ASTM F1506–10a, the nite at such low heat energy levels. Al- expectation is that protective clothing with though § 1926.960(g)(5) does not require cloth- an arc rating equal to the estimated incident ing to have an arc rating when exposures are 2 heat energy will be capable of preventing 2 cal/cm or less, § 1926.960(g)(4) requires the second-degree burn injury to an employee outer layer of clothing to be flame resistant exposed to that incident heat energy from an under certain conditions, even when the esti- electric arc. Note that actual electric-arc ex- mated incident heat energy is less than 2 cal/ 2 posures may be more or less severe than the cm , as discussed later in this appendix. Ad- estimated value because of factors such as ditionally, it is especially important to en- arc movement, arc length, arcing from re- sure that employees do not wear undergar- closing of the system, secondary fires or ex- ments made from fabrics listed in the note to plosions, and weather conditions. Addition- § 1926.960(g)(3) even when the outer layer is ally, for arc rating based on the fabric’s arc flame resistant or arc rated. These fabrics thermal performance value 5 (ATPV), a work- can melt or ignite easily when an electric er exposed to incident energy at the arc rat- arc occurs. Logos and name tags made from ing has a 50-percent chance of just barely re- non-flame-resistant material can adversely ceiving a second-degree burn. Therefore, it is affect the arc rating or the flame-resistant possible (although not likely) that an em- characteristics of arc-rated or flame-resist- ployee will sustain a second-degree (or ant clothing. Such logos and name tags may worse) burn wearing clothing conforming to violate § 1926.960(g)(3), (g)(4), or (g)(5). § 1926.960(g)(5) under certain circumstances. Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 requires that However, reasonable employer estimates and arc-rated protection cover the employee’s maintaining appropriate minimum approach entire body, with limited exceptions for the distances for employees should limit burns employee’s hands, feet, face, and head. Para- to relatively small burns that just barely ex- graph (g)(5)(i) of § 1926.960 provides that arc- tend beyond the epidermis (that is, just bare- rated protection is not necessary for the em- ly a second-degree burn). Consequently, pro- ployee’s hands under the following condi- tective clothing and other protective equip- tions: ment meeting § 1926.960(g)(5) will provide an For any estimated When the employee incident heat en- is wearing rubber 5 ASTM F1506–10a defines ‘‘arc thermal per- ergy. insulating gloves formance value’’ as ‘‘the incident energy on with protectors a material or a multilayer system of mate- If the estimated inci- When the employee rials that results in a 50% probability that dent heat energy is wearing heavy- sufficient heat transfer through the tested does not exceed 14 duty leather work specimen is predicted to cause the onset of a cal/cm2. gloves with a second-degree skin burn injury based on the weight of at least Stoll [footnote] curve, cal/cm2.’’ The foot- 407 gm/m2 (12 oz/ note to this definition reads: ‘‘Derived from: yd2) Stoll, A.M., and Chianta, M.A., ‘Method and Paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of § 1926.960 provides Rating System for Evaluations of Thermal Protection,’ Aerospace Medicine, Vol 40, 1969, that arc-rated protection is not necessary for pp. 1232–1238 and Stoll A.M., and Chianta, the employee’s feet when the employee is M.A., ‘Heat Transfer through Fabrics as Re- wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots. Fi- lated to Thermal Injury,’ Transactions—New nally, § 1926.960(g)(5)(iii), (g)(5)(iv), and York Academy of Sciences, Vol 33(7), Nov. (g)(5)(v) require arc-rated head and face pro- 1971, pp. 649–670.’’ tection as follows:

519

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00529 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Minimum head and face protection Exposure Arc-rated faceshield Arc-rated hood or faceshield None * with a minimum rating with of 8 cal/cm2 * balaclava

Single-phase, open air ...... 2–8 cal/cm2 ...... 9–12 cal/cm2 ...... 13 cal/2 or higher.† Three-phase ...... 2–4 cal/cm2 ...... 5–8 cal/cm2 ...... 9 cal/cm2 or higher.‡ * These ranges assume that employees are wearing hardhats meeting the specifications in § 1910.135 or § 1926.100(b)(2), as applicable. † The arc rating must be a minimum of 4 cal/cm2 less than the estimated incident energy. Note that § 1926.960(g)(5)(v) permits this type of head and face protection, with a minimum arc rating of 4 cal/cm2 less than the estimated incident energy, at any incident energy level. ‡ Note that § 1926.960(g)(5) permits this type of head and face protection at any incident energy level.

IV. PROTECTION AGAINST IGNITION clothing poses an ignition hazard.7 Although outer flame-resistant layers may not have Paragraph (g)(3) of § 1926.960 prohibits openings that expose flammable inner lay- clothing that could melt onto an employee’s ers, when an outer flame-resistant layer skin or that could ignite and continue to would be unable to resist breakopen,8 the burn when exposed to flames or to the avail- next (inner) layer must be flame-resistant if able heat energy estimated by the employer it could ignite. under § 1926.960(g)(2). Meltable fabrics, such as acetate, nylon, polyester, and poly- Non-flame-resistant clothing can ignite propylene, even in blends, must be avoided. even when the heat energy from an electric When these fibers melt, they can adhere to arc is insufficient to ignite the clothing. For the skin, thereby transferring heat rapidly, example, nearby flames can ignite an em- exacerbating burns, and complicating treat- ployee’s clothing; and, even in the absence of ment. These outcomes can result even if the flames, electric arcs pose ignition hazards meltable fabric is not directly next to the beyond the hazard of ignition from incident skin. The remainder of this section focuses energy under certain conditions. In addition on the prevention of ignition. to requiring flame-resistant clothing when Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 generally re- the estimated incident energy exceeds 2.0 quires protective clothing and other protec- cal/cm2, § 1926.960(g)(4) requires flame-resist- tive equipment with an arc rating greater ant clothing when: The employee is exposed than or equal to the employer’s estimate of to contact with energized circuit parts oper- available heat energy. As explained earlier ating at more than 600 volts in this appendix, untreated cotton is usually (§ 1926.960(g)(4)(i)), an electric arc could ig- acceptable for exposures of 2 cal/cm2 or less.6 nite flammable material in the work area If the exposure is greater than that, the em- that, in turn, could ignite the employee’s ployee generally must wear flame-resistant clothing (§ 1926.960(g)(4)(ii)), and molten clothing with a suitable arc rating in accord- metal or electric arcs from faulted conduc- ance with § 1926.960(g)(4) and (g)(5). However, tors in the work area could ignite the em- even if an employee is wearing a layer of ployee’s clothing (§ 1926.960(g)(4)(iii)). For ex- flame-resistant clothing, there are cir- ample, grounding conductors can become a cumstances under which flammable layers of source of heat energy if they cannot carry clothing would be uncovered, and an electric fault current without failure. The employer arc could ignite them. For example, clothing must consider these possible sources of elec- ignition is possible if the employee is wear- tric arcs 9 in determining whether the em- ing flammable clothing under the flame-re- ployee’s clothing could ignite under sistant clothing and the underlayer is uncov- § 1926.960(g)(4)(iii). ered because of an opening in the flame-resistant clothing. Thus, for purposes of § 1926.960(g)(3), it is important for the em- 7 Paragraph (g)(3) of § 1926.960 prohibits ployer to consider the possibility of clothing clothing that could ignite and continue to ignition even when an employee is wearing burn when exposed to the heat energy esti- flame-resistant clothing with a suitable arc mated under paragraph (g)(2) of that section. rating. 8 Breakopen occurs when a hole, tear, or Under § 1926.960(g)(3), employees may not crack develops in the exposed fabric such wear flammable clothing in conjunction with that the fabric no longer effectively blocks flame-resistant clothing if the flammable incident heat energy. 9 Static wires and pole grounds are examples of grounding conductors that might not 6 See § 1926.960(g)(4)(i), (g)(4)(ii), and be capable of carrying fault current without (g)(4)(iii) for conditions under which employ- failure. Grounds that can carry the max- ees must wear flame-resistant clothing as imum available fault current are not a con- the outer layer of clothing even when the in- cern, and employers need not consider such cident heat energy does not exceed 2 cal/cm2. grounds a possible electric arc source.

520

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00530 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. V, App. G

APPENDIX F TO SUBPART V OF PART consensus standards to be compliance with 1926—WORK-POSITIONING EQUIPMENT the provisions of Subpart V of this part. INSPECTION GUIDELINES ANSI/SIA A92.2–2009, American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Elevating I. BODY BELTS and Rotating Aerial Devices. ANSI Z133–2012, American National Standard Inspect body belts to ensure that: Safety Requirements for Arboricultural Op- A. The hardware has no cracks, nicks, dis- erations—Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, tortion, or corrosion; Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cut- B. No loose or worn rivets are present; ting Brush. C. The waist strap has no loose grommets; ANSI/IEEE Std 935–1989, IEEE Guide on Ter- D. The fastening straps are not 100-percent minology for Tools and Equipment to Be leather; and Used in Live Line Working. E. No worn materials that could affect the ASME B20.1–2012, Safety Standard for Con- safety of the user are present. veyors and Related Equipment. II. POSITIONING STRAPS ASTM D120–09, Standard Specification for Rub- ber Insulating Gloves. Inspect positioning straps to ensure that: ASTM D149–09 (2013), Standard Test Method A. The warning center of the strap mate- for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Di- rial is not exposed; electric Strength of Solid Electrical Insu- B. No cuts, burns, extra holes, or fraying of lating Materials at Commercial Power Fre- strap material is present; quencies. C. Rivets are properly secured; ASTM D178–01 (2010), Standard Specification D. Straps are not 100-percent leather; and for Rubber Insulating Matting. E. Snaphooks do not have cracks, burns, or ASTM D1048–12, Standard Specification for corrosion. Rubber Insulating Blankets. III. CLIMBERS ASTM D1049–98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. Inspect pole and tree climbers to ensure ASTM D1050–05 (2011), Standard Specification that: for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. A. Gaffs are at least as long as the manu- ASTM D1051–08, Standard Specification for facturer’s recommended minimums (gen- Rubber Insulating Sleeves. erally 32 and 51 millimeters (1.25 and 2.0 ASTM F478–09, Standard Specification for In- inches) for pole and tree climbers, respec- Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and tively, measured on the underside of the Covers. gaff); ASTM F479–06 (2011), Standard Specification NOTE: Gauges are available to assist in de- for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. termining whether gaffs are long enough and ASTM F496–08, Standard Specification for In- shaped to easily penetrate poles or trees. Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. B. Gaffs and leg irons are not fractured or ASTM F711–02 (2007), Standard Specification cracked; for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod C. Stirrups and leg irons are free of exces- and Tube Used in Live Line Tools. sive wear; D. Gaffs are not loose; ASTM F712–06 (2011), Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insu- E. Gaffs are free of deformation that could lating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protec- adversely affect use; tion of Workers. F. Gaffs are properly sharpened; and G. There are no broken straps or buckles. ASTM F819–10, Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Work- ers. APPENDIX G TO SUBPART V OF PART ASTM F855–09, Standard Specifications for 1926—REFERENCE DOCUMENTS Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used The references contained in this appendix on De-energized Electric Power Lines and provide information that can be helpful in Equipment. understanding and complying with the re- ASTM F887–12e1, Standard Specifications for quirements contained in Subpart V of this Personal Climbing Equipment. part. The national consensus standards ref- ASTM F914/F914M–10, Standard Test Method erenced in this appendix contain detailed for Acoustic Emission for Aerial Personnel specifications that employers may follow in Devices Without Supplemental Load Han- complying with the more performance-based dling Attachments. requirements of Subpart V of this part. Ex- ASTM F1116–03 (2008), Standard Test Method cept as specifically noted in Subpart V of for Determining Dielectric Strength of Di- this part, however, the Occupational Safety electric Footwear. and Health Administration will not nec- ASTM F1117–03 (2008), Standard Specification essarily deem compliance with the national for Dielectric Footwear.

521

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00531 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1000 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

ASTM F1236–96 (2012), Standard Guide for Vis- IEEE Std 1048–2003, IEEE Guide for Protective ual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rub- Grounding of Power Lines. ber Products. IEEE Std 1067–2005, IEEE Guide for In-Service ASTM F1430/F1430M–10, Standard Test Method Use, Care, Maintenance, and Testing of for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages up and Non-Insulated Aerial Personnel Devices to 765 kV AC and ±750 kV DC. with Supplemental Load Handling Attach- IEEE Std 1307–2004, IEEE Standard for Fall ments. Protection for Utility Work. ASTM F1505–10, Standard Specification for In- IEEE Stds 1584–2002, 1584a–2004 (Amendment sulated and Insulating Hand Tools. 1 to IEEE Std 1584–2002), and 1584b–2011 ASTM F1506–10a, Standard Performance Speci- (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of fication for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated IEEE Std 1584–2002), IEEE Guide for Per- Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for forming Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations. Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Mo- IEEE C2–2012, National Electrical Safety Code. mentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal NFPA 70E–2012, Standard for Electrical Safety Hazards. in the Workplace. ASTM F1564–13, Standard Specification for Structure-Mounted Insulating Work Plat- Subpart W—Rollover Protective forms for Electrical Workers. Structures; Overhead Protection ASTM F1701–12, Standard Specification for Un- used Polypropylene Rope with Special Elec- trical Properties. AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, ASTM F1742–03 (2011), Standard Specification 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 for PVC Insulating Sheeting. (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR ASTM F1796–09, Standard Specification for 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3– High Voltage Detectors—Part 1 Capacitive 2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), or 1– Type to be Used for Voltages Exceeding 600 2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Volts AC. ASTM F1797–09 ε 1, Standard Test Method for § 1926.1000 Scope. Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and (a) Coverage. This subpart applies to Non-Insulated Digger Derricks. the following types of material han- ASTM F1825–03 (2007), Standard Specification dling equipment: All rubber-tired, self- for Clampstick Type Live Line Tools. propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front- ASTM F1826–00 (2011), Standard Specification for Live Line and Measuring Telescoping end loaders, rubber-tired dozers, wheel- Tools. type agricultural and industrial trac- ASTM F1891–12, Standard Specification for Arc tors, crawler tractors, crawler-type and Flame Resistant Rainwear. loaders, and motor graders, with or ASTM F1958/F1958M–12, Standard Test Method without attachments, that are used in for Determining the Ignitability of Non- construction work. This subpart also flame-Resistant Materials for Clothing by applies to compactors and rubber-tired Electric Arc Exposure Method Using Man- skid-steer equipment, with or without nequins. ASTM F1959/F1959M–12, Standard Test Method attachments, manufactured after July for Determining the Arc Rating of Materials 15, 2019, that are used in construction for Clothing. work. This subpart does not apply to IEEE Stds 4–1995, 4a–2001 (Amendment to sideboom pipelaying tractors. IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Volt- (b) Equipment manufactured before age Testing), IEEE Standard Techniques for July 15, 2019. Material handling equip- High-Voltage Testing. ment described in paragraph (a) of this IEEE Std 62–1995, IEEE Guide for Diagnostic section (excluding compactors and rub- Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus— Part 1: Oil Filled Power Transformers, Reg- ber-tired skid-steer equipment) manu- ulators, and Reactors. factured before July 15, 2019, shall be IEEE Std 80–2000, Guide for Safety in AC Sub- equipped with rollover protective station Grounding. structures that meet the minimum per- IEEE Std 100–2000, The Authoritative Dic- formance standards prescribed in tionary of IEEE Standards Terms Seventh § 1926.1001(b), as applicable. Agricul- Edition. tural and industrial tractors used in IEEE Std 516–2009, IEEE Guide for Mainte- construction shall be equipped with nance Methods on Energized Power Lines. rollover protective structures that IEEE Std 524–2003, IEEE Guide to the Installa- tion of Overhead Transmission Line Con- meet the minimum performance stand- ductors. ards prescribed in § 1926.1002(b), as ap- IEEE Std 957–2005, IEEE Guide for Cleaning plicable. When overhead protection is Insulators. provided on agricultural and industrial

522

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00532 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1001

tractors, the overhead protection shall Health Regulations for Construction. meet the minimum performance stand- Part II (September 1971). ards prescribed in § 1926.1003(b), as ap- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, plicable. 1979, as amended at 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] (c) Equipment manufactured on or after July 15, 2019. Material handling ma- § 1926.1001 Minimum performance cri- chinery described in paragraph (a) of teria for rollover protective struc- this section manufactured on or after tures for designated scrapers, load- July 15, 2019, shall be equipped with ers, dozers, graders, crawler trac- rollover protective structures that tors, compactors, and rubber-tired skid steer equipment. meet the minimum performance standards prescribed in § 1926.1001(c). Agri- (a) General. This section prescribes cultural and industrial tractors used in minimum performance criteria for roll- construction shall be equipped with over protective structures (ROPS) for rollover protective structures that rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers; meet the minimum performance stand- rubber-tired front end loaders and rub- ards prescribed in § 1926.1002(c). When ber-tired dozers; crawler tractors and overhead protection is provided on ag- crawler-type loaders, motor graders, ricultural and industrial tractors, the compactors, and rubber-tired skid steer overhead protection shall meet the equipment. minimum performance standards pre- (b) Equipment manufactured before scribed in § 1926.1003(c). July 15, 2019. For equipment listed in (d) Remounting. ROPS removed for paragraph (a) of this section (excluding any reason, shall be remounted with compactors and rubber-tired skid steer equal quality, or better, bolts or weld- equipment) manufactured before July ing as required for the original mount- 15, 2019, the protective frames shall ing. conform to the following Society of (e) Labeling. Each ROPS shall have Automotive Engineers Recommended the following information permanently Practices as applicable: SAE J320a, affixed to the structure: Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protective Structure for (1) Manufacturer or fabricator’s name Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers; and address; SAE J394, Minimum Performance Cri- (2) ROPS model number, if any; teria for Roll-Over Protective Struc- (3) Machine make, model, or series ture for Rubber-Tired Front End Load- number that the structure is designed ers and Rubber-Tired Dozers; SAE J395, to fit. Minimum Performance Criteria for (f) Machines meeting certain existing Roll-Over Protective Structure for governmental requirements. Any machine Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type in use, equipped with rollover protec- Loaders; SAE J396, Minimum Perform- tive structures, shall be deemed in ance Criteria for Roll-Over Protective compliance with this section if it Structure for Motor Graders; and SAE meets the rollover protective structure J397, Critical Zone Characteristics and requirements of the State of Cali- Dimensions for Operators of Construc- fornia, the U.S. Army Corps of Engi- tion and Industrial Machinery, as ap- neers, or the Bureau of Reclamation of plicable (each incorporated by ref- the U.S. Department of the Interior in erence, see § 1926.6), or comply with the effect on April 5, 1972. The require- consensus standard (ISO 3471:2008) list- ments in effect are: ed in paragraph (c) of this section. (1) State of California: Construction (c) Equipment manufactured on or after Safety Orders, issued by the Depart- July 15, 2019. For equipment listed in ment of Industrial Relations pursuant paragraph (a) of this section manufac- to Division 5, Labor Code, § 6312, State tured on or after July 15, 2019, the proof California. tective frames shall meet the test and (2) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: performance requirements of the Inter- General Safety Requirements, EM–385– national Organization for Standardiza- 1–1 (March 1967). tion (ISO) standard ISO 3471:2008 Earth- (3) Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. De- Moving Machinery—Roll-over protec- partment of the Interior: Safety and tive structures—Laboratory tests and

523

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00533 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1002 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

performance requirements (incor- cultural and industrial tractors’’) de- porated by reference, see § 1926.6). fines ‘‘agricultural tractor’’ as a [84 FR 21578, May 14, 2019] ‘‘wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 engine horsepower designed to furnish § 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll- the power to pull, carry, propel, or over protective structures, known drive implements that are designed for as ROPS) for wheel-type agricul- agricultural usage.’’ Since this part tural and industrial tractors used 1926 applies only to construction work, in construction. the SAE definition of ‘‘agricultural (a) General. This section sets forth re- tractor’’ is adopted for purposes of this quirements for frames used to protect subpart.) operators of wheel-type agricultural (2) ‘‘Industrial tractor’’ means that and industrial tractors used in con- class of wheel-type tractors of more struction work that will minimize the than 20 engine horsepower (other than possibility of operator injury resulting rubber-tired loaders and dozers de- from accidental upsets during normal scribed in 29 CFR 1926.1001), used in op- operation. See paragraph (e) of this erations such as landscaping, construc- section for definitions of agricultural tion services, loading, digging, grounds and industrial tractors. keeping, and highway maintenance. (b) Equipment manufactured before July 15, 2019. For equipment manufac- [70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 tured before July 15, 2019, the protec- FR 41129, July 20, 2006; 84 FR 21578, May 14, tive frames shall meet the test and per- 2019] formance requirements of the Society § 1926.1003 Overhead protection for of Automotive Engineers Standard operators of agricultural and indus- J334a, Protective Frame Test Proce- trial tractors used in construction. dures and Performance Requirements and J168, Protective enclosures-test (a) General. This section sets forth re- procedures and performance require- quirements for overhead protection ments, as applicable (incorporated by used to protect operators of wheel-type reference, see § 1926.6), or comply with agricultural and industrial tractors the consensus standard (ISO 5700:2013) used in construction work that will listed in paragraph (c) of this section. minimize the possibility of operator in- (c) Equipment manufactured on or after jury resulting from overhead objects July 15, 2019. For equipment manufac- such as flying or falling objection, and tured on or after July 15, 2019, the pro- from the cover itself in the event of ac- tective frames shall meet the test and cidental upset. performance requirements of the Inter- (b) Equipment manufactured before national Organization for Standardiza- July 15, 2019. When overhead protection tion (ISO) standard ISO 5700:2013, Trac- is provided on wheel-type agricultural tors for agriculture and forestry—Roll- and industrial tractors manufactured over protective structures—static test before July 15, 2019, the overhead pro- method and acceptance conditions or tection shall be designed and installed ISO 3471:2008 Earth-Moving Machin- according to the requirements con- ery—Roll-over protective structures— tained in the test and performance re- Laboratory tests and performance requirements of Society of Automotive quirements (incorporated by reference, Engineers Standard J167, Protective see § 1926.6). Frame with Overhead Protection-Test (d) Overhead protection requirements. Procedures and Performance Require- For overhead protection requirements, ments, which pertains to overhead pro- see § 1926.1003. tection requirements (incorporated by (e) Definitions applicable to this sec- reference, see § 1926.6) or comply with tion. (1) ‘‘Agricultural tractor’’ means a the consensus standard (ISO 27850:2013) wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- listed in paragraph (c) of this section. gine horsepower, used in construction (c) Equipment manufactured on or after work, that is designed to furnish the July 15, 2019. When overhead protection power to pull, propel, or drive imple- is provided on wheel-type agricultural ments. (SAE standard J333a–1970 (‘‘Op- and industrial tractors manufactured erator protection for wheel-type agri- on or after July 15, 2019, the overhead

524

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00534 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1050

protection shall be designed and in- cleat ladder, but with a center rail to stalled according to the requirements allow simultaneous two-way traffic for contained in the test and performance employees ascending or descending. requirements of the International Or- Equivalent means alternative designs, ganization for Standardization (ISO) materials, or methods that the em- standard ISO 27850:2013, Tractors for ployer can demonstrate will provide an agriculture and forestry—Falling ob- equal or greater degree of safety for ject protective structures—Test proce- employees than the method or item dures and performance requirements, specified in the standard. which pertains to overhead protection Extension trestle ladder means a self- requirements (incorporated by ref- supporting portable ladder, adjustable erence, see § 1926.6). in length, consisting of a trestle ladder (d) Site clearing. In the case of ma- base and a vertically adjustable exten- chines to which § 1926.604 (relating to sion section, with a suitable means for site clearing) also applies, the overhead locking the ladders together. protection may be either the type of protection provided in § 1926.604, or the Failure means load refusal, breakage, type of protection provided by this sec- or separation of component parts. Load tion. refusal is the point where the structural members lose their ability to [84 FR 21578, May 14, 2019] carry the loads. Fixed ladder means a ladder that can- Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders not be readily moved or carried because it is an integral part of a build- AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. ing or structure. A side-step fixed ladder 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. is a fixed ladder that requires a person 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1– getting off at the top to step to the 2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR side of the ladder side rails to reach the Part 1911. landing. A through fixed ladder is a SOURCE: 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990, unless fixed ladder that requires a person get- otherwise noted. ting off at the top to step between the side rails of the ladder to reach the § 1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this sub- landing. part. Handrail means a rail used to provide employees with a handhold for support. (a) Scope and application. This subpart applies to all stairways and lad- Individual-rung/step ladders means ders used in construction, alteration, ladders without a side rail or center repair (including painting and deco- rail support. Such ladders are made by rating), and demolition workplaces mounting individual steps or rungs di- covered under 29 CFR part 1926, and rectly to the side or wall of the struc- also sets forth, in specified cir- ture. cumstances, when ladders and stair- Job-made ladder means a ladder that ways are required to be provided. Addi- is fabricated by employees, typically at tional requirements for ladders used on the construction site, and is not com- or with scaffolds are contained in sub- mercially manufactured. This defini- part L—Scaffolds. This subpart does tion does not apply to any individual- not apply to integral components of rung/step ladders. equipment covered by subpart CC. Sub- Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size self- part CC exclusively sets forth the cir- supporting ladder consisting of a wide cumstances when ladders and stair- flat tread ladder in the form of stairs. ways must be provided on equipment The assenbly may include handrails. covered by subpart CC. Lower levels means those areas to (b) Definitions. Cleat means a ladder which an employee can fall from a crosspiece of rectangular cross section stairway or ladder. Such areas include placed on edge upon which a person ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, run- may step while ascending or descend- ways, excavations, pits, tanks, mate- ing a ladder. rial, water, equipment, and similar sur- Double-cleat ladder means a ladder faces. It does not include the surface similar in construction to a single- from which the employee falls.

525

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00535 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1051 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Maximum intended load means the Unprotected sides and edges means any total load of all employees, equipment, side or edge (except at entrances to tools, materials, transmitted loads, points of access) of a stairway where and other loads anticipated to be ap- there is no stairrail system or wall 36 plied to a ladder component at any one inches (.9 m) or more in height, and time. any side or edge (except at entrances to Nosing means that portion of a tread points of access) of a stairway landing, projecting beyond the face of the riser or ladder platform where there is no immediately below. wall or guardrail system 39 inches (1 m) Point of access means all areas used or more in height. by employees for work-related passage [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, from one area or level to another. Such 1991, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993; open areas include doorways, 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010] 1passageways, stairway openings, stud- ded walls, and various other permanent § 1926.1051 General requirements. or temporary openings used for such (a) A stairway or ladder shall be pro- travel. vided at all personnel points of access Portable ladder means a ladder that where there is a break in elevation of can be readily moved or carried. 19 inches (48 cm) or more, and no ramp, Riser height means the vertical dis- runway, sloped embankment, or per- tance from the top of a tread to the top sonnel hoist is provided. of the next higher tread or platform/ (1) Employees shall not use any spi- landing or the distance from the top of ral stairways that will not be a perma- a platform/landing to the top of the nent part of the structure on which next higher tread or platform/landing. construction work is being performed. Side-step fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed lad- (2) A double-cleated ladder or two or der.’’ more separate ladders shall be provided Single-cleat ladder means a ladder when ladders are the only mean of ac- consisting of a pair of side rails, con- cess or exit from a working area for 25 nected together by cleats, rungs, or or more employees, or when a ladder is steps. to serve simultaneous two-way traffic. Single-rail ladder means a portable (3) When a building or structure has ladder with rungs, cleats, or steps only one point of access between levels, mounted on a single rail instead of the that point of access shall be kept clear normal two rails used on most other to permit free passage of employees. ladders. When work must be performed or Spiral stairway means a series of steps equipment must be used such that free attached to a vertical pole and pro- passage at that point of access is re- gressing upward in a winding fashion stricted, a second point of access shall within a cylindrical space. be provided and used. Stairrail system means a vertical bar- (4) When a building or structure has rier erected along the unprotected two or more points of access between sides and edges of a stariway to pre- levels, at least one point of access shall vent employees from falling to lower be kept clear to permit free passage of levels. The top surface of a stairrail employees. system may also be a ‘‘handrail.’’ (b) Employers shall provide and in- Step stool (ladder type) means a self- stall all stairway and ladder fall pro- supporting, foldable, portable ladder, tection systems required by this sub- nonadjustable in length, 32 inches or part and shall comply with all other less in overall size, with flat steps and pertinent requirements of this subpart without a pail shelf, designed to be before employees begin the work that climbed on the ladder top cap as well necessitates the installation and use of as all steps. The side rails may con- stairways, ladders, and their respective tinue above the top cap. fall protection systems. Through fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed ladder.’’ § 1926.1052 Stairways. Tread depth means the horizontal dis- (a) General. The following require- tance from front to back of a tread (ex- ments apply to all stairways as indi- cluding nosing, if any). cated:

526

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00536 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1052

(1) Stairways that will not be a per- (c) Stairrails and handrails. The fol- manent part of the structure on which lowing requirements apply to all stair- construction work is being performed ways as indicated: shall have landings of not less than 30 (1) Stairways having four or more ris- inches (76 cm) in the direction of travel ers or rising more than 30 inches (76 and extend at least 22 inches (56 cm) in cm), whichever is less, shall be width at every 12 feet (3.7 m) or less of equipped with: vertical rise. (i) At least one handrail; and (2) Stairs shall be installed between (ii) One stairrail system along each 30° and 50° from horizontal. unprotected side or edge. (3) Riser height and tread depth shall NOTE: When the top edge of a stairrail sys- be uniform within each flight of stairs, tem also serves as a handrail, paragraph including any foundation structure (c)(7) of this section applies. used as one or more treads of the (2) Winding and spiral stairways shall stairs. Variations in riser height or 1 be equipped with a handrail offset suf- tread depth shall not be over ⁄4-inch ficiently to prevent walking on those (0.6 cm) in any stairway system. portions of the stairways where the (4) Where doors or gates open directly tread width is less than 6 inches (15 on a stairway, a platform shall be pro- cm). vided, and the swing of the door shall (3) The height of stairrails shall be as not reduce the effective width of the follows: platform to less than 20 inches (51 cm). (i) Stairrails installed after March 15, (5) Metal pan landings and metal pan 1991, shall be not less than 36 inches treads, when used, shall be secured in (91.5 cm) from the upper surface of the place before filling with concrete or stairrail system to the surface of the other material. tread, in line with the face of the riser (6) All parts of stairways shall be free at the forward edge of the tread. of hazardous projections, such as pro- (ii) Stairrails installed before March truding nails. 15, 1991, shall be not less than 30 inches (7) Slippery conditions on stairways (76 cm) nor more than 34 inches (86 cm) shall be eliminated before the stair- from the upper surface of the stairrail ways are used to reach other levels. system to the surface of the tread, in (b) Temporary service. The following line with the face of the riser at the requirements apply to all stairways as forward edge of the tread. indicated: (4) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- (1) Except during stairway construc- mediate vertical members, or equiva- tion, foot traffic is prohibited on stair- lent intermediate structural members, ways with pan stairs where the treads shall be provided between the top rail and/or landings are to be filled in with of the stairrail system and the stair- concrete or other material at a later way steps. date, unless the stairs are temporarily (i) Midrails, when used, shall be lo- fitted with wood or other solid mate- cated at a height midway between the rial at least to the top edge of each top edge of the stairrail system and the pan. Such temporary treads and land- stairway steps. ings shall be replaced when worn below (ii) Screens or mesh, when used, shall the level of the top edge of the pan. extend from the top rail to the stair- (2) Except during stairway construc- way step, and along the entire opening tion, foot traffic is prohibited on skel- between top rail supports. eton metal stairs where permanent (iii) When intermediate vertical treads and/or landings are to be in- members, such as balusters, are used stalled at a later date, unless the stairs between posts, they shall be not more are fitted with secured temporary than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. treads and landings long enough to (iv) Other structural members, when cover the entire tread and/or landing used, shall be installed such that there area. are no openings in the stairrail system (3) Treads for temporary service shall that are more than 19 inches (48 cm) be made of wood or other solid mate- wide. rial, and shall be installed the full (5) Handrails and the top rails of width and depth of the stair. stairrail systems shall be capable of

527

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00537 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1053 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

withstanding, without failure, a force the maximum intended load. The abil- of at least 200 pounds (890 n) applied ity of a ladder to sustain the loads in- within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, dicated in this paragraph shall be de- in any downward or outward direction, termined by applying or transmitting at any point along the top edge. the requisite load to the ladder in a (6) The height of handrails shall be downward vertical direction. Ladders not more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor built and tested in conformance with less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the the applicable provisions of appendix A upper surface of the handrail to the of this subpart will be deemed to meet surface of the tread, in line with the this requirement. face of the riser at the forward edge of (ii) Each portable ladder that is not the tread. self-supporting: At least four times the (7) When the top edge of a stairrail maximum intended load, except that system also serves as a handrail, the each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal height of the top edge shall be not or plastic ladders shall sustain at least more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less 3.3 times the maximum intended load. than 36 inches (91.5 cm) from the upper The ability of a ladder to sustain the surface of the stairrail system to the loads indicated in this paragraph shall surface of the tread, in line with the be determined by applying or transmit- face of the riser at the forward edge of ting the requisite load to the ladder in the tread. a downward vertical direction when the (8) Stairrail systems and handrails ladder is placed at an angle of 751⁄2 de- shall be so surfaced as to prevent in- grees from the horizontal. Ladders jury to employees from punctures or built and tested in conformance with lacerations, and to prevent snagging of the applicable provisions of appendix A clothing. will be deemed to meet this require- (9) Handrails shall provide an ade- ment. quate handhold for employees grasping (iii) Each fixed ladder: At least two them to avoid falling. loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, con- (10) The ends of stairrail systems and centrated between any two consecutive handrails shall be constructed so as not attachments (the number and position to constitute a projection hazard. of additional concentrated loads of 250 (11) Handrails that will not be a per- pounds (114 kg) each, determined from manent part of the structure being anticipated usage of the ladder, shall built shall have a minimum clearance also be included), plus anticipated of 3 inches (8 cm) between the handrail loads caused by ice buildup, winds, rig- and walls, stairrail systems, and other ging, and impact loads resulting from objects. the use of ladder safety devices. Each (12) Unprotected sides and edges of step or rung shall be capable of sup- stairway landings shall be provided porting a single concentrated load of at with guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- least 250 pounds (114 kg) applied in the tem criteria are contained in subpart middle of the step or rung. Ladders M of this part. built in conformance with the applica- [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, ble provisions of appendix A will be 1991; 56 FR 5061, Feb. 7, 1991; 56 FR 41794, Aug. deemed to meet this requirement. 23, 1991] (2) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level, and uniformly § 1926.1053 Ladders. spaced when the ladder is in position (a) General. The following require- for use. ments apply to all ladders as indicated, (3)(i) Rungs, cleats, and steps of port- including job-made ladders. able ladders (except as provided below) (1) Ladders shall be capable of sup- and fixed ladders (including individual- porting the following loads without rung/step ladders) shall be spaced not failure: less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart, nor (i) Each self-supporting portable lad- more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as der: At least four times the maximum measured between center lines of the intended load, except that each extra- rungs, cleats, and steps. heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic (ii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step ladder shall sustain at least 3.3 times stools shall be not less than 8 inches (20

528

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00538 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1053

cm) apart, nor more than 12 inches (31 vated work area, the ladders shall be cm) apart, as measured between center offset with a platform or landing be- lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. tween the ladders. (The requirements (iii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the to have guardrail systems with base section of extension trestle lad- toeboards for falling object and over- ders shall not be less than 8 inches (20 head protection on platforms and land- cm) nor more than 18 inches (46 cm) ings are set forth in subpart M of this apart, as measured between center part.) lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. (11) Ladder components shall be sur- The rung spacing on the extension sec- faced so as to prevent injury to an em- tion of the extension trestle ladder ployee from punctures or lacerations, shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm) and to prevent snagging of clothing. nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as (12) Wood ladders shall not be coated measured between center lines of the with any opaque covering, except for rungs, cleats, and steps. identification or warning labels which (4)(i) The minimum clear distance be- may be placed on one face only of a tween the sides of individual-rung/step side rail. ladders and the minimum clear dis- (13) The minimum perpendicular tance between the side rails of other clearance between fixed ladder rungs, fixed ladders shall be 16 inches (41 cm). cleats, and steps, and any obstruction (ii) The minimum clear distance be- behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 tween side rails for all portable ladders cm), except in the case of an elevator shall be 111⁄2 inches (29 cm). pit ladder, for which a minimum per- (5) The rungs of individual-rung/step pendicular clearance of 41⁄2 inches (11 ladders shall be shaped such that em- cm) is required. ployees’ feet cannot slide off the end of the rungs. (14) The minimum perpendicular (6)(i) The rungs and steps of fixed clearance between the center line of metal ladders manufactured after fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, March 15, 1991, shall be corrugated, and any obstruction on the climbing knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-reside of the ladder shall be 30 inches (76 sistant material, or otherwise treated cm), except as provided in paragraph to minimize slipping. (a)(15) of this section. (ii) The rungs and steps of portable (15) When unavoidable obstructions metal ladders shall be corrugated, are encountered, the minimum perpen- knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re- dicular clearance between the center- sistant material, or otherwise treated line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and to minimize slipping. steps, and the obstruction on the (7) Ladders shall not be tied or fas- climbing side of the ladder may be re- tened together to provide longer sec- duced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided tions unless they are specifically de- that a deflection device is installed to signed for such use. guide employees around the obstruc- (8) A metal spreader or locking de- tion. vice shall be provided on each step- (16) Through fixed ladders at their ladder to hold the front and back sec- point of access/egress shall have a step- tions in an open position when the lad- across distance of not less than 7 der is being used. inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches (9) When splicing is required to ob- (30 cm) as measured from the center- tain a given length of side rail, the re- line of the steps or rungs to the nearest sulting side rail must be at least equiv- edge of the landing area. If the normal alent in strength to a one-piece side step-across distance exceeds 12 inches rail made of the same material. (30 cm), a landing platform shall be (10) Except when portable ladders are provided to reduce the distance to the used to gain access to fixed ladders specified limit. (such as those on utility towers, bill- (17) Fixed ladders without cages or boards, and other structures where the wells shall have a clear width to the bottom of the fixed ladder is elevated nearest permanent object of at least 15 to limit access), when two or more sep- inches (38 cm) on each side of the cen- arate ladders are used to reach an ele- terline of the ladder.

529

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00539 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1053 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(18) Fixed ladders shall be provided vision for access to the platform or with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, other point of access. or self-retracting lifelines where the (21) Wells for fixed ladders shall con- length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 form to all of the following: m) but the top of the ladder is at a dis- (i) They shall completely encircle the tance greater than 24 feet (7.3 m) above ladder; lower levels. (ii) They shall be free of projections; (19) Where the total length of a climb (iii) Their inside face on the climbing equals or exceeds 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed side of the ladder shall extend not less ladders shall be equipped with one of than 27 inches (68 cm) nor more than 30 the following: inches (76 cm) from the centerline of (i) Ladder safety devices; or the step or rung; (ii) Self-retracting lifelines, and rest (iv) The inside clear width shall be at platforms at intervals not to exceed 150 least 30 inches (76 cm); feet (45.7 m); or (v) The bottom of the wall on the ac- (iii) A cage or well, and multiple lad- cess side shall start at a level not less der sections, each ladder section not to than 7 feet (2.1 m) nor more than 8 feet exceed 50 feet (15.2 m) in length. Ladder (2.4 m) above the point of access to the sections shall be offset from adjacent bottom of the ladder. sections, and landing platforms shall (22) Ladder safety devices, and re- be provided at maximum intervals of 50 lated support systems, for fixed ladders feet (15.2 m). shall conform to all of the following: (20) Cages for fixed ladders shall con- (i) They shall be capable of with- form to all of the following: standing without failure a drop test consisting of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of (i) Horizontal bands shall be fastened a 500-pound (226 kg) weight; to the side rails of rail ladders, or di- (ii) They shall permit the employee rectly to the structure, building, or using the device to ascend or descend equipment for individual-rung ladders; without continually having to hold, (ii) Vertical bars shall be on the in- push or pull any part of the device, side of the horizontal bands and shall leaving both hands free for climbing; be fastened to them; (iii) They shall be activated within 2 (iii) Cages shall extend not less than feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs, and 27 inches (68 cm), or more than 30 limit the descending velocity of an em- inches (76 cm) from the centerline of ployee to 7 feet/sec. (2.1 m/sec.) or less; the step or rung (excluding the flare at (iv) The connection between the car- the bottom of the cage), and shall not rier or lifeline and the point of attach- be less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width; ment to the body belt or harness shall (iv) The inside of the cage shall be not exceed 9 inches (23 cm) in length. clear of projections; (23) The mounting of ladder safety (v) Horizontal bands shall be spaced devices for fixed ladders shall conform not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) on center to the following: vertically; (i) Mountings for rigid carriers shall (vi) Vertical bars shall be spaced at be attached at each end of the carrier, intervals not more than 91⁄2 inches (24 with intermediate mountings, as nec- cm) on center horizontally; essary, spaced along the entire length (vii) The bottom of the cage shall be of the carrier, to provide the strength at a level not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) necessary to stop employees’ falls. nor more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the (ii) Mountings for flexible carriers point of access to the bottom of the shall be attached at each end of the ladder. The bottom of the cage shall be carrier. When the system is exposed to flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all wind, cable guides for flexible carriers around within the distance between the shall be installed at a minimum spac- bottom horizontal band and the next ing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and maximum higher band; spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the en- (viii) The top of the cage shall be a tire length of the carrier, to prevent minimum of 42 inches (1.1 m) above the wind damage to the system. top of the platform, or the point of ac- (iii) The design and installation of cess at the top of the ladder, with pro- mountings and cable guides shall not

530

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00540 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1053

reduce the design strength of the lad- (2) Ladders shall be maintained free der. of oil, grease, and other slipping haz- (24) The side rails of through or side- ards. step fixed ladders shall extend 42 inches (3) Ladders shall not be loaded be- (1.1 m) above the top of the access level yond the maximum intended load for or landing platform served by the lad- which they were built, nor beyond der. For a parapet ladder, the access their manufacturer’s rated capacity. level shall be the roof if the parapet is (4) Ladders shall be used only for the cut to permit passage through the purpose for which they were designed. parapet; if the parapet is continuous, (5)(i) Non-self-supporting ladders the access level shall be the top of the shall be used at an angle such that the parapet. horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is ap- (25) For through-fixed-ladder exten- proximately one-quarter of the work- sions, the steps or rungs shall be omit- ing length of the ladder (the distance ted from the extension and the exten- along the ladder between the foot and sion of the side rails shall be flared to the top support). provide not less than 24 inches (61 cm) (ii) Wood job-made ladders with nor more than 30 inches (76 cm) clear- spliced side rails shall be used at an ance between side rails. Where ladder angle such that the horizontal distance safety devices are provided, the max- is one-eighth the working length of the imum clearance between side rails of ladder. the extensions shall not exceed 36 (iii) Fixed ladders shall be used at a inches (91 cm). pitch no greater than 90 degrees from (26) For side-step fixed ladders, the the horizontal, as measured to the side rails and the steps or rungs shall back side of the ladder. be continuous in the extension. (6) Ladders shall be used only on sta- (27) Individual-rung/step ladders, ex- ble and level surfaces unless secured to cept those used where their access prevent accidental displacement. openings are covered with manhole (7) Ladders shall not be used on slip- covers or hatches, shall extend at least pery surfaces unless secured or pro- 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level vided with slip-resistant feet to pre- or landing platform either by the con- vent accidental displacement. Slip-re- tinuation of the rung spacings as hori- sistant feet shall not be used as a sub- zontal grab bars or by providing stitute for care in placing, lashing, or vertical grab bars that shall have the holding a ladder that is used upon slip- same lateral spacing as the vertical pery surfaces including, but not lim- legs of the rungs. ited to, flat metal or concrete surfaces that are constructed so they cannot be (b) Use. The following requirements prevented from becoming slippery. apply to the use of all ladders, includ- (8) Ladders placed in any location ing job-made ladders, except as other- where they can be displaced by work- wise indicated: place activities or traffic, such as in (1) When portable ladders are used for passageways, doorways, or driveways, access to an upper landing surface, the shall be secured to prevent accidental ladder side rails shall extend at least 3 displacement, or a barricade shall be feet (.9 m) above the upper landing sur- used to keep the activities or traffic face to which the ladder is used to gain away from the ladder. access; or, when such an extension is (9) The area around the top and bot- not possible because of the ladder’s tom of ladders shall be kept clear. length, then the ladder shall be secured (10) The top of a non-self-supporting at its top to a rigid support that will ladder shall be placed with the two not deflect, and a grasping device, such rails supported equally unless it is as a grabrail, shall be provided to as- equipped with a single support attach- sist employees in mounting and dis- ment. mounting the ladder. In no case shall (11) Ladders shall not be moved, the extension be such that ladder de- shifted, or extended while occupied. flection under a load would, by itself, (12) Ladders shall have nonconduc- cause the ladder to slip off its support. tive siderails if they are used where the

531

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00541 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB §§ 1926.1054–1926.1059 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

employee or the ladder could contact §§ 1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved] exposed energized electrical equipment, except as provided in § 1926.955(b) § 1926.1060 Training requirements. and (c) of this part. The following training provisions (13) The top or top step of a step- clarify the requirements of ladder shall not be used as a step. § 1926.21(b)(2), regarding the hazards ad- (14) Cross-bracing on the rear section dressed in subpart X. of stepladders shall not be used for (a) The employer shall provide a climbing unless the ladders are de- training program for each employee signed and provided with steps for using ladders and stairways, as nec- climbing on both front and rear sec- essary. The program shall enable each tions. employee to recognize hazards related (15) Ladders shall be inspected by a to ladders and stairways, and shall competent person for visible defects on train each employee in the procedures a periodic basis and after any occur- to be followed to minimize these haz- rence that could affect their safe use. ards. (16) Portable ladders with structural (1) The employer shall ensure that defects, such as, but not limited to, each employee has been trained by a broken or missing rungs, cleats, or competent person in the following steps, broken or split rails, corroded areas, as applicable: components, or other faulty or defec- (i) The nature of fall hazards in the tive components, shall either be imme- work area; diately marked in a manner that readily identifies them as defective, or be (ii) The correct procedures for erect- tagged with ‘‘Do Not Use’’ or similar ing, maintaining, and disassembling language, and shall be withdrawn from the fall protection systems to be used; service until repaired. (iii) The proper construction, use, (17) Fixed ladders with structural de- placement, and care in handling of all fects, such as, but not limited to, bro- stairways and ladders; ken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps, (iv) The maximum intended load-car- broken or split rails, or corroded com- rying capacities of ladders used; and ponents, shall be withdrawn from serv- (v) The standards contained in this ice until repaired. The requirement to subpart. withdraw a defective ladder from serv- (b) Retraining shall be provided for ice is satisfied if the ladder is either: each employee as necessary so that the (i) Immediately tagged with ‘‘Do Not employee maintains the understanding Use’’ or similar language, and knowledge acquired through com- (ii) Marked in a manner that readily pliance with this section. identifies it as defective; (iii) Or blocked (such as with a ply- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X OF PART wood attachment that spans several 1926—LADDERS rungs). This appendix serves as a non-mandatory (18) Ladder repairs shall restore the guideline to assist employers in complying ladder to a condition meeting its origi- with the ladder loading and strength require- nal design criteria, before the ladder is ments of § 1926.1053(a)(1). A ladder designed returned to use. and built in accordance with the applicable (19) Single-rail ladders shall not be national consensus standards, as set forth used. below, will be considered to meet the requirements of § 1926.1053(a)(1): (20) When ascending or descending a • Manufactured portable wood ladders: ladder, the user shall face the ladder. American National Standards Institute (21) Each employee shall use at least (ANSI) A14.1–1982—American National one hand to grasp the ladder when pro- Standard for Ladders-Portable Wood-Safety gressing up and/or down the ladder. Requirements. (22) An employee shall not carry any • Manufactured portable metal ladders: object or load that could cause the em- ANSI A14.2–1982—American National Stand- ployee to lose balance and fall. ard for Ladders—Portable Metal-Safety Re- quirements. [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, • Manufactured fixed ladders: ANSI A14.3– 1991, as amended at 56 FR 41794, Aug. 23, 1991; 1984—American National Standard for Lad- 79 FR 20743, Apr. 11, 2014] ders-Fixed-Safety Requirements.

532

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00542 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1090

• Job-made ladders: ANSI A14.4–1979—Safe- tical to those set forth at § 1910.421 of this ty Requirements for Job-Made Ladders. chapter. • Plastic ladders: ANSI A14.5–1982—Amer- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] ican National Standard for Ladders-Portable Reinforced Plastic-Safety Requirements. § 1926.1082 Procedures during dive. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Subpart Y—Diving struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.422 of this AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- chapter. pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Con- § 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. struction Safety Standards Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor Workers’ NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Compensation Act (33 U.S.C. 941); Secretary struction work under this section are iden- of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 tical to those set forth at § 1910.423 of this (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR chapter. 9033), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017) or 5–2002 (67 FR [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] 65008) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.

SOURCE: 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993, unless SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES otherwise noted. § 1926.1084 SCUBA diving. GENERAL NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- § 1926.1071 Scope and application. tical to those set forth at § 1910.424 of this NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- chapter. struction work under this section are iden- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] tical to those set forth at § 1910.401 of this chapter. § 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air div- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] ing. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- § 1926.1072 Definitions. struction work under this section are iden- NOTE: The provisions applicable to con- tical to those set forth at § 1910.425 of this struction work under this section are iden- chapter. tical to those set forth at § 1910.402 of this [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.426 of this § 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.410 of this § 1926.1087 Liveboating. chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.427 of this GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES chapter.

§ 1926.1080 Safe practices manual. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]

NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND struction work under this section are iden- REQUIREMENTS tical to those set forth at § 1910.420 of this chapter. § 1926.1090 Equipment. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- § 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. tical to those set forth at § 1910.430 of this chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]

533

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00543 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1091 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

RECORDKEEPING (5) Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup; and § 1926.1091 Recordkeeping require- (6) Transportation, disposal, storage, ments. containment of and housekeeping ac- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tivities involving asbestos or products struction work under this section are iden- containing asbestos, on the site or lo- tical to those set forth at § 1910.440 of this cation at which construction activities chapter. are performed. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (7) Coverage under this standard shall be based on the nature of the APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y OF PART work operation involving asbestos ex- 1926—EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONS posure. WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR LIMIT EX- (8) This section does not apply to as- POSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS bestos-containing asphalt roof coat- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- ings, cements and mastics. struction work under this appendix A are (b) Definitions. identical to those set forth at appendix A to Aggressive method means removal or Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter. disturbance of building material by [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] sanding, abrading, grinding or other method that breaks, crumbles, or dis- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y OF PART integrates intact ACM. 1926—GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING Amended water means water to which surfactant (wetting agent) has been NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- added to increase the ability of the liq- struction work under this appendix B are identical to those set forth at appendix B to uid to penetrate ACM. subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter. Asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous has been chemically treated and/or al- Substances tered. For purposes of this standard, ‘‘asbestos’’ includes PACM, as defined AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3704; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, below. 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 Asbestos-containing material (ACM), (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR means any material containing more 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3– than one percent asbestos. 2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 Assistant Secretary means the Assist- (72 FR 31160), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- FR 3912) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1926.1102 not issued under 29 U.S.C. tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- 655 or 29 CFR part 1911; also issued under 5 ment of Labor, or designee. U.S.C. 553. Authorized person means any person authorized by the employer and re- § 1926.1100 [Reserved] quired by work duties to be present in regulated areas. § 1926.1101 Asbestos. Building/facility owner is the legal en- (a) Scope and application. This section tity, including a lessee, which exercises regulates asbestos exposure in all work control over management and record as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), includ- keeping functions relating to a building but not limited to the following: ing and/or facility in which activities (1) Demolition or salvage of struc- covered by this standard take place. tures where asbestos is present; Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) (2) Removal or encapsulation of ma- means one certified in the practice of terials containing asbestos; industrial hygiene by the American (3) Construction, alteration, repair, Board of Industrial Hygiene. maintenance, or renovation of struc- Class I asbestos work means activities tures, substrates, or portions thereof, involving the removal of TSI and sur- that contain asbestos; facing ACM and PACM. (4) Installation of products con- Class II asbestos work means activities taining asbestos; involving the removal of ACM which is

534

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00544 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

not thermal system insulation or sur- clean room, which is used for the de- facing material. This includes, but is contamination of workers, materials, not limited to, the removal of asbestos- and equipment that are contaminated containing wallboard, floor tile and with asbestos. sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, Demolition means the wrecking or and construction mastics. taking out of any load-supporting Class III asbestos work means repair structural member and any related and maintenance operations, where razing, removing, or stripping of asbes- ‘‘ACM’’, including TSI and surfacing tos products. ACM and PACM, is likely to be dis- Director means the Director, National turbed. Institute for Occupational Safety and Class IV asbestos work means mainte- Health, U.S. Department of Health and nance and custodial activities during Human Services, or designee. which employees contact but do not Disturbance means activities that dis- disturb ACM or PACM and activities to rupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, clean up dust, waste and debris result- crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or ing from Class I, II, and III activities. generate visible debris from ACM or Clean room means an uncontaminated PACM. In no event shall the amount of room having facilities for the storage ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that of employees’ street clothing and which can be contained in one glove uncontaminated materials and equip- bag or waste bag which shall not ex- ment. ceed 60 inches in length and width. Closely resemble means that the major Employee exposure means that expo- workplace conditions which have con- sure to airborne asbestos that would tributed to the levels of historic asbes- occur if the employee were not using tos exposure, are no more protective respiratory protective equipment. than conditions of the current work- Equipment room (change room) means place. a contaminated room located within Competent person means, in addition the decontamination area that is sup- to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32 (f), plied with impermeable bags or con- one who is capable of identifying exist- tainers for the disposal of contami- ing asbestos hazards in the workplace nated protective clothing and equip- and selecting the appropriate control ment. strategy for asbestos exposure, who has Fiber means a particulate form of as- the authority to take prompt correc- bestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a tive measures to eliminate them, as length-to-diameter ratio of at least 3 to specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f): in addi- 1. tion, for Class I and Class II work who Glovebag means not more than a 60 × is specially trained in a training course 60 inch impervious plastic bag-like en- which meets the criteria of EPA’s closure affixed around an asbestos-con- Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR part taining material, with glove-like ap- 763) for supervisor, or its equivalent pendages through which material and and, for Class III and Class IV work, tools may be handled. who is trained in a manner consistent High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) with EPA requirements for training of filter means a filter capable of trapping local education agency maintenance and retaining at least 99.97 percent of and custodial staff as set forth at 40 all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 mi- CFR 763.92 (a)(2). crometers in diameter. Critical barrier means one or more Homogeneous area means an area of layers of plastic sealed over all open- surfacing material or thermal system ings into a work area or any other insulation that is uniform in color and similarly placed physical barrier suffi- texture. cient to prevent airborne asbestos in a Industrial hygienist means a profes- work area from migrating to an adja- sional qualified by education, training, cent area. and experience to anticipate, recog- Decontamination area means an en- nize, evaluate and develop controls for closed area adjacent and connected to occupational health hazards. the regulated area and consisting of an Intact means that the ACM has not equipment room, shower area, and crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise

535

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00545 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

deteriorated so that the asbestos is no or PACM attached to structures or sub- longer likely to be bound with its ma- strates. trix. Surfacing material means material Modification for purposes of para- that is sprayed, troweled-on or other- graph (g)(6)(ii), means a changed or al- wise applied to surfaces (such as acous- tered procedure, material or compo- tical plaster on ceilings and fire- nent of a control system, which re- proofing materials on structural mem- places a procedure, material or compo- bers, or other materials on surfaces for nent of a required system. Omitting a acoustical, fireproofing, and other pur- procedure or component, or reducing or poses). diminishing the stringency or strength Surfacing ACM means surfacing mate- of a material or component of the con- rial which contains more than 1% as- trol system is not a ‘‘modification’’ for bestos. purposes of paragraph (g)(6) of this sec- Thermal system insulation (TSI) means tion. ACM applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, Negative Initial Exposure Assessment breeching, tanks, ducts or other struc- means a demonstration by the em- tural components to prevent heat loss ployer, which complies with the cri- or gain. teria in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this sec- Thermal system insulation ACM is tion, that employee exposure during an thermal system insulation which con- operation is expected to be consist- tains more than 1% asbestos. ently below the PELs. PACM means ‘‘presumed asbestos (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELS)— containing material’’. (1) Time-weighted average limit (TWA). Presumed Asbestos Containing Material The employer shall ensure that no em- means thermal system insulation and ployee is exposed to an airborne con- surfacing material found in buildings centration of asbestos in excess of 0.1 constructed no later than 1980. The des- fiber per cubic centimeter of air as an ignation of a material as ‘‘PACM’’ may eight (8) hour time-weighted average be rebutted pursuant to paragraph (TWA), as determined by the method (k)(5) of this section. prescribed in appendix A to this sec- Project Designer means a person who tion, or by an equivalent method. has successfully completed the train- (2) Excursion limit. The employer shall ing requirements for an abatement ensure that no employee is exposed to project designer established by 40 an airborne concentration of asbestos U.S.C. 763.90(g). in excess of 1.0 fiber per cubic centi- Regulated area means: an area estab- meter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a lished by the employer to demarcate sampling period of thirty (30) minutes, areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos as determined by the method pre- work is conducted, and any adjoining scribed in appendix A to this section, area where debris and waste from such or by an equivalent method. asbestos work accumulate; and a work (d) Multi-employer worksites. (1) On area within which airborne concentra- multi-employer worksites, an employer tions of asbestos, exceed or there is a performing work requiring the estab- reasonable possibility they may exceed lishment of a regulated area shall in- the permissible exposure limit. Re- form other employers on the site of the quirements for regulated areas are set nature of the employer’s work with as- out in paragraph (e) of this section. bestos and/or PACM, of the existence of Removal means all operations where and requirements pertaining to regu- ACM and/or PACM is taken out or lated areas, and the measures taken to stripped from structures or substrates, ensure that employees of such other and includes demolition operations. employers are not exposed to asbestos. Renovation means the modifying of (2) Asbestos hazards at a multi-em- any existing structure, or portion ployer work site shall be abated by the thereof. contractor who created or controls the Repair means overhauling, rebuild- source of asbestos contamination. For ing, reconstructing, or reconditioning example, if there is a significant of structures or substrates, including breach of an enclosure containing Class encapsulation or other repair of ACM I work, the employer responsible for

536

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00546 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

erecting the enclosure shall repair the used, they may demarcate the regu- breach immediately. lated area. Signs shall be provided and (3) In addition, all employers of em- displayed pursuant to the requirements ployees exposed to asbestos hazards of paragraph (k)(7) of this section. shall comply with applicable protective (3) Access. Access to regulated areas provisions to protect their employees. shall be limited to authorized persons For example, if employees working im- and to persons authorized by the Act or mediately adjacent to a Class I asbes- regulations issued pursuant thereto. tos job are exposed to asbestos due to (4) Respirators. All persons entering a the inadequate containment of such regulated area where employees are re- job, their employer shall either remove quired pursuant to paragraph (h)(1) of the employees from the area until the this section to wear respirators shall enclosure breach is repaired; or per- be supplied with a respirator selected form an initial exposure assessment in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of pursuant to (f) of this section. this section. (4) All employers of employees work- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer ing adjacent to regulated areas estab- shall ensure that employees do not eat, lished by another employer on a multi- drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or employer work-site, shall take steps on apply cosmetics in the regulated area. a daily basis to ascertain the integrity (6) Competent Persons. The employer of the enclosure and/or the effective- shall ensure that all asbestos work per- ness of the control method relied on by formed within regulated areas is super- the primary asbestos contractor to as- vised by a competent person, as defined sure that asbestos fibers do not mi- in paragraph (b) of this section. The grate to such adjacent areas. duties of the competent person are set (5) All general contractors on a con- out in paragraph (o) of this section. struction project which includes work (f) Exposure assessments and moni- covered by this standard shall be toring—(1) General monitoring criteria. (i) deemed to exercise general supervisory Each employer who has a workplace or authority over the work covered by work operation where exposure moni- this standard, even though the general toring is required under this section contractor is not qualified to serve as shall perform monitoring to determine the asbestos ‘‘competent person’’ as de- accurately the airborne concentrations fined by paragraph (b) of this section. of asbestos to which employees may be As supervisor of the entire project, the exposed. general contractor shall ascertain (ii) Determinations of employee ex- whether the asbestos contractor is in posure shall be made from breathing compliance with this standard, and zone air samples that are representa- shall require such contractor to come tive of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute into compliance with this standard short-term exposures of each employee. when necessary. (iii) Representative 8-hour TWA em- (e) Regulated areas. (1) All Class I, II ployee exposure shall be determined on and III asbestos work shall be con- the basis of one or more samples rep- ducted within regulated areas. All resenting full-shift exposure for em- other operations covered by this stand- ployees in each work area. Representa- ard shall be conducted within a regu- tive 30-minute short-term employee ex- lated area where airborne concentra- posures shall be determined on the tions of asbestos exceed, or there is a basis of one or more samples rep- reasonable possibility they may exceed resenting 30 minute exposures associ- a PEL. Regulated areas shall comply ated with operations that are most with the requirements of paragraphs likely to produce exposures above the (2), (3),(4) and (5) of this section. excursion limit for employees in each (2) Demarcation. The regulated area work area. shall be demarcated in any manner (2) Initial Exposure Assessment. (i) that minimizes the number of persons Each employer who has a workplace or within the area and protects persons work operation covered by this stand- outside the area from exposure to air- ard shall ensure that a ‘‘competent per- borne asbestos. Where critical barriers son’’ conducts an exposure assessment or negative pressure enclosures are immediately before or at the initiation

537

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00547 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

of the operation to ascertain expected the monitoring and analysis were per- exposures during that operation or formed in compliance with the asbestos workplace. The assessment must be standard in effect; and the data were completed in time to comply with re- obtained during work operations con- quirements which are triggered by ex- ducted under workplace conditions posure data or the lack of a ‘‘negative ‘‘closely resembling’’ the processes, exposure assessment,’’ and to provide type of material, control methods, information necessary to assure that work practices, and environmental all control systems planned are appro- conditions used and prevailing in the priate for that operation and will work employer’s current operations, the op- properly. erations were conducted by employees (ii) Basis of Initial Exposure Assess- whose training and experience are no ment: Unless a negative exposure as- more extensive than that of employees sessment has been made pursuant to performing the current job, and these paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the data show that under the conditions initial exposure assessment shall, if prevailing and which will prevail in the feasible, be based on monitoring con- current workplace there is a high de- ducted pursuant to paragraph (f)(1)(iii) gree of certainty that employee expo- of this section. The assessment shall sures will not exceed the TWA and ex- take into consideration both the moni- cursion limit; or toring results and all observations, in- (C) The results of initial exposure formation or calculations which indi- monitoring of the current job made cate employee exposure to asbestos, in- from breathing zone air samples that cluding any previous monitoring con- are representative of the 8-hour TWA ducted in the workplace, or of the oper- and 30-minute short-term exposures of ations of the employer which indicate each employee covering operations the levels of airborne asbestos likely to which are most likely during the per- be encountered on the job. For Class I formance of the entire asbestos job to asbestos work, until the employer con- result in exposures over the PELs. ducts exposure monitoring and docu- (3) Periodic monitoring—(i) Class I and ments that employees on that job will II operations. The employer shall con- not be exposed in excess of the PELs, duct daily monitoring that is rep- or otherwise makes a negative expo- resentative of the exposure of each em- sure assessment pursuant to paragraph ployee who is assigned to work within (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the employer a regulated area who is performing shall presume that employees are ex- Class I or II work, unless the employer posed in excess of the TWA and excur- pursuant to (f)(2)(iii) of this section, sion limit. has made a negative exposure assess- (iii) Negative Exposure Assessment: ment for the entire operation. For any one specific asbestos job which (ii) All operations under the standard will be performed by employees who other than Class I and II operations. have been trained in compliance with The employer shall conduct periodic the standard, the employer may dem- monitoring of all work where exposures onstrate that employee exposures will are expected to exceed a PEL, at inter- be below the PELs by data which con- vals sufficient to document the valid- form to the following criteria; ity of the exposure prediction. (A) Objective data demonstrating (iii) Exception: When all employees that the product or material con- required to be monitored daily are taining asbestos minerals or the activ- equipped with supplied-air respirators ity involving such product or material operated in the pressure demand mode, cannot release airborne fibers in con- or other positive pressure mode, the centrations exceeding the TWA and ex- employer may dispense with the daily cursion limit under those work condi- monitoring required by this paragraph. tions having the greatest potential for However, employees performing Class I releasing asbestos; or work using a control method which is (B) Where the employer has mon- not listed in paragraph (g)(4)(i), (ii), or itored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL (iii) of this section or using a modifica- and the excursion limit within 12 tion of a listed control method, shall months of the current or projected job, continue to be monitored daily even if

538

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00548 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

they are equipped with supplied-air res- all operations covered by this section. pirators. The employer shall use the following (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the engineering controls and work prac- periodic monitoring required by para- tices in all operations covered by this graph (f)(3) of this section reveals that section, regardless of the levels of ex- employee exposures, as indicated by posure: statistically reliable measurements, (i) Vacuum cleaners equipped with are below the permissible exposure HEPA filters to collect all debris and limit and excursion limit the employer dust containing ACM and PACM, ex- may discontinue monitoring for those cept as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) employees whose exposures are rep- of this section in the case of roofing resented by such monitoring. material. (ii) Additional monitoring. Notwith- (ii) Wet methods, or wetting agents, standing the provisions of paragraph (f) to control employee exposures during (2) and (3), and (f)(4) of this section, the asbestos handling, mixing, removal, employer shall institute the exposure cutting, application, and cleanup, ex- monitoring required under paragraph cept where employers demonstrate (f)(3) of this section whenever there has that the use of wet methods is infeasi- been a change in process, control ble due to for example, the creation of equipment, personnel or work practices electrical hazards, equipment malfunc- that may result in new or additional tion, and, in roofing, except as provided exposures above the permissible expo- in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section; sure limit and/or excursion limit or and when the employer has any reason to (iii) Prompt clean-up and disposal of suspect that a change may result in wastes and debris contaminated with new or additional exposures above the asbestos in leak-tight containers ex- permissible exposure limit and/or except in roofing operations, where the cursion limit. Such additional moni- procedures specified in paragraph toring is required regardless of whether (g)(8)(ii) of this section apply. a ‘‘negative exposure assessment’’ was (2) In addition to the requirements of previously produced for a specific job. paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the em- (5) Employee notification of monitoring ployer shall use the following control results. The employer must, as soon as methods to achieve compliance with possible but no later than 5 working the TWA permissible exposure limit days after the receipt of the results of and excursion limit prescribed by para- any monitoring performed under this graph (c) of this section; section, notify each affected employee (i) Local exhaust ventilation of these results either individually in equipped with HEPA filter dust collec- writing or by posting the results in an tion systems; appropriate location that is accessible (ii) Enclosure or isolation of proc- to employees. esses producing asbestos dust; (6) Observation of monitoring. (i) The (iii) Ventilation of the regulated area employer shall provide affected em- to move contaminated air away from ployees and their designated represent- the breathing zone of employees and atives an opportunity to observe any toward a filtration or collection device monitoring of employee exposure to as- equipped with a HEPA filter; bestos conducted in accordance with (iv) Use of other work practices and this section. engineering controls that the Assistant (ii) When observation of the moni- Secretary can show to be feasible. toring of employee exposure to asbes- (v) Wherever the feasible engineering tos requires entry into an area where and work practice controls described the use of protective clothing or equip- above are not sufficient to reduce em- ment is required, the observer shall be ployee exposure to or below the permis- provided with and be required to use sible exposure limit and/or excursion such clothing and equipment and shall limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this comply with all other applicable safety section, the employer shall use them to and health procedures. reduce employee exposure to the lowest (g) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi- levels attainable by these controls and neering controls and work practices for shall supplement them by the use of

539

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00549 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

respiratory protection that complies by perimeter area surveillance during with the requirements of paragraph (h) each work shift at each boundary of of this section. the regulated area, showing no visible (3) Prohibitions. The following work asbestos dust; and perimeter area mon- practices and engineering controls itoring showing that clearance levels shall not be used for work related to contained in 40 CFR part 763, subpt. E, asbestos or for work which disturbs of the EPA Asbestos in Schools Rule ACM or PACM, regardless of measured are met, or that perimeter area levels, levels of asbestos exposure or the re- measured by Phase Contrast Micros- sults of initial exposure assessments: copy (PCM) are no more than back- (i) High-speed abrasive disc saws that ground levels representing the same are not equipped with point of cut ven- area before the asbestos work began. tilator or enclosures with HEPA fil- The results of such monitoring shall be tered exhaust air. made known to the employer no later (ii) Compressed air used to remove than 24 hours from the end of the work asbestos, or materials containing as- shift represented by such monitoring. bestos, unless the compressed air is Exception: For work completed out- used in conjunction with an enclosed doors where employees are not working ventilation system designed to capture in areas adjacent to the regulated the dust cloud created by the com- areas, this paragraph (g)(4)(ii) is satis- pressed air. fied when the specific control methods (iii) Dry sweeping, shoveling or other in paragraph (g)(5) of this section are dry clean-up of dust and debris con- used. taining ACM and PACM. (iii) For all Class I jobs, HVAC sys- (iv) Employee rotation as a means of tems shall be isolated in the regulated reducing employee exposure to asbes- area by sealing with a double layer of tos. 6 mil plastic or the equivalent; (4) Class I Requirements. In addition to (iv) For all Class I jobs, impermeable the provisions of paragraphs (g) (1) and dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces (2) of this section, the following engi- beneath all removal activity; neering controls and work practices (v) For all Class I jobs, all objects and procedures shall be used. within the regulated area shall be cov- (i) All Class I work, including the in- ered with impermeable dropcloths or stallation and operation of the control plastic sheeting which is secured by system shall be supervised by a com- duct tape or an equivalent. petent person as defined in paragraph (vi) For all Class I jobs where the em- (b) of this section; ployer cannot produce a negative expo- (ii) For all Class I jobs involving the sure assessment, or where exposure removal of more than 25 linear or 10 monitoring shows that a PEL is ex- square feet of thermal system insula- ceeded, the employer shall ventilate tion or surfacing material; for all other the regulated area to move contami- Class I jobs, where the employer can- nated air away from the breathing zone not produce a negative exposure assess- of employees toward a HEPA filtration ment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) or collection device. of this section, or where employees are (5) Specific control methods for Class I working in areas adjacent to the regu- work. In addition, Class I asbestos work lated area, while the Class I work is shall be performed using one or more of being performed, the employer shall the following control methods pursu- use one of the following methods to en- ant to the limitations stated below: sure that airborne asbestos does not (i) Negative Pressure Enclosure migrate from the regulated area: (NPE) systems: NPE systems may be (A) Critical barriers shall be placed used where the configuration of the over all the openings to the regulated work area does not make the erection area, except where activities are per- of the enclosure infeasible, with the formed outdoors; or following specifications and work prac- (B) The employer shall use another tices. barrier or isolation method which pre- (A) Specifications: vents the migration of airborne asbes- (1) The negative pressure enclosure tos from the regulated area, as verified (NPE) may be of any configuration,

540

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00550 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(2) At least 4 air changes per hour mil plastic or otherwise rendered in- shall be maintained in the NPE, tact, (3) A minimum of ¥0.02 column (7) Where system uses attached waste inches of water pressure differential, bag, such bag shall be connected to col- relative to outside pressure, shall be lection bag using hose or other mate- maintained within the NPE as evi- rial which shall withstand pressure of denced by manometric measurements, ACM waste and water without losing (4) The NPE shall be kept under neg- its integrity: ative pressure throughout the period of (8) Sliding valve or other device shall its use, and separate waste bag from hose to ensure (5) Air movement shall be directed no exposure when waste bag is discon- away from employees performing as- nected: bestos work within the enclosure, and (9) At least two persons shall perform toward a HEPA filtration or a collec- Class I glovebag removal operations. tion device. (iii) Negative Pressure Glove Bag Sys- (B) Work Practices: tems. Negative pressure glove bag sys- (1) Before beginning work within the tems may be used to remove ACM or enclosure and at the beginning of each PACM from piping. shift, the NPE shall be inspected for (A) Specifications: In addition to spec- breaches and smoke-tested for leaks, ifications for glove bag systems above, and any leaks sealed. negative pressure glove bag systems (2) Electrical circuits in the enclo- shall attach HEPA vacuum systems or sure shall be deactivated, unless other devices to bag to prevent collapse equipped with ground-fault circuit in- during removal. terrupters. (B) Work Practices: (1) The employer (ii) Glove bag systems may be used to shall comply with the work practices remove PACM and/or ACM from for glove bag systems in paragraph straight runs of piping and elbows and (g)(5)(ii)(B)(4) of this section. other connections with the following (2) The HEPA vacuum cleaner or specifications and work practices: other device used to prevent collapse of (A) Specifications: bag during removal shall run contin- (1) Glovebags shall be made of 6 mil ually during the operation until it is thick plastic and shall be seamless at completed at which time the bag shall the bottom. be collapsed prior to removal of the (2) Glovebags used on elbows and bag from the pipe. other connections must be designed for (3) Where a separate waste bag is that purpose and used without modi- used along with a collection bag and fications. discarded after one use, the collection (B) Work Practices: bag may be reused if rinsed clean with (1) Each glovebag shall be installed amended water before reuse. so that it completely covers the cir- (iv) Negative Pressure Glove Box cumference of pipe or other structure Systems: Negative pressure glove boxes where the work is to be done. may be used to remove ACM or PACM (2) Glovebags shall be smoke-tested from pipe runs with the following spec- for leaks and any leaks sealed prior to ifications and work practices. use. (A) Specifications: (3) Glovebags may be used only once (1) Glove boxes shall be constructed and may not be moved. with rigid sides and made from metal (4) Glovebags shall not be used on or other material which can withstand surfaces whose temperature exceeds 150 the weight of the ACM and PACM and °F. water used during removal: (5) Prior to disposal, glovebags shall (2) A negative pressure generator be collapsed by removing air within shall be used to create negative pres- them using a HEPA vacuum. sure in the system: (6) Before beginning the operation, (3) An air filtration unit shall be at- loose and friable material adjacent to tached to the box: the glovebag/box operation shall be (4) The box shall be fitted with gloved wrapped and sealed in two layers of six apertures:

541

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00551 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(5) An aperture at the base of the box (vi) A small walk-in enclosure which shall serve as a bagging outlet for accommodates no more than two per- waste ACM and water: sons (mini-enclosure) may be used if (6) A back-up generator shall be the disturbance or removal can be com- present on site: pletely contained by the enclosure with (7) Waste bags shall consist of 6 mil the following specifications and work thick plastic double-bagged before they practices. are filled or plastic thicker than 6 mil. (A) Specifications: (B) Work practices: (1) The fabricated or job-made enclo- (1) At least two persons shall perform sure shall be constructed of 6 mil plas- the removal: tic or equivalent: (2) The box shall be smoke-tested for (2) The enclosure shall be placed leaks and any leaks sealed prior to under negative pressure by means of a each use. HEPA filtered vacuum or similar ven- (3) Loose or damaged ACM adjacent tilation unit: to the box shall be wrapped and sealed (B) Work practices: in two layers of 6 mil plastic prior to (1) Before use, the mini-enclosure the job, or otherwise made intact prior shall be inspected for leaks and smoke- to the job. tested to detect breaches, and any breaches sealed. (4) A HEPA filtration system shall be used to maintain pressure barrier in (2) Before reuse, the interior shall be box. completely washed with amended water and HEPA-vacuumed. (v) Water Spray Process System. A (3) During use, air movement shall be water spray process system may be directed away from the employee’s used for removal of ACM and PACM breathing zone within the mini-enclo- from cold line piping if, employees car- sure. rying out such process have completed (6) Alternative control methods for Class a 40-hour separate training course in I work. Class I work may be performed its use, in addition to training required using a control method which is not for employees performing Class I work. referenced in paragraph (g)(5) of this The system shall meet the following section, or which modifies a control specifications and shall be performed method referenced in paragraph (g)(5)of by employees using the following work this section, if the following provisions practices. are complied with: (A) Specifications: (i) The control method shall enclose, (1) Piping shall be surrounded on 3 contain or isolate the processes or sides by rigid framing, source of airborne asbestos dust, or (2) A 360 degree water spray, deliv- otherwise capture or redirect such dust ered through nozzles supplied by a high before it enters the breathing zone of pressure separate water line, shall be employees. formed around the piping. (ii) A certified industrial hygienist or (3) The spray shall collide to form a licensed professional engineer who is fine aerosol which provides a liquid also qualified as a project designer as barrier between workers and the ACM defined in paragraph (b) of this section, and PACM. shall evaluate the work area, the pro- (B) Work Practices: jected work practices and the engineer- (1) The system shall be run for at ing controls and shall certify in writ- least 10 minutes before removal begins. ing that the planned control method is (2) All removal shall take place with- adequate to reduce direct and indirect in the water barrier. employee exposure to below the PELs (3) The system shall be operated by under worst-case conditions of use, and at least three persons, one of whom that the planned control method will shall not perform removal, but shall prevent asbestos contamination out- check equipment, and ensure proper side the regulated area, as measured by operation of the system. clearance sampling which meets the re- (4) After removal, the ACM and quirements of EPA’s Asbestos in PACM shall be bagged while still inside Schools rule issued under AHERA, or the water barrier. perimeter monitoring which meets the

542

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00552 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

criteria in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of be performed by complying with the this section. work practices and controls designated (A) Where the TSI or surfacing mate- for each type of asbestos work to be rial to be removed is 25 linear or 10 performed, set out in this paragraph. square feet or less , the evaluation re- Where more than one control method quired in paragraph (g)(6) of this sec- may be used for a type of asbestos tion may be performed by a ‘‘com- work, the employer may choose one or petent person’’, and may omit consid- a combination of designated control eration of perimeter or clearance moni- methods. Class II work also may be toring otherwise required. performed using a method allowed for (B) The evaluation of employee expo- Class I work, except that glove bags sure required in paragraph (g)(6) of this and glove boxes are allowed if they section, shall include and be based on fully enclose the Class II material to be sampling and analytical data rep- removed. resenting employee exposure during (i) For removing vinyl and asphalt the use of such method under worst- flooring materials which contain ACM case conditions and by employees or for which in buildings constructed whose training and experience are no later than 1980, the employer has equivalent to employees who are to not verified the absence of ACM pursu- perform the current job. ant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this sec- (7) Work practices and engineering con- tion. The employer shall ensure that trols for Class II work. (i) All Class II employees comply with the following work shall be supervised by a com- work practices and that employees are petent person as defined in paragraph trained in these practices pursuant to (b) of this section. paragraph (k)(9): (ii) For all indoor Class II jobs, where (A) Flooring or its backing shall not the employer has not produced a nega- be sanded. tive exposure assessment pursuant to (B) Vacuums equipped with HEPA fil- paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or ter, disposable dust bag, and metal where during the job, changed condi- floor tool (no brush) shall be used to tions indicate there may be exposure clean floors. above the PEL or where the employer (C) Resilient sheeting shall be re- does not remove the ACM in a substan- moved by cutting with wetting of the tially intact state, the employer shall snip point and wetting during use one of the following methods to en- delamination. Rip-up of resilient sheet sure that airborne asbestos does not floor material is prohibited. migrate from the regulated area; (D) All scraping of residual adhesive (A) Critical barriers shall be placed and/or backing shall be performed over all openings to the regulated area; using wet methods. or, (E) Dry sweeping is prohibited. (B) The employer shall use another (F) Mechanical chipping is prohibited barrier or isolation method which pre- unless performed in a negative pressure vents the migration of airborne asbes- enclosure which meets the require- tos from the regulated area, as verified ments of paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this sec- by perimeter area monitoring or clear- tion. ance monitoring which meets the cri- (G) Tiles shall be removed intact, un- teria set out in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) less the employer demonstrates that of this section. intact removal is not possible. (C) Impermeable dropcloths shall be (H) When tiles are heated and can be placed on surfaces beneath all removal removed intact, wetting may be omit- activity; ted. (iii) [Reserved] (I) Resilient flooring material includ- (iv) All Class II asbestos work shall ing associated mastic and backing be performed using the work practices shall be assumed to be asbestos-con- and requirements set out above in taining unless an industrial hygienist paragraph (g)(1) (i) through (g)(1)(iii) of determines that it is asbestos-free this section. using recognized analytical techniques. (8) Additional Controls for Class II (ii) For removing roofing material work. Class II asbestos work shall also which contains ACM the employer

543

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00553 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

shall ensure that the following work (G) Roof level heating and ventila- practices are followed: tion air intake sources shall be isolated (A) Roofing material shall be re- or the ventilation system shall be shut moved in an intact state to the extent down. feasible. (H) Notwithstanding any other provi- (B) Wet methods shall be used to re- sion of this section, removal or repair move roofing materials that are not in- of sections of intact roofing less than tact, or that will be rendered not in- 25 square feet in area does not require tact during removal, unless such wet use of wet methods or HEPA methods are not feasible or will create vacuuming as long as manual methods safety hazards. which do not render the material non- (C) Cutting machines shall be con- intact are used to remove the material tinuously misted during use, unless a and no visible dust is created by the re- competent person determines that moval method used. In determining misting substantially decreases worker whether a job involves less than 25 safety. square feet, the employer shall include (D) When removing built-up roofs all removal and repair work performed with asbestos-containing roofing felts on the same roof on the same day. and an aggregate surface using a power (iii) When removing cementitious as- roof cutter, all dust resulting from the bestos-containing siding and shingles cutting operation shall be collected by or transite panels containing ACM on a HEPA dust collector, or shall be building exteriors (other than roofs, HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along where paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this sec- the cut line. When removing built-up tion applies) the employer shall ensure roofs with asbestos-containing roofing that the following work practices are felts and a smooth surface using a followed: power roof cutter, the dust resulting (A) Cutting, abrading or breaking from the cutting operation shall be col- siding, shingles, or transite panels, lected either by a HEPA dust collector shall be prohibited unless the employer or HEPA vacuuming along the cut line, can demonstrate that methods less or by gently sweeping and then care- likely to result in asbestos fiber re- fully and completely wiping up the lease cannot be used. still-wet dust and debris left along the (B) Each panel or shingle shall be cut line. The dust and debris shall be sprayed with amended water prior to immediately bagged or placed in cov- removal. ered containers. (C) Unwrapped or unbagged panels or (E) Asbestos-containing material shingles shall be immediately lowered that has been removed from a roof to the ground via covered dust-tight shall not be dropped or thrown to the chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an ground. Unless the material is carried impervious waste bag or wrapped in or passed to the ground by hand, it plastic sheeting and lowered to the shall be lowered to the ground via cov- ground no later than the end of the ered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist: work shift. (1) Any ACM that is not intact shall (D) Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp be lowered to the ground as soon as is instruments. practicable, but in any event no later (iv) When removing gaskets con- than the end of the work shift. While taining ACM, the employer shall en- the material remains on the roof it sure that the following work practices shall either be kept wet, placed in an are followed: impermeable waste bag, or wrapped in (A) If a gasket is visibly deteriorated plastic sheeting. and unlikely to be removed intact, re- (2) Intact ACM shall be lowered to moval shall be undertaken within a the ground as soon as is practicable, glovebag as described in paragraph but in any event no later than the end (g)(5)(ii) of this section. of the work shift. (B) [Reserved] (F) Upon being lowered, unwrapped (C) The gasket shall be immediately material shall be transferred to a placed in a disposal container. closed receptacle in such manner so as (D) Any scraping to remove residue to preclude the dispersion of dust. must be performed wet.

544

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00554 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(v) When performing any other Class (9) Work Practices and Engineering II removal of asbestos containing ma- Controls for Class III asbestos work. Class terial for which specific controls have III asbestos work shall be conducted not been listed in paragraph (g)(8)(i) using engineering and work practice through (iv) of this section, the em- controls which minimize the exposure ployer shall ensure that the following to employees performing the asbestos work practices are complied with. work and to bystander employees. (A) The material shall be thoroughly (i) The work shall be performed using wetted with amended water prior to wet methods. and during its removal. (ii) To the extent feasible, the work (B) The material shall be removed in shall be performed using local exhaust an intact state unless the employer ventilation. demonstrates that intact removal is (iii) Where the disturbance involves not possible. drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding, (C) Cutting, abrading or breaking the chipping, breaking, or sawing of ther- material shall be prohibited unless the mal system insulation or surfacing ma- employer can demonstrate that meth- terial, the employer shall use imper- ods less likely to result in asbestos meable dropcloths, and shall isolate fiber release are not feasible. the operation using mini-enclosures or (D) Asbestos-containing material re- glove bag systems pursuant to para- moved, shall be immediately bagged or graph (g)(5) of this section or another wrapped, or kept wetted until trans- isolation method. ferred to a closed receptacle, no later (iv) Where the employer does not than the end of the work shift. produce a ‘‘negative exposure assess- (vi) Alternative Work Practices and ment’’ for a job, or where monitoring Controls. Instead of the work practices results show the PEL has been exceed- and controls listed in paragraph (g)(8) ed, the employer shall contain the area (i) through (v) of this section, the em- using impermeable dropcloths and ployer may use different or modified plastic barriers or their equivalent, or engineering and work practice controls shall isolate the operation using a con- if the following provisions are complied trol system listed in and in compliance with. with paragraph (g)(5) of this section. (A) The employer shall demonstrate (v) Employees performing Class III by data representing employee expo- jobs, which involve the disturbance of sure during the use of such method thermal system insulation or surfacing under conditions which closely resem- material, or where the employer does ble the conditions under which the not produce a ‘‘negative exposure as- method is to be used, that employee ex- sessment’’ or where monitoring results posure will not exceed the PELs under show a PEL has been exceeded, shall any anticipated circumstances. wear respirators which are selected, (B) A competent person shall evalu- used and fitted pursuant to provisions ate the work area, the projected work of paragraph (h) of this section. practices and the engineering controls, (10) Class IV asbestos work. Class IV and shall certify in writing, that the asbestos jobs shall be conducted by em- different or modified controls are ade- ployees trained pursuant to the asbes- quate to reduce direct and indirect em- tos awareness training program set out ployee exposure to below the PELs in paragraph (k)(9) of this section. In under all expected conditions of use addition, all Class IV jobs shall be con- and that the method meets the require- ducted in conformity with the requirements of this standard. The evaluation ments set out in paragraph (g)(1) of shall include and be based on data rep- this section, mandating wet methods, resenting employee exposure during HEPA vacuums, and prompt clean up the use of such method under condi- of debris containing ACM or PACM. tions which closely resemble the condi- (i) Employees cleaning up debris and tions under which the method is to be waste in a regulated area where res- used for the current job, and by em- pirators are required shall wear res- ployees whose training and experience pirators which are selected, used and are equivalent to employees who are to fitted pursuant to provisions of para- perform the current job. graph (h) of this section.

545

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00555 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Employers of employees who tos pursuant to paragraph (k)(8) of this clean up waste and debris in, and em- section are installed on non-residential ployers in control of, areas where fri- roofs during operations covered by this able thermal system insulation or sur- paragraph (g)(11), the employer shall facing material is accessible, shall as- notify the building owner of the pres- sume that such waste and debris con- ence and location of such materials no tain asbestos. later than the end of the job. (11) Alternative methods of compliance (vi) All removal or disturbance of for installation, removal, repair, and pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be per- maintenance of certain roofing and pipe- formed using wet methods. line coating materials. Notwithstanding (h) Respiratory protection—(1) General. any other provision of this section, an employer who complies with all provi- For employees who use respirators re- sions of this paragraph (g)(11) when in- quired by this section, the employer stalling, removing, repairing, or main- must provide each employee an appro- taining intact pipeline asphaltic wrap, priate respirator that complies with or roof flashings which contain asbes- the requirements of this paragraph. tos fibers encapsulated or coated by bi- Respirators must be used during: tuminous or resinous compounds shall (i) Class I asbestos work. be deemed to be in compliance with (ii) Class II asbestos work when ACM this section. If an employer does not is not removed in a substantially in- comply with all provisions of this para- tact state. graph (g)(11) or if during the course of (iii) Class II and III asbestos work the job the material does not remain that is not performed using wet meth- intact, the provisions of paragraph ods, except for removal of ACM from (g)(8) of this section apply instead of sloped roofs when a negative-exposure this paragraph (g)(11). assessment has been conducted and (i) Before work begins and as needed ACM is removed in an intact state. during the job, a competent person who (iv) Class II and III asbestos work for is capable of identifying asbestos haz- which a negative-exposure assessment ards in the workplace and selecting the has not been conducted. appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, and who has the author- (v) Class III asbestos work when TSI ity to take prompt corrective measures or surfacing ACM or PACM is being to eliminate such hazards, shall con- disturbed. duct an inspection of the worksite and (vi) Class IV asbestos work performed determine that the roofing material is within regulated areas where employ- intact and will likely remain intact. ees who are performing other work are (ii) All employees performing work required to use respirators. covered by this paragraph (g)(11) shall (vii) Work operations covered by this be trained in a training program that section for which employees are ex- meets the requirements of paragraph posed above the TWA or excursion (k)(9)(viii) of this section. limit. (iii) The material shall not be sand- (viii) Emergencies. ed, abraded, or ground. Manual meth- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em- ods which do not render the material ployer must implement a respiratory non-intact shall be used. protection program in accordance with (iv) Material that has been removed § 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except from a roof shall not be dropped or (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which thrown to the ground. Unless the material is carried or passed to the ground covers each employee required by this by hand, it shall be lowered to the section to use a respirator. ground via covered, dust-tight chute, (ii) No employee shall be assigned to crane or hoist. All such material shall asbestos work that requires respirator be removed from the roof as soon as is use if, based on their most recent med- practicable, but in any event no later ical examination, the examining physi- than the end of the work shift. cian determines that the employee will (v) Where roofing products which be unable to function normally while have been labeled as containing asbes- using a respirator, or that the safety or

546

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00556 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

health of the employee or other em- an 8-hour time-weighted average ployees will be impaired by the em- (TWA). ployee’s respirator use. Such employ- (B) A full facepiece supplied-air res- ees must be assigned to another job or pirator operated in the pressure-de- given the opportunity to transfer to a mand mode and equipped with an auxil- different position that they can per- iary positive-pressure SCBA whenever form. If such a transfer position is the employees are in a regulated area available, it must be with the same em- performing Class I asbestos work for ployer, in the same geographical area, which a negative exposure assessment and with the same seniority, status, is not available and the exposure as- rate of pay, and other job benefits the sessment indicates that the exposure employee had just prior to such trans- level will be above 1 f/cc as an 8-hour fer. TWA. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers (i) Protective clothing—(1) General. The must: employer shall provide or require the (A) Select, and provide to employees, use of protective clothing, such as cov- the appropriate respirators specified in eralls or similar whole-body clothing, paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR head coverings, gloves, and foot cov- 1910.134; however, employers must not erings for any employee exposed to air- select or use filtering facepiece res- borne concentrations of asbestos that pirators for use against asbestos fibers. exceed the TWA and/or excursion limit (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- and non-powered air-purifying res- tion, or for which a required negative pirators. exposure assessment is not produced, (ii) Employers must provide an em- or for any employee performing Class I ployee with tight-fitting, powered air- operations which involve the removal purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of of over 25 linear or 10 square feet of TSI a negative pressure respirator selected or surfacing ACM and PACM. according to paragraph (h)(3)(i)(A) of (2) Laundering. (i) The employer shall this standard when the employee ensure that laundering of contami- chooses to use a PAPR and it provides nated clothing is done so as to prevent adequate protection to the employee. the release of airborne asbestos in ex- (iii) Employers must provide employ- cess of the TWA or excursion limit pre- ees with an air-purifying half mask res- scribed in paragraph (c) of this section. pirator, other than a filtering facepiece (ii) Any employer who gives contami- respirator, whenever the employees nated clothing to another person for perform: laundering shall inform such person of (A) Class II or Class III asbestos work the requirement in paragraph (i)(2)(i) for which no negative exposure assess- of this section to effectively prevent ment is available. the release of airborne asbestos in ex- (B) Class III asbestos work involving cess of the TWA and excursion limit disturbance of TSI or surfacing ACM or prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- PACM. tion. (iv) Employers must provide employ- (3) Contaminated clothing. Contami- ees with: nated clothing shall be transported in (A) A tight-fitting powered air-puri- sealed impermeable bags, or other fying respirator or a full facepiece, sup- closed, impermeable containers, and be plied-air respirator operated in the labeled in accordance with paragraph pressure-demand mode and equipped (k) of this section. with either HEPA egress cartridges or (4) Inspection of protective clothing. (i) an auxiliary positive-pressure, self-con- The competent person shall examine tained breathing apparatus (SCBA) worksuits worn by employees at least whenever the employees are in a regu- once per workshift for rips or tears lated area performing Class I asbestos that may occur during performance of work for which a negative exposure as- work. sessment is not available and the expo- (ii) When rips or tears are detected sure assessment indicates that the ex- while an employee is working, rips and posure level will be at or below 1 f/cc as tears shall be immediately mended, or

547

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00557 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the worksuit shall be immediately re- ees leave the regulated area. Following placed. showering, such employees however (j) Hygiene facilities and practices for must then change into street clothing employees. (1) Requirements for employ- in clean change areas provided by the ees performing Class I asbestos jobs in- employer which otherwise meet the revolving over 25 linear or 10 square feet quirements of this section. of TSI or surfacing ACM and PACM. (ii) Decontamination area entry proce- (i) Decontamination areas. The em- dures. The employer shall ensure that ployer shall establish a decontamina- employees: tion area that is adjacent and con- (A) Enter the decontamination area nected to the regulated area for the de- through the clean room; contamination of such employees. The (B) Remove and deposit street cloth- decontamination area shall consist of ing within a locker provided for their an equipment room, shower area, and use; and clean room in series. The employer (C) Put on protective clothing and shall ensure that employees enter and respiratory protection before leaving exit the regulated area through the de- the clean room. contamination area. (D) Before entering the regulated (A) Equipment room. The equipment area, the employer shall ensure that room shall be supplied with imper- employees pass through the equipment meable, labeled bags and containers for room. the containment and disposal of con- (iii) Decontamination area exit proce- taminated protective equipment. dures. The employer shall ensure that: (B) Shower area. Shower facilities (A) Before leaving the regulated area, shall be provided which comply with 29 employees shall remove all gross con- CFR 1910.141(d)(3), unless the employer tamination and debris from their pro- can demonstrate that they are not fea- tective clothing. sible. The showers shall be adjacent (B) Employees shall remove their both to the equipment room and the protective clothing in the equipment clean room, unless the employer can room and deposit the clothing in la- demonstrate that this location is not beled impermeable bags or containers. feasible. Where the employer can dem- (C) Employees shall not remove their onstrate that it is not feasible to lo- respirators in the equipment room. cate the shower between the equipment (D) Employees shall shower prior to room and the clean room, or where the entering the clean room. work is performed outdoors, the em- (E) After showering, employees shall ployers shall ensure that employees: enter the clean room before changing (1) Remove asbestos contamination into street clothes. from their worksuits in the equipment (iv) Lunch Areas. Whenever food or room using a HEPA vacuum before pro- beverages are consumed at the work- ceeding to a shower that is not adja- site where employees are performing cent to the work area; or Class I asbestos work, the employer (2) Remove their contaminated shall provide lunch areas in which the worksuits in the equipment room, then airborne concentrations of asbestos are don clean worksuits, and proceed to a below the permissible exposure limit shower that is not adjacent to the work and/or excursion limit. area. (2) Requirements for Class I work in- (C) Clean change room. The clean volving less than 25 linear or 10 square room shall be equipped with a locker or feet of TSI or surfacing ACM and appropriate storage container for each PACM, and for Class II and Class III as- employee’s use. When the employer can bestos work operations where expo- demonstrate that it is not feasible to sures exceed a PEL or where there is provide a clean change area adjacent to no negative exposure assessment pro- the work area or where the work is per- duced before the operation. formed outdoors, the employer may (i) The employer shall establish an permit employees engaged in Class I equipment room or area that is adja- asbestos jobs to clean their protective cent to the regulated area for the de- clothing with a portable HEPA- contamination of employees and their equipped vacuum before such employ- equipment which is contaminated with

548

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00558 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

asbestos which shall consist of an area buildings as asbestos-containing, uncovered by an impermeable drop cloth less they determine in compliance with on the floor or horizontal working sur- paragraph (k)(5) of this section that face. the material is not asbestos-con- (ii) The area must be of sufficient taining. Asphalt and vinyl flooring ma- size as to accommodate cleaning of terial installed no later than 1980 must equipment and removing personal pro- also be considered as asbestos con- tective equipment without spreading taining unless the employer, pursuant contamination beyond the area (as de- to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section termined by visible accumulations). determines that it is not asbestos-con- (iii) Work clothing must be cleaned taining. If the employer/building owner with a HEPA vacuum before it is re- has actual knowledge, or should have moved. known through the exercise of due dili- (iv) All equipment and surfaces of gence, that other materials are asbes- containers filled with ACM must be tos-containing, they too must be treat- cleaned prior to removing them from ed as such. When communicating infor- the equipment room or area. mation to employees pursuant to this (v) The employer shall ensure that standard, owners and employers shall employees enter and exit the regulated identify ‘‘PACM’’ as ACM. Additional area through the equipment room or requirements relating to communica- area. tion of asbestos work on multi-em- (3) Requirements for Class IV work. ployer worksites are set out in para- Employers shall ensure that employees graph (d) of this section. performing Class IV work within a reg- (ii) The employer shall include asbes- ulated area comply with the hygiene tos in the program established to com- practice required of employees per- ply with the Hazard Communication forming work which has a higher clas- Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The em- sification within that regulated area. ployer shall ensure that each employee Otherwise employers of employees has access to labels on containers of as- cleaning up debris and material which bestos and safety data sheets, and is is TSI or surfacing ACM or identified trained in accordance with the provi- as PACM shall provide decontamina- sions of HCS and paragraphs (k)(9) and tion facilities for such employees (10) of this section. The employer shall which are required by paragraph (j)(2) provide information on at least the fol- of this section. lowing hazards: Cancer and lung ef- (4) Smoking in work areas. The em- fects. ployer shall ensure that employees do not smoke in work areas where they (2) Duties of building and facility own- are occupationally exposed to asbestos ers. (i) Before work subject to this because of activities in that work area. standard is begun, building and facility (k) Communication of hazards—(1) owners shall determine the presence, Hazard communication. (i) This section location, and quantity of ACM and/or applies to the communication of infor- PACM at the work site pursuant to mation concerning asbestos hazards in paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section. construction activities to facilitate (ii) Building and/or facility owners compliance with this standard. Most shall notify the following persons of asbestos-related construction activi- the presence, location and quantity of ties involve previously installed build- ACM or PACM, at the work sites in ing materials. Building owners often their buildings and facilities. Notifica- are the only and/or best sources of in- tion either shall be in writing, or shall formation concerning them. Therefore, consist of a personal communication they, along with employers of poten- between the owner and the person to tially exposed employees, are assigned whom notification must be given or specific information conveying and re- their authorized representatives: tention duties under this section. In- (A) Prospective employers applying stalled Asbestos Containing Building or bidding for work whose employees Material. Employers and building own- reasonably can be expected to work in ers shall identify TSI and sprayed or or adjacent to areas containing such troweled on surfacing materials in material;

549

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00559 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(B) Employees of the owner who will contain asbestos. Building owners and/ work in or adjacent to areas containing or employers are not required to com- such material: municate information about the pres- (C) On multi-employer worksites, all ence of building material for which employers of employees who will be such a demonstration pursuant to the performing work within or adjacent to requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of areas containing such materials; this section has been made. However, (D) Tenants who will occupy areas in all such cases, the information, data containing such material. and analysis supporting the determina- (3) Duties of employers whose em- tion that PACM does not contain as- ployees perform work subject to this bestos, shall be retained pursuant to standard in or adjacent to areas con- paragraph (n) of this section. taining ACM and PACM. Building/facil- (ii) An employer or owner may dem- ity owners whose employees perform onstrate that PACM does not contain such work shall comply with these pro- more than 1% asbestos by the fol- visions to the extent applicable. lowing: (A) Having a completed inspec- (i) Before work in areas containing tion conducted pursuant to the require- ACM and PACM is begun; employers ments of AHERA (40 CFR part 763, sub- shall identify the presence, location, part E) which demonstrates that the and quantity of ACM, and/or PACM material is not ACM; or therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1)(i) (B) Performing tests of the material of this section. containing PACM which demonstrate (ii) Before work under this standard that no ACM is present in the material. is performed employers of employees Such tests shall include analysis of who will perform such work shall in- bulk samples collected in the manner form the following persons of the loca- described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, tion and quantity of ACM and/or PACM evaluation and sample collection shall present in the area and the precautions be conducted by an accredited inspec- to be taken to insure that airborne as- tor or by a CIH. Analysis of samples bestos is confined to the area. shall be performed by persons or lab- (A) Owners of the building/facility; oratories with proficiency dem- (B) Employees who will perform such work and employers of employees who onstrated by current successful partici- work and/or will be working in adja- pation in a nationally recognized test- cent areas. ing program such as the National Vol- (iii) Within 10 days of the completion untary Laboratory Accreditation Pro- of such work, the employer whose em- gram (NVLAP) or the National Insti- ployees have performed work subject to tute for Standards and Technology this standard, shall inform the build- (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk ing/facility owner and employers of samples administered by the American employees who will be working in the Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) area of the current location and quan- or an equivalent nationally-recognized tity of PACM and/or ACM remaining in round robin testing program. the area and final monitoring results, (iii) The employer and/or building if any. owner may demonstrate that flooring (4) In addition to the above require- material including associated mastic ments, all employers who discover and backing does not contain asbestos, ACM and/or PACM on a worksite shall by a determination of an industrial hy- convey information concerning the gienist based upon recognized analyt- presence, location and quantity of such ical techniques showing that the mate- newly discovered ACM and/or PACM to rial is not ACM. the owner and to other employers of (6) At the entrance to mechanical employees working at the work site, rooms/areas in which employees rea- within 24 hours of the discovery. sonably can be expected to enter and (5) Criteria to rebut the designation which contain ACM and/or PACM, the of installed material as PACM. (i) At building owner shall post signs which any time, an employer and/or building identify the material which is present, owner may demonstrate, for purposes its location, and appropriate work of this standard, that PACM does not practices which, if followed, will ensure

550

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00560 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

that ACM and/or PACM will not be dis- (8) Labels. (i) Labels shall be affixed turbed. The employer shall ensure, to to all products containing asbestos and the extent feasible, that employees to all containers containing such prod- who come in contact with these signs ucts, including waste containers. can comprehend them. Means to ensure Where feasible, installed asbestos prod- employee comprehension may include ucts shall contain a visible label. the use of foreign languages, picto- (ii) The employer shall ensure that graphs, graphics, and awareness train- such labels comply with paragraphs (k) ing. of this section. (7) Signs. (i) Warning signs that de- (iii) The employer shall ensure that marcate the regulated area shall be labels of bags or containers of protec- provided and displayed at each location tive clothing and equipment, scrap, where a regulated area is required to be waste, and debris containing asbestos established by paragraph (e) of this sec- fibers bear the following information: tion. Signs shall be posted at such a distance from such a location that an DANGER employee may read the signs and take CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS necessary protective steps before en- MAY CAUSE CANCER tering the area marked by the signs. CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS (ii) (A) The warning signs required by DO NOT BREATHE DUST AVOID CREATING DUST paragraph (k)(7) of this section shall bear the following information. (iv) (A) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following informa- DANGER ASBESTOS tion on raw materials, mixtures or la- MAY CAUSE CANCER bels of bags or containers of protective CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS clothing and equipment, scrap, waste, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY and debris containing asbestos fibers in (B) In addition, where the use of res- lieu of the labeling requirements in pirators and protective clothing is re- paragraphs (k)(8)(ii) and (k)(8)(iii) of quired in the regulated area under this this section: section, the warning signs shall include DANGER the following: CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD PROTECTIVE CLOTHING IN THIS AREA (B) Labels shall also contain a warn- (C) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers ing statement against breathing asbes- may use the following legend in lieu of tos fibers. that specified in paragraph (k)(7)(ii)(A) (v) [Reserved] of this section: (vi) The provisions for labels required DANGER by paragraphs (k)(8)(i) through ASBESTOS (k)(8)(iii) of this section do not apply CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD where: AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (A) Asbestos fibers have been modi- (D) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers fied by a bonding agent, coating, bind- may use the following legend in lieu of er, or other material, provided that the that specified in paragraph (k)(7)(ii)(B) manufacturer can demonstrate that, of this section: during any reasonably foreseeable use, handling, storage, disposal, processing, RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA or transportation, no airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers in excess (iii) The employer shall ensure that of the permissible exposure limit and/ employees working in and contiguous or excursion limit will be released, or to regulated areas comprehend the (B) Asbestos is present in a product warning signs required to be posted by in concentrations less than 1.0 percent. paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section. (vii) When a building owner or em- Means to ensure employee comprehen- ployer identifies previously installed sion may include the use of foreign lan- PACM and/or ACM, labels or signs shall guages, pictographs and graphics. be affixed or posted so that employees

551

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00561 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

will be notified of what materials con- (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section shall retain PACM and/or ACM. The employer ceive training in the work practices ap- shall attach such labels in areas where plicable to each category of material they will clearly be noticed by employ- that the employee removes and each ees who are likely to be exposed, such removal method that the employee as at the entrance to mechanical room/ uses. areas. Signs required by paragraph (C) For Class II operations not in- (k)(6) of this section may be posted in volving the categories of material spec- lieu of labels so long as they contain ified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this information required for labelling. The section, training shall be provided employer shall ensure, to the extent which shall include at a minimum all feasible, that employees who come in the elements included in paragraph contact with these signs or labels can (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- comprehend them. Means to ensure em- tion, the specific work practices and ployee comprehension may include the engineering controls set forth in para- use of foreign languages, pictographs, graph (g) of this section which specifi- graphics, and awareness training. cally relate to the category of material (9) Employee Information and Training. being removed, and shall include (i) The employer shall train each em- ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the work prac- ployee who is likely to be exposed in tices applicable to each category of excess of a PEL, and each employee material that the employee removes who performs Class I through IV asbes- and each removal method that the em- tos operations, in accordance with the ployee uses. requirements of this section. Such (v) Training for Class III employees training shall be conducted at no cost shall be consistent with EPA require- to the employee. The employer shall ments for training of local education institute a training program and en- agency maintenance and custodial staff sure employee participation in the pro- as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2). Such gram. a course shall also include ‘‘hands-on’’ (ii) Training shall be provided prior training and shall take at least 16 to or at the time of initial assignment hours. Exception: For Class III oper- and at least annually thereafter. ations for which the competent person (iii) Training for Class I operations determines that the EPA curriculum and for Class II operations that require does not adequately cover the training the use of critical barriers (or equiva- needed to perform that activity, train- lent isolation methods) and/or negative ing shall include as a minimum all the pressure enclosures under this section elements included in paragraph shall be the equivalent in curriculum, (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- training method and length to the EPA tion, the specific work practices and Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) asbes- engineering controls set forth in para- tos abatement workers training (40 graph (g) of this section which specifi- CFR part 763, subpart E, appendix C). cally relate to that activity, and shall (iv) Training for other Class II work. include ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the (A) For work with asbestos con- work practices applicable to each cat- taining roofing materials, flooring ma- egory of material that the employee terials, siding materials, ceiling tiles, disturbs. or transite panels, training shall in- (vi) Training for employees per- clude at a minimum all the elements forming Class IV operations shall be included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of consistent with EPA requirements for this section and in addition, the spe- training of local education agency cific work practices and engineering maintenance and custodial staff as set controls set forth in paragraph (g) of forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(1). Such a this section which specifically relate to course shall include available informa- that category. Such course shall in- tion concerning the locations of ther- clude ‘‘hands-on’’ training and shall mal system insulation and surfacing take at least 8 hours. ACM/PACM, and asbestos-containing (B) An employee who works with flooring material, or flooring material more than one of the categories of ma- where the absence of asbestos has not terial specified in paragraph yet been certified; and instruction in

552

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00562 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

recognition of damage, deterioration, distribute the list of such organiza- and delamination of asbestos con- tions contained in appendix J to this taining building materials. Such course section, to comply with this require- shall take at least 2 hours. ment; and (vii) Training for employees who are (J) The requirements for posting likely to be exposed in excess of the signs and affixing labels and the mean- PEL and who are not otherwise re- ing of the required legends for such quired to be trained under paragraph signs and labels. (k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section, (10) Access to training materials. (i) shall meet the requirements of para- The employer shall make readily avail- graph (k)(9)(viii) of this section. able to affected employees without (viii) The training program shall be cost, written materials relating to the conducted in a manner that the em- employee training program, including ployee is able to understand. In addi- a copy of this regulation. tion to the content required by provi- (ii) The employer shall provide to the sions in paragraphs (k)(9)(iii) through Assistant Secretary and the Director, (vi) of this section, the employer shall upon request, all information and ensure that each such employee is in- training materials relating to the em- formed of the following: ployee information and training pro- (A) Methods of recognizing asbestos, gram. including the requirement in paragraph (iii) The employer shall inform all (k)(1) of this section to presume that employees concerning the availability certain building materials contain as- of self-help smoking cessation program bestos; material. Upon employee request, the (B) The health effects associated with employer shall distribute such mate- asbestos exposure; rial, consisting of NIH Publication No, (C) The relationship between smok- 89–1647, or equivalent self-help mate- ing and asbestos in producing lung can- rial, which is approved or published by cer; a public health organization listed in (D) The nature of operations that appendix J to this section. could result in exposure to asbestos, (l) Housekeeping—(1) Vacuuming. the importance of necessary protective Where vacuuming methods are se- controls to minimize exposure includ- lected, HEPA filtered vacuuming ing, as applicable, engineering con- equipment must be used. The equip- trols, work practices, respirators, ment shall be used and emptied in a housekeeping procedures, hygiene fa- manner that minimizes the reentry of cilities, protective clothing, decon- asbestos into the workplace. tamination procedures, emergency pro- (2) Waste disposal. Asbestos waste, cedures, and waste disposal procedures, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equip- and any necessary instruction in the ment, and contaminated clothing con- use of these controls and procedures; signed for disposal shall be collected where Class III and IV work will be or and disposed of in sealed, labeled, im- is performed, the contents of EPA 20T– permeable bags or other closed, la- 2003, ‘‘Managing Asbestos In-Place’’ beled, impermeable containers except July 1990 or its equivalent in content; in roofing operations, where the proce- (E) The purpose, proper use, fitting dures specified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of instructions, and limitations of res- this section apply. pirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134; (3) Care of asbestos-containing flooring (F) The appropriate work practices material. (i) All vinyl and asphalt floor- for performing the asbestos job; ing material shall be maintained in ac- (G) Medical surveillance program re- cordance with this paragraph unless quirements; the building/facility owner dem- (H) The content of this standard in- onstrates, pursuant to paragraph cluding appendices; (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section that the floor- (I) The names, addresses and phone ing does not contain asbestos. numbers of public health organizations (ii) Sanding of flooring material is which provide information, materials prohibited. and/or conduct programs concerning (iii) Stripping of finishes shall be smoking cessation. The employer may conducted using low abrasion pads at

553

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00563 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet and consultations to each employee methods. covered under paragraph (m)(1)(i) of (iv) Burnishing or dry buffing may be this section on the following schedules: performed only on flooring which has (A) Prior to assignment of the em- sufficient finish so that the pad cannot ployee to an area where negative-pres- contact the flooring material. sure respirators are worn; (4) Waste and debris and accom- (B) When the employee is assigned to panying dust in an area containing ac- an area where exposure to asbestos cessible thermal system insulation or may be at or above the permissible ex- surfacing ACM/PACM or visibly dete- posure limit for 30 or more days per riorated ACM: year, or engage in Class I, II, or III (i) Shall not be dusted or swept dry, work for a combined total of 30 or more or vacuumed without using a HEPA fil- days per year, a medical examination ter; must be given within 10 working days (ii) Shall be promptly cleaned up and following the thirtieth day of exposure; disposed of in leak tight containers. (C) And at least annually thereafter. (m) Medical surveillance— (1) Gen- (D) If the examining physician deter- eral—(i) Employees covered. (A) The em- mines that any of the examinations ployer shall institute a medical sur- should be provided more frequently veillance program for all employees than specified, the employer shall pro- who for a combined total of 30 or more vide such examinations to affected em- days per year are engaged in Class I, II ployees at the frequencies specified by and III work or are exposed at or above the physician. a permissible exposure limit. For pur- (E) Exception: No medical examina- poses of this paragraph, any day in tion is required of any employee if ade- which a worker engages in Class II or quate records show that the employee Class III operations or a combination has been examined in accordance with thereof on intact material for one hour this paragraph within the past 1-year or less (taking into account the entire period. time spent on the removal operation, (ii) Content. Medical examinations including cleanup) and, while doing so, made available pursuant to paragraphs adheres fully to the work practices (m)(2)(i)(A) through (m)(2)(i)(C) of this specified in this standard, shall not be section shall include: counted. (A) A medical and work history with (B) For employees otherwise required special emphasis directed to the pul- by this standard to wear a negative monary, cardiovascular, and gastro- pressure respirator, employers shall en- intestinal systems. sure employees are physically able to (B) On initial examination, the perform the work and use the equip- standardized questionnaire contained ment. This determination shall be in part 1 of appendix D to this section, made under the supervision of a physi- and, on annual examination, the abbre- cian. viated standardized questionnaire con- (ii) Examination. (A) The employer tained in part 2 of appendix D to this shall ensure that all medical examina- section. tions and procedures are performed by (C) A physical examination directed or under the supervision of a licensed to the pulmonary and gastrointestinal physician, and are provided at no cost systems, including a 14- by 17-inch or to the employee and at a reasonable other reasonably-sized standard film or time and place. digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray (B) Persons other than such licensed to be administered at the discretion of physicians who administer the pul- the physician, and pulmonary function monary function testing required by tests of forced vital capacity (FVC) and this section shall complete a training forced expiratory volume at one second course in spirometry sponsored by an (FEV1). Classification of all chest X- appropriate academic or professional rays shall be conducted in accordance institution. with appendix E to this section. (2) Medical examinations and consulta- (D) Any other examinations or tests tions—(i) Frequency. The employer shall deemed necessary by the examining make available medical examinations physician.

554

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00564 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(3) Information provided to the physi- containing asbestos or the activity in- cian. The employer shall provide the volving such products or material are following information to the exam- not capable of releasing fibers of asbes- ining physician: tos in concentrations at or above the (i) A copy of this standard and Ap- permissible exposure limit and/or ex- pendices D, E, and I to this section; cursion limit under the expected condi- (ii) A description of the affected em- tions of processing, use, or handling to ployee’s duties as they relate to the satisfy the requirements of paragraph employee’s exposure; (f), the employer shall establish and (iii) The employee’s representative maintain an accurate record of objec- exposure level or anticipated exposure tive data reasonably relied upon in sup- level; port of the exemption. (iv) A description of any personal (ii) The record shall include at least protective and respiratory equipment the following information: used or to be used; and (A) The product qualifying for ex- (v) Information from previous med- emption; ical examinations of the affected em- (B) The source of the objective data; ployee that is not otherwise available (C) The testing protocol, results of to the examining physician. testing, and/or analysis of the material (4) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The for the release of asbestos; employer shall obtain a written opin- (D) A description of the operation ex- ion from the examining physician. This empted and how the data support the written opinion shall contain the re- exemption; and sults of the medical examination and (E) Other data relevant to the oper- shall include: ations, materials, processing, or em- (A) The physician’s opinion as to ployee exposures covered by the ex- whether the employee has any detected emption. medical conditions that would place (iii) The employer shall maintain the employee at an increased risk of this record for the duration of the em- material health impairment from expo- ployer’s reliance upon such objective sure to asbestos; data. (B) Any recommended limitations on (2) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- the employee or on the use of personal ployer shall keep an accurate record of protective equipment such as res- all measurements taken to monitor pirators; and employee exposure to asbestos as pre- (C) A statement that the employee scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. has been informed by the physician of NOTE: The employer may utilize the the results of the medical examination services of competent organizations and of any medical conditions that such as industry trade associations and may result from asbestos exposure. employee associations to maintain the (D) A statement that the employee records required by this section. has been informed by the physician of (ii) This record shall include at least the increased risk of lung cancer at- the following information: tributable to the combined effect of (A) The date of measurement; smoking and asbestos exposure. (B) The operation involving exposure (ii) The employer shall instruct the to asbestos that is being monitored; physician not to reveal in the written (C) Sampling and analytical methods opinion given to the employer specific used and evidence of their accuracy; findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- (D) Number, duration, and results of cupational exposure to asbestos. samples taken; (iii) The employer shall provide a (E) Type of protective devices worn, copy of the physician’s written opinion if any; and to the affected employee within 30 days (F) Name and exposure of the em- from its receipt. ployees whose exposures are rep- (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data resented. relied on pursuant to paragraph (f) to this (iii) The employer shall maintain section. (i) Where the employer has re- this record for at least thirty (30) lied on objective data that dem- years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of onstrates that products made from or this chapter

555

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00565 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- (8) Transfer of records. The employer ployer shall establish and maintain an must comply with the requirements accurate record for each employee sub- concerning transfer of records set forth ject to medical surveillance by para- in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). graph (m) of this section, in accordance (o) Competent person—(1) General. On with § 1910.1020 of this chapter. all construction worksites covered by (ii) The record shall include at least this standard, the employer shall des- the following information: ignate a competent person, having the (A) The name of the employee; qualifications and authorities for en- (B) A copy of the employee’s medical suring worker safety and health re- examination results, including the quired by subpart C, General Safety medical history, questionnaire re- and Health Provisions for Construction sponses, results of any tests, and physi- (29 CFR 1926.20 through 1926.32). cian’s recommendations. (2) Required inspections by the com- (C) Physician’s written opinions; petent person. Section 1926.20(b)(2) (D) Any employee medical com- which requires health and safety pre- plaints related to exposure to asbestos; vention programs to provide for fre- and quent and regular inspections of the (E) A copy of the information pro- job sites, materials, and equipment to vided to the physician as required by be made by competent persons, is in- paragraph (m) of this section. corporated. (iii) The employer shall ensure that (3) Additional inspections. In addition, this record is maintained for the dura- the competent person shall make fre- tion of employment plus thirty (30) quent and regular inspections of the years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of job sites, in order to perform the duties this chapter. set out below in paragraph (o)(3)(i) of (4) Training records. The employer this section. For Class I jobs, on-site shall maintain all employee training inspections shall be made at least once records for one (1) year beyond the last during each work shift, and at any date of employment by that employer. time at employee request. For Class II, (5) Data to Rebut PACM. Where the III, and IV jobs, on-site inspections building owner and employer have re- shall be made at intervals sufficient to lied on data to demonstrate that PACM assess whether conditions have is not asbestos-containing, such data changed, and at any reasonable time at shall be maintained for as long as they employee request. are relied upon to rebut the presump- (i) On all worksites where employees tion. are engaged in Class I or II asbestos (6) Records of required notifications. work, the competent person designated Where the building owner has commu- in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of nicated and received information con- this section shall perform or supervise cerning the identification, location and the following duties, as applicable: quantity of ACM and PACM, written (A) Set up the regulated area, enclo- records of such notifications and their sure, or other containment; content shall be maintained by the (B) Ensure (by on-site inspection) the building owner for the duration of own- integrity of the enclosure or contain- ership and shall be transferred to suc- ment; cessive owners of such buildings/facili- (C) Set up procedures to control ties. entry to and exit from the enclosure (7) Availability. (i) The employer, and/or area; upon written request, shall make all (D) Supervise all employee exposure records required to be maintained by monitoring required by this section this section available to the Assistant and ensure that it is conducted as re- Secretary and the Director for exam- quired by paragraph (f) of this section; ination and copying. (E) Ensure that employees working (ii) The employer must comply with within the enclosure and/or using glove the requirements concerning avail- bags wear respirators and protective ability of records set forth in 29 CFR clothing as required by paragraphs (h) 1910.1020. and (i) of this section;

556

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00566 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

(F) Ensure through on-site super- as part of this section and the contents vision, that employees set up, use, and of these appendices are mandatory. remove engineering controls, use work (2) Appendices B, F, H, I, J, and K to practices and personal protective this section are informational and are equipment in compliance with all re- not intended to create any additional quirements; obligations not otherwise imposed or (G) Ensure that employees use the to detract from any existing obliga- hygiene facilities and observe the de- tions. contamination procedures specified in paragraph (j) of this section; APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1101—OSHA REFERENCE (H) Ensure that through on-site in- METHOD—MANDATORY spection, engineering controls are func- This mandatory appendix specifies the pro- tioning properly and employees are cedure for analyzing air samples for asbestos using proper work practices; and, and specifies quality control procedures that (I) Ensure that notification require- must be implemented by laboratories per- ment in paragraph (k) of this section forming the analysis. The sampling and ana- are met. lytical methods described below represent (ii) [Reserved] the elements of the available monitoring (4) Training for the competent person. methods (such as appendix B of this regulation, the most current version of the OSHA (i) For Class I and II asbestos work the method ID–160, or the most current version competent person shall be trained in of the NIOSH Method 7400). All employers all aspects of asbestos removal and who are required to conduct air monitoring handling, including: abatement, instal- under paragraph (f) of the standard are relation, removal and handling; the con- quired to utilize analytical laboratories that tents of this standard; the identifica- use this procedure, or an equivalent method, tion of asbestos; removal procedures, for collecting and analyzing samples. where appropriate; and other practices Sampling and Analytical Procedure for reducing the hazard. Such training shall be obtained in a comprehensive 1. The sampling medium for air samples course for supervisors that meets the shall be mixed cellulose ester filter mem- criteria of EPA’s Model Accreditation branes. These shall be designated by the Plan (40 CFR part 763, subpart E, ap- manufacturer as suitable for asbestos count- pendix C), such as a course conducted ing. See below for rejection of blanks. by an EPA-approved or state-approved 2. The preferred collection device shall be the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open- training provider, certified by EPA or a faced 50-mm electrically conductive exten- state, or a course equivalent in strin- sion cowl. The 37-mm cassette may be used if gency, content, and length. necessary but only if written justification (ii) For Class III and IV asbestos for the need to use the 37-mm filter cassette work, the competent person shall be accompanies the sample results in the em- trained in aspects of asbestos handling ployee’s exposure monitoring record. Do not appropriate for the nature of the work, reuse or reload cassettes for asbestos sample to include procedures for setting up collection. glove bags and mini-enclosures, prac- 3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min tices for reducing asbestos exposures, and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25/ mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used, use of wet methods, the contents of an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 2.5 this standard, and the identification of liters/min shall be selected. asbestos. Such training shall include 4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume successful completion of a course that for each air sample shall be collected to is consistent with EPA requirements yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square for training of local education agency millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter maintenance and custodial staff as set darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2), or its on the filter, a second sample shall be start- equivalent in stringency, content and ed. length. Competent persons for Class III 5. Ship the samples in a rigid container with sufficient packing material to prevent and IV work, may also be trained pur- dislodging the collected fibers. Packing ma- suant to the requirements of paragraph terial that has a high electrostatic charge on (o)(4)(i) of this section. its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) can- (p) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, D, not be used because such material can cause and E to this section are incorporated loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette.

557

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00567 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than before and after use with a representative fil- 5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved ter cassette installed between the pump and fibers along the curve. the calibration devices. b. In the absence of other information, 7. Personal samples shall be taken in the count all particles as asbestos, that have a ‘‘breathing zone’’ of the employee (i.e., at- length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3:1 or tached to or near the collar or lapel near the greater. worker’s face). c. Fibers lying entirely within the bound- 8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field phase contrast using a microscope with an 8 shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the to 10× eyepiece and a 40 to 45× objective for boundary once, having one end within the a total magnification of approximately 400× circle, shall receive the count of one half and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The (1⁄2). Do not count any fiber that crosses the microscope shall also be fitted with a green graticule boundary more than once. Reject or blue filter. and do not count any other fibers even 9. The microscope shall be fitted with a though they may be visible outside the grati- Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule cali- cule area. brated for a field diameter of 100 microm- d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- eters (±2 micrometers). less individual fibers can be identified by ob- 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the serving both ends of an individual fiber. e. Count enough graticule fields to yield microscope shall be about 3 degrees meas- 100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop ured using the HSE phase shift test slide as counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber outlined below. count. a. Place the test slide on the microscope 14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at stage and center it under the phase objec- the rate of 10 percent. tive. b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into Quality Control Procedures focus. 1. Intralaboratory program. Each labora- NOTE: The slide consists of seven sets of tory and/or each company with more than grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block) one microscopist counting slides shall estab- in descending order of visibility from sets 1 lish a statistically designed quality assur- to 7, seven being the least visible. The re- ance program involving blind recounts and quirements for asbestos counting are that comparisons between microscopists to mon- the microscope optics must resolve the itor the variability of counting by each grooved lines in set 3 completely, although microscopist and between microscopists. In a they may appear somewhat faint, and that company with more than one laboratory, the the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be in- program shall include all laboratories, and visible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least par- shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-labora- tially visible but may vary slightly in visi- tory variability. bility between microscopes. A microscope 2a. Interlaboratory program. Each labora- that fails to meet these requirements has ei- tory analyzing asbestos samples for compli- ther too low or too high a resolution to be ance determination shall implement an used for asbestos counting. interlaboratory quality assurance program that, as a minimum, includes participation c. If the image deteriorates, clean and ad- of at least two other independent labora- just the microscope optics. If the problem tories. Each laboratory shall participate in persists, cosult the microscope manufac- round robin testing at least once every 6 turer. months with at least all the other labora- 11. Each set of samples taken will include tories in its interlaboratory quality assur- 10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field ance group. Each laboratory shall submit blanks. These blanks must come from the slides typical of its own workload for use in same lot as the filters used for sample collec- this program. The round robin shall be de- tion. The field blank results shall be aver- signed and results analyzed using appro- aged and subtracted from the analytical re- priate statistical methodology. sults before reporting. A set consists of any b. All laboratories should also participate sample or group of samples for which an in a national sample testing scheme such as evaluation for this standard must be made. the Proficiency Analytical Testing Program Any samples represented by a field blank (PAT), or the Asbestos Registry sponsored by having a fiber count in excess of the detec- the American Industrial Hygiene Association tion limit of the method being used shall be (AIHA). rejected. 3. All individuals performing asbestos anal- 12. The samples shall be mounted by the ysis must have taken the NIOSH course for acetone/triacetin method or a method with sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos an equivalent index of refraction and similar dust or an equivalent course. clarity. 4. When the use of different microscopes 13. Observe the following counting rules. contributes to differences between counters

558

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00568 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

and laboratories, the effect of the different 5. Current results of these quality assur- microscope shall be evaluated and the micro- ance programs shall be posted in each lab- scope shall be replaced, as necessary. oratory to keep the microscopists informed.

APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1101—SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS (NON-MANDATORY)

Matrix Air: OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits: Time Weighted Average ...... 0.1 fiber/cc Excursion Level (30 minutes) ...... 1.0 fiber/cc Collection Procedure: A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber density of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2 on the filter.

Recommended Sampling Rate ...... 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute (L/min) Recommended Air Volumes: Minimum ...... 25 L Maximum ...... 2,400 L

Analytical Procedure: and a moderate aspect ratio (usually less A portion of the sample filter is cleared than 20:1). and prepared for asbestos fiber counting by Detection Limit: The number of fibers nec- Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) at 400X. essary to be 95% certain that the result is Commercial manufacturers and products greater than zero. mentioned in this method are for descriptive Differential Counting: The term applied to use only and do not constitute endorsements the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from bers from the fiber count because they do other sources can be substituted. not appear to be asbestos. Fiber: A particle that is 5 μm or longer, 1. Introduction with a length-to-width ratio of 3 to 1 or This method describes the collection of longer. airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated Field: The area within the graticule circle sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester that is superimposed on the microscope (MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast image. microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are Set: The samples which are taken, sub- unique to this method and are defined below: mitted to the laboratory, analyzed, and for Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- which, interim or final result reports are brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, generated. crocidolite, amosite (cummingtonite- Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: The grunerite asbestos), tremolite asbestos, ac- non-asbestos form of these minerals which tinolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and meet the definition of a fiber. It includes any any of these minerals that have been chemi- of these minerals that have been chemically cally treated and/or altered. The precise treated and/or altered. chemical formulation of each species will Walton-Beckett Graticule: An eyepiece grati- vary with the location from which it was cule specifically designed for asbestos fiber mined. Nominal compositions are listed: counting. It consists of a circle with a projected diameter of 100 ±2 μm (area of about Chrysotile ...... Mg Si O (OH) 3 2 5 4 0.00785 mm2) with a crosshair having tic- Crocidolite ...... Na Fe 2+ Fe 3+ Si 2 3 2 8 marks at 3-μm intervals in one direction and O (OH) 22 2 5-μm in the orthogonal direction. There are Amosite ...... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 marks around the periphery of the circle to Tremolite-actin- demonstrate the proper sizes and shapes of olite ...... Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 Si8 O22(OH)2 fibers. This design is reproduced in Figure 1. Anthophyllite .... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 The disk is placed in one of the microscope Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos which eyepieces so that the design is superimposed meets the criteria specified below for a fiber. on the field of view. Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a 1.1. History fiber to it’s diameter (e.g. 3:1, 5:1 aspect ratios). Early surveys to determine asbestos expo- Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles sures were conducted using impinger counts formed by comminution of minerals, espe- of total dust with the counts expressed as cially those characterized by parallel sides million particles per cubic foot. The British

559

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00569 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Asbestos Research Council recommended fil- uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper, ter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969, paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most the Bureau of Occupational Safety and significant exposures in the workplace is the Health published a filter membrane method removal and encapsulation of asbestos in for counting asbestos fibers in the United schools, public buildings, and homes. Many States. This method was refined by NIOSH workers have the potential to be exposed to and published as P & CAM 239. On May 29, asbestos during these operations. 1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sam- About 95% of the asbestos in commercial pling with phase contrast counting for eval- use in the United States is chrysotile. Cro- uation of asbestos exposures at work sites in cidolite and amosite make up most of the re- the United States. The use of this technique mainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or ac- was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase tinolite are likely to be encountered as con- contrast microscopy has continued to be the taminants in various industrial products. method of choice for the measurement of occupational exposure to asbestos. 1.5. Physical Properties Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile 1.2. Principle strength along its axis, is chemically inert, Air is drawn through a MCE filter to cap- non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a ture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped high electrical resistance and good sound ab- portion of the filter is removed, placed on a sorbing properties. It can be weaved into ca- glass microscope slide and made transparent. bles, fabrics or other textiles, and also mat- A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM. ted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. All the fibers meeting defined criteria for asbestos are counted and considered a measure 2. Range and Detection Limit of the airborne asbestos concentration. 2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2. With a Walton- 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages Beckett graticule this range is equivalent to There are four main advantages of PCM 0.8 to 10 fibers/field. Using NIOSH counting over other methods: statistics, a count of 0.8 fibers/field would (1) The technique is specific for fibers. give an approximate coefficient of variation Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique (CV) of 0.13. which excludes non-fibrous particles from 2.2. The detection limit for this method is the analysis. 4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm2. This (2) The technique is inexpensive and does was determined using an equation to esti- not require specialized knowledge to carry mate the maximum CV possible at a specific out the analysis for total fiber counts. concentration (95% confidence) and a Lower (3) The analysis is quick and can be per- Control Limit of zero. The CV value was formed on-site for rapid determination of air then used to determine a corresponding con- concentrations of asbestos fibers. centration from historical CV vs fiber rela- (4) The technique has continuity with his- tionships. As an example: torical epidemiological studies so that esti- Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) = mates of expected disease can be inferred AC—1.645(CV)(AC) from long-term determinations of asbestos exposures. Where: The main disadvantage of PCM is that it AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber con- does not positively identify asbestos fibers. centration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower Other fibers which are not asbestos may be Control Limit = 0 and solving for CV: included in the count unless differential 0 = AC—1.645(CV)(AC) counting is performed. This requires a great CV = 0.61 deal of experience to adequately differen- This value was compared with CV vs. count tiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Posi- curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for tive identification of asbestos must be per- Leidel-Busch counting statistics or for an formed by polarized light or electron micros- OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center (OSHA- copy techniques. A further disadvantage of SLTC) CV curve (see appendix A for further PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fibers per about 0.2 μm in diameter while the finest as- 100 fields, respectively. Although a lower de- bestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 μm in tection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields is sup- diameter. For some exposures, substantially ported by the OSHA-SLTC data, both data more fibers may be present than are actually sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields value. counted. 3. Method Performance—Precision and 1.4. Workplace Exposure Accuracy Asbestos is used by the construction indus- Precision is dependent upon the total num- try in such products as shingles, floor tiles, ber of fibers counted and the uniformity of asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation the fiber distribution on the filter. A general and acoustical products. Non-construction rule is to count at least 20 and not more than

560

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00570 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100 5.1.2. Gel bands for sealing cassettes. fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields 5.1.3. Sampling pump. have already been counted. Counting more Each pump must be a battery operated, than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in self-contained unit small enough to be precision. As the total count drops below 10 placed on the monitored employee and not fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is interfere with the work being performed. The noted. pump must be capable of sampling at the col- At this time, there is no known method to lection rate for the required sampling time. determine the absolute accuracy of the as- 5.1.4. Flexible tubing, 6-mm bore. bestos analysis. Results of samples prepared through the Proficiency Analytical Testing 5.1.5. Pump calibration. (PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA- Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or elec- SLTC showed no significant bias when com- tronic meter. pared to PAT reference values. The PAT 5.2. Sampling Procedure samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989 (N = 5.2.1. Seal the point where the base and 36) and the concentration range was from 120 cowl of each cassette meet with a gel band or to 1,300 fibers/mm2. tape. 5.2.2. Charge the pumps completely before 4. Interferences beginning. Fibrous substances, if present, may inter- 5.2.3. Connect each pump to a calibration fere with asbestos analysis. cassette with an appropriate length of 6-mm Some common fibers are: bore plastic tubing. Do not use luer connec- fiberglass tors—the type of cassette specified above has anhydrite built-in adapters. plant fibers 5.2.4. Select an appropriate flow rate for perlite veins the situation being monitored. The sampling gypsum flow rate must be between 0.5 and 5.0 L/min some synthetic fibers for personal sampling and is commonly set membrane structures between 1 and 2 L/min. Always choose a flow sponge spicules rate that will not produce overloaded filters. diatoms microorganisms 5.2.5. Calibrate each sampling pump before wollastonite and after sampling with a calibration cassette in-line (Note: This calibration cassette The use of electron microscopy or optical should be from the same lot of cassettes used tests such as polarized light, and dispersion staining may be used to differentiate these for sampling). Use a primary standard (e.g. materials from asbestos when necessary. bubble burette) to calibrate each pump. If possible, calibrate at the sampling site. 5. Sampling NOTE: If sampling site calibration is not 5.1. Equipment possible, environmental influences may affect the flow rate. The extent is dependent 5.1.1. Sample assembly (The assembly is on the type of pump used. Consult with the shown in Figure 3). Conductive filter holder pump manufacturer to determine dependence consisting of a 25-mm diameter, 3-piece cas- on environmental influences. If the pump is sette having a 50-mm long electrically con- affected by temperature and pressure ductive extension cowl. Backup pad, 25-mm, changes, correct the flow rate using the for- cellulose. Membrane filter, mixed-cellulose mula shown in the section ‘‘Sampling Pump ester (MCE), 25-mm, plain, white, 0.4 to 1.2- Flow Rate Corrections’’ at the end of this ap- μ m pore size. pendix. NOTES: (a) DO NOT RE-USE CASSETTES. 5.2.6. Connect each pump to the base of (b) Fully conductive cassettes are required each sampling cassette with flexible tubing. to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the cas- Remove the end cap of each cassette and sette due to electrostatic attraction. (c) Purchase filters which have been se- take each air sample open face. Assure that lected by the manufacturer for asbestos each sample cassette is held open side down counting or analyze representative filters for in the employee’s breathing zone during fiber background before use. Discard the fil- sampling. The distance from the nose/mouth ter lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields are of the employee to the cassette should be found. about 10 cm. Secure the cassette on the col- (d) To decrease the possibility of contami- lar or lapel of the employee using spring nation, the sampling system (filter-backup clips or other similar devices. pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually 5.2.7. A suggested minimum air volume preassembled by the manufacturer. when sampling to determine TWA compli- (e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell- ance is 25 L. For Excursion Limit (30 min mouth, may be used within the limits of sampling time) evaluations, a minimum air their validation. volume of 48 L is recommended.

561

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00571 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

5.2.8. The most significant problem when the samples in such a manner that they will sampling for asbestos is overloading the fil- not rattle. ter with non-asbestos dust. Suggested max- 5.3.3. To avoid the possibility of sample imum air sample volumes for specific envi- contamination, always ship bulk samples in ronments are: separate mailing containers.

Environment Air Vol. (L) 6. Analysis

Asbestos removal operations (visible 100. 6.1. Safety Precautions dust). Asbestos removal operations (little 240. 6.1.1. Acetone is extremely flammable and dust). precautions must be taken not to ignite it. Office environments ...... 400 to 2,400. Avoid using large containers or quantities of acetone. Transfer the solvent in a ventilated CAUTION: Do not overload the filter with laboratory hood. Do not use acetone near dust. High levels of non-fibrous dust par- any open flame. For generation of acetone ticles may obscure fibers on the filter and vapor, use a spark free heat source. lower the count or make counting impos- 6.1.2. Any asbestos spills should be cleaned sible. If more than about 25 to 30% of the up immediately to prevent dispersal of fi- field area is obscured with dust, the result bers. Prudence should be exercised to avoid may be biased low. Smaller air volumes may contamination of laboratory facilities or ex- be necessary when there is excessive non-as- posure of personnel to asbestos. Asbestos bestos dust in the air. spills should be cleaned up with wet methods While sampling, observe the filter with a and/or a High Efficiency Particulate-Air small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of (HEPA) filtered vacuum. dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and CAUTION: Do not use a vacuum without a seal the cassette, and replace with a new HEPA filter—It will disperse fine asbestos fi- sampling assembly. The total dust loading bers in the air. should not exceed 1 mg. 5.2.9. Blank samples are used to determine 6.2. Equipment if any contamination has occurred during sample handling. Prepare two blanks for the 6.2.1. Phase contrast microscope with bin- first 1 to 20 samples. For sets containing ocular or trinocular head. greater than 20 samples, prepare blanks as 6.2.2. Widefield or Huygenian 10X eyepieces 10% of the samples. Handle blank samples in (NOTE: The eyepiece containing the grati- the same manner as air samples with one ex- cule must be a focusing eyepiece. Use a 40X ception: Do not draw any air through the phase objective with a numerical aperture of blank samples. Open the blank cassette in 0.65 to 0.75). the place where the sample cassettes are 6.2.3. Kohler illumination (if possible) with mounted on the employee. Hold it open for green or blue filter. about 30 seconds. Close and seal the cassette 6.2.4. Walton-Beckett Graticule, type G–22 ± μ appropriately. Store blanks for shipment with 100 2 m projected diameter. with the sample cassettes. 6.2.5. Mechanical stage. A rotating me- 5.2.10. Immediately after sampling, close chanical stage is convenient for use with po- and seal each cassette with the base and larized light. plastic plugs. Do not touch or puncture the 6.2.6. Phase telescope. filter membrane as this will invalidate the 6.2.7. Stage micrometer with 0.01-mm sub- analysis. divisions. 5.2.11 Attach and secure a sample seal 6.2.8. Phase-shift test slide, mark II (Avail- around each sample cassette in such a way able from PTR optics Ltd., and also as to assure that the end cap and base plugs McCrone). cannot be removed without destroying the 6.2.9. Precleaned glass slides, 25 mm × 75 seal. Tape the ends of the seal together since mm. One end can be frosted for convenience the seal is not long enough to be wrapped in writing sample numbers, etc., or paste-on end-to-end. Also wrap tape around the cas- labels can be used. sette at each joint to keep the seal secure. 6.2.10. Cover glass #11⁄2. 5.3.1. Send the samples to the laboratory 6.2.11. Scalpel (#10, curved blade). with paperwork requesting asbestos analysis. 6.2.12. Fine tipped forceps. List any known fibrous interferences present 6.2.13. Aluminum block for clearing filter during sampling on the paperwork. Also, (see appendix D and Figure 4). note the workplace operation(s) sampled. 6.2.14. Automatic adjustable pipette, 100- to 5.3.2. Secure and handle the samples in 500-μL. such that they will not rattle during ship- 6.2.15. Micropipette, 5 μL. ment nor be exposed to static electricity. Do 6.3. Reagents not ship samples in expanded polystyrene peanuts, vermiculite, paper shreds, or excel- 6.3.1. Acetone (HPLC grade). sior. Tape sample cassettes to sheet bubbles 6.3.2. Triacetin (glycerol triacetate). and place in a container that will cushion 6.3.3. Lacquer or nail polish.

562

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00572 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

6.4. Standard Preparation 6.5.7. Lower a cover slip gently onto the filter at a slight angle to reduce the possibility A way to prepare standard asbestos sam- of forming air bubbles. If more than 30 sec- ples of known concentration has not been de- onds have elapsed between acetone exposure veloped. It is possible to prepare replicate and triacetin application, glue the edges of samples of nearly equal concentration. This the cover slip to the slide with lacquer or has been performed through the PAT pro- nail polish. gram. These asbestos samples are distributed 6.5.8. If clearing is slow, warm the slide for by the AIHA to participating laboratories. 15 min on a hot plate having a surface tem- Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm perature of about 50 °C to hasten clearing. sample membrane is required for an asbestos The top of the hot block can be used if the count, any PAT sample can serve as a slide is not heated too long. ‘‘standard’’ for replicate counting. 6.5.9. Counting may proceed immediately 6.5. Sample Mounting after clearing and mounting are completed. NOTE: See Safety Precautions in Section 6.6. Sample Analysis 6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy) Completely align the microscope according background in a medium with a refractive to the manufacturer’s instructions. Then, index of approximately 1.46. The technique align the microscope using the following below collapses the filter for easier focusing general alignment routine at the beginning and produces permanent mounts which are of every counting session and more often if useful for quality control and interlabora- necessary. tory comparison. 6.6.1. Alignment (1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small An aluminum block or similar device is re- amount of dirt can significantly degrade the quired for sample preparation. image. 6.5.1. Heat the aluminum block to about 70 (2) Rough focus the objective on a sample. °C. The hot block should not be used on any surface that can be damaged by either the (3) Close down the field iris so that it is heat or from exposure to acetone. visible in the field of view. Focus the image 6.5.2. Ensure that the glass slides and cover of the iris with the condenser focus. Center glasses are free of dust and fibers. the image of the iris in the field of view. 6.5.3. Remove the top plug to prevent a (4) Install the phase telescope and focus on vacuum when the cassette is opened. Clean the phase rings. Critically center the rings. the outside of the cassette if necessary. Cut Misalignment of the rings results in astig- the seal and/or tape on the cassette with a matism which will degrade the image. razor blade. Very carefully separate the base (5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the from the extension cowl, leaving the filter microscope stage and focus on the lines. The and backup pad in the base. analyst must see line set 3 and should see at 6.5.4. With a rocking motion cut a tri- least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6 angular wedge from the filter using the scal- or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination pel. This wedge should be one-sixth to one- which does not pass this test may not be fourth of the filter. Grasp the filter wedge used. with the forceps on the perimeter of the fil- 6.6.2. Counting Fibers ter which was clamped between the cassette (1) Place the prepared sample slide on the pieces. DO NOT TOUCH the filter with your mechanical stage of the microscope. Position finger. Place the filter on the glass slide the center of the wedge under the objective sample side up. Static electricity will usu- lens and focus upon the sample. ally keep the filter on the slide until it is (2) Start counting from one end of the cleared. wedge and progress along a radial line to the 6.5.5. Place the tip of the micropipette con- other end (count in either direction from pe- taining about 200 μL acetone into the alu- rimeter to wedge tip). Select fields ran- minum block. Insert the glass slide into the domly, without looking into the eyepieces, receiving slot in the aluminum block. Inject by slightly advancing the slide in one direc- the acetone into the block with slow, steady tion with the mechanical stage control. pressure on the plunger while holding the pi- (3) Continually scan over a range of focal pette firmly in place. Wait 3 to 5 seconds for planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 μm of the the filter to clear, then remove the pipette filter surface) with the fine focus control and slide from the aluminum block. during each field count. Spend at least 5 to 6.5.6. Immediately (less than 30 seconds) 15 seconds per field. place 2.5 to 3.5 μL of triacetin on the filter (4) Most samples will contain asbestos fi- (NOTE: Waiting longer than 30 seconds will bers with fiber diameters less than 1 μm. result in increased index of refraction and Look carefully for faint fiber images. The decreased contrast between the fibers and small diameter fibers will be very hard to the preparation. This may also lead to sepa- see. However, they are an important con- ration of the cover slip from the slide). tribution to the total count.

563

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00573 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(5) Count only fibers equal to or longer for sampling and evaluating airborne asbes- than 5 μm. Measure the length of curved fi- tos or an equivalent course. bers along the curve. 6.8.2. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos (6) Count fibers which have a length to counting shall set up a slide trading arrange- width ratio of 3:1 or greater. ment with at least two other laboratories in (7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields. order to compare performance and eliminate Continue counting until either 100 fibers are inbreeding of error. The slide exchange oc- counted or 100 fields have been viewed; curs at least semiannually. The round robin whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers results shall be posted where all analysts can in the final field. view individual analyst’s results. (8) Fibers lying entirely within the bound- 6.8.3. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field counting shall participate in the Proficiency shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the Analytical Testing Program, the Asbestos boundary once, having one end within the Analyst Registry or equivalent. circle shall receive a count of 1⁄2. Do not 6.8.4. Each analyst shall select and count count any fiber that crosses the graticule prepared slides from a ‘‘slide bank’’. These boundary more than once. Reject and do not are quality assurance counts. The slide bank count any other fibers even though they may shall be prepared using uniformly distributed be visible outside the graticule area. If a samples taken from the workload. Fiber den- fiber touches the circle, it is considered to sities should cover the entire range routinely cross the line. analyzed by the laboratory. These slides are (9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- counted blind by all counters to establish an less individual fibers can be clearly identi- original standard deviation. This historical fied and each individual fiber is clearly not distribution is compared with the quality as- connected to another counted fiber. See Fig- surance counts. A counter must have 95% of ure 1 for counting conventions. all quality control samples counted within (10) Record the number of fibers in each three standard deviations of the historical field in a consistent way such that filter mean. This count is then integrated into a non-uniformity can be assessed. new historical mean and standard deviation (11) Regularly check phase ring alignment. for the slide. (12) When an agglomerate (mass of mate- The analyses done by the counters to es- rial) covers more than 25% of the field of tablish the slide bank may be used for an in- view, reject the field and select another. Do terim quality control program if the data are not include it in the number of fields count- treated in a proper statistical fashion. ed. 7. Calculations (13) Perform a ‘‘blind recount’’ of 1 in every 10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides 7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbes- using a person other than the original tos fiber concentration on the filter sample counter. using the following formula: 6.7. Fiber Identification ⎡⎛ FB⎞ ⎛ BFB⎞ ⎤ As previously mentioned in Section 1.3., ⎢⎜ ⎟ − ⎜ ⎟ ⎥ × ECA PCM does not provide positive confirmation ⎣⎝ FL⎠ ⎝ BFL ⎠ ⎦ of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential AC = counting techniques should be used if dis- 1000 ×××FR T MFA crimination is desirable. Differential count- where: ing may include primary discrimination AC = Airborne fiber concentration based on morphology, polarized light anal- FB = Total number of fibers greater than 5 ysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data μm counted by Scanning Electron or Transmission Elec- FL = Total number of fields counted on the tron Microscopy. filter A great deal of experience is required to BFB = Total number of fibers greater than 5 routinely and correctly perform differential μm counted in the blank counting. It is discouraged unless it is le- BFL = Total number of fields counted on the gally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obvi- blank ously not asbestos should it be excluded from ECA = Effective collecting area of filter (385 the count. Further discussion of this tech- mm2 nominal for a 25-mm filter.) nique can be found in reference 8.10. FR = Pump flow rate (L/min) If there is a question whether a fiber is as- MFA = Microscope count field area (mm2). bestos or not, follow the rule: This is 0.00785 mm2 for a Walton-Beckett ‘‘WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.’’ Graticule. T = Sample collection time (min) 6.8. Analytical Recommendations—Quality 1,000 = Conversion of L to cc Control System NOTE: The collection area of a filter is sel- 6.8.1. All individuals performing asbestos dom equal to 385 mm2. It is appropriate for analysis must have taken the NIOSH course laboratories to routinely monitor the exact

564

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00574 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER10AU94.033 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

diameter using an inside micrometer. The CVFB = CV for the average of the two con- collection area is calculated according to the centration estimates formula: If a pair of counts are rejected by this cri- Area = †(d/2)2 terion then, recount the rest of the filters in the submitted set. Apply the test and reject 7.2. Short-Cut Calculation any other pairs failing the test. Rejection shall include a memo to the industrial hy- Since a given analyst always has the same gienist stating that the sample failed a sta- interpupillary distance, the number of fields tistical test for homogeneity and the true air per filter for a particular analyst will remain concentration may be significantly different constant for a given size filter. The field size than the reported value. for that analyst is constant (i.e. the analyst is using an assigned microscope and is not 7.4. Reporting Results changing the reticle). Report results to the industrial hygienist For example, if the exposed area of the fil- as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If ter is always 385 mm2 and the size of the field multiple analyses are performed on a sam- is always 0.00785 mm2 the number of fields ple, an average of the results is to be re- per filter will always be 49,000. In addition it ported unless any of the results can be re- is necessary to convert liters of air to cc. jected for cause. These three constants can then be combined such that ECA/(1,000 × MFA) = 49. The pre- 8. References vious equation simplifies to: 8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al., U.S. Public Health Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos ⎛ FB⎞ ⎛ BFB⎞ ⎜ ⎟ − ⎜ ⎟ × 49 Textile Industry (Public Health Bulletin No. ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ 241), U.S. Treasury Dept., Washington, DC, AC = FL BFL 1938. × 8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measure- FR T ment of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Mem- brane Filter Method (Technical Note), Asbes- 7.3. Recount Calculations tos Research Council, Rockdale, Lancashire, As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a Great Britain, 1969. ‘‘blind recount’’ of 10% of the slides is per- 8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown, formed. In all cases, differences will be ob- T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting served between the first and second counts of Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers the same filter wedge. Most of these dif- by Phase Contrast Microscopy, Bureau of Oc- ferences will be due to chance alone, that is, cupational Health, U.S. Dept. of Health, Edu- due to the random variability (precision) of cation and Welfare, Cincinnati, OH, 1969. the count method. Statistical recount cri- 8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, teria enables one to decide whether observed 2nd ed., Vol. 1 (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 77– differences can be explained due to chance 157–A). National Institute for Occupational alone or are probably due to systematic dif- Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1977. pp. ferences between analysts, microscopes, or 239–1—239–21. other biasing factors. 8.5. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations The following recount criterion is for a 29 CFR 1910.1001. 1971. pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc. 8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, The criterion is given at the type-I error Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk Rule, FEDERAL REGISTER 51:119 (20 June 1986). that we will reject a pair of counts for the pp. 22612–22790. reason that one might be biased, when the 8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and large observed difference is really due to Actinolite, Code of Federal Regulations chance. 1910.1001. 1988. pp. 711–752. Reject a pair of counts if: 8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard— Occupational Exposure to Asbestos (DHEW/ −> NIOSH Pub. No. HSM 72–10267), National In- AC21 AC 278. stitute for Occupational Safety and Health, NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH, 1972. pp. III–1—III–24. × × 8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, ()ACAVG CV FB R.D., Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Where: Fibers (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 79–127). Na- AC1 = lower estimated airborne fiber con- tional Institute for Occupational Safety and centration Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1979. AC2 = higher estimated airborne fiber con- 8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- centration croscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, ACavg = average of the two concentration es- Analytical Techniques in Occupational timates Health Chemistry, edited by D.D. Dollberg

565

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00575 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER10AU94.034 ER29JN95.002 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

and A.W. Verstuyft. Wash. DC: American needed to fit the ocular of the microscope Chemical Society, (ACS Symposium Series and the diameter (mm) of the circular count- 120) 1980. pp. 13–41. ing area. Instructions for measuring the dimensions necessary are listed: Quality Control (1) Insert any available graticule into the The OSHA asbestos regulations require focusing eyepiece and focus so that the grati- each laboratory to establish a quality con- cule lines are sharp and clear. trol program. The following is presented as (2) Align the microscope. an example of how the OSHA-SLTC con- (3) Place a stage micrometer on the micro- structed its internal CV curve as part of scope object stage and focus the microscope meeting this requirement. Data is from 395 on the graduated lines. samples collected during OSHA compliance (4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL inspections and analyzed from October 1980 (μm), using the stage micrometer. through April 1986. Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 dif- (5) Remove the graticule from the micro- ferent counters independently of one an- scope and measure its actual grid length, AL other. The standard deviation and the CV (mm). This can be accomplished by using a statistic was calculated for each sample. mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a This data was then plotted on a graph of CV jeweler’s loupe with a direct reading scale. vs. fibers/mm2. A least squares regression (6) Let D = 100 μm. Calculate the circle di- was performed using the following equation: ameter, dc (mm), for the Walton-Beckett 2 graticule and specify the diameter when CV = antilog10[A(log10(x)) + B(log10(x)) + C] making a purchase: where: x = the number of fibers/mm2 AL× D Application of least squares gave: = dc A = 0.182205 PL B = 0.973343 Example: If PL = 108 μm, AL = 2.93 mm and C = 0.327499 D = 100 μm, then, Using these values, the equation becomes: 2 CV = antilog10[0.182205(log10(x)) 2. 93× 100 ¥ = = 0.973343(log10(x)) + 0.327499] dmmc 271. 108 Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections (7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle com- This correction is used if a difference bination on the microscope must be cali- greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/ brated. Should any of the three be changed or pressure is noted between calibration and (by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replace- sampling sites and the pump does not com- ment, etc.), the combination must be recali- pensate for the differences. brated. Calibration may change if interpupillary distance is changed. ⎛ P ⎞ ⎛ T ⎞ Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable =×⎜ cal ⎟ × ⎜ act ⎟ range: 100 ±2 μm) with a stage micrometer QQact cal upon receipt of the graticule from the manu- ⎝ Pact ⎠ ⎝ Tcal ⎠ facturer. Determine the field area (mm2). Where: Field Area = †(D/2) 2 If D = 100 μm = 0.1 mm, then Qact = actual flow rate Field Area = †(0.1 mm/2) 2 = 0.00785 mm 2 Qcal = calibrated flow rate (if a rotameter was used, the rotameter value) The Graticule is available from: Graticules Pcal = uncorrected air pressure at calibration Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN, Pact = uncorrected air pressure at sampling Kent, England (Telephone 011–44–732–359061). site Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145 Tact = temperature at sampling site (K) Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [tele- Tcal = temperature at calibration (K) phone (617) 891–6000] or McCrone Accessories and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chi- Walton-Beckett Graticule cago, IL 60616 [phone (312)-842–7100]. The When ordering the Graticule for asbestos graticule is custom made for each micro- counting, specify the exact disc diameter scope.

566

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00576 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER10AU94.036 ER10AU94.037 ER10AU94.038 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

COUNTS FOR THE FIBERS IN THE FIGURE COUNTS FOR THE FIBERS IN THE FIGURE— Continued Structure No. Count Explanation Structure No. Count Explanation 1 to 6 ...... 1 Single fibers all contained within the Circle. 12 ...... 1⁄2 Although split, fiber only crosses 7 ...... 1⁄2 Fiber crosses circle once. once. 8 ...... 0 Fiber too short. 9 ...... 2 Two crossing fibers. APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] 10 ...... 0 Fiber outside graticule. 11 ...... 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice.

567

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00577 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER10au94.025 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

568

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00578 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.112 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

569

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00579 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.113 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

570

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00580 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.114 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

571

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00581 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.115 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

572

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00582 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.116 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

573

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00583 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.117 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

574

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00584 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.118 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

575

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00585 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.119 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

576

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00586 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.120 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

577

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00587 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.121 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

578

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00588 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.122 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

579

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00589 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.123 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

580

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00590 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.124 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

581

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00591 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.125 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

582

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00592 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.126 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

583

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00593 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.127 § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1101—CLASSIFICATION OF the ILO International Classification of CHEST X-RAYS—MANDATORY Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011) (incorporated by reference, see (a) Chest X-rays shall be classified in ac- § 1926.6), and recorded on a classification cordance with the Guidelines for the use of

584

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00594 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER14MY19.128 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

form following the format of the CDC/NIOSH reliably achieve the objectives of negative- (M) 2.8 form. As a minimum, the content pressure enclosures. within the bold lines of this form (items 1 Requirements included in this appendix, through 4) shall be included. This form is not cover general provisions to be followed in all to be submitted to NIOSH. asbestos jobs, provisions which must be fol- (b) All X-rays shall be classified only by a lowed for all Class I asbestos jobs, and provi- B-Reader, a board eligible/certified radiolo- sions governing the construction and testing gist, or an experienced physician with known of negative pressure enclosures. The first expertise in pneumoconioses. category includes the requirement for use of (c) Whenever classifying chest X-ray film, wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and imme- the physician shall have immediately avail- diate bagging of waste; Class I work must able for reference a complete set of the ILO conform to the following provisions: standard format radiographs provided for use • oversight by competent person with the Guidelines for the use of the ILO • use of critical barriers over all openings International Classification of Radiographs to work area of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011). • isolation of HVAC systems (d) Whenever classifying digitally-acquired • use of impermeable dropcloths and cov- chest X-rays, the physician shall have imme- erage of all objects within regulated areas diately available for reference a complete set In addition, more specific requirements for of ILO standard digital chest radiographic NPEs include: images provided for use with the Guidelines • maintenance of ¥0.02 inches water gauge for the Use of the ILO International Classi- within enclosure fication of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses • manometric measurements (revised edition 2011). Classification of • air movement away from employees per- digitally-acquired chest X-rays shall be forming removal work based on the viewing of images displayed as • smoke testing or equivalent for detection electronic copies and shall not be based on of leaks and air direction the viewing of hard copy printed trans- • deactivation of electrical circuits, if not parencies of images. provided with ground-fault circuit interrupters. APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1101—WORK PRACTICES AND ENGINEERING CONTROLS FOR CLASS I Planning the Project ASBESTOS OPERATIONS (NON-MANDATORY) The standard requires that an exposure as- This is a non-mandatory appendix to the sessment be conducted before the asbestos asbestos standards for construction and for job is begun [§ 1926.1101 (f)(1)]. Information shipyards. It describes criteria and proce- needed for that assessment, includes data re- dures for erecting and using negative pres- lating to prior similar jobs, as applied to the sure enclosures for Class I Asbestos Work, specific variables of the current job. The in- when NPEs are used as an allowable control formation needed to conduct the assessment method to comply with paragraph (g)(5)(i) of will be useful in planning the project, and in this section. Many small and variable details complying with any reporting requirements are involved in the erection of a negative under this standard, when significant pressure enclosure. OSHA and most partici- changes are being made to a control system pants in the rulemaking agreed that only the listed in the standard, [see also those of major, more performance oriented criteria USEPA (40 CFR 61, subpart M). Thus, al- should be made mandatory. These criteria though the standard does not explicitly re- are set out in paragraph (g) of this section. quire the preparation of a written asbestos In addition, this appendix includes these removal plan, the usual constituents of such mandatory specifications and procedures in a plan, i.e., a description of the enclosure, its guidelines in order to make this appendix the equipment, and the procedures to be used coherent and helpful. The mandatory nature throughout the project, must be determined of the criteria which appear in the regu- before the enclosure can be erected. The fol- latory text is not changed because they are lowing information should be included in the included in this ‘‘non-mandatory’’ appendix. planning of the system: Similarly, the additional criteria and proce- A physical description of the work area; dures included as guidelines in the appendix, A description of the approximate amount of do not become mandatory because manda- material to be removed; tory criteria are also included in these com- A schedule for turning off and sealing exist- prehensive guidelines. ing ventilation systems; In addition, none of the criteria, both man- Personnel hygiene procedures; datory and recommended, are meant to A description of personal protective equip- specify or imply the need for use of patented ment and clothing to be worn by employ- or licensed methods or equipment. Rec- ees; ommended specifications included in this at- A description of the local exhaust ventila- tachment should not discourage the use of tion systems to be used and how they are creative alternatives which can be shown to to be tested;

585

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00595 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

A description of work practices to be ob- that has been used to clean personnel or served by employees; equipment should either be filtered or be An air monitoring plan; collected and discarded as asbestos waste. A description of the method to be used to Soap and shampoo should be provided to transport waste material; and aid in removing dust from the workers’ The location of the dump site. skin and hair. —See paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section Materials and Equipment Necessary for Asbestos for appropriate respiratory protection and Removal protective clothing. Although individual asbestos removal —See paragraph (k) of this section for re- projects vary in terms of the equipment required signs and labels. quired to accomplish the removal of the materials, some equipment and materials are Preparing the Work Area common to most asbestos removal oper- Disabling HVAC Systems: The power to ations. the heating, ventilation, and air condi- Plastic sheeting used to protect horizontal tioning systems that service the restricted surfaces, seal HVAC openings or to seal area must be deactivated and locked off. All vertical openings and ceilings should have a ducts, grills, access ports, windows and vents minimum thickness of 6 mils. Tape or other must be sealed off with two layers of plastic adhesive used to attach plastic sheeting to prevent entrainment of contaminated air. should be of sufficient adhesive strength to Operating HVAC Systems in the Restricted support the weight of the material plus all Area: If components of a HVAC system lo- stresses encountered during the entire dura- cated in the restricted area are connected to tion of the project without becoming de- a system that will service another zone dur- tached from the surface. ing the project, the portion of the duct in the Other equipment and materials which restricted area must be sealed and pressur- should be available at the beginning of each ized. Necessary precautions include caulking project are: the duct joints, covering all cracks and open- —HEPA Filtered Vacuum is essential for ings with two layers of sheeting, and pres- cleaning the work area after the asbestos surizing the duct throughout the duration of has been removed. It should have a long the project by restricting the return air flow. hose capable of reaching out-of-the-way The power to the fan supplying the positive places, such as areas above ceiling tiles, pressure should be locked ‘‘on’’ to prevent behind pipes, etc. pressure loss. —Portable air ventilation systems installed Sealing Elevators: If an elevator shaft is to provide the negative air pressure and air located in the restricted area, it should be ei- removal from the enclosure must be ther shut down or isolated by sealing with equipped with a HEPA filter. The number two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting and capacity of units required to ventilate should provide enough slack to accommo- an enclosure depend on the size of the area date the pressure changes in the shaft with- to be ventilated. The filters for these sys- out breaking the air-tight seal. tems should be designed in such a manner Removing Mobile Objects: All movable ob- that they can be replaced when the air flow jects should be cleaned and removed from volume is reduced by the build-up of dust the work area before an enclosure is con- in the filtration material. Pressure moni- structed unless moving the objects creates a toring devices with alarms and strip chart hazard. Mobile objects will be assumed to be recorders attached to each system to indi- contaminated and should be either cleaned cate the pressure differential and the loss with amended water and a HEPA vacuum due to dust buildup on the filter are rec- and then removed from the area or wrapped ommended. and then disposed of as hazardous waste. —Water sprayers should be used to keep the Cleaning and Sealing Surfaces: After asbestos material as saturated as possible cleaning with water and a HEPA vacuum, during removal; the sprayers will provide a surfaces of stationary objects should be cov- fine mist that minimizes the impact of the ered with two layers of plastic sheeting. The spray on the material. sheeting should be secured with duct tape or —Water used to saturate the asbestos con- an equivalent method to provide a tight seal taining material can be amended by adding around the object. at least 15 milliliters (1⁄4 ounce) of wetting Bagging Waste: In addition to the require- agent in 1 liter (1 pint) of water. An exam- ment for immediate bagging of waste for dis- ple of a wetting agent is a 50/50 mixture of posal, it is further recommended that the polyoxyethylene ether and waste material be double-bagged and sealed polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester. in plastic bags designed for asbestos disposal. —Backup power supplies are recommended, The bags should be stored in a waste storage especially for ventilation systems. area that can be controlled by the workers —Shower and bath water should be with conducting the removal. Filters removed mixed hot and cold water faucets. Water from air handling units and rubbish removed

586

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00596 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

from the area are to be bagged and handled ing and HEPA vacuuming. Before entering as hazardous waste. the shower area, foot coverings, head coverings, hand coverings, and coveralls are re- Constructing the Enclosure moved and placed in impervious bags for dis- The enclosure should be constructed to posal or cleaning. Airline connections from provide an air-tight seal around ducts and airline respirators with HEPA disconnects openings into existing ventilation systems and power cables from powered air-purifying and around penetrations for electrical con- respirators (PAPRs) will be disconnected duits, telephone wires, water lines, drain just prior to entering the shower room. pipes, etc. Enclosures should be both airtight and watertight except for those openings de- Establishing Negative Pressure Within the signed to provide entry and/or air flow con- Enclosure trol. Negative Pressure: Air is to be drawn into Size: An enclosure should be the minimum the enclosure under all anticipated condi- volume to encompass all of the working sur- tions and exhausted through a HEPA filter faces yet allow unencumbered movement by for 24 hours a day during the entire duration the worker(s), provide unrestricted air flow of the project. past the worker(s), and ensure walking sur- Air Flow Tests: Air flow patterns will be faces can be kept free of tripping hazards. checked before removal operations begin, at Shape: The enclosure may be any shape least once per operating shift and any time that optimizes the flow of ventilation air there is a question regarding the integrity of past the worker(s). the enclosure. The primary test for air flow Structural Integrity: The walls, ceilings is to trace air currents with smoke tubes or and floors must be supported in such a man- other visual methods. Flow checks are made ner that portions of the enclosure will not at each opening and at each doorway to dem- fall down during normal use. onstrate that air is being drawn into the en- Openings: It is not necessary that the closure and at each worker’s position to structure be airtight; openings may be de- show that air is being drawn away from the signed to direct air flow. Such openings breathing zone. should be located at a distance from active Monitoring Pressure Within the Enclosure: removal operations. They should be designed After the initial air flow patterns have been to draw air into the enclosure under all an- checked, the static pressure must be mon- ticipated circumstances. In the event that negative pressure is lost, they should be itored within the enclosure. Monitoring may fitted with either HEPA filters to trap dust be made using manometers, pressure gauges, or automatic trap doors that prevent dust or combinations of these devices. It is rec- from escaping the enclosure. Openings for ommended that they be attached to alarms exits should be controlled by an airlock or a and strip chart recorders at points identified vestibule. by the design engineer. Barrier Supports: Frames should be con- Corrective Actions: If the manometers or structed to support all unsupported spans of pressure gauges demonstrate a reduction in sheeting. pressure differential below the required Sheeting: Walls, barriers, ceilings, and level, work should cease and the reason for floors should be lined with two layers of the change investigated and appropriate plastic sheeting having a thickness of at changes made. The air flow patterns should least 6 mil. be retested before work begins again. Seams: Seams in the sheeting material Pressure Differential: The design param- should be minimized to reduce the possibili- eters for static pressure differentials be- ties of accidental rips and tears in the adhe- tween the inside and outside of enclosures sive or connections. All seams in the sheet- typically range from 0.02 to 0.10 inches of ing should overlap, be staggered and not be water gauge, depending on conditions. All located at corners or wall-to-floor joints. zones inside the enclosure must have less Areas Within an Enclosure: Each enclosure pressure than the ambient pressure outside consists of a work area, a decontamination of the enclosure (¥0.02 inches water gauge area, and waste storage area. The work area differential). Design specifications for the where the asbestos removal operations occur differential vary according to the size, con- should be separated from both the waste figuration, and shape of the enclosure as well storage area and the contamination control as ambient and mechanical air pressure con- area by physical curtains, doors, and/or air- ditions around the enclosure. flow patterns that force any airborne con- Air Flow Patterns: The flow of air past tamination back into the work area. each worker shall be enhanced by posi- See paragraph (j) of this section for re- tioning the intakes and exhaust ports to requirements for hygiene facilities. move contaminated air from the worker’s During egress from the work area, each breathing zone, by positioning HEPA vacu- worker should step into the equipment room, um cleaners to draw air from the worker’s clean tools and equipment, and remove gross breathing zone, by forcing relatively contamination from clothing by wet clean- uncontaminated air past the worker toward

587

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00597 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

an exhaust port, or by using a combination General Work Practices of methods to reduce the worker’s exposure. Preventing dust dispersion is the primary Air Handling Unit Exhaust: The exhaust means of controlling the spread of asbestos plume from air handling units should be lo- within the enclosure. Whenever practical, cated away from adjacent personnel and in- the point of removal should be isolated, en- takes for HVAC systems. closed, covered, or shielded from the workers Air Flow Volume: The air flow volume in the area. Waste asbestos containing mate- (cubic meters per minute) exhausted (re- rials must be bagged during or immediately moved) from the workplace must exceed the after removal; the material must remain amount of makeup air supplied to the enclo- saturated until the waste container is sealed. sure. The rate of air exhausted from the en- Waste material with sharp points or cor- closure should be designed to maintain a ners must be placed in hard air-tight con- negative pressure in the enclosure and air tainers rather than bags. movement past each worker. The volume of Whenever possible, large components air flow removed from the enclosure should should be sealed in plastic sheeting and re- replace the volume of the container at every moved intact. 5 to 15 minutes. Air flow volume will need to Bags or containers of waste will be moved be relatively high for large enclosures, enclo- to the waste holding area, washed, and sures with awkward shapes, enclosures with wrapped in a bag with the appropriate labels. multiple openings, and operations employing Cleaning the Work Area several workers in the enclosure. Air Flow Velocity: At each opening, the air Surfaces within the work area should be flow velocity must visibly ‘‘drag’’ air into kept free of visible dust and debris to the ex- the enclosure. The velocity of air flow within tent feasible. Whenever visible dust appears the enclosure must be adequate to remove on surfaces, the surfaces within the enclo- airborne contamination from each worker’s sure must be cleaned by wiping with a wet breathing zone without disturbing the asbes- sponge, brush, or cloth and then vacuumed tos-containing material on surfaces. with a HEPA vacuum. Airlocks: Airlocks are mechanisms on All surfaces within the enclosure should be doors and curtains that control the air flow cleaned before the exhaust ventilation system is deactivated and the enclosure is dis- patterns in the doorways. If air flow occurs, assembled. An approved encapsulant may be the patterns through doorways must be such sprayed onto areas after the visible dust has that the air flows toward the inside of the been removed. enclosure. Sometimes vestibules, double doors, or double curtains are used to prevent APPENDIX G TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] air movement through the doorways. To use a vestibule, a worker enters a chamber by APPENDIX H TO § 1926.1101—SUBSTANCE TECH- opening the door or curtain and then closing NICAL INFORMATION FOR ASBESTOS. NON- the entry before opening the exit door or MANDATORY curtain. I. Substance Identification Airlocks should be located between the equipment room and shower room, between A. Substance: ‘‘Asbestos’’ is the name of a the shower room and the clean room, and be- class of magnesium-silicate minerals that tween the waste storage area and the outside occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are in- of the enclosure. The air flow between adja- cluded in this group are chrysotile, crocid- cent rooms must be checked using smoke olite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, tubes or other visual tests to ensure the flow tremolite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos. patterns draw air toward the work area with- B. Asbestos is and was used in the manu- out producing eddies. facture of heat-resistant clothing, automotive brake and clutch linings, and a vari- Monitoring for Airborne Concentrations ety of building materials including floor tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-ce- In addition to the breathing zone samples ment pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant taken as outlined in paragraph (f) of this sec- drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and tion, samples of air should be taken to dem- boiler insulation materials and in sprayed-on onstrate the integrity of the enclosure, the materials located on beams, in crawlspaces, cleanliness of the clean room and shower and between walls. area, and the effectiveness of the HEPA fil- C. The potential for an asbestos-containing ter. If the clean room is shown to be con- product to release breathable fibers depends taminated, the room must be relocated to an largely on its degree of friability. Friable uncontaminated area. means that the material can be crumbled Samples taken near the exhaust of port- with hand pressure and is therefore likely to able ventilation systems must be done with emit fibers. The fibrous fluffy sprayed-on care. materials used for fireproofing, insulation,

588

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00598 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

or sound proofing are considered to be fri- 2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trim- able, and they readily release airborne fibers mings, or reject materials. if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos 3. Housekeeping waste from wet-sweeping floor tile or roofing felt are considered non- or HEPA-vacuuming. friable if intact and generally do not emit 4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating mate- airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding, rial that is removed from buildings. sawing and other aggressive operations. As- 5. Asbestos-containing building products bestos-cement pipe or sheet can emit air- removed during building renovation or dem- borne fibers if the materials are cut or olition. sawed, or if they are broken. 6. Contaminated disposable protective D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to air- clothing. borne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.1 fi- B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened bers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) under exhaust hoods and packed into air- averaged over the 8-hour workday, and 1 tight containers for disposal. Empty ship- fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc) ping drums are difficult to clean and should averaged over a 30 minute work period. be sealed. C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters II. Health Hazard Data should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed with a fine water mist and placed into a la- A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory beled waste container. disease and various types of cancers if the fi- D. Process waste and housekeeping waste bers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers should be wetted with water or a mixture of from contaminated clothing or skin can also water and surfactant prior to packaging in result in these diseases. The symptoms of disposable containers. these diseases generally do not appear for 20 E. Asbestos-containing material that is re- or more years after initial exposure. moved from buildings must be disposed of in B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to leak-tight 6-mil plastic bags, plastic-lined cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a containers. These wastes, which are removed rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of while wet, should be sealed in containers be- the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of meso- fore they dry out to minimize the release of thelioma include shortness of breath, pain in asbestos fibers during handling. the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal pain. V. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to III. Respirators and Protective Clothing inform you of the information contained in A. Respirators: You are required to wear a this standard and appendices for asbestos. In respirator when performing tasks that result addition, your employer must instruct you in asbestos exposure that exceeds the per- in the proper work practices for handling as- missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc and bestos-containing materials, and the correct when performing certain designated oper- use of protective equipment. ations. Air-purifying respirators equipped B. Your employer is required to determine with a high-efficiency particulate air whether you are being exposed to asbestos. (HEPA) filter can be used where airborne as- Your employer must treat exposure to ther- bestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 1.0 mal system insulation and sprayed-on and f/cc; otherwise, more protective respirators troweled-on surfacing material as asbestos such as air-supplied, positive-pressure, full exposure, unless results of laboratory anal- facepiece respirators must be used. Dispos- ysis show that the material does not contain able respirators or dust masks are not per- asbestos. You or your representative has the mitted to be used for asbestos work. For ef- right to observe employee measurements and fective protection, respirators must fit your to record the results obtained. Your em- face and head snugly. Your employer is re- ployer is required to inform you of your ex- quired to conduct a fit test when you are posure, and, if you are exposed above the per- first assigned a respirator and every 6 missible exposure limit, he or she is required months thereafter. Respirators should not be to inform you of the actions that are being loosened or removed in work situations taken to reduce your exposure to within the permissible limit. where their use is required. C. Your employer is required to keep B. Protective Clothing: You are required to records of your exposures and medical ex- wear protective clothing in work areas where aminations. These exposure records must be asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the per- kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. records must be kept for the period of your IV. Disposal Procedures and Clean-up employment plus thirty (30) years. D. Your employer is required to release A. Wastes that are generated by processes your exposure and medical records to your where asbestos is present include: physician or designated representative upon 1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. your written request.

589

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00599 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX I TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL SURVEIL- nosis of asbestosis is most commonly based LANCE GUIDELINES FOR ASBESTOS, NON- on a history of exposure to asbestos, the MANDATORY presence of characteristic radiologic abnormalities, end-inspiratory crackles (rales), I. Route of Entry and other clinical features of fibrosing lung Inhalation, ingestion. disease. Pleural plaques and thickening may be observed on chest X-rays. Asbestosis is II. Toxicology often a progressive disease even in the absence of continued exposure, although this Clinical evidence of the adverse effects as- appears to be a highly individualized char- sociated with exposure to asbestos is present acteristic. In severe cases, death may be in the form of several well-conducted epide- caused by respiratory or cardiac failure. miological studies of occupationally exposed workers, family contacts of workers, and IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations persons living near asbestos mines. These studies have shown a definite association be- As noted above, exposure to asbestos has tween exposure to asbestos and an increased been linked to an increased risk of lung can- incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peri- cer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, toneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal can- and asbestosis among occupationally ex- cer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling posed workers. Adequate screening tests to fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by determine an employee’s potential for devel- exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos oping serious chronic diseases, such as a can- has also been associated with an increased cer, from exposure to asbestos do not pres- incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal, ently exist. However, some tests, particu- pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As larly chest X-rays and pulmonary function with other known chronic occupational dis- tests, may indicate that an employee has eases, disease associated with asbestos gen- been overexposed to asbestos increasing his erally appears about 20 years following the or her risk of developing exposure related first occurrence of exposure: There are no chronic diseases. It is important for the phy- known acute effects associated with expo- sician to become familiar with the operating sure to asbestos. conditions in which occupational exposure to Epidemiological studies indicate that the asbestos is likely to occur. This is particu- risk of lung cancer among exposed workers larly important in evaluating medical and who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased work histories and in conducting physical over the risk of lung cancer among non-ex- examinations. When an active employee has posed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These been identified as having been overexposed studies suggest that cessation of smoking to asbestos measures taken by the employer will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a per- to eliminate or mitigate further exposure son exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it should also lower the risk of serious long- to the same level of risk as that existing for term consequences. The employer is required to institute a an exposed worker who has never smoked. medical surveillance program for all employ- III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure-Related ees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at Disease or above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter of air). All exami- The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or nations and procedures must be performed gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure by or under the supervision of a licensed to asbestos are not unique, except that a physician, at a reasonable time and place, chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung and at no cost to the employee. cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural Although broad latitude is given to the calcification, or pleural fibrosis, and may physician in prescribing specific tests to be also show asbestosis (i.e., small irregular pa- included in the medical surveillance pro- renchymal opacities). Symptoms char- gram, OSHA requires inclusion of the fol- acteristic of mesothelioma include shortness lowing elements in the routine examination: of breath, pain in the chest or abdominal (i) Medical and work histories with special pain. Mesothelioma has a much longer aver- emphasis directed to symptoms of the res- age latency period compared with lung can- piratory system, cardiovascular system, and cer (40 years versus 15–20 years), and meso- digestive tract. thelioma is therefore more likely to be found (ii) Completion of the respiratory disease among workers who were first exposed to as- questionnaire contained in appendix D. bestos at an early age. Mesothelioma is a (iii) A physical examination including a fatal disease. chest X-ray and pulmonary function test Asbestosis is pulmonary fibrosis caused by that includes measurement of the employ- the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the ee’s forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced lungs. Symptoms include shortness of expiratory volume at one second (FEV1). breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, short- examining physician deems by sound med- ness of breath occurs even at rest. The diag- ical practice to be necessary.

590

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00600 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

The employer is required to make the pre- 3. American Heart Association, 7320 Green- scribed tests available at least annually to ville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750– those employees covered; more often than 5300 specified if recommended by the examining The American Heart Association (AHA) is physician; and upon termination of employ- a voluntary organization with 130,000 mem- ment. bers (physicians, scientists, and laypersons) The employer is required to provide the in 55 state and regional groups. AHA pro- physician with the following information: A duces a variety of publications and audio- copy of this standard and appendices; a de- visual materials about the effects of smok- scription of the employee’s duties as they re- ing on the heart. AHA also has developed a late to asbestos exposure; the employee’s guidebook for incorporating a weight-control representative level of exposure to asbestos; component into smoking cessation pro- a description of any personal protective and grams. respiratory equipment used; and information from previous medical examinations of the 4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broad- affected employee that is not otherwise way, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245– available to the physician. Making this in- 8000 formation available to the physician will aid A voluntary organization of 7,500 members in the evaluation of the employee’s health in (physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the relation to assigned duties and fitness to American Lung Association (ALA) conducts wear personal protective equipment, if re- numerous public information programs quired. about the health effects of smoking. ALA The employer is required to obtain a writ- has 59 state and 85 local units. The organiza- ten opinion from the examining physician tion actively supports legislation and infor- containing the results of the medical exam- mation campaigns for non-smokers’ rights ination; the physician’s opinion as to wheth- and provides help for smokers who want to er the employee has any detected medical quit, for example, through ‘‘Freedom From conditions that would place the employee at Smoking,’’ a self-help smoking cessation an increased risk of exposure-related disease; program. any recommended limitations on the em- 5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. De- ployee or on the use of personal protective partment of Health and Human Services, equipment; and a statement that the em- 5600 Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room ployee has been informed by the physician of 110, Rockville, Maryland 20857 the results of the medical examination and The Office on Smoking and Health (OSH) is of any medical conditions related to asbestos the Department of Health and Human Serv- exposure that require further explanation or ices’ lead agency in smoking control. OSH treatment. This written opinion must not re- has sponsored distribution of publications on veal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated smoking-related topics, such as free flyers on to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the relapse after initial quitting, helping a opinion must be provided to the affected em- friend or family member quit smoking, the ployee. health hazards of smoking, and the effects of APPENDIX J TO § 1926.1101—SMOKING CES- parental smoking on teenagers. SATION PROGRAM INFORMATION FOR ASBES- * In Hawaii, on Oahu call 524–1234 (call col- TOS—NON-MANDATORY lect from neighboring islands), Spanish-speaking staff members are avail- The following organizations provide smok- able during daytime hours to callers from ing cessation information. the following areas: California, Florida, 1. The National Cancer Institute operates a Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 201), toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS) New York, and Texas. Consult your local with trained personnel to help you. Call 1– telephone directory for listings of local chap- 800–4–CANCER * to reach the CIS office serv- ters. ing your area, or write: Office of Cancer Communications, National Cancer Institute, APPENDIX K TO § 1926.1101—POLARIZED LIGHT National Institutes of Health, Building 31 MICROSCOPY OF ASBESTOS (NON-MANDATORY) Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892. Method number: 2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree ID–191 Road, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30026, (404) Matrix: Bulk 320–3333 Collection Procedure: The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each voluntary organization composed of 58 divi- type of material and place into separate sions and 3,100 local units. Through ‘‘The 20 mL scintillation vials. Great American Smokeout’’ in November, Analytical Procedure: the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and nu- A portion of each separate phase is ana- merous educational materials, ACS helps lyzed by gross examination, phase-polar people learn about the health hazards of examination, and central stop dispersion smoking and become successful ex-smokers. microscopy.

591

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00601 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Commercial manufacturers and products Differential Counting: The term applied to mentioned in this method are for descriptive the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- use only and do not constitute endorsements bers from a phase contrast asbestos count by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from because they are not asbestos. other sources may be substituted. Fiber: A particle longer than or equal to 5 μm with a length to width ratio greater than 1. Introduction or equal to 3:1. This may include cleavage This method describes the collection and fragments. (see section 3.5 of this appendix). analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light Phase Contrast: Contrast obtained in the microscopy techniques including phase- microscope by causing light scattered by polar illumination and central-stop disper- small particles to destructively interfere sion microscopy. Some terms unique to as- with unscattered light, thereby enhancing bestos analysis are defined below: the visibility of very small particles and par- Amphibole: A family of minerals whose ticles with very low intrinsic contrast. crystals are formed by long, thin units which Phase Contrast Microscope: A microscope have two thin ribbons of double chain sili- configured with a phase mask pair to create cate with a brucite ribbon in between. The phase contrast. The technique which uses shape of each unit is similar to an ‘‘I beam’’. this is called Phase Contrast Microscopy Minerals important in asbestos analysis in- (PCM). clude cummingtonite-grunerite, crocidolite, Phase-Polar Analysis: This is the use of po- tremolite-actinolite and anthophyllite. larized light in a phase contrast microscope. Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- It is used to see the same size fibers that are brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, visible in air filter analysis. Although fibers cummingtonite-grunerite asbestos (amosite), finer than 1 μm are visible, analysis of these anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos, is inferred from analysis of larger bundles crocidolite, actinolite asbestos and any of that are usually present. these minerals which have been chemically Phase-Polar Microscope: The phase-polar treated or altered. The precise chemical for- microscope is a phase contrast microscope mulation of each species varies with the lo- which has an analyzer, a polarizer, a first cation from which it was mined. Nominal order red plate and a rotating phase con- compositions are listed: denser all in place so that the polarized light Chrysotile ...... Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4 image is enhanced by phase contrast. Crocidolite Sealing Encapsulant: This is a product (Riebeckite as- which can be applied, preferably by spraying, bestos) ...... Na2 Fe32 + Fe23 + Si8 onto an asbestos surface which will seal the O22(OH)2 surface so that fibers cannot be released. Cummingtonite- Serpentine: A mineral family consisting of Grunerite as- minerals with the general composition bestos Mg3(Si2 O5(OH)4 having the magnesium in (Amosite) ...... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 brucite layer over a silicate layer. Minerals Tremolite-Actin- important in asbestos analysis included in olite asbestos .. Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 Si8 O22(OH)2 this family are chrysotile, lizardite, Anthophyllite as- antigorite. bestos ...... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 1.1. History Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos meeting the criteria for a fiber. (See section 3.5. of Light microscopy has been used for well this Appendix) over 100 years for the determination of min- Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a eral species. This analysis is carried out fiber to its diameter usually defined as using specialized polarizing microscopes as ‘‘length : width’’, e.g. 3:1. well as bright field microscopes. The identi- Brucite: A sheet mineral with the composi- fication of minerals is an on-going process tion Mg(OH)2. with many new minerals described each Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope): year. The first recorded use of asbestos was This is a dark field microscope technique in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the mate- that images particles using only light re- rial was used in the mud wattle for the wood- fracted by the particle, excluding light that en huts the people lived in as well as travels through the particle unrefracted. strengthening for pottery. Adverse health as- This is usually accomplished with a McCrone pects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000 objective or other arrangement which places years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote a circular stop with apparent aperture equal about the poor health of slaves in the asbes- to the objective aperture in the back focal tos mines. Although known to be injurious plane of the microscope. for centuries, the first modern references to Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles its toxicity were by the British Labor formed by the comminution of minerals, es- Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust pecially those characterized by relatively from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases parallel sides and moderate aspect ratio. were described in the literature after the

592

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00602 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

turn of the century. Cancer was first sus- rangement. Amorphous materials have pected in the mid 1930’s and a causal link to atoms in random order while crystalline ma- mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of terials have long range order. Many mate- the public concern for worker and public rials are transparent to light, at least for safety with the use of this material, several small particles or for thin sections. The different types of analysis were applied to properties of these materials can be inves- the determination of asbestos content. Light tigated by the effect that the material has microscopy requires a great deal of experi- on light passing through it. The six asbestos ence and craft. Attempts were made to apply minerals are all crystalline with particular less subjective methods to the analysis. X- properties that have been identified and cat- ray diffraction was partially successful in aloged. These six minerals are anisotropic. determining the mineral types but was un- They have a regular array of atoms, but the able to separate out the fibrous portions arrangement is not the same in all direc- from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the min- tions. Each major direction of the crystal imum detection limit for asbestos analysis presents a different regularity. Light pho- by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Dif- tons travelling in each of these main direc- ferential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no tions will encounter different electrical more successful. These provide useful cor- neighborhoods, affecting the path and time roborating information when the presence of of travel. The techniques outlined in this asbestos has been shown by microscopy; method use the fact that light traveling however, neither can determine the dif- through fibers or crystals in different direc- ference between fibrous and non-fibrous min- tions will behave differently, but predict- erals when both habits are present. The same ably. The behavior of the light as it travels is true of Infrared Absorption (IR). through a crystal can be measured and com- When electron microscopy was applied to pared with known or determined values to asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were identify the mineral species. Usually, Polar- discovered present too small to be visible in ized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed any light microscope. There are two dif- with strain-free objectives on a bright-field ferent types of electron microscope used for microscope platform. This would limit the μ asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Micro- resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 m. scope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Mi- Because OSHA requires the counting and croscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Micros- identification of fibers visible in phase contrast, the phase contrast platform is used to copy is useful in identifying minerals. The visualize the fibers with the polarizing ele- SEM can provide two of the three pieces of ments added into the light path. Polarized information required to identify fibers by light methods cannot identify fibers finer electron microscopy: morphology and chem- than about 1 μm in diameter even though istry. The third is structure as determined they are visible. The finest fibers are usually by Selected Area Electron Diffraction— identified by inference from the presence of SAED which is performed in the TEM. Al- larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers though the resolution of the SEM is suffi- are present, but not identifiable by light mi- cient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy croscopy, use either SEM or TEM to deter- of chemical analysis that can be performed mine the fiber identity. on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fibers of less than 0.2 μm diameter. The TEM 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small to be resolved by light microscopy and The advantages of light microcopy are: should be used in conjunction with this (a) Basic identification of the materials method when necessary. The TEM can pro- was first performed by light microscopy and vide all three pieces of information required gross analysis. This provides a large base of for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker published information against which to check analysis and analytical technique. than 1 μm can adequately be defined in the (b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The light microscope. The light microscope re- minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fi- mains as the best instrument for the deter- brous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at mination of mineral type. This is because the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of the minerals under investigation were first analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR anal- described analytically with the light micro- ysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the scope. It is inexpensive and gives positive material is not known to be fibrous. identification for most samples analyzed. (c) The analysis is quick, requires little Further, when optical techniques are inad- preparation time, and can be performed on- equate, there is ample indication that alter- site if a suitably equipped microscope is native techniques should be used for com- available. plete identification of the sample. The disadvantages are: (a) Even using phase-polar illumination, 1.2. Principle not all the fibers present may be seen. This Minerals consist of atoms that may be ar- is a problem for very low asbestos concentra- ranged in random order or in a regular ar- tions where agglomerations or large bundles

593

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00603 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

of fibers may not be present to allow identi- 1.5. Interferences fication by inference. Any material which is long, thin, and (b) The method requires a great degree of small enough to be viewed under the micro- sophistication on the part of the scope can be considered an interference for microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as asbestos. There are literally hundreds of his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a interferences in workplaces. The techniques microscopist’s accuracy is enhanced by expe- described in this method are normally suffi- rience. The mineralogical training of the an- cient to eliminate the interferences. An ana- alyst is very important. It is the basis on lyst’s success in eliminating the inter- which subjective decisions are made. ferences depends on proper training. (c) The method uses only a tiny amount of Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral material for analysis. This may lead to sam- families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. pling bias and false results (high or low). In the serpentine family, the only common This is especially true if the sample is se- fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally, verely inhomogeneous. the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril (d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and habit with morphology similar to the not distinguishable as fibers so identifica- amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist tion cannot be made. of a score of different minerals of which only five are regulated by federal standard: 1.4. Method Performance amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos, 1.4.1. This method can be used for deter- tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos. mination of asbestos content from 0 to 100% These are the only amphibole minerals that asbestos. The detection limit has not been have been commercially exploited for their adequately determined, although for selected fibrous properties; however, the rest can and samples, the limit is very low, depending on do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit. the number of particles examined. For most- In addition to the related mineral inter- ly homogeneous, finely divided samples, with ferences, other minerals common in building no difficult fibrous interferences, the detec- material may present a problem for some tion limit is below 1%. For inhomogeneous microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite, samples (most samples), the detection limit quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollas- remains undefined. NIST has conducted pro- tonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fi- ficiency testing of laboratories on a national brous materials commonly present in work- scale. Although each round is reported sta- places are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic tistically with an average, control limits, wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar, etc., the results indicate a difficulty in es- nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon tablishing precision especially in the low fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal concentration range. It is suspected that fibers, etc. there is significant bias in the low range es- Matrix embedding material can sometimes pecially near 1%. EPA tried to remedy this be a negative interference. The analyst may by requiring a mandatory point counting not be able to easily extract the fibers from scheme for samples less than 10%. The point the matrix in order to use the method. counting procedure is tedious, and may in- Where possible, remove the matrix before troduce significant biases of its own. It has the analysis, taking careful note of the loss not been incorporated into this method. of weight. Some common matrix materials 1.4.2. The precision and accuracy of the are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, ce- quantitation tests performed in this method ment, and epoxy. A further negative inter- are unknown. Concentrations are easier to ference is that the asbestos fibers themselves determine in commercial products where as- may be either too small to be seen in Phase bestos was deliberately added because the contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low amount is usually more than a few percent. fibrous quality, having the appearance of An analyst’s results can be ‘‘calibrated’’ plant fibers. The analyst’s ability to deal against the known amounts added by the with these materials increases with experi- manufacturer. For geological samples, the ence. degree of homogeneity affects the precision. 1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure 1.4.3. The performance of the method is analyst dependent. The analyst must choose Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment. carefully and not necessarily randomly the More than 40% of the land area of the United portions for analysis to assure that detection States is composed of minerals which may of asbestos occurs when it is present. For contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual this reason, the analyst must have adequate formation of great amounts of asbestos is training in sample preparation, and experi- relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are loca- ence in the location and identification of as- tions in which environmental exposure can bestos in samples. This is usually accom- be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of plished through substantial on-the-job train- California. ing as well as formal education in min- There are thousands of uses for asbestos in eralogy and microscopy. industry and the home. Asbestos abatement

594

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00604 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

workers are the most current segment of the (c) Tightly close the sample container. population to have occupational exposure to (d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where great amounts of asbestos. If the material is the sample was taken, if necessary. undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure occurs when the asbestos-containing mate- 2.3. Sampling Procedure rial is abraded or otherwise disturbed during Samples of any suspect material should be maintenance operations or some other activ- taken from an inconspicuous place. Where ity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in the material is to remain, seal the sampling place in the United States is chrysotile. wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly potential for exposure from the sample site. all the difference. Tremolite and Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of anthophyllite make up a very small percent- material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL age. Tremolite is found in extremely small scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Ac- sure to collect samples from all layers and tinolite exposure is probably greatest from phases of material. If possible, make sepa- environmental sources, but has been identi- rate samples of each different phase of the fied in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on material. This will aid in determining the insulating materials which may have been actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES, certified as asbestos-free. PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO COLLECT SAMPLES. The use of plastic bags 1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties presents a contamination hazard to labora- The nominal chemical compositions for tory personnel and to other samples. When the asbestos minerals were given in Section these containers are opened, a bellows effect 1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the blows fibers out of the container onto every- same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a thing, including the person opening the con- high tensile strength along the fiber axis. tainer. They are chemically inert, non-combustible, If a cork-borer type sampler is available, and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile, push the tube through the material all the they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid way, so that all layers of material are sam- (HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl. pled. Some samplers are intended to be dis- Asbestos has high electrical resistance and posable. These should be capped and sent to good sound absorbing characteristics. It can the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork be woven into cables, fabrics or other tex- borer is used, empty the contents into a scin- tiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats. tillation vial and send to the laboratory. Vigorously and completely clean the cork 1.8. Toxicology (This section is for Informa- borer between samples. tion Only and Should Not Be Taken as OSHA Policy) 2.4 Shipment Possible physiologic results of respiratory Samples packed in glass vials must not exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the touch or they might break in shipment. pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis, (a) Seal the samples with a sample seal asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory over the end to guard against tampering and cancer. The possible consequences of asbes- to identify the sample. tos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Cri- (b) Package the bulk samples in separate teria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos packages from the air samples. They may Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR cross-contaminate each other and will inval- 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001. idate the results of the air samples. (c) Include identifying paperwork with the 2. Sampling Procedure samples, but not in contact with the suspected asbestos. 2.1. Equipment for sampling (d) To maintain sample accountability, (a) Tube or cork borer sampling device ship the samples by certified mail, overnight (b) Knife express, or hand carry them to the labora- (c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial tory. (d) Sealing encapsulant 3. Analysis 2.2. Safety Precautions The analysis of asbestos samples can be di- Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care vided into two major parts: sample prepara- when sampling. While in an asbestos-con- tion and microscopy. Because of the different taining atmosphere, a properly selected and asbestos uses that may be encountered by fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take the analyst, each sample may need different samples in a manner to cause the least preparation steps. The choices are outlined amount of dust. Follow these general guide- below. There are several different tests that lines: are performed to identify the asbestos spe- (a) Do not make unnecessary dust. cies and determine the percentage. They will (b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g). be explained below.

595

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00605 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

3.1. Safety (p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid, (a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods. Tetrasodium ...... 0.7 g/l If samples are received in bags, envelopes or Sodium Potassium Tartrate ...... 8.0 mg/liter other inappropriate container, open them Hydrochloric Acid ...... 99.2 g/liter only in a hood having a face velocity at or Sodium Tartrate...... 0.14 g/liter greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small (q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) ° amount to a scintillation vial and only han- (r) Hotplate capable of 60 C dle the smaller amount. (s) Balance (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the (t) Hacksaw blade (u) Ruby mortar and pestle open lab area. (c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic. 3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation Take care not to get this material on the skin. Wash immediately with soap and water Sample preparation begins with pre-prepa- if this happens. ration which may include chemical reduc- (d) Samples that have been heated in the tion of the matrix, heating the sample to muffle furnace or the drying oven may be dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The hot. Handle them with tongs until they are end result is a sample which has been re- cool enough to handle. duced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to (e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF fit under the cover slip. Analyze different (tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and be handled in an appropriate fume hood and the tile mastic should be analyzed separately according to instructions given in the Safety as the mastic may contain asbestos while Data Sheet (SDS). the tile may not. (a) Wet Samples 3.2. Equipment Samples with a high water content will not give the proper dispersion colors and must be (a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces, lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle G–22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple in the drying oven and heat at 100 °C to dry- disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red ness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotat- not submitted to the lab in glass must be re- ing position condenser with oversize phase moved and placed in glass vials or aluminum rings, central stop dispersion objective, weighing pans before placing them in the Kohler illumination and a rotating mechan- drying oven. ical stage. (b) Samples With Organic Interference—Muf- (b) Stereo microscope with reflected light fle Furnace illumination, transmitted light illumina- These may include samples with tar as a tion, polarizer, analyzer and first order red matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other or- or gypsum plate, and rotating stage. ganic that can be reduced by heating. Re- (c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo move the sample from the vial and weigh in microscope a balance to determine the weight of the sub- (d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 °C mitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle ° (e) Drying oven capable of 50–150 C furnace at 500 °C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvi- (f) Aluminum specimen pans ous organic material has been removed. Re- (g) Tongs for handling samples in the fur- trieve, cool and weigh again to determine nace the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary (h) High dispersion index of refraction oils to determine the asbestos content of the sub- (Special for dispersion staining.) mitted sample, because the analyst will be n = 1.550 looking at a reduced sample. n = 1.585 NOTE: Heating above 600 °C will cause the n = 1.590 sample to undergo a structural change n = 1.605 which, given sufficient time, will convert the n = 1.620 chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at n = 1.670 lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a n = 1.680 measurable effect on the optical properties n = 1.690 of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of (i) A set of index of refraction oils from what to expect, a sample of standard asbes- about n = 1.350 to n = 2.000 in n = 0.005 incre- tos should be heated to the same tempera- ments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) ture for the same length of time so that it (j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends can be examined for the proper interpreta- 1 × 3 inches 1mm (thick, precleaned. tion. (k) Cover Slips 22 × 22 mm, #11⁄2 (l) Paper clips or dissection needles (c) Samples With Organic Interference—THF (m) Hand grinder Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common (n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades material treated with this solvent, although, (o) 0.1 molar HCl substances containing tar will sometimes

596

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00606 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

yield to this treatment. Select a portion of about 3 mm for a good mount. If the mate- the material and then grind it up if possible. rial is very fine, less sample may be appro- Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube. priate. For non-powder samples such as fiber Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic mats, forceps should be used to transfer a matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Re- small amount of material to the slide. Stir member, THF is highly flammable. Filter the the material in the medium on the slide, remaining material through a tared silver spreading it out and making the preparation membrane, dry and weigh to determine how as uniform as possible. Place a cover-slip on much is left after the solvent extraction. the preparation by gently lowering onto the Further process the sample to remove carbonate or mount directly. slide and allowing it to fall ‘‘trapdoor’’ fash- (d) Samples With Carbonate Interference ion on the preparation to push out any bub- Carbonate material is often found on fibers bles. Press gently on the cover slip to even and sometimes must be removed in order to out the distribution of particulate on the perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a slide. If there is insufficient mounting oil on portion of the material and place it in a test the slide, one or two drops may be placed tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or near the edge of the coverslip on the slide. decalcifying solution in the tube to react all Capillary action will draw the necessary the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation; amount of liquid into the preparation. Re- i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little move excess oil with the point of a labora- more solution. If no more gas forms, the re- tory wiper. action is complete. Filter the material out Treat at least two different areas of each through a tared silver membrane, dry and phase in this fashion. Choose representative weigh to determine the weight lost. areas of the sample. It may be useful to se- 3.4. Sample Preparation lect particular areas or fibers for analysis. This is useful to identify asbestos in severely Samples must be prepared so that accurate inhomogeneous samples. determination can be made of the asbestos When it is determined that amphiboles type and amount present. The following steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a may be present, repeat the above process low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow): using the appropriate high-dispersion oils (1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard, until an identification is made or all six as- or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip, bestos minerals have been ruled out. Note the grain size must be reduced. Place a small that percent determination must be done in amount between two slides and grind the the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles material between them or grind a small tend to disappear in their matching medi- amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The ums. choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby, or diamond mortar depends on the hardness 3.5. Analytical procedure of the material. Impact damage can alter the NOTE: This method presumes some knowl- asbestos mineral if too much mechanical shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely edge of mineralogy and optical petrography. destroy the observable crystallinity of asbes- The analysis consists of three parts: The tos and should not be used). For some sam- determination of whether there is asbestos ples, a portion of material can be shaved off present, what type is present and the deter- with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grind- mination of how much is present. The gen- er or hack saw blade. eral flow of the analysis is: The preparation tools should either be dis- (1) Gross examination. posable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous (2) Examination under polarized light on scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the the stereo microscope. washing. Rinse the implements with copious amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free (3) Examination by phase-polar illumina- environment. tion on the compound phase microscope. (2) If the sample is powder or has been re- (4) Determination of species by dispersion duced as in (1) above, it is ready to mount. stain. Examination by Becke line analysis Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tis- may also be used; however, this is usually sue and write the identification on the paint- more cumbersome for asbestos determina- ed or frosted end. Place two drops of index of tion. refraction medium n = 1.550 on the slide. (5) Difficult samples may need to be ana- (The medium n = 1.550 is chosen because it is lyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from the matching index for chrysotile. Dip the those techniques combined with light mi- end of a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle croscopy for a definitive identification. into the droplet of refraction medium on the Identification of a particle as asbestos re- slide to moisten it. Then dip the probe into the powder sample. Transfer what sticks on quires that it be asbestiform. Description of the probe to the slide. The material on the particles should follow the suggestion of end of the probe should have a diameter of Campbell. (Figure 1)

597

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00607 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

For the purpose of regulation, the mineral ily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very must be one of the six minerals covered and long compared with their widths. The fibers must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large have a very high tensile strength as dem- specimen samples of asbestos generally have onstrated by bending without breaking. As- the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are eas- bestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily

598

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00608 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER10AU94.026 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

parted, show longitudinal fine structure and venience. Examine with the polarizing stereo may be tufted at the ends showing ‘‘bundle microscope. Estimate the percentage of as- of sticks’’ morphology. In the microscope bestos based on the amount of birefringent some of these properties may not be observ- fiber present. able. Amphiboles do not always show stri- (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar ations along their length even when they are microscopes at magnifications of 160 and 400 asbestos. Neither will they always show tuft- × . Note the morphology of the fibers. Long, ing. They generally do not show a curved na- thin, very straight fibers with little cur- ture except for very long fibers. Asbestos and vature are indicative of fibers from the asbestiform minerals are usually character- amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are ized in groups by extremely high aspect ra- usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate tios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar analysis is useful for characterizing popu- microscope under conditions of crossed lations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller individual fibers of intermediate to short as- than 1.0 μm in thickness must be identified pect ratio. Observation of many fibers is by inference to the presence of larger, identi- often necessary to determine whether a sam- fiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fi- ple consists of ‘‘cleavage fragments’’ or of as- bers are visible, electron microscopy should bestos fibers. be performed. At this point, only a tentative Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos identification can be made. Full identifica- minerals are easily distinguishable from true tion must be made with dispersion micros- asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage copy. Details of the tests are included in the fragments usually have larger diameters appendices. than 1 μm. Internal structure of particles (4) Once fibers have been determined to be larger than this usually shows them to have present, they must be identified. Adjust the no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, microscope for dispersion mode and observe cleavage fragments of the monoclinic the fibers. The microscope has a rotating amphiboles show inclined extinction under stage, one polarizing element, and a system crossed polars with no compensator. Asbes- for generating dark-field dispersion micros- tos fibers usually show extinction at zero de- copy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align grees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. a fiber with its length parallel to the polar- Morphologically, the larger cleavage frag- izer and note the color of the Becke lines. ments are obvious by their blunt or stepped Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they perpendicular to the polarizer and note the tend to be acicular rather than filiform. color. Repeat this process for every fiber or Where the particles are less than 1 μm in fiber bundle examined. The colors must be diameter and have an aspect ratio greater consistent with the colors generated by than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that standard asbestos reference materials for a the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if positive identification. In n = 1.550, there is any question whether the fibers are amphiboles will generally show a yellow to cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber Care must be taken when analyzing by indices of refraction are higher than the liq- electron microscopy because the inter- uid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the col- ferences are different from those in light mi- ors are yellow, prepare further slides as croscopy and may structurally be very simi- above in the suggested matching liquids list- lar to asbestos. The classic interference is ed below: between anthophyllite and biopyribole or intermediate fiber. Use the same morpho- Type of asbestos Index of refraction logical clues for electron microscopy as are used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril split- Chrysotile ...... n = 1.550. Amosite ...... n = 1.670 or 1.680. ting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, Crocidolite ...... n = 1.690. curvature, etc. Anthophyllite ...... n = 1.605 and 1.620. (1) Gross examination: Tremolite ...... n = 1.605 and 1.620. Examine the sample, preferably in the Actinolite ...... n = 1.620. glass vial. Determine the presence of any obvious fibrous component. Estimate a per- Where more than one liquid is suggested, centage based on previous experience and the first is preferred; however, in some cases current observation. Determine whether any this liquid will not give good dispersion pre-preparation is necessary. Determine the color. Take care to avoid interferences in the number of phases present. This step may be other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n = 1.620 carried out or augmented by observation at will give the same colors as tremolite. In n 6 to 40 × under a stereo microscope. = 1.605 wollastonite will appear yellow in all (2) After performing any necessary pre- directions. Wollastonite may be determined preparation, prepare slides of each phase as under crossed polars as it will change from described above. Two preparations of the blue to yellow as it is rotated along its fiber same phase in the same index medium can be axis by tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos made side-by-side on the same glass for con- minerals will not change in this way.

599

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00609 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Determination of the angle of extinction Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains may, when present, aid in the determination after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl. of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbes- Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines tos fibers usually have 0° extinction or am- that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbes- biguous extinction, while cleavage fragments tos. have more definite extinction. The reported result is: Continue analysis until both preparations R = (Microvisual result in percent) × (Frac- have been examined and all present species tion remaining after step 2) × (Fraction re- of asbestos are identified. If there are no fi- maining of original sample after step 1) bers present, or there is less than 0.1% R = (5) × (.30) × (.60) = 0.9% present, end the analysis with the minimum (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos number of slides (2). present. For samples where asbestos was (5) Some fibers have a coating on them identified, but is less than 1.0%, report ‘‘As- which makes dispersion microscopy very dif- bestos present, less than 1.0%.’’ There must ficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or have been at least two observed fibers or electron microscopy may be performed in fiber bundles in the two preparations to be those cases. Determine the percentage by reported as present. For samples where as- light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to bestos was not seen, report as ‘‘None De- overestimate the actual percentage present. tected.’’ (6) Percentage determination is an estimate of occluded area, tempered by gross ob- Auxiliary Information servation. Gross observation information is used to make sure that the high magnifica- Because of the subjective nature of asbes- tion microscopy does not greatly over- or tos analysis, certain concepts and procedures underestimate the amount of fiber present. need to be discussed in more depth. This information will help the analyst understand This part of the analysis requires a great why some of the procedures are carried out deal of experience. Satisfactory models for the way they are. asbestos content analysis have not yet been developed, although some models based on 4.1. Light metallurgical grain-size determination have found some utility. Estimation is more eas- Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels ily handled in situations where the grain from its source in packets called quanta. It sizes visible at about 160 × are about the is instructive to consider light as a plane same and the sample is relatively homo- wave. The light has a direction of travel. geneous. Perpendicular to this and mutually perpen- View all of the area under the cover slip to dicular to each other, are two vector compo- make the percentage determination. View nents. One is the magnetic vector and the the fields while moving the stage, paying at- other is the electric vector. We shall only be tention to the clumps of material. These are concerned with the electric vector. In this not usually the best areas to perform disper- description, the interaction of the vector and sion microscopy because of the interference the mineral will describe all the observable from other materials. But, they are the areas phenomena. From a light source such a mi- most likely to represent the accurate per- croscope illuminator, light travels in all different direction from the filament. centage in the sample. Small amounts of as- In any given direction away from the fila- bestos require slower scanning and more fre- ment, the electric vector is perpendicular to quent analysis of individual fields. the direction of travel of a light ray. While Report the area occluded by asbestos as perpendicular, its orientation is random the concentration. This estimate does not about the travel axis. If the electric vectors generally take into consideration the dif- from all the light rays were lined up by pass- ference in density of the different species ing the light through a filter that would only present in the sample. For most samples this let light rays with electric vectors oriented is adequate. Simulation studies with similar in one direction pass, the light would then be materials must be carried out to apply POLARIZED. microvisual estimation for that purpose and Polarized light interacts with matter in is beyond the scope of this procedure. the direction of the electric vector. This is (7) Where successive concentrations have the polarization direction. Using this prop- been made by chemical or physical means, erty it is possible to use polarized light to the amount reported is the percentage of the probe different materials and identify them material in the ‘‘as submitted’’ or original by how they interact with light. state. The percentage determined by micros- The speed of light in a vacuum is a con- copy is multiplied by the fractions remain- stant at about 2.99 × 108 m/s. When light trav- ing after pre-preparation steps to give the els in different materials such as air, water, percentage in the original sample. For exam- minerals or oil, it does not travel at this ple: speed. It travels slower. This slowing is a Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 °C function of both the material through which for 1 h. the light is traveling and the wavelength or

600

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00610 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

frequency of the light. In general, the more They are called ‘‘length-slow’’. This orienta- dense the material, the slower the light trav- tion to fiber length is used to aid in the iden- els. Also, generally, the higher the fre- tification of asbestos. quency, the slower the light will travel. The ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to 4.3. Polarized Light Technique that in a material is called the index of re- Polarized light microscopy as described in fraction (n). It is usually measured at 589 nm this section uses the phase-polar microscope (the sodium D line). If white light (light con- described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast taining all the visible wavelengths) travels through a material, rays of longer wave- microscope is fitted with two polarizing ele- lengths will travel faster than those of short- ments, one below and one above the sample. er wavelengths, this separation is called dis- The polarizers have their polarization direc- persion. Dispersion is used as an identifier of tions at right angles to each other. Depend- materials as described in Section 4.6. ing on the tests performed, there may be a compensator between these two polarizing 4.2. Material Properties elements. A compensator is a piece of mineral with known properties that ‘‘com- Materials are either amorphous or crys- pensates’’ for some deficiency in the optical talline. The difference between these two de- train. Light emerging from a polarizing ele- scriptions depends on the positions of the ment has its electric vector pointing in the atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous ma- polarization direction of the element. The terials are randomly arranged with no long light will not be subsequently transmitted range order. An example of an amorphous material is glass. The atoms in crystalline through a second element set at a right materials, on the other hand, are in regular angle to the first element. Unless the light is arrays and have long range order. Most of altered as it passes from one element to the the atoms can be found in highly predictable other, there is no transmission of light. locations. Examples of crystalline material 4.4. Angle of Extinction are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. It is beyond the scope of this method to de- Crystals which have different crystal regu- scribe the different types of crystalline ma- larity in two or three main directions are terials that can be found, or the full descrip- said to be anisotropic. They have a different tion of the classes into which they can fall. index of refraction in each of the main direc- However, some general crystallography is tions. When such a crystal is inserted be- provided below to give a foundation to the tween the crossed polars, the field of view is procedures described. no longer dark but shows the crystal in With the exception of anthophyllite, all color. The color depends on the properties of the asbestos minerals belong to the the crystal. The light acts as if it travels monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the through the crystal along the optical axes. If basic repeating unit of the crystal and for a crystal optical axis were lined up along one monoclinic crystals can be described as hav- of the polarizing directions (either the polar- ° ing three unequal sides, two 90 angles and izer or the analyzer) the light would appear ° one angle not equal to 90 . The orthorhombic to travel only in that direction, and it would group, of which anthophyllite is a member blink out or go dark. The difference in de- ° has three unequal sides and three 90 angles. grees between the fiber direction and the The unequal sides are a consequence of the angle at which it blinks out is called the complexity of fitting the different atoms angle of extinction. When this angle can be into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in measured, it is useful in identifying the min- a regular array, that array is not symmet- eral. The procedure for measuring the angle rical in all directions. There is long range of extinction is to first identify the polariza- order in the three major directions of the crystal. However, the order is different in tion direction in the microscope. A commer- each of the three directions. This has the ef- cial alignment slide can be used to establish fect that the index of refraction is different the polarization directions or use in each of the three directions. Using polar- anthophyllite or another suitable mineral. ized light, we can investigate the index of re- This mineral has a zero degree angle of ex- fraction in each of the directions and iden- tinction and will go dark to extinction as it tify the mineral or material under investiga- aligns with the polarization directions. When tion. The indices a, b, and g are used to iden- a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinc- tify the lowest, middle, and highest index of tion, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule refraction respectively. The x direction, as- with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as sociated with a is called the fast axis. Con- to the direction of polarization in the field of versely, the z direction is associated with g view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has a in this position so it will not shift. along the fiber length making it ‘‘length- After the polarization direction has been fast’’. The remainder of the asbestos min- identified in the field of view, move the par- erals have the g axis along the fiber length. ticle of interest to the center of the field of 601

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00611 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1101 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

view and align it with the polarization direc- used for this test is a gypsum plate of known tion. For fibers, align the fiber along this di- thickness and birefringence. Such a compen- rection. Note the angular reading of the ro- sator when oriented at 45° to the polarizer di- tating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate rection, provides a retardation of 530 nm of the stage until the fiber goes dark or ‘‘blinks the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances out’’. Again note the reading of the stage. the red color and gives the background a The difference in the first reading and the characteristic red to red-magenta color. If second is an angle of extinction. this ‘‘full-wave’’ compensator is in place The angle measured may vary as the ori- when the asbestos preparation is inserted entation of the fiber changes about its long into the light train, the colors seen on the fi- axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually re- bers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbes- port the maximum angle of extinction. As- tos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a bestos forming minerals, when they exhibit fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same an angle of extinction, usually do show an direction as the fast axis of the gypsum angle of extinction close to the reported plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction maximum, or as appropriate depending on is retarded by both the asbestos and the gyp- the substitution chemistry. sum. This results in a higher retardation than would be present for either of the two 4.5. Crossed Polars with Compensator minerals. The color seen is a second order When the optical axes of a crystal are not blue. When the fiber is rotated 90° using the lined up along one of the polarizing direc- rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber tions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) is now aligned with the fast direction of the part of the light travels along one axis and gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is part travels along the other visible axis. This aligned with the slow direction of the gyp- is characteristic of birefringent materials. sum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast The color depends on the difference of the direction of the gypsum, and slower in the two visible indices of refraction and the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will thickness of the crystal. The maximum dif- vibrate slower in the slow direction of the ference available is the difference between gypsum and faster in the fast direction of the a and the g axes. This maximum dif- the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtrac- ference is usually tabulated as the tive and the color seen is a first order yel- birefringence of the crystal. low. As long as the fiber thickness does not For this test, align the fiber at 45° to the add appreciably to the color, the same basic polarization directions in order to maximize colors will be seen for all asbestos types ex- the contribution to each of the optical axes. cept crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors The colors seen are called retardation colors. will be weaker, may be in the opposite direc- They arise from the recombination of light tions, and will be altered by the blue absorp- which has traveled through the two separate tion color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of directions of the crystal. One of the rays is other materials will give the same colors as retarded behind the other since the light in asbestos, and therefore, this test is not defin- that direction travels slower. On recombina- itive for asbestos. The test is useful in dis- tion, some of the colors which make up criminating against fiberglass or other white light are enhanced by constructive in- amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fi- terference and some are suppressed by de- bers. Certain synthetic fibers will show re- structive interference. The result is a color tardation colors different than asbestos; dependent on the difference between the in- however, there are some forms of poly- dices and the thickness of the crystal. The ethylene and aramid which will show mor- proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations phology and retardation colors similar to as- are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three bestos minerals. This test must be supple- items, retardation, thickness and mented with a positive identification test birefringence are related by the following re- when birefringent fibers are present which lationship: can not be excluded by morphology. This R = t(nγ¥nα) test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers R = retardation, t = crystal thickness in μm, less than 1 μm in diameter. For positive con- and firmation TEM or SEM should be used if no nα,γ = indices of refraction. larger bundles or fibers are visible. Examination of the equation for asbestos 4.6. Dispersion Staining minerals reveals that the visible colors for almost all common asbestos minerals and Dispersion microscopy or dispersion stain- fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The ing is the method of choice for the identi- eye is relatively poor at discriminating dif- fication of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke ferent shades of gray. It is very good at dis- line analysis is used by some laboratories criminating different colors. In order to and yields the same results as does disper- compensate for the low retardation, a com- sion staining for asbestos and can be used in pensator is added to the light train between lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion stain- the polarization elements. The compensator ing is performed on the same platform as the

602

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00612 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1101

phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and note the color. Both colors must be con- compensator removed. One polarizing ele- sistent with standard asbestos minerals in ment remains to define the direction of the the correct direction for a positive identi- light so that the different indices of refrac- fication of asbestos. If only one of the colors tion of the fibers may be separately deter- is correct while the other is not, the identi- mined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field fication is not positive. If the colors in both technique when used for asbestos. Particles directions are bluish-white, the analyst has are imaged with scattered light. Light which chosen a matching index oil which is higher is unscattered is blocked from reaching the than the correct matching oil, e.g. the ana- eye either by the back field image mask in a lyst has used n = 1.620 where chrysotile is McCrone objective or a back field image present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.) mask in the phase condenser. The most con- should be used to prepare another specimen. venient method is to use the rotating phase If the color in both directions is yellow- condenser to move an oversized phase ring white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates into place. The ideal size for this ring is for that the index of the oil is lower than the the central disk to be just larger than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in objective entry aperture as viewed in the n = 1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Se- back focal plane. The larger the disk, the lect the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and pre- less scattered light reaches the eye. This will pare another slide. Continue in this fashion have the effect of diminishing the intensity until a positive identification of all asbestos of dispersion color and will shift the actual species present has been made or all possible color seen. The colors seen vary even on mi- asbestos species have been ruled out by nega- croscopes from the same manufacturer. This tive results in this test. Certain plant fibers is due to the different bands of wavelength can have similar dispersion colors as asbes- exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask tos. Take care to note and evaluate the mor- may either reside in the condenser or in the phology of the fibers or remove the plant fi- objective back focal plane. It is imperative bers in pre-preparation. Coating material on that the analyst determine by experimen- the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may de- tation with asbestos standards what the ap- stroy the dispersion color. Usually, there propriate colors should be for each asbestos will be some outcropping of fiber which will type. The colors depend also on the tempera- show the colors sufficient for identification. ture of the preparation and the exact chem- When this is not the case, treat the sample istry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight as described in Section 3.3. and then perform differences from the standards should be al- dispersion staining. Some samples will yield lowed. This is not a serious problem for com- to Becke line analysis if they are coated or mercial asbestos uses. This technique is used electron microscopy can be used for identi- for identification of the indices of refraction fication. for fibers by recognition of color. There is no direct numerical readout of the index of re- 5. References fraction. Correlation of color to actual index 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, OSHA meth- of refraction is possible by referral to pub- od ID160, Revised November 1992. lished conversion tables. This is not nec- 5.2. Ford, W.E., Dana’s Textbook of Min- essary for the analysis of asbestos. Recogni- eralogy; Fourth Ed.; John Wiley and Son, tion of appropriate colors along with the New York, 1950, p. vii. proper morphology are deemed sufficient to 5.3. Selikoff, I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978, Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and pp. 3,20. XRD may be required to provide additional 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. Annual Re- information in order to identify other types port for 1898, H.M. Statistical Office, Lon- of asbestos. don, p. 170 (1898). Make a preparation in the suspected 5.5. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n = 1.550 Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978, for chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests pp. 26,30. to determine whether the fibers are 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate birefringent or not. Take note of the mor- Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties, phological character. Wavy fibers are indic- United States Department of the Interior, ative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, Bureau of Mines, Information Circular frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole as- 8751, 1977. bestos. This can aid in the selection of the 5.7. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations, 29 appropriate matching oil. The microscope is CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.58. set up and the polarization direction is noted 5.8. National Emission Standards for Hazardous as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the po- Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revision, larization direction. Note the color. This is FEDERAL REGISTER, Vol. 55, No. 224, 20 No- the color parallel to the polarizer. Then ro- vember 1990, p. 48410. tate the fiber rotating the stage 90° so that 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Defini- the polarization direction is across the fiber. tions, Description, Modes of Formation, Phys- This is the perpendicular position. Again ical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk

603

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00613 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1102 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

to the Mining Community, Nation Bureau of § 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4- Standards Special Publication, Wash- Nitrobiphenyl, etc.). ington, DC, 1977. 5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and Endemic NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, J. struction work under this section are iden- Occ Medicine, 1981, 23,(8),548–550. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos—1972, chapter. U.S. Department of Health Education and [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Oc- § 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine. cupational Safety and Health, HSM–72– 10267. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 5.12. Campbell,W.J., et al, Relationship of struction work under this section are iden- Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, United chapter. States Department of the Interior, Bureau [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] of Mines, Information Circular 8367, 1979. 5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver, § 1926.1105 [Reserved] private communication, July 1987. 5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J., § 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether. Rock Forming Minerals, Longman, Thetford, UK, 1974. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; Third Ed. struction work under this section are iden- McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and Other chapter. Hydrous Pyriboles—Mineralogy, Reviews in [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Mineralogy, Vol 9A, Michigan, 1982, pp 1– 102. § 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene 5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- (and its salts). croscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, ACS Symposium Series, No. 120, NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Analytical Techniques in Occupational struction work under this section are iden- Health Chemistry, 1979. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone chapter. Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] 5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Re- search Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, § 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether. 1987. 5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refrac- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tive Indices from Dispersion Staining struction work under this section are iden- Data, The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other chapter. Health Related Silicates, ASTM Technical [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Publication 834, ASTM, Philadelphia 1982. 5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H. § 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine. (Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of As- bestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, pp. 93– NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 101, SME-AIME, 1981. struction work under this section are iden- 5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbes- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this tos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and chapter. Hazards, pp. 45–67 Wiley, 1979. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] [51 FR 22756, June 20, 1986] § 1926.1110 Benzidine. EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tations affecting § 1926.1101, see the List of struction work under this section are iden- CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this Finding Aids section of the printed volume chapter. and at www.govinfo.gov. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpretation of term. § 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1002 of this tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]

604

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00614 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1124

§ 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. (2) This standard does not apply to articles, as defined in the Hazard Com- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- munication standard (HCS) (29 CFR tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this 1910.1200(c)), that contain beryllium chapter. and that the employer does not process. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] (3) This standard does not apply to § 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone. materials containing less than 0.1% beryllium by weight where the employer NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- has objective data demonstrating that tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this employee exposure to beryllium will chapter. remain below the action level as an 8- hour TWA under any foreseeable condi- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] tions. § 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. (b) Definitions. As used in this standard: NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Action level means a concentration of struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this airborne beryllium of 0.1 micrograms 3 chapter. per cubic meter of air (μg/m ) calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted av- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] erage (TWA). § 1926.1115 4- Airborne exposure and airborne expo- Dimethylaminoazobenzene. sure to beryllium mean the exposure to airborne beryllium that would occur if NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- the employee were not using a res- struction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this pirator. chapter. Assistant Secretary means the Assist- ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] tional Safety and Health, United § 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. States Department of Labor, or designee. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Beryllium lymphocyte proliferation test struction work under this section are iden- (BeLPT) means the measurement of tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. blood lymphocyte proliferation in a laboratory test when lymphocytes are [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] challenged with a soluble beryllium salt. § 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. CBD diagnostic center means a med- NOTE: The requirements applicable to conical diagnostic center that has an on- struction work under this section are iden- site pulmonary specialist and on-site tical to those set forth at § 1910.1017 of this facilities to perform a clinical evalua- chapter. tion for the presence of chronic beryl- [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] lium disease (CBD). This evaluation must include pulmonary function test- § 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic. ing (as outlined by the American Tho- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- racic Society criteria), bronchoalveolar struction work under this section are iden- lavage (BAL), and transbronchial bi- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1018 of this opsy. The CBD diagnostic center must chapter. also have the capacity to transfer BAL [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] samples to a laboratory for appropriate diagnostic testing within 24 hours. The § 1926.1124 Beryllium. on-site pulmonary specialist must be (a) Scope and application. (1) This able to interpret the biopsy pathology standard applies to occupational expo- and the BAL diagnostic test results. sure to beryllium in all forms, com- Chronic beryllium disease (CBD) means pounds, and mixtures in construction, a chronic lung disease associated with except those articles and materials ex- airborne exposure to beryllium. empted by paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) Competent person means an individual of this standard. who is capable of identifying existing

605

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00615 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1124 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

and foreseeable beryllium hazards in cess of 0.2 μg/m3 calculated as an 8-hour the workplace and who has authoriza- TWA. tion to take prompt corrective meas- (2) Short-term exposure limit (STEL). ures to eliminate or minimize them. The employer must ensure that no em- The competent person must have the ployee is exposed to an airborne con- knowledge, ability, and authority nec- centration of beryllium in excess of 2.0 essary to fulfill the responsibilities set μg/m3 as determined over a sampling forth in paragraph (e) of this standard. period of 15 minutes. Confirmed positive means the person (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General. tested has beryllium sensitization, as The employer must assess the airborne indicated by two abnormal BeLPT test exposure of each employee who is or results, an abnormal and a borderline may reasonably be expected to be ex- test result, or three borderline test re- posed to airborne beryllium in accord- sults. It also means the result of a ance with either the performance op- more reliable and accurate test indi- tion in paragraph (d)(2) or the sched- cating a person has been identified as uled monitoring option in paragraph having beryllium sensitization. (d)(3) of this standard. Director means the Director of the (2) Performance option. The employer National Institute for Occupational must assess the 8-hour TWA exposure Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De- and the 15-minute short-term exposure partment of Health and Human Serv- for each employee on the basis of any ices, or designee. combination of air monitoring data Emergency means any uncontrolled and objective data sufficient to accu- release of airborne beryllium. rately characterize airborne exposure High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) to beryllium. filter means a filter that is at least 99.97 (3) Scheduled monitoring option. (i) The percent efficient in removing particles employer must perform initial moni- 0.3 micrometers in diameter. toring to assess the 8-hour TWA expo- Objective data means information, sure for each employee on the basis of such as air monitoring data from in- one or more personal breathing zone dustry-wide surveys or calculations air samples that reflect the airborne based on the composition of a sub- exposure of employees on each shift, stance, demonstrating airborne expo- for each job classification, and in each sure to beryllium associated with a work area. particular product or material or a spe- (ii) The employer must perform ini- cific process, task, or activity. The tial monitoring to assess the short- data must reflect workplace conditions term exposure from 15-minute personal closely resembling or with a higher air- breathing zone air samples measured in borne exposure potential than the proc- operations that are likely to produce esses, types of material, control meth- airborne exposure above the STEL for ods, work practices, and environmental each work shift, for each job classifica- conditions in the employer’s current tion, and in each work area. operations. (iii) Where several employees per- Physician or other licensed health care form the same tasks on the same shift professional (PLHCP) means an indi- and in the same work area, the em- vidual whose legally permitted scope of ployer may sample a representative practice (i.e., license, registration, or fraction of these employees in order to certification) allows the individual to meet the requirements of paragraph independently provide or be delegated (d)(3). In representative sampling, the the responsibility to provide some or employer must sample the employee(s) all of the health care services required expected to have the highest airborne by paragraph (k) of this standard. exposure to beryllium. This standard means this beryllium (iv) If initial monitoring indicates standard, 29 CFR 1926.1124. that airborne exposure is below the ac- (c) Permissible Exposure Limits tion level and at or below the STEL, (PELs)—(1) Time-weighted average the employer may discontinue moni- (TWA) PEL. The employer must ensure toring for those employees whose air- that no employee is exposed to an airborne exposure is represented by such borne concentration of beryllium in ex- monitoring.

606

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00616 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1124

(v) Where the most recent exposure to an accuracy of plus or minus 25 per- monitoring indicates that airborne ex- cent within a statistical confidence posure is at or above the action level level of 95 percent for airborne con- but at or below the TWA PEL, the em- centrations at or above the action ployer must repeat such monitoring level. within six months of the most recent (6) Employee notification of assessment monitoring. results. (i) Within 15 working days after (vi) Where the most recent exposure completing an exposure assessment in monitoring indicates that airborne ex- accordance with paragraph (d) of this posure is above the TWA PEL, the em- standard, the employer must notify ployer must repeat such monitoring each employee whose airborne expo- within three months of the most recent sure is represented by the assessment 8-hour TWA exposure monitoring. of the results of that assessment indi- (vii) Where the most recent (non-ini- vidually in writing or post the results tial) exposure monitoring indicates in an appropriate location that is ac- that airborne exposure is below the action level, the employer must repeat cessible to each of these employees. such monitoring within six months of (ii) Whenever an exposure assessment the most recent monitoring until two indicates that airborne exposure is consecutive measurements, taken 7 or above the TWA PEL or STEL, the em- more days apart, are below the action ployer must describe in the written no- level, at which time the employer may tification the corrective action being discontinue 8-hour TWA exposure mon- taken to reduce airborne exposure to or itoring for those employees whose ex- below the exposure limit(s) exceeded posure is represented by such moni- where feasible corrective action exists toring, except as otherwise provided in but had not been implemented when paragraph (d)(4) of this standard. the monitoring was conducted. (viii) Where the most recent exposure (7) Observation of monitoring. (i) The monitoring indicates that airborne ex- employer must provide an opportunity posure is above the STEL, the em- to observe any exposure monitoring re- ployer must repeat such monitoring quired by this standard to each em- within three months of the most recent ployee whose airborne exposure is short-term exposure monitoring until measured or represented by the moni- two consecutive measurements, taken toring and each employee’s representa- 7 or more days apart, are below the tive(s). STEL, at which time the employer (ii) When observation of monitoring may discontinue short-term exposure requires entry into an area where the monitoring for those employees whose use of personal protective clothing or exposure is represented by such moni- equipment (which may include res- toring, except as otherwise provided in pirators) is required, the employer paragraph (d)(4) of this standard. must provide each observer with appro- (4) Reassessment of exposure. The em- priate personal protective clothing and ployer must reassess airborne exposure equipment at no cost to the observer. whenever a change in the production, (iii) The employer must ensure that process, control equipment, personnel, each observer follows all other applica- or work practices may reasonably be ble safety and health procedures. expected to result in new or additional airborne exposure at or above the ac- (e) Competent person. Wherever em- tion level or STEL, or when the employees are, or can reasonably be ex- ployer has any reason to believe that pected to be, exposed to airborne beryl- new or additional airborne exposure at lium at levels above the TWA PEL or or above the action level or STEL has STEL, the employer must designate a occurred. competent person to (5) Methods of sample analysis. The (1) Make frequent and regular inspec- employer must ensure that all air mon- tions of job sites, materials, and equip- itoring samples used to satisfy the ment; monitoring requirements of paragraph (2) Implement the written exposure (d) of this standard are evaluated by a control plan under paragraph (f) of this laboratory that can measure beryllium standard;

607

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00617 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1124 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(3) Ensure that all employees use res- result, in new or additional airborne piratory protection in accordance with exposure to beryllium; paragraph (g) of this standard; and (B) The employer is notified that an (4) Ensure that all employees use per- employee is eligible for medical re- sonal protective clothing and equip- moval in accordance with paragraph ment in accordance with paragraph (h) (l)(1) of this standard, referred for eval- of this standard. uation at a CBD diagnostic center, or (f) Methods of compliance—(1) Written shows signs or symptoms associated exposure control plan. (i) The employer with airborne exposure to or dermal must establish, implement, and main- contact with beryllium; or tain a written exposure control plan, (C) The employer has any reason to which must contain: believe that new or additional airborne (A) A list of operations and job titles exposure is occurring or will occur. reasonably expected to involve air- (iii) The employer must make a copy borne exposure to or dermal contact of the written exposure control plan with beryllium; accessible to each employee who is, or (B) A list of operations and job titles can reasonably be expected to be, ex- reasonably expected to involve air- posed to airborne beryllium in accord- borne exposure at or above the action ance with OSHA’s Access to Employee level; Exposure and Medical Records (Records (C) A list of operations and job titles Access) standard (29 CFR 1910.1020(e)). reasonably expected to involve air- (2) Engineering and work practice con- borne exposure above the TWA PEL or trols. (i) Where exposures are, or can STEL; reasonably be expected to be, at or (D) Procedures for minimizing cross- above the action level, the employer contamination; must ensure that at least one of the (E) Procedures for minimizing the following is in place to reduce airborne migration of beryllium within or to lo- exposure: cations outside the workplace; (A) Material and/or process substi- (F) A list of engineering controls, tution; work practices, and respiratory protec- (B) Isolation, such as ventilated par- tion required by paragraph (f)(2) of this tial or full enclosures; standard; (G) A list of personal protective (C) Local exhaust ventilation, such clothing and equipment required by as at the points of operation, material paragraph (h) of this standard; handling, and transfer; or (H) Procedures for removing, laun- (D) Process control, such as wet dering, storing, cleaning, repairing, methods and automation. and disposing of beryllium-contami- (ii) An employer is exempt from nated personal protective clothing and using the controls listed in paragraph equipment, including respirators; and (f)(2)(i) of this standard to the extent (I) Procedures used to restrict access that: to work areas when airborne exposures (A) The employer can establish that are, or can reasonably be expected to such controls are not feasible; or be, above the TWA PEL or STEL, to (B) The employer can demonstrate minimize the number of employees ex- that airborne exposure is below the ac- posed to airborne beryllium and their tion level, using no fewer than two rep- level of exposure, including exposures resentative personal breathing zone generated by other employers or sole samples taken at least 7 days apart, for proprietors. each affected operation. (ii) The employer must review and (iii) If airborne exposure exceeds the evaluate the effectiveness of each writ- TWA PEL or STEL after implementing ten exposure control plan at least an- the control(s) required by paragraph nually and update it, as necessary, (f)(2)(i) of this standard, the employer when: must implement additional or en- (A) Any change in production proc- hanced engineering and work practice esses, materials, equipment, personnel, controls to reduce airborne exposure to work practices, or control methods re- or below the exposure limit(s) exceed- sults, or can reasonably be expected to ed.

608

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00618 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1124

(iv) Wherever the employer dem- (i) Respiratory protection is required onstrates that it is not feasible to re- by this standard; duce airborne exposure to or below the (ii) An employee entitled to such res- PELs by the engineering and work piratory protection requests a PAPR; practice controls required by para- and graphs (f)(2)(i) and (f)(2)(iii), the em- (iii) The PAPR provides adequate ployer must implement and maintain protection to the employee in accord- engineering and work practice controls ance with paragraph (g)(2) of this to reduce airborne exposure to the low- standard. est levels feasible and supplement (h) Personal protective clothing and these controls by using respiratory equipment—(1) Provision and use. The protection in accordance with para- employer must provide at no cost, and graph (g) of this standard. (3) Prohibition of rotation. The em- ensure that each employee uses, appro- ployer must not rotate employees to priate personal protective clothing and different jobs to achieve compliance equipment in accordance with the writ- with the PELs. ten exposure control plan required (g) Respiratory protection—(1) General. under paragraph (f)(1) of this standard The employer must provide respiratory and OSHA’s Personal Protective and protection at no cost to the employee Life Saving Equipment standards for and ensure that each employee uses construction (29 CFR part 1926 Subpart respiratory protection: E): (i) During periods necessary to in- (i) Where airborne exposure exceeds, stall or implement feasible engineering or can reasonably be expected to ex- and work practice controls where air- ceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; or borne exposure exceeds, or can reason- (ii) Where there is a reasonable ex- ably be expected to exceed, the TWA pectation of dermal contact with beryl- PEL or STEL; lium. (ii) During operations, including (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em- maintenance and repair activities and ployer must ensure that each employee non-routine tasks, when engineering removes all beryllium-contaminated and work practice controls are not fea- personal protective clothing and equip- sible and airborne exposure exceeds, or ment at the end of the work shift, at can reasonably be expected to exceed, the completion of tasks involving be- the TWA PEL or STEL; ryllium, or when personal protective (iii) During operations for which an clothing or equipment becomes visibly employer has implemented all feasible contaminated with beryllium, which- engineering and work practice controls ever comes first. when such controls are not sufficient (ii) The employer must ensure that to reduce airborne exposure to or below each employee removes beryllium-con- the TWA PEL or STEL; taminated personal protective clothing (iv) During emergencies; and and equipment as specified in the writ- (v) When an employee who is eligible ten exposure control plan required by for medical removal under paragraph (l)(1) chooses to remain in a job with paragraph (f)(1) of this standard. airborne exposure at or above the ac- (iii) The employer must ensure that tion level, as permitted by paragraph each employee stores and keeps beryl- (l)(2)(ii) of this standard. lium-contaminated personal protective (2) Respiratory protection program. clothing and equipment separate from Where this standard requires an em- street clothing and that storage facili- ployer to provide respiratory protec- ties prevent cross-contamination as tion, the selection and use of such res- specified in the written exposure con- piratory protection must be in accord- trol plan required by paragraph (f)(1) of ance with the Respiratory Protection this standard. standard (29 CFR 1910.134). (iv) The employer must ensure that (3) The employer must provide at no no employee removes beryllium-con- cost to the employee a powered air-pu- taminated personal protective clothing rifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a or equipment from the workplace, ex- negative pressure respirator when cept for employees authorized to do so

609

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00619 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1124 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

for the purposes of laundering, clean- (2) Change rooms. In addition to the ing, maintaining or disposing of beryl- requirements of paragraph (i)(1)(i) of lium-contaminated personal protective this standard, the employer must pro- clothing and equipment at an appro- vide employees required to use per- priate location or facility away from sonal protective clothing by this stand- the workplace. ard with a designated change room in (v) When personal protective clothing accordance with this standard and the or equipment required by this standard Sanitation standard (§ 1926.51) where is removed from the workplace for employees are required to remove their laundering, cleaning, maintenance or personal clothing. disposal, the employer must ensure (3) Eating and drinking areas. Wher- that personal protective clothing and ever the employer allows employees to equipment are stored and transported consume food or beverages at a work- in sealed bags or other closed con- site where beryllium is present, the tainers that are impermeable and are employer must ensure that: labeled in accordance with paragraph (i) Surfaces in eating and drinking (m)(2) of this standard and the HCS (29 areas are as free as practicable of be- CFR 1910.1200). ryllium; (3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The (ii) No employees enter any eating or employer must ensure that all reusable drinking area with personal protective personal protective clothing and equip- clothing or equipment unless, prior to ment required by this standard is entry, surface beryllium has been re- cleaned, laundered, repaired, and removed from the clothing or equipment placed as needed to maintain its effec- by methods that do not disperse beryl- tiveness. lium into the air or onto an employee’s (ii) The employer must ensure that body; and beryllium is not removed from personal protective clothing and equip- (iii) Eating and drinking facilities ment by blowing, shaking or any other provided by the employer are in ac- means that disperses beryllium into cordance with the Sanitation standard the air. (§ 1926.51). (iii) The employer must inform in (4) Prohibited activities. The employer writing the persons or the business en- must ensure that no employees eat, tities who launder, clean or repair the drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or personal protective clothing or equip- apply cosmetics in work areas where ment required by this standard of the there is a reasonable expectation of ex- potentially harmful effects of airborne posure above the TWA PEL or STEL. exposure to and dermal contact with (j) Housekeeping—(1) General. (i) When beryllium and that the personal protec- cleaning beryllium-contaminated tive clothing and equipment must be areas, the employer must follow the handled in accordance with this stand- written exposure control plan required ard. under paragraph (f)(1) of this standard; (i) Hygiene areas and practices—(1) (ii) The employer must ensure that General. For each employee required to all spills and emergency releases of be- use personal protective clothing or ryllium are cleaned up promptly and in equipment by this standard, the em- accordance with the written exposure ployer must: control plan required under paragraph (i) Provide readily accessible washing (f)(1) of this standard. facilities in accordance with this (2) Cleaning methods. (i) When clean- standard and the Sanitation standard ing beryllium-contaminated areas, the (§ 1926.51) to remove beryllium from the employer must ensure the use of hands, face, and neck; and HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other (ii) Ensure that employees who have methods that minimize the likelihood dermal contact with beryllium wash and level of airborne exposure. any exposed skin at the end of the ac- (ii) The employer must not allow dry tivity, process, or work shift and prior sweeping or brushing for cleaning in to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing beryllium-contaminated areas unless tobacco or gum, applying cosmetics, or HEPA-filtered vacuuming or other using the toilet. methods that minimize the likelihood

610

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00620 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1124

and level of airborne exposure are not (A) An employee meets the criteria safe or effective. of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(A), unless the em- (iii) The employer must not allow the ployee has received a medical examina- use of compressed air for cleaning in tion, provided in accordance with this beryllium-contaminated areas unless standard, within the last two years; or the compressed air is used in conjunc- (B) An employee meets the criteria of tion with a ventilation system de- paragraph (k)(1)(i)(B) or (C). signed to capture the particulates (ii) At least every two years there- made airborne by the use of com- after for each employee who continues pressed air. to meet the criteria of paragraph (iv) Where employees use dry sweep- (k)(1)(i)(A), (B), or (D) of this standard. ing, brushing, or compressed air to (iii) At the termination of employ- clean in beryllium-contaminated areas, ment for each employee who meets any the employer must provide, and ensure of the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i) of that each employee uses, respiratory this standard at the time the employ- protection and personal protective ee’s employment terminates, unless an clothing and equipment in accordance examination has been provided in ac- with paragraphs (g) and (h) of this cordance with this standard during the standard. six months prior to the date of termi- (v) The employer must ensure that nation. cleaning equipment is handled and (3) Contents of examination. (i) The maintained in a manner that mini- employer must ensure that the PLHCP mizes the likelihood and level of air- conducting the examination advises borne exposure and the re-entrainment the employee of the risks and benefits of airborne beryllium in the workplace. of participating in the medical surveil- (3) Disposal. When the employer lance program and the employee’s transfers materials containing beryl- right to opt out of any or all parts of lium to another party for use or dis- the medical examination. posal, the employer must provide the recipient with a copy of the warning (ii) The employer must ensure that described in paragraph (m)(2) of this the employee is offered a medical ex- standard. amination that includes: (k) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (A) A medical and work history, with (i) The employer must make medical emphasis on past and present airborne surveillance required by this paragraph exposure to or dermal contact with be- available at no cost to the employee, ryllium, smoking history, and any his- and at a reasonable time and place, to tory of respiratory system dysfunction; each employee: (B) A physical examination with em- (A) Who is or is reasonably expected phasis on the respiratory system; to be exposed at or above the action (C) A physical examination for skin level for more than 30 days per year; rashes; (B) Who shows signs or symptoms of (D) Pulmonary function tests, per- CBD or other beryllium-related health formed in accordance with the guide- effects; lines established by the American Tho- (C) Who is exposed to beryllium dur- racic Society including forced vital ca- ing an emergency; or pacity (FVC) and forced expiratory vol- (D) Whose most recent written med- ume in one second (FEV1); ical opinion required by paragraph (E) A standardized BeLPT or equiva- (k)(6) or (k)(7) recommends periodic lent test, upon the first examination medical surveillance. and at least every two years thereafter, (ii) The employer must ensure that unless the employee is confirmed posi- all medical examinations and proce- tive. If the results of the BeLPT are dures required by this standard are per- other than normal, a follow-up BeLPT formed by, or under the direction of, a must be offered within 30 days, unless licensed physician. the employee has been confirmed posi- (2) Frequency. The employer must tive. Samples must be analyzed in a provide a medical examination: laboratory certified under the College (i) Within 30 days after determining of American Pathologists/Clinical Lab- that: oratory Improvement Amendments

611

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00621 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1124 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(CLIA) guidelines to perform the ployee at increased risk from further BeLPT. airborne exposure, and (F) A low dose computed tomography (B) Any medical conditions related to (LDCT) scan, when recommended by airborne exposure that require further the PLHCP after considering the em- evaluation or treatment. ployee’s history of exposure to beryl- (ii) Any recommendations on: lium along with other risk factors, (A) The employee’s use of respirators, such as smoking history, family med- protective clothing, or equipment; or ical history, sex, age, and presence of (B) Limitations on the employee’s existing lung disease; and airborne exposure to beryllium. (G) Any other test deemed appro- (iii) If the employee is confirmed priate by the PLHCP. positive or diagnosed with CBD or if (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. the licensed physician otherwise deems The employer must ensure that the exit appropriate, the written report must amining PLHCP (and the agreed-upon also contain a referral for an evalua- CBD diagnostic center, if an evaluation tion at a CBD diagnostic center. is required under paragraph (k)(7) of (iv) If the employee is confirmed this standard) has a copy of this stand- positive or diagnosed with CBD the ard and must provide the following in- written report must also contain a rec- formation, if known: ommendation for continued periodic (i) A description of the employee’s medical surveillance. former and current duties that relate (v) If the employee is confirmed posi- to the employee’s airborne exposure to tive or diagnosed with CBD the written and dermal contact with beryllium; report must also contain a rec- (ii) The employee’s former and cur- ommendation for medical removal rent levels of airborne exposure; from airborne exposure to beryllium, (iii) A description of any personal as described in paragraph (l). protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, used by the em- (6) Licensed physician’s written medical ployee, including when and for how opinion for the employer. (i) The em- long the employee has used that per- ployer must obtain a written medical sonal protective clothing and equip- opinion from the licensed physician ment; and within 45 days of the medical examina- (iv) Information from records of em- tion (including any follow-up BeLPT ployment-related medical examina- required under paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(E) tions previously provided to the em- of this standard). The written medical ployee, currently within the control of opinion must contain only the fol- the employer, after obtaining written lowing: consent from the employee. (A) The date of the examination; (5) Licensed physician’s written medical (B) A statement that the examina- report for the employee. The employer tion has met the requirements of this must ensure that the employee re- standard; ceives a written medical report from (C) Any recommended limitations on the licensed physician within 45 days of the employee’s use of respirators, pro- the examination (including any follow- tective clothing, or equipment; and up BeLPT required under paragraph (D) A statement that the PLHCP has (k)(3)(ii)(E) of this standard) and that explained the results of the medical ex- the PLHCP explains the results of the amination to the employee, including examination to the employee. The any tests conducted, any medical con- written medical report must contain: ditions related to airborne exposure (i) A statement indicating the results that require further evaluation or of the medical examination, including treatment, and any special provisions the licensed physician’s opinion as to for use of personal protective clothing whether the employee has or equipment; (A) Any detected medical condition, (ii) If the employee provides written such as CBD or beryllium sensitization authorization, the written opinion (i.e., the employee is confirmed posi- must also contain any recommended tive, as defined in paragraph (b) of this limitations on the employee’s airborne standard), that may place the em- exposure to beryllium.

612

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00622 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1124

(iii) If the employee is confirmed medical examination. The written positive or diagnosed with CBD or if medical opinion must contain only the the licensed physician otherwise deems information in paragraph (k)(6)(i) of it appropriate, and the employee pro- this standard, as applicable, unless the vides written authorization, the writ- employee provides written authoriza- ten opinion must also contain a refer- tion to release additional information. ral for an evaluation at a CBD diag- If the employee provides written au- nostic center. thorization, the written opinion must (iv) If the employee is confirmed also contain the information from positive or diagnosed with CBD and the paragraphs (k)(6)(ii), (iv), and (v), if ap- employee provides written authoriza- plicable. tion, the written opinion must also (iv) The employer must ensure that contain a recommendation for contin- each employee receives a copy of the ued periodic medical surveillance. written medical opinion from the CBD (v) If the employee is confirmed posi- diagnostic center described in para- tive or diagnosed with CBD and the graph (k)(7) of this standard within 30 employee provides written authoriza- days of any medical examination per- tion, the written opinion must also formed for that employee. contain a recommendation for medical (v) After an employee has received removal from airborne exposure to be- the initial clinical evaluation at a CBD ryllium, as described in paragraph (l). diagnostic center described in para- (vi) The employer must ensure that graph (k)(7)(i) of this standard, the em- each employee receives a copy of the ployee may choose to have any subse- written medical opinion described in quent medical examinations for which paragraph (k)(6) of this standard within the employee is eligible under para- 45 days of any medical examination graph (k) of this standard performed at (including any follow-up BeLPT re- a CBD diagnostic center mutually quired under paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(E) of agreed upon by the employer and the this standard) performed for that em- employee, and the employer must pro- ployee. vide such examinations at no cost to (7) CBD diagnostic center. (i) The em- the employee. ployer must provide an evaluation at (l) Medical removal. (1) An employee is no cost to the employee at a CBD diag- eligible for medical removal, if the em- nostic center that is mutually agreed ployee works in a job with airborne ex- upon by the employer and the em- posure at or above the action level and ployee. The examination must be pro- either: vided within 30 days of: (i) The employee provides the em- (A) The employer’s receipt of a physi- ployer with: cian’s written medical opinion to the (A) A written medical report indi- employer that recommends referral to cating a confirmed positive finding or a CBD diagnostic center; or CBD diagnosis; or (B) The employee presenting to the (B) A written medical report recom- employer a physician’s written medical mending removal from airborne expo- report indicating that the employee sure to beryllium in accordance with has been confirmed positive or diag- paragraph (k)(5)(v) or (k)(7)(ii) of this nosed with CBD, or recommending re- standard; or ferral to a CBD diagnostic center. (ii) The employer receives a written (ii) The employer must ensure that medical opinion recommending re- the employee receives a written med- moval from airborne exposure to beryl- ical report from the CBD diagnostic lium in accordance with paragraph center that contains all the informa- (k)(6)(v) or (k)(7)(iii) of this standard. tion required in paragraphs (k)(5)(i), (2) If an employee is eligible for med- (ii), (iv), and (v) of this standard and ical removal, the employer must pro- that the PLHCP explains the results of vide the employee with the employee’s the examination to the employee with- choice of: in 30 days of the examination. (i) Removal as described in paragraph (iii) The employer must obtain a (l)(3) of this standard; or written medical opinion from the CBD (ii) Remaining in a job with airborne diagnostic center within 30 days of the exposure at or above the action level,

613

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00623 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1124 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

provided that the employer provides, and must, at a minimum, include the and ensures that the employee uses, following on the label: respiratory protection that complies DANGER with paragraph (g) of this standard CONTAINS BERYLLIUM whenever airborne exposures are at or MAY CAUSE CANCER above the action level. CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS (3) If the employee chooses removal: AVOID CREATING DUST (i) If a comparable job is available DO NOT GET ON SKIN where airborne exposures to beryllium are below the action level, and the em- (3) Employee information and training. ployee is qualified for that job or can (i) For each employee who has, or can be trained within one month, the em- reasonably be expected to have, air- ployer must remove the employee to borne exposure to or dermal contact that job. The employer must maintain with beryllium: for six months from the time of re- (A) The employer must provide infor- moval the employee’s base earnings, mation and training in accordance seniority, and other rights and benefits with the HCS (29 CFR 1910.1200(h)); that existed at the time of removal. (B) The employer must provide ini- (ii) If comparable work is not avail- tial training to each employee by the able, the employer must maintain the time of initial assignment; and employee’s base earnings, seniority, (C) The employer must repeat the and other rights and benefits that ex- training required under this standard isted at the time of removal for six annually for each employee. months or until such time that com- (ii) The employer must ensure that parable work described in paragraph each employee who is, or can reason- (l)(3)(i) becomes available, whichever ably be expected to be, exposed to air- comes first. borne beryllium can demonstrate (4) The employer’s obligation to pro- knowledge and understanding of the vide medical removal protection bene- following: fits to a removed employee shall be re- (A) The health hazards associated duced to the extent that the employee with airborne exposure to and dermal receives compensation for earnings lost contact with beryllium, including the during the period of removal from a signs and symptoms of CBD; publicly or employer-funded compensa- (B) The written exposure control tion program, or receives income from plan, with emphasis on the specific na- another employer made possible by vir- ture of operations that could result in tue of the employee’s removal. airborne exposure, especially airborne (m) Communication of hazards—(1) exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL; General. (i) Chemical manufacturers, (C) The purpose, proper selection, fit- importers, distributors, and employers ting, proper use, and limitations of per- must comply with all requirements of sonal protective clothing and equip- the HCS (29 CFR 1910.1200) for beryl- ment, including respirators; lium. (D) Applicable emergency procedures; (ii) Employers must include beryl- (E) Measures employees can take to lium in the hazard communication pro- protect themselves from airborne expo- gram established to comply with the sure to and dermal contact with beryl- HCS. Employers must ensure that each lium, including personal hygiene prac- employee has access to labels on con- tices; tainers of beryllium and to safety data (F) The purpose and a description of sheets, and is trained in accordance the medical surveillance program re- with the requirements of the HCS (29 quired by paragraph (k) of this stand- CFR 1910.1200) and paragraph (m)(4) of ard including risks and benefits of each this standard. test to be offered; (2) Warning labels. Consistent with (G) The purpose and a description of the HCS (29 CFR 1910.1200), the em- the medical removal protection pro- ployer must label each bag and con- vided under paragraph (l) of this stand- tainer of clothing, equipment, and ma- ard; terials contaminated with beryllium, (H) The contents of the standard; and

614

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00624 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1124

(I) The employee’s right of access to (C) The source of the objective data; records under the Records Access (D) A description of the process, task, standard (29 CFR 1910.1020). or activity on which the objective data (iii) When a workplace change (such were based; and as modification of equipment, tasks, or (E) Other data relevant to the proc- procedures) results in new or increased ess, task, activity, material, or air- airborne exposure that exceeds, or can borne exposure on which the objective reasonably be expected to exceed, ei- data were based. ther the TWA PEL or the STEL, the (iii) The employer must ensure that employer must provide additional objective data are maintained and training to those employees affected by made available in accordance with the the change in airborne exposure. Records Access standard (29 CFR (iv) Employee information. The em- 1910.1020). ployer must make a copy of this stand- (3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- ard and its appendices readily available ployer must make and maintain a at no cost to each employee and des- record for each employee covered by ignated employee representative(s). medical surveillance under paragraph (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Air monitoring (k) of this standard. data. (i) The employer must make and (ii) The record must include the fol- maintain a record of all exposure meas- lowing information about each em- urements taken to assess airborne ex- ployee: posure as prescribed in paragraph (d) of (A) Name, social security number, this standard. and job classification; (ii) This record must include at least (B) A copy of all licensed physicians’ the following information: written medical opinions for each em- (A) The date of measurement for each ployee; and sample taken; (C) A copy of the information pro- (B) The task that is being monitored; vided to the PLHCP as required by (C) The sampling and analytical paragraph (k)(4) of this standard. methods used and evidence of their ac- (iii) The employer must ensure that curacy; medical records are maintained and (D) The number, duration, and re- made available in accordance with the sults of samples taken; Records Access standard (29 CFR (E) The type of personal protective 1910.1020). clothing and equipment, including res- (4) Training. (i) At the completion of pirators, worn by monitored employees any training required by this standard, at the time of monitoring; and the employer must prepare a record (F) The name, social security num- that indicates the name, social secu- ber, and job classification of each em- rity number, and job classification of ployee represented by the monitoring, each employee trained, the date the indicating which employees were actu- training was completed, and the topic ally monitored. of the training. (iii) The employer must ensure that (ii) This record must be maintained exposure records are maintained and for three years after the completion of made available in accordance with the training. Records Access standard (29 CFR (5) Access to records. Upon request, the 1910.1020). employer must make all records main- (2) Objective data. (i) Where an em- tained as a requirement of this stand- ployer uses objective data to satisfy ard available for examination and the exposure assessment requirements copying to the Assistant Secretary, the under paragraph (d)(2) of this standard, Director, each employee, and each em- the employer must make and maintain ployee’s designated representative(s) in a record of the objective data relied accordance the Records Access stand- upon. ard (29 CFR 1910.1020). (ii) This record must include at least (6) Transfer of records. The employer the following information: must comply with the requirements in- (A) The data relied upon; volving transfer of records set forth in (B) The beryllium-containing mate- the Records Access standard (29 CFR rial in question; 1910.1020).

615

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00625 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1126 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(o) Dates—(1) Effective date. This If an incidental release of chromium standard shall become effective March (VI) can be controlled at the time of re- 10, 2017. lease by employees in the immediate (2) Compliance dates. (i) All obliga- release area, or by maintenance per- tions contained in paragraph (c) of this sonnel, it is not an emergency. standard commence and become en- Employee exposure means the expo- forceable on March 12, 2018; and sure to airborne chromium (VI) that (ii) All other obligations of this would occur if the employee were not standard commence and become en- using a respirator. forceable on September 30, 2020. High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] [82 FR 2751, Jan. 9, 2017, as amended at 84 FR filter means a filter that is at least 99.97 51400, Sept. 30, 2019] percent efficient in removing mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in § 1926.1126 Chromium (VI). diameter or larger. (a) Scope. (1) This standard applies to Historical monitoring data means data occupational exposures to chromium from chromium (VI) monitoring con- (VI) in all forms and compounds in conducted prior to May 30, 2006, obtained struction, except: during work operations conducted (2) Exposures that occur in the appli- under workplace conditions closely re- cation of pesticides regulated by the sembling the processes, types of mate- Environmental Protection Agency or rial, control methods, work practices, another Federal government agency and environmental conditions in the (e.g., the treatment of wood with pre- employer’s current operations. servatives); Objective data means information (3) Exposures to portland cement; or such as air monitoring data from in- (4) Where the employer has objective dustry-wide surveys or calculations data demonstrating that a material based on the composition or chemical containing chromium or a specific and physical properties of a substance process, operation, or activity involv- demonstrating the employee exposure ing chromium cannot release dusts, to chromium (VI) associated with a fumes, or mists of chromium (VI) in particular product or material or a spe- concentrations at or above 0.5 μgm/m3 cific process, operation, or activity. as an 8-hour time-weighted average The data must reflect workplace condi- (TWA) under any expected conditions tions closely resembling the processes, of use. types of material, control methods, (b) Definitions. For the purposes of work practices, and environmental this section the following definitions conditions in the employer’s current apply: operations. Action level means a concentration of Physician or other licensed health care airborne chromium (VI) of 2.5 professional [PLHCP] is an individual micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5 whose legally permitted scope of prac- μgm/m3) calculated as an 8-hour time- tice (i.e., license, registration, or cer- weighted average (TWA). tification) allows him or her to inde- Assistant Secretary means the Assist- pendently provide or be delegated the ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- responsibility to provide some or all of tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- the particular health care services re- ment of Labor, or designee. quired by paragraph (i) of this section. Chromium (VI) [hexavalent chromium This section means this § 1926.1126 or Cr(VI)] means chromium with a va- chromium (VI) standard. lence of positive six, in any form and in (c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). any compound. The employer shall ensure that no em- Director means the Director of the ployee is exposed to an airborne con- National Institute for Occupational centration of chromium (VI) in excess Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De- of 5 micrograms per cubic meter of air partment of Health and Human Serv- (5 μgm/m3), calculated as an 8-hour ices, or designee. time-weighted average (TWA). Emergency means any occurrence (d) Exposure determination—(1) Gen- that results, or is likely to result, in an eral. Each employer who has a work- uncontrolled release of chromium (VI). place or work operation covered by this

616

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00626 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1126

section shall determine the 8-hour monitoring data, historical monitoring TWA exposure for each employee ex- data, or objective data sufficient to ac- posed to chromium (VI). This deter- curately characterize employee expo- mination shall be made in accordance sure to chromium (VI). with either paragraph (d)(2) or para- (4) Employee notification of determina- graph (d)(3) of this section. tion results. (i) Within 5 work days after (2) Scheduled monitoring option. (i) The making an exposure determination in employer shall perform initial moni- accordance with paragraph (d)(2) or toring to determine the 8-hour TWA paragraph (d)(3) of this section, the em- exposure for each employee on the ployer shall individually notify each basis of a sufficient number of personal affected employee in writing of the re- breathing zone air samples to accu- sults of that determination or post the rately characterize full shift exposure results in an appropriate location ac- on each shift, for each job classifica- cessible to all affected employees. tion, in each work area. Where an employer does representative sampling in- (ii) Whenever the exposure deter- stead of sampling all employees in mination indicates that employee ex- order to meet this requirement, the posure is above the PEL, the employer employer shall sample the employee(s) shall describe in the written notifica- expected to have the highest chromium tion the corrective action being taken (VI) exposures. to reduce employee exposure to or (ii) If initial monitoring indicates below the PEL. that employee exposures are below the (5) Accuracy of measurement. Where action level, the employer may dis- air monitoring is performed to comply continue monitoring for those employ- with the requirements of this section, ees whose exposures are represented by the employer shall use a method of such monitoring. monitoring and analysis that can (iii) If monitoring reveals employee measure chromium (VI) to within an exposures to be at or above the action accuracy of plus or minus 25 percent level, the employer shall perform peri- (±25%) and can produce accurate meas- odic monitoring at least every six urements to within a statistical con- months. fidence level of 95 percent for airborne (iv) If monitoring reveals employee concentrations at or above the action exposures to be above the PEL, the em- level. ployer shall perform periodic moni- (6) Observation of monitoring. (i) toring at least every three months. Where air monitoring is performed to (v) If periodic monitoring indicates comply with the requirements of this that employee exposures are below the section, the employer shall provide af- action level, and the result is con- fected employees or their designated firmed by the result of another moni- representatives an opportunity to ob- toring taken at least seven days later, serve any monitoring of employee ex- the employer may discontinue the posure to chromium (VI). monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such mon- (ii) When observation of monitoring itoring. requires entry into an area where the (vi) The employer shall perform addi- use of protective clothing or equipment tional monitoring when there has been is required, the employer shall provide any change in the production process, the observer with clothing and equip- raw materials, equipment, personnel, ment and shall assure that the ob- work practices, or control methods server uses such clothing and equip- that may result in new or additional ment and complies with all other appli- exposures to chromium (VI), or when cable safety and health procedures. the employer has any reason to believe (e) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi- that new or additional exposures have neering and work practice controls. (i) occurred. Except as permitted in paragraph (3) Performance-oriented option. The (e)(1)(ii) of this section, the employer employer shall determine the 8-hour shall use engineering and work prac- TWA exposure for each employee on tice controls to reduce and maintain the basis of any combination of air employee exposure to chromium (VI)

617

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00627 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1126 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

to or below the PEL unless the em- (g) Protective work clothing and equip- ployer can demonstrate that such con- ment—(1) Provision and use. Where a trols are not feasible. Wherever fea- hazard is present or is likely to be sible engineering and work practice present from skin or eye contact with controls are not sufficient to reduce chromium (VI), the employer shall pro- employee exposure to or below the vide appropriate personal protective PEL, the employer shall use them to clothing and equipment at no cost to reduce employee exposure to the lowest employees, and shall ensure that em- levels achievable, and shall supplement ployees use such clothing and equip- them by the use of respiratory protec- ment. tion that complies with the require- (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em- ments of paragraph (f) of this section. ployer shall ensure that employees re- (ii) Where the employer can dem- move all protective clothing and equip- onstrate that a process or task does ment contaminated with chromium not result in any employee exposure to (VI) at the end of the work shift or at chromium (VI) above the PEL for 30 or the completion of their tasks involving more days per year (12 consecutive chromium (VI) exposure, whichever months), the requirement to imple- comes first. ment engineering and work practice (ii) The employer shall ensure that controls to achieve the PEL does not no employee removes chromium (VI)- apply to that process or task. contaminated protective clothing or (2) Prohibition of rotation. The em- equipment from the workplace, except ployer shall not rotate employees to for those employees whose job it is to different jobs to achieve compliance launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of with the PEL. such clothing or equipment. (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General. (iii) When contaminated protective Where respiratory protection is re- clothing or equipment is removed for quired by this section, the employer laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or must provide each employee an appro- disposal, the employer shall ensure priate respirator that complies with that it is stored and transported in the requirements of this paragraph. sealed, impermeable bags or other Respiratory protection is required dur- closed, impermeable containers. ing: (iv) The employer shall ensure that (i) Periods necessary to install or im- bags or containers of contaminated plement feasible engineering and work protective clothing or equipment that practice controls; are removed from change rooms for (ii) Work operations, such as mainte- laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or nance and repair activities, for which disposal shall be labeled in accordance engineering and work practice controls with the requirements of the Hazard are not feasible; Communication Standard, § 1910.1200. (iii) Work operations for which an (3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The employer has implemented all feasible employer shall clean, launder, repair engineering and work practice controls and replace all protective clothing and and such controls are not sufficient to equipment required by this section as reduce exposures to or below the PEL; needed to maintain its effectiveness. (iv) Work operations where employ- (ii) The employer shall prohibit the ees are exposed above the PEL for removal of chromium (VI) from protec- fewer than 30 days per year, and the tive clothing and equipment by blow- employer has elected not to implement ing, shaking, or any other means that engineering and work practice controls disperses chromium (VI) into the air or to achieve the PEL; or onto an employee’s body. (v) Emergencies. (iii) The employer shall inform any (2) Respiratory protection program. person who launders or cleans protec- Where respirator use is required by this tive clothing or equipment contami- section, the employer shall institute a nated with chromium (VI) of the poten- respiratory protection program in ac- tially harmful effects of exposure to cordance with § 1910.134, which covers chromium (VI) and that the clothing each employee required to use a res- and equipment should be laundered or pirator. cleaned in a manner that minimizes

618

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00628 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1126

skin or eye contact with chromium (i) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i) (VI) and effectively prevents the re- The employer shall make medical sur- lease of airborne chromium (VI) in ex- veillance available at no cost to the cess of the PEL. employee, and at a reasonable time and (h) Hygiene areas and practices—(1) place, for all employees: General. Where protective clothing and (A) Who are or may be occupation- equipment is required, the employer ally exposed to chromium (VI) at or shall provide change rooms in conform- above the action level for 30 or more ance with 29 CFR 1926.51 Where skin days a year; contact with chromium (VI) occurs, (B) Experiencing signs or symptoms the employer shall provide washing fa- of the adverse health effects associated cilities in conformance with 29 CFR with chromium (VI) exposure; or 1926.51. Eating and drinking areas pro- (C) Exposed in an emergency. vided by the employer shall also be in (ii) The employer shall assure that conformance with § 1926.51. all medical examinations and proce- (2) Change rooms. The employer shall dures required by this section are per- assure that change rooms are equipped formed by or under the supervision of a with separate storage facilities for pro- PLHCP. tective clothing and equipment and for (2) Frequency. The employer shall street clothes, and that these facilities provide a medical examination: prevent cross-contamination. (i) Within 30 days after initial assign- (3) Washing facilities. (i) The employer ment, unless the employee has received shall provide readily accessible wash- a chromium (VI) related medical exam- ing facilities capable of removing chro- ination that meets the requirements of mium (VI) from the skin, and shall en- this paragraph within the last twelve sure that affected employees use these months; facilities when necessary. (ii) Annually; (ii) The employer shall ensure that (iii) Within 30 days after a PLHCP’s employees who have skin contact with written medical opinion recommends chromium (VI) wash their hands and an additional examination; faces at the end of the work shift and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, (iv) Whenever an employee shows chewing tobacco or gum, applying cos- signs or symptoms of the adverse metics, or using the toilet. health effects associated with chro- (4) Eating and drinking areas. (i) mium (VI) exposure; Whenever the employer allows employ- (v) Within 30 days after exposure dur- ees to consume food or beverages at a ing an emergency which results in an worksite where chromium (VI) is uncontrolled release of chromium (VI); present, the employer shall ensure that or eating and drinking areas and surfaces (vi) At the termination of employ- are maintained as free as practicable of ment, unless the last examination that chromium (VI). satisfied the requirements of paragraph (ii) The employer shall ensure that (i) of this section was less than six employees do not enter eating and months prior to the date of termi- drinking areas with protective work nation. clothing or equipment unless surface (3) Contents of examination. A medical chromium (VI) has been removed from examination consists of: the clothing and equipment by meth- (i) A medical and work history, with ods that do not disperse chromium (VI) emphasis on: past, present, and antici- into the air or onto an employee’s pated future exposure to chromium body. (VI); any history of respiratory system (5) Prohibited activities. The employer dysfunction; any history of asthma, shall ensure that employees do not eat, dermatitis, skin ulceration, or nasal drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or septum perforation; and smoking sta- apply cosmetics in areas where skin or tus and history; eye contact with chromium (VI) oc- (ii) A physical examination of the curs; or carry the products associated skin and respiratory tract; and with these activities, or store such (iii) Any additional tests deemed ap- products in these areas. propriate by the examining PLHCP.

619

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00629 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1126 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(4) Information provided to the PLHCP. chromium (VI) in the program estab- The employer shall ensure that the ex- lished to comply with the Hazard Com- amining PLHCP has a copy of this munication Standard (HCS) standard, and shall provide the fol- (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure lowing information: that each employee has access to labels (i) A description of the affected em- on containers of chromium and safety ployee’s former, current, and antici- data sheets, and is trained in accord- pated duties as they relate to the em- ance with the provisions of § 1910.1200 ployee’s occupational exposure to chro- and paragraph (j)(2) of this section. The mium (VI); employer shall provide information on (ii) The employee’s former, current, at least the following hazards: Cancer; and anticipated levels of occupational eye irritation; and skin sensitization. exposure to chromium (VI); (2) Employee information and training. (iii) A description of any personal (i) The employer shall ensure that each protective equipment used or to be employee can demonstrate knowledge used by the employee, including when of at least the following: and for how long the employee has used (A) The contents of this section; and that equipment; and (iv) Information from records of em- (B) The purpose and a description of ployment-related medical examina- the medical surveillance program re- tions previously provided to the af- quired by paragraph (i) of this section. fected employee, currently within the (ii) The employer shall make a copy control of the employer. of this section readily available with- (5) PLHCP’s written medical opinion. out cost to all affected employees. (i) The employer shall obtain a written (k) Recordkeeping—(1) Air monitoring medical opinion from the PLHCP, data. (i) The employer shall maintain within 30 days for each medical exam- an accurate record of all air moni- ination performed on each employee, toring conducted to comply with the which contains: requirements of this section. (A) The PLHCP’s opinion as to (ii) This record shall include at least whether the employee has any detected the following information: medical condition(s) that would place (A) The date of measurement for each the employee at increased risk of ma- sample taken; terial impairment to health from fur- (B) The operation involving exposure ther exposure to chromium (VI); to chromium (VI) that is being mon- (B) Any recommended limitations itored; upon the employee’s exposure to chro- (C) Sampling and analytical methods mium (VI) or upon the use of personal used and evidence of their accuracy; protective equipment such as res- (D) Number, duration, and the results pirators; of samples taken; (C) A statement that the PLHCP has explained to the employee the results (E) Type of personal protective of the medical examination, including equipment, such as respirators worn; any medical conditions related to chro- and mium (VI) exposure that require fur- (F) Name and job classification of all ther evaluation or treatment, and any employees represented by the moni- special provisions for use of protective toring, indicating which employees clothing or equipment. were actually monitored. (ii) The PLHCP shall not reveal to (iii) The employer shall ensure that the employer specific findings or diag- exposure records are maintained and noses unrelated to occupational expo- made available in accordance with 29 sure to chromium (VI). CFR 1910.1020. (iii) The employer shall provide a (2) Historical monitoring data. (i) copy of the PLHCP’s written medical Where the employer has relied on his- opinion to the examined employee torical monitoring data to determine within two weeks after receiving it. exposure to chromium (VI), the em- (j) Communication of chromium (VI) ployer shall establish and maintain an hazards to employees—(1) Hazard commu- accurate record of the historical moni- nication. The employer shall include toring data relied upon.

620

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00630 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

(ii) The record shall include informa- ered by medical surveillance under tion that reflects the following condi- paragraph (i) of this section. tions: (ii) The record shall include the fol- (A) The data were collected using lowing information about the em- methods that meet the accuracy re- ployee: quirements of paragraph (d)(5) of this (A) Name; section; (B) A copy of the PLHCP’s written (B) The processes and work practices opinions; that were in use when the historical (C) A copy of the information pro- monitoring data were obtained are es- vided to the PLHCP as required by sentially the same as those to be used paragraph (i)(4) of this section. during the job for which exposure is (iii) The employer shall ensure that being determined; medical records are maintained and (C) The characteristics of the chro- made available in accordance with 29 mium (VI) containing material being CFR 1910.1020. handled when the historical moni- (l) Dates. (1) For employers with 20 or toring data were obtained are the same more employees, all obligations of this as those on the job for which exposure section, except engineering controls re- is being determined; quired by paragraph (e) of this section, (D) Environmental conditions pre- commence November 27, 2006. vailing when the historical monitoring (2) For employers with 19 or fewer data were obtained are the same as employees, all obligations of this sec- those on the job for which exposure is tion, except engineering controls re- being determined; and quired by paragraph (e) of this section, (E) Other data relevant to the oper- commence May 30, 2007. ations, materials, processing, or em- (3) For all employers, engineering ployee exposures covered by the excep- controls required by paragraph (e) of tion. this section shall be implemented no (iii) The employer shall ensure that later than May 31, 2010. historical exposure records are main- [71 FR 10382, Feb. 28, 2006, as amended at 73 tained and made available in accord- FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008; 75 FR 12686, Mar. 17, ance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. 2010; 77 FR 17895, Mar. 26, 2012] (3) Objective data. (i) The employer shall maintain an accurate record of § 1926.1127 Cadmium. all objective data relied upon to com- (a) Scope. This standard applies to all ply with the requirements of this sec- occupational exposures to cadmium tion. and cadmium compounds, in all forms, (ii) This record shall include at least in all construction work where an em- the following information: ployee may potentially be exposed to (A) The chromium containing mate- cadmium. Construction work is defined rial in question; as work involving construction, alter- (B) The source of the objective data; ation and/or repair, including but not (C) The testing protocol and results limited to the following: of testing, or analysis of the material (1) Wrecking, demolition or salvage for the release of chromium (VI); of structures where cadmium or mate- (D) A description of the process, oper- rials containing cadmium are present; ation, or activity and how the data (2) Use of cadmium containing-paints support the determination; and and cutting, brazing, burning, grinding (E) Other data relevant to the proc- or welding on surfaces that were paint- ess, operation, activity, material, or ed with cadmium-containing paints; employee exposures. (3) Construction, alteration, repair, (iii) The employer shall ensure that maintenance, or renovation of struc- objective data are maintained and tures, substrates, or portions thereof, made available in accordance with 29 that contain cadmium, or materials CFR 1910.1020. containing cadmium; (4) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- (4) Cadmium welding; cutting and ployer shall establish and maintain an welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing accurate record for each employee cov- or welding with cadmium alloys;

621

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00631 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(5) Installation of products con- suring that the engineering controls taining cadmium; required by this standard are imple- (6) Electrical grounding with cad- mented, maintained in proper oper- mium welding, or electrical work using ating condition, and functioning prop- cadmium-coated conduit; erly. (7) Maintaining or retrofitting cad- Director means the Director of the mium-coated equipment; National Institute for Occupational (8) Cadmium contamination/emer- Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De- gency cleanup; and partment of Health and Human Serv- (9) Transportation, disposal, storage, ices, or designee. or containment of cadmium or mate- Employee exposure and similar lan- rials containing cadmium on the site guage referring to the air cadmium or location at which construction ac- level to which an employee is exposed tivities are performed. means the exposure to airborne cad- (b) Definitions. mium that would occur if the employee Action level (AL) is defined as an air- were not using respiratory protective borne concentration of cadmium of 2.5 equipment. micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5 Final medical determination is the μg/m3), calculated as an 8-hour time- written medical opinion of the employ- weighted average (TWA). ee’s health status by the examining Assistant Secretary means the Assist- physician under paragraphs (l)(3)-(12) of ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- this section or, if multiple physician tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- review under paragraph (l)(13) of this ment of Labor, or designee. section or the alternative physician de- Authorized person means any person termination under paragraph (l)(14) of authorized by the employer and re- this section is invoked, it is the final, quired by work duties to be present in written medical finding, recommenda- regulated areas or any person author- tion or determination that emerges ized by the OSH Act or regulations from that process. issued under it to be in regulated areas. High-efficiency Particulate Air [HEPA] Competent person, in accordance with filter means a filter capable of trapping 29 CFR 1926.32(f), means a person des- and retaining at least 99.97 percent of ignated by the employer to act on the mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 microm- employer’s behalf who is capable of eters in diameter. identifying existing and potential cad- Regulated area means an area demar- mium hazards in the workplace and the cated by the employer where an em- proper methods to control them in ployee’s exposure to airborne con- order to protect workers, and has the centrations of cadmium exceeds, or can authority necessary to take prompt reasonably be expected to exceed the corrective measures to eliminate or permissible exposure limit (PEL). control such hazards. The duties of a This section means this cadmium competent person include at least the standard. following: Determining prior to the (c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). performance of work whether cadmium The employer shall assure that no em- is present in the workplace; estab- ployee is exposed to an airborne con- lishing, where necessary, regulated centration of cadmium in excess of five areas and assuring that access to and micrograms per cubic meter of air (5 from those areas is limited to author- μg/m3), calculated as an eight-hour ized employees; assuring the adequacy time-weighted average exposure of any employee exposure monitoring (TWA). required by this standard; assuring (d) Exposure Monitoring—(1) General. that all employees exposed to air cad- (i) Prior to the performance of any con- mium levels above the PEL wear ap- struction work where employees may propriate personal protective equip- be potentially exposed to cadmium, the ment and are trained in the use of ap- employer shall establish the applica- propriate methods of exposure control; bility of this standard by determining assuring that proper hygiene facilities whether cadmium is present in the are provided and that workers are workplace and whether there is the trained to use those facilities; and as- possibility that employee exposures

622

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00632 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

will be at or above the action level. centration of airborne cadmium, the The employer shall designate a com- employee shall be monitored while per- petent person who shall make this deforming those tasks. termination. Investigation and mate- (iii) Where the employer has objec- rial testing techniques shall be used, as tive data, as defined in paragraph (n)(2) appropriate, in the determination. In- of this section, demonstrating that em- vestigation shall include a review of ployee exposure to cadmium will not relevant plans, past reports, Safety exceed airborne concentrations at or Data Sheets (SDS), and other available above the action level under the ex- records, and consultations with the pected conditions of processing, use, or property owner and discussions with handling, the employer may rely upon appropriate individuals and agencies. such data instead of implementing ini- (ii) Where cadmium has been deter- tial monitoring. mined to be present in the workplace, (iv) Where a determination con- and it has been determined that there ducted under paragraphs (d)(1) or (d)(2) is a possibility the employee’s exposure of this section is made that a poten- will be at or above the action level, the tially exposed employee is not exposed competent person shall identify em- to airborne concentrations of cadmium ployees potentially exposed to cad- at or above the action level, the em- mium at or above the action level. ployer shall make a written record of (iii) Determinations of employee ex- such determination. The record shall posure shall be made from breathing- include at least the monitoring data zone air samples that reflect the mon- developed under paragraphs (d)(2)(i)– itored employee’s regular, daily 8-hour (iii) of this section, where applicable, TWA exposure to cadmium. and shall also include the date of deter- (iv) Eight-hour TWA exposures shall mination, and the name of each em- be determined for each employee on ployee. the basis of one or more personal (3) Monitoring frequency (periodic mon- breathing-zone air samples reflecting itoring). (i) If the initial monitoring or full shift exposure on each shift, for periodic monitoring reveals employee each job classification, in each work exposures to be at or above the action area. Where several employees perform level, the employer shall monitor at a the same job tasks, in the same job frequency and pattern needed to assure classification, on the same shift, in the that the monitoring results reflect same work area, and the length, dura- with reasonable accuracy the employ- tion, and level of cadmium exposures ee’s typical exposure levels, given the are similar, an employer may sample a variability in the tasks performed, representative fraction of the employ- work practices, and environmental ees instead of all employees in order to conditions on the job site, and to as- meet this requirement. In representa- sure the adequacy of respiratory selective sampling, the employer shall sam- tion and the effectiveness of engineer- ple the employee(s) expected to have ing and work practice controls. the highest cadmium exposures. (ii) If the initial monitoring or the (2) Specific. (i) Initial monitoring. Ex- periodic monitoring indicates that em- cept as provided for in paragraph ployee exposures are below the action (d)(2)(iii) of this section, where a deter- level and that result is confirmed by mination conducted under paragraph the results of another monitoring (d)(1)(i) of this section shows the possi- taken at least seven days later, the em- bility of employee exposure to cad- ployer may discontinue the monitoring mium at or above the action level, the for those employees whose exposures employer shall conduct exposure moni- are represented by such monitoring. toring as soon as practicable that is (4) Additional monitoring. The em- representative of the exposure for each ployer also shall institute the exposure employee in the workplace who is or monitoring required under paragraphs may be exposed to cadmium at or (d)(2)(i) and (d)(3) of this section when- above the action level. ever there has been a change in the raw (ii) In addition, if the employee peri- materials, equipment, personnel, work odically performs tasks that may ex- practices, or finished products that pose the employee to a higher con- may result in additional employees

623

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00633 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

being exposed to cadmium at or above pirator, selected in accordance with the action level or in employees al- paragraph (g)(2) of this section. ready exposed to cadmium at or above (5) Prohibited activities. The employer the action level being exposed above shall assure that employees do not eat, the PEL, or whenever the employer or drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or competent person has any reason to apply cosmetics in regulated areas, or suspect that any other change might carry the products associated with any result in such further exposure. of these activities into regulated areas (5) Employee notification of monitoring or store such products in those areas. results. (i) The employer must, as soon (f) Methods of compliance—(1) Compli- as possible but no later than 5 working ance hierarchy. (i) Except as specified in days after the receipt of the results of paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, the any monitoring performed under this employer shall implement engineering section, notify each affected employee and work practice controls to reduce of these results either individually in and maintain employee exposure to writing or by posting the results in an cadmium at or below the PEL, except appropriate location that is accessible to the extent that the employer can to employees. demonstrate that such controls are not (ii) Wherever monitoring results indi- feasible. cate that employee exposure exceeds (ii) The requirement to implement the PEL, the employer shall include in engineering controls to achieve the the written notice a statement that PEL does not apply where the em- the PEL has been exceeded and a de- ployer demonstrates the following: scription of the corrective action being (A) The employee is only intermit- taken by the employer to reduce em- tently exposed; and ployee exposure to or below the PEL. (B) The employee is not exposed above the PEL on 30 or more days per (6) Accuracy of measurement. The em- year (12 consecutive months). ployer shall use a method of moni- (iii) Wherever engineering and work toring and analysis that has an accu- practice controls are not sufficient to racy of not less than plus or minus 25 ± reduce employee exposure to or below percent ( 25%), with a confidence level the PEL, the employer nonetheless of 95 percent, for airborne concentra- shall implement such controls to re- tions of cadmium at or above the ac- duce exposures to the lowest levels tion level and the permissible exposure achievable. The employer shall supple- limit. ment such controls with respiratory (e) Regulated areas—(1) Establishment. protection that complies with the re- The employer shall establish a regu- quirements of paragraph (g) of this sec- lated area wherever an employee’s ex- tion and the PEL. posure to airborne concentrations of (iv) The employer shall not use em- cadmium is, or can reasonably be ex- ployee rotation as a method of compli- pected to be in excess of the permis- ance. sible exposure limit (PEL). (2) Specific operations—(i) Abrasive (2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall blasting. Abrasive blasting on cadmium be demarcated from the rest of the or cadmium-containing materials shall workplace in any manner that ade- be conducted in a manner that will pro- quately establishes and alerts employ- vide adequate protection. ees of the boundaries of the regulated (ii) Heating cadmium and cadmium- area, including employees who are or containing materials. Welding, cutting, may be incidentally in the regulated and other forms of heating of cadmium areas, and that protects persons out- or cadmium-containing materials shall side the area from exposure to airborne be conducted in accordance with the concentrations of cadmium in excess of requirements of 29 CFR 1926.353 and 29 the PEL. CFR 1926.354, where applicable. (3) Access. Access to regulated areas (3) Prohibitions. (i) High speed abra- shall be limited to authorized persons. sive disc saws and similar abrasive (4) Provision of respirators. Each per- power equipment shall not be used for son entering a regulated area shall be work on cadmium or cadmium-con- supplied with and required to use a res- taining materials unless they are

624

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00634 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

equipped with appropriate engineering compliance status or significant controls to minimize emissions, if the changes in the lowest air cadmium exposure levels are above the PEL. level that is technologically feasible. (ii) Materials containing cadmium (iii) A competent person shall review shall not be applied by spray methods, the comprehensive compliance pro- if exposures are above the PEL, unless gram initially and after each change. employees are protected with supplied- (iv) Written compliance programs air respirators with full facepiece, shall be provided upon request for ex- hood, helmet, suit, operated in positive amination and copying to the Assist- pressure mode and measures are insti- ant Secretary, the Director, affected tuted to limit overspray and prevent employees, and designated employee contamination of adjacent areas. representatives. (4) Mechanical ventilation. (i) When (g) Respirator protection—(1) General. ventilation is used to control exposure, For employees who use respirators re- measurements that demonstrate the ef- quired by this section, the employer fectiveness of the system in controlling must provide each employee an appro- exposure, such as capture velocity, priate respirator that complies with duct velocity, or static pressure shall the requirements of this paragraph. be made as necessary to maintain its Respirators must be used during: effectiveness. (i) Periods necessary to install or im- (ii) Measurements of the system’s ef- plement feasible engineering and work- fectiveness in controlling exposure practice controls when employee expo- shall be made as necessary within five sures exceed the PEL. working days of any change in produc- (ii) Maintenance and repair activi- tion, process, or control that might re- ties, and brief or intermittent work op- sult in a significant increase in em- erations, for which employee exposures ployee exposure to cadmium. exceed the PEL and engineering and (iii) Recirculation of air. If air from work-practice controls are not feasible exhaust ventilation is recirculated into or are not required. the workplace, the system shall have a (iii) Work operations in the regulated high efficiency filter and be monitored areas specified in paragraph (e) of this to assure effectiveness. section. (iv) Procedures shall be developed and implemented to minimize em- (iv) Work operations for which the ployee exposure to cadmium when employer has implemented all feasible maintenance of ventilation systems engineering and work-practice con- and changing of filters is being controls, and such controls are not suffi- ducted. cient to reduce employee exposures to (5) Compliance program. (i) Where em- or below the PEL. ployee exposure to cadmium exceeds (v) Work operations for which an em- the PEL and the employer is required ployee, who is exposed to cadmium at under paragraph (f)(1) of this section to or above the action level, requests a implement controls to comply with the respirator. PEL, prior to the commencement of (vi) Work operations for which engi- the job the employer shall establish neering controls are not required by and implement a written compliance paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section to re- program to reduce employee exposure duce employee exposures that exceed to or below the PEL. To the extent the PEL. that engineering and work practice (vii) Emergencies. controls cannot reduce exposures to or (2) Respirator program. (i) The em- below the PEL, the employer shall in- ployer must implement a respiratory clude in the written compliance pro- protection program in accordance with gram the use of appropriate respiratory § 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except protection to achieve compliance with (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which the PEL. covers each employee required by this (ii) Written compliance programs section to use a respirator. shall be reviewed and updated as often (ii) If an employee exhibits breathing and as promptly as necessary to reflect difficulty during fit testing or res- significant changes in the employer’s pirator use, the employer must provide

625

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00635 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the employee with a medical examina- ployee, and assure that the employee tion in accordance with paragraph uses, appropriate protective work (l)(6)(ii) of this section to determine if clothing and equipment that prevents the employee can use a respirator contamination of the employee and the while performing the required duties. employee’s garments. Protective work (iii) No employee must use a res- clothing and equipment includes, but is pirator when, based on their most re- not limited to: cent medical examination, the exam- (i) Coveralls or similar full-body ining physician determines that the work clothing; employee will be unable to continue to (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and boots function normally while using a res- or foot coverings; and pirator. If the physician determines the (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or employee must be limited in, or re- other appropriate protective equip- moved from, their current job because ment that complies with 29 CFR of the employee’s inability to use a res- 1910.133. pirator, the job limitation or removal (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em- must be conducted in accordance with ployer shall assure that employees re- paragraphs (l) (11) and (12) of this sec- move all protective clothing and equip- tion. ment contaminated with cadmium at (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers the completion of the work shift and do must: so only in change rooms provided in ac- (A) Select, and provide to employees, cordance with paragraph (j)(1) of this the appropriate respirators specified in section. paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (ii) The employer shall assure that no 1910.134. employee takes cadmium-contami- (B) Provide employees with full face- nated protective clothing or equipment piece respirators when they experience from the workplace, except for employ- eye irritation. ees authorized to do so for purposes of (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or and non-powered air-purifying res- disposing of cadmium-contaminated pirators. protective clothing and equipment at (ii) The employer must provide a an appropriate location or facility powered air-purifying respirator in- away from the workplace. stead of a negative-pressure respirator (iii) The employer shall assure that when an employee entitled to a res- contaminated protective clothing and pirator chooses to use this type of res- equipment, when removed for laun- pirator and such a respirator will pro- dering, cleaning, maintenance, or dis- vide adequate protection to the em- posal, is placed and stored in sealed, ployee. impermeable bags or other closed, im- (h) Emergency situations. The em- permeable containers that are designed ployer shall develop and implement a to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. written plan for dealing with emer- (iv) The employer shall ensure that gency situations involving substantial containers of contaminated protective releases of airborne cadmium. The plan clothing and equipment that are to be shall include provisions for the use of taken out of the change rooms or the appropriate respirators and personal workplace for laundering, cleaning, protective equipment. In addition, em- maintenance or disposal shall bear la- ployees not essential to correcting the bels in accordance with paragraph emergency situation shall be restricted (m)(3)(ii) of this section. from the area and normal operations (3) Cleaning, replacement, and disposal. halted in that area until the emer- (i) The employer shall provide the pro- gency is abated. tective clothing and equipment re- (i) Protective work clothing and equip- quired by paragraph (i)(1) of this sec- ment—(1) Provision and use. If an em- tion in a clean and dry condition as ployee is exposed to airborne cadmium often as necessary to maintain its ef- above the PEL or where skin or eye ir- fectiveness, but in any event at least ritation is associated with cadmium weekly. The employer is responsible exposure at any level, the employer for cleaning and laundering the protec- shall provide at no cost to the em- tive clothing and equipment required

626

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00636 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

by this paragraph to maintain its effec- smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or tiveness and is also responsible for dis- applying cosmetics. posing of such clothing and equipment. (4) Lunchroom facilities. (i) The em- (ii) The employer also is responsible ployer shall assure that the lunchroom for repairing or replacing required pro- facilities are readily accessible to em- tective clothing and equipment as ployees, that tables for eating are needed to maintain its effectiveness. maintained free of cadmium, and that When rips or tears are detected while no employee in a lunchroom facility is an employee is working they shall be exposed at any time to cadmium at or immediately mended, or the worksuit above a concentration of 2.5 μg/m3. shall be immediately replaced. (ii) The employer shall assure that (iii) The employer shall prohibit the employees do not enter lunchroom fa- removal of cadmium from protective cilities with protective work clothing clothing and equipment by blowing, or equipment unless surface cadmium shaking, or any other means that dis- has been removed from the clothing perses cadmium into the air. and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or (iv) The employer shall assure that some other method that removes cad- any laundering of contaminated cloth- mium dust without dispersing it. ing or cleaning of contaminated equip- (k) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces ment in the workplace is done in a shall be maintained as free as prac- manner that prevents the release of ticable of accumulations of cadmium. airborne cadmium in excess of the per- (2) All spills and sudden releases of missible exposure limit prescribed in material containing cadmium shall be paragraph (c) of this section. cleaned up as soon as possible. (v) The employer shall inform any (3) Surfaces contaminated with cad- person who launders or cleans protec- mium shall, wherever possible, be tive clothing or equipment contami- cleaned by vacuuming or other meth- nated with cadmium of the potentially ods that minimize the likelihood of harmful effects of exposure to cad- cadmium becoming airborne. mium, and that the clothing and equip- (4) HEPA-filtered vacuuming equipment should be laundered or cleaned in ment or equally effective filtration a manner to effectively prevent the re- methods shall be used for vacuuming. lease of airborne cadmium in excess of The equipment shall be used and the PEL. emptied in a manner that minimizes (j) Hygiene areas and practices—(1) the reentry of cadmium into the work- General. For employees whose airborne place. exposure to cadmium is above the PEL, (5) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, the employer shall provide clean and brushing may be used only where change rooms, handwashing facilities, vacuuming or other methods that min- showers, and lunchroom facilities that imize the likelihood of cadmium be- comply with 29 CFR 1926.51. coming airborne have been tried and (2) Change rooms. The employer shall found not to be effective. assure that change rooms are equipped (6) Compressed air shall not be used with separate storage facilities for to remove cadmium from any surface street clothes and for protective cloth- unless the compressed air is used in ing and equipment, which are designed conjunction with a ventilation system to prevent dispersion of cadmium and designed to capture the dust cloud cre- contamination of the employee’s street ated by the compressed air. clothes. (7) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, and (3) Showers and handwashing facilities. containers, personal protective equip- (i) The employer shall assure that em- ment and clothing contaminated with ployees whose airborne exposure to cadmium and consigned for disposal cadmium is above the PEL shower dur- shall be collected and disposed of in ing the end of the work shift. sealed impermeable bags or other (ii) The employer shall assure that closed, impermeable containers. These employees who are exposed to cad- bags and containers shall be labeled in mium above the PEL wash their hands accordance with paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of and faces prior to eating, drinking, this section.

627

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00637 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(l) Medical Surveillance—(1) General— latory text of this section, the protocol (i) Scope—(A) Currently exposed—The for sample handling and lab selection employer shall institute a medical sur- in appendix F to this section, and the veillance program for all employees questionnaire of appendix D to this sec- who are or may be exposed at or above tion. the action level and all employees who (iv) The employer shall provide the perform the following tasks, operations medical surveillance required by this or jobs: Electrical grounding with cad- section, including multiple physician mium welding; cutting, brazing, burn- review under paragraph (l)(13) of this ing, grinding or welding on surfaces section without cost to employees, and that were painted with cadmium-con- at a time and place that is reasonable taining paints; electrical work using and convenient to employees. cadmium-coated conduit; use of cad- (v) The employer shall assure that mium containing paints; cutting and the collecting and handling of biologi- welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing cal samples of cadmium in urine (CdU), or welding with cadmium alloys; fusing cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2 of reinforced steel by cadmium weld- microglobulin in urine (b2-M) taken ing; maintaining or retrofitting cad- from employees under this section is mium-coated equipment; and, wrecking done in a manner that assures their re- and demolition where cadmium is liability and that analysis of biological present. A medical surveillance pro- samples of cadmium in urine (CdU), gram will not be required if the em- cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2 ployer demonstrates that the em- microglobulin in urine (b2-M) taken ployee: from employees under this section is (1) Is not currently exposed by the performed in laboratories with dem- employer to airborne concentrations of onstrated proficiency to perform the cadmium at or above the action level particular analysis. (See appendix F to on 30 or more days per year (twelve this section.) consecutive months); and, (2) Initial Examination. (i) For em- (2) Is not currently exposed by the ployees covered by medical surveil- employer in those tasks on 30 or more lance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this days per year (twelve consecutive section, the employer shall provide an months). initial medical examination. The ex- (B) Previously exposed—The employer amination shall be provided to those shall also institute a medical surveil- employees within 30 days after initial lance program for all employees who assignment to a job with exposure to might previously have been exposed to cadmium or no later than 90 days after cadmium by the employer prior to the the effective date of this section, effective date of this standard in tasks whichever date is later. specified under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(A) of (ii) The initial medical examination this section, unless the employer dem- shall include: onstrates that the employee did not in (A) A detailed medical and work his- the years prior to the effective date of tory, with emphasis on: Past, present, this section work in those tasks for the and anticipated future exposure to cad- employer with exposure to cadmium mium; any history of renal, cardio- for an aggregated total of more than 12 vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, months. reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal (ii) To determine an employee’s fit- system dysfunction; current usage of ness for using a respirator, the em- medication with potential nephrotoxic ployer shall provide the limited med- side-effects; and smoking history and ical examination specified in paragraph current status; and (l)(6) of this section. (B) Biological monitoring that in- (iii) The employer shall assure that cludes the following tests: all medical examinations and proce- (1) Cadmium in urine (CdU), stand- dures required by this section are per- ardized to grams of creatinine (g/Cr); formed by or under the supervision of a (2) Beta-2 microglobulin in urine (b2- licensed physician, who has read and is M), standardized to grams of creatinine familiar with the health effects section (g/Cr), with pH specified, as described of appendix A to this section, the regu- in appendix F to this section; and

628

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00638 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

(3) Cadmium in blood (CdB), stand- (2) Reevaluate the employee’s res- ardized to liters of whole blood (lwb). pirator use, if any, and the respirator (iii) Recent Examination: An initial program; examination is not required to be pro- (3) Review the hygiene facilities; vided if adequate records show that the (4) Reevaluate the maintenance and employee has been examined in accord- effectiveness of the relevant engineer- ance with the requirements of para- ing controls; graph (l)(2)(ii) of this section within (5) Assess the employee’s smoking the past 12 months. In that case, such history and status; records shall be maintained as part of (B) Within 30 days after the exposure the employee’s medical record and the reassessment, specified in paragraph prior exam shall be treated as if it were (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, take reason- an initial examination for the purposes able steps to correct any deficiencies of paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this sec- found in the reassessment that may be tion. responsible for the employee’s excess (3) Actions triggered by initial biological exposure to cadmium; and, monitoring. (i) If the results of the bio- (C) Within 90 days after receipt of bi- logical monitoring tests in the initial ological monitoring results, provide a examination show the employee’s CdU full medical examination to the em- μ level to be at or below 3 g/g Cr, b2-M ployee in accordance with the require- μ level to be at or below 300 g/g Cr and ments of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this sec- μ CdB level to be at or below 5 g/lwb, tion. After completing the medical ex- then: amination, the examining physician (A) For employees who are subject to shall determine in a written medical medical surveillance under paragraphs opinion whether to medically remove (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of the employee. If the physician deter- current or anticipated exposure to cad- mines that medical removal is not nec- mium, the employer shall provide the essary, then until the employee’s CdU minimum level of periodic medical sur- level falls to or below 3 μg/g Cr, b2-M veillance in accordance with the re- level falls to or below 300 μg/g Cr and quirements in paragraph (l)(4)(i) of this CdB level falls to or below 5 μg/lwb, the section; and employer shall: (B) For employees who are subject to (1) Provide biological monitoring in medical surveillance under paragraph accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section because of of this section on a semiannual basis; prior but not current exposure, the em- and ployer shall provide biological moni- (2) Provide annual medical examina- toring for CdU, B -M, and CdB one year 2 tions in accordance with paragraph after the initial biological monitoring and then the employer shall comply (l)(4)(ii) of this section. with the requirements of paragraph (iii) For all employees who are sub- (l)(4)(vi) of this section. ject to medical surveillance under (ii) For all employees who are subject paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the to medical surveillance under para- results of the initial biological moni- graph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the re- toring tests show the level of CdU to be μ sults of the initial biological moni- in excess of 15 g/g Cr, or the level of toring tests show the level of CdU to CdB to be in excess of 15 μg/lwb, or the level of b -M to be in excess of 1,500 μg/ exceed 3 μg/g Cr, the level of b2-M to be 2 in excess of 300 μg/g Cr, or the level of g Cr, the employer shall comply with CdB to be in excess of 5 μg/lwb, the em- the requirements of paragraphs ployer shall: (l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within (A) Within two weeks after receipt of 90 days after receipt of biological moni- biological monitoring results, reassess toring results, the employer shall pro- the employee’s occupational exposure vide a full medical examination to the to cadmium as follows: employee in accordance with the re- (1) Reassess the employee’s work quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of practices and personal hygiene;

629

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00639 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

this section. After completing the medical opinion whether to medically re- ical examination, the examining physi- move the employee. However, if the cian shall determine in a written med- initial biological monitoring results ical opinion whether to medically re- and the biological monitoring results move the employee. However, if the obtained during the medical examina- initial biological monitoring results tion both show that: CdU exceeds 7 μg/ and the biological monitoring results g Cr; or CdB exceeds 10 μg/lwb; or b2-M obtained during the medical examina- exceeds 750 μg/g Cr, and in addition CdU tion both show that: CdU exceeds 15 μg/ exceeds 3 μg/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 μg/ g Cr; or CdB exceeds 15 μg/lwb; or b2-M liter of whole blood, then the physician exceeds 1500 μg/g Cr, and in addition shall medically remove the employee CdU exceeds 3 μg/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 from exposure to cadmium at or above μg/liter of whole blood, then the physi- the action level. If the second set of bi- cian shall medically remove the em- ological monitoring results obtained ployee from exposure to cadmium at or during the medical examination does above the action level. If the second set not show that a mandatory removal of biological monitoring results ob- trigger level has been exceeded, then tained during the medical examination the employee is not required to be re- does not show that a mandatory removed by the mandatory provisions of moval trigger level has been exceeded, this paragraph. If the employee is not then the employee is not required to be required to be removed by the manda- removed by the mandatory provisions tory provisions of this paragraph or by of this paragraph. If the employee is the physician’s determination, then not required to be removed by the man- until the employee’s CdU level falls to datory provisions of this paragraph or or below 3 μg/g Cr, b2-M level falls to or by the physician’s determination, then below 300 μg/g Cr and CdB level falls to until the employee’s CdU level falls to or below 5 μg/lwb, the employer shall: or below 3 μg/g Cr, b2-M level falls to or (A) Periodically reassess the employ- below 300 μg/g Cr and CdB level falls to ee’s occupational exposure to cad- or below 5 μg/lwb, the employer shall: mium; (A) Periodically reassess the employ- (B) Provide biological monitoring in ee’s occupational exposure to cad- accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) mium; of this section on a quarterly basis; and (B) Provide biological monitoring in (C) Provide semiannual medical ex- accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) aminations in accordance with para- of this section on a quarterly basis; and graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (C) Provide semiannual medical ex- (4) Periodic medical surveillance. (i) aminations in accordance with para- For each employee who is covered by graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. medical surveillance under paragraph (iv) For all employees to whom med- (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of ical surveillance is provided, beginning current or anticipated exposure to cad- on January 1, 1999, and in lieu of para- mium, the employer shall provide at graph (l)(3)(iii) of this section, when- least the minimum level of periodic ever the results of initial biological medical surveillance, which consists of monitoring tests show the employee’s periodic medical examinations and CdU level to be in excess of 7 μg/g Cr, or periodic biological monitoring. A peri- b2-M level to be in excess of 750 μg/g Cr, odic medical examination shall be pro- or CdB level to be in excess of 10 μg/ vided within one year after the initial lwb, the employer shall comply with examination required by paragraph the requirements of paragraphs (l)(2) of this section and thereafter at (l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within least biennially. Biological sampling 90 days after receipt of biological moni- shall be provided at least annually ei- toring results, the employer shall pro- ther as part of a periodic medical ex- vide a full medical examination to the amination or separately as periodic bi- employee in accordance with the re- ological monitoring. quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of (ii) The periodic medical examination this section. After completing the med- shall include: ical examination, the examining physi- (A) A detailed medical and work his- cian shall determine in a written med- tory, or update thereof, with emphasis

630

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00640 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

on: Past, present and anticipated fu- employer shall take the appropriate ture exposure to cadmium; smoking actions specified in paragraphs history and current status; reproduc- (l)(3)(ii)–(iv) of this section, respective history; current use of medica- tively. tions with potential nephrotoxic side- (v) For previously exposed employees effects; any history of renal, cardio- under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this sec- vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, tion: and/or musculo-skeletal system dys- (A) If the employee’s levels of CdU function; and as part of the medical did not exceed 3 μg/g Cr, CdB did not and work history, for employees who exceed 5 μg/lwb, and b2–M did not ex- wear respirators, questions 3–11 and 25– ceed 300 μg/g Cr in the initial biological 32 in appendix D to this section; monitoring tests, and if the results of (B) A complete physical examination the followup biological monitoring re- with emphasis on: blood pressure, the quired by paragraph (l)(3)(i)(B) of this respiratory system, and the urinary section one year after the initial exam- system; ination confirm the previous results, (C) A 14 inch by 17 inch or other rea- the employer may discontinue all peri- sonably-sized standard film or digital odic medical surveillance for that em- posterior-anterior chest X-ray (after ployee. the initial X-ray, the frequency of (B) If the initial biological moni- chest X-rays is to be determined by the toring results for CdU, CdB, or b2–M examining physician); were in excess of the levels specified in (D) Pulmonary function tests, includ- paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, but ing forced vital capacity (FVC) and subsequent biological monitoring re- forced expiratory volume at 1 second sults required by paragraph (l)(3)(ii)– (FEV1); (iv) of this section show that the em- (E) Biological monitoring, as re- ployee’s CdU levels no longer exceed 3 quired in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this μg/g Cr, CdB levels no longer exceed 5 section; μg/lwb, and b2–M levels no longer ex- (F) Blood analysis, in addition to the ceed 300 μg/g Cr, the employer shall analysis required under paragraph provide biological monitoring for CdU, (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including CdB, and b2–M one year after these blood urea nitrogen, complete blood most recent biological monitoring recount, and serum creatinine; sults. If the results of the followup bio- (G) Urinalysis, in addition to the logical monitoring specified in this analysis required under paragraph paragraph, confirm the previous re- (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including sults, the employer may discontinue the determination of albumin, glucose, all periodic medical surveillance for and total and low molecular weight that employee. proteins; (C) However, if the results of the fol- (H) For males over 40 years old, pros- low-up tests specified in paragraph tate palpation, or other at least as ef- (l)(4)(v)(A) or (B) of this section indi- fective diagnostic test(s), and; cate that the level of the employee’s (I) Any additional tests or procedures CdU, b2–M, or CdB exceeds these same deemed appropriate by the examining levels, the employer is required to pro- physician. vide annual medical examinations in (iii) Periodic biological monitoring accordance with the provisions of para- shall be provided in accordance with graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section until the paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. results of biological monitoring are (iv) If the results of periodic biologi- consistently below these levels or the cal monitoring or the results of bio- examining physician determines in a logical monitoring performed as part of written medical opinion that further the periodic medical examination show medical surveillance is not required to the level of the employee’s CdU, b2–M, protect the employee’s health. or CdB to be in excess of the levels (vi) A routine, biennial medical ex- specified in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iii) amination is not required to be proof this section; or beginning on Janu- vided in accordance with paragraphs ary 1, 1999, in excess of the levels speci- (l)(3)(i) and (l)(4) of this section if ade- fied in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iv), the quate medical records show that the

631

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00641 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

employee has been examined in accord- (A) A detailed medical and work his- ance with the requirements of paratory, or update thereof, with emphasis graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section within on: past exposure to cadmium; smoking the past 12 months. In that case, such history and current status; any history records shall be maintained by the em- of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, ployer as part of the employee’s med- hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal ical record, and the next routine, peri- system dysfunction; a description of odic medical examination shall be the job for which the respirator is re- made available to the employee within quired; and questions 3–11 and 25–32 in two years of the previous examination. appendix D; (5) Actions triggered by medical exami- (B) A blood pressure test; nations. (i) If the results of a medical (C) Biological monitoring of the em- examination carried out in accordance ployee’s levels of CdU, CdB and b2–M in with this section indicate any labora- accordance with the requirements of tory or clinical finding consistent with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, cadmium toxicity that does not require unless such results already have been employer action under paragraphs obtained within the twelve months; (l)(2), (3) or (4) of this section, the em- and ployer shall take the following steps (D) Any other test or precedure that and continue to take them until the the examining physician deems appro- physician determines that they are no priate. longer necessary. (ii) After reviewing all the informa- (A) Periodically reassess: The em- tion obtained from the medical exam- ployee’s work practices and personal ination required in paragraph (l)(6)(i) hygiene; the employee’s respirator use, of this section, the physician shall de- if any; the employee’s smoking history termine whether the employee is fit to and status; the respiratory protection wear a respirator. program; the hygiene facilities; the (iii) Whenever an employee has ex- maintenance and effectiveness of the hibited difficulty in breathing during a relevant engineering controls; and take respirator fit test or during use of a all reasonable steps to correct the defi- respirator, the employer, as soon as ciencies found in the reassessment that possible, shall provide the employee may be responsible for the employee’s with a periodic medical examination in excess exposure to cadmium. accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of (B) Provide semi-annual medical re- this section to determine the employ- examinations to evaluate the abnormal ee’s fitness to wear a respirator. clinical sign(s) of cadmium toxicity (iv) Where the results of the exam- until the results are normal or the em- ination required under paragraphs ployee is medically removed; and (l)(6)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are (C) Where the results of tests for abnormal, medical limitation or prohi- total proteins in urine are abnormal, bition of respirator use shall be consid- provide a more detailed medical eval- ered. If the employee is allowed to wear uation of the toxic effects of cadmium a respirator, the employee’s ability to on the employee’s renal system. continue to do so shall be periodically (6) Examination for respirator use. (i) evaluated by a physician. To determine an employee’s fitness for (7) Emergency Examinations. (i) In ad- respirator use, the employer shall pro- dition to the medical surveillance re- vide a medical examination that in- quired in paragraphs (l)(2)–(6) of this cludes the elements specified in para- section, the employer shall provide a graph (l)(6)(i)(A)–(D) of this section. medical examination as soon as pos- This examination shall be provided sible to any employee who may have prior to the employee’s being assigned been acutely exposed to cadmium be- to a job that requires the use of a res- cause of an emergency. pirator or no later than 90 days after (ii) The examination shall include this section goes into effect, whichever the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii), date is later, to any employee without of this section, with emphasis on the a medical examination within the pre- respiratory system, other organ sys- ceding 12 months that satisfies the re- tems considered appropriate by the ex- quirements of this paragraph. amining physician, and symptoms of

632

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00642 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

acute overexposure, as identified in (B) The physician’s opinion as to paragraphs II(B)(1)–(2) and IV of appen- whether the employee has any detected dix A of this section. medical condition(s) that would place (8) Termination of employment exam- the employee at increased risk of ma- ination. (i) At termination of employ- terial impairment to health from fur- ment, the employer shall provide a ther exposure to cadmium, including medical examination in accordance any indications of potential cadmium with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section, toxicity; including a chest X-ray where nec- (C) The results of any biological or essary, to any employee to whom at other testing or related evaluations any prior time the employer was re- that directly assess the employee’s ab- quired to provide medical surveillance sorption of cadmium; under paragraph (l)(1)(i) or (l)(7) of this (D) Any recommended removal from, section. However, if the last examina- or limitation on the activities or duties tion satisfied the requirements of para- of the employee or on the employee’s graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section and was use of personal protective equipment, less than six months prior to the date such as respirators; of termination, no further examination (E) A statement that the physician is required unless otherwise specified has clearly and carefully explained to in paragraph (l)(3) or (l)(5) of this sec- the employee the results of the medical tion; examination, including all biological (ii) In addition, if the employer has monitoring results and any medical discontinued all periodic medical sur- conditions related to cadmium expo- veillance under paragraph (l)(4)(v) of sure that require further evaluation or this section, no termination of employ- treatment, and any limitation on the ment medical examination is required. employee’s diet or use of medications. (9) Information provided to the physi- (ii) The employer shall promptly ob- cian. The employer shall provide the tain a copy of the results of any bio- following information to the exam- logical monitoring provided by an em- ining physician: ployer to an employee independently of a medical examination under para- (i) A copy of this standard and appen- graphs (l)(2) and (l)(4) of this section, dices; and, in lieu of a written medical opin- (ii) A description of the affected em- ion, an explanation sheet explaining ployee’s former, current, and antici- those results. pated duties as they relate to the em- (iii) The employer shall instruct the ployee’s occupational exposure to cad- physician not to reveal orally or in the mium; written medical opinion given to the (iii) The employee’s former, current, employer specific findings or diagnoses and anticipated future levels of occupa- unrelated to occupational exposure to tional exposure to cadmium; cadmium. (iv) A description of any personal (11) Medical Removal Protection protective equipment, including res- (MRP)—(i) General. (A) The employer pirators, used or to be used by the em- shall temporarily remove an employee ployee, including when and for how from work where there is excess expo- long the employee has used that equip- sure to cadmium on each occasion that ment; and medical removal is required under (v) Relevant results of previous bio- paragraphs (l)(3), (l)(4), or (l)(6) of this logical monitoring and medical exami- section and on each occasion that a nations. physician determines in a written med- (10) Physician’s written medical opin- ical opinion that the employee should ion. (i) The employer shall promptly be removed from such exposure. The obtain a written, medical opinion from physician’s determination may be the examining physician for each med- based on biological monitoring results, ical examination performed on each inability to wear a respirator, evidence employee. This written opinion shall of illness, other signs or symptoms of contain: cadmium-related dysfunction or dis- (A) The physician’s diagnosis for the ease, or any other reason deemed medi- employee; cally sufficient by the physician.

633

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00643 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(B) The employer shall medically re- risk to the employee’s health and there move an employee in accordance with are special circumstances that make paragraph (l)(11) of this section regard- continued medical removal an inappro- less of whether at the time of removal priate remedy, the physician shall fully a job is available into which the re- discuss these matters with the em- moved employee may be transferred. ployee, and then in a written deter- (C) Whenever an employee is medi- mination may return a worker to his/ cally removed under paragraph (l)(11) her former job status despite what of this section, the employer shall would otherwise be unacceptably high transfer the removed employee to a job biological monitoring results. There- where the exposure to cadmium is after and until such time as the em- within the permissible levels specified ployee’s biological monitoring results in that paragraph as soon as one behave decreased to levels where he/she comes available. (D) For any employee who is medi- could have been returned to his/her cally removed under the provisions of former job status, the returned em- paragraph (l)(11)(i) of this section, the ployee shall continue medical surveil- employer shall provide follow-up med- lance as if he/she were still on medical ical examinations semi-annually until, removal. Until such time, the employee in a written medical opinion, the ex- is no longer subject to mandatory med- amining physician determines that ei- ical removal. Subsequent questions re- ther the employee may be returned to garding the employee’s medical re- his/her former job status or the em- moval shall be decided solely by a final ployee must be permanently removed medical determination. from excess cadmium exposure. (vi) Where an employer, although not (E) The employer may not return an required by this section to do so, re- employee who has been medically removes an employee from exposure to moved for any reason to his/her former cadmium or otherwise places limita- job status until a physician determines tions on an employee due to the effects in a written medical opinion that con- of cadmium exposure on the employ- tinued medical removal is no longer ee’s medical condition, the employer necessary to protect the employee’s shall provide the same medical re- health. moval protection benefits to that em- (ii) Where an employee is found unfit ployee under paragraph (l)(12) of this to wear a respirator under paragraph section as would have been provided (l)(6)(ii) of this section, the employer had the removal been required under shall remove the employee from work where exposure to cadmium is above paragraph (l)(11) of this section. the PEL. (12) Medical removal protection benefits. (iii) Where removal is based upon any (i) The employer shall provide medical reason other than the employee’s in- removal protection benefits to an em- ability to wear a respirator, the employee for up to a maximum of 18 ployer shall remove the employee from months each time, and while the em- work where exposure to cadmium is at ployee is temporarily medically re- or above the action level. moved under paragraph (l)(11) of this (iv) Except as specified in paragraph section. (l)(11)(v) of this section, no employee (ii) For purposes of this section, the who was removed because his/her level requirement that the employer provide of CdU, CdB and/or b2–M exceeded the medical removal protection benefits trigger levels in paragraph (l)(3) or means that the employer shall main- (l)(4) of this section may be returned to tain the total normal earnings, senior- work with exposure to cadmium at or ity, and all other employee rights and above the action level until the em- benefits of the removed employee, in- ployee’s levels of CdU fall to or below 3 cluding the employee’s right to his/her μ μ g/g Cr, CdB fall to or below 5 g/lwb, former job status, as if the employee and –M fall to or below 300 μg/g Cr. b2 had not been removed from the em- (v) However, when in the examining ployee’s job or otherwise medically physician’s opinion continued exposure to cadmium will not pose an increased limited.

634

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00644 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

(iii) Where, after 18 months on med- (iii) If the findings, determinations, ical removal because of elevated bio- or recommendations of the second phy- logical monitoring results, the employ- sician differ from those of the initial ee’s monitoring results have not de- physician, then the employer and the clined to a low enough level to permit employee shall assure that efforts are the employee to be returned to his/her made for the two physicians to resolve former job status: any disagreement. (A) The employer shall make avail- (iv) If the two physicians have been able to the employee a medical exam- unable to quickly resolve their dis- ination pursuant to this section in agreement, then the employer and the order to obtain a final medical deter- employee, through their respective mination as to whether the employee physicians, shall designate a third phy- may be returned to his/her former job sician to: status or must be permanently re- (A) Review any findings, determina- moved from excess cadmium exposure; tions, or recommendations of the other and two physicians; and (B) The employer shall assure that (B) Conduct such examinations, con- the final medical determination indi- sultations, laboratory tests, and dis- cates whether the employee may be re- cussions with the other two physicians turned to his/her former job status and as the third physician deems necessary what steps, if any, should be taken to to resolve the disagreement among protect the employee’s health; them. (iv) The employer may condition the provision of medical removal protec- (v) The employer shall act consist- tion benefits upon the employee’s par- ently with the findings, determina- ticipation in medical surveillance pro- tions, and recommendations of the vided in accordance with this section. third physician, unless the employer (13) Multiple physician review. (i) If and the employee reach an agreement the employer selects the initial physi- that is consistent with the rec- cian to conduct any medical examina- ommendations of at least one of the tion or consultation provided to an em- other two physicians. ployee under this section, the employee (14) Alternate physician determination. may designate a second physician to: The employer and an employee or des- (A) Review any findings, determina- ignated employee representative may tions, or recommendations of the ini- agree upon the use of any alternate tial physician; and form of physician determination in lieu (B) Conduct such examinations, con- of the multiple physician review pro- sultations, and laboratory tests as the vided by paragraph (l)(13) of this sec- second physician deems necessary to tion, so long as the alternative is expe- facilitate this review. ditious and at least as protective of the (ii) The employer shall promptly no- employee. tify an employee of the right to seek a (15) Information the employer must pro- second medical opinion after each oc- vide the employee. (i) The employer casion that an initial physician pro- shall provide a copy of the physician’s vided by the employer conducts a med- written medical opinion to the exam- ical examination or consultation pur- ined employee within five working suant to this section. The employer days after receipt thereof. may condition its participation in, and (ii) The employer shall provide the payment for, multiple physician review employee with a copy of the employ- upon the employee doing the following ee’s biological monitoring results and within fifteen (15) days after receipt of an explanation sheet explaining the re- this notice, or receipt of the initial sults within five working days after re- physician’s written opinion, whichever ceipt thereof. is later: (iii) Within 30 days after a request by (A) Informing the employer that he an employee, the employer shall pro- or she intends to seek a medical opin- vide the employee with the informa- ion; and tion the employer is required to pro- (B) Initiating steps to make an ap- vide the examining physician under pointment with a second physician. paragraph (l)(9) of this section.

635

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00645 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(16) Reporting. In addition to other RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA medical events that are required to be (3) Warning labels. (i) Shipping and reported on the OSHA Form No. 200, storage containers containing cad- the employer shall report any abnor- mium or cadmium compounds shall mal condition or disorder caused by oc- bear appropriate warning labels, as cupational exposure to cadmium asso- specified in paragraph (m)(1) of this ciated with employment as specified in section. Chapter (V)(E) of the Reporting Guide- (ii) The warning labels for containers lines for Occupational Injuries and Ill- of cadmium-contaminated protective nesses. clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or (m) Communication of cadmium haz- debris shall include at least the fol- ards to employees—(1) Hazard commu- lowing information: nication. The employer shall include cadmium in the program established to DANGER comply with the Hazard Communica- CONTAINS CADMIUM tion Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The MAY CAUSE CANCER employer shall ensure that each em- CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KID- ployee has access to labels on con- NEYS tainers of cadmium and safety data AVOID CREATING DUST sheets, and is trained in accordance (iii) Where feasible, installed cad- with the provisions of HCS and para- mium products shall have a visible graph (m)(4) of this section. The em- label or other indication that cadmium ployer shall provide information on at is present. least the following hazards: Cancer; (iv) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers lung effects; kidney effects; and acute may include the following information toxicity effects. on shipping and storage containers (2) Warning signs. (i) Warning signs containing cadmium, cadmium com- shall be provided and displayed in regu- pounds, or cadmium-contaminated lated areas. In addition, warning signs clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or shall be posted at all approaches to debris in lieu of the labeling require- regulated areas so that an employee ments specified in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) may read the signs and take necessary and (m)(3)(ii) of this section: protective steps before entering the area. DANGER (ii) Warning signs required by para- CONTAINS CADMIUM graph (m)(2)(i) of this section shall CANCER HAZARD AVOID CREATING DUST bear the following legend: CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE DANGER (4) Employee information and training. CADMIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER (i) The employer shall train each em- CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KID- ployee who is potentially exposed to NEYS cadmium in accordance with the re- WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN quirements of this section. The em- THIS AREA ployer shall institute a training pro- AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY gram, ensure employee participation in (iii) The employer shall ensure that the program, and maintain a record of signs required by this paragraph (m)(2) the contents of the training program. are illuminated, cleaned, and main- (ii) Training shall be provided prior tained as necessary so that the legend to or at the time of initial assignment is readily visible. to a job involving potential exposure to (iv) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers cadmium and at least annually there- may use the following legend in lieu of after. that specified in paragraph (m)(2)(ii) of (iii) The employer shall make the this section: training program understandable to the employee and shall assure that DANGER CADMIUM each employee is informed of the fol- CANCER HAZARD lowing: CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE (A) The health hazards associated AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY with cadmium exposure, with special

636

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00646 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1127

attention to the information incor- (ii) This record shall include at least porated in appendix A to this section; the following information: (B) The quantity, location, manner of (A) The monitoring date, shift, dura- use, release, and storage of cadmium in tion, air volume, and results in terms the workplace and the specific nature of an 8-hour TWA of each sample of operations that could result in expo- taken, and if cadmium is not detected, sure to cadmium, especially exposures the detection level; above the PEL; (B) The name and job classification (C) The engineering controls and of all employees monitored and of all work practices associated with the em- other employees whose exposures the ployee’s job assignment; monitoring result is intended to rep- (D) The measures employees can take resent, including, where applicable, a to protect themselves from exposure to description of how it was determined cadmium, including modification of that the employee’s monitoring result such habits as smoking and personal could be taken to represent other em- hygiene, and specific procedures the ployee’s exposures; employer has implemented to protect (C) A description of the sampling and employees from exposure to cadmium analytical methods used and evidence such as appropriate work practices, of their accuracy; emergency procedures, and the provi- (D) The type of respiratory protec- sion of personal protective equipment; tive device, if any, worn by the mon- (E) The purpose, proper selection, fit- itored employee and by any other em- ting, proper use, and limitations of res- ployee whose exposure the monitoring pirators and protective clothing; result is intended to represent; (F) The purpose and a description of (E) A notation of any other condi- the medical surveillance program re- tions that might have affected the quired by paragraph (l) of this section; monitoring results. (G) The contents of this section and (F) Any exposure monitoring or ob- its appendices, and, jective data that were used and the lev- (H) The employee’s rights of access els. to records under § 1926.33(g) (1) and (2). (iii) The employer shall maintain (iv) Additional access to information this record for at least thirty (30) and training program and materials. years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of (A) The employer shall make a copy this chapter. of this section and its appendices read- (iv) The employer shall also provide a ily available to all affected employees copy of the results of an employee’s air and shall provide a copy without cost if monitoring prescribed in paragraph (d) requested. of this section to an industry trade as- (B) Upon request, the employer shall sociation and to the employee’s union, provide to the Assistant Secretary or if any, or, if either of such associations the Director all materials relating to or unions do not exist, to another com- the employee information and the parable organization that is competent training program. to maintain such records and is reason- (5) Multi-employer workplace. In a ably accessible to employers and em- multi-employer workplace, an employees in the industry. ployer who produces, uses, or stores (2) Objective data for exemption from re- cadmium in a manner that may expose quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For employees of other employers to cad- purposes of this section, objective data mium shall notify those employers of are information demonstrating that a the potential hazard in accordance particular product or material con- with paragraph (e) of the hazard com- taining cadmium or a specific process, munication standard for construction, operation, or activity involving cad- 29 CFR 1926.59. mium cannot release dust or fumes in (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure moni- concentrations at or above the action toring. (i) The employer shall establish level even under the worst-case release and keep an accurate record of all air conditions. Objective data can be ob- monitoring for cadmium in the work- tained from an industry-wide study or place. from laboratory product test results

637

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00647 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1127 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

from manufacturers of cadmium-con- paragraph (n)(3) of this section avail- taining products or materials. The data able for examination and copying to the employer uses from an industry- the subject employee, to designated wide survey must be obtained under representatives, to anyone having the workplace conditions closely resem- specific written consent of the subject bling the processes, types of material, employee, and after the employee’s control methods, work practices and death or incapacitation, to the employ- environmental conditions in the em- ee’s family members. ployer’s current operations. (o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- (ii) The employer shall maintain the ployee observation. The employer shall record for at least 30 years of the objec- provide affected employees or their tive data relied upon. designated representatives an oppor- (3) Medical surveillance. (i) The employer shall establish and maintain an tunity to observe any monitoring of accurate record for each employee cov- employee exposure to cadmium. ered by medical surveillance under (2) Observation procedures. When ob- paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section. servation of monitoring requires entry (ii) The record shall include at least into an area where the use of protec- the following information about the tive clothing or equipment is required, employee: the employer shall provide the observer (A) Name and description of duties; with that clothing and equipment and (B) A copy of the physician’s written shall assure that the observer uses opinions and of the explanation sheets such clothing and equipment and com- for biological monitoring results; plies with all other applicable safety (C) A copy of the medical history, and health procedures. and the results of any physical exam- (p) [Reserved] ination and all test results that are re- (q) Appendices. Except where portions quired to be provided by this section, of appendices A, B, D, E, and F to this including biological tests, X-rays, pul- section are expressly incorporated in monary function tests, etc., or that requirements of this section, these ap- have been obtained to further evaluate pendices are purely informational and any condition that might be related to are not intended to create any addi- cadmium exposure; tional obligations not otherwise im- (D) The employee’s medical symptoms that might be related to exposure posed or to detract from any existing to cadmium; and obligations. (E) A copy of the information pro- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE vided to the physician as required by SAFETY DATA SHEET paragraph (l)(9) of this section. (iii) The employer shall assure that NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- this record is maintained for the dura- struction work under this appendix A are identical to those set forth in appendix A to tion of employment plus thirty (30) § 1910.1027 of this chapter. years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of this chapter. APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE (iv) At the employee’s request, the TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR CADMIUM employer shall promptly provide a NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- copy of the employee’s medical record, struction work under this appendix B are or update as appropriate, to a medical identical to those set forth in appendix B to doctor or a union specified by the em- § 1910.1027 of this chapter. ployee. (4) Availability. (i) Except as other- APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1127 [RESERVED] wise provided for in this section, access to all records required to be main- APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1127—OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HISTORY INTERVIEW WITH REF- tained by paragraphs (n)(1) through (3) ERENCE TO CADMIUM EXPOSURE of this section shall be in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1020. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (ii) Within 15 days after a request, struction work under this appendix D are the employer shall make an employee’s identical to those set forth in appendix D to medical records required to be kept by § 1910.1027 of this chapter.

638

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00648 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1127—CADMIUM IN § 1926.1152 Methylene chloride. WORKPLACE ATMOSPHERES NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction employment under this section are struction work under this appendix E are identical to those set forth at 29 CFR identical to those set forth in appendix E to § 1910.1027 of this chapter. 1910.1052. [62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997] APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1127—NONMANDATORY PROTOCOL FOR BIOLOGICAL MONITORING § 1926.1153 Respirable crystalline sili- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- ca. struction work under this appendix F are identical to those set forth in appendix F to (a) Scope and application. This section § 1910.1027 of this chapter. applies to all occupational exposures to [57 FR 42452, Sept. 14, 1992, as amended at 57 respirable crystalline silica in con- FR 49272, Oct. 30, 1992; 58 FR 21787, Apr. 23, struction work, except where employee 1993. Redesignated and amended at 59 FR 215, exposure will remain below 25 Jan. 3, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR micrograms per cubic meter of air (25 31433, 31434, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8, μg/m3) as an 8-hour time-weighted aver- 1998; 70 FR 1144, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16675, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50192, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75589, age (TWA) under any foreseeable condi- Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33612, June 8, 2011; 77 FR tions. 17895, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21597, May 14, 2019; (b) Definitions. For the purposes of 85 FR 8746, Feb. 18, 2020] this section the following definitions apply: § 1926.1128 Benzene. Action level means a concentration of NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- airborne respirable crystalline silica of struction work under this section are iden- 25 μg/m3, calculated as an 8-hour TWA. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1028 of this chapter. Assistant Secretary means the Assist- ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- § 1926.1129 [Reserved] ment of Labor, or designee. Director means the Director of the § 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3- National Institute for Occupational chloropropane. Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- partment of Health and Human Serv- struction work under this section are iden- ices, or designee. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1044 of this Competent person means an individual chapter. who is capable of identifying existing [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] and foreseeable respirable crystalline silica hazards in the workplace and § 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile. who has authorization to take prompt NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- corrective measures to eliminate or struction work under this section are iden- minimize them. The competent person tical to those set forth at § 1910.1045 of this chapter. must have the knowledge and ability necessary to fulfill the responsibilities [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] set forth in paragraph (g) of this sec- § 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide. tion. Employee exposure means the expo- NOTE: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are iden- sure to airborne respirable crystalline tical to those set forth at § 1910.1047 of this silica that would occur if the employee chapter. were not using a respirator. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] filter means a filter that is at least 99.97 § 1926.1148 Formaldehyde. percent efficient in removing mono-dis- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- persed particles of 0.3 micrometers in struction work under this section are iden- diameter. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1048 of this Objective data means information, chapter. such as air monitoring data from in- [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] dustry-wide surveys or calculations

639

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00649 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

based on the composition of a sub- pling device designed to meet the char- stance, demonstrating employee expo- acteristics for respirable-particle-size- sure to respirable crystalline silica as- selective samplers specified in the sociated with a particular product or International Organization for Stand- material or a specific process, task, or ardization (ISO) 7708:1995: Air Quality— activity. The data must reflect work- Particle Size Fraction Definitions for place conditions closely resembling or Health-Related Sampling. with a higher exposure potential than Specialist means an American Board the processes, types of material, con- Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Dis- trol methods, work practices, and envi- ease or an American Board Certified ronmental conditions in the employer’s Specialist in Occupational Medicine. current operations. Physician or other licensed health care This section means this respirable professional [PLHCP] means an indi- crystalline silica standard, 29 CFR vidual whose legally permitted scope of 1926.1153. practice (i.e., license, registration, or (c) Specified exposure control methods. certification) allows him or her to (1) For each employee engaged in a independently provide or be delegated task identified on Table 1, the em- the responsibility to provide some or ployer shall fully and properly imple- all of the particular health care serv- ment the engineering controls, work ices required by paragraph (h) of this practices, and respiratory protection section. specified for the task on Table 1, unless Respirable crystalline silica means the employer assesses and limits the quartz, cristobalite, and/or tridymite exposure of the employee to respirable contained in airborne particles that are crystalline silica in accordance with determined to be respirable by a sam- paragraph (d) of this section.

TABLE 1—SPECIFIED EXPOSURE CONTROL METHODS WHEN WORKING WITH MATERIALS CONTAINING CRYSTALLINE SILICA

Required respiratory protection and minimum Equipment/task Engineering and work practice control methods assigned protection factor (APF) ≤4 hours/shift >4 hours/shift

(i) Stationary masonry Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery None ...... None. saws. system that continuously feeds water to the blade. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. (ii) Handheld power saws Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery (any blade diameter). system that continuously feeds water to the blade. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions: —When used outdoors ...... None ...... APF 10. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 ...... APF 10. (iii) Handheld power saws For tasks performed outdoors only: for cutting fiber-cement Use saw equipped with commercially available None. None. board (with blade di- dust collection system. ameter of 8 inches or Operate and maintain tool in accordance with less). manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the tool manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency. (iv) Walk-behind saws ..... Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions: —When used outdoors ...... None ...... None. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 ...... APF 10. (v) Drivable saws ...... For tasks performed outdoors only:

640

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00650 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

TABLE 1—SPECIFIED EXPOSURE CONTROL METHODS WHEN WORKING WITH MATERIALS CONTAINING CRYSTALLINE SILICA—Continued

Required respiratory protection and minimum Equipment/task Engineering and work practice control methods assigned protection factor (APF) ≤4 hours/shift >4 hours/shift

Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery None ...... None. system that continuously feeds water to the blade. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. (vi) Rig-mounted core Use tool equipped with integrated water delivery None ...... None. saws or drills. system that supplies water to cutting surface. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. (vii) Handheld and stand- Use drill equipped with commercially available None ...... None. mounted drills (includ- shroud or cowling with dust collection system. ing impact and rotary hammer drills). Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the tool manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism. Use a HEPA-filtered vacuum when cleaning holes. (viii) Dowel drilling rigs for For tasks performed outdoors only: concrete. Use shroud around drill bit with a dust collection APF 10 ...... APF 10. system. Dust collector must have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism. Use a HEPA-filtered vacuum when cleaning holes. (ix) Vehicle-mounted drill- Use dust collection system with close capture None ...... None. ing rigs for rock and hood or shroud around drill bit with a low-flow concrete. water spray to wet the dust at the discharge point from the dust collector. OR Operate from within an enclosed cab and use None ...... None. water for dust suppression on drill bit. (x) Jackhammers and Use tool with water delivery system that supplies handheld powered chip- a continuous stream or spray of water at the ping tools. point of impact: —When used outdoors ...... None ...... APF 10. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 ...... APF 10. OR Use tool equipped with commercially available shroud and dust collection system. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the tool manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism: —When used outdoors ...... None ...... APF 10. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 ...... APF 10. (xi) Handheld grinders for Use grinder equipped with commercially available APF 10 ...... APF 25. mortar removal (i.e., shroud and dust collection system. tuckpointing). Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Dust collector must provide 25 cubic feet per minute (cfm) or greater of airflow per inch of wheel diameter and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a cyclonic pre-separator or filter-cleaning mechanism.

641

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00651 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 1—SPECIFIED EXPOSURE CONTROL METHODS WHEN WORKING WITH MATERIALS CONTAINING CRYSTALLINE SILICA—Continued

Required respiratory protection and minimum Equipment/task Engineering and work practice control methods assigned protection factor (APF) ≤4 hours/shift >4 hours/shift

(xii) Handheld grinders for For tasks performed outdoors only: None ...... None. uses other than mortar Use grinder equipped with integrated water deliv- removal. ery system that continuously feeds water to the grinding surface. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. OR Use grinder equipped with commercially available shroud and dust collection system. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Dust collector must provide 25 cubic feet per minute (cfm) or greater of airflow per inch of wheel diameter and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a cyclonic pre-separator or filter-cleaning mechanism: —When used outdoors ...... None ...... None. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area None ...... APF 10. (xiii) Walk-behind milling Use machine equipped with integrated water deliv- None ...... None. machines and floor ery system that continuously feeds water to the grinders. cutting surface. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. OR Use machine equipped with dust collection system None ...... None. recommended by the manufacturer. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism. When used indoors or in an enclosed area, use a HEPA-filtered vacuum to remove loose dust in between passes. (xiv) Small drivable milling Use a machine equipped with supplemental water None ...... None. machines (less than sprays designed to suppress dust. Water must half-lane). be combined with a surfactant. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions. (xv) Large drivable milling For cuts of any depth on asphalt only: None ...... None. machines (half-lane and Use machine equipped with exhaust ventilation on larger). drum enclosure and supplemental water sprays designed to suppress dust. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions. For cuts of four inches in depth or less on any substrate: Use machine equipped with exhaust ventilation on None ...... None. drum enclosure and supplemental water sprays designed to suppress dust. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions. OR Use a machine equipped with supplemental water None ...... None. spray designed to suppress dust. Water must be combined with a surfactant. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions. (xvi) Crushing machines .. Use equipment designed to deliver water spray or None ...... None. mist for dust suppression at crusher and other points where dust is generated (e.g., hoppers, conveyers, sieves/sizing or vibrating components, and discharge points).

642

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00652 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

TABLE 1—SPECIFIED EXPOSURE CONTROL METHODS WHEN WORKING WITH MATERIALS CONTAINING CRYSTALLINE SILICA—Continued

Required respiratory protection and minimum Equipment/task Engineering and work practice control methods assigned protection factor (APF) ≤4 hours/shift >4 hours/shift

Operate and maintain machine in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to minimize dust emissions. Use a ventilated booth that provides fresh, cli- mate-controlled air to the operator, or a remote control station. (xvii) Heavy equipment Operate equipment from within an enclosed cab ... None ...... None. and utility vehicles used When employees outside of the cab are engaged None ...... None. to abrade or fracture in the task, apply water and/or dust suppres- silica-containing mate- sants as necessary to minimize dust emissions. rials (e.g., hoe-ram- ming, rock ripping) or used during demolition activities involving silica-containing materials. (xviii) Heavy equipment Apply water and/or dust suppressants as nec- None ...... None. and utility vehicles for essary to minimize dust emissions. tasks such as grading OR and excavating but not including: Demolishing, abrading, or fracturing silica-containing materials. When the equipment operator is the only em- None ...... None. ployee engaged in the task, operate equipment from within an enclosed cab.

(2) When implementing the control (3) Where an employee performs more measures specified in Table 1, each em- than one task on Table 1 during the ployer shall: course of a shift, and the total duration (i) For tasks performed indoors or in of all tasks combined is more than four enclosed areas, provide a means of ex- hours, the required respiratory protec- haust as needed to minimize the accu- tion for each task is the respiratory mulation of visible airborne dust; protection specified for more than four (ii) For tasks performed using wet hours per shift. If the total duration of methods, apply water at flow rates suf- all tasks on Table 1 combined is less ficient to minimize release of visible than four hours, the required res- dust; piratory protection for each task is the (iii) For measures implemented that respiratory protection specified for less include an enclosed cab or booth, en- than four hours per shift. sure that the enclosed cab or booth: (d) Alternative exposure control meth- (A) Is maintained as free as prac- ods. For tasks not listed in Table 1, or ticable from settled dust; where the employer does not fully and (B) Has door seals and closing mecha- properly implement the engineering nisms that work properly; controls, work practices, and res- (C) Has gaskets and seals that are in piratory protection described in Table good condition and working properly; 1: (D) Is under positive pressure main- (1) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). tained through continuous delivery of The employer shall ensure that no em- fresh air; ployee is exposed to an airborne con- (E) Has intake air that is filtered centration of respirable crystalline through a filter that is 95% efficient in silica in excess of 50 μg/m3, calculated the 0.3–10.0 μm range (e.g., MERV–16 or as an 8-hour TWA. better); and (2) Exposure assessment—(i) General. (F) Has heating and cooling capabili- The employer shall assess the exposure ties.

643

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00653 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

of each employee who is or may reason- the action level, at which time the em- ably be expected to be exposed to res- ployer may discontinue monitoring for pirable crystalline silica at or above those employees whose exposures are the action level in accordance with ei- represented by such monitoring, except ther the performance option in para- as otherwise provided in paragraph graph (d)(2)(ii) or the scheduled moni- (d)(2)(iv) of this section. toring option in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of (iv) Reassessment of exposures. The this section. employer shall reassess exposures (ii) Performance option. The employer whenever a change in the production, shall assess the 8-hour TWA exposure process, control equipment, personnel, for each employee on the basis of any or work practices may reasonably be combination of air monitoring data or expected to result in new or additional objective data sufficient to accurately exposures at or above the action level, characterize employee exposures to or when the employer has any reason respirable crystalline silica. to believe that new or additional expo- (iii) Scheduled monitoring option. (A) sures at or above the action level have The employer shall perform initial occurred. monitoring to assess the 8-hour TWA (v) Methods of sample analysis. The exposure for each employee on the employer shall ensure that all samples basis of one or more personal breathing taken to satisfy the monitoring re- zone air samples that reflect the expo- quirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this sures of employees on each shift, for section are evaluated by a laboratory each job classification, in each work that analyzes air samples for respirable area. Where several employees perform crystalline silica in accordance with the same tasks on the same shift and the procedures in Appendix A to this in the same work area, the employer section. may sample a representative fraction (vi) Employee notification of assess- of these employees in order to meet ment results. (A) Within five working this requirement. In representative days after completing an exposure as- sampling, the employer shall sample the employee(s) who are expected to sessment in accordance with paragraph have the highest exposure to respirable (d)(2) of this section, the employer crystalline silica. shall individually notify each affected (B) If initial monitoring indicates employee in writing of the results of that employee exposures are below the that assessment or post the results in action level, the employer may dis- an appropriate location accessible to continue monitoring for those employ- all affected employees. ees whose exposures are represented by (B) Whenever an exposure assessment such monitoring. indicates that employee exposure is (C) Where the most recent exposure above the PEL, the employer shall de- monitoring indicates that employee ex- scribe in the written notification the posures are at or above the action level corrective action being taken to reduce but at or below the PEL, the employer employee exposure to or below the shall repeat such monitoring within six PEL. months of the most recent monitoring. (vii) Observation of monitoring. (A) (D) Where the most recent exposure Where air monitoring is performed to monitoring indicates that employee ex- comply with the requirements of this posures are above the PEL, the em- section, the employer shall provide af- ployer shall repeat such monitoring fected employees or their designated within three months of the most recent representatives an opportunity to ob- monitoring. serve any monitoring of employee ex- (E) Where the most recent (non-ini- posure to respirable crystalline silica. tial) exposure monitoring indicates (B) When observation of monitoring that employee exposures are below the requires entry into an area where the action level, the employer shall repeat use of protective clothing or equipment such monitoring within six months of is required for any workplace hazard, the most recent monitoring until two the employer shall provide the observer consecutive measurements, taken with protective clothing and equip- seven or more days apart, are below ment at no cost and shall ensure that

644

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00654 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

the observer uses such clothing and and such controls are not sufficient to equipment. reduce exposures to or below the PEL. (3) Methods of compliance—(i) Engi- (2) Respiratory protection program. neering and work practice controls. The Where respirator use is required by this employer shall use engineering and section, the employer shall institute a work practice controls to reduce and respiratory protection program in ac- maintain employee exposure to res- cordance with 29 CFR 1910.134. pirable crystalline silica to or below (3) Specified exposure control methods. the PEL, unless the employer can dem- For the tasks listed in Table 1 in para- onstrate that such controls are not fea- graph (c) of this section, if the em- sible. Wherever such feasible engineer- ployer fully and properly implements ing and work practice controls are not the engineering controls, work prac- sufficient to reduce employee exposure tices, and respiratory protection de- to or below the PEL, the employer scribed in Table 1, the employer shall shall nonetheless use them to reduce be considered to be in compliance with employee exposure to the lowest fea- paragraph (e)(1) of this section and the sible level and shall supplement them requirements for selection of res- with the use of respiratory protection pirators in 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(1)(iii) and that complies with the requirements of (d)(3) with regard to exposure to res- paragraph (e) of this section. pirable crystalline silica. (ii) Abrasive blasting. In addition to (f) Housekeeping. (1) The employer the requirements of paragraph (d)(3)(i) shall not allow dry sweeping or dry of this section, the employer shall com- brushing where such activity could ply with other OSHA standards, when contribute to employee exposure to applicable, such as 29 CFR 1926.57 (Ven- respirable crystalline silica unless wet tilation), where abrasive blasting is sweeping, HEPA-filtered vacuuming or conducted using crystalline silica-con- other methods that minimize the likelihood of exposure are not feasible. taining blasting agents, or where abra- (2) The employer shall not allow com- sive blasting is conducted on sub- pressed air to be used to clean clothing strates that contain crystalline silica. or surfaces where such activity could (e) —(1) Respiratory protection General. contribute to employee exposure to Where respiratory protection is re- respirable crystalline silica unless: quired by this section, the employer (i) The compressed air is used in con- must provide each employee an appro- junction with a ventilation system priate respirator that complies with that effectively captures the dust cloud the requirements of this paragraph and created by the compressed air; or 29 CFR 1910.134. Respiratory protection (ii) No alternative method is feasible. is required: (g) Written exposure control plan. (1) (i) Where specified by Table 1 of para- The employer shall establish and im- graph (c) of this section; or plement a written exposure control (ii) For tasks not listed in Table 1, or plan that contains at least the fol- where the employer does not fully and lowing elements: properly implement the engineering (i) A description of the tasks in the controls, work practices, and res- workplace that involve exposure to respiratory protection described in Table pirable crystalline silica; 1: (ii) A description of the engineering (A) Where exposures exceed the PEL controls, work practices, and res- during periods necessary to install or piratory protection used to limit em- implement feasible engineering and ployee exposure to respirable crys- work practice controls; talline silica for each task; (B) Where exposures exceed the PEL (iii) A description of the house- during tasks, such as certain mainte- keeping measures used to limit em- nance and repair tasks, for which engi- ployee exposure to respirable crys- neering and work practice controls are talline silica; and not feasible; and (iv) A description of the procedures (C) During tasks for which an em- used to restrict access to work areas, ployer has implemented all feasible en- when necessary, to minimize the num- gineering and work practice controls ber of employees exposed to respirable

645

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00655 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

crystalline silica and their level of ex- less than 14 x 17 inches and no more posure, including exposures generated than 16 x 17 inches) or digital radiog- by other employers or sole proprietors. raphy systems), interpreted and classi- (2) The employer shall review and fied according to the International evaluate the effectiveness of the writ- Labour Office (ILO) International Clas- ten exposure control plan at least an- sification of Radiographs of nually and update it as necessary. Pneumoconioses by a NIOSH-certified (3) The employer shall make the B Reader; written exposure control plan readily (iv) A pulmonary function test to in- available for examination and copying, clude forced vital capacity (FVC) and upon request, to each employee covered forced expiratory volume in one second by this section, their designated rep- (FEV1) and FEV1/FVC ratio, adminis- resentatives, the Assistant Secretary tered by a spirometry technician with and the Director. a current certificate from a NIOSH-ap- (4) The employer shall designate a proved spirometry course; competent person to make frequent (v) Testing for latent tuberculosis in- and regular inspections of job sites, materials, and equipment to imple- fection; and ment the written exposure control (vi) Any other tests deemed appro- plan. priate by the PLHCP. (h) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (3) Periodic examinations. The em- (i) The employer shall make medical ployer shall make available medical surveillance available at no cost to the examinations that include the proce- employee, and at a reasonable time and dures described in paragraph (h)(2) of place, for each employee who will be this section (except paragraph (h)(2)(v)) required under this section to use a at least every three years, or more fre- respirator for 30 or more days per year. quently if recommended by the (ii) The employer shall ensure that PLHCP. all medical examinations and proce- (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. dures required by this section are per- The employer shall ensure that the ex- formed by a PLHCP as defined in para- amining PLHCP has a copy of this graph (b) of this section. standard, and shall provide the PLHCP (2) Initial examination. The employer with the following information: shall make available an initial (base- (i) A description of the employee’s line) medical examination within 30 former, current, and anticipated duties days after initial assignment, unless as they relate to the employee’s occu- the employee has received a medical pational exposure to respirable crys- examination that meets the require- talline silica; ments of this section within the last (ii) The employee’s former, current, three years. The examination shall and anticipated levels of occupational consist of: exposure to respirable crystalline sili- (i) A medical and work history, with ca; emphasis on: Past, present, and antici- (iii) A description of any personal pated exposure to respirable crys- protective equipment used or to be talline silica, dust, and other agents affecting the respiratory system; any used by the employee, including when history of respiratory system dysfunc- and for how long the employee has used tion, including signs and symptoms of or will use that equipment; and respiratory disease (e.g., shortness of (iv) Information from records of em- breath, cough, wheezing); history of tu- ployment-related medical examina- berculosis; and smoking status and his- tions previously provided to the em- tory; ployee and currently within the con- (ii) A physical examination with spe- trol of the employer. cial emphasis on the respiratory sys- (5) PLHCP’s written medical report for tem; the employee. The employer shall ensure (iii) A chest X-ray (a single that the PLHCP explains to the em- posteroanterior radiographic projec- ployee the results of the medical exam- tion or radiograph of the chest at full ination and provides each employee inspiration recorded on either film (no with a written medical report within 30

646

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00656 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

days of each medical examination per- cates that an employee should be ex- formed. The written report shall con- amined by a specialist, the employer tain: shall make available a medical exam- (i) A statement indicating the results ination by a specialist within 30 days of the medical examination, including after receiving the PLHCP’s written any medical condition(s) that would opinion. place the employee at increased risk of (ii) The employer shall ensure that material impairment to health from the examining specialist is provided exposure to respirable crystalline silica with all of the information that the and any medical conditions that re- employer is obligated to provide to the quire further evaluation or treatment; PLHCP in accordance with paragraph (ii) Any recommended limitations on (h)(4) of this section. the employee’s use of respirators; (iii) The employer shall ensure that (iii) Any recommended limitations the specialist explains to the employee on the employee’s exposure to res- the results of the medical examination pirable crystalline silica; and and provides each employee with a (iv) A statement that the employee written medical report within 30 days should be examined by a specialist of the examination. The written report (pursuant to paragraph (h)(7) of this shall meet the requirements of para- section) if the chest X-ray provided in graph (h)(5) (except paragraph accordance with this section is classi- (h)(5)(iv)) of this section. fied as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or (iv) The employer shall obtain a writ- if referral to a specialist is otherwise ten opinion from the specialist within deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. 30 days of the medical examination. (6) PLHCP’s written medical opinion for The written opinion shall meet the re- the employer. (i) The employer shall ob- quirements of paragraph (h)(6) (except tain a written medical opinion from paragraph (h)(6)(i)(B) and (ii)(B)) of the PLHCP within 30 days of the med- this section. ical examination. The written opinion (i) Communication of respirable crys- shall contain only the following: talline silica hazards to employees—(1) (A) The date of the examination; Hazard communication. The employer (B) A statement that the examina- shall include respirable crystalline sili- tion has met the requirements of this ca in the program established to com- section; and ply with the hazard communication (C) Any recommended limitations on standard (HCS) (29 CFR 1910.1200). The the employee’s use of respirators. employer shall ensure that each em- (ii) If the employee provides written ployee has access to labels on con- authorization, the written opinion tainers of crystalline silica and safety shall also contain either or both of the data sheets, and is trained in accord- following: ance with the provisions of HCS and (A) Any recommended limitations on paragraph (i)(2) of this section. The em- the employee’s exposure to respirable ployer shall ensure that at least the crystalline silica; following hazards are addressed: Can- (B) A statement that the employee cer, lung effects, immune system ef- should be examined by a specialist fects, and kidney effects. (pursuant to paragraph (h)(7) of this (2) Employee information and training. section) if the chest X-ray provided in (i) The employer shall ensure that each accordance with this section is classi- employee covered by this section can fied as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or demonstrate knowledge and under- if referral to a specialist is otherwise standing of at least the following: deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (A) The health hazards associated (iii) The employer shall ensure that with exposure to respirable crystalline each employee receives a copy of the silica; written medical opinion described in (B) Specific tasks in the workplace paragraph (h)(6)(i) and (ii) of this sec- that could result in exposure to res- tion within 30 days of each medical ex- pirable crystalline silica; amination performed. (C) Specific measures the employer (7) Additional examinations. (i) If the has implemented to protect employees PLHCP’s written medical opinion indi- from exposure to respirable crystalline

647

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00657 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

silica, including engineering controls, (E) Other data relevant to the proc- work practices, and respirators to be ess, task, activity, material, or expo- used; sures on which the objective data were (D) The contents of this section; based. (E) The identity of the competent (iii) The employer shall ensure that person designated by the employer in objective data are maintained and accordance with paragraph (g)(4) of made available in accordance with 29 this section; and CFR 1910.1020. (F) The purpose and a description of (3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- the medical surveillance program re- ployer shall make and maintain an acquired by paragraph (h) of this section. curate record for each employee cov- (ii) The employer shall make a copy ered by medical surveillance under of this section readily available with- paragraph (h) of this section. out cost to each employee covered by this section. (ii) The record shall include the fol- (j) Recordkeeping—(1) Air monitoring lowing information about the em- data. (i) The employer shall make and ployee: maintain an accurate record of all ex- (A) Name; posure measurements taken to assess (B) A copy of the PLHCPs’ and spe- employee exposure to respirable crys- cialists’ written medical opinions; and talline silica, as prescribed in para- (C) A copy of the information pro- graph (d)(2) of this section. vided to the PLHCPs and specialists. (ii) This record shall include at least (iii) The employer shall ensure that the following information: medical records are maintained and (A) The date of measurement for each made available in accordance with 29 sample taken; CFR 1910.1020. (B) The task monitored; (k) Dates. (1) This section shall be- (C) Sampling and analytical methods come effective June 23, 2016. used; (2) All obligations of this section, ex- (D) Number, duration, and results of cept requirements for methods of sam- samples taken; ple analysis in paragraph (d)(2)(v), (E) Identity of the laboratory that shall commence June 23, 2017. performed the analysis; (F) Type of personal protective (3) Requirements for methods of sam- equipment, such as respirators, worn ple analysis in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of by the employees monitored; and this section commence June 23, 2018. (G) Name and job classification of all APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1153—METHODS OF employees represented by the moni- SAMPLE ANALYSIS toring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. This This appendix specifies the procedures (iii) The employer shall ensure that for analyzing air samples for respirable crystalline silica, as well as the quality control exposure records are maintained and procedures that employers must ensure that made available in accordance with 29 laboratories use when performing an anal- CFR 1910.1020. ysis required under 29 CFR 1926.1153 (d)(2)(v). (2) Objective data. (i) The employer Employers must ensure that such a labora- shall make and maintain an accurate tory: record of all objective data relied upon 1. Evaluates all samples using the proce- to comply with the requirements of dures specified in one of the following ana- this section. lytical methods: OSHA ID–142; NMAM 7500; (ii) This record shall include at least NMAM 7602; NMAM 7603; MSHA P–2; or the following information: MSHA P–7; (A) The crystalline silica-containing 2. Is accredited to ANS/ISO/IEC Standard material in question; 17025:2005 with respect to crystalline silica analyses by a body that is compliant with (B) The source of the objective data; ISO/IEC Standard 17011:2004 for implementa- (C) The testing protocol and results tion of quality assessment programs; of testing; 3. Uses the most current National Institute (D) A description of the process, task, of Standards and Technology (NIST) or NIST or activity on which the objective data traceable standards for instrument calibra- were based; and tion or instrument calibration verification;

648

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00658 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

4. Implements an internal quality control of the medical surveillance program for em- (QC) program that evaluates analytical un- ployees exposed to silica. Section 3 describes certainty and provides employers with esti- the roles and responsibilities of the PLHCP mates of sampling and analytical error; implementing the program and of other med- 5. Characterizes the sample material by ical specialists and public health profes- identifying polymorphs of respirable crys- sionals. Section 4 provides a discussion of talline silica present, identifies the presence considerations, including confidentiality. of any interfering compounds that might af- Section 5 provides a list of additional re- fect the analysis, and makes any corrections sources and Section 6 lists references. Sec- necessary in order to obtain accurate sample tion 7 provides sample forms for the written analysis; and medical report for the employee, the written 6. Analyzes quantitatively for crystalline medical opinion for the employer and the silica only after confirming that the sample written authorization. matrix is free of uncorrectable analytical interferences, corrects for analytical inter- 1. RECOGNITION OF SILICA-RELATED DISEASES ferences, and uses a method that meets the following performance specifications: 1.1. Overview. The term ‘‘silica’’ refers spe- 6.1 Each day that samples are analyzed, cifically to the compound silicon dioxide performs instrument calibration checks with (SiO2). Silica is a major component of sand, standards that bracket the sample con- rock, and mineral ores. Exposure to fine (res- centrations; pirable size) particles of crystalline forms of 6.2 Uses five or more calibration standard silica is associated with adverse health ef- levels to prepare calibration curves and en- fects, such as silicosis, lung cancer, chronic sures that standards are distributed through obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), and the calibration range in a manner that accu- activation of latent TB infections. Exposure rately reflects the underlying calibration to respirable crystalline silica can occur in curve; and industry settings such as foundries, abrasive 6.3 Optimizes methods and instruments to blasting operations, paint manufacturing, obtain a quantitative limit of detection that glass and concrete product manufacturing, represents a value no higher than 25 percent brick making, china and pottery manufac- of the PEL based on sample air volume. turing, manufacturing of plumbing fixtures, and many construction activities including APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1153—MEDICAL highway repair, masonry, concrete work, SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES rock drilling, and tuck-pointing. New uses of INTRODUCTION silica continue to emerge. These include countertop manufacturing, finishing, and in- The purpose of this Appendix is to provide stallation (Kramer et al. 2012; OSHA 2015) and medical information and recommendations hydraulic fracturing in the oil and gas indus- to aid physicians and other licensed health try (OSHA 2012). care professionals (PLHCPs) regarding com- Silicosis is an irreversible, often disabling, pliance with the medical surveillance provi- and sometimes fatal fibrotic lung disease. sions of the respirable crystalline silica standard (29 CFR 1926.1153). Appendix B is for Progression of silicosis can occur despite re- informational and guidance purposes only moval from further exposure. Diagnosis of and none of the statements in Appendix B silicosis requires a history of exposure to should be construed as imposing a manda- silica and radiologic findings characteristic tory requirement on employers that is not of silica exposure. Three different presen- otherwise imposed by the standard. tations of silicosis (chronic, accelerated, and Medical screening and surveillance allow acute) have been defined. Accelerated and for early identification of exposure-related acute silicosis are much less common than health effects in individual employee and chronic silicosis. However, it is critical to groups of employees, so that actions can be recognize all cases of accelerated and acute taken to both avoid further exposure and silicosis because these are life-threatening prevent or address adverse health outcomes. illnesses and because they are caused by sub- Silica-related diseases can be fatal, encom- stantial overexposures to respirable crys- pass a variety of target organs, and may talline silica. Although any case of silicosis have public health consequences when con- indicates a breakdown in prevention, a case sidering the increased risk of a latent tuber- of acute or accelerated silicosis implies cur- culosis (TB) infection becoming active. Thus, rent high exposure and a very marked break- medical surveillance of silica-exposed em- down in prevention. ployees requires that PLHCPs have a thor- In addition to silicosis, employees exposed ough knowledge of silica-related health ef- to respirable crystalline silica, especially fects. those with accelerated or acute silicosis, are This Appendix is divided into seven sec- at increased risks of contracting active TB tions. Section 1 reviews silica-related dis- and other infections (ATS 1997; Rees and eases, medical responses, and public health Murray 2007). Exposure to respirable crys- responses. Section 2 outlines the components talline silica also increases an employee’s

649

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00659 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

risk of developing lung cancer, and the high- 1.3.3. Spirometry—restrictive or mixed re- er the cumulative exposure, the higher the strictive/obstructive pattern. risk (Steenland et al. 2001; Steenland and 1.3.4. Chest X-ray—small rounded and/or ir- Ward 2014). Symptoms for these diseases and regular opacities bilaterally. Large opacities other respirable crystalline silica-related and lung abscesses may indicate infections, diseases are discussed below. lung cancer, or progression to complicated 1.2. Chronic Silicosis. Chronic silicosis is the silicosis, also termed progressive massive fi- most common presentation of silicosis and brosis. usually occurs after at least 10 years of expo- 1.3.5. Clinical Course—accelerated silicosis sure to respirable crystalline silica. The clin- has a rapid, severe course. Under the res- ical presentation of chronic silicosis is: pirable crystalline silica standard, the 1.2.1. Symptoms—shortness of breath and PLHCP can recommend referral to a Board cough, although employees may not notice Certified Specialist in either Pulmonary Dis- any symptoms early in the disease. Constitu- ease or Occupational Medicine, as deemed tional symptoms, such as fever, loss of appe- appropriate, and referral to a Specialist is tite and fatigue, may indicate other diseases recommended whenever the diagnosis of ac- associated with silica exposure, such as TB celerated silicosis is being considered. infection or lung cancer. Employees with 1.4. Acute Silicosis. Acute silicosis is a rare these symptoms should immediately receive disease caused by inhalation of extremely further evaluation and treatment. high levels of respirable crystalline silica 1.2.2. Physical Examination—may be nor- particles. The pathology is similar to alve- mal or disclose dry rales or rhonchi on lung olar proteinosis with lipoproteinaceous ma- auscultation. terial accumulating in the alveoli. Acute sil- 1.2.3. Spirometry—may be normal or may icosis develops rapidly, often, within a few show only a mild restrictive or obstructive months to less than 2 years of exposure, and pattern. is almost always fatal. The clinical presen- 1.2.4. Chest X-ray—classic findings are tation of acute silicosis is as follows: small, rounded opacities in the upper lung 1.4.1. Symptoms—sudden, progressive, and fields bilaterally. However, small irregular severe shortness of breath. Constitutional opacities and opacities in other lung areas symptoms are frequently present and include can also occur. Rarely, ‘‘eggshell calcifi- fever, weight loss, fatigue, productive cough, cations’’ in the hilar and mediastinal lymph hemoptysis (coughing up blood), and pleu- nodes are seen. ritic chest pain. 1.2.5. Clinical Course—chronic silicosis in 1.4.2. Physical Examination—dyspnea at most cases is a slowly progressive disease. rest, cyanosis, decreased breath sounds, in- Under the respirable crystalline silica stand- spiratory rales, clubbing of the digits, and ard, the PLHCP is to recommend that em- fever. ployees with a 1/0 category X-ray be referred 1.4.3. Spirometry—restrictive or mixed re- to an American Board Certified Specialist in strictive/obstructive pattern. Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- 1.4.4. Chest X-ray—diffuse haziness of the cine. The PLHCP and/or Specialist should lungs bilaterally early in the disease. As the counsel employees regarding work practices disease progresses, the ‘‘ground glass’’ ap- and personal habits that could affect em- pearance of interstitial fibrosis will appear. ployees’ respiratory health. 1.4.5. Clinical Course—employees with 1.3. Accelerated Silicosis. Accelerated sili- acute silicosis are at especially high risk of cosis generally occurs within 5–10 years of TB activation, nontuberculous exposure and results from high levels of ex- mycobacterial infections, and fungal super- posure to respirable crystalline silica. The infections. Acute silicosis is immediately clinical presentation of accelerated silicosis life-threatening. The employee should be ur- is: gently referred to a Board Certified Spe- 1.3.1. Symptoms—shortness of breath, cialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupa- cough, and sometimes sputum production. tional Medicine for evaluation and treat- Employees with exposure to respirable crys- ment. Although any case of silicosis indi- talline silica, and especially those with ac- cates a breakdown in prevention, a case of celerated silicosis, are at high risk for acti- acute or accelerated silicosis implies a pro- vation of TB infections, atypical foundly high level of silica exposure and may mycobacterial infections, and fungal super- mean that other employees are currently ex- infections. Constitutional symptoms, such as posed to dangerous levels of silica. fever, weight loss, hemoptysis (coughing up 1.5. COPD. COPD, including chronic bron- blood), and fatigue may herald one of these chitis and emphysema, has been documented infections or the onset of lung cancer. in silica-exposed employees, including those 1.3.2. Physical Examination—rales, who do not develop silicosis. Periodic rhonchi, or other abnormal lung findings in spirometry tests are performed to evaluate relation to illnesses present. Clubbing of the each employee for progressive changes con- digits, signs of heart failure, and cor sistent with the development of COPD. In ad- pulmonale may be present in severe lung dis- dition to evaluating spirometry results of in- ease. dividual employees over time, PLHCPs may

650

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00660 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

want to be aware of general trends in understanding of the many silica-related dis- spirometry results for groups of employees eases and health effects outlined in Section 1 from the same workplace to identify possible of this Appendix. At each clinical encounter, problems that might exist at that workplace. the PLHCP should consider silica-related (See Section 2 of this Appendix on Medical health outcomes, with particular vigilance Surveillance for further discussion.) Heart for acute and accelerated silicosis. In this disease may develop secondary to lung dis- Section, the required components of medical eases such as COPD. A recent study by Liu et surveillance under the respirable crystalline al. 2014 noted a significant exposure-response silica standard are reviewed, along with ad- trend between cumulative silica exposure ditional guidance and recommendations for and heart disease deaths, primarily due to PLHCPs performing medical surveillance ex- pulmonary heart disease, such as cor aminations for silica-exposed employees. pulmonale. 1.6. Renal and Immune System. Silica expo- 2.1. History. sure has been associated with several types 2.1.1. The respirable crystalline silica of kidney disease, including glomerulo- standard requires the following: A medical nephritis, nephrotic syndrome, and end stage and work history, with emphasis on: Past, renal disease requiring dialysis. Silica expo- present, and anticipated exposure to res- sure has also been associated with other pirable crystalline silica, dust, and other autoimmune conditions, including progres- agents affecting the respiratory system; any sive systemic sclerosis, systemic lupus history of respiratory system dysfunction, erythematosus, and rheumatoid arthritis. including signs and symptoms of respiratory Studies note an association between employ- disease (e.g., shortness of breath, cough, ees with silicosis and serologic markers for wheezing); history of TB; and smoking status autoimmune diseases, including antinuclear and history. antibodies, rheumatoid factor, and immune 2.1.2. Further, the employer must provide complexes (Jalloul and Banks 2007; the PLHCP with the following information: Shtraichman et al. 2015). 2.1.2.1. A description of the employee’s 1.7. TB and Other Infections. Silica-exposed former, current, and anticipated duties as employees with latent TB are 3 to 30 times they relate to the employee’s occupational more likely to develop active pulmonary TB exposure to respirable crystalline silica; infection (ATS 1997; Rees and Murray 2007). Although respirable crystalline silica expo- 2.1.2.2. The employee’s former, current, and sure does not cause TB infection, individuals anticipated levels of occupational exposure with latent TB infection are at increased to respirable crystalline silica; risk for activation of disease if they have 2.1.2.3. A description of any personal pro- higher levels of respirable crystalline silica tective equipment used or to be used by the exposure, greater profusion of radiographic employee, including when and for how long abnormalities, or a diagnosis of silicosis. De- the employee has used or will use that equip- mographic characteristics, such as immigra- ment; and tion from some countries, are associated 2.1.2.4. Information from records of em- with increased rates of latent TB infection. ployment-related medical examinations pre- PLHCPs can review the latest Centers for viously provided to the employee and cur- Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) infor- rently within the control of the employer. mation on TB incidence rates and high risk 2.1.3. Additional guidance and rec- populations online (See Section 5 of this Ap- ommendations: A history is particularly im- pendix). Additionally, silica-exposed employ- portant both in the initial evaluation and in ees are at increased risk for contracting non- periodic examinations. Information on past tuberculous mycobacterial infections, in- and current medical conditions (particularly cluding Mycobacterium avium-intracellulare a history of kidney disease, cardiac disease, and Mycobacterium kansaii. connective tissue disease, and other immune 1.8. Lung Cancer. The National Toxicology diseases), medications, hospitalizations and Program has listed respirable crystalline silica as a known human carcinogen since surgeries may uncover health risks, such as 2000 (NTP 2014). The International Agency immune suppression, that could put an em- for Research on Cancer (2012) has also classi- ployee at increased health risk from expo- fied silica as Group 1 (carcinogenic to hu- sure to silica. This information is important mans). Several studies have indicated that when counseling the employee on risks and the risk of lung cancer from exposure to res- safe work practices related to silica expo- pirable crystalline silica and smoking is sure. greater than additive (Brown 2009; Liu et al. 2.2. Physical Examination. 2013). Employees should be counseled on 2.2.1. The respirable crystalline silica smoking cessation. standard requires the following: A physical examination, with special emphasis on the 2. MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE respiratory system. The physical examina- PLHCPs who manage silica medical sur- tion must be performed at the initial exam- veillance programs should have a thorough ination and every three years thereafter.

651

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00661 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

2.2.2. Additional guidance and rec- (4) Identification of settings at high risk ommendations: Elements of the physical ex- for TB transmission so that appropriate in- amination that can assist the PHLCP infection-control measures can be imple- clude: An examination of the cardiac system, mented. an extremity examination (for clubbing, cya- 2.4. Pulmonary Function Testing. nosis, edema, or joint abnormalities), and an 2.4.1. The respirable crystalline silica examination of other pertinent organ sys- standard requires the following: Pulmonary tems identified during the history. function testing must be performed on the 2.3. TB Testing. initial examination and every three years 2.3.1. The respirable crystalline silica thereafter. The required pulmonary function standard requires the following: Baseline test is spirometry and must include forced testing for TB on initial examination. vital capacity (FVC), forced expiratory vol- 2.3.2. Additional guidance and rec- ume in one second (FEV1), and FEV1/FVC ommendations: ratio. Testing must be administered by a 2.3.2.1. Current CDC guidelines (See Section spirometry technician with a current certifi- 5 of this Appendix) should be followed for the cate from a National Institute for Occupa- application and interpretation of Tuberculin tional Health and Safety (NIOSH)-approved skin tests (TST). The interpretation and doc- spirometry course. umentation of TST reactions should be per- 2.4.2. Additional guidance and rec- formed within 48 to 72 hours of administra- ommendations: Spirometry provides infor- tion by trained PLHCPs. mation about individual respiratory status 2.3.2.2. PLHCPs may use alternative TB and can be used to track an employee’s res- tests, such as interferon-g release assays piratory status over time or as a surveil- (IGRAs), if sensitivity and specificity are lance tool to follow individual and group res- comparable to TST (Mazurek et al. 2010; piratory function. For quality results, the Slater et al. 2013). PLHCPs can consult the ATS and the American College of Occupa- current CDC guidelines for acceptable tests tional and Environmental Medicine for latent TB infection. (ACOEM) recommend use of the third Na- 2.3.2.3. The silica standard allows the tional Health and Nutrition Examination PLHCP to order additional tests or test at a Survey (NHANES III) values, and ATS pub- greater frequency than required by the lishes recommendations for spirometry standard, if deemed appropriate. Therefore, equipment (Miller et al. 2005; Townsend 2011; PLHCPs might perform periodic (e.g., an- Redlich et al. 2014). OSHA’s publication, nual) TB testing as appropriate, based on Spirometry Testing in Occupational Health Pro- employees’ risk factors. For example, ac- grams: Best Practices for Healthcare Profes- cording to the American Thoracic Society sionals, provides helpful guidance (See Sec- (ATS), the diagnosis of silicosis or exposure tion 5 of this Appendix). Abnormal to silica for 25 years or more are indications spirometry results may warrant further clin- for annual TB testing (ATS 1997). PLHCPs ical evaluation and possible recommenda- should consult the current CDC guidance on tions for limitations on the employee’s expo- risk factors for TB (See Section 5 of this Ap- sure to respirable crystalline silica. pendix). 2.5. Chest X-ray. 2.3.2.4. Employees with positive TB tests 2.5.1. The respirable crystalline silica and those with indeterminate test results standard requires the following: A single should be referred to the appropriate agency posteroanterior (PA) radiographic projection or specialist, depending on the test results or radiograph of the chest at full inspiration and clinical picture. Agencies, such as local recorded on either film (no less than 14 x 17 public health departments, or specialists, inches and no more than 16 x 17 inches) or such as a pulmonary or infectious disease digital radiography systems. A chest X-ray specialist, may be the appropriate referral. must be performed on the initial examina- Active TB is a nationally notifiable disease. tion and every three years thereafter. The PLHCPs should be aware of the reporting re- chest X-ray must be interpreted and classi- quirements for their region. All States have fied according to the International Labour TB Control Offices that can be contacted for Office (ILO) International Classification of further information. (See Section 5 of this Radiographs of Pneumoconioses by a NIOSH- Appendix for links to CDC’s TB resources certified B Reader. and State TB Control Offices.) Chest radiography is necessary to diagnose 2.3.2.5. The following public health prin- silicosis, monitor the progression of silicosis, ciples are key to TB control in the U.S. and identify associated conditions such as (ATS–CDC–IDSA 2005): TB. If the B reading indicates small opac- (1) Prompt detection and reporting of per- ities in a profusion of 1/0 or higher, the em- sons who have contracted active TB; ployee is to receive a recommendation for re- (2) Prevention of TB spread to close con- ferral to a Board Certified Specialist in Pul- tacts of active TB cases; monary Disease or Occupational Medicine. (3) Prevention of active TB in people with 2.5.2. Additional guidance and rec- latent TB through targeted testing and ommendations: Medical imaging has largely treatment; and transitioned from conventional film-based

652

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00662 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

radiography to digital radiography systems. to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary The ILO Guidelines for the Classification of Disease or Occupational Medicine. Pneumoconioses has historically provided Once the medical surveillance examination film-based chest radiography as a referent is completed, the employer must ensure that standard for comparison to individual exams. the PLHCP explains to the employee the re- However, in 2011, the ILO revised the guide- sults of the medical examination and pro- lines to include a digital set of referent vides the employee with a written medical standards that were derived from the prior report within 30 days of the examination. film-based standards. To assist in assuring The written medical report must contain a that digitally-acquired radiographs are at statement indicating the results of the med- least as safe and effective as film ical examination, including any medical con- radiographs, NIOSH has prepared guidelines, dition(s) that would place the employee at based upon accepted contemporary profes- increased risk of material impairment to sional recommendations (See Section 5 of health from exposure to respirable crys- this Appendix). Current research from Laney talline silica and any medical conditions et al. 2011 and Halldin et al. 2014 validate the that require further evaluation or treat- use of the ILO digital referent images. Both ment. In addition, the PLHCP’s written med- studies conclude that the results of pneumo- ical report must include any recommended coniosis classification using digital ref- limitations on the employee’s use of res- erences are comparable to film-based ILO pirators, any recommended limitations on classifications. Current ILO guidance on ra- the employee’s exposure to respirable crys- diography for pneumoconioses and B-reading talline silica, and a statement that the em- should be reviewed by the PLHCP periodi- ployee should be examined by a Board Cer- cally, as needed, on the ILO or NIOSH Web tified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Oc- sites (See Section 5 of this Appendix). cupational medicine if the chest X-ray is 2.6. Other Testing. Under the respirable classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or crystalline silica standards, the PLHCP has if referral to a Specialist is otherwise the option of ordering additional testing he deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. or she deems appropriate. Additional tests The PLHCP should discuss all findings and can be ordered on a case-by-case basis de- test results and any recommendations re- pending on individual signs or symptoms and garding the employee’s health, worksite clinical judgment. For example, if an em- safety and health practices, and medical re- ployee reports a history of abnormal kidney ferrals for further evaluation, if indicated. In function tests, the PLHCP may want to addition, it is suggested that the PLHCP order a baseline renal function tests (e.g., offer to provide the employee with a com- serum creatinine and urinalysis). As indi- plete copy of their examination and test re- cated above, the PLHCP may order annual sults, as some employees may want this in- TB testing for silica-exposed employees who formation for their own records or to provide are at high risk of developing active TB in- to their personal physician or a future PLHCP. Employees are entitled to access fections. Additional tests that PLHCPs may their medical records. order based on findings of medical examinations include, but is not limited to, chest Under the respirable crystalline silica computerized tomography (CT) scan for lung standard, the employer must ensure that the cancer or COPD, testing for immunologic PLHCP provides the employer with a written diseases, and cardiac testing for pulmonary- medical opinion within 30 days of the em- related heart disease, such as cor pulmonale. ployee examination, and that the employee also gets a copy of the written medical opin- 3. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ion for the employer within 30 days. The PLHCP may choose to directly provide the 3.1. PLHCP. The PLHCP designation refers employee a copy of the written medical opin- to ‘‘an individual whose legally permitted ion. This can be particularly helpful to em- scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, ployees, such as construction employees, or certification) allows him or her to inde- who may change employers frequently. The pendently provide or be delegated the rewritten medical opinion can be used by the sponsibility to provide some or all of the par- employee as proof of up-to-date medical sur- ticular health care services required’’ by the veillance. The following lists the elements of respirable crystalline silica standard. The le- the written medical report for the employee gally permitted scope of practice for the and written medical opinion for the em- PLHCP is determined by each State. ployer. (Sample forms for the written med- PLHCPs who perform clinical services for a ical report for the employee, the written silica medical surveillance program should medical opinion for the employer, and the have a thorough knowledge of respirable written authorization are provided in Sec- crystalline silica-related diseases and symp- tion 7 of this Appendix.) toms. Suspected cases of silicosis, advanced 3.1.1. The written medical report for the COPD, or other respiratory conditions caus- employee must include the following infor- ing impairment should be promptly referred mation:

653

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00663 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

3.1.1.1. A statement indicating the results 3.2. Medical Specialists. The silica standard of the medical examination, including any requires that all employees with chest X-ray medical condition(s) that would place the B readings of 1/0 or higher be referred to a employee at increased risk of material im- Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Dis- pairment to health from exposure to res- ease or Occupational Medicine. If the em- pirable crystalline silica and any medical ployee has given written authorization for conditions that require further evaluation or the employer to be informed, then the em- treatment; ployer shall make available a medical exam- 3.1.1.2. Any recommended limitations upon ination by a Specialist within 30 days after the employee’s use of a respirator; receiving the PLHCP’s written medical opin- 3.1.1.3. Any recommended limitations on ion. the employee’s exposure to respirable crys- 3.2.1. The employer must provide the fol- talline silica; and lowing information to the Board Certified 3.1.1.4. A statement that the employee Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupa- should be examined by a Board Certified Spe- tional Medicine: cialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupa- 3.2.1.1. A description of the employee’s tional Medicine, where the standard requires former, current, and anticipated duties as or where the PLHCP has determined such a they relate to the employee’s occupational referral is necessary. The standard requires exposure to respirable crystalline silica; referral to a Board Certified Specialist in 3.2.1.2. The employee’s former, current, and Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- anticipated levels of occupational exposure cine for a chest X-ray B reading indicating to respirable crystalline silica; small opacities in a profusion of 1/0 or high- 3.2.1.3. A description of any personal pro- er, or if the PHLCP determines that referral tective equipment used or to be used by the to a Specialist is necessary for other silica- employee, including when and for how long related findings. the employee has used or will use that equip- 3.1.2. The PLHCP’s written medical opinion ment; and for the employer must include only the fol- 3.2.1.4. Information from records of em- lowing information: ployment-related medical examinations pre- 3.1.2.1. The date of the examination; viously provided to the employee and cur- 3.1.2.2. A statement that the examination rently within the control of the employer. has met the requirements of this section; 3.2.2. The PLHCP should make certain and that, with written authorization from the 3.1.2.3. Any recommended limitations on employee, the Board Certified Specialist in the employee’s use of respirators. Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- 3.1.2.4. If the employee provides the PLHCP cine has any other pertinent medical and oc- with written authorization, the written opin- cupational information necessary for the ion for the employer shall also contain ei- specialist’s evaluation of the employee’s con- ther or both of the following: dition. (1) Any recommended limitations on the 3.2.3. Once the Board Certified Specialist in employee’s exposure to respirable crystalline Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- silica; and cine has evaluated the employee, the em- (2) A statement that the employee should ployer must ensure that the Specialist ex- be examined by a Board Certified Specialist plains to the employee the results of the in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- medical examination and provides the em- cine if the chest X-ray provided in accord- ployee with a written medical report within ance with this section is classified as 1/0 or 30 days of the examination. The employer higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a must also ensure that the Specialist provides Specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate. the employer with a written medical opinion 3.1.2.5. In addition to the above referral for within 30 days of the employee examination. abnormal chest X-ray, the PLHCP may refer (Sample forms for the written medical report an employee to a Board Certified Specialist for the employee, the written medical opin- in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- ion for the employer and the written author- cine for other findings of concern during the ization are provided in Section 7 of this Ap- medical surveillance examination if these pendix.) findings are potentially related to silica ex- 3.2.4. The Specialist’s written medical re- posure. port for the employee must include the fol- 3.1.2.6. Although the respirable crystalline lowing information: silica standard requires the employer to en- 3.2.4.1. A statement indicating the results sure that the PLHCP explains the results of of the medical examination, including any the medical examination to the employee, medical condition(s) that would place the the standard does not mandate how this employee at increased risk of material im- should be done. The written medical opinion pairment to health from exposure to res- for the employer could contain a statement pirable crystalline silica and any medical that the PLHCP has explained the results of conditions that require further evaluation or the medical examination to the employee. treatment;

654

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00664 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

3.2.4.2. Any recommended limitations upon Hazard Evaluation program. (See Section 5 of the employee’s use of a respirator; and this Appendix) 3.2.4.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee’s exposure to respirable crys- 4. CONFIDENTIALITY AND OTHER talline silica. CONSIDERATIONS 3.2.5. The Specialist’s written medical The information that is provided from the opinion for the employer must include the PLHCP to the employee and employer under following information: the medical surveillance section of OSHA’s 3.2.5.1. The date of the examination; and respirable crystalline silica standard differs 3.2.5.2. Any recommended limitations on from that of medical surveillance require- the employee’s use of respirators. ments in previous OSHA standards. The 3.2.5.3. If the employee provides the Board standard requires two separate written com- Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or munications, a written medical report for Occupational Medicine with written author- the employee and a written medical opinion ization, the written medical opinion for the employer shall also contain any rec- for the employer. The confidentiality re- ommended limitations on the employee’s ex- quirements for the written medical opinion posure to respirable crystalline silica. are more stringent than in past standards. 3.2.5.4. Although the respirable crystalline For example, the information the PLHCP silica standard requires the employer to en- can (and must) include in his or her written sure that the Board Certified Specialist in medical opinion for the employer is limited Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medi- to: The date of the examination, a statement cine explains the results of the medical ex- that the examination has met the require- amination to the employee, the standard ments of this section, and any recommended does not mandate how this should be done. limitations on the employee’s use of res- The written medical opinion for the em- pirators. If the employee provides written ployer could contain a statement that the authorization for the disclosure of any limi- Specialist has explained the results of the tations on the employee’s exposure to res- medical examination to the employee. pirable crystalline silica, then the PLHCP 3.2.6. After evaluating the employee, the can (and must) include that information in Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Dis- the written medical opinion for the employer ease or Occupational Medicine should pro- as well. Likewise, with the employee’s writ- vide feedback to the PLHCP as appropriate, ten authorization, the PLHCP can (and depending on the reason for the referral. must) disclose the PLHCP’s referral rec- OSHA believes that because the PLHCP has ommendation (if any) as part of the written the primary relationship with the employer medical opinion for the employer. However, and employee, the Specialist may want to the opinion to the employer must not in- communicate his or her findings to the clude information regarding recommended PLHCP and have the PLHCP simply update limitations on the employee’s exposure to the original medical report for the employee respirable crystalline silica or any referral and medical opinion for the employer. This recommendations without the employee’s is permitted under the standard, so long as written authorization. all requirements and time deadlines are met. The standard also places limitations on the 3.3. Public Health Professionals. PLHCPs information that the Board Certified Spe- might refer employees or consult with public cialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupa- health professionals as a result of silica med- tional Medicine can provide to the employer ical surveillance. For instance, if individual without the employee’s written authoriza- cases of active TB are identified, public tion. The Specialist’s written medical opin- health professionals from state or local ion for the employer, like the PLHCP’s opin- health departments may assist in diagnosis ion, is limited to (and must contain): The and treatment of individual cases and may date of the examination and any rec- evaluate other potentially affected persons, ommended limitations on the employee’s use including coworkers. Because silica-exposed of respirators. If the employee provides writ- employees are at increased risk of progres- ten authorization, the written medical opin- sion from latent to active TB, treatment of ion can (and must) also contain any limita- latent infection is recommended. The diag- tions on the employee’s exposure to res- nosis of active TB, acute or accelerated sili- pirable crystalline silica. cosis, or other silica-related diseases and in- The PLHCP should discuss the implication fections should serve as sentinel events sug- of signing or not signing the authorization gesting high levels of exposure to silica and with the employee (in a manner and lan- may require consultation with the appro- guage that he or she understands) so that the priate public health agencies to investigate employee can make an informed decision re- potentially similarly exposed coworkers to garding the written authorization and its assess for disease clusters. These agencies in- consequences. The discussion should include clude local or state health departments or the risk of ongoing silica exposure, personal OSHA. In addition, NIOSH can provide as- risk factors, risk of disease progression, and sistance upon request through their Health possible health and economic consequences.

655

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00665 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

For instance, written authorization is re- Tuberculosis Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/ quired for a PLHCP to advise an employer default.htm that an employee should be referred to a State TB Control Offices Web page: http:// Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Dis- www.cdc.gov/tb/links/tboffices.htm ease or Occupational Medicine for evaluation Tuberculosis Laws and Policies Web page: of an abnormal chest X-ray (B-reading 1/0 or http://www.cdc.gov/tb/programs/laws/de- greater). If an employee does not sign an au- fault.htm thorization, then the employer will not know CDC. (2013). Latent Tuberculosis Infection: A and cannot facilitate the referral to a Spe- Guide for Primary Health Care Pro- cialist and is not required to pay for the Spe- viders. Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/ cialist’s examination. In the rare case where publications/ltbi/pdf/targetedltbi.pdf an employee is diagnosed with acute or ac- 5.3. International Labour Organization celerated silicosis, co-workers are likely to be at significant risk of developing those dis- International Labour Office (ILO). (2011) eases as a result of inadequate controls in Guidelines for the use of the ILO Inter- the workplace. In this case, the PLHCP and/ national Classification of Radiographs of or Specialist should explain this concern to Pneumoconioses, Revised edition 2011. the affected employee and make a deter- Occupational Safety and Health Series mined effort to obtain written authorization No. 22: http://www.ilo.org/safework/info/ from the employee so that the PLHCP and/or publications/WCMSl168260/lang-en/ Specialist can contact the employer. index.htm Finally, without written authorization 5.4. National Institute of Occupational from the employee, the PLHCP and/or Board Safety and Health (NIOSH) Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or NIOSH B Reader Program Web page. (Infor- Occupational Medicine cannot provide feed- mation on interpretation of X-rays for back to an employer regarding control of silicosis and a list of certified B-readers). workplace silica exposure, at least in rela- Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/top- tion to an individual employee. However, the ics/chestradiography/breader-info.html regulation does not prohibit a PLHCP and/or NIOSH Guideline (2011). Application of Dig- Specialist from providing an employer with ital Radiography for the Detection and general recommendations regarding expo- Classification of Pneumoconiosis. NIOSH sure controls and prevention programs in re- publication number 2011–198. Accessed at: lation to silica exposure and silica-related http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2011-198/ illnesses, based on the information that the NIOSH Hazard Review (2002), Health Effects PLHCP receives from the employer such as of Occupational Exposure to Respirable employees’ duties and exposure levels. Rec- Crystalline Silica. NIOSH publication ommendations may include increased fre- number 2002–129: Accessed at http:// quency of medical surveillance examina- www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2002-129/ tions, additional medical surveillance com- NIOSH Health Hazard Evaluations Pro- ponents, engineering and work practice con- grams. (Information on the NIOSH trols, exposure monitoring and personal pro- Health Hazard Evaluation (HHE) protective equipment. For instance, more fre- gram, how to request an HHE and how to quent medical surveillance examinations look up an HHE report). Accessed at: may be a recommendation to employers for http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/hhe/ employees who do abrasive blasting with 5.5. National Industrial Sand Association: silica because of the high exposures associated with that operation. Occupational Health Program for Exposure ACOEM’s Code of Ethics and discussion is to Crystalline Silica in the Industrial a good resource to guide PLHCPs regarding Sand Industry. National Industrial Sand the issues discussed in this section (See Sec- Association, 2nd ed. 2010. Can be ordered tion 5 of this Appendix). at: http://www.sand.org/silica-occupational- health-program 5. RESOURCES 5.6. Occupational Safety and Health Ad- ministration (OSHA) 5.1. American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine (ACOEM): Contacting OSHA: http://www.osha.gov/html/ FeedlBack.html ACOEM Code of Ethics. Accessed at:http:// OSHA’s Clinicians Web page. (OSHA re- www.acoem.org/codeofconduct.aspx sources, regulations and links to help cli- Raymond, L.W. and Wintermeyer, S. (2006) nicians navigate OSHA’s Web site and ACOEM evidenced-based statement on aid clinicians in caring for workers.) medical surveillance of silica-exposed Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/dts/oom/ workers: Medical surveillance of workers clinicians/index.html exposed to crystalline silica. J Occup En- OSHA’s Safety and Health Topics Web page viron Med, 48, 95–101. on Silica. Accessed at: http:// 5.2. Center for Disease Control and Preven- www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrystalline/ tion (CDC) index.html

656

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00666 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

OSHA (2013). Spirometry Testing in Occupa- Disease resurgence among artificial tional Health Programs: Best Practices stone workers. Chest, 142, 419–424. for Healthcare Professionals. (OSHA Laney, A.S., Petsonk, E.L., and Attfield, 3637–03 2013). Accessed at: http:// M.D. (2011). Intramodality and inter- www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3637.pdf modality comparisons of storage phos- OSHA/NIOSH (2011). Spirometry: OSHA/ phor computed radiography and conven- NIOSH Spirometry InfoSheet (OSHA tional film-screen radiography in the 3415–1–11). (Provides guidance to employ- recognition of small pneumonconiotic ers). Accessed at http://www.osha.gov/Pub- opacities. Chest, 140, 1574–1580. lications/osha3415.pdf Liu, Y., Steenland, K., Rong, Y., Hnizdo, E., OSHA/NIOSH (2011) Spirometry: OSHA/ Huang, X., Zhang, H., Shi, T., Sun, Y., NIOSH Spirometry Worker Info. (OSHA Wu, T., and Chen, W. (2013). Exposure-re- 3418–3–11). Accessed at http:// sponse analysis and risk assessment for www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3418.pdf lung cancer in relationship to silica ex- 5.7. Other posure: A 44-year cohort study of 34,018 workers. Am J Epi, 178, 1424–1433. Steenland, K. and Ward E. (2014). Silica: A Liu, Y., Rong, Y., Steenland, K., Christiani, lung carcinogen. CA Cancer J Clin, 64, 63– D.C., Huang, X., Wu, T., and Chen, W. 69. (This article reviews not only silica (2014). Long-term exposure to crystalline and lung cancer but also all the known silica and risk of heart disease mortality. silica-related health effects. Further, the Epidemiology, 25, 689–696. authors provide guidance to clinicians on Mazurek, G.H., Jereb, J., Vernon, A., LoBue, medical surveillance of silica-exposed P., Goldberg, S., Castro, K. (2010). Up- workers and worker counselling on safe- dated guidelines for using interferon ty practices to minimize silica exposure.) gamma release assays to detect 6. REFERENCES Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection— United States. Morbidity and Mortality American Thoracic Society (ATS). Medical Weekly Report (MMWR), 59(RR05), 1–25. Section of the American Lung Associa- Miller, M.R., Hankinson, J., Brusasco, V., tion (1997). Adverse effects of crystalline Burgos, F., Casaburi, R., Coates, A., silica exposure. Am J Respir Crit Care Crapo, R., Enright, P., van der Grinten, Med, 155, 761–765. C.P., Gustafsson, P., Jensen, R., Johnson, American Thoracic Society (ATS), Centers D.C., MacIntyre, N., McKay, R., Navajas, for Disease Control (CDC), Infectious Dis- D., Pedersen, O.F., Pellegrino, R., Viegi, eases Society of America (IDSA) (2005). G., and Wanger, J. (2005). American Tho- Controlling Tuberculosis in the United racic Society/European Respiratory Soci- States. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly ety (ATS/ERS) Task Force: Report (MMWR), 54(RR12), 1–81. Accessed Standardisation of Spirometry. Eur at: http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/ Respir J, 26, 319–338. mmwrhtml/rr5412a1.htm National Toxicology Program (NTP) (2014). Brown, T. (2009). Silica exposure, smoking, Report on Carcinogens, Thirteenth Edi- silicosis and lung cancer—complex inter- tion. Silica, Crystalline (respirable Size). actions. Occupational Medicine, 59, 89–95. Research Triangle Park, NC: U.S. De- Halldin, C.N., Petsonk, E.L., and Laney, A.S. partment of Health and Human Services, (2014). Validation of the International Public Health Service. http:// Labour Office digitized standard images ntp.niehs.nih.gov/ntp/roc/content/profiles/ for recognition and classification of silica.pdf radiographs of pneumoconiosis. Acad Occupational Safety and Health Administra- Radiol, 21, 305–311. tion/National Institute for Occupational International Agency for Research on Can- Safety and Health (OSHA/NIOSH) (2012). cer. (2012). Monographs on the evaluation Hazard Alert. Worker exposure to silica of carcinogenic risks to humans: Arsenic, during hydraulic fracturing. Metals, Fibers, and Dusts Silica Dust, Occupational Safety and Health Administra- Crystalline, in the Form of Quartz or tion/National Institute for Occupational Cristobalite. A Review of Human Car- Safety and Health (OSHA/NIOSH) (2015). cinogens. Volume 100 C. Geneva, Switzer- Hazard alert. Worker exposure to silica land: World Health Organization. during countertop manufacturing, fin- Jalloul, A.S. and Banks D.E. (2007). Chapter ishing, and installation. (OSHA–HA–3768– 23. The health effects of silica exposure. 2015). In: Rom, W.N. and Markowitz, S.B. (Eds). Redlich, C.A., Tarlo, S.M., Hankinson, J.L., Environmental and Occupational Medi- Townsend, M.C, Eschenbacher, W.L., Von cine, 4th edition. Lippincott, Williams Essen, S.G., Sigsgaard, T., Weissman, and Wilkins, Philadelphia, 365–387. D.N. (2014). Official American Thoracic Kramer, M.R., Blanc, P.D., Fireman, E., Society technical standards: Spirometry Amital, A., Guber, A., Rahman, N.A., and in the occupational setting. Am J Respir Shitrit, D. (2012). Artifical stone silicosis: Crit Care Med; 189, 984–994.

657

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00667 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Rees, D. and Murray, J. (2007). Silica, sili- in 10 cohorts of silica-exposed workers: cosis and tuberculosis. Int J Tuberc Lung An IARC multicentre study. Cancer Dis, 11(5), 474–484. Causes Control, 12(9): 773–84. Shtraichman, O., Blanc, P.D., Ollech, J.E., Steenland, K. and Ward E. (2014). Silica: A Fridel, L., Fuks, L., Fireman, E., and lung carcinogen. CA Cancer J Clin, 64, 63– Kramer, M.R. (2015). Outbreak of auto- 69. immune disease in silicosis linked to ar- Townsend, M.C. ACOEM Guidance State- tificial stone. Occup Med, 65, 444–450. ment. (2011). Spirometry in the occupa- Slater, M.L., Welland, G., Pai, M., tional health setting—2011 Update. J Parsonnet, J., and Banaei, N. (2013). Chal- Occup Environ Med, 53, 569–584. lenges with QuantiFERON–TB gold assay for large-scale, routine screening of U.S. 7. SAMPLE FORMS healthcare workers. Am J Respir Crit Care Med, 188,1005–1010. Three sample forms are provided. The first Steenland, K., Mannetje, A., Boffetta, P., is a sample written medical report for the Stayner, L., Attfield, M., Chen, J., employee. The second is a sample written Dosemeci, M., DeKlerk, N., Hnizdo, E., medical opinion for the employer. And the Koskela, R., and Checkoway, H. (2001). third is a sample written authorization form International Agency for Research on that employees sign to clarify what informa- Cancer. Pooled exposure-response anal- tion the employee is authorizing to be re- yses and risk assessment for lung cancer leased to the employer.

658

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00668 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1153

659

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00669 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER25MR16.175 § 1926.1153 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

660

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00670 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER25MR16.176 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1201

[81 FR 16876, Mar. 25, 2016] SOURCE: 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015, unless otherwise noted. Subpart AA—Confined Spaces in § 1926.1200 [Reserved] Construction § 1926.1201 Scope. AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. (a) This standard sets forth require- 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. ments for practices and procedures to 1–2012 (77 FR 3912); and 29 CFR part 1911.

661

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00671 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER25MR16.177 § 1926.1202 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

protect employees engaged in construc- Barrier means a physical obstruction tion activities at a worksite with one that blocks or limits access. or more confined spaces, subject to the Blanking or blinding means the abso- exceptions in paragraph (b) of this sec- lute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by tion. the fastening of a solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a). Examples of locations where confined spaces may occur incompletely covers the bore and that is clude, but are not limited to, the following: capable of withstanding the maximum Bins; boilers; pits (such as elevator, esca- pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with lator, pump, valve or other equipment); man- no leakage beyond the plate. holes (such as sewer, storm drain, electrical, Competent person means one who is communication, or other utility); tanks capable of identifying existing and pre- (such as fuel, chemical, water, or other liq- dictable hazards in the surroundings or uid, solid or gas); incinerators; scrubbers; working conditions which are unsani- concrete pier columns; sewers; transformer vaults; heating, ventilation, and air-condi- tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- tioning (HVAC) ducts; storm drains; water ployees, and who has the authorization mains; precast concrete and other pre- to take prompt corrective measures to formed manhole units; drilled shafts; en- eliminate them. closed beams; vessels; digesters; lift stations; Confined space means a space that: cesspools; silos; air receivers; sludge gates; (1) Is large enough and so configured air preheaters; step up transformers; tur- that an employee can bodily enter it; bines; chillers; bag houses; and/or mixers/reactors. (2) Has limited or restricted means for entry and exit; and (b) Exceptions. This standard does not (3) Is not designed for continuous em- apply to: ployee occupancy. (1) Construction work regulated by Control means the action taken to re- subpart P of this part (Excavations). duce the level of any hazard inside a (2) Construction work regulated by confined space using engineering meth- subpart S of this part (Underground ods (for example, by ventilation), and Construction, Caissons, Cofferdams and then using these methods to maintain Compressed Air). the reduced hazard level. Control also (3) Construction work regulated by refers to the engineering methods used subpart Y of this part (Diving). for this purpose. Personal protective (c) Where this standard applies and equipment is not a control. there is a provision that addresses a Controlling Contractor is the employer confined space hazard in another appli- that has overall responsibility for con- cable OSHA standard, the employer struction at the worksite. must comply with both that require- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘CONTROLLING ment and the applicable provisions of CONTRACTOR’’. If the controlling contractor this standard. owns or manages the property, then it is both a controlling employer and a host em- § 1926.1202 Definitions. ployer. The following terms are defined for Double block and bleed means the clo- the purposes of this subpart only: sure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing Acceptable entry conditions means the and locking or tagging two in-line conditions that must exist in a permit valves and by opening and locking or space, before an employee may enter tagging a drain or vent valve in the that space, to ensure that employees line between the two closed valves. can safely enter into, and safely work Early-warning system means the within, the space. method used to alert authorized en- Attendant means an individual sta- trants and attendants that an engulf- tioned outside one or more permit ment hazard may be developing. Exam- spaces who assesses the status of au- ples of early-warning systems include, thorized entrants and who must per- but are not limited to: Alarms acti- form the duties specified in § 1926.1209. vated by remote sensors; and lookouts Authorized entrant means an em- with equipment for immediately com- ployee who is authorized by the entry municating with the authorized en- supervisor to enter a permit space. trants and attendants.

662

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00672 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1202

Emergency means any occurrence (in- long as that person is trained and equipped cluding any failure of power, hazard as required by this standard for each role he control or monitoring equipment) or or she fills. Also, the duties of entry super- event, internal or external, to the pervisor may be passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry oper- mit space that could endanger en- ation. trants. Engulfment means the surrounding Hazard means a physical hazard or and effective capture of a person by a hazardous atmosphere. See definitions liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid below. substance that can be aspirated to Hazardous atmosphere means an at- cause death by filling or plugging the mosphere that may expose employees respiratory system or that can exert to the risk of death, incapacitation, enough force on the body to cause impairment of ability to self-rescue death by strangulation, constriction, (that is, escape unaided from a permit crushing, or suffocation. space), injury, or acute illness from one Entry means the action by which any or more of the following causes: part of a person passes through an (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in opening into a permit-required con- excess of 10 percent of its lower flam- fined space. Entry includes ensuing mable limit (LFL); work activities in that space and is (2) Airborne combustible dust at a considered to have occurred as soon as concentration that meets or exceeds its any part of the entrant’s body breaks LFL; the plane of an opening into the space, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (2) OF THE DEFINITION whether or not such action is inten- OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE’’. This con- tional or any work activities are actu- centration may be approximated as a condi- ally performed in the space. tion in which the combustible dust obscures Entry Employer means any employer vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 meters) or who decides that an employee it directs less. will enter a permit space. (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘ENTRY EM- tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 PLOYER’’. An employer cannot avoid the du- percent; ties of the standard merely by refusing to de- (4) Atmospheric concentration of any cide whether its employees will enter a per- substance for which a dose or a permis- mit space, and OSHA will consider the fail- sible exposure limit is published in sub- ure to so decide to be an implicit decision to part D of this part (Occupational allow employees to enter those spaces if they are working in the proximity of the space. Health and Environmental Control), or in subpart Z of this part (Toxic and Entry permit (permit) means the writ- Hazardous Substances), and which ten or printed document that is pro- could result in employee exposure in vided by the employer who designated excess of its dose or permissible expo- the space a permit space to allow and sure limit; control entry into a permit space and that contains the information specified NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (4) OF THE DEFINITION in § 1926.1206. OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE’’. An atmospheric concentration of any substance that Entry rescue occurs when a rescue is not capable of causing death, incapacita- service enters a permit space to rescue tion, impairment of ability to self-rescue, in- one or more employees. jury, or acute illness due to its health effects Entry supervisor means the qualified is not covered by this definition. person (such as the employer, foreman, (5) Any other atmospheric condition or crew chief) responsible for deter- that is immediately dangerous to life mining if acceptable entry conditions or health. are present at a permit space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (5) OF THE DEFINITION and overseeing entry operations, and OF ‘‘HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE’’. For air con- for terminating entry as required by taminants for which OSHA has not deter- this standard. mined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Safety NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘ENTRY SUPER- Data Sheets that comply with the Hazard VISOR’’ An entry supervisor also may serve as Communication Standard, § 1926.59, published an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as information, and internal documents can

663

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00673 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1202 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

provide guidance in establishing acceptable tagout of all sources of energy; block- atmospheric conditions. ing or disconnecting all mechanical Host employer means the employer linkages; or placement of barriers to that owns or manages the property eliminate the potential for employee where the construction work is taking contact with a physical hazard. place. Limited or restricted means for entry or exit means a condition that has a po- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘HOST EM- tential to impede an employee’s move- PLOYER’’. If the owner of the property on which the construction activity occurs has ment into or out of a confined space. contracted with an entity for the general Such conditions include, but are not management of that property, and has trans- limited to, trip hazards, poor illumina- ferred to that entity the information speci- tion, slippery floors, inclining surfaces fied in § 1926.1203(h)(1), OSHA will treat the and ladders. contracted management entity as the host Line breaking means the intentional employer for as long as that entity manages the property. Otherwise, OSHA will treat the opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is owner of the property as the host employer. or has been carrying flammable, corro- In no case will there be more than one host sive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or employer. any fluid at a volume, pressure, or tem- Hot work means operations capable of perature capable of causing injury. providing a source of ignition (for ex- Lockout means the placement of a ample, riveting, welding, cutting, burn- lockout device on an energy isolating ing, and heating). device, in accordance with an estab- Immediately dangerous to life or health lished procedure, ensuring that the en- (IDLH) means any condition that ergy isolating device and the equip- would interfere with an individual’s ment being controlled cannot be oper- ability to escape unaided from a permit ated until the lockout device is re- space and that poses a threat to life or moved. that would cause irreversible adverse Lower flammable limit or lower explo- health effects. sive limit means the minimum concentration of a substance in air needed NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘IMMEDIATELY for an ignition source to cause a flame DANGEROUS TO LIFE OR HEALTH’’. Some mate- or explosion. rials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may produce immediate Monitor or monitoring means the proc- transient effects that, even if severe, may ess used to identify and evaluate the pass without medical attention, but are fol- hazards after an authorized entrant en- lowed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12–72 ters the space. This is a process of hours after exposure. The victim ‘‘feels nor- checking for changes that is performed mal’’ after recovery from transient effects in a periodic or continuous manner until collapse. Such materials in hazardous after the completion of the initial test- quantities are considered to be ‘‘immediately’’ dangerous to life or health. ing or evaluation of that space. Non-entry rescue occurs when a rescue Inerting means displacing the atmos- service, usually the attendant, re- phere in a permit space by a non- trieves employees in a permit space combustible gas (such as nitrogen) to without entering the permit space. such an extent that the resulting at- Non-permit confined space means a mosphere is noncombustible. confined space that meets the defini- NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘INTERING’’. tion of a confined space but does not This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-de- meet the requirements for a permit-re- ficient atmosphere. quired confined space, as defined in Isolate or isolation means the process this subpart. by which employees in a confined space Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an are completely protected against the atmosphere containing less than 19.5 release of energy and material into the percent oxygen by volume. space, and contact with a physical haz- Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an ard, by such means as: Blanking or atmosphere containing more than 23.5 blinding; misaligning or removing sec- percent oxygen by volume. tions of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double Permit-required confined space (permit block and bleed system; lockout or space) means a confined space that has

664

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00674 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1202

one or more of the following character- and accessibility to, the permit space istics: that authorized entrants enter. (1) Contains or has a potential to Rescue means retrieving, and pro- contain a hazardous atmosphere; viding medical assistance to, one or (2) Contains a material that has the more employees who are in a permit potential for engulfing an entrant; space. (3) Has an internal configuration Rescue service means the personnel such that an entrant could be trapped designated to rescue employees from or asphyxiated by inwardly converging permit spaces. walls or by a floor which slopes down- Retrieval system means the equipment ward and tapers to a smaller cross-sec- (including a retrieval line, chest or full tion; or body harness, wristlets or anklets, if appropriate, and a lifting device or an- (4) Contains any other recognized se- chor) used for non-entry rescue of per- rious safety or health hazard. sons from permit spaces. Permit-required confined space program Serious physical damage means an im- (permit space program) means the em- pairment or illness in which a body ployer’s overall program for control- part is made functionally useless or is ling, and, where appropriate, for pro- substantially reduced in efficiency. tecting employees from, permit space Such impairment or illness may be per- hazards and for regulating employee manent or temporary and includes, but entry into permit spaces. is not limited to, loss of consciousness, Physical hazard means an existing or disorientation, or other immediate and potential hazard that can cause death substantial reduction in mental effi- or serious physical damage. Examples ciency. Injuries involving such impair- include, but are not limited to: Explo- ment would usually require treatment sives (as defined by paragraph (n) of by a physician or other licensed health- § 1926.914, definition of ‘‘explosive’’); care professional. mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and Tagout means: pneumatic energy; radiation; tempera- (1) Placement of a tagout device on a ture extremes; engulfment; noise; and circuit or equipment that has been de- inwardly converging surfaces. Physical energized, in accordance with an estab- hazard also includes chemicals that lished procedure, to indicate that the can cause death or serious physical circuit or equipment being controlled damage through skin or eye contact may not be operated until the tagout (rather than through inhalation). device is removed; and Prohibited condition means any condi- (2) The employer ensures that: tion in a permit space that is not al- (i) Tagout provides equivalent pro- lowed by the permit during the period tection to lockout; or when entry is authorized. A hazardous (ii) That lockout is infeasible and the atmosphere is a prohibited condition employer has relieved, disconnected, unless the employer can demonstrate restrained and otherwise rendered safe that personal protective equipment stored (residual) energy. (PPE) will provide effective protection Test or testing means the process by for each employee in the permit space which the hazards that may confront and provides the appropriate PPE to entrants of a permit space are identi- each employee. fied and evaluated. Testing includes Qualified person means one who, by specifying the tests that are to be per- possession of a recognized degree, cer- formed in the permit space. tificate, or professional standing, or NOTE TO THE DEFINITION OF ‘‘TEST OR TEST- who by extensive knowledge, training, ING’’. Testing enables employers both to de- and experience, has successfully dem- vise and implement adequate control meas- onstrated his ability to solve or resolve ures for the protection of authorized en- problems relating to the subject mat- trants and to determine if acceptable entry ter, the work, or the project. conditions are present immediately prior to, Representative permit space means a and during, entry. mock-up of a confined space that has Ventilate or ventilation means control- entrance openings that are similar to, ling a hazardous atmosphere using con- and is of similar size, configuration, tinuous forced-air mechanical systems

665

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00675 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1203 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

that meet the requirements of § 1926.57 with §§ 1926.1204 through 1206 and (Ventilation). §§ 1926.1208 through 1211, provided that all of the following conditions are met: § 1926.1203 General requirements. (i) The employer can demonstrate (a) Before it begins work at a work- that all physical hazards in the space site, each employer must ensure that a are eliminated or isolated through en- competent person identifies all con- gineering controls so that the only haz- fined spaces in which one or more of ard posed by the permit space is an ac- the employees it directs may work, and tual or potential hazardous atmos- identifies each space that is a permit phere; space, through consideration and eval- (ii) The employer can demonstrate uation of the elements of that space, that continuous forced air ventilation including testing as necessary. alone is sufficient to maintain that (b) If the workplace contains one or permit space safe for entry, and that, more permit spaces, the employer who in the event the ventilation system identifies, or who receives notice of, a stops working, entrants can exit the permit space must: space safely; (1) Inform exposed employees by (iii) The employer develops moni- posting danger signs or by any other toring and inspection data that sup- equally effective means, of the exist- ports the demonstrations required by ence and location of, and the danger paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii) of this sec- posed by, each permit space; and tion; (iv) If an initial entry of the permit NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(1). A sign reading space is necessary to obtain the data ‘‘DANGER—PERMIT-REQUIRED CON- FINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER’’ or using required by paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this other similar language would satisfy the re- section, the entry is performed in com- quirement for a sign. pliance with §§ 1926.1204 through 1926.1211; (2) Inform, in a timely manner and in (v) The determinations and sup- a manner other than posting, its em- porting data required by paragraphs ployees’ authorized representatives and (e)(1)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this section are the controlling contractor of the exist- documented by the employer and are ence and location of, and the danger made available to each employee who posed by, each permit space. enters the permit space under the (c) Each employer who identifies, or terms of paragraph (e) of this section receives notice of, a permit space and or to that employee’s authorized rep- has not authorized employees it directs resentative; and to work in that space must take effec- (vi) Entry into the permit space tive measures to prevent those employ- under the terms of paragraph (e)(1) of ees from entering that permit space, in this section is performed in accordance addition to complying with all other with the requirements of paragraph applicable requirements of this stand- (e)(2) of this section. ard. (d) If any employer decides that em- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e)(1). See paragraph ployees it directs will enter a permit (g) of this section for reclassification of a space, that employer must have a writ- permit space after all hazards within the ten permit space program that com- space have been eliminated. plies with § 1926.1204 implemented at (2) The following requirements apply the construction site. The written pro- to entry into permit spaces that meet gram must be made available prior to the conditions set forth in paragraph and during entry operations for inspec- (e)(1) of this section: tion by employees and their authorized (i) Any conditions making it unsafe representatives. to remove an entrance cover must be (e) An employer may use the alter- eliminated before the cover is removed. nate procedures specified in paragraph (ii) When entrance covers are re- (e)(2) of this section for entering a per- moved, the opening must be imme- mit space only under the conditions set diately guarded by a railing, temporary forth in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. cover, or other temporary barrier that (1) An employer whose employees will prevent an accidental fall through enter a permit space need not comply the opening and that will protect each

666

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00676 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1203

employee working in the space from (vii) If a hazard is detected during foreign objects entering the space. entry: (iii) Before an employee enters the (A) Each employee must leave the space, the internal atmosphere must be space immediately; tested, with a calibrated direct-reading (B) The space must be evaluated to instrument, for oxygen content, for determine how the hazard developed; flammable gases and vapors, and for and potential toxic air contaminants, in (C) The employer must implement that order. Any employee who enters measures to protect employees from the space, or that employee’s author- the hazard before any subsequent entry ized representative, must be provided takes place. an opportunity to observe the pre- (viii) The employer must ensure a entry testing required by this para- safe method of entering and exiting the graph. space. If a hoisting system is used, it (iv) No hazardous atmosphere is per- must be designed and manufactured for mitted within the space whenever any personnel hoisting; however, a job- employee is inside the space. made hoisting system is permissible if (v) Continuous forced air ventilation it is approved for personnel hoisting by must be used, as follows: a registered professional engineer, in writing, prior to use. (A) An employee must not enter the (ix) The employer must verify that space until the forced air ventilation the space is safe for entry and that the has eliminated any hazardous atmos- pre-entry measures required by para- phere; graph (e)(2) of this section have been (B) The forced air ventilation must taken, through a written certification be so directed as to ventilate the im- that contains the date, the location of mediate areas where an employee is or the space, and the signature of the per- will be present within the space and son providing the certification. The must continue until all employees have certification must be made before left the space; entry and must be made available to (C) The air supply for the forced air each employee entering the space or to ventilation must be from a clean that employee’s authorized representa- source and must not increase the haz- tive. ards in the space. (f) When there are changes in the use (vi) The atmosphere within the space or configuration of a non-permit con- must be continuously monitored unless fined space that might increase the the entry employer can demonstrate hazards to entrants, or some indication that equipment for continuous moni- that the initial evaluation of the space toring is not commercially available or may not have been adequate, each periodic monitoring is sufficient. If entry employer must have a competent continuous monitoring is used, the em- person reevaluate that space and, if ployer must ensure that the moni- necessary, reclassify it as a permit-re- toring equipment has an alarm that quired confined space. will notify all entrants if a specified (g) A space classified by an employer atmospheric threshold is achieved, or as a permit-required confined space that an employee will check the mon- may only be reclassified as a non-per- itor with sufficient frequency to ensure mit confined space when a competent that entrants have adequate time to person determines that all of the appli- escape. If continuous monitoring is not cable requirements in paragraphs (g)(1) used, periodic monitoring is required. through (4) of this section have been All monitoring must ensure that the met: continuous forced air ventilation is (1) If the permit space poses no ac- preventing the accumulation of a haz- tual or potential atmospheric hazards ardous atmosphere. Any employee who and if all hazards within the space are enters the space, or that employee’s eliminated or isolated without entry authorized representative, must be pro- into the space (unless the employer can vided with an opportunity to observe demonstrate that doing so without the testing required by this paragraph entry is infeasible), the permit space (e)(2)(vi). may be reclassified as a non-permit

667

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00677 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1203 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

confined space for as long as the non- contractor or entry employer imple- atmospheric hazards remain elimi- mented for the protection of employees nated or isolated; in the permit space. (2) The entry employer must elimi- (2) Before entry operations begin, the nate or isolate the hazards without en- controlling contractor must: tering the space, unless it can dem- (i) Obtain the host employer’s infor- onstrate that this is infeasible. If it is mation about the permit space hazards necessary to enter the permit space to and previous entry operations; and eliminate or isolate hazards, such (ii) Provide the following informa- entry must be performed under tion to each entity entering a permit §§ 1926.1204 through 1926.1211. If testing space and any other entity at the and inspection during that entry dem- worksite whose activities could onstrate that the hazards within the foreseeably result in a hazard in the permit space have been eliminated or permit space: isolated, the permit space may be re- (A) The information received from classified as a non-permit confined the host employer; space for as long as the hazards remain (B) Any additional information the eliminated or isolated; controlling contractor has about the subjects listed in paragraph (h)(1) of NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(2). Control of atmospheric hazards through forced air ven- this section; and tilation does not constitute elimination or (C) The precautions that the host em- isolation of the hazards. Paragraph (e) of ployer, controlling contractor, or other this section covers permit space entry where entry employers implemented for the the employer can demonstrate that forced protection of employees in the permit air ventilation alone will control all hazards spaces. in the space. (3) Before entry operations begin, (3) The entry employer must docu- each entry employer must: ment the basis for determining that all (i) Obtain all of the controlling con- hazards in a permit space have been tractor’s information regarding permit eliminated or isolated, through a cer- space hazards and entry operations; tification that contains the date, the and location of the space, and the signature (ii) Inform the controlling contractor of the person making the determina- of the permit space program that the tion. The certification must be made entry employer will follow, including available to each employee entering any hazards likely to be confronted or the space or to that employee’s author- created in each permit space. ized representative; and (4) The controlling contractor and (4) If hazards arise within a permit entry employer(s) must coordinate space that has been reclassified as a entry operations when: non-permit space under paragraph (g) (i) More than one entity performs of this section, each employee in the permit space entry at the same time; space must exit the space. The entry or employer must then reevaluate the (ii) Permit space entry is performed space and reclassify it as a permit at the same time that any activities space as appropriate in accordance that could foreseeably result in a haz- with all other applicable provisions of ard in the permit space are performed. this standard. (5) After entry operations: (h) Permit space entry communication (i) The controlling contractor must and coordination. (1) Before entry oper- debrief each entity that entered a per- ations begin, the host employer must mit space regarding the permit space provide the following information, if it program followed and any hazards con- has it, to the controlling contractor: fronted or created in the permit (i) The location of each known per- space(s) during entry operations; mit space; (ii) The entry employer must inform (ii) The hazards or potential hazards the controlling contractor in a timely in each space or the reason it is a per- manner of the permit space program mit space; and followed and of any hazards confronted (iii) Any precautions that the host or created in the permit space(s) during employer or any previous controlling entry operations; and

668

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00678 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1204

(iii) The controlling contractor must els in sufficient time for the entrants apprise the host employer of the infor- to safely exit the permit space; mation exchanged with the entry enti- (6) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or ties pursuant to this subparagraph. other barriers as necessary to protect

NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h). Unless a host em- entrants from external hazards; ployer or controlling contractor has or will (7) Verifying that conditions in the have employees in a confined space, it is not permit space are acceptable for entry required to enter any confined space to col- throughout the duration of an author- lect the information specified in this para- ized entry, and ensuring that employ- graph (h). ees are not allowed to enter into, or re- (i) If there is no controlling con- main in, a permit space with a haz- tractor present at the worksite, the re- ardous atmosphere unless the employer quirements for, and role of, controlling can demonstrate that personal protec- contactors in this section must be ful- tive equipment (PPE) will provide ef- filled by the host employer or other fective protection for each employee in employer who arranges to have em- the permit space and provides the ap- ployees of another employer perform propriate PPE to each employee; and work that involves permit space entry. (8) Eliminating any conditions (for example, high pressure) that could § 1926.1204 Permit-required confined make it unsafe to remove an entrance space program. cover. Each entry employer must: (d) Provide the following equipment (a) Implement the measures nec- (specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through essary to prevent unauthorized entry; (9) of this section) at no cost to each (b) Identify and evaluate the hazards employee, maintain that equipment of permit spaces before employees properly, and ensure that each em- enter them; ployee uses that equipment properly: (c) Develop and implement the (1) Testing and monitoring equip- means, procedures, and practices nec- ment needed to comply with paragraph essary for safe permit space entry oper- (e) of this section; ations, including, but not limited to, (2) Ventilating equipment needed to the following: obtain acceptable entry conditions; (1) Specifying acceptable entry condi- (3) Communications equipment nections; essary for compliance with (2) Providing each authorized entrant §§ 1926.1208(c) and 1926.1209(e), including or that employee’s authorized rep- any necessary electronic communica- resentative with the opportunity to ob- tion equipment for attendants assess- serve any monitoring or testing of per- ing entrants’ status in multiple spaces; mit spaces; (4) Personal protective equipment in- (3) Isolating the permit space and sofar as feasible engineering and work- physical hazard(s) within the space; practice controls do not adequately (4) Purging, inerting, flushing, or protect employees; ventilating the permit space as necessary to eliminate or control atmos- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(4). The require- pheric hazards; ments of subpart E of this part and other PPE requirements continue to apply to the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(4). When an em- use of PPE in a permit space. For example, ployer is unable to reduce the atmosphere if employees use respirators, then the res- below 10 percent LFL, the employer may pirator requirements in § 1926.103 (Res- only enter if the employer inerts the space piratory protection) must be met. so as to render the entire atmosphere in the space non-combustible, and the employees (5) Lighting equipment that meets use PPE to address any other atmospheric the minimum illumination require- hazards (such as oxygen deficiency), and the ments in § 1926.56, that is approved for employer eliminates or isolates all physical the ignitable or combustible properties hazards in the space. of the specific gas, vapor, dust, or fiber (5) Determining that, in the event that will be present, and that is suffi- the ventilation system stops working, cient to enable employees to see well the monitoring procedures will detect enough to work safely and to exit the an increase in atmospheric hazard lev- space quickly in an emergency;

669

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00679 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1204 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(6) Barriers and shields as required by being maintained during the course of paragraph (c)(4) of this section; entry operations; (7) Equipment, such as ladders, need- (3) When testing for atmospheric haz- ed for safe ingress and egress by au- ards, test first for oxygen, then for thorized entrants; combustible gases and vapors, and then (8) Rescue and emergency equipment for toxic gases and vapors; needed to comply with paragraph (i) of (4) Provide each authorized entrant this section, except to the extent that or that employee’s authorized rep- the equipment is provided by rescue resentative an opportunity to observe services; and the pre-entry and any subsequent test- (9) Any other equipment necessary ing or monitoring of permit spaces; for safe entry into, safe exit from, and (5) Reevaluate the permit space in rescue from, permit spaces. the presence of any authorized entrant (e) Evaluate permit space conditions or that employee’s authorized rep- in accordance with the following para- resentative who requests that the em- graphs (e)(1) through (6) of this section ployer conduct such reevaluation be- when entry operations are conducted: cause there is some indication that the (1) Test conditions in the permit evaluation of that space may not have space to determine if acceptable entry been adequate; and conditions exist before changes to the (6) Immediately provide each author- space’s natural ventilation are made, ized entrant or that employee’s author- and before entry is authorized to begin, ized representative with the results of except that, if an employer dem- any testing conducted in accordance onstrates that isolation of the space is with this section. infeasible because the space is large or (f) Provide at least one attendant is part of a continuous system (such as outside the permit space into which a sewer), the employer must: entry is authorized for the duration of (i) Perform pre-entry testing to the entry operations: extent feasible before entry is author- (1) Attendants may be assigned to ized; and, more than one permit space provided (ii) If entry is authorized, continu- the duties described in § 1926.1209 can be ously monitor entry conditions in the effectively performed for each permit areas where authorized entrants are space. working, except that employers may (2) Attendants may be stationed at use periodic monitoring in accordance any location outside the permit space with paragraph (e)(2) of this section for as long as the duties described in monitoring an atmospheric hazard if § 1926.1209 can be effectively performed they can demonstrate that equipment for each permit space to which the at- for continuously monitoring that haz- tendant is assigned. ard is not commercially available; (g) If multiple spaces are to be as- (iii) Provide an early-warning system signed to a single attendant, include in that continuously monitors for non- the permit program the means and pro- isolated engulfment hazards. The sys- cedures to enable the attendant to re- tem must alert authorized entrants spond to an emergency affecting one or and attendants in sufficient time for more of those permit spaces without the authorized entrants to safely exit distraction from the attendant’s re- the space. sponsibilities under § 1926.1209; (2) Continuously monitor atmos- (h) Designate each person who is to pheric hazards unless the employer can have an active role (as, for example, demonstrate that the equipment for authorized entrants, attendants, entry continuously monitoring a hazard is supervisors, or persons who test or not commercially available or that monitor the atmosphere in a permit periodic monitoring is of sufficient fre- space) in entry operations, identify the quency to ensure that the atmospheric duties of each such employee, and pro- hazard is being controlled at safe lev- vide each such employee with the els. If continuous monitoring is not training required by § 1926.1207; used, periodic monitoring is required (i) Develop and implement proce- with sufficient frequency to ensure dures for summoning rescue and emer- that acceptable entry conditions are gency services (including procedures

670

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00680 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1205

for summoning emergency assistance entries performed during a 12-month period. in the event of a failed non-entry res- If no entry is performed during a 12-month cue), for rescuing entrants from permit period, no review is necessary. spaces, for providing necessary emergency services to rescued employees, § 1926.1205 Permitting process. and for preventing unauthorized per- (a) Before entry is authorized, each sonnel from attempting a rescue; entry employer must document the (j) Develop and implement a system completion of measures required by for the preparation, issuance, use, and § 1926.1204(c) by preparing an entry per- cancellation of entry permits as re- mit. quired by this standard, including the (b) Before entry begins, the entry su- safe termination of entry operations pervisor identified on the permit must under both planned and emergency sign the entry permit to authorize conditions; entry. (k) Develop and implement proce- (c) The completed permit must be dures to coordinate entry operations, made available at the time of entry to in consultation with the controlling all authorized entrants or their author- contractor, when employees of more ized representatives, by posting it at than one employer are working simul- the entry portal or by any other equal- taneously in a permit space or else- ly effective means, so that the entrants where on the worksite where their ac- can confirm that pre-entry prepara- tivities could, either alone or in con- tions have been completed. junction with the activities within a (d) The duration of the permit may permit space, foreseeably result in a not exceed the time required to com- hazard within the confined space, so plete the assigned task or job identi- that employees of one employer do not fied on the permit in accordance with endanger the employees of any other § 1926.1206(b). employer; (l) Develop and implement proce- (e) The entry supervisor must termi- dures (such as closing off a permit nate entry and take the following ac- space and canceling the permit) nection when any of the following apply: essary for concluding the entry after (1) Cancel the entry permit when the entry operations have been completed; entry operations covered by the entry (m) Review entry operations when permit have been completed; or the measures taken under the permit (2) Suspend or cancel the entry per- space program may not protect em- mit and fully reassess the space before ployees and revise the program to cor- allowing reentry when a condition that rect deficiencies found to exist before is not allowed under the entry permit subsequent entries are authorized; and arises in or near the permit space and that condition is temporary in nature NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (m). Examples of cir- and does not change the configuration cumstances requiring the review of the permit space program include, but are not lim- of the space or create any new hazards ited to: Any unauthorized entry of a permit within it; and space, the detection of a permit space hazard (3) Cancel the entry permit when a not covered by the permit, the detection of a condition that is not allowed under the condition prohibited by the permit, the oc- entry permit arises in or near the per- currence of an injury or near-miss during mit space and that condition is not entry, a change in the use or configuration covered by paragraph (e)(2) of this sec- of a permit space, and employee complaints about the effectiveness of the program. tion. (f) The entry employer must retain (n) Review the permit space program, each canceled entry permit for at least using the canceled permits retained 1 year to facilitate the review of the under § 1926.1205(f), within 1 year after permit-required confined space pro- each entry and revise the program as gram required by § 1926.1204(n). Any necessary to ensure that employees problems encountered during an entry participating in entry operations are operation must be noted on the perti- protected from permit space hazards. nent permit so that appropriate revi- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (n). Employers may sions to the permit space program can perform a single annual review covering all be made.

671

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00681 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1206 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

§ 1926.1206 Entry permit. (n) Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment, The entry permit that documents communications equipment, alarm sys- compliance with this section and au- tems, and rescue equipment, to be pro- thorizes entry to a permit space must vided for compliance with this stand- identify: ard; (a) The permit space to be entered; (o) Any other information necessary, (b) The purpose of the entry; given the circumstances of the par- (c) The date and the authorized dura- ticular confined space, to ensure em- tion of the entry permit; ployee safety; and (d) The authorized entrants within (p) Any additional permits, such as the permit space, by name or by such for hot work, that have been issued to other means (for example, through the authorize work in the permit space. use of rosters or tracking systems) as will enable the attendant to determine § 1926.1207 Training. quickly and accurately, for the dura- (a) The employer must provide train- tion of the permit, which authorized ing to each employee whose work is entrants are inside the permit space; regulated by this standard, at no cost NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d). This requirement to the employee, and ensure that the may be met by inserting a reference on the employee possesses the understanding, entry permit as to the means used, such as a knowledge, and skills necessary for the roster or tracking system, to keep track of safe performance of the duties assigned the authorized entrants within the permit under this standard. This training space. must result in an understanding of the (e) Means of detecting an increase in hazards in the permit space and the atmospheric hazard levels in the event methods used to isolate, control or in the ventilation system stops working; other ways protect employees from (f) Each person, by name, currently these hazards, and for those employees serving as an attendant; not authorized to perform entry res- (g) The individual, by name, cur- cues, in the dangers of attempting such rently serving as entry supervisor, and rescues. the signature or initials of each entry (b) Training required by this section supervisor who authorizes entry; must be provided to each affected em- (h) The hazards of the permit space ployee: to be entered; (1) In both a language and vocabulary (i) The measures used to isolate the that the employee can understand; permit space and to eliminate or con- (2) Before the employee is first as- trol permit space hazards before entry; signed duties under this standard; (3) Before there is a change in as- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (i). Those measures signed duties; can include, but are not limited to, the lock- (4) Whenever there is a change in per- out or tagging of equipment and procedures mit space entry operations that pre- for purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces. sents a hazard about which an employee has not previously been trained; (j) The acceptable entry conditions; and (k) The results of tests and moni- (5) Whenever there is any evidence of toring performed under § 1926.1204(e), a deviation from the permit space accompanied by the names or initials entry procedures required by of the testers and by an indication of § 1926.1204(c) or there are inadequacies when the tests were performed; in the employee’s knowledge or use of (l) The rescue and emergency serv- these procedures. ices that can be summoned and the (c) The training must establish em- means (such as the equipment to use ployee proficiency in the duties re- and the numbers to call) for sum- quired by this standard and must intro- moning those services; duce new or revised procedures, as nec- (m) The communication procedures essary, for compliance with this stand- used by authorized entrants and at- ard. tendants to maintain contact during (d) The employer must maintain the entry; training records to show that the

672

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00682 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1209

training required by paragraphs (a) means used to identify authorized en- through (c) of this section has been ac- trants under § 1926.1206(d) accurately complished. The training records must identifies who is in the permit space; contain each employee’s name, the (d) Remains outside the permit space name of the trainers, and the dates of during entry operations until relieved training. The documentation must be by another attendant; available for inspection by employees NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d). Once an attendant and their authorized representatives, has been relieved by another attendant, the for the period of time the employee is relieved attendant may enter a permit space employed by that employer. to attempt a rescue when the employer’s permit space program allows attendant entry § 1926.1208 Duties of authorized en- for rescue and the attendant has been trants. trained and equipped for rescue operations as The entry employer must ensure that required by § 1926.1211(a). all authorized entrants: (e) Communicates with authorized (a) Are familiar with and understand entrants as necessary to assess entrant the hazards that may be faced during status and to alert entrants of the need entry, including information on the to evacuate the space under mode, signs or symptoms, and con- § 1926.1208(e); sequences of the exposure; (f) Assesses activities and conditions (b) Properly use equipment as re- inside and outside the space to deter- quired by § 1926.1204(d); mine if it is safe for entrants to remain (c) Communicate with the attendant in the space and orders the authorized as necessary to enable the attendant to entrants to evacuate the permit space assess entrant status and to enable the immediately under any of the fol- attendant to alert entrants of the need lowing conditions: to evacuate the space as required by (1) If there is a prohibited condition; § 1926.1209(f); (2) If the behavioral effects of hazard (d) Alert the attendant whenever: exposure are apparent in an authorized (1) There is any warning sign or entrant; symptom of exposure to a dangerous (3) If there is a situation outside the situation; or space that could endanger the author- (2) The entrant detects a prohibited ized entrants; or condition; and (4) If the attendant cannot effectively (e) Exit from the permit space as and safely perform all the duties re- quickly as possible whenever: quired under this section; (1) An order to evacuate is given by (g) Summons rescue and other emer- the attendant or the entry supervisor; gency services as soon as the attendant (2) There is any warning sign or determines that authorized entrants symptom of exposure to a dangerous may need assistance to escape from situation; permit space hazards; (3) The entrant detects a prohibited (h) Takes the following actions when condition; or unauthorized persons approach or enter (4) An evacuation alarm is activated. a permit space while entry is under- way: § 1926.1209 Duties of attendants. (1) Warns the unauthorized persons The entry employer must ensure that that they must stay away from the per- each attendant: mit space; (a) Is familiar with and understands (2) Advises the unauthorized persons the hazards that may be faced during that they must exit immediately if entry, including information on the they have entered the permit space; mode, signs or symptoms, and con- and sequences of the exposure; (3) Informs the authorized entrants (b) Is aware of possible behavioral ef- and the entry supervisor if unauthor- fects of hazard exposure in authorized ized persons have entered the permit entrants; space; (c) Continuously maintains an accu- (i) Performs non-entry rescues as rate count of authorized entrants in specified by the employer’s rescue pro- the permit space and ensures that the cedure; and

673

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00683 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1210 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(j) Performs no duties that might tion to rescue employee(s) wearing res- interfere with the attendant’s primary piratory protection while in work areas de- duty to assess and protect the author- fined as IDLH atmospheres. ized entrants. (2) Evaluate a prospective rescue service’s ability, in terms of pro- § 1926.1210 Duties of entry super- ficiency with rescue-related tasks and visors. equipment, to function appropriately The entry employer must ensure that while rescuing entrants from the par- each entry supervisor: ticular permit space or types of permit (a) Is familiar with and understands spaces identified; the hazards that may be faced during (3) Select a rescue team or service entry, including information on the from those evaluated that: mode, signs or symptoms, and con- (i) Has the capability to reach the sequences of the exposure; victim(s) within a time frame that is (b) Verifies, by checking that the ap- appropriate for the permit space haz- propriate entries have been made on ard(s) identified; the permit, that all tests specified by (ii) Is equipped for, and proficient in, the permit have been conducted and performing the needed rescue services; that all procedures and equipment (iii) Agrees to notify the employer specified by the permit are in place be- immediately in the event that the res- fore endorsing the permit and allowing cue service becomes unavailable; entry to begin; (4) Inform each rescue team or serv- (c) Terminates the entry and cancels ice of the hazards they may confront or suspends the permit as required by when called on to perform rescue at the § 1926.1205(e); site; and (d) Verifies that rescue services are (5) Provide the rescue team or service available and that the means for sum- selected with access to all permit moning them are operable, and that spaces from which rescue may be nec- the employer will be notified as soon as essary so that the rescue team or serv- the services become unavailable; ice can develop appropriate rescue (e) Removes unauthorized individuals plans and practice rescue operations. who enter or who attempt to enter the (b) An employer whose employees permit space during entry operations; have been designated to provide permit and space rescue and/or emergency services (f) Determines, whenever responsi- must take the following measures and bility for a permit space entry oper- provide all equipment and training at ation is transferred, and at intervals no cost to those employees: dictated by the hazards and operations (1) Provide each affected employee performed within the space, that entry with the personal protective equipment operations remain consistent with (PPE) needed to conduct permit space terms of the entry permit and that ac- rescues safely and train each affected ceptable entry conditions are main- employee so the employee is proficient tained. in the use of that PPE; (2) Train each affected employee to § 1926.1211 Rescue and emergency perform assigned rescue duties. The services. employer must ensure that such em- (a) An employer who designates res- ployees successfully complete the cue and emergency services, pursuant training required and establish pro- to § 1926.1204(i), must: ficiency as authorized entrants, as pro- (1) Evaluate a prospective rescuer’s vided by §§ 1926.1207 and 1926.1208; ability to respond to a rescue summons (3) Train each affected employee in in a timely manner, considering the basic first aid and cardiopulmonary re- hazard(s) identified; suscitation (CPR). The employer must ensure that at least one member of the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(1). What will be rescue team or service holding a cur- considered timely will vary according to the specific hazards involved in each entry. For rent certification in basic first aid and example, § 1926.103 (Respiratory protection) CPR is available; and requires that employers provide a standby (4) Ensure that affected employees person or persons capable of immediate ac- practice making permit space rescues

674

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00684 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1400

before attempting an actual rescue, permit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 and at least once every 12 months, by meters) deep. means of simulated rescue operations (3) Equipment that is unsuitable for in which they remove dummies, mani- retrieval must not be used, including, kins, or actual persons from the actual but not limited to, retrieval lines that permit spaces or from representative have a reasonable probability of be- permit spaces, except practice rescue is coming entangled with the retrieval not required where the affected em- lines used by other authorized en- ployees properly performed a rescue trants, or retrieval lines that will not operation during the last 12 months in work due to the internal configuration the same permit space the authorized of the permit space. entrant will enter, or in a similar per- (d) If an injured entrant is exposed to mit space. Representative permit a substance for which a Safety Data spaces must, with respect to opening Sheet (SDS) or other similar written size, configuration, and accessibility, information is required to be kept at simulate the types of permit spaces the worksite, that SDS or written in- from which rescue is to be performed. formation must be made available to (c) Non-entry rescue is required un- the medical facility treating the ex- less the retrieval equipment would in- posed entrant. crease the overall risk of entry or § 1926.1212 Employee participation. would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. The employer must des- (a) Employers must consult with af- ignate an entry rescue service when- fected employees and their authorized ever non-entry rescue is not selected. representatives on the development Whenever non-entry rescue is selected, and implementation of all aspects of the entry employer must ensure that the permit space program required by retrieval systems or methods are used § 1926.1203. whenever an authorized entrant enters (b) Employers must make available a permit space, and must confirm, to each affected employee and his/her prior to entry, that emergency assist- authorized representatives all informa- ance would be available in the event tion required to be developed by this that non-entry rescue fails. Retrieval standard. systems must meet the following re- § 1926.1213 Provision of documents to quirements: Secretary. (1) Each authorized entrant must use For each document required to be re- a chest or full body harness, with a retained in this standard, the retaining trieval line attached at the center of employer must make the document the entrant’s back near shoulder level, available on request to the Secretary above the entrant’s head, or at another of Labor or the Secretary’s designee. point which the employer can establish presents a profile small enough for the successful removal of the entrant. Subpart BB [Reserved] Wristlets or anklets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if Subpart CC—Cranes and Derricks the employer can demonstrate that the in Construction use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater hazard and AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; 29 U.S.C. that the use of wristlets or anklets is 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. the safest and most effective alter- 5–2007 (72 FR 31159) or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as native. applicable; and 29 CFR Part 1911. (2) The other end of the retrieval line SOURCE: 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, unless must be attached to a mechanical de- otherwise noted. vice or fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can § 1926.1400 Scope. begin as soon as the rescuer becomes (a) This standard applies to power-op- aware that rescue is necessary. A me- erated equipment, when used in con- chanical device must be available to struction, that can hoist, lower and retrieve personnel from vertical type horizontally move a suspended load.

675

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00685 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1400 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Such equipment includes, but is not eligible for this exclusion, digger-der- limited to: Articulating cranes (such as rick use in work subject to subpart V knuckle-boom cranes); crawler cranes; of this part must comply with all of floating cranes; cranes on barges; loco- the provisions of that subpart, and dig- motive cranes; mobile cranes (such as ger-derrick use in construction work wheel-mounted, rough-terrain, all-ter- for telecommunication service (as de- rain, commercial truck-mounted, and fined at § 1910.268(s)(40)) must comply boom truck cranes); multi-purpose ma- with all of the provisions of § 1910.268. chines when configured to hoist and (5) Machinery originally designed as lower (by means of a winch or hook) vehicle-mounted aerial devices (for lift- and horizontally move a suspended ing personnel) and self-propelled ele- load; industrial cranes (such as carry- vating work platforms. deck cranes); dedicated pile drivers; (6) Telescopic/hydraulic gantry sys- service/mechanic trucks with a hoist- tems. ing device; a crane on a monorail; (7) Stacker cranes. tower cranes (such as a fixed jib, i.e., (8) Powered industrial trucks (fork- ‘‘hammerhead boom’’), luffing boom lifts), except when configured to hoist and self-erecting); pedestal cranes; por- and lower (by means of a winch or tal cranes; overhead and gantry cranes; hook) and horizontally move a sus- straddle cranes; sideboom cranes; der- pended load. ricks; and variations of such equip- (9) Mechanic’s truck with a hoisting ment. However, items listed in para- device when used in activities related graph (c) of this section are excluded to equipment maintenance and repair. from the scope of this standard. (10) Machinery that hoists by using a (b) Attachments. This standard applies come-a-long or chainfall. to equipment included in paragraph (a) (11) Dedicated drilling rigs. of this section when used with attach- (12) Gin poles when used for the erec- ments. Such attachments, whether tion of communication towers. crane-attached or suspended include, (13) Tree trimming and tree removal but are not limited to: Hooks, magnets, work. grapples, clamshell buckets, orange (14) Anchor handling or dredge-re- peel buckets, concrete buckets, drag lated operations with a vessel or barge lines, personnel platforms, augers or using an affixed A-frame. drills and pile driving equipment. (15) Roustabouts. (c) Exclusions. This subpart does not (16) Helicopter cranes. cover: (17) Material Delivery (1) Machinery included in paragraph (i) Articulating/knuckle-boom truck (a) of this section while it has been cranes that deliver material to a con- converted or adapted for a non-hoist- struction site when used to transfer ing/lifting use. Such conversions/adap- materials from the truck crane to the tations include, but are not limited to, ground, without arranging the mate- power shovels, excavators and concrete rials in a particular sequence for hoist- pumps. ing. (2) Power shovels, excavators, wheel (ii) Articulating/knuckle-boom truck loaders, backhoes, loader backhoes, cranes that deliver material to a con- track loaders. This machinery is also struction site when the crane is used to excluded when used with chains, slings transfer building supply sheet goods or or other rigging to lift suspended loads. building supply packaged materials (3) Automotive wreckers and tow from the truck crane onto a structure, trucks when used to clear wrecks and using a fork/cradle at the end of the haul vehicles. boom, but only when the truck crane is (4) Digger derricks when used for equipped with a properly functioning augering holes for poles carrying elec- automatic overload prevention device. tric or telecommunication lines, plac- Such sheet goods or packaged mate- ing and removing the poles, and for rials include, but are not limited to: handling associated materials for in- Sheets of sheet rock, sheets of ply- stallation on, or removal from, the wood, bags of cement, sheets or pack- poles, or when used for any other work ages of roofing shingles, and rolls of subject to subpart V of this part. To be roofing felt.

676

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00686 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1401

(iii) This exclusion does not apply eral Railroad Administration require- when: ments. See § 1926.1402(f). (A) The articulating/knuckle-boom [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 78 crane is used to hold, support or sta- FR 32116, May 29, 2013; 79 FR 20743, Apr. 11, bilize the material to facilitate a con- 2014] struction activity, such as holding material in place while it is attached to § 1926.1401 Definitions. the structure; A/D director (Assembly/Disassembly di- (B) The material being handled by rector) means an individual who meets the articulating/knuckle-boom crane is this subpart’s requirements for an A/D a prefabricated component. Such pre- director, irrespective of the person’s fabricated components include, but are formal job title or whether the person not limited to: Precast concrete mem- is non-management or management personnel. bers or panels, roof trusses (wooden, Articulating crane means a crane cold-formed metal, steel, or other ma- whose boom consists of a series of fold- terial), prefabricated building sections ing, pin connected structural members, such as, but not limited to: Floor pan- typically manipulated to extend or reels, wall panels, roof panels, roof struc- tract by power from hydraulic cyl- tures, or similar items; inders. (C) The material being handled by Assembly/Disassembly means the as- the crane is a structural steel member sembly and/or disassembly of equip- (for example, steel joists, beams, col- ment covered under this standard. umns, steel decking (bundled or With regard to tower cranes, ‘‘erecting unbundled) or a component of a sys- and climbing’’ replaces the term ‘‘as- tems-engineered metal building (as de- sembly,’’ and ‘‘dismantling’’ replaces fined in 29 CFR 1926 subpart R). the term ‘‘disassembly.’’ Regardless of (D) The activity is not specifically whether the crane is initially erected excluded under § 1400(c)(17)(i) and (ii). to its full height or is climbed in (d) All sections of this subpart CC stages, the process of increasing the apply to the equipment covered by this height of the crane is an erection proc- standard unless specified otherwise. ess. Assist crane means a crane used to as- (e) The duties of controlling entities sist in assembling or disassembling a under this subpart include, but are not crane. limited to, the duties specified in Attachments means any device that §§ 1926.1402(c), 1926.1402(e) and expands the range of tasks that can be 1926.1424(b). done by the equipment. Examples in- (f) Where provisions of this standard clude, but are not limited to: An auger, direct an operator, crewmember, or drill, magnet, pile-driver, and boom-at- other employee to take certain actions, tached personnel platform. the employer must establish, effec- Audible signal means a signal made by tively communicate to the relevant a distinct sound or series of sounds. Ex- persons, and enforce, work rules to en- amples include, but are not limited to, sure compliance with such provisions. sounds made by a bell, horn, or whistle. (g) For work covered by subpart V of Blocking (also referred to as ‘‘crib- this part, compliance with § 1926.959 is bing’’) is wood or other material used deemed compliance with §§ 1926.1407 to support equipment or a component through 1926.1411. and distribute loads to the ground. It is typically used to support lattice boom (h) Section 1926.1402 does not apply to sections during assembly/disassembly cranes designed for use on railroad and under outrigger and stabilizer tracks, when used on railroad tracks floats. that are part of the general railroad Boatswain’s chair means a single- system of transportation that is regu- point adjustable suspension scaffold lated pursuant to the Federal Railroad consisting of a seat or sling (which Administration under 49 CFR part 213, may be incorporated into a full body and that comply with applicable Fed- harness) designed to support one employee in a sitting position.

677

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00687 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1401 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

Bogie means ‘‘travel bogie,’’ which is under that point, you could balance the defined below. object on the support. Boom (equipment other than tower Certified welder means a welder who crane) means an inclined spar, strut, or meets nationally recognized certifi- other long structural member which cation requirements applicable to the supports the upper hoisting tackle on a task being performed. crane or derrick. Typically, the length Climbing means the process in which and vertical angle of the boom can be a tower crane is raised to a new work- varied to achieve increased height or ing height, either by adding additional height and reach when lifting loads. tower sections to the top of the crane Booms can usually be grouped into (top climbing), or by a system in which general categories of hydraulically ex- the entire crane is raised inside the tendible, cantilevered type, latticed structure (inside climbing). section, cable supported type or articu- Come-a-long means a mechanical de- lating type. vice typically consisting of a chain or Boom (tower cranes): On tower cranes, cable attached at each end that is used if the ‘‘boom’’ (i.e., principal horizontal to facilitate movement of materials structure) is fixed, it is referred to as a through leverage. jib; if it is moveable up and down, it is Competent person means one who is referred to as a boom. capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or Boom angle indicator means a device working conditions which are unsani- which measures the angle of the boom tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- relative to horizontal. ployees, and who has authorization to includes Boom hoist limiting device take prompt corrective measures to boom hoist disengaging device, boom eliminate them. hoist shut-off, boom hoist disconnect, Controlled load lowering means low- boom hoist hydraulic relief, boom hoist ering a load by means of a mechanical kick-outs, automatic boom stop device, hoist drum device that allows a hoisted or derricking limiter. This type of de- load to be lowered with maximum con- vice disengages boom hoist power when trol using the gear train or hydraulic the boom reaches a predetermined op- components of the hoist mechanism. erating angle. It also sets brakes or Controlled load lowering requires the closes valves to prevent the boom from use of the hoist drive motor, rather lowering after power is disengaged. than the load hoist brake, to lower the Boom length indicator indicates the load. length of the permanent part of the Controlling entity means an employer boom (such as ruled markings on the that is a prime contractor, general con- boom) or, as in some computerized sys- tractor, construction manager or any tems, the length of the boom with ex- other legal entity which has the over- tensions/attachments. all responsibility for the construction Boom stop includes boom stops, (belly of the project—its planning, quality straps with struts/standoff), tele- and completion. scoping boom stops, attachment boom Counterweight means a weight used to stops, and backstops. These devices re- supplement the weight of equipment in strict the boom from moving above a providing stability for lifting loads by certain maximum angle and toppling counterbalancing those loads. over backward. Crane/derrick includes all equipment Boom suspension system means a sys- covered by this subpart. tem of pendants, running ropes, Crawler crane means equipment that sheaves, and other hardware which sup- has a type of base mounting which in- ports the boom tip and controls the corporates a continuous belt of sprock- boom angle. et driven track. Builder means the builder/constructor Crossover points means locations on a of equipment. wire rope which is spooled on a drum Center of gravity: The center of grav- where one layer of rope climbs up on ity of any object is the point in the ob- and crosses over the previous layer. ject around which its weight is evenly This takes place at each flange of the distributed. If you could put a support drum as the rope is spooled onto the

678

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00688 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1401

drum, reaches the flange, and begins to Fall protection equipment means wrap back in the opposite direction. guardrail systems, safety net systems, Dedicated channel means a line of personal fall arrest systems, posi- communication assigned by the em- tioning device systems or fall restraint ployer who controls the communica- systems. tion system to only one signal person Fall restraint system means a fall pro- and crane/derrick or to a coordinated tection system that prevents the user group of cranes/derricks/signal per- from falling any distance. The system son(s). is comprised of either a body belt or Dedicated pile-driver is a machine that body harness, along with an anchorage, is designed to function exclusively as a connectors and other necessary equip- pile-driver. These machines typically ment. The other components typically have the ability to both hoist the ma- include a lanyard, and may also in- terial that will be pile-driven and to clude a lifeline and other devices. pile-drive that material. Fall zone means the area (including Dedicated spotter (power lines): To be but not limited to the area directly be- considered a dedicated spotter, the re- neath the load) in which it is reason- quirements of § 1926.1428 (Signal person ably foreseeable that partially or com- qualifications) must be met and his/her pletely suspended materials could fall sole responsibility is to watch the sepa- in the event of an accident. ration between the power line and the Flange points are points of contact be- equipment, load line and load (includ- tween rope and drum flange where the ing rigging and lifting accessories), and rope changes layers. ensure through communication with Floating cranes/derricks means equip- the operator that the applicable min- ment designed by the manufacturer (or imum approach distance is not employer) for marine use by permanent breached. attachment to a barge, pontoons, ves- Directly under the load means a part sel or other means of flotation. or all of an employee is directly be- For example means ‘‘one example, al- neath the load. though there are others.’’ Dismantling includes partial disman- Free fall (of the load line) means that tling (such as dismantling to shorten a only the brake is used to regulate the boom or substitute a different compo- descent of the load line (the drive nent). mechanism is not used to drive the Drum rotation indicator means a de- load down faster or retard its low- vice on a crane or hoist which indicates ering). in which direction and at what relative speed a particular hoist drum is turn- Free surface effect is the uncontrolled ing. transverse movement of liquids in com- Electrical contact occurs when a per- partments which reduce a vessel’s son, object, or equipment makes con- transverse stability. tact or comes in close proximity with Hoist means a mechanical device for an energized conductor or equipment lifting and lowering loads by winding a that allows the passage of current. line onto or off a drum. Employer-made equipment means float- Hoisting is the act of raising, lowing cranes/derricks designed and built ering or otherwise moving a load in the by an employer for the employer’s own air with equipment covered by this use. standard. As used in this standard, Encroachment is where any part of ‘‘hoisting’’ can be done by means other the crane, load line or load (including than wire rope/hoist drum equipment. rigging and lifting accessories) Include/including means ‘‘including, breaches a minimum clearance dis- but not limited to.’’ tance that this subpart requires to be Insulating link/device means an insu- maintained from a power line. lating device listed, labeled, or accept- Equipment means equipment covered ed by a Nationally Recognized Testing by this subpart. Laboratory in accordance with 29 CFR Equipment criteria means instruc- 1910.7. tions, recommendations, limitations Jib stop (also referred to as a jib back- and specifications. stop), is the same type of device as a

679

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00689 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1401 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

boom stop but is for a fixed or luffing entry into and exit from the device. jib. Such devices do not include boat- Land crane/derrick is equipment not swain’s chairs when hoisted by equip- originally designed by the manufac- ment covered by this standard. turer for marine use by permanent at- Marine worksite means a construction tachment to barges, pontoons, vessels, worksite located in, on or above the or other means of floatation. water. List means the angle of inclination Mobile crane means a lifting device about the longitudinal axis of a barge, incorporating a cable suspended pontoons, vessel or other means of latticed boom or hydraulic telescopic floatation. boom designed to be moved between Load refers to the object(s) being operating locations by transport over hoisted and/or the weight of the ob- the road. ject(s); both uses refer to the object(s) Moving point-to-point means the times and the load-attaching equipment, during which an employee is in the such as, the load block, ropes, slings, process of going to or from a work sta- shackles, and any other ancillary at- tion. tachment. Multi-purpose machine means a ma- Load moment (or rated capacity) indi- chine that is designed to be configured cator means a system which aids the in various ways, at least one of which equipment operator by sensing (di- allows it to hoist (by means of a winch rectly or indirectly) the overturning or hook) and horizontally move a sus- moment on the equipment, i.e., load multiplied by radius. It compares this pended load. For example, a machine lifting condition to the equipment’s that can rotate and can be configured rated capacity, and indicates to the op- with removable forks/tongs (for use as erator the percentage of capacity at a forklift) or with a winch pack, jib which the equipment is working. (with a hook at the end) or jib used in Lights, bells, or buzzers may be incor- conjunction with a winch. When config- porated as a warning of an approaching ured with the forks/tongs, it is not cov- overload condition. ered by this subpart. When configured Load moment (or rated capacity) limiter with a winch pack, jib (with a hook at means a system which aids the equip- the end) or jib used in conjunction with ment operator by sensing (directly or a winch, it is covered by this subpart. indirectly) the overturning moment on Nationally recognized accrediting agen- the equipment, i.e., load multiplied by cy is an organization that, due to its radius. It compares this lifting condi- independence and expertise, is widely tion to the equipment’s rated capacity, recognized as competent to accredit and when the rated capacity is reached, testing organizations. Examples of it shuts off power to those equipment such accrediting agencies include, but functions which can increase the sever- are not limited to, the National Com- ity of loading on the equipment, e.g., mission for Certifying Agencies and the hoisting, telescoping out, or luffing American National Standards Insti- out. Typically, those functions which tute. decrease the severity of loading on the Nonconductive means that, because of equipment remain operational, e.g., the nature and condition of the mate- lowering, telescoping in, or luffing in. rials used, and the conditions of use Locomotive crane means a crane (including environmental conditions mounted on a base or car equipped for and condition of the material), the ob- travel on a railroad track. ject in question has the property of not Luffing jib limiting device is similar to becoming energized (that is, it has high a boom hoist limiting device, except dielectric properties offering a high re- that it limits the movement of the sistance to the passage of current luffing jib. under the conditions of use). Marine hoisted personnel transfer de- Operational aids are devices that as- vice means a device, such as a ‘‘transfer sist the operator in the safe operation net,’’ that is designed to protect the of the crane by providing information employees being hoisted during a ma- or automatically taking control of a rine transfer and to facilitate rapid crane function. These include, but are

680

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00690 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1401

not limited to, the devices listed in Qualified evaluator (not a third party) § 1926.1416 (‘‘listed operational aids’’). means a person employed by the signal Operational controls means levers, person’s employer who has dem- switches, pedals and other devices for onstrated that he/she is competent in controlling equipment operation. accurately assessing whether individ- Operator means a person who is oper- uals meet the Qualification Require- ating the equipment. ments in this subpart for a signal per- Overhead and gantry cranes includes son. overhead/bridge cranes, semigantry, Qualified evaluator (third party) means cantilever gantry, wall cranes, storage an entity that, due to its independence bridge cranes, launching gantry cranes, and expertise, has demonstrated that it and similar equipment, irrespective of is competent in accurately assessing whether it travels on tracks, wheels, or whether individuals meet the Quali- other means. fication Requirements in this subpart Paragraph refers to a paragraph in for a signal person. the same section of this subpart that Qualified person means a person who, the word ‘‘paragraph’’ is used, unless by possession of a recognized degree, otherwise specified. certificate, or professional standing, or Pendants includes both wire and bar who by extensive knowledge, training types. Wire type: A fixed length of wire and experience, successfully dem- rope with mechanical fittings at both onstrated the ability to solve/resolve ends for pinning segments of wire rope problems relating to the subject mat- together. Bar type: Instead of wire ter, the work, or the project. rope, a bar is used. Pendants are typi- Qualified rigger is a rigger who meets cally used in a latticed boom crane sys- the criteria for a qualified person. tem to easily change the length of the Range control limit device is a device boom suspension system without com- that can be set by an equipment oper- pletely changing the rope on the drum ator to limit movement of the boom or when the boom length is increased or jib tip to a plane or multiple planes. decreased. Range control warning device is a de- Personal fall arrest system means a vice that can be set by an equipment system used to arrest an employee in a operator to warn that the boom or jib fall from a working level. It consists of tip is at a plane or multiple planes. an anchorage, connectors, a body har- Rated capacity means the maximum ness and may include a lanyard, decel- working load permitted by the manu- eration device, lifeline, or suitable facturer under specified working condi- combination of these. tions. Such working conditions typi- Portal crane is a type of crane con- cally include a specific combination of sisting of a rotating upperstructure, factors such as equipment configura- hoist machinery, and boom mounted on tion, radii, boom length, and other pa- top of a structural gantry which may rameters of use. be fixed in one location or have travel Rated capacity indicator: See load mo- capability. The gantry legs or columns ment indicator. usually have portal openings in be- Rated capacity limiter: See load mo- tween to allow passage of traffic be- ment limiter. neath the gantry. Repetitive pickup points refer to, when Power lines means electric trans- operating on a short cycle operation, mission and distribution lines. the rope being used on a single layer Procedures include, but are not lim- and being spooled repetitively over a ited to: Instructions, diagrams, rec- short portion of the drum. ommendations, warnings, specifica- Running wire rope means a wire rope tions, protocols and limitations. that moves over sheaves or drums. Proximity alarm is a device that pro- Runway means a firm, level surface vides a warning of proximity to a designed, prepared and designated as a power line and that has been listed, la- path of travel for the weight and con- beled, or accepted by a Nationally Rec- figuration of the crane being used to ognized Testing Laboratory in accord- lift and travel with the crane sus- ance with 29 CFR 1910.7. pended platform. An existing surface

681

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00691 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1402 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

may be used as long as it meets these to permit vertical wheel displacement criteria. and equalize the loading on the wheels. Section means a section of this sub- Trim means angle of inclination part, unless otherwise specified. about the transverse axis of a barge, Sideboom crane means a track-type or pontoons, vessel or other means of wheel-type tractor having a boom floatation. mounted on the side of the tractor, Two blocking means a condition in used for lifting, lowering or trans- which a component that is uppermost porting a load suspended on the load on the hoist line such as the load hook. The boom or hook can be lifted block, hook block, overhaul ball, or or lowered in a vertical direction only. similar component, comes in contact Special hazard warnings means warn- with the boom tip, fixed upper block or ings of site-specific hazards (for exam- similar component. This binds the sys- ple, proximity of power lines). tem and continued application of power Stability (flotation device) means the can cause failure of the hoist rope or tendency of a barge, pontoons, vessel other component. or other means of flotation to return to Unavailable procedures means proce- an upright position after having been dures that are no longer available from inclined by an external force. the manufacturer, or have never been Standard Method means the protocol available, from the manufacturer. in appendix A of this subpart for hand Upperstructure: See Upperworks. signals. Upperworks means the revolving Such as means ‘‘such as, but not lim- frame of equipment on which the oper- ited to.’’ ating machinery (and many cases the Superstructure: See Upperworks. engine) are mounted along with the op- Tagline means a rope (usually fiber) erator’s cab. The counterweight is attached to a lifted load for purposes of typically supported on the rear of the controlling load spinning and pendular upperstructure and the boom or other motions or used to stabilize a bucket front end attachment is mounted on or magnet during material handling the front. operations. Up to means ‘‘up to and including.’’ Tender means an individual respon- Wire rope means a flexible rope con- sible for monitoring and commu- structed by laying steel wires into var- nicating with a diver. ious patterns of multi-wired strands Tilt up or tilt down operation means around a core system to produce a raising/lowering a load from the hori- helically wound rope. zontal to vertical or vertical to horizontal. § 1926.1402 Ground conditions. Tower crane is a type of lifting struc- (a) Definitions. (1) ‘‘Ground condi- ture which utilizes a vertical mast or tions’’ means the ability of the ground tower to support a working boom (jib) to support the equipment (including in an elevated position. Loads are sus- slope, compaction, and firmness). pended from the working boom. While (2) ‘‘Supporting materials’’ means the working boom may be of the fixed blocking, mats, cribbing, marsh type (horizontal or angled) or have buggies (in marshes/wetlands), or simi- luffing capability, it can always rotate lar supporting materials or devices. to swing loads, either by rotating on (b) The equipment must not be as- the top of the tower (top slewing) or by sembled or used unless ground condi- the rotation of the tower (bottom tions are firm, drained, and graded to a slewing). The tower base may be fixed sufficient extent so that, in conjunc- in one location or ballasted and move- tion (if necessary) with the use of sup- able between locations. Mobile cranes porting materials, the equipment man- that are configured with luffing jib ufacturer’s specifications for adequate and/or tower attachments are not con- support and degree of level of the sidered tower cranes under this sec- equipment are met. The requirement tion. for the ground to be drained does not Travel bogie (tower cranes) is an as- apply to marshes/wetlands. sembly of two or more axles arranged (c) The controlling entity must:

682

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00692 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1404

(1) Ensure that ground preparations used meet the requirements in necessary to meet the requirements in § 1926.1406. paragraph (b) of this section are pro- NOTE: The employer must follow manufac- vided. turer procedures when an employer uses syn- (2) Inform the user of the equipment thetic slings during assembly or disassembly and the operator of the location of haz- rigging. (See § 1926.1404(r).) ards beneath the equipment set-up area (such as voids, tanks, utilities) if those § 1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly— hazards are identified in documents general requirements (applies to all (such as site drawings, as-built draw- assembly and disassembly operations). ings, and soil analyses) that are in the possession of the controlling entity (a) Supervision—competent-qualified (whether at the site or off-site) or the person. (1) Assembly/disassembly must hazards are otherwise known to that be directed by a person who meets the controlling entity. criteria for both a competent person (d) If there is no controlling entity and a qualified person, or by a com- for the project, the requirement in petent person who is assisted by one or paragraph (c)(1) of this section must be more qualified persons (‘‘A/D direc- met by the employer that has author- tor’’). ity at the site to make or arrange for (2) Where the assembly/disassembly is being performed by only one person, ground preparations needed to meet that person must meet the criteria for paragraph (b) of this section. both a competent person and a quali- (e) If the A/D director or the operator fied person. For purposes of this stand- determines that ground conditions do ard, that person is considered the A/D not meet the requirements in para- director. graph (b) of this section, that person’s (b) Knowledge of procedures. The A/D employer must have a discussion with director must understand the applica- the controlling entity regarding the ble assembly/disassembly procedures. ground preparations that are needed so (c) Review of procedures. The A/D di- that, with the use of suitable sup- rector must review the applicable as- porting materials/devices (if nec- sembly/disassembly procedures imme- essary), the requirements in paragraph diately prior to the commencement of (b) of this section can be met. assembly/disassembly unless the A/D (f) This section does not apply to director understands the procedures cranes designed for use on railroad and has applied them to the same type tracks when used on railroad tracks and configuration of equipment (in- that are part of the general railroad cluding accessories, if any). system of transportation that is regu- (d) Crew instructions. (1) Before com- lated pursuant to the Federal Railroad mencing assembly/disassembly oper- Administration under 49 CFR part 213 ations, the A/D director must ensure and that comply with applicable Fed- that the crew members understand all eral Railroad Administration require- of the following: ments. (i) Their tasks. (ii) The hazards associated with their § 1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly—se- tasks. lection of manufacturer or em- (iii) The hazardous positions/loca- ployer procedures. tions that they need to avoid. When assembling or disassembling (2) During assembly/disassembly op- equipment (or attachments), the em- erations, before a crew member takes ployer must comply with all applicable on a different task, or when adding new manufacturer prohibitions and must personnel during the operations, the comply with either: requirements in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) (a) Manufacturer procedures applica- through (d)(1)(iii) of this section must ble to assembly and disassembly, or be met. (b) Employer procedures for assembly (e) Protecting assembly/disassembly and disassembly. Employer procedures crew members out of operator view. (1) may be used only where the employer Before a crew member goes to a loca- can demonstrate that the procedures tion that is out of view of the operator

683

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00693 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1404 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

and is either in, on, or under the equip- cient to sustain the loads and maintain ment, or near the equipment (or load) stability. where the crew member could be in- (3) Proper location of blocking. When jured by movement of the equipment used to support lattice booms or com- (or load), the crew member must in- ponents, blocking must be appro- form the operator that he/she is going priately placed to: to that location. (i) Protect the structural integrity of (2) Where the operator knows that a the equipment, and crew member went to a location cov- (ii) Prevent dangerous movement and ered by paragraph (e)(1) of this section, collapse. the operator must not move any part (4) Verifying assist crane loads. When of the equipment (or load) until the op- using an assist crane, the loads that erator is informed in accordance with a will be imposed on the assist crane at pre-arranged system of communication each phase of assembly/disassembly that the crew member is in a safe posi- must be verified in accordance with tion. § 1926.1417(o)(3) before assembly/dis- (f) Working under the boom, jib or other assembly begins. components. (1) When pins (or similar (5) Boom and jib pick points. The devices) are being removed, employees point(s) of attachment of rigging to a must not be under the boom, jib, or boom (or boom sections or jib or jib other components, except where the re- sections) must be suitable for pre- quirements of paragraph (f)(2) of this venting structural damage and facili- section are met. tating safe handling of these compo- (2) Exception. Where the employer nents. demonstrates that site constraints re- (6) Center of gravity. (i) The center of quire one or more employees to be gravity of the load must be identified if under the boom, jib, or other compo- that is necessary for the method used nents when pins (or similar devices) are for maintaining stability. being removed, the A/D director must (ii) Where there is insufficient infor- implement procedures that minimize mation to accurately identify the cen- the risk of unintended dangerous move- ter of gravity, measures designed to ment and minimize the duration and prevent unintended dangerous move- extent of exposure under the boom. (See ment resulting from an inaccurate Non-mandatory appendix B of this sub- identification of the center of gravity part for an example.) must be used. (See Non-mandatory ap- (g) Capacity limits. During all phases pendix B of this subpart for an exam- of assembly/disassembly, rated capac- ple.) ity limits for loads imposed on the (7) Stability upon pin removal. The equipment, equipment components (in- boom sections, boom suspension sys- cluding rigging), lifting lugs and equip- tems (such as gantry A-frames and jib ment accessories, must not be exceeded struts), and components must be rigged for the equipment being assembled/dis- or supported to maintain stability assembled. upon the removal of the pins. (h) Addressing specific hazards. The A/ (8) Snagging. Suspension ropes and D director supervising the assembly/ pendants must not be allowed to catch disassembly operation must address on the boom or jib connection pins or the hazards associated with the oper- cotter pins (including keepers and ation, which include: locking pins). (1) Site and ground bearing conditions. (9) Struck by counterweights. The po- Site and ground conditions must be tential for unintended movement from adequate for safe assembly/disassembly inadequately supported counterweights operations and to support the equip- and from hoisting counterweights. ment during assembly/disassembly (see (10) Boom hoist brake failure. Each § 1926.1402 for ground condition require- time reliance is to be placed on the ments). boom hoist brake to prevent boom (2) Blocking material. The size, movement during assembly/dis- amount, condition and method of assembly, the brake must be tested stacking the blocking must be suffi- prior to such reliance to determine if it

684

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00694 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1404

is sufficient to prevent boom move- (p) Pile driving. Equipment used for ment. If it is not sufficient, a boom pile driving must not have a jib at- hoist pawl, other locking device/back- tached during pile driving operations. up braking device, or another method (q) Outriggers and stabilizers. When of preventing dangerous movement of the load to be handled and the oper- the boom (such as blocking or using an ating radius require the use of out- assist crane) from a boom hoist brake riggers or stabilizers, or at any time failure must be used. when outriggers or stabilizers are used, (11) Loss of backward stability. Back- all of the following requirements must ward stability before swinging the be met (except as otherwise indicated): upperworks, travel, and when attach- (1) The outriggers or stabilizers must ing or removing equipment compo- be either fully extended or, if manufac- nents. turer procedures permit, deployed as (12) Wind speed and weather. The ef- specified in the load chart. fect of wind speed and weather on the (2) The outriggers must be set to re- equipment. move the equipment weight from the (i) [Reserved] wheels, except for locomotive cranes (j) Cantilevered boom sections. Manu- (see paragraph (q)(6) of this section for facturer limitations on the maximum use of outriggers on locomotive amount of boom supported only by cranes). This provision does not apply cantilevering must not be exceeded. to stabilizers. Where these are unavailable, a reg- (3) When outrigger floats are used, istered professional engineer familiar they must be attached to the out- with the type of equipment involved riggers. When stabilizer floats are used, must determine in writing this limita- they must be attached to the stabi- tion, which must not be exceeded. lizers. (4) Each outrigger or stabilizer must (k) Weight of components. The weight be visible to the operator or to a signal of each of the components must be person during extension and setting. readily available. (5) Outrigger and stabilizer blocking (l) [Reserved] must: (m) Components and configuration. (1) (i) Meet the requirements in para- The selection of components, and con- graphs (h)(2) and (h)(3) of this section. figuration of the equipment, that affect (ii) Be placed only under the out- the capacity or safe operation of the rigger or stabilizer float/pad of the jack equipment must be in accordance with: or, where the outrigger or stabilizer is (i) Manufacturer instructions, prohi- designed without a jack, under the bitions, limitations, and specifications. outer bearing surface of the extended Where these are unavailable, a reg- outrigger or stabilizer beam. istered professional engineer familiar (6) For locomotive cranes, when with the type of equipment involved using outriggers or stabilizers to han- must approve, in writing, the selection dle loads, the manufacturer’s proce- and configuration of components; or dures must be followed. When lifting (ii) Approved modifications that loads without using outriggers or sta- meet the requirements of § 1926.1434 bilizers, the manufacturer’s procedures (Equipment modifications). must be met regarding truck wedges or (2) Post-assembly inspection. Upon screws. completion of assembly, the equipment (r) Rigging. In addition to following must be inspected to ensure compli- the requirements in 29 CFR 1926.251 and ance with paragraph (m)(1) of this sec- other requirements in this and other tion (see § 1926.1412(c) for post-assembly standards applicable to rigging, when inspection requirements). rigging is used for assembly/dis- (n) [Reserved] assembly, the employer must ensure (o) Shipping pins. Reusable shipping that: pins, straps, links, and similar equip- (1) The rigging work is done by a ment must be removed. Once they are qualified rigger. removed they must either be stowed or (2) Synthetic slings are protected otherwise stored so that they do not from: Abrasive, sharp or acute edges, present a falling object hazard. and configurations that could cause a

685

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00695 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1405 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

reduction of the sling’s rated capacity, (3) Position employees involved in such as distortion or localized compres- the assembly/disassembly operation so sion. that their exposure to unintended movement or collapse of part or all of NOTE: Requirements for the protection of wire rope slings are contained in 29 CFR the equipment is minimized. 1926.251(c)(9). (b) Qualified person. Employer procedures must be developed by a qualified (3) When synthetic slings are used, person. the synthetic sling manufacturer’s instructions, limitations, specifications § 1926.1407 Power line safety (up to and recommendations must be fol- 350 kV)—assembly and disassembly. lowed. (a) Before assembling or disassembling equipment, the employer must § 1926.1405 Disassembly—additional determine if any part of the equipment, requirements for dismantling of load line, or load (including rigging booms and jibs (applies to both the use of manufacturer procedures and lifting accessories) could get, in and employer procedures). the direction or area of assembly/disassembly, closer than 20 feet to a power Dismantling (including dismantling for line during the assembly/disassembly changing the length of) booms and jibs. process. If so, the employer must meet (a) None of the pins in the pendants the requirements in Option (1), Option are to be removed (partly or com- (2), or Option (3) of this section, as fol- pletely) when the pendants are in ten- lows: sion. (1) Option (1)—Deenergize and ground. (b) None of the pins (top or bottom) Confirm from the utility owner/oper- on boom sections located between the ator that the power line has been deen- pendant attachment points and the ergized and visibly grounded at the crane/derrick body are to be removed worksite. (partly or completely) when the pend- (2) Option (2)—20 foot clearance. En- ants are in tension. sure that no part of the equipment, (c) None of the pins (top or bottom) load line or load (including rigging and on boom sections located between the lifting accessories), gets closer than 20 uppermost boom section and the crane/ feet to the power line by implementing derrick body are to be removed (partly the measures specified in paragraph (b) or completely) when the boom is being of this section. supported by the uppermost boom sec- (3) Option (3)—Table A clearance. (i) tion resting on the ground (or other Determine the line’s voltage and the support). minimum clearance distance permitted (d) None of the top pins on boom sec- under Table A (see § 1926.1408). tions located on the cantilevered por- (ii) Determine if any part of the tion of the boom being removed (the equipment, load line, or load (including portion being removed ahead of the rigging and lifting accessories), could pendant attachment points) are to be get closer than the minimum clearance removed (partly or completely) until distance to the power line permitted the cantilevered section to be removed under Table A (see § 1926.1408). If so, is fully supported. then the employer must follow the requirements in paragraph (b) of this sec- § 1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly— tion to ensure that no part of the employer procedures—general re- equipment, load line, or load (including quirements. rigging and lifting accessories), gets (a) When using employer procedures closer to the line than the minimum instead of manufacturer procedures for clearance distance. assembly/disassembly, the employer (b) Preventing encroachment/electrocu- must ensure that the procedures: tion. Where encroachment precautions (1) Prevent unintended dangerous are required under Option (2), or Option movement, and prevent collapse, of any (3) of this section, all of the following part of the equipment. requirements must be met: (2) Provide adequate support and sta- (1) Conduct a planning meeting with bility of all parts of the equipment. the Assembly/Disassembly director (A/

686

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00696 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1408

D director), operator, assembly/dis- has confirmed that the utility owner/ assembly crew and the other workers operator has deenergized and (at the who will be in the assembly/dis- worksite) visibly grounded the power assembly area to review the location of line. the power line(s) and the steps that (d) Assembly/disassembly inside Table A will be implemented to prevent en- clearance prohibited. No part of a crane/ croachment/electrocution. derrick, load line, or load (including (2) If tag lines are used, they must be rigging and lifting accessories), wheth- nonconductive. er partially or fully assembled, is al- (3) At least one of the following addi- lowed closer than the minimum ap- tional measures must be in place. The proach distance under Table A (see measure selected from this list must be § 1926.1408) to a power line unless the effective in preventing encroachment. employer has confirmed that the util- The additional measures are: ity owner/operator has deenergized and (i) Use a dedicated spotter who is in (at the worksite) visibly grounded the continuous contact with the equipment power line. operator. The dedicated spotter must: (e) Voltage information. Where Option (A) Be equipped with a visual aid to (3) of this section is used, the utility assist in identifying the minimum owner/operator of the power lines must clearance distance. Examples of a vis- provide the requested voltage informa- ual aid include, but are not limited to: tion within two working days of the A clearly visible line painted on the employer’s request. ground; a clearly visible line of stan- (f) Power lines presumed energized. The chions; a set of clearly visible line-of- employer must assume that all power sight landmarks (such as a fence post lines are energized unless the utility behind the dedicated spotter and a owner/operator confirms that the building corner ahead of the dedicated power line has been and continues to be spotter). deenergized and visibly grounded at the (B) Be positioned to effectively gauge worksite. the clearance distance. (g) Posting of electrocution warnings. (C) Where necessary, use equipment There must be at least one electrocu- that enables the dedicated spotter to tion hazard warning conspicuously communicate directly with the oper- posted in the cab so that it is in view ator. of the operator and (except for over- (D) Give timely information to the head gantry and tower cranes) at least operator so that the required clearance two on the outside of the equipment. distance can be maintained. (ii) A proximity alarm set to give the § 1926.1408 Power line safety (up to operator sufficient warning to prevent 350 kV)—equipment operations. encroachment. (a) Hazard assessments and precautions (iii) A device that automatically inside the work zone. Before beginning warns the operator when to stop move- equipment operations, the employer ment, such as a range control warning must: device. Such a device must be set to (1) Identify the work zone by either: give the operator sufficient warning to (i) Demarcating boundaries (such as prevent encroachment. with flags, or a device such as a range (iv) A device that automatically lim- limit device or range control warning its range of movement, set to prevent device) and prohibiting the operator encroachment. from operating the equipment past (v) An elevated warning line, barri- those boundaries, or cade, or line of signs, in view of the op- (ii) Defining the work zone as the erator, equipped with flags or similar area 360 degrees around the equipment, high-visibility markings. up to the equipment’s maximum work- (c) Assembly/disassembly below power ing radius. lines prohibited. No part of a crane/der- (2) Determine if any part of the rick, load line, or load (including rig- equipment, load line or load (including ging and lifting accessories), whether rigging and lifting accessories), if oper- partially or fully assembled, is allowed ated up to the equipment’s maximum below a power line unless the employer working radius in the work zone, could

687

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00697 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1408 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

get closer than 20 feet to a power line. ing line, a dedicated spotter must be If so, the employer must meet the reused as described in § 1926.1408(b)(4)(ii) quirements in Option (1), Option (2), or in addition to implementing one of the Option (3) of this section, as follows: measures described in (i) Option (1)—Deenergize and ground. §§ 1926.1408(b)(4)(i), (iii), (iv) and (v). Confirm from the utility owner/oper- (4) Implement at least one of the fol- ator that the power line has been deen- lowing measures: ergized and visibly grounded at the (i) A proximity alarm set to give the worksite. operator sufficient warning to prevent (ii) Option (2)—20 foot clearance. En- encroachment. sure that no part of the equipment, (ii) A dedicated spotter who is in con- load line, or load (including rigging tinuous contact with the operator. and lifting accessories), gets closer Where this measure is selected, the than 20 feet to the power line by imple- dedicated spotter must: menting the measures specified in (A) Be equipped with a visual aid to paragraph (b) of this section. assist in identifying the minimum (iii) Option (3)—Table A clearance. (A) clearance distance. Examples of a vis- Determine the line’s voltage and the ual aid include, but are not limited to: minimum approach distance permitted A clearly visible line painted on the under Table A (see § 1926.1408). ground; a clearly visible line of stan- (B) Determine if any part of the chions; a set of clearly visible line-of- equipment, load line or load (including sight landmarks (such as a fence post rigging and lifting accessories), while behind the dedicated spotter and a operating up to the equipment’s max- building corner ahead of the dedicated imum working radius in the work zone, spotter). could get closer than the minimum ap- (B) Be positioned to effectively gauge proach distance of the power line per- the clearance distance. mitted under Table A (see § 1926.1408). If (C) Where necessary, use equipment so, then the employer must follow the that enables the dedicated spotter to requirements in paragraph (b) of this communicate directly with the oper- section to ensure that no part of the ator. equipment, load line, or load (including (D) Give timely information to the rigging and lifting accessories), gets operator so that the required clearance closer to the line than the minimum distance can be maintained. approach distance. (b) Preventing encroachment/electrocu- (iii) A device that automatically tion. Where encroachment precautions warns the operator when to stop move- are required under Option (2) or Option ment, such as a range control warning (3) of this section, all of the following device. Such a device must be set to requirements must be met: give the operator sufficient warning to (1) Conduct a planning meeting with prevent encroachment. the operator and the other workers (iv) A device that automatically lim- who will be in the area of the equip- its range of movement, set to prevent ment or load to review the location of encroachment. the power line(s), and the steps that (v) An insulating link/device, as de- will be implemented to prevent en- fined in § 1926.1401, installed at a point croachment/electrocution. between the end of the load line (or (2) If tag lines are used, they must be below) and the load. non-conductive. (5) The requirements of paragraph (3) Erect and maintain an elevated (b)(4) of this section do not apply to warning line, barricade, or line of work covered by subpart V of this part. signs, in view of the operator, equipped (c) Voltage information. Where Option with flags or similar high-visibility (3) of this section is used, the utility markings, at 20 feet from the power owner/operator of the power lines must line (if using Option (2) of this section) provide the requested voltage informa- or at the minimum approach distance tion within two working days of the under Table A (see § 1926.1408) (if using employer’s request. Option (3) of this section). If the oper- (d) Operations below power lines. (1) No ator is unable to see the elevated warn- part of the equipment, load line, or

688

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00698 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1408

load (including rigging and lifting ac- (i) The procedures to be followed in cessories) is allowed below a power line the event of electrical contact with a unless the employer has confirmed that power line. Such training must include: the utility owner/operator has deener- (A) Information regarding the danger gized and (at the worksite) visibly of electrocution from the operator si- grounded the power line, except where multaneously touching the equipment one of the exceptions in paragraph and the ground. (d)(2) of this section applies. (B) The importance to the operator’s (2) Exceptions. Paragraph (d)(1) of this safety of remaining inside the cab ex- section is inapplicable where the em- cept where there is an imminent dan- ployer demonstrates that one of the ger of fire, explosion, or other emer- following applies: gency that necessitates leaving the (i) The work is covered by subpart V cab. of this part. (C) The safest means of evacuating (ii) For equipment with non-exten- from equipment that may be energized. sible booms: The uppermost part of the (D) The danger of the potentially en- equipment, with the boom at true ergized zone around the equipment vertical, would be more than 20 feet (step potential). below the plane of the power line or (E) The need for crew in the area to more than the Table A of this section avoid approaching or touching the minimum clearance distance below the equipment and the load. plane of the power line. (F) Safe clearance distance from (iii) For equipment with articulating power lines. or extensible booms: The uppermost (ii) Power lines are presumed to be part of the equipment, with the boom energized unless the utility owner/oper- in the fully extended position, at true ator confirms that the power line has vertical, would be more than 20 feet been and continues to be deenergized below the plane of the power line or and visibly grounded at the worksite. more than the Table A of this section (iii) Power lines are presumed to be minimum clearance distance below the uninsulated unless the utility owner/ plane of the power line. operator or a registered engineer who (iv) The employer demonstrates that is a qualified person with respect to compliance with paragraph (d)(1) of electrical power transmission and dis- this section is infeasible and meets the tribution confirms that a line is insu- requirements of § 1926.1410. lated. (e) Power lines presumed energized. The (iv) The limitations of an insulating employer must assume that all power link/device, proximity alarm, and lines are energized unless the utility range control (and similar) device, if owner/operator confirms that the used. power line has been and continues to be (v) The procedures to be followed to deenergized and visibly grounded at the properly ground equipment and the worksite. limitations of grounding. (f) When working near transmitter/ (2) Employees working as dedicated communication towers where the spotters must be trained to enable equipment is close enough for an elec- them to effectively perform their task, trical charge to be induced in the including training on the applicable re- equipment or materials being handled, quirements of this section. the transmitter must be deenergized or (3) Training under this section must the following precautions must be be administered in accordance with taken: § 1926.1430(g). (1) The equipment must be provided (h) Devices originally designed by the with an electrical ground. manufacturer for use as: A safety de- (2) If tag lines are used, they must be vice (see § 1926.1415), operational aid, or non-conductive. a means to prevent power line contact (g) Training. (1) The employer must or electrocution, when used to comply train each operator and crew member with this section, must meet the manu- assigned to work with the equipment facturer’s procedures for use and condi- on all of the following: tions of use.

689

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00699 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1409 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

TABLE A—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES

Voltage Minimum clearance distance (nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet)

up to 50 ...... 10 over 50 to 200 ...... 15 over 200 to 350 ...... 20 over 350 to 500 ...... 25 over 500 to 750 ...... 35 over 750 to 1,000 ...... 45 over 1,000 ...... (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution). Note: The value that follows ‘‘to’’ is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV.

§ 1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 ance distance that must be maintained kV). to prevent electrical contact in light of The requirements of §§ 1926.1407 and the on-site conditions. The factors that 1926.1408 apply to power lines over 350 must be considered in making this de- kV except: termination include, but are not lim- (a) For power lines at or below 1000 ited to: Conditions affecting atmos- kV, wherever the distance ‘‘20 feet’’ is pheric conductivity; time necessary to specified, the distance ‘‘50 feet’’ must bring the equipment, load line, and be substituted; and load (including rigging and lifting ac- (b) For power lines over 1000 kV, the cessories) to a complete stop; wind con- minimum clearance distance must be ditions; degree of sway in the power established by the utility owner/oper- line; lighting conditions, and other ator or registered professional engineer conditions affecting the ability to pre- who is a qualified person with respect vent electrical contact. to electrical power transmission and (2) Paragraph (c)(1) of this section distribution. does not apply to work covered by subpart V of this part; instead, for such § 1926.1410 Power line safety (all work, the minimum approach distances voltages)—equipment operations established by the employer under closer than the Table A zone. § 1926.960(c)(1)(i) apply. Equipment operations in which any (d) A planning meeting with the em- part of the equipment, load line, or ployer and utility owner/operator (or load (including rigging and lifting ac- registered professional engineer who is cessories) is closer than the minimum a qualified person with respect to elec- approach distance under Table A of trical power transmission and distribu- § 1926.1408 to an energized power line is tion) is held to determine the proce- prohibited, except where the employer dures that will be followed to prevent demonstrates that all of the following electrical contact and electrocution. requirements are met: At a minimum these procedures must (a) The employer determines that it include: is infeasible to do the work without breaching the minimum approach dis- (1) If the power line is equipped with tance under Table A of § 1926.1408. a device that automatically reener- (b) The employer determines that, gizes the circuit in the event of a power after consultation with the utility line contact, before the work begins, owner/operator, it is infeasible to deen- the automatic reclosing feature of the ergize and ground the power line or re- circuit interrupting device must be locate the power line. made inoperative if the design of the (c) Minimum clearance distance. (1) device permits. The power line owner/operator or reg- (2) A dedicated spotter who is in con- istered professional engineer who is a tinuous contact with the operator. The qualified person with respect to elec- dedicated spotter must: trical power transmission and distribu- (i) Be equipped with a visual aid to tion determines the minimum clear- assist in identifying the minimum

690

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00700 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1410

clearance distance. Examples of a vis- ments and recommendations, and is in- ual aid include, but are not limited to: stalled at a point between the end of A line painted on the ground; a clearly the load line (or below) and the load; visible line of stanchions; a set of and clearly visible line-of-sight landmarks (B) All employees, excluding equip- (such as a fence post behind the dedi- ment operators located on the equip- cated spotter and a building corner ment, who may come in contact with ahead of the dedicated spotter). the equipment, the load line, or the (ii) Be positioned to effectively gauge load must be insulated or guarded from the clearance distance. the equipment, the load line, and the (iii) Where necessary, use equipment load through an additional means that enables the dedicated spotter to other than the device described in communicate directly with the oper- paragraph (d)(4)(v)(A) of this section. ator. Insulating gloves rated for the voltage (iv) Give timely information to the involved are adequate additional operator so that the required clearance means of protection for the purposes of distance can be maintained. this paragraph. (3) An elevated warning line, or barri- (5) Nonconductive rigging if the rig- cade (not attached to the crane), in ging may be within the Table A of view of the operator (either directly or § 1926.1408 distance during the oper- through video equipment), equipped ation. with flags or similar high-visibility (6) If the equipment is equipped with markings, to prevent electrical con- a device that automatically limits tact. However, this provision does not range of movement, it must be used apply to work covered by subpart V of and set to prevent any part of the this part. equipment, load line, or load (including (4) Insulating link/device. (i) An insu- rigging and lifting accessories) from lating link/device installed at a point breaching the minimum approach dis- between the end of the load line (or tance established under paragraph (c) below) and the load. of this section. (ii) Paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section (7) If a tag line is used, it must be of does not apply to work covered by sub- the nonconductive type. part V of this part. (8) Barricades forming a perimeter at (iii) [Reserved] least 10 feet away from the equipment (iv) Until November 8, 2011, the fol- to prevent unauthorized personnel lowing procedure may be substituted from entering the work area. In areas for the requirement in paragraph where obstacles prevent the barricade (d)(4)(i) of this section: All employees, from being at least 10 feet away, the excluding equipment operators located barricade must be as far from the on the equipment, who may come in equipment as feasible. contact with the equipment, the load (9) Workers other than the operator line, or the load must be insulated or must be prohibited from touching the guarded from the equipment, the load load line above the insulating link/de- line, and the load. Insulating gloves vice and crane. Operators remotely op- rated for the voltage involved are ade- erating the equipment from the ground quate insulation for the purposes of must use either wireless controls that this paragraph. isolate the operator from the equip- (v) Until November 8, 2013, the fol- ment or insulating mats that insulate lowing procedure may be substituted the operator from the ground. for the requirement in (d)(4)(i) of this (10) Only personnel essential to the section: operation are permitted to be in the (A) The employer must use a link/de- area of the crane and load. vice manufactured on or before Novem- (11) The equipment must be properly ber 8, 2011, that meets the definition of grounded. an insulating link/device, except that (12) Insulating line hose or cover-up it has not been approved by a Nation- must be installed by the utility owner/ ally Recognized Testing Laboratory, operator except where such devices are and that is maintained and used in ac- unavailable for the line voltages in- cordance with manufacturer require- volved.

691

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00701 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1411 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(e) The procedures developed to com- § 1926.1411 Power line safety—while ply with paragraph (d) of this section traveling under or near power lines are documented and immediately with no load. available on-site. (a) This section establishes proce- (f) The equipment user and utility dures and criteria that must be met for owner/operator (or registered profes- equipment traveling under or near a sional engineer) meet with the equip- power line on a construction site with ment operator and the other workers no load. Equipment traveling on a con- who will be in the area of the equip- struction site with a load is governed ment or load to review the procedures by § 1926.1408, § 1926.1409 or § 1926.1410, that will be implemented to prevent whichever is appropriate, and breaching the minimum approach dis- § 1926.1417(u). tance established in paragraph (c) of (b) The employer must ensure that: this section and prevent electrocution. (1) The boom/mast and boom/mast (g) The procedures developed to com- support system are lowered sufficiently ply with paragraph (d) of this section to meet the requirements of this para- are implemented. graph. (h) The utility owner/operator (or (2) The clearances specified in Table registered professional engineer) and T of this section are maintained. all employers of employees involved in (3) The effects of speed and terrain on the work must identify one person who equipment movement (including move- will direct the implementation of the ment of the boom/mast) are considered procedures. The person identified in ac- so that those effects do not cause the cordance with this paragraph must di- minimum clearance distances specified rect the implementation of the proce- in Table T of this section to be dures and must have the authority to breached. stop work at any time to ensure safety. (4) Dedicated spotter. If any part of the (i) [Reserved] equipment while traveling will get (j) If a problem occurs implementing closer than 20 feet to the power line, the procedures being used to comply the employer must ensure that a dedi- with paragraph (d) of this section, or cated spotter who is in continuous con- indicating that those procedures are tact with the driver/operator is used. inadequate to prevent electrocution, The dedicated spotter must: the employer must safely stop oper- (i) Be positioned to effectively gauge ations and either develop new proce- the clearance distance. dures to comply with paragraph (d) of (ii) Where necessary, use equipment this section or have the utility owner/ that enables the dedicated spotter to operator deenergize and visibly ground communicate directly with the oper- or relocate the power line before re- ator. suming work. (iii) Give timely information to the (k) Devices originally designed by operator so that the required clearance the manufacturer for use as a safety distance can be maintained. device (see § 1926.1415), operational aid, (5) Additional precautions for traveling or a means to prevent power line con- in poor visibility. When traveling at tact or electrocution, when used to night, or in conditions of poor visi- comply with this section, must comply bility, in addition to the measures with the manufacturer’s procedures for specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through use and conditions of use. (4) of this section, the employer must (l) [Reserved] ensure that: (m) The employer must train each (i) The power lines are illuminated or operator and crew member assigned to another means of identifying the loca- work with the equipment in accordance tion of the lines is used. with § 1926.1408(g). (ii) A safe path of travel is identified [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 79 and used. FR 20743, Apr. 11, 2014]

692

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00702 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1412

TABLE T—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES WHILE TRAVELING WITH NO LOAD

Voltage While traveling—minimum clearance distance (nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet)

up to 0.75 ...... 4 over .75 to 50 ...... 6 over 50 to 345 ...... 10 over 345 to 750 ...... 16 Over 750 to 1,000 ...... 20 Over 1,000 ...... (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution).

§ 1926.1412 Inspections. (ii) Where manufacturer equipment criteria are unavailable or inappli- (a) Modified equipment. (1) Equipment that has had modifications or additions cable, the qualified person must: which affect the safe operation of the (A) Determine if a registered profes- equipment (such as modifications or sional engineer (RPE) is needed to de- additions involving a safety device or velop criteria for the repair/adjust- operational aid, critical part of a con- ment. If an RPE is not needed, the em- trol system, power plant, braking sys- ployer must ensure that the criteria tem, load-sustaining structural compo- are developed by the qualified person. nents, load hook, or in-use operating If an RPE is needed, the employer must mechanism) or capacity must be in- ensure that they are developed by an spected by a qualified person after such RPE. modifications/additions have been com- (B) Determine if the repair/adjust- pleted, prior to initial use. The inspec- ment meets the criteria developed in tion must meet all of the following re- accordance with paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A) quirements: of this section. (i) The inspection must assure that (iii) The inspection must include the modifications or additions have functional testing of the repaired/ad- been done in accordance with the ap- justed parts and other components that proval obtained pursuant to § 1926.1434 may be affected by the repair/adjust- (Equipment modifications). ment. (ii) The inspection must include func- (4) Equipment must not be used until tional testing of the equipment. an inspection under this paragraph (2) Equipment must not be used until demonstrates that the repair/adjust- an inspection under this paragraph ment meets the requirements of para- demonstrates that the requirements of graph (b)(1)(i) of this section (or, where paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section have applicable, paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this been met. section). (b) Repaired/adjusted equipment. (1) (c) Post-assembly. (1) Upon completion Equipment that has had a repair or ad- of assembly, the equipment must be in- justment that relates to safe operation spected by a qualified person to assure (such as: A repair or adjustment to a that it is configured in accordance with safety device or operator aid, or to a manufacturer equipment criteria. critical part of a control system, power (2) Where manufacturer equipment plant, braking system, load-sustaining criteria are unavailable, a qualified structural components, load hook, or person must: in-use operating mechanism), must be (i) Determine if a registered profes- inspected by a qualified person after sional engineer (RPE) familiar with such a repair or adjustment has been the type of equipment involved is need- completed, prior to initial use. The ined to develop criteria for the equip- spection must meet all of the following ment configuration. If an RPE is not requirements: needed, the employer must ensure that (i) The qualified person must deter- the criteria are developed by the quali- mine if the repair/adjustment meets fied person. If an RPE is needed, the manufacturer equipment criteria employer must ensure that they are de- (where applicable and available). veloped by an RPE.

693

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00703 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1412 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Determine if the equipment tion, or similar conditions. This para- meets the criteria developed in accord- graph does not apply to the inspection ance with paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this of ground conditions for railroad section. tracks and their underlying support (3) Equipment must not be used until when the railroad tracks are part of an inspection under this paragraph the general railroad system of trans- demonstrates that the equipment is portation that is regulated pursuant to configured in accordance with the ap- the Federal Railroad Administration plicable criteria. under 49 CFR part 213. (d) Each shift. (1) A competent person (xi) The equipment for level position must begin a visual inspection prior to within the tolerances specified by the each shift the equipment will be used, equipment manufacturer’s rec- which must be completed before or dur- ommendations, both before each shift ing that shift. The inspection must and after each move and setup. consist of observation for apparent de- (xii) Operator cab windows for sig- ficiencies. Taking apart equipment nificant cracks, breaks, or other defi- components and booming down is not ciencies that would hamper the opera- required as part of this inspection un- tor’s view. less the results of the visual inspection (xiii) Rails, rail stops, rail clamps or trial operation indicate that further and supporting surfaces when the investigation necessitating taking equipment has rail traveling. This apart equipment components or boom- paragraph does not apply to the inspec- ing down is needed. Determinations tion of rails, rail stops, rail clamps and made in conducting the inspection supporting surfaces when the railroad must be reassessed in light of observa- tracks are part of the general railroad tions made during operation. At a min- system of transportation that is regu- imum the inspection must include all lated pursuant to the Federal Railroad of the following: Administration under 49 CFR part 213. (i) Control mechanisms for mal- (xiv) Safety devices and operational adjustments interfering with proper aids for proper operation. operation. (2) If any deficiency in paragraphs (ii) Control and drive mechanisms for (d)(1)(i) through (xiii) of this section apparent excessive wear of components (or in additional inspection items re- and contamination by lubricants, quired to be checked for specific types water or other foreign matter. of equipment in accordance with other (iii) Air, hydraulic, and other pres- sections of this standard) is identified, surized lines for deterioration or leak- an immediate determination must be age, particularly those which flex in made by the competent person as to normal operation. whether the deficiency constitutes a (iv) Hydraulic system for proper fluid safety hazard. If the deficiency is de- level. termined to constitute a safety hazard, (v) Hooks and latches for deforma- the equipment must be taken out of tion, cracks, excessive wear, or damage service until it has been corrected. See such as from chemicals or heat. § 1926.1417. (vi) Wire rope reeving for compliance (3) If any deficiency in paragraph with the manufacturer’s specifications. (d)(1)(xiv) of this section (safety de- (vii) Wire rope, in accordance with vices/operational aids) is identified, the § 1926.1413(a). action specified in § 1926.1415 and (viii) Electrical apparatus for mal- § 1926.1416 must be taken prior to using functioning, signs of apparent exces- the equipment. sive deterioration, dirt or moisture ac- (e) Monthly. (1) Each month the cumulation. equipment is in service it must be in- (ix) Tires (when in use) for proper inspected in accordance with paragraph flation and condition. (d) of this section (each shift). (x) Ground conditions around the (2) Equipment must not be used until equipment for proper support, includ- an inspection under this paragraph ing ground settling under and around demonstrates that no corrective action outriggers/stabilizers and supporting under paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this foundations, ground water accumula- section is required.

694

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00704 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1412

(3) Documentation. (i) The following (x) Hydraulic, pneumatic and other information must be documented and pressurized hoses, fittings and tubing, maintained by the employer that con- as follows: ducts the inspection: (A) Flexible hose or its junction with (A) The items checked and the re- the fittings for indications of leaks. sults of the inspection. (B) Threaded or clamped joints for (B) The name and signature of the leaks. person who conducted the inspection (C) Outer covering of the hose for and the date. blistering, abnormal deformation or (ii) This document must be retained other signs of failure/impending fail- for a minimum of three months. ure. (f) Annual/comprehensive. (1) At least (D) Outer surface of a hose, rigid every 12 months the equipment must tube, or fitting for indications of exces- be inspected by a qualified person in sive abrasion or scrubbing. accordance with paragraph (d) of this (xi) Hydraulic and pneumatic pumps section (each shift) except that the cor- and motors, as follows: rective action set forth in paragraphs (A) Performance indicators: Unusual (f)(4), (f)(5), and (f)(6) of this section noises or vibration, low operating must apply in place of the corrective speed, excessive heating of the fluid, action required by paragraphs (d)(2) low pressure. and (d)(3) of this section. (B) Loose bolts or fasteners. (2) In addition, at least every 12 (C) Shaft seals and joints between months, the equipment must be in- pump sections for leaks. spected by a qualified person. Dis- (xii) Hydraulic and pneumatic valves, assembly is required, as necessary, to as follows: complete the inspection. The equip- (A) Spools: Sticking, improper return ment must be inspected for all of the to neutral, and leaks. following: (B) Leaks. (i) Equipment structure (including (C) Valve housing cracks. the boom and, if equipped, the jib): (D) Relief valves: Failure to reach (A) Structural members: Deformed, correct pressure (if there is a manufac- cracked, or significantly corroded. turer procedure for checking pressure, (B) Bolts, rivets and other fasteners: it must be followed). loose, failed or significantly corroded. (xiii) Hydraulic and pneumatic cyl- (C) Welds for cracks. inders, as follows: (ii) Sheaves and drums for cracks or (A) Drifting caused by fluid leaking significant wear. across the piston. (iii) Parts such as pins, bearings, (B) Rod seals and welded joints for shafts, gears, rollers and locking de- leaks. vices for distortion, cracks or signifi- (C) Cylinder rods for scores, nicks, or cant wear. dents. (iv) Brake and clutch system parts, (D) Case (barrel) for significant linings, pawls and ratchets for exces- dents. sive wear. (E) Rod eyes and connecting joints: (v) Safety devices and operational Loose or deformed. aids for proper operation (including (xiv) Outrigger or stabilizer pads/ significant inaccuracies). floats for excessive wear or cracks. (vi) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or (xv) Slider pads for excessive wear or other power plants for safety-related cracks. problems (such as leaking exhaust and (xvi) Electrical components and wir- emergency shut-down feature) and con- ing for cracked or split insulation and ditions, and proper operation. loose or corroded terminations. (vii) Chains and chain drive sprockets (xvii) Warning labels and decals for excessive wear of sprockets and ex- originally supplied with the equipment cessive chain stretch. by the manufacturer or otherwise re- (viii) Travel steering, brakes, and quired under this standard: Missing or locking devices, for proper operation. unreadable. (ix) Tires for damage or excessive (xviii) Originally equipped operator wear. seat (or equivalent): Missing.

695

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00705 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1413 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(xix) Operator seat: Unserviceable. person must inspect those items/condi- (xx) Originally equipped steps, lad- tions. ders, handrails, guards: Missing. (3) If a deficiency is found, the em- (xxi) Steps, ladders, handrails, ployer must follow the requirements in guards: In unusable/unsafe condition. paragraphs (f)(4) through (6) of this sec- (3) This inspection must include function. tional testing to determine that the (h) Equipment not in regular use. equipment as configured in the inspec- Equipment that has been idle for 3 tion is functioning properly. months or more must be inspected by a (4) If any deficiency is identified, an qualified person in accordance with the immediate determination must be requirements of paragraph (e) (Month- made by the qualified person as to ly) of this section before initial use. whether the deficiency constitutes a (i) [Reserved] safety hazard or, though not yet a safe- (j) Any part of a manufacturer’s pro- ty hazard, needs to be monitored in the cedures regarding inspections that re- monthly inspections. late to safe operation (such as to a safety device or operational aid, crit- (5) If the qualified person determines ical part of a control system, power that a deficiency is a safety hazard, the plant, braking system, load-sustaining equipment must be taken out of service structural components, load hook, or until it has been corrected, except in-use operating mechanism) that is when temporary alternative measures more comprehensive or has a more fre- are implemented as specified in quent schedule of inspection than the § 1926.1416(d) or § 1926.1435(e). See requirements of this section must be § 1926.1417. followed. (6) If the qualified person determines (k) All documents produced under that, though not presently a safety this section must be available, during hazard, the deficiency needs to be mon- the applicable document retention pe- itored, the employer must ensure that riod, to all persons who conduct inspec- the deficiency is checked in the month- tions under this section. ly inspections. (7) Documentation of annual/com- § 1926.1413 Wire rope—inspection. prehensive inspection. The following in- (a) Shift inspection. (1) A competent formation must be documented, main- person must begin a visual inspection tained, and retained for a minimum of prior to each shift the equipment is 12 months, by the employer that con- used, which must be completed before ducts the inspection: or during that shift. The inspection (i) The items checked and the results must consist of observation of wire of the inspection. ropes (running and standing) that are (ii) The name and signature of the likely to be in use during the shift for person who conducted the inspection apparent deficiencies, including those and the date. listed in paragraph (a)(2) of this sec- (g) Severe service. Where the severity tion. Untwisting (opening) of wire rope of use/conditions is such that there is a or booming down is not required as reasonable probability of damage or ex- part of this inspection. cessive wear (such as loading that may (2) Apparent deficiencies—(i) Category have exceeded rated capacity, shock I. Apparent deficiencies in this cat- loading that may have exceeded rated egory include the following: capacity, prolonged exposure to a cor- (A) Significant distortion of the wire rosive atmosphere), the employer must rope structure such as kinking, crush- stop using the equipment and a quali- ing, unstranding, birdcaging, signs of fied person must: core failure or steel core protrusion be- (1) Inspect the equipment for struc- tween the outer strands. tural damage to determine if the equip- (B) Significant corrosion. ment can continue to be used safely. (C) Electric arc damage (from a (2) In light of the use/conditions de- source other than power lines) or heat termine whether any items/conditions damage. listed in paragraph (f) of this section (D) Improperly applied end connec- need to be inspected; if so, the qualified tions.

696

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00706 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1413

(E) Significantly corroded, cracked, operations involving use of the wire bent, or worn end connections (such as rope in question must be prohibited from severe service). until: (ii) Category II. Apparent deficiencies (A) The wire rope is replaced (see in this category are: § 1926.1417), or (A) Visible broken wires, as follows: (B) If the deficiency is localized, the (1) In running wire ropes: Six ran- problem is corrected by severing the domly distributed broken wires in one wire rope in two; the undamaged por- rope lay or three broken wires in one tion may continue to be used. Joining strand in one rope lay, where a rope lay lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro- is the length along the rope in which hibited. If a rope is shortened under one strand makes a complete revolu- this paragraph, the employer must en- tion around the rope. sure that the drum will still have two (2) In rotation resistant ropes: Two wraps of wire when the load and/or randomly distributed broken wires in boom is in its lowest position. six rope diameters or four randomly (ii) If a deficiency in Category II (see distributed broken wires in 30 rope di- paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section) is ameters. identified, operations involving use of (3) In pendants or standing wire the wire rope in question must be pro- ropes: More than two broken wires in hibited until: one rope lay located in rope beyond end (A) The employer complies with the connections and/or more than one bro- wire rope manufacturer’s established ken wire in a rope lay located at an end connection. criterion for removal from service or a (B) A diameter reduction of more different criterion that the wire rope than 5% from nominal diameter. manufacturer has approved in writing for that specific wire rope ( (iii) Category III. Apparent defi- see ciencies in this category include the § 1926.1417), following: (B) The wire rope is replaced (see (A) In rotation resistant wire rope, § 1926.1417), or core protrusion or other distortion in- (C) If the deficiency is localized, the dicating core failure. problem is corrected by severing the (B) Prior electrical contact with a wire rope in two; the undamaged por- power line. tion may continue to be used. Joining (C) A broken strand. lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro- (3) Critical review items. The com- hibited. If a rope is shortened under petent person must give particular at- this paragraph, the employer must en- tention to all of the following: sure that the drum will still have two (i) Rotation resistant wire rope in wraps of wire when the load and/or use. boom is in its lowest position. (ii) Wire rope being used for boom (iii) If a deficiency in Category III is hoists and luffing hoists, particularly identified, operations involving use of at reverse bends. the wire rope in question must be pro- (iii) Wire rope at flange points, cross- hibited until: over points and repetitive pickup (A) The wire rope is replaced (see points on drums. § 1926.1417), or (iv) Wire rope at or near terminal (B) If the deficiency (other than ends. power line contact) is localized, the (v) Wire rope in contact with saddles, problem is corrected by severing the equalizer sheaves or other sheaves wire rope in two; the undamaged por- where rope travel is limited. tion may continue to be used. Joining (4) Removal from service. (i) If a defi- lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro- ciency in Category I (see paragraph hibited. Repair of wire rope that con- (a)(2)(i) of this section) is identified, an tacted an energized power line is also immediate determination must be prohibited. If a rope is shortened under made by the competent person as to this paragraph, the employer must en- whether the deficiency constitutes a sure that the drum will still have two safety hazard. If the deficiency is de- wraps of wire when the load and/or termined to constitute a safety hazard, boom is in its lowest position.

697

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00707 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1414 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iv) Where a wire rope is required to additional 6 months for running ropes be removed from service under this sec- and, for standing ropes, at the time of tion, either the equipment (as a whole) disassembly. or the hoist with that wire rope must (3) If a deficiency is identified, an im- be tagged-out, in accordance with mediate determination must be made § 1926.1417(f)(1), until the wire rope is by the qualified person as to whether repaired or replaced. the deficiency constitutes a safety haz- (b) Monthly inspection. (1) Each ard. month an inspection must be con- (i) If the deficiency is determined to ducted in accordance with paragraph constitute a safety hazard, operations (a) (shift inspection) of this section. involving use of the wire rope in ques- (2) The inspection must include any tion must be prohibited until: deficiencies that the qualified person (A) The wire rope is replaced (see who conducts the annual inspection de- § 1926.1417), or termines under paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of (B) If the deficiency is localized, the this section must be monitored. problem is corrected by severing the (3) Wire ropes on equipment must not wire rope in two; the undamaged por- be used until an inspection under this tion may continue to be used. Joining paragraph demonstrates that no cor- lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro- rective action under paragraph (a)(4) of hibited. If a rope is shortened under this section is required. this paragraph, the employer must en- (4) The inspection must be docu- sure that the drum will still have two mented according to § 1926.1412(e)(3) wraps of wire when the load and/or (monthly inspection documentation). boom is in its lowest position. (c) Annual/comprehensive. (1) At least (ii) If the qualified person determines every 12 months, wire ropes in use on that, though not presently a safety equipment must be inspected by a hazard, the deficiency needs to be mon- qualified person in accordance with itored, the employer must ensure that paragraph (a) of this section (shift in- the deficiency is checked in the month- spection). ly inspections. (2) In addition, at least every 12 months, the wire ropes in use on equip- (4) The inspection must be document must be inspected by a qualified mented according to § 1926.1412(f)(7) (an- person, as follows: nual/comprehensive inspection docu- (i) The inspection must be for defi- mentation). ciencies of the types listed in para- (d) Rope lubricants that are of the graph (a)(2) of this section. type that hinder inspection must not (ii) The inspection must be complete be used. and thorough, covering the surface of (e) All documents produced under the entire length of the wire ropes, this section must be available, during with particular attention given to all the applicable document retention pe- of the following: riod, to all persons who conduct inspec- (A) Critical review items listed in tions under this section. paragraph (a)(3) of this section. (B) Those sections that are normally § 1926.1414 Wire rope—selection and installation criteria. hidden during shift and monthly inspections. (a) Original equipment wire rope and (C) Wire rope subject to reverse replacement wire rope must be selected bends. and installed in accordance with the (D) Wire rope passing over sheaves. requirements of this section. Selection (iii) Exception: In the event an inspec- of replacement wire rope must be in action under paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- cordance with the recommendations of tion is not feasible due to existing set- the wire rope manufacturer, the equip- up and configuration of the equipment ment manufacturer, or a qualified per- (such as where an assist crane is need- son. ed) or due to site conditions (such as a (b) Wire rope design criteria: Wire rope dense urban setting), such inspections (other than rotation resistant rope) must be conducted as soon as it be- must comply with either Option (1) or comes feasible, but no longer than an Option (2) of this section, as follows:

698

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00708 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1414

(1) Option (1). Wire rope must comply (2) Requirements. (i) Types II and III with section 5–1.7.1 of ASME B30.5–2004 with an operating design factor of less (incorporated by reference, see § 1926.6) than 5 must not be used for duty cycle except that section’s paragraph (c) or repetitive lifts. must not apply. (ii) Rotation resistant ropes (includ- (2) Option (2). Wire rope must be de- ing Types I, II and III) must have an signed to have, in relation to the equip- operating design factor of no less than ment’s rated capacity, a sufficient 3.5. minimum breaking force and design (iii) Type I must have an operating factor so that compliance with the ap- design factor of no less than 5, except plicable inspection provisions in where the wire rope manufacturer and § 1926.1413 will be an effective means of the equipment manufacturer approves preventing sudden rope failure. the design factor, in writing. (c) Wire rope must be compatible (iv) Types II and III must have an op- with the safe functioning of the equip- erating design factor of no less than 5, ment. except where the requirements of para- (d) Boom hoist reeving. (1) Fiber core graph (e)(3) of this section are met. ropes must not be used for boom hoist (3) When Types II and III with an op- reeving, except for derricks. erating design factor of less than 5 are (2) Rotation resistant ropes must be used (for non-duty cycle, non-repet- used for boom hoist reeving only where itive lifts), the following requirements the requirements of paragraph (e)(4)(ii) must be met for each lifting operation: of this section are met. (i) A qualified person must inspect (e) Rotation resistant ropes—(1) Defini- the rope in accordance with tions—(i) Type I rotation resistant wire § 1926.1413(a). The rope must be used rope (‘‘Type I’’). Type I rotation resist- only if the qualified person determines ant rope is stranded rope constructed that there are no deficiencies consti- to have little or no tendency to rotate tuting a hazard. In making this deter- or, if guided, transmits little or no mination, more than one broken wire torque. It has at least 15 outer strands in any one rope lay must be considered and comprises an assembly of at least a hazard. three layers of strands laid helically (ii) Operations must be conducted in over a center in two operations. The di- such a manner and at such speeds as to rection of lay of the outer strands is minimize dynamic effects. opposite to that of the underlying (iii) Each lift made under layer. § 1926.1414(e)(3) must be recorded in the (ii) Type II rotation resistant wire rope monthly and annual inspection docu- (‘‘Type II’’). Type II rotation resistant ments. Such prior uses must be consid- rope is stranded rope constructed to ered by the qualified person in deter- have significant resistance to rotation. mining whether to use the rope again. It has at least 10 outer strands and comprises an assembly of two or more (4) Additional requirements for rotation layers of strands laid helically over a resistant ropes for boom hoist reeving. (i) center in two or three operations. The Rotation resistant ropes must not be direction of lay of the outer strands is used for boom hoist reeving, except opposite to that of the underlying where the requirements of paragraph layer. (e)(4)(ii) of this section are met. (iii) Type III rotation resistant wire (ii) Rotation resistant ropes may be rope (‘‘Type III’’). Type III rotation reused as boom hoist reeving when load sistant rope is stranded rope con- hoists are used as boom hoists for at- structed to have limited resistance to tachments such as luffing attachments rotation. It has no more than nine or boom and mast attachment systems. outer strands, and comprises an assem- Under these conditions, all of the fol- bly of two layers of strands laid lowing requirements must be met: helically over a center in two oper- (A) The drum must provide a first ations. The direction of lay of the layer rope pitch diameter of not less outer strands is opposite to that of the than 18 times the nominal diameter of underlying layer. the rope used.

699

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00709 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1415 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(B) The requirements in § 1926.1426(a) (ii) If a built-in crane level indicator (irrespective of the date of manufac- is not working properly, it must be ture of the equipment), and tagged-out or removed. If a removable § 1926.1426(b). crane level indicator is not working (C) The requirements in ASME B30.5– properly, it must be removed. 2004 sections 5–1.3.2(a), (a)(2) through (iii) This requirement does not apply (a)(4), (b) and (d) (incorporated by ref- to portal cranes, derricks, floating erence, see § 1926.6) except that the min- cranes/derricks and land cranes/der- imum pitch diameter for sheaves used ricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or in multiple rope reeving is 18 times the other means of flotation. nominal diameter of the rope used (in- (2) Boom stops, except for derricks stead of the value of 16 specified in sec- and hydraulic booms. tion 5–1.3.2(d)). (3) Jib stops (if a jib is attached), ex- (D) All sheaves used in the boom cept for derricks. hoist reeving system must have a rope (4) Equipment with foot pedal brakes pitch diameter of not less than 18 times must have locks. the nominal diameter of the rope used. (5) Hydraulic outrigger jacks and hy- (E) The operating design factor for draulic stabilizer jacks must have an the boom hoist reeving system must be integral holding device/check valve. not less than five. (6) Equipment on rails must have rail (F) The operating design factor for clamps and rail stops, except for portal these ropes must be the total minimum cranes. breaking force of all parts of rope in (7) Horn. (i) The equipment must the system divided by the load imposed have a horn that is either built into on the rope system when supporting the equipment or is on the equipment the static weights of the structure and and immediately available to the oper- the load within the equipment’s rated ator. capacity. (G) When provided, a power-con- (ii) If a built-in horn is not working trolled lowering system must be capa- properly, it must be tagged-out or re- ble of handling rated capacities and moved. If a removable horn is not speeds as specified by the manufac- working properly, it must be removed. turer. (b) Proper operation required. Oper- (f) Wire rope clips used in conjunc- ations must not begin unless all of the tion with wedge sockets must be at- devices listed in this section are in tached to the unloaded dead end of the proper working order. If a device stops rope only, except that the use of de- working properly during operations, vices specifically designed for dead- the operator must safely stop oper- ending rope in a wedge socket is per- ations. If any of the devices listed in mitted. this section are not in proper working (g) Socketing must be done in the order, the equipment must be taken manner specified by the manufacturer out of service and operations must not of the wire rope or fitting. resume until the device is again work- (h) Prior to cutting a wire rope, ing properly. See § 1926.1417 (Operation). seizings must be placed on each side of Alternative measures are not per- the point to be cut. The length and mitted to be used. number of seizings must be in accordance with the wire rope manufacturer’s § 1926.1416 Operational aids. instructions. (a) The devices listed in this section (‘‘listed operational aids’’) are required § 1926.1415 Safety devices. on all equipment covered by this sub- (a) Safety devices. The following safe- part, unless otherwise specified. ty devices are required on all equip- (1) The requirements in paragraphs ment covered by this subpart, unless (e)(1), (e)(2), and (e)(3) of this section do otherwise specified: not apply to articulating cranes. (1) Crane level indicator. (i) The equip- (2) The requirements in paragraphs ment must have a crane level indicator (d)(3), (e)(1), and (e)(4) of this section that is either built into the equipment apply only to those digger derricks or is available on the equipment. manufactured after November 8, 2011.

700

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00710 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1416

(b) Operations must not begin unless (ii) If the equipment was manufac- the listed operational aids are in prop- tured on or before December 16, 1969, er working order, except where an and is not equipped with a boom hoist operational aid is being repaired the limiting device, at least one of the employer uses the specified temporary measures in paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A) alternative measures. The time periods through (C) of this section must be permitted for repairing defective oper- used. ational aids are specified in paragraphs (2) Luffing jib limiting device. Equip- (d) and (e) of this section. More protec- ment with a luffing jib must have a tive alternative measures specified by luffing jib limiting device. Temporary the crane/derrick manufacturer, if any, alternative measures are the same as must be followed. in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section, (c) If a listed operational aid stops except to limit the movement of the working properly during operations, luffing jib rather than the boom hoist. the operator must safely stop oper- (3) Anti two-blocking device. (i) Tele- ations until the temporary alternative scopic boom cranes manufactured after measures are implemented or the de- February 28, 1992, must be equipped vice is again working properly. If a re- with a device which automatically pre- placement part is no longer available, vents damage from contact between the use of a substitute device that per- the load block, overhaul ball, or simi- forms the same type of function is per- lar component, and the boom tip (or mitted and is not considered a modi- fixed upper block or similar compo- fication under § 1926.1434. nent). The device(s) must prevent such (d) Category I operational aids and al- damage at all points where two-block- ternative measures. Operational aids ing could occur. listed in this paragraph that are not Temporary alternative measures: Clear- working properly must be repaired no ly mark the cable (so that it can easily later than 7 calendar days after the de- be seen by the operator) at a point that ficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- will give the operator sufficient time ployer documents that it has ordered to stop the hoist to prevent two-block- the necessary parts within 7 calendar ing, and use a spotter when extending days of the occurrence of the defi- the boom. ciency, the repair must be completed (ii) Lattice boom cranes. (A) Lattice within 7 calendar days of receipt of the boom cranes manufactured after Feb parts. See § 1926.1417(j) for additional re- 28, 1992, must be equipped with a device quirements. that either automatically prevents (1) Boom hoist limiting device. (i) For damage and load failure from contact equipment manufactured after Decem- between the load block, overhaul ball, ber 16, 1969, a boom hoist limiting de- or similar component, and the boom vice is required. Temporary alternative tip (or fixed upper block or similar measures (use at least one). One or more component), or warns the operator in of the following methods must be used: time for the operator to prevent two- (A) Use a boom angle indicator. blocking. The device must prevent such (B) Clearly mark the boom hoist damage/failure or provide adequate cable (so that it can easily be seen by warning for all points where two-block- the operator) at a point that will give ing could occur. the operator sufficient time to stop the (B) Lattice boom cranes and derricks hoist to keep the boom within the min- manufactured after November 8, 2011 imum allowable radius. In addition, in- must be equipped with a device which stall mirrors or remote video cameras automatically prevents damage and and displays if necessary for the oper- load failure from contact between the ator to see the mark. load block, overhaul ball, or similar (C) Clearly mark the boom hoist component, and the boom tip (or fixed cable (so that it can easily be seen by upper block or similar component). a spotter) at a point that will give the The device(s) must prevent such dam- spotter sufficient time to signal the op- age/failure at all points where two- erator and have the operator stop the blocking could occur. hoist to keep the boom within the min- (C) Exception. The requirements in imum allowable radius. paragraphs (d)(3)(ii)(A) and (B) of this

701

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00711 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1416 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

section do not apply to such lattice determined by measuring the radii or boom equipment when used for drag- boom angle with a measuring device. line, clamshell (grapple), magnet, drop (2) Jib angle indicator if the equip- ball, container handling, concrete ment has a luffing jib. Temporary alter- bucket, marine operations that do not native measures: Radii or jib angle must involve hoisting personnel, and pile be determined by ascertaining the driving work. main boom angle and then measuring (D) Temporary alternative measures. the radii or jib angle with a measuring Clearly mark the cable (so that it can device. easily be seen by the operator) at a (3) Boom length indicator if the point that will give the operator suffi- equipment has a telescopic boom, ex- cient time to stop the hoist to prevent cept where the rated capacity is inde- two-blocking, or use a spotter. pendent of the boom length. Temporary (iii) Articulating cranes manufac- alternative measures. One or more of the tured after December 31, 1999, that are equipped with a load hoist must be following methods must be used: equipped with a device that automati- (i) Mark the boom with measured cally prevents damage from contact be- marks to calculate boom length, tween the load block, overhaul ball, or (ii) Calculate boom length from boom similar component, and the boom tip angle and radius measurements, (or fixed upper block or similar compo- (iii) Measure the boom with a meas- nent). The device must prevent such uring device. damage at all points where two-block- (4) Load weighing and similar devices. ing could occur. Temporary alternative (i) Equipment (other than derricks and measures: When two-blocking could articulating cranes) manufactured only occur with movement of the load after March 29, 2003 with a rated capac- hoist, clearly mark the cable (so that ity over 6,000 pounds must have at least it can easily be seen by the operator) one of the following: load weighing de- at a point that will give the operator vice, load moment (or rated capacity) sufficient time to stop the hoist to pre- indicator, or load moment (or rated ca- vent two-blocking, or use a spotter. pacity) limiter. Temporary alternative When two-blocking could occur with- measures: The weight of the load must out movement of the load hoist, clearly be determined from a source recognized mark the cable (so that it can easily be by the industry (such as the load’s seen by the operator) at a point that manufacturer) or by a calculation will give the operator sufficient time method recognized by the industry to stop the hoist to prevent two-block- (such as calculating a steel beam from ing, and use a spotter when extending measured dimensions and a known per the boom. foot weight). This information must be (e) Category II operational aids and al- provided to the operator prior to the ternative measures. Operational aids listed in this paragraph that are not lift. working properly must be repaired no (ii) Articulating cranes manufac- later than 30 calendar days after the tured after November 8, 2011 must have deficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- at least one of the following: automatic ployer documents that it has ordered overload prevention device, load weigh- the necessary parts within 7 calendar ing device, load moment (or rated ca- days of the occurrence of the defi- pacity) indicator, or load moment ciency, and the part is not received in (rated capacity) limiter. Temporary al- time to complete the repair in 30 cal- ternative measures: The weight of the endar days, the repair must be com- load must be determined from a source pleted within 7 calendar days of receipt recognized by the industry (such as the of the parts. See § 1926.1417(j) for addi- load’s manufacturer) or by a calcula- tional requirements. tion method recognized by the industry (1) Boom angle or radius indicator. The (such as calculating a steel beam from equipment must have a boom angle or measured dimensions and a known per radius indicator readable from the op- foot weight). This information must be erator’s station. Temporary alternative provided to the operator prior to the measures: Radii or boom angle must be lift.

702

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00712 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1417

(5) The following devices are required dures until the rated capacities (in on equipment manufactured after No- electronic or other form) are available. vember 8, 2011: (d) The operator must not engage in (i) Outrigger/stabilizer position (hori- any practice or activity that diverts zontal beam extension) sensor/monitor his/her attention while actually en- if the equipment has outriggers or sta- gaged in operating the equipment, such bilizers. Temporary alternative measures: as the use of cellular phones (other The operator must verify that the posi- than when used for signal communication of the outriggers or stabilizers is tions). correct (in accordance with manufac- (e) Leaving the equipment unattended. turer procedures) before beginning op- (1) The operator must not leave the erations requiring outrigger or sta- controls while the load is suspended, bilizer deployment. except where all of the following are (ii) Hoist drum rotation indicator if met: the equipment has a hoist drum not (i) The operator remains adjacent to visible from the operator’s station. the equipment and is not engaged in Temporary alternative measures: Mark any other duties. the drum to indicate the rotation of (ii) The load is to be held suspended the drum. In addition, install mirrors for a period of time exceeding normal or remote video cameras and displays if lifting operations. necessary for the operator to see the (iii) The competent person deter- mark. mines that it is safe to do so and implements measures necessary to restrain § 1926.1417 Operation. the boom hoist and telescoping, load, swing, and outrigger or stabilizer func- (a) The employer must comply with tions. all manufacturer procedures applicable (iv) Barricades or caution lines, and to the operational functions of equip- notices, are erected to prevent all em- ment, including its use with attach- ployees from entering the fall zone. No ments. employees, including those listed in (b) Unavailable operation procedures. §§ 1926.1425(b)(1) through (3), (1) Where the manufacturer procedures § 1926.1425(d) or § 1926.1425(e), are per- are unavailable, the employer must de- mitted in the fall zone. velop and ensure compliance with all (2) The provisions in § 1926.1417(e)(1) procedures necessary for the safe oper- do not apply to working gear (such as ation of the equipment and attach- slings, spreader bars, ladders, and weld- ments. ing machines) where the weight of the (2) Procedures for the operational working gear is negligible relative to controls must be developed by a quali- the lifting capacity of the equipment fied person. as positioned, and the working gear is (3) Procedures related to the capacity suspended over an area other than an of the equipment must be developed entrance or exit. and signed by a registered professional (f) Tag-out—(1) Tagging out of service engineer familiar with the equipment. equipment/functions. Where the em- (c) Accessibility of procedures. (1) The ployer has taken the equipment out of procedures applicable to the operation service, a tag must be placed in the cab of the equipment, including rated ca- stating that the equipment is out of pacities (load charts), recommended service and is not to be used. Where the operating speeds, special hazard warn- employer has taken a function(s) out of ings, instructions, and operator’s man- service, a tag must be placed in a con- ual, must be readily available in the spicuous position stating that the func- cab at all times for use by the oper- tion is out of service and is not to be ator. used. (2) Where rated capacities are avail- (2) Response to ‘‘do not operate’’/tag- able in the cab only in electronic form: out signs. (i) If there is a warning (tag- In the event of a failure which makes out or maintenance/do not operate) the rated capacities inaccessible, the sign on the equipment or starting con- operator must immediately cease oper- trol, the operator must not activate ations or follow safe shut-down proce- the switch or start the equipment until

703

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00713 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1417 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the sign has been removed by a person (o) Compliance with rated capacity. (1) authorized to remove it, or until the The equipment must not be operated in operator has verified that: excess of its rated capacity. (A) No one is servicing, working on, (2) The operator must not be required or otherwise in a dangerous position on to operate the equipment in a manner the machine. that would violate paragraph (o)(1) of (B) The equipment has been repaired this section. and is working properly. (3) Load weight. The operator must (ii) If there is a warning (tag-out or verify that the load is within the rated maintenance/do not operate) sign on capacity of the equipment by at least any other switch or control, the oper- one of the following methods: ator must not activate that switch or (i) The weight of the load must be de- control until the sign has been re- termined from a source recognized by moved by a person authorized to re- the industry (such as the load’s manu- move it, or until the operator has facturer), or by a calculation method verified that the requirements in para- recognized by the industry (such as cal- graphs (f)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this sec- culating a steel beam from measured tion have been met. dimensions and a known per foot (g) Before starting the engine, the op- weight), or by other equally reliable erator must verify that all controls are means. In addition, when requested by in the proper starting position and that the operator, this information must be all personnel are in the clear. provided to the operator prior to the (h) Storm warning. When a local storm lift; or warning has been issued, the com- (ii) The operator must begin hoisting petent person must determine whether it is necessary to implement manufac- the load to determine, using a load turer recommendations for securing weighing device, load moment indi- the equipment. cator, rated capacity indicator, or (i) [Reserved] rated capacity limiter, if it exceeds 75 percent of the maximum rated capac- (j) If equipment adjustments or re- ity at the longest radius that will be pairs are necessary: used during the lift operation. If it (1) The operator must, in writing, does, the operator must not proceed promptly inform the person designated with the lift until he/she verifies the by the employer to receive such infor- weight of the load in accordance with mation and, where there are successive shifts, to the next operator; and paragraph (o)(3)(i) of this section. (2) The employer must notify all af- (p) The boom or other parts of the fected employees, at the beginning of equipment must not contact any ob- each shift, of the necessary adjust- struction. ments or repairs and all alternative (q) The equipment must not be used measures. to drag or pull loads sideways. (k) Safety devices and operational (r) On wheel-mounted equipment, no aids must not be used as a substitute loads must be lifted over the front for the exercise of professional judg- area, except as permitted by the manu- ment by the operator. facturer. (l) [Reserved] (s) The operator must test the brakes (m) If the competent person deter- each time a load that is 90% or more of mines that there is a slack rope condi- the maximum line pull is handled by tion requiring re-spooling of the rope, lifting the load a few inches and apply- it must be verified (before starting to ing the brakes. In duty cycle and repet- lift) that the rope is seated on the itive lifts where each lift is 90% or drum and in the sheaves as the slack is more of the maximum line pull, this removed. requirement applies to the first lift but (n) The competent person must ad- not to successive lifts. just the equipment and/or operations (t) Neither the load nor the boom to address the effect of wind, ice, and must be lowered below the point where snow on equipment stability and rated less than two full wraps of rope remain capacity. on their respective drums.

704

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00714 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1419

(u) Traveling with a load. (1) Traveling § 1926.1418 Authority to stop oper- with a load is prohibited if the practice ation. is prohibited by the manufacturer. Whenever there is a concern as to (2) Where traveling with a load, the safety, the operator must have the au- employer must ensure that: thority to stop and refuse to handle (i) A competent person supervises the loads until a qualified person has deter- operation, determines if it is necessary mined that safety has been assured. to reduce rated capacity, and makes determinations regarding load posi- § 1926.1419 Signals—general require- tion, boom location, ground support, ments. travel route, overhead obstructions, (a) A signal person must be provided and speed of movement necessary to in each of the following situations: ensure safety. (1) The point of operation, meaning (ii) The determinations of the com- the load travel or the area near or at petent person required in paragraph load placement, is not in full view of (u)(2)(i) of this section are imple- the operator. mented. (2) When the equipment is traveling, (iii) For equipment with tires, tire the view in the direction of travel is pressure specified by the manufacturer obstructed. is maintained. (3) Due to site specific safety concerns, either the operator or the person (v) Rotational speed of the equipment handling the load determines that it is must be such that the load does not necessary. swing out beyond the radius at which it (b) Types of signals. Signals to opera- can be controlled. tors must be by hand, voice, audible, or (w) A tag or restraint line must be new signals. used if necessary to prevent rotation of (c) Hand signals. (1) When using hand the load that would be hazardous. signals, the Standard Method must be (x) The brakes must be adjusted in used (see appendix A of this subpart). accordance with manufacturer proce- Exception: Where use of the Standard dures to prevent unintended move- Method for hand signals is infeasible, ment. or where an operation or use of an at- (y) The operator must obey a stop (or tachment is not covered in the Stand- emergency stop) signal, irrespective of ard Method, non-standard hand signals who gives it. may be used in accordance with para- (z) Swinging locomotive cranes. A loco- graph (c)(2) of this section. motive crane must not be swung into a (2) Non-standard hand signals. When position where railway cars on an adja- using non-standard hand signals, the cent track could strike it, until it is signal person, operator, and lift direc- determined that cars are not being tor (where there is one) must contact moved on the adjacent track and that each other prior to the operation and proper flag protection has been estab- agree on the non-standard hand signals lished. that will be used. (d) New signals. Signals other than (aa) Counterweight/ballast. (1) The fol- hand, voice, or audible signals may be lowing applies to equipment other than used where the employer demonstrates tower cranes: that: (i) Equipment must not be operated (1) The new signals provide at least without the counterweight or ballast equally effective communication as in place as specified by the manufac- voice, audible, or Standard Method turer. hand signals, or (ii) The maximum counterweight or (2) The new signals comply with a na- ballast specified by the manufacturer tional consensus standard that pro- for the equipment must not be exceed- vides at least equally effective commu- ed. nication as voice, audible, or Standard (2) Counterweight/ballast require- Method hand signals. ments for tower cranes are specified in (e) Suitability. The signals used (hand, § 1926.1435(b)(8). voice, audible, or new), and means of

705

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00715 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1420 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

transmitting the signals to the oper- (1) Multiple cranes/derricks and one ator (such as direct line of sight, video, or more signal persons may share a radio, etc.), must be appropriate for the dedicated channel for the purpose of site conditions. coordinating operations. (f) During operations requiring sig- (2) Where a crane is being operated nals, the ability to transmit signals be- on or adjacent to railroad tracks, and tween the operator and signal person the actions of the crane operator need must be maintained. If that ability is to be coordinated with the movement interrupted at any time, the operator of other equipment or trains on the must safely stop operations requiring same or adjacent tracks. signals until it is reestablished and a (c) The operator’s reception of sig- proper signal is given and understood. nals must be by a hands-free system. (g) If the operator becomes aware of a safety problem and needs to commu- § 1926.1421 Signals—voice signals—ad- nicate with the signal person, the oper- ditional requirements. ator must safely stop operations. Oper- (a) Prior to beginning operations, the ations must not resume until the oper- operator, signal person and lift director ator and signal person agree that the (if there is one), must contact each problem has been resolved. other and agree on the voice signals (h) Only one person may give signals that will be used. Once the voice sig- to a crane/derrick at a time, except in nals are agreed upon, these workers circumstances covered by paragraph (j) need not meet again to discuss voice of this section. signals unless another worker is added (i) [Reserved] or substituted, there is confusion about (j) Anyone who becomes aware of a the voice signals, or a voice signal is to safety problem must alert the operator be changed. or signal person by giving the stop or (b) Each voice signal must contain emergency stop signal. (NOTE: the following three elements, given in § 1926.1417(y) requires the operator to the following order: function (such as obey a stop or emergency stop signal). hoist, boom, etc.), direction; distance (k) All directions given to the oper- and/or speed; function, stop command. ator by the signal person must be given (c) The operator, signal person and from the operator’s direction perspec- lift director (if there is one), must be tive. able to effectively communicate in the (l) [Reserved] language used. (m) Communication with multiple cranes/derricks. Where a signal person(s) § 1926.1422 Signals—hand signal chart. is in communication with more than Hand signal charts must be either one crane/derrick, a system must be posted on the equipment or conspicu- used for identifying the crane/derrick ously posted in the vicinity of the each signal is for, as follows: hoisting operations. (1) for each signal, prior to giving the function/direction, the signal person § 1926.1423 Fall protection. must identify the crane/derrick the sig- (a) Application. (1) Paragraphs (b), nal is for, or (c)(3), (e) and (f) of this section apply to (2) must use an equally effective all equipment covered by this subpart method of identifying which crane/der- except tower cranes. rick the signal is for. (2) Paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), (d), (g), (j) and (k) of this section apply to all § 1926.1420 Signals—radio, telephone equipment covered by this subpart. or other electronic transmission of (3) Paragraphs (c)(4) and (h) of this signals. section apply only to tower cranes. (a) The device(s) used to transmit (b) Boom walkways. (1) Equipment signals must be tested on site before manufactured after November 8, 2011 beginning operations to ensure that with lattice booms must be equipped the signal transmission is effective, with walkways on the boom(s) if the clear, and reliable. vertical profile of the boom (from cord (b) Signal transmission must be centerline to cord centerline) is 6 or through a dedicated channel, except: more feet.

706

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00716 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1423

(2) Boom walkway criteria. (i) The (i) Steps, handholds, ladders, and walkways must be at least 12 inches guardrails/railings/grabrails must meet wide. the criteria of ISO 11660–1:2008(E) (in- (ii) Guardrails, railings and other corporated by reference, see § 1926.6) permanent fall protection attachments and ISO 11660–3:2008(E) (incorporated along walkways are: by reference, see § 1926.6) or SAE J185 (A) Not required. (May 2003) (incorporated by reference, (B) Prohibited on booms supported by see § 1926.6) except where infeasible. pendant ropes or bars if the guardrails/ (ii) Walking/stepping surfaces must railings/attachments could be snagged have slip-resistant features/properties by the ropes or bars. (such as diamond plate metal, strategi- (C) Prohibited if of the removable cally placed grip tape, expanded metal, type (designed to be installed and re- or slip-resistant paint). moved each time the boom is assem- (d) Personal fall arrest and fall re- bled/disassembled). straint systems. Personal fall arrest system components must be used in per- (D) Where not prohibited, guardrails sonal fall arrest and fall restraint sys- or railings may be of any height up to, tems and must conform to the criteria but not more than, 45 inches. in § 1926.502(d) except that (c) Steps, handholds, ladders, grabrails, § 1926.502(d)(15) does not apply to com- (1) Section guardrails and railings. ponents used in personal fall arrest and 1926.502(b) does not apply to equipment fall restraint systems. Either body covered by this subpart. belts or body harnesses must be used in (2) The employer must maintain in personal fall arrest and fall restraint good condition originally-equipped systems. steps, handholds, ladders and guard- (e) For non-assembly/disassembly rails/railings/grabrails. work, the employer must provide and (3) Equipment manufactured after ensure the use of fall protection equip- November 8, 2011 must be equipped so ment for employees who are on a walk- as to provide safe access and egress being/working surface with an unpro- tween the ground and the operator tected side or edge more than 6 feet work station(s), including the forward above a lower level as follows: and rear positions, by the provision of (1) When moving point-to-point: devices such as steps, handholds, lad- (i) On non-lattice booms (whether ders, and guardrails/railings/grabrails. horizontal or not horizontal). These devices must meet the following (ii) On lattice booms that are not criteria: horizontal. (i) Steps, handholds, ladders and (iii) On horizontal lattice booms guardrails/railings/grabrails must meet where the fall distance is 15 feet or the criteria of SAE J185 (May 2003) (in- more. corporated by reference, see § 1926.6) or (2) While at a work station on any ISO 11660–2:1994(E) (incorporated by ref- part of the equipment (including the erence, see § 1926.6) except where infea- boom, of any type), except when the sible. employee is at or near draw-works (ii) Walking/stepping surfaces, except (when the equipment is running), in for crawler treads, must have slip-re- the cab, or on the deck. sistant features/properties (such as dia- (f) For assembly/disassembly work, mond plate metal, strategically placed the employer must provide and ensure grip tape, expanded metal, or slip-re- the use of fall protection equipment for sistant paint). employees who are on a walking/work- (4) Tower cranes manufactured after ing surface with an unprotected side or November 8, 2011 must be equipped so edge more than 15 feet above a lower as to provide safe access and egress be- level, except when the employee is at tween the ground and the cab, machin- or near draw-works (when the equip- ery platforms, and tower (mast), by the ment is running), in the cab, or on the provision of devices such as steps, deck. handholds, ladders, and guardrails/rail- (g) Anchorage criteria. (1) Sections ings/grabrails. These devices must 1926.502(d)(15) and 1926.502(e)(2) apply to meet the following criteria: equipment covered by this subpart only

707

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00717 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1424 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

to the extent delineated in paragraph the crane/derrick (including the hook, (g)(2) of this section. load line and rigging) meets or exceeds (2) Anchorages for personal fall arrest the requirements in § 1926.502(d)(15). and positioning device systems. (i) Per- (2) The equipment operator must be sonal fall arrest systems must be an- at the work site and informed that the chored to any apparently substantial equipment is being used for this pur- part of the equipment unless a com- pose. petent person, from a visual inspection, (3) No load is suspended from the load without an engineering analysis, would line when the personal fall arrest sys- conclude that the criteria in tem is anchored to the crane/derrick’s § 1926.502(d)(15) would not be met. hook (or other part of the load line). (ii) Positioning device systems must (k) Training. The employer must be anchored to any apparently substan- train each employee who may be ex- tial part of the equipment unless a posed to fall hazards while on, or hoist- competent person, from a visual ined by, equipment covered by this sub- spection, without an engineering anal- part on all of the following: ysis, would conclude that the criteria (1) the requirements in this subpart in § 1926.502(e)(2) would not be met. that address fall protection. (iii) Attachable anchor devices (port- (2) the applicable requirements in able anchor devices that are attached §§ 1926.500 and 1926.502. to the equipment) must meet the anchorage criteria in § 1926.502(d)(15) for § 1926.1424 Work area control. personal fall arrest systems and § 1926.502(e)(2) for positioning device (a) Swing radius hazards. (1) The re- systems. quirements in paragraph (a)(2) of this (3) Anchorages for fall restraint sys- section apply where there are acces- tems. Fall restraint systems must be sible areas in which the equipment’s anchored to any part of the equipment rotating superstructure (whether per- that is capable of withstanding twice manently or temporarily mounted) the maximum load that an employee poses a reasonably foreseeable risk of: may impose on it during reasonably (i) Striking and injuring an em- anticipated conditions of use. ployee; or (h) Tower cranes. (1) For work other (ii) Pinching/crushing an employee than erecting, climbing, and disman- against another part of the equipment tling, the employer must provide and or another object. ensure the use of fall protection equip- (2) To prevent employees from enter- ment for employees who are on a walking these hazard areas, the employer ing/working surface with an unpro- must: tected side or edge more than 6 feet (i) Train each employee assigned to above a lower level, except when the work on or near the equipment (‘‘au- employee is at or near draw-works thorized personnel’’) in how to recog- (when the equipment is running), in nize struck-by and pinch/crush hazard the cab, or on the deck. areas posed by the rotating super- (2) For erecting, climbing, and dis- structure. mantling work, the employer must pro- (ii) Erect and maintain control lines, vide and ensure the use of fall protec- warning lines, railings or similar bar- tion equipment for employees who are riers to mark the boundaries of the on a walking/working surface with an hazard areas. Exception: When the em- unprotected side or edge more than 15 ployer can demonstrate that it is nei- feet above a lower level. ther feasible to erect such barriers on (i) [Reserved] the ground nor on the equipment, the (j) Anchoring to the load line. A per- hazard areas must be clearly marked sonal fall arrest system is permitted to by a combination of warning signs be anchored to the crane/derrick’s hook (such as ‘‘Danger—Swing/Crush Zone’’) (or other part of the load line) where and high visibility markings on the all of the following requirements are equipment that identify the hazard met: areas. In addition, the employer must (1) A qualified person has determined train each employee to understand that the set-up and rated capacity of what these markings signify.

708

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00718 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1426

(3) Protecting employees in the hazard (d) Receiving a load. Only employees area. (i) Before an employee goes to a needed to receive a load are permitted location in the hazard area that is out to be within the fall zone when a load of view of the operator, the employee is being landed. (or someone instructed by the em- (e) During a tilt-up or tilt-down oper- ployee) must ensure that the operator ation: is informed that he/she is going to that (1) No employee must be directly location. under the load. (ii) Where the operator knows that (2) Only employees essential to the an employee went to a location covered operation are permitted in the fall zone by paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the (but not directly under the load). An operator must not rotate the super- employee is essential to the operation structure until the operator is in- if the employee is conducting one of formed in accordance with a pre-ar- the following operations and the em- ranged system of communication that ployer can demonstrate it is infeasible the employee is in a safe position. for the employee to perform that oper- (b) Where any part of a crane/derrick ation from outside the fall zone: (1) is within the working radius of another Physically guide the load; (2) closely crane/derrick, the controlling entity monitor and give instructions regard- must institute a system to coordinate ing the load’s movement; or (3) either operations. If there is no controlling detach it from or initially attach it to entity, the employer (if there is only another component or structure (such one employer operating the multiple as, but not limited to, making an ini- pieces of equipment), or employers, tial connection or installing bracing). must institute such a system. NOTE: Boom free fall is prohibited when an employee is in the fall zone of the boom or § 1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load. load, and load line free fall is prohibited (a) Where available, hoisting routes when an employee is directly under the load; that minimize the exposure of employ- see § 1926.1426. ees to hoisted loads must be used, to § 1926.1426 Free fall and controlled the extent consistent with public safe- load lowering. ty. (a) Boom free fall prohibitions. (1) The (b) While the operator is not moving use of equipment in which the boom is a suspended load, no employee must be designed to free fall (live boom) is pro- within the fall zone, except for employ- hibited in each of the following cir- ees: cumstances: (1) Engaged in hooking, unhooking or (i) An employee is in the fall zone of guiding a load; the boom or load. (2) Engaged in the initial attachment (ii) An employee is being hoisted. of the load to a component or struc- (iii) The load or boom is directly over ture; or a power line, or over any part of the (3) Operating a concrete hopper or area extending the Table A of § 1926.1408 concrete bucket. clearance distance to each side of the (c) When employees are engaged in power line; or any part of the area ex- hooking, unhooking, or guiding the tending the Table A clearance distance load, or in the initial connection of a to each side of the power line is within load to a component or structure and the radius of vertical travel of the are within the fall zone, all of the fol- boom or the load. lowing criteria must be met: (iv) The load is over a shaft, except (1) The materials being hoisted must where there are no employees in the be rigged to prevent unintentional dis- shaft. placement. (v) The load is over a cofferdam, ex- (2) Hooks with self-closing latches or cept where there are no employees in their equivalent must be used. Excep- the fall zone of the boom or the load. tion: ‘‘J’’ hooks are permitted to be (vi) Lifting operations are taking used for setting wooden trusses. place in a refinery or tank farm. (3) The materials must be rigged by a (2) The use of equipment in which the qualified rigger. boom is designed to free fall (live

709

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00719 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1427 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

boom) is permitted only where none of within the radius of vertical travel of the circumstances listed in paragraph the load. (a)(1) of this section are present and: (4) The load is over a shaft. (i) The equipment was manufactured (5) The load is over a cofferdam, ex- prior to October 31, 1984; or cept where there are no employees in (ii) The equipment is a floating the fall zone of the load. crane/derrick or a land crane/derrick on a vessel/flotation device. § 1926.1427 Operator training, certification, and evaluation. (b) Preventing boom free fall. Where the use of equipment with a boom that (a) General requirements for operators. is designed to free fall (live boom) is The employer must ensure that each prohibited, the boom hoist must have a operator is trained, certified/licensed, secondary mechanism or device de- and evaluated in accordance with this signed to prevent the boom from fall- section before operating any equipment ing in the event the primary system covered under subpart CC, except for used to hold or regulate the boom hoist the equipment listed in paragraph fails, as follows: (a)(2) of this section. (1) Friction drums must have: (1) Operation during training. An em- (i) A friction clutch and, in addition, ployee who has not been certified/li- a braking device, to allow for con- censed and evaluated to operate as- trolled boom lowering. signed equipment in accordance with this section may only operate the (ii) A secondary braking or locking equipment as an operator-in-training device, which is manually or automati- under supervision in accordance with cally engaged, to back-up the primary the requirements of paragraph (b) of brake while the boom is held (such as a this section. secondary friction brake or a ratchet (2) Exceptions. Operators of derricks and pawl device). (see § 1926.1436), sideboom cranes (see (2) Hydraulic drums must have an in- § 1926.1440), or equipment with a max- tegrally mounted holding device or in- imum manufacturer-rated hoisting/lift- ternal static brake to prevent boom ing capacity of 2,000 pounds or less (see hoist movement in the event of hy- § 1926.1441) are not required to comply draulic failure. with § 1926.1427. Note: The training re- (3) Neither clutches nor hydraulic quirements in those other sections con- motors must be considered brake or tinue to apply (for the training require- locking devices for purposes of this ment for operators of sideboom cranes, subpart. follow section 1926.1430(c)). (4) Hydraulic boom cylinders must (3) Qualification by the U.S. military. have an integrally mounted holding de- (i) For purposes of this section, an op- vice. erator who is an employee of the U.S. (c) Preventing uncontrolled retraction. military meets the requirements of Hydraulic telescoping booms must this section if he/she has a current op- have an integrally mounted holding de- erator qualification issued by the U.S. vice to prevent the boom from retract- military for operation of the equip- ing in the event of hydraulic failure. ment. An employee of the U.S. military (d) Load line free fall. In each of the is a Federal employee of the Depart- following circumstances, controlled ment of Defense or Armed Forces and load lowering is required and free fall does not include employees of private of the load line hoist is prohibited: contractors. (1) An employee is directly under the (ii) A qualification under this para- load. graph is: (2) An employee is being hoisted. (A) Not portable: Such a qualifica- (3) The load is directly over a power tion meets the requirements of para- line, or over any part of the area ex- graph (a) of this section only where the tending the Table A of § 1926.1408 clear- operator is employed by (and operating ance distance to each side of the power the equipment for) the employer that line; or any part of the area extending issued the qualification. the Table A of § 1926.1408 clearance dis- (B) Valid for the period of time stipu- tance to each side of the power line is lated by the issuing entity.

710

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00720 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1427

(b) Operator training. The employer (ii) While monitoring the operator- must provide each operator-in-training in-training, the operator’s trainer per- with sufficient training, through a forms no tasks that detract from the combination of formal and practical in- trainer’s ability to monitor the oper- struction, to ensure that the operator- ator-in-training. in-training develops the skills, knowl- (iii) For equipment other than tower edge, and ability to recognize and avert cranes: The operator’s trainer and the risk necessary to operate the equip- operator-in-training must be in direct ment safely for assigned work. line of sight of each other. In addition, (1) The employer must provide in- they must communicate verbally or by struction on the knowledge and skills hand signals. For tower cranes: The op- listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this erator’s trainer and the operator-in- section to the operator-in-training. training must be in direct communica- (2) The operator-in-training must be tion with each other. continuously monitored on site by a (iv) The operator-in-training must be trainer while operating equipment. monitored by the operator’s trainer at (3) The employer may only assign all times, except for short breaks tasks within the operator-in-training’s where all of the following are met: ability. However, except as provided in (A) The break lasts no longer than 15 paragraph (b)(3)(v) of this section, the minutes and there is no more than one operator-in-training shall not operate break per hour. the equipment in any of the following (B) Immediately prior to the break circumstances unless certified in ac- the operator’s trainer informs the oper- cordance with paragraph (c) of this sec- ator-in-training of the specific tasks tion: that the operator-in-training is to per- (i) If any part of the equipment, load form and limitations to which he/she line, or load (including rigging and lift- must adhere during the operator training accessories), if operated up to the er’s break. equipment’s maximum working radius (C) The specific tasks that the oper- in the work zone (see § 1926.1408(a)(1)), ator-in-training will perform during could get within 20 feet of a power line the operator trainer’s break are within that is up to 350 kV, or within 50 feet the operator-in-training’s abilities. of a power line that is over 350 kV. (5) Retraining. The employer must (ii) If the equipment is used to hoist provide retraining in relevant topics personnel. for each operator when, based on the (iii) In multiple-equipment lifts. performance of the operator or an eval- (iv) If the equipment is used over a uation of the operator’s knowledge, shaft, cofferdam, or in a tank farm. there is an indication that retraining is (v) In multiple-lift rigging oper- necessary. ations, except where the operator’s (c) Operator certification and licensing. trainer determines that the operator- The employer must ensure that each in-training’s skills are sufficient for operator is certified or licensed to op- this high-skill work. erate the equipment as follows: (4) The employer must ensure that an (1) Licensing. When a state or local operator-in-training is monitored as government issues operator licenses for follows when operating equipment cov- equipment covered under subpart CC, ered by this subpart: the equipment operator must be li- (i) While operating the equipment, censed by that government entity for the operator-in-training must be con- operation of equipment within that en- tinuously monitored by an individual tity’s jurisdiction if that government (‘‘operator’s trainer’’) who meets all of licensing program meets the following the following requirements: requirements: (A) The operator’s trainer is an em- (i) The requirements for obtaining ployee or agent of the operator-in- the license include an assessment, by training’s employer. written and practical tests, of the oper- (B) The operator’s trainer has the ator applicant regarding, at a min- knowledge, training, and experience imum, the knowledge and skills listed necessary to direct the operator-in- in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this sec- training on the equipment in use. tion.

711

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00721 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1427 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) The testing meets industry-recog- (B) Provide certification based on nized criteria for written testing mate- equipment type, or type and capacity. rials, practical examinations, test ad- (iii) Have procedures for operators to ministration, grading, facilities/equip- re-apply and be re-tested in the event ment, and personnel. an operator applicant fails a test or is (iii) The government authority that decertified. oversees the licensing department/of- (iv) Have testing procedures for re- fice has determined that the require- certification designed to ensure that ments in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of the operator continues to meet the this section have been met. technical knowledge and skills require- (iv) The licensing department/office ments in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of has testing procedures for re-licensing this section. designed to ensure that the operator (v) Have its accreditation reviewed continues to meet the technical knowl- by the nationally recognized accred- edge and skills requirements in para- iting agency at least every 3 years. graphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. (2) If no accredited testing agency of- (v) For the purposes of compliance fers certification examinations for a with this section, a license is valid for particular type of equipment, an oper- the period of time stipulated by the li- ator will be deemed to have complied censing department/office, but no with the certification requirements of longer than 5 years. this section for that equipment if the (2) Certification. When an operator is operator has been certified for the type not required to be licensed under para- that is most similar to that equipment graph (c)(1) of this section, the oper- and for which a certification examina- ator must be certified in accordance tion is available. The operator’s certifi- with paragraph (d) or (e) of this sec- cate must state the type of equipment tion. for which the operator is certified. (3) No cost to employees. Whenever op- (3) A certification issued under this erator certification/licensure is re- option is portable among employers quired under this section, the employer who are required to have operators cer- must provide the certification/licen- tified under this option. sure at no cost to employees. (4) A certification issued under this (4) Provision of testing and training. A paragraph is valid for 5 years. testing entity is permitted to provide (e) Audited employer program. The em- training as well as testing services as ployer’s certification of its employee long as the criteria of the applicable must meet the following requirements: governmental or accrediting agency (in the option selected) for an organization (1) Testing. The written and practical providing both services are met. tests must be either: (d) Certification by an accredited crane (i) Developed by an accredited crane operator testing organization. (1) For a operator testing organization (see certification to satisfy the require- paragraph (d) of this section); or ments of this section, the crane oper- (ii) Approved by an auditor in accord- ator testing organization providing the ance with the following requirements: certification must: (A) The auditor is certified to evalu- (i) Be accredited by a nationally rec- ate such tests by an accredited crane ognized accrediting agency based on operator testing organization (see that agency’s determination that in- paragraph (d) of this section). dustry-recognized criteria for written (B) The auditor is not an employee of testing materials, practical examina- the employer. tions, test administration, grading, fa- (C) The approval must be based on cilities/equipment, and personnel have the auditor’s determination that the been met. written and practical tests meet na- (ii) Administer written and practical tionally recognized test development tests that: criteria and are valid and reliable in (A) Assess the operator applicant re- assessing the operator applicants regarding, at a minimum, the knowledge garding, at a minimum, the knowledge and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. and (2) of this section.

712

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00722 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1427

(D) The audit must be conducted in (i) Not portable: Such a certification accordance with nationally recognized meets the requirements of paragraph auditing standards. (c) of this section only where the oper- (2) Administration of tests. (i) The writ- ator is employed by (and operating the ten and practical tests must be admin- equipment for) the employer that istered under circumstances approved issued the certification. by the auditor as meeting nationally (ii) Valid for 5 years. recognized test administration stand- (f) Evaluation. (1) Through an evalua- ards. tion, the employer must ensure that (ii) The auditor must be certified to each operator is qualified by a dem- evaluate the administration of the onstration of: written and practical tests by an ac- (i) The skills and knowledge, as well credited crane operator testing organi- as the ability to recognize and avert zation (see paragraph (d) of this sec- risk, necessary to operate the equip- tion). ment safely, including those specific to (iii) The auditor must not be an em- the safety devices, operational aids, ployee of the employer. software, and the size and configura- (iv) The audit must be conducted in tion of the equipment. Size and con- accordance with nationally recognized figuration includes, but is not limited auditing standards. to, lifting capacity, boom length, at- (3) Timing of audit. The employer pro- tachments, luffing jib, and counter- gram must be audited within 3 months weight set-up. of the beginning of the program and at (ii) The ability to perform the hoist- least every 3 years thereafter. ing activities required for assigned (4) Requalification. The employer pro- work, including, if applicable, blind gram must have testing procedures for lifts, personnel hoisting, and multi- re-qualification designed to ensure that crane lifts. the operator continues to meet the technical knowledge and skills require- (2) For operators employed prior to ments in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of December 10, 2018, the employer may this section. The re-qualification pro- rely on its previous assessments of the cedures must be audited in accordance operator in lieu of conducting a new with paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this evaluation of that operator’s existing section. knowledge and skills. (5) Deficiencies. If the auditor deter- (3) The definition of ‘‘qualified’’ in mines that there is a significant defi- § 1926.32 does not apply to paragraph ciency (‘‘deficiency’’) in the program, (f)(1) of this section: Possession of a the employer must ensure that: certificate or degree cannot, by itself, (i) No operator is qualified until the cause a person to be qualified for pur- auditor confirms that the deficiency poses of paragraph (f)(1). has been corrected. (4) The evaluation required under (ii) The program is audited again paragraph (f)(1) of this section must be within 180 days of the confirmation conducted by an individual who has the that the deficiency was corrected. knowledge, training, and experience (iii) The auditor files a documented necessary to assess equipment opera- report of the deficiency to the appro- tors. priate Regional Office of the Occupa- (5) The evaluator must be an em- tional Safety and Health Administra- ployee or agent of the employer. Em- tion within 15 days of the auditor’s de- ployers that assign evaluations to an termination that there is a deficiency. agent retain the duty to ensure that (iv) Records of the audits of the em- the requirements in paragraph (f) are ployer’s program are maintained by satisfied. Once the evaluation is com- the auditor for 3 years and are made pleted successfully, the employer may available by the auditor to the Sec- allow the operator to operate other retary of Labor or the Secretary’s des- equipment that the employer can dem- ignated representative upon request. onstrate does not require substantially (6) Audited-program certificates. A cer- different skills, knowledge, or ability tification under this paragraph is: to recognize and avert risk to operate.

713

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00723 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1428 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(6) The employer must document the (B) Use of, and the ability to cal- completion of the evaluation. This doc- culate (manually or with a calculator), ument must provide: The operator’s load/capacity information on a variety name; the evaluator’s name and signa- of configurations of the equipment. ture; the date; and the make, model, (C) Procedures for preventing and re- and configuration of equipment used in sponding to power line contact. the evaluation. The employer must (D) Technical knowledge of the sub- make the document available at the ject matter criteria listed in appendix worksite while the operator is em- C of this subpart applicable to the spe- ployed by the employer. For operators cific type of equipment the individual assessed per paragraph (f)(2) of this sec- will operate. Use of the appendix C cri- tion, the documentation must reflect teria meets the requirements of this the date of the employer’s determina- provision. tion of the operator’s abilities and the (E) Technical knowledge applicable make, model and configuration of to the suitability of the supporting equipment on which the operator has ground and surface to handle expected previously demonstrated competency. loads, site hazards, and site access. (7) When an employer is required to (F) This subpart, including applicable provide an operator with retraining incorporated materials. under paragraph (b)(5) of this section, (ii) The individual is able to read and the employer must re-evaluate the op- locate relevant information in the erator with respect to the subject of equipment manual and other materials the retraining. containing information referred to in (g) [Reserved] paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section. (h) Language and literacy requirements. (2) A determination through a prac- (1) Tests under this section may be ad- tical test that the individual has the ministered verbally, with answers skills necessary for safe operation of given verbally, where the operator can- the equipment, including the following: didate: (i) Ability to recognize, from visual (i) Passes a written demonstration of and auditory observation, the items literacy relevant to the work. listed in § 1926.1412(d) (shift inspection). (ii) Demonstrates the ability to use (ii) Operational and maneuvering the type of written manufacturer pro- skills. cedures applicable to the class/type of (iii) Application of load chart infor- equipment for which the candidate is mation. seeking certification. (iv) Application of safe shut-down (2) Tests under this section may be and securing procedures. administered in any language the oper- (k) Effective dates. (1) Apart from the ator candidate understands, and the evaluation and documentation require- operator’s certification documentation ments in paragraphs (a) and (f), this must note the language in which the section is effective on December 10, test was given. The operator is only 2018. permitted to operate equipment that is (2) The evaluation and documenta- furnished with materials required by tion requirements in paragraphs (a) this subpart, such as operations manu- and (f) are effective on February 7, 2019. als and load charts, that are written in [83 FR 56244, Nov. 9, 2018] the language of the certification. (i) [Reserved] § 1926.1428 Signal person qualifica- (j) Certification criteria. Certifications tions. must be based on the following: (a) The employer of the signal person (1) A determination through a writ- must ensure that each signal person ten test that: meets the Qualification Requirements (i) The individual knows the informa- (paragraph (c) of this section) prior to tion necessary for safe operation of the giving any signals. This requirement specific type of equipment the indi- must be met by using either Option (1) vidual will operate, including all of the or Option (2) of this section. following: (1) Option (1)—Third party qualified (A) The controls and operational/per- evaluator. The signal person has docu- formance characteristics. mentation from a third party qualified

714

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00724 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1430

evaluator (see Qualified Evaluator through (4) of this section through an (third party), § 1926.1401 for definition) oral or written test, and through a showing that the signal person meets practical test. the Qualification Requirements (see paragraph (c) of this section). § 1926.1429 Qualifications of mainte- (2) Option (2)—Employer’s qualified nance & repair employees. evaluator. The employer’s qualified (see (a) Maintenance, inspection and re- Qualified Evaluator (not a third party), pair personnel are permitted to operate § 1926.1401 for definition) evaluator as- the equipment only where all of the sesses the individual and determines following requirements are met: that the individual meets the Quali- (1) The operation is limited to those fication Requirements (see paragraph functions necessary to perform mainte- (c) of this section) and provides docu- nance, inspect the equipment, or verify mentation of that determination. An its performance. assessment by an employer’s qualified (2) The personnel either: evaluator under this option is not port- (i) Operate the equipment under the able—other employers are not per- direct supervision of an operator who mitted to use it to meet the require- meets the requirements of § 1926.1427 ments of this section. (Operator qualification and certifi- (3) The employer must make the doc- cation); or umentation for whichever option is (ii) Are familiar with the operation, used available at the site while the sig- limitations, characteristics and haz- nal person is employed by the em- ards associated with the type of equip- ployer. The documentation must speci- ment. fy each type of signaling (e.g. hand sig- (b) Maintenance and repair personnel nals, radio signals, etc.) for which the must meet the definition of a qualified signal person meets the requirements person with respect to the equipment of paragraph (c) of this section. and maintenance/repair tasks per- (b) If subsequent actions by the sig- formed. nal person indicate that the individual does not meet the Qualification Re- § 1926.1430 Training. quirements (see paragraph (c) of this The employer must provide training section), the employer must not allow as follows: the individual to continue working as a (a) Overhead powerlines. The employer signal person until re-training is pro- must train each employee specified in vided and a re-assessment is made in § 1926.1408(g) and § 1926.1410(m) in the accordance with paragraph (a) of this topics listed in § 1926.1408(g). section that confirms that the indi- (b) Signal persons. The employer must vidual meets the Qualification Re- train each employee who will be as- quirements. signed to work as a signal persons who (c) Qualification Requirements. Each does not meet the requirements of signal person must: § 1926.1428(c) in the areas addressed in (1) Know and understand the type of that paragraph. signals used. If hand signals are used, (c) Operators. (1) The employer must the signal person must know and un- train each operator in accordance with derstand the Standard Method for hand § 1926.1427(a) and (b), on the safe oper- signals. ation of the equipment the operator (2) Be competent in the application will be using. of the type of signals used. (2) The employer must train each op- (3) Have a basic understanding of erator covered under the exception of equipment operation and limitations, § 1926.1427(a)(2) on the safe operation of including the crane dynamics involved the equipment the operator will be in swinging and stopping loads and using. boom deflection from hoisting loads. (3) The employer must train each op- (4) Know and understand the relevant erator of the equipment covered by this requirements of §§ 1926.1419 through subpart in the following practices: 1926.1422 and 1926.1428. (i) On friction equipment, whenever (5) Demonstrate that he/she meets moving a boom off a support, first raise the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) the boom a short distance (sufficient to

715

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00725 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1431 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

take the load of the boom) to deter- tion, use, and dismantling of conven- mine if the boom hoist brake needs to tional means of reaching the work be adjusted. On other types of equip- area, such as a personnel hoist, ladder, ment with a boom, the same practice is stairway, aerial lift, elevating work applicable, except that typically there platform, or scaffold, would be more is no means of adjusting the brake; if hazardous, or is not possible because of the brake does not hold, a repair is nec- the project’s structural design or work- essary. See § 1926.1417(f) and (j) for addi- site conditions. This paragraph does tional requirements. not apply to work covered by subpart R (ii) Where available, the manufactur- (Steel Erection) of this part and also er’s emergency procedures for halting does not apply to routine personnel ac- unintended equipment movement. cess to an underground worksite via (d) Competent persons and qualified shaft as covered by § 1926.800 (Under- persons. The employer must train each ground Construction) of this part. competent person and each qualified (b) Use of personnel platform. (1) When person regarding the requirements of using equipment to hoist employees, this subpart applicable to their respec- the employees must be in a personnel tive roles. platform that meets the requirements (e) Crush/pinch points. The employer of paragraph (e) of this section. must train each employee who works (2) Exceptions: A personnel platform with the equipment to keep clear of is not required for hoisting employees: holes, and crush/pinch points and the (i) Into and out of drill shafts that hazards addressed in § 1926.1424 (Work are up to and including 8 feet in diame- area control). ter (see paragraph (o) of this section for (f) Tag-out. The employer must train requirements for hoisting these em- each operator and each additional employees). ployee authorized to start/energize (ii) In pile driving operations (see equipment or operate equipment con- paragraph (p) of this section for re- trols (such as maintenance and repair quirements for hoisting these employ- employees), in the tag-out and start-up ees). procedures in §§ 1926.1417(f) and (g). (iii) Solely for transfer to or from a (g) Training administration. (1) The marine worksite in a marine-hoisted employer must evaluate each employee personnel transfer device (see para- required to be trained under this sub- graph (r) of this section for require- part to confirm that the employee un- ments for hoisting these employees). derstands the information provided in (iv) In storage-tank (steel or con- the training. crete), shaft and chimney operations (2) The employer must provide re- (see paragraph (s) of this section for refresher training in relevant topics for quirements for hoisting these employ- each employee when, based on the con- ees). duct of the employee or an evaluation (c) Equipment set-up. (1) The equip- of the employee’s knowledge, there is ment must be uniformly level, within an indication that retraining is nec- one percent of level grade, and located essary. on footing that a qualified person has (3) Whenever training is required determined to be sufficiently firm and under subpart CC, the employer must stable. provide the training at no cost to the (2) Equipment with outriggers or sta- employee. bilizers must have them all extended [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 83 and locked. The amount of extension FR 56247, Nov. 9, 2018] must be the same for all outriggers and stabilizers and in accordance with § 1926.1431 Hoisting personnel. manufacturer procedures and load The requirements of this section are charts. supplemental to the other require- (d) Equipment criteria—(1) Capacity: ments in this subpart and apply when Use of suspended personnel platforms. one or more employees are hoisted. The total load (with the platform load- (a) The use of equipment to hoist em- ed, including the hook, load line and ployees is prohibited except where the rigging) must not exceed 50 percent of employer demonstrates that the erec- the rated capacity for the radius and

716

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00726 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1431

configuration of the equipment, except section specifies how to prevent two- during proof testing. blocking during such operations. (2) Capacity: Use of boom-attached per- (vi) Controlled load lowering. The load sonnel platforms. The total weight of line hoist drum must have a system, the loaded personnel platform must not other than the load line hoist brake, exceed 50 percent of the rated capacity which regulates the lowering rate of for the radius and configuration of the speed of the hoist mechanism. This sys- equipment (except during proof test- tem or device must be used when hoisting). ing personnel. (3) Capacity: Hoisting personnel with- NOTE: Free fall of the load line hoist is pro- out a personnel platform. When hoisting hibited (see § 1926.1426(d); the use of equip- personnel without a personnel platform ment in which the boom hoist mechanism pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this sec- can free fall is also prohibited (see tion, the total load (including the § 1926.1426(a)(1). hook, load line, rigging and any other (vii) Proper operation required. Per- equipment that imposes a load) must sonnel hoisting operations must not not exceed 50 percent of the rated ca- begin unless the devices listed in this pacity for the radius and configuration section are in proper working order. If of the equipment, except during proof a device stops working properly during testing. such operations, the operator must (4) When the occupied personnel plat- safely stop operations. Personnel hoist- form is in a stationary working posi- ing operations must not resume until tion, the load and boom hoist brakes, the device is again working properly. swing brakes, and operator actuated Alternative measures are not per- secondary braking and locking features mitted. (See § 1926.1417 for tag-out and (such as pawls or dogs) or automatic related requirements.) secondary brakes must be engaged. (6) Direct attachment of a personnel (5) Devices. (i) Equipment (except for platform to a luffing jib is prohibited. derricks and articulating cranes) with (e) Personnel platform criteria. (1) A a variable angle boom must be qualified person familiar with struc- equipped with all of the following: tural design must design the personnel (A) A boom angle indicator, readily platform and attachment/suspension visible to the operator, and system used for hoisting personnel. (B) A boom hoist limiting device. (2) The system used to connect the (ii) Articulating cranes must be personnel platform to the equipment equipped with a properly functioning must allow the platform to remain automatic overload protection device. within 10 degrees of level, regardless of (iii) Equipment with a luffing jib boom angle. must be equipped with: (3) The suspension system must be (A) A jib angle indicator, readily visi- designed to minimize tipping of the ble to the operator, and. platform due to movement of employ- (B) A jib hoist limiting device. ees occupying the platform. (iv) Equipment with telescoping (4) The personnel platform itself (ex- booms must be equipped with a device cluding the guardrail system and per- to indicate the boom’s extended length sonal fall arrest system anchorages), clearly to the operator, or must have must be capable of supporting, without measuring marks on the boom. failure, its own weight and at least five (v) Anti two-block. A device which times the maximum intended load. automatically prevents damage and (5) All welding of the personnel plat- load failure from contact between the form and its components must be per- load block, overhaul ball, or similar formed by a certified welder familiar component, and the boom tip (or fixed with the weld grades, types and mate- upper block or similar component) rial specified in the platform design. must be used. The device(s) must pre- (6) The personnel platform must be vent such damage/failure at all points equipped with a guardrail system where two-blocking could occur. Excep- which meets the requirements of sub- tion: This device is not required when part M of this part, and must be en- hoisting personnel in pile driving oper- closed at least from the toeboard to ations. Instead, paragraph (p)(2) of this mid-rail with either solid construction

717

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00727 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1431 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

material or expanded metal having (ii) Evenly distributed within the openings no greater than 1⁄2 inch (1.27 confines of the platform while it is sus- cm). Points to which personal fall ar- pended. rest systems are attached must meet (4) The number of employees occu- the anchorage requirements in subpart pying the personnel platform must not M of this part. exceed the maximum number the plat- (7) A grab rail must be installed inform was designed to hold or the num- side the entire perimeter of the per- ber required to perform the work, sonnel platform except for access whichever is less. gates/doors. (g) Attachment and rigging—(1) Hooks (8) Access gates/doors. If installed, ac- and other detachable devices. (i) Hooks cess gates/doors of all types (including used in the connection between the swinging, sliding, folding, or other hoist line and the personnel platform types) must: (including hooks on overhaul ball as- (i) Not swing outward. If due to the semblies, lower load blocks, bridle legs, size of the personnel platform, such as or other attachment assemblies or a 1-person platform, it is infeasible for components) must be: the door to swing inward and allow safe (A) Of a type that can be closed and entry for the platform occupant, then locked, eliminating the throat opening. the access gate/door may swing out- (B) Closed and locked when attached. ward. (ii) Shackles used in place of hooks (ii) Be equipped with a device that must be of the alloy anchor type, with prevents accidental opening. either: (9) Headroom must be sufficient to (A) A bolt, nut and retaining pin, in allow employees to stand upright in place; or the platform. (B) Of the screw type, with the screw (10) In addition to the use of hard pin secured from accidental removal. hats, employees must be protected by (iii) Where other detachable devices overhead protection on the personnel are used, they must be of the type that platform when employees are exposed can be closed and locked to the same to falling objects. The platform over- extent as the devices addressed in para- head protection must not obscure the graphs (g)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section. view of the operator or platform occu- Such devices must be closed and locked pants (such as wire mesh that has up to when attached. 1⁄2 inch openings), unless full protection (2) Rope bridle. When a rope bridle is is necessary. used to suspend the personnel plat- (11) All edges exposed to employee form, each bridle leg must be con- contact must be smooth enough to pre- nected to a master link or shackle (see vent injury. paragraph (g)(1) of this section) in a (12) The weight of the platform and manner that ensures that the load is its rated capacity must be conspicu- evenly divided among the bridle legs. ously posted on the platform with a (3) Rigging hardware (including wire plate or other permanent marking. rope, shackles, rings, master links, and (f) Personnel platform loading. (1) The other rigging hardware) and hooks personnel platform must not be loaded must be capable of supporting, without in excess of its rated capacity. failure, at least five times the max- (2) Use. (i) Personnel platforms must imum intended load applied or trans- be used only for employees, their tools, mitted to that component. Where rota- and the materials necessary to do their tion resistant rope is used, the slings work. Platforms must not be used to must be capable of supporting without hoist materials or tools when not failure at least ten times the maximum hoisting personnel. intended load. (ii) Exception: Materials and tools to (4) Eyes in wire rope slings must be be used during the lift, if secured and fabricated with thimbles. distributed in accordance with para- (5) Bridles and associated rigging for graph (f)(3) of this section may be in suspending the personnel platform the platform for trial lifts. must be used only for the platform and (3) Materials and tools must be: the necessary employees, their tools (i) Secured to prevent displacement. and materials necessary to do their

718

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00728 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1431

work. The bridles and associated rig- (ii) Confirm that, upon the comple- ging must not have been used for any tion of the trial lift process, the test purpose other than hoisting personnel. weight has been removed. (h) Trial lift and inspection. (1) A trial (5) Immediately prior to each lift: lift with the unoccupied personnel plat- (i) The platform must be hoisted a form loaded at least to the anticipated few inches with the personnel and ma- liftweight must be made from ground terials/tools on board and inspected by level, or any other location where em- a competent person to ensure that it is ployees will enter the platform, to each secure and properly balanced. location at which the platform is to be (ii) The following conditions must be hoisted and positioned. Where there is determined by a competent person to more than one location to be reached exist before the lift of personnel pro- from a single set-up position, either in- ceeds: dividual trial lifts for each location, or (A) Hoist ropes must be free of defi- a single trial lift, in which the plat- ciencies in accordance with form is moved sequentially to each lo- § 1926.1413(a). cation, must be performed; the method (B) Multiple part lines must not be selected must be the same as the meth- twisted around each other. od that will be used to hoist the per- (C) The primary attachment must be sonnel. centered over the platform. (2) The trial lift must be performed (D) If the load rope is slack, the immediately prior to each shift in hoisting system must be inspected to which personnel will be hoisted. In ad- ensure that all ropes are properly seat- dition, the trial lift must be repeated ed on drums and in sheaves. prior to hoisting employees in each of (6) Any condition found during the the following circumstances: trial lift and subsequent inspection(s) (i) The equipment is moved and set that fails to meet a requirement of this up in a new location or returned to a standard or otherwise creates a safety previously used location. hazard must be corrected before hoist- (ii) The lift route is changed, unless ing personnel. (See § 1926.1417 for tag- the competent person determines that out and related requirements.) the new route presents no new factors (i) [Reserved] affecting safety. (j) Proof testing. (1) At each jobsite, (3) The competent person must deter- prior to hoisting employees on the per- mine that: sonnel platform, and after any repair (i) Safety devices and operational or modification, the platform and rig- aids required by this section are acti- ging must be proof tested to 125 per- vated and functioning properly. Other cent of the platform’s rated capacity. safety devices and operational aids The proof test may be done concur- must meet the requirements of rently with the trial lift. § 1926.1415 and § 1926.1416. (2) The platform must be lowered by (ii) Nothing interferes with the controlled load lowering, braked, and equipment or the personnel platform in held in a suspended position for a min- the course of the trial lift. imum of five minutes with the test (iii) The lift will not exceed 50 per- load evenly distributed on the plat- cent of the equipment’s rated capacity form. at any time during the lift. (3) After proof testing, a competent (iv) The load radius to be used during person must inspect the platform and the lift has been accurately deter- rigging to determine if the test has mined. been passed. If any deficiencies are (4) Immediately after the trial lift, found that pose a safety hazard, the the competent person must: platform and rigging must not be used (i) Conduct a visual inspection of the to hoist personnel unless the defi- equipment, base support or ground, and ciencies are corrected, the test is re- personnel platform, to determine peated, and a competent person deter- whether the trial lift has exposed any mines that the test has been passed. defect or problem or produced any ad- (See § 1926.1417 for tag-out and related verse effect. requirements.)

719

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00729 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1431 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(4) Personnel hoisting must not be equipment, and must be on site and in conducted until the competent person view of the equipment. determines that the platform and rig- (iii) The platform operating manual ging have successfully passed the proof must be in the platform or on the test. equipment. (k) Work practices. (1) Hoisting of the (8) Environmental conditions—(i) Wind. personnel platform must be performed When wind speed (sustained or gusts) in a slow, controlled, cautious manner, exceeds 20 mph at the personnel plat- with no sudden movements of the form, a qualified person must deter- equipment or the platform. mine if, in light of the wind conditions, (2) Platform occupants must: it is not safe to lift personnel. If it is (i) Keep all parts of the body inside not, the lifting operation must not the platform during raising, lowering, begin (or, if already in progress, must and horizontal movement. This provi- be terminated). sion does not apply to an occupant of (ii) Other weather and environmental the platform when necessary to posi- conditions. A qualified person must de- tion the platform or while performing termine if, in light of indications of the duties of a signal person. dangerous weather conditions, or other (ii) Not stand, sit on, or work from impending or existing danger, it is not the top or intermediate rail or safe to lift personnel. If it is not, the toeboard, or use any other means/de- lifting operation must not begin (or, if vice to raise their working height. already in progress, must be termi- (iii) Not pull the platform out of nated). plumb in relation to the hoisting (9) Employees being hoisted must re- equipment. main in direct communication with the (3) Before employees exit or enter a signal person (where used), or the oper- hoisted personnel platform that is not ator. landed, the platform must be secured (10) Fall protection. (i) Except over to the structure where the work is to water, employees occupying the per- be performed, unless the employer can sonnel platform must be provided and demonstrate that securing to the use a personal fall arrest system. The structure would create a greater haz- system must be attached to a struc- ard. tural member within the personnel (4) If the platform is tied to the platform. When working over or near structure, the operator must not move water, the requirements of § 1926.106 the platform until the operator re- apply. ceives confirmation that it is freely (ii) The fall arrest system, including suspended. the attachment point (anchorage) used (5) Tag lines must be used when nec- to comply with paragraph (i) of this essary to control the platform. section, must meet the requirements in (6) Platforms without controls. Where § 1926.502. the platform is not equipped with con- (11) Other load lines. (i) No lifts must trols, the equipment operator must re- be made on any other of the equip- main at the equipment controls, on ment’s load lines while personnel are site, and in view of the equipment, at being hoisted, except in pile driving op- all times while the platform is occu- erations. pied. (ii) Factory-produced boom-mounted (7) Platforms with controls. Where the personnel platforms that incorporate a platform is equipped with controls, all winch as original equipment. Loads are of the following must be met at all permitted to be hoisted by such a times while the platform is occupied: winch while employees occupy the per- (i) The occupant using the controls in sonnel platform only where the load on the platform must be a qualified person the winch line does not exceed 500 with respect to their use, including the pounds and does not exceed the rated safe limitations of the equipment and capacity of the winch and platform. hazards associated with its operation. (12) Traveling—equipment other than (ii) The equipment operator must be derricks. (i) Hoisting of employees while at a set of equipment controls that in- the equipment is traveling is prohib- clude boom and swing functions of the ited, except for:

720

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00730 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1431

(A) Equipment that travels on fixed (o) Hoisting personnel in drill shafts. rails; or When hoisting employees into and out (B) Where the employer demonstrates of drill shafts that are up to and in- that there is no less hazardous way to cluding 8 feet in diameter, all of the perform the work. following requirements must be met: (C) This exception does not apply to (1) The employee must be in either a rubber-tired equipment. personnel platform or on a boatswain’s (ii) Where employees are hoisted chair. while the equipment is traveling, all of (2) If using a personnel platform, the following criteria must be met: paragraphs (a) through (n) of this sec- (A) Equipment travel must be re- tion apply. stricted to a fixed track or runway. (3) If using a boatswain’s chair: (B) Where a runway is used, it must (i) The following paragraphs of this be a firm, level surface designed, pre- section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3), pared and designated as a path of trav- (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i), el for the weight and configuration of (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), the equipment being used to lift and (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), (n). Where the travel with the personnel platform. An terms ‘‘personnel platform’’ or ‘‘plat- existing surface may be used as long as form’’ are used in these paragraphs, it meets these criteria. substitute them with ‘‘boatswain’s (C) Equipment travel must be limited chair.’’ to boom length. (ii) A signal person must be stationed at the shaft opening. (D) The boom must be parallel to the (iii) The employee must be hoisted in direction of travel, except where it is a slow, controlled descent and ascent. safer to do otherwise. (iv) The employee must use personal (E) A complete trial run must be per- fall protection equipment, including a formed to test the route of travel be- full body harness, attached inde- fore employees are allowed to occupy pendent of the crane/derrick. the platform. This trial run can be per- (v) The fall protection equipment formed at the same time as the trial must meet the applicable requirements lift required by paragraph (h) of this in § 1926.502. section which tests the lift route. (vi) The boatswain’s chair itself (ex- (13) Traveling—derricks. Derricks are cluding the personal fall arrest system prohibited from traveling while per- anchorages), must be capable of sup- sonnel are hoisted. porting, without failure, its own (l) [Reserved] weight and at least five times the max- (m) Pre-lift meeting. A pre-lift meet- imum intended load. ing must be: (vii) No more than one person must (1) Held to review the applicable re- be hoisted at a time. quirements of this section and the pro- (p) Hoisting personnel for pile driving cedures that will be followed. operations. When hoisting an employee (2) Attended by the equipment oper- in pile driving operations, the fol- ator, signal person (if used for the lift), lowing requirements must be met: employees to be hoisted, and the per- (1) The employee must be in a person responsible for the task to be personnel platform or boatswain’s chair. formed. (2) For lattice boom cranes: Clearly (3) Held prior to the trial lift at each mark the cable (so that it can easily be new work location, and must be re- seen by the operator) at a point that peated for any employees newly as- will give the operator sufficient time signed to the operation. to stop the hoist to prevent two-block- (n) Hoisting personnel near power lines. ing, or use a spotter who is in direct Hoisting personnel within 20 feet of a communication with the operator to power line that is up to 350 kV, and inform the operator when this point is hoisting personnel within 50 feet of a reached. For telescopic boom cranes: power line that is over 350 kV, is pro- Clearly mark the cable (so that it can hibited, except for work covered by be easily seen by the operator) at a subpart V of this part (Power Trans- point that will give the operator suffi- mission and Distribution). cient time to stop the hoist to prevent

721

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00731 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1431 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

two-blocking, and use a spotter who is (ii) The transfer device must be used in direct communication with the oper- only for transferring workers. ator to inform the operator when this (iii) The number of workers occu- point is reached. pying the transfer device must not ex- (3) If using a personnel platform, ceed the maximum number it was de- paragraphs (b) through (n) of this sec- signed to hold. tion apply. (iv) Each employee must wear a U.S. (4) If using a boatswain’s chair: Coast Guard personal flotation device (i) The following paragraphs of this approved for industrial use. section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3), (s) Hoisting personnel for storage-tank (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i), (steel or concrete), shaft and chimney op- (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (j), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), erations. When hoisting an employee in (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), and (n). Where the storage tank (steel or concrete), shaft terms ‘‘personnel platform’’ or ‘‘plat- and chimney operations, the following form’’ are used in these paragraphs, requirements must be met: substitute them with ‘‘boatswains (1) The employee must be in a per- chair.’’ sonnel platform except when the em- (ii) The employee must be hoisted in ployer can demonstrate that use of a a slow, controlled descent and ascent. personnel platform is infeasible; in (iii) The employee must use personal such a case, a boatswain’s chair must fall protection equipment, including a be used. full body harness, independently at- (2) If using a personnel platform, tached to the lower load block or over- paragraphs (a) through (n) of this sec- haul ball. tion apply. (iv) The fall protection equipment (3) If using a boatswain’s chair: must meet the applicable requirements (i) The following paragraphs of this in § 1926.502. section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3), (v) The boatswain’s chair itself (ex- (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i), cluding the personal fall arrest system (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), anchorages), must be capable of sup- (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), (n). Where the porting, without failure, its own terms ‘‘personnel platform’’ or ‘‘plat- weight and at least five times the max- form’’ are used in these paragraphs, imum intended load. substitute them with ‘‘boatswains (vi) No more than one person must be chair.’’ hoisted at a time. (ii) The employee must be hoisted in (q) [Reserved] a slow, controlled descent and ascent. (r) Hoisting personnel for marine trans- (iii) The employee must use personal fer. When hoisting employees solely for fall protection equipment, including a transfer to or from a marine worksite, full body harness, attached inde- the following requirements must be pendent of the crane/derrick. When met: there is no adequate structure for at- (1) The employee must be in either a tachment of personal fall arrest equip- personnel platform or a marine-hoisted ment as required in § 1926.502(d)(15), the personnel transfer device. attachment must be to the lower load (2) If using a personnel platform, block or overhaul ball. paragraphs (a) through (n) of this sec- (iv) The fall protection equipment tion apply. must meet the applicable requirements (3) If using a marine-hoisted per- in § 1926.502. sonnel transfer device: (i) The following paragraphs of this (v) The boatswain’s chair itself (ex- section apply: (a), (c)(2), (d)(1), (d)(3), cluding the personal fall arrest system (d)(4), (e)(1) through (5), (e)(12), (f)(1), anchorages), must be capable of sup- (g), (h), (j), (k)(1), (k)(8), (k)(9), porting, without failure, its own (k)(10)(ii), (k)(11)(i), (k)(12), (m), and weight and at least five times the max- (n). Where the terms ‘‘personnel plat- imum intended load. form’’ or ‘‘platform’’ are used in these (vi) No more than one person must be paragraphs, substitute them with hoisted at a time. ‘‘marine-hoisted personnel transfer de- [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 85 vice.’’ FR 8746, Feb. 18, 2020]

722

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00732 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1433

§ 1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick (3) Section 5–1.2 (‘‘Stability (Back- lifts—supplemental requirements. ward and Forward)’’). (a) Plan development. Before begin- (4) In section 5–1.3.1 (‘‘Boom Hoist ning a crane/derrick operation in which Mechanism’’), paragraphs (a), (b)(1) and more than one crane/derrick will be (b)(2), except that when using rotation supporting the load, the operation resistant rope, § 1926.1414(c)(4)(ii)(A) ap- must be planned. The planning must plies. meet the following requirements: (5) In section 5–1.3.2 (‘‘Load Hoist (1) The plan must be developed by a Mechanism’’), paragraphs (a)(2) qualified person. through (a)(4) (including subpara- (2) The plan must be designed to en- graphs), (b) (including subparagraphs), sure that the requirements of this sub- (c) (first sentence only) and (d). part are met. (6) Section 5–1.3.3 (‘‘Telescoping (3) Where the qualified person deter- Boom’’). mines that engineering expertise is (7) Section 5–1.4 (‘‘Swing Mecha- needed for the planning, the employer nism’’). must ensure that it is provided. (8) In section 5–1.5 (‘‘Crane Travel’’), (b) Plan implementation. (1) The mul- all provisions except 5–1.5.3(d). tiple-crane/derrick lift must be di- (9) In section 5–1.6 (‘‘Controls’’), all rected by a person who meets the cri- provisions except 5–1.6.1 (c). teria for both a competent person and (10) Section 5–1.7.4 (‘‘Sheaves’’). a qualified person, or by a competent (11) Section 5–1.7.5 (‘‘Sheave sizes’’). person who is assisted by one or more (12) In section 5–1.9.1 (‘‘Booms’’), qualified persons (lift director). paragraph (f). (2) The lift director must review the (13) Section 5–1.9.3 (‘‘Outriggers’’). plan in a meeting with all workers who (14) Section 5–1.9.4 (‘‘Locomotive will be involved with the operation. Crane Equipment’’). (15) Section 5–1.9.7 (‘‘Clutch and § 1926.1433 Design, construction and Brake Protection’’). testing. (16) In section 5–1.9.11 (‘‘Miscella- The following requirements apply to neous equipment’’), paragraphs (a), (c), equipment that has a manufacturer- (e), and (f). rated hoisting/lifting capacity of more (c) Prototype testing: mobile (includ- than 2,000 pounds. ing crawler and truck) and locomotive (a) Crawler, truck and locomotive cranes manufactured on or after No- cranes manufactured prior to Novem- vember 8, 2010 must meet the prototype ber 8, 2010 must meet the applicable re- testing requirements in Test Option A quirements for design, construction, or Test Option B of this section. Tower and testing as prescribed in ANSI cranes manufactured on or after No- B30.5–1968 (incorporated by reference, vember 8, 2010 must meet the prototype see § 1926.6), PCSA Std. No. 2 (1968) (in- testing requirements in BS EN corporated by reference, see § 1926.6), 14439:2006 (incorporated by reference, the requirements in paragraph (b) of see § 1926.6). this section, or the applicable DIN standards that were in effect at the NOTE: Prototype testing of crawler, loco- time of manufacture. motive and truck cranes manufactured prior (b) Mobile (including crawler and to November 8, 2010 must conform to paragraph (a) of this section. truck) and locomotive cranes manufactured on or after November 8, 2010 must (1) Test Option A. (i) The following ap- meet the following portions of ASME plies to equipment with cantilevered B30.5–2004 (incorporated by reference, booms (such as hydraulic boom cranes): see § 1926.6) as applicable: All the tests listed in SAE J1063 (Nov. (1) In section 5–1.1.1 (‘‘Load Ratings— 1993) Table 1 (incorporated by ref- Where Stability Governs Lifting Per- erence, see § 1926.6) must be performed formance’’), paragraphs (a)–(d) (includ- to load all critical structural elements ing subparagraphs). to their respective limits. All the (2) In section 5–1.1.2 (‘‘Load Ratings— strength margins listed in SAE J1063 Where Structural Competence Governs (Nov. 1993) Table 2 (incorporated by ref- Lifting Performance’’), paragraph (b). erence, see § 1926.6) must be met.

723

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00733 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1433 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(ii) The following applies to equip- (A) At all manufacturer approved opment with pendant supported lattice erating radii, boom angles, work areas, booms: All the tests listed in SAE J987 boom lengths and configurations, jib (Jun. 2003) Table 1 (incorporated by ref- lengths and angles (or offset). erence, see § 1926.6) must be performed (B) Alternate ratings for use and non- to load all critical structural elements use of option equipment which affects to their respective limits. All the rated capacities, such as outriggers, strength margins listed in SAE J987 stabilizers, and extra counterweights. (Jun. 2003) Table 2 (incorporated by ref- (ii) A work area chart for which ca- erence, see § 1926.6) must be met. pacities are listed in the load chart. (2) Test Option B. The testing and (NOTE: An example of this type of chart verification requirements of BS EN is in ASME B30.5–2004, section 5–1.1.3, 13000:2004 (incorporated by reference, Figure 11). see § 1926.6) must be met. In applying (iii) The work area figure and load BS EN 13000:2004, the following addi- chart must clearly indicate the areas tional requirements must be met: where no load is to be handled. (i) The following applies to equip- (iv) Recommended reeving for the ment with cantilevered booms (such as hoist lines must be shown. hydraulic boom cranes): The analysis (v) Recommended parts of hoist methodology (computer modeling) reeving, size, and type of wire rope for must demonstrate that all load cases various equipment loads. listed in SAE J1063 (Nov. 1993) (incor- (vi) Recommended boom hoist porated by reference, see § 1926.6) meet reeving diagram, where applicable; the strength margins listed in SAE size, type and length of wire rope. J1063 (Nov. 1993) Table 2. (vii) Tire pressure (where applicable). (viii) Caution or warnings relative to (ii) The following applies to equip- limitations on equipment and oper- ment with pendant supported lattice ating procedures, including an indica- booms: The analysis methodology tion of the least stable direction. (computer modeling) must dem- (ix) Position of the gantry and re- onstrate that all load cases listed in quirements for intermediate boom sus- SAE J987 (Jun. 2003) (incorporated by pension (where applicable). reference, see § 1926.6) meet the (x) Instructions for boom erection strength margins listed in SAE J987 and conditions under which the boom, (Jun. 2003) Table 2. or boom and jib combinations, may be (iii) Analysis verification. The physical raised or lowered. testing requirements under SAE J1063 (xi) Whether the hoist holding mech- (Nov. 1993) (incorporated by reference, anism is automatically or manually see § 1926.6) and SAE J987 (Jun. 2003) (in- controlled, whether free fall is avail- corporated by reference, see § 1926.6) able, or any combination of these. must be met unless the reliability of (xii) The maximum telescopic travel the analysis methodology (computer length of each boom telescopic section. modeling) has been demonstrated by a (xiii) Whether sections are telescoped documented history of verification manually or with power. through strain gauge measuring or (xiv) The sequence and procedure for strain gauge measuring in combination extending and retracting the telescopic with other physical testing. boom section. (d) All equipment covered by this (xv) Maximum loads permitted dur- subpart must meet the following re- ing the boom extending operation, and quirements: any limiting conditions or cautions. (1) Rated capacity and related informa- (xvi) Hydraulic relief valve settings tion. The information available in the specified by the manufacturer. cab (see § 1926.1417(c)) regarding ‘‘rated (2) Load hooks (including latched and capacity’’ and related information unlatched types), ball assemblies and must include, at a minimum, the fol- load blocks must be of sufficient lowing information: weight to overhaul the line from the (i) A complete range of the manufac- highest hook position for boom or turer’s equipment rated capacities, as boom and jib lengths and the number follows: of parts of the line in use.

724

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00734 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1433

(3) Hook and ball assemblies and load Windows with sections designed to be blocks must be marked with their opened must be designed so that they rated capacity and weight. can be secured to prevent inadvertent (4) Latching hooks. (i) Hooks must be closure. equipped with latches, except where (C) Windows must be of safety glass the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) or material with similar optical and of this section are met. safety properties, that introduce no (ii) Hooks without latches, or with visible distortion or otherwise obscure latches removed or disabled, must not visibility that interferes with the safe be used unless: operation of the equipment. (A) A qualified person has determined (iv) A clear passageway must be pro- that it is safer to hoist and place the vided from the operator’s station to an load without latches (or with the exit door on the operator’s side. latches removed/tied-back). (v) Areas of the cab roof that serve as (B) Routes for the loads are pre- a workstation for rigging, maintenance planned to ensure that no employee is or other equipment-related tasks must required to work in the fall zone except be capable of supporting 250 pounds for employees necessary for the hook- without permanent distortion. ing or unhooking of the load. (8) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, (iii) The latch must close the throat sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, opening and be designed to retain chains, and other parts or components slings or other lifting devices/acces- that reciprocate, rotate or otherwise sories in the hook when the rigging ap- move must be guarded where contact paratus is slack. by employees (except for maintenance (5) Posted warnings. Posted warnings and repair employees) is possible in the required by this subpart as well as performance of normal duties. those originally supplied with the (9) All exhaust pipes, turbochargers, equipment by the manufacturer must and charge air coolers must be insu- be maintained in legible condition. lated or guarded where contact by em- (6) An accessible fire extinguisher ployees (except for maintenance and must be on the equipment. repair employees) is possible in the (7) Cabs. Equipment with cabs must performance of normal duties. meet the following requirements: (10) Hydraulic and pneumatic lines (i) Cabs must be designed with a form must be protected from damage to the of adjustable ventilation and method extent feasible. for clearing the windshield for main- (11) The equipment must be designed taining visibility and air circulation. so that exhaust fumes are not dis- Examples of means for adjustable ven- charged in the cab and are discharged tilation include air conditioner or win- in a direction away from the operator. dow that can be opened (for ventilation (12) Friction mechanisms. Where fric- and air circulation); examples of means tion mechanisms (such as brakes and for maintaining visibility include heat- clutches) are used to control the boom er (for preventing windshield icing), de- hoist or load line hoist, they must be: froster, fan, windshield wiper. (i) Of a size and thermal capacity suf- (ii) Cab doors (swinging, sliding) ficient to control all rated loads with must be designed to prevent inad- the minimum recommended reeving. vertent opening or closing while trav- (ii) Adjustable to permit compensa- eling or operating the machine. Swing- tion for lining wear to maintain proper ing doors adjacent to the operator operation. must open outward. Sliding operator (13) Hydraulic load hoists. Hydraulic doors must open rearward. drums must have an integrally mount- (iii) Windows. ed holding device or internal static (A) The cab must have windows in brake to prevent load hoist movement front and on both sides of the operator. in the event of hydraulic failure. Forward vertical visibility must be suf- (e) The employer’s obligations under ficient to give the operator a view of paragraphs (a) through (c) and (d)(7) the boom point at all times. through (13) of this section are met (B) Windows may have sections de- where the equipment has not changed signed to be opened or readily removed. (except in accordance with § 1926.1434

725

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00735 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1434 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(Equipment modifications)) and it can posal within 120 days of the date it was refer to documentation from the manu- provided the detailed description of the facturer showing that the equipment proposed modification/addition, and has been designed, constructed and the requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i) tested in accordance with those para- and (ii) of this section are met. graphs. (5) Multiple manufacturers of equipment designed for use on marine work § 1926.1434 Equipment modifications. sites. The equipment is designed for ma- (a) Modifications or additions which rine work sites, contains major struc- affect the capacity or safe operation of tural components from more than one the equipment are prohibited except manufacturer, and the requirements of where the requirements of paragraphs paragraphs (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this sec- (a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), or (a)(5) of tion are met. this section are met. (b) Modifications or additions which (1) Manufacturer review and approval. affect the capacity or safe operation of (i) The manufacturer approves the the equipment are prohibited where the modifications/additions in writing. manufacturer, after a review of the (ii) The load charts, procedures, in- technical safety merits of the proposed struction manuals and instruction modification/addition, rejects the pro- plates/tags/decals are modified as nec- posal and explains the reasons for the essary to accord with the modification/ rejection in a written response. If the addition. manufacturer rejects the proposal but (iii) The original safety factor of the does not explain the reasons for the re- equipment is not reduced. jection in writing, the employer may (2) Manufacturer refusal to review re- treat this as a manufacturer refusal to quest. The manufacturer is provided a review the request under paragraph detailed description of the proposed (a)(2) of this section. modification/addition, is asked to ap- (c) The provisions in paragraphs (a) prove the modification/addition, but it and (b) of this section do not apply to declines to review the technical merits modifications made or approved by the of the proposal or fails, within 30 days, U.S. military. to acknowledge the request or initiate the review, and all of the following are § 1926.1435 Tower cranes. met: (i) A registered professional engineer (a) This section contains supple- who is a qualified person with respect mental requirements for tower cranes; to the equipment involved: all sections of this subpart apply to (A) Approves the modification/addi- tower cranes unless specified other- tion and specifies the equipment con- wise. figurations to which that approval ap- (b) Erecting, climbing and dismantling. plies, and (1) Section 1926.1403 (Assembly/Dis- (B) Modifies load charts, procedures, assembly—selection of manufacturer instruction manuals and instruction or employer procedures), § 1926.1404 (As- plates/tags/decals as necessary to ac- sembly/Disassembly—general require- cord with the modification/addition. ments (applies to all assembly and dis- (ii) The original safety factor of the assembly operations)), § 1926.1405 (Dis- equipment is not reduced. assembly—additional requirements for (3) Unavailable manufacturer. The dismantling of booms and jibs (applies manufacturer is unavailable and the to both the use of manufacturer proce- requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i) dures and employer procedures)), and and (ii) of this section are met. § 1926.1406 (Assembly/Disassembly—em- (4) Manufacturer does not complete the ployer procedures—general require- review within 120 days of the request. The ments), apply to tower cranes (except manufacturer is provided a detailed de- as otherwise specified), except that the scription of the proposed modification/ term ‘‘assembly/disassembly’’ is re- addition, is asked to approve the modi- placed by ‘‘erecting, climbing and dis- fication/addition, agrees to review the mantling,’’ and the term ‘‘dis- technical merits of the proposal, but assembly’’ is replaced by ‘‘disman- fails to complete the review of the pro- tling.’’

726

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00736 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1435

(2) Dangerous areas (self-erecting tower (i) Comply with all manufacturer cranes). In addition to the requirements prohibitions. in § 1926.1404(e), for self-erecting tower (ii) Have a registered professional en- cranes, the following applies: Employ- gineer verify that the host structure is ees must not be in or under the tower, strong enough to sustain the forces im- jib, or rotating portion of the crane posed through the braces, brace an- during erecting, climbing and disman- chorages and supporting floors. tling operations until the crane is se- (8) Counterweight/ballast. (i) Equip- cured in a locked position and the com- ment must not be erected, dismantled petent person in charge indicates it is or operated without the amount and safe to enter this area, unless the man- position of counterweight and/or bal- ufacturer’s instructions direct other- last in place as specified by the manu- wise and only the necessary personnel facturer or a registered professional en- are permitted in this area. gineer familiar with the equipment. (3) Foundations and structural sup- (ii) The maximum counterweight ports. Tower crane foundations and and/or ballast specified by the manu- structural supports (including both the facturer or registered professional en- portions of the structure used for sup- gineer familiar with the equipment port and the means of attachment) must not be exceeded. must be designed by the manufacturer (c) Signs. The size and location of or a registered professional engineer. signs installed on tower cranes must be (4) Addressing specific hazards. The rein accordance with manufacturer speci- quirements in § 1926.1404(h)(1) through fications. Where these are unavailable, (9) apply. In addition, the A/D director a registered professional engineer fa- must address the following: miliar with the type of equipment in- (i) Foundations and structural sup- volved must approve in writing the size ports. The A/D director must determine and location of any signs. that tower crane foundations and (d) Safety devices. (1) Section 1926.1415 structural supports are installed in ac- does not apply to tower cranes. cordance with their design. (2) The following safety devices are (ii) Loss of backward stability. Back- required on all tower cranes unless oth- ward stability before swinging self erwise specified: erecting cranes or cranes on traveling (i) Boom stops on luffing boom type or static undercarriages. tower cranes. (iii) Wind speed. Wind must not ex- (ii) Jib stops on luffing boom type ceed the speed recommended by the tower cranes if equipped with a jib at- manufacturer or, where manufacturer tachment. does not specify this information, the (iii) Travel rail end stops at both speed determined by a qualified person. ends of travel rail. (5) Plumb tolerance. Towers must be (iv) Travel rail clamps on all travel erected plumb to the manufacturer’s bogies. tolerance and verified by a qualified (v) Integrally mounted check valves person. Where the manufacturer does on all load supporting hydraulic cyl- not specify plumb tolerance, the crane inders. tower must be plumb to a tolerance of (vi) Hydraulic system pressure lim- at least 1:500 (approximately 1 inch in iting device. 40 feet). (vii) The following brakes, which (6) Multiple tower crane jobsites. On must automatically set in the event of jobsites where more than one fixed jib pressure loss or power failure, are re- (hammerhead) tower crane is installed, quired: the cranes must be located such that (A) A hoist brake on all hoists. no crane can come in contact with the (B) Swing brake. structure of another crane. Cranes are (C) Trolley brake. permitted to pass over one another. (D) Rail travel brake. (7) Climbing procedures. Prior to, and (viii) Deadman control or forced neu- during, all climbing procedures (includ- tral return control (hand) levers. ing inside climbing and top climbing), (ix) Emergency stop switch at the op- the employer must: erator’s station.

727

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00737 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1435 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(x) Trolley end stops must be pro- end stops. Temporary alternative meas- vided at both ends of travel of the trol- ures: ley. (A) Option A. The trolley rope must (3) Proper operation required. Oper- be marked (so it can be seen by the op- ations must not begin unless the de- erator) at a point that will give the op- vices listed in this section are in proper erator sufficient time to stop the trol- working order. If a device stops work- ley prior to the end stops. ing properly during operations, the op- (B) Option B. A spotter who is in di- erator must safely stop operations. The rect communication with the operator equipment must be taken out of serv- must be used when operations are con- ice, and operations must not resume ducted within 10 feet of the outer or until the device is again working prop- inner trolley end stops. erly. See § 1926.1417(f). Alternative (ii) Boom hoist limiting device. The measures are not permitted to be used. range of the boom must be limited at (e) Operational aids. (1) Section the minimum and maximum radius. 1926.1416 does not apply to tower Temporary alternative measures: Clearly cranes. mark the cable (so it can be seen by (2) The devices listed in this section the operator) at a point that will give (‘‘operational aids’’) are required on all the operator sufficient time to stop the tower cranes covered by this subpart, boom hoist within the minimum and unless otherwise specified. maximum boom radius, or use a spot- (3) Operations must not begin unless ter who is in direct communication the operational aids are in proper with the operator to inform the oper- working order, except where the em- ator when this point is reached. ployer meets the specified temporary (iii) Anti two-blocking device. The alternative measures. More protective tower crane must be equipped with a alternative measures specified by the device which automatically prevents tower crane manufacturer, if any, must damage from contact between the load be followed. See § 1926.1417(j) for addi- block, overhaul ball, or similar compo- tional requirements. nent, and the boom tip (or fixed upper (4) If an operational aid stops work- block or similar component). The de- ing properly during operations, the op- vice(s) must prevent such damage at erator must safely stop operations all points where two-blocking could until the temporary alternative meas- occur. Temporary alternative measures: ures are implemented or the device is Clearly mark the cable (so it can be again working properly. If a replace- seen by the operator) at a point that ment part is no longer available, the will give the operator sufficient time use of a substitute device that per- to stop the hoist to prevent two-block- forms the same type of function is per- ing, or use a spotter who is in direct mitted and is not considered a modi- communication with the operator to fication under § 1926.1434. inform the operator when this point is (5) Category I operational aids and al- reached. ternative measures. Operational aids (iv) Hoist drum lower limiting device. listed in this paragraph that are not Tower cranes manufactured after No- working properly must be repaired no vember 8, 2011 must be equipped with a later than 7 calendar days after the de- device that prevents the last 2 wraps of ficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- hoist cable from being spooled off the ployer documents that it has ordered drum. Temporary alternative measures: the necessary parts within 7 calendar Mark the cable (so it can be seen by days of the occurrence of the defi- the operator) at a point that will give ciency, the repair must be completed the operator sufficient time to stop the within 7 calendar days of receipt of the hoist prior to last 2 wraps of hoist parts. cable being spooled off the drum, or use (i) Trolley travel limiting device. The a spotter who is in direct communica- travel of the trolley must be restricted tion with the operator to inform the at both ends of the jib by a trolley operator when this point is reached travel limiting device to prevent the (v) Load moment limiting device. The trolley from running into the trolley tower crane must have a device that

728

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00738 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1435

prevents moment overloading. Tem- ciency, and the part is not received in porary alternative measures: A radius in- time to complete the repair in 30 cal- dicating device must be used (if the endar days, the repair must be com- tower crane is not equipped with a ra- pleted within 7 calendar days of receipt dius indicating device, the radius must of the parts. be measured to ensure the load is with- (i) Boom angle or hook radius indicator. in the rated capacity of the crane). In (A) Luffing boom tower cranes must addition, the weight of the load must have a boom angle indicator readable be determined from a source recognized from the operator’s station. by the industry (such as the load’s (B) Hammerhead tower cranes manu- manufacturer), or by a calculation factured after November 8, 2011 must method recognized by the industry have a hook radius indicator readable (such as calculating a steel beam from from the operator’s station. measured dimensions and a known per (C) Temporary alternative measures: foot weight), or by other equally reli- Hook radii or boom angle must be de- able means. This information must be termined by measuring the hook radii provided to the operator prior to the or boom angle with a measuring device. lift. (ii) Trolley travel deceleration device. (vi) Hoist line pull limiting device. The The trolley speed must be automati- capacity of the hoist must be limited cally reduced prior to the trolley to prevent overloading, including each reaching the end limit in both direc- individual gear ratio if equipped with a tions. Temporary alternative measure: multiple speed hoist transmission. The employer must post a notice in the Temporary alternative measures: The op- cab of the crane notifying the operator erator must ensure that the weight of that the trolley travel deceleration de- the load does not exceed the capacity vice is malfunctioning and instructing of the hoist (including for each indi- the operator to take special care to re- vidual gear ratio if equipped with a duce the trolley speed when approach- multiple speed hoist transmission). ing the trolley end limits. (vii) Rail travel limiting device. The (iii) Boom hoist deceleration device. travel distance in each direction must The boom speed must be automatically be limited to prevent the travel bogies reduced prior to the boom reaching the from running into the end stops or minimum or maximum radius limit. buffers. Temporary alternative measures: Temporary alternative measure: The em- A spotter who is in direct communica- ployer must post a notice in the cab of tion with the operator must be used the crane notifying the operator that when operations are conducted within the boom hoist deceleration device is 10 feet of either end of the travel rail malfunctioning and instructing the op- end stops; the spotter must inform the erator to take special care to reduce operator of the distance of the travel the boom speed when approaching the bogies from the end stops or buffers. minimum or maximum radius limits. (viii) Boom hoist drum positive locking (iv) Load hoist deceleration device. The device and control. The boom hoist load speed must be automatically re- drum must be equipped with a control duced prior to the hoist reaching the that will enable the operator to posi- upper limit. Temporary alternative meas- tively lock the boom hoist drum from ure: The employer must post a notice the cab. Temporary alternative measures: in the cab of the crane notifying the The device must be manually set when operator that the load hoist decelera- required if an electric, hydraulic or tion device is malfunctioning and in- automatic control is not functioning. structing the operator to take special (6) Category II operational aids and al- care to reduce the load speed when ap- ternative measures. Operational aids proaching the upper limits. listed in this paragraph that are not (v) Wind speed indicator. A device working properly must be repaired no must be provided to display the wind later than 30 calendar days after the speed and must be mounted above the deficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- upper rotating structure on tower ployer documents that it has ordered cranes. On self erecting cranes, it must the necessary parts within 7 calendar be mounted at or above the jib level. days of the occurrence of the defi- Temporary alternative measures: Use of

729

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00739 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1436 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

wind speed information from a properly (i) A load test using certified functioning indicating device on an- weights, or scaled weights using a cer- other tower crane on the same site, or tified scale with a current certificate a qualified person estimates the wind of calibration, must be conducted after speed. each erection. (vi) Load indicating device. Cranes (ii) The load test must be conducted manufactured after November 8, 2011 in accordance with the manufacturer’s must have a device that displays the instructions when available. Where magnitude of the load on the hook. these instructions are unavailable, the Displays that are part of load moment test must be conducted in accordance limiting devices that display the load with written load test procedures de- on the hook meet this requirement. veloped by a registered professional en- Temporary alternative measures: The gineer familiar with the type of equip- weight of the load must be determined ment involved. from a source recognized by the industry (such as the load’s manufacturer), (4) Monthly. The following additional or by a calculation method recognized items must be included: by the industry (such as calculating a (i) Tower (mast) bolts and other steel beam from measured dimensions structural bolts (for loose or dislodged and a known per foot weight), or by condition) from the base of the tower other equally reliable means. This in- crane up or, if the crane is tied to or formation must be provided to the op- braced by the structure, those above erator prior to the lift. the upper-most brace support. (f) Inspections. (1) Section 1926.1412 (ii) The upper-most tie-in, braces, (Inspections) applies to tower cranes, floor supports and floor wedges where except that the term ‘‘assembly’’ is re- the tower crane is supported by the placed by ‘‘erection.’’ Section 1926.1413 structure, for loose or dislodged compo- (Wire rope—inspection) applies to nents. tower cranes. (5) Annual. In addition to the items (2) Pre-erection inspection. Before each that must be inspected under crane component is erected, it must be § 1926.1412(f), all turntable and tower inspected by a qualified person for bolts must be inspected for proper con- damage or excessive wear. dition and torque. (i) The qualified person must pay particular attention to components that § 1926.1436 Derricks. will be difficult to inspect thoroughly (a) This section contains supple- during shift inspections. mental requirements for derricks, (ii) If the qualified person determines whether temporarily or permanently that a component is damaged or worn mounted; all sections of this subpart to the extent that it would create a apply to derricks unless specified oth- safety hazard if used on the crane, that erwise. A derrick is powered equipment component must not be erected on the crane unless it is repaired and, upon re- consisting of a mast or equivalent inspection by the qualified person, member that is held at or near the end found to no longer create a safety haz- by guys or braces, with or without a ard. boom, and its hoisting mechanism. The (iii) If the qualified person deter- mast/equivalent member and/or the mines that, though not presently a load is moved by the hoisting mecha- safety hazard, the component needs to nism (typically base-mounted) and op- be monitored, the employer must en- erating ropes. Derricks include: A- sure that the component is checked in frame, basket, breast, Chicago boom, the monthly inspections. Any such de- gin pole (except gin poles used for erec- termination must be documented, and tion of communication towers), guy, the documentation must be available shearleg, stiffleg, and variations of to any individual who conducts a such equipment. monthly inspection. (b) Operation—procedures. (1) Section (3) Post-erection inspection. In addition 1926.1417 (Operation) applies except for to the requirements in § 1926.1412(c), the § 1926.1417(c) (Accessibility of proce- following requirements must be met: dures).

730

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00740 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1436

(2) Load chart contents. Load charts tion from the manufacturer or a quali- must contain at least the following in- fied person, when not available from formation: the manufacturer: (i) Rated capacity at corresponding (A) The amount of initial sag or ten- ranges of boom angle or operating sion. radii. (B) The amount of tension in guy line (ii) Specific lengths of components to rope at anchor. which the rated capacities apply. (iv) The mast base must permit the (iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. mast to rotate freely with allowance (iv) Size and construction of rope for slight tilting of the mast caused by must be included on the load chart or guy slack. in the operating manual. (v) The mast cap must: (3) Load chart location—(i) Permanent (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely. installations. For permanently installed derricks with fixed lengths of boom, (B) Withstand tilting and cramping guy, and mast, a load chart must be caused by the guy loads. posted where it is visible to personnel (C) Be secured to the mast to prevent responsible for the operation of the disengagement during erection. equipment. (D) Be provided with means for at- (ii) Non-permanent installations. For taching guy ropes. derricks that are not permanently in- (3) Stiffleg derricks. (i) The mast must stalled, the load chart must be readily be supported in the vertical position by available at the job site to personnel at least two stifflegs; one end of each responsible for the operation of the must be connected to the top of the equipment. mast and the other end securely an- (c) Construction—(1) General require- chored. ments. (i) Derricks must be constructed (ii) The stifflegs must be capable of to meet all stresses imposed on mem- withstanding the loads imposed at any bers and components when installed point of operation within the load and operated in accordance with the chart range. manufacturer’s/builder’s procedures (iii) The mast base must: and within its rated capacity. (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely (ii) Welding of load sustaining mem- (when necessary). bers must conform to recommended (B) Permit deflection of the mast practices in ANSI/AWS D14.3–94 (incor- without binding. porated by reference, see § 1926.6) or (iv) The mast must be prevented from AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002 (incorporated by lifting out of its socket when the mast reference, see § 1926.6). is in tension. (2) Guy derricks. (i) The minimum number of guys must be 6, with equal (v) The stiffleg connecting member spacing, except where a qualified per- at the top of the mast must: son or derrick manufacturer approves (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely variations from these requirements and (when necessary). revises the rated capacity to com- (B) Withstand the loads imposed by pensate for such variations. the action of the stifflegs. (ii) Guy derricks must not be used (C) Be secured so as to oppose sepa- unless the employer has the following rating forces. guy information from the manufac- (4) Gin pole derricks. (i) Guy lines turer or a qualified person, when not must be sized and spaced so as to make available from the manufacturer: the gin pole stable in both boomed and (A) The number of guys. vertical positions. Exception: Where the (B) The spacing around the mast. size and/or spacing of guy lines do not (C) The size, grade, and construction result in the gin pole being stable in of rope to be used for each guy. both boomed and vertical positions, the (iii) For guy derricks manufactured employer must ensure that the derrick after December 18, 1970, in addition to is not used in an unstable position. the information required in paragraph (ii) The base of the gin pole must per- (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the employer mit movement of the pole (when nec- must have the following guy informa- essary).

731

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00741 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1436 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(iii) The gin pole must be anchored at (C) Section 7–1.3 (‘‘Installation’’). the base against horizontal forces (D) Applicable terms in section 7–0.2 (when such forces are present). (‘‘Definitions’’). (5) Chicago boom derricks. The fittings (ii) Load tests for new hoists. The em- for stepping the boom and for attach- ployer must ensure that new hoists are ing the topping lift must be arranged load tested to a minimum of 110% of to: rated capacity, but not more than 125% (i) Permit the derrick to swing at all of rated capacity, unless otherwise rec- permitted operating radii and mount- ommended by the manufacturer. This ing heights between fittings. requirement is met where the manufac- (ii) Accommodate attachment to the turer has conducted this testing. upright member of the host structure. (iii) Repaired or modified hoists. Hoists (iii) Withstand the forces applied that have had repairs, modifications or when configured and operated in ac- additions affecting their capacity or cordance with the manufacturer’s/ safe operation must be evaluated by a builder’s procedures and within its qualified person to determine if a load rated capacity. test is necessary. If it is, load testing (iv) Prevent the boom or topping lift must be conducted in accordance with from lifting out under tensile forces. paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (iv) of this sec- (d) Anchoring and guying. (1) Load an- tion. choring data developed by the manu- (iv) Load test procedure. Load tests re- facturer or a qualified person must be quired by paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) or used. (e)(2)(iii) of this section must be con- (2) Guy derricks. (i) The mast base ducted as follows: must be anchored. (A) The test load must be hoisted a (ii) The guys must be secured to the vertical distance to assure that the ground or other firm anchorage. load is supported by the hoist and held (iii) The anchorage and guying must by the hoist brake(s). be designed to withstand maximum horizontal and vertical forces encoun- (B) The test load must be lowered, tered when operating within rated ca- stopped and held with the brake(s). pacity with the particular guy slope (C) The hoist must not be used unless and spacing specified for the applica- a competent person determines that tion. the test has been passed. (3) Stiffleg derricks. (i) The mast base (f) Operational aids. (1) Section and stifflegs must be anchored. 1926.1416 (Operational aids) applies, ex- (ii) The mast base and stifflegs must cept for § 1926.1416(d)(1) (Boom hoist be designed to withstand maximum limiting device), § 1926.1416(e)(1) (Boom horizontal and vertical forces encoun- angle or radius indicator), and tered when operating within rated ca- § 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load weighing and pacity with the particular stiffleg spac- similar devices). ing and slope specified for the applica- (2) Boom angle aid. A boom angle indi- tion. cator is not required but if the derrick (e) Swingers and hoists. (1) The boom, is not equipped with a functioning one, swinger mechanisms and hoists must the employer must ensure that either: be suitable for the derrick work in- (i) The boom hoist cable must be tended and must be anchored to pre- marked with caution and stop marks. vent displacement from the imposed The stop marks must correspond to loads. maximum and minimum allowable (2) Hoists. (i) Base mounted drum boom angles. The caution and stop hoists must meet the requirements in marks must be in view of the operator, the following sections of ASME B30.7– or a spotter who is in direct commu- 2001 (incorporated by reference, see nication with the operator; or § 1926.6): (ii) An electronic or other device that (A) Sections 7–1.1 (‘‘Load ratings and signals the operator in time to prevent markings’’). the boom from moving past its max- (B) Section 7–1.2 (‘‘Construction’’), imum and minimum angles, or auto- except: 7–1.2.13 (‘‘Operator’s cab’’); 7– matically prevents such movement, is 1.2.15 (‘‘Fire extinguishers’’). used.

732

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00742 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1436

(3) Load weight/capacity devices. (i) tested by a competent person. The test Derricks manufactured more than one load must meet the following require- year after November 8, 2010 with a ments: maximum rated capacity over 6,000 (i) Test loads must be at least 100% pounds must have at least one of the and no more than 110% of the rated ca- following: load weighing device, load pacity, unless otherwise recommended moment indicator, rated capacity indi- by the manufacturer or qualified per- cator, or rated capacity limiter. Tem- son, but in no event must the test load porary alternative measures: The weight be less than the maximum anticipated of the load must be determined from a load. source recognized by the industry (such (ii) The test must consist of: as the load’s manufacturer), or by a (A) Hoisting the test load a few calculation method recognized by the inches and holding to verify that the industry (such as calculating a steel load is supported by the derrick and beam from measured dimensions and a held by the hoist brake(s). known per foot weight), or by other equally reliable means. This informa- (B) Swinging the derrick, if application must be provided to the operator ble, the full range of its swing, at the prior to the lift. See § 1926.1417(j) for ad- maximum allowable working radius for ditional requirements. the test load. (ii) A load weight/capacity device (C) Booming the derrick up and down that is not working properly must be within the allowable working radius repaired no later than 30 days after the for the test load. deficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- (D) Lowering, stopping and holding ployer documents that it has ordered the load with the brake(s). the necessary parts within 7 days of the (iii) The derrick must not be used un- occurrence of the deficiency, and the less the competent person determines part is not received in time to com- that the test has been passed. plete the repair in 30 days, the repair (4) Documentation. Tests conducted must be completed within 7 days of re- under this paragraph must be docu- ceipt of the parts. mented. The document must contain (g) Post-assembly approval and test- the date, test results and the name of ing—new or reinstalled derricks—(1) An- the tester. The document must be re- chorages. (i) Anchorages, including the tained until the derrick is re-tested or structure to which the derrick is at- dismantled, whichever occurs first. All tached (if applicable), must be ap- such documents must be available, dur- proved by a qualified person. ing the applicable document retention (ii) If using a rock or hairpin anchor- period, to all persons who conduct in- age, the qualified person must deter- spections in accordance with § 1926.1412. mine if any special testing of the an- (h) Load testing repaired or modified chorage is needed. If so, it must be derricks. Derricks that have had retested accordingly. pairs, modifications or additions af- (2) Functional test. Prior to initial fecting the derrick’s capacity or safe use, new or reinstalled derricks must operation must be evaluated by a be tested by a competent person with qualified person to determine if a load no hook load to verify proper oper- test is necessary. If it is, load testing ation. This test must include: (i) Lifting and lowering the hook(s) must be conducted and documented in through the full range of hook travel. accordance with paragraph (g) of this (ii) Raising and lowering the boom section. through the full range of boom travel. (i) [Reserved] (iii) Swinging in each direction (j) Power failure procedures. If power through the full range of swing. fails during operations, the derrick op- (iv) Actuating the anti two-block and erator must safely stop operations. boom hoist limit devices (if provided). This must include: (v) Actuating locking, limiting and (1) Setting all brakes or locking de- indicating devices (if provided). vices. (3) Load test. Prior to initial use, new (2) Moving all clutch and other power or reinstalled derricks must be load controls to the off position.

733

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00743 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1437 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(k) Use of winch heads. (1) Ropes must means of flotation, unless specified not be handled on a winch head with- otherwise. The requirements of this out the knowledge of the operator. section do not apply when using jacked (2) While a winch head is being used, barges when the jacks are deployed to the operator must be within reach of the river, lake, or sea bed and the the power unit control lever. barge is fully supported by the jacks. (l) [Reserved] (b) General requirements. The require- (m) Securing the boom. (1) When the ments in paragraphs (c) through (k) of boom is being held in a fixed position, this section apply to both floating dogs, pawls, or other positive holding cranes/derricks and land cranes/der- mechanisms on the boom hoist must be ricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or engaged. other means of flotation. (2) When taken out of service for 30 (c) Work area control. (1) The require- days or more, the boom must be se- ments of § 1926.1424 (Work area control) cured by one of the following methods: apply, except for § 1926.1424(a)(2)(ii). (i) Laid down. (2) The employer must either: (ii) Secured to a stationary member, (i) Erect and maintain control lines, as nearly under the head as possible, by warning lines, railings or similar bar- attachment of a sling to the load riers to mark the boundaries of the block. hazard areas; or (iii) For guy derricks, lifted to a (ii) Clearly mark the hazard areas by vertical position and secured to the a combination of warning signs (such mast. as, ‘‘Danger—Swing/Crush Zone’’) and (iv) For stiffleg derricks, secured high visibility markings on the equip- against the stiffleg. ment that identify the hazard areas. In (n) The process of jumping the der- addition, the employer must train each rick must be supervised by the A/D di- employee to understand what these rector. markings signify. (o) Derrick operations must be super- (d) Keeping clear of the load. Section vised by a competent person. 1926.1425 does not apply. (p) Inspections. In addition to the re- (e) Additional safety devices. In addi- quirements in § 1926.1412, the following tion to the safety devices listed in additional items must be included in § 1926.1415, the following safety devices the inspections: are required: (1) Daily: Guys for proper tension. (1) Barge, pontoon, vessel or other (2) Annual. (i) Gudgeon pin for means of flotation list and trim device. cracks, wear, and distortion. The safety device must be located in (ii) Foundation supports for contin- the cab or, when there is no cab, at the ued ability to sustain the imposed operator’s station. loads. (2) Positive equipment house lock. (q) Qualification and Training. The (3) Wind speed and direction indicator. employer must train each operator of a A competent person must determine if derrick on the safe operation of equip- wind is a factor that needs to be con- ment the individual will operate. Sec- sidered; if wind needs to be considered, tion 1926.1427 of this subpart (Operator a wind speed and direction indicator qualification and certification) does must be used. not apply. (f) Operational aids. (1) An anti two- block device is required only when § 1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks hoisting personnel or hoisting over an and land cranes/derricks on barges. occupied cofferdam or shaft. (a) This section contains supple- (2) Section 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load mental requirements for floating weighing and similar devices) does not cranes/derricks and land cranes/der- apply to dragline, clamshell (grapple), ricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or magnet, drop ball, container handling, other means of flotation (i.e., vessel/ concrete bucket, and pile driving work flotation device). The sections of this performed under this section. subpart apply to floating cranes/der- (g) Accessibility of procedures applica- ricks and land cranes/derricks on ble to equipment operation. If the crane/ barges, pontoons, vessels or other derrick has a cab, the requirements of

734

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00744 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1437

§ 1926.1417(c) apply. If the crane/derrick (4) Annual: external vessel/flotation de- does not have a cab, the employer must vice inspection. For each annual inspec- ensure that: tion: (1) Rated capacities (load charts) are (i) The external portion of the barge, posted at the operator’s station. If the pontoons, vessel or other means of flo- operator’s station is moveable (such as tation used is inspected annually by a with pendant-controlled equipment), qualified person who has expertise with the load charts are posted on the equip- respect to vessels/flotation devices and ment. that the inspection includes the fol- (2) Procedures applicable to the oper- lowing items: ation of the equipment (other than (A) The items identified in para- load charts), recommended operating graphs (h)(1) (Shift) and (h)(2) (Monthly) speeds, special hazard warnings, in- of this section. structions and operators manual, must (B) Cleats, bitts, chocks, fenders, cap- be readily available on board the ves- stans, ladders, and stanchions, for sig- sel/flotation device. nificant corrosion, wear, deterioration, (h) Inspections. In addition to meeting or deformation that could impair the the requirements of § 1926.1412 for in- function of these items. specting the crane/derrick, the em- (C) External evidence of leaks and ployer must inspect the barge, pon- structural damage; evidence of leaks toons, vessel or other means of flota- and damage below the waterline may tion used to support a floating crane/ be determined through internal inspec- derrick or land crane/derrick, and en- tion of the vessel/flotation device. sure that: (D) Four-corner draft readings. (1) Shift. For each shift inspection, (E) Firefighting equipment for serv- the means used to secure/attach the iceability. equipment to the vessel/flotation de- (ii) Rescue skiffs, lifelines, work vice is in proper condition, including vests, life preservers and ring buoys are wear, corrosion, loose or missing fas- inspected for proper condition. teners, defective welds, and (when ap- (iii) If any deficiency is identified, an plicable) insufficient tension. immediate determination is made by (2) Monthly. For each monthly in- the qualified person whether the defi- spection: ciency constitutes a hazard or, though (i) The means used to secure/attach not yet a hazard, needs to be monitored the equipment to the vessel/flotation in the monthly inspections. device is in proper condition, including (A) If the qualified person determines inspection for wear, corrosion, and, that the deficiency constitutes a haz- when applicable, insufficient tension. ard, the vessel/flotation device is re- (ii) The vessel/flotation device is not moved from service until it has been taking on water. corrected. See requirements in (iii) The deckload is properly se- § 1926.1417(f). cured. (B) If the qualified person determines (iv) The vessel/flotation device is wa- that, though not presently a hazard, tertight based on the condition of the the deficiency needs to be monitored, chain lockers, storage, fuel compart- the deficiency is checked in the month- ments, and hatches. ly inspections. (v) The firefighting and lifesaving (5) Four-year: internal vessel/flotation equipment is in place and functional. device inspection. For each four-year in- (3) The shift and monthly inspections spection: are conducted by a competent person, (i) A marine engineer, marine archi- and: tect, licensed surveyor, or other quali- (i) If any deficiency is identified, an fied person who has expertise with re- immediate determination is made by a spect to vessels/flotation devices sur- qualified person whether the deficiency veys the internal portion of the barge, constitutes a hazard. pontoons, vessel, or other means of flo- (ii) If the deficiency is determined to tation. constitute a hazard, the vessel/flota- (ii) If the surveyor identifies a defi- tion device is removed from service ciency, an immediate determination is until the deficiency has been corrected. made by the surveyor as to whether the

735

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00745 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1437 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

deficiency constitutes a hazard or, (k) Manufacturer’s specifications and though not yet a hazard, needs to be limitations. (1) The employer must en- monitored in the monthly or annual insure that the barge, pontoons, vessel, spections, as appropriate. or other means of flotation must be ca- (A) If the surveyor determines that pable of withstanding imposed environ- the deficiency constitutes a hazard, the mental, operational and in-transit vessel/flotation device is removed from loads when used in accordance with the service until it has been corrected. manufacturer’s specifications and limi- (B) If the surveyor determines that, tations. though not presently a hazard, the de- (2) The employer must ensure that ficiency needs to be monitored, the de- the manufacturer’s specifications and ficiency is checked in the monthly or limitations with respect to environ- annual inspections, as appropriate. mental, operational, and in-transit (6) Documentation. The monthly and loads for a barge, pontoon, vessel, or annual inspections required in para- other means of flotation are not ex- graphs (h)(2) and (h)(4) of this section ceeded or violated. are documented in accordance with (3) When the manufacturer’s speci- §§ 1926.1412 (e)(3) and 1926.1412(f)(7), re- fications and limitations are unavail- spectively, and that the four-year in- able, the employer must ensure that spection required in paragraph (h)(5) of the specifications and limitations es- this section is documented in accord- tablished by a qualified person with re- ance with § 1926.1412(f)(7), except that spect to environmental, operational the documentation for that inspection and in-transit loads for the barge, pon- must be retained for a minimum of 4 toons, vessel, or other means of flota- years. All such documents must be tion are not exceeded or violated. made available, during the applicable (l) [Reserved] document retention period, to all per- (m) Floating cranes/derricks. For sons who conduct inspections in ac- equipment designed by the manufac- cordance with § 1926.1412. turer (or employer) for marine use by (i) [Reserved] permanent attachment to barges, pon- (j) Working with a diver. The employer toons, vessels or other means of flota- must meet the following additional re- tion: quirements when working with a diver (1) Load charts. (i) The employer must in the water: not exceed the manufacturer load charts applicable to operations on (1) If a crane/derrick is used to get a water. When using these charts, the diver into and out of the water, it must employer must comply with all param- not be used for any other purpose until eters and limitations (such as dynamic the diver is back on board. When used and environmental parameters) appli- for more than one diver, it must not be cable to the use of the charts. used for any other purpose until all (ii) The employer must ensure that divers are back on board. load charts take into consideration a (2) The operator must remain at the minimum wind speed of 40 miles per controls of the crane/derrick at all hour. times. (2) The employer must ensure that (3) In addition to the requirements in the requirements for maximum allow- §§ 1926.1419 through 1926.1422 (Signals), able list and maximum allowable trim either: as specified in Table M1 of this section (i) A clear line of sight must be main- are met. tained between the operator and tender; or TABLE M1 (ii) The signals between the operator Maximum Maximum and tender must be transmitted elec- allowable allowable tronically. Rated capacity list trim (degrees) (degrees) (4) The means used to secure the crane/derrick to the vessel/flotation de- Equipment designed for marine use vice (see paragraph (n)(5) of this sec- by permanent attachment (other than derricks): tion) must not allow any amount of 25 tons or less ...... 5 5 shifting in any direction. Over 25 tons ...... 7 7

736

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00746 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1437

TABLE M1—Continued (n) Land cranes/derricks. For land cranes/derricks used on barges, pon- Maximum Maximum allowable allowable toons, vessels or other means of flota- Rated capacity list trim tion, the employer must ensure that: (degrees) (degrees) (1) The rated capacity of the equip- Derricks designed for marine use by ment (including but not limited to permanent attachment: modification of load charts) applicable Any rated capacity ...... 10 10 for use on land is reduced to: (3) The employer must ensure that (i) Account for increased loading the equipment is stable under the con- from list, trim, wave action, and wind. ditions specified in Tables M2 and M3 (ii) Be applicable to a specified loca- of this section. (NOTE: Freeboard is the tion(s) on the specific barge, pontoons, vertical distance between the water vessel or other means of flotation that line and the main deck of the vessel.) will be used, under the environmental conditions expected and encountered. TABLE M2 (iii) The conditions required in paragraphs (n)(3) and (n)(4) of this section Wind Minimum Operated at speed freeboard are met. (mph) (ft) (2) The rated capacity modification required in paragraph (n)(1) of this sec- Rated capacity ...... 60 2 Rated capacity plus 25% ...... 60 1 tion is performed by the equipment High boom, no load ...... 60 2 manufacturer, or a qualified person who has expertise with respect to both TABLE M3 land crane/derrick capacity and the stability of vessels/flotation devices. Wind (3) For list and trim. Operated at speed (i) The maximum allowable list and For backward stability of the boom: the maximum allowable trim for the High boom, no load, full back list (least stable 90 mph. condition). barge, pontoon, vessel or other means of flotation must not exceed the (4) If the equipment is employer- amount necessary to ensure that the made, it must not be used unless the conditions in paragraph (n)(4) of this employer has documents dem- section are met. In addition, the max- onstrating that the load charts and ap- imum allowable list and the maximum plicable parameters for use meet the allowable trim does not exceed the requirements of paragraphs (m)(1) least of the following: 5 degrees, the through (3) of this section. Such docu- amount specified by the crane/derrick ments must be signed by a registered manufacturer, or, when, an amount is professional engineer who is a qualified not so specified, the amount specified person with respect to the design of by the qualified person. this type of equipment (including the (ii) The maximum allowable list and means of flotation). the maximum allowable trim for the (5) The employer must ensure that land crane/derrick does not exceed the the barge, pontoons, vessel or other amount specified by the crane/derrick means of flotation used: manufacturer, or, when, an amount is (i) Are structurally sufficient to not so specified, the amount specified withstand the static and dynamic loads by the qualified person. of the crane/derrick when operating at (4) For the following conditions: the crane/derrick’s maximum rated ca- (i) All deck surfaces of the barge, pacity with all planned and actual deck pontoons, vessel or other means of flo- loads and ballasted compartments. tation used are above water. (ii) Have a subdivided hull with one (ii) The entire bottom area of the or more longitudinal watertight bulk- barge, pontoons, vessel or other means heads for reducing the free-surface ef- of flotation used is submerged. fect. (5) Physical attachment, corralling, (iii) Have access to void compart- rails system and centerline cable sys- ments to allow for inspection and tem meet the requirements in Option pumping. (1), Option (2), Option (3), or Option (4)

737

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00747 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1437 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

of this section, and that whichever op- (v) The systems/means used to com- tion is used also meets the require- ply with Option (1), Option (2), Option ments of paragraph (n)(5)(v) of this sec- (3), or Option (4) of this section are de- tion. signed by a marine engineer, registered (i) Option (1)—Physical attachment. professional engineer familiar with The crane/derrick is physically at- floating crane/derrick design, or quali- tached to the barge, pontoons, vessel or fied person familiar with floating other means of flotation. Methods of crane/derrick design. physical attachment include crossed- (6) Exception. For mobile auxiliary cable systems attached to the crane/ cranes used on the deck of a floating derrick and vessel/flotation device, crane/derrick, the requirement speci- bolting or welding the crane/derrick to fied by paragraph (n)(5) of this section the vessel/flotation device, strapping to use Option (1), Option (2), Option (3), the crane/derrick to the vessel/flota- or Option (4) does not apply when the tion device with chains, or other meth- employer demonstrates implementa- ods of physical attachment. tion of a plan and procedures that meet (ii) Option (2)—Corralling. The crane/ the following requirements: derrick is prevented from shifting by (i) A marine engineer or registered installing barricade restraints (i.e., a professional engineer familiar with corralling system). Employers must en- floating crane/derrick design develops sure that corralling systems do not allow the equipment to shift by any and signs a written plan for the use of amount of shifting in any direction. the mobile auxiliary crane. (iii) Option (3)—Rails. The crane/der- (ii) The plan is designed so that the rick must be prevented from shifting applicable requirements of this section by being mounted on a rail system. are met despite the position, travel, op- Employers must ensure that rail eration, and lack of physical attach- clamps and rail stops are used unless ment (or corralling, use of rails or the system is designed to prevent cable system) of the mobile auxiliary movement during operation by other crane. means. (iii) The plan specifies the areas of (iv) Option (4)—Centerline cable system. the deck where the mobile auxiliary The crane/derrick is prevented from crane is permitted to be positioned, shifting by being mounted to a wire travel, and operate, and the parameters rope system. The employer must en- and limitations of such movements and sure that the wire rope system meets operation. the following requirements: (iv) The deck is marked to identify (A) The wire rope and attachments the permitted areas for positioning, are of sufficient size and strength to travel, and operation. support the side load of crane/derrick. (v) The plan specifies the dynamic (B) The wire rope is attached phys- and environmental conditions that ically to the vessel/flotation device. must be present for use of the plan. (C) The wire rope is attached to the (vi) If the dynamic and environ- crane/derrick by appropriate attach- mental conditions in paragraph ment methods (such as shackles or (n)(6)(v) of this section are exceeded, sheaves) on the undercarriage, and that the mobile auxiliary crane is attached the method used will allow the crew to physically or corralled in accordance secure the crane/derrick from move- with Option (1), Option (2) or Option (4) ment during operation and to move the crane/derrick longitudinally along the of paragraph (n)(5) of this section. vessel/flotation device for repo- (7) The barge, pontoons, vessel or sitioning. other means of flotation used: (D) Means are installed to prevent (i) Are structurally sufficient to the crane/derrick from passing the for- withstand the static and dynamic loads ward or aft end of the wire rope attach- of the crane/derrick when operating at ments. the crane/derrick’s maximum rated ca- (E) The crane/derrick is secured from pacity with all anticipated deck loads movement during operation. and ballasted compartments.

738

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00748 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1440

(ii) Have a subdivided hull with one lowing sections of ASME B30.2–2005 (in- or more longitudinal watertight bulk- corporated by reference, see § 1926.6) heads for reducing the free surface ef- apply: 2–1.3.1; 2–1.3.2; 2–1.4.1; 2–1.6; 2– fect. 1.7.2; 2–1.8.2; 2–1.9.1; 2–1.9.2; 2–1.11; 2– (iii) Have access to void compart- 1.12.2; 2–1.13.7; 2–1.14.2; 2–1.14.3; 2–1.14.5; ments to allow for inspection and 2–1.15.; 2–2.2.2; 2–3.2.1.1. In addition, 2– pumping. 3.5 applies, except in 2–3.5.1(b), ‘‘29 CFR 1910.147’’ is substituted for ‘‘ANSI § 1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes. Z244.1.’’ (a) Permanently installed overhead and gantry cranes. The requirements of § 1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers. § 1910.179, except for § 1910.179(b)(1), and (a) The provisions of subpart CC not the requirements of this subpart apply to dedicated pile drivers, except CC, apply to the following equipment as specified in this section. when used in construction and perma- (b) Section 1926.1416(d)(3) (Anti two- nently installed in a facility: overhead blocking device) does not apply. and gantry cranes, including (c) Section 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall weighing and similar devices) applies cranes, storage bridge cranes, and oth- only to dedicated pile drivers manufac- ers having the same fundamental char- tured after November 8, 2011. acteristics. (d) In § 1926.1433, only §§ 1926.1433(d) (b) Overhead and gantry cranes that and (e) apply to dedicated pile drivers. are not permanently installed in a facility. (1) This paragraph applies to the § 1926.1440 Sideboom cranes. following equipment when used in con- (a) The provisions of this standard struction and not permanently in- apply, except § 1926.1402 (Ground condi- stalled in a facility: Overhead and gan- tions), § 1926.1415 (Safety devices), try cranes, overhead/bridge cranes, § 1926.1416 (Operational aids), and semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall § 1926.1427 (Operator qualification and cranes, storage bridge cranes, launch- certification). ing gantry cranes, and similar equip- (b) Section 1926.1426 (Free fall and ment having the same fundamental controlled load lowering) applies, ex- characteristics, irrespective of whether cept § 1926.1426(a)(2)(i). Sideboom cranes it travels on tracks, wheels, or other in which the boom is designed to free means. fall (live boom) are permitted only if (2) The following requirements apply manufactured prior to November 8, to equipment identified in paragraph 2010. (b)(1) of this section: (i) Sections 1926.1400 through (c) Sideboom cranes mounted on 1926.1414; §§ 1926.1417 through 1926.1425; wheel or crawler tractors must meet § 1926.1426(d), §§ 1926.1427 through all of the following requirements of 1926.1434; § 1926.1437, § 1926.1439, and ASME B30.14–2004 (incorporated by ref- § 1926.1441. erence, see § 1926.6): (ii) The following portions of (1) Section 14–1.1 (‘‘Load Ratings’’). § 1910.179: (2) Section 14–1.3 (‘‘Side Boom Trac- (A) Paragraphs (b)(5),(6),(7); tor Travel’’). (e)(1),(3),(5),(6); (f)(1),(4); (g); (h)(1),(3); (3) Section 14–1.5 (‘‘Ropes and (k); and (n) of § 1910.179. Reeving Accessories’’). (B) The definitions in § 1910.179(a) ex- (4) Section 14–1.7.1 (‘‘Booms’’). cept for ‘‘hoist’’ and ‘‘load.’’ For those (5) Section 14–1.7.2 (‘‘General Re- words, the definitions in § 1926.1401 quirements—Exhaust Gases’’). apply. (6) Section 14–1.7.3 (‘‘General Re- (C) Section 1910.179(b)(2), but only quirements—Stabilizers (Wheel-Type where the equipment identified in Side Boom Tractors)’’). paragraph (b)(1) of this section (7) Section 14–1.7.4 (‘‘General Re- (§ 1926.1438) was manufactured before quirements—Welded Construction’’). September 19, 2001. (8) Section 14–1.7.6 (‘‘General Re- (iii) For equipment manufactured on quirements—Clutch and Brake Protec- or after September 19, 2001, the fol- tion’’).

739

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00749 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB § 1926.1441 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

(9) Section 14–2.2.2 (‘‘Testing—Rated ation of the equipment complies with Load Test’’), except that it applies only either the: to equipment that has been altered or (A) Manufacturer instructions, rec- modified. ommendations, limitations, and speci- (10) In section 14–3.1.2 (‘‘Operator fications. When these documents and Qualifications’’), paragraph (a), except information are unavailable, a reg- the phrase ‘‘When required by law.’’ istered professional engineer familiar (11) In section 14–3.1.3 (‘‘Operating with the type of equipment involved Practices’’), paragraphs (e), (f)(1)–(f)(4), must approve, in writing, the selection (f)(6), (f)(7), (h), and (i). and configuration of components; or (12) In section 14–3.2.3 (‘‘Moving the (B) Approved modifications that Load’’), paragraphs (j), (l), and (m). meet the requirements of § 1926.1434 (Equipment modifications). § 1926.1441 Equipment with a rated (ii) Post-assembly inspection. Upon hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000 completion of assembly, the equipment pounds or less. is inspected to ensure that it is in com- The following paragraphs of this sec- pliance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this tion specify requirements for employ- section (see § 1926.1412(c) for post-assem- ers using equipment with a maximum bly inspection requirements). rated hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000 (3) Manufacturer prohibitions. The em- pounds or less. ployer must comply with applicable (a) The employer using this equip- manufacturer prohibitions. ment must comply with the following (c) Operation—procedures. (1) The em- provisions of this subpart: § 1926.1400 ployer must comply with all manufac- (Scope); § 1926.1401 (Definitions); turer procedures applicable to the oper- § 1926.1402 (Ground conditions); ational functions of the equipment, in- § 1926.1403 (Assembly/disassembly—se- cluding its use with attachments. lection of manufacturer or employer (2) Unavailable operation procedures. procedures); § 1926.1406 (Assembly/dis- The employer must: assembly—employer procedures); (i) When the manufacturer’s proce- §§ 1926.1407 through 1926.1411 (Power line dures are unavailable, develop, and en- safety); § 1926.1412(c) (Post-assembly); sure compliance with, all procedures §§ 1926.1413 through 1926.1414 (Wire necessary for the safe operation of the rope); § 1926.1418 (Authority to stop op- equipment and attachments. eration); §§ 1926.1419 through 1926.1422 (ii) Ensure that procedures for the (Signals); § 1926.1423 (Fall protection); operational controls are developed by a § 1926.1425 (Keeping clear of the load) qualified person. (except for § 1926.1425(c)(3) (qualified (iii) Ensure that procedures related rigger)); § 1926.1426 (Free fall and con- to the capacity of the equipment are trolled load lowering); § 1926.1432 (Mul- developed and signed by a registered tiple crane/derrick lifts—supplemental professional engineer familiar with the requirements); § 1926.1434 (Equipment equipment. modifications); § 1926.1435 (Tower (3) Accessibility. The employer must cranes); § 1926.1436 (Derricks); § 1926.1437 ensure that: (Floating cranes/derricks and land (i) The load chart is available to the cranes/derricks on barges); § 1926.1438 operator at the control station; (Overhead & gantry cranes). (ii) Procedures applicable to the op- (b) Assembly/disassembly. (1) In addi- eration of the equipment, rection to compliance with §§ 1926.1403 (As- ommended operating speeds, special sembly/disassembly—selection of man- hazard warnings, instructions, and op- ufacturer or employer procedures) and erator’s manual are readily available 1926.1406 (Assembly/disassembly—em- for use by the operator. ployer procedures), the employer must (iii) When rated capacities are avail- also comply with § 1926.1441(b)(2)–(3). able at the control station only in elec- (2) Components and configuration. The tronic form and a failure occurs that employer must ensure that: makes the rated capacities inacces- (i) The selection of components, and sible, the operator immediately ceases the configuration of the equipment, operations or follows safe shut-down that affect the capacity or safe oper- procedures until the rated capacities

740

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00750 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.1442

(in electronic or other form) are avail- (f) Signal person qualifications. The able. employer must train each signal person (d) Safety devices and operational aids. in the proper use of signals applicable (1) The employer must ensure that to the use of the equipment. safety devices and operational aids (g) [Reserved] that are part of the original equipment (h) Inspections. The employer must are maintained in accordance with ensure that equipment is inspected in manufacturer procedures. accordance with manufacturer proce- (2) Anti two-blocking. The employer dures. must ensure that equipment covered by (i) [Reserved] this section manufactured more than (j) Hoisting personnel. The employer one year after November 8, 2010 have must ensure that equipment covered by either an anti two-block device that this section is not used to hoist per- meets the requirements of sonnel. § 1926.1416(d)(3), or is designed so that, in the event of a two-block situation, (k) Design. The employer must ensure no damage or load failure will occur that the equipment is designed by a (for example, by using a power unit qualified engineer. that stalls in response to a two-block situation). § 1926.1442 Severability. (e) Operator qualifications. The em- Should a court of competent jurisdic- ployer must train each operator, prior tion hold any provision(s) of subpart to operating the equipment, on the safe CC to be invalid, such action shall not operation of the type of equipment the affect any other provision of the sub- operator will be using. part.

741

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00751 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX A TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926—STANDARD HAND SIGNALS

742

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00752 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER09AU10.003 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. B

APPENDIX B TO SUBPART CC OF PART implement procedures that minimize the 1926—ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY: SAM- risk of unintended dangerous movement and PLE PROCEDURES FOR MINIMIZING minimize the duration and extent of exposure under the boom. THE RISK OF UNINTENDED DAN- The following scenario is an example of GEROUS BOOM MOVEMENT how the exception applies: A boom cannot be 1. Section 1926.1404(f)(1) provides that when disassembled on the ground because of pins (or similar devices) are being removed, aboveground piping (as might be found, for employees must not be under the boom, jib, example, in an oil refinery) that precludes or other components, except where the re- lowering the boom to the ground. The boom quirements of § 1926.1404(f)(2) are met. The must therefore be disassembled in the air, exception in § 1926.1404(f)(2) applies when the and the employees who remove the pins must employer demonstrates that site constraints perform that work from an aerial lift whose require one or more employees to be under base is positioned on one side (the near side) the boom, jib, or other components when of the boom. To gain access to the pins on pins (or similar devices) are being removed. the far side, the aerial lift basket must move In such a situation, the A/D director must under the boom, since, due to lack of room,

743

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00753 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB ER09AU10.004 Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

the aerial lift cannot be repositioned on the (1) The functions and limitations of the far side. Due to lack of room, the aerial lift crane and attachments. cannot be repositioned on the far side, so the (2) Wire rope: aerial basket must move under the boom to (i) Background information necessary to gain access to the pins on the far side. understand the inspection and removal from To minimize the risk of unintended dan- service criteria in § 1926.1413 and § 1926.1414. gerous movement while the pins are re- (ii) Capacity and when multi-part rope is moved, the A/D director uses an assist crane needed. that is rigged to support the boom section (iii) Relationship between line pull and that is being detached, using particular care safe working load. to ensure that the section end that is near (iv) How to determine the manufacturer’s the employee(s) removing the pins is well recommended rope for the crane. supported. The duration and extent of expo- (3) Rigging devices and their use, such as: sure is minimized by removing the far side (i) Slings. pins first, moving the aerial lift basket as (ii) Spreaders. soon as possible to the near side so that the (iii) Lifting beams. employees are no longer under the boom, and then removing the near side pins. (iv) Wire rope fittings, such as clips, shack- 2. Section 1926.1404(h)(6)(i) provides that, les and wedge sockets. during assembly/disassembly, the center of (v) Saddles (softeners). gravity of the load must be identified if that (vi) Clamps (beams). is necessary for the method used for main- (4) The technical limitations of protective taining stability. Section 1926.1404(h)(6)(ii) measures against electrical hazards: states that, where there is insufficient infor- (i) Grounding. mation to accurately identify the center of (ii) Proximity warning devices. gravity, measures designed to prevent unin- (iii) Insulated links. tended dangerous movement resulting from (iv) Boom cages. an inaccurate identification of the center of (v) Proximity to electric power lines, radii, gravity must be used. and microwave structures. An example of the application of (5) The effects of load share and load trans- § 1926.1404(h)(6)(ii) is as follows: The boom is fer in multi-crane lifts. assembled by lowering boom sections se- (6) Basic crane terms. quentially into place using an assist crane. (7) The basics of machine power flow sys- The A/D director’s plan is to keep the boom tems. sections stable while they are lowered into (i) Mechanical. place by attaching the assist crane hoist line (ii) Electrical. above the center of gravity of each section. (iii) Pneumatic. However, in assembling the non-symmetrical (iv) Hydraulic. top section of the boom, the A/D director is (v) Combination. not able to determine where to attach the (8) The significance of the instruments and assist crane hoist line so that it is above the gauge readings. center of gravity. In this situation, before raising the section, all personnel are kept (9) The effects of thermal expansion and clear of the section and the section is first contraction in hydraulic cylinders. raised a few inches to determine whether it (10) Background information necessary to tips when raised (if it did tip, it would indi- understand the requirements of pre-oper- cate it is not rigged over the center of grav- ation and inspection. ity). If this occurs, the hoist line is reposi- (11) How to use the safety devices and oper- tioned and the procedure repeated (with em- ational aids required under § 1926.1415 and ployees kept clear of the section while it is § 1926.1416. raised) until the A/D director determines (12) The difference between duty-cycle and that it is rigged over the center of gravity lifting operations. and can be moved into place without dan- (13) How to calculate net capacity for gerous movement. every possible configuration of the equipment using the manufacturer’s load chart. APPENDIX C TO SUBPART CC OF PART (14) How to use manufacturer-approved at- 1926—OPERATOR CERTIFICATION: tachments and their effect on the equipment. WRITTEN EXAMINATION: TECHNICAL (15) How to obtain dimensions, weight, and center of gravity of the load. KNOWLEDGE CRITERIA (16) The effects of dynamic loading from: This appendix contains information for (i) Wind. employers, accredited testing organizations, (ii) Stopping and starting. auditors and government entities developing (iii) Impact loading. criteria for a written examination to test an (iv) Moving with the load. individual’s technical knowledge relating to (17) The effect of side loading. the operation of cranes. (18) The principles of backward stability. (a) General technical information. (b) Site information.

744

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00754 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. C

(1) How to identify the suitability of the (ix) Multi-drum operations. supporting ground/surface to support the ex- (13) Know the proper procedures for oper- pected loads of the operation. Elements in- ating safely under the following conditions: clude: (i) Traveling with suspended loads. (i) Weaknesses below the surface (such as (ii) Approaching a two-block condition. voids, tanks, loose fill). (iii) Operating near power lines. (ii) Weaknesses on the surface (such as re- (iv) Hoisting personnel. taining walls, slopes, excavations, depres- (v) Using other than full outrigger/crawler sions). or stabilizer extensions. (2) Proper use of mats, blocking/cribbing, (vi) Lifting loads from beneath the surface outriggers, stabilizers, or crawlers. of the water. (3) Identification of site hazards such as (vii) Using various approved counterweight power lines, piping, and traffic. configurations. (4) How to review operation plans with su- (viii) Handling loads out of the operator’s pervisors and other workers (such as the sig- vision (‘‘operating in the blind’’). nal person), including how to determine (ix) Using electronic communication sys- working height, boom length, load radius, tems for signal communication. and travel clearance. (14) Know the proper procedures for load (5) How to determine if there is adequate control and the use of hand-held tag lines. room for extension of crawlers or outriggers/ stabilizers and counterweights. (15) Know the emergency response proce- (c) Operations. dure for: (1) How to pick, carry, swing and place the (i) Fires. load smoothly and safely on rubber tires and (ii) Power line contact. on outriggers/stabilizers or crawlers (where (iii) Loss of stability. applicable). (iv) Control malfunction. (2) How to communicate at the site with (v) Two-blocking. supervisors, the crew and the signal person. (vi) Overload. (3) Proper procedures and methods of (vii) Carrier or travel malfunction. reeving wire ropes and methods of reeving (16) Know how to properly use outriggers multiple-part lines and selecting the proper and stabilizers in accordance with manufac- load block and/or ball. turer specifications. (4) How to react to changes in conditions (d) Use of load charts. that affect the safe operation of the equip- (1) Know the terminology necessary to use ment. load charts. (5) How to shut down and secure the equip- (2) Know how to ensure that the load chart ment properly when leaving it unattended. is the appropriate chart for the equipment in (6) Know how to apply the manufacturer’s its particular configuration and application. specifications for operating in various (3) Know how to use load charts. This in- weather conditions, and understand how en- cludes knowing: vironmental conditions affect the safe oper- (i) The operational limitations of load ation of the equipment. charts and footnotes. (7) How to properly level the equipment. (ii) How to relate the chart to the configu- (8) How to verify the weight of the load and ration of the crane, crawlers, or outriggers/ rigging prior to initiating the lift. stabilizers extended or retracted, jib erected (9) How to determine where the load is to or offset, and various counterweight configu- be picked up and placed and how to verify rations. the radii. (iii) The difference between structural ca- (10) Know basic rigging procedures. pacity and capacity limited by stability. (11) How to carry out the shift inspection (iv) What is included in capacity ratings. required in this subpart. (v) The range diagram and its relationship (12) Know that the following operations re- to the load chart. quire specific procedures and skill levels: (vi) The work area chart and its relation- (i) Multi-crane lifts. ship to the load chart. (ii) Hoisting personnel. (vii) Where to find and how to use the (iii) Clamshell/dragline operations. ‘‘parts-of-line’’ information. (iv) Pile driving and extracting. (4) Know how to use the load chart to- (v) Concrete operations, including poured- gether with the load indicators and/or load in-place and tilt-up. moment devices. (vi) Demolition operations. (vii) Operations on water. (viii) Magnet operations.

745

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00755 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Pt. 1926, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNA- 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 TIONS FOR GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS—Continued STANDARDS INCORPORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Source § no. and/or New § no. and/or para. para. New Designations for General Industry Standards Incorporated Into Body of Con- [Do.] (o) ...... [Do.] (d)(10) struction Standards 1926.156 ...... 1910.160 1926.157 ...... 1910.162 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926.158 ...... 1910.164 STANDARDS 1926.159 ...... 1910.165 1926.200(c)(3) ...... 1910.145(d)(4) Source § no. and/or 1926.250(c) ...... 1910.176(c) New § no. and/or para. para. [Do.] (d) (1)–(4) ...... 1910.30(a) (1), (2), (4) and (5) 1926.20 (c) ...... 1910.5 (a) 1926.251(a)(5) ...... 1910.184(a) [Do.] (d) ...... [Do.] (c) [Do.] (a)(6) ...... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (e) ...... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (b)(6)(i)–(ii) ...... [Do.] (e)(3)(i)–(ii) 1926.32(g) ...... 1910.12(b) [Do.] (c)(6)–(7) ...... [Do.] (c) (2)–(3) 1926.33 ...... 1910.20 [Do.] (c)(8) ...... [Do.] (c)(5) 1926.34 (a) ...... 1910.36(b)(4) [Do.] (c)(9) ...... [Do.] (c)(7) [Do.] (b) ...... 1910.37 (q)(1) [Do.] (c)(10)–(12) ...... [Do.] (c)(10)–(12) [Do.] (c) ...... [Do.] (k)(2) [Do.] (c)(13)–(15) ...... [Do.](f) (2)–(4) 1926.35 ...... 1910.38(a) [Do.] (d)(3)–(6) ...... [Do.] (h) (2)–(5) 1926.50(g) ...... 1910.151(c) [Do.] (e)(3)–(5) ...... [Do.] (i) (2)–(4) 1926.51(a)(6) ...... 1910.141(a)(2)(v) [Do.] (e)(6)–(7) ...... [Do.] (i) (6)–(7) [Do.] (d)(2) ...... [Do.] (h) [Do.] (e)(8) ...... [Do.] (i)(9) [Do.] (f) (2)–(4) ...... [Do.] (d) (1)–(3) 1926.300(b) (3) ...... 1910.212(a)(1) [Do.] (g) ...... [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (4) ...... [Do.] (a)(3) [Do.] (h) ...... [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (5) ...... [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (i) ...... [Do.] (e) [Do.] (6) ...... [Do.] (b) 1926.53 (c)–(r) ...... 1910.96 [Do.] (7) ...... 1910.215(b)(9) 1926.57 (f)–(i) ...... 1910.94 [Do.] (8) and (9) ...... [Do.] (b) (3) and (4) 1926.64 ...... 1910.119 1926.302(b)(10) ...... 1910.244(b) 1926.65 ...... 1910.120 1926.303(b)(2) ...... 1910.215(a) (2) 1926.66 (a) ...... 1910.107 (a) [Do.] (e) ...... [Do.] (4) [Do.] (b) ...... [Do.] (b) (1)–(10) 1926.304 (g) ...... 1910.213(h)(1) [Do.] (c)–(d) ...... [Do.] (c)–(d) [Do.] (h) ...... [Do.] (d)(1) [Do.] (e)–(g) ...... [Do.] (h)–(j) [Do.] (i) ...... [Do.] (c)(1) 1926.95 ...... 1910.132 1926.305(d)(1) ...... 1910.244(a)(2) (iii)–(viii) 1926.96 ...... 1910.136 1926.306 ...... 1910.169 1926.97 (a)–(e) ...... 1910.156(e) 1926.307 ...... 1910.219 [Do.] (f)–(h) ...... [Do.] Subpt. L App. 1926.350(a) (10) ...... 1910.253(b) (4)(iii) E [Do.] (11) ...... [Do.] (2)(ii) 1926.98 ...... 1910.156(f) [Do.] (12) ...... 1910.101(b) 1926.102(a) (6) ...... 1910.133(a) (2) 1926.353(b)(3) ...... 1910.252(b)(4)(iv) [Do.] (7) ...... [Do.] (4) 1926.416 (a)(4) ...... 1910.333(c)(2) [Do.] (8) ...... [Do.] (5) [Do.] (f) (1) ...... [Do.] (c)(10) 1926.103 (d) ...... 1910.134 (a) [Do.] (2) ...... 1910.334(a)(1) [Do.] (e) ...... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (3) ...... [Do.] (a)(2)(iii) [Do.] (f)–(i) ...... [Do.] (d)–(g) [Do.] (4) ...... [Do.] (a)(5) 1926.150(c)(1) (xi) ...... 1910.157 (g)(1) [Do.] (5)–(6) ...... [Do.] (b) (1)–(2) [Do.] (xii) ...... [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (7)–(9) ...... [Do.] (c) (1)–(3) [Do.] (xiii) ...... [Do.] (c)(4) [Do.] (10) ...... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (xiv) ...... [Do.] (e)(3) 1926.417(d) ...... 1910.333(b)(2) 1926.152 (b)(5) ...... 1910.107(e)(2) 1926.451(a) (22) ...... 1910.28(a) (15) [Do.] (h) ...... 1910.106(j) [Do.] (23) ...... [Do.] (18) [Do.] (i) ...... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (24) ...... [Do.] (20) [Do.] (j) ...... [Do.] (c) 1926.453 (a) ...... 1910.29(a) [Do.] (k) (1)–(3) ...... [Do.] (g)(4) [Do.] (b) ...... [Do.] (c) [Do.] (k)(4) ...... [Do.] (a)(22) 1926.600(a)(7) ...... 1910.176(f) 1926.153(a) (3) ...... 1910.110(a)(4) 1926.602(c)(1) (vii) ...... 1910.178(m) (3) [Do.] (m) (1) ...... [Do.] (d)(1) [Do.] (viii) ...... [Do.] (12) [Do.] (2) ...... [Do.] (d)(2) 1926.900 (s) ...... 1910.109 (g)(2)(ii) [Do.] (3) ...... [Do.] (d)(7)(vii) [Do.] (t) ...... [Do.] (h)(3)(ii) [Do.] (4) ...... [Do.] (d)(7)(viii) 1926.905(u) ...... [Do.] (e)(3)(iii) [Do.] (n) ...... [Do.] (b)(5)(iii) 1926.914(aa) ...... [Do.] (a)(12)

746

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00756 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, App. A

1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 STANDARDS—Continued STANDARDS—Continued

New § no. and/or para. Source § no. and/or Source § no. and/or para. New § no. and/or para. para.

1926.1050(b) ...... 1910.21(g)(9) 1926.1107 ...... 1910.1007 1926.1108 ...... 1910.1008 1926.1071 ...... 1910.401 1926.1109 ...... 1910.1009 1926.1072 ...... 1910.402 1926.1110 ...... 1910.1010 1926.1076 ...... 1910.410 1926.1111 ...... 1910.1011 1926.1080 ...... 1910.420 1926.1112 ...... 1910.1012 1926.1081 ...... 1910.421 1926.1113 ...... 1910.1013 1926.1082 ...... 1910.422 1926.1114 ...... 1910.1014 1926.1083 ...... 1910.423 1926.1115 ...... 1910.1015 1926.1084 ...... 1910.424 1926.1116 ...... 1910.1016 1926.1085 ...... 1910.425 1926.1117 ...... 1910.1017 1926.1086 ...... 1910.426 1926.1118 ...... 1910.1018 1926.1087 ...... 1910.427 1926.1128 ...... 1910.1028 1926.1090 ...... 1910.430 1926.1129 ...... 1910.1029 1926.1091 ...... 1910.440 1926.1144 ...... 1910.1044 1926.1092 ...... 1910.441 1926.1145 ...... 1910.1045 1926.1147 ...... 1910.1047 1926.1102 ...... 1910.1002 1926.1148 ...... 1910.1048 1926.1103 ...... 1910.1003 1926.1104 ...... 1910.1004 1926.1105 ...... 1910.1005 [58 FR 35305, June 30, 1993, as amended at 61 1926.1106 ...... 1910.1006 FR 9255, Mar. 7, 1996; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010]

747

VerDate Sep<11>2014 17:16 Sep 01, 2020 Jkt 250123 PO 00000 Frm 00757 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Q:\29\29V8.TXT PC31 kpayne on VMOFRWIN702 with $$_JOB